1beatb*B  /iBobern  Xan^uaae  Series* 


FROM -THE- LIBRARY- OF- 
A.   W.    Ryder 


-J   •'- r- 


Heatlx's  French  Dictionary.    Retail  price,  J51.50. 


'5^gTF0RD.&.G^ 
.<rBOOKSELLEflS^> 


Deatb*s  /lI^o^ern  Xan^ua^e  Series* 

ELEMENTARY  FRENCH  TEXTS. 

Easy  Selections  for  Sight  Translation  (Mansion).     15  cts. 

Segur's  Les  Malheurs  de  Sophie  (White).    Vocabulary.    45  cts. 

French  Fairy  Tales  (Joynes).     Vocabulary  and  exercises.    35  cts. 

Saintine's  Picciola.  With  notes  and  vocabulary  by  Prof.  O.  B.  Super.  45  cts. 

Mair^t's  La  Tache  du  Petit  Pierre  (Super).    Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Bruno's  Les  Enf ants  Patriotes  (Lyon).     Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Bruno's  Tour  de  la  France  par  deux  Enf  ants  (Fontaine).  Vocabulary.  45  cts. 

Verne's  L'Expedition  de  la  Jeune  Hardie  (Lyon).     Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Gervais  Un  Cas  de  Conscience  (Horsley).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

G^nin's  Le  Petit  Tailleur  Bouton  (Lyon).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Assolant's  Aventure  du  Celebre -Pierrot  (Pain).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Assolant's  Recits  de  la  Vieille  France.     Notes  by  E.  B.  Wauton.    25  cts. 

Mailer's  Grandes  Decouvertes  Modemes.    25  cts. 

Recits  de  Guerre  et  de  Revolution  (Minssen).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Bedollidre's  La  Mere  Michel  et  son  Chat  (Lyon).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Legouve  and  Labiche's  Cigale  chez  les  Founnis  (Witherby).    20  cts. 

Labiche's  La  Grammaire  (Levi).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Labiche's  Le  Voyage  de  M.  Perrichon  (Wells).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 

Labiche's  La  Poudre  aux  Yeux  (Wells).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 

Lemaitre,  Contes  (Rensch).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 

Dumas's  Due  de  Beaufort  (Kitchen).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 

Dumas's  Monte-Cristo  (Spiers).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 

Berthet's  Le  Facte  de  Famine.    With  notes  by  B.  B.  Dickinson.    25  cts. 

Erckmann-Chatrian's  Le  Consent  de  18x3  (Super).    Vocabulary.    45  cts. 

Erckmann-Chatrian's  L'Histoire  d'un  Paysan  (Lyon).    25  cts. 

France's  Abeille  (Lebon).    25  cts. 

Moinaux's  Les  deux  Sourds  (Spiers).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

La  Main  Malheureuse  (Guerber).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Enault's  Le  Chien  du  Capitaine  (Fontaine).    Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Trois  Contes  Choisis  par  Daudet  (Sanderson).    Vocabulary.    20  cts. 

Desnoyer's  Jean-Paul  Choppart  (Fontaine).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 

Selections  for  Sight  Translation  (Bruce).    15  cts. 

Laboulaye's  Contes  Bleus  (Fontaine).    Vocabulary.     35  cts. 

Malot's  Sans  Famille  (Spiers).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 

Meilhac  and  Halevy's  L'Et6  de  la  St.-Martin  (Franjois).  Vocab.    25  cts. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  fundingfrom 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/frenchgrammarforOOfrasrich 


IHeatb's  flDo&ern  Xanauaflc  Series 
A   FRENCH   GRAMMAR 

FOR  SCHOOLS  AND   COLLEGES 

TOGETHER  WITH 

A  BRIEF  READER  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

BT 

W.  II.  FRASER  AND  J.  SQUAIR 

PROFESSORS  OF  THE  ROMANCE  DEPARTMENT,  UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 


BOSTON,   U.  S.  A. 
D.  C.  HEATH  &  COMPANY 
1911 


o 


Copyright,   1901, 
By  D.  C.  Heath  &  Co. 


■     ■■,■■;•■.■••  0 


(5^ 


c((l*l 


PREFACE 


This  book  aims  to  provide  a  practical  and  thorough 
course  in  French  grammar  and  elementary  composition  for 
schools  and  colleges.  In  the  preparation  of  the  work  an 
effort  has  been  made  to  bring  the  presentation  of  the  sub- 
ject into  accord  with  recent  advances  in  the  methods  of 
modern  language  teaching. 

Having  regard  to  the  importance  of  securing  accurate 
pronunciation  from  the  very  outset,  care  has  been  taken  to 
facilitate  the  work  of  the  teacher  in  this  respect  by  giving 
a  phonetic  transcription  of  all  vocabularies  and  paradigms, 
under  the  conviction  that  in  no  other  way  can  distinctions 
in  sounds  be  intelligibly  explained.  In  order,  however,  not 
to  confuse  the  beginner  with  too  minute  distinctions,  "  half 
long  "  vowels  have  not  been  indicated,  and  the  same  rule 
has  been  observed,  for  the  most  part,  with  regard  to  such 
stressed  vowels  as  are  optionally  long  or  short. 

The  elementary  exercises  are  based  almost  exclusively 
upon  connected  pieces  of  French,  dealing  with  a  variety  of 
topics  relating  to  every-day  life,  and  make  provision  for 
both  oral  and  written  practice.  They  have  been  provided 
in  abundance  so  as  to  admit  of  selection  and  variety,  and 
to  afford  ample  material  for  review.  In  both  the  elemen- 
tary and  advanced  exercises,  regard  has  been  had  to  the 
requirements  of  such  teachers  as  feel  the  necessity  for  a 
large  amount  of  work  of  this  kind  in  order  to  ensure  ade- 
quate and  practical  knowledge  on  the  part  of  the  pupil. 

mS§396 


IV  PREFACE. 

Part  I.  consists  of  a  series  of  lessons  on  the  elements  of 
grammar  as  an  essential  preparation  for  easy  reading,  while 
Part  II.  furnishes  a  systematic  grammar  of  modern  French 
for  later  study  and  general  reference.  To  this  part  a  se- 
ries of  exercises  has  been  added  dealing  with  the  various 
topics  treated  in  the  text.  It  was  thought  best  to  group 
these  exercises  together  at  the  end,  in  order  not  to  impair 
the  usefulness  of  the  Grammar  as  a  book  of  reference  by 
inserting  the  exercises  immediately  after  the  paragraphs  to 
which  they  refer.  Each  exercise,  however,  is  furnished 
with  section  references  which  will  enable  the  pupil  to  turn 
readily  to  the  theory  upon  which  the  exercises  are  based. 

The  Eeader,  which  may  be  used  with  advantage  after 
the  completion  of  Part  I.  of  the  Grammar,  has  been  made 
up  of  interesting  selections,  for  the  most  part  complete  in 
themselves,  and  affording  considerable  range  as  to  topic, 
vocabulary  and  idiom.  The  exercises  inserted  at  the  end 
of  the  Keader  are  based  on  the  idiom  and  vocabulary  of  the 
text,  and  are  intended  to  give  practice  in  the  reproduction 
in  French  of  the  substance  of  the  selections. 

The  authors  take  this  opportunity  of  expressing  indebted- 
ness to  a  number  of  teachers,  whose  advice  and  criticism 
have  been  of  much  assistance  in  the  preparation  of  the 
present  volume. 

March  26, 1901. 

This  edition  has  profited  greatly  by  criticisms  kindly 
suggested  by  several  instructors,  in  particular  by  Madame 
Hel^ne  J.  Raiche,  of  Wellesley  College. 

January  f  1903. 


CONTENTS. 


PAOI 

Phonetic  Introduction 1 

Exercise  in  Phonetic  Transcription 12 

PART  I. 

Elementary  Lessons,  I-LI 13 

PART  II. 

TheVerb 129 

The  Noun 220 

The  Article 233 

The  Adjective         .        .        .        .' 247 

The  Pronoun 262 

The  Adverb *       ....  302 

The  Numeral 314 

The  Preposition 321 

The  Conjunction 331 

The  Interjection 334 

Abbreviations 336 

Exercises  on  Grammar,  I,  a-LXXV,  a 337 

FRENCH  READER, 

Prose  Selections 395 

Poetical  Selections 431 

Composition  Exercises  on  Reader  . 439 

Vocabularies  : 

French-English 461 

English-French 512 

Index 543 


NOTE  TO   THE   SECOND  EDITION. 


By  a  decree  of  the  French  Minister  of  Public  Instruction, 
dated  February  26th,  1901,  certain  deviations  fronv  com- 
monly accepted  rules  of  grammar  are  permitted  at  all 
examinations  held  under  his  control.  In  the  Appendix 
(see  last  page  of  this  volume)  will  be  found  a  reference 
list  explaining  the  bearing  of  these  deviations  upon  the 
various  sections  of  the  Grammar  affected  thereby. 

vi 


FEENCH   GRAMMAK. 


PHONETIC  INTRODUCTION. 
I.  Genera;!    Distinctions.     The  pronunciation  will  be 

explained,  as  far  as  possible,  by  comparison  with  English 
sounds,  but  it  must  never  be  forgotten  that  the  sounds  of 
two  languages  rarely  correspond.  Important  general  distinc- 
tions between  English  and  French  are  the  following : — 

1.  English  has  strong  stress  (§  7)  and  comparatively  weak  action  of 
the  organs  in  articulation. 

2.  French  has  weak  stress,  while  the  action  of  the  organs  in  articula- 
tion is  very  energetic. 

3.  Hence,  French  sounds,  both  vowels  and  consonants,  are  almost  all 
*  narrow,'  i.e.,  uttered  with  tenseness  of  the  organs  concerned  in  their 
articulation.  (To  understand  'narrow'  and  'wide,'  compare  the  narrow 
sound  of  ea  in  *  seat '  with  the  wide  sound  of  i  in  '  sit. ') 

4.  Tongue  and  lip  positions  for  French  vowels  are  more  definite,  and 
more  promptly  taken,  than  in  English.  Lip-rounding  (as  in  'who,* 
•no,'  'la'w')  and  lip-retraction  (as  in  'let,'  'hat')  are  much  more 
definite  and  energetic  in  forming  French  vowels. 

5.  The  tongue,  both  for  vowels  and  consonants,  is,  in  general,  either 
further  advanced  or  further  retracted  than  in  forming  English  sound* 
requiring  tongue  action. 

6.  English  long  vowels  (like  a  in  '  fate')  are  diphthongal  (especially  as 
pronounced  in  the  South  of  England),  while  French  vowels,  whether 
long  or  short,  are  uniform  throughout  their  utterance. 

7.  The  nasal  vowels  of  French  are  entirely  foreign  to  English. 
They  are  formed  by  allowing  the  soft  palate  to  hang  freely,  as  in 
ordinary  breathing,  thus  causing  the  air  to  escape  through  both  nose- 
and  mouth  at  once.  If,  for  example,  the  a  of  ' father'  be  uttered  with 
the  soft  palate  hanging  freely,  the  resulting  sound  will  be  approxi- 
mately that  of  the  nasal  [a]  in  '  tante'  [tdit].    The  position  of  the  aoft 


2 


I^fTRODUCTION. 


[§§2-3 


^alatd  in  f cynniag  ihis  sbund  ra&y  be  readily  observed  with  a  mirror.  It 
must  be  eareruily  noted  that  thore  is  absolutely  no  sound  of.n,  m,  or  ng, 
in  French  nasal  vowels,  and  hence  that  great  care  must  be  taken  neither 
to  raise  the  tongue  nor  close  the  lips  until  the  sound  is  complete. 

2.  Sounds.  The  French  language  has  thirty-seven  sounds, 
exclusive  of  minor  distinctions.  The  orthography,  like  that  of 
English,  is  irregular  and  inconsistent.  Hence,  to  avoid  con- 
fusion in  indicating  the  pronunciation,  we  shall  employ  a 
phonetic  alphabet  (that  of  the  'Association  Phon^tique  In- 
ternationale'), in  which  each  sound  is  represented  by  but  one 
symbol,  and  each  symbol  has  but  one  sound. 

3.  Table  of  Symbols.  In  the  following  table,  the 
examples  are  in  ordinary  orthography,  the  heavy  type  indi- 
cates the  sounds  which  correspond  to  the  symbols,  and  the 
phonetic  transcription  is  given  within  brackets  :  — 


VBOU 

1.                 Examples. 

StMBOIiB. 

Examples. 

i 

ni,  vive  [ni,  viiv]. 

b 

beau,  robe  [bo,  rob]. 

y 

pu,  muse  [py,  mysz]. 

d 

dame,  fade  [dam,  fad]. 

e 

6t6  [ete]. 

f 

fort,  neuf  [foir,  ncef]. 

0 

creux,  creuse[kr0,  kr0:z]. 

g 

gant,  dogue  [ga,  dog]. 

e 

le  [b]. 

h 

aha !  [a(h)a]. 

e 

prfes,  pfere  [pre,  pe:r]. 

k 

car,  roc,  [kar,  rok]. 

2 

fin,  prince  [fe,  pre  is]. 

1 

long,  seul  [15,  soel]. 

oe 

neuf,  neuve  [noef,  noeiv]. 

m 

mot,  dame  [mo,  dam]. 

<56 

un,  humble  [ce,  ce:bl]. 

n 

ni,  ^ne  [ni,  a:n]. 

a 

patte,  part  [pat,  pair]. 

Ji 

ag^eau,  dig^e  [ajio,  diji]. 

a 

pas,  passe  [pa,  pais]. 

P 

pas,  tape  [pa,  tap]. 

a 

tant,  tante  [to,  ta:t]. 

r 

drap,  par  [dra,  par]. 

0 

note,  tort  [not,  to:r]. 

s 

si,  pense  [si,  pais]. 

5 

rond,  ronde  [ro,  roid]. 

J 

chou,  lache  [Ju,  la  i  J], 

0 

sot,  chose  [so,  Joiz]. 

t 

tas,  patte  [to,  pat]. 

u 

tout,  tour  [tu,  tuir]. 

v 

vin,  cave  [v?,  kaiv]. 

J 

viande  [vjaid]. 

z 

zone,  rose  [zoin,  roiz]. 

q 

lui  [Iqi]. 

3 

je,  rouge  [38,  ruis]. 

w 

Gui  [wi]. 

I 

sign  of  length. 

§§4-6]  SYLLABICATION.  3 

4.  The   Alphabet.     The  letters   of    the   alphabet,    with 
their  French  names,  are  as  follows  : — 


a    a  [a]. 

j     ji[5i]. 

s    esse  [es]. 

b    be  [be].    - 

k    ka[ka]. 

t     te[te]. 

c    ce  [se]. 

1     elle  [el]. 

u    u[y]. 

d    de[de]. 

m  emme  [em]. 

V    ve  [ve]. 

e    6[e]. 

n  •  enne  [en]. 

■w  double  ve  [dubl  ve]. 

f    eflfe[ef].. 

0    0  [0]. 

X    iks  [iks]. 

g    g^  [36]. 

P    P^[pe]. 

y    i  grec  [i  grek]. 

h    ache[aj]. 

q    ku[ky]. 

z    z6de  [zed]. 

i     i[i]. 

r     erre  [er]. 

NOTB.— Word8  are  commonly  spelled  by  namiog  their  letters,  as  above,  together  with 
the  other  orthographic  signs,  if  any. 

5.  Other   Orthogpraphic   Sig^ns.     In  addition  to  the 

letters  of  the  alphabet,  the  following  signs  are  used  : — 

1.  The  acute  accent  ^ ,  Fr.  'accent  aigu'  [aksat  egy],  e.g.,  V6t6t 
I'Ecosse. 

2.  The  grave  accent  "^,  Fr.  *  accent  grave '  [aksa  gra:v],  e.g.,  voiU^ 
p^re,  ou. 

3.  The  circumflex  accent  ^,  Fr.  'accent  circonflexe'  [aksa  sirkofleks], 
e.g.,  kne,  tete,  ile,  bote,  flute. 

Observe:  None  of  the  above  accent  marks  serve  to  denote  stress  (§  7). 

4.  The  cedilla,  Fr.  'cedille'  [sediij],  used  under  c  to  give  it  the 
sound  of  [s],  before  a,  o,  u  (§  17,  13),  e.g.,  facade,  legon,  commen^it, 
comraen^ons,  reqdmes,  re^u. 

5.  The  diaeresis  "  ,  Fr.  *  tr^ma '  [trema],  shows  that  the  vowel  bearing 
it  is  divided  in  pronunciation  from  the  preceding  vowel,  e.g.,  N06I,  naif. 

6.  The  apostrophe,  Fr.  'apostrophe'  [apostrof],  shows  omission  of 
final  vowel  before  initial  vowel  sound,  e.g.,  I'amie  (  =  la  amie),  I'ami 
(  =  le  ami),  I'homme  (=le  homme),  s'il  (  =  si  il),  §  19. 

7.  The  hyphen,  Fr.  *  trait  d'union '  [tre  d  ynjoj,  used  as  in  English. 

6.  Syllabication. 

1.  A  single  consonant  sound  between  vowel  sounds  always  belongs  to 
the  following  syllable. 

Ex.:  Ma-rie,  in-di-vi-si-bi-li-t6,  a-che-ter. 

'2.  Two  consonants,  of  which  the  second  is  1  or  r  (but  not  the  com- 
binations rl  or  Ir),  similarly  both  belong  to  the  following  syllable. 

Ex.:  ta-bleau,  6-cri-vain. 


4  INTRODUCTION.  [§§7-8 

3.  Other  combinations  of  consonants  representing  two  or  more  sounds 
are  divided. 

Ex. :  par-ler,  per-dre,  es-ca-lier. 

N.B. — Great  care  should  be  taken  to  avoid  the  consonantal  ending 
of  syllables,  so  frequent  in  English.  Compare  French  *  ci-te,'  *  ta-bleau,' 
with  English  'cit-y,'  *tab-leau.' 

7.  Stress. 

'Stress'  is  the  force  with  which  a  syllable  is  uttered  as  compared 
with  other  syllables  in  the  same  group.  In  French,  the  syllables  are 
uttered  with  almost  equal  force,  a  very  slight  stress  falling  on  the  last 
syllable  of  a  word  of  two  or  more  syllables,  or,  on  the  last  but  one,  if 
the  last  vowel  of  the  word  is  [a]. 

Ex.:  Che-val,  par-ler,  par-lai,  per-dre,  cr^-di-bi-li-t6  (compare  the 
strong  stress  of  English  cred-i-bil-it-y). 

Note.— In  connected  discourse  the  rule  above  stated  varies  considerably,  but  a  full 
treatment  of  the  subject  would  exceed  the  limits  of  an  elementary  work.  The  safest 
practice  for  the  be^nner  is  to  pronounce  all  syllables  with  almost  equal  force.  It  should 
be  remembered  that  accent-marks  have  nothing  to  do  with  stress,  and  that  all  vowels, 
except  [a],  see  §  19,  whether  stressed  or  unstressed,  have  their  full  value,  never  being 
slurred  over  as  in  English. 

8.  Vowel  Quantity.  The  most  important  general  rules 
are: — 

1.  Final  vowel  sounds  (including  nasals)  are  regularly  short,  c.gr., 
fini  [fini],  vie  [vi],  loue  [lu],  parl6  [parle],  rideau  [rido],  mais  [me], 
donner  [done],  enfant  [afa],  parlerons  [parlaro]. 

2.  Stressed  vowels  are  long  before  the  sounds  [v],  [z],  [3],  [j], 
[r  final],  e.g.y  rive  [riiv],  ruse  [ry:z],  rouge  [ruij],  feuille  [foe:j], 
faire  [fe:r]. 

3.  Of  stressed  vowels  standing  before  other  consonant  sounds,  nasals 
are  long,  e.g.,  prince  [pre:s];  [o],  [0],  long,  e.g.,  faute  [foit],  meule 
[m0il];  [a],  long  (almost  always),  e.g.,  passe  [pais];  [e],  long  or  short, 
e.g.,  reine  [rem],  renne  [ren] ;  other  vowels  regularly  short,  e.g.,  cap 
[kap],  poche  [poj],  koupe  [kup],  pipe  [pip],  seul  [soel],  lune  [lynj. 

NOTB.— It  is  possible  to  distinguish  also  between  'long'  and  '  half  long'  vowels,  but 
It  has  been  thought  best  to  omit,  in  an  elementary  work,  the  rules  relating  to  this 
distinotion,  and  to  indicate  '  long'  vowels  only  in  the  transcriptions. 


§§9-11]  VOWELS.  5 

YOWELS. 

9,  Tongue  Position.  The  relative  position  of  the 
tongue  for  the  various  vowels  may  be  seen  from  the  following 
diagram,  adapted  from  Vietor.  Rounded  vowels  are  enclosed 
in  parentheses : — 


'greatest > < least 

i(y)  (u) 

e  (0)  (o) 

(a) 
e  f  (oe  &)  (o  0) 


ad 

Jeaat > < greatest, 

N.B. — In  the  following  descriptions  of  sounds,  the  word 
'like'  means,  of  course,  only  'resembling,'  or  'approximately 
like'(§l).  The  examples  given  after  the  word  'also'  show 
the  less  common  orthographical  equivalents. 

10.  i,  y. 

1.  i — Like  ea  in  *  seat ' ;  the  comers  of  the  mouth  retracted  as  in 
smiling  (§1,  4);  avoid  the  sound  of  i  in  'sit';  avoid  diphthongization 
(§1,6);  narrow  (§1,3). 

Ex.:  ni  [ni],  vive  [viiv] ;  also,  ile  [ill],  lyre  [liir]. 

2.  y — Has  no  counterpart  in  English.  The  tongue  position  is  practi- 
cally the  same  as  for  [i]  above  ;  very  tense  lip-rounding  (§1,  4) ;  avoid 
diphthongization  (§1,  6) ;  narrow  (§  1,  3).  The  sound  may  be  best 
acquired  either  by  prolonging  [i],  and  at  the  same  time  effecting  the 
rounding,  or  by  holding  the  lips  rounded  and  taking  the  tongue 
position  of  [i], 

Ex.:  pu  [py],  muse  [my:z];  also  ffit  [fy],  il  cut  [il  y],  nous  eiimes 
[nuz  ym]. 

11.  e,  0,  o. 

1.  e — Like  the  first  part  of  the  sound  of  a  in  '  day,'  but  with  the  lips 
more  retracted  (§1,4);  avoid  diphthongization  (§  1,6);  narrow  (§  1,  3). 
Ex. :  ^t6  [etel ;  also,  parler  [parle],  donnai  [done]. 


6  INTRODUCTION.  [§§12-13 

2.  0 — Has  no  counterpart  in  English.  The  tongue  position  is  prac- 
tically the  same  as  for  [ej,  with  tense  rounding  of  the  lips  (§  1,  4) ;  avoid 
diphthongization  (§1,  6) ;  narrow  (§1,  3);  best  acquired  by  combining, 
as  explained  for  [y]  above,  the  lip-rounding  with  the  [e]  position. 

Ex.:  creux  [kr0],  creuse  [kr0:z] ;  also,  boeufs  [bjzJ]. 

3.  9 — Like  English  e  in  *  the  man,'  or  a  in  *  Louisa,'  but  slightly 
rounded ;  best  acquired  by  relaxing  the  tension  of  the  organs  required 
for  the  production  of  the  [0]  sound. 

Ex.:  le  [la] ;  also,  monsieur  [masj^j,  faisant  [fdza]. 

12.  e   e,  ce,  cfe. 

1.  E — Like  the  sound  of  e  in  '  let,'  with  the  mouth  more  definitely 
open  and  the  lips  more  retracted  (§  1,  4) ;  avoid  diphthongization  (§  1,  6) ; 
narrow  (§  1,  3). 

Ex.:  pres  [pre],  p^re  [peir] ;  also,  fete  [feit],  terre  [te:r],  secret 
[sakre],  parlais  [park],  paix  [pe],  reine  [rem]. 

Note. — The  e  of  a  stressed  syllable  followed  by  a  syllable  containing 
e  mute  has  almost  always  this  sound  (orthographically  denoted  by  h,  e, 
or  e  +  double  consonant),  e.g.,  je  mhne  [men],  tete  [teit],  chere  [Jeir], 
j'appelle  [apel],  ancienne  [asjen].  This  principle  accounts  for  the 
apparent  irregularities  of  certain  verbs  and  adjectives. 

2.  e — The  [e]  sound  nasalized  (§1,  7),  but  slightly  more  open. 

Ex.:  fin  [fe],  prince  [prfis];  also,  faim  [f?],  sainte  [ss:t],  Reims  [re  is], 
plein  [pie],  simple  [se:pl],  symbole  [sebol],  syntaxe  [setaks],  viendrai 
[vjedre],  soin  [swe]. 

3.  oe — Has  no  counterpart  in  English.  It  has  practically  the  tongue 
position  of  [e],  combined  with  definite  rounding  of  the  lips  ;  avoid  diph- 
thongization (§  1,  6)  1  narrow  (§1,3);  best  acquired  by  combining,  with 
the  [e]  position,  the  rounding  described. 

Ex.:  neuf  [noef],  neuve  [noesv];  also,  coeur  [koeir],  ceil  [oej],  orgueil 
[orgoeij]. 

4.  (5&— The  [oe]  sound  nasalized  (§  1,  7),  but  slightly  more  open. 
Ex. :  un  [<£],  humble  [<3&ibl] ;  also,  k  jeun  [a  3<5e]. 

13.  a,  a,  a. 

1.  a — Only  very  slightly  resembles  the  sound  of  a  in  *  pat,'  which  is 
nearer  that  of  [e].  The  [a]  sound  .requires  much  wider  mouth  opening 
than  a  of  '  pat,'  accompanied  by  retraction  of  the  lips  and  lowering  of 


§§14-16]  CONSONANTS.  7 

the  tongue,  though  with  the  point  still  touching  the  lower  teeth  ;  avoid 
diphthongization  (§1,4);  narrow  (§  1,  3). 

Ex.:  patte  [pat],  part  [pair] ;  also,  \k  [la],  femme  [fam],  moi  [mwa], 
boite  [bwa:t],  parldmes  [parlam],  parlat  [parla]. 

2.  a — Like  a  in  *  father '  ;  the  mouth  well  open,  the  tongue  Ijdng  flat, 
and  so  far  retracted  that  it  no  longer  touches  the  lower  teeth ;  lips 
absolutely  neutral,  i.e.,  neither  rounded  nor  retracted ;  avoid  especially 
rounding,  as  of  a  in  '  fall.' 

Ex.:  pas  [pa],  passe  [pais];  also,  p4te  [pa it],  roi  [rwa],  po61e 
[pwoil]. 

3.  a — The  [a]  sound  nasalized  (§  1,  7). 

Ex.:  tant  [ta],  tante  [tait] ;  also,  lampe  [laip],  entre  [aitr],  membra 
[maibr]. 

14.  0,  5,  o. 

1.  0 — Like  o  in  *  not,'  but  with  definite  bell-like  rounding  (§  1,  4) ; 
avoid  diphthongization  (§1,  6) ;  narrow  (§  1,  3). 

Ex.:  note  [not],  tort  [to:r]  ;  also  Paul  [pol],  album  [albom]. 

2.  0 — The  [0]  sound  nasalized  (§1,  7),  but  slightly  more  close. 
Ex.:  rond  [ro],  ronde  [r5:d] ;  also  tomber  [tobe],  comte  [ko:t]. 

3.  o — Like  o  in  *  omen,'  but  with  more  protrusion  and  much  tenser 
rounding  of  the  lips  (§  1,  4) ;  avoid  diphthongization  (§  1,  6) ;  narrow 
(§1,3). 

Ex.:  sot  [so],  chose  [Joiz],  fosse  [fois];  also,  cot^  [kote],  cote  [koitj, 
faute  [fort],  beaut6  [bote]. 

15.  u. 

I.  u — Like  u  in  *  rumour,'  but  with  more  protrusion  and  much  tenser 
rounding  of  the  lips  (§  1,  4) ;  avoid  diphthongization  (§  1,  6) ;  narrow 
(§1,3). 

Ex.:  tout  [tu],  tour  [tuir] ;  also,  goiit  [gu],  aoiit  [u]. 

Consonants. 

16.  j,  ^,  w. 

When  the  sounds  [i],  [y],  [u],  §  10  and  §  15,  come  before  a  vowel  of 
stronger  stress,  they  are  pronounced  with  the  tongue  slightly  closer  to 
the  palate,  and  hence  assume  a  consonantal  value,  indicated  by  [j],  [q], 
[w],  respectively.     They  are  sometimes  called  semi- vowels. 


8  INTRODUCTION.  [§17 

1.  j — Like  very  brief  and  narrow  y  in  'yes.' 

Ex.:  viande  [vjaid] ;  also,  yeux  [j0],  ai'eul  [ajoel],  fille  [fiij],  travailler 
[travaje],  travail  [travaj]. 

2.  q — Has  no  counterpart  in  English  ;  avoid  very  carefully  the  sound 
of  -w  in  '  wall ' ;  may  be  best  acquired  by  at  first  substituting  [y]  for  it, 
and  afterward  increasing  the  speed  of  the  utterance  and  the  elevation 
of  the  tongue  until  it  can  be  formed  exactly  along  with  what  follows. 

Ex.:  lui  [Iqi];  also,  nuage  [nqais],  ^cuelle  [ekqel]. 

3.  w — Like  very  brief  and  narrow  w^  in  '-we,'  '■west.'  It  is  best, 
however,  to  proceed  from  the  sound  of  [u]  in  the  manner  described 
for  [q]  above. 

Ex.:  oui  [wi] ;  also,  poids  [pwo],  tramway  [tramwe]. 

17.  The  remaining  consonantal  sounds  can  be  sufficiently 
described  by  noting  the  differences  between  their  mode  of  for- 
mation and  that  of  the  nearest  English  sounds  (see  §  1). 

L  b— Like  bin  'barb.' 

Ex. :  beau  [bo],  robe  [rob],  abb^  [abe]. 

2.  d — Like  d  in  'did,'  but  with  the  tongue  so  far  advanced  that 
its  point,  or  upper  surface,  forms  a  closure  with  the  inner  surface  of 
the  upper  teeth  and  gums ;  or  the  point  of  the  tongue  may  be  thrust 
against  the  lower  teeth,  the  upper  surface  forming  a  closure  with  the 
upper  teeth  and  gums.  It  must  be  remembered  that  in  forming  English 
d  (also  1,  n,  r,  s,  t,  z)  the  tongue  touches  at  some  little  distance  above 
the  teeth  (§  1,  5). 

Ex. :  dame  [dam],  fade  [fad],  addition  [adisjo]. 

3.  f— Like  fin  'fat.' 

Ex.:  fort  [fo:r],  neuf  [noef],  difficile  [difisil]. 

4.  g — Like  g  in  '  go.' 

Ex.:  gant  [go],  dog^e  [dog],  gfuerre  [geir] ;  also,  second  [sogo]. 

5.  h — In  orthography  the  letter  h  is  known  as  'h  mute'  (Fr.  'h 
tnuette'),  or  'h  aspirate'  (Fr.  *h  aspir^e'),  according  as  it  does,  or  does 
not,  cause  elision  (§19).  The  learner  may  regard  it,  in  either  case,  as 
absolutely  silent. 

Ex. :  I'homme  [1  om],  le  h^ros  [I9  ero]. 


$17] 


CONSONANTS.  9 


In  hiatus,  however,  a  sotmd  resembling,  hut  much  weaker  than  h  in 
*hat,'  is  permissible,  and  is  actually  used  by  many  Frenchmen. 
Ex.:  aha  !  [aha],  le  heros  [la  hero],  fl^au  [fleho]. 

6.  k — Like  k  in  'take';  avoid  the  slight  aspiration  which  generally 
follows  the  English  sound. 

Ex. :  car  [kar],  roc  [rok],  accorder  [akorde] ;  also,  chr^tien  [kretjf], 
cinq  [sgik],  bouquet  [buke],  acqu6rir  [akeriir],  kilo  [kilo],  maxime 
[maksim]. 

7.  1 — Like  1  in  *  law,'  but  with  the  tongue  advanced  as  for  [d]  above. 
Ex. :  long  [15],  seul  [soel],  aller  [ale]. 

8.  m — Like  m  in  *  man,'  '  dumb.' 

Ex. :  mot  [mo],  dame  [dam],  homme  [om]. 

9.  n — Like  n  in  'not,'  'man,'  but  with  the  tongue  advanced  as  for 
[d]  above. 

Ex.:  ni  [ni],  ane  [am],  donner  [done]. 

10.  p — Somewhat  like  ny  in  '  ban-yan,'  except  that  [ji]  is  a  single,  not 
a  double,  sound,  and  is  formed  by  pressing  the  middle  of  the  tongue 
against  the  hard  palate,  the  tip  being  usually  thrust  against  the  lower 
teeth. 

Ex. :  ag^eau  [ajio],  digne  [diji]. 

11.  p — Like  p  in  'pan,'  'top';  avoid  the  slight  aspiration  which 
generally  follows  the  English  sound. 

Ex.  pas  [pa],  tape  [tap],  appliquer  [aplike]. 

12.  r — Has  no  English  counterpart.  It  is  formed  by  trilling  the  tip 
of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  gums,  or  even  against  the  upper  teeth. 
This  r  is  called  in  French  'r  linguale,'  The  tongue  must,  of  course, 
be  well  advanced  towards  the  teeth,  and  not  retracted  and  turned 
upward,  as  in  our  r  sound  (§  1,  5),  The  spund  may  be  advantageously 
practised  at  first  in  combination  with  d,  e.g.,  dry,  drip,  drop,  drum 
(as  in  Scotch  or  Irish  dialect),  and  afterwards  in  combinations  in  which 
it  is  less  easily  pronounced. 

Ex. :  drap  [dra],  par  [par],  torrent  [tora],  rond  [ro]. 

NoTK.— Another  r  sound  (called  in  French  '  r  uvulaire '),  used  especially  in  Paris 
and  in  the  large  cities  and  towns,  is  formed  by  withdrawing  and  elevating  the  root  of 
the  tongue  so  as  to  cause  a  trilling  of  the  uvula.  This  r  is  usually  more  difficult  for 
English-speaking  people  to  acquire. 

13.  8 — Like  s  in  '  sea,'  '  cease,'  but  with  the  tongue  advanced  as  for 
[d]  above. 


10  INTRODUCTION.  [§§18-19 

Ex. :  si  [si],  pense  [pais],  casser  [kase] ;  also  sc^ne  [sein],  place  [plas], 
fa^de  [fasad],  legon  [laso],  regu  [rosy],  commen^ait  [komase],  commen- 
50ns  [komaso],  resumes  [rasym],  portion  [porsjS],  soixante  [swasait]. 

14.  J — Like  sh  in  shoe,  but  with  the  tongue  more  advanced  (§  1,  5). 
Ex. :  chou  [Ju],  lache  [la  i  j],  also,  schisme  [Jism]. 

15.  t — Like  t  in  'tall,'  but  with  the  tongue  advanced  as  for  [d]  above ; 
avoid  the  slight  aspiration  which  generally  follows  the  English  sound. 

Ex.:  tas  [ta],  patte  [pat]. 

16.  V — Like  v  in  *  vine,'  *  cave.* 

Ex. :  vin  [ve],  cave  [ka:v];  also,  "v^ragon  [vago],  neuf  heures  [ncev  ceir], 

17.  z — Like  z  in  *  zone,'  or  s  in  '  rose,'  but  with  the  tongue  advanced 
as  for  [d]  above. 

Ex.:  zone  [zoin],  rose  [roiz];  also,  deux  heures,  [d0z  oeir],  exact 
[egzakt]. 

18.  3 — Like  z  in  *  azure '  or  s  in  *  pleasure,'  but  with  the  tongue  mere 
advanced  {§  1,  5). 

Ex.  :  je  [39],  rouge  [ruis] ;  also  mangeant  [ma3a],  Jean  [3a]. 

18.  Liaison.  Final  consonants  are  usually  silent,  but  in 
oral  speech,  within  a  group  of  words  closely  connected  logically, 
a  final  consonant  (whether  usually  sounded  or  not)  is  regularly- 
sounded,  and  forms  a  syllable  with  the  initial  vowel  sound  of 
the  next  word.  This  is  called  in  French  '  liaison '  =  '  linking,* 
'joining.' 

Ex. :  C'est^un  petit^homme  [s^e-t(5&-po-ti-tom]. 

1.  A  few  of  the  consonants  change  their  sound  in  liaison^  thus,  final 
S  or  x  =  z,  d  =  t,  g  =  k,  f=v,  e.g.,  nos^amis  [no-za-mi],  quand^on  parle 
[ka-to-parl]  ;  the  t  of  et  is  silent,  for  examples  see  p.  12. 

2.  The  n  of  a  nasal  is  carried  on,  and  the  nasal  vowel  loses  its  nasality 
in  part,  or  even  wholly,  e.g.,  un  bon^ami  [de-bo-na-mi,  or  de-bo-na-mi]. 

NOTK. — The  sounds  carried  over  really  belong  in  pronunciation  to  the  initial  syllable 
of  the  following  word,  but  to  avoid  confusion  they  will  be  indicated  in  the  transcription 
with  the  preceding  word,  e.g. ,  les,_,homme3  [lez  om,  more  properly  le  zom]. 

19.  Hlision.  The  letters  a,  e,  i,  are  entirely  silent  in 
certain  cases : — 

1.  The  a  and  e  are  silent  and  replaced  by  apostrophe  in  le,  la,  je,  me, 
tCj  se,  de,  ne,  que  (and  some  of  its  compounds)  before  initial  vowel  or 


§§20-21]  CAPITALS.  11 

h  mute  (not,  however,  je,  ce,  le,  la  after  a  verb) ;  so  also  i  of  si  before 
U(s). 

Ex.:  L'arbre  {=le  arbre),  I'encre  (=la  encre),  j'ai  (=je  ai),  qu'a-t-il 
(=que  a-t-il),  jusqu'^  (=jusque  k),  s'il  (  =  si  il). 

2.  In  prose  the  letter  e  is  silent  at  the  end  of  all  words  (except  when 
e  is  itself  the  only  vowel  in  the  word),  silent  in  the  verbal  endings  -es, 
-ent,  silent  within  words  after  a  vowel  sound,  and  in  the  combination 
ge  or  je  [3].  In  verbs  which  have  stem  g  [3],  g  becomes  ge  [3]  before 
a  or  o  of  an  ending,  to  preserve  the  [3]  sound. 

Ex.:  rue  [ry],  donn^e  [done],  rare  [ra:r],  place  [plas],  ai-je  [ei3], 
table  [tabl],  sabre  [saibr],  prendre  [prdidr],  tu  paries  [ty  pari],  ils 
parlent  [il  pari],  gaiet^  [gete],  mangeons  [ma  30],  Jean  [3a]. 

NOTK.— In  ordinary  discourse,  this  sound  is  usually  slighted  or  wholly  omitted  in  most 
cases  in  which  consonantal  combinations  produced  by  its  weakening  or  elision  can  be 
readily  pronounced,  but  beginners  will  do  well  to  sound  it  fully,  except  in  the  cases 
above  specified.    The  treatment  of  the  [a]  in  poetry  is  beyond  the  scope  of  this  work. 

20.  Punctuation.  The  same  punctuation  marks  are  used 
in  French  as  in  English. 

1.  Their  French  names  are : 

.  point.  -  trait  d'union.  [  ]  crochets. 

,  virgule.  -  tiret,  or  tiret  de  |  ^^^^^^^ 

;  point  et  virgule.  separation.                I 

:  deux  points.  .  .  .  points  suspensifs.        *  ast^risque. 

?  point  d'interrogation.  "  "  guillemets.                    t  croix  de  renvoi. 

1  point  d'exclamation.  ( )  parenth6se. 

2.  They  are  used  as  in  English,  but  the  *  tiret '  commonly  serves 
to  denote  a  change  of  interlocutor. 

Ex.:  "Qui  est  li?  dis-je. — Personne. — Quoi !  personnel — Personne, 
dit-il." 

21.  Capitals.  The  principal  differences  between  French  and 
English  in  the  use  of  capital  letters  (Fr.  *  lettres  majuscules/ 
*  capitales ')  may  be  seen  from  the  following  examples  : 

Un  livre  canadien  ^crit  en  franijais  par  un  Canadien.  Toronto,  lundi, 
le  3  jauvier.    Je  lui  ai  dit  ce  que  je  pensais. 


EXERCISE    IN    PHONETIC    TRANSCRIPTION. 

[The  sign  (:)  in  unstressed  syllables  indicates  'half  long.'] 

Tu  aimeras  le  Seigneur  ton  Dieu  de  tout  ton  ccBur,  de  toute 
ty     eimra     1     sejioeir      to      dj0     d     tu       to    koeir,  da    tut 

ton  ame,  de  toute  ta  force,  et  de  toute  ta  pens^e;    et  ton 
ton   aim,     da      tut      ta    fors,      e      d      tut      ta     paise;       e      to 

prochain  comme  toi-meme ... 
projs  kom      twameim... 

Un  homme  descendait  de  Jerusalem  h  Jericho;    et  il  est 
c&n        om  desaide        d      seryzalem    a     3eriko ;        e    il     e 

tombd  parmi  des  brigands,  qui  I'ont  d^pouill^,  lis  Tont  charg^ 
to  I  be      parmi    de       briga,        ki    1   o        depuje,       i     1   5        |ar3e 

de  coups,  et  lis  sont  partis,  en  le  laissant  k  moiti^  mort.     Et 
d      ku,       e     i       so      parti,     a     1      leisa      a  rawatje  moir.        e 

par  hasard  un  pr^tre  descendait  par  ce  chemin-la,  et  en  le 
par     azasr      &    preitra      desaide        par    sa       Jme       la,    e      a      1 

voyant,  il  a  pass^  outre.      De  meme  aussi  un  Invite,  arrive 
vwaja^     il  a    parse     utr.  da    me:m     o!si      o6      levit,     ariive 

dans  cet  endroit,  il  est  venu,  et  en  le  voyant,  il  a  pass^  outre, 
da      st    aidrwa,    il    e      vny,     e     a     1    vwaja,    il  a  paise     utr. 

Mais  un  Samaritain,  qui  voyageait,  est  venu  la,  et  en  le  voyant, 
me     (56     samarite,        ki     vwajase,       e     vny    la,   e     a     1    vwaja, 

il  a  4t6  t^mu  de  piti^;    et  11  s'est  approche  pour  bander  ses 
il   a  ete    emy    d    pitje;      e    il    s  et       aproje        pur       baide      se 

blessures,  en  y  versant  de  I'huile  et  du  vin ;   puis  il  Fa  mis  sur 
blesysr,     an  i      versa     da  1    qil     e    dy    ve;      pi{i    i   1  a    mi    syr 

sa  propre  bete  pour  le  conduire  k  une  auberge,  et  il  a  pris  soin 
sa  propra    be  it    pur    la   koidqiir   a    yn      obers,       e    il  a    pri    sw? 

de  lui.      Et  le  lendemain  il  a  tir^  deux  deniers,  et  il  les  a 
d    Iqi.         e      1        laidme        il    a  tiire     dj^        danje,       e    i    lez  a 

donnas  k  I'aubergiste,  en  disant,  '  prends  soin  de  lui,  et  ce  que 
done     a  1     obersist,        a     diiza,  pro         sw?    d    Iqi,   e    s     ka 

tu  d^penseras  de  plus,  moi  je  te  le  rendrai  k  mon  retour.' 
ty      depasra       d   plys,  mwa  3    ta   1    raidre    a    mo     rtuir. 

— Reprinted  by  kind  permission  of  M.  Paul  Passy,  from  his  "Version 
populaire  de  I'lfevangile  de  Luc  en  transcription  phon^tique." 
12 


PART   I. 


LESSON  I. 

22.  Definite  Article.  1.  The  definite  article  has  the 
following  forms  in  the  singular: 

{Je  [la],  before  a  masculine  beginning  with  a  consonant, 
la  [la],  before  a  feminine  beginning  with  a  consonant. 
r   [1],  before  any  noun  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute. 

Le  p6re,  la  m6re.  The  father,  the  mother. 

L'enfant  (m.  or  f . ),  I'homme.  The  child,  the  man. 

2.  The  definite  article  must  be  repeated  before  each  noun 
to  which  it  refers  : 
L'oncle  at  la  tante.  The  uncle  and  (the)  aunt. 

23.  Gender.  1.  All  French  nouns  are  either  masculine 
or  feminine : 

Le  papier  (m.),  la  plume  (f.).  The  paper,  the  pen. 

2.  Names  of  male  beings  are  masculine,  and  names  of 
female  beings  feminine,  as  in  English. 

24.  Case.  French  nouns  have  no  case  endings.  The  direct 
object  (acpusative)  is  expressed  by  verb  +  noun  ;  the  indirect 
object  (dative)  by  the  preposition  k  +  noun ; .  the  possessive 
(genitive)  by  de  +  noun,  and  these  prepositions  must  be 
repeated  before  each  noun  to  which  they  refer : 

La  m6re  aime  Tenfant.  The  mother  loves  the  child. 

J'ai  la  plume  de  Robert.  I  have  Robert's  pen  (the  pen  of 

Robert). 
Je  donne  I'argent  k  Marie  et  k     I  give  the  money  to  Mary  and  (to) 
Jean.  John. 


14 


LESSON  I. 


[§25 


25.  Agreements.  Prench  has  the  following  agreements, 
and  they  are  usually  expressed  by  change  of  form :  (1)  Verb 
and  subject,  in  number  and  person  ,*  (2)  adjective  and  noun, 
in  gender  and  number  ;  (3)  pronoun  and  antecedent,  in  gender 
and  number. 

YOCABULAKY. 


avec  [avek],  with. 

crayon  [krejo],  m.,  pencil. 

encre  [aikr],  f.,  ink. 

est  [e],  is. 

et  [e],  and. 

livre  [li :  vr],  m. ,  book. 

montrez-moi  [matre  mwa],  show 


oil  ?  [u],  where  ? 

papier  [papje],  m.,  paper. 

plume  [plym],  f.,  pen. 

sur  [syr],  on,  upon. 

table  [tabl],  f.,  table. 

voici  [vwasi],  here  is,  here  are. 

voilk  [vwalaj,  there  is,  there  are. 


EXERCISE  I. 

A.  1.  Ou  est  le  livre?  2.  Voici  le  livre.  3.  Ou  est  la 
table  1  4.  Voila  la  table.  5.  Ou  est  le  papier  1  6.  Voici  le 
papier.  7.  Ou  est  la  plume  1  8.  Voici  la  plume.  9.  Ou  est 
I'encre?  10.  Voil^  I'encre  sur  la  table.  11.  Ou  est  le  crayon? 
12.  Voilk  le  crayon  avec  la  plume.  13.  Voici  le  livre  et  la 
plume  sur  la  table.  14.  Voila  le  papier  avec  I'encre  sur  la 
table.  15.  Montrez-moi  le  papier,  la  plume  et  I'encre.  16. 
Ou  est  le  crayon?  17.  Voici  le  crayon  et  la  plume.  18. 
Voil^  le  papier  et  I'encre. 

B.  (Oral  Exercise — questions  to  be  answered  in  French  by 
the  pupil.)  1.  Montrez-moi  la  table.  2.  Montrez-moi  le 
papier.  3.  Montrez-moi  la  plume.  4.  Montrez-moi  I'encre. 
5.  Ou  est  la  table?  6.  Ou  est  le  papier?  7.  Ou  est  la 
plume?  8.  Ou  est  I'encre?  9.  Montrez-moi  le  papier,  la 
plume  et  I'encre.     Etc.,  etc. 

C.  1.  Here  is  the  pen.  2.  There  is  the  ink.  3.  "Where  is 
the  paper  ?  4.  There  is  the  paper  with  the  pen.  5.  Here  is 
the  book.  6.  Show  me  the  paper.  7.  Here  is  the  paper  on 
the  table.  8.  Where  is  the  pen?  9.  The  pen  is  with  the  ink. 
10.  Show  me  the  paper  and  ink.  11.  The  paper  is  on  the 
table.     12.  The  ink  is  with  the  paper. 


§26] 


LESSON   II.  15 


LESSON  II. 


26.  Indefinite  Article.    It  has  the  following  forms,  which 
must  be  repeated  before  each  noun  to  which  they  refer : 

^       Jun  [oe],  before  any  masculine  noun. 
A    or     an  —   "j^^j^g  |-^jj-j^  before  any  feminine  noun. 

Un  livre  et  une  plume.  A  book  and  (a)  pen 

Un  homme,  une  ^cole.  A  man,  a  school. 

Vocabulary. 


Marie  [mari],  Mary, 
non  [no],  no. 
porta  [port],  f.,  door, 
qui  ?  [ki],  who  ?,  whom  ? 
tableau  [tablo],  m. ,  picture. 


aussi  [osi],  too,  also, 
chaise  [Je:z],  f.,  chair. 
derriere  [derje:r],  behind. 
deyant  [dava],  before,  in  front  of. 
fenetre  [fane:tr],  f.,  window. 
Jean  [3a],  John. 

j'ai  [3  e],  I  have  ;  il  a  [il  a],  he  has ;  elle  a  [el  a],  she  has ; 
vous  avez  [vuz  ave],  you  have. 

EXERCISE  II. 

A.  1.  Yoici  une  porte  et  aussi  une  fenetre.  2.  Montrez-moi 
la  porte.  3.  Montrez-moi  la  fenetre.  4.  Montrez-moi  une 
chaise  et  une  table.  5.  Voilk  une  chaise  devant  la  table.  6. 
Voici  une  plume  sur  la  table.  7.  Voil^  un  tableau  derriere  la 
porte.  8.  Qui  a  un  crayon  et  une  plume?  9.  Jean  a  un 
crayon  et  Marie  a  une  plume.  10.  Non,  elle  a  un  crayon  et  il 
a  une  plume.  11.  J'ai  un  crayon  et  vous  avez  un  livre.  12. 
Ou  est  Jean?  13.  Jean  est  derriere  la  table.  14.  Marie  est 
devant  la  fenetre.  15.  Marie  a  I'encre  et  elle  a  la  plume 
aussi.  IG.  Elle  a  le  papier  et  vous  avez  I'encre.  17.  Montrez- 
moi  I'encre  et  aussi  la  plume.  18.  Voici  I'encre  avec  la  plume 
sur  la  table. 

B.  (Oral.)  1.  Montrez-moi  une  porte.  2.  Montrez-moi  une 
fenetre.  3.  Montrez-moi  une  table  aussi.  4.  Oil  est  la  chaise? 
5.  Ou  est  la  table  ?  6.  Qui  a  la  plume  et  I'encre  ?  7.  Ou  est 
le  crayon?  8.  Montrez-moi  une  plume  9.  Montrez-moi  un 
tableau.  10.  Ou  est  le  tableau?  11.  Ou  est  Marie?  12. 
Oil  est  Jean  ?     Etc.,  etc. 


16  LESSON  III.  [§§27-29 

^  C.  1.  There  is  a  door  and  here  is  a  window.  2.  Show  me 
a  chair  and  a  picture.  3.  Here  is  a  chair  behind  the  door. 
4.  There  is  a  picture.  5.  "Who  has  a  pen  and  a  pencil  ?  6. 
John  has  a  pen  and  Mary  has  a  pencil.  7.  You  have  a  pencil. 
8.  No,  I  have  a  pen.  9.  Who  has  the  ink  ?  10.  Mary  has 
the  ink.  11.  She  has  the  ink.  12.  You  have  the  pen  and  a 
pencil.  13.  There  is  a  chair  in  front  of  the  window.  14. 
There  is  a  book  on  the  table.  15.  The  pen  is  with  the  book. 
16.  The  chair  is  behind  the  door.  17.  Where  is  the  picture? 
18.  The  picture  is  behind  the  door  also.  ^ 

LESSON  III. 

27.  Some  Possessives.  Observe  the  following,  and 
remember  that  possessive  adjectives  must  be  repeated  before 
each  noun  to  which  they  refer  (for  pronunciation,  see  §32)  • 

Mon  (m. )  livre  et  ma  (f. )  plume.  My  book  and  (my)  pen. 

Ton  (m. )  livre  et  ta  (f. )  plume.  Thy  book  and  (thy)  pen. 

Son  (ra. )  livre  et  sa  (f. )  plume.  His  or  her  book  and  pen. 

Voire  (m. )  livre  et  voire  (f. )  plume.  Your  book  and  (your)  pen. 

28.  Negation.  With  verbs,  *not'  or  'no'  =  ne  .  .  .  pas, 
with  the  verb  placed  between  them,  ne  becoming  n'  before  a 
vowel  (§19,  1): 

Je  n'ai  pas,  vous  n'avez  pas.  I  have  not,  you  have  not. 

29.  Interrogation.  In  questions,  the  personal  pronoun 
subject  comes  after  the  verb,  as  in  English,  and  is  joined  to  it 
by  a  hyphen,  or  by  -t-  if  the  verb  ends  in  a  vowel : 

Avez-voua.V ;  a-t-il? ;  est-elle  ici ?    Hav^  you ? ;  has  he ? ;  iaghe  here ? 


Vocabulary. 


autre  [otr],  other, 
boiie  [bwa:t],  f.,  box. 
cour  [kuir],  f.,  yard, 
dans  [da],  in,  into. 
fr^re  [freir],  m.,  brother. 
ici  [isi],  here. 

I'encre  de  voire  frfere,  your  brother's  ink. 


mais  [me],  but. 

ne. .  .pas  [na. .  .pa],  not,  no. 

oui  [wi],  yes. 

salle  [sal],  f.,  room  (large). 

scBur  [scEir],  f.,  sister. 


§30]  LESSON  III.  17 

EXERCISE  III. 

A.  1.  Avez-vous  voire  crayon  1  2.  Oui,  j'ai  mon  crayon,  et 
Jean  a  son  crayon.  3.  Ou  est  votre  crayon?  4.  Voici  mon 
crayon  dans  ma  boite.  5.  Ou  est  votre  f  rere  1  6.  II  est  dans 
la  cour  avec  ma  sceur.  7.  Ou  est  Marie?  8.  Elle  n'est  pas  ici. 
9.  Elle  est  dans  I'autre  salle.  10.  A-t-elle  la  boite  et  le 
papier?  11.  Elle  n'a  pas  le  papier,  mais  elle  a  la  boite. 
12.  Ou  est  Jean?  13.  A-t-iMe  papier  et  la  plume?  14.  II  a 
le  papier  mais  il  n'a  pas  la  plume.  15.  Montrez-moi  votre 
frere  et  votre  soeur.  16.  Voici  mon  frere,  mais  ma  soeur 
n'est  pas  ici.  17.  Qui  est  dans  la  salle?  18.  Votre  frere  est 
dans  la  salle.  19.  Qui  a  I'encre  de  mon  fr^re?  20.  Jean  a 
I'encre  de  votre  frere.  21.  Avez-vous  un  crayon?  22.  J'ai 
iin  crayon. 

B.  (Oral.)  1.  Ou  est  Jean?  2.  Est-il  ici?  3.  Ou  est 
Marie?     4.    Est-elle  ici?     5.    A-t-il  son   livre  et   sa   plume? 

6.  A-t-elle  son  papier  et  son  crayon?  7.  Avez-vous  votre 
livre?  8.  Avez-vous  le  livre  de  Marie?  9.  Avez-vous  un 
crayon  e  tune  plume?  10.  Ou  est  ma  plume?  11.  Ou  est  mon 
papier?  12.  Ou  est  votre  boite?  13.  Ou  est-elle?  14.  Mon- 
trez-moi une  autre  boite.  15.  Montrez-moi  votre  frere  et  votre 
soeur,     16.  Est-il  ici?     17.  Est-elle  ici?     Etc.,  etc. 

\^C.  1.  Has  he  the  paper?  2.  He  has  not  the  paper.  3. 
Where  is  my  pencil  ?  4.  Where  is  your  pencil  ?  5.  There  is 
my  pencil  in  the  box  on  the  table.     6.  Where  is  your  sister  ? 

7.  Is  she  in  the  other  room  ?  8.  No,  she  is  in  the  yard.  9. 
Where  is  your  brother  ?  10.  Is  he  here?  ^  11.  He  is  not  here. 
12.  He  is  in  the  yard  with  your  brother.  13.  Your  sister  has 
her  pen.  14.  I  have  her  pencil.  15.  Show  me  the  picture. 
16.  There  is  the  picture  behind  the  door.  17.  Where  is  the 
table?  >  18.  Where  is  it?  19.  The  table  is  in  the  room  in 
front  of  the  window,  v^' 

LESSON  IV. 

30.  Some  Pronoun  Objects.    *Him'  or  'it'  =  le  (m  ), 

and  'her'  or  *it'  =  la  (f),  both  becoming  1'  before  a  vowel  or 
h  mute  (§19,  1).     They  come  next  before  the  verb,  or  before 
voici  and  voilk : 
2 


18 


LESSON  IV. 


[§30 


Oil  est  la  plume  ?  Je  I'ai. 
Ou  est  le  livre  ?  Le  voici. 
Ou  est  Marie  ?    La  voila. 


Where  is  the  pen  ?    I  have  it. 
Where  is  the  book  ?    Here  it  is. 
Where  is  Mary  ?    There  she  is. 


NOTB.— Voici  and  Voil^  are  derived  from  vois  =  'see'  +  ici  =  'here'  and  vois 
=  'see'  +  1^  =  'there'  (literally,  'see  here,'  'see  there'),  and,  owing  to  their  verbal 
force,  govern  words  directly  like  transitive  verbs. 

Vocabulary. 


cahier  [kaje],  m.,  exercise-book. 
6cole  [ekol],  f.,  school. 
6glise  [egli:z],  f.,  church. 
616ve  [ele:v],  in.,  f.,  pupil. 
la  [la],  f.,  her,  it. 
le  [la],  m.,  him,  it. 


madame    [madam],    f.,    madam, 
Mrs.  (Miss. 

mademoiselle    [madmwazel] ,    f . , 
maison  [mez5],  f.,  house. 
monsieur  [masj^],  m.,  sir,  Mr. 
pardon  [pardo] ,  I  beg  your  pardon. 


EXERCISE  IV. 

A.  1.  IMontrez-moi  la  fenetre.  2.  La  voilk  3.  Ou  est  mon 
cahier  1  4.  Le  voil^  sur  la  table.  5.  Avez-vous  votre  plume, 
mademoiselle  ?  6.  Non,  monsieur,  je  ne  I'ai  pas.  7.  Marie  a 
I'encre.  8.  Non,  monsieur,  elle  ne  I'a  pas.  9.  •  A-t-il  mon 
crayon?  10.  II  ne  I'a  pas.  11.  Ou  est  ma  sceuf  ?  12.  La 
voila  dans  la  cour  derriere  I'ecole.  1 3.  J'ai  mon  crayon ; 
JVIarie  ne  I'a  pas.     1 4.  La  cour  est  derriere  I'ecole ;  la  voil^. 

15.  Yous  avez  Fencre.      16.  Pardon,  madame,  je  ne  Tai  pas. 

17.  IMontrez-moi  votre  maison,  18.  La  voila  derriere  I'eglise. 
19.  A-t-elle  sa  plume?  20.  Non,  monsieur,  elle  ne  I'a  pas. 
21.  La  voila  sur  la  chaise.  22.  N'avez-vous  pas  mon  cahier? 
23.  Non,  monsieur,  je  ne  I'ai  pas. 

£.  (Oral.)  1.  IVTontrez-moi  la  fenetre.  2.  Ou  est  votre 
cahier?  3.  Qui  a  ma  plume?  4.  Qui  a  mon  crayon?  5.  Avez- 
vous  I'encre?  6.  Qui  a  votre  cahier?  7.  JMontrez-moi  I'eglise? 
8.  Ou  est  le  papier  de  Jean  ?  9.  A-t-il  son  papier  ?  10.  Avez- 
vous  votre  encre?  11.  N'avez-vous  pas  le  papier  aussi? 
1 2.  A-t-elle  sa  boite  ?  13.  A-t-elle  son  papier  dans  sa  boite  ? 
14.  A-t-elle   sa  plume   aussi?     15.  Ou  est  votre  frere   Jean? 

16.  Ou  est  votre  sceur  IVEarie  ?     17.   Montrez-moi  votre  fr^re. 

18.  IMontrez-moi  votre  soeur.     Etc.,  etc. 

C.  1.  Who  has  my  pen  ?  2.  John  has  your  pen,  sir. 
3.  John,  have  you  my  exercise-book  ?     4.  No,  sir,  I  haven't 


§§31-32]  LESSON   V.  19 

it ;  here  it  is  on  the  table.  5.  Who  has  your  exercise-book  ? 
6.  Here  it  is,  sir.  7.  John,  where  is  your  pen  ?  8.  Another 
pupil  has  my  pen.  9.  The  yard  is  behind  the  school ;  there  it 
is.  10.  Mary,  your  pencil  is  on  the  chair.  11.  I  beg  your 
pardon ;  I  have  it  here.  12.  Have  you  your  ink,  too  ? 
13.  Yes,  sir,  I  have  it.  14.  Mary  has  her  book,  pen  and 
exercise-book.  15.  Where  is  Mr.  B.  ?  16.  Here  he  is. 
17.  He  is  here.  18.  Where  is  Miss  B.  ?  19.  She  is  here, 
too.     20.  There  she  is  with  her  brother. 

LESSON  V. 

31.  Plural  Forms.     1.  The  plural  of  a  noun  or  an  adjec- 
tive is  regularly  formed  by  adding  -s  to  the  singular : 

Le  grand  roi,  la  grande  reine.  The  great  king,  the  great  queen. 

Les  grands  rois,  les  grandes  relnes.      The  great  kings,  the  great  queengu. 

2.  The  plural  of  the  definite  article  le,  la,  1*  is  les : 
Les  [le]  livres,  les  [lez]  enfants.  The  books,  the  children. 

3.  The  plural  of  the  personal  pronoun  le,  la,  1'  is  also  les  I 
Je  les  ai.  I  have  them  (books,  pens,  etc. ). 

32.  The  Possessive  Adjective.    1.  The  following  are 
its  forms  in  full  (for  agreement  and  repetition,  see  §  27) : 

Masculine.  Feminine.  Plural. 

men    [m5]  ma     [ma]  »  mes  [me],ja^ 

ton     [to]  ta       [ta]     '  '  tes     [te],  tliy,  your. 

son     [so]  sa       [sa]  '  ses    [se],  his^Jier,  its. 

notre  [notr]  notre  [notr]  nos    [no],  ouTj. 

votre  [votr]  votre  [votr]  vos    [vo],  youn 

leur    [loeir]  leur    [loeir]  leurs  [Iceir],  thgir^ 

2.  The  forms  mon,  ton,  SOn,  are  used  instead  of  ma,  ta,  sa 
before  feminines  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute : 

Mon  [mon]  amie  (f. ).  My  friend. 

Son  [son]  histoire  (f.).  His  story. 

Son  [son]  autre  plume  (f.).  His  other  pen. 

3.  Since  son  (sa,  ses)  means  *his,'  'her,'  or  *its,*  it  can 
only  be  known  from  the  context  which  is  meant* 


20  LESSON  V.  [§32 


Vocabulary. 


affaires  [afsir],  f.  pi.,  things, 
aujourd'hui  [o3urdiii],  to-day. 
bon  [bo],  good, 
canif  [kanif],  m.,  penknife, 
^l^ve  [eleiv],  m.  or  f.,  pupil. 

ils  ont  [ilz  o],  they  have,    ils  sont  [11  so],  they  are. 


porte-plume  [portplym],  m.,  pen- 
holder. 
regie  [re:gl],  f.,  ruler, 
sous  [su],  under. 


EXERCISE  V. 

A.  1.  Mes  livres  ne  sont  pas  sur  la  table ;  qui  les  a  ?  2.  Les 
voila  sur  une  chaise.  3.  Qui  a  nos  bons  crayons?  4.  Les 
voila  dans  la  boite  de  Marie.  ^  Ou  sont  vos  plumes  1  6.  Voici 
nos  plumes.  7.  Ou  sont  nos  affaires?  8.  Voici  vos  crayons 
€t  vos  plumes  sur  la  table.  9.  Leurs  plumes  et  les  plumes  de 
leur  soeur  ne  sont  pas  ici.  10.  Pardon,  monsieur,  les  voici 
sous  la  table.     11.  Les  eleves  n'ont  pas  leurs  livres  aujourd^hui. 

12.  JMontrez-moi  la  regie  de  I'dleve.  13.  La  voici  dans  sa 
boite.  14.  Leurs  canif s  sont  bons.  15.  ISTos  canifs  sont  bons 
aussi.  16.  Vos  porte-plumes  ne  sont  pas  bons.  17.  Ou  est 
mon  encre?  18.  La  voila  avec  I'encre  de  ma  soeur.  19.  Ou 
est  mon  autre  plume  ?     20.  Elle  est  dans  ma  boite. 

B.  (Oral.)  1.  Ou  sont  les  affaires  de  mon  frere?  2.  Quia 
le  canif  de  ma  soeur  ?  3.  IVIontrez-moi  votre  regie.  4.  Ou  est 
la  plume  de  Marie?  6.  Ou  sont  nos  livres  aujourd'hui? 
6.  Avez-vous  ma  boite  ?  7.  Qui  est  dans  la  salle  ?  8.  Qui  est 
avec  Jean  dans  la  cour  ?  9.  Ou  est  la  cour?  10.  Ou  est 
Marie?  11.  N'est-eile  pas  ici?  12.  Montrez-moi  vos  bons 
crayons.  13.  Avez-vous  mon  encre?  14.  Qui  a  mon  autre 
plume?     Etc.,  etc. 

C.  1.  Where  are  your  books  to-day  ?  2.  They  are  here. 
3.  There  they  are  on  the  table.  4.  Where  are  your  brother's 
things?  5.  There  is  his  pen-holder  and  his  ruler.  6.  Have 
you  my  ink  and  my  other  pen?  7.  Where  is  your  sister's 
ruler?  8.  Her  ruler  is  not  here  to-day.  9.  There  is  her  pen- 
knife on  the  table.  10.  Where  is  Mary's  book?  11.  Her 
brother  has  her  book.      12.   And  she  has  her  brother's  book. 

13.  John's  ink  is  on  the  table.  14.  Their  books  are  not  here. 
15.  Have  you  not  my  pens?     16.  No,  your  pens  are  in  the 


§§33-36]                        LESSON  VI.  21 

box.      17.   Where  are  John's  and  Mary's  books'?     18.  Here 

they  are  on  the  table.      19.  Where  is  my  sister's  ruler?  20.  I 
haven't  it ;  there  it  is  on  the  table. 


LESSON    VI.  ^ 

33.  Present  Indicative  of  auoir,  *  to  have.* 

1.  Affirmative.  2.  Negative. 

I  have,  etc.  I  have  not,  etc. 

j'  ai  [3  e].  "^^  je  n*ai  pas  [ja  n  e  pa].     ^ 

tuas  [ty  a].  '                     tu  n'as  pas  [ty  n  a  pa]. 

II  a        _  [il  a].  -^ -■'                   il  n'a  pas  [il  n  a  pa], 
nous  avons  [nuz  avo].  ■     ,i,  nous  n'avons  pas  [nu  n  avo  pa], 
vous  avez  [vuz  ave].  .^  '\\^^^^  n'avez  pas  [vu  n  ave  pa]. 

lis  ont         [ilz  5].      ^;  "  A^^tu^.   ils  n'ont  pas        [il  n  0  pa]. 

34.  Pronouns  in  Address.  '  You '  is  regularly  vous ; 
the  form  tu  =  '  thou '  or  *  you  '  is  used  in  familiar  address : 

Avez- vous  ma  plume,  monsieur  ?      Have  you  my  pen,  sir  ? 
As-tu  ta  plume,  mon  enfant  ?  Have  you  your  pen,  my  child  ? 

N.B. — Translate  'you'  by  vous  in  the  exercises,  unless  the  use  of  tu 
is  required  by  the  context. 

35.  Contractions.  De  +  le  and  de  +  les  are  always 
contracted  into  du  and  des ;  the  remaining  forms  are  not 
contracted,  thus,  de  la,  de  1'  in  full : 

La  plume  du  [dy]  fr^re.  The  brother's  pen. 

Les  plumes  des  [de]  sceurs.  The  sisters'  pens. 

But :  La  plume  de  I'^l^ve,  etc. 

36.  The  Partitive  *Noun  and  Pronoun.     1.  *Some'  or 

*  any,'  whether  expressed  or  implied  before  a  noun  in  English, 
is  regularly  expressed  in  French  by  de  +  the  definite  article  : 

J'ai  de  I'encre.  I  have  (some)  ink  (lit.,  *of  the  ink'). 

A-t-il  des  fr^res  ?  Has  he  (any)  brothers  ? 

2.  In  a  general  negation  the  partitive  is  expressed  by  de 
alone: 


22  LESSON  VI.  [§36 

H  n'a  pas  de  pain.  He  has  no  bread. 

II  n'a  pas  d'amis.  He  has  no  friends. 

3.  *  Some '  or  *  any  *  as  a  pronoun  =  en,  which  must  be  ex- 
pressed in  French,  even  when  omitted  in  English  (cf.  §  80) : 

A-t-il  de  I'encre  ? — II  en  a.  Has  he  (any)  ink  ? — He  has  (some). 

A-t-il  une  plume  ? — II  en  a  une.       Has  he  a  pen  ? — He  has  one. 


Vocabulary. 
ami  [ami],  m. ,  friend, 
deux  [d0],  two. 
encrier  [akrie],  m.,  inkstand, 
enfant  [afa],  m.  or  f.,  child,  boy, 
girl. 

il  n'en  a  pas,  he  has  not,  he  has  not  any,  he  has  none. 


fils  [fis],  m.,  son. 

Ik  [la],  there. 

un,  une  [ce,  yn],  one. 


EXERCISE  VI.  r 

A.  Continue  the  following  throughout  the  singular  and 
plural :  1.  J'ai  des  plumes,  tu  as  des  plumes,  etc.  2.  Je  n'ai 
pas  de  plumes,  etc.  3.  J'ai  des  amis,  etc.  4.  Je  n'ai,  pas 
d'amis,  etc.  5.  J'ai  de  I'encre,  etc.  6.  Je  n'ai  pas  d'enere, 
etc.     7.  J'en  ai,  etc.     8.  Je  n'en  ai  pas,  etc. 

B.  1.  Avez-vous  des  plumes  et  des  crayons  ?  2.  Je  n'ai  pas 
de  plumes,  mais  j'ai  des  crayons.  3.  Mon  frere  a  un  canif  et 
ma  soeur  en  a  deux.  4.  Ou  est  I'encre  ?  5.  La  voila  dans 
I'encrier  sur  la  table.  6.  Avez-vous  (ijt papier?  7.  Je  n'en  ai 
pas.  8.  Jean  est  la  dans  la  salle.  .9.  A-t-il  de  I'encre? 
10.  Non,  monsieur,  ii  n'a  pas  d'enere.  11.  A-t-il  des  livres? 
12.  Non,  monsieur,  il  n'en  a  pas.  13.  As-tu  du  papier,  mon 
fils?  14.  Je  n'en  ai  pas.  15.  Tu  as  de  I'encre  et  des  plumes, 
mon  enfant.  16.  Pardon,  monsieur,  je  n'en  ai  pas.  17.  Ou 
sont  les  livres  des  eleves  ?  18.  Les  voila  sur  la  table.  19.  Mes 
soeurs  n'ont  pas  de  papier,  mais  elles  ont  de  I'encre  et  des 
plumes.  20.  Ou  est  la  regie  du  frere  de  Jean?  21.  Je  I'ai. 
22.  Nous  avons  des  livres  et  des  plumes.  23.  En  avez-vous? 
24.  Nous  n'en  avons  pas. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Avez-vous  un  cahier  ?  2.  Ou  est  votre  cahier  ? 
3.  Ou  est  le  cahier  de  IVIarie  ?  4.  A-t-elle  des  crayons  aussi  ? 
6.  Qui  a  de  I'encre  ?  6.  Ou  est  son  encre  ?  7.  Ou  sont  vos 
frferes  et  vos  soeurs?     8.  Avez-vous  des  crayons?     9.  Avons- 


37-38]  LESSON  viL  23 

nous  du  papier  et  des  plumes  ?  10.  Avez-voua  des  amis  ?  11. 
Ou  sont-ils?  12.  Qui  n'a  pas  d'amis?  13.  As-tu  du  papier, 
mon  enfant?  14.  Qui  a  ton  cahier,  Marie?  15.  As-tu  la  regie 
de  ta  soeur  1     Etc.,  etc. 

J).  1.  Where  is  your  brother's  book  1  2.  Here  it  is  with 
our  books.  3.  Have  you  any  ink  ?  4.  I  have  some.  5.  Show 
me  your  ruler.  \  6. 'I  haven't  any,  but  my  sister  has  one. 
7.  Have  you  a  pen-holder?  8.  Yes,  sir,  I  have  one,  and  my 
brother  has  two.  ^  Show  me  your  pencils.  10.  I  haven't 
any,  but  my  friend  has  some.  11.  We,  have  pens.  12.  You 
have  ink.  13.  They  have  no  pens.  \  14.  He  has  no  ink. 
15.  His  brother's  friend  has  no  books.  16.  Where  are  their 
books?  17.  There  are  some  books  on  the  table.  1^  Here 
are  our  books  on  the  chair.  19.  She  has  brothers  and  sisters. 
20.  Where  are  they?  21.  They  are  in  the  yard,  i  22.  Where 
are  the  pupils'  things?  23. ^ They  are  in  the  other  j^pom. 
24.  -Where  is  your  ruler,  my  boy  ?  25.  Here  it  is.-^  26.  Have 
you  any  ink,  my  son  ?  27.  I  haven't  any.  ^ 
C  <> 

^  .^  LESSON  VII. 

37.        Present  Indicative  of  avoir  (continued). 


1.  Interrogative. 

2.  Negative  Interrogative. 

Have  I  ?  etc. 

Have  I  not  ?  etc. 

ai-je?               [eiil 

n'ai-je  pas  ?                [n  e:  3  pa]. 

as-tu  ?               [a  ty]. 

n'as-tu  pas  ?              [n  a  ty  pa]. 

a-t-il  ?              [a  t  il]. 

n'a-t-il  pas  ?               [n  a  t  il  pa]. 

avons-nous  ?    [av5  nu]. 

n'avons-nous  pas  ?    [n  avo  nu  pa]. 

avez-vous  ?       [ave  vuj. 

n'avez-vous  pas  ?       [n  ave  vu  pa]. 

ont-ils  ?            [5t  il]. 

n'ont-ils  pas  ?             [n  ot  il  pa]. 

38.  Interrogation.      1 .   When    the  subject  of    an   inter- 
rogative sentence  is  a  noun,   the  word  order  is   noun- verb- 
pronoun  : 
L'homme  est-il  Ik  ?  Is  the  man  there  ? 

2.  This  form  of  question  may  be  combined  with  an  inter- 
rogative word  : 

Male  Jean  oh  est-il  ?  But  where  is  John  ? 

Combien  de  plumes  Jean  a-t-il  ?         How  many  pens  has  John  ? 


24  LESSON  VII.  [§38 

3.   'What?*  (as  direct  object  or  predicate  of  a  verb)  =  qtie? 
See  also  §19,  1  : 
Qu'avez-vous  Ik  ?  What  have  you  there  ? 


Vocabulary. 


chez  moi  [je  mwa],  at  home, 
classe  [kla  !s],  f.,  class,  class-room. 
combien    de  ?    [kobje    da],    how 

many  ? 
ensemble  [asaibl],  together, 
maintenant  [metna],  now. 
maitre[me:  tr],  m.,  master,  teacher. 


ou  [u],  or. 

poche  [pDJ],  f. ,  pocket. 

quatre  [katr],  four. 

sac  [sak],  m.,  bag,  satchel. 

salle  de  classe  [sal  da  kla  is],  f., 

class-room. 
trois  [trwa],  three. 


EXERCISE   VII. 

A.  Continue  the  following:  1.  Ai-je  un  canif?,  as-tu  un 
canif?,  etc.  2.  Ai-je  des  crayons  dans  une  boite?,  as-tu  des 
crayons  dans  une  boite  ?,  etc.     3.  N'ai-je  pas  un  bon  ami  ?,  etc. 

'^  B.  1 .  Avez-vous  votre  crayon  dans  votre  boite  ?  2.  Non, 
monsieur,  je  I'ai  dans  mon  sac.  3.  Combien  de  livres  avez< 
vous?  4.  J'en  ai  trois  ou  quatre  dans  mon  sac.  5.  N'avez- 
vous  pas  un  canif  dans  votre  poche?  6.  Non,  monsieur,  je 
n'en  ai  pas  dans  ma  poche,  mais  j'en  ai  un  chez  moi.  7.  Ou 
est  votre  frere  maintenant?  8.  II  est  dans  la  cour  avec  les 
autres  enfants.  9.  Ou  sont  Marie  et  sa  soeur?  10.  Les  voil^ 
ensemble  dans  la  salle  de  classe.  11.  Jean  n'a-t-il  pas  mon 
porte-plume  et  mes  plumes  dans  son  sac  ?  12.  Non,  monsieur, 
il  les  a  dans  sa  poche.  13.  Ou  sont  le  maitre  et  les  Aleves 
maintenant?  14.  lis  sont  dans  la  salle  de  classe.  15.  Qu'as- 
tu  dans  ton  sac,  mon  enfant?  16.  J'ai  deux  livres  et  quatre 
plumes  dans  mon  sac.  17.  Ou  sont  les  porte-plumes  ?  18. 
En  voila  un  sur  la  table. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Ou  est  le  sac  de  Jean?'  2.  Montrez-moi  votre 
papier.  3.  Jean,  ou  est  ton  canif?  4.  N'as-tu  pas  un  canif 
et  un  porte-plume  ?  5.  Ou  sont  les  enfants  ?  6.  Qu'avez-vous 
dans  votre  poche  ?  7.  Combien  de  f reres  avez-vous  ?  8.  Votre 
frere  combien  de  plumes  a-t-il?  9.  Qu'a-t-il  dans  son  sac? 
10.  Ou  sont  mes  affaires?  11.  Qui  est  dans  la  salle  de  classe 
maintenant?  12.  Le  maitre  ou  est-il?  13.  Et  les  Aleves 
ou   sont-ils?      14.    Combien   de  plumes   as-tu,    mon   enfant? 


§39] 


LESSON   VIII. 


25 


15.  Et  Marie,  combien  de  plumes  a-t-elle  ?  16.  Les  ^l^ves  sont- 
ils  dans  la  salle  ?  17.  Les  dl^ves  ont-ils  leurs  affaires  dans  leurs 
sacs  ?  18.  Avez-vous  mes  bons  crayons  ?  19.  Qui  a  mes  bons 
crayons  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  Where  are  our  bags  ?  2.  There  they  are  behind  the 
door.  3.  Wiiat  have  you  in  your  pocket  ?  4.  I  liave  a 
knife  and  a  pencil  in  my  pocket,  h^  Have  you  pens  and 
pencils  ?  6^  Yes,  sir,  I  have  two  pens  and  three  pencils. 
%.  Where  are  John  and  his  brother  ?  8.  They  are  with  .the 
other  boys  in  the  class-room.  "^  9.  Sliow  me  your  books  and 
pens.  10.  I  haven't  any.  (  11.  Jolm  is  in  the  other  room  with 
his  brother.  1,2^ How  many  pojicils  have  they.''  13.  They 
have  four..  1^.  vVliere  are  your  things?  15.  Here  they  are 
in  my  bag.  16.  Have  we  any  pens  ?  17.  Yes,  sir,  here  t> 
are  some  in  tITe  box.  18.  Where  are  John  and  Robert  ? 
19.  There  they  are  together  in  the  class-room.  20.  How 
many  knives  have  you  ?i  21.  I  have  one  and  my  brother  has 
two.  22.  Have  you  any  paper  ?  23.  We  haven't  any,  but 
the  master  has  some.     24.  Here  is  his  paper. 


39.  Present 

1.  AflSrmative. 
I  am,  etc. 

je  suis        [sa  snij. 

tu  68  [ty  e]. 

il  est  [il  e]. 

nous  somraes  [nu  som]. 
vous  etes        [vuz  e:t]. 

lis  sont       [il  so]. 

3.  Interrogative. 
Am  I  ?  etc. 
suis-je?  [sqii  3]. 

es-tu  ?  [e  ty]. 

est-il  ?  [et  il], 

sommes-nous  ?  [som  nu]. 
^tes-vous  ?         [e :  t  vu]. 
8ont-ils !  [sot  il]. 


LESSON    VIII. 
Indicative  of  4tre,  *  to  be.' 
2.  Negative. 


I  am 
je  ne  suis  pas 
tu  n'es  pas 
il  n'est  pas 
nous  ne  sommes 
vous  n'etes  pas 
lis  ne  sont  pas 

4.  Negative 
Ami 
ne  suis-je  pas  ? 
n'es-tu  pas  ? 
n'est-il  pas  ? 
ne  sommes-nous 
n'etes- vous  pas  ? 
ne  8ont-ils  pas  ? 


not,  etc. 

[39  n9  siji  pa]. 

[tyn  epa]. 

[il  n  e  pa], 
pas  [nu  na  som  pa]. 

[vu  n  e:t  pa]. 

[il  na  s5  pa]. 

Interrogative, 
not?  etc. 

[no  sqi:  3  pa]. 

[n  e  ty  pa]. 

[n  et  il  pa], 
pas  ?  [na  som  nu  pa} 

[n  e:t  vu  pa]. 

[n9  sot  il  pa]. 


26  LESSON  VIII.  [§40 

40.  Observe  that  il  and  elle  mean  not  only  *  he '  and  *  she,' 
but  also  'it/  since  there  are  but  two  genders  of  nouns  in 
French : 

Ou  est  la  plume  ?    Elle  est  ici.  Where  is  the  x)en  ?    It  is  here. 

Oh  sont  les  plumes  ?    Elles  sont  ici.     Where  are  the  pens  ?     They  are 

here. 


malade  [malad],  ill,  sick. 

nous  [nu],  us. 

tableau  noir    [tablo  nwair],  m., 

black-board. 
k  present  [a  preza],  at  present. 


Vocabulary. 
k  [a],  to,  at,  in. 
commence  [komais],  begins, 
difficile  [difisil],  difficult. 
facile  [fasil],  easy. 
ie^on  [laso],  f.,  lesson. 

EXERCISE  VIII. 

A.  Continue  the  following:  1.  Je  suis  k  I'dcole,  tu  es,  etc. 
2.  Je  suis  malade  aujourd'hui,  tu  es,  etc.  3.  Je  ne  suis  pas 
malade  aujourd'hui,  etc.  4.  Suis-je  malade?,  etc.  5.  Ne 
suis-je  pas  malade  1,  etc. 

r-=-J5.  1.  Nous  sommes  k  I'ecole  aujourd'hui,  et  nos  freres  sont 
avec  nous.  2.  Nous  sommes  a  present  avec  les  autres  Aleves 
dans  la  salle  de  classe,  et  le  maitre  est  ici  aussi.  3.  Nous 
avons  nos  affaires.  4.  Nos  canifs  sont  dans  nos  poches.  5. 
Nos  plumes  et  nos  porte-plumes  sont  dans  nos  boites.  6.  Nos 
livres  sont  dans  nos  sacs.  7.  L'encre  est  dans  les  encriers.  8. 
La  le9on  est  sur  le  tableau  noir.  9.  Nous  avons  des  cahiers, 
et  les  autres  Aleves  en  ont  aussi.      10.  La  legon  commence. 

11.  La  le9on  n'est  pas  difficile.     12.  Elle  est  facile. 

(Js::^  C  (Oral.)  1.  Ou  etes-vous  k  present?  2.  Ou  suis-je  k 
prdsenf?  3.  Ou  sommes-nous?  4.  Qui  est  avec  nous?  5.  Ou 
sont  les  affaires  des  Aleves  ?  6.  Le  maitre  n'est-il  pas  avec  les 
Aleves?  7.  Ou  sont  les  chaises  et  les  tables?  8.  N'avez-vous 
pas  vos  livres  ?  9.  Montrez-moi  les  regies  et  les  porte-plumes. 
10.    Qui  est  devant  le  tableau  noir?     11.    Ou  est  la  legon  ? 

12.  Avez-vous  des  cahiers?  13.  La  le9on  commence-t-elle ? 
14.  Qui  commence  la  le9on?  15.  Ta  le^on  est-elle  facile? 
16.  Tes  le90ns  sont-elles  difficiles,  mon  enfant?  Etc.,  etc, 
<;;D.  1.  Our  brothers  are  not  in  the  class-room.  2.  They  are 
in  the  yard  with  the  other  pupils.  3.  The  lesson  is  not  on 
the  black-board.     4.  Are  you  not  in  our  class  ?     5.  Yes,  I  am 


\/ 


§§41-42]  LESSON  IX.  27 

in  your  class.  6.  Have  you  your  things  in  your  bags  1  7. 
No,  our  things  are  on  the  table.  8.  Have  you  exercise-books'? 
9.  Yes,  and  our  brothers  have  some  too.  10.  Have  you  no 
paper?  11.  No,  sir,  I  have  none.  12.  Are  the  pencils  herel 
13.  Yes,  here  they  are  on  the  table.  14.  What  have  you  in 
your  bags?  15.  We  have  paper,  exercise- books  and  pen- 
holders. 16._Have  you  no  ink?  17.  Yes,  I  have  some.  18. 
How  many~books  have  you?  19.  I  have  four  in  my  bag,  and 
three  at  home.  20.  The  lessonls  easy  to-day  ;  it  is  easy.  21. 
John's  lessons  are  diificult.  22.  Are  your  lessons  difficult, 
John  ?     23.  Yes,  sir,  they  are  difficult. 

LESSON   IX. 

41.  The   Regular  Conjugations.     French  verbs  are 

conveniently  divided,  according  to  the  infinitive  endings  -er, 
-ir,  -re,  into  three  conjugations  : 

I.  II.  III. 

Donner  [done],  to  give.    Finir  [fini  :r],  to  finish.    Vendre  [va  :dr],  to  sell. 
Like  these  are  conjugated  all  regular  verbs  with  corres- 
ponding infinitive  endings. 

42.  Present  Indicative  of  donner,  *to  give.' 
1.  Affirmative.  2.  Negative. 

I  give,  am  giving,  etc.  I  do  not  give,  am  not  giving,  etc. 

je  donn  e       [ja  don].  ^  <^LyiyV^  je  ne  donn  e  pas      [3a  no  don  pa], 
tu  donn  es     [ty  don].  i/^^uLO    tu  ne  donn  es  pas    [ty  no  don  pa]. 
'    il  donn  e       [il  don].    l^JL  ■  -^^  il  ne  donn  e  pas      [il  no  don  pa], 
nous  donn  ens  [nil  donS].    t^^  ^  nous  ne  donn  ons  pas  [nu  no  dono  pa], 
vous  donn  ez     [vu  done].  Jiu/-    vous  ne  donn  ez  pas    [vu  no  done  pa], 
ils  donn  ent  [il  don].       *■  '^  v;      lis  ne  donn  ent  pas  [il  no  don  pa]. 

3.  Interrogative.  4.  Negative  Interrogative. 

Am  I  giving  ?,  do  I  give  ?,  etc.  Am  I  not  giving  ?,  do  I  not  give  ?,  etc. 

donne-je?  [doners].  ne  donn^-je  pas  ?  [no  done:  3  pa], 

donnes-tu?  [don  ty].  ne  donnes-tu  pas  ?        [no  don  ty  pa], 

doime-t-il?  [don  t  il].  ne  donne-t-il  pas  ?        [no  don  t  il  pa], 

donnons-nous  ?  [dono  nu].  ne  donnons-nouspas?  [no  dono  nu  pa], 

donnez-vous  ?     [done  vu].  ne  donnez-vous  pas  ?    [no  done  vu  pa], 

donnent-ils  ?       [dont  il].  ne  donnent-ils  pas  ?     [no  dont  il  pa]. 


28  LESSON  IX.  [§§43-44 

43.  Interrogation.    By  prefixing  the  words  est-ce  que  ?, 

literally,   'is  it  that?',  any  statement  may  be  turned  into  a 
question  : 

Vous  avez  mon  canif.  You  have  my  penknife. 

Est-ce  que  vous  avez  mon  canif  ?     Have  you  my  penknife  ? 

Note.— The  first  singular  interrogative  form  (e.g.,  donne-je?  suis-je?  etc.)  la 
avoided  in  most  verbs,  and  rmmt  be  avoided  in  some,  by  using  'est-ce  que?'  In  the 
exercises,  use  'est-ce  que?'  everywhere  in  interrogations  with  the  first  singular. 

44.  The  Demonstrative  Adjective.  1.  The  following 
are  its  forms,  and  they  must  be  repeated  before  each  noun  to 
which  they  refer : 

{ce  [so],  before  a  masculine  beginning  with  a  consonant. 
cet  [set],  before  a  m.  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute. 
cette  [set],  before  any  feminine. 
'These,'  *  those  '  =  ces  [se],  before  any  plural. 

2.  To  distinguish  '  this '  from  *  that,'  or  for  emphasis,  add 
-Ci  (  =  ici)  and  -la  respectively  to  the  noun  : 

Ce  livre,  cet  homme,  cette  amie.     This  (or  that)  book,  man,  friend. 
Ce  crayon-ci  et  ces  plumes-la.  This  pencil  and  those  pens. 

Vocabulary. 


aller  [ale],  to  go. 
arriver  [arive],  to  arrive, 
chemin  [jams],  m.,  road,  way. 
commencer  [komase],  to  begin. 
continue^  [kotinqe],  to  continue. 
6couter  [ekute],  to  listen  to,  hear. 
en  [a],  in,  on. 

entrfcr  [atre]dans,  to  enter,  go  into, 
histoire  [istwair],  f.,  story. 


marcher  [marje],  to  march,  walk, 
pour  [pur],  for,  in  order  to. 
racontsr  [rakote],  to  relate,  tell, 
ramasser  [ramase],  to  pick  up, 
^        collect. 

rencontrer  [rakotre],  to  meet. 
Robert  [robeir],  Robert, 
route  [rut],  f.,  way. 
me  [ry],  f.,  street. 


nous  void  [nu  vwasi],  here  we  are.     en  route  [a  rut],  on  the  way. 

EXERCISE   IX. 

A.  Je  ramasse  mes  affaires  pour  aller  a  I'ecole.  Yoici  mes 
livres,  mon  cahier,  mes  plumes,  ma  regie,  mon  crayon.  Les 
voil^  maintenant  dans  mon  sac.     Main  tenant  je  suis  en  route 


§44] 


LESSON   IX.  29 


pour  I'dcole.  Dans  la  rue  je  rencontre  mon  ami  Robert. 
Nous  marchons  ensemble.  Nous  continuons  notre  chemin. 
II  raconte  une  histoire.  Nous  arrivons  a  la  porte  de  I'^cole. 
Nous  entrons  dans  I'^cole.  Nous  voici  dans  la  classe.  Les 
autres  eleves  arrivent  aussi,  et  le  maitre  commence  les  le9ons. 
Ce  maitre  doiine  des  le9ons  faciles.  Cette  leQon  n'est  pas 
difficile.     Ces  dleves-ci  ecoutent.     Ces  ^l^ves-la  n'ecoutent  pas. 

B.  Continue  the  following :  1.  Je  donne  du  papier  k  Thieve, 
etc.  2.  Est-ce  que  j 'arrive  k  Tecole?,  etc.  3.  Je  ne  ramasse 
pas  mes  affaires,  tu  ne  ramasses  pas  tes  affaires,  etc.  4.  Est-ce 
que  je  ne  donne  pas  un  canif  k  Robert?,  etc. 

X  C.  (Oral.)  1.  Oil  allons-nous  ?  2.  Qui  ramasse  nos  affaires  ? 
3.  Ou  sont  nos  cahiers  1  4.  Avez-vous  vos  livres  1  5.  Est-ce 
que  vous  avez  votre  crayon  aussi  1  6.  Ou  sorames-nous  mainte- 
nant  ?  7.  Qui  est  en  route  pour  I'ecole  %  8.  Qui  rencontrons- 
nous?  9.  Ou  est-ce  que  nous  le  rencontrons?  10.  Qui  est 
Robert?  11.  Est-ce  que  Robert  est  en  route  pour  I'^cole 
aussi?  12.  Qui  raconte  une  histoire  1  13.  Qui  arrive  a  la 
porte  de  T^cole?  14.  Ou  entrons-nous  ?  15.  Ou  sommes- 
nous  maintenant?  16.  Qui  est  dans  la  classe?  17.  Est-ce 
que  les  autres  ^l^ves  sont  dans  la  classe  aussi?  18.  Qui 
commence  les  lemons?  19.  Ce  maitre  donne-t-il  des  le9ons 
faciles?  20.  Ces  le9ons  sont-elles  faciles?  21.  Cet  ^l^ve-la 
^coute-t-il?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  Where  are  you  going?  2.  Are  you  going  to  school? 
3.  We  are  going  to  school.  4.  I  am  collecting  my  things  to 
go  to  school.  ^5.  My  things  are  in  my  bag  now.  \  6.  We  meet 
our  friends  in  the  street.  7.  We  continue  our  way.—  8.  We 
arrive  at  the  door  of  the  school.  /  9.  The  other  pupils  arrive 
also.  VI 0.  They  enter  the  school.  -11.  We  enter  the  school 
too.  H^  The  master  and  the  pupils  are  in  the  class-room. 
13.  He  begins  the  lesson.  14.  Is  he  beginning  the  lesson 
now?  15.  He  continues  the  lesson.  16.  This  lesson  is  not 
easy.  17.  It  is  difficult.  18.  i These  lessons  are  difficult. 
19.  The  master  tells  a  story.  20.  The  pupils  listen.  21.  Are 
you  listening  ?  22.  Yes,  sir,  I  am  listening  now.  23.  Robert, 
are  you  listening?  24.  Yes,  sir.  25.  Are  those  pupils 
listening  ? 


80  LESSON  X.  [§§45-47 

LESSON  X. 

45.  Plural  Forms.  Note  the  following  exceptions  to  the 
rule  (§31)  that  the  plural  of  nouns  and  adjectives  is  formed 
by  adding  -s  to  the  singular  : 

1.  Nouns  in  -s,  -x,  -z,  and  adjectives  in  -s,  -x,  remain  unchanged  in 
the  plural,  e.g  ,  bras,  bras,  arm(s) ;  voix,  voix,  voice(s) ;  nez,  nez, 
nose(s)  ;  bas,  bas,  low  ;  vieux,  vieux,  old. 

2.  Nouns  and  adjectives  in  -au,  nouns  in  -eu,  and  a  few  nouns  in  -ou, 
add  -X  instead  of  -s,  e.g.,  couteau,  couteaux,  knife,  knives;  beau, 
beaux,  fine  ;  jeu,  jeux,  game(s) ;  bijou,  bijoux,  jewel(s) ;  caillou, 
cailloux,  pebble(s),  and  a  few  rarer  nouns  in  -ou. 

3.  Nouns,  and  the  commoner  adjectives,  in  -al  change  -al  to  -au  and 
add  -X  (as  above),  e.g.,  general,  g^n^raux,  general(s) ;  rival,  rivaux, 
rival(s),  except  bal,  bals,  ball(s),  and  a  few  rarer  nouns. 

4.  Oeil,  yeux,  eye(s) ;  del,  cieux,  sky,  skies,  heaven(s). 

46.  Contractions.      The  forms  k  +  \e   and   a  +  les   are 

always  contracted  into  au  and  aux  respectively ;  the  remain- 
ing forms  are  not  contracted,  thus,  a  la,  a  1*  in  full : 

Je  parle  au  [o]  fr^re.  I  speak  to  the  brother. 

Aux  [o]  soeurs,  aux  [oz]  hommes.      To  the  sisters,  to  the  men. 
But :  Je  parle  a  la  sceur,  k  I'homme. 

47.  Use  of  II  y  a.  1.  'There  is'  and  'there  are'  are  not 
only  translated  by  voila,  but  also  by  il  y  a  : 

Voilk  des  plumes  sur  la  table.  There  are  some  pens  on  the  table. 

II  y  a  [il  j  a]  des  plumes  sur  la  table.      There  are  some  pens  on  the  table. 

2.  Observe,  however,  that  voila  answers  the  question 
*  where  is  *? ',  '  where  are  1 ',  and  makes  a  specific  statement 
about  an  object  to  which  attention  is  directed  by  pointing  or 
the  like,  while  il  y  a  does  not  answer  the  question  'where 
is  ? ',  '  where  are  1 ',  and  makes  a  general  statement. 

3.  II  y  a  governs  nouns  just  like  other  transitive  verbs : 

Je  donne  des  plumes  a  Marie.  I  give  (some)  pens  to  Mary. 

II  y  a  des  plumes  sur  la  table.  There  are  (some)  pens  on  the  tablet 


§47] 


LESSON"  X. 


81 


Vocabulary. 


aimer  [eme],  to  love,  like. 

beau  [bo],  fine,  handsome. 

beaucoup  [boku],  much,  very  much. 

blanc  [bla],  white. 

bleu  [bl0],  blue. 

bord  [bo:r],  m. ,  edge,  shore,  border. 

caillou  [kaju],  m.,  pebble,  stone. 

cheval  [javal],  m.,  horse. 

courag^eux  [kura30],  brave. 

creuser  [kr0ze],  to  dig. 

eau  [o],  f., "water. 

foug^ueux  [fug0],  spirited,  fiery. 

general  [seneral],  m. ,  general. 

grand  [gra],  great,  large,  tall. 

jouer  [swe],  to  play. 

k  cheval,  on  horseback,    chez 


lac  [lak],  m.,  lake. 
Tun  [1  cfe],  the  one,  one. 
naturel  [natyrel],  natural, 
noir  [nwair],  black. 
oeil,  yeux  [oej,  j0],  m.,  eye,  eyes. 
parce  que  [pars  ka],  because, 
parler  [parle],  to  speak,  talk. 
pourquoi?  [purkwa],  why? 
qui    [ki],    indecl.,    who,    whom, 

which. 
repr6senter  [raprezate],  to  rspre- 

sent. 
sable  [sa:bl],  m.,  sand, 
si  [si],  so. 
vieux  [vj^],  old. 
nous,  at  home,  at  our  house. 


EXERCISE  X. 

^.  n  y  a  deux  tableaux  chez*  nous.  Nous  les  aimons  beau- 
coup,  parce  qu'ils  sont  si  naturels.  L'un  reprdsente  quatre 
enfants  qui  jouent  au  bord  du  lac.  L'eau  du  lac  est  bleue  (f.), 
et  les  yeux  des  enfants  sont  bleus  aussi.  II  y  en  a  deux  qui 
ramassent  des  cailloux,  et  les  deux  autres  creusent  dans  le 
sable.  L'autre  tableau  repr^sente  deux  grands  generaux  a 
cheval.  lis  sont  sur  deux  beaux  chevaux.  L'un  des  chevaux 
est  blanc  et  l'autre  est  noir.  IjCS  g^ndraux  sont  courageux  et 
leurs  chevaux  sont  beaux  et  fougueux. 

B.  Continue  the  following:  1.  Je  parle  aux  g^n^raux,  etc. 
2.  Je  parle  a  I'enfant,  etc.  3.  Est-ce  que  je  ramasse  des 
cailloux?,  etc.  4.  II  y  a  des  plumes  dans  ma  boite,  dans  ta 
boite,  etc.  5.  II  n'y  en  a  pas  dans  ma  boite,  ta  boite,  etc. 
6.  Mes  yeux  sont  bleus,  tes  yeux,  etc.  7.  J'ai  deux  beaux 
chevaux,  etc.     8.  J'aime  ces  vieux  tableaux,  etc. 

0.  (Oral.)  1.  Ou  sont  les  tableaux?  2.  Est-ce  que  vous  les 
aimez?  3.  Pourquoi  est-ce  que  vous  les  aimez?  4.  Y  a-t-il 
des  tableaux  dans  cette  salle  ?  5.  Montrez-moi  ces  tableaux. 
6.  Qui  joue?  7.  Ou  est-ce  qu'ils  jouent?  8.  Les  yeux  des 
enfants  sont-ils  bleus  ou  noirs?     9.  Vos  yeux  sont-ils  noirs? 


32  LESSON  XL  [§§48-49 

10  Qui  raraasse  des  cailloux?  11.  Que  ramassez-vous  ?  12. 
Qui  creuse  dans  le  sable?  13.  Ou  sont  les  deUx  grands 
generaux?  14.  Les  chevaux  des  generaux  sont-ils  blancs  ou 
noirs?  15.  Vos  fr^res  sont-ils  courageux?  16.  A  qui  est-ce 
'  que  je  parle  ?  17.  A  qui  est-ce  que  vous  parlez?  18.  Y  a-t-il 
des  plumes  dans  votre  boite  1  19.  Combien  de  tableaux  y  a-t-il 
chez  nous?     20.  Aimez-vous  ces  vieux  tableaux?     Etc.,  etc. 

^^^'^i).  1.  There  are  two  fine  pictures  in  our  class-room.  2.  The 
pupils  like  them.  3.  These  pictures  are  natural  and  beautiful. 
4.  In  this  picture  there  are  four  children.  5.  They  are  play- 
ing. 6.  The  children's  eyes  are  blue.  7.  Three  of  the  children 
are  picking  up  pebbles  on  the  shore  of  the  lake.  8.  The 
other  child  is  digging  in  the  sand.  ^9.  He  is  talking  to  the 
other  children.  10.  There  is  the  other  picture.  11.  In  that 
picture  there  are  two  generals.  12.  Their  horses  are  fine 
and  spirited.  13.  The  generals  are  brave.  14.  I  like  these 
pictures  very  much.  15.  The  master  is  relating  the  story  of 
the  generals  to  the  pupils.  16.  There  is  a  pupil  who  is  not 
listening.  17.  Show  me  the  pupil  who  is  not  listening. 
18.  I  am  listening,  because  I  like  this  story.      19.  Now,  show 

/■:n    me  the  fine  pictures.     20.  There  they  are. 

LESSON  XL 

48.  An  Indefinite  Pronoun.  1.  'One,*  'some  one,'  *we/ 
*you,'  'they,'  'people,'  used  indefinitely,  are  represented  in 
French  by  on,  with  the  verb  always  in  the  singular: 

On  [5]  parle  de  Jean.  We  (you,  they,  etc. )  speak  of  John. 

2.  When  following  a  verb  with  a  final  vowel,  on  is  joined 
to  it  by -t-  (cf.  §29): 

Par  oil  commence-t-on  ?  Where  do  we  (etc. )  begin  ? 

3.  An  on  construction   often   corresponds   to  an  English 
passive,  especially  when  the  agent  is  not  mentioned  : 
Ensuite  on  apporte  le  potage.  Next  the  soup  is  brought. 

49.  Interrogation.  Observe  the  frequently  used  inter- 
rogative phrase  *  qu'est-ce  que  ? '  =  '  what  1 '  which  is  made 
up  of  que  ?  (§  38,  3)  +  est-ce  que  ?  (§  43) : 

Qu'a-t-il  ?  or  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  a  ?        What  has  he  ? 


§50] 


LESSON   XI. 


33 


50.  Present  Indicative  off  aire,  '  to  do,' '  make '  (irreg.). 

I  do,  am  doing,  etc.  We  do,  are  doing,  etc. 

je  fais  [39  fe].  nous  faisons  [nu  fazo]. 

tu  fais  [ty  fe],  vous  faites     [vu  fet]. 
a  fait  [U  fe].  lis  font      [il  fo]. 

Vocabulary. 


d'abord  [d  abo:r],  first  (of  all). 
apporter  [aporte],  to  bring. 
assiette  [as jet],  f.,  plate. 
bientot  [bj?to],  soon. 
biblioth^ue    [bibliotek],   f.,   li- 
brary. 
bonne  [bon],  f.,  maid,  servant. 
caf6  [kafe],  m.,  coffee. 
chapeau  [Japo],  m.,  hat. 
couteau  [kuto],  m.,  knife, 
cuiller  [kyje:r],  f.,  spoon. 
dessert  [dese:r],  m.,  dessert, 
ensuite  [asiiit],  then,  next, 
escalier  [cskalje],  m.,  stairs. 
fourchette  [fur Jet],  f.,  fork, 
fruit  [frx^i],  m.,  fruit. 
journal  [sumal],  m.,  newspaper. 
16g^me  [legym],  m.,  vegetable, 
lire  [li:r],  to  read, 
manger  [mase],  to  eat. 

en  haut  [a  o],  up  stairs. 


moment  [moma],  m.,  moment. 

monter  [mote],  to  go  up. 

nappe  [nap],  f.,  table-cloth. 

oter  [ote],  to  take  oflf. 

place  [plas],  f.,  place. 

potag^e  [potais],  m.,  soup. 

prend  [pro],  3  sg.  pres.  ind.  pren- 
dre, to  take. 

puis  [pi{i],  then,  afterwards. 

remporter  [raporte],  to  take  away. 

repas  [rope],  m.,  meal,  repast. 

retoumer  [roturne],  to  return,  go 
back ;  de  retour,  back. 

salle  k  manger  [sal  a  mase],  f., 
dining-room. 

sonner  [sone],  to  ring. 

vestibule  [vestibyl],  m.,  hall,  en- 
trance. 

viande  [vjQid],  f.,  meat. 

en  bas  [a  ba],  down  stairs. 


EXERCISE  XI. 

A.  Nous  voici  de  retour  de  I'^cole.  Nous  entrons  dans  la 
maison  Dans  le  vestibule  nous  6tons  nos  chapeaux.  Ensuite 
nous  montons  Tescalier.  '  Nous  somraes  en  haut  maintenant, 
et  nous  entrons  dans  la  biblioth^ue  un  moment  pour  lire  les 
journaux.  Bientot  on  sonne,  et  nous  aliens  en  bas.  Nous 
voici  dans  la  salle  k  manger.  La  nappe  est  sur  la  table.  Les 
assiettes,  les  cuillers,  les  couteaux  et  les  fourchettes  sont  a  leur 
place.  On  commence  le  repas.  La  bonne  apporte  le  potage. 
Puis,  elle  apporte  la  viande  et  les  legumes.     On  mange,  on 


34  ■    LESSON  XI.  [§50 

raconte  des  histoires.     La  bonne  remporte  les  assiettes.     Au 
dessert  on  mange  du  fruit  et  on  prend  du  cafe. 

B.  Continue  the  following:  1.  J'6te  mon  chapeau,  tu  6tes 
ton  chapeau,  etc.  2.  Je  ne  suis  pas  en  haut,  etc.  3.  Qu'est-ce 
que  je  fais  %  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  sonne  pas  %  etc.  5.  Je 
ne  monte  pas  I'escalier,  etc.  6.  On  apporte  mon  repas,  ton 
repas,  etc.  7.  Est-ce  qu'on  n'apporte  pas  mon  repas  1,  ton 
repas?,  etc.  8.  II  n'y  a  pas  de  viande  sur  mon  assiette,  ton 
assiette,  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Ou  est-ce  que  nous  allons  maintenant  ?  2.  Que 
faisons-nous  dans  le  vestibule?  3.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  faites 
dans  le  vestibule  1  4.  Ensuite  que  faites- vous  \  5.  Pourquoi 
est-ce  que  j'entre  dans  la  bibliotheque  ?  6.  La  bibliotheque 
est-elle  en  haut  ou  en  bas?  7.  Ou  est  la  salle  a  manger? 
8.  Qui  Sonne  ?  9.  Est-ce  que  la  bonne  sonne  pour  le  repas  ? 
10.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  y  a  sur  la  table  dans  la  salle  a  manger  1 
IL  Ou  sont  les  couteaux  et  les  fourchettes?  12.  Les  cuillers 
sont-elles  sur  la  table  ?  13.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  apporte  d'abord  ? 
14.  Ensuite,  qu'est-ce  qu'on  apporte?  15.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  fait 
au  repas?  16.  Kaconte-t-on  des  histoires  aussi?  17.  Qui 
apporte  le  dessert?  18.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  mange  au  dessert? 
Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  T  am  returning  home  now.  2.  I  enter  the  house. 
3.  First,  I  take  off  my  hat  in  the  hall.  4.  You  take  off  your 
hat.  5.  I  meet  my  brother  in  the  hall.  "^6.  We  go  into  the 
library  for  a  moment  to  read  the  newspapers.  (  7.  Somebody 
rings.  8.  We  listen.  9.  We  are  up  stairs.  10.  The  dining- 
room  is  down  stairs.  11.  There  is  a  cloth  on  the  table  in  the 
dining-room,  v  12.  There  are  plates,  spoons,  knives  and  forks 
on  the  table  also.  13.  First,  the  soup  is  brought.  14.  The 
soup  is  eaten,  and  the  maid  brings  the  meat.  15.  There  is  no 
fruit  on  the  table  now.  16.  The  maid  brings  it  at  (the) 
dessert.  !|l  17.  People  take  coffee  at  dessert.  \\%.  Then  they 
go  up  stairs.  19.  Then  they  go  into  the  library.  20.  What 
am  I  doing  now?  21.  What  are  you  doing?  22.  We  are 
going  into  the  library. 


§§51-63]  LESSON  XII.  35 

LESSON  XII. 

51.  Feminine  of  Adjectives.  It  is  regularly  formed  by 
adding  -e  to  the  masculine  singular,  but  adjectives  ending  in 
-e  remain  unchanged.  -^^ 
Grand,  m.,  grande,  f.,  tall ;  facile,  ra.  or  f.,  easy. 

52.  Irregularities.      Change  of  stem  takes  place  in  cer- 
tain adjectives  on  adding  -e.     The  following  list  shows  the 


f 


commoner  types : 

M. 

F. 

M. 

F. 

actif, 

active,  active. 

cruel, 

cruelle,  cruel. 

heui-eux, 

heureuse,  happy. 

gentil, 

gentille,  nice. 

flatteur, 

flatteuse,  flatter- 

ancien, 

ancienne,  ancient. 

ing. 

gros, 

grosse,  big. 

blanc, 

blanche,  white. 

muet, 

muette,  dumb. 

long, 

long^e,  long. 

cher. 

chfere,  dear. 

faux, 

fausse,  false. 

sec, 

s^che,  dry. 

Observe  also  :  m.  beau  (yr  bel,  f.  belle,  fine ;  m.  nouveau  or  nouvel^ 
f.  nouvelle,  new ;  m.  vieux  or  vieil,  f.  vieille,  old,  with  two  forms  for 
the  masculine,  one  of  which  gives  the  feminine.  The  masculine  forms 
in  -1  are  used  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute  : 

Le  bel  arbre,  le  bel  homme.  The  fine  tree,  the  handsome  man. 

But :  L'arbre  est  beau ;  le  beau  livre ;  les  beaux  arbres ;  les  arbres 
sent  beaux. 

53.  Position.      1.  An  attributive  adjective  more  usually 
follows  its  noun  : 
Un  homme  riche,  une  pomme  mfire.    A  rich  man,  a  ripe  apple. 

2.  Adjectives  from  proper  nouns,  adjectives  of  physical 
quality,  participles  as  adjectives,  almost  always  follow ; 

La  langue  anglaise.  The  English  language. 

Du  caf6  chaud,  une  lampe  cass^e.    Hot  coffee,  a  broken  lamp. 

3.  The  following  of  very  common  occurrence  nearly  always 
precede : 

Bon,  good,  mauvais,  bad  ;  beau,  fine,  handsome,  joli,  pretty,  vilain, 
ugly ;  jeune,  young,  vieux,  old ;  grand,  tall,  great,  gros,  big,  petit^ 
small ;  long,  long,  court,  short. 


36 


LESSON  XII. 


[§§54-55 


54.  Interrogative  Adjective.  'Which?',  *whatf,  'what 
,(a)!'  =  m.  quel?,  f.  quelle?,  m.  pi.  quels?,  f.  pi.  quelles? 

-Quel  [kel]  livre  ?  Which  (what)  book  ? 

Quelle  [kel]  plume  ?  Which  (what)  pen  ? 

Quelle  belle  vue  !  Quels  h^ros  !       What  a  fine  view  !  What  heroes  I 

55.  'There,'  'in  that  place '  =  y.  It  stands  for  a  place 
already  referred  to,  is  put  before  the  verb  like  a  pronoun 
object,  and  is  less  emphatic  than  la  =  '  there ' : 

Est-il  ^  r^oole  ?    Ily[i]est.  Is  he  at  school  ?    He  is  (there) 


J  agfneau  [ajio],  m.,  lamb. 

animal  [animal],  m.,  animal,  beast. 

arbre  [arbr],  m.,  tree. 

beau,  belle  [bo,  bel],  fine,  hand- 
some. 

blanc,  blanche  [bla,  blaij],  white. 

bois  [bwa],  m.,  wood(s). 

campa^e  [kapap],  f.,  country. 

•champ  [Ja],  m.,  field. 

chemin  de  fer  [Jame  da  feir],  m., 
railway. 

comme  [kom],  how ! 

comment  [koma],  how? 

cousin(e)  [kuze,  kuzin],  cousin. 

fer  [feir],  m.,  iron. 

fleur  [floe  I  r],  £.,  flower. 

gare  [ga:r],  £.,  station. 

beureux  -se  [cerjzJ,  oerjzJiz],  happy 
(to,  de). 

it  la  campag^e,  in  the  country. 


Vocabulary. 

joli  [soli],  pretty. 


oncle  [o:kl],  m.,  uncle. 

par  [par],  by. 

parents  [para],  m.  pi.,  relatives. 

passer  [pose],  to  pass. 

petit  [pati],  small. 

regarder  [ragarde],  to  look  at. 

semaine  [same:n],  f.,  week. 

tante  [ta:t],  f.,  aunt. 

tout  [tu],  all,  everything. 

travailler  [travaje],  to  work. 

trouver  [truve],  to  find. 

vache  [vaf],  f.,  cow. 

visiter  [vizite],  to  visit. 

vite  [vit],  quickly. 

voir  [vwair],  to  see. 

voiture  [vwatyir],  f.,  carriage. 

y  [i],  there,  in  that  place. 


de  nous  voir,  to  see  us. 

to  go  to  see,  go  and  visit.   ^  A^^^^'  ^^  A^^^^'  dooming. 

EXERCISE  XII.  / 

A.  Nous  allons  visiter  nos  parents  a  la  campagne.  '  Nous  y 
allons  par  le  chemin  de  fer.  Nous  arrivons  a  la  petite  gare. 
Nous  y  trouvons  ma  tante  et  une  de  mes  cousines  avec  leur 
Toiture.  Comme  nous  sommes  heureux  de  les  voir!  IVIon 
oncle  et  mes  cousins  n'y  sent  pas,  parce  qu'ils  travaillent  dans 


§§54-65]  LESSON  XII.  37 

les  champs.  Nous  montons  dans  la  voiture,  et  nous  voila  en 
route.  Comme  la  campagne  est  belle !  Tout  est  en  fleurs, 
les  arbres  et  les  champs.  Nous  passons  devant  les  beaux 
champs  et  les  jolies  maisons  blanches.  Les  chevaux  marchent 
vite,  et  nous  arrivons  bientdt  chez  nos  parents.  Nous  y 
passons  deux  ou  trois  semaines.  Nous  allons  dans  les  bois 
et  les  champs.  'Nous  y  trouvons  des  fleurs  et  des  fruits.) 
Nous  allons  regarder  les  animaux,  les  belles  vaches  et  les 
jolis  agneaux.  ^^ 

B.  Continue  the  following:  1.  Quelle  plume  est-ce  que  je 
donne  k  I'enfant  %  etc.  2.  Est-ce  que  j'ai  des  fleurs  blanches  % 
etc.  3.  Mes  fleurs  sont  belles  et  blanches,  tes  fleurs,  etc.  4. 
Je  ne  suis  pas  heureuse,  etc.  5.  Je  suis  k  la  campagne ;  j'y 
suis,  etc.  6.  J'ai  un  bel  arbre  devant  ma  maison,  tu  as  un 
bel  arbre  devant  ta  maison,  .etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Ou  sont  vos  parents  ?  2.  Comment  allons-nous 
k  la  campagne  ?  3.  Comment  y  allons-nous  ?  4.  La  gare  est- 
elle  grande  ou  petite  ?  5.  Qui  trouve-t-on  a  la  gare  ?  6.  Notre 
tante  est-elle  heureuse  de  nous  voir  V  7.  Que  fait  votre  oncle? 
8.  Pourquoi  vos  cousins  ne  sont-ils  pas  a  la  gare /?  9.  Aimez- 
vous  la  campagne?  10.  Pourquoi?  11.  Les  chevaux  de 
votre  oncle  sont-ils  beaux?     12.  Et  sa  maison  est-elle  belle.? 

13.  Combien    de    semaines    passez-vous    chez     vos    parents? 

14.  Aimez-vous  les  fleurs  blanches?  15.  Quelles  fleurs 
aimez-vous?  16.  6tes-vous  heureuse  dialler  voir  votre 
tante,  mademoiselle  ?  17.  Oil  trouve-t-on  ces  belles  fleurs  > 
18.  Oil  sqnt  les  belles  vaches  et  les  jolis  agneaux  ?  19.  Quels 
animaux  y  a-t-il  dans  les  champs  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

i>.  1.  I  have  an  uncle  and  aunt  in  the  country.  2.  They 
have  a  fine  house  and  a  carriage.  3.  There  is  my  uncle's  house. 
4.  We  are  going  to  visit  them.  5.  We  are  going  {y)  by  (the) 
railway.  6.  We  find  my  uncle  and  cousins  at  the  station. 
7.  My  aunt  is  not  there.  8.  How  beautiful  the  country  is ! 
^  The  flowers  in  (de)  the  fields  are  so  pretty !  10.  We  go  to  see 
the  animals  in  the  fields.  11.  There  are  some  cows  and 
some  white  lambs  in  the  fields.  12.  We  are  going  to  pass 
two  or  three  weeks  with  (chez)  our  relatives.  13.  They  are 
happy  to  see  us.  14.  We  arer happy  to  see  them  too.  15.  I 
like  my  aunt  and  uncle.  16.  Which  uncle  are  you  going  to 
visit  now  ?     17.   What  are  you  going  to  do  in  the  country  ? 


38  LESSON  XIII.  [§§56-58 

LESSON  XIII. 
56.    Present  Indicative  of  donner,  finir,  uendre. 

I  give,  am  giving,  I  finish,  am  finishing,       I  sell,  am  selling, 

etc.  etc.  etc. 

donn  e       [don].  fini  s  -       [fini].  vend  s  —  [va]. 

donn  es     [don].  fini  s-       [fini].  vend  s  "^  [va]. 

donn  e       [don].  fini  t,  [fini],  vend^       [va]. 

donn  ons  [dono].  finiss  ons  [finiso].  vend  ons  [vado]. 

donn  ez     [done].  finiss  ez     [finise].  vend  ez    [vade]. 

donn  ent  [don].  finiss  ent   [finis].  vend  ant  [void]. 

*Vendre  is  irregular  in  this  one  form.  The  regular  verb  rompre  has  rompt, 
but  vendre  is  here  given  as  being  more  useful  for  practice.  ' 

NOTB.— The  pronouns  Je,  tu,  il,  etc.,  have  been  omitted  in  this  paradigm  and  in 
some  others  to  economize  space  in  printing.  They  should  be  supplied  in  learning  or 
reciting  the  paradigms. 

57^  The  General  Noun.  A  noun  used  in  a  general  sense 
takes  the  definite  article  in  French,  though  not  commonly  in 
English  : 

L'homme  est  mortel.  Man  is  mortal. 

Les  hommes  sont  mortels.  Men  are  mortal. 

Le  miel  est  tr6s  doux.  Honey  is  very  sweet. 

Le  cheval  est  un  animal  utile.  The  horse  is  a  useful  animal. 

58.  Tout.  'AH,'  *the  whole,'  *  every,' =  tout,  with  the 
following  forms,  which  precede  the  article,  when  it  i^  present : 

m.  s,,  tout  [tu],   f.  s,,  toute  [tut],    m,  pi.,  tous  [tu],   f,  pi,,  toutes  [tut]. 

Tout  homme,  toute  femme.  Every  man,  every  woman. 

Tous  les  hommes.  All  the  men. 

Toute  la  joiurnee.  The  whole  day. 

Vocabulary. 


aoiit  [uj,  m.,  August. 
bUtir  [batiir],  to  build. 
bon,  bonne  [bo,  bon],  good. 
cerise  [sarijz],  f.,  cherry. 
cerisier  [serizje],  m.,  cherry-tree. 


esp^ce  [espes],  f.,  ^ps^^,  kinsL. 
fruitier  [frqitje],  fruit  (adj,), 
g^out  [gu],  m. ,  taste. 
grimper  [grepe],  to  climb, 
majority  [masorite],  f.,  majority. 


§58]  LESSON  xin.  39 


quand  [ka],  when. 
rouge  [ruis],  red. 
septembre  [septa  :br],  m.,  Septem- 
ber, 
souvent  [suva],  often, 
vendre  [vajdr],  to  sell. 
verger  [verse],  m.,  orchard, 
vert  [ve:r],  green. 
ville  [vilj,  f.,  town,  city. 


marchand  [marja],  m.,  merchant, 
mois  [rawo],  m.,  month, 
mur  [my:r],  ripe, 
miirir  [myri:r],  to  ripen. 
poire  [pwa:r],  f.,  pear, 
poirier  [pwarje],  m.,  pear- tree, 
pomme  [pom],  f.,  apple. 
pommier  [poraje],  m. ,  apple-tree. 
prune  [pryn],  f.,  plum, 
prunier  [prynje],  m.,  plum-tree. 

k  la  maison,  at  home,  pour  en  avoir,  to  g-et  some,  en  (dans)  quel 
mois  ?,  in  what  month  ?     au  mois  d'aout,  in  the  month  of  August. 

EXERCISE  XIII. 

A.  Chez  notre  oncle  k  la  campagne  il  y  a  un  verger.  Dans 
ce  verger  11  y  a  des  arbres  fruitiers.  La  majorite  des  arbres 
sont  des  pommiers,  et  ils  donnent  des  pommes  de  toute  espece. 
II  y  en  a  qui  murissent  au  mois  d'aout,  et  11  y  en  a  qui 
murlssent  au  mois  de  septembre.  On  ne  mange  pas  toutes  les 
pommes  a  la  maison.  On  en  vend  beaucoup  aux  marchands 
des  villes.  ('II  y  a  aussi  dans  le  verger  des  cerisiers,  des 
pruniers  et  des  polrlers."!  Les  cerl«?s  sont  rouges  et  ont  un 
bon  gout  quand  elles  sont  mures.  V  Les  prunes  et  les  poires 
sont  bonnes  aussl.  Nous  les  aimons  beaucoup,  et  souvent 
nous  grimpons  dans  les  arbres  pour  en  avoir. 

B.  Continue  the  following:  1.  Je  vends  des  pommes  aux 
marchands,  etc.  2.  Est-ce  que  je  vends  des  pommes  aux 
marchands  %  etc.  3.  Je  ne  vends  pas  de  pommes,  etc.  4.  Je 
finis  mes  le9ons,  tu  finis  tes  le9ons,  etc.  5.  Est-ce  que  je  b^tls 
une  maison?,  etc.  6.  Je  ne  b^tis  pas  une  maison,  etc.  7. 
J'alme  les  pommes,  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  L  Ou  est  le  verger  de  votre  oncle  1  2.  Quels 
arbres  y  a-t-U  dans  son  verger  ?  3.  Quel  fruit  les  pommiers 
donnent-Us?  4.  Quel  fruit  est-ce  que  le  prunier  donne? 
5.  Ces  pommes  sont-elles  mures  ou  vertes?  6.  Les  pommes 
ont-elles  un  bon  gout  quand  elles  sont  vertes'?  7.  En  quel 
mois  les  prunes  murissent-elles  ?  8.  A  qui  est-ce  qu'on  vend 
les  cerises  *?  9.  En  quel  mois  est-ce  que  votre  oncle  vend  ses 
pommes?     10.  Ne  vendez-vous  pas   toutes  vos  poires?     IL 


40  LESSON  XIV.  [§59 

Aimez-vous  les  poires?  12.  Mange-t-on  les  poires  quand  elles 
sont  vertes?     13.  Mange-t-on  toutes  les  poires  a  la  maison] 

14.  En  quel  mois  la  pomme  murit-elle?  16.  Pourquoi  grimpez- 
vous  dans  le  pommier  de  votre  oncle  ?  16.  Allons-nous  visiter 
le  verger  de  votre  oncle  aujourd'hui  ?  17.  Est-ce  que  vous 
finissez  vos  leQons  main  tenant  ?  18.  Qui  b^tit  cette  maison 
derriere  le  verger  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  There  is  a  pear-tree  in  our  orchard.  2.  There  are 
also  apple-trees,  plum-trees  and  cherry-trees.  3.  What  fruit 
does  the  apple-tree  bear  (donner)  ?  4.  What  fruit  do  plum- 
trees  bear?  5.  The  cherry-tree  bears  cherries.  6.  Are  the 
plums  ripe  now  ?  7.  In  what  month  do  plums  ripen  1  8.  They 
ripen  in  the  month  of  September.  9.  The  apple  also  ripens  in 
the  month  of  September.  10.  The  pears  on  (de)  these  trees  are 
green.  11.  There  are  ripe  cherries  on  that  tree.  12.  When 
the  apples  ripen  they  are  sold.  13.  We  sell  them  to  the 
merchants.     14.  We  do  not  eat  apples  when  they  are  green. 

15.  They  have  not  a  good  taste.  16.  When  we  finish  our 
lessons  we  go  into  the  orchard.  17.  All  the  apples  are 
ripening  now.  18.  I  climb  into  the  pear-tree  to  get  pears. 
19.  We  sell  the  good  pears.  20.  We  give  the  others  to  the 
animals. 

LESSON  XIV. 

59.  Partitives.  In  partitive  constructions  (§  36),  de 
alone  is  used : — 

1.  In  a  general  negation  (§  36,  2) : 

II  n'a  pas  de  plumes.  He  has  no  pens. 

2.  When  an  adjective  precedes  the  nouni 

Marie  a  de  jolies  fleurs.  Mary  has  (some)  pretty  flowers. 

J'ai  de  votre  argent.  I  have  some  of  your  money. 

But :  J'ai  des  pommes  mures.  I  have  (some)  ripe  apples. 

3.  Similarly  when  a  noun  after  An  adjective  is  understood ; 
De  bons  rois  et  de  mauvais.  Good  kings  and  bad  (kings). 

4.  After  words  of  quantity  in  such  expressions  as  these : 
Beaucoup  de  th6.  A  great  deal  of  tea  (much  tea). 
Une  livre  de  viande.                           A  pound  of  meat. 

AsBez  de  viande.  Enough  (of)  meat. 

Trop  de  pain.  Too  much  bread. 


§§60-61] 


LESSON  XIV. 


41 


60.  The  preposition  de  +  a  noun  forms  adjectival  phrases : 

Une  robe  de  sole.  A  silk  dress. 

La  feuille  d'^rable.  The  maple  leaf. 

61.  Observe   the   following    expressions   of    frequent   use, 
formed  from  avoir  +  an  undetermined  noun  : 


avoir  besoin  [bazwe]  de,  be  in 

need  of,  need, 
avoir  chaud  [Jo],  be  warm, 
avoir  froid  [frwo],  be  cold. 
avoir  faim  [f?],  be  hungry. 


avoir  soif  [swaf],  be  thirsty, 
avoir  sommeil  [someij],  be  sleepy, 
avoir  raison  [rezo],  be  (in  the) 

right. 
avoir  tort  [tojr],  be  (in  the)  wrong. 


Vocabulary. 


abriter  [abrite],  to  shelter, 
alors  [aloir],  then. 
brise  [briiz],  f.,  breeze, 
canadien  [kanadje],  Canadian, 
chaud  [jo],  m.,  heat. 
chose  [Joiz],  f.,  thing, 
^cureuil  [ekyroeij],  m.,  squirrel, 
embl^me  [cibleim],  m.,  emblem. 
Arable  [erabl],  m.,  maple, 
feuille  [foeij],  f.,  leaf, 
feuillage  [fcejais],  m.,  foliage, 
foumir  [fumiir],  to  furnish, 
hetre  [ertr,  h  asp.,  §17, 5],  m.,  beech. 


insecte  [esekt],  m.,  insect, 
int^ressant  [Steresa],  interesting, 
mauvais  [move],  bad. 
moins  [mw?],  less. 
national  [nasjonal],  national, 
nombreux  [nobr0],  numerous, 
nourriture  [nurityir],  f.,  food.       " 
oiseau  [wazo],  ra.,  bird. 
ombre  [oibr],  f.,  shade, 
orme  [orm],  m.,  elm. 
parmi  [parmi],  among. 
trhs  [tre],  very. 
utile  [ytil],  usefuL 


il  fait  chaud,  it  is  warm,  hot  (of  weather  or  temperature). 


EXERCISE  XIV. 

A.  Quand  nous  sommes  k  la  campagne  nous  aliens  sou  vent 
aux  bois.  On  y  trouve  beaucoup  de  choses  interessantes.  II 
y  a  la  de  grands  arbres  et  de  petites  fleurs.  Les  arbres  abri- 
tent  beaucoup  de  petits  animaux.  Les  ^cureuils  et  les  petits 
oiseaux  trouvent  leur  nourriture  dans  les  arbres.  Les  fleurs 
fournissent  de  la  nourriture  aux  insectes  nombreux.  Les 
Canadiens  aiment  beaucoup  I'erable.  L'erable  est  un  bel  arbre 
et  il  est  tres  utile.  La  feuille  d'erable  est  Pembleme  national 
canadien.  II  y  a  d'autres  arbres,  comme  le  hetre  et  Porme,  qui 
sont  beaux  et  utiles  aussi.     Leur  feuillage  est  vert  et  donne 


42  LESSON  XIV.  [§61 

de  Tombre.     Quand  il  fait  chaud  nous  trouvons  sou  vent  k 
I'ombre  une  bonne  brise,  et  alors  nous  avons  moins  chaud. 

B.  Continue  the  following  :  1.  J'ai  de  jolies  fleurs,  etc.  2. 
Est-ce  que  j'ai  des  pommes  mures?,  etc.  3.  J'ai  de  bonnes 
pommes  et  de  mauvaises,  etc.  4.  J'aime  le  hetre  et  I'erable,  etc. 
5.  Est-ce  que  je  vends  beaucoup  de  pommes?,  etc.  6.  J'ai  raison, 
etc.     7.  Je  n'ai  pas  tort,  etc.     8.  Est-ce  que  j'ai  chaud?,  etc. 

C.  (Oral)  1.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  trouve  dans  les  bois?  2.  Oil 
trouve-t-on  de  grands  arbres  ?  3.  Y  a-t-il  de  petites  fleurs  dans 
les  bois  aussi  ?  4.  Quels  animaux  les  arbres  abritent-ils  ?  5. 
Les  oiseaux  ont-ils  besoin  de  nourriture  1  6.  Ou  est-ce  que  les 
oiseauxtroiivent  leur  nourriture  ?  7.  Ou  trouvons-nous  notre 
nourriture?  8.  A  quels  petits  animaux  les  fleurs  fournis- 
sent-elles  de  la  nourriture  1  9.  Quels  arbres  trouve-t-on  dans 
les  bois?  10.  Quels  arbres  aimez-vous?  11.  L'erable  est-il  un 
bel  arbre  ?  12.  Aimez-vous  le  hetre  et  I'orme?  1 3.  Trouve-t-on 
des  arbres  fruitiers  dans  les  bois?  14.  Ou  est-ce  qu'on  les 
trouve?  15.  Les  arbres  des  bois  sont-ils  beaux ?  16.  Y  a-t-il 
de  beaux  arbres  chez  votre  oncle  ?  17.  Qu'est-ce  que  le  f euil- 
lage  des  arbres  donne  ?  18.  Est-ce  qu'il  fait  chaud  aujourd'hui? 
19.  Avez-vous  chaud  ?  20.  Ou  allons-nous  quand  il  fait  chaud? 
21.  Est-ce  qu'on  a  soif  quand  il  fait  chaud  ?  22.  Avez-vous 
soif?     Etc.,  etc. 

B.  1.  To-day  it  is  hot,  and  we  are  going  to  the  woods.  2. 
There  are  many  interesting  things  in  the  woods.  3.  One  finds 
there  great  trees  and  beautiful  flowers.  4.  Among  the  trees 
there  are  pretty  little  animals.  5.  The  leaves  of  the  trees  and 
the  flowers  shelter  many  little  insects.  6.  These  trees  are  very 
beautiful  and  very  useful  also.  _7.  The  maple  is  a  very  fine 
tree.  8.  We  like  the  elm  and  the  beech  because  they  are  fine 
trees.  9.  The  beech  and  the  elm  are  very  useful.  10.  The 
foliage  of  trees  gives  shade.  11.  In  the  woods  behind  our 
house  there  are  large  trees  and  small  ones.  12.  People  like 
the  shade  of  trees  when  it  is  hot.  13.  We  go  into  the  woods 
to  find  shade.  14.  The  animals  in  the  woods  have  need  of 
food.  15.  The  fruits  of  the  trees  furnish  food  to  the  animals. 
JL^  Many  little  insects  find  food  in  the  flowers.  17.  When  it 
is  hot  the  animals  are  thirsty.  18.  Then  they  need  water  (see 
C.  5).  19.  They  find  it  in  the  woods.  20.  We  need  \vater  when 
we  are  thirsty.  '21.  I^ople  need  food  when  they  are  hungry.'{|^ 


§§62-66]  LESSON  XV.  43 

LESSON  XV. 
62,  Past  Participles. 

Given.  Finished.  Sold.  Had.  Been. 

donn6  [done],     fini  [fini].  vendu  [vady].      ^u  [y].  6t6  [ete]. 

.63.  Compound  Tenses.  They  are  formed  from  the  past 
participle  along  with  an  auxiliary  (usually  avoir,  sometimes 
etre,  see  §155),  as  in  the  following  section. 

64.  The  Past  Indefinite. 

I  have  given,  or  I  have  finished,  or  I  have  sold,  or 
I  gave,  etc.                           I  finished,  etc.  I  sold,  etc. 

j'ai  donn^     [5  e  done]        j'ai  fini     [3  e  fini]       j'ai  vendu     [3  e  vady] 
tu  as  donn6  [ty  a  done],     tu  as  fini  [ty  a  fini],     tu  as  vendu  [ty  a  vady], 
etc.  fi  etc.  etc. 

>^ 
I  have  liad,  or  I  had,  etc.  I  have  been,  or  I  was,  etc. 

j'ai  eu  [3  e  y].  j'ai  et6  [3  e  ete]. 

tu  as  eu  [ty  az  y].  tu  as  4t4  [ty  az  ete]. 

il  a  eu  [il  a  y].  il  a  ^t^  [il  a  ete]. 

etc.  etc. 

65.  Word  Order.  The  auxiliary  is  the  verb  in  a  com- 
pound tense,  and  all  rules  of  word  order  apply  to  it : 

Nous  ne  I'avons  pas  fini.  We  have  not  finished  it. 

N'a-t-elle  pas  4t6  ici  ?  Has  she  not  been  here  ? 

66.  Use  of  Past  Indefinite.  It  denotes  not  only  what 
has  happened  or  has  been  happening,  as  in  English,  but  also 
what  happened  (.=  English  past  tense): 

J'ai  fini  mon  ouvrage.  I  have  finished  my  work. 

Elle  a  chants  toute  la  matinee.  She  has  been  singing  all  the  morning. 

II  a  et^  longtemps  ici.  He  was  here  for  a  long  time. 
J'ai  quitt^  Paris  I'hiver  pass^.  I  left  Paris  last  winter.  -- 

N.B. — The  past  indefinite  is  the  ordinary  past  tense  of  French.  For 
the  past  tense  of  narrative  in  the  literary  style,  see  §  148. 


44  LESSON  XV.  [§67 

67.  Idiomatic  Present  Indicative.  Besides  its  use  in 
general,  as  in  English,  the  present  indicative  is  used  idioma- 
tically, in  ce!^4ain  phrases,  to  denote  what  has  been  and  still 
continues  to  be  ; 

Depuis  quand  etes-vous  ici  ?  How  long  have  you  been  here  ? 

Je  Buis  ici  depuis  trois  jours.  I  have  been  here  for  three  days 

{or  for  three  days  past,  or 
for  the  last  three  days). 


Vocabulary. 


acheter  [ajte],  to  buy. 
battre  [batr],  to  beat,  thresh. 
bl6  [ble],  m.,  wheat. 
boulanger  [bulaze],  m.,  baker, 
contra  [kotr],  against,  from, 
couper  [kupe],  to  cut. 
depuis  [dapqi],  shice. 
fait  [fc],  p.  p.  faire,  to  do. 
farina  [farm],  f.,  flour, 
froid  [frwa],  m.,  cold. 
germer  [serme],  to  sprout, 
grandir  [groFdi:r],  to  grow  large. 


grange  [groFrs],  f.,  bam. 

hiar  [jeir],  yesterday. 

meunier  [m^nje],  m.,  miller. 

morceau  [morso],  m.,  piece. 

neige  [neis],  1,  snow. 

paysan  [  pe  izo  ],  m .,  peasant,  farmer. 

plante  [pla:t],  f.,  plant. 

prot6gar  [protese],  to  protect. 

saison  [scz5],  f.,  season. 

sec  [s€k],  dry. 

semer  [same],  to  sow.  (bring. 

transporter  [trasporte],  to  carry. 


en  quelle  saison  ?,  in  what  season  ?,  when  ?;  au  printemps  [o  preta], 
in  spring ;  en  et6  [an  ete],  in  summer ;  en  automne  [an  oton],  in 
autumn;  en  hiver  [an  iveir],  in  winter. 

EXERCISE  XV. 

A.  Voici  I'histoire  d'un  morceau  de  pain.  En  automne* 
le  paysan  a  sem^  le  bid,  et  puis  le  h\6  a  germd  En  hiver  la 
neige  a  protegd  les  jeunes  plantes  contre  le  froid.  Au  prin- 
temps elles  ont  grandi.  En  4t6  le  ble  a  muri.  L/es  paysans 
I'ont  coupe.  lis  Font  transporte  dans  la  grange,  et  ils  I'ont 
battu.  Le  meunier  a  achete  le  h\4  pour  faire  de  la  farine.  II 
a  fourni  la  farine  au  boulanger.  Le  boulanger  a  fait  le  pain, 
et  ensuite  il  I'a  vendu.  Voila  un  morceau  de  pain  sur  la  table. 
II  est  la  depuis  hier,  et  il  est  tres  sec. 

B.  (Oral.)  1.  Quelle  his toire  est-ce  que  vous  racontez?  2.  Qui 
a  travailld  pour  faire  le  pain?  3,  Qui  a  semd  le  ble?  4.  En  quelle 
saison  I'a-t-il  semd  1    5.  Quand  le  hU  a-t-il  germd  1    6.  Qu'est-ce 


§§68-69]  LESSON  XVI.  45 

que  la  neige  a  fait  en  hiver  ?  7.  En  quelle  saison  est-ce 
que  les  plantes  ont  grandi  ?  8.  Quand  le  bid  a-t-il  muri  ? 
9.  Avez-vous  coupd  le  h\6  ?  10.  Est-ce  que  j'ai  coupd  le  hU  ? 
11.  Qui  a  coupd  le  bid  ?  12.  Ou  I'ont-ils  transports  ?  13.  Et 
ensuite  qu'est-ce  qu'ils  ont  fait  ?  14.  A  qui  I'ont-ils  vendu .'' 
15.  Qu'est-ce  que  le  ineunier  a  fait  ?  16.  Le  boulanger  qu'a-t-il 
achetd  pour  faire  le  pain  ?  17.  Qui  a  fourni  la  farine  au  bou- 
langer ?  18.  Avons-nous  vendu  le  pain  ?  19.  Qui  I'a  vendu  ? 
20.  Depuis  quand  ce  morceau  de  pain  est-il  sur  la  table  ?  21. 
Pourquoi  est-il  sec  ?  22.  Depuis  quand  etes-vous  ici  ?  Etc.,  etc. 
C.  1.  This  bread  is  dry.  2.  It  has  been  ou  the  table 
since  yesterday.  3.  Here  is  the  story  of  a  piece  of  bread. 
4.  The  farmer  sowed  the  wheat.  5.  He  sowed  it  in  the 
autumn.  6.  The  wheat  sprouted.  7.  In  the  winter  the  snow 
protected  the  young  plants  from  the  cold.  8.  When  did  they 
grow  large  ?  9.  In  spring.  J_0.  When  did  the  wheat  ripen  ? 
11.  It  ripened  in  summer.  12.  Who  cut  the  wheat  ?  13.  Did 
^we  bring  it  into  the  barn  ?  14.  Did  you  thresh  it  ?  15.  Who 
bought  the  wheat?  16.  The  miller  bought  it,  and  made  the 
flour.  17.  We  are  the  bakers  ;  we  made  the  bread.  18.  Then 
we  sold  it  to  the  farmers.  19.  Here  are  two  pieces  of  dry 
bread.  20.  Did  you  make  this  bread  ?  21.  Who  made  it  ? 
22.  Our  baker  made  it. 

LESSON  XVL 

p^  68.  Comparatives.  Place  plus  =  *  more,'  moins  =  *  less,' 
or  aussi  =  '  as,'  before  the  adjective,  and  que  =  '  than '  or  *  as ' 
after  it,  to  form  comparatives  : 

II  est  plus  grand  que  Jean.  He  is  taller  than  John. 

II  est  moins  grand  que  Jean.  He  is  less  tall  than  (not  so  t.  as)  John. 

II  est  aussi  grand  que  Jean.  He  is  as  tall  as  John.        /       \Ay\jL.^lf^ 

69.  Superlatives.     1.  Place  the  definite  article  or  a  pos- 
sessive adjective  before  plus  or  moins  to  form  superlatives : 
Marie  est  la  plus  jeune  de  toutes.     Mary  is  the  youngest  of  all. 

Obs.:  La  plus  jeune  des  deux.       The  younger  of  the  two. 

2.  Do  not  omit  the  definite  article  when  the  superlative 
follows  the  noun : 

La  le9on  la  plus  difficile.  The  most  difficult  lesson. 

Mes  livres  les  plus  utiles.  My  most  useful  books. 


46 


LESSON  XVI. 


.[§§70-73 


70.  Irregfular  Comparison.    Observe  the  irregular  forms: 
bon  [bo],  good.       meilleur  [mejoeir],  better.       le  meilleur  [lo  mejoeir], 

the  best. 

71.  Comparison  of  Adverbs.     1.  They  are  compared  by 
plus  and  moins  like  adjectives,  but  le  in  the  superlative  is 

invariable. 

2.  Observe  the  irregular  forms : 
bien  [bjs],  well,      mieux  [mj0],  better,      le  mieux  [la  mj0],  (the)  best, 
peu  [p0],  little.       moins  [mwe],  less.         le  moins  [la  mwe],  (the)  least. 

72.  Present  Indicative  of  alter,  *  to  go '  (irreg.). 

I  go,  am  going,  etc.  We  go,  are  going,  etc. 

je  vais  [3 a  ve].  nous  allons  [nuz  alo]. 

tu  vas  [ty  va].  vous  allez    [vuz  ale]. 
11  va     [il  va],  ils  vont    [11  vo]. 

73.  Imperative  of  a//er,  *  to  go.' 

va  [va],  go.  allons  [alo],  let  us  go.  allez  [ale],  ga 

Vocabulary. 

oignon  [ojio],  m. 


ann^e  [ane],  f . ,  year, 
avril  [avril],  m.,  April, 
carotte  [karot],  f, ,  carrot, 
charmant  [Jarma],  charming, 
chou  [Ju],  m. ,  cabbage. 
y  chenille  [jani:j],  f.,  caterpillar. 
c6t6  [kote],  m. ,  side, 
couleur  [kulcEir],  f.,  colour, 
dejk  [desa],  already. 
dernier,  -iere  [dernje,  -jeir],  last, 
encore  [akoir],  yet. 
entre  [aitr],  among, 
graine  [gre:n],  f.,  seed, 
gros,  -se  [gro,  gro:s],  big. 
jardin  [jarde],  m.,  garden, 
modeste  [modest],  modest. 
muguet  [myge],  m.,  lily  of  the 
valley. 


onion. 

partie  [parti],  f. ,  part. 

peu  [p0],  m.,  little. 

peut-etre  [p0t  eitr],  perhaps. 

planter  [plate],  to  plant. 

pomme  de  terre  [pom  da  teir],  i, 
potato. 

pousser  [puse],  to  grow. 

probablement  [probablama],  prob- 
ably. 

reine  [rem],  f.,  queen. 

r6serv6  [rezerve],  reserved. 

rose  [roiz],  f.,  rose. 

semaine  [samein],  f.,  week. 

terre  [te:r],  f.,  earth. 

toujours  [tu3u:r],  still. 

tout  h.  fait  [tut  a  fe],  quite. 

tulipe  [tylip],  f.,  tulip. 


aimer  mieux,  to  like  better,  prefer ;  d'un  cbtk,  de  I'autre  c6t6,  on  the 
one  side,  on  the  other  side ;  I'ann^e  derniere,  last  year. 


§73]  LESSON  XVL  47 

EXERCISE  XVI. 

A.  Nous  sommes  toujours  a  la  campagne.  Allons  voir  main- 
tenant  le  jardin.  D'un  cote  11  y  a  des  legumes,  de  I'autre  c6t^  il 
y  a  des  fleurs.  II  y  a  des  pommes  de  terre,  des  choux,  des 
oignons  et  des  carottes.  On  a  plants  les  pommes  de  terre  au 
mois  d'avril,  et  elles  sont  maintenant  en  fleurs.  On  a  plants 
les  choux  la  semaine  derniere.  lis  ont  deja  pouss^  un  peu. 
lis  vont  etre  probablement  meilleurs  cette  annee  que  I'ann^e 
derniere.  L'annee  derniere  les  chenilles  en  ont  mange  beau- 
coup.  On  a  seme  la  gtaine  de  deux  especes  de  carottes  :  des 
carottes  rouges  et  des  carottes  blanches.  Nous  aimons  mieux 
les  rouges  pour  le  potage  que  les  blanches.  Les  oignons  sont 
d'une  espece  plus  grosse  que  les  oignons  de  I'annde  derniere. 

Dans  la  partie  du  jardin  rdservee  aux  fleurs  nous  .trouvons, 
entre  autres,  des  roses,  des  tulipes  et  des  muguets.  La  rose 
est  la  reine  des  fleurs.  Elle  est  peut-etre  la  plus  belle  de 
toutes  les  fleurs.  Les  tulipes  sont  tres  jolies.  Elles  sont  de 
toutes  les  couleurs.  Le  muguet  est  une  petite  fleur  blanche, 
tres  modeste  mais  tout  k  fait  charmante.    r^ 

B.  Continue  the  following:  \.  Je  suis  plus  grand  que" 
Robert,  etc.  2.  Est-ce  que  je  suis  aussi  grande  que  Marie  ?, 
etc.  3.  Je  suis  le  meilleur  dleve  de  la  classe,  etc.  4.  N'ai-je 
pas  la  IcQon  la  plus  diflScile?,  etc.  6.  J'ai  vendu  mes  meilleurs 
livres,  tu  as  vendu  tes,  etc.  6.  Est-ce  que  j'aime  mieux  les 
fleurs  rouges  ?,  etc.  7.  Est-ce  que  je  vais  voir  mes  parents  ?, 
est-ce  que  tu  vas  voir  tes  parents  ?,  etc.  8.  Je  n'ai  pas 
encore  ete  a  la  campagne,  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  \.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  allez  voir  aujourd'hui? 
2.  Qu'y  a-t-il  de  ce  c6te?  3.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  y  a  de  I'autre 
c6te  ?  4.  Dans  quel  mois  plantez-vous  vos  choux  1  5.  Les 
choux    poussent-ils    aussi    vite    que    les    pommes    de    terre? 

6.  Vos    pommes    de    terre    sont-elles    bonnes    cette    ann^e  ] 

7.  Sonjb-elles  meilleures  que  Tannic  derniere?  8.  Sont-elles 
plus    grosses?      9.     Est-ce    qu'elles    ont    un    meilleur    gout? 

10.  Combien  d'espfeces  de  carottes  y  a-t-il  dans  ce  jardin? 

11.  Aimez-vous  mieux  les  carottes  blanches  que  les  carottes 
rouges?  12.  Pourquoi?  13.  Quelle  est  la  reine  des  fleurs? 
14.  De  quelle  couleur  les  tulipes  sont-elles?  15.  De  quelle 
couleur  le  muguet  est-il?     16.  Est-il  aussi  blanc  que  la  neige? 


48  LESSON  XVII.  [§§74-75 

17.  Quelle  est  la  fleur  la  plus  channante  de  votre  jardini 

18.  Quels  sont  vee  meilleurs  legumes?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  I  am  going  to  see  your  garden.  2.  Your  garden  is 
large  and  fi^e^^  3.  What  have  you  planted  on  this  side? 
4.  Where  are  the  flowers "?  5.  I  planted  my  potatoes  in  the 
month  of  April.  6.  I  am  going  to  plant  my  cabbage  this 
week.  7.  The  potato  is  a  very  useful  plant.  8.  It  is  perhaps 
the  most  useful  of  all  the  vegetables.  9.  It*is  good  for  men 
and  for  animals.  10.  Carrots  are  not  so  useful.  11.  I  like 
the  red  carrots  better  than  the  white.  12.  They  are  better 
for  soup.  13.  The  white  ones  are  larger,  but  they  are  not  so 
good.  14.  Now  let  us  go  and  see  the  flowers.  15.  How 
beautiful  those  tulips  are !  16.  They  are  finer  this  year  than 
last  year.  17.  The  lily  of  the  valley  and  the  rose  are  bot  yet 
in  flower.  18.  Do  you  like  roses  better  than  tulips  1  19.  Yes, 
but  I  like  the  lily  of  the  valley  better  than  all  the  other 
flowers.  20.  It  is  smaller  than  the  others,  but  more  charming. 
21.  I  like  your  garden  very  much.  22.  I  am  going  to  visit  it 
often  this  summer. 

LESSON    XTII. 

74.  Agreement  of  Past  Participle.  1.  In  a  compound 
tense  with  avoir  the  past  participle  agrees  in  gender  and 
number  with  a  direct  object  which  precedes  it : 

J'ai  fini  mes  lemons.  I  have  finished  my  lessons. 

Je  les  ai  finies.  I  have  finished  them. 

Quels  livres  a-t-il  achates  ?  What  books  has  he  bought  ? 

N.B.— Remember  that  the  participle  does  not  agree  with  en,  e.g.,  'Avez-vous 
des  plumes?  Oui,  j'en  ai  aohet6  hier.'  'Have  you  any  .pens?  Yes,  I  bought  some 
yesterday.' 

2.  When  used  as  an  adjective,  the  past  participle  agrees 
like  an  adjective  : 
La  plume  achet^e  hier.  The  pen  bought  yesterday. 

75.  Some  Relatives.  1.  The  relative  pronouns  of  most 
common  use  are  qui  as  subject,  and  que  as  direct  object  of  a 
verb : 

La  dame  qui  chante.  The  lady  who  sings. 

Les  livres  qui  sont  icL  The  books  which  are  here. 

Les  pommes  que  j'ai  achet^es.  The  apples  that  I  have  bought. 


\ 


§75]  LESSON  XVII.  49 

2.  The  relative  pronoun,  often  omitted  in  English,  is  never 
omitted  in  French  :  »» 

Le  pain  que  j'ai  achet^  hier.  The  bread  I  bought  yesterday. 


Vocabulary. 


banane  [banan],  f.,  banana, 
car  [kar],  for. 

Cher,  -hre  [Je:r,  Je:r],  dear, 
cuisinifere  [ki{izinje:r],  f.,  cook, 
diner  [dine],  m.,  dinner, 
douzaine  [duzen],  f . ,  dozen, 
franc  [fra],  m.,  franc, 
laitue  [lety],  f.,  lettuce. 
march6  [marje],  m.,  market, 
matin  [mate],  m.,  morning, 
oeillet  [oeje],  m.,  pink. 
oie  [wa],  f.,  goose. 


omer  [orne],  to  decorate,  adorn, 
payer  [peje],  to  pay,  pay  for. 
plusieurs  [plyzjoeir],  several.    >^ 
poulet  [pule],  m.,  chicken,  fowl, 
preparer  [prepare],  to  prepare, 
quant  k  [kot  a],  as  for,  as  to. 
salade  [salad],  f.,  salad. 
soir  [swair],  m.,  evening, 
sou  [su],  m.,  sou,  cent. 
train  [tre],  m. ,  train,  act  of,  etc. 
ving^t  [vs],  twenty. 
volaille  [vola:j],  f.,  poultry. 


^tre  en  train  de,  to  be  in  the  act  of,  be  busy  (doing  a  thing). 
je  les  ai  pay^s  vingt  [v?]  sous  la  douzaine,  I  paid  twenty  cents 
a  dozen  for  them. 

EXERCISE  XVII. 

A.  Nous  avons  ^t^  au  march^  ce  matin.  Nous  avons  achet^ 
plusieurs  choses  pour  ce  soir :  des  legumes,  des  fleurs,  des  fruits 
et  de  la  volaille.  Nous  allons  avoir  des  amis  k  diner.  Voici 
les  legumes  que  nous  avons  achet^s.  II  y  a  des  porames  de  terre, 
des  carottes  et  de  la  laitue.  Les  carottes  sont  pour  le  potage, 
et  la  laitue  est  pour  la  salade.  Voil^,  sur  la  table,  les  fleurs 
que  nous  avons  achetees.  Nous  les  avons  achetees  pour 
orner  la  table.  II  y  a  des  roses  et  des  oeillets.  -^^u^rLa  la 
volaille,  nous  avons  achet^  un  poulet  et  une  oie.  La  volaille 
n'est  pas  trfes  ch^re,  car  il  y  en  a  beaucoup  en  cette  saison. 
Nous  avons  payd  le  poulet  vingt  sous  et  I'oie  trois  francs. 
La  cuisiniere  est  en  train  de  les  preparer.  Pour  le  dessert 
nous  avons  achet^  des  pommes  et  des  bananes.  Les  bananes 
sont  cheres.     Nous  les  avons  payees  vingt  sous  la  douzaine. 

B.  Continue  the  following:  1.  Voil^  les  pommes  que  j'ai 
achet^s,  etc.     2.  Quelles  fleurs  ai-je  achetees  au  march^  ?,  etc. 

4 


-/- 


50  LESSON  XVII.  [§75 

3.  J'ai  vendu  les  pommes  qu'on  a  achetdes  hier,  etc.  4.  Est-ce 
que  j'ai^te  au  march^  ce  matin'?,  etc.  5.  J'ai  achet^  les  livres 
qui  sont  sur  la  table,  etc. 

Relate  the  story  of  Part  Aj  using  the  first  singular  instea^ 
of  the  first  plural. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Avez-vous  ^t^  au  marchd  ce  matin?  2. 
Qu'avez-vous  achete?  3.  Pourquoi  avez-vous  achet^  toutes 
ces  choses  ?  4.  Combien  d'amis  allez-vous  avoir  a  diner  1  5. 
Montrez-moi  les  legumes  que  vous  avez  achetds.  6.  Sont-ila 
tres  chers  en  cette  saison?  7.  Combien  avez-vous  paye  les 
pommes  de  terre  que  vous  avez  achetees?  8.  Quels  autres 
legumes  avez-vous  achetes  ?  9.  Ousont-ils?  10.  Quelle  belle 
oie !  combien  I'avez-vous  payee?  11.  Qu'est-ce  que  la  cui- 
siniere  fait  maintenant?  12.  Ou  sont  les  fleurs  que  vous  avez 
achetees?  13.  Quelles  especes  de  fleurs  y  a-t-il  la?  14. 
Qu'allons-nous  faire  de  ces  fleurs?  15.  Les  fleurs  qu'on  a 
achet^es  hier  les  avez-vous  encore  ?  16.  Quels  fruits  allez-vous 
avoir  pour  le  dessert  ?  17.  Les  bananes  sont-elles  plus  cheres 
que  les  pommes  cette  ann^e?  18.  Combien  avez-vous  payd 
ces  pommes?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  We  are  going  to  have  some  friends  to  dinner  this 
evening.  2.  I  have  bought  some  flowers  to  decorate  the  table. 
3.  The  cook  has  been  at  the  market  to  buy  meat  and  vege- 
tables. 4.  Here  are  the  things  she  brought.  5.  What 
poultry  did  she  buy?  6.  Is  poultry  dear  at  this  season? 
7.  Here  is  a  goose  which  she  paid  three  francs  for.  8.  There 
are  two  chickens  which  she  bought.  9.  Chickens  are  not  so 
dear  as  geese ;  they  are  not  so  large.  10.  What  pretty 
flowers  !  11.  Where  did  you  buy  them?  12.  I  bought  them 
at  the  market  this  morning.  13.  I  bought  some  yesterday, 
but  they  are  not  so  pretty.  14.  My  flowers  are  dearer.  15.  I 
paid  three  francs  a  dozen  for  the  roses.  16.  Last  year  I 
bought  roses  for  twenty  cents  a  dozen.  17.  Fruit  (pi.)  is  dear 
this  year.  18.  How  much  did  you  pay  for  the  bananas? 
19.  I  paid  twenty  cents  a  dozen  for  them.  20.  We  are  going 
to  have  a  good  dinner.  21.  The  cook  is  busy  preparing  it 
now. 


§76] 


LESSON   XVIII. 


51 


LESSON  XYIII. 

76.  Tenses  with  St  re.  1.  The  verb  ^tre  +  the  past  parti- 
ciple forms  the  compound  tenses  of  all  reflexive  verbs  (§82)  and 
of  a  few  intransitive  verbs,  of  which  aller,  *  to  go,'  amver, 
*  to  arrive,'  and  venir,   *  to  come,'  are  of  very  frequent  use. 

2.  The  past  participle  of  a  verb  (not  reflexive)  conjugated 

with  ^tre  agrees  with  the  subject,  thus  : 

I  have  arrived,  etc. 

je  suis  arriv6(e)  [arive].  nous  sommes  arriv6(e)s  [arive]. 

tu  es  arriv6(e)     [arive].  vous  etes  arriv6(e)s        [arive]. 

il  (elle)  est  arriv6(e)  [arive].  ils  (elles)  sont  arriv6{e)s       [arive]. 


admirablement  [admirablama], 

admirably, 
admirer  [admire],  to  admire, 
amuser  [amyze],  to  amuse. 
c^l^bre  [seleibr],  celebrated. 
chanter  [Jate],  to  sing. 
concert  [koseir],  m.,  concert, 
depuis  que  [dapqi  ko],  conj.,  since. 
dimanche  [dimaij],  m.,  Sunday. 
Edifice  [edifis],  m. ,  edifice,  building, 
emplette  [aplet],  f.,  purchase. 
entendre  [ataidr],  to  hear. 
hotel  de  ville  [otel  da  vil],  m., 

town-halL 
hier  soir  [jeir  swair],  yesterday 

evening, 
intention  [?tasjo],  f.,  intention. 
jour  [3ujr],  m.,  day. 


Vocabulary. 

lundi  [l(3&di],  m.,  Monday. 

magasin  [magaz?],  m.,  shop. 

mener  [mane],  to  lead,  take. 

nuit  [nqi],  f.,  night. 

partout  [partu],  everywhere. 

pr^dicateur  [predikatceir],  m., 
preacher. 

principal  [prfsipal],  principaL 

prochain  [proje],  next. 

public  [pyblik],  public. 

rencontre  [rakoitr],  £.,  meeting. 

sermon  [sermo],  m.,  sermon. 

songe  [so: 3],  m.,  dream. 

th^Mre  [teoitr],  m.,  theatre. 

tour  [tu :  r],  m. ,  circuit. 

tramway  [tram we],  m.,  street- 
cars. 

venu  [vany],  p.p.  venir,  to  come. 


aller  k  la  rencontre  de,  to  go  to  meet. 
faire  le  tour  de,  to  go  around. 

EXERCISE   XVIII. 

A.  Nos  parents  de  la  campagne  sont  chez  nous  depuis  qua- 
tre  jours.  lis  sont  arrives  lundi  dernier  par  le  chemin  de  fer. 
Nous  sommes  all^s  k  la  gare  a  leur  rencontre.     Depuis  qu'ils 


52  LESSON  XVIII.  [§76 

sont  ici  nous  les  menons  partout  pour  les  amuser.  Nous  mon- 
tons  en  tramway  et  nous  faisons  le  tour  de  la  ville.  Nous 
entrons  dans  les  grands  magasins  pour  faire  des  emplettes. 
Nous  avons  visits  les  princlpaux  Edifices  publics.  Nous  avons 
admir^  les  dglises  et  I'hotel  de  ville.  Hier  soir  nous  avons  6t6 
au  theatre.  On  y  a  jou^  le  "  Songe  d'une  nuit  d'dtd "  de 
Shakespeare.  Nous  I'avons  beaucoup  admir^.  Nous  avons 
^te  aussi  k  un  concert.  On  y  a  chants  admirablement. 
Dimanche  prochain  nous  avons  Tintention  d'aller  k  I'eglise 
pour  entendre  un  sermon  par  un  des  plus  celebres  pr^dicateurs 
de  la  ville. 

B.  Continue  the  following :  1.  Je  suis  arriv^  hier,  etc. 
2.  Je  (f.)  suis  venue  ce  matin,  etc.  3.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  suis 
pas  all^  a  la  gare  %  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  suis  pas  all^e  a 
ia  rencontre  de  mes  amies  %  est-ce  que  tu  n'es  pas  allee  k  la 
rencontre  de  tes  amies  %  etc.     5.   Je  fais  le  tour  de  la  ville,  etc, 

6.  Je  suis  entr^  dans  les  magasins,  etc.  7.  Je  n'ai  pas  6t4i  au 
theatre,  etc.     8.  J'ai  I'intention  d'aller  k  I'eglise,  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Qui  est  chez  vous?  2.  Vos  parents  sont-ils 
toujours  chez  vous?  3.  Depuis  quand  sont-ils  chez  vous? 
4.  Quand  est-ce  qu'ils  sont  arrives?  5.  Votre  tante  est-elle 
venue  ce  matin  1  6.  Qui  est  all^  a  sa  rencontre  ?  7.  L'avez- 
vous  trouv^e  k  la  gare  ?  8.  Que  faites-vous  pour  amuser  vos 
amis  ?  9.  Comment  faites-vous  le  tour  de  la  ville  ]  10.  Sont-ils 
entr^s  dans  les  magasins?  11.  Dans  quels  magasins  sont-ils 
entrds?  12.  Quels  sont  les  plus  grands  Edifices  de  votre  ville  ? 
13.  Yotre  tante  a-t-elle  admire  les  dglises?  14.  Oil  est-elle 
all^e  hier  soir?  15.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  va  jouer  au  the&tre  ce 
soir?     16.  Aime-t-elle  mieux  aller  au  concert  qu'au  theatre? 

17.  A-t-elle  Tintention  de  retourner  bientdt  a  la  campagne? 

18.  Yos  parents  ou  sont-ils  alles  dimanche  dernier?  19.  Ou 
avez-vous  I'intention  d'aller  I'ete  prochain  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  My  uncle  and  aunt  are  at  our  house.  2.  They 
arrived  this  morning.  3.  They  came  by  the  railway.  4.  My 
sister  went  to  meet  them  at  the  station.  5.  They  came  from 
the  station  in  a  carriage.     6.  They  soon  arrived  at  our  house. 

7.  To-day  we  took  them  into  the  city  to  amuse  them.  8.  First 
we  went  around  the  city  in  the  street-cars.  9.  Then  my  aunt 
■went  to  one  of  the  large  shops  to  make  purchases.  10.  To- 
morrow we  are  going  to  visit  the  largest  churches.     11.     They 


§§77-7S]  LESSON  XIX.  53 

admire  very  much  the  public  buildings  of  the  city.  12.  We 
are  going  to  the  concert  this  evening,  perhaps.  13.  We 
went  to  the  theatre  yesterday  evening.  14.  My  aunt  did 
not  go  iy) ;  she  does  not  like  the  theatre.  15.  I  always  go  {y) 
when  they  play  Shakespeare's  ''  Midsummer  Night's  Dream." 
16.  I  admire  it  very  much.  17.  The  churches  of  this  city  are 
very  fine.  18.  My  aunt  intends  to  go  to  church  next  Sunday 
to  hear  a  sermon.  19.  Next  Monday  my  uncle  and  aunt 
return  to  the  country.  20.  They  admire  the  city,  but  they 
like  the  country  better.  ,  I    r,   I      "   , 

.J^''  LESSON    XIX.  h    ^^^    Jn,  X 

77.  Pronoun  Objects.     1.  The  personal  pronoun  has,  for 
the  indirect  object  of  the  third  person,  the  following  forms : 
lui  Qui],  (to,  for)  him,  (to,  for)  her.      leur  [loeir],  (to,  for)  them. 

2.  Lui  and  leur  precede  the  verb  (§  30),  but  follow  le,  la, 

les: 

Nous  lui  parlous.  We  speak  to  him  (to  her). 

Je  donn^  une  rose  h.  Marie.  I  am  giving  Mary  a  rose. 

Je  la  lui  donne.  I  give  her  it  (it  to  her). 

Je  donne  mes  livres  aux  enfants.  I  give  the  children  my  books. 

Je  les  leur  donne.  I  give  them  (to)  them. 

78.  Observe  the  following  orthographical  peculiarities : 

i.  commencer,  nous  commen^ons — stem  c  [s]  becomes  5  [s]  before  o  of 
endingfcf.  §  5,  4). 

2.  manger,  nous  mangeons — stem  g  [3]  becomes  ge  [3]  before  o  of  ■» 
ending  (cf.  §  19,  2). 

3.  mener,  je  mfene  [men],  tu  mfenes,  il  m^ne,  ils  mfenent — stem  e  [a] 
becomes  fe  [e]  in  most  verbs  when  ending  is  e  mute  (cf.  §  12,  1,  n.). 

Vocabulary. 


accompagner  [akopajie],  to  acc9m- 

pany. 
article  fartikl],  m.,  article, 
avoir  [avwair],  to  have,  get. 
bonbon  [bobo],  m. ,  bonbon,  candy. 
chapelier  [japalje],  m.,  hatter. 


chaussures  [/osyrr],  f.  pi.,  boots, 
shoes. 

confiseur  [kofizoeir],  m.,  confec- 
tioner. 

couru  [kury],  p.p.  courir,  to  run 
(about). 


54  LESSON  XIX.  '    [§78 


demander  [damatfej,  to  ask  (for), 
dentelle  [datsl],  f.,  lace. 
dollar  [dolair],  m.,  dollar, 
examiner  [egzamine],  to  examine, 
fatigue  [fatige],  tired. 
faux-col  [fo  kol],  m.,  collar. 
k  la  fin  [a  la  fe],  at  last,  finally, 
manchette  [ma Jet],  f.,  cuff, 
meme  [meim],  same. 

k  bon  marche,  cheap,     magasin  de  nouveaut^s,  dry-goods  store, 
aller  faire  des  emplettes,  to  go  shopping. 


montrer  [motre],  to  show.         * 
mouchoir[muJwa!r],  m.,  handker- 
chief. 
nouveaut6  [nuvote],  f.,  novelty, 
paille  [paij],  f.,  straw, 
paire  [peir],  f.,  pair, 
prix  [pri],  m.,  price. 
Soulier  [sulje],  m.,  shoe, 
toilette  [twalet],  f.,  toilet. 


EXERCISE  XIX. 

A.  Que  nous  sommes  fatigues  !  Nous  avons  couru  beaucoup 
aujourd'hui.  J'ai  accompagn^  mon  cousin  ghez  plusieurs  mar- 
chands  pour  avoir  des  articles  de  toilette.  D'abord  nous 
sommes  entres  chez  le  chapelier.  Mon  cousin  a  demande  un 
chapeau  de  paille.  Le  chapelier  lui  a  montr^  un  tres  joli 
chapeau  h  un  dollar,  et  mon  cousin  Pa  achete.  J'en  ai  achet^ 
un  aussi  au  meme  prix.  Ensuite  nous  sommes  alles  chez  le 
marchand  de  chaussures  ou  nous  avons  examine  plusieurs 
paires  de  souliers.  Mais  nous  n'en  avons  pas  achetd.  Puis 
nous  sommes  entres  dans   un  grand  magasin  de  nouveaut^s. 

9  Mon  cousin  y  a  dehiand^  des  faux-cols  et  des  manchettes.  On 
lui  en  a  montre  a  tres  bon  marche,  et  il  en  a  achet^.  Nous  y 
avons  achete  aussi  des  mouchoirs  pour  mon  oncle  et  de  la 
dentelle  pour  ma  tante.     A  la  fin  nous  sommes  entre's  chez  un 

tlj^onfiseur  ou  nous  avons  achete  pour  mes  cousines  des  bonbons* 
que  nous  leur  avons  donnes. 

B.  Continue  the  following :  1.  Qu'est-cequejelui  donne?,  etc. 

2.  Je  parle  a  mes  amis,  je  leur  parle ;  tu  paries  a  tes  amis,  tu 
leur  paries,  etc.  3.  Voici  une  plume;  je  la  lui  donne,  etc. 
4.  Voici  des  bonbons;  je  ne  les  leur  donne  pas,  etc.  5.  Est-ce 
que  je  ne  mange  pas  beaucoup  de  bonbons?,  etc.  6.  Je  com- 
mence mes  legons,  etc.  7.  Est-ce  que  je  mene  mon  cousin  chez 
le  confiseur  %  est-ce  que  tu  menes  ton  cousin,  etc. 

Relate  part  A,  using  '  ma  tante '  and  '  elle '  as  subject,  and 
changing  'cousin'  to  'cousine.' 

C.  (Oral.)    1.   Votre   oncle   est-il   fatigud?      2.    Pourquoil 

3.  Est-ce  que  votre  frere  Ta   accompagn^   partout?     4.    Ou 


§79]  LESSON  XX.  55 

8ont-ils  entr^s  d'abord  ?  5.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  trouve  chez  le 
chapelier  ?  6.  Votre  f rere  qu'a-t-il  demande  chez  le  chapelier  1 
7.  Quels  chapeaux  le  chapelier  lui  a-t-il  montrds  1  8.  Qui  les 
leur  a  montres?  9.  Combien  votre  frere  a-t-il  paye  le 
chapeau"?  10.  Ou  sont-ils  all(^s  ensuite  ?  11.  Qu'est-ce  que  le 
marchand  de  chaussures  leur  a  montr^?  12.  Les  souliers  de 
ce  marchand  sont-ils  chers  ou  bon  march^?  13.  Votre  oncle 
a-t-il  achate  les  souliers  que  le  marchand  lui  a  montres  ?  14. 
Qu'est-ce  que  votre  tante  et  votre  soeur  out  achete  dans  le 
magasin  de  nouveautes?  15.  Pour  qui  est  la  dentelle  que 
votre  tante  a  achetee  ?  16.  Est-ce  qu'elle  la  lui  a  donnee  ] 
17.  Et  pour  qui  sont  les  bonbons?  18.  Quand  est-ce  qu'elles 
vont  les  leur  donner]  1-9.  Mangeons-nous  des  bonbons  au 
dessert?  20.  Ou  est-ce  qu'on  achate  les  bonbons?  Etc.,  etc. 
D.  1.  We  are  going  shopping  again  to-day.  2.  My  rela- 
tives are  buying  a  great  many  things.  3.  They  always  buy 
articles  of  dress  when  they  are  here.  4.  I  take  them  to  all 
the  large  dry-goods  stores.  5.  They  bought  several  articles 
yesterday.  6.  First  I  went  with  my  uncle  to  a  hatter's. 
7.  The  hatter  showed  him  several  straw  hats.  8.  My  uncle 
bought  one  at  a  dollar.  \9.  Afterwards  I  went  with  my 
cousin  to  buy  shoes.  10.  The  shop-keeper  showed  him  some. 
11.  He  bought  two  pairs.  12.  Then  the  shop-keeper  gave 
them  to  him,  and  he  brought  them  home.  1 3.  My  aunt  has 
been  to  a  dry-goods  store  to  buy  handkerchiefs.  14.  The 
shop-keeper  showed  her  handkercniefs  at  a  dollar  a  dozen. 
^15.  She  bought  some  of  them  for  my  uncle.  iB.  Finally  my 
aunt  and  my  cousin  (f.)  went  to  a  confectioner's.  17.  The 
confectioner  showed  them  several  kinds  of  bonbons.  18.  Who 
paid  for  the  bonbons'?  19.  My  cousin  paid  for  them.  20. 
They  are  for  her  little  sister,  and  she  is  going  to  give  them  to 
her  after  dinner. 

LESSON    XX. 

79.  Personal  Pronoun  Objects.  The  remaining  forms 
serve  both  as  direct  and  indirect  object  of  verbs  (for  elision, 
see  §19): 

me  [m9],  me,  to  (for)  me.  nous  [nu],  us,  to  (for)  us. 

te  [ta],  thee,  to  (for)  thee.  vous  [wl],  you,  to  (for)  you. 

se  [so],  himself,  herself,  itself,  one's     se  [s9],  themselves,  to  (for)  them- 
self,  to  (for)  himself,  etc.  selves. 


56 


LESSON   XX. 


[§§80-83 


80.  Pronominal  Adverbs.  They  are  used  with  verbs, 
and  are  equivalent  to  a  preposition  +  a  pronoun,  standing 
usually  for  things : 

y  =  k  (dans,  sur,  etc. )  +  a  pronoun,  means  '  to  (at,  on,  in,  into,  etc. ) 
it  or  them,'  'there.' 

en  =  de  +  a  pronoun,  means  *  of  (from,  etc.)  it  or  them,'  '  some  of  it,' 
*some  of  them,'  'some,'  'any,'  'thence,'  'from  there.' 

81.  Position.  Personal  pronoun  objects  and  pronominal 
adverbs,  coming  before  the  verb,  are  arranged  thus  : 


me    ^  before  rle 


te 

•  la 

se 

lies 

nous 

vous 

before  J  lui 
\leur 


before  y 


before  en. 


H  me  donne  les  plumes. 
II  me  les  donne. 
II  les  leur  donne. 
II  nous  en  donne. 
II  y  en  a. 


He  gives  me  the  pens. 
He  gives  them  to  me. 
He  gives  them  to  them. 
He  gives  us  some  of  it. 
There  is  (are)  some. 


82.  Reflexive  Verb.     The  compound  tenses  of  reflexive 
verbs,  e.g.,  se  flatter,  to  'flatter  one's  self,'  are  formed  with 

4tre: 


Present  Indicative. 
I  flatter  myself,  etc. 
je  me  flatte      [sa  ma  flat], 
tu  te  flattes    [ty  ta  flat], 
il  (elle)  se  flatte      [il  s9  flat], 
nous  nous  flattens  [nu  nu  flato] 
vous  vous  flattez    [vu  vu  flate]. 
Us  (elles)  se  flattent  [il  so  flat]. 

83.  Agreement.     The  past  participle  agrees  with  a  pre- 
ceding reflexive  object,  unless  the  object  be  indirect : 

Elles  se  sont  flatties.  They  have  flattered  themselves. 

But :  Us  se  sont  lav^  les  mains.        They  have  washed  their  hands. 


Past  Indefinite. 

I  (have)  flattered  myself,  etc. 

je  me  suis^  „  ^.t.,,  x 
tu  t'es     l^^**^(^) 
il(elle)s'estif^^*"^- 
nous  nous  sommes^i^^^^^ 
vous  vous  etes        v  „ 
ils (elles)  se  sont       J 


§84] 


LESSON   XX. 


67 


84.  Observe  the  possessive  force  of  the  article,  or  of  the 
article  with  an  indirect  object,  when  there  is  no  ambiguity  as 
to  the  possessor : 

Je  vous  donne  la  main.  I  give  you  my  hand. 

La  bonne  leur  lave  les  mains.  'The  maid  is  washing  their  hands. 

lis  se  lavent  les  mains.  They  are  washing  their  hands. 

Vocabulary. 


apr^s  [apre],  after. 

armoire  [armwair],  f.,  cupboard, 
clothes-press. 

bonjour  [bosuir],  m.,  good  morn- 
ing. 

brosse  [bros],  f.,  brush. 

brosser  [brose],  to  brush. 

chercher  [Jerje],  to  seek,  look  for. 

cheveux  [J8v0],  m.  pi.,  hair. 

dejeuner  [de30ne],  m.,  breakfast. 

dent  [da],  f.,  tooth. 

descendre  [desaidr],  to  descend, 
go  down  (stairs). 

dire  [di:r],  to  say,  tell. 

dormir  [dormiir],  to  sleep. 

figure  [figyir],  f.,  face.  ♦ 

g^et  [sile],  m. ,  vest,  waistcoat. 

tout  de  suite  [tu  da  sqit],  at  once. 
k  I'instant  [a  1  esta],  at  once,  in- 
stantly. 


habiller  [abije],  to  dress. 

habit  [abi],  m. ,  coat. 

instant  [esta],  m.,  instant. 

laver  [lave],  to  wash. 

main  [me],  f.,  hand. 

mhre  [me:r],  f.,  mother. 

mettre  [metr],  to  put  (on),  place. 

peig^ne  [pe:ji],  m.,  comb. 

phre  [peir],  m.,  father. 

prdt  [pre],  ready. 

se  lever  [lave],  to  rise. 

se  promener  [promne],  to  go  for  a 

walk,  drive,  etc. 
savon  [savo],  m. ,  soap, 
serviette  [servjet],  f.,  towel, 
temps  [ta],  m.,  time. 

donner  la  main  k,  to  shake  hands 

with. 
je  suis  lev6,  I  am  up. 


EXERCISE  XX. 

A.  Comme  nous  avons  bien  dormi !  II  est  temps  de  se  lever 
maintenant.  Nous  nous  levons  tout  de  suite,  et  nous  faisons 
notre  toilette.  Je  vais  me  laver  les  mains  et  la  figure,  mais 
ou  sont  I'eau  et  le  savon  ? — Les  voici ;  je  vais  vous  les  donner. — 
IVIaintenant,  ou  est  la  serviette  1 — La  voici. — Je  cherche  main- 
tenant  mes  brosses  et  mon  peigne. — Les  voila  sur  la  table  de 
toilette. — Je  me  brosse  les  cheveux  et  les  dents.  Je  vais 
mettre  mon  gilet  et  mon  habit,  mais  ou  sont-ils  1 — Les  voici 
dans  Tarmoire,  je  vous  les  donne  a  I'instant. — Me  voila  pr^t. 
Etes-vous  pret  aussi  1 — Oui,  me  voilk  habill^. — Nous  descendons 


58  LESSON  XX.  [§84 

k  la  salle  h.  manger.  Mon  pere  et  ma  mere  y  sont  d^ja.  Nous 
allons  leur  dire  bonjour.  Apres  le  dejeuner  nous  allons  nous 
promener. 

B.  Continue  the  following:  1.  Je  me  leve,  etc.  2.  Je  me 
suis  lav^  les  mains,  etc.  3.  Yoila  du  savon ;  je  lui  en  donne, 
etc.  4.  Je  leur  en  ai  donn^,  etc.  5.  Me  voila  pret,  te  voil^ 
pret,  etc.  6.  Me  voila  pr^te,  te  voila  prete,  etc.  7.  Je  des- 
cends k  la  salle  a  manger,  etc.  8.  Je  me  suis  promend  hier,  tu 
t'es,  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Avez-vous  bien  dormi ?  2.  Est-il  temps  de  se 
lever  maintenant  1  3.  Ailez-vous  vous  lever  tout  de  suite  ?  4. 
Qui  se  lave  les  mains  ?  5.  Est-ce  que  Jean  et  Robert  se  sont 
lave  les  mains?  6.  Allez-vous  leur  donner  de  I'eau  et  du 
savon  1  7.  Qui  en  donne  aux  autres  enfants  ?  8.  En  donne- 
t-elle  aussi  ^  Marie  ?  9.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  cherchez  ?  10.  Qui 
est-ce  qui  va  me  donner  la  serviette  et  les  brosses?  11.  Ou  est 
mongilet?  12.  Qui  vous  a  donne  ce  beau  gilet?  13.  Est-ce 
que  les  enfants  sont  habill^s  ?  14.  Que  font-ils  ensuite'?  15. 
Qui  est  dans  la  salle  a  manger  1  16.  Les  enfants  donnent-ils 
la  main  a  leur  pere  ?  17.  Est-ce  que  je  lui  donne  la  main 
aussi?  18.  Que  vent  faire  les  enfants  apres  le  dejeuner? 
19.  Ne  sont-ils  pas  encore  pre ts  *?  20.  Ou  est-ce  que  vous  vous 
fetes  promenes  hier?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  Have  you  slept  well?  2.  Yes,  and  it  is  time  to  rise 
now.  3.  I  rise,  you  rise,  we  rise,  we  are  up.  4.  Now  I 
make  my  toilet.  5.  I  am  washing  my  hands  and  my  face. 
6.  You  have  already  washed  your  hands  and  your  face.  7.  I 
give  you  your  comb  and  brushes.  8.  I  give  you  them.  9. 
You  are  brushing  your  hair.  "lO.  I  brush  my  teeth.-  11. 
Have  you  brushed  your  teeth  yet  ?  1 2.  You  need  your  vest 
and  coat  now.  13.  Why  do  yoa  not  give  me  them?  14. 
There  they  are  in  the  clothes-press.  15.  I  am  going  to  give 
you  them  at  once.  16.  We  are  ready  now,  and  we  are  going 
down  stairs.  17.  We  shake  hands  with  our  father  and  mother. 
18.  They  shake  hands  with  us.  19.  We  shake  hands  with 
each  other.  20.  They  are  going  for  a  walk  in  the  garden 
after  breakfast.     21.  We  are  going  for  a  walk  there  too. 


§§85-89]  LESSON  XXI.  5& 

LESSON    XXL 

85.  Imperfect    Indicative   of  donner,   flnir,    uendre. 

I  was  giving,  etc.  I  was  finishing,  etc.  I  was  selling,  etc. 
donn  ais  [done].  finiss  ais  [finise].  vend  ais  [vade]. 
donn  ais  [done].  finiss  ais  [finise].  vend  ais  [vade]. 
donn  ait  [done].  finiss  ait  [finise].  vend  ait  [vade]. 
donn  ions  [donjo].  finiss  ions  [finisjo].  vend  ions  [vadjo]. 
donn  iez  [donje].  finiss  iez  [finisje].  vend  iez  [vadje]. 
donn  aient  [done].  finiss  aient  [finise].  vend  aient  [vade]. 

86.  Imperfect  Indicative  of  auoi'r,  etre. 

I  had,  used  to  have,  etc.  I  was,  used  to  be,  etc. 

av  ais  [ave].     av  ions   [avjo].  ^t  ais  [ete].     ^t  ions   [etjo]. 

av  ais  [ave].     av  iez      [avje].  ^t  ais  [ete].     ^t  iez     [etje]. 

av  ait  [ave].     av  aient  [ave].  ^t  ait  [ete].     6t  aient  [ete]. 

To  form  the  Pluperfect  tense,  add  a  past  participle,  see  §  63. 

87.  Use  of  Imperfect.     1.  It  denotes  what  used  to  hap- 
pen or  continued  to  happen  : 

Nous  parlions  souvent  de  cela.  We  often  used  to  speak  of  that. 

Mon  oncle  6tait  tr^s  vieux.  My  uncle  was  very  old. 

H  allait  souvent  k  pied  k  la  ville.      He  would  often  walk  to  town. 

2.   It  denotes  what  was  happening  when  something  else 
happened  or  was  happening  : 

On  chantait  quand  je  suis  arriv^.      They  were  singing  when  I  arrived. 

II  parlait  pendant  que  nous  chan-     He  was    speaking  while  we   sang 

tions.  (were  singing). 

88.  Imperfect  of  f aire  (irreg.). 

I  was  doing,  etc. 
je  fais  ais  [sa  faze].  nous  fais  ions  [nu  fazjo]. 

tu  fais  ais  [ty  faze].  vous  fais  iez     [vu  fozje], 

il  fais  ait  [il  faze].  ils  fais  aient  [il  faze]. 

89.  For  imperfect  of  commencer,  manger,  cf.  §§  78, 156: 

je  commen^is  [3a  komase],  etc.       je  mangeais  [mass],  etc. 


60  LESSON  XXI.  [§89 

EXERCISE  XXI. 

[The  vocabularies  for  this  and  the  remaining  exercises  will  be  found 
at  the  end  of  the  volume.] 

A.  Nous  avons  ete  a  I'eglise  ce  matin.  Quand  nous  sommes 
arrives  on  chantait  deja  le  premier  cantique.  II  y  avait 
beaucoup  de  monde,  et  nous  avons  trouvd  un  banc  avec  diffi- 
cult6.  Le  pasteur  a  lu  (read)  un  chapitre  des  proverbes.  Tout  le 
monde  ecoutait  attentivement  pendant  la  lecture  du  chapitre. 
Ensuite  le  pasteur  a  prie  Dieu,  et  on  a  chants  des  versets 
d'un  autre  cantique.  Apres  cela  le  pasteur  a  choisi  comme 
texte  un  verset  du  "  Sermon  sur  la  montagne."  Voici  le  texte 
qu'il  a  choisi :  "  Tout  arbre  qui  est  bon  porte  de  bons  fruits ; 
mais  un  mauvais  arbre  porte  dfe  mauvais  fruits."  Le  pasteur 
I'a  explique,  et  en  a  tire  de  bonnes  le9ons.  II  a  compart 
les  hommes  avec  les  arbres.  Le  me'rite  des  hommes  consiste 
dans  leurs  bonnes  actions,  comme  le  merite  des  arbres  dans 
leurs  bons  fruits.  Ce  sermon  a  ete  un  encouragement  k  faire 
le  bien.  Le  sermon  fini,  on  a  fait  la  quete,  on  a  chante  encore 
et  le  pasteur  a  donne  la  benediction. 

B.  Continue  the  following :  1 .  Je  chantais  le  premier 
cantique,  etc.     2.  J'avais  deja  chants  le  premier  ccyitique,  etc. 

3.  Le  pasteur  priait  Dieu  quand  je  suis  arrive,  le  pasteur,  etc., 
quand  tu,  etc.  4.  Je  comparais  les  hommes  avec  les  arbres, 
etc.  5.  Est-ce  que  je  faisais  la  quete?,  etc.  6.  Est-ce  que 
je  ne  finissais  pas  mes  le9ons  1,  est-ce  que  tu . . .  tes  legons  %  etc. 
7.  A  qui  est-ce  que  je  vendais  mes  pommes  ?,  h  qui  est-ce  que 
tu .  .  .  tes  pommes  1,  etc.  8.  Y  avait-il  beaucoup  de  plumes 
dans  ma  boite  ?,  dans  ta  boite,  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Ou  avez-vous  4t4  ce  matin?  2.  Y  avait-il 
beaucoup  de  monde  ?     3.  Que  faisait-on  quand  vous  dtes  entr^s? 

4.  Qu'est-ce  que  le  pasteur  a  fait  apr^s  cela?  5.  Est-ce  que 
nous  ^coutions  pendant  la  lecture  du  chapitre?  6.  Votre 
tante  ^coutait-elle  attentivement  aussi?  7.  Tout  le  monde 
^coutait-il  attentivement  ?  8.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  faisait  pendant 
que  le  pasteur  priait  Dieu  ?  9.  Et  aprds  cela  qu'est-ce  que  le 
pasteur  a  fait?  10.  Quel  ^tait  le  texte  qu'il  a  choisi?  11.  Le 
sermon  ^tait-il  int^ressant?  12.  Qui  a  expliqu^  le  texte?  13. 
Quels  fruits  les  bons  arbres  portent-ils?  14.  Et  les  mauvais 
arbres  quels  fruits  portent-ils?  15.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  a  fait 
apr^s  le  sermon?      16.  Est-ce  qu'on  chantait  pendant  qu'on 


§90-91]  LESSON  XXII.  61 

faisait  la  quSte ?  17.  Qui  a  donne  la  benediction?  18.  Que 
faisait-on  quand  vous  etes  arrive  chez  vous?  19.  Alliez-vous 
souvent  h  I'eglise  quand  vous  etiez  h  la  campagne  ]  20.  Votre 
vieil  oncle  allait-il  h  I'eglise  tous  les  dimanches  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

J).  1.  1  often  used  to  go  to  church  when  I  was  in  the 
coi^try.  2.  My  relatives  used  to  go  (y)  every  Sunday.  3.  My 
old  uncle  used  to  go  (y)  in  his  carriage.  4.  I  went  to  church  last 
Sunday.  5.  While  I  was  at  church  my  brother  was  taking  a 
walk  on  the  mountain.  6.  There  were  a  great  many  people 
in  the  little  church.  7.  There  were  people  everywhere,  in  the 
seats  and  at  the  door.  8.  I  met  one  of  my  cousins  at  the 
door.  9.  When  we  went  in  the  pastor  was  finishing  the 
reading  of  the  chapter.  10.  They  (on)  had  already  sung  and 
prayed.  1 1 .  Then  they  sang  two  verses  of  another  hymn,  and 
the  pastor  began  the  sermon.  12.  What  was  the  text?  13. 
The  text  was  a  verse  from  the  "Sermon  on  the  mount."  14. 
I  While  the  pastor  was  speaking,  everybody  listened  attentively. 
15.  He  finished  the  sermon,  and  then  the  collection  was  taken 
up.  16.  While  they  were  taking  up  the  collection,  the  pastor 
read  some  verses.  17.  We  sang  again,  and  after  the  last 
hymn  the  pastor  pronounced  the  benediction.  18.  As  I  was 
going  home  I  met  my  brother.  1 9.  We  were  hungry  when 
we  arrived  at  the  house.  20.  My  uncle  had  already  arrived, 
and  we  had  {avons  fait)  a  good  dinner.  ,^ 

LESSON  XXII. 

90.  Future  Indicative  of  donner,  flnir,  uendre. 

I  shall  give,  etc.  I  shall  finish,  etc.  I  shall  sell,  etc. 

donner  ai     [donare].  finir  ai     [finire].  vendr  ai     [vadre]. 

donner  as    [donora].  finir  as    [finira].  vendr  as    [vadra]. 

donner  a      [donara].  finir  a      [finira].  vendr  a      [vadra]. 

donner  ons  [donaro].  finir  ons  [finiro].  vendr  ons  [vadro]. 

donner  ez    [donore].  finir  ez    [finire].  vendr  ez    [vadre]. 

donner  ont  [donaro].  finir  ont  [finiro].  vendr  ont  [vadro]. 

91.  Future  Indicative  of  auolr,  Stre. 

1  shall  have,  etc.  .                I  shall  be,  etc. 

aur  ai  [ore],     aur  ons  [oro].  ser  ai  [sore],     ser  ons  [saro]. 

aur  as  [ora].     aur  ez    [ore].  ser  as  [sara].     ser  ez    [sare]. 

aura   [ora].     aur  ont  [oro],  sera    [sara].     ser  ont  [saro]. 


62  LESSON  XXII.  [§§92-94 

92.  Future  Indicative  oialler  (irreg.),  and  f aire  (irreg.). 

I  shall  go,  etc.  I  shall  do,  etc. 

ir  ai  [ire],     ir  ons  [iro].  fer  ai  [fare],     fer  ons  [foro]. 

ir  as  [ira].     ir  ez    [ire].  fer  as  [fara].     fer  ez    [fare]. 

ir  a    [ira].     ir  ont  [iro].  fer  a    [fara].     fer  ont  [faro]. 

93.  For  the  future  of  lever  and  acheter,  cf.  §  78,  3  : 
je  leverai  [levare],  etc.  j'ach^terai  [ajetare],  etc. 

94.  Use  of  Future.     It  is  used  in  general  as  in  English, 

but  observe  its  use  in  a  subordinate  sentence,  when  futurity 

is  implied  (but  for  '  if '  clause  see  §  116,  3) : 

Je  lui  parlerai  quand  il  arrivera.     I  shall  speak  to  him  when  he  come& 

EXERCISE   XXII.  ^^ 

A.  II  est  d^j^  tard.  IVEaintenant  nous  allons  nous  coucher. 
Nous  avons  fait  nos  plans  pour  demain.  Nous  nous  leve- 
rons  de  bonne  heure.  Le  dejeuner  sera  pret  quand  nous  nous 
l^verons,  et  nous  sortirons  bient6t  apre§.  S'il  fait  beau  temps, 
nous  irons  k  pied,  mais  s'il  fait  mauvais  temps,  nous  prendrons' 
le  tramway.  Nous  passerons  d'abord  chez  la  modiste.  Si  nos 
chapeaux  ne  sont  pas  prets,  nous  attend  rons  un  peu.  Mais  ils 
seront  prets,  parce  que  je  les  ai  vus  hier,  et  ils  etaient  bien 
avanc^s.  Avant  midi  nous  serons  chez  la  couturier^  pour 
essayer  nos  robes.  Nous  y  resterons  probablement  une  heure. 
Alors  nous  irons  prendre  une  glace  au  cafe.  Ensuite  nous 
entrerons  dans  un  magasin  de  nouveaut^s  pour  acheter  de  la 
dentelle  et  des  rubans.  Puis  nous  monterons  encore  dans  le 
tramway^et  nous  serons  de  re  tour  de  bonne  heure  dans  I'apres- 
midi,  parce  que  nous  attendons  des  amies.  Si  nous  ne  sommes 
pas  trop  fatiguees,  nous  irons  le  soir  au  theatre  ou  au  concert. 
Si  nous  nous  ^.musons  bien,  nous  ne  serons  pas  chez  nous 
avant  minuit.  M 

B.  Continue  the  following :  1.  Je  vais  me  coucher,  etc. 
2.  Je  me  leverai  de  bonne  heure  demain,  etc.  3.  Est-ce  que 
je  sortirai  apres  le  dejeuner?,  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  j'acheterai 
des  rubans  %  etc.  5.  J'attendrai  au  caf^,  etc.  6.  Est-ce  que 
je  ne  serai  pas  de  re  tour  de  bonne  heure  %  etc.     7.  Si  je  suis 


§95]  LESSON  XXIII.  63 

fatigude,  je  ne  sortirai  pas,  si  tu,  etc.  8.  S'il  fait  beau  temps 
demain,  j'irai  en  ville,  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Pour  quand  faites-vous  vos  plans?  2.  Sor- 
tirez-vous  demain  s'il  fait  beau  temps  ?  3.  Que  ferez-vous  s'il 
fait  mauvais  temps  ?  4.  Vous  leverez-vous  de  bonne  heure  ? 
5.  Le  dejeuner  sera-t-il  pret?  6!  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  ferez 
aprfes  le  dejeuner  ?  7.  Irez-vous  k  pied  ou  dans  le  tramway  ? 
8.  Qui  va  vous  accompagner  ?  9.  Ou  irez-vous  d'abord  1 
10.  Votre  soeur  ira-t-elle  aussi  chez  la  modiste?  11.  Qu'est- 
ce  que  vous  ferez  si  votre  chapeau  n'est  pas  pret?  12.  Nous 
attend rez-vous  chez  la  modiste  ou  au  caf^l  13.  Pourquoi  allez- 
vous  chez  la  couturifere?  14.  Quand  y  serez-vous  ?  15.  Irez- 
vous  au  cafd  ensuite?  16.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  acheterez  au 
magasin  de  nouveautes?  17.  Quand  derez-vous  de  retourl 
18.  Vos  amies  seront-elles  chez  vous?  19.  Ou  irez-vous  le 
soir  %     20.  Quand  serez-vous  de  retour  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  After  (the)  dinner  I  shall  make  my  plans  for  to- 
morrow. 2.  Then  I  shall  go  to  bed.  3.  To-morrow  I  shall 
rise  early.  4.  After  (the)  breakfast  I  shall  go  out  if  it  is  fine. 
5.  My  sister  will  go  out  too.^  6.  We  shall  take  the  street-cars 
if  it  is  not  fine.  7.  First  I  shall  go  to  the  milliner's.  8.  I 
shall  wait  for  my  sister  there.  9.  Our  hats  will  probably  be  ) 
ready.  10.  They  were  well  advanced  yesterday.  11.  After 
that  we  shall  go  to  the  dressmaker's.  12.  We  shall  remain 
an  hour  there  to  try  on  our  dresses.  13.  If  we  have  (the) 
time  we  shall  probably  go  to  the  caf^.  14.  What  will  you 
do  next]  15.  I  shall  go  to  the  dry-goods  store  to  buy  some 
ribbons.  16^  My  sister  will  return  home.  17.  Some  friends 
will  be  waiting  for  her  there.     18.  I  shalTgo  to  the  concert 

in  the  evening  with  my  brother  if  I  am  not  too  tired.  19.  My 
sister  will  stay  at  home  with  my  mother.  20.  They  will 
expect  us  before  midnight. 

LESSON   XXIII. 
95.   Disjunctive   Personal   Pronouns.     The  personal 

pronouns  already  given  are  used  as  subject  or  object  with 
the  verb,  and  are  hence  called  *  conjunctive.'  The  following 
forms,  not  being  immediately  connected  with  a  verb,  are 
called  *  disjunctive ' : 


64  LESSON  XXIII.  [§§96-97 

moi  [niTva],  I,  me.  nous  [nu],  we,  us. 

toi    [twa],  thou,  thee,  you.  vous  [vu],  you. 

lui     [Iqi],  he,  him.  eux  [0],  they  (m.),  them  (m.). 

elle  [el],  she,  her.  elles  [el],  they  (f.),  them  (f.). 

96.  The  following  are  some  of  their  uses  : — 

1.  Absolutely,  a  verb  being  implied,  but  not  expressed: 
Qui  est  Ik  ?— Moi  (eux,  elles).  Who  is  there  ?— I  (they). 

2.  After  a  preposition  : 

Pour  elles ;  avec  moi ;  sans  eux.       For  them ;  with  me ;  without  them. 

3.  As  logical  subject  after  ce  +  ^tre  : 

C'est  moi,  c'est  toi.  It  is  I,  it  is  thou  (you). 

C'est  lui,  c'est  elle.  '  It  is  he,  it  is  she. 

C'est  nous,  c'est  vous.  It  is  we,  it  is  you. 

Ce  sont  eux,  ce  sont  elles.  It  is  they  (m. ),  it  is  they  (f. ). 

97.  Hitherto  in  the  exercises  il(s),  elle(s),  standing  before 
a  verb  as  subject,  have  been  used  for  'he,'  'she,*  *it,'  'they' 
(§  40).  When  the  logical  subject  follows  the  verb  6tre,  '  he,' 
*she,'  'it,'  *they'  =  ce,  as"  representative  subject,  in  cases  like 
the  following : 

C'est  Marie  et  sa  m6re.  It  is  Mary  and  her  mother. 

C'est  nous,  ce  sont  eux.  It  is  we,  it  is  they. 

C'est  un  homme  celebre.  He  is  a  celebrated  man. 

C'est  une  jolie  dame.  She  is  a  pretty  lady. 

Ce  sont  des  amis  de  Jean.  They  are  friends  of  John. 

Ce  sont  mes  meilleures  amies.  They  are  my  best  friends. 

C'est  aujourd'hui  lundi.  It  is  Monday  to-day  (to-day  is,  etc. ). 

C'est  k  nous  qu'il  parle.  It  is  to  us  that  he  is  speaking. 

C'est  ici  qu'il  demeure.  It  is  here  that  he  lives  (he  lives  here). 

EXERCISE  XXIII. 

[Before  doing  this  exercise  learn  the  present  indicative  of  voir, '  to  see,' 
p.  82,  and  its  past  participle  vu,  'seen.'] 

A.  Nous  irons  en  ville  a  pied  ce  matin,  n'est-ce  pas  ? — Oh 
oui,  il  fait  beau,  et  nous  causerons  en  route.  Qui  est  ce 
monsieur  qui  est  la-bas  de  Tautre  c6t^  de  la  rue  1 — C'est  un  de 
nos  anciens  voisins.     II  demeure  k  present  dans  une  autre 


§97] 


LESSON  XXIIL  65 


rue. — Voili  un  autre  monsieur  qui  attend  le  tramway ;  c'est 
votre  professeur  de  f ran9ais,  n'est-ce  pas  1 — Oui,  c'est  lui.  II 
va  donner  pfobablement  une  legon. — Voila  maintenant  le 
tramway  qui  passe.  Avez-vous  vu  ces  deux  messieurs  qui 
nous  ont  salu^s  1 — Oui,  je  les  ai  vus.  Ce  sont  les  messieurs 
que  nous  avons  rencontres  I'autre  soir. — Voyez-vous  cette  dame 
qui  monte  en  voiture?  C'est  I'amie  de  votre  mere,  n'est-ce 
pas'? — Non,  ce  n'est  pas  elle.  L'amie  de  ma  mere  est  plus 
grande. — Qui  est  ce  monsieur  qui  approche  ?  II  va  nous  parler, 
n'est-ce  pas  1 — Non,  ce  n'est  pas  a  nous  qu'il  va  parler,  mais  k 
ce  monsieur  qui  est  derriere  nous. — Voila  encore  un  autre 
monsieur  qui  vous  salue. — Ce  n'est  pas  moi  qu'il  salue,  c'est 
vous. — Mais  non,  c'est  bien  vous.  II  m'est  inconnu.  C'est  la 
premiere  fois  que  je  le  vois. — Nous  voici  arrives  maintenant. 
C'est  ici  que  vous  alliez  entrer  pour  acheter  vos  gants. 

^  B.  Continue  the  following:  1.  Je  vais  donner  une  le^on, 
n*est-ce  pas  ?,  etc.  2.  C'est  ici  que  je  demeure,  etc.  3.  C'est 
moi  qui  vais  en  ville,  c'est  toi  qui  vas  en  ville,  etc.  4.  J'irai  k 
pied,  etc.  5.  Je  vois  un  monsieur  qui  monte  en  voiture,  tu 
vois,  etc.     6.  Ce  n'est  pas  moi  qu'il  a  salu^,  ce  n'est  pas  toi,  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Ou  est-ce  que  vous  allez  ce  matin  ?  2.  Allez- 
vous  k  pied  ou  en  voiture  ?  3.  Qu'est-ce  que  nous  ferons  en 
route  pour  nous  amuser?  4.  Qui  est  ce  vieux  monsieur 
la-bas?  5.  Ou  est-ce  qu'il  demeure  k  present?  6.  Voi]4  un 
monsieur  qui  attend  le  tramway ;  qui  est-ce  1  7.  Voyez-vous 
ces  messieurs  qui  nous  saluent  ?  8.  Ce  sont  des  amis  de  votre 
pere,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  9.  Qui  est  cette  dame  qui  se  promene  en 
voiture?  10.  Quand  est-ce  que  je  I'ai  vue?  11.  Est-ce  bien 
elle?  12.  Ce  monsieur  qui  approche  est  votre  voisin,  n'est-ce 
pas?  13.  Est-ce  moi  qu'il  a  salu^?  14.  Qui  est-ce  que  vous 
avez  salu^  devant  I'hdtel  de  ville?  15.  Est-ce  un  de  vos 
anciens  amis  ?  16.  Est-ce  ici  que  vous  allez  acheter  vos  gants  ? 
17.  N'est-ce  pas  dans  cet  autre  magasin  1^-bas?  18.  Est-ce 
la  premiere  fois  que  vous  allez  dans  ce  magasin  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  "We  are  going  down  town  on  foot.  2.  We  are 
chatting  on  the  way.  3.  We  see  a  gentleman  on  the  other 
side  of  the  street.  4.  He  is  one  of  my  old  neighbours.  6.  He 
lived  on  the  other  side  of  the  street.  6.  He  is  your  old 
French  teacher,  is  he  not?     7.   No,  he  is  an  old  merchant. 

5 


66  LESSON  XXIV.  [§98 

8.  A  carriage  passes  next.  9.  Who  are  those  two  gentlemen 
in  the  carriage  who  bowed  to  us  ?  10.  They  are  the  gentlemen 
we  met  yesterday  evening.  11.  Was  it  I  that  they  bowed  tol 
12.  Who  bowed  to  them,  you  or  I  ?  13.  I  see  a  lady  (who 
is)  waiting  for  the  street-cars.  14.  She  is  a  friend  of  your 
family,  is  she  not  1  15.  She  is  a  friend  of  my  mother.  XI 6.  Do 
you  see  that  gentleman  who  is  approaching?  17.  Yes,  who 
is  if?  18.  He  is  a  celebrated  general  who  lives  in  this  city. 
19.  Is  it  here  that  you  buy  your  gloves?  20.  No,  it  is  in 
that  large  shop  over  yonder. 

LESSON    XXIY. 

>\^ 

98.  Impersonal  Verbs.  They  are  conjugated  in  the 
third  person  singular  only,  with  the  subject  il  =  'it,'  used 
indefinitely  and  absolutely.  Among  such  are  verbs  describing 
natural  phenomena,  as  in  English  : 

Quel  temps  fait-il  ?  What  kind  of  weather  is  it  ? 

H  fait  beau  temps.  It  is  fine  (weather). 

II  pleut,  il  pleuvait.  It  is  raining,  it  was  raining. 

II  a  plu,  il  pleuvra.  It  has  rained,  it  will  rain. 

H  neige,  il  a  neig^.  It  is  snowing,  it  has  snowed. 

n  fait  chaud,  11  fait  du  vent.  It  is  hot,  it  is  windy. 

EXERCISE  XXIV. 

A.  C'est  mardi  dernier  que  nous  avons  fait  notre  pique-nique. 
Nous  nous  sommes  lev^s  presque  au  lever  du  soleil.  La  pre- 
miere question  a  ^t^ :  quel  temps  fera-t-il  1  Le  temps  dtait 
'convert,  et  il  faisait  tr^s  lourd.  II  y  avait  de  gros  nuages  k 
Touest,  et  le  tonnerre  grondait  d4jk.  II  a  fait  des  Eclairs,  et 
apres  un  grand  coup  de  tonnerre  la  pluie  a  commence.  II  a 
plu  pendant  une  heure.  Ensuite  le  soleil  s'est  montr^,  et  un 
bon  vent  a  chass^  les  nuages.  Bientdt  il  a  fait  tres  beau,  et 
nous  sommes  partis.  Le  pique-nique  a^eu  lieu  dans  les  bois  au 
bord  du  lac.  Nous  avions  I'intention  de  nous  promener  en 
bateau,  mais  il  faisait  du  vent,  et  il  y  avait  des  vagues.  C'est 
pourquoi  nous  ne  sommes  pas  all^s  sur  I'eau.  II  a  fait  chaud, 
mais  nous  ^tions  k  I'ombre,  et  un  vent  frais  nous  arrivait  du 
lac    Vers  midi  nous  avons  mang^  notre  gouter.    Dana  I'aprfes- 


§98]  LESSON  XXIV.  67 

midi  nous  avons  jou^  et  chants.     Avant  le  coucher  du  soleil 
nous  sommes  arrives  chez  nous.      ^^ 

B,  Commit  to  memory  :  ^^^ 

La  semaine  au  lundi  commence, 

Et  mari^i  I'ouvrage  avanqe, 

Ensuite  vient  le  mercredi, 

Le  jeudi,  puis  le  vendredi ; 

Le  sanfliedi  comble  nos  vcbux, 

Et  le  dimanche  nous  prions  Dieu.  4.  » 

C,  (Oral.)  1.  Aimez-votis  les  pique-niques  ?  2.  Quand  avez- 
vous  fait*votre  pique-nique  cette  ann6e?  3.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on 
demande  quand  on  va  partir  ?  4.  Quel  temps  faisait-il  quand 
vous  vous  etes  lev^s?  5.  Est-ce  qu'il  a  fait  des  Eclairs*?  6. 
Est-ce  qu'il  a  plu?  7.  Quand  la  pluie  a-t-elle  commence?  8. 
Pendant  combien  de  temps  est-ce  qu'il  a  plu  ?  9.  Quel  temps 
faisait-il  quand  vous  etes  partis'?  10.  Ou  votre  pique-nique 
a-t-il  eu  lieu?  11.  6tes-vous  all^s  sur  I'eau?  12.  Pourquoi 
pas?  13.  Y  avait-il  de  grosses  vagues ?  14.  Quand  avez- vous 
mang^  votre  gouter?  15.  Vous  dtes-vous  bien  amuses?  16. 
Etes-vous  arrives  tr^s  tard  chez  vous?  17.  Quand  etes-voua 
arrives?  18.  Quel  jour  est-ce  aujourd'hui?  19.  Etdemaini 
20.  Et  aprfes-demain  1  21.  Quels  sont  les  autres  jours  de  la 
semaine?     Etc.,  etc. 

D,  1.  I  like  picnics.     2.  I  always  enjoy  myself  at  picnics. 

3.  If  the  weather  is  fine,  we  shall  have  a  picnic  to-morrow. 

4.  What  kind  of  weather  is  it  now?  5.  It  is  raining.  6. 
There  will  be  no  rain  to-morrow.  7.  The  sun  is  showing  itself 
already.  8.  This  afternoon  it  rained  for  (pendant)  two  hours. 
9.  Where  will  your  picnic  take  place?  10.  It  will  take  place, 
in  the  woods,  at  the  lake  shore.  11.  We  had  a  picnic  there 
last  summer  too.  12.  If  it  is  not  windy,  we  shall  go  for  a 
row.  13.  Last  summer  we  did  not  go  upon  the  water.  14. 
The  waves  were  too  large.  15.  Will  you  eat  your  lunch  before 
noon?  16.  What  will  you  do  in  the  afternoon?  17.  We  shall 
sing  and  play.  18.  When  will  you  reach  home  ?  19.  We 
shall  set  out  before  sunset,  and  we  shall  reach  home  early. 
20.  The  days  of  the  week  are:  Sunday,  Monday,  Tuesday, 
Wednesday,  Thursday,  Friday,  Saturday. 


68  LESSON  XXV.  [§99 

LESSON    XXV. 

99.  The  Infinitive.  Some  of  the  commoner  uses  of  the 
infinitive  are : — 

1.  Without  any  preposition,  after  such  verbs  as  vouloir, 
•will/ pou voir,  *can,  may,'  d^sirer,  'wish,  desire,' savoir, 
*know  how  to,'  devoir,  '  ought,'  falloir,  'be  necessary,'  aller, 
*go';  after  verbs  of  perceiving,  such  as  voir,  'see,'  ^COUter, 
'listen  (to)/  regarder,  *look  at';  also  after  faire,  'make, 
cause  to/  laisser,  '  let ' :  ^ 
D^sire-t-il  aller  en  ville ?                    Does  he  wish  to  go  down  town? 

H  lui  faut  travailler.  He  must  work. 

Je  vais  chercher  des  plumes.  I  am  going  to  get  some  pens. 

Je  vois  venir  des  soldats.  I  see  some  soldiers  coming. 

Je  fais  sonner  la  cloche.  I  make  the  bell  ring. 

2.  Preceded  by  de,  after  6tre  impersonally  +  an  adjective; 
after  many  verbs  like  cesser,  'cease,'  regretter,  'regret/ 
prier,  '  beg';  after  nouns  to  form  adjective  phrases;  and  after 
most  adjectives : 

H  est  facile  de  parler.  It  is  easy  to  talk. 

H  a  cess^  de  chanter.  He  has  ceased  singing. 

Le  crime  de  voler.  The  crime  of  stealing. 

Yous  etes  libre  de  partir.  You  are  free  to  go. 

3.  Preceded  by  k,  after  verbs  like  r^ussir,  'succeed,'  aimer, 
'like,'  enseigner,  'teach/  etc.;  and  after  some  adjectives: 
fPaime  k  patiner.  I  like  to  skate  (like  skating). 

•  Je  m'amuse  k  patiner.  I  amuse  myself  (by)  skating. 

Cela  est  facile  k  faire.  That  is  easy  to  do. 

4.  Observe  that  the  same  adjective  may  take  k  or  de, 
according  to  the  construction  in  which  it  is  used  : 

H  est  facile  k  contenter.  He  is  easy  to  satisfy, 

n  est  facile  de  le  contenter.  It  is  easy  to  satisfy  him. 

Cest  facile  k  faire.  That  {or  it)  is  easy  to  do. 

5.  A  verb  governed  by  a  preposition  must  be  in  the  infini- 
tive, except  after  en  (cf.  §  101) : 

Je  I'ai  fait  sans  penser.  I  did  it  without  thinking. 


§§100-103]  LESSON  XXV.  69 

100.  Present  Participle  of  donner,  flnir,  uendre,  etc. 

Giving.  Finishing.  Selling. 

donn  ant  [dona].  finiss  ant  [finisa].  vend  ant  [vada]. 

Having.  Being. 

ay  ant  [eja].  ^t  ant  [eta]. 

101.  Agreement.  Used  as  an  adjective,  the  present  parti- 
ciple agrees  like  an  adjective ;  otherwise  it  is  invariable : 

Une  8c6ne  charraante.  A  charming  scene. 

Elle  tombait  souvent  en  marchant      She  often  fell  while  walking. 

102.  Present  Indicative  of  pouuoir,    'be  able,'  'can/ 

*m&j'  (irreg.). 

I  can,  am  able,  etc. 

je  puis  or  peux  [30  pHi,  p0].  nous  pouvons  [nu  puvo], 

tu  peux  [ty  p0].  vous  pouvez    [vu  puve]. 

11  peut  [il  p0].  ils  peuvent  [il  pce:v]. 

103.  Observe  the  use  of  the  impersonal  il  faut  + infinitive: 
n  lui  faut  partir.  He  must  (it  is  necessary  for  him  to)  ga 
II  me  faudra  travailler.  I  shall  have  to  work. 

D  ne  faut  pas  voler.  We  (one)  must  not  steal. 

EXERCISE  XXV. 

A.  Bonjour  men  ami ;  je  suis  charm^  de  vous  voir.  Com- 
ment vous  portez-vous  1 — Je  me  porte  tr^s  bien,  merci. — Comme 
j'aime  a  me  promener  le  matin  !  II  a  geld  cette  nuit,  mais 
maintenant  le  soleil  brille  et  il  fait  presque  chaud.  Malgrd  le 
froid  tout  est  gai. — II  n'y  a  pas  de  fleurs,  mais  il  y  a  de  petits 
oiseaux  qui  n'ont  pas  encore  cessd  de  chanter.  En  passant  j'ai 
regarde  le  petit  lac,  et  j'ai  vu  qu'il  y  avait  de  la  glace.  ,  Nous 
pouvons  bient6t  patiner. — Aimez-vous  a  patiner?— Oui,  j'aime 
beaucoup  k  patiner.  Nous  avons  beaucoup  d'amusements  en 
hiver,  n'est-ce  pas  1 — Oh  oui,  il  est  tres  facile  de  s'amuser  en 
hiver  quand  on  se  porte  bien. — Aimez-vous  a  vous  promener 
en  traineau  '?  C'est  tr^s  amusant,  n'est-ce  pas  1 — C'est  surtout 
le  soir  que  j'aime  une  promenade  en  traineau.  C'est  si  joli 
quand  il  fait  clair  de  lune.  La  neige  est  blanche,  tout  le  monde 
est  gai,  et  lea  chevaux  font  sonner  leurs  grelots. —  Et  si  on  ne 


70  LESSON  XXV.  [§103 

desire  pas  sortir,  on  peut  s'amuser  k  la  maison.  Vous  aimez  la 
lecture,  n'est-ce  pas  ? — J'aime  beaucoup  a  lire.  Hier  j'ai  com- 
mence un  roman  de  Daudet.  Quelquefois  nous  invitons  nos 
amis  k  passer  la  soiree  chez  nous.  Nous  aimons  a  chanter  et  a 
danser.     II  est  facile  de  passer  le  temps  quand  on  a  des  amis. 

B.  Continue  the  following  :  1.  Je  ne  peux  pas  partir  ce 
matin,   etc.     2.  II   me   faut   partir   ce    soir,    il   te  faut,   etc. 

3.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  me  porte  pas  bien  %  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que 
j'aime  k  patiner?,  etc.  5.  Je  ne  cesse  pas  de  chanter,  etc. 
6.  Je  vois  une  scene  charmante,  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Comment  vous  portez-vous  ce  matin?  2. 
Avez-vous   bien   dormi]      3.   Est-ce    qu'il   a  gele  cette  nuif^ 

4.  En    quelle    saison    les    oiseaux    cessent-ils    de    chanter? 

5.  Quand  est-ce  qu'ils  commencent  k  chanter?  6.  Est-ce 
qu'il  y  a  d^ja  de  bonne  glace  sur  le  lac  1  7.  Peut-on  y  patiner 
ce  soir  ?  8.  Aimez-vous  a  patiner  ?  9.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous 
faites  en  hiver  pour  vous  amuser?  10.  Est-il  facile  de 
s'amuser  en  hiver?  11.  Pouvez-vous  vous  promener  en 
traineau  ce  soir?  12.  Ne  ddsirez-vous  pas  sortir  ce  soir? 
13.  Qu'avez-vous  I'intention  de  faire?  14.  Allez-vous  passer 
toute  la  soiree  chez  vous  ?  15.  Faut-il  avoir  des  amis  pour 
8'amuser  ?  16.  Aimez-vous  a  passer  la  soiree  k  lire  1  1 7.  Quand 
avez-vous  commence  a  lire  ces  romans?  18.  Ce  sont  des 
remans  charmants,  n'est-ce  pas?  19.  Vous  faut-il  rester  k  la 
maison  ce  soir  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

v.  1.  Good  morning;  I  am  charmed  to  see  you.  2.  The 
weather  is  very  fine  for  the  season,  is  it  not  ?  3.  Did  you  look 
at  the  ice  on  the  lake  in  passing  ?  4.  Yes,  the  ice  is  good, 
and  we  shall  soon  skate.  5.  Do  you  like  to  skate  ?  6.  Yes, 
but  I  cannot  go  skating  this  evening.  7.  I  must  stay  at 
home.  8.  You  can  amuse  yourself  reading.  9.  I  like  to  pass 
the  evening  at  home  sometimes.  10.  It  is  easy  to  find 
amusements.  11.  We  often  invite  friends  to  pass  the  evening 
with  us.  12.  We  have  begun  to  read  a  novel  together. 
13.  It  is  charming  to  go  for  a  sleigh-ride  sometimes.  14.  The 
white  snow  and  the  moonlight  make  a  charming  scene. 
15.  It  is  so  charming  to  hear  the  sleigh-bells  ring.  16.  We 
must  go  for  a  sleigh-ride  to-morrow.  17.  I  shall  go  if  I  can. 
18.  We  shall  go  too.  19.  We  must  have  some  friends  with  u& 
20.  To  enjoy  one's  self  one  must  have  friends. 


§§104-106]  LESSON  XXVI.  71 

J^^  ^        ,      LESSON  XXYI.  4 . 

104.  Present  Subjunctive   of  donmr,  fnir,    vendre, 

I  (may)  give,  etc.  I  (may)  finish,  etc.  I  (may)  sell,  etc. 

donn  e       [don].  finiss  e       [finis].  vend  e       [va  id], 

donn  es     [don].  finiss  es     [finis].  vend  es      [void], 

donn  e       [don].  finiss  e       [finis].  vend  e       [vaid]. 

donn  ions  [donjo].  finiss  ions  [finisjo}  vend  ions  [vadjo], 

donn  iez    [donje].  finiss  iez    [finisje].  vend  iez    [vadje]. 

donnent    [don].  finiss  ent  [finis].  vend  ent    [void], 

N.B. — ^The  paradigm  meanings  *I  may  give,'  etc.,  are  only  approxi- 
mate, as  will  be  seen  from  the  examples  below. 

105.  ^  Present  Subjunctive  of  avoir,  Stre. 

I  (may)  have,  etc.  I  (may)  be,  etc. 

aie    [e].     ayons  [ejo].  sois  [swa].     soyons  [swajo]. 

aies  [e].     ayez    [eje].  sois  [swa].     soyez    [swaje]. 

ait   [e].     aient  [e].  soit  [swa].     soient   [swa], 

106.  Use  of  the  Subjunctive.    Some  of  the  commoner 
uses  of  the  subjunctive  are : — 

1.  In  a  subordinate  noun  clause  introduced  by  que,  *that,' 
after  expressions  of  willing  or  desiring : 

Je  d^ire  que  vous  restiez.  I  desire  you  to  remain  (=that  you 

may  or  should  remain). 

2.  Similarly,  after  expressions  oijcyg  or  sorrow  : 
Je  suis  content  qu'il  soit  ici.  I  am  glad  he  is  here. 

3.  So  also  after  expressions  of  necessity^  like  il  faut  I 

H  faut  que  vous  restiez.  You  must  remain. 

II  est  n^cessairo  que  vous  restiez.     It  is  necessary  for  you  to  remain. 

4.  It  is  used  in  adverbial  clauses  after  certain  conjunctions, 
e.g.,  afin  que,  *in  order  that,'  pour  que,  'in  order  that,' 
avant  que,  *  before,'  bien  que,  *  although,'  quoique, 
*  although,'  etc. 

Bien  qu'il  soit  pauvre  il  est  heureux.     Although  he  is  poor  he  is  happy. 

5.  Que  is  never  omitted,  as  *  that '  often  is  in  English ; 
Je  suis  content  qu'il  soit  ici.  I  am  glad  (that)  he  is  here. 


72  LESSON  XXVI.  [§§107-109 

107.  Tense  Sequence.  Present  or  Future  is  regularly 
followed  by  Present  Subjunctive  : 

Pres.  II  faut      )  ^  „^  „^„„  ,.o^i;o»  J  You  must  speak. 

>  que  vous  pariiez.  {  ^^         .,,  ,  , 

FuT.     II  faudra  )  (  You  will  have  to  speak. 

108.  Present  Indicative  of  uou/oir,  'will,'  'wish,'  etc. 
(irreg.). 

I  will,  wish,  etc. 

je  veux  [3e  v0].  nous  voulons  [nu  vulo]. 

tu  veux  [ty  v0].  vous  voulez    [vu  vule]. 

il  veut  [il  v0].  ils  veulent  [il  voel]. 

109.  Present  Subjunctive  oifaire  (irreg.). 

I  (may)  do,  etc. 
fasse   [fas].  fassions  [fasjo]. 

fasses  [fas].  fassiez    [fasje]. 

fasse   [fas].  fassent  [fas]. 

EXERCISE  XXVI. 

A.  On  frappe  k  la  porte.  Je  vais  voir  qui  c'est.  C'est  une 
de  mes  amies.  EUe  entre.  Nous  causons  ensemble. — Qu'allez- 
vous  faire  aujourd'hui  ? — Ma  robe  n'est  pas  encore  prete.  H 
faut  que  je  sois  chez  la  couturiere  avant  midi.     Apres  cela  je 

"^vais  porter  des  fleurs  a  une  amie  qui  est  un  peu  souffrante,  et 
je  desire  que  vous  m'accompagniez,  si  vous  pouvez.  C'est  as9ez 
loin,  mais  nous  n'irons  pas  a  pied.  Je  serai  si  contente  que 
vous  soyez  avec  moi.  II  faut  que  vous  fassiez  connaissance 
avec  mon  amie ;  elle  est  si  charmante. — Je  regrette  de  ne 
pouvoir  pas  vous  accompagner  ce  matin ;  j'ai  mal  aux  dents 
depuis  hier.  II  y  en  a  deux  qui  me  font  souffrir. — Que  je 
regrette  que  voiis  ayez  tant  d'ennui  !  C'est  tres  facheux.  Et 
qu'allez-vous  faire? — II  me  faut  aller  voir  le  dentiste.  II 
arrachera  une  de  mes  dents  probablement,  car  elle  est  entiere- 
ment  g^tee.    Mais  je  desire  qu'il  tache  de  me  conserver  I'autre. 

B.  Continue  the  following  :  1.  Je  suis  content  qu'il  soit 
arriv^  tu  es,  etc.  2.  Je  veux  qu'elle  attende,  tu  veux,  etc. 
3.  II  faut  que  je  sois  la  avant  midi,  il  faut  que  tu,  etc.  4.  II 
d^ire  que  je  le  finisse,  que  tu,  etc.  5.  II  faut  que  je  vende 
ma  maison,  que  tu,  etc.  6.  Bien  que  j'aie  des  amis,  bien  que 
tu,  etc.     7.  Je  suis  fach^  qu'elle  soit  souffrante,  tu  es,  etc. 


§110]  LESSON  XXVII.  73 

G.  (Oral.)  1.  Qui  frappe  h.  la  porte?  2.  Qu'est-ce  qu'elle 
demande?  3.  Votre  robe  est-elle  prete?  4.  Faut-il  que  je 
8ois  en  \ille  avant  midi  ?  5.  Me  faut-il  partir  tout  de  suite  1 
6.  Desirez-vous  que  je  vous  accompagne  1  7.  Regrettez-vous 
que  votre  amie  soit  souffrante  1  8.  Etes-vous  contente  qu'elle 
se  porte  mieux  a  present?  9.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  avez  ce 
matin  ?  10.  Desirez-vous  que  le  dentiste  arrache  votre  dent 
malade?  11.  Voulez-vous  qu'il  vous  arrache  les  deux  dents 
malades?  12.  Que  desirez-vous  1  13.  Ne  voulez-vous  pas 
que  je  vous  attende  au  caf^  ?  14.  Desirez-vous  que  je  sois 
avec  vous  chez  le  dentiste"?  15.  Faut-il  que  nous  soyon?  de 
retour  avant  midi?  16.  Etes-vous  ikch6e>  que  votre  pere  ait 
vendu  sa  maison?  17.  Desirez-vous  qu'il  en  achete  une  dans 
cette  rue  ?  18.  Cette  maison  est  jolie  bien  qu'elle  soit  petite, 
n'est-ce  pas?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  There  is  a  knock  at  the  door.  2.  I  do  not  wish  you 
to  knock  at  my  door.  3.  I  wish  you  to  ring.  4.  Must  you 
be  at  the  dressmaker's  at  noon?  5.  Yes,  I  must  have  my 
dress  for  this  evening.  6.  I  am  going  afterwards  to  see  my 
friend  who  is  indisposed.  7.  I  am  very  sorry  that  she  is 
indisposed.  8.  I  must  take  her  some  flowers.  9.  Do  you 
wish  me  to  accompany  you  ?  10.  No,  I  desire  you  to  remain 
at  home.  11.  I  am  very  sorry  you  have  toothache.  12.  Is  it 
necessary  that  the  dentist  should  extract  your  two  teeth? 
13.  I  must  go  and  see  him  first.  14.  I  wish  him  to  try  and 
save  one  of  the  two.  15.  Although  this  tooth  is  a  little 
decayed,  it  is  better  than  the  other.  16.  Do  you  wish  me  to 
be  with  you  at  the  dentist's?  17.  No,  I  wish  you  to  buy 
some  fruit  for  our  dinner.  18.  Although  fruit  is  dear,  I  shall 
buy  a  great  deal.  19.  One  must  eat  to  live.  20.  Everybody 
must  eat  enough. 

LESSON  XXYII. 


V  no.       Imperat 

ive 

of  donner,  flni'r, 

uendre. 

Give,  etc. 

Finish, 

,  etc. 

Sell,  < 

3tC. 

donn  e  '  [don]. 

finis 

[fini]. 

vend  s 

[va]. 

qu'il  donne  ^  [don]. 

qu 

I'il  finiss  e 

[finis]. 

qu'il  vend  e 

[vaid]. 

donn  ons  [dono]. 

finiss  ons 

;  [finiso]. 

vend  ons 

!  [vado]. 

donn  ez    [done]. 

finiss  ez 

[finise]. 

vend  ez 

[vade]. 

qu'ila  donn  ent  [don]. 

qu'i 

ils  finiss  ent  [finis].    > 

qu'ils  vend  ent 

[vaid]. 

Ob$.:  The  3rd  Bing.  and  3rd  plur.  ajre  subjunctive  forms  used  as  imperatiTes. 


74  LESSON  XXVII.  [§§111-113 

111.  Imperative  of  auoir,  itre. 

Have,  etc.  Be,  etc. 

aie         [e].  sois          [swa]. 

qu'il  ait        [k  il  e].  qu'il  soii,        [swa]. 

ay  ons  [ejo].  soy  ons  [swaj3]. 

ay  ez    [eje].  soy  ez     [swaje]. 

qu'ils  aient     [k  ilz  e].  qu'ils  soient     [k  il  swa]. 

112.  Imperative  Negative. 

ne  donne  pas.     qu'il  ne  donne  pas.     ne  donnons  pas,  etc. 

113.  Position  of  Objects.  1.  Personal  pronoun  objects 
follow  the  positive  imperative  (but  not  the  subjunctive  as  im- 
perative), and  are  joined  to  it  and  to  one  another  by  hyphens : 

Donnez-lui  la  plume.  Give  him  the  pen. 

Donnez-la-lui.  Give  it  to  him. 

Donnons-leur-en.  Let  us  give  them  some. 

Qu'il  me  la  donne.  Let  him  give  it  to  me. 

2.  If  the  imperative  be  negative,  the  general  rule  of  position 
(§81)  holds  good: 

Ne  la  lui  donnez  pas.  Do  not  give  it  to  him. 

3.  IVIoi  and  toi  are  used  after  an  imperative  instead  of  me 
and  te  (unless  before  y  and  en,  in  which  case  apostrophe 
replaces  hyphen) : 

Donnez-moi  des  pommes.  Give  me  some  apples. 

Donnez-m'en.  Give  me  some  (of  them). 

4.  When  a  verb  has  two  objects,  they  are  arranged  thus 
after  it  (for  slight  exceptions,  see  Part  II) : 

le  (la,  les)  before  moi  (toi,  lui,  nous,  vous,  leur). 

me  (te,  lui,  nous,  vous,  leur)  before  y  (en). 
y  before  en. 

EXERCISE  XXyil. 

A.  Nous  allons  ^tudier  nos  le9ons.  Le  professeur  nous  a 
laissds  ici  dans  cette  salle  afin  qu'on  ne  nous  derange  pas. 
Travaillons  f erme.  Quel  est  le  livre  que  vous  avez  k  la  main  1 
— C'est  ma  grammaire  fran^aise. — Donnez-la-moi  un  moment 


§113]  LESSON  XXVII.  75 

s'il  vous  plait.  Je  desire  chercher  quelque  chose. — Ou  est 
done  mon  cahier?  Le  voyez-vous? — Oui,  le  voici. — Donnez- 
le-moi,  s'il  vous  plait. — Maintenant  c'est  ma  regie  que  je 
cherche. — Je  ne  Tai  pas  vue. — Si  vous  la  trouvez,  ne  la  cassez 
pas. — Avez-vous  de  I'encre  ?-LOui,  j'en  ai. — Soyez  assez  bon 
pour  m'en  donner.  Mon  petit  ami  n'en  a  pas,  non  plus. 
Donnez-lui-en  un  peu  aussi. — En  voila.  Est-ce  assez? — Oui,' 
je  vous  remercie  infiniment. — Allons,  d^pechons-nous  I'-Il  est 
d^ja  tard,  et  nous  n'avons  pas  encore  fait  grand'chose. — Soyez 
tranquille,  nous  fiiiirons  bientdt. — "  Ayez  de  la  patience  "'  est 
une  bonne  niaxime,  mais  n'en  abusons  pas. — Avez-vous  parl^ 
de  cette  affaire  au  professeur? — Pas  encore. — Eh  bien,  parlez- 
lui-en  cette  apr^s-midi. — Pour  vous  contenter,  je  lui  en  parlerai. 

.  B.  Complete  the  following  by  adding  a  noun  object,  and 
then  repeating  the  phrase  with  the  proper  pronoun :  1.  Cher- 
chez ...  2.  Ne  cherchez  pas ...  3.  Finissez ...  4.  Ne 
finissez  pas ...  5.  Vendez ...  6.  Ne  vendez  pas ...  7.  Qu'il 
^coute.  . .  8.  Chante.  . .  9.  Ne  chante  pas. . .  10.  Choisis- 
sez...  11.  Ne  choisissez  pas...  12.  Vends...  13.  Ne 
vends  pas...  14.  Finissons...  15.  Ne  finissons  pas... 
16.  Vendons. .  .      17.  Ne  vendons  pas. . . 

^  (7.  1.  Go  and  study  your  lessons.  2.  Study  them  for  an 
hour.  3.  Remain  in  this  class-room.  4.  Remain  in  it  for  an 
hour.  5.  Do  not  disturb  me;  I  wish  to  study.  6.  Now  let  us 
work  hard.  7.  Show  me  the  lesson.  8.  Show  me  it.  9.  Find 
me  my  exercise-book,  if  you  please.  10.  Find  it  for  me. 
11.  I  have  your  ruler.  12.  Do  not  break  it,  please.  ^13.  If 
you  have  any  ink,  give  me  some  of  it,  please.  14.  Give  some 
to  Robert,  too;  he  hasn't  any,  either.  15.  Now  Robert,  thank 
him.  16.  Come,  hurry  up.  17.  Have  patience,  but  don't 
have  too  much*of  it.  18.  Let  us  finish  our  lessons.  19.  Let 
us  finish  them  before  noon.  20.  Have  you  spoken  to  the 
master  of  that  affair?  21.  Do  not  speak  of  it  to  him  to-day, 
22.  Speak  to  him  of  it  to-morrow.  23.  We  have  finished  our 
lessons.  24.  The  lessons  are  finished  now.  25.  Have  the 
kindness  to  bring  me  my  hat.  26.  Look  for  it,  please.  27. 
Let  us  go  for  a  walk.  28.  Let  us  not  take  advantage  of  the 
patience  of  our  masters.     29.  Let  us  not  take  advantage  of  it. 


76  LESSON  XXVIIL  [§§114-116 

LESSON  XXVIII. 

114.  Conditional  of  donner,  flni'r,  uendre. 

I  should  give,  etc.  I  should  finish,  etc.  I  should  sell,  etc. 

donner  ais      [donare].  finir  ais      [finire].  vendr  ais     [vadre]. 

donner  ais      [donore].  finir  ais      [finire].  vendr  ais     [vadre]. 

donner  ait      [donare].  finir  ait     [finire],  vendr  ait      [vadre]. 

donner  ions  [donarjo].  finir  ions  [finirjo].  vendr  ions   [vadrio]. 

donner  iez      [donarje].  finir  iez     [finirje].  vendr  iez      [vadrie], 

donner  aient  [donare].  finir  aient  [finire].  vendr  aient  [vadre]. 

115.  Conditional  of  auoir,  St  re. 

I  should  have,  etc.  I  should  be,  etc. 

aur  ais  [ore].        aur  ions   [orjo].       ser  ais  [sare].        ser  ions  [sarjo]. 
aur  ais  [ore].        aur  iez     [orje].       ser  ais  [sare].        ser  iez     [sarje]. 
aur  ait  [ore].        aur  aient  [ore].         ser  ait  [sare].        ser  aient  [sare]. 
Obs. :  In  all  verbs  the  stem  of  the  conditional  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  future. 

116.  Conditional  Sentences.  1.  The  conditional  is  used 
to  express  what  would  happen  (result)  in  case  something  else 
were  to  happen  (condition) : 

S'il  avait  le  temps  (condition).         If  he  had  time  (had  he  time,  etc. ), 
il  finirait  sa  le<?on  (result).  he  would  finish  his  lesson. 

2.  A  *  result '  clause  in  the  conditional  (English  '  should '  or 
I  'would')  regularly  has  the  *  if  clause  in  the  imperfect  indica- 
"*  tive,  whatever  be  the  corresponding  English  form : 

Si  j'^tudiais   bien    (condition),        If  I  studied  {or  if  I  were  to  s. ,  or 
le  maltre  serait  content  (result).  were  I  to  s. ,  or  should  I  s. )  well, 

the  master  would  be  glad. 

3.  A  *  result '  clause  in  the  future  requires  the  '  if '  clause  in 
the  present  indicative,  whatever  loe  the  corresponding  English 
form : 

S'il  est  ici  demain  (condition).         If  he  is  {or  be,  or  will  be,  or  should 
je  lui  donnerai  I'argent  (result).  be)  here  to-morrow,  I  shall  give 

him  the  money. 


§117]  LESSON  XXVIII.  77 

117.  Future  and  Conditional  offaire  (irreg.)  and  aller 

(irreg.). 

ir  ai  [ire].  ir^ais  tire].  fer  ai  [fare].  fer  ais  [fare]. 

ir  as  [ira],  etc.      ir  ais  [ire],  etc.      fer  as  [fara],  etc.    fer  ais  [fare],  etc. 

EXERCISE  XXVIII. 

A.  Si  j'avais  mes  livres,  j'^tudierais  mes  le9ons.     Je  les  ai 
.  laisses  a  Tecole. — Cependant  il  n'est  pas  n^cessaire  que  vous 

'  perdiez  votre  temps.  J'ai  mes  livres  et  je  puis  vous  les  preter, 
si  vous  desirez  preparer  vos  leqons. — Vous  etes  trop  aimable, 
je  les  accepterai  avec  plaisir. — De  quels  livres  a\ez-vou8 
besoin? — J'ai  besoin  d'une  arithmdtique  et  d'une  g^ographie. 

^Si  j'avais  aussi  un  crayon  et  du  papier,  j'en  ferais  usage. — Ma 
bibliotheque  snti^re  est  k  votre  disposition. —  A  propos, 
qu'allez-vous  faire  pendant  les  vacances  1 — Si  j'avais  beaucoup 
d'argent,  j'irais  bien  loin.  Je  suis  si  fatigu^  depuis  quelque 
temps.  vEt  qu'est-ce  que  vous  alle^ faire? — Si  je  n'avais  pas 
v^^  6t6  si  sou  vent  a  la  campagne,  j'y  serais  all^  encore  cette  ann^e. 

^Mais  il  me  faut  un  plus  grand  changement  s'il  est  possible. — 
Alors  vous  n'etes  pas  encore  d^cid^.— Pas  encore,  il  y  a  tant 
de  reflexions  k  faire.  S'il  ne  fait  pas  trop  chaud,  nous  reste- 
rons  ici.  On  sera  tres  bien  ici,  s'il  fait  frais.  Mais  s'il  fait 
trfes  chaud,  nous  partirons  pour  un  endroit  plus  agr^able.    , 

B.  Complete  the  following  by  adding  a  'result'  clause  or  an 
*if '  clause  as  the  case  may  be:  1.  Le  maitre  sera  content.  . . 
2.  S'il  fait  chaud  demain ...  3.  S'il  ne  faisait  pas  si  chaud .  . . 
4.  Je  lui  donnerai  I'argent ...  5.  Je  lui  donnerais  I'argent . . . 
6.  Si  j'avais  du  papier  et  des  plumes ...  7.  Si  j'avais  ma 
grammaire  f  ran9aise ...  8.  J'irais  bien  loin ...  9.  Vendriez- 
vous  votre  maison.  . .      10.   Seriez-vous  parti.  . . 

'C.  (Oral.)  1.  Oh  sont  vos  livres?  2.  Si  vous  les  aviez, 
qu'est-ce  que  vous  feriez  ?  3.  Si  je  vous  pretais  ma  grammaire, 
en  feriez-vous  usage?  4.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  ferez  si  je  vous 
prete  mes  livres?  5.  Le  maitre  sera-t-il  content  si  nous  ne 
pr^parons  pas  nos  le9ons  ?  6.  Ne  sera-t-il  pas  content  si  nous 
^tudions  deux  heures  enti^res  ?  7.  Serait-il  content  si  je  perdais 
mon  temps  ?  8.  Le  maitre  est-il  content  si  nous  perdons  notre 
temps?  9.  Est-ce  que  je  serai  content  si  je  perds  mon  temps  1 
10.    Serions-nous    contents   si    nous   perdions    notre   temps? 


7S  LESSON  XXIX.  [§118 

11.  Seriez-vous   fatigu^   si   vous   travailliez   toute   la   soiree? 

12.  Irez-vous  a  la  campagne  s'il  fait  chaud  demainl  13. 
Qu'est-ce  que  nous  ferons  s'il  fait  chaud  demain?  14.  Si  vous 
aviez  des  vacances,  est-ce  que  vous  resteriez  a  la  maisoni 
15.  Que  feriez-vous?  16.  Iriez-vous  a  la  campagne?  17.  Si 
vous  aviez  beaucoup  d'argent,  que  feriez-vous  pendant  I'^t^l 
18.  Serons-nous  bien  ici  s'il  fait  chaud?     Etc.,  etc. 

\  £>.  1.  I  have  left  all  my  books  at  school.     2.  If  I  had  them, 

I  should  prepare  my  lessons  for  to-morrow.  3.  If  I  do  not 
prepare  them,  the  master  will  not  be  pleased.  4.  If  you  wish 
to  study,  I  will  lend  you  my  books.  5.  If  you  were  to  lend 
me  them,  I  should  be  very  glad.  6.  I  should  study  the  whole 
evening.  7.\I  do  not  wish  to  lose  my  time.  8.  I  am  never 
happy,  if  I  am  not  working.  9.  Should  you  make  use  of 
my  pens  and  paper,  if  I  lent  you  them?  10.  I  should  accept 
them  with  pleasure,  if  you  were  kind  enough  to  lend  me 
them.     11.  If  we  work  the  whole  evening,  we  shall  be  tired. 

12.  By  the  way,  what  are  you  going  to  do  in  the  holidays  1 

13.  I  shall  go  to  the  country,  if  it  is  hot.  14.  I  should  go 
too,  if  I  had  not  been  there  so  often.  15.  If  I  had  a  great 
deal  of  money,  I  should  go  a  long  way  off.  16.  If  one  has  no 
fhoney,  one  cannot  go  far.  17.  If  it  is  possible,  I  shall  spend 
some  days  with  my  relatives.  18.  It  (ce)  will  be  for  me  a 
great  pleasure,  if  my  cousins  are  at  home. 

LESSON   XXIX. 

Il8.  Use  of  Article.     1-  Names  of  continents,  countries, 
provinces,  large  islands,  regularly  take  the  definite  article : 

La  France  est  un  beau  pays.  France  is  a  beautiful  country. 

Nous  partons  pour  le  Canada.  We  are  leaving'  for  Canada. 

II  demeure  aux  ^fitats-Unis.  He  lives  in  the  United  States. 

2.  The  article  is  omitted  after  the  preposition  en  =  '  in,'  '  to ;' 
it  is  also  omitted  after  de  in  certain  constructions  : 

Mon  p6re  est  en  Angleterre.  •  My  father  is  in  England. 

Nous  allons  en  France.  We  are  going  to  France. 

II  vient  d'ltalie.  He  comes  from  Italy.  ♦ 

Les  vins  d'Espagne.  Spanish  wines. 


§§119-120]  LESSON  XXIX.  79 

119.  1.  Place  'where/  •whereto,'  is  usually  denoted  by 
en  before  names  of  continents,  European  countries  singular 
and  feminine  countries  singular  outside  of  Europe;  other 
countries  usually  take  the  preposition  a  +  the  definite  article  : 

II  est  en  (va  en)  Europe.  He  is  in  (goes  to)  Europe. 

II  est  au  (va  au)  Canada.  He  is  in  (goes  to)  Canada. 

2.  Cities,  towns,  etc.,  usually  take  a,  without  any  article ; 

II  est  k  (va  k)  Paris.  He  is  in  or  at  (goes  to)  Paris. 

But :  A  la  Nouvelle-Orleans.  At  New  Orleans. 

12a  Present  Indicative  of  sauoir,  *to  know*  (irreg.). 

I  know,  etc 

je  aais  [se].  nous  savons  [savo], 

tu  sais  [se].  vous  savez    [save]. 

il  salt  [se].  ils  savent  [sa:v]. 

EXERCISE  XXIX. 

A.  Savez-vous  que  votre  ami  est  parti  hier  potir  la  France  ? 
•^Oui,  je  le  sais.  II  dtait  si  content !  II  sait  ddjk  bien  le  fran- 
^ais ;  dans  quelques  mois  il  le  parlera  comme  un  Frangais. 
— Avez-vous  jamais  6t4  en  France  ? — Non,  je  n'y  ai  jamais  ^t^, 
mais  j'ai  I'intention  d'y  aller  I'ann^e  prochaine.  Vous  y  avez 
6t4,  n'est-ce  pas? — Oui,  j'y  ai  pass^  d^x  ann^es.  C'est  un 
beau  pays.  J'aime  beaucoup  la  France,  j^ime  les  Fran9ais  et 
le  frangais.  C'est  une  belle  langue. — Oh*ui,  vous,  vous  etes 
bien  avancd.  Yous  parlez  fran^ais  coujamAent,  mais  moi,  je 
trouve  cela  difficile. — En  commen9ant,  c  est  difficile,  mais  avec 
le  temps  vous  I'apprendrez,  surtout  si  vous  passez  une  ann^e  en 
France. — Quelle  partie  de  la  France  avez-vous  habitue  ? — J'ai 
habits  Paris,  mais  j'ai  visits  d'autres  grandes  villes.  J'ai  et^  k 
Rouen  et  k  Lyon. — Avez-vous  jamais  ^t^  au  Bas-Canada? — 
Oui,  j'y  ai  ^t^.  J'ai  ^t^  k  JNIontrdal  et  k  Quebec.  Ce  sont 
deux  belles  villes.  J'ai  4t6  aussi  k  la  jSj)uv^^ftB-Orl^ans,  ou  il  y 
a  beaucoup  de  FranQais.  On  y  ^Wrle  encore  aujourd'hui 
fran^ais.  Mais  en  g^nJral  aux  Etats-XJnis  les  Frangais  n'ont 
pas  conserve  leur  langue  si  ISd^lement  que  les  Fran9ais  du 
Canada.  /  V 


80  LESSON  XXIX.  [§120 

B.  Continue   the  following:    1.   Je   parle  anglais,   tu,   etc. 

2.  Est-ce  que  je  parle  frangais?,  est-ce  que  tu?,  etc.  3.  Je  sais 
bieii  le  frangais,  tu,  etc.  4.  Ai-je  ete  en  France?,  as-tu  4)\A% 
etc.  5.  Demaiii  je  partirai  pour  le  Canada,  tu,  etc.  6.  Je 
vais  aux  Etats-Unis,  tu,  etc.  7.  J'habite  les  Etats-Unis,  tu, 
etc.  8.  J'irai  a  Paris  I'annee  prochaine,  tu,  etc.  9.  J'ai 
demeur^  une  ann^e  a  Paris,  tu  as,  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  1,  Ou  est  la  France?  2.  Quelle  langue  les  Fran- 
gais  parlent-ils?  3.  Savez-vous  le  fran9ais?  4.  Parlez-vous 
fran9ais  ?  5.  Le  parlez-vous  couramment  ?  6.  Avez-vous  jamais 
^t^  en  France  ?  7.  Combien  de  temps  avez-vous  passe  k  Paris  ? 
8.  Avez-vous  ^t^  aussi  a  Rouen  et  a  Lyon?  9.  Aimez-vous 
la  France?  10.  Aimez-vous  les  Frangais?  11.  Est-ce  que 
le  frangais  est  une  belle  langue?  12.  Quelle  langue  parlez- 
vous?  13.  Est-ce  que  nous  sommes  Anglais  ou  Frangais? 
14.  Les  habitants  de  la  France  parlent  frangais,  n'est-ce  pas? 
16.  Y  a-t'il  beaucoup  de  Fran9ais  aux  Etats-Unis  ?  16.  Quelle 
langue  parle-t-on  au  Bas-Canada  ?  17.  Parle-t-on  aussi  la  langue 
fran^aise  a  la  Nouvelle-Orl^ans  ?  18.  Quelle  langue  parle-t-on 
i  Montreal  et  k  Quebec?  19.  Les  Frangais  des  Etats-Unis 
ont-ils  conserve  fidelement  leur  langue?  20.  Depuis  quand 
^tudiez-vous  le  f rangais  ?  21.  Avez-vous  I'intention  d'aller  en 
France  Fannie  prochaine  ?  22.  Dans  quels  pays  avez-vous 
passd  les  vacances  I'ann^  derni^re  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  France  is  in  Europe.    2.  France  is  a  beautiful  country. 

3.  Its  inhabitants  speak  French.  4.  French  is  spoken  also  in 
Canada  and  in  the  United  States. »  ^.  It  is  spoken  at  Mont- 
real, Quebec  and  New  Orleans.  6.  French  is  a  fine  language. 
7.  We  like  the  French  and  the  French  language.  8.  We  have 
been  studying  French  for  three  months.  \9.  I  have  not  been 
in  France  yet.  10.  I  intend  to  go  there  next  year.  11.  I 
shall  set  out  for  France  in  the  summer.  12.  I  shall  spend  a 
month  in  Paris,  and  some  time  also  at  Lyons  and  Rouen. 
13.  On  my  return,  I  shall  remain  some  days  at  Montreal  and 
Quebec.  14.  French  is  a  difficult  language  for  the  English. 
16.  We  speak  English.  16.  You  live  in  Canada.  17.  Our 
relatives  live  in  the  United  States.  18.  They  live  in  New 
Orleans.  1 9.  They  have  never  been  in  France,  but  they  speak 
French  like  Frenchmen.  20.  If  you  were  to  spend  a  year  in 
France,  you  would  speak  it  fluently  also. 


§§121-123]  LESSON   XXX.  81 

LESSON    XXX. 

121.  The  Possessive  Pronouns. 

Singular.  Plural. 

le  mien       [mje],  m.  les  miens     [mj?],  m.^    . 

la  mienne  [mjen],  f.  les  miennes  [mjen],  f.  J 

le  tien        [tje],  m.  les  tiens       [tjf],  m.  V, . 

1     A.-  rx-     -,  r  1      X.  r  •  \   r    j-thme,  yours. 

la  tienne    [tjen],  f.  les  tiennes    [tjen],  f .  J  '' 

le  sien        [sj£],  m.  les  siens       [sje],  m.  "^ his,  hers, 

la  sienne    [sjen],  f.  les  siennes  [sjen],  f.  J  its,  one's  own. 

le  notre      [no:tr],  m.)  i        .^  r      i. -i 

I       'i^       r      X  1  x    r  1^  notres     [noitr],  ours. 

la  notre      [no:tr],  f .  J  l         j» 

le  votre      [vo:tr],  m. )  ,        .,  r      xi 

lavotre      [vo:tr],  f.  |  '**  ""^*'     [vo.tr],  yours. 

le  leur        [loe:r],  m.  ^  ,     ,  n       n   ..u  • 

,     ,  n       T    f     r  les  leurs        [loeir],  theirs. 

la  leur        [loe:r],  f.    j  l       j> 

122.  Agreement.  Possessive  pronouns  agree  in  gender 
and  number  with  the  object  possessed,  and  in  person  with  thd 
possessor : 

J'ai  mes  livres ;  elle  a  les  siens.       I  have  my  books ;  she  has  hers. 

123.  Use  of  Possessive  Pronouns.  1.  After  ^tre,  mere 
ownership  is  regularly  expressed  by  a  +  a  personal  pronoun 
disjunctive,  while  the  use  of  a  possessive  pronoun  implies 
distinction  of  ownership ; 

Cette  montre  est  k  moi.  This  watch  is  mine. 

Oette  montre  est  la  mienne.  This  watch  is  min'U 

2.  De  and  a  +  le  mien,  etc.,  contract  as  usual  (of.  §§  35,  46): 
Je  parle  de  son  ami  et  du  mien.        I  speak  of  his  friend  and  of  mine. 

3.  Since  le  sien,  la  sienne,  etc.,  mean  'his,'  'hers,'  'its,' 
*  one's,'  the  context  determines  which  sense  is  intended  : 

II  a  ses  livres ;  elle  a  les  siens.         He  has  his  books ;  she  has  hers. 

4.  Observe  the  idioms  : 

Un  de  mes  amis.  A  friend  of  mine. 

Un  Parisien  de  mes  amis.  A  Parisian,  a  friend  of  mine. 

6 


82  LESSON  XXX.  [§124 

124.  Present  Indicative  of  dire,  *to  say/  *teir  (irreg.), 
and  of  voir,  Ho  see'  (irreg.). 

I  say,  etc.  I  see,  etc. 

je  dis  [di].     nous  disons  [dizo].  je  vols  [vwa].     nous  voyons  [vwajo]. 

tu  dis  [di],     vous  dites    [dit].  tu  vols  [vwa].     vous  voyez    [vwaje]. 

il  dit  [di].        ils  disent  [diiz].  il-v9it  [vwa].        lis  voient  [vwa]. 

EXERCISE  XXX. 

A.  Tin  de  mes  amis,  qui  voyage  actuellement  en  Europe,  m'a 
envoy ^  une  lettre  I'autre  jour.  Dans  cette  lettre  11  fait  les 
comparaisons  les  plus  int^ressantes  entre  les  habitudes  des 
Europ^ens  et  les  ndtres.  Par  exemple,  les  chemins  de  fer 
europeens  sont  diffdrents  des  ndtres.  Nos  voitures  sont  plus 
grandes  que  les  leurs,  et  elles  ont  un  seul  compartiment, 
tandis  que  les  leurs  sont  divis^es  en  plusieurs.  Les  petits 
compartiments  sont  souvent  tres  commodes;  on  pent  y  ^tre 
seul  ou  avec  une  petite  compagnie  agrdable.  Mais  il  y  a  un 
inconvenient:  on  risque  de  se  trouver  face  k  face  avec  un 
compagnon  de  voyage  tr^s  desagr^able,  ou  meme  dangereux. 
Un  jour,  par  exemple,  mon  ami  se  trouvait  dans  un  comparti- 
ment avec  un  individu  qui  ne  respectait  pas  trop  la  difference 
entre  le  mien  et  le  tien.  Mon  ami  avait  une  jolie  montre 
d'or.  Son  compagnon  la  remarque.  Ije  train  approche  d'une 
petite  ville,  et  ralentit  sa  marche.  L'individu  tire  un  revolver 
de  sa  poche  et  dit  k  mon  ami :  "  Vous  avez  \k  une  belle 
montre,  donnez-la-moi  et  je  vous  donnerai  la  mienne."  Mon 
ami  a  peur,  il  donne  sa  montre,  et  le  voleur  saute  du  train. 

B.  Complete  the  following  by  supplying  a  suitable  posses- 
sive pronoun  form:  1.  Ma  montre  est  en  or;.  ..est  en 
argent.  2.  Mes  parents  sont  k  Paris; .  . .  sont  aux  Etats-Unis. 
3.  Marie  va  chercher  mes  plumes  et.  . .  4.  Nous  avons  fini 
nos  legons ;  ils  ont  fini ...  5.  J'ai  fini  mes  le9ons,  et  Jean 
a  fini ...  6.  Vos  le9ons  sont  faciles,  mais .  .  sont  difficiles. 
7.  J'ai  mon  crayon,  et  Marie  a .  .  .  8.  Marie  a  ses  crayons  et 
. .  .  aussi.  9.  Les  Frangais  aiment  leur  pays,  et  nous  aimons .  .^, 
10.  Nous  aimons  notre  langue;  les  Fran9ais  aiment.  . .  11. 
Je  parle  de  mes  amis,  et  vous  parlez.  . .  12.  Jean  donne  des 
fleurs  k  ses  sceurs,  et  Robert  en  donne. . . 


§124]  LESSON  XXX.  88 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Qui  vous  a  envoye  unelettre?  2.  Les  habi- 
tudes des  Europeens  sont-elles  les  memes  que  les  ndtres  ?  3. 
Nos  chemins  de  fer  sont-ils  meilleurs  que  les  leurs  ?  4.  Leurs 
voitures  sont-elles  plus  grandes  que  les  n6tres  ?  *  5.  Les  ndtres 
sont-elles  plus  commodes  que  les  leurs  ]  6.  Avec  qui  votre 
ami  se  trouvait-il  dans  un  compartiment  ?  7.  La  montre  du 
voleur  ^tait-elle  meilleure  que  la  sienne  ?  8.  En  quoi  est  votre 
montre  1  9.  Voulez-vous  me  donner  la  v6tre  en  ^change  de 
lamienne?  10.  A  qui  ^tait  la  belle  montre  d'or  ?  11.  Qu'est- 
ce  que  le  voleur  veut  donner  en  ^change  de  la  montre  de  votre 
ami?  12.  Qui  a  tir^  un  revolver  de  sa  poche?  13.  Votre  ami 
a-t-il  tir^  le  sien  aussi  de  sa  poche?  14.  Auriez-vous  donn4 
au  voleur  votre  belle  montre  en  ^change  de  la  sienne? 
15.  L'auriez-vous  donnee  si  la  sienne  avait  ete  meilleure  que 
la  v6tre  ?  16.  Qui  ne  respeete  pas  la  difii^rence  entre  le  mien 
et  le  tien?     Etc.,  etc. 

>-/>.  1.  A  friend  of  mine  is  travelling  in  France.  2.  There 
is  much  difference  between  the  customs  of  the  French  and 
^^>-ours.  3.  For  example,  our  railways  and  theirs  are  different. 
4.  Their  railways  are  not  so  long  as  ours.  5.  The  carriages 
of  our  trains  are  larger  than  theirs.  6.  But  their  carriages 
are  often  more  comfortable  than  ours.  7.  Ours  are  not 
divided  into  compartments.  8.  One  day  I  find  myself  in 
one  of  these  compartments.  9.  I  draw  my  watch  from  my 
pocket  to  look  at  it.  10.  My  travelling  companion  is  an 
individual  who  does  not  respect  the  difference  between  mine 
and  thine.  11.  He  draws  out  his  also  from  his  pocket,  and 
looks  at  it.  12.  He  looks  at  mine  too.  13,  He  says  to  me: 
"  Here  are  two  watches ;  yours  is  of  (en)  gold  and  mine  is 
of  silver.  14.  Give  me  yours,  and  I  will  give  you  mine." 
15.  At  these  words,  I  draw  a  revolver  which  I  have  in  another 
pocket.  16.  The  thief  does  not  draw  his  from  his  pocket, 
because  he  has  no  revolver.  17.  At  this  moment  the  train 
arrives  at  a  little  town.  18.  The  thief  is  afraid,  and  jumps 
from  the  carriage,  leaving  me  his  watch.  19.  I  have  now  two 
watches,  mine  and  his.  20.  If  he  had  had  his  revolver, 
and  if  I  had  not  had  mine,  the  affair  would  have  been  very 
different. 


I 


v>- 


«4  LESSON  XXXI.  [§§125-129 

LESSON    XXXI. 

125.  The  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

,  'Si  -ce  [sa],  this,  these,  that,  those,  he,  she,  it,  they. 

V\i^  ceci  [sasi],  this. 

W-cela  [sala],  that. 

■celui  [salqi],  m.  )  that  (one),  the  (one),  ceux  [s0],  m."^^ those  (ones),  the 

celle  [sel].  J  he,  she.  celles  [sel],  f.  J  ones,  they. 

celui-ci  [salqi  si],  m.  )^this  (one),  ceux-ci  [80  si],  m. )  these  (ones), 

celle-ci  [sel  si],  f.       /the  latter.  celles-ci  [sel  si],  f.  /the  latter. 

celui-lk  [salx{i  la],  m.  \that  (one),  the  ceux-lk  [s0  la],  m.)  those  (ones), 

•celle-lk  [sel  la],  f.       /former.  celles-lk  [sel  la],  f.  /the  former. 

126.  For  the  use  of  ce  as  distinguished  from  the  personal 
pronoun  il  (elle,  etc.),  see  §  97. 

127.  Ceci  =  '  this,'  and  cela  =  *  that,'  are  used  to  denote 
something  pointed  out  or  indicated,  but  not  named.     Cela  is 
often  contracted  into  ga  in  familiar  language : 
Cela  est  joli ;  je  pr^f^re  ceci.  That  is  pretty ;  I  prefer  this. 
Pouvez-vous  faire  cela  ?  Can  you  do  that  ? 
J'aime  ^a.  I  like  that. 

128.  Celui,  '  that  (one),'  *  the  (one),'  '  he,'  is  used  of  persons 
or  things,  and  is  regularly  followed  by  a  relative  clause  or  a 
de  clause : 

Celui  que  j'attendais  est  arriv^.        He  whom  I  expected  has  arrived. 
Ceux  qui  cherchent  trouvent.  Those  who  seek  find. 

Mes  fleurs  et  celles  de  Marie.  My  flowers  and  Mar3r's. 

Celles  que  vous  aimez.  The  ones  (flowers)  you  like. 

129.  1.  Celui-ci,  Hhis,'  'this  one,'  *he,'  and  celui-lel, 
*  that,'  *  that  one,'  are  used  of  persons  or  things  already  men- 
tioned, to  contrast  the  nearer  and  the  more  remote : 

Voici  les  deux   chalnes;    gardez  Here  are  the  two  chains;  keep 

celle-ci  et  donnez-moi  celle-lk.  this  ^one)  and  give  me  that  (one). 

2.  '  The  latter '  is_celui-ci,  and  '  the  former '  is  celui-1^ 
the  order  of  ideas  being  inverted  as  compared  with  English  : 

Cic^ron  et  Virgile    dtaient  tons    Cicero  and  Virgil  were  both  cele- 
deux  cel^hres ;   cemi^ci^tait  brated ;     the    former    was   an 

po6te  et  celui-Uk  orateur.  orator  and  the  latter  a  poet 


§129]  LESSON  XXXL  8& 

EXERCISE  XXXI. 

A.  ^Un  certain  homme  possedait  un  &ne  et  un  petit  chien. 
A  ceMi^i  il  donnait  des  caresses  et  h.  celui-14  des  fardeaux  k. 
porter.  Le  chien  s'amusait  toute  la  journ^e.  II  courait  par-ci 
par-la.  A  table  il  mangeait  avec  son  maitre.  II  donnait  la 
patte  a  tout  le  monde,  et  tout  le  monde  lui  donnait  dea 
baisers.  Le  pauvre  4ne  voyait  tout  cela,  et  il  en  ^tait  tres 
m^content.  tin  jour  il  se  demande :  "  Pourquoi  ne  me  donne- 
t-on  pas  autant  de  bonnes  choses  qu'k  ce  miserable  petit  chien? 
^  Pourquoi  donne-t-on  toutes  les  caresses  h.  celui  qui  ne  travaille 
pas,  et  tons  les  coups  de  baton  k  celui  qui  travaille  tou jours  % 
Je  cesserai  de  travailler.  J'entrerai  dans  la  salle  k  manger 
de  mon  maitre,  je  donnerai  la  patte  k  tous  ceux  qui  y  sont,  e1> 
ils  me  donneront  des  caresses."  Le  pauvre  ane  t^che  de  faire 
cela.  II  entre  dans  la  salle  k  manger,  il  salue  la  compagnie. 
II  chante  de  sa  belle  voix.  II  veut  donner  la  patte  k  son 
maitre.  Mais  en  levant  la  patte  il  fait  tomber  la  vaisselle. 
On  a  peur,  on  crie.  Les  valets  entrent,  et  donnent  k  la  pauvr© 
b^te,  non  des  caresses,  mais  des  coups  de  biton. 

^^  B.  Complete  the  following  by  supplying  suitable  demonstra- 
tive pronoun  forms  :  1.  Ceci  est  bon, .  .  .est  mauvais.  2.  Cela 
est  grand, ...  est  petit.  3.  Voilk  deux  montres  d'or ; .  . .  est 
plus  jolie  que ...      4.    .  . .  de  mon  pfere  est  plus  jolie  encore. 

5.  Voici  des  livres  pour  nous ;  donnez-moi .  . . ,  et  je  voua 
donnerai...  6.  Donnez-moi  d'autres  plumes,  j'ai  perdu... 
que  vous  m'avez  pretdes.  7.  Je  parle  de  Cic^ron  et  de 
Virgile;.  .  .^tait  po^te  et.  .  .^tait  orateur.  8.  .  .  qui  volent 
sont  des  voleurs.  9.  Cet  homme  a  vol^  mon  argent  et .  . .  d© 
mon  ami. 

CI.  Give  me  that.  2.  I  do  not  need  this.  3.  There  are 
two  pens ;  give  me  this  one  and  keep  that  one.  4.  My  watch 
is  finer  than  John's.  6.  My  father's  is  still  finer.  6.  He 
who  steals  is  a  thief.  7.  Those  who  steal  are  thieves.  8.  I 
have  two  brothers,  John  and  Robert :  the  former  is  taller 
than  I,  the  latter  smaller. 

D.  (Oral.)  \.  Quels  ^taient  les  deux  animaux  que  possedait 
cet  homme  ?  2.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  donnait  a  celui-ci  ?  3.  Qu'est-ce 
qu'il  donnait  k  celui-la?     4.  L'ane   ^tait-il   content   de   celal 

6.  Qu'est-ce  que  Vkne  se  demande  1     6.  Oh  est-ce  qu'il  veut 


\fc 


Se  LESSON  XXXII.  [§§130-132 

entrer?  7.  Est-ce  qu'il  a  fait  cela?  8.  La  voix  de  I'ane 
est-elle  plus  belle  que  celle  du  chien'?  9.  A  qui  veut-il 
donner  la  patte?  10.  Ceux  qui  sont  dans  la  salle  sont-ils 
contents'?  11.  Qu'est-ce  que  font  les  valets'?  12.  Est-ce 
qu'on  donne  toujours  des  coups  de  b^ton  k  ceux  qui  les 
m^ritent?     Etc.,  etc. 

B.  1.  The  ass  and  the  dog  are  useful  animals.  2.  The  former 
carries  burdens,  and  the  latter  is  the  faithful  friend  of  man. 
3.  The  ass  in  this  story  is  dissatisfied.  4.  He  asks  himself 
why  people  give  good  things  to  those  who  do  not  work. 
5.  His  master  gives  caresses  to  the  dog  and  blows  to  him  who 
works.  6.  The  unhappy  animal  is  dissatisfied  with  that.  7.  He 
ceases  to  work,  and  enters  the  dining-room.  8.  He  salutes 
those  who  are  there.  9.  He  sings  with  his  beautiful  voice. 
10.  That  is  not  very  agreeable  to  the  company.  11.  You  know 
that  the  voice  of  the  ass  is  not  so  pleasant  as  that  of  the  dog. 
12.  The  master  is  afraid.  13.  All  those  who  are  present 
scream.  14.  The  servants  hear  this,  and  enter  the  room. 
15.  They  give  the  poor  ass  blows  with  a  stick.  16.  People  do 
not  always  give  {des)  blows  to  those  who  deserve  them. 

LESSON  XXXII. 

130.  The  Relative  Pronouns. 

qui  [ki],  who,  which,  that,  whom  (after  a  preposition). 

que  [ka],  whom,  which,  that. 

dont  [do],  whose,  of  whom,  of  which. 

ou  [u],  in  which,  into  which,  at  which,  to  which,  etc. 

lequel  [lakel],  m.  s.,  lesquels  [lekel],  m.  pi.    )    ,         ,  1  .  1.  ^,   ^ 

1         11    n  I    n  i!        .  fi      n  i    n  /    i  }-who,  whoffi,  which,  that, 

laquelle  [lakel],  f.  s. ,  lesquelles  [leksl],  f.  pi.  J 

quoi  [kwa],  what,  which. 

131.  Agreement.  A  relative  pronoun,  whether  variable 
or  invariable  in  form,  is  of  the  gender,  number  and  person  of 
its  antecedent : 

Moi  qui  dtais  (vous  qui  ^tiez)  \k.      I  who  was  (you  who  were)  there, 
Les  lettres  que  j'ai  apport^es.  The  letters  which  I  have  brought. 

132.  Use  of  the  Relative.  1.  The  relative  of  most 
common  use  is  qui,  as  subject,  and  que,  as  direct  object,  of  a 
verb  (cf.  §75). 


§133]  LESSON  XXXII.  87 

2.  Qui  =  *whom'  (of  persons  only)  is  also  used  after  a 
preposition : 

L'oncle  chez  qui  je  demeurais.  The  uncle  with  whom  I  lived. 

3.  The  force  of  de  +  a  relative  is  generally  expressed  by 

dont: 

Les  amis  dont  nous  parlions.  The  friends  of  whom  we  spoke. 

L'^glise  dont  je  vois  la  tour.  The  church  whose  tower  I  see. 

4.  Oil  =  dans  (or  some  other  preposition  of  position)  +  a 
relative : 

La  ville  ou  {or  dans  laquelle)  je        The  city  in  which  I  live, 
demeure. 

6.  Lequel  is  often  used  instead  of  qui  (que,  etc.),  to  avoid 
ambiguity,  and  must  be  used  of  things  after  a  preposition : 
Les  sceurs  de  nos  amis,  lesquelles     The  sisters  of  our  friends,  who  (i.e., 
sent  chez  nous  k  present.  the  sisters)  are  with  us  now. 

6.  Quoi  stands  after  a  preposition,  rarely  otherwise : 
Voilk  de  quoi  je  parlais.  That  is  what  I  was  speaking  of. 

7.  The  absolute  *  what,'  '  which,'  *  that  which '  as  subject  is 
Ce  qui,  and,  as  object  or  predicate,  ce  que ;  '  of  what/  *  that 
of  which,'  is  ce  dotit : 

Je  vois  ce  qui  vous  amuse.  I  see  what  amuses  you. 

Je  sais  ce  que  je  sais.  I  know  what  I  know. 

Vous  savez  ce  que  je  suis.  You  know  what  I  am. 

Ce  dont  j'ai  besoin.  That  which  I  need.     • 

8.  *  He  who,'  *  the  one  who,'  etc.  =  celui  qui : 

J'aime  ceuz  qui  m'aiment.  I  love  those  who  love  me. 

Ma  montre  est  plus  jolie  que  My  watch  is  prettier  than  the  one 

celle  que  vous  avez.  you  have. 

9.  The  relative  pronoun,  often  omitted  in  English,  is  never 
omitted  in  French : 

Le  tableau  que  j'ai  vu  hier.  The  picture  I  saw  yesterday. 

133.  Present  Indicative  of  connaitre,  *  to  know,'  *  be 
acquainted  with,'  etc.  (irreg.). 


88  LESSON  XXXII.  [§133 

I  know,  etc. 

je  connais  [39  kone].  nous  connaissons  [nu  koncso]. 

tu  connais  [ty  kone].  vous  connaissez    [vu  konese], 

il  connait  [il  kone].  ils  connaissent  [il  koneis]. 

EXERCISE  XXXII. 

A.  C'est  ma  premiere  promenade  a  Paris.  Tin  Parisien  de 
mes  amis  m'accompagne.  Nous  voila  a  la  place  de  la  Con- 
corde.— Quelle  est  cette  eglise  dont  on  voit  la  fagade  au  bout 
de  cette  rue  ? — C'est  I'eglise  de  la  Madeleine  dont  je  vous  ai 
d^jh,  parld  ce  matin.  C'est  une  tres  belle  Eglise.  Je  vous  y 
m^nerai  un  de  ces  jours  pour  assister  k  la  messe. — Quel  est  cet 
autre  Edifice  de  I'autre  cot^  du  fleuve  1 — C'est.  le  palais  de  la 
Chambre  des  deputes.  C'est  Ik  que  se  font  les  lois  du  pays. 
Je  connais  un  d^put^  qui  m'a  donn^  des  billets  d'entree  pour 
demain.  Voulez-vous  m'y  accompagner? — Avec  plaisir.  Et 
quel  est  ce  grand  monument  tout  pres  de  nous? — C'est  un 
ob^lisque  ^gy:ptien  qu'on  a  apportd  en  France  sous  Louis- 
Philippe.  Yoyez-vous  aussi  ces  huit  statues  situ^es  k  differents 
points  autour  de  la  Place?  Ce  sont  des  statues  qui  repr^- 
sentent  les  villes  les  plus  importantes  de  la  France.  Regardez 
surtout  celle  de  Strasbourg  qui  est  couverte  de  couroim^s. 
C'est  une  societe  patriotique  qui  a  fait  cela  pour  marquer  la 
douleur  q^e  lui  ^  causee  la  perte  de  cette  ville.  Kegardons 
encore  ce  qui  se  trouve  atrtouf  de  nous.  A  droite  il  y  a  les 
fameux  Champs-Elysdes  avec  leurs  belles  promenades.  Cette 
avenue  splendide  qui  les  traverse  mene  au  bois  de  Boulogne, 
en  passant  par  I'Arc  de  Triomphe  qu'on  voit  la-bas  k  I'horizon. 
A  gauche  nd\is  voyons  les  jardins  des  Tuileries,  et  plus  loin  le 
Louvre,  ancien  palais  des  rois  de  France.  C'est  la  que  nous 
irons  visiter  les  grandes  galeries  de  peintures.  Tout  ce  qu'on 
voit  d'ici  est  interessant. 

B.  Complete  the  following  by  supplying  suitable  relative 
pronoun  forms:  L  La  ville ...  nous  habi  tons.  2.  La  ville 
.  . . nous  demeurons.  3.  L'oncle  chez.  .  .je  demeurais.  4.  Les 
amis  .  . .  m'accompagnent.  5.  L'eglise  ...  on  voit  la  fa9ade 
Ik-bas.  6.  Les  sceurs  de  nos  amis .  . .  sont  chez  nous  k  present. 
7.  Les  dames...  j'ai  donne  les  fleurs.  8.  Les  chiens.  .  .j'ai 
donn^  la  viande.  9.  Vous  savez  ce.  .  .il  a  perdu.  10.  Je  vois 
ce...vous  amuse.  IL  Nous  aimons  ceux...nous  aiment, 
12.  Ce.  .  .j'ai  besoin. 


§133]  LESSON   XXXII.  89 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Est-ce  la  premiere  promenade  que  vous  faites  h, 
Paris  ?  2.  Quel  est  I'ami  qui  vous  accompagne  ?  3.  L'ami  que 
vous  accompagnez  connait-il  la  ville  ?  4.  Quel  est  I'endroit  otf 
vous  commencez  votre  promenade  ?  5.  Quelle  est  I'eglise  dont 
on  voit  la  faQade  ?  6.  Est-ce  Peglise  dont  vous  m'avez  parl^ 
ce  matin  ?  7.  Et  quel  est  cet  autre  edifice  dont  on  voit  la 
fa9ade  de  I'autre  cote  du  fleuve  ?  8.  Vous  dites  que  vous  avez 
des  billets  d'entree  ;  qui  vous  les  a  donnes  ?  9.  Est-ce  le  depute 
chez  qui  vous  etiez  hier  soir  ?  10.  Ou  est  cet  obelisque  egyptien 
dont  vous  m'avez  parle  ?  11.  Est-ce  le  grand  monument  prfes 
duquel  on  voit  tant  de  monde?  12.  Que  representent  ces 
statues-Ik?  13.  Connaissez-vous  celle  sur  laquelle  on  voit 
tant  de  couronnes  ?  14.  Voulez-vous  me  dire  ce  qu'elle  repr^- 
sente  ?  15.  Cet  espace  qui  se  trouve  k  droite,  est-ce  un  jardin 
public?  16.  Oil  niene  cette  avenue  par  laquelle  on  voit 
passer  les  voitures  ?  17.  Quels  sont  les  jardins  qui  sont  k 
gauche  ?  18.  Quel  est  cet  edifice  dont  on  voit  d'ici  les  fenetres  ? 
19.  M'avez- vous  montrd  tout  ce  qui  est  int^ressant?    Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  Paris  is  a  city  of  which  we  have  often  spoken.  2. 
To-day  I  take  my  first  walk  in  Paris.  3.  The  gentleman  who 
accompanies  me  knows  the  city  well.  4.  He  shows  me  every- 
thing that  is  interesting.  6.  The  point  at  which  we  begin 
our  walk  is  the  "place  de  la  Concorde."  6»  From  this  square 
we  see  the  church  of  the  Madeleine,  whose  fa9ade  we  admire. 
7.  We  see  also  the  "  Chambre  des  deputes,"  where  the  laws  of 
the  country  are  made.  8.  A  member  of  parliament  {depute), 
at  whose  house  we  were  yesterday,  has  given  us  tickets  of 
admission.  9.  Near  the  middle  of  the  square  there  is  an 
obelisk  whicTT  was  brought  to  France  in  the  time  of  (sous) 
Louis-Philippe.  10.  Statues  which  represent  the  most  im- 
portant  cities   of   France   are    situated   around   the  square. 

11.  What  is  that  statue  on  which  I  see  so  many  wreaths  1 

12.  It  is  a  statue  which  represents  a  city  the  loss  of  which 
caused  much  sorrow  to  France.  13.  Let  us  look  again  at 
what  is  around  us,  1 4.  Where  does  that  avenue  lead,  through 
which  we  see  the  carriages  passing?  15.  And  what  public 
gardens  are  those  on  our  left,  to  which  we  are  going  (se 
rendre)'i  16.  They  (ce)  are  the  gardens  of  the  Tuileries. 
1 7.  Farther  off  you  see  the  Louvre,  in  which  lived  (vivre)  the 
kings  of  France.  18.  All  that  you  have  shown  me  is  very 
interesting.     19.  I  thank  you  very  much. 


90  LESSON  XXXIII.  [§§134-135 

J  LESSON  XXXIII. 

134,  The  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

qui  ?  [ki],  who  ?,  whom  ? 

que  ?  [ko],  what  ? 

quoi  ?  [kwa],  what  ? 

lequel?  [lakel],  m.  s.,  lesquels?  [lekel],  m.  pi.    Which?,  which  one(s)?, 

laquelle?  [lakel],  f.  s.,  lesquelles?  [lekel],  f.  pi.  J  what  one(s)? 

I35«  Use  of  Interrogatives.  1.  Qui?  =  *whoV  *whomV 

is  used  of  persons: 

Qui  Sonne  ?    Qui  sont-elles  ?  Who  is  ringing  ?    Who  are  they  ? 

Dites-moi  qui  sonne.  Tell  me  who  is  ringing. 

Qui  a-t-il  f rapp^  ?  Whom  has  he  struck  ? 

De  qui  parlez-vous  ?  Of  whom  are  you  speaking  ? 

2.  '  Whose  V  denoting  ownership  simply  =  a  qui  ?,  otherwise 
generally  de  qui  ?,  but  never  dont  I 

A  qui  est  ce  livre  ?  Whose  book  is  this  ? 

De  qui  etes-vous  (le)  fils  ?  Whose  son  are  you  ? 

3.  Que  ?  =  *  what 1, '  stands  always  as  the  object  or  the 
predicate  of  a  verb  : 

Que  vous  a-t-il  dit  ?    Qu'est-ce  ?       What  did  he  tell  you?    What  is  it  ? 

4.  'What?'  as  subject  is  usually  qu'est-ce  qui?,  and 
'what'  in  indirect  question  is  usually  ce  qui  (ce  que,  etc.) : 

Qu'est-ce  qui  vous  a  int^ress^  ?         What  has  interested  you  ? 

Je  ne  sais  pas  ce  qui  m'a  f rapp^.        I  do  not  know  what  struck  me. 

Dites-moi  ce  que  vous  d^sirez.  Tell  me  what  you  desire. 

5.  Quoi  ?  =  *  what  V  stands  regularly  after  a  preposition,  or 
absolutely,  the  verb  being  understood  : 

A  quoi  pensez-vous  ?  What  are  you  thinking  of  ? 

Je  cherche  quelque  chose.  — Quoi  ?    I  am  looking  for  something.  — What  ? 

6.  Lequel?  (laquelle?,  etc.)  =  * which V  'which  or  what 
one  V  agrees  in  gender  with  the  noun  referred  to.  Both  parts 
of  lequel  (le  and  quel)  are  inflected,  and  the  usual  contrac- 
tions with  de  and  a  (cf.  §§  35,  46)  take  place  : 

Laquelle  des  dames  est  Ik  ?  Which  of  the  ladies  is  there  ? 

Auquel  des  hommes  parle-t-il  ?  To  which  of  the  men  does  he  speak? 


§135]  LESSON  XXXIII.  9] 

EXERCISE  XXXIII. 

A.  Mon  ami  et  moi  continuons  aujourd'hui  notre  promenade. 
Nous  allons  voir  d'autres  choses  int^^ressantes.  Je  demande  k 
mou  ami :  ''Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  I'ile  de  la  Cit^  dont  vous 
me  parlez  ? " — L'ile  de  la  Cit^  est  une  ile  de  la  Seine  oil  on 
trouve  plusieurs  des  grands  Edifices  publics  de  Paris.  Mais 
vous  allez  voir  tout  de  suite.  Nous  voici  au  Pont-Neuf  par 
lequel  on  entre  dans  la  Cit^.— ^uel  est  ce  grand  edifice  dont 
nous  approchons  1 — C'est  le  Palais  de  Justice.—  Qu'est-ce  que 
c'est  que  le  Palais  de  Justice  ?^-C'est  I'endroit  ou  les  juges 
r^glent  les  diffS^rends  qui  existent  entre  les  particuliers. — 
Quelle  est  cette  partie  de  I'^ifice  qui  ressemble  a  une  dglise? — 
C'est,  en  effet,  une  eglise  qui  s'appelle  la  Sainte-Chapelle. — Par 
qui  a-t-elle  ^t^  b^tie  ? — Elle  a  ^t^  b&tie  par  un  roi  de  France  qui 
s'appelait  sainf^  Louis,  fils  de  la  cel^bre  Blanche  de  Castille. 
Mais  continuons  notre  chemin.  En  a5'an9ant  nous  voyons 
rH6tel-Dieu, — Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  I'Hdtel-Dieu  ? — C'est  un 
h6pital. — Et  en  face  de  nous  quelle  est  cette  grande  dglise  1 — 
C'est  r^glise  de  Notre-Dame  dont  nous  avons  d6jk  tantparl^. — 
Oh  oui,  je  me  rappelle.  Je  ne  sais  pas  k  quoi  je  pensais.  Que 
je  su^s  bete  S  Laquelle  est  la  plus  ancienne,  I'^glise  de  Notre- 
Dame^  ou  la  .Madeleine? — Notre-Dame  est  beaucoup  plus 
ancienne ;  elle  est  parmi  les  plus  anciennes  ^glises  de  1' Europe. 
C'est  une  belle  fa9ade ;  admirons-la  un  peu.  Regardez  les  trois 
portails  qui  sont  ornds  de  statues. — Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que 
cette  rang^e  de  statues  au-dessus  des  portails  ? — C'est  ce  qu'on 
appelle  la  galerie  des  rois, — Qu'est-ce  que  cela  signifie? — On 
dit  que  les  vingt-huit  statues  repr^sentent  des  rois  de  France. 
Au-dessus  de  la  galerie  il  y  a  une  belle  rosace,  plus  haut,  une 
deuxiferae  galerie  ou  il  n'y  a  pas  de  statues,  et  encore  plus  haut, 
les  deux  grandes  tours  ou  se  trouvent  les  cloches.  //  ' 

B.  Write  in  French  one  example  of  the  correct  use  of  each 
of  the  following  interrogative  forms  and  locutions:  1.  Que? 
2.  Est-ce  que?  3.  Qu'est-ce  que?  4.  Quel?  5.  Quelle? 
6.  Quels  ?  7.  Quelles  ?  8.  Qui  ?  9.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  ? 
10.  Quoi?  11.  Lequel?  12.  Laquelle?  13.  Lesquels  ? 
14.  Lesquelles.     15.  A  qui?     16.  Dequi? 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Avec  qui  vous  promenez-vous  aujourd'hui? 
2.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  allez  voir?     3.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que 


92  LESSON  XXXIV.  [§136 

Tile  de  la  Cite?  4.  Ou  est-ce  qu'elle  est  situ^e?  5.  Quels 
Edifices  s'y  trouvent?  6.  Comment  s'appelle  ce  pont-la? 
7.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  ce  grand  palais  ?  8.  J'en  vols 
deux,  lequel  voulez-vous  dire  ?  9.  Youlez-vous  me  dire  par  qui 
la  Sainte-Chapelle  a  ete  batie?  10.  Savez-vous  de  qui  il  ^tait  le 
fils  ?  11.  Savez-vous  ce  que  c'est  que  I'Hotel-Dieu  ?  12.  Laquelle 
est  la  plus  ancienne  de  ces  deux  ^glises,  Notre-Dame  ou  la 
Madeleine?  13.  Quel  est  I'autre  edifice  que  vous  voulez  visiter 
maintenant?  14.  Auquel  voulez-vous  aller  ?  15.  Ou  sont  ces 
fameux  portails  dont  vous  parliez?  16.  Qu'y  a-t-il  au-dessus 
des  portails?     17.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  la  galerie  des  rois? 

18.  Voulez-vous   me   dire   ce   qu'il   y  a   dans   cette   tour-1^? 

19.  Qu'est-ce  qui  vous  a  int^ress^  le  plus  dans  cet  edifice? 
Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  What  interesting  things  are  you  going  to  see  to-day? 
2.  What  is  the  ile  de  la  Cit^  ?  3.  What  is  the  name  of  the 
bridge  by  which  one  enters  it  {y)  ?  4.  Which  of  those  build- 
ings is  the  Palais  de  Justice?  5.  What  is  the  Palais  de 
Justice?  6.  What  is  a  judge?  7.  A  judge  is  a  man  who 
settles  disputes.  8.  There  is  a  part  of  the  building  which 
resembles  a  church ;  what  is  it  ?  9.  Will  you  tell  me  by  whom 
the  Sainte-Chapelle  was  built?  10.  Which  of  those  buildings 
is  the  H6tel-Dieu?  11.  Do  you  know  what  the  H6tel-Dieu 
is  ?  12.  What  is  the  name  of  that  largg,  church  in  front  of  us  ? 
13.  Which  is  the  more  ancient  of  those  two  churches,  Notre- 
Dame  or  la  Madeleine?  14.  Which  of  these  two  churches  do 
you  admire  the  more?  15.  In  which  do  you  attend  mass? 
16.  What  is  it  that  people  call  "la  galerie  des  rois"?  17.  What 
is  there  in  the  two  high  towers  on  the  right  hand  and  on  the 
left?     18.  What  has  interested  you  most  in  Notre-Dame ? 

LESSON  XXXIV. 

136.  Indefinite  Pronouns.  The  indefinite  pronouns  of 
most  frequent  occurrence  are  : — 

1.  On  [5],  *one,'  'someone,'  *we,'  *you,'  'they,'  'people,'  etc.  (cf. 
§48). 

2.  Quelqu'un  [kelk  dfe],  m. ,  quelqu'une  [kelk  yn],  f. ,  'somebody,'  'some 
one,'  'any  one,'  plural  quelques-uns  [kelkoz  d&],  m.,  quelques-unes 
[kfilkaz  ynl,  f.,  'some,'  'some  people,'  'any,'  'a  few' : 


§137]  LESSON  XXXIV.  93 

II  y  a  quelqu'un  k  la  porte.  There  is  somebody  at  the  door. 

J'ai  vu  quelques-unes  de  vos  amies.    I  have  seen  some  of  your  friends. 
Avez-vous  des  cerises,  madame?       Have  you  any  cherries,  madam? 
J'en  ai  quelques-unes.  I  have  a  few. 

3.  Quelquechose  [kelka  J013],  m.,  'something,'  'anything'? 
Quelque  chose  est  tomb^.  Something  has  fallen. 

J'ai  quelque  chose  de  bon.  I  have  something  good. 

4.  Along  with  ne  +  a  verb,  or  when  alone,  a  verb  being  understood, 
personne  [person],  m.,  means  'nobody,  'not  anybody,'  'no  one,'  and 
rien  [rje],  m.,  'nothing,'  ' not  anything ' : 

Je  n'ai  parle  k  personne.  I  did  not  speak  to  anybody. 

Vous  n'avez  rien  apporte.  You  have  brought  nothing. 

II  n'a  rien  dit  de  mauvais.  He  said  nothing  bad. 

Qu'a-t-il  dit  ?— Rien.  What  did  he  say  ?— Nothing. 

Personne  ici !  Nobody  here  ! 

I37«  Certain  forms  serve  both  as  adjectives  and  as  pronouns. 
Those  of  most  frequent  occurrence  are  : — 

1.  Autre  [otr],  'other'  (adjective);  un  autre,  'another,'  Tautre, 
*  the  other '  (pronoun) : 

Une  autre  fois  ;  d'autres  causes.       Another  time  ;  other  causes. 
Les  autres  iront  aussi.  The  others  will  go  too. 

2.  Distinguish  un  autre  from  encore  un  : 

Une  autre  plume.  Another  (a  different)  pen. 

Encore  une  plume.  Another  (an  additional)  pen. 

3.  From  autre  are  formed  various  locutions : 
L'une  et  I'autre  occasion.  Both  occasions. 
Les  uns  et  les  autres  partent.  All  are  going  away. 
Donnez-le  k  I'un  ou  k  I'autre.  Give  it  to  either. 

Ce  n'est  ni  pour  les  uns  ni  pour    It  is  for  none  of  them. 

les  autres. 
EUes  se  flattent  les  unes  les  autres.   They  flatter  each  other. 
Hs  ont  peur  les  uns  des  autres.        They  are  afraid  of  one  another. 

4.  When  used  with  ne  +  a  verb,  or  when  alone,  the  verb  being  under- 
stood, aucun  [okce],  nul  [nyl],  pas  un  [paz  c6],  as  adjectives  = '  no,'  '  not 
one,'  '  not  any,'  and  as  pronouns  = '  none,'  *  no  one,'  '  not  one' : 
Aucun  auteur  ne  dit  cela.  No  author  says  that. 

A-t-on  de  I'espoir  ? — Aucun.  Have  they  any  hope? — None, 


94  LESSON  XXXIV.  [§137 

6.  Tel  [tel]  =  *  such,'  un  tel  =  'such  a.'  *Such'  as  an  adverb  is  si 
[si]  or  tenement  [telma] : 

Telles  sont  mes  doTaleurs.  Such  are  my  griefs. 

Qui  raconte  une  telle  histoire  ?  Who  tells  such  a  story  ? 

Une  si  belle  maison.  Such  a  beautiful  house. 

Un  homme  tellement  crueL  Such  a  cruel  man. 

6.  Tout  [tu],  m.,  toute  [tut],  f.,  tous  [tu  (as  adj.),  tus  (as  pron.)],  m. 
pi.,  toutes  [tut],  f.  pl.,  =  'all,'  'every,'  'any,'  'whole,'  etc.: 

Tous  les  hommes.  All  (the)  men. 

Toute  ma  vie.  All  my  (my  whole)  life. 

Tous  (toutes)  sont  arriv6(e)s.  All  have  come. 

7.  Meme  [me:m],  before  a  noun  or  as  a  pronoiin  = '  same ' ;  m^me, 
following  the  noun  or  pronoun  qualified='self,'  'very,'  'even,'  and 
agrees,  but  has  no  article  ;  as  adverb  meme= '  even ' : 

La  meme  chose.  The  same  thing. 

Ce  sont  les  memes.  They  are  the  same. 

Dieu  est  la  bont^  meme.  God  is  goodness  itself. 

Les  enfants  memes  le  savent.  The  very  children  know  it. 

Nous-memes  ;  elles-memes.  We  ourselves ;  they  tnemselves. 

lis  nous  ont  meme  battus.  They  even  beat  us. 

EXERCISE   XXXIV. 

A.  A  Paris  on  peut  s'amuser  facilement.  On  y  trouve  des 
amusements  pour  tout  le  monde.  On  y  trouve  des  th^^tres, 
des  cirques,  des  spectacles  de  toute  espece.  Hier  nous  avons 
^t^  k  un  spectacle  qui  nous  a  beaucoup  amuses.  Un  monsieur 
en  dtait  le  directeur,  mais  tous  les  acteurs  etaient  des  chats  et 
des  chiens.  C'^tait  quelque  chose  de  magnifique.  On  n'a 
jamais  rien  vu  de  plus  amusant !  Personne  n'avait  jamais  vu 
des  animaux  si  intelligents  !  II  y  avait  des  chiens  noirs  et 
des  chiens  blancs.  II  y  en  avait  des  grands  et  des  petits.  II 
y  en  avait  de  toutes  les  races  :  des  chiens  danois,  des  chiens  de 
berger,  des  terre-neuve,  des  levriers  et  des  caniches.  Les 
grands  chiens  portaient  les  petits  sur  le  dos.  Quelques-uns 
etaient  habilles  en  homme  et  d'autres  en  femme ;  ils  f aisaient 
beaucoup  de  tours  comiques.  II  y  en  avait  qui  fumaient  la 
pipe.  II  y  en  avait  d'autres  qui  causaient  ensemble  comme 
des  personnes.  D'autres  promenaient  des  voitures  d'enfant 
comme  des  bonnes.     Quelques-uns  se  promenaient  a  bicy- 


§137]  LESSON  XXXIV.  95 

clette,  quelques-uns  marchaient  sur  les  pattes  de  derri^re,  et 
un,  plus  fort  que  les  autres,  raarchait  sur  les  pattes  de  devant. 
II  y  en  avait  d'autres  qui  se  battaient  a  coups  de  poing. 
II  y  en  avait  mgme  qui  tiraient  des  coups  de  pistolet.  lis 
couraient,  ils  sautaient,  et  pas  un  ne  semblait  s'ennuyer.  Les 
personnes  qui  assistaient  au  spectacle  ne  s'ennuyaient  pas 
non  plus.  On  riait,  on  applaudissait,  on  battait  des  mains, 
et  personne  n'a  quitte  la  salle  en  mauvaise  humeur. 

B.  Write  in  French  one  example  for  the  use  of  each  of  the 
following  in  a  sentence  :  1.  On.     2.  Quelque  chose.     3.  Quel 
que  chose  de.     4.  Quelqu'un.     5.  Quelques-unes.     6.  Ne  .  . 
personne.    7.  Ne  .  .  .  rien.     8.  Autre  (adj.^.    9.  L'une  I'autre 

10.  Les  uns  aux  autres.     IL  Pas  une   (adj.).     12.  Un  tel 

13.  Toutes  (adj.).  14.  Tous  (pron.).  15.  Meme  (  =  self), 
16.  Meme  (  =  even). 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Est-ce  qu'on  s'amuse  facilement  h.  Paris? 
2.  Y  a-t-il  des  amusements  pour  tous  ?  3.  Quelques-uns  des 
theatres  sont-ils  trfes  c^lebres  ?  4.  Avez-vous  dt^  k  quelque 
spectacle  hierl  5.  Etait-ce  quelque  chose  d'amusant?  6.  N'avez- 
vous  jamais  rien  vu  de  plus  amusant  ?  7.  Avez-vous  jamais 
vu  un  tel  spectacle  ?  8.  A-t-on  vu  des  animaux  si  intelligents  ? 
9.  Quelles  especes  de  chiens  y  avait-il?  10.  Qu'est-ce  que 
les  uns  faisaient  pendant  que  les  autres  fumaient  la  pipe  ? 

11.  Avez-vous  dit  que  les  tJns  parlaient  aux  autres  ?  12.  Com- 
ment se  battaient-ils  1     13.  Jouaient-ils  tous  en  m§me  temps  ? 

14.  Estnce  que  tous  les  chiens  semblaient  contents?  15.  Est- 
ce   que   les   personnes    qui   y    assistaient    s'amusaient  bien? 

16.  Et  personne  n'a  quitte  la  salle  avant  la  fin,  n'est-ce  pas  ? 

17.  Ces  chiens  sont-ils  les  memes  que  nous  avons  vus  I'ann^e 
pass^e?  18.  Est-ce  que  les  enfants  iront  les  voir  encore  une 
fois?  19.  Irez-vous  vous-meme?  20.  Irez-vous  meme  s'il 
fait  mauvais  temps  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  There  are  amusements  in  Paris  for  all  sorts  of  people. 
2.  There  is  something  new  every  day.  3.  One  can  find 
amusement  in  the  promenades  and  public  gardens  for  nothing. 
4.  You  can  also  visit  the  picture  galleries  for  nothing.  5.  Some 
of  the  theatres  of  Paris  are  among  the  best  in  the  world. 
6.  Some  of  its  promenades  are  very  celebrated,  for  example, 
the  Champs-^lys^es.  7.  Yesterday  evening  I  was  at  a  very 
amusing  show.      8.  Two  of  my  cousins  (f.),  who  are  at  our 


96 


LESSON  XXXV. 


[§138 


house,  were  with  me.  9.  Both  enjoyed  themselves  very  much. 
1 0.  I  have  never  seen  anything  more  amusing  myself.  1 1 .  It 
was  a  kind  of  theatre,  in  which  the  actors  were  dogs  and 
cats.  12.  There  were  dogs  of  all  races:  shepherd's  dogs, 
poodles,  and  many  other  kinds.  13.  Several  of  the  dogs  were 
dressed  like  men  and  women.  14.  Some  were  walking  on 
their  hind  feet.  15.  Others  were  smoking  pipes.  16.  And 
there  were  even  a  few  that  were  chatting  together  like  people 
in  the  street.  17.  Nobody  left  the  hall  before  the  end  of  the 
show.  18.  We  were  all  very  much  pleased.  19.  We  saw  the 
same  dogs  last  year,  but  they  seemed  all  cleverer  this  year. 
20.  I  should  go  to  see  them  again  to-morrow  if  somebody 
accompanied  me.     21.  I  shall  go  with  you  myself. 


LESSON   XXXY. 


138. 


Cardinal  Numerals. 


1.  un,  une 

2.  deux 

3.  trois 

4.  quatre 

5.  cinq 

6.  six 

7.  sept 

8.  huit 

9.  neuf 

10.  dix 

11.  onze 

12.  douze 

13.  treize 

14.  quatorze 

15.  quinze 

16.  seize 

17.  dix-sept 

18.  dix-huit 

19.  dix -neuf 

20.  vingt 


[<B,  yn]. 

[d0]. 

[trwa]. 

[katr]. 

[se:k]. 

[sis]. 

[set]. 

[Hit]. 

[noefj. 

[dis]. 

[oiz]. 

[duiz]. 

[treiz]. 

[katorz]. 

[k6:z]. 

[seiz]. 

[dis  set]. 

[diz  qit]. 

[diz  noef]. 

[VI]. 


21. 

vingt  et  un 

[v?t  e  (£]. 

22. 

vingt-deux 

[v?nd  d0]. 

30. 

trente  - 

[trait]. 

31. 

trente  et  un 

[trait  e<36]. 

40. 

^arante 

[karait]. 

50. 

cinquante 

[sekait]. 

60. 

soixante 

[swasait]. 

70. 

soixa,nte-dix 

[swasait  dis]. 

71. 

soixante  et  onze 

[swasait  eoiz], 

80. 

quatre- vingts 

[katr  ve]. 

81. 

quatre-vingt-un 

[katr  V6  «]. 

90. 

quatre-vingt-dix 

[katr  ve  dis]. 

91. 

quatre- vingt-onze  [katr  ve  3iz]. 

100. 

cent 

[sa]. 

101. 

cent  un 

[sa  «]. 

200. 

deux  cents 

[d0  sa]. 

201. 

deux  cent  un 

[d0  sa  &]. 

1000. 

mille 

[mil]. 

1001. 

mille  un 

[mil  &]. 

2000. 

deux  mille 

[d0mil]. 

§§139-142]  LESSON  XXXV.      -  97 

Nouns  op  Number:  1,000,000  =  un  million  [<3&  miljo];  2,000,000  = 
deux  millions  [d0  miljo] ;  1,000,000,000  =  un  milliard  [ce  miljair]. 

Observe:  1.  The  hyphen  unites  together  compound  numerals  under 
100,  except  where  et  occurs.  2.  Et  stands  regularly  in  21,  31,  41,  51, 
61,  is  optional  in  70,  omitted  in  81,  and  elsewhere. 

Notes  on  Pronunciation  :  1.  The  final  consonant  of  5,  6,  7,  8,  9, 
10,  17,  18,  19,  is  silent  before  initial  consonant  or  h  aspirate  of  a  word 
multiplied  by  them,  not  elsewhere:  *Cinq  livres'  [se  liivr],  but  'le 
cinq  mai'  [la  8?:k  me].  2.  No  elision  or  liaison  occurs  before  huit, 
onze:  Le  huit  [la  qit] ;  les  huit  livres  [le  qi  liivr];  le  onze  [la  0!z]; 
les  onze  francs  [le  5:z  fra].  3.  The  t  is  sounded  in  vingt  in  21,  23,  24, 
25,  26,  27,  28,  29,  becomes  d  in  22,  is  silent  from  81  to  99,  is  silent  in 
cent  un,  deux  cent  un,  etc. 

139.  Million  and  milliard  require  de  before  the  object 
enumerated ;  cent  =  *a  (or  one)  hundred';  mille  =  'b.  (or  one) 
thousand ' : 

II  a  pay^  un  million  de  francs.  He  has  paid  a  million  (of)  francs. 

Ceci  vaut  cent  francs.  This  is  worth  a  hundred  francs. 

140.  Quatre-vingft  and  the  multiples  of  cent  take  -S  only 
when  immediately  preceding  a  noun,  or  when  they  themselves 
are  used  as  nouns  of  number  * 

Quatre-vingts  francs.  Eighty  francs. 

Trois  cents  francs.  Three  hundred  francs. 

Les  cinq  cents.  The  five  hundreds. 

But :  Trois  cent  un  francs  ;  quatre- vingt-un  francs,  etc. 

Obt. :  They  are  not  nouns  of  ntimber  in  dates,  or  when  used  as  ordinals. 

141.  Multiplicatives.  'Once'  =  une  fois,  'twice'  =  deux 
fois,  *  three  times '  =  trois  fois,  etc. : 

Diz  fois  dix  font  cent.  Ten  times  ten  make  a  hundred. 

Z42.  Ordinal  Numerals.     They  are  formed  from  'third' 
upwards  by  adding  -i^me  to  the  corresponding  cardinal,  final 
e  being  dropped  •  cinq  adds  u,  and   neuf  changes  f  to  V 
before  -i^me : 
7 


LESSON  XXXV. 


[§143 


1st 


premier 
second 


[pramje]. 
[sago]. 


7th  septifeme 
8th  huiti^me 
9th  neuvi^me 
10th  dixi^me 
11th  onzi^me 


[setjem]. 

[qitjem]. 

[noevjem]. 

[dizjem]. 

[ozjem]. 


21st  vingt  et  unifeme  [vet  e  ynjem]. 
22nd  vingt-deuxieme  [vend  dizjem]. 


(i 

\deuxi6me    [d0zjsm]. 
3rd    troisieme   [trwazjem]. 
4th    quatri^me  [katriem]. 
5th    cinqui6me  [sekjem]. 
6th    sixi^me       [sizjem]. 

143.  Fractions.  The  numerator  is  expressed  by  a  cardi- 
nal, the  denominator  by  an  ordinal,  as  in  English.  '  Half '  = 
moiti^,  f.  (as  noun),  and  demi  (as  adjective) ;  ;J  =  un  quart, 
J  =  un  tiers.  Before  a  noun,  demi  is  invariable,  and  joined 
by  a  hyphen,  but  agrees  elsewhere.  Use  la  moiti^  (not  demi) 
where  *  the  half  of '  is,  or  may  be,  used  in  English : 

Un  huiti^me  ;  les  trois  dixi^mes.  One-eighth  ;  the  three  tenths. 

La  moitie  de  I'ann^e.  (The)  half  (of)  the  year. 

Une  heure  et  demie.  An  hour  and  a  half. 

Une  demi-heure.  Half  an  hour. 

Les  trois  quarts  de  cette  somme.  Three-fourths  of  that  sum. 


EXERCISE  XXXV. 

A.  En  France  on  indique  la  valeur  des  objets  par  francs  et 
centimes.  -Le  franc  vaut  k  peu  pr^s  vingt  "cents"  de  la 
monnaie  americaine  ou  canadienne.  Le  centime  est  la  cen- 
tieme  partie  du  franc.  On  compte  souvent  aussi  par  sous  pour 
les  petites  sommes.  Un  sou,  aussi  bien  qu'un  "  cent "  ameri- 
cain,  vaut  cinq  centimes.  Pour  trouver  la  valeur,  en  monnaie 
americaine,  d'une  somme  quelconque,  exprimee  en  francs,  on 
la  divise  par  cinq.  Par  exemple,  une  somme  de  sept  francs 
quarante  centimes  (7  fr.  40)  vaut  un  dollar  et  quarante-huit 
"cents"  de  not  re  monnaie.  Au  contraire,  pour  trouver  la 
valeur  en  francs  d'une  somme  quelconque,  exprim^  en  dollars, 
on  la  multiplie  par  cinq.  Ainsi  $7.45  vaut,  en  monnaie 
fran9aise,  trente-sept  francs  vingt-cinq  centimes  (37  fr.  25). 

B.  (Oral.)  1.  Comptez  en  frangais  jusqu'a  dix;  de  dix  k 
vingt;  de  vingt  k  trente.  2.  Nommez  les  nombres 40,  41,  50, 
61,  53,  60,  61,  64,  70,  71,  75,  76,  80,  81,  87,  90,  91,  92,  93, 
100,  101,  102,  118,  171,  179,  200,  220,  1000,  1001,  75,000, 
2,000,000,  I,  f ,  2^.  •  3.    Deux  fois  un  font  deux ;   deux  fois 


§144]  LESSON  XXXVI.  99 

deux  font  quatre,  etc . .  .  continuez  jusqu'4  deux  fois  douze. 
4.  Trois  fois  un  font  trois,  etc.  5.  Combien  font  2  fois  10 ;  7 
fois  9 ;  9  fois  9 ;  11  fois  11?,  etc.  6.  Donnez  les  nombres  ordi- 
naiix  jusqu'a  vingtifeme.  7.  Nommez  les  ordinaux  21°,  5P, 
71«,  89«,  101%  200%  2000«.  8.  Comment  indique-t-on  la  valeur 
des  objets  en  France?  9.  Combien  vaut  le  franc  en  notre 
monnaie  ?  10.  Combien  de  centimes  y  a-t-il  en  un  franc? 
11.  Quelle  partie  du  franc  le  centime  est-iU  12.  Combien 
vaut  le  sou?  13.  Quelle  est  la  valeur  de  cent  francs  en 
moniiaie  americaine.?  14.  Quelle  est  la  valeur  de  cent 
dollars  en  monnaie  frangaise?     Etc.,  etc. 

\  C.  Give  in  dollars  and  cents  the  equivalents  of :  1.  Cinq 
centimes.  2.  Dix  centimes.  3.  Quinze  centimes.  4.  Vingt 
centimes.  5.  Vingt-cinq  centimes.  6.  Cinquante  centimes. 
7.  Soixante-quinze  centimes.  8.  Quatre-vingt-quinze  centimes. 
9.  Un  franc  dix  (centimes).  10.  Un  franc  vingt-cinq. 
11.  Un  franc  soixante-quinze.  12.  Un  franc  cinquante. 
13.  Dix  sous.  14.  Vingt  sous.  15.  Cinquante  sous.  16. 
Cent  francs.  17.  Cent  cinquante  francs.  18.  Deux  cents 
francs.  19.  Cinq  cents  francs.  20.  Mille  francs.  21.  Deux 
millions  de  francs. 

\D.  Give  in  French,  in  francs  and  centimes,  the  equivalents 
of:  1.  One  cent.  2.  Five  cents.  3.  Eight  cents.  4.  Ten 
cents.  5.  Fifteen  cents.  6.  Eighteen  cents.  7.  Twenty 
cents.  8.  Twenty-five  cents.  9.  Thirty  cents.  10.  Fifty 
cents.  11.  Seventy-five  cents.  12.  Ninety  cents.  13.  One 
dollar.  14.  One  dollar  and  twenty-five  cents.  15.  One  dollar 
and  fifty  cents.  16.  One  dollar  and  seventy-five  cents.  17. 
Two  dollars.  18.  Ten  dollars.  19.  Fifty  dollars.  20.  A 
hundred  dollars.     21.  A  thousand  dollars. 

LESSON  XXXVI. 

144.  Dates,  Titles,  etc.  1.  The  form  mil  is  used  in 
dates  of  the  Christian  era,  from  1001  to  1099 ;  from  1100  on- 
ward, dates  are  often  expressed  by  hundreds,  as  so  frequently 
in  English : 

(En)  Tan  mil  six.  '  (In)  the  year  1006. 

En  mil  neuf  cent  neul  In  nineteen  hundred  and  nine. 

£n  dix-neuf  cent  neui.  In  1909. 


-I  (. 


.^ 


y 


100  LESSON  XXXVI.  [§144 

2.  Days  of  the  month  and  numerical  titles  of  rulers  are 
indicated  by  cardinals,  except  '  first '  =  premier : 

Le  premiermai.    Charles  premier.     The  first  of  May.    Charles  the  First. 
Paris,  le  deux  mai  Paris,  the  2nd  of  May. 

Louis  quatorze  (XIV).  Louis  XIV. 

3.  Observe  the  following  date  idioms : 

Quel  jour  du  mois  est-ce  au jour-  What  day  of  the  month  is  this  ? 

d'hui  ? 
Quel  jour  du  mois  sommes-nous  n  n  n  h 

aujourd'hui  ? 
Quel  quanti^me  du  mois  est-ce  n  n  n  n 

aujourd'hui  ? 

C'est  aujourd'hui  le  quinze.  To-day  is  the  fifteenth. 

Ce  sera  demain  le  seize.  To-morrow  will  be  the  sixteenth. 

Le  six  Janvier.  On  the  sixth  of  January. 

Us  sont  arrives  lundi.  They  came  on  Monday. 

D'aujourd'hui  en  huit.  A  week  from  to-day  (future). 

11  y  a  quinze  jours.  A  fortnight  ago. 

4.  The  names  of  the  months  may  be  conveniently  learned 
from  the  following  rhyme: 

Trente  jours  out  septembre, 
Avril,  juin,  novembre ; 
Trente  et  un  ont  mars 
Aout,  octobre,  puis  juillet, 
Et  decembre  et  Janvier 
De  vingt-huit  est  f^vrier. 

5.  Observe  the  following  idioms  referring  to  age: 

Quel  age  avez-vous  ?  How  old  are  you  ? 

J'ai  vingt  ans.  I  am  twenty  (years  old). 

Une  fiUe  ag^e  de  six  ans.  A  girl  six  years  old  (or  of  age). 

A  l'S,ge  de  vingt-cinq  ans.  At  the  age  of  twenty-five  (years). 

EXERCISE  XXXVL 

A.  Dans  tons  les  pays  il  y  a  des  jours  de  fete,  oi!i  on  ne 

travaille  pas.     En  France,  les  jours  de  fete  reconnus  par  la  loi 

^ont :  les  dimanches,  le  jour  de  FAn,  ou  on  se  donne  des  ^tren- 

nes ;   le  lundi  de  Piques,  qui  tombe  entre  le  21  mars  et  le 


et  mai,         jjjJ"^ 
illet,  r\ 


§144]  LESSON  XXXVl.  101 

26  avril ,  I'Ascension,  qui  tombe  quaraxite  jours  api^s  ?tiques ; 
le  lundi  de  la  Pentecdte,  qu'on  celebre  cinquante  jours  apr^s 
Paques  en  memoire  de  la  descente  du  Saint-Esprit  sur  les 
apdtres ;  la  Fete  Nationafe,  qu'on  celebre  le  14  juillet  en 
memoire  de  la  destruction  de  la  Bastille  (le  14  juillet,  1789)  ; 
I'Assomption,  qu'on  celebre  le  15  aout  en  memoire  de  I'ascension 
de  la  sainte  Vierge ;  la  Toussaint,  la  fete  de  tous  les  saints, 
qui  tombe  le  P'  novembre;  et  le  jour  de  Noel,  le  25  decembre, 
en  memoire  de  la  naissance  de  Jesus-Christ.  II  y  a  beaucoup 
d'autres  fetes  religieuses,  comme  par  exemple  le  vendredi  saint 
et  la  Fete-Dieu.  II  y  a  aussi,  en  outre,  plusieurs  fetes  plutdt 
populaires  que  religieuses,  quoiqu'ayant  une  origine  religieuse, 
comme  le  jour  des  Rois  et  le  mardi  gras. 

B.  Parmi  les  rois  de  France  les  plus  c^l^bres  se  trouvent 
ceux-ci :  Fran9ois  I®"",  nd  le  12  septembre,  1494.  II  a  com- 
mence k  rdgner  en  1515,  i,  I'^ge  de  vingt  ans.  II  est  mort  le 
31  mars,  1547.  Louis  XIV,  n^  le  5  septembre,  1638.  Lors- 
qu'il  n'avait  que  cinq  ans  il  a  succ^d^  a  son  p^re  le  14  mai, 
1643.  Apr^s  un  long  r^gne  de  soixante-douze  ans,  il  est  mort 
le  P^  septembre,  1715.  Louis  XVI,  n^  le  23  aout,  1754,  a 
succ^de  k  son  grand-p^re,  Louis  XV,  le  10  mai,  1774,  k  I'age 
de  vingt  ans.  C'est  sous  son  regne  que  la  Revolution  a  delate. 
II  a  ete  d^capite  le  21  Janvier,  1793. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Repdtez-moi  les  noms  des  six  premiers  mois 
de  Tannic.  2.  Quels  sont  les  noras  des  six  derniers  mois  de 
Tannic  ?  3.  Quels  sont  les  mois  qui  n'ont  que  trente  jours  % 
4.  Le  mois  de  fevrier  combien  de  jours  a-t-il  ?  5.  Quelle  est 
la  premiere  fete  de  I'annee  en  France  ?  6.  Entre  quelles  dates 
le  lundi  de  Paques  tombe-t-il  1  7.  Combien  de  jours  y  a-t-il 
entre  Paques  et  I'Ascension  ?  8.  Quand  est-ce  qu'on  c^l^bre 
la  Fete  Nationale  ?  9.  En  memoire  de  quoi  la  c^l^bre-t-on  1 
10.  Dites-moi  la  date  de  la  fete  de  I'Assomption.  11.  Qu'est- 
ce  que  c'est  que  la  Toussaint  1  1 2.  Quand  est-ce  qu'elle  se 
ceiebre  1  13.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  c^lfebre  le  jour  de  Noel  ?  14.  Quel 
jour  du  mois  sommes-nous  aujourd'hui  ?  15.  Quel  jour  du  mois 
serons-nous  demain  1  16.  Quel  jour  du  mois  serons-nous  d'au- 
jourd'hui  en  huit  ?  17.  Et  lundi  de  la  semaine  prochaine  quel 
jour  du  mois  serons-nous  ?  18.  Quel  jour  de  la  semaine  Noel 
tombe-t-il  cette  ann^e  ?     Etc.,  etc. 


102  LESSON  XXXVl.  [§144 

D.  (Oral.)  1.  Quel  4ge  avez-vous  1  2.  Dans  quel  mois  etes- 
vous  nd  %  3.  Quel  jour  du  mois  ?  4.  Quand  Fran9ois  I®'  est-il 
n^  ?  5.  Quel  age  avait-il  quand  il  a  commence  h,  r^gner  1 
6.  Quand  a-t-il  commence  h.  r^gner  %  7.  Dites-moi  la  date  de 
samort?  8.  En  quelle  annee  Louis  XIV  est-il  n^?  9.  Quel 
jour  du  mois  1  10.  Quel  age  avait-il  quand  il  a  succed^  a  son 
pfere?  11.  Combien  de  temps  a-t-il  regne?  12.  Quand  est-il 
mort?  13.  A  qui  asucc^dd  LouisXVI?  14.  Quand  a-t-il  dt^ 
d^capit^?     Etc.,  etc. 

E.  1.  The  months  of  April,  June,  September  and  November 
have  thirty  days.  2.  The  months  of  January,  March,  May, 
July,  August,  October  and  December  have  thirty-one  days. 
3.  The  month  of  February  has  twenty-eight,  and  sometimes 
twenty-nine  days.  4.  The  1st  of  January  is  New -Year's 
Day.  5.  On  (a  I'occasion  de)  New- Year's  Day  in  France 
people  {on)  give  each  other  giits  (etrennes).  6.  Easter  Monday 
falls  between  the  21st  of  March  and  the  26th  of  April.  7. 
The  Fete  Nationale  is  celebrated  on  the  14th  of  July.  8.  It  is 
celebrated  in  memory  of  the  destruction  of  the  Bastille,  in 
1789.  9.  The  15th  of  August  is  the  date  of  the  Feast  of  the 
Assumption.  10.  All  Saints'  Day  falls  on  the  1st  of  November. 
11.  The  25th  of  December  is  Christmas  Day. 

F.  1.  Francis  L,  Louis  XIV.,  and  Louis  XVI.,  are  among 
the  most  celebrated  kings  of  France.  2.  Francis  I.  was  born 
(est  nd)  on  the  12th  of  September,  1494.  3.  He  was  twenty 
years  of  age  when  (lorsque)  he  began  to  reign.  4.  He  reigned 
thirty-two  years,  and  died  (est  mort)  in  1547.  5.  Louis  XIV. 
began  to  reign  at  the  age  of  five  years.  6.  He  was^  born  in 
1638,  on  the  5th  of  September.  7.  He  reigned  seventy-two 
years.  8.  The  day  of  his  death  was  the  1st  of  September, 
1715.  9.  In  the  reign  of  (sous)  Louis  XVI.the  French  Revo- 
lution broke  out.  10.  Louis  XVI.  had  succeeded  Louis  XV. 
in  1774.  11.  On  the  21st  of  January,  1793,  he  was  decapi- 
tated. 12.  How  old  are  you*?  13.  How  old  were  you  when 
you  began  to  go  to' school]  14.  What  is  the  date  of  your 
birthday'?  15.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-day?  16.  Two 
weeks  from  to-day  (it)  will  be  the  24th  May. 


§145]  LESSON  XXXVIL  103 

LESSON   XXXYII. 

I4S  The  Time  of  Day.  The  hours  and  fractions  of 
hours  are  indicated  as  follows  : 

Quelle  heure  est-il  ?  What  o'clock  is  it  ? 

II  est  deux  heures.  It  is  two  o'clock. 

Trois  heures  et  demie.  Half-past  three. 

Trois  heures  (et)  un  quart.  A  quarter  past  three. 

Quatre  heures  moins  un  quart.  A  quarter  to  four. 

Trois  heures  dix  (minutes).  Ten  minutes  past  three. 

Quatre  heures  moins  cinq  (minutes).  Five  minutes  to  four. 

Trois  heures  cinquante-cinq.  Three  fifty-five. 

II  est  midi  et  demi.  It  is  half-past  twelve  (noon). 

II  est  minuit.  It  is  twelve  o'clock  (night). 

A  sept  heures  du  soir.  At  seven  o'clock  in  the  evening. 

A  quelle  heure  ?  At  what  o'clock  ? 

A  trois  heures  precises.  At  three  o'clock  precisely. 

Vers  (lea)  trois  heures.  About  three  o'clock. 

EXERCISE  XXXVIL 

A.  Quel  jour  du  mois  sommes-nous  ?  C'est  le  quinze,  n'est-ce 
pas  1  J'ai  une  lettre  k  ^crire  a  mon  frere  pour  lui  raconter  ce 
que  j'ai  fait  aujourd'hui.  ^'a  6t4  une  journ^e  bien  remplie. 
Le  matin  a  neuf  heures  un  quart  j 'arrive  chez  le  tailleur  pour 
essayer  mon  vetement.  C'est  un  complet  en  serge.  II  me  va 
tr^s  bien.  II  coutera  cent  dix  francs.  A  dix  heures  dix  je 
me  trouve  chez  le  chapelier.  II  n'a  pas  de  chapeaux  que 
j'aime,  et  j'en  commande  un.  Le  prix  sera  de  vingt-deux 
francs.  J'entre  chez  le  gantier  k  onze  heures  precises.  J'ach^te 
deux  paires  de  gants  de  chevreau.  A  onze  heures  et  demie 
me  voil^  chez  le  marchand  de  chaussures.  On  prend  ma 
mesure,  et  on  me  fera  une  paire  de  souliers.  lis  seront  pr^ts 
dans  huit  jours.  A  midi  precis  je  fais  ma  deuxi^me  visite  au 
m^decin.  J'ai  fait  ma  premiere  visite  il  y  a  huit  jours.  II 
m'a  auscult^,  et  il  a  trouv^  chez  moi  une  \4ghre  faiblesse  de 
poitrine.  II  m'a  fait  une  ordonnance,^  et  j'irai  le  voir  pour  la 
troisifeme  fois  d'aujourd'hui  en  huit.  A  midi  et  demi  je  dejeune 
dans  un  restaurant  rue  de  Rivoli.  L'addition  est  de  deux 
francs  vingt-cinq,  avec  cinq  sous  de  pourboire.     A  une  heure 


104  LESSON  XXXVII.  [§145 

vingt-cinq  me  voil^  dans  les  galeries  du  Louvre.  J'y  passe  une 
heure  et  demie.  A  trois  heures  un  quart  j 'arrive  au  Th^atre- 
Fran9ais.  Je  paie  ma  place  au  parterre  deux  francs  cinquante. 
On  joue  le  Cid  de  Corneille.  A  six  heures  moins  vingt-cinq 
j'arrive  ici.  J'^tais  tr^s  fatigue,  et  je  me  repose  pendant  une 
heure  avant  de  m'habiller  pour  diner.  A  sept  heures  dix 
nous  nous  mettons  a  table.  Nous  dinons  bien.  Nous  causons 
apres.  Et  voil^  maintenant  huit  heures  et  demie.  Je  vais 
^crire  ma  lettre. 

B.  1.  Relate  the  above,  beginning  at  the  fifth  sentence, 
using  '  mon  frere '  as  the  subject,  and  making  the  necessary 
changes  throughout.  2.  Re-write  the  extract,  substituting  a 
time  five  minutes  later  for  each  hour  of  the  day  mentioned. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  C'est  aujourd'hui  le  dix,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  2.  Quel 
jour  de  la  semaine  est-ce?    3.  Quelle  heure  est-il  a  votre  montre? 

4.  Avez-vous  et^  en  ville  aujourd'hui  ?  5.  A  quelle  heure 
4tes-vous  parti  ce  matin  ?  6.  Chez  qui  etes-vous  all^  d'abord  1 
7.  Quand  etes-vous  arriv^  chez  lui  ?  8.  Combien  votre  complet 
en  serge  coutera-t-il  ?  9.  A  quelle  heure  vous  etes-vous  trouvd 
chez  le  chapelier?  10.  jQuel  sera  le  prix  du  chapeau  que  vous 
avez  command^  ?  11.  Etes-vous  rest^  une  demi-heure  chez  le 
gantier?  12.  Ou  ^tiez-vous  ^  onze  heures  et  demie  precises? 
13.  Quand  vos  souliers  seront-ils  prets?  14.  A  quelle  heure 
votre  m^decin  se  trouve-t-il  chez  lui?  15.  Quand  etes-vous 
alld  le  voir  I'autre  fois?  16.  A.  quelle  heure  avez-vous  d^jeund  1 
17.  Combien  avez-vous  pay^  ?  18.  A  quelle  heure  etes-vous 
arriv^  au  Louvre?  19.  A  quelle  heure  avez-vous  din^  ce  soir? 
20.  Quelle  heure  est-il  k  present  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  My  brother  has  related  to  me  what  he  did  to-day 
down  town.  2.  He  has  told  me  the  precise  hour  at  which  he 
was  at  the  tailor's,  the  hatter's,  etc.  3.  He  set  out  at  half- 
past  eight.     4.  He  arrived  at  the  tailor's  at  half-past  nine. 

5.  He  says  that  his  serge  suit  fits  him  well.  6.  He  was  trying 
on  hats  at  the  hatter's  at  ten  minutes  after  ten.  7.  He  bought 
two  pairs  of  gloves  at  eleven  o'clock  precisely.  8.  Half  an 
hour  later  he  was  at  the  shoemaker's.  9.  His  shoes  will  be 
ready  in  a  week.  10.  At  five  minutes  after  twelve  he  visited 
his  doctor  for  the  second  time.  11.  He  will  visit  him  again 
a  week  from  to-day.  12.  At  half -past  twelve  he  lunched  in  a 
restaurant.     13.  His  lunch  cost  him  two  francs  and  fifty  cen- 


§§146-148]  LESSON  XXXVIII.  105 

times.  14.  At  twenty-iive  minutes  past  one  he  went  to  the 
Louvre  to  see  the  paintings.  15.  At  a  quarter  to  three  he 
was  at  the  door  of  the  Theatre-FranQais.  16.  At  ten  minutes 
to  six  he  left  the  theatre.  17.  In  a  quarter  of  an  hour  he  was 
at  home.  18.  He  rested  for  half  an  hour.  19.  At  ten  minutes 
after  seven  (the)  dinner  was  ready.  20.  All  that  is  interesting 
for  him,  but  not  for  me. 

LESSON  XXXYIIL 
146.     Past  Definite  of  donner,  flnir,  uendre. 


I  gave,  etc. 

I  finis] 

tied,  etc. 

I  sold,  etc. 

donn  ai        [done]. 

finis 

[fini]. 

vend  is        [vadi]. 

donn  as       [dona]. 

finis 

[fini]. 

vend  is        [vadi]. 

donn  a         [dona]. 

fin  it 

[fini]. 

vend  it        [vadi]. 

donn  4mes  [donam]. 

fin  imes 

5  [finim]. 

vendimes  [vadim]. 

donn  ates    [donat]. 

fin  ites 

[finit]. 

vend  ites    [vadit] . 

donn  ferent  [done:r]. 

fin  irent  [finiir]. 

vend  irent  [vaditr]. 

147.  Past  Definite  of  avoir,  itre. 

I  had,  etc.  I  was,  etc 

eus  [y].  edmes  [ym].  fus  [fy].  f^mes  [fym]. 

eus  [y],  e^tes    [yt].  fus  [fy].  futes    [fyt]. 

eut  [y].  eurent  [y:r].  fut  [fy].  furent  [fyir], 

148.  Use  of  the  Past  Definite.    The  past  definite    is 

used  in  the  literary  narrative  style  to  denote  what  happened 
(completed  past  action),  or  what  happened  next  (successive 
events).  It  never  denotes,  like  the  imperfect  (§  87),  what  was 
happening  or  used  to  happen,  or  continued  to  happen  : 

Les  Remains  brul^rent  Carthage.  The  Romans  burnt  Carthage. 

Dieu  accepta  les  presents  d'Abel,  God  accepted  the   gifts   of  Abel, 

qui  4tait  plus  pieux  que  son  frere  ;  who  was  more  righteous  than  his 

mais  il  d^tourna  les  yeux  de  ceux  brother  ;  but  he  turned  away  his 

de  Cain,  parce  que  son  cceur  n^dtait  eyes  from  those  of  Cain,  because  his 

pas  pur Un  jour  Cain  et  Abel  heart  was  not  pure One  day 

^to»«w<seuls  dans  un  champ,  et  Cain  Cain  and  Abel  were  alone  in  a  field, 

86  jeta  sur  Abel,  et  le  tua.  and  Cain  fell  upon  Abel,  and  slew 

him. 


106  LESSON  XXXVIIL  [§149 

149.  Past  Definite  of  f aire  (irreg.). 

I  did,  etc. 

je  fis  [39  fi].  nous  fimes  [nu  fim], 

tu  fis  [ty  fi].  vous  fites   [vu  fit]. 

ilfit[ilfi].  ilsfirent[ilfi:r]. 

EXERCISE  XXXVIII. 

NoTB.— Up  to  this  point  the  past  indefinite  has  been  used  exclusively  in  the  exercises 
to  express  completed  action  in  past  time.  It  was  thought  well  to  give  ample  practice 
in  the  past  indefinite,  owing  to  its  almost  exclusive  use  as  a  past  tense  in  the  language 
of  every-day  life.  Since  the  past  definite,  however,  is  so  extensively  employed  in 
narration  in  the  literary  or  elevated  style,  and  since  familiarity  with  its  forms  is  so 
necessary  for  the  reading  of  books,  this  tense  will  be  given  prominence  in  the  extracts 
and  exercises  which  follow. 

A.  Un  petit  rouge-gorge  frappa  k  notre  fenetre.  "Ayez 
piti^  de  moi !  Ouvrez-moi,  je  vous  prie ;  la  neige  tombe,  la 
bise  souffle,  et  j'ai  bien  faim." 

Nous  eumes  piti^  du  petit  rouge-gorge,  et  j'ouvris  la  fenetre. 
Le  gentil  oiseau  vola  dans  la  chambre,  et  ramassa  les  miettes 
de  pain  qui  ^taient  tomb^s  de  la  table.  Bientot  meme  11 
becqueta  le  grain  dans  la  main  qu'on  lui  tendait. 

Mais  lorsque  la  neige  fut  fondue,  le  printemps  revint  et  les 
haies  se  couvrirent  de  feuilles.  Nous  ouvrimes  la  fenetre,  et 
notre  petit  bote  s'envola  dans  le  bois  voisin,  ou  il  batit  son  nid, 
et  nous  entendimes  ses  joyeuses  chansons. 

L'hiver  revint,  et  le  rouge-gorge  revint  aussi,  cette  fois  avec 
sa  compagne.  Les  deux  petits  oiseaux  entrferent  avec  con- 
fiance  dans  la  chambre,  et  nous  nous  r^jouimes  beaucoup  de 
les  revoir. 

B.  Continue  the  following  :  1.  J'eus  piti^  de  lui,  tu  eus,  etc. 
2.  J'ouvris  la  fenetre,  tu,  etc.  3.  Je  volai  dans  la  chambre, 
tu,  etc.  4.  Je  ramassai  les  miettes  de  pain,  tu,  etc.  5.  Je 
me  couvris  la  tete,  tu,  etc.  6.  Je  m'envolai  dans  le  bois,  tu, 
etc.  7.  Je  batis  une  maison  de  pierre,  tu,  etc.  8.  J'entendis 
des  chansons  d'oiseau,  tu,  etc.  9.  J'entrai  dans  la  chambre, 
tu,  etc.  10.  Je  me  r^jouis  de  les  revoir,  tu,  etc.  11.  Je  fis 
mon  devoir,  tu  fis  ton,  etc.     12.  Je  fus  joyeux,  tu,  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  De  quel  oiseau  raconte-t-on  cette  histoire? 
2.  Ou  frappa  ce  petit  rouge-gorge  ?  3.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  a  dit  ? 
4.  Est-ce  que  vous  eutes  {or  avez  eu)  piti^  de  lui?     6.  Qui 


§150]  LESSON  XXXIX.  107 

ouvrit  la  fenetre  ?  6.  Et  alors  que  fit  le  rouge-gorge  ? 
7.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  ramassa?  8.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  lui  tendait 
souvent  dans  la  main?  9.  Quelle  saison  arriva  enfin  'i  10.  La 
neige  etait-elle  deja  fondue?  11.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  fites  (or 
avez  fait)  alors  1  1 2.  Et  le  petit  rouge-gorge  ou  s'envola-t-il  ? 
13.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  batit  dans  le  bois  ?  14.  Chantait-il  souvent? 
15.  Ses  chansons  ^taient-elles  joyeuses  ou  tristes?  16.  Enten- 
dites-vous  ses  chansons?  17.  Quand  le  rouge-gorge  revint-il  ? 
18.  Qui  I'accompagna  ?  19.  Qui  ouvrit  la  fen§tre  de  la  cham- 
bre  cette  fois  ?     20.  Et  les  oiseaux  que  firent-ils  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

£>.  1.  Here  is  the  story  of  a  little  robin.  2.  The  snow  was 
falling,  the  north  wind  was  blowing,  and  the  robin  was  hungry. 
3.  He  often  knocked  at  our  window.  4,  At  last  I  had  pity 
on  the  poor  bird,  and  I  opened  the  window.  5.  The  pretty 
little  robin  flew  into  the  room.  6.  There  were  some  crumbs 
of  bread  on  the  table,  and  he  picked  them  up.  7.  My  sister 
used  to  hold  out  crumbs  to  him  in  her  hand.  8.  At  last  he 
pecked  at  them.  9.  In  spring  the  snow  melted,  and  the 
hedges  were  covered  with  leaves  and  flowers.  10.  The  little 
robin  was  sad,  and  did  not  sing.  11.  I  opened  the  window, 
and  he  flew  away.  1 2.  He  built  his  nest  in  a  neighbouring 
wood.  13.  We  heard  his  joyful  song  again.  14.  The  robin 
returned  (revint)  with  the  winter.  15.  Another  robin  ac- 
companied him  this  time.  16.  We  rejoiced  very  much  at 
this.  17.  We  opened  our  windows,  and  the  two  birds  flew 
into  the  room.  18.  They  passed  a  second  winter  with  us, 
and  flew  away  again  in  spring. 

LESSON  XXXIX. 
150.  Imperfect  Subjunctive  of  donner,  finir,  vendre, 

(That)  I  gave,  might  (That)  I  finished,  might    (That)  I  sold,  might 
give,  etc.  finish,  etc.  sell,  etc. 

donn  asse       [donasl.  fin  isse       [finis].  vend  isse       [vadis]. 

donn  asses     [donas].  fin  isses     [finis].  vend  isses     [vadis]. 

donn4t  [dona].  fin  it  [fini].  vend  it  [vadi]. 

donn  assions  [donasjo].  fin  issions  [finisjo].  vend  issions  [vadisjo], 

donn  assiez    [donasje].  fin  issiez    [finisje].  vend  issiez    [vadisje]. 

donn  assent  [donas],  fin  issent   [finis].  vend  issent  t^^ddisj. 


108  LESSON  XXXIX.  [§§161-162 

151.  Imperfect  Subjunctive  of  avoir,  etre. 

(That)  I  had,  might  have.  (That)  I  was,  were,  might  be,  etc. 

eusse  [ys].  eussions  [ysj3].         fusse    [fys].  fussions  [fysj3]. 

eusses  [ys].  eussiez    [ysje].         fusses  [fys].         fussiez   [fysje]. 

e^t^     [y].  eussent    [ys].         "  fut       [fy].  fussent  [fys]. 

152.  Tense  Sequence.  Any  other  tense  than  the  present 
or  future  (§  107)  in  the  governing  clause  regularly  requires  the 
imperfect  subjunctive  in  the  governed  clause  ;  so  also  for  com- 
pound subjunctive  tenses,  the  auxiliary  being  considered  as 
the  verb  : 

Impf.  Je  d^sirais      ^  fl  was  desiring  him  to  remain. 

P.  Def.  Je  d^sirai         I  ,.,         tit  i  ^  desired  him  to  remain. 

CoNDL.  Je  d^sirerais   [^  '  1 1  should  desire  him  to  remain. 

pLUPF.  J'avais  ddsir^J  ll  had  desired  him  to  remain. 

EXERCISE    XXXIX. 

A.  L'dducation  d'Henri  IV,  roi  de  France,  fut  dirigde  par 
son  grand-pfere  Henri  d'Albret,  roi  de  Navarre,  qui  ne  voulut 
pas  qu'on  ^levat  le  jeune  prince  avec  la  d^licatesse  qu'on  a 
d' ordinaire  pour  les  gens  de  cette  quality,  sachant  bien  que 
dans  un  corps  mou  et  tendre  n'habite  ordinairement  qu'une 
anie  molle  et  faible.  II  ddfendit  aussi  qu'on  I'habillat  riche- 
ment,  qu'on  lui  donnat  des  babioles,  et  qu'on  le  flattat,  parce 
que  toutes  ces  choses  dlfevent  le  coeur  des  enfants  plut6t  dans 
I'orgueil  que  dans  les  sentiments  de  la  g^n^rositd.  Mais  11 
ordonna  qu'on  habillat  et  qu'on  nourrit  son  petit-fils  comme 
les  autres  enfants  du  pays,  et  meme  qu'il  fut  accoutumd  k 
courir  et  h  grimper  sur  les  rochers,  pour  I'habituer  k  la 
fatigue. 

Note, — The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  of  very  limited  use  in  the  language  of  every- 
day life,  being  rarely  employed  except  in  the  literary  or  elevated  style.  A  knowledge 
of  its  forms  and  their  use  is,  however,  necessary  for  reading  purposes. 

B.  Continue  the  following:  1.  Mon  pfere  ne  voulait  pas  que 
je  partisse  hier,  que  tu  partisses,  etc.  2.  Le  mattre  d^fendit 
que  je  parlasse  k  Henri,  que  tu,  etc.  3.  Kotre  voisin  ddsirait 
que  je  lui  vendisse  des  pommes,  que  tu,  etc.  4.  Un  bon  roi 
d^sirerait  que  je  fusse  heureux,  que  tu,  etc.  5.  Un  tel  roi 
regretterait  que  j 'eusse  besoin  de  rien,  que  tu,  etc. 


§152]  LESSON  XXXIX.  109 

Turn  the  governing  verbs  in  the  extract  into  the  'present 
indicative,  and  make  the  necessary  changes  in  the  subjunctive 
forms. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Qui  ^tait  le  grand-pfere  d'Henri  IV?  2.  Par 
qui  Teducation  d'Henri  IV  fut-elle  dirigee?  3.  Le  jeune 
prince  fut-il  eleve  avec  d^licatesse  ou  avec  s^verit^  1  4.  Est-ce 
qu'on  a  ordinairement  beaucoup  de  deHcatesse  pour  les  jeunes 
princes  1  5.  Le  vieux  roi  voulait-il  qu'on  ^levat  le  prince  avec 
d^licatesse  1  6.  Quelle  ame  trouve-t-on  souvent  dans  un  corps 
mou  et  tendre  1  7.  Henri  d'Albret  desirait-il  que  son  petit- 
fils  eut  une  telle  ame?  8.  Les  gens  de  la  cour  airaent-ils  h, 
flatter  les  jeunes  princes'?  9.  Le  grand-p^re  aimait-il  qu'on 
flattat  ce  jeune  prince  ]  10.  Permettait-il  que  les  gens  de  la 
cour  flattassent  son  petit-filsl  11.  Votre  pere  permettait-il 
que  vous  vous  habillassiez  richement  quand  vous  ^tiez  jeune  1 
12.  Henri  d'Albret  ordonna-t-il  que  son  petit-fils  eut  une 
nourriture  riche?  13.  Comment  voulut-il  qu'on  le  nourrit? 
14.  Pourquoi  ordonna-t-il  que  le  jeune  prince  fut  accoutum^ 
k  courir  et  k  grimper?  15.  D^sireriez-vous  que  je  fusse  ac- 
coutum^  k  courir  et  a  grimper?  16.  Pourquoi  le  d^sireriez- 
vous?  17.  D^sireriez-vous  que  j'eusse  des  sentiments  de 
gdndrosit^?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  Henry  d'Albret  was  the  grandfather  of  Henry  IV. 
of  France.  2.  His  grandfather  directed  his  education.  3. 
Here  is  what  the  old  king  said  to  the  people  of  the  court. 

4.  "I  desire   my   grandson   to   have  a   strong   mind    (dme). 

5.  Knowing  that  a  weak  mind  usually  dwells  in  a  weak  body, 
I  desire  his  body  to  be  strong.  6.  I  desire  that  nobody  should 
flatter  him."  7.  So  you  see  that  the  king  did  not  wish  the 
prince  to  be  brought  up  with  delicacy.  8.  He  did  not  wish 
his  grandson  to  have  a  soft  and  weak  mind.  9.  He  wished 
his  body  to  be  strong  in  order  that  his  mind  might  not  be 
weak.  10.  He  did  not  like  the  people  of  the  court  to  flatter 
him.  11.  He  forbade  them  to  flatter  him.  12.  He  did  not 
permit  them  even  to  give  him  trinkets.  13.  He  ordered  the 
prince  to  be  dressed  like  the  other  children  of  the  country. 
14.  He  allowed  him  to  play  with  the  other  children  and  to 
climb  the  rocks.  15.  He  wished  him  to  be  fed  like  the  other 
children  too.  16.  All  this  he  did  because  he  wished  his  grand- 
son to  be  a  good  king.  17.  Our  parents  wish  us  to  be  strong 
and  good.     18.  They  would  not  wish  us  to  be  weak  and  bad. 


no  EXERCISE   XL. 


EXERCISE    XL. 

A.  TJn  matelot,  k  bord  d'un  vaisseau,  ayant^  eu  la  maladresse 
de  laisser  tomber  par-dessus  le  bord  une  th^iere  d'argent,  alia 2 
trouver  le  capitaine  et  lui  dit^  :  *^Peut-on^  dire^  d'une  chose, 
qu'elle  est^  perdue^,  lorsqu'on  salt''  oti  elle  est^l — Non,  mon 
ami. — En  ce  cas,  vous  n'avez^  rien  a  craindre^  pour  votre 
th^iere ;  car  je  sais"^  qu'elle  est^  au  fond  de  la  mer." 

A»§154.  »§193.  »§154.  \»§222.  ^»§19a 

«§160.  *§221.  «§210. 

(The  sections  indicated  give  the  forms  of  the  irregular  verbs.) 

B.  Complete  the  following  by  conjugating  the  tense  in  full, 
repeating  also  the  remainder  of  the  expression  along  with  the 
verb :  1.  II  ajla  trouver  le  capitaine.  2.  II  lui  dit.  3.  Peut- 
il  dire?  4.  II  sait  ou  il  est.  5.  Elle  est  perdue.  6.  Vous 
n'avez  rien  a  craindre. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  De  quelles  personnes  parle-t-on  dans  cette 
histoire?  2.  Ou  ^taient  ces  personnes?  3.  Qu'avait  fait  le 
matelot]  4.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  qu'une  th^iere  ?  5.  En  qiioi 
^tait  cette  th^i^re?  6.  A  qui  ^tait-elle?  7.  Ou  ^tait-elle 
tombee  ?  8.  Savait-on  ou  elle  ^tait  1  9.  ^tait-elle  alors  vrai- 
ment  perdue?  10.  Mais  quel  ^tait  I'argument  du  matelot? 
Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  The  sailor  was  so  clumsy  as  to  let  the  tea-pot  fall. 
2.  If  you  let  a  silver  tea-pot  fall  into  the  sea,  it  is  lost.  3.  Go 
to  the  captain.  4.  I  went  to  the  captain.  5.  Tell  him  that 
the  tea-pot  is  not  lost.  6.  The  captain  will  say  :  "  My  good 
fellow,  did  you  drop  my  silver  tea-pot  into  the  sea  ? "  7.  When 
we  are  on  board  of  a  ship  we  do  not  let  tea-pots  fall  into  the 
sea.  8.  Where  is  the  tea-pot  ?  9.  I  do  not  know  where  it  is. 
10.  No  one  finds  tea-pots  at  the  bottom  of  the  sea. 

E.  A  sailor  dropped  the  captain's  silver  tea-pot  into  the  sea. 
The  captain  went  to  the  sailor  and  said  to  him  :  "  You  let  my 
tea-pot  fall  into  the  sea,  did  you  not?  It  is  lost."  "No,  no," 
said  the  sailor,  **I  know  where  it  is.  It  is  at  the  bottom  of 
the  sea." 


EXERCISE  XLL  111 

EXERCISE  XLI. 

A.  Un  Arabe,  4gB.r6  dans  le  desert,  n'avaiti  pas  mang^^ 
depuis  deux  jours,  et  se  voyait^  menace*  de  mourir^  de  faim. 
En  passant  pres  d'un  de  ces  puits  ou  les  caravanes  viennent^ 
abreuver  leurs  chameaux,  il  voit^  sur  le  sable  un  petit  sac  de 
cuir.  II  le  ramasse  et  le  tate.  "  Allah  soit^  b^ni^  !  dit-il^; 
ce  sont/  je  crois,^*^  des  da^s  ou  des  noisettes."  Plein  de  cette 
douce  esperance,  il  se  hate  d'ouvrir^^  le  sac ;  mais,  k  la  vue  de 
ce  qu'il  contient^^ :  "  H^las !  s'ecrie-t-il  douloureusement,  ce 
ne  sont  "^  que  des  perles  !" 


1  §154. 

M156. 

M154. 

•§193. 

"  §176. 

a  §156. 

»  §  174. 

«§163. 

»«§191. 

»2§177. 

3  §224. 

•§178. 

B.  Complete  the  following,  as  in  the  preceding  exercise: 
1.  II  n'avait  pas  mangd  2.  II  se  voyait  menacd.  3.  lis 
viennent.  4.  II  voit  son  sac.  5.  II  le  tS,te.  6.  Qu'il  soit 
b^ni  I  7.  Je  le  crois.  8.  II  se  hate  d'ouvrir  le  sac.  9.  II 
s'ecria. 

Relate  the  story  in  the  first  person  singular,  thus  :  "  Egar^ 
dans  le  desert,  je  n'avais  pas,  etc." 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Ou  demeurent  les  Arabes?  2.  Ou  est 
I'Arabie?  3.  Ou  s'^tait  dgard  I'Arabe?  4.  Est-ce  qu'il  y  a 
beaucoup  de  deserts  dans  ce  pays  t  5.  Dans  quel  dtat  se 
trouvait  I'Arabe  1  6.  Par  ou  passait-il  1  7.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  a 
vu  ?  8.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  y  avait  dans  le  sac  1  9.  ]fetait-il  content 
de  trouver  les  perles  1  10.  Est-ce  que  les  perles  ne  sont  pas 
des  choses  precieuses  ?  11.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  esp^rait  trouver  dans 
lesac'?  12.  Pourquoi  pr^f^rait-il  des  noisettes  a  des  perles? 
13.  Lesquelles  pr^f^reriez-vous  maintenant  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  The  Arab  has  lost  his  way.  2.  If  we  had  not  eaten 
for  two  days,  we  should  be  hungry.  3.  We  saw  ourselves 
threatened  with  starvation.  4.  The  caravans  will  come  to 
water  their  camels  at  the  well.  5.  We  shall  water  our  camels. 
6.  If  I  saw  pearls  on  the  sand,  I  should  pick  them-  up.  7.  He^ 
felt  the  dates  in  the  bag.  -  8.  If  there  had  been  hazel-nuts  in 
the  leathern  bag,  he  would  have  hastened  to  open  it.     9.  But 


112  EXERCISE   XLII. 

the  bag  did  not  contain  nuts,  it  contained  only  pearls.     10.  At 
the  sight  of  that  he  exclaimed  :  "  I  shall  die  of  hunger." 

E.  An  Arab  had  lost  his  way  in  the  desert.  Not  having 
eatea  for  two  days  he  saw  that  he  would  soon  starve.  As  he 
was  passing  near  a  well  where  the  caravans  came  to  water 
their  camels,  he  saw  there  on  the  sand  a  leathern  bag  which 
he  hoped  to  find  full  of  dates  or  hazel-nuts.  He  picked  it 
up,  felt  it,  and  opened  it.     Alas,  it  contained  only  pearls ! 

EXERCISE  XLII. 

A.  Tin  paysan  accompagne  de  son  fils,  le  petit  Auguste 
alla^  un  jour  visiter  ses  champs  pour  voir^  dans  quel  ^tat  etait* 
son  ble.  lis  arriverent  a  un  champ  ou  certains  epis  se  te- 
naient*  droits  tandis  que  d'autres  ^taient^  lourdement  inclines 
vers  la  terre.  Auguste  s'ecria :  "  Quel  dommage  que  ces  ^pis 
soient^  si  courbes  !  Combien  je  prefere^  ceux-la  qui  sont* 
vigoureux  et  droits."  Le  p^re  prit^  deux  des  ^pis,  les  roula 
entre  ses  doigts  pour  faire"^  sortir^  le  grain,  et  repondit^ : 
"Regarde  un  peu  mon  enfant;  ces  dpis  courbes  sont^  pleins 
du  meilleur  bl^,  car  c'est^  le  poids  qui  fait^  pencher  leur  tete, 
tandis  que  ceux  qui  la  reinvent  i<^  si  fierement  sont^  vides  et  ne 
valentii  rien." 

>§160.  «§177.  •§202.  •§166.  >«'§15a 

a  §224.  ■§158.  »8196,  •§210.  "§223. 

»  §  154. 

B.  Complete  the  following,  as  above  :  L  II  alia  visiter  ses 
champs.  2.  lis  arriverent  a  un  champ.  3.  lis  se  tenaient 
droits.  4.  II  s'ecria.  5.  Quel  dommage  qu'ils  soient  si 
courbes !  6.  Je  pr^fere  ceux-la.  7.  II  en  prit  deux.  8.  H 
fait  pencher  leur  tete.     9.  lis  ne  valent  rien. 

Give  the  present  indicative  in  full  of:  L  Alia.  2.  Se 
tenaient.     3.  Prit.     4.  Fait.     5.  Yalent. 

Relate  the  story,  substituting  the  past  indefinite  for  the  past 
definite,  thus :  *' Un  paysan. .  .est  all^  visiter,"  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)  L  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  qu'un  paysan?  2.  Ou  ce 
paysan  est-il  all^  ?  3.  Est-ce  qu'il  ^tait  seul  1  4.  Qui  est  alld 
avec  lull  5.  Pourquoi  sont-ils  all^s  aux  champs?  6.  Com- 
ment se  tenaient  certains   epis   dans   les  champs  qu'ils  ont 


<r- 


EXERCISE  XLII.  113 

visit^s  t  7.  Tous  les  dpis  se  tenaient-ils  droits  ?  8.  Comment 
les  autres  se  tenaient-ils  1  9.  Quels  epis  pr^f^rait  le  petit 
Auguste?  10.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  s'est  6cri4'i  11.  Lesquels  pr^ 
ferez-vous  ?  12.  Pourquoi  les  pr^f^rez-vous  ?  13.  Lesquels 
des  epis  ^taient  courbes?  14.  Qu'est-ce  qui  leur  faisait  pen- 
cher  la  tete  ?  15.  Pourquoi  les  autres  se  tenaient-ils  si  droits  1 
16.  Lesquels  valent  le  plus?  17.  Comment  le  pere  a-t-il  d^- 
montrd  cela  k  son  filsl  18.  Les  personnes  fieres  valent-elles 
ordinairement  grand'chose  ?  19.  Pr^f^rez-vous  les  personnes 
modestes?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  I.  I  am  going  to  see  the  fields.  2.  If  you  were  to  go 
and  visit  the  fields,  in  what  condition  would  you  find  the 
wheat  1  3.  Hold  yourself  upright.  4.  Take  two  ears  of 
wheat.  5.  Rub  the  grain  out.  6.  The  best  wheat  is  not  in 
the  upright  ears.  7.  The  full  ears  are  bent,  whilst  the  empty 
ears  are  upright.  8.  Just  look,  my  boy,  the  upright  ears  are 
empty.  9.  Full  heads  are  worth  a  great  deal,  but  empty 
heads  are  worth  nothing. 

Use  either  the  past  definite  or  the  past  indefinite  for  the 
narrative  tenses  of  the  following  : 

E.  Little  Augustus  went  one  day  to  the  fields.  He  went 
with  his  father,  who  was  going  to  see  whether  his  wheat  was 
ripe.  They  arrived  at  a  wheat-field.  Augustus  observed  that 
certain  ears  of  wheat  were  bent  down  towards  the  earth.  He 
observed  also  that  others  held  themselves  upright.  He  said 
to  his  father :  "  Look  at  those  ears  of  wheat.  What  a  pity 
they  are  so  bent  down !  I  prefer  those  which  hold  them- 
selves upright."  His  father  wished  to  teach  him  a  lesson. 
He  took  two  of  the  ears  of  wheat,  and  rolled  them  between 
his  fingers.  The  one  was  empty  and  was  worth  nothing.  The 
other  was  full  of  good  wheat.  Then  he  said:  "Look,  my  boy, 
this  ear  which  raised  its  head  so  proudly  was  almost  empty. 
On  the  contrary,  this  other  which  was  so  bent  down  was  full 
of  the  best  grain.  We  observe  the  same  thing  amongst  men. 
Those  who  are  proud  have  an  (the)  empty  head.  They  are 
worth  nothing.  On  the  contrary,  those  who  are  modest  and 
humble  are  generally  the  best"  ^ 

8 


114  EXERCISE  XLin. 

EXERCISE  XLIII. 

A.  Tin  laboureur  ^tant  sur  le  point  de  mourir^,  et  voulant^ 
donner  a  ses  enfants  une  derniere  preuve  de  sa  tendresse,  les 
fit^  venir^  aupres  de  lui,  et  leur  dit^:  "Mes  enfants,  apres 
moi  vous  aiirez  le  champ  que  mon  p^re  a  possdde^,  le  champ 
qui  m'a  servi^  a  elever^  et  a  nourrir  ma  famille.  Cherchez 
bien  dans  ce  champ,  et  vous  trouverez  un  tresor." 

Les  enfants,  apres  la  mort  de  leur  pere,  se  mirent^  a  re  tour, 
ner  le  champ  en  tous  sens,  bechant,  labourant  la  terre.  lis 
n'y  trouverent  ni  or  ni  argent;  mais  la  terre  bien  remu^e,  bien 
labouree,  produisit^^  une  moisson  abondante.  Le  sage  vieillard 
ne  les  avait  pas  trompds ;  il  leur  avait  enseign^  que  le  travail 
est  un  tresor. 

»$174.  »§195.  "§193.  T§166.  'SigS. 

«§225.  *§178.  «§158.  » §  158.  "§185. 

£.  Complete  the  following,  as  above :  1.  II  les  fit  venir 
aupres  de  lui.  2.  lis  se  mirent  a  retourner  le  champ.  3.  II 
produisit  une  moisson.     4.  II  ne  les  avait  pais  trompds. 

Give  the  future  and  the  past  definite  in  full  of :  1.  Mourir. 
2.  Voulant.     3.  Fit.     4.  Venir.     5.  Dit.     6.  Servir. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  De  quelles  personnes  parle  I'histoire?  2. 
Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  qu'un  laboureur  ?  3.  Ce  laboureur-ci  ^tait-il 
unjeunehomme?  4.  Dans  quel  ^tat  se  trouvait-il?  5.  Qu'est- 
ce  qu'il  allait  laisser  k  ses  enfants?  6.  Avait-il  achet^  ce 
champ?  7.  Etait-ce  un  bon  champ?  8.  Quel  conseil  le 
laboureur  a-t-il  donnd  a  ses  enfants?  9.  Ont-ils  bien  cherchd? 
10.  Est-ce  qu'ils  y  ont  trouv^  de  I'or  ?  11.  Leur  pere  les  avait-il 
trompes,  alors  ?  12.  Quel  tresor  ont-ils  trouv^?  13.  Quelle  est 
la  morale  de  I'histoire  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

"^.  1.  The  father  gave  his  children  a  proof  of  his  love.  2. 
He  called  his  children  into  his  presence.  3.  The  children  will 
own  the  field  after  the  father.  4.  The  children  delved  and 
ploughed  the  field.  5.  Stir  the  land,  and  it  will  produce  a 
harvest.     6.  If  you  plough  this  field,  you  will  find  a  treasure. 

7.  It  will  not  be  silver  or  gold,  but  it  will  be  a  good  harvest. 

8.  Your  father  is  not  deceiving  you,  he  is  teaching  you  a  good 
lesson. 


EXERCISE  XLIV.  115 

E.  A  husbandman,  who  was  at  the  point  of  death,  wished  to 
teach  his  children  that  labour  is  a  treasure.  Calling  his  chil- 
dren into  his  presence,  he  told  them  that  they  would  have  the 
field  which  his  father  had  owned.  It  was  a  good  field,  and  it 
had  fed  his  father  and  his  father's  family.  If  they  would 
seek  in  it,  they  would  find  a  treasure  there.  After  the  old 
man's  death,  the  children  dug  everywhere  in  the  field,  but 
they  found  no  treasure.  There  was  no  gold  or  silver,  but  they 
stirred  the  land  so  well  that  they  had  an  abundant  harvest. 
They  had  not  been  deceived.  Their  father  had  taught  them  a 
good  lesson.   .^ 

EXERCISE  XLIV. 

A.  Louis  XIV,  traversant  avec  sa  cour  la  galerie  de  Ver- 
sailles, aper9oiti  Jean  Bart  fumant  sa  pipe  dans  I'embrasure^ 
d'une  fenetre  ouverte^;  il  le  fait^  appeler*,  et  lui  dit^  d'un 
ton  affectueux :  "  Jean  Bart,  je  viens^  de  vous  nommer  chef 
d'escadre. — Vous  avez  bien  fait^,  sire,  r^pondit^  le  marin  en 
continuant  de  fumer  tranquillement  sa  pipe."  Cette  brusque 
r^ponse  ayant  excite  parmi  les  sots  courtisans  un  grand  ^clat 
de  rire  :  "  Vous  vous  trompez,  messieurs,  leur  dit^  gravement 
le  roi,  cette  r^ponse  est  celle  d'un  homme  qui  sent^  ce  qu'il 
vaut^,  et  qui  compte  m'en  donner  bient6t  de  nouvelles  preuves. 
Sans  doute,  Jean  Bart  ne  parle  pas  comme  vous  ;  mais  qui  de 
vous  peut^o  faire^  ce  que  fait^  Jean  Bart  ? " 

'    '§213.  •'•§196.    r  'flOS.  .     '§210.  »§223. 

2§176..^'       '■      *§168.  •§178.        '  •§166.  "§221. 

B.  Complete  the  following,  as  above :  L  II  aper9oit  Jean 
Bart.  2.  II  le  fait  appeler.  3.  Je  viens  de  le  nommer. 
4.  Vous  avez  bien  fait.  5.  Vous  vous  trompez.  6.  II  sent 
ce  qu'il  vaut.     7.   II  ne  parle  pas  comme  les  autres. 

Give  the  imperfect  indicative  and  the  imperfect  subjunctive 
of:  1.  Apergoit.     2.  Fait.     3.  Dit.     4.  Viens.     5.  Sent. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Qui^tait  Louis  XIV?  2.  Ou  est  Versailles  ? 
3.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'^tait  autrefois  ?  4.  Quel  est  I'autre  person- 
nage  de  notre  histoire?  5.  Quelle  ^tait  sa  profession?  .6.  Etait- 
il,  ce  jour-lk,  k  bord  de  son  vaisseau  1  7.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  faisait 
qui  montrait  qu'il  n'^tait  pas  courtisan  ?  8,  De  quelle  fa(jon  le 
roi  a-t-il  montr^  qu'il  n'en  ^tait  pas  m^content?     9.  Quelle 


116  EXERCISE   XLV. 

sorte  de  r^ponse  Jean  Bart  a-t-il  faite  au  roil  10.  Quelle  im- 
pression a-t-elle  faite  sur  les  courtisans?  11.  Quelle  en  etait 
I'opinion  du  roi?  12.  Pourquoi  dtait-il  permis  a  Jean  Bart,  et 
non  pas  aux  courtisans,  de  faire  une  brusque  reponse?  Etc.,  etc. 

— '  D.  1.  The  king  sends  for  Jean  Bart.  2.  I  shall  call  him. 
3.  We  have  just  called  Jean  Bart.  4.  The  king  had  just 
appointed  him  rear-admiral.  5.  A  great  outburst  of  laughter 
was  excited  by  Jean  Bart's  blunt  answer.  6.  The  king  did  not 
appoint  the  stupid  courtiers  rear-admirals.  7.  We  are  mis- 
taken ;  it  is  not  a  blunt  answer.  8.  Do  not  make  a  mistake. 
9.  The  stupid  courtiers  did  not  make  blunt  answers,  because 
they  did  not  feel  their  own  worth.  10.  Jean  Bart  hopes  soon 
to  give  the  king  new  proofs  of  his  worth.  11.  We  can  not  do 
what  Jean  Bart  did. 

— —  E.  Jean  Bart  was  coolly  smoking  his  pipe  in  the  embrasure 
of  a  window  in  the  palace  {chdteau)  of  Versailles,  as  the  king, 
accompanied  by  his  courtiers,  was  passing  through  the  great 
gallery.  The  king  sent  for  the  brdve  sailor,  and  told  him  that 
he  had  just  been  appointed  rear-admiral.  The  sailor's  blunt 
reply :  "  You  have  done  well,  sire,"  caused  a  burst  of  laughter 
among  those  who  were  with  the  king.  But  Louis  knew  that 
it  was  the  reply  of  a  man  who  would  soon  give  proofs  of  his 
worth.  Jea^n  Bart  did  not  talk  like  a  courtier,  but  he  did 
what  courtiers  could  not  do. .. 

EXERCISE  XLV. 

A.  J'ai  vu^  une  petite  fourmi  qui  allait^  qh.  et  la  cherchant 
fortune.  Elle  a  rencontre  sur  son  chemin  un  brin  d'herbe 
qu'elle  voudrait^  bien  emporter ;  mais  comment  faire*  ?  II  est 
si  gros,  et  elle  est  si  faible.  Alors  elle  est  montee  sur  un 
caillou,  du  haut  duquel  elle  regarde  la  campagne,  comme  du 
haut  d'une  tour.  Elle  regarde,  elle  regarde ;  ehjfin  elle  a 
apergu^  deux  de  ses  compagnes  qui  passent  par  la,  et  elle 
court^  k  elles.  Elle  se  frotte  le  nez  contre  leur  nez  pour  leur 
dire'^ :  "  Venez^  vite  avec  moi ;  il  y  a  par  la  quelque  chose  de 
bon  ! "  Leg  trois  fourmis  se  prdcipitent  vers  le  brin  d'herbe  et 
le  saisissent.  Ce  que  I'une  ne  pouvait^  faire*,  les  trois  le  font* 
ais^mAit,  et  elles  emportent  en  triomphe  le  brin  devenu^** 
Idger  pour  elles. 

"^        »§224.  3  §225.  'i§2l3.  '  '  %\^Z.  »§221. 

*§160.  *§196.  6  §164.  «§17a  "§17& 


EXERCISE  XLV.  117 

B.  Complete  the  following,  as  above  :  1.   EUe  allait  qh.  et  \k, 

2.  Elle  voudrait  bien  I'emporter.  3.  EUe  est  mont^e.  4.  EUe 
court  a  elles.  5.  Elle  se  frotte  le  nez.  6.  Venez.  7.  EUes  se- 
pr^cipitent.  8.  Elles  le  saisissent.  9.  Elle  ne  pouvait  pas  le 
faire.     10,  Elles  le  font  aisement. 

Give  in  full  the  past  definite  of:   1.  Vu.     2.  Rencontr^. 

3.  Regarde.  4.  Aper9u.  5.  Court.  6.  Se  precipitent.  7. 
Font. 

Beginning  at  the  second  sentence,  relate  the  story  in  the 
past  definite,  thus  :  "  Elle  rencontra,  etc." 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  De  quel  insecte  parle-t-on  ici  ?  2.  Qu'est-ce 
qu'elle  faisait?  3.  Qu'est-ce  qu'elle  a  rencontrd  sur  son 
chemin  ]  4.  Le  brin  d'herbe  dtait-il  gros  ou  petit  ?  5.  Et  la 
fourmi  ^tait-elle  forte  ou  faible  ]  6.  Qu'est-ce  que  la  fourmi 
aurait  voulu  faire?  7.  Est-ce  qu'elle  pouvait  le  faire  toute 
seule  ?  8.  Ou  est-elle  montde  1  9.  Qu'est-ce  qu'elle  a  regard^ 
du  haut  du  caillou  ?  10.  Pour  la  fourmi  le  caillou  ^tait  comme 
une  tour,  n'est-ce  pas?  11.  Qu'est-ce  qu'elle  aper9oit  enfin? 
12.  Que  faisaient  les  deux  compagnes  de  la  fourmi?  13.  Et 
la  fourmi  qu'est-ce  qu'elle  a  fait?  14.  Est-ce  qu'elle  leur  a 
parl^  ?  15.  Comment  leur  a-t-elle  parld  ?  16.  Qu'est-ce  qu'elle 
leur  adit?  17.  Quelle  est  la  premiere  chose  qu'ont  faite  lea 
trois  fourmis?  18.  Et  ensuite  qu'ont-elles  fait?  19.  Une 
fourmi  pouvait-elle  emporter  le  brin  d'herbe?  20.  Les 
trois  fourmis  ensemble  pouvaient-elles  le  faire  aisement? 
21.  Pourquoi  le  brin  d'herbe  est-il  devenu  l^ger?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  A  little  ant  was  going  hither  and  thither  one  day.  She 
found  a  blade  of  grass  on  the  road.  "This  blade  of  grass  is 
very  big,"  thought  the  ant.  "  I  am  too  weak  to  carry  it  off 
alone.  I  know  what  I  shall  do.  I  shall  climb  upon  a  pebble. 
From  the  top  of  the  pebble  I  shall  look  around.  The  pebble 
will  be  for  me  like  a  tall  tower."  She  did  so.  She  looked 
about  her  a  long  time.  At  last  she  saw  two  of  her  compan- 
ions. They  were  passing  along  {par)  the  same  road.  She 
called  them,  and  they  ran  to  her.  She  said  to  them  :  "Come 
here,  for  I  have  found  something  good."  She  said  this  by 
rubbing  her  nose  against  theirs.  Ants,  as  you  know,  cannot 
speak  like  men.  After  that  the  three  ants  rushed  towards 
the  blade  of  grass.  They  seized  it  quickly.  It  iiad  been  very 
heavy  for  the  one  ant.  But  the  three  together  carried  it  off 
easily. 


118  EXERCISE  XLVL 

EXERCISE    XLVL 

A.  Un  homme  descendit^  de  Jerusalem  h  Jericho,  et  tomba 
parmi  des  brigands,  qui  le  depouillerent.  Apres  I'avoir  bless^ 
de  plusieurs  coups,  ils  s'en  all^rent^,  le  laissant  a  deini  mort.^ 
Un  pretre,  qui  par  hasard  descendait^  par  ce  chemin-la,  I'ayant 
vu^,  passa  outre.  Un  levite,  venant^  aussi  dans  le  meme 
endroit,  et  le  voyant^,  passa  outre.  Mais  un  Samaritain, 
qui  voyageait^,  vint^  vers  cet  homme,  et  le  voyanf*,  fut 
touchy  de  compassion.  S'approchant  de  lui,  il  banda  ses  plaies, 
et  il  y  versa  de  I'huile  et  du  vin ;  puis  il  le  mit"^  sur  sa  mon- 
ture,  le  mena^  a  une  auberge,  et  prit^  soin  de  lui.  Le  lende- 
main,  en  partant^^,  il  tira  de  sa  poche  deux  deniers  d'argent, 
et  les  donnant  a  I'aubergiste,  lui  dit^^:  "Aie  soin  de  lui,  et 
tout  ce  que  tu  ddpenseras  de  plus  je  te  le  rendrai^  k  mon 
retour." 


»  §  210. 

*§224. 

•§166. 

•§158. 

"§166. 

«§160. 

»  §  178. 

»§i9a 

•§202. 

"§193. 

«  §  174. 

B.  Complete  the  following,  as  above :  1.  II  descendit.  2.  lis 
le  depouillerent.  3.  Ils  s'en  allerent.  4.  II  descendit  par  ce 
chemin.  5.  II  passa  outre.  6.  II  vint  vers  cet  homme.  7.  II 
y  versa  de  I'huile.  8.  II  le  mit  sur  sa  monture.  9.  II  prit 
soin  de  lui. 

Give  the  present  indicative  and  present  subjunctive  of: 
1.  S'en  allerent.     2.  Mort.     3.  Venant.     4.  Voyant.     5.  Mit. 

G,  (Oral.)  1.  D'ou  a-t-on  tir^  cette  histoire?  2.  Comment 
s'appelle  I'histoire?  3.  Ou  sont  Jerusalem  et  Jdrichol  4. 
Est-ce  que  la  terre  sainte  est  un  grand  ou  un  petit  pays  1 
5.  Qu'ont  fait  les  brigands  au  voyageur  ?  6.  En  quel  ^tat  se 
trouvait-il  apr^s  leur  depart  1  7.  Quelles  personnes  sont  venues 
ensuite  ?  8.  Qu'est-ce  qu'elles  ont  fait  1  9.  Qui  est  venu  apres 
le  pretre  et  le  Invite?  10.  Est-ce  que  les  Samaritains  ^baient 
bien  aim^s  des  Juifs?  11.  Est-ce  que  cela  a  empech^  le 
Samaritain  de  faire  le  bieni  12.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  a  fait  au 
Juif?  13.  Aprfes  I'avoir  soign^  qu'a-t-il  faif?  14.  Qu'a-t-il 
donn^  k  I'aubergiste  ]  15.  En  quittant  I'auberge,  qu'a-t-il  ditj 
Etc.,  etc.  I 

D.  1.  If  we  fall  among  thieves,  they  will  strip  us.  2.  After 
having  wounded  us  they  will  depart.     3.  If  you  should  see  a 


EXERCISE  XLVII.  119 

poor  traveller  half  dead,  would  you  pass  by  on  the  other  side  ? 
4.  If  the  priest  had  been  touched  with  compassion,  he  would 
have  bound  up  the  wounds.  5.  Let  us  pour  oil  and  wine  into 
his  wounds.  6.  Let  us  put  the  poor  man  on  our  own  beast. 
7.  Let  us  take  him  to  the  inn.  8.  Let  us  take  care  of  him 
there.  9.  The  next  day  we  shall  give  money  to  the  inn- 
keeper.  10.  On  our  return  we  shall  give  him  back  whatever 
he  shall  have  spent  for  our  friend. 

E.  A  man,  who  was  going  down  from  Jerusalem  to  Jericho, 
fell  among  thieves.  They  stripped  him  and  wounded  him,  and 
left  him  half  dead. -O^hen  a  priest  and  a  Levite  came  by 
chance  to  the  same  place,  and  they  saw  him  and  passed  by  on 
the  other  side.  But  a  Samaritan,  who  was  going  down  by 
that  road,  saw  him,  and  was  touched  with  compassion.  Then, 
after  having  bound  up  his  wounds,  he  put  him  on  his  beast 
and  took  him  to  an  inn.  On  the  morrow  he  gave  money  to 
the  innkeeper,  and  said  that  on  his  return  he  would  give  the 
innkeeper  whatever  he  should  spend  if  he  took  care  of  the 
poor  man. 

EXERCISE  XLVII. 

A.  Lorsque  M.  Laffitte,  le  fameux  banquier,  vint^  h.  Paris,  en 
1788,  k  I'age  de  21  ans,  toute  son  ambition  se  bornait  a  obtenir^ 
une  petite  place  dans  une  maison  de  banque.  II  se  presents 
chez  un  riche  banquier.  "  Impossible  de  vous  admettre^  chez 
moi,  du  moins  pour  le  moment,  lui  dit*  le  banquier :  mes 
bureaux  sont  au  complet.".  Le  jeune  homme  salue  et  se  retire. 
En  traversant  la  cour,  il  aper9oit^  a  terre  une  epingle,  et  la 
ramasse.  Debout  devant  la  fenetre  de  son  cabinet  le  riche 
banquier  avait  suivi^  des  yeux  la  retraite  du  jeune  homme.  11 
lui  vit'^  ramasser  I'epingle  et  ce  trait  lui  fit^  plaisir.  Le  soir 
meme  le  jeune  homme  regut^  un  billet  du  banquier,  qui  lui 
disait*:  "Vous  avez  une  place  dans  mes  bureaux;  vous  pou- 
vez^  venir^  I'occuper  des  demain."  Le  jeune  homme  devint^ 
bientdt  caissier,  puis  associ^,  puis  maitre^de  la  premiere  maison 
de  banque  de  Paris,  et  enfin  homme  d'Etat  tr^s  influent  sous 
Louis-Philippe. 

-j-rns:  3  §198.  "-sais.  'T^.  'fi22L 

•«m.  *|198.  •6206.  J4186r 


120  EXERCISE  XLVIL 

B.  Complete  the  following,  as  above:  1.  II  vint  k  Paris. 
2.  Elle  se  bornait  a  cela.  3.  II  se  presenta  chez  le  banquier. 
4.  II  se  retire.  5.  II  apergoit  k  terre  une  epingle.  6.  II  I'avait 
Buivi  des  yeux.  7.  II  vit  ramasser  I'epingle.  8.  II  re9ut  un 
billet.  9.  II  lui  disait.  10.  Vous  pouvez  venir.  11.  II  devint 
maitre. 

Give  in  full  the  future  and  conditional  of;  1.  Tenir. 
2.  Admettre.     3.  Aper9oit.     4.  Suivi.     5.  Vit. 

G.  (Oral.)  1.  Quel  age  avait  M.  Laffitte  a  son  arriv^e  k 
Paris?  2.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  cherchait?  3.  Reussit-il  d'abord  k 
trouver  une  place  ?  4.  Ou  se  presenta-t-il  1  5.  Que  lui  a-t-on 
dit  ?  6.  En  se  retirant  ou  va-t-il  1  7.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  trouve  1 
8.  Qui  I'a  vu  ?  9.  En  ^tait-il  content?  10.  De  quelle  fa9on 
a-t-il  montr^  son  contentement  ?  11.  Qu'est  devenu  lejeune 
homme  par  la  suite?  12.  Quelle  est  la  morale  del'histoire? 
Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  If  your  ambition  is  only  to  get  a  humble  position, 
you  will  get  it.  2.  Present  yourself  at  the  office  of  the  rich 
banker.  3:  He  will  admit  you  into  his  employ^  4.  His 
offices  are  not  full.  5.  Do  you  see  that  pin  on  the  ground  ? 
6.  Pick  it  up.  7.  There  is  the  rich  banker  standing  at  his 
office  window.  _  8.  The  banker  is  watching  the  young  man  as 
he  retires.  9.  If  we  see  him  pick  up  a  pin,  it  {cela)  will  please 
us.  10.  Did  you  receive  a  note  from  the  banker?  11.  You 
shall  have  a  position  in  his  banking-house.  12^^  You  will 
soon  become  his  partner,  will  you  not?  13.  Those  who  pick 
up  pins  may  become  statesmen. 

E.  When  M.  Laffitte  was  twenty-one  years  of  age  he  came 
to  Paris.  He  wished  to  get  a  humble  position  with  a  rich 
banker.  But  when  he  presented  himself,  the  rich  banker  told 
him  that  his  offices  were  full,  and  that  he  could  not  admit 
him.  He  withdrew.  The  rich  banker  watched  him  from  his 
office  window,  and  saw  him  pick  up  a  pin  which  he  noticed  on 
the  ground  as  he  was  crossing  the  yard.  This  action  pleased 
the  banker.  That  very  evening  he  sent  a  note  to  the  young 
man,  which  said  that  he  could  have  a  position  in  his  offices 
the  very  next  day.  The  young  man  became  head  of  a  great 
banking-house,  and  at  last  an  influential  statesman. 


EXERCISE  XEVIIL  121 

EXERCISE    XLVIII. 

A.  Benjamin  Franklin  raconte I'anecdote  suivante^:  "Quand 
j'^tais  un  enfant  de  cinq  ou  six  ans,  mes  amis,  un  jour  de  fete, 
remplirent  ma  petite  poche  de  sous.  Je  partis^  tout  de  suite 
pour  une  boutique  ou  Ton  vendait^  des  jouets.  Chemin  faisant*, 
je  vis^  dans  les  mains  d'un  autre  petit  gargon  un  sifflet,  dont 
le  son  me  charma.  Je  lui  donnai  en  echange  tout  mon  argent. 
Revenu^  chez  moi,  fort  content  de  mon  achat,  sifflant  par 
toute  la  maison,  je  fatiguai  les  oreilles  de  toute  la  famille. 
Mes  fr^res  et  mes  soeurs  apprenanf^  que  j'avais  tout  donn^ 
pour  un  mauvais  instrument,  me  dirent^  que  je  I'avais  pay^^ 
dix  fois  plus  cher  qu'il  ne  valait^^.  Alors  ils  ^num^rerent^^ 
toutes  les  jolies  choses  que  j'aurais  pu^^  acheter^i  avec  mon 
argent  si  j'avais  ^te  plus  prudent.  Ils  me  tournferent  tellement 
en  ridicule  que  j'en  pleurai.  Cependant,  cet  accident  fut  de 
quelque  utility  pour  moi.  Lorsque  plus  tard  j'^tais  tent^ 
d'acheter^i  quelque  chose  qui  ne  m'^tait  pas  n^cessaire,  je 
disais^  en  moi-meme :  ^e  donnons  pas  trop  pour  le  sifflet,  et 
j'^pargnais  mon  argent." 

•§157.  »»§168. 

io§223.  i2§221. 


»§206. 

*§195. 

'1202. 

'§166. 

«§224. 

•1193. 

»  §  210. 

«  §  178. 

B.  Complete  the  following,  as  above :  1.  Quand  j'^tais  un 
enfant.  2.  Ils  remplirent  ma  pOche.  3.  Je  partis  tout  de 
suite.  4.  Je  vis  un  sifflet.  5.  Je  fatiguai  tous  mes  amis. 
6.  Je  remplis  mes  poches,  tu  remplis  tes  poches,  etc.  7.  Ils 
me  dirent,  ils  te  dirent,  etc.  8.  Je  disais  en  moi-meme,  tu 
disais  en  toi-meme,  etc.  __ 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Qui  ^tait  Benjamin  Franklin?  2.  A  quelle 
^poqiie  vivait-il  ?  3.  Quel  age  avait-il  a  I't^poque  de  I'anecdotQ? 
4.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  avait  dans  sa  poche?  5.  Qui  le  lui  avait  donnd  ? 
6.  Pour  quel  endroit  est-il  parti  ensuite  ?  7.  Y  est-il  jamais 
arriv^  ?  8.  Quel  ^tait  I'obstacle  ?  9.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  a  fait 
de  son  argent?  10.  A  son  re  tour  chez  lui,  qu'est-ce  qu'il  a 
fait?  11.  A-t-il  charme  ses  freres  et  ses  soeurs?  12.  Est-ce 
qu'il  avait  pay^  assez  cher  son  sifflet?  13.  Est-ce  que  la 
famille  ^tait  contente  de  son  achat?  14.  De  quelle  faqon  la 
famille  a-t-elle  fait  voir  son  m^contentement  ?     16.  Le  pauvre 


122  EXERCISE  XLfX. 

Franklin  ^tait-il  content  a  la  fin?     16.  Quelle  legon  Franklin 
a-t-il  reqne  par  cet  accident  'i     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  You  have  paid  twice  as  much  for  that  apple  as  it  is 
worth.  2.  If  you  pay  ten  cents  for  that  pencil,  that  will  be 
three  times  as  much  as  it  is  worth.  3.  Never  pay  more  for 
things  than  they  are  worth.  4.  We  could  have  bought  many 
pretty  things  with  our  money,  if  we  had  been  prudent.  5.  If 
our  friend  had  been  less  prudent,  he  could  not  have  bought  so 
many  pretty  things,  6.  That  accident  will  be  of  some  use  to 
our  friends.  7.  When  we  are  (fut.)  tempted  to  buy  some- 
thing which  is  not  necessary  for  us,  we  shall  say  to  our- 
selves :  "  We  are  not  going  to  give  too  much  for  the  whistle." 

E.  When  Benjamin  Franklin  was  five  years  old,  his  brother, 
on  a  holiday,  filled  his  pockets  with  coppers.  Staxting  off  at 
once  for  a  shop  where  toys  were  sold,  he  met  on  the  way 
another  little  boy  who  had  a  whistle.  The  sound  of  the 
instrument  charmed  him,  and  he  gave  all  his  money  to  have  it. 
He  was  much  pleased  with  his  purchase,  but  he  whistled  so 
much  all  over  the  house  that  he  tired  the  whole  family.  His 
brothers  and  sisters  asked  him  where  he  hacf  bought  his  whistle 
and  how  much  he  had  paid  for  it.  He  told  them  he  had  given 
all  his  money  to  the  little  boy.  Then  they  told  him  he  had 
paid  too  much  for  it.  They  said  too  that  if  he  had  been  more 
prudent,  he  could  have  bought  ten  times  as  many  pretty  things, 
and  he  cried  on  account  of  it.  But  the  affair  was  of  some  use 
to  him  later  on.  Whenever  he  was  tempted  to  buy  things 
which  he  did  not  need,  he  would  always  say  to  himself :  "  J 
will  not  give  too  much  for  the  whistle." 

EXERCISE  XLIX. 

A.  Henri  TV,  dans  une  chasse,  s'^tant  ^cart^,  suivant^  sa 
coutume,  de  ses  gardes  et  de  sa  cour,  rencontra  un  p^ysan 
assis^  sous  un  arbre.  "Que  fais-tu^  la?  lui  dit*  le  prince. — 
J'^tais  venu^  ici  des  le  point  du  jour,  pour  voir^  passer  le  roi, 
rdpondit ''  le  paysan ;  sans  ce  d^sir,  je  serais  k  labourer  mon 
champ,  qui  n'est  pas  fort  ^loign^. — Si  tu  veux^  monter  sur  la 
croupe  de  mon  cheval,  lui  r^pliqua  Henri,  je  te  conduirai^  oil 
est  le  roi,  et  tu  le  verras^  k  ton  aise." 

Le  paysan,  enchants,  profite  de  la  rencontre,  monte  k  c6t6 
du  roi,  et  demande,  chemin  faisant^,  comment  il  pourra^*^  reoon- 


EXERCISE   XLIX.  123 

n^tre  ^^  le   roi.     "  Tu   n'aiiras   qu'a   regarder   celui   qui   sera 
couvert^^  pendant  que  tous  les  autres  aurout  la  tete  nue." 

Enfin  le  moment  arrive  ou  le  roi  rejoint  ^*  une  partie  de  sa 
cour  et  se  trouve  parmi  ses  courtisans  ;  tous  se  decouvrent^^, 
excepte  lui.  Alors  il  demande  au  paysan :  "  Eh  bien,  quel  est 
le  roi  ?  —  Ma  foi,  monsieur,  lui  repondit-il  "^y  c'est  vous  ou  moi, 
car  il  n'y  a  que  nous  deux  qui  ayons  le  chapeau  sur  la  tete." 


>§206. 

«§193. 

7  §210. 

w§221. 

"§176. 

«§215. 

»§178. 

8  §225. 

"§188. 

13  §190. 

•§195. 

6  §224. 

9  §186. 

B.  Complete  the  following,  as  above :  1.  J'etais  venu.  2. 
Tu  veux  voir  le  roi.  3.  Tu  le  verras  a  ton  aise.  4.  II  pourra 
reconnaitre  le  roi.  5.  II  sera  convert.  6.  II  rejoint  les 
courtisans.  7.  lis  se  decouvrent.  8.  II  n'y  a  que  nous  qui 
ayons. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Qui  etait  Henri  IV?  2.  A  quelle  ^poque 
vivait-il  ?  3.  Quelle  etait  sa  coutume  quand  il  etait  k  la 
chasse  ?  4.  Qui  a-t-il  rencontre  un  jour  ?  5.  Qu'est-ce  que 
c'est  qu'un  paysan  ?  6.  Que  faisait  le  paysan  ?  7.  Depuis 
combien  de  temps  y  etait-il  ?  8.  Pourquoi  y  etait-il  venu  ? 
9.  S'il  n'^tait  pas  venu  oil  aurait-il  ete  ?  10.  Qu'est-ce  que  le 
roi   a   propose   au   paysan  ?      11.    Le   paysan   a-t-il  accepte  ? 

12.  Qu'eat-ce   que  le   paysan    a  demande  au  roi  en   chemin  ? 

13.  Quel  etait  le  signe  par    lequel   on  reconnaitrait   le   roi  ? 

14.  Le  roi  et  le  paysan  ou  arrivent-ils  bientdt  ?  15.  Qu'est-ce 
que  les  courtisans  ont  fait  k  leur  approche  ?  ,  16.  Combien  de 
personnes  restaient  couvertes  ?  17.  Et  combien  de  rois  y 
avait-il  dans  la  compagnie  ?     Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  We  have  wandered  from  the  court.  2.  If  the  king 
had  not  wandered  from  the  court,  he  would  not  have  met  the 
peasant.  3.  We  came  here  at  the  very  peep  of  day.  4.  I 
have  not  seen  the  king  go  by.  5.  The  peasants  are  busy 
ploughing  the  field.  6.  If  you  get  up  beside  me,  you  will  see 
the  king.  7.  As  they  went  along,  the  peasant  said  to  the 
king  :  "  Take  me  where  the  king  is."  8.  Everybody  had  his 
hat  on,  and  we  could  not  recognize  the  king.  9.  If  the 
courtiers  had  taken  oflf  their  hats,  we  could  have  recognized 
the  king. 


124  EXERCISE  L. 

E.  One  day  Henry  IV.  had  wandered  from  his  courtiers. 
Meeting  a  peasant  who  was  sitting  under  a  tree,  he  asked 
the  latter  what  he  was  doing  there.  The  peasant  replied  that 
he  had  been  there  since  daybreak,  and  that  he  wished  to  see 
the  king,  and  that  if  he  had  not  come,  he  would  be  busy 
ploughing  his  field.  The  king  said  to  him  :  "  Get  up  behind 
me,  and  I  will  take  you  where  you  can  see  the  king."  The 
peasant  was  delighted,  and  got  up  beside  the  king.  As  they 
went  along,  he  asked  how  he  should  recognize  the  king,  and 
the  king  told  him  to  look  at  the  one  who  should  have  his  hat 
on,  whilst  the  others  should  be  bareheaded.  When  they 
arrived  where  the  courtiers  were,  the  latter  took  off  their  hats. 
Then  the  king  asked  the  peasant  which  was  the  king.  He 
replied :  "  We  two  have  our  hats  on,  the  others  are  bare- 
headed :  it  is  you  or  I." 

EXERCISE    L. 

A,  Un  paysan  traversait  la  campagne  avec  son  fils  Thomas. 
"  Regarde  !  lui  dit-iP  en  chemin,  voil4  par  terre  un  fer  k 
cheval  perdu^,  ramasse-le  ! " 

"  Bah !  r^pondit^  Thomas ;  il  ne  vaut'  pas  la  peine  de  se 
baisser  pour  si  peu  de  chose !  "  Le  pere  ne  dit^  rien,  ramassa 
le  fer  et  le  mit*  dans  sa  poche.  Arriv^  au  village  voisin,  il  le 
vendit^  pour  quelques  centimes  au  mardchal  f errant,  et  acheta^ 
des  cerises  avec  cet  argent. 

Cela  fait*,  ils  se  remirent*  en  route.  Le  soleil  ^tait  brfilant. 
Thomas  mourait^  de  soif,  et  avait  de  la  peine  h.  poursuivre^  son 
chemin.  Le  pere,  qui  marchait  le  premier,  laissa,  comme  par 
hasard,  tomber  une  cerise.  Thomas  la  ramassa  avec  empresse- 
ment,  et  la  mangea*^.  Quelques  pas  plus  loin,  une  seconde 
cerise  s'echappa  des  mains  du  pere,  et  Thomas  la  saisit  avec 
le  meme  empressement.  Le  pere  fit^  de  meme  avec  toutes  les 
cerises.  Lorsque  I'enfant  eut  port^  a  la  bouche  la  derniere 
cerise,  le  pere  se  retournaet  lui  dit^ :  "Yois^^,  mon  ami,  tu  n'as 
pas  voulu^i  te  baisser  une  fois  pour  ramasser  le  fer  a  cheval,  et 
tu  as  ^t^  oblig^i2  (Je  ^e  baisser  plus  de  vingt  fois  pour  ramasser 
les  cerises." 


»§193. 

*§198. 

^  §  174. 

•§156. 

"§226. 

«§210. 

•  §  158. 

•  §206. 

>o§224. 

"§156. 

88223. 

•§195. 

9  EXERCISE  L.  125 

B.  Complete  the  following,  as  above  :  1.  II  ne  dit  rien. 
2.  II  le  mit  dans  sa  poche.  3.  II  vendit  le  fer.  4.  II  acheta 
des  cerises.     5.  II  mourait  de  soif.     6.   II  mangea  une  cerise. 

7.  II  la  saisit.  8.  II  fit  de  meme.  9.  lis  se  remirent  en  route. 
10.  II  s'dchappa  de  ses  mains.  11.  II  se  retourna.  12.  Tu  t'es 
baiss^. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  De  quelles  personnes  parle-t-on  dans  cette  his- 
toire  1  2.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  qu'un  paysan  ?  3.  Etait-il  seul^ 
4.  Qu'est-ce  qu'ils  ont  vu  en  chemin  1  5.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est 
qu'un  fer  k  cheval  1  6.  Qu'est-ce  que  le  pere  a  dit  au  fils  1  7. 
Qu'est-ce  que  le  fils. a  r^pondu  *?  8.  Lequel  des  deux  ^tait  le 
plus  prudent  1  9.  Par  quelle  action  a-t-il  montr^  sa  prudence  ? 
10.  A  qui  a-t-on  vendu  le  fer  k  chevaU  11.  Pourquoi  I'a-t-on 
vendu  k  un  mardchal  f errant"^  12.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  a  acheta 
avec  I'argent  ?  13.  Quel  temps  faisait-iH  14.  Quel  ^tait  I'effefc 
de  la  chaleur  sur  le  petit  Thomas?  15.  Est-ce  que  le  p^re 
n'avait  rien  pour  la  soif^  16.  Est-ce  que  les  cerises  sent 
bonnes  pour  la  soif?  17.  Qu'est-ce  que  le  p^re  a  fait  des 
cerises?  18.  Et  qu'est-ce  que  son  fils  en  a  fait?  19.  Com- 
bien  en  a-t-il  mangles  ?  20.  Pourquoi  aurait-il  mieux  fait  de 
se  baisser  pour  le  fer  k  cheval  1     Etc.,  etc. 

£>.  1.  It  was  not  worth  the  trouble.  2.  It  will  not  be 
worth  the  trouble.  3.  If  it  is  worth  the  trouble,  we  shall 
pick  up  the  horse-shoe.  4.  Put  the  horse-shoe  into  your  pocket 
and  buy  cherries.  5.  We  shall  set  out  again  on  our  journey. 
6.  If  the  sun  is  hot,  they  will  not  set  out  again.  7.  I  am 
very   thirsty   (dying    with    thirst) ;   give   me   some   cherries. 

8.  We  have  diffici^lty  in  picking  up  the  cherries.  9.  If  you  are 
dying  with  thirst,  I  shall  drop  a  cherry.  10.  The  cherries  are 
on  the  ground;  pick  them  up.  11.  If  you  walk  ahead,  will 
you  pick  up  the  cherries?  12.  A  few  steps  farther  on,  I 
stooped  to  pick  up  the  horse-shoe.  13.  Why  did  you  seize 
the  horse-shoe  so  eagerly  ?  14.  We  did  not  seize  it  eagerly. 
15.  If  you  had  been  willing  to  turn  round,  we  should  have 
given  you  the  cherries.  16.  Stoop,  if  you  wish  to  pick  up. 
17.  He  who  is  not  willing  to  stoop  once,  will  perhaps  stoop 
more  than  twenty  times. 

.^.  As  a  peasant  and  his  son  were  crossing  the  country, 
they  saw  a  horse-shoe  on  the  ground.     The  father  told  his  son 


126  EXERCISE   LL 

to  pick  it  Tip  and  put  it  into  his  pocket.  The  son  replied  that 
it  was  iiot  worth  while  to  stoop  for  a  horse-shoe.  Then  the 
father  stooped  and  picked  it  up.  They  sold  it  to  the  black- 
smith of  the  neighboring  village,  and  bought  some  cherries, 
which  the  father  put  into  his  pocket.  They  pursued  their 
way,  the  father  walking  ahead.  The  sun  was  hot  and  Thomas 
was  very  thirsty,  and,  as  if  by  chance,  a  cherry  fell  from  his 
father's  pocket.  The  son  seizing  it,  ate  it,  and  also  a  second 
one,  which  slipped  from  his  father's  pocket.  Soon  the  last 
cherry  was  carried  to  his  mouth,  and  his  father,  turning  round, 
told  him  that  if  he  had  been  willing  to  stoop  once  for  the 
horse-shoe,  he  would  not  have  been  obliged  to  stoop  twenty 
times  for  the  cherries. 

EXERCISE  LI. 

A.  Un  jour  Fr^ddric  le  Grand,  roi  de  Prusse,  ayant  sonnd 
sans  que  personne  r^pondit^  k  cet  appel,  ouvrit^  la  porte  de  son 
antichambre  et  trouva  son  page  endormi^  sur  une  chaise.  Au 
moment  ou  il  allait*  le  r^veiller,  il  apergut^  un  papier  ^crit^ 
sortant^  de  la  poche  du  page.  La  curiosity  du  roi  fut  excit^e, 
il  prit®  le  papier  et  le  lut^.  C'^tait  une  lettre  de  la  mere  da 
jeune  homme,  dans  laquelle  elle  remerciait  son  fils  de  ce  qu'il 
lui  envoyait^^  une  partie  de  ses  gages  pour  la  soulager^^  dans  sa. 
mis^re.  Le  roi,  ayant  lu^  la  lettre,  prit^  un  rouleau  de  ducats 
et  le  glissa  avec  la  lettre  dans  la  poche  du  page.  Un  instant 
apres  il  sonna  si  fort  que  le  page  se  reveilla  et  accourut^^ 
aupres  de  lui.  "  Vous  avez  dormi^,"  lui  dit^^  le  roi.  Le  jeune 
homme,  ayant  honte,  t&cha  de  s'excuser.  Dans  son  embarras  il 
mit^*  la  main  dans  sa  poche,  et  y  trouva  le  rouleau  de  ducats. 
II  le  prit^,  palit,  trembla,  et  ne  put^^  articuler  un  seul  mot. 
"  Qu'avez-vous  ]  dit^^  \q  yqI — H^las  !  sire,  dit^^  le  page,  quel- 
qu'un  veut^^  me  perdre^;  je  ne  sais^'^  pas  d'ou  m'est  venu^^ 
cet  or. — La  fortune  ne  vient-elle^^  pas  sou  vent  en  dormant  3? 
reprit^  Fr^d^ric.  Envoie^^  cette  somme  a  ta  mere,  en  lui  fai- 
sant^^  mes  compliments  et  assure-la  bien  que  j'aurai  soin  d'elle 
et  de  toi." 


»§210. 

•§213. 

•§197. 

"§193. 

"§222. 

«§176. 

«§194. 

»o§157. 

"§198. 

"§178. 

»§166. 

»  §166. 

"§156. 

"§221. 

"§196. 

*§160. 

•§202. 

"§164. 

"§226b 

EXERCISE  LI.  127 

B.  Complete  the  following,  as  above  :  1 .  Sans  qu'il  r^pondtt. 
2.  II  ouvrit  la  porte.  3.  II  lut  le  billet.  4.  II  allait  le 
r^veiller.      5.    II  aper9ut  un  papier.     6.   II  remerciait  le  roi. 

7.  II  *envoyait  I'argent.  8.  II  prit  le  rouleau.  9.  II  se 
r^veilla.  10.  II  accourut  aupres  du  roi.  11.  II  ne  put  dire 
un  mot.  12.  II  veut  me  perdre.  13.  Je  sais  d'ou  c'est  venu. 
14.  Envoie  cette  somme. 

Re-write  the  anecdote,  substituting  the  past  indefinite  for 
the  past  definite. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  Quel  est  le  sujet  de  cette  anecdote  ?  2.  A 
quelle  ^j)oque  vivait  Frederic  le  Grand  1  3.  Ou  est  la  Prusse  1 
4.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  qu'un  page  ?  5.  Ou  ^tait  le  page  dont 
parle  I'histoire  1  6.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  y  faisait  1  7.  Qu'est-ce  que 
les   pages   devraient   faire  dans   les   antichambres   des   roisi 

8.  Est-ce  que  le  roi  s'est  mis  en  colere  contre  le  page?  9. 
Qu'est-ce  qu'il  a  fait  %  10.  En  lisant  la  lettre  qu'est-ce  que  le 
roi  a  d^couvert?  11.  Est-ce  que  la  m^re  dupage  ^tait  riche? 
12.  Qu'est-ce  que  le  page  faisait  pour  elle?  13.  Le  roi  en 
^tait-il  content]  14.  De  quelle  fagon  a-t-il  montr^  son  con- 
tentementl  15.  Comment  le  jeune  homme  a-t-il  d^couvert  ce 
que  le  roi  avait  fait?     16.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  qu'un  ducat? 

17.  Que   pensait-il   en   sentant   les   ducats    dans   sa   poche? 

18.  De   quelle   fagon   le   roi   a-t-il   calm^   le   jeune   homme? 

19.  Est-ce  que  le  proverbe  est  toujours  vrai :  "La  fortune 
nous  vient  en  dormant  ? "  20.  Qu'est-ce  que  cette  histoire 
nous  apprend  ?    Etc.,  etc. 

D.  1.  He  rings  without  anyone  answering  him.  2.  If  we 
open  the  door,  we  shall  find  the  page.  3.  I  am  going  to  wake 
him.  4.  He  will  waken.  5.  The  paper  was  sticking  out  of 
his  pocket.  6.  She  thanked  her  son  for  sending  her  a  part  of 
his  wages.  7.  She  sent  a  letter  in  which  she  thanked  her  son. 
8.  We  have  been  asleep.  9.  We  had  been  asleep.  10.  The 
king  asked  :  "  What  is  the  matter  with  him  ?"  1 1.  Somebody 
will  ruin  me.     12.  He  took  care  of  him  and  her. 

E.  One  day  Frederick  the  Great  rang,  and  nobody  answered 
him.  Opening  the  door  of  the  antechamber,  he  finds  his  page 
asleep.  A  letter,  which  was  sticking  out  of  the  page's  pocket, 
aroused  the  king's  curiosity.  The  young  man  used  to  send  his 
mother  a  part  of  his  wages,  and  in  this  letter  she  was  thanking 


128  EXERCISE  LI. 

him  for  it.  The  king  read  the  letter,  and,  taking  a  roll  of 
ducats,  slipped  it,  with  the  letter,  into  the  young  man's  pocket. 
Then  ringing  very  loud,  he  waked  the  page,  who  hastened  into 
his  presence.  He  asked  the  young  man  if  he  had  been*  asleep. 
The  young  man  was  ashamed,  and  tried  to  excuse  himself. 
Putting  his  hand  into  his  pocket  he  finds  the  ducats.  He 
trembles,  and  cannot  utter  a  word.  The  king  asked  him  what 
was  the  matter  with  him,  and  he  replied  that  somebody  wished 
to  ruin  him,  for  he  did  not  know  where  the  ducats  came  from. 
The  king  replies  that  good  luck  comes  to  us  often  while  we 
Bleep.  He  tells  the  page  that  he  will  take  care  of  his  mother 
and  him. 


§163] 


REGULAK  VERBS. 


129 


PART  II. 


THE  VERB. 

REGULAR   VERBS. 

153.  RegfUlar  Conjugations.  Kegular  verbs  are  con- 
veniently divided  into  three  classes  or  conjugations,  according 
as  the  present  infinitive  ends  in  -er,  -ir,  -re,  and  are  inflected 
in  their  simple  tenses  as  follows : — 


I. 


Present. 
doirn  er,  to  give. 


Present. 
donn  ant,  giving. 

Past. 
donn  €t  given. 


Present. 
IgivCf  am  giving, 
etc, 
je  donn  e. 
tu  donn  es. 
11  donn  e. 
nous  donn  ons. 
yons  donn  ez. 
ils  donn  ent. 
9 


II. 

Infinitive  Mood. 

Present. 
fin  ir,  to  finish. 

Participles. 

Present. 
fin  iss  ant,  finishing. 

Past. 
fin  i,  finished. 

Indicative  Mood. 

Present. 
I  finish,  am  finishing, 
etc. 
]e  fin  i  s. 
tu  fin  i  s. 
il  fin  i  L 
nous  fin  iss  ons. 
vous  fin  iss  ez. 
ils  fin  iss  ent 


IIL 


Present. 
romp  re,  to  break. 


Present. 
romp  ant,  breaking. 

Past. 
romp  u,  broken. 


Present. 
/  break,  am  breaking, 
etc. 
je  romp  s. 
tu  romp  s. 
il  romp  t. 
nous  romp  ons. 
vous  romp  ez. 
ils  romp  ent. 


130 


THE  VERB. 


[§163 


Imperfect. 

/  was  giving,  used 
to  give,  etc. 
je  donn  ais. 
tu  donn  ais. 
il  donn  ait 
nous  donn  ions, 
vous  donn  iez. 
lis  donn  aient. 

Past  Definitjl 

/  gave,  etc. 

je  donn  ai. 

tu  donn  as. 

11  donn  a. 

nous  donn  dmes. 

vous  donn  ktes. 

lis  donn  ^rent 

Future. 
/  shall  give,  etc. 
je  donner  ai. 
tu  donner  as. 
11  donner  a. 
nous  donner  ons. 
vous  donner  ez. 
Us  donner  ont. 

Conditional. 
I  should  give,  etc. 

je  donner  ais. 

tu  donner  ais. 

il  donner  ait. 
nous  donner  ions, 
vous  donner  iez. 

ils  donner  aient. 


Imperfect. 

/  was  finishing,  used 
to  finishf  etc. 
je  fin  iss  ais, 
tu  fin  iss  ais. 
11  fin  iss  ait. 

nous  fin  iss  ions. 

vous  fin  iss  iez. 
ils  fin  iss  aient. 

Past  Definite. 
I  finished,  etc. 

je  fin  is. 

tu  fin  is. 

il  fin  it. 

nous  fin  imes. 

vous  fin  ites. 

Us  fin  irent. 

Future. 

/  shall  finish,  etc. 

je  finir  ai. 

tu  finir  as. 

11  finir  a. 

nous  finir  ons. 

vous  finir  ez. 

ils  finir  ont 

Conditional. 
I  should  finish,  etc. 

je  finir  ais. 

tu  finir  ais. 

il  finir  ait 
nous  finir  ions. 
vous  finir  iez. 

ils  finir  aient 


Imperfect. 

Twas  breaking,  used 
to  break,  etc. 
je  romp  ais. 
tu  romp  ais. 
11  romp  ait 
nous  romp  ions. 
vous  romp  iez. 
ils  romp  aient 

Past  Definite. 

/  broke,  etc.    ^ 

je  romp  is. 

tu  romp  is. 

11  romp  it 
nous  romp  imes. 
vous  romp  ites. 

ils  romp  irent 

Future. 

/  shall  break,  etc* 
je  rompr  ai. 
tu  rompr  as. 
11  rompr  a. 

nous  rompr  ons. 

vous  rompr  ez. 
ils  rompr  ont 

Conditional. 
/  should  break,  etc. 
je  rompr  ais. 
tu  rompr  ais. 
11  rompr  ait 
nous  rompr  ions. 
vous  rompr  iez. 
ils  rompr  aient 


§154] 


AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


131 


Present. 
Oive,  etc. 
donn  e.* 
(qu'il  donn  e. ) 
donn  ons. 
donn  ez. 
(qu'ils  donn  ent ) 


Imperative  Mood. 

PRESBNT. 

Finish,  etc. 
finis. 
(qu'il  fin  isse.) 
fin  iss  ons. 
fin  iss  ez. 
(qu'ils  fin  iss  ent.) 


Present. 
Break,  etc. 
romp  s. 
(qu'il  romp  e.) 
romp  ons. 
romp  ez. 
(qu'ils  romp  ent.) 


*Thi8  form  becomes  'donn  es'  when  followed  by  -y  or  -en  (cf.  §370,  3,  obs.  3,  4). 


PBES13fT. 

(That)  I  (may)  give, 
etc. 
(que)  je  donn  e, 
(que)  tu  donn  es. 
(qu')  ildonn  e. 
(que)  nous  donn  Ions, 
(que)  vous  donn  iez. 
(qu')  ils  donn  ent. 

Imperfect. 

(That)  I  {might)  give, 

etc. 
(que)  je  donni 
(que)  tu  donn  i 
(qu')  il  donn4t. 


Subjunctive  Mood. 

Present. 

{That)  I  {may)  finish, 

etc. 

(que)  je  fin  iss  e. 

(que)  tu  fin  iss  es. 

(qu'  il  fin  iss  e. 

(que)  nous  fin  iss  ions. 

(que)  vous  fin  iss  iez. 

(qu')  ils  fin  iss  ent 


Imperfect. 

{Tlmt)  I  {might)  finish, 

etc. 

(que)  je  fin  isse. 

(que)  tu  fin  isses. 

(qu')  il  fin  it. 


Present. 

{That)  I  {may)  break, 

etc. 

(que)  je  romp  e. 

(que)  tu  romp  es. 

(qu')  il  romp  e. 

(que)  nous  romp  ions* 

(que)  vous  romp  iez. 

(qu')  ils  romp  ent. 

Imperfect. 


(que)  nous  donn  assions.  (que)  nous  fin  issions. 
(que)  vous  donn  assiez.     (que)  vous  fin  issiez. 
(qu')  ils  donn  assent        (qu')  ils  fin  issent 

AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


{That)  I  {might)  breaJs, 
etc. 
(que)  je  romp  isse. 
(que)  tu  romp  isseS. 
(qu')  il  romp  it. 
(que)  nous  romp  issions. 
(que)  vous  romp  issiez. 
(qu')  ils  romp  issent 


154.  The  auxiliary  verbs  avoir,  *  to  have/  and  ^tre,  *  to  be^' 

are  conjugated  in  their  simple  tenses  as  follows : — 

Infinitive. 

Pres.  avoir,  to  have,  Pbes.  Stre,  to  be» 


132 


THE  VERB. 


[§154 


Participles. 

Pbes.  ayant,  having.  Pres.  ^tant,  being. 

Past,  et^,  been. 


Past,  eu,  had. 


Indicative. 


Present. 

Present. 

I  have,  am  having,  etc. 

/  am,  am  being,  etc. 

j'ai.     nous  avons. 

je  suis.    nous  sommes. 

tu  as.     vous  avez. 

tu  es.        vous  etes. 

il  a.       .  ils  ont. 

il  est.         ils  sont. 

Imperfect. 

Imperfect. 

/  had,  was  having,  etc. 

/  was,  was  being,  etc. 

J'avais.     nous  avions. 

j'etais.     nous  ^tions. 

tu  avais.     vous  aviez. 

tu  ^tais.     vous  etiez. 

il  avait.         ils  avaient. 

il  etait.        ils  etaient. 

Past  Definite. 

Past  Definite. 

/  had,  etc. 

/  was,  etc. 

j'eus.     nous  eftmes. 

je  fus.     nous  Mmes. 

tu  eus.     vous  efttes. 

tu  fus.     vous  fiites. 

il  eut.        ils  eurent. 

ilfutx       ilsfurent. 

Future. 

Future. 

/  shall  have,  etc. 

/  shall  be,  etc. 

j'aurai.     nous  aurons. 

je  serai,    nous  serons. 

tu  auras^     vous  aurez. 

tu  seras.    vous  serez. 

11  aura.          ils  auront. 

il  gera.          ils  seront. 

y^il  .Conditional. 
/    ■    /  should  have,  etc. 

Conditional. 
/  should  be,  etc. 

j'aurais^    nous  aurions. 

je  serais,     nous  serions. 

tu  aurais.     vous  auriez. 

'  tu  serais,     vous  seriez. 

il  aurait.        ils  auraient. 

il  serait.        ils  seraient 

Imperative. 

Present.                                          Present. 

Have,  etc. 

Be,  etc. 

ayons. 

soyons. 

aie.                           ayez. 

sois.                       soyez. 

(qu'ilait.)              (qu'ila  aient. ) 

(qu'il  soit. )         (qu'ils  soient. ) 

§155J 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


133 


Subjunctive 

Present. 
( That)  I  {may)  have,  etc. 
(que)  j'aie.       (que)  nous  ayons. 
(que)  tu  aies.     (que)  vous  ayez. 
(qu')  il  ait.  (qu')  ils  aient. 


Present. 
( That)  I  (may)  be,  etc. 
(que)  je  sois.      (que)  nous  soyons. 
(que)  tu  sois.      (que)  vous  soyez. 
(qu')  il  soit.  (qu')  ils  soient. 


Imperfect. 
( That)  I  {might)  have,  etc. 
(que)  j'eusse.    (que)  nous  eussions. 
(que)tueusses.  (que)  vous  eussiez. 
(qu'  lil  etit.  (qu' )  ils  eussent. 


Imperfect. 

( That)  I  {might)  be,  etc. 

(que)jefusse.     (que)  nous  fussions. 

(que)  tu  fusses,  (que)  vous  fussiez. 

(qu' )  il  f  iit.  (qu' )  ils  fussent. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 

155.  Formation.  Compound  tenses  are  formed  from  the 
past  participle  of  the  principal  verb  along  with  an  auxiliary 
verb  (usually  avoir,  sometimes  6tre),  see  §§  227-229. 


Avoir. 

Perfect. 
To  have  given. 
avoir  donn4. 

Perfect. 
Having  given. 
ayantdonn^ 

Past  iNOEriNrrE. 

J  have  given,  etc. 

j'ai  donu^ 

tu  as  donn^ 

etc. 

Pluperfect. 

/  Jiad  given,  etc, 

j'avais  donn^ 

etc 


Infinitive. 


Participle. 


Indicative. 


l&tre. 

Perfect. 

To  have  arrived. 

etre  arriv6(e)(s). 

Perfect. 
Having  arrived. 
^tant  arriv^(e)(8). 

Past  Indefinite. 

/  have  arrived,  etc 
je  suis  arriv^(e), 
tu  es  arriv^(e). 
etc. 

Pluperfect. 
/  had  arrived,  etc 
j'^tais  arriv^(e). 
etc. 


\ 


134 


THE  VERB. 


[§156 


Past  Anterior. 

/  had  given,  etc, 

j'eus  donn6. 

etc. 

Future  Anterior. 

/  shall  have  given,  etc. 

j'aurai  donn^. 

etc. 

Conditional  Anterior. 

/  should  have  given,  etc. ' 

j'aurais  donn6. 

etc. 


Past  Anterior. 

/  had  arrived,  etc. 

je  fus  arriv6(e), 

etc. 

Future  Anterior. 

7  shall  have  arrived ,  etc, 

je  serai  arrive(e). 

etc. 

Conditional  Anterior. 

1  should  have  arrived,  etc 

je  serais  arriv6(e). 

etc. 


Subjunctive. 

Perfect.  Perfect. 

{That)  J  {may)  have  given,  etc.       {That)  I  {may)  have  arrived,  etc 
(que)  j'aie  donn6.  que  je  sois  arrive(e). 

etc.  etc. 


Pluperfect. 
(That)  I  {might)  have  given,  etc. 
(que)  j'eusse  donn^ 
etc. 


Pluperfect. 

( That)  I  {might)  have  arrived,  etc 

(que)  je  fusse  arriv6(e). 


eta 


156. 


ORTHOGRAPHICAL   PECULIARITIES. 

Verbs  in  -cer  and  -ger. 


X 


I.  Verbs  in  -cer,  e.g.,  avancer  [avase],  'to  advance,'  require  the  [s] 
sound  of  c  throughout  their  conjugation,  and  hence  c  becomes  g  before 
a  or  o  of  an  ending  (§  5,  4),  but  not  elsewhere  : 


Pres.  Part. 

Pres.  Indie 

Imp/.  Indie. 

avan^ant. 

avance. 

avan^is. 

avances. 

avan^ais. 

avance. 

avangait. 

avangons. 

avancions. 

avancez. 

avanciez. 

avancent. 

avan^aient. 

Past  Def. 


Impf.  Sulj. 
avan^asse. 


avan^au 

avangas. 

avan^a.  avan^S,t. 

avangllmes.  avan^assions. 

avangates.  avangassiez, 

avanc^rent.  avan^ssent. 


§§157-158]      ORTHOGRAPHICAL  PECULIARITIES. 


135 


mangeasses. 

mangeat. 

mangeassions. 

mangeassiez. 

mangeassent. 


2.  Verbs  in  -ger,  c.gr.,  manger  [mase],  'to  eat,'  require  the  [3]  sound 
of  g  throughout  their  conjugation,  and  hence  g  becomes  ge  before  a  or 
o  (§  19,  2),  but  not  elsewhere  : 

Pres.  Part.     Pres.  Indie.  Impf.  Indie.  Past  Def.  Impf.  Subj. 

mangeant.       mange.  mangeais.  mangeai. 

manges.  mangeais.  mangeas. 

mange.  mangeait.  mangea. 

mangeons  mangions.  mange^mes. 

mangez.  mangiez.  mange^tes. 

mangent.  mangeaient.  mang6rent. 

157.  Verbs  in  -yen 

Verbs  in  -oyer  and  -uyer  change  y  to  i  whenever  it  comes  before  [a] 
in  conjugation,  but  not  elsewhere  ;  verbs  in  -ayer  and  -eyer  may  either 
retain  y  throughout,  or  change  it  to  i  before  [aj  : 

Pres.  Indie.  Fut.  Condi.  Pres.  Subj. 

nettoie,  etc.         nettoierai,  etc.  nettoierais,  etc.       nettoie,  etc. 

P^r'letc.    '       P^r^^'jetc.  P^r'^^^'letc.         P^rAetc 

paie,  j  paierai,  j  paierais,  j  paie,  j 

158.  Verbs  with  Stem-vowel  e  or  ^. 

Verbs  with  stem-vowel  e  require  the  [e]  sound  of  e  (§  12,  1)  whenever, 
in  conjugation,  the  next  syllable  contains  [a]  ;  so  also  verbs  with  the 
stem-vowel  6,  shown  orthographically  as  follows : — 

1.  By  changing  e  or  ^  to  fe  (§  12, 1),  e.g.,  mener,  *  to  lead,'  c^der,  *  to 
yield': 


res.  Indie. 

Pres.  Subj. 

Fut. 

Condi. 

m^ne. 

m^ne. 

mfeneraL 

minerals. 

m^nes. 

mfenes. 

m^neras. 

mfenerais. 

m^e. 

m^ne. 

m^nera. 

m^nerait. 

menons. 

menions. 

mfenerons. 

mfenerions. 

menez. 

meniez. 

mfenerez. 

m^neriez. 

m^nent. 

m^nent. 

meneront. 

m^neraient. 

But  c^der  with  the  stem- vowel  6  : 

chde,  etc.      c^e,  etc.     c6derai  [sedare],  etc.     c^derais  [sedare],  etc. 

Obs.:  In  men^-je?  [mane  13],  e  of  the  ending  is  not  mute,  and  hence 
the  stem-vowel  e  is  imchanged. 

Like  mener :  Verbs  with  stem- vowel  e  (for  exceptions  in  -eler  and 
-eter,  see  below). 


136 


THE  VERB. 


[§159 


Like  ceder:  Verbs  with  stem- vowel  ^  + consonant,  e.g.,  r^g^er, 
*  reign,'  etc. 

NoTK.— Verbs  like  cr^er,  create,  with  stem- vowel  followed  by  a  vowel,  are  regular: 
Je  cr^e,  etc. 

2.  Most  verbs  in  -eler,  -eter,  however,  indicate  the  [e]  sound  by 
doubling  1  or  t  (§  12,  1),  e.g.,  appder,  'to  call,'  jeter,  *  to  throw' : 


Pres.  Indie. 

Pres.  Subj. 

Put. 

Condr. 

appelle. 

appelle. 

appellerai. 

appellerais. 

appelles. 

appelles. 

appelleras. 

appellerais. 

appelle. 

appelle. 

appellera. 

appellerait. 

appelons. 

appelions. 

appellerons. 

appellerions. 

appelez. 

appeliez. 

appellerez. 

appelleriez. 

appellent. 

appellent. 

appelleront. 

appelleraient. 

So  also,  jeter : 

jette,  etc. 

jette,  etc. 

jetterai,  etc. 

jetterais,  etc. 

A  few  verbs  in  -eler,  -eter  take  the  grave  accent  precisely  like  mener, 
e.g.,  acheter,  '  to  buy ' : 

achate,  etc.  achate,  etc.  ach^terai,  etc.  ach^terais,  etc 

Exceptions  like  acheter : 

*6pou8seter,  dust. 
6tiqueter,  kibel. 
geler,  freeze. 


agneler,  lamb. 
becqueter,  peck. 
bourreler,  goad. 
d6manteler,  dismantle. 
^carteler,  quarter. 
*Fut.  ^poUBSeterai  according  to  the  '  Dictionnaire  de  TAcad^mie. 

Exceptions  like  appeler  or  acheter : 


harceler,  harass. 
marteler,  hammer. 


modeler,  model. 
peler,  peel. 
rapi^ceter,  piece. 
trompeter,  trumpeL 


botteler,  bale  (hay,  etc.). 
canneler,  groove. 


caqueter,  cackle. 
ciseler,  chisel. 


crocheter,  pick(&  lock). 


FORMATION   OF   TENSES. 


X 


159.  Principal  Parts.  By  the  following  rules,  the  various 
tenses  of  all  regular  verbs  and  of  most  irregular  verbs  may  be 
known  from  five  forms  of  the  verb,  called  principal  parts  or 
primary  tenses : — 

1.  The  Infinitive  gives  the  Puture  by  adding  -ai,  -as,  -a,  -ons,  -ez, 
•ont,  and  the    Conditional  by    adding  -ais,    -ais,    -ait,   -ions,   -iez. 


§§160-161]  IRREGULAR 'verbs  IN  -ER.  13t 

-aient — dropping  the  final  infinitive  -e  of  the  third  conjugation  for 
both  tenses. 

2.  The  Present  Participle  gives  the  Imperfect  Indicative  by  changing 
-ant  into  -ais,  -ais,  -ait,  -ions,  -iez,  -aient,  and  the  Present  Subjunctive 
by  changing  -ant  into  -e,  -es,  -e,  -ions,  -iez,  -ent 

3.  The  Past  Participle  gives  the  Compound  Tenses,  with  the  auxiliary 
avoir  (§227)  or  etre  (§228),  and  the  Passive,  with  the  auxiliary  etre 
(§239). 

4.  The  Present  Indicative  gives  the  Imperative  by  dropping  the 
pronoun  subject  of  the  second  singular  and  first  and  second  plural, 
the  -s  of  the  first  conjugation  second  singular  being  also  dropped, 
except  before  y  and  en  (cf.  §  370,  3,  obs.  3,  4). 

5.  The  Past  Definite  gives  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  by  changing  the 
final  letter  of  the  first  singular  (-i  or  -s)  into  -sse,  -sses,  -t,  -ssions, 
-ssiez,  -ssent,  and  putting  a  circumflex  accent  over  the  last  vowel  of 
the  third  singular. 

Obs.:  The  tenses,  except  the  future  and  conditional,  are  not  really  derived  from  the 
pnncipal  pcurts,  as  is  sometimes  said  in  grammars ;  the  method  is  merely  an  aid  to 
memory. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  -Cr. 

i6o.  AUer, 'togo.* 

1.  Infinitive,  aller ;  fut.  *irai,  iras,  ira,  etc. ;  condl.  irais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  allant ;  imp/,  indie,  allais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  aille  [ai  j], 
ailles,  aille,  alliens,  alliez,  aillent. 

3.  Past  Part.  all6  ;  past  indef.  je  suis^all^,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  vais  [ve],  vas,  va,  allons,  allez,  vont;  impve.  va 
(vas-y),  allons,  allez. 

6.  Past  Def.  allai,  alias,  alia,  allames,  alUtes,  all6rent ;  impf.  subj. 
allasse,  allasses,  all3,t,  allassions,  allassiez,  allassent. 

*  The  stem  of  the  future  is  from  the  Latin  infinitive  ire.  \X 

Like  aller : 

s'en  aller,  go  away. 

i6i.  Envoyer,  *  to  send.* 

1.  Infinitive,  envoyer ;  fut.  enverrai,  etc. ;  condl.  enverrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  envoyant;  impf.  indie,  envoyais,  envoyais,  envoyait, 
envoyjons  [avwaijo],  envoyiez,  envoyaient ;  pres.  subj.  envoie,  envoies, 
envoie,  envoyiona  [avwaijo],  envoyiez,  envoient. 


138  THE  VERB.  [§§162-164 

3.  Past  Part,  envoy^  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  envoy^,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  envoie,  envoies,  envoie,  envoyons,  envoyez,  envoient; 
impve.  envoie,  envoyons,  envoyez. 

5.  Past  Def.  envoyai,  envoyas,  envoya,  envoyames,  envoyates, 
envoy^rent ;  vmpf.  subj.  envoyasse,  envoyasses,  envoy§,t,  envoyassions, 
envoyassiez,  envoyassent.  * 

Like  envoyer : 

renvoyer,  send  away,  dismiss.  ^ 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  -if. 

162.  Acqudrir,  '  to  acquire.' 

1.  Infinitive,  acqu^rir ;  fut.  acquerrai,  acquerras,  etc.  ;  condl.  acquer- 
rais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Pari,  acqu^rant ;  imp/,  indie,  acqu^rais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj. 
acqui^re,  acqui^res,  acqui^re,  acqu^rions,  acqu^riez,  acqui^rent. 

3.  Pa^t  Part,  acquis  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  acquis,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  acquiers,  acquiers,  acquiert,  acqu^rons,  acqU^rez, 
acqui^rent ;  impve.  acquiers,  acqu^rons,  acqu^rez. 

5.  Past  Def.  acquis,  acquis,  acquit,  acquimes,  acquites,  acquirent; 
imp/,  subj.  acquisse,  acquisses,  acquit,  acquissions,  acquissiez,  acquissent. 

Like  acquerir : 

conqu6rir,  conquer.  *querir  or  qu^rir,  seek.  requ6rir,  require,  claim. 

B'enqu^rir,  inquire.  reconqu6rir,  reconquer. 

*  Has  only  the  infinitive.  %y 

163.  Bdnir,  *  to  bless.' 

Is  regular,  but  has  also  an  irregular  past  participle  b^nit,  used  only 
as  adjective : 

De  I'eau  b^nite ;  du  pain  b^nit        Holy  water ;  consecrated  bread. 

164.  Courir,  *  to  run.' 

1.  Infinitive,  courir ;  fut.  courrai,  courras,  etc. ;  condl  courrais,  etc 

2.  Pres.  Part,  courant ;  imp/,  indie,  courais,  etc. ;  pres,  subj.  coure, 
coures,  coure,  courions,  couriez,  courent. 

3.  Past  Part,  couru  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  couru,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  cours,  cours,  court,  courons,  coorez,  courent ;  impve, 
oours,  courons,  courez. 


§§165-166]  IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN   -IR.  139 

6.  Past  Def.  counis,  counis,  courut,  courumes,  couriites,  couru- 
rent;  impf.  subj,  courusse,  courusses,  courut,  courussions,  courussiez, 
courussent. 

Like  courir  are  its  compounds  : 
accourir,  run  up,  hasten.      discourir,  discourse.  recourir,  run  again,  apply. 

concourir,  co-operate,  con-     encourir,  incur.  seoourir,  succor,  help. 

eur,  compete.  parcourir,  run  over. 

Note. — Couire,  chase  (a  hunting  term),  sometimes  replaces  courlr  in  the  infinitive* 

l6S  Cueillir,   'to  gather,' 'pick.' 

1.  Infinitive,  cueillir  ;  fut.  cueillerai,  etc.  ;  condl.  cueillerais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  cueillant ;  impf.  indie,  cueillais,  etc. ;  prea.  subj. 
cueille,  cueilles,  cueille,  cueillions,  cueilliez,  cueillent. 

3.  Past  Part,  cueilli ;  past  indef.  j'ai  cueilli,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  cueille,  cueilles,  cueille,  cueillons,  cueillez,  cueillent ; 
impve.  cueille,  cueillons,  cueillez. 

5.  Past  Def.  cueillis,  cueillis,  cueillit,  cueilUmes,  cueillltes,  cueilli- 
rent ;  impf.  subj.  cueillisse,  cueillisses,  cueillit,  cueillissions,  cueillissiez, 
cueillissent. 

Obi. :  The  present  indicative,  future,  and  conditional  are  like  those  of  doxmor. 

Like  cueillir : 
aooueillir,  welcome.  ^assaillir,  assail.  tressaillir,  start. 

recueillir,  gather,  collect.  f  saillir,  jut  out. 

*  Regular  in  future  and  conditional :  assailllrai,  etc. 

t  Saillir,  gush  out,  rush  forth,  is  regular,  like  flnir. 

i66.  Dormir,  *to  sleep.' 

1.  Infinitive,  dormir;  fut.  dormirai,  etc. ;  condl.  dormirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  dormant ;  impf.  indie,  dormais,  etc. ;  pres.  sabij. 
dorme,  dormes,  dorme,  dormions,  dormiez,  dorment. 

3.  Past  Part,  dormi ;  past  indef.  j'ai  dormi,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  dors,  dors,  dort,  dormons,  dormez,  dorment ; 
impve.  dors,  dormons,  dormez. 

5.  Past  Def.  dormis,  dormis,  dormit,  dormimes,  dormltes,  dormirent ; 
impf.  subj.  dormisse,  dormisses,  dormit,  dormissions,  dormissiez, 
dormissent. 

Like  dormir : 

endonnir,  put  to  sleep.  se  rendormir,  go  to  sleep  mentir,  lie. 

aTendormir,  fall  asleep.  again.  d^mentir,  contradict,  belie, 

redormir,  sleep  again.  bouillir,  boil.  partir,  set  owt." 

rendormir,  put  to  sleep  ^bouillir,  boil  away.  d^partir,  distribute. 

rebouillir,  boil  again.  se  d^partir,  desist. 


140  THE  VERB.  [§§167-169 

repartir,  set  out  again,  consentir,  consent.  se  servir,  make  use. 

reply.  preasentir,  forebode.  desservir,  clear  the  table. 

Be  repentir,  repent.  ressentir,  resent.  sortir,  go  out. 

sentir,  feel.  servir,  serve.  ressortir,  go  out  again. 

NoTB.— Asservir,  enslave,  assortir,  sort,  match,  ressortir,  depend  (on,  k), 
repartir,  distribute,  are  like  fiiiir. 

Observe  the  Present  Indicative  of  the  following  types,  which  are 
represented  in  the  above  list : 

bouillir :  bous,  bous,  bout,  bouillons,  bouillez,  bouillent. 

mentir :  mens,  mens,  ment,  mentons,  mentez,  mentent. 

partir :  pars,  pars,  part,  partons,  partez,  partent. 

se  repentir :  repens,  repens,  repent,  repentons,  repentez,  repentent. 

sentir :  sens,  sens,  sent,  sentons,  sentez,  sentent. 

servir :  sers,  sers,  sert,  servons,  servez,  servent. 

sortir :  sors,  sors,  sort,  sortons,  sortez,  sortent. 

167.  Faillir,  'to  fail.' 

1.  Infinitive,  faillir  ;  fut.  faudrai,  faudras,  etc. ;  condl.  faudrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  faillant ;  impf.  indie,  faillais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  faille, 
failles,  faille,  faillions,  failliez,  faillent. 

3.  Past  Part,  failli ;  past  indef.  j'ai  failli,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,   faux,  faux,  faut,   faillons,   faillez,   faillent ;  impve. 

y  >  • 

5.  Past  Def.  faillis,  faillis,  faillit,  faillimes,  faillites,  faillirent ;  imp/, 
subj.  faillisse,  faillisses,  faillit,  faillissions,  faillissiez,  faillissent. 

Like  faillir : 

*d6faillir,  faint,  fail. 
*  Pres.  indie,  usually  d6faus,  d^faus,  d^faut. 
Note.— Faillir,  fail  in  business,  is  usually  like  flnlr. 

168.  F^rir,  'to  strike.' 

Used  only  in  *Sans  coup  ferir,'  '  Without  striking  a  blow,'  and  in  the 
past  part,  feru,  wounded  (a  veterinary  term). 

169.  Fleurir,   '  to  flourish,'  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  florissant ;  impf.  indie,  florissais,  etc. ,  when  used  of  per- 
sons or  a  collection  of  persons,  or  fleurissais,  etc. ,  when  used  of  things ; 
otherwise  like  finir. 

NOTX.— Fleurir,  blossom,  bloom  (in  a  literal  sense)  is  like  flnir. 


§§170-174]  IRREGULAR  VERBS   IN   -IR.  141 

170.  Fuir,  Hoflee,'  'fly/ 

1.  Infinitive,  fuir ;  fut.  fuirai,  etc. ;  concU.  fuirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  fuyant ;  impf.  indie,  f uyais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  f uie,  fuieSy 
fuie,  fuyions,  fuyiez,  fuient. 

3.  Past  Part,  fui ;  past  indef.  j'ai  fui,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  fuis,  fuis,  fuit,  fuyons,  fuyez,  fuient ;    impve.  f uis, 
fuyons,  fuyez. 

5.  Past  Dtf.  fuis,  fuis,  fuit,  fuimes,  fuites,  fuirent ;  impf.  subj.  fuisse, 
fuisses,  fuit,  fuissions,  fuissiez,  fuissent. 

Lake  fuir : 

s'enfuir,  flee,  escape. 

171.  0        G^sir,  *  to  lie,'  '  lie  buried.' 

1.  Infinitive,  g^^sir ;  fut. ;  condl. . 

2.  Pres.  Part,  gisant ;  imp/,  indie,  gisais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj. , 

3.  Past  Part. , 

4.  Pres.  Indie. ,  ,  g^t,  gisons,  gisez,  gisent ;  impve.  , 

*  • 

5.  Past  Def. ;  impf.  subj. . 

Note.— Its  most  frequent  use  is  in  epitaphs:  'Ci-glt,'  'Here  lies,'  'Ci-glBOnV 
*  Here  lie.' 

172.  Hair,  'to  nate.' 

1.  Infinitive,  hair  ;  fut.  ha'irai,  etc. ;  eondl.  hairais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.   Part,    hsussant ;    impf.   indie,   haissais,   etc. ;    pres.   subj, 
haiisse,  haisses,  haisse,  haissions,  haiissiez,  haissent. 

3.  Past  Part,  hai";  past  indef.  j'ai  hai,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  hais,  hais,  hait,   ha'issons,   ha'issez,  haissent;  impve. 
hais,  haissons,  haissez. 

5.  Pa^t  Def.  hais,  hais,   hait,   haimes,   haites,  hairent;  impf.  subj. 
haisse,  haisses,  hait,  haissions,  haissiez,  haissent. 

Obs. :  Hair  loses  its  diaeresis  in  the  present  indicative  and  imperative  singular,  and 
tekes  no  circumflex  accent ;  otherwise  like  finlr. 

173.  Issir,  '  to  spring  (from,  de),'  etc. 
Used  only  in  the  past  part,  issu ;  past  indef.  je  suis  issu,  etc. 

174.  Mourir,  'to  die.' 

1.  Infinitive,  mourir;  fvi.  mourrai,  mourras,  etc.;  condl.  mourraiSf 
etc. 


142  THE  VERB.  [§§175-177 

2.  Pres.  Part,  mourant ;  impf.  indie,  mourais,  etc. ;  prea.  suij.  meure, 
meures,  meure,  mourions,  mouriez,  meurent. 

3.  Past  Part,  mort ;  past  indef.  je  suis  mort,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  meurs,  meurs,  meurt,  mourons,  mourez,  meurent; 
impve.  meurs,  mourons,  mourez. 

5.  Past  Def.  mourus,  mourus,  mourut,  mourtimes,  mourlites,  mou- 
rurent ;  impf.  subj.  mourusse,  mourusses,  mourdt,  mourussions, 
mounissiez,  mourussent. 

Obs. :  The  stem-vowel  becomes  eu  wherever  it  bears  the  stress. 

Like  mourir : 

ee  mourir,  be  dying  (used  only  in  infin.,  pre&  indie,  impf.  indio.), 

175.  Ouir,  'to  hear.'  , 

Is  hardly  used  beyond  the  infinitive  and  past  participle  :  *  J'ai  Oltf 
dire.'     *  I  have  heard  said,'  etc. 

176.  Ouvrir,  *  to  open.* 

1.  Infinitive,  ouvrir ;  fut.  ouvrirai,  etc. ;  eondl.  ouvrirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  ouvrant ;  impf.  indie,  ouvrais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  ouvre, 
ouvres,  ouvre,  ouvrions,  ouvriez,  ouvrent. 

3.  Pa^t  Part,  ouvert ;  past  indef.  j'ai  ouvert,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  ouvre,  ouvres,  ouvre,  ouvrons,  ouvrez,  ouvrent; 
impve.  ouvre,  ouvrons,  ouvrez. 

5.  Past  Def.  ouvris,  ouvris,  ouvrit,  ouvrimes,  ouvrites,  ouvrirent; 
impf.  subj.  ouvrisse,  ouvrisses,  ouvrit,  ouvrissions,  ouvrissiez,  ouvrissent. 

Oh8.:  The  present  indicative  is  like  that  of  doxmer. 

Like  ouvrir : 
entr'ouvrir,  open  slightly.  d^couvrir,  discover.  offrir,  offer. 

rouvrir,  open  again.  recouvrir,  cover  again.  souffrir,  suffer, 

couvrir,  cover. 

177.  Tenir,  Ho  hold/ 

1.  Infinitive,  tenir ;  fut.  tiendrai,  tiendras,  etc. ;  eondl.  tiendrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  tenant ;  impf.  indie,  tenais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  tienne, 
tiennes,  tienne,  tenions,  teniez,  tiennent. 

3.  Past  Part,  tenu  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  tenu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  tiens,  tiens,  tient,  tenons,  tenez,  tiennent;  impve. 
tiens,  tenons,  tenez. 


§§178-179]  IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN   -IR.  143 

5.  Past  Def.  tins,  tins,  tint,  tinmes  [teim],  tintes  [t?:t],  tinrent 
[tSir] ;  imp/,  aubj,  tinsse,  [teis],  tinsses,  tint,  tinssions,  tinssiez, 
tinssent. 

Obs.:  The  stem-vowel  becomes  ie  wherever  it  bears  the  stress. 

Like  tenir  are  its  compounds  : 

s'abstenir,  abstain.  ddtenir,  detain.  obtenir,  obtain. 

appartenir,  belong,  entretenir,  entertain.  retenir,  retain. 

coDtenir,  contain.  mamtenir,  maintain.  soutenir,  sustain. 

178.  Venir,  *  to  come.* 

1.  Infinitive,  venir ;  fut.  viendrai,  viendras,  etc. ;  condl.  viendraia,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  venant ;  impf.  indie,  venais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  vienne, 
viennes,  vienne,  venions,  veniez,  viennent. 

3.  Pa^t  Part,  venu;  past  indef.  je  §uis  venu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  viens,  viens,  vient,  venons,  venez,  viennent;  impve. 
viens,  venons,  venez. 

5.  Past  Def.  vins,  vins,  vint,  vinmes  [v?:ni],  vtntea  [veit],  vinrent 
[vSir];  impf.  subj.  vinsse  [vSis],  vinsses,  vint,  vinssions,  vinssiez, 
vinssent. 

Obs.:  1.  The  stem*vowel  becomes  ie  wherever  it  bears  the  stress.  2.  Venir  is 
precisely  like  tenir  in  its  irregularities,  but  owing  to  its  difficulty  it  is  given  in  full. 

Like  venir  are  its  compounds  : 

avenir,  happen  (Sag.  only),  disconvenir,  be  discordant.  redevenir,  become  a^gain. 

advenir,  happen  (3  sg.  only),  intervenir,  intervene.  se  souvenir,  recollect. 

oonvenir,  <igree,  suit.  parvenir,  attain.  subvenir,  aid. 

oontrevenir,  violate.  pr6venir,  prevent.  survenir,  occur. 

circonvenir,  circumvent,     provenir,  proceed  (from,  de).  se  ressouvenir,  recollect. 
devenir,  become.                  revenir,  come  back. 

179.  V6tir,  *  to  clothe.' 

1.  Infinitive,  vetir  ;  fiU.  vStirai,  etc. ;  cendl.  vStirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part.  vStant ;  imp/,  indie,  vetais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  v^te,  vStcs, 
v6te,  vetions,  vetiez,  vetent. 

3.  Past  Part,  vfetu  ;  past  inde/  j'ai  vetu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  vets,  vets,  vet,  v^tons,  vdtez,  vetent;  impve.  vSts, 
vfitons,  vetez. 

5.  Past  De/.  vetis,  v^tis,  vStit,  vStimes,  vetltea,  vgtirent ;  imp/,  subj, 
vetisse,  vetisses,  v6ttt,  vetissions,  v^tissiez,  v^tissent. 

Like  vfetir :        x 
d6v6tir,  divest.  rev6tir,  clothe,  invest.        se  rev6tir,  put  on  clothing, 

M  d^vdtir,  take  of  clothing. 


144  THE  VERB.  [§§180-183 

IRREGULAB  VERBS  IN  -re. 

l8o.  Battre,  'to  beat.' 

Loses  one  t  in  the  present  indicative  singular :  Bats,    bats,  bat ; 
otherwise  like  rompre. 

Like  battre  : 

abattre,  fell.  d^battre,  debate.  rabattre,  heat  down. 

combattre,  fight,  oppose.        se  d6battre,  struggle. 

i8i.  Boire,  'to  drink.' 

1.  Infinitive,  boire ;  fut.  boirai,  etc.  ;  condl.  boirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  buvant ;  impf.  indie. Jjuvais,  etc.;  pres.  subj.  boive, 
boives,  boive,  buvions,  buviez,  boivent. 

3.  Past  Part,  bu ;  past  indef.  j'ai  bu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  bois,  bois,  boit,  buvons,  buvez,  boivent ;  impve.  bois, 
buvons,  buvez. 

5.  Past  Dtf.  bus,  bus,  but,  btlmes,  bites,  burent ;  impf.  suJbj.  busse, 
busses,  but,  bussions,  bussiez,  bussent. 

Like  boire : 

emboire,  coat  (in  painting).  imboire,  tm&t&0,  imimt. 

*8'emboire,  become  dtUl.  reboire,  drink  again. 

*used  in  third  person. 

182.  Bruire,  *to  murmur,'  'rustle.' 

1.  Infinitive,  bruire  ;  fut.  bruirai,  etc.  ;  condl.  bruirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  bruyant ;  impf.  indie,  bruyais,  etc.  ;  pres.  subj. , 

3.  Past  Part,  bruit ;  past  indef.  j'ai  bruit,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  bruis,  bruis,  bruit, , , ;  impve. . 

5.  Past  Def. ;  impf.  subj. . 

Notes.— 1.  The  pres.  part,  bruyant,  noisy,  is  used  as  adjective  only.    2.  The  forms 
brolssant,  brulssals,  etc.,  bruisse,  etc.,  are  also  in  use. 

183.  Clore,   'to  close,' 'enclose.' 

1.  Infinitive,  clore ;  fut.  clorai,  etc. ;  condl.  clorais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part. ;  impf.  indie. ;  pres.  subj.  close,  cloBes,  close, 

closions,  closiez,  closent. 

3.  Past  Part,  clos  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  clos,  etc.  ^ 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  clos,  clos,  cl6t, , , ;  impve. » 

6.  Past  Def. ;  impf.  subj. , 


§§184-185]  IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  -RK  145 

Like  clore : 

d^clore,  throw  open.  t  enclore,  inclose. 

*  6clore,  hatch,  open  (of  flowersX  tt  forclore,  foreclose,  debar. 

*  Has  also  pres.  plur.  ^closons,  etc. ;  impf.  indie,  ^closais,  eto.    Its  future  and 

conditional  are  Sclorai,  etc. 

t  Has  also  pres.  plur.  enclosons,  etc. ;  pres.  part,  enclosant ;  imp/,  indie. 
enclosais,  etc. 

tt  Hardly  used  beyond  the  infinitive,  past  participle,  and  compound  tenses. 

184.  Conclure,  *  to  conclude.' 

1.  Infinitive,  conclure ;  fut.  conclurai,  etc. ;  condl.  conclurais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  concluant ;  impf.  indie,  concluais,  etc. ;  prea.  aulj. 
conclue,  conclues,  conclue,  concluions,  concluiez,  concluent. 

3.  Past  Part,  conclu  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  conclu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  conclus,  conclus,  conclut,  concluons,  concluez,  con- 
cluent ;  impve.  conclus,  concluons,  concluez, 

5.  Past  Def.  conclus,  conclus,  conclut,  concliimes,  concMtes,  conclu- 
rent ;  impf.  suhj.  conclusse,  conclusses,  conclut,  conclussions,  conclussiez, 
conclussent. 

Like  conclure : 
exclnre,  exclude.  *inolure,  iticZom.  t  reclure,  sAut  up. 

*Past  Part.  inclOB. 
t  Used  only  in  infin.,  past  part,  and  oomp.  tenses.    Pott  part.  reolOS. 

185.  Conduire,  *  to  conduct,'  etc. 

1.  Infinitive,  conduire ;  fut.  conduirai,  etc. ;  condl.  conduirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  conduisant ;  impf.  indie,  conduisais,  etc. ;  pres.  suij. 
conduise,  conduises,  conduise,  conduisions,  conduisiez,  conduisent. 

3.  Past  Part,  conduit ;  past  indef.  j'ai  conduit,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  conduis,  conduis,  conduit,  conduisons,  conduisez, 
conduisent;  impve.  conduis,  conduisons,  conduisez. 

5.  Past  Def.  conduisis,  conduisis,  conduisit,  conduisimes,  condui- 
sites,  conduisirent ;  impf.  suhj.  conduisisse,  conduisisses,  conduisit, 
conduisissions,  conduisissiez,  conduisissent. 

Like  conduire : 

se  conduire,  conduct  ontfs  ddduire,  deduct.  r6duire,  reduce. 

self.  enduire,  coat  (with  plaster),      reproduire,  reproduce, 

6conduire,  show  out,  dismiss,  induire,  induce.  sMuire,  seduce. 

reoonduire,  lead  back.  introduire,  introdu4:e.  traduire,  translate. 

•duire,  please,  suit.  produire,  produce.  oonstruire,  construct, 
10 


146  THE  VERB.  ^  [§§186-188 

dteonstruire,  take  apart.      d6truire,  destroy.  fluire,  shine. 

instruire,  instruct.  cuire,  cook.  t  reluire,  glisten. 

reconstruire,  reconstruct.       recuire,  cook  again.  %  nuire,  injure. 

*  Only  in  third  sing,  and  plu.  pres.  indie,  and  third  sing,  impf .  indie.    Obsolescent, 
t  Past  part,  lui  and  relui  respectively.    No  past  def .  or  impf.  subj. 

X  Past  part.  nuL 

i86.  Etre, 'tobe.' 

See  §  154  for  the  full  conjugation. 

187.  Confire,   '  to  preserve,'  etc. 

1.  Infinitive,  confire  ;  fut.  confirai,  etc. ;  condl.  confirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  confisant ;  imp/,  indie,  confisais,  etc.  ;  prea.  suij, 
confise,  confises,  confise,  confisions,  confisiez,  confisent. 

3.  Past  Part,  confit ;  past  indef.  j'ai  confit,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  confis,  confis,  confit,  confisons,  confisez,  confisent  j 
impve.  confis,  confisons,  confisez. 

5.  Past  Def.  confis,  confis,  confit,  confimes,  confttes,  confirent ;  imp/, 
subj.  confisse,  confisses,  confit,  confissions,  confissiez,  confissent. 

Like  confire : 
d^confire,  discomfit.       circoncire  (p.p.  -ClS),  circumcise.       suffire  (p. p.  suffl),  suffice. 

188.  Connaitre,  'to  know,'  etc. 

1.  Infinitive,  connaitre  ;  /ut.  connaitrai,  etc.  ;  condl.  connaitrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  connaissant ;  imp/,  indie,  connaissais,  etc.  ;  pres. 
subj.  connaisse,  connaisses,  connaisse,  connaissions,  connaissiez,  con- 
aaissent. 

3.  Past  Part,  connu  ;  j'ai  connu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  connais,  connais,  connait,  connaissons,  connaissez, 
connaissent ;  impve.  connais,  connaissons,  connaissez. 

6.  Past  Def.  connus,  connus,  connut,  connumes,  conniiteft,  connu- 
rent ;  imp/,  subj.  connusse,  connusses,  connut,  connussions,  connussiez, 
connussent. 

Obs. :  Stem-vowel  i  has  circumflex  (i)  everywhere  before  t. 

Like  connaitre  : 
m6connaitre,  not  to  know,      comparaltre,  appear  (law       *paltre,  graze.  ^ 

reconnaitre,  recognize.  term).  repaitre,  feed,  feast. 

p&rsAtre,  appear.  disparaitre,  dwappeor.  se  repaitre, /e<d, /«Mt. 

apparaitre,  appear.  reparaitre,  reappear. 

*  Lacks  the  past  part.,  past  def.,  and  impf.  subj. 

NoTK.— Apparoir  (also  used  in  third  singular  il  appeit,  'it  appears')  and  COm- 
paroir,  are  infinitive  archaic  variants  of  apparaitre  and  comparaltro. 


§§189-191]  IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN   -RE. 


147 


189. 


Coudre,  *to  sew.' 


1.  Infinitive,  coudre ;  fut.  coudrai,  etc.  ;  condl.  coudrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  cousant ;  imp/,  indie,  cousais,  etc.  ;  pres.  subj.  couse, 
couses,  couse,  cousions,  cousiez,  cousent. 

3.  Past  Part,  cousu ;  past  indef.  j'ai  cousu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  couds,  couds,  coud,  cousons,  cousez,  cousent;  impve. 
couds,  cousons,  cousez. 

5.  Past  Def.  cousis,  cousis,  cousit,  cousimes,  cousites,  cousirent ; 
vmpf.  subj.  cousisse,  cousisses,  cousit,  cousissions,  cousissiez,  cousissent- 

Like  coudre : 

dteoudre,  rip,  unsew.  recoudre,  sew  again. 

190.  Craindre,  *to  fear.' 

1.  Infinitipe.  craindre ;  fut.  craindrai,  etc.  ;  condl.  craindrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  craignant ;  impf.  indie,  craignais,  etc.  ;  pres.  subj. 
craigne,  craignes,  craigne,  craignions,  craigniez,  craignent. 

3.  Past  Part,  craint ;  past  indef.  j'ai  craint,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  crains,  crains,  craint,  craignons,  craignez,  craignent ; 
impve.  crains,  craignons,  craignez. 

5.  Past  Def.  craignis,  craignis,  craignit,  craignimes,  craignites, 
craignirent ;  impf  subj.  craignisse,  craignisses,  craignit,  craignissions, 
craignissiez,  craignissent. 

Like  craindre : 


in  -aindre : 
contraindre,  constrain. 
plaindre,  pity. 
se  plaindre,  complain. 
in  -eindre : 
aatreindre,  abstract. 
atteindre,  attain. 


enfreindre,  infringe. 
^preindre,  squeeze  out. 
6teindre,  extinguish. 
^treindre,  draw  tight. 
feindre,  feign. 
geindre,  groan. 
peindre,  paint. 


ceindre,  enclose,  gird,  gird    ratteindre,  overtake. 


on  (a  sword,  etc.). 
d^peindre,  depict. 
empreindre,  imprint. 
enceindre,  gird. 


repeindre,  paint  again. 
restreindre,  restrain. 
teindre,  dye. 
d6teindre,  fade. 


reteindre,  dye  a^ain. 
in  -olndre : 
joindre,  join. 
adjolndre,  adjoin. 
conjoindre,  conjoin. 
d^joindre,  disjoin. 
disjoindre,  disjoin. 
enjoindre,  enjoin, 
rejoindre,  rejoin. 
olndre,  anoint. 
*poindre,  dawn. 


^Hardly  used  beyond  the  infinitive  and  future. 


Croire,  *  to  believe.' 


191. 

1.  Infinitive,  croire ;  fut.  croirai,  etc. ;  condl.  croirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  croyant;  impf.  indlc.  croyais,  etc.;  pres.  , 
croies,  croie,  croyions,  croyiez,  croient. 


croie. 


148  THE  VERB.  [§§192-193 

3.  Past  Part,  cru  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  cru,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  crois,  crois,  croit,  croyons,  croyez,  croient ;    impve. 
crois,  croyons,  croyez. 

5.  Past  Def.  crus,  crus,  crut,  crumes,  crutes,  crurent;    impf,  sahj. 
crusse,  crusses,  crut,  crussions,  crussiez,  crussent. 

Like  croire : 

*accroire,  believe  (an  untruth).  td6croire,  disbelieve. 

*  Found  only  in  faire  accroire,  to  cause  to  believe  (an  untruth). 

t  Used  only  in  '  je  ne  crois  ni  ne  d^crois,'  '  I  neither  believe  nor  disbelieve.' 

192.  Croitre,  *  to  grow.' 

1.  Infinitive,  croitre;  fiit.  croitrai,  etc.;  condl.  crottrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.    Part,   croissant ;    imp/,    indie,    croissais,   etc. ;    pres.   subj. 
croisse,  croisses,  croisse,  croissions,  croissiez,  croissent. 

3.  Past  Part,  cru  (f.  crue) ;  past  indef.  j'ai  cru,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  crois,  crois,  croit,  croissons,  croissez,  croissent;  impve, 
crois,  croissons,  croissez.  < 

5.  Past  Def.  criis,  crfts,  crut,  cr<imes,  crfttes,  criirent;    impf.  subj. 

criisse,  crusses,  crtit,  crussions,  crtissiez,  crussent. 

Obs.:   The  circumflex  accent  distinguishes  otherwise  like  forms  of  croltre  and 
crOire,  but  is  optional  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive  (except  the  third  singular). 

Like  croitre : 
*accroitre,  increase.  *  recroitre,  grow  again.  *8urcroitre,  overgrow. 

d^croitre,  decrease. 

*No  circumflex  in  past  participle,  past  definite  third  sing^ular  and  third  pluraL 

193.  Dire,  *  to  say,'  '  tell.' 

L  Infinitive,  dire  ;  fut.  dirai,  etc. ;  cotidl.  dirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  disant ;  imp/,  indie,  disais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  dise,  discs, 
dise,  disions,  disiez,  disent. 

3.  Past  Part,  dit ;  past  indef.  j'ai  dit,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  dis,  dis,  dit,  disons,  dites,  disent ;  impve.  dis,  disons, 
dites. 

5.  Past  Def.  dis,  dis,  dit,  dimes,  dites,  dirent;  impf.  subj.  disse, 
disses,  dit,  dissions,  dissiez,  dissent. 

Like  dire : 
*contredire,  contradict.  *interdire,  interdict.  *pr4dire,  predict. 

*d6dire,  retract,  deny.  *m6dire  (de),  slander.  redire,  say  again. 

*  The  2d  plur.  pres.  indie,  and  impve.  is :  Contredlsez,  d^dlsez,  interdlsez,   etc. 
Note. — ^Maudlre  is  like  dire  only  in  infinitive,  past  participle  (maudit),   future 

and  conditional ;  otherwise  like  fintr. 


§§194-196]  IRREGULAR  VERBS   IN  -RE.  149 

194.  6crire,  *  to  write.' 

1.  Infinitive,  ^crire;  fut.  ^crirai,  etc.,  condl.  ^crirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  ^crivant;  impf.  indie,  ecrivais,  etc.,  pres.  subj.  derive, 
derives,  derive,  ^crivions,  ^criviez,  ^crivent. 

3.  Past  Part,  ecrit ;  past  indef.  j'ai  ^crit,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  ^cris,  ^cris,  ecrit,  ^crivons,  ^crivez,  ^crivent;  impve. 
^cris,  ^crivons,  ^crivez. 

5.  Past  Def.  ^crivis,  ^crivis,  ^crivit,  ^crivtmes,  ^crivltes,  ^crivi- 
rent ;  impf.  subj.  ^crivisse,  ^crivisses,  ecrivit,  ^crivissions,  ^crivissiez, 
^crivissent. 

Like  ^crire  are  all  verbs  in  -(s)crire : 

drconsorire,  circumscribe,     prescrire,  prescribe.  souscrire,  mbterihe. 

d6crire,  describe.  proscrire,  ■proscribe.  transcrire,  transcribe. 

inscrire,  inscribe.  rterire,  retorite. 

19s  Faire,  *to  do,'  *make.' 

1.  Infinitive,  faire ;  fut.  feral  [fere],  etc. ;  condl.  ferais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  faisant  [fezfi];  impf.  indie,  faisais  [fazs],  etc.;  prea, 
subj.  fasse,  fasses,  fasse,  fassions,  fassiez,  fassent. 

3.  Past  Part,  fait ;  past  indef.  j'ai  fait,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  fais,  fais,  fait,  faisons  [f9z5],  faites,  font ;  impiii.  fais, 
faisons,  faites. 

5.  Past  Def.  fis,  fis,  fit,  f Imes,  fltes,  firent ;  impf.  subj.  fisse,  fisses, 
fit,  fissions,  fissiez,  fissent. 

Like  faire : 

contrefaire,  imitate.  mdfaire,  harm.  refaire,  do  again. 

ddfaire,  undo.  parfaire,  complete.  satisfaire,  satisfy. 

forfaire,  forfeit.  red^faire,  undo  again.  siu^aire,  overcharge. 

*inalfaire,  do  ill. 
♦Used  in  infinitive  only. 

196.  Frire,  *  to  fry'  (intr.). 

1.  Infinitive,  frire  ;/tt<.  frirai,  etc.;  condl.  frirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part. ;  ivnpf.  indie.  ;  pres.  subj. , 

3.  Pa^t  Part,  frit ;  past  indef.  j'ai  frit,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  fris,  fris,  frit, , , ;  impve.  fris, , . 

5.  Past  Def. ;  impf.  subj, , 


150  THE  VERB.  [§§197-199 

197.  Lire,  *to  read.' 

1.  Infinitive,  lire  ;  fut  lirai,  etc. ;  condl.  lirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  lisant ;  impf.  indie,  lisais,  etc.  j  prea.  sulj.  lise,  Uses, 
lise,  lisions,  lisiez,  lisent. 

3.  Past  Part,  lu  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  lu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  lis,  lis,  lit,  lisons,  lisez,  lisent ;  impve.  lis,  lisons,  lisez. 

5.  Past  Def.  lus,  lus,  lut,  Iftmes,  Itites,  lurent;  imp/,  aubj.  lusse, 
lusses,  Mt,  lussions,  lussiez,  lussent. 

Like  lire : 
^lire,  elect.  r661ire,  re-elect.  relire,  read  again. 

198.  Mettre,  *  to  place,' '  put.' 

Infinitive,  mettre ;  fut.  mettrai,  etc. ;  condl.  mettrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  mettant ;  impf.  indie,  mettais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  matte, 
mettes,  mette,  mettions,  mettiez,  mettent. 

3.  Past  Part,  mis ;  past  indef.  j'ai  mis,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  mets,  mets,  met,  mettons,  mettez,  mettent;  impve, 
mets,  mettons,  mettez. 

6.  Pa^t  Def.  mis,  mis,  mit,  mimes,  mites,  mirent ;  impf.  sultj.  misse, 
misses,  mlt,  missions,  missiez,  missent. 

Like  mettre : 

86  mettre,  begin.  d^mettre,  dismiss.  promettre,  promise. 

admettre,  admit.  ^mettre,  emit.  remettre,  put  back,  hand  to. 

commettre,  commit.  s'entremettre,  interpose.  repromettre,  promise  again. 

oompromettre,  compro-  omettre,  omit.  soumettre,  submit. 

mise.  permettre,  permit.  transmettre,  transmit. 

199.  Moudre,  '  to  grind.' 

1.  Infinitive,  moudre ;  fut.  moudrai,  etc. ;  condl.  moudrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  moulant ;  impf  indie,  moulais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  moule, 
monies,  moule,  moulions,  mouliez,  moulent. 

3.  Past  Part,  moulu  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  moulu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  mouds,  mouds,  moud,  moulons,  moulez,  moulent; 
impve.  mouds,  moulons,  moulez. 

5.  Past  Def.  moulus,  moulus,  moulut,  moultimes,  moulutes,  moulu- 
rent ;  impf.  subj.  moulusse,  moulusses,  moultit,  moulussions,  moulussiez, 
moulussent. 

Like  moudre : 
Moudre,  whet.  remoudre,  grind  t^ain.  r^moudre,  sharpen. 


§§200-202]  IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  -RE.  151 

200.  Naitre,  '  to  be  born,'  etc. 

1.  Infinitive,  naitre ;  fut.  naitrai,  etc. ;  condl.  nattrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  naissant ;  imp/,  indie,  naissais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  naisse, 
naisses,  naisse,  naissions,  naissiez,  naissent. 

3.  Past  Part.  n€  ;  past  indef.  je  suis  iie,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  nais,  nais,  nait,  naissons,  naissez,  naissent;  impve. 
nais,  naissons,  naissez. 

5.  Past  Def.  naquis,  naquis,  naquit,  naqutmes,  naqultes,  naqui- 
rent ;  imp/,  subj.  naquisse,  naquisses,  naquit,  naquissions,  naquissiez, 
naquissent. 

Obs.:  Stem-vowel  1  has  the  circumflex  (1)  everywhere  before  t. 

Like  naitre : 

renaitre,  revive. 

201.  Plaire,  'to  please.* 

1.  Infinitive,  pl^re ;  fut.  plairai,  etc.  ;  condl.  plairais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  plaisant ;  impf.  indie,  plaisais,  etc.  ;  pres.  subj.  plaise, 
plaises,  plaise,  plaisions,  plaisiez,  plaisent. 

3.  Pa^t  Part,  plu  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  plu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  plais,  plais,  plait,  plaisons,  plaisez,  plaisent ;  impve. 
plais,  plaisons,  plaisez. 

5.  Pa^t  Def.  plus,  plus,  plut,  plAmes,  pMtes,  plurent;  impf.  subj. 
plusse,  plusses,  plUt,  plussions,  plussiez,  plussent. 

Like  plaire : 
oomplaire,  humour.  d^plaire,  ditpleaae.  *taire,  say  nothing  about. 

*I1  tait  has  no  circumflex. 

202.  Prendre,  *to  take.' 

1.  Infinitive,  prendre ;  fut.  prendrai,  etc.  ;  condl.  prendrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  prenant ;  impf.  indie,  prenais,  etc.  ;  pres.  subj.  premie, 
prennes,  prenne,  prenions,  preniez,  prennent. 

3.  Past  Part,  pris  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  pris,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  prends,  prends,  prend,  prenons,  prenez,  prennent; 
imjyve.  prends,  prenons,  prenez. 

6.  Past  Def.  pris,  pris,  prit,  primes,  prites,  prirent ;  impf.  subj.  prisse, 
prisses,  prit,  prissions,  prissiez,  prissent. 

Like  prendre  are  its  compounds  : 
apprendre,  learn.  entreprendre,  undertake.  rapprendre,  learn  again, 

d6prendre,  part.  s'^prendre,  be  taken.  reprendre,  take  back. 

d^sapprendre,  unlearn.         se  m^prendre,  be  mistaken.      surprendre,  rurprise. 
Qomprendre,  understand. 


152  THE  VEEB.  [§§203-206 

203.  Rdsoudre,  'to  resolve.' 

1.  Infinitive,  r^soudre ;  fut.  r^soudrai,  etc.  ;  cmidl.  r^soudrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  r^solvant ;  impf.  indie,  r^solvais,  etc  ;  pres.  sulj. 
resolve,  resolves,  resolve,  r^solvions,  r^solviez,  resolvent. 

3.  Past  Part,  r^solu  and  re  sous  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  r^solu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  resous,  r^sous,  r^sout,  r^solvons,  r^solvez,  resolvent; 
impve.  resous,  r^solvons,  r^solvez. 

5.  PastDef.  r^solus,  resolus,  r^solut,  r^soltoies,  r^solfites,  r^solurentj 
impf.  subj.  r^solusse,  r^solusses,  r^solut,  r^solussions,  r^solussiez, 
r^solussent. 

Like  r^soudre  : 
*  absoudre,  absolve.  *  dissoudre,  dissolve. 

*  Past  part,  absous  (f.  absoute),  dlSSOUB  (f.  dissoute),  respectively,  lack  the  past 
definite  and  imperfect  subjunctive. 

204.  Rire,  *  to  laugh.' 

1.  Infinitive,  lire ;  fut.  rirai,  etc. ;  condl.  rirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  riant ;  impf.  indie,  rials,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  rie,  ries,  rie, 
riions,  riiez,  rient. 

3.  Past  Part,  ri  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  ri,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  ris,  ris,  rit,  rions,  riez,  rient ;  impve.  ris,  rions,  riez. 

5.  Past  Def.  ris,  ris,  rit,  rimes,  rites,  rirent ;  impf.  subj.  risse,  risses, 
rlt,  rissions,  rissiez,  rissent. 

Like  rire : 
ae  rire,  make  sport  (of,  de).  sourire,  smile. 

205.  Sourdre,  *  to  rise,'  etc. 

1.  Infinitive,  sourdre;  fut.  il  sourdra ;  condl.  il  sourdrait. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  sourdant;  impf.  indie,  il  sourdait;  pres.  subj.  il  sourde. 

3.  Past  Part.  ;  past  indef.  . 

4.  Pres.  Indie. , ,  sourd, , ,  sourdent;  impve.  * 

6.  Past  Def.  il  sourdit ;  impf.  subj.  il  sourdit. 
Note.— Little  used  beyond  the  infin.  and  third  sing.  pres.  indie. 

206.  Suivre,  *  to  follow.' 

1.  Infinitive,  suivre ;  fut.  suivrai,  etc. ;  condl.  suivrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  suivant;  impf.  indie,  suivais,  etc.;  pres.  subj.  suive, 
solves,  suive,  suivions,  suiviez,  suivent. 


§§207-209]  IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  -RE.  153 

3.  Past  Part,  suivi ;  pa^t  indef.  j'ai  suivi,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  suis,  suis,  suit,  suivons,  suivez,  suivent;  impve.  suis, 
Buivons,  suivez. 

5.  Past  Dtf.  suivis,  suivis,  suivit,  suivimes,  suivites,  suivirent ;  impf. 
suhj.  suivisse,  suivisses,  suivit,  suivissions,  suivissiez,  suivissent. 

Like  suivre : 
8'ensuivre  (impere.),  it  follows.  poursuivre,  pursue. 

2ff],  Tistre,  *to  weave.' 

Used  only  in  the  yast  -part,  tissu,  and  compound  tenses. 

208.  Traire,  'to  milk.' 

1.  Infinitive.,  traire  ;  fviA.  trairai,  etc. ;  condl.  trairais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  trayant ;  xm,pf.  indie,  trayais,  etc.  ;  pres.  subj.  traie, 
traies,  traie,  trayions,  trayiez,  traient. 

3.  Past  Part,  trait ;  past  indef.  j'ai  trait,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  trais,  trais,  trait,  trayons,  trayez,  traient;  impve, 
trais,  trayons,  trayez. 

6.  Past  Def. ;  impf.  sv^j. . 

Like  traire : 

abstraire,  abstract.  extraire,  extract.  soustraire,  subtract. 

attraire,  attract  (ituBn.  only;,  rentraire,  dam.  *braire,  bray. 

distrajre,  distract.  retraire,  redeem  (LegeA). 

*  Commonly  used  only  in  the  infin.  and  the  third  pera.  pres.  indie,  fut.  and  condL 

209.  Vaincre,  *to  conquer.' 

1.  Infinitive,  vaincre ;  fut.  vaincrai,  etc. ;  condl.  vaincsrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  vainquant ;  impf.  indie,  vainquais,  etc. ;  pres.  sulj, 
vainque,  vainques,  vainque,  vainquions,  vainquiez,  vainquent. 

3.  Past  Part,  vaincu  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  vaincu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  vaincs  [v.e],  vaincs,  vainc,  vainquons,  vainquez,  vain- 
quent ;  impve.  vaincs,  vainquons,  vainquez. 

5.  Pa^t  Def.  vainquis,  vainquis,  vainquit,  vainqulmes,  vainqultes, 
vainquirent ;  impf.  subj.  vainquisse,  vainquisses,  vainquit,  vainquissions, 
vainquissiez,  vainquissent. 

Obs. :  Stem  c  [k]  becomes  qu  [k]  before  any  vowel  except  u. 

Like  vaincre : 
oonvainore,  convince. 


154  THE  VERB.  [§§210-213 

210.  Vendre,  *  to  sell.* 

Irregular  only  in  third  singular  present  indicative :  II  vend  (t  omitted). 

Like  vendre : 

All  verbs  in  -andre.  -endre*,  -erdre,  -ondre,  -ordre. 

^Except  prendre,  reprendre,  surprendre,  etc. 

211.  Vivre,  *to  live.' 

1.  Infinitive,  vivre ;  fut.  vivrai,  etc.  ;  condl.  vivrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  vivant ;  impf.  indie,  vivais,  etc.  ;  pres.  subj. ,  vive, 
vfves,  vive,  vivions,  viviez,  vivent. 

3.  Past  Part,  vecu ;  past  indef.  j'ai  v^cu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  vis,  vis,  vit,  vivons,  vivez,  vivent ;  impve.,  vis,  vivons, 
vivez. 

5.  Past  Def.  v^cus,  v^cus,  v^cut,  v^ciimes,  v^cAtes,  v^curent ;  ir^pf. 
subj.  v6cusse,  vecusses,  v^ctit,  v^cussions,  v^cussiez,  v^cussent. 

Like  vivre : 
revivre,  revive.  survivre,  survive. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  -oir. 

Note. — The  few  verbs  in  -oir,  which  are  all  irregular,  form,  in  some 
grammars,  a  separate  conjugation,  the  third,  verbs  in  -re  being  the 
fourth. 

212.  Avoir,  '  to  have.' 
See  §154  for  the  full  conjugation  of  this  verb. 
Like  avoir : 

*  ravoir,  have  again. 

*  Used  only  in  the  infinitive. 

213.  Recevoir,  *  to  receive.' 

1.  Infinitive,  recevoir ;  fut.  recevrai,  etc. ;  eondl.  recevrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  recevant ;  impf.  indie,  recevais,  etc. ;  pres.  subJ, 
re§oive,  regoives,  regoive,  recevions,  receviez,  regoivent. 

3.  Past  Part,  regu ;  past  indef  j'ai  re9U,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  regois,  regois,  regoit,  recevons,  recevez,  re5oivent; 
impve.  re^ois,  recevons,  recevez. 


§§214-215]  IRREGULAR   VERBS  IN  -OIR.  155 

5.  PoM  def.  regus,  re9us,  regut,  reQumes,  regfttes,  regurent;  impf, 
subj.  re5usse,  re9usses,  reqiLt,  regussions,  re§ussiez,  re9ussent. 

Obs.:  1.  Stem-vowel  becomes  oi  wherever  it  bears  the  stress.  2.  Stem  c  [s]  ia 
written  c  [s]  before  0  or  u  (§  5,  4). 

Like  recevoir : 
apercevoir,  perceive.  d6cevoir,  deceive.  peroevoir,  coUect  taaea, 

concevoir,  conceive. 

214.  Devoir,  '  to  owe.' 

1.  Infinitive,  devoir ;  fut.  devrai,  etc. ;  condl.  devrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  devant ;  impf.  indie,  devais,  etc. ;  p^es.  subj.  doive, 
doives,  doive,  devions,  deviez,  doivent. 

3.  Past  Part,  du  (f.  due,  pi.  du(e)s) ;  past  indef.  j'ai  dft,  etc, 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  dois,  dois,  doit,  devons,  devez,  doivent ;  impve. * 

5.  Past  Def.  dus,  dus,  dut,  dfimes,  dutes,  durent ;  impf.  subj.  dusse, 
dusses,  dftt,  dussions,  dussiez,  dussent. 

NoTK.— Devoir  follows  the  recevoir  model,  but,  as  its  forms  present  some  difficulty, 
tiiey  have  been  given  in  full. 

Like  devoir : 
redevoir,  ttiU  owe. 

215.  Asseoir,  *to  seat.* 

1.  Infinitive,  asseoir ;  fvJ;.  assi^rai,  etc.,  or  asseyerai,  etc.,  or  assoirai, 
etc. ;  condl.  assierais,  etc.,  or  asseyerais,  etc.,  or  assoirais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  asseyant  or  assoyant ;  imp/,  indie,  asseyais,  etc. ,  or 
assoyais,  etc.  ;  pres.  subj.  asseye,  asseyes,  asseye,  asseyions,  asseyiez, 
asseyent,  or  assoie,  assoies,  assoie,  assoyions,  assoyiez,  assoient. 

3.  Past  Part,  assis ;  past  indef.,  j'ai  assis,  etc. 

4.  Pre^.  Indie,  assieds,  assieds,  assied,  asseyons,  asseyez,  asseyent, 
or  assois,  assois,  assoit,  assoyons,  assoyez,  assoient ;  impve.  assieds, 
asseyons,  asseyez,  o?*  assois,  assoyons,  assoyez. 

5.  Past  Def.  assis,  assis,  assit,  assimes,  assites,  assirent ;  impf.  subj. 
assisse,  assisses,  asslt,  assissions,  assissiez,  assissent. 

Like  asseoir : 
s'asseoir,  git  dovm.  se  rasseoir,  tU  down  again.       *mes8eoir,^f  badly. 

rasseoir,  reseat,  calm.         *seoir,  be  becoming.  tsurseoir,  suspend,  reprieve. 

*  Used  in  third  person  of  the  following :  Prea.  indie,  sied,  silent  (messied,  messi6ent) ; 
impf.  indie,  seyait,  seyaient  (messeyait,  messeyaient) ;  pres.  subj.  B\6e,  silent  (mes- 
8i6e,  mesai^ent) ;  fut.  si6ra,  si^ront  (messi^ra,  messi^ront) ;  condl.  si^rait,  si^raient 
(messi^rait,  messi^raient). 

iLike  the  forms  in  oi  (oy)  of  asseoir,  but /ut.  and  condl.  8urseoirai(8). 


156  THE  VERB.  [§§216-219 

216.  Ddchoir,  'to  decline,'  etc. 

1.  Infinitive,  d^choir ;  fut.  decherrai,  etc.  ;  condl.  d^cherrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part. ;  impf.  indie. ;  pres.  subj.  d^choie,  d^choies, 

d6choie,  d^choyions,  dechoyiez,  dechoient. 

3.  Past  Part,  dechu  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  d^chu  or  je  suis  d^chu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  dechois,  d^chois,  d^choit,  d^choyons,  d^choyez, 
dechoient;  impve.  d^chois,  d^choyons,  d^choyez. 

6.  Past  Def.  dechus,  d^chus,  dechut,  dechtimes,  d^chutes,  d^churent ; 
impf.  suhj.  ddchusse,  dechusses,  dechut,  d^hussions,  d^chussiez, 
d^chussent. 

Like  ddchoir : 

•choir,  fall.  *rechoir,  fall  again. 

•Hardly  used  beyond  the  infin.  and  comp.  tenses. 

217.  6choir,  *  fall  due/  etc. 

1.  Infinitive,  ^choir ;  fut.  il  *^cherra ;  cmidl.  il  *6cherrait. 

2.  Pres.  Part.  6cheant ;  impf.  indie,  il  ^choyait ;  pres.  suhj.  il  ^choie. 

3.  Past  Part,  ^chu  ;  past  indef.  je  suis  6chu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie.  ,  ,  ^hoit  c/r  ^chet,  ,  ,  ^choient  or 

^ch^ent ;  impve. . 

6.  Pa^t  Def. , ,  il  ^chut;  , ,  ils  ^churent ;  impf.  stdifj. 

il  6ch^t. 
*  Or  regular :  il  6cllOira(it). 

218.  Falloir,  'must,' etc.  (impers.). 

1.  Infinitive,  falloir  ;  fut.  il  faudra ;  condl.  il  faudrait. 

2.  Pres.  Part. ;  impf.  indie,  il  fallait ;  pres.  subj.  il  faille. 

3.  Past  Part,  fallu  ;  past  indef.  il  a  fallu. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  il  faut ;  impve. . 

6.  Past  Def,  il  fallut ;  impf.  subj.  il  falliit.* 

219.  Mouvoir,  *  to  move.' 

1.  Infinitive,  mouvoir ;  fut.  mouvrai,  etc. ;  condl.  mouvrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  mouvant ;  impf  indie,  mouvais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  meuve, 
meuves,  meuve,  mouvions,  mouviez,  meuvent. 

3.  Past  Part,  mu  (f.  mue,  pi.  mu(e)s);  past  indef.  j'ai  m6,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  meus,  meus,  meut,  mouvons,  mouvez,  meuvent;  impve. 
meus,  mouvons,  mouvez. 


§§220-223]  IRREGULAR  VERBS   IN   -OIR.  157 

6.  Past  Def.  mus,  mus,  mut,  m^mes,  miites,  murent;  impf.  svibj, 
musse,  musses,  mtit,  mussions,  mussiez,  mussent.  • 

Ohs.:  Stem- vowel  becomea  eu  wherever  stressed. 

Like  mouvoir : 
•6mouvoir,  arouse.  *promouvoir,  promote. 

*Past  participle  has  no  circumflex  accent. 

220.  Pleuvoir,  *to  rain*  (impers.). 

1.  Infinitive,  pleuvoir  ;  fut.  il  pleuvra ;  condl.  il  pleuvrait. 

2.  Prea.  Part,  pleuvant;  impf.  indie,  il  pleuvait;  pres.  subj.  il  pleuve. 

3.  Past  Part,  plu  ;  past  indef.  il  a  plu. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  il  pleut ;  impve. . 

6.  Past  Def.  il  plut ;  impf.  subj.  il  pWt. 

221.  Pouvoir,  *  to  be  able,'  etc. 

1.  Infinitive,  pouvoir  ;  fut.  pourrai,  etc.  ;  condl.  pourrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  pouvant ;  impf.  indie,  pouvais,  etc.  ;  pres.  subj.  puisse, 
puisses,  puisse,  puissions,  puissiez,  puissent. 

3.  Past  Part,  pu  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  pu. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  puis  or  peux,  peux,  peut,  pouvons,  pouvez,  peuvent ; 
impve. . 

6.  Past  Def.  pus,  pus,  put,  pfimes,  pAtes,  purent ;  impf.  subj.  pusse, 
pusses,  pfit,  pussioQS,  pussiez,  pussent. 

Oha. :  The  first  sing.  pres.  indie,  in  negation  is  usually  •  je  ne  peux  pas,' or  '  je  ne 
pais' ;  in  questions,  only  '  puis-je?';  otherwise  '  puis '  or  'peux.' 

222.  Savoir,  *  to  know,'  etc. 

1.  Infinitive,  savoir ;  fut.  saurai,  etc.  ;  condl.  saurais,  etc.  (y     ^^ 

2.  Pres.  Part,  sachant ;  impf.  indie,  savais,  etc.  ;  jyres.  subj.  sache, 
saches,  sache,  sachions,  sachiez,  sachent. 

3.  Past  Part,  su  ;  pa^t  indef.  j'ai  su,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  sals  [se],  sals,  salt,  savons,  savez,  savent ;  impve.  sache, 
sachons,  sachez. 

5.  Past  Def.  sus,  sus,  sut,  sfimes,  siites,  surent;  impf.  subj.  susse, 
susses,  sdt,  sussions,  sussiez,  sussent. 

223.  Valoir,   *  to  be  worth.' 

1.  Infinitive,  valoir ;  fut.  vaudrai,  etc. ;  condl.  vaudrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  valant;  impf.  indie,  valais,  etc.;  pres.  su^j.  vaille, 
▼allies,  vaille,  valions,  valiez,  vaillent. 


/ 


158  THE  VERB.  [§§224-225 

3.  P<Mt  Part,  valu  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  valu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.' Indie,  vaux,  vaux,  vaut,  valons,  valez,  valent;  impve.  vaux, 
valons,  valez. 

5.  Past  Def.  valus,  valus,  valut,  valtimes,  valutes,  valurent ;  vm/pf, 
8ubj.  valusse,  valusses,  valdt,  valussions,  valussiez,  valussent. 

Like  valoir : 
iquivaloir,  be  equivalent.       *pr6yaloir,  prevail.  fchaloir. 

revaloir,  pay  back,  return 

like  for  like. 

*Pres.  subj.  pr6vale,  etc. 

t  Hardly  used  beyond,  '  II  ne  me  chaut  de,'  •  I  care  not  for.' 

224.  Voir,  *  to  see.* 

1.  Infinitive,  voir ;  fut.  verrai,  etc. ;  condl.  verrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  voyant ;  imp/,  indie,  voyais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  voie,  voies, 
voie,  voyions,  voyiez,  voient. 

3.  Past  Part,  vu  ;  past  indef.  j'ai  vu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  vois,  vois,  voit,  voyons,  voyez,  voient ;  impve.  vols, 
voyons,  voyez. 

5.  Past  Def.  vis,  vis,  vit,  vimes,  vites,  virent ;  impf.  subj.  visse,  visses, 
vit,  vissions,  vissiez,  vissent. 

Like  voir : 
mtrevoir,  catch  sight  of .        *pouryoir,  provide.  fpr^voir, /ore<ee. 

revoir,  see  again.  *d6pourvoir,  strip,  leave  destitute. 

*Past  def.  -VUB,  etc.;  impf.  subj.  -vusse,  etc.;  fut.  and  condl.  -V0irai(8),  regular. 

iFut.  and  condl.  -VOirai(B),  etc.,  regular. 

22s  Vouloir,  'to  will,'  etc. 

1.  Infn.  vouloir ;  fut.  voudrai,  etc.  ;  condl.  voudrais,  etc. 

2.  Pres.  Part,  voulant ;  impf.  indie,  voulais,  etc. ;  pres.  subj.  veuille, 
veuilles,  veuille,  voulions,  vouliez,  veuillent. 

3.  Past  Part,  voulu  ;  pa^t  indef.  j'ai  voulu,  etc. 

4.  Pres.  Indie,  veux,  veux,  veut,  voulons,  voulez,  veulent;  impve. 
veux,  voulons,  voulez. 

5.  Past  Def.  voulus,  voulus,  voulut,  voul^es,  voulutes,  voulu- 
rent ;  impf.  subj.  voulusse,  voulusses,  voulut,  voulussions,  voulussiez, 
voulussent. 

Obs. :  Stem- vowel  becomes  eu  whenever  it  is  stressed. 

NoTB.— The  regular  impve.  veuz,  voulons,  VOUlez  is  rare;  veuillOZ^'httve  the 
kindness  to'  generally  serves  as  second  plural  imperative. 


§226] 


LIST  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


169 


226.        Reference  List  of  Irregular  Verbs. 

Note. — Each  verb  in  the  list  is  referred  to  the  section  in  which  its 
irregularity  is  explained.  For  verbs  in  -cer,  -ger,  see  §156 ;  for  verbs 
in  -yer,  §157 ;  for  verbs  with  stem-vowel  e  or  i,  §158 ;  for  verbs  in 
-andre,  -endre,  -erdre,  -ondre,  -ordre,  §210. 


abattre 

absoudre 203 

abstenir 177 

abstraire. 208 

accourir 164 

accroire 191 

accroltre 192 

accueillir 165 

acqu^rir 162 

adjoindr& 190 

admettre 198 

advenir 178 

aller 160 

apercevoir 213 

apparaitre 188 

apparoir 188 

appartenir 177 

apprendre 202 

assaillir 165 

asseoir 215 

astreindre 190 

atteindre 190 

attraire 208 

avenir 178 

avoir 154 

B. 

battre 180 

b^nir 163 

boire 181 

bouillir 166 

braire. 208 

bruire 182 


C. 

ceindre §190 

chaloir 223 

choir 216 

circoncire 187 

circonscrire 194 

circonvenir 178 

clore 183 

combattre 180 

commettre 198 

comparaitre 188 

comparoir 188 

complaire 201 

comprendre 202 

compromettre . . .  198 

concevoir 213 

conclure 184 

concourir 164 

conduire 185 

confire 187 

conjoindre 190 

connaitre 188 

conquerir 162 

consentir 166 

construire 185 

contenir 177 

contraindre 190 

contredire 193 

contrefaire 195 

contrevenir 178 

convaincre 209 

convenir 178 

coudre 189 


courir §  164 

courre 164 

couvrir 176 

craindre 190 

croire 191 

croitre 192 

cueillir 165 

cuire 185 

D. 

ddbattre 180 

d^cevoir 213 

d^choir 216 

d^clore 183 

d^confire 187 

d^construire 185 

d^coudre 189 

d^couvrir 176 

d^crire 194 

d^croire 191 

d^croitre 192 

d^dire 193 

d^duire 185 

d^failUr 167 

d^faire 195 

d^joindre 190 

d^mentir 166 

d^mettre 198 

d^partir 166 

d^peindre 190 

d^plaire 201 

d^pourvoir 224 

d^prendre 202 

d^sapprendre. . . .  202 


160 

desservir 

d^teindre 190 

d^tenir 177 

d^tmire 185 

devenir 178 

d^v^tir 179 

devoir 214 

dire 193 

disconvenir 178 

discourir 164 

disjoindre 190 

disparaitre 188 

dissoudre 203 

distraire 208 

dormir 166 

duire 185 

E. 

^bouillir 166 

^choir 217 

Colore 183 

^onduire 185 

^rire 194 

^Ure 197 

emboire 181 

^mettre 198 

^moudre 199 

^mouvoir 219 

empreindre 190' 

enceindre 190 

enclore 183 

encourir 164 

endormir 166 

enduire 185 

enfreindre 190 

enfuir 170 

enjoindre 190 

enqudrir 162 

ensuivre 206 

entremettre 198 

entreprendre. . . .  202 


THE  VERB. 

entretenir §177 

eiitrevoir 224 

entr'ouvrir 176 

envoyer 161 

dpreindre 190 

^prendre 202 

^quivaloir 223 

^teindre 190 

etre 154 

^treindre 190 

exclure 184 

extrairc 208 

F. 

failUr 167 

faire 195 

falloir   218 

feindre 190 

ferir 168 

fleurir 169 

forclore 183 

forfaire  195 

frire 196 

fuir 170 

G. 

geindre 190 

g^sir 171 

H. 
hair 172 

I. 

imboire 181 

inclure 184 

induire 185 

inscrire 194 

instruire 185 

interdire 193 

intervenir 178 

introduire 185 

issir 173 

J. 
joindre. 190 


[§226 

L. 

lire.... §197 

luire 185 

M. 

maintenir 177 

malfaire 195 

maudire 193 

m^connaitre 188 

mMire 193 

mefaire 195 

mentir 166 

meprendre 202 

messeoir 215 

mettre 198 

moudre 199 

mourir 174 

mouvoir 219 

N. 

naitre 200 

nuire 185 

O. 

obtenir 177 

ofirir 176 

oindre 190 

omettre 198 

ouir 175 

ouvrir 176 

P. 

paitre 188 

paraitre 188 

parcourir 164 

parfaire 195 

partir 166 

parvenir 178 

peindre 190 

percevoir 213 

pennettre. ......   198 

plaindre 190 

plaire 201 

pleuvoir 220 


§226] 


LIST  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


161 


poindre §190 

poursuivre 206 

pourvoir 224 

pouvoir 221 

pr^dire ". .   193 

prendre 202 

prescrire 194 

pressentir 166 

pr^valoir 223 

prevenir 178 

prevoir 224 

produire 185 

promettre 198 

promouvoir 219 

proscrire 194 

provenir 178 

1»^"^| 162 

R. 

rabattrc. 180 

rapprendre 202 

rasseoir 215 

ratteindre 190 

ravoir 212 

reboire 181 

rebouillir. 166 

recevoir 213 

rechoir 216 

reclure 184 

reconduire 185 

reconnaitre 188 

reconqu^rir 162 

reconstniire 185 

recoudre 189 

recourir 164 

recouvrir. 176 

r^crire 194 

recroitre 192 

recueillir 165 

recuire 185 

red^faire 195 

redevenir 178 

U 


redevoir §214 

redire 193 

redormir 166 

reduire 185 

re^lire 197 

refaire 195 

rejoindre 190 

relire 197 

reluire 185 

remettre 198 

remoudre 199 

r6moudre 199 

renaitre 200 

rendormir 166 

rentraire 208 

renvoyer 161 

repaltre 188 

reparaitre 188 

repartir 166 

repeindre 190 

repentir 166 

reprendre 202 

reproduire 185 

repromettre 198 

requerir 162 

r^soudre 203 

ressentir 166 

ressortir 166 

ressouvenir 178 

restreindre 190 

reteindre 190 

retenir 177 

retraire 208 

revaloir 223 

revenir 178 

revetir 179 

revivre 211 

revoir 224 

rire 204 

rouvrir 176 

S. 

saillir 165 

satisfaire 195 


savoir §222 

secourir 164 

s6duire 185 

sentir 166 

seoir. 215 

servir 166 

sortir 166 

soufFrir 176 

soumettre 198 

sourdre 205 

sourire 204 

souscrire 194 

soustraire 208 

soutenir 177 

souvenir 178 

subvenir 178 

suffire 187 

suivre 206 

surcroitre 192 

surfaire 195 

Burprendre 202 

surseoir 215 

survenir 178 

survivre 211 

T. 

taire 201 

teindre 190 

tenir 177 

tistre 207 

traduire 185 

traire 208 

transcrire 194 

transmettre 198 

tressaillir 165 

V. 

vaincre 209 

valoir 223 

vendre 210 

venir 178 

vetir 179 

vivre 211 

voir 224 

vouloir. 225 


162  THE  VERB.  [§§227-229 


USE  OF  AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

227*  Avoir  +  the  past  participle  forms  the  compound  tenses 
of  all  transitive  and  of  most  intransitive  verbs  (cf.  §  155). 

228.  ttre  +  the  past  participle  forms  the  compound  tenses 
of  all  reflexive  verbs  (§  242),  and  of  the  following  intransitives 
denoting  motion  or  change  of  condition  (cf.  §  155) : 

aller,  go.  6choir,  fall  due.  mourir,  die. 

arriver,  arrive.  6clore,  hatch  out.  naitre,  be  bom. 

choir,  fall.  entrer,  en,ter,  go  {come)  ir^.  venir,  come. 
ddc^der,  die. 

So  also,  the  following  compounds  of  venir : 

devenir,  become.  parvenir,  attain.  survenir,  supervene. 

xedevenir,  become  again.        provenir,  proceed. 
intervenir,  intervene.  revenir,  come  back. 

229.  1.  Avoir  or  6tre  +  the  past  participle  forms  the  com- 
pound tenses  of  a  number  of  intransitive  verbs,  the  general 
distinction  being  that  avoir,  when  so  used,  denotes  action, 
while  ^tre  denotes  state  or  condition  resulting  from  action : 

La  pluie  a  passe  par  la  fenStre.  The  rain  came  through  the  window. 

La  pluie  est  pass^e.  The  rain  is  past. 

Elle  a  grandi  bien  vite.  She  grew  up  very  fast. 

EUe  est  grandie.  She  is  grown  up. 

2.  Reference  list  of  verbs  with  avoir  or  ^tre  : 

aborder,  land.  *de3cendre,  descend.  *rede8cendre,  corn«  doTvn  again, 

accourir,  run  to.  disparaitre,  disappear.  *remonter,  go  up  again. 

accroitre,  iiicrease.  6chapper,  escape.  *rentrer,  go  in  again. 

apparaitre,  appear.  6chouer,  be  stranded,  fail,     repasser,  pass  again. 

baisser,  fall,  decline.  embellir,  grow  handsomer.     *re8sortir,  go  out  again. 

cesser,  cease.  emigrer,  emigrate.  ressusciter,  revive. 

changer,  change.  empirer,  grow  worse.  *  rester,  remain. 

croitre,  grow.  expirer,  expire.  *retomber,  fall  again. 

d^border,  overflow.  grandir,  grow  up.  *retoumer,  go  back. 

ddchoir,  decay.  *monter,  go  up.  sonner,  strike,  toU. 

d^croitre,  decrease.  *partir,  set  out.  *8ortir,  go  out. 

d6g6n6rer,  degenerate.  passer,  pa^s.  ♦tomber,  fall. 

demeurer,  remain.  r6chapper,  escape  again.  vieillir,  grow  old. 

*  Almost  always  with  ^tre,  aod  placed  by  some  grammarians  among  verbs  taking 
dtre  exclusively. 


§230] 


USE  OF  VERB  PHRASEa 


163 


a.  Any  verb  in  the  list,  used  transitively,  must,  of  course,  take  avoir 
(§227): 

II  m'a  passe  la  plume.  He  handed  me  the  pen. 

Avez-vous  rentr^  votre  bl^  ?  Have  you  hauled  in  your  wheat  ? 

lis  ont  descendu  le  tableau.  They  have  taken  down  the  picture. 

6.  The  meaning  also  determines  the  auxiliary  in  a  few  other  cases ; 

£tre. 


Avoir. 

convenir,  suit^  become. 

disconvenir,  not  to  suit,  be  discordant. 

repartir,  reply. 

Nous  sommes  convenus  du  prix 
Le  prix  ne  m'a  pas  convenu. 


convenir,  agree. 
disconvenir,  deny. 
repartir,  go  away  again. 


We  are  (have)  agreed  on  the  price. 
The  price  did  not  suit  me. 


USE  OF  VERB  PHRASES. 


230.  Auxiliary  Function.  Several  verbs,  when  followed 
by  an  infinitive,  have  a  sort  of  auxiliary  function,  and  serve 
to  form  verb  phrases  of  various  values,  modal,  temporal,  etc. : 

1.  Vouloir=  *  will,'  •  wish  to,'  •  want  to,'  *  desire  to,'  etc.  : 


Je  ne  veux  pas  rester. 
H  voudrait  (bien)  le  savoir. 
EUe  n'a  pas  voulu  m'^couter. 
U  aurait  voulu  le  faire. 
Veuillez  le  faire. 


I  will  not  remain. 
He  would  like  to  know  it. 
She  would  not  listen  to  me. 
He  would  have  liked  to  do  so. 
Be  so  good  as  to  do  so. 


a.  Distinguish  from  *  will '  of  simple  futurity : 
Elle  vous  6coutera.  She  will  listen  to  you. 

2.  Devoir=  *  ought,' *  should,'  *must,'  'be  to,'  'have  to,'  *  be  obliged 
to,'  *  intend  to,'  etc.,  varies  in  force  in  dififerent  tenses: 


Present :  je  dels  rester. 

Imperfect :  je  devais  parler. 
Future :  je  devrai  revenir. 

Conditional :  je  devrais  ^crire. 
Past  Indefinite :  j'ai  6h  m'arreter. 


I  am  to  (have  to,  intend  to,  must) 

remain. 
I  was  to  (had  to,  etc.)  speak. 
I  shall  have  to  (be  obliged  to)  come 

back. 
I  ought  to  (should)  write. 
I  have  had  to  (been  obliged  to)  stopf 

must  have  stopped. 


164  THE  VERB.  [§230 

Past  Definite  :  Je  dus  revenir.  I  had  to  come  back. 

Conditional  Anterior :  j'aurais  du    I    ought    to    have    (should    have) 
savoir.  known. 

3.  Pouvoir=  *  can,'  *  be  able  to,'  *  be  permitted  to,'  *  may,'  etc. : 
II  ne  pouvait  pas  porter  le  sac.  He  could  not  carry  the  sack. 
Puis-je  aller  k  la  ville  ?                         May  I  go  to  town  1 

lis  auraient  pu  le  faire.  They  could  (might)  have  done  it. 

Je  pourrais  le  faire,  si  je  voulais.  I  could  do  it,  if  I  would. 

Pourraient-ils  en  trouver  ?  Could  they  find  any  ? 

Pourrais- je  vous  demander  ?  Might  I  ask  you  ? 

4.  Savoir  =  *  know  how  to',  *  can,'  etc. : 

EUe  sait  chanter  et  danser.  She  can  sing  and  dance. 

a.  Distinguish  savoir  in  this  sense  from  pouvoir : 
EUe  est  enrouee  et  ne  peut  pas     She  is  hoarse  and  cannot  sing  this 

chanter  ce  soir.  evening. 

6.  The  conditional  with  ne  has  peculiar  idiomatic  force  : 
Je  ne  saurais  le  croire.  I  cannot  believe  it. 

5.  Oser=  'dare' : 

Je  n'ose  pas  le  lui  dire.  I  dare  not  tell  him  so. 

NoTB.— The  above  five  verbs  are  sometimes  called  '  modal  auxiliaries.' 

6.  Faire  =  *  make,' *  cause  to,'  'cause  to  be,'  'have,'  'order,'  'order 
to  be,'  etc. : 

J'ai  fait  ^tudier  les  enfants.  I  have  made  the  children  study. 

H  les  fera  ecouter.  He  will  make  them  listen. 

II  s'est  fait  faire  un  habit.  He  had  a  coat  made  for  himself. 

Faites  chercher  un  medecin.  Send  for  a  doctor. 

a.  A  governed  substantive  follows  the  infinitive,  but  a  governed  con- 
junctive personal  pronoun  (not  reflexive)  goes  with  faire  : 
Faites  venir  le  domestique.  Have  the  servant  come. 

Faites-le  venir.  Have  him  come. 

6.  If  the  infinitive  with  faire  have  a  direct  object,  the  personal  object 
of  faire  must  be  indirect  (cf.  §  293,  2,  a) : 
Je  fis  ^crire  mon  fils.  I  had  my  son  write. 

Je  fis  ^crire  un  devoir  cl  mon  fils.      I  made  my  son  write  an  exercise. 
Faites-le-lui  ^crire.  Make  him  write  it. 

Je  le  lew  fis  voir.  I  showed  them  it. 


§§231-232]    AGREEMENT  OF  VERB  AND  SUBJECT.  166 

c.  Possible  ambiguity  is  sometimes  avoided  by  par : 

II  fit  porter  le  sac  par  le  guide.         He  had  the  sack  carried  by  the  guidei 

d.  Note  the  passive  force  of  a  transitive  infinitive  after  faire  : 
Je  ferai  ecrire  une  lettre.  I  shall  have  a  letter  written. 

7.  Laisser  =  '  let,'  has  usually  the  same  constructions  as  faire  : 
Laissez  Ecrire  les  enfants.  Let  the  children  write. 
Laissez-leur  (or  -les)  ecrire  un        Let  them  write  an  exercise. 

devoir. 

8.  The  present  and  imperfect  of  aller+an  infinitive  give  a  kind  of 
immediate  future,  as  also  in  English : 

II  va  I'acheter.  He  is  going  to  (is  about  to)  buy  it. 

Nous  allions  nous  arreter.  We  were  about  to  stop. 

II  allait  se  uoyer.  He  was  on  the  point  of  drowning. 

9.  Similarly  the  present  and  imperfect  of  venir  de  +  an  infinitive  give 
a  kind  of  immediate  past : 

Je  viens  de  le  voir.  I  have  just  seen  him. 

H  venait  de  I'entendre.  He  had  just  heard  it. 

AGREEMENT  OF  VERB  AND  SUBJECT. 

231.  General  Rule.     The  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in 
number  and  person : 

Les  hommes  sont  mortels.  Men  are  mortal 

Tout  le  monde  est  ici.  Everybody  is  here. 

Toi  et  moi  (nous)  ne  faisons  qu'un.     You  and  I  are  but  one. 

232.  Simple  Subject.     Special  rules  for  the  agreement  of 
a  verb  with  one  subject  are : — 

-  1.  A  collective  subject  singular,  when  not  followed  by  dCi 
or  when  followed  by  de  +  the  singular,  has  a  singular  verb : 

Le  peuple  fran9ais  est  brave.  The  French  people  are  brave. 

Le  s^nat  I'a  d^cid^.  The  senate  has  {or  have)  decided  it. 

La  plupart  du  monde  le  croit.  Most  people  believe  it. 

2.  A  collective   subject  singular  +  de  +  a  plural  takes  a 
plural  verb,  unless  the  sense  of  the  collective  be  dominant : 


166 


THE  VERB. 


[§232 


Une  nu^e  de  sauvages  l'attaqu6- 

rent. 
Une  nu^e  de  traits  I'obseurcit. 
Une  partie  des  soldats  restent. 
Une  partie  des  bourgeois  protesta. 
Cette  sorte  de  poires  est  chere. 


A  cloud  of  savages  attacked  him. 


A  cloud  of  arrows  hid  him. 

A  part  of  the  soldiers  remain. 

A  part  of  the  citizens  protested. 

This  sort  of  pears  is  dear. 
a.  When  so  used,  adverbs  of  quantity,  e.g.  beaucoup,  peu,  etc.,  the 
nouns  nombre,  quantite,  without  article,  and  la  plupart,  are  regularly 
plural  in  sense ;  so  also,  force  : 

Many  people  think  so. 

Few  people  know  it. 

How  many  enemies  attack  me  ! 

A  number  of  Athenians  had  fled. 

Most  of  the  soldiers  perished. 

Many  a  fool  will  try  it. 


Beaucoup  de  gens  pensent  ainsL 
Peu  de  gens  le  savent. 
Que  d'ennemis  m'attaquent ! 
Nombre  d'Atht^niens  avaient  fui. 
La  plupart  des  soldats  perirent. 
Force  sots  le  tenteront. 


b.  Beaucoup,  peu,  combien,  used  absolutely,  are  singular  or  plural 
according  to  the  sense  of  the  de  clause  implied ;  la  plupart  when  so 
used  is  always  plural : 

Beaucoup  {sc.  de  gens)  le  croient.      Many  (sc.  people)  believe  it. 
Peu  {sc.  de  ceci)  me  sufiira.  Little  (sc.  of  this)  will  suflfice  me. 

La  plupart  vot^rent  contre.  The  majority  voted  nay. 

c.  Plus  d'un  is  singular,  unless  reciprocal  or  repeated,  and  moins  de 
deux  is  plural : 


Plus  d'un  t^moin  a  depos^ 
Moins  de  deux  ne  valent  rien. 
Plus  d'un  fripon  se  dupent  I'un 

I'autre. 
Plus  d'un  ofiicier,  plus  d'un 

general  furent  tu6s. 


More  than  one  witness  has  sworn. 

Less  than  two  is  no  use. 

More  rogues  than  one  cheat  each 

other. 
More  than  one  officer,  more  than 

one  general  was  killed. 

3.  Ce  requires  a  plural  verb  only  when  the  predicate  is  a 
plural  noun,  a  plural  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  or  when  ce 
refers  to  a  preceding  plural : 


Sont-ce  vos  amis  ? — Ce  sont  eux. 

Ce  doivent  Stre  les  siens. 

Ce  sont  nos  semblables. 

Ses  desirs,  ce  sont  sa  loi. 

But :  C'est  moi ;  c'est  toi ;  c'est  lui 


Is  it  your  friends  ?    It  is  they. 

Those  must  be  his. 

They  are  our  fellow-creatures. 

His  desires  are  his  law. 

;  c'est  nous  ;  c'est  vous. 


a.  The  third  singular  is  often  used  for  the  third  plural  in  this  construc- 
tion, more  especially  in  familiar  language  or  to  avoid  harsh  locutions ; 


§233]  AGREEMENT  OF  VERB  AND  SUBJECT.  167 

Est-ce  les  Anglais  que  je  crains  ?  Is  it  the  English  that  I  fear? 

C'est  eux  qui  I'ont  fait.  It  is  they  who  did  it. 

C'est  des  betises.  That  is  stupidity. 

Ne  fut-ce  que  quelques  lignes.  If  it  were  only  a  few  lines. 

b.  The  verb  with  ce  is  singular  when  the  predicate  is  a  numeral + a 
noun  of  collective  force : 

C'est  dix  heures  qui  sonnent.  It  is  ten  o'clock  that  is  striking. 

c.  Si  ce  n'est  is  always  singular : 

Qui,  si  ce  n'est  nos  parents  ?  Who,  if  it  is  not  our  parents  ? 

4.  II  (impers.)  always  has  a  singular  verb,  whatever  be  the 
logical  subject : 

II  est  arrive  bien  des  choses.  Many  things  have  happened. 

II  en  reste  trois  livres.  Three  pounds  of  it  remain. 

a.  Importer  is  construed  personally  or  impersonally : 
Qu'importe  (importent)  les  depens?    What  matters  the  cost  ? 

233.   Composite    Subject.     A  verb  common  to  two  or 
more  subjects  is  regularly  plural ;   when  the  subjects  differ  in 
person,  the  verb  agrees  with  the  first  person,  if  one  subject  is 
of  the  first  person,  otherwise  with  the  second  : 
Toi  et  moi  (nous)  ne  faisons  qu'un.     You  and  I  are  but  one. 
Sa  soeur  et  lui  sont  \k.  His  sister  and  he  are  there. 

a.  With  subjects  of  different  person,  pleonastic  nous,  vous,  is  generally 
used: 
Vous  et  lui  (vous)  I'avez  vu.  You  and  he  have  seen  it. 

6.  With  ou=  *or,'  ni. .  .ni=  *  neither. .  .nor,'  the  verb  is  singular  if 
the  sense  is  clearly  alternative,  i.e.,  the  one  subject  excluding  the  other, 
otherwise  generally  plural ;  Tun  ou  I'autre  is  always  singular : 
Sa  vie  ou  sa  mort  en  depend.  His  life  or  death  depends  on  it. 

Ni  lui  ni  votre  fr^re  n'aura  ce       Neither  he  nor  your  brother  will 

poste.  have  that  post. 

Ni  I'lm  ni  I'autre  ne  sont  bons.  Neither  is  good. 

L'une  ou  I'autre  viendra.  The  one  or  the  other  will  come. 

L'un  ou  I'autre  jour  me  convient.      Either  day  suits  me. 

c.  If  the  subjects  (generally  without  et)  are  sjmonymous,  or  nearly  so, 
or  form  a  climax,  the  verb  may  be  singular : 


168  •       THE  VERB.  [§234-236 

Sa  dignity,  sa  noblesse  frappa         His  dignity,  his  nobility  stnick 

tout  le  monde.  everybody. 

L'heure,  le  lieu,  le  bras  se  choisit      The  hour,  the  place,  the  arm  are 

aujourd'hui.  chosen  to-day. 

Une  excuse,  un  mot  le  d^sarme.        An  excuse,  a  word  disarms  him. 

d.  When  the  subjects  are  recapitulated  by  a  word  in  the  singular, 
e.g.,  tout,  rien,  etc.,  the  verb  is  singular  agreeing  with  it  : 
Remords,  crainte,  perils,  rien  ne    Remorse,  fear,  dangers,  nothing  de- 

m'a  retenue.  terred  me. 

e.  With  an  intervening  clause,  e.g.,  ainsi  que,  plus  que,  etc.,  the 
subject  is  usually  only  apparently  composite  : 

La  vertu,  plus  que  le  savoir,  el6ve    Virtue,  more  than  knowledge,  ele- 
I'homme.  vates  man. 

/.  Even  with  et  the  sense  is  occasionally  singular,  or  distributive,  or 
alternative,  and  a  singular  verb  is  required  : 
Le  bien  et  le  mal  est  en  ta  main.       Good  and  ill  are  in  thy  hand. 
L'un  et  I'autre  pent  se  dire.  Both  may  be  said. 

L'^te  est  revenu  et  le  soleil.  Summer  has  returned  and  the  sun. 

Tombe  Argos  et  ses  murs.  Let  Argos  and  its  walls  fall. 

234.  Relative  Subject.  The  verb  agrees  with  the  rela- 
tive pronoun  subject,  which  is  itself  of  the  number  and  person 
of  the  antecedent  (see  also  Relative  Pronoun) : 

C'est  nous  qui  I'avons  fait.  It  is  we  who  have  done  it. 

Dieux  (vous)  qui  m'exaucez  !  (Ye)  Gods  who  hear  me  ! 

POSITION  OF  SUBJECT. 

235.  General  Rule.  The  subject  usually  precedes  the 
verb.  Exceptions  to  this  rule  are  noted  in  the  following 
sections. 

236.  Interrogative  Word  Order.  Direct  interrogation 
is  expressed  as  follows  : — 

1.  A  personal  pronoun  subject  (also  ce  or  on)  follows  the 
verb,  and  is  joined  to  it  by  a  hyphen  : 

Parlez-vous  fran9ais  ?  Do  you  speak  French  ? 

Est-celui?  Is  it  he? 


§236]  POSITION  OF  SUBJECT.  169 

a.  The  letter  -t-  is  inserted  after  a  third  singular  with  final  vowel 
before  a  pronoun  with  initial  vowel : 

Parla-t-elle  ?    Parle-t-on  ?  Did  she  speak  ?    Do  they  speak  ? 

b.  A  final  e  of  the  first  singular  takes  acute  accent,  but  with  the 
sound  of  [e] : 

Donn6-je  ?  [done:  3].  Do  I  give  ? 

2.  A  noun  subject  precedes  the  verb,  and  is  repeated  after 
it  by  a  pleonastic  pronoun ;  so  also,  possessive,  demonstrative 
and  indefinite  pronouns : 

Get  homme  parle-t-il  anglais  ?  Does  that  man  speak  English  ? 

Cela  est-il  vrai  ?  Is  that  true  ? 

Les  miens  ne  sont-ils  pas  bons  ?         Are  mine  not  good  ? 

3.  Questions  are  also  asked  by  interrogative  words  (adjec- 
tives, pronouns,  adverbs) : 

Quel  po6te  a  ^crit  cela  ?  What  poet  wrote  that  ? 

A  quelle  heure  partira  son  ami  ?       At  what  o'clock  will  his  friend  go  ? 

Qui  est  \k  ?    Qu'y  a-t-il  ?  Who  is  there  ?    What  is  the  matter? 

Lequel  des  deux  est  parti  ?  Which  of  the  two  has  gone  ? 

Combien  coute  cela  ?        ^ 

Combien  cela  coiite-t-il  ?/  ^°^  °^"^^  ^"^^  *^**  ^°«*  ^ 

a.  The  word  order  of  either  of  the  last  two  examples  is  commonly 
permissible  for  noun  subject  under  this  rule. 

6.  The  word  order  of  the  last  example  is  obligatory  when  the  verb 
has  a  direct  object  (not  reflexive),  or  a  prepositional  complement,  or 
when  ambiguity  might  arise ;  this  arrangement  is  preferable  with 
pourquoi  ?,  or  when  a  compound  tense  is  used  : 

Oil  le  roi  tient-il  sa  cour  ?  Where  does  the  king  hold  his  court  ? 

De  quoi  le  roi  parle-t-il  ?  Of  what  is  the  king  speaking  ? 

Quel  prix  le  roi  paya-t-il  ?  What  price  did  the  king  pay  ? 

Jean  qui  aime-t-il  ?  Whom  does  John  love  ? 

Pourquoi  mon  ami  part-il  ?  Why  does  my  friend  go  ? 

Quand  ce  roi  a-t-il  6t6  d^capit^  ?        When  was  this  king  beheaded  ? 

4.  By  prefixing  est-ce  que  ?  a  statement  becomes  a  quea- 
tion  without  change  in  its  word  order  : 

Est-ce  que  vous  partez  ?  Are  you  going  away  ? 

Quand  est-ce  que  vous  partez  ?  When  are  you  going  away  ? 


170  THE  VERB.  [§237 

a.  The  use  of  est-ce  que?  is  permissible  with  all  forms  of  the  verb,  but 
is  obligatory  with  a  monosyllabic  first  singular  (except  ai-je  ?,  suis-je  ? 
dis-je  ?,  dois-je  ?,  fais-je  ?,  puis-je  ?,  sais-je  ?,  vais-je  ?,  vois-je  ?),  and 
is  preferable  to  avoid  forms  like  donn^-je  ?  : 
Est-ce  que  je  sers,  moi  ?  Do  I  serve  ? 

Est-ce  que  je  parle  de  lui  ?  Do  I  speak  of  him  ? 

5.  Interrogation  is  also  expressed   by   mere   inflection  of 
the  voice,  without  change  in  word  order  : 
Vous  partez  dej4  ?  You  are  going  already  ? 

237.  Rhetorical  Inversions.  Owing  to  rhetorical  con- 
siderations the  noun  subject  not  uncommonly  follows  the  verb, 
or  the  sentence  assumes  interrogative  form,  though  not  inter- 
rogative, as  follows  : — 

1.  In  interjected  remarks  explanatory  of  direct  quotation, 

as  in  English  : 

Fais  comme  tu  voudras,  dit-il.        Do  as  you  please,  said  he. 

Que  veux-tu  ?  demanda  la  m^re.      What  do  you  wish  ?  asked  the  mother. 

2.  In  optative  clauses  when  que  is  omitted,  and  also  after 
the  rare  omission  of  si,  *  if ' : 

Vive  le  roi  !    P^risse  le  tyran  !         (Long)  live  the  king  !    Perish  the 

tyrant ! 
Voulait-il  de  I'argent,  son  p6re  If  he  wished  money,  his  father  al- 

lui  en  donnait  tou jours.  ways  gave  him  some. 

Ne  f<it-ce  que  pour  cela.  If  it  were  only  for  that. 

3.  Very  commonly  after  certain  adverbs  and  adverbial 
locutions : 

Du  moins  devrait-il  attendre.  He  should  at  least  wait. 

A  peine  le  jour  fut-il  arrive.  Hardly  had  the  day  arrived. 

Such  are : 

il  peine,  AardZy.  *  peut-fitre,  pcr/iaps.  UmtRtoiB,  although. 

aussi,  hence.  encore,  besides.  en  vain,  in  vain. 

aussi  bien,  moreover.  toujours,  however.  rarement,  rarely. 

au  moins,  at  least.  tout  au  plus,  at  most.  probablement,  probably. 

du  moins,  at  least.  d'autant  plus,  the  more.                      etc. 

*Peut-^tre  que  does  not  cause  inversion :  ' Peut-dtre  qu'il  le  fera,'  'Perhaps  he 

will  do  sa'  y 


§238]  POSITION   OF  SUBJECT.  171 

4.  Sometimes  in  exclamatory  sentences  : 
Avons-nous  cri^  !  Didn't  we  shout ! 

5.  When  a  predicate  adjective  heads  the  phrase  ; 

Telle  fut  la  fin  de  Carthage.  Such  was  the  end  of  Carthage. 

Quelque  riche  que  soit  cet  homme.     However  rich  that  man  is. 

Note.— All  the  above  inversions,  except  the  last  given,  may  take  place  whatever  be 
the  nature  of  the  subject,  but  the  follovriug  rules  do  not  usually  hold  good  for  personal 
pronoun  subject. 

6.  Very  commonly  in  a  relative  clause,  especially  when  a 
second  relative  clause  qualifies  its  subject  :  ^ 

H  fera  ce  que  pent  faire  un  He  will  do  what  a  man  can  who 

homme  qui  se  respecte.  respects  himself. 

Dites-moi  ce  qu'a  fait  votre  amL  Tell  me  what  your  friend  did. 

Dis-moi  oti  est  ton  amL  Tell  me  where  your  friend  is. 

Note.— The  relative  is  unstressed  (proclitic),  and  naturally  stands  next  the  vierb 
which  governs  it. 

7.  Commonly  after  c*est  QUe,  and  in  the  second  member 
of  a  comparative  sentence  : 

C'est  en  vous  qu'esp^rent  tous.  It  is  in  you  that  all  hope. 

J'en  ai  plus  que  n'en  a  mon  ami.       I  have  more  of  it  than  my  friend  has. 

8.  Commonly  when  an  adverb,  other  than  those  mentioned 
in  (3)  above,  e.g.,  ainsi,  bient6t,ici,  la,  etc.,  or  an  adverbial 
phrase  heads  the  sentence  : 

Ainsi  va  le  monde.  So  goes  the  world. 

Bientdt  viendra  le  printemps.  Spring  will  soon  come. 

A  la  tete  de  I'arm^e  fut  port6  At  the  head  of  the  army  was  carried 
r^tendard  sacr^.  the  sacred  standard. 

9.  Quite  exceptionally,  when  the  verb  comes  first : 
Viendra  un  autre.  (Along)  will  come  another. 

NOTB.— No  inversion  of  noun  subject  usually  occurs  if  the  verb  has  a  direct  object 
or  a  prepositional  complement. 

238.  Indirect  Interrogation.    It  has  no  special  rules  of 
word  order  apart  from  those  of  the  clause  in  which  it  occurs : 
Difl-moi  ce  qu'il  a  dit.  Tell  me  what  he  said. 


172  THE  VERB.  [§§239-241 

THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

239.  Formation.  The  passive  voice  of  a  transitive  verb  is 
formed  from  the  auxiliary  6tre  +  the  past  participle,  which 
agrees  with  the  subject  of  the  verb  in  gender  and  number : 

Pres.   Infin.  £tre  lou^(e)  or  loue(e)s,  to  he  praised. 

Perf.  Infin.  Avoir  6t6  loue(e)  or  loue(e)s,  to  have  been  praised. 

Pres.  Part,  ifctant  loue(e)  or  loue(e)s,  being  praised. 

Pkrf.  Part.  Ayant  ete  loue(e)  or  loue(e)s,  having  been  praised. 

Present  Indicative.  Past  Indefinite  Indicative. 

/  am  (/  am  keing)  praised,  etc.  I  have  be£n  (/  was)  praised  etc, 

je  suis^  j'ai  ^t6^ 

tu  es    [•  loue(e).  tu  as  et6  j-  Ioud{e). 

il  (eUe)  est  J  il  (elle)  a  ^t^  J 

nous  somraes^  nous  avons  t5te^ 

vous  etes.       V  loud(e)s.  vous  avez  6t6    J-  lou6(e)s, 

lis  (elles)  sont.      J  lis  (elles)  ont  6t6    J 

etc.,  etc.,  throughout. 
Obs.:  1.  The  past  participle  6t6  is  always  invariable.    2.  The  past  participle  after 
VOUS  agrees  with  the  sense:  'Madame,  vous  serez  m^prisee  de  tous,'  'Madam,  you 
will  be  despised  by  all.' 

240.  The  Agent.  The  person  by  whom  the  action  is  done 
is  usually  denoted  by  par,  when  a  specific  intention  or  definite 
volition  is  implied,  and  by  de  when  the  action  is  habitual, 
usual,  or  indefinite : 

Elle  fut  saisie  par  le  voleur.  She  was  seized  ^y  the  thief. 

Le  g^n^ral  fut  suivi  de  pr6s  par  The  general  was  closely  followed  by 

I'ennemi.  the  enemy. 

La  reine  ^tait  suivie  de  ses  dames.  The  queen  was  followed  by  her  ladies. 

Us  sont  aim^s  de  tous.  They  are  loved  by  everybody. 

241.  Remarks.  1.  Only  transitive  verbs  regularly  have 
the  passive  voice,  but  the  intransitives  ob^ir,  ddsobdir,  par- 
donner,  may  also  be  made  passive  : 

Vous  ^tes  pardonn^s  tous.  You  are  all  pardoned. 

EUe  est  toujours  ob^ie.  She  is  always  obeyed. 

2.  The  passive  is  much  less  used  than  in  English,  especially 
if  the  agent  be  not  specified,  or  if  the  corresponding  French 


§242]  THE  REFLEXIVE  VERB.  173 

verb  is  intransitive,   or   if    an    indirect   object   be  present. 
Substitutes  are : 

a.  A  verb  with  the  indeiimte  pronoun  on  : 
On  m'a  tromp^.  I  have  been  deceived 

On  me  soup^onne.  I  am  suspected. 

On  a  r^pondu  a  ma  question.  My  question  has  been  answered. 

On  lui  a  rendu  1' argent.  The  money  has  been  given  back  to 

him. 

6.  A  reflexive  construction : 
Ce  livre  se  publie  k  Paris.  This  book  is  published  in  Paris. 

La  guerre  se  prolongea.  The  war  was  prolonged. 

Voili  ce  qui  se  dit.  This  is  what  is  being  said. 

3.  A  transitive  infinitive  has  passive  force  after  verbs  of 
perceiving  (voir,  etc.),  after  faire,  laisser,  and  when  ^  +  aii 
infinitive  is  used  adjectivally  (cf.  §  284) 
Le  f erez-vous  vendre  ?  Will  you  have  it  sold  ? 

Je  la  vis  battre.  I  saw  her  beaten. 

Une  faute  a  eviter.  A  mistake  to  be  avoided. 

THE  REFLEXIVE  VERB. 

242.  Compound  Tenses.  The  auxiliary  6tre  +  the  past 
participle  forms  the  compound  tenses  of  all  reflexive  verbs,  as 
follows : — 

Pres.  Infin.     Se  flatter,  to  flatter  one^a  self. 

Perf.  Infin.     S'etre  flatt6(e)  or  flatt^(e)s,  to  have  flattered  one^s  self. 

Pres.  Part.      Se  flattant,  flattering  one's  self. 

Perf.  Part.     S'^tant  flatt6(e)  or  flatt6(e)s,  having  flatUred  one*a  self. 

Indicative. 

Present.  Past  iNDEFiNrrE. 

IflAxUer  my  self y  etc  I  {have)  flattered  myself,  etc 

je  me  flatte.  je  me  suis  "v 

tuteflattes.  tu  t'es      yflatt^(e). 

il  (elle)  se  flatte.  *                 il  (elle)  s'est   J 

nous  nous  flattons.  nous  nous  sommes^ 

vous  vous  flattez.  vous  vou3  6tes        |-flatt^{e)a 

ils  (elles)  se  flattent.  ils  (elles)  se  sont       J 

etc,  etc. 


174  THE  VERB.  [§§243-245 

Imperative. 

Flatter  thyself,  etc.  Do  not  flatter  thyself,  etc. 

flatte-toi.  ne  te  flatte  pas. 

(qu'il  se  flatte. )  (qu'il  ne  se  flatte  pas. ) 

flattons-nous.  ne  nous  flattens  pas. 

flattez-vous.  ne  vous  flattez  pas. 

(qu'ils  se  flattent. )  (qu'ils  ne  se  flattent  pas. ) 

Notes.— 1.  Se  flatter,  se  flattant,  etc.,  are  the  infinitive  and  participial  form* 
found  in  dictionaries,  but  se  must  be  replaced  by  me,  te,  etc.,  according  to  the  sense. 

2.  Except  in  the  use  of  6tre  as  auxiliary,  reflexive  verbs  have  no  peculiarities  of  con- 
jugation on  account  of  being  reflexive. 

243.  Reflexive  or  Reciprocal.    A  reflexive  verb  often 

has  reciprocal  force,  especially  in  the  plural.     Ambiguity  is 

generally  avoided  by  some  modifying  expression  : 

„„  „  ,  fThey  flatter  themselves. 

EUes  se  flattent.  \^^^^  ^^^^^^  ^^^^  ^^^^^^ 

EUes  se  flattent  Tune  I'autre.  They  flatter  one  another. 

On  se  dupe  mutuellement  They  cheat  each  other. 

244.  Agreement  of  Past  Participle.  1.  In  compound 
tenses,  the  past  participle  of  a  reflexive  agrees  in  gender 
and  number  with  the  reflexive  object,  unless  that  object  be 
indirect : 

Elle  s'est  deride.  She  cried  out. 

EUe  s'est  dit  k  elle-m^me.  She  said  to  herself. 

lis  se  sont  6crit.  They  wrote  to  each  other. 

EUes  se  sont  achet^  des  robes.  They  bought  themselves  dresses. 

2.  Besides  the  reflexive  object,  a  direct  object  may  precede 
the  verb,  and  with  this  object  the  participle  agrees : 
Les  plumes  qu'ils  se  sont  achet^es.     The  pens  they  bought  themselves. 

Notes.— 1.  The  auxiliary  6tre  is  considered  as  replacing  avoir,  and  the  above 
agreements  are  explained  by  the  general  principle  (§  291). 

2.  The  agreement  with  vous  is  according  tp  the  sense :  *  Vous  vous  fites  tromp6e, 
madame,'  '  You  were  mistaken,  madam.' 

245.  Omission  of  Reflexive  Object.  1.  It  is  always 
omitted  with  the  "past  participle  used  as  attributive  adjective : 
Le  temps  ^coul^.  The  time  past. 


§§246-247]  THE  REFLEXIVE  VERB.  175 

2.  The  infinitives  of  certain  verbs,  such  as  s'asseoir,  se 
souvenir,  se  taire,  regularly  omit  se  when  preceded  by 
faire: 

Faites  asseoir  vos  amis.  Make  your  friends  sit  down. 

Je  vous  en  ferai  souvenir.  I  shall  remind  you  of  it. 

a.  A  similar  omission  of  se  sometimes  occurs  after  laisser,  entendre, 
voir,  etc 

246.  Remarks.  The  reflexive  construction  is  much  com- 
moner in  French  than  in  English : — 

1.  It  often  translates  the  English  passive,  especially  when 
the  agent  is  not  specified  ; 

La  bourse  s'est  trouv^.  The  purse  has  been  found. 

Cela  se  raconte  partout.  That  is  being  told  everywhere. 

2.  Or  it  is  expressed  by  an  English  non-reflexive  verb,  gen- 
erally intransitive : 

S'arr^ter  ;  s'^crier ;  se  porter.  Stop ;  exclaim  ;  be  (of  health). 

S'asseoir;  se  hater;  se  tromper.  Sit  down  ;  hasten  ;  bo  mistaken. 

3.  Or  the  French  reflexive  -}-  a  preposition  has  the  value  of 
an  English  transitive : 

S'approcher  de ;  se  douter  de.  Approach  ;  suspect. 

S'attendre  k ;  se  fier  k.  Expect ;  trust. 

Se  passer  de ;  se  souvenir  de.  Do  without ;  recollect. 

247.  S'en  Alien    The  conjugation  of  s*en  aller,  *to  go 

away,'  presents  special  difficulty  : 

Peesent  Indicative.  Past  Indefinite  Indicative. 

/  go  away,  etc.  I  have  gone  (/  werU)  away,  etc. 

je  m'en  vais.  je  m'en  suisl 

tu  t'en  vas.  tu  t'en  es     faX\6{i 


il  s'en  va.  il  (elle)  s'en  est 

nous  nous  en  aliens.  nous  nous  en  sommes 

vous  vous  en  allez.  vous  vous  en  etes         }-all6(e)8. 

ila  s'en  vonu  ils  (elles)  s'en  sont 


176  THE  VERB.  [§§248-249 

Imperative.  Impebative  Negative. 

Go  away,   etc.  Do  not  go  away,  etc. 

va-t'en.  ne  t'en  va  pas. 

(qu'il  s'en  aille. )  (qu'il  ne  s'en  aille  pas. ) 

allons-nous-en.  ne  nous  en  allons  pas. 

allez-vous-en.  ne  vous  en  allez  pas. 

(qu'ils  s'en  aillent. )  (qu'ils  ne  s'en  aillent  pas. ) 

Further  examples : 

Est-ce  que  je  m'en  vais  ?  Us  ne  s'en  sont  pas  alles. 

Vous  en  allez- vous  ?  Ne  nous  en   sommes-nous  pas*  al- 

S'en  sont-elles  allies  ?  le(e)s  ? 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

248.  Conjug'ation.  An  impersonal  verb,  or  a  verb  used 
as  such,  is  one  conjugated,  in  the  third  singular  only,  with  the 
subject  il  =  •  it,'  *  there,'  used  indefinitely  and  absolutely,  e.g., 
tonner,  *  to  thunder ' : 

Indicative. 

Pbes.  n  tonne,  it  thunders.         Past  Indf.  H  a  tonnd,  it  has  thundered. 

Impf.  H  tonnait,  it  thundered.     Plupf.    II  avait  tonn6,  it  had  thundered. 

Past  Def.  11  tonna,  it  thundered.  Past  Ant.  11  eut  tonn6,  it  had  thundered. 

etc.,  etc.,  like  the  third  singular  of  donner. 

Note. — Apart  from  being  limited  to  the  third  singfular,  their  conjugation  does  not 
differ  from  that  of  ordinary  verbs.    Some  are  regular,  others  irregular. 

249.  Use  of  Impersonals.  1.  Verbs  denoting  natural 
phenomena  and  time  are  impersonal,  as  in  English  : 

11  tonne  ;  il  a  plu  ;  il  pleuvra.  It  thunders  ;  it  rained  ;  it  will  rain. 

II  a  gel^  hier  ;  il  d<^g61e.  It  froze  yesterday  ;  it  is  thawing. 

H  est  une  heure  ;  il  est  tard.  It  is  one  o'clock ;  it  is  late. 

Such  verbs  are : 

pleuvoir,  rain.  grfiler,  hail.  geler,  fruze. 

neiger,  snow.  6clairer,  lighten.  d6geler,  thaw. 

2.  Faire  = '  make,'  is  also  much  used  impersonally  to 
describe  weather,  temperature,  etc. : 


§§250-251]  IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  177 

Quel  temps  fait-il  ?  What  kind  of  weather  is  it  ? 

II  fait  beau  (temps)  ce  matin.  It  is  fine  (weather)  this  morning. 

II  a  fait  bien  froid  hier.  It  was  very  cold  yesterday. 

II  faisait  du  vent  aussi.  It  was  windy  too. 

Est-ce  qu'il  fera  obscur  ce  soir  ?         Will  it  be  dark  this  evening  ? 

Obs. :  Distinjruish  these  from  constructions  with  a  personal  subject :  '  Le  temps  est 
beau,'  *  The  weather  is  fine ' ;  '  L'eau  est  froide,' '  The  water  is  cold.' 

250.  Impersonal  avoir  and  etre.     1.  The  verb  avoir, 
preceded  by  y,  used  impersonally  =  '  there   is,'    *  there   are/ 

*  there  was/  '  there  were/  etc. : 

H  y  a.     II  y  a  eu.     Y  a-t-il  ?  There  is.    There  has  been.    Is  there? 

H  n'y  a  pas.     II  n'y  a  pas  eu.  There  is  not.    There  has  not  been. 

Y  a-t-il  eu  ?    N'y  a-t-il  pas  eu  ?  Has  there  been?  Has  there  not  been? 

Y  aura-t-il  ?    II  peut  y  avoir.  Will  there  be  ?  There  may  be. 

2.  II  est  (^tait,  etc.)  is  sometimes  used  for  11  y  a  in  this 
sense : 

II  est  des  hommes  qui  le  croient.      There  are  men  who  think  so. 

3.  II  y  a  =  *  there  is/  *  there  are/  is  distinguished  from 
VOila  =  *  there  is/  *  there  are.'     Voila  answers  the  question 

*  where  is*?/  'where  are*?/  and  makes  a  specific  statement 
about  an  object  to  which  attention  is  directed  by  pointing  or 
the  like,  while  il  y  a  does  not  answer  the  question  *  where  is?/ 

*  where  are  V  and  makes  a  general  statement. 

II  y  a  des  plumes  sur  la  table.  There  are  pens  on  the  table. 

Yoilk  les  plumes  sur  la  table.  There  are  the  pens  on  the  table. 

4.  Y   avoir    also    forms    idiomatic   expressions    of    time, 
reckoned  backwards,  and  of  distance  : 

lis  sont  arrives  il  y  a  trois  jours.  They  came  three  days  ago. 

II  y  avait  trois  jours  que  j'^tais  Ik.  I  had  been  there  three  days. 

Combien  y  a-t-il  d'ici  k  la  ville "?  How  far  is  it  to  the  city  ? 

II  y  a  dix  milles  d'ici  k  la  ville.  It  is  ten  miles  from  here  to  the  city. 

251.  Falloir  =  *be  necessary,' expresses  the  various  mean- 
ings of  *  must,'  *  be  obliged  to,'  *  have  to,'  *  need,'  as  follows ; 

1.  *  Must '  +  infinitive  =  falloir  +  que  and  subjunctive : 
12 


178  THE  VERB.  [§252 

II  faut  que  je  parte.  I  must  go. 

D  faudra  que  vous  restiez.  You  will  have  to  (be  obliged  to)  stay, 

2.  Or  the  subject  of  'must,'  etc.,  if  a  personal  pronoun,  may 
become  indirect  object  of  falloir  +  an  infinitive  : 

H  me  faudrait  raster.  I  should  be  obliged  to  remain. 

II  leur  faut  faire  cela.  They  must  do  that. 

II  lui  a  fallu  parler.  He  was  forced  (obliged)  to  speak. 

3.  The  infinitive  construction  without  indirect  object  is 
used  in  general  or  indefinite  statement : 

II  faut  faire  son  devoir.  One  must  do  one's  duty. 

II  ne  faut  pas  voler.  We  must  not  steal. 

4.  Falloir  +  an  indirect  object  and  a  substantive  signifies 
*  lack,'  '  need ' : 

H  faut  une  ardoise  k  Jean.  John  needs  a  slate. 

II  leur  faudra  cent  francs.  They  will  need  a  hundred  francs. 

5.  S'en  falloir  =' lack': 

II  s'en  faut  de  beaucoup  que  I'un    The  one  is  not  nearly  so  good  as  the 
vaille  I'autre.  other. 

252.  Other  Impersonals.      1.  Besides  faire  and  avoir, 

already  noted,  many  other  verbs  take  a  special  meaning  as 
impersonals : 

De  quoi  s'agit-il  ?  What  is  the  matter  ? 

II  est  souvent  arriv^  que,  etc.  It  has  often  happened  that,  etc. 

II  vaudra  mieux  ne  rien  dire.  It  will  be  better  to  say  nothing. 

II  y  va  de  ses  jours.  His  life  is  at  stake. 

II  se  peut  que  je  me  trompe.  It  may  be  that  I  art  mistaken. 

Obs. :  Compare  the  literal  meanings  :  Agir,  act,  aniver,  arrive,  valoir,  be  worth, 
aller,  go,  pouvoir,  be  able. 

2.  Many  verbs  may  stand  in  the  third  singidar  with  imper- 
sonal il  representing  a  logical  subject,  singular  or  plural, 
following  the  verb : 

H  viendra  un  meilleur  temps.  There  will  come  a  happier  time, 

n  en  reste  trois  livres.  There  remain  three  pounds  of  it. 

D  est  arriv6  des  messagers.  Messengers  have  arrived. 


§§253-256]      TENSES  of  the  indicative.  179 

253.  Omission  of  //.  II  is  understood  in  certain  phrases, 
such  as : 

Reste  k  savoir.  It  remains  to  be  seen. 

N'iraporte.  No  matter  (it  matters  not). 

Mieux  vaut  tard  que  jamais.  Better  late  than  never. 

THE  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

254.  Use  of  Indicative.  The  indicative  is  the  mood  of 
direct  or  indirect  assertion,  and  of  direct  or  indirect  inter- 
rogation. It  stands  both  in  principal  and  in  subordinate 
clauses,  both  affirmative  and  negative : 

Dieu  cr^a  le  monde.  God  created  the  world. 

Moise  dit  que  Dieu  cr6a  le  monde.     Moses  says  that  God  created  the 

world. 
Oi\  allez-vous  ?  Where  are  you  going  ? 

Dites-moi  oh  vous  allez.  Tell  me  where  you  are  going. 

Je  le  ferais,  si  je  pouvais.  I  should  do  so,  if  I  could. 

Notes. — 1.  It  should  be  noted  especially  that  the  indicative  is  regularly  the  mood  of 
indirect  discourse  and  of  '  if '  clauses. 

2.  When  the  verb  of  a  subordinate  clause  is  subjunctive,  the  mood  is  determined 
by  the  context,  and  not  simply  by  the  fact  that  the  clause  is  subordinate. 

TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE. 

25s  Periphrastic  Forms.  Such  forms,  so  common  in 
English,  are  not  used  in  French  : 

Je  parle.  I  speak  (am  speaking,  do  speak). 

H  a  ^crit.  He  has  written  (has  been  writing). 

II  disait.  He  was  saying  (used  to  say,  etc. ). 

256.  Hlliptical  Forms.  Ellipsis  of  part  of  a  verb  form 
is  common  in  English  ;  in  French  the  form  is  either  fully 
given  or  entirely  avoided  : 

J'irai. — Moi,  je  n'irai  pas.  I  shall  go. — I  shall  not  (go). 

II  a  promis  de  venir,  mais  il  n'est     He  promised  to  come,  but  he  did 
pas  venu.  not  (come). 


180  THE  VERB.  [§§257-258 

H  est  venu. — ^Vraiment!  He  has  come. — Has  he  !    (Indeed!) 

Vous  viendrez,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  You  will  come,  will  you  not  ? 

II  6tait  sorti,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  He  had  gone  out,  had  he  not  ? 

257.  Present  Indicative.     The  present  tense  is  used  : — 

1.  To  denote  what  is  happening,  including  the  habitual  and 
the  universally  true : 

Je  crois  qu'il  pleut.  I  think  it  is  raining.  *  ♦ 

II  se  leve  toujours  de  bon  matin.       He  always  rises  early. 
L'homme  propose  et  Dieu  dispose.     Man  proposes  and  God  disposes. 

2.  To  denote  what  has  happened  and  still  continues,  after 
il  y  a . . . que,  voici  (voila). • .  que,  depuis,  depuis  quand ?, 
depuis . . .  que : 

Depuis  quand  attendez-vous  ?  How  long  have  you  been  waiting  ? 

II  y  a  {or  voici,  voila)  trois  jours  I  have  waited  (I  have  been  waiting) 

que  j 'attends,  or  j 'attends  de-  for  three  days. 

puis  trois  jours. 

3.  Instead  of  a  past  tense  in  animated  narrative  : 

La  nuit  approche,  I'instant  arrive,     Night  draws  on,  the  moment  comes, 
Cesar  se  presente,  etc.  Caesar  appears,  etc. 

a.  This  use  is  much  commoner  than  in  EngUsh,  especially  side  by 
side  with  past  tenses. 

b.  C'est . . .  que  +  a  past  tense  =  *  was . . .  that ' : 

C'est  li  que  je  I'ai  vu.  It  was  there  that  I  saw  him. 

4.  Instead  of  a  future  in  familiar  style  : 

Nous  partons  demain  matin.  We  go  to-morrow  morning. 

5.  As  a  virtual  future  after  si  =  *  if ' : 

Je  serai  content,  si  vous  venez.         I  shall  be  glad,  if  you  (will)  come. 

258.  Imperfect  Indicative.  The  action  or  state  denoted 
by  the  imperfect  is  in  general  viewed  as  being  in  progress,  i.e., 
as  contemporaneous,  customary,  continued,  etc.,  and  it  is 
employed  as  follows  : — 

1.  To  denote  what  was  happening,  when  something  else 
happened  or  was  happening  : 


§259]  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE.  181 

n  ^tait  nuit,  quand  je  sortis.  It  was  night,  when  I  went  out. 

H  parlait,  pendant  que  je  chantais.    He  was  talking,  while  I  sang. 

2.  To  denote  what  used  to  happen  : 

H  se  levait  de  bon  matin.  He  used  to  rise  early. 

Je  parlais  souvent  de  cela.  I  often  spoke  (used  to  speak,  would 

speak)  of  that. 
Les  Romains  brulaient  leurs  morts.    The  Romans  were  accustomed  to 

burn  their  dead. 

3.  To  denote  what  continued  to  happen : 

Son  p^re  6tait  n^gociant  et  de-  His  father  was  a  merchant  and 
meurait  dans  cette  rue.  lived  in  this  street. 

4.  To  denote  what  had  happened  and  still  continued,  after 
il  y  a . . .  que,  voici  (voila) . .  •  que,  depuis,  depuis  quand  ?, 
depuis ...  que  (cf .  §  257,  2) : 

Je  le  disais  depuis  longtemps.  I  had  long  been  saying  so. 

Voili  un  an  que  je  le  disais.  I  had  been  saying  so  for  a  year. 

5.  In  indirect  discourse,  after  a  past  tense,  instead  of  the 
present : 

Je  croyais  qu'il  revenait.  I  thought  he  was  coming  back. 

Je  demandai  ou  il  6tait.  I  asked  where  he  was. 

But :  *  Oti  est-il  ? ',  demandai- je.        '  Where  is  he  ? ',  I  asked. 

6.  Regularly  in  an  *  if '  clause  when  the  *  result '  clause  is 
conditional : 

S'il  venait,  je  serais  content.  If  he  came,  I  should  be  glad. 

7.  Occasionally,  instead  of  the  conditional  anterior  in  condi- 
tional sentences : 

Si  je  ne  I'avais  pas  arrgt^,  il  torn-  Had  I  not  stopped  him  he  would 
bait  (=  serait  tomb^)  du  train.  have  fallen  from  the  train. 

8.  Sometimes  instead  of  the  past  definite  (§  260)  : 

Un  moment  apr^s,  le  p6re  A.lph^e  A  moment  afterwards,  Father  Al- 
so dressait,  marchait  k  grands  pheus  rose,  walked  about  with 
pas,  voilk  s'^criait-il,  etc.  great  strides,  there  cried  he,  etc. 

259.  Past  Indefinite.     The  past  indefinite  is  used :  — 


182  THE  VERB.  [§260 

1.  To  denote  what  has  happened  or  has  been  happening, 
equivalent  to  an  English  tense  with  *  have,'  reference  to  the 
present  being  implied : 

J'ai  fini  mon  ouvrage.  I  have  finished  my  work. 

L'avez-vous  vu  demi^rement  ?  Have  you  seen  him  lately? 

Je  I'ai  souvent  rencontr^.  I  have  often  met  him. 

J'ai  chant6  toute  la  matinee.  I  have  been  singing  all  morning. 

2.  In  familiar  style,  spoken  or  written,  to  denote  a  past 
event,  without  implied  reference  to  the  present,  or  a  succes- 
sion of  such  past  events  as  mark  the  progress  of  a  narrative, 
answering  the  question  *  what  happened  ^ '  or  *  what  happened 
next?'     For  narrative  in  the  literary  style,  see  §260  : 

Us  sont  arrives  ce  soir.  They  arrived  this  evening. 

Je  I'ai  vu  il  y  a  dix  ans.  I  saw  him  ten  years  ago. 

De  quoi  est-il  mort  ?  What  did  he  die  of  ? 

J'ai  quitt6  Rome  le  dix.    Puis  je  I  left  Rome  on  the  tenth.     Then  I 

suis  alle  voir  des  amis  a  Lyon,  visited  some  friends  at  Lyons,  I 

j'ai  passe  quelques  jours  a  Paris,  spent  some  days  in  Paris,  and  I 

et  je  suis  revenu  aLondres  hier.  came  back  to  London  yesterday. 

3.  Occasionally  instead  of  a  future  anterior : 

Attendez,  j'ai  bient6t  fini.  Wait,  I  shall  have  finished  soon. 

260.  Past  Definite.  The  past  definite  denotes  a  past 
event,  or  a  succession  of  such  past  events  as  mark  the  progress 
of  the  narrative,  answering  the  question  *what  happened?', 
or  *what  happened  next?'  Its  use  is  confined  to  literary 
or  "  book  "  French,  and  formal  public  address.  It  is  hardly 
ever  used  in  conversation  or  in  easy  correspondence : 

Dieu  cr4a  le  monde.  God  created  the  world. 

La  guerre  dura  sept  ans.  The  war  lasted  seven  years. 

On  forga  le  palais,  les  sc^l^rats  They  broke  into  the    palace,  the 

n'os^rent  pas  r^sister  longtemps  et  villains  did  not  dare  to  resist  long, 

ne  song^rent  qu'^  fuir.     Astarb^  and  only  thought  of  fleeing.     As- 

voulut  se  sauver  dans  la  foule,  tarb^  tried  to  escape  in  the  crowd, 

mais  un  soldat  la  reconnut;  elle  but  a  soldier  recognized  her;  she 

f  ut  prise.  was  captured. 


§261]  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE.  183 

a.  Some  verbs  have  a  special  force  in  the  past  definite : 
Avoir ;  j'eus.  To  have ;  I  received. 

Savoir ;  je  sus.  To  know ;  I  found  out  (learned). 

Connaitre ;  je  connus.  To  know  ;  I  realized. 

261.  Examples  of  Narrative.  1.  The  following  ex- 
amples illustrate  the  principal  uses  of  the  past  definite, 
imperfect,  past  indefinite,  and  historical  present,  in  the  literary 
narrative  style : 

Les  Turcs,  qui  cependant  entouraient  cette  maison  tout  embras^e, 
^nyaient  avec  une  admiration  melee  d'epouvante  que  les  Su^dois  n'en 
sortaient  point ;  mais  leur  ^tonnement  fut  encore  plus  grand  lorsqu'ils 
virent  ouvrir  les  portes,  et  le  roi  et  les  siens  fondre  sur  eux  en  d^sesp^r^s. 
Charles  et  ses  principaux  officiers  ^talent  armes  d'^p^es  et  de  pistolets : 
chacun  tira  deux  coups  k  la  fois  k  I'instant  que  la  porte  s'ouvrit ;  et 
dans  le  meme  clin  d'oeil,  jetant  leurs  pistolets  et  s'armant  de  leurs 
^p^s,  ils  firent  reculer  les  Turcs  plus  de  cinquante  pas ;  mais  le  moment 
d'apr6s  cette  petite  troupe  fut  entour^e :  le  roi,  qui  ^tait  en  bottes 
selon  sa  coutume,  s'embarrassa  dans  ses  ^perons,  et  tomba ;  vingt  et 
un  janissaires  se  jettent  aussitOt  sur  lui :  il  jette  en  I'air  son  ^p^e  pour 
s'^pargner  la  douleur  de  la  rendre ;  les  Turcs  remm^nent  au  quartier 
du  bacha. —  Voltaire. 

Stanislas  se  d^roba  un  jour  k  dix  heures  du  soir  de  I'arm^e  su^doise 
qu'il  commandait  en  Pom^ranie,  et  partit  avec  le  baron  Sparre,  qui  a 
6t€  depuis  ambassadeur  en  Angleterre  et  en  France,  et  avec  un  autre 
colonel :  il  prend  le  nom  d'un  Fran^ais,  nomm6  Haran,  alors  major  au 
service  de  Su6de,  et  qui  est  mort  depuis  commandant  de  Dantzick. — 
Voltaire. 

2.  So  nearly  identical  is  the  force  of  the  past  definite  and 
the  past  indefinite,  as  narrative  tenses,  that  they  are  often 
used  interchangeably,  as  in  the  following  extract,  taken  from 
a  newspaper : 

LoNDRES,  5  aoiit. — Hier  soir,  k  onze  heures  et  demie,  un  incendie 
a  6clat^  dans  I'ateher  de  composition  de  la  National  Press  Agency. 

Plusieurs  pompes  k  vapeur  arriv^rent  imm^diatement  sur  le  lieu  du 
sinistre,  et  I'incendie  s'^tendit  avec  une  telle  rapidity,  que  toute  la 
maison  a  6t6  compl^tement  d^truite. — Le  Matin, 


184  THE  VERB.  [§§262-263 

262.  Pluperfect  and  Past  Anterior.    1.  Both  denote 

what  had  happened,  like  the  Enghsh  pluperfect : 
Lorsque  je  I'avais  (eus)  fini.  When  I  had  finished  it. 

2.  The  pluperfect  is  of  much  commoner  occurrence  than  the 
past  anterior,  and  can  alone  be  used  after  si  = '  if,'  or  when 
custom,  continuance,  etc.,  is  implied  (but  of.  §§  258,  275,  b) : 

Si  je  I'avais  vu,  je  I'aurais  dit.  Had  I  seen  it,  I  should  have  said  so. 

J'avais  toujours  fini  avant  midi.       I  always  had  finished  before  noon. 

3.  The  past  anterior  denotes  what  had  happened  immedi- 
ately before  another  event.     It   is  rarely  used  except  aft^ 

conjunctions  of  time,  such  as  lorsque,  quand,  apr^s  que, 
aussit6t  que,  ne . . .  pas  plus  t6t . . .  que,  etc. : 

Apr6s  qu'il  eut  din^,  il  partit.  After  he  had  dined,  he  set  out. 

263.  Future.     The  future  is  used  : — 

1.  To  denote  what  will  happen  : 

Us  viendront  demain.  They  will  come  to-morrow. 

Je  les  verrai  bient6t.  I  shall  see  them  soon. 

Je  ne  sais  pas  s'il  viendra.  I  know  not  whether  he  will  come. 

a.  Distinguish  English  *  will '  of  futurity  from  *  will '  of  volition,  and 
from  •  will '  of  habitual  action  : 

II  ne  restera  pas.  He  will  not  stay. 

II  ne  veut  pas  rester.  He  will  not  stay. 

Ce  chasseur  teste  souvent  dans  les     That  hunter  will  often  remain  whole 

bois  pendant  des  mois  entiers.  months  in  the  woods. 

6.  Observe  the  following  commonly  occurring  forms : 
Ne  voulez-vous  pas  rester  ?  Will  you  not  stay  ? 

Voulez-vous  que  je  reste.  Shall  I  stay  ? 

Je  ne  resterai  pas.  I  shall  not  stay. 

2.  Regularly  in  a  subordinate  clause  of  implied  futurity ; 
Payez-le  quand  il  viendra.  Pay  him  when  he  comes. 
Faites  comme  vous  voudrez.  Do  as  you  please. 

Tant  que  je  vivrai.  As  long  as  I  live. 

3.  To  denote  probability,  conjecture,  or  possibility,  etc.  : 


§§264-265]      TENSES  of  the  indicative.  185 

La  nef  appartient  au  XII*  si^cle,    The  nave  belongs  to  the  12th  century, 
mais  le  choeur  sera  du  XV.  but  the  choir  is  probably  of  the  15th. 

4.    Sometimes  with  imperative  force  ; 

Tu  ne  tueras  point.  Thou  shalt  not  kill. 

Vous  voudrez  bien  m'^couter.  Be  good  enough  to  hear  me. 

a.  This  use  is  common  in  oflBcial  style  (edicts,  etc. ). 

264.  Future  Anterior.     The  future  anterior  is  used : — 

1.  To  denote  what  will  have  happened  : 

H  aura  bientOt  fini.  He  will  soon  have  done. 

2.  To  denote  implied  futurity  (cf.  §263,  2),  probability, 
conjecture,  or  possibility,  etc.  (cf.  §  263,  3) : 

Quand  vous  serez  rentr^  je  When  you  have  come  home,  I  shall 

sortirai.  go  out. 

Je  me  serai  tromp^.  I  must  have  made  a  mistake. 

265.  Conditional.  1.  The  main  use  of  the  conditional  is 
to  denote  result  dependent  on  condition,  i.e.,  what  would 
happen  in  case  something  else  were  to  happen : 

Je  serais  content,  s'il  venait.  I  should  be  glad,  if  he  came. 

a.  The  condition  on  which  the  result  would  depend  is  often  merely 
implied,  but  not  formally  stated  : 
H^isiter  serait  une  faiblesse.  To  hesitate  would  be  weakness. 

6.  Distinguish  English  'should'  of  duty,  etc.,  'would'  of  volition, 
and  '  would'  of  past  habit,  from  conditional  *  should '  and  '  would ' : 
Je  devrais  partir.  I  should  (ought  to)  set  out. 

II  ne  voulait  pas  4couter.  He  would  not  listen. 

J'allais  souvent  le  voir.  I  would  often  go  to  see  him. 

2.  It  corresponds  to  an  English  past  in  a  subordinate  clause 
of  implied  futurity  (cf.  §  263,  2) : 

Je  prendrais  ce  qui  resterait.  I  should  take  what  remained. 

3.  In  indirect  discourse,  it  denotes  what  was  once  future 
and  is  now  regarded  as  past,  i.e.,  the  original  future  of  the 


186  THE  VERB.  [§§266-267 

assertion  or  question  becomes  a  conditional  when  in  a  clause 

subordinate  to  a  verb  in  a  past  tense : 

Je  croyais  qu'il  pleuvrait.  I  thought  it  would  rain. 

A-t-il  dit  s'il  le  ferait  ?  Did  he  say  whether  he  would  do  so? 

But :  *  Je  le  ferai,'  dit-il.  *  I  shall  do  so,'  said  he. 

4.  It  is  used  in  statement  or  request  expressed  with  defer- 
ence or  reserve  : 

Je  le  croirais  au  moins.  I  should  think  so  at  least. 

Auriez-vous  la  bonte  d'y  aller?  Would  you  have  the  kindness  to  go? 

Cela  ne  serait  jamais  vrai.  That  never  could  (can)  be  true. 

Je  ne  saurais  vous  le  dire.  I  cannot  tell  you. 

5.  It  sometimes  denotes  probability,  conjecture,  or  possi- 
bility, etc.,  in  exclamations  and  questions  (cf.  §  263,  3) : 

Serait-il  vrai  qu'il  I'a  dit  ?  Can  it  be  true  that  he  said  so  ? 

Serait-il  possible  ?  Can  (could)  it  be  possible  ? 

6.  It  sometimes  denotes  concession  after  quand,  quand 
m^me,  or  with  que  : 

Quand  (meme)  il  me  tuerait,  etc.       Even  if  he  should  kill  me,  etc. 
Vous  me  le    jureriez  que  je  ne    Even  if  you  swore  it  to  me,  I  should 
vous  croirais  pas.  not  believe  you. 

7.  It  is  used  to  give  the  substance  of  hearsay  information : 
A  ce  qu'on  dit,  le  roi  serait  malade.     By  what  they  say,  the  king  is  ill. 

266.  Conditional  Anterior.  Its  uses  are  precisely 
parallel  with  those  of  the  conditional  (§  265)  ;  it  denotes  what 
would  have  happened,  etc.,  etc. : 

Je  serais  parti,  s'il  ^tait  venu.  I  should  have  gone,  had  he  come. 

Je  partirais  d6s  que  je  I'aurais  vu.  I  should  go  when  I  had  seen  him. 

Selon  les  joumaux,  la  guerre  se  According  to  the  newspapers,  war 
serait  d^claree  hier  soir.  was  declared  last  evening. 

267.  Imperative  Mood.  It  is  used  in  general  as  in 
English  : 

Lisez-le.     Ne  le  lisez  pas.  Read  it.     Do  not  read  it. 

Allons-nous-en  k  present.  Let  us  go  away  now. 

Veuillez  m'6couter.  Be  good  enough  to  hear  me. 


§§268-269]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  187 

a.  The  first  plural  sometimes  serves  instead  of  the  lacking  first 
singular : 

Soyons  digne  de  ma  naissance.  Let  me  be  worthy  of  my  birth. 

E^fl^chissons  un  moment.  Let  me  think  a  moment. 

b.  The  imperatives  va,  allons,  allez,  voyons,  often  have  special 
idiomatic  force : 

Allonsdonc!  Allons,  du  courage  !     Nonsense  !  Come,  courage  ! 
J'en  suis  content,  allez  I  I  am  glad  of  it,  I  can  assure  you ! 

Voyons,  que  pensez-vous  ?  Come  now,  what  do  you  think  ? 

c.  An  imperative  perfect  is  rare  : 

Ayez  fini  votre  tache  ce  soir.  Have  your  task  done  to-night. 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

268.  General  Function.  The  subjunctive  denotes,  in 
general,  what  is  viewed  as  being  desirable  or  undesirable, 
uncertain,  contingent,  or  the  like,  and  usually  stands  in  a 
subordinate  clause. 

269.  Subjunctive  in  Noun  Clause.  The  subjunctive 
is  used  in  a  clause  introduced  by  que  and  serving  as  logical 
subject  or  as  object  of  a  verb  : — 

1.  After  expressions  of  desiring  (including  willing,  wishing, 
preferring)  and  avoiding : 

Je  desire  (veux)  qu'il  parte.  I  desire  (wish)  him  to  go. 

Voulez-vous  que  je  reste  ?  Do  you  wish  me  to  (shall  I)  stay  ? 

Je  souhaite  qu'il  ait  du  succfes.  I  wish  that  he  may  have  success. 

II  pr^f^re  que  vous  restiez.  He  prefers  that  you  should  stay. 

Evitez  qu'il  ne  vous  voie.  Avoid  his  seeing  you. 

Such  are : 

umer,  like.  iviter,  avoid.  souhaiter,  roigh. 

aimer  mieux,  prefer.  pr6f6rer,  prefer.  il  me  tarde,  /  lon^. 

avoir  envie,  be  desirous.  prendre  garde,  take  vouloir,  wiU,  vnsh. 

d^sirer,  desire,  toish.  care  (lest).  eta 

a.  Prendre  garde  requires  ne  in  the  subjunctive  clause ;    so  also, 
6viter  generally. 
Prends  garde  que  cela  ne  se  fasse.     Take  care  lest  that  happen. 


188 


THE  VERB. 


[§269 


2.  After  expressions  of  commanding  (including  requesting, 
exhorting),  forbidding,  consenting : 
Vous  ordonnez  que  je  m'en  aille.       You  order  me  to  go. 


Je  demande  que  vous  me  payiez. 
Dis-leur  qu'ils  soient  prets. 
Le  m^decin  defend  que  je  sorte. 
Je  consens  que  cela  se  fasse. 

Such  are : 


I  ask  that  you  should  pay  me. 
Tell  them  to  be  ready. 
The  doctor  forbids  me  to  go  out. 
I  consent  that  that  be  done. 


demander,  ask. 
emp^cher,  hinder. 
exhorter,  exhort. 
exiger,  exact. 
laisser,  aUow. 
s'opposer,  oppose. 
ordonner,  order. 


permettre,  permit. 
prier,  beg,  ask. 
Bouffrir,  suffer. 
supplier,  beg,  pray. 
trouver  n&ture\,findnaturaL 
veiller,  take  care. 
etc. 


admettre,  admit. 
agr^er,  permit. 
avoir  soin,  take  care. 
conjurer,  implore. 
oonsentir,  consent. 
convenir,  agree. 
d6f  endre,  forbid. 

So  also,  dire,  tell,  6crire,  write,  entendre,  mean,  pr^tendre,  intend,  when 
denoting  command. 

a.  The  future  or  conditional  often  stands  after  arreter,  commander^ 
decider,  d6cr6ter,  etc. ,  especially  when  the  subject  is  a  word  denoting 
final  authority,  such  as  cour,  roi,  etc.  : 

Le  roi  d^cr^te  qu'il  sera  pendu.     The  king  decrees  that  he  shall  be  hanged. 

b.  The  subjunctive  after  empecher  usually  has  ne : 
Emp^chez  qii'il  ne  sorte.  Prevent  his  going  out. 

3.  After   expressions   of   judgment   or    opinion   involving 

approval  or  disapproval : 

J'approuve  qu'il  revienne.  I  approve  of  his  coming  back. 

II  m^rite  qu'on  le  craigne.  He  deserves  to  be  feared. 

1\  vaut  mieux  que  vous  restiez.  It  is  better  for  you  to  stay. 

H  faudra  qu'il  parte  demain.  He  will  have  to  go  to-morrow. 

Such  are : 

approuver,  approve.  6tre  indigne,  be  unworthy,  trouTer  mauvais,  disapprove. 

avoir  int6r6t,  be  interested,  juger  k  propos,  think  fit.  trouver  juste,  think  just. 

h^Taex,  blame.  loner,  praise.  trouver  injuste.t^inibunTttrt. 

d^sapprouver,  disapprove.  m6riter,  deserve.  valoir,  be  worthy. 

6tre  d'avis,  be  of  opinion.  tenir  {k  ce  que),  insist.  etc. 

6tre  digne,  be  worthy.  trouver  bon,  approve. 

So  also,  a  large  number  of  impersonals  of  like  force : 


§269] 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


189 


II  convient,  it  is  fitting. 
c'est  assez,  it  is  eno%igh. 

ilest,  t«M 

+k  propos,  proper. 

+bien,  well. 

+bon,  good. 

•4-  convenable ,  fitting. 

+e88entiel,  essential. 

+ii  d^irer,  to  be  desired. 


+ facile,  easy. 

4- important,  important. 

-findispensable,  indispens 

able. 
+jU8te,  just. 
4- nature!,  natural. 
+n6ce88aire,  necessary. 
+k  souhaiter,  to  be  unshed. 
+(tout)  simple,  (quite)  simple. 


+temps,  time. 
il  faut,  it  is  necessary,  must. 
11  importe,  it  is  important. 
11  peut  se  faire,  it  may  be. 
11  Buffit,  it  suffices. 
il  vaut  mieux,  it  is  better. 
etc.,  and  their  opposites. 


4.  After  expressions  of  emotion  or  sentiment,  such  as  joy, 
sorrow,  anger,  shame,  wonder,  fear : 

fites-voua  content  qu'il  soit  ici  ?        Are  you  glad  he  is  here  ? 

I  regret  that  he  has  gone. 
He  is  angry  at  your  blaming  him. 
He  is  ashamed  that  you  know  it. 
I  wonder  he  is  not  ashamed. 
I  fear  he  ha3  said  too  much. 


Je  regrette  qu'il  soit  parti. 
n  est  fach6  que  vous  le  bltoiiez. 
n  a  honte  que  vous  le  sachiez. 
Je  m'^tonne  qu'il  n'ait  pas  honte. 
tTai  peur  qu'il  n'ait  trop  dit. 

Such  are : 


admirer,  be  astonished. 
s'aflSiger,  grieve. 
avoir  honte,  be  ashamed. 
avoir  crainte,  fear. 
avoir  peur,  fear. 
oraindre,  fear. 
d^plorer,  deplore. 
c'eat,  it  is.... 
+un  bonheur,  fortunate. 
+dommage,  a  pity. 
+une  honte,  a  shame. 
+honteux,  a  shame. 
+piti6,  a  pity. 

U  eat,  it  is 

+ourieux,  strange. 


+4tonnant,  astonishing. 
+f§loheux,  annoying. 
+heureux,  fortunate. 
enrager,  be  enraged. 
s'^tonner,  be  astonished. 
6tre,  be.... 
+afflig6,  grieved. 
+bien  aise,  very  glad. 
+charm^,  delighted. 
+content,  glad. 
+d68ol6,  very  sorry. 
4-6tonn6,  astonished. 
+f4ch6,  sorry,  angry. 
+heureux,  happy. 
+indi£^^,  indignant. 


+ joyeux,  glad. 
-f  mteontent,  displeased, 
+8ati8fait,  satisfied. 
+8urpri8,  surprised. 
+  triste,  sad. 

se  facher,  be  sorry,  angry, 
se  plaindre,  complain. 
redouter,  fear. 
regretter,  regret. 
86  r^jouir,  rejoice. 
86  repentir,  repent. 
rougir,  blush. 
Boupirer,  sigh. 
trembler,  tremble. 
etc. 


a.  When  it  is  feared  something  will  happen  the  subjunctive  has  ne ; 
when  it  is  feared  something  will  not  happen  the  subjunctive  has  ne .  .  . 
pas ;  when  the  expression  of  fearing  is  negative,  or  interrogative,  or 
conditional,  ne  is  usually  omitted  ;  with  double  negation  ne . . .  pas 
stands  in  both : 

Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne.  I  fear  he  will  come. 

Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne  pas.  I  fear  he  will  not  come. 

Je  ne  crains  pas  qu'il  vienne.  I  do  not  fear  he  will  come. 

Craignez-vous  qu'il  vienne  ?  Do  you  fear  he  will  come  ? 


190  THE  VERB.  [§269 

Ne  craignez-vous  pas  qu'il  ne  vienne?    Do  you  not  fear  he  will  come  ? 
Si  je  craignais  qu'il  vint.  If  I  feared  he  would  come. 

Je  ne  crains  pas  qu'il  ne  vienne  pas.     I  do  not  fear  he  will  not  come. 

6.  After  expressions  of  emotion  or  sentiment  (except  fear),  which 
admit  de  after  them,  de  ce  que  +  indicative  may  be  used  : 
J'ai  honte  de  ce  qu'il  a  6chou^.  I  am  ashamed  that  he  failed. 

5.  After  expressions  of  doubt,  denial,  despair,  ignorance  or 
very  slight  probability : 

II  doute  que  je  sois  loyal.  He  doubts  that  (whether)  I  am  honest. 

Je  nie  que  cela  soit  vrai.  I  deny  that  that  is  true. 

II  est  rare  que  vous  ayez  tort.        You  are  rarely  in  the  wrong. 

Such  are : 

con  tester,  dispute.  +ta,vix,  false.  de  (i)  quoi  sert-il?,  of  what 

d^sesp^rer,  despair.  +impo8sible,  impossible.  use  is  it} 

diaconvenir,  deny.  +pos8ibIe,  possible.  il  ne  sert  de  (k)  rien,  it  is  qf 

dissimuler.  not  confess.  +rare,  rare.  no  use. 

Be  dissimuler,  be  hidden,  il  s'en  faut,  there  is  wanting,    il  se  peut,  it  may  he. 

douter,  dmubt.  ignorer,  not  know.  il  ne  se  peut  pas,  it  cannot  be. 

11  est,  it  is...  nier,  deny.  il  semble,  it  seems. 

+douteux,  doubtful.  etc. 

a.  Douter  si  ( =  *  if,'  *  whether ')  requires  the  indicative  : 

H  doute  si  je  suis  loyal.  He  doubts  if  (whether)  I  am  honest. 

b.  II  semble  regularly  has  the  subjunctive,  since  it  indicates  slight 
probability  as  distinguished  from  il  parait=*it  appears,'  *is  evident,* 
and  il  me  semble  =  *  it  appears  to  me '  (personal  conviction) : 

II  semble  que  vous  me  craig^niez.     It  seems  that  you  fear  me. 
II  me  semble  (il  parait)  que  vous     It  seems  to  me  (it  appears)  that  you 
me  craig^ez.  fear  me. 

c.  Verbs  of  doubt  and  denial  used  negatively  or  interrogatively  regu- 
larly require  ne  in  the  subjunctive  clause  : 

Je  ne  nie  pas  que  je  ne  le  sois.  I  do  not  deny  that  I  am  such. 

d.  I gnorer  + negative  =  *  know  well,'  and  hence  takes  indicative : 

Je  n'ignore  pas  qu'il  a  menti.  I  know  well  he  has  lied. 

NOTB.— Peut-6tre  que,  perhaps,  and  sans  doute  que,  doubtless,  require  the 
indicative. 

6.  After  expressions  of  perceiving,  thinking,  knowing, 
declaring,  resulting,  but  only  when  uncertainty  or  doubt  is 


§269] 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


191 


implied  by  negation,  interrogation,  or   condition;   otherwise 
the  indicative  : 


Verra-t-on  que  j'aie  pleur^  ? 
Je  ne  crois  pas  que  ce  soit  lui. 
Esperez-vous  qu'il  r^ussisse  ? 
Je  ne  suis  pas  sur  qu'il  vienne. 
Si  je  pr^tendais  qu'il  eut  tort. 
But :  Je  crois  que  c'est  lui. 
J'espere  qu'il  reussira. 

Such  are : 


Will  they  see  that  I  have  wept  ? 

I  do  not  think  that  that  is  he. 

Do  you  hope  he  will  succeed  ? 

I  am  not  sure  he  will  come. 

If  I  claimed  that  he  was  wrong. 

I  think  it  is  he. 

I  hope  he  will  succeed. 


ftflSimer,  affirtn. 
s'apercevoir,  perceive. 
apprendre,  learn,  hear. 
assurer,  assure. 
s'attendre,  expect. 
avertir,  VMirn. 
avouer,  declare. 
oonclure,  conclude. 
connaitre,  recognize. 
oroire,  believe,  think. 
d^larer,  declare. 
deviner,  guess. 
dire,  say,  tell. 
86  douter,  suspect. 
62rire,  vrrite. 
entendre  dire,  h^ar  said. 


esp^rer,  hope. 
6tre  certain,  be  certain. 
6tre  persuad^  be  persuaded. 
fitre  Bdr,  be  sure. 
se  figurer,  imagine. 
se  flatter,  flatter  one's  self. 
imaginer,  imagine. 
s'imaginer,  imagine. 
juger,  judge,  think. 
jurer,  declare. 
oublier,  forget. 
penser,  think. 
persuader,  persuade. 
pressentir,  forebode. 
pr^tendre,  assert,  claim. 
pr6venir,  forewarn. 


pr^voir,  foresee. 
promettre,  promise. 
se  rappeler,  recollect. 
reconnaitre,  acknotoledgt, 
remarquer,  remark. 
r^p6ter,  repeat 
r^pondre,  ansvfer, 
savoir,  know. 
sentir,  feel,  notice. 
soutenir,  maintain. 
se  souvenir,  recollect. 
supposer,  suppose. 
trouver,  firui,  think. 
voir,  see. 
etc. 


So  also,  a  number  of  impersonals  of  like  force : 

+  Evident,  evident.  +BtLr,  sure. 

+d6montr6,  demonstrated.  +vraisemblable,  probo&Itf. 

+incontestable,  indisputable,  il  r^sulte,  it  follows. 

■+  probable,  probable.  il  me  semble,  it  seem*  to  m*. 


ils'ensuit,  it  follows. 
11  est  &vir&,  it  is  stated, 
ilest,  it  is... 
+oertain,  certain. 
+clair,  clear. 

a.  Negative  question  usually  imphes  affirmation ;  hence  the  indicative : 
Ne^trouves-tu  pas  qu'il  est  beau  ?      Don't  you  think  he  is  handsome  ? 

6.  When  what  the  speaker  regards  as  fact  follows  the  negative  or 
conditional  clause,  or  when  a  person  is  questioned  as  to  his  knowledge 
of  what  is  regarded  as  fact,  the  indicative  stands : 

II  ne  croit  pas  que  je  suis  ici.  He  does  not  believe  I  am  here. 

S*!!  savait  que  tu  es  ici.  If  he  knew  you  were  here. 

Savez-vous  qu'il  est  arrive  ?  Do  you  know  that  he  has  come? 


192  THE  VERB,  [§270 

c.  II  me  semble  +  negation  has  subjunctive;  with  interrogation + 
negation  the  indicative : 

II  ne  me  semble  pas  qu'il  soit  fou.       It  does  not  seem  to  me  he  is  mad. 
Ne  vous  semble-t-il  pas  qu'il  est  fou?    Does  it  not  seem  to  you  he  is  mad? 

d.  A  preceding  dependent  clause  with  this  class  of  verbs  always  has 
the  subjunctive  : 

Qu'il  ait  ^chou^,  je  le  sals  That  he  has  failed,  I  know. 

NoTB.— For  the  choice  between  que  clause  and  infinitive  see  §  283. 

270.  Subjunctive  in  Adjectival  Clause.  The  sub- 
junctive is  used  as  follows  in  clauses  introduced  by  a  relative 
pronoun  : — 

1.  When  purpose  regarding  Ijhe  antecedent,  or  unattained 
result  is  implied  : 

Montrez-moi  un  chemin  qui   con-  Show    me    a    way    which    leads    to 

duise  k  la  science.  knowledge. 

Je  cherche  un  endroit  oh.  je  sois  en  I  seek   a   place  where   I   may  be  in 

paix.  peace. 

a.     The  indicative,  however,  is  used  to  express  what  is  regarded  as 
fact  or  certain  result : 
Montrez-moi  le  chemin  qui  con-     Show  me  the  road  which  leads  to 

duit  k  la  ville.  the  town. 

J'irai  ou  je  serai  libre.  I  shall  go  where  I  shall  be  free. 

2.  When  the  principal  clause  contains  general  negation, 
interrogation  implying  negative  answer,  or  condition  (all  of 
which  imply  non-existence  of  the  antecedent) : 

H  n'a  pas  de  raison  qui  vaille.  He  has  no  reason  worth  anything. 

As-tu  un  seul  ami  qid  soit  fiddle  ?  Have  you  one  friend  who  is  true  ? 

Bi  j'ai  un  ami  qui  soit  fidele  c'est  If  I  have  one  friend  who  is  true,  it 
lui.  is  he.  1 

a.  General  negation  is  sometimes  merely  implied  : 

H  y  a  peu  de  gens  qui  le  sachent.     There  are  few  people  who  know  it. 

b.  When  the  negation  is  not  general,  or  when  the  interrogation  does 
not  imply  negative  answer,  the  indicative  stands  : 

Ce  n'est  pas  vous  que  je  crains.  It  is  not  you  that  I  fear. 

N*est-ce  point  rm  songe  que  je  vois  !    Is  it  not  a  dream  that  I  see  I 


§271]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  193 

e.  In  a  negative  relative  clause  ne,  not  *  ne . . .  pas,'  is  used  when  the 
principal  clause  is  negative  or  implies  negation  : 
En  est-il  un  seul  qui  ne  tremble  ?      Is  there  one  who  does  not  tremble  ? 

3.  When  the  antecedent  is  qualified  by  a   superlative,  or 

by  seul,  unique,  premier,  dernier  (all  with  superlative 
force)  : 

C'est  le  meilleur  ami  que  j'aie.  He  is  the  best  friend  that  I  have. 

Cest  le  seul  ami  que  j'aie.  He  is  the  only  friend  I  have. 

a.  What  is  stated  unreservedly  as  fact  requires  the  indicative : 
Cest  la  seule  chose  qu'il  a  dite.         It  is  the  only  thing  he  said. 

4.  With  concessive  force  in  compound  relative  and  indefinite 
clauses  (  =  *  whoever,'  *  whatever,'  etc.) : 

Quoi  que  vous  fassiez.  Whatever  you  do. 

Qui  qu'on  y  puisse  61ire.  Whosoever  may  be  elected  to  it. 

Qui  que  tu  sois,  parle.  Whoever  you  are,  speak  I 

Quelles  que  soient  vos  raisons.  Whatever  be  your  reasons. 

271.  Subjunctive  in  Adverbial  Clause.    The  subjunc- 
tive is  used  in  clauses  of  adverbial  force,  as  follows  : — 

1.  After  conjunctions  of  time  before  which  or  up  to  which 
(avant  que,  en  attendant  que,  jusqu'^  ce  que) : 

Dis-le-lui,  avant  qu'il  parte.  Tell  it  to  him,  before  he  goes. 

Asseyez-vous,  en  attendant  qu'il    Sit  down  until  he  comes  back. 

revienne. 
Pers^verez    jusqu'k   ce   que  vous    Persevere  till  you  have  succeeded. 

ayez  r^ussi. 

a.  Jusqu'k  ce  que  may  have  the  indicative,  when  referring  to  com- 
pleted past  event : 
II  y  resta  jnsqn'k  ce  que  je  revins.       He  remained  till  I  came  back. 

2.  After  conjunctions  of  purpose  or  result  (afin  que,  pour 
que,  de  crainte  que,  de  peur  que): 

J'6cris  ceci  afin  que  (pour  que)    I  write  this  in  order  that  you  may 

vous  sachiez  la  v^rit^.  know  the  truth. 

Je  le  tins  de  crainte  qu'il  ne  torn-    I  held  him  for  fear  he  should  fall. 

Ut. 
13 


194  THE  VERB.  [§271 

a.  So  also,  de  sorte  que,  en  sorte  que,  de  telle  sorte  que,  de  fagon 
que,  de  mani^re  que,  tel. .  .quei  tellement. .  .que,  when  denoting  pur- 
pose, but  not  result : 

Agis  de  sorte  que  tu  r^ussisses.         Act  in  such  a  way  as  to  succeed. 
But :  J'ai  agi  de  sorte  que  j'ai  r^ussi.    I  acted  so  that  I  succeeded. 

3.  After  conjunctions  of  condition  (en  cas  Que,  au  cas 

que,  a  moins  que . . .  ne,  pourvu  que,  suppose  que,  en 
supposant  que) : 

Je  viendrai  au  cas  que  je  sois  I  shall  come  in  case  I  am  free  to- 
libre  demain,  ou  i  moins  que  morrow,  or  unless  I  am  detained, 
je  ne  sois  retenu. 

a.  After  si  =  *if,'  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  stands  exceptionally 
(§275,  b). 

b.  The  present  subjunctive  sometimes  expresses  condition : 
Vienne  I'ennemi,  il  s'enfuit.  If  the  enemy  comes,  he  flees. 

c.  A  (la)  condition  que  takes  indicative,  conditional,  or  subjunctive : 
Je  lui  donne  I'argent  k  (la)  condi-     I  give  him  the  money  on  condition 

tion  qu'il  partira  (or  parte).  that  he  will  go. 

NoTB.— Dans  le  cas  oii,  au  cas  oil  usually  have  conditional:  'Au  cas  oh  cela 
BOrait  vrai,' '  In  case  that  should  be  true.' 

4.  After  conjunctions  of  concession  (quoique,  bien  que, 
encore  que,  nonobstant  que,  soit  que . . .  soit  que  or  ou 
que,  pour  (si)  peu  que,  si  tant  est  que,  malgr^  que) : 

Bien  qu'il  soit  malade,  il  sortira.        Although  he  is  ill,  he  will  go  out. 
Pour  peu  qu'il  fut  malade,  il  se    If    he  were  ever  so  little  ill,   he 
croyait  mourant.  thought  himself  dying. 

a.  The  present  subjunctive  with  que  sometimes  has  concessive  force  : 
Qu'il  perde  ou  gagne,  il  partira.        Though  he  lose  or  win,  he  will  go. 

b.  The  use  of  a  subjunctive  after  adverbial  quelque  (tout,  si,  etc.)  + 
que  =  *  however '  depends  on  the  same  principle  : 

Quelque  grand  que  vous  soyez.  However  great  you  may  be. 

Si  brave  qu'il  se  croie.  However  brave  he  thinks  himself. 

c.  Quand  (meme)  used  concessively  sometimes  takes  the  pluperfect 
subjunctive  for  the  conditional  anterior  (cf.  §265,  6) : 

Quand  (mSme)  il  m'eut  dit  cela.        Even  if  he  had  told  me  that. 


§272-273]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  195 

5.  After  conjunctions  of  negative  force  (non  que,  non  pas 
que,  loin  que,  sans  que) : 

II  partit  sans  que  je  le  susse.       He  went  away  without  my  knowing  it. 

6.  After  que  replacing  any  conjunction  requiring  the  sub- 
junctive, and  also  after  que  replacing  si  =  '  if  ' : 

Venez  que  ( =  afin  que,  pour  que)    Come,  that  I  may  see  you. 

je  vous  voie. 
Si  je  vais  et  que  je  le  voie.  If  I  go,  and  if  I  see  him. 

272.  Subjunctive  in  Principal  Clause.  The  subjunc- 
tive is  sometimes  used  in  principal  clauses,  as  follows  : — 

1.  Either  with  or  without  que  to  denote  what  is  desired, 
etc.  : 

Ainsi  soit-il !    Vive  le  roi  I  So  be  it !    (Long)  live  the  king  I 

Pldt  k  Dieu  qu'il  en  fiit  ainsi !  Would  to  God  it  were  so  ! 

Qu'il  parte  tout  de  suite.  Let  him  go  at  once. 

Je  meure,  si  je  mens  !  May  I  die,  if  I  am  lying  ! 

Le  croie  qui  voudra  !  Let  him  believe  it  who  will 

a.  Que  followed  by  the  third  person  present  subjunctive  regularly 
serves  as  an  imperative ;  so  also,  sometimes,  the  first  singular : 
Qu'il  parte.  Let  him  go. 

Que  je  vous  entende.  Let  me  hear  you. 

NoTB.— This  construction,  as  also  those  without  que,  may  be  explained  by  ellipsis  of 
some  expression  of  desire,  command,  etc.  (§  269,  1,  2). 

2.  The  present  subjunctive  first  singular  of  savoir  is 
sometimes  used  to  denote  modified  assertion : 

Je  ne  sache  rien  de  plus  beau.  I  know  nothing  finer. 

3.  The  pluperfect  subjunctive  stands  exceptionally  for  con- 
ditional anterior  in  a  '  result  *  clause  (cf.  §  275,  b): 

S'il  eiit  (or  avait)  su  cela,  il  ne    If  he  had  known  that,  he  would  not 
I'eiit  {or  aurait)  pas  dit.  have  said  it. 

273.  Tense  Sequence.  The  tense  of  the  subjunctive  is 
usually  determined  by  the  tense  of  the  finite  verb  in  the 
governing  clause,  as  follows: — 


196  THE  VERR  [§273 

1.  A  present  (including  present  subjunctive  and  imper- 
ative) or  a  future,  in  the  governing  clause,  requires  the  present 
subjunctive  in  the  governed  clause  : 

Je  doute               "j  I  doubt  that  (whether)  he  will  come. 

Quoique  je  doute  I  ,.,    .               Though  I  doubt  that  he  will  come. 

Doutez                  j  ^                          Doubt  that  he  will  come. 

Je  douterai          J  I  shall  doubt  that  he  will  come. 

2.  Any  other  tense  than  the  above  (i.e.,  an  imperfect,  past 
definite,  conditional,  etc.)  requires  the  imperfect  subjunctive  : 
Je  doutais  ^  I  doubted  that(  whether )he  would  come. 
Quoique  je  doutasse  I       vi   «  4.    Though  I  doubted  that  he  would  come. 
Je  doutai                    |  I  doubted  that  he  would  come 

Je  douterais  J  I  should  doubt  that  he  would  come. 

3.  Compound  tenses  follow  the  same  rules,  the  auxiliary 
being  reckoned  as  the  verb : 

J'ai  dout^  (quoique  j'aie  dout^,  I    have  doubted    (though  I    have 

j'aurai  dout6)  qu'il  vienne  or  soit  doubted,  I  shall  have  doubted)  that 

venu.  he  will  come  or  has  come. 

J'avais  dout^  (j'eus  dout^,  quoique  I  had   doubted    (I    had    doubted, 

j'eusse     doute,    j'aurais    doute)  though  I  had   doubted,    I   should 

qu'il  vint  or  fut  venu.  have  doubted)  that  he  would  come 

or  had  come. 

Obs. :  As  appears  from  the  above,  the  subjunctive  simple  tenses  express  uncompleted 
event,  and  the  compound  tenses  completed  event,  with  reference  to  the  time  of  the 
governing  verb. 

4.  The  following  exceptional  cases  depend  mainly  on  the 
sense  of  the  context : 

a.  The  sequence  after  the  past  indefinite  depends  upon  its  value  as  a 
present  past  or  as  a  past  (§259,  1,  2) : 

J'ai  doute  qu'il  vienne  (soit  v. ).        I  have  doubted  that  he  will  (has)  c. 
J'ai  dout^  qu'il  vint  (fut  venu).         I  doubted  that  he  would  (had)  come. 

b.  Exceptionally  after  verbs  of  saying,  etc. ,  a  governing  present  may 
take  a  past  subjunctive  and  vice  versd : 

Je  ne  dis  pas  qu'il  fut  k  bl^mer.        I  do  not  say  he  was  to  blame. 
n  ne  croyait  pas  qu'il  y  ait  un    He  did  not  beUeve  there  is  a  God. 
Dieu. 


§§274-275]  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES.  197 

c.  In  a  relative  clause  a  past  indefinite  may  stand  for  a  pluperfect : 
n  portait  cet  habit  la  seule  fois    He  was  wearing  that  coat  the  only 

que  je  I'aie  vu.  time  that  I  saw  him. 

d.  The  conditional  of  modified  assertion  (§  265,  4),  being  virtually  a 
present,  is  commonly  followed  by  the  present  subjunctive  : 

Je  desirerais  que  vous  veniez.  I  should  like  you  to  come, 

n  faudrait  qu'il  s'en  aille.  He  would  have  to  go. 

e.  The  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive,  with  the  force  of  an 
English  conditional,  may  follow  any  tense : 

II  n'y  a  pas  de  rang  qu'elle  ne  pfit    There  is  no  rank  she  could  not  hold, 

tenir. 
Je  doute  qu'il  jou4t  (eut  jou^),     I  doubt  that  he  would  play  (would 

8*11  avait  (avait  eu)  de  I'argent.         have  played),  if  he  had  (had  had) 

money. 

CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES. 

274.  Typical  Form.  A  conditional  sentence  consists 
regularly  of  two  parts :  the  condition,  introduced  by  si  = '  if,' 
and  the  result : 

Si  j'avais  le  temps,  j'irais  k  B.  If  I  had  time,  I  should  go  to  B. 

a.  The  condition  may,  of  course,  either  precede  or  follow  the  result : 
Irez-vous  k  B.,  s'il  pleut  ?  Will  you  go  to  B.,  if  it  rains  ? 
S'il  ne  fait  pas  beau,  je  n'irai  pas.       If  it  is  not  fine,  I  shall  not  go. 

b.  The  condition  is  often  disguised  or  implied,  or  the  result  understood : 
H^siter  serait  une  faiblesse.  To  hesitate  would  be  weakness. 

Je  n'irais  pas  (si  j'^tais  de  lui).  I  should  not  go  (if  I  were  he). 

Ah  !  si  j'^tais  k  sa  place.  Ah,  if  I  were  in  his  place  ! 

275.  Mood  and  Tense.  A  'result'  clause  in  the  present 
indicative,  imperative,  or  future,  regularly  requires  the  *if* 
clause  in  the  present  indicative ;  a  'result'  clause  in  the  con- 
ditional regularly  requires  the  'if  clause  in  the  imperfect 
indicative  : 

S'il  a  le  temps,  il  y  va.  If  he  has  time,  he  goes. 

S'il  a  le  temps,  dites-lui  d'y  aller.      If  he  has  (have,  will  have,  should 

have)  time,  tell  him  to  ga 


198  THE  VERB.    .  [§275 

S'il  a  le  temps,  il  ira  la  voir.  If  he  has  (have,  will  have,  should 

have)  time,  he  will  go  to  see  her. 

S'il  avait  le  temps,  il  irait  la  voir.       If  he  had  (had  he,  were  he  to  have, 

if  he  should  have,  should  he  have) 
time,  he  would  go  to  see  her. 
Oba. :  The  condition  is  regularly  expressed  by  the  indicative  present  or  imperfect, 

whatever  be  the  corresponding  English  form. 

a.  The  above  rules  hold  good  for  compound  tenses,  the  auxiliary 
being  considered  as  the  verb  : 

S'il  I'a  dit,  il  le  fera.  If  he  has  said  it,  he  will  do  it. 

S'il  est  venu,  faites-le-moi  savoir.     If  he  has  come,  let  me  know. 

S'il  a  eu  le  temps,  il  sera  venu.         If  he  has  had  time,  he  will  have 

come. 
Si  j'avais  eu  le  temps,  je  serais    If  I  had  had  time,  I  should  have 

all^  h  Londres.  gone  to  London. 

S'il  6tait  brave,  il  aurait  fait  cela.     If  he  were  brave,  he  would  have 

done  that. 

b.  Sometimes,  in  literary  style,  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  stands  in 
the  '  if '  clause,  or  in  the  '  result '  clause,  or  in  both  : 

S'il  eut  {or  avait)  su  cela  il  ne    Had  he  known  that,  he  would  not 
VevLt  {or  aurait)  pas  dit.  have  said  so. 

c.  Occasionally  the  imperfect  indicative  stands  in  the  *if'  clause 
instead  of  the  pluperfect,  and  in  the  *  result '  clause  instead  of  the  con- 
ditional anterior : 

Si    Stanislas   demeurait  (= avait    If  Stanislas  had  remained,  he  would 
demeur^),  il  4tait  (= aurait  ^t^)        have  been  lost, 
perdu. 

d.  Occasionally  the  condition  is  expressed  by  inversion,  without  si : 
N'^tait-ce  la  crainte  de  cela.  If  it  were  not  for  fear  of  that. 
Eut-il  4te  moins  riche.  If  he  had  been  poorer. 

e.  A  virtual  condition  (concession)  is  sometimes  expressed  by  various 
locutions : 

Quiconque  le  fera.  Whoever  (if  any  one)  does  it. 

II  le  dirait,  le  f erait-il  ?  Even  if  he  said  it,  would  he  do  it  ? 

Quand  meme  il  ne  I'aurait  pas  dit.  Even  though  he  had  not  said  so. 

n  le  dirait  que  je  ne  le  croirais  Even  if  he  said  it,  I  should  not 
pas.  believe  it 


§§276-278]  THE   INFINITIVE  MOOD.  199 

/.   The  past  definite  is  rare  in  the   'if  clause.     The  expression 
s'il  en  fut,  however,  is  noteworthy  : 
Riche,  s'il  en  fut  (jamais),  mais    Rich,  if  any  one  ever  was,  but  cor- 

corrompu.  rupt. 

g.  Si= '  whether'  may  take  the  future  or  conditional : 
Dis-moi  si  tu  iras  (irais)  chez  elle.     Tell  me  whether  (if)  you  will  (would) 

go  to  her  house. 

THE  INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

276.  Function.  The  infinitive  is  a  verbal  noun.  As  a 
verb  it  governs,  and  as  a  noun  it  serves  as  subject,  object,  etc.  : 
V0U8  devriez  lui  parler.  You  ought  to  speak  to  him. 

Voir  c'est  croire.  Seeing  is  believing. 

II  lit  sans  ooraprendre.  He  reads  without  understanding. 

277.  Use  of  Infinitive.  The  chief  difficulty  in  the  use  of 
the  infinitive  is  to  determine,  (1)  when  it  should  stand  without 
any  preposition,  (2)  when  it  should  be  preceded  by  a,  (3)  when 
it  should  be  preceded  by  de. 

278.  Infinitive   without    Preposition.    The   infinitive 

without  any  preposition  is  used  : — 

1.  As  subject,  or  in  apposition  : 

Mentir  est  honteux.  To  lie  (lying)  is  base. 

Trop  parler  nuit.  Too  much  talk  does  harm. 

Vivre  c'est  soufiFrir.  To  live  is  to  suffer. 

2.  As  predicate  after  a  few  verbs  (see  list  below) : 

Vous  semblez  h^siter.  You  seem  to  hesitate. 

11  est  cens^  I'avoir  fait.  He  is  supposed  to  have  done  it. 

3.  As  logical  subject  after  a  few  impersonals  (see  list  below) : 
H  vaudrait  mieux  se  taire.  It  would  be  better  to  keep  quiet. 

n  fait  cher  vivre  k  Paris.  Living  is  dear  in  Paris. 

4.  As  object  or  complement  after  the  so-.called  modal  aux- 
iliaries (§230),  after  most  verbs  of  motion  and  causation  of 
motion,  after  verbs  of  desiring  and  preferring,  after  verbs  of 


200 


THE  VERB. 


[§278 


perceiving,  after  verbs  of  thinking  and  intending,  after  verbs 
of  saying  and  declaring,  and  after  certain  verbs  of  lacking 
and  failing  (see  list  below)  : 

Will  you  dine  with  us  ? 

Make  him  learn  his  lesson. 

Send  for  the  doctor. 

I  should  like  to  speak  to  him. 

I  see  them  come  (coming). 

When  do  you  expect  to  come  back  ? 

He  claims  to  be  in  the  right. 

It  was  in  vain  that  I  shouted. 
6.  Sometimes,  in  elliptical  expressions,  as  an  imperative,  as 
a  direct  or  indirect  interrogative,  or  absolutely  : 
Voir  les  affiches.  See  the  posters. 

Que  faire  ?    Ou  me  cacher  ?  What  (am  I)  to  do  ?    Where  hide  ? 

Je  ne  sais  que  faire.  I  know  not  what  to  do. 

Penser  qu'il  a  dit  cela  !  To  think  that  he  said  that 

6.  Reference  list  of  verbs  requiring  direct  infinitive : 


Voulez-vous  diner  chez  nous  ? 
Faites-lui  apprendre  sa  legon. 
Envoyez  chercher  le  m^decin. 
Je  d^sirerais  lui  parler. 
Je  les  vois  venir. 
Quand  comptez-vous  revenir  ? 
II  pretend  avoir  raison. 
J'avais  beau  crier. 


accourir,  hasten. 
affirmer,  ajfirm. 
aimer  (condl.).-''  should  like. 
aimer  autant,  like  as  well. 
aimer  mieux,  pr^er. 
aller,  go. 

apercevoir,  perceive. 
assurer,  assure. 
avoir  beau,  be  in  vain. 
avouer,  avow. 
compter*,  intend. 
confesser,  confess. 
courir,  run. 
croire,  think. 
daig^ier,  deign. 
declarer,  declare. 
d6poser,  testify. 
descendre-'',  cowi*  (^o)  dOTOTi. 
d^sirer',  desire,  toish. 
devoir,  ought,  to  be,  etc. 
dire*,  say. 
^couter,  listen  to. 
entendre,  hear,  intend. 


envoyer,  send, 

esp^rer*,  hope. 

6tre,  be. 

dtre  cens^,  be  supposed. 

faillir^,  be  on  the  point  qf. 

faire,  make,  cause. 

11  fait(imper8.),  it  is. 

falloir,  be  necessary. 

se  figurer,  imagine. 

s'imaginer,  fancy. 

juger,  consider. 

jurer*,  swear,  attest  by  oath. 

Justifier,  justify. 

laisser'',  *,  let,  allow. 

mener,  lead,  bring. 

mettre,  set,  put  at. 

monter,  go  up. 

nier',  deny. 

oser,  dare. 

ouir,  hear. 

paraitre,  appear. 

penser',  intend,  be  near. 

pouvoir,  can,  may. 


pr^ferer,  prefer. 
pr^tendre",  assert. 
se  rappeler',  recollect. 
reconnaitre,  acknowledge. 
regarder,  look  at. 
rentrer,  go  in  again. 
retoumer,  go  back. 
revenir,  com£  back. 
savoir,  know  how  to,  can. 
sembler,  seem. 
sentir,  hear,  feel. 
souhaiter',  wish. 
soutenir,  maintain. 
supposer,  suppose. 
fitre  suppose,  be  supposed. 
t^moigner,  testify. 
se  trouver,  be. 
valoir  autant,  be  as  good. 
valoir  mieux,  be  better. 
venir',  ♦,  come. 
voir,  see. 
voler,  fly. 
vouloir,  iffiU,  toish. 


1  Sometimes  takes  de.  ' 

'  Sometimes  takes  k  or  de. 

3  See  also  list  of  verbs  requiring  k  (§  279,  9). 

♦  See  also  list  of  verbs  requiring  de  (§  280,  6). 


§279]  THE  INFINITIVE  MOOD.  201 

o.  Devoir  =  *  owe,'  *  be  indebted '  with  indirect  object  takes  de : 
Je  lui  dois  d'etre  encore  en  vie.         I  owe  to  him  that  I  am  still  alives. 

b.  Fair^  takes  de  in  ne  faire  que  de : 

H  ne  fait  que  de  sortir.  He  has  just  gone  out. 

c.  Ne  pas  laisser=  *  not  to  cease,'  etc.,  takes  de  : 

II  ne  laisse  pas  que  de  le  dire.  He  is  always  saying  so  (says  so  for 

all  that). 

279.  Infinitive  with  the  Preposition  a.  The  infinitive 
preceded  by  a  = '  to,'  ♦  in,'  *  at,'  '  by,'  etc.,  is  used  : — 

1.  As  direct  object  of  a  few  transitives  (see  list  below): 

J'aime  k  chanter.  I  like  to  sing. 

Continuez  k  lire.  Continue  to  read. 

D  m'enseigne  k  chanter.  He  teaches  me  to  sing  (singing). 

J'ai  k  ^tudier  demain.  I  have  to  study  to-morrow. 

H  n'y  a  pas  k  se  plaindre  There  is  nothing  to  complain  ol 

2.  As  a  complement,  after  many  verbs,  to  denote  the  object 
to  which  the  action  tends  (answering  the  question  *to  do 
what?')  or  the  object  in,  at,  on,  about  which  the  action  takes 
place  (answering  the  question  *in  doing  what?'  'at  doing 
what?' etc.): 

H  aspire  k  devenir  riche.  He  aspires  to  become  rich. 

Poussez-les  k  agir.  Urge  them  to  act. 

Je  les  ai  invites  k  venir.  I  have  invited  them  to  come. 

Aidez-moi  a  porter  cette  malle.  Help  me  to  carry  this  trunk. 

n  r^ussit  k  me  trouver.  He  succeeded  in  finding  me. 

Je  suis  k  ^crire  une  lettre.  I  am  (busy)  writing  a  letter. 

H  s'amuse  k  me  taquiner.  He  amuses  himself  teasing  me. 

J'ai  gagn^  k  vendre  ma  maison.  I  gained  by  selling  my  house, 

H  joue  k  faire  le  malade.  He  plays  at  being  ill. 

3.  As  the  complement  of  certain  adjectives  (of.  §  280,  2)  and 
nouns  denoting  fitness,  tendency,  purpose,  etc. : 

Ceci  est  bon  k  miinger.  This  is  good  to  eat. 

Je  suis  pret  k  vous  ^couter.  I  am  ready  to  hear  you. 

Quelque  chose  d'utile  k  savoir.  Something  useful  to  know. 

Gela  est  facile  k  faira  That  is  easy  to  do. 


202 


THE  VERB. 


[§279 


La  tendance  k  se  croire  grand.  The  tendency  to  think  one's  self 

great. 
Une  bonne  k  tout  faire.  A  maid  of  all  work.  • 

a.  So  also,  le  premier,  le  dernier,  le  seul : 
H  n'est  pas  le  seul  k  le  dire.  He  is  not  the  only  one  to  say  so. 

4.  To  form  adjectival  phrases  denoting  use,  fitness,  quality, 
etc.: 


Une  salle  k  manger. 
Une  chose  k  voir. 
Des  contes  k  dormir  debout. 
Un  spectacle  a  faire  peur. 
De  mani^re  k  reussir. 
Vous  etes  k  plaindre. 
C'est  k  en  mourir. 


A  dining-room. 

A  thing  worth  seeing. 

Very  tiresome  stories. 

A  terrible  sight. 

In  such  a  way  as  to  succeed. 

You  are  to  be  pitied. 

It  is  enough  to  kill  one. 


5.  To  form  adverbial  phrases  : 

EUe  chante  k  ravir.  She  sings  charmingly. 

EUe  pleurait  k  faire  piti^.  She  wept  pitifully. 

A  vrai  dire,  je  le  plains.  To  tell  the  truth,  I  pity  him. 

EUe  est  laide  k  faire  peur.  She  is  frightfully  ugly. 

6.  Reference  list  of  verbs  requiring  infinitive  with  a  : 


B'abaisser,  stoop. 
abandonner(8'),  give  up. 
aboutir,  end  (in),  tend. 
B'abuser,  be  mistaken  (in). 
s'accorder*,  agree  (in). 
fitre  d'accord,  agree  (in). 
accoutumer(8')'',  accuttom. 
8'acharner,  be  bent  (on). 
admettre,  admit. 
s'adonner,  addict  o.  s. 
agiierrir  (8*),  inure. 
aider,  help. 
aimer  2,  ♦,  like. 
amener,  lead. 
amuser  (a'),  amuse  (in,  by). 
animer  (s'),  excite. 
appeler,  call. 
appliquer  (s'),  apply. 
apprendre,  learn,  teach. 
appreter  (s'),  get  ready. 


B'arrfiter,  stop. 
aspirer,  aspire. 
assujettir  (s'),  subject. 
astreindre,  compel. 
s'aetreindre,  bind  o.  s. 
attacher,  attach. 
s'attacher,  be  intent  (on). 
attendre  (b'),  expect. 
autoriser,  authorize. 
B'avilir,  stoop. 
avoir,  have,  must. 
avoir  (de  la)  peine,  have 

difficulty  (in). 
balancer,  hesitate. 
se  bomer,  limit  o.  s. 
cl^ercher,  seek,  try. 
commencer*,  begin. 
se  complaire,  take  pleasure 

(in). 
ooDcourir,  co-operate  (in). 


condamner(se),  condemn. 
condescendre,  condescend. 
conduire,  lead. 
consacrer  (se),  devote. 
consentir^,  consent. 
consister,  consist  (in). 
conspirer,  conspire. 
con8umer(se),con«MTne  (in). 
continuer',  continue. 
contraindrei,  constrain. 
contribuer,  contribute. 
convier*,  invite. 
coflter,  cost. 
decider',  induce. 
se  decider,  resolve. 
d^fier'',  Challenge,  incite. 
demander',  ask. 
demeurer,  remain. 
d^penser,  spend  (in). 
d^sapprendre,  forget. 


§279] 


THE   INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


203 


descendre*,  ttoop,  abase  o.  s. 
destiner,  destiiie. 
determiner',  induce. 
86  determiner,  resolve. 
devouer(se),  devote. 
difl6rer»,  delay. 
disposer(se),  dispose. 
divertir(se),  armise. 
donner,  give. 
dresser,  train. 
B'efiforcer',  try. 
8'6gayer,  divert  o.  s.  (by). 
employer  (s'X  employ  (in). 
B'empresser*,  •■»,  be  eager. 
encourager,  encourage. 
engagrer(8')^, engage,  advise. 
enhardir-,  embolden. 
s'enhardir^,  venture. 
B'ennuyer^,',  tire  o.  s.  (in). 
enseigner,  teach. 
s'entendre,  know  toell  how. 
entrainer,  allure. 
essay er»,  try. 
B'essayer,  tryo.s.  (in). 
6tre^,  to  be  occupied  (in, 

at). 
6tre  k',  be  one's  turn. 
8'6tudier,  apply  o.  s. 
B'6vertuer,  exert  o.  s.,  try. 
exoeller,  excel  (in). 
exciter  (s'),  excite. 
exercerCs*),  exercise  (in). 
exhorter,  exhoH. 
exposer  (s'),  expose. 
se  fatiguer',  tire  o.  s.  (in, 

at). 

»  Orde. 

s  Sometimes  takes  de. 

»  See  also  list  of  verbs  requiring  de  (§  280,  6). 

*  See  also  list  of  verbs  requiring  direct  infinitive  (S  278,  6), 

a.  Suffire  sometimes  takes  pour  : 
Cela  suffira  pour  I'amuser.  That  will  suffice  to  amuse  him. 

6.  The  infinitive  after  6tre  k  often  has  passive  force : 
Cet  ouvrage  est  k  refaire.  That  work  is  to  be  done  again. 

c.  Hair  may  take  de  when  negative  : 
U  ne  halt  pas  k  (d*)  etre  endett^      He  does  not  dislike  being  in  debt. 


finir  (neg.p,  have  done, 
forcer^,  force. 
gagner,  gain  (by). 
habituer*,  acc%istom. 
B'habituer,  acmustom  o.  s. 
hair,  hate. 

Be  hasarder*,  venture. 
h^siter*,  hesitate. 
inciter,  incite. 
incliner,  incline. 
induire,  induce. 
instruire,  instruct. 
interes8er(s'),  interest  (in). 
inviter,  invite. 
jouer,  play  (at). 
laisser-"*,  ♦,  leave. 
se  lasser',  tire  o.  s.  (in), 
manquer-"*,  be  remiss  (in). 
mettre,  put,  set. 
86  mettre,  set  about. 
montrer,  show  how. 
obliger*,  ',  oblige,  force. 
B'obliger',  bind  o.  s. 
B'obstiner,  persist  (in). 
occuper(8')',  employ  (in). 
B'oCfrir^,  offer. 
B'opiniatrer,  persist  (in), 
parvenir,  succeed  (in). 
passer,  spend  (in). 
pencher,  incline. 
penser*,  think  (of) 
perdre,  lose  (in,  by). 
pers^v^rer,  persevere  (in), 
persister,  persist  (in), 
se  plaire,  delight  (in). 
se  plier,  submit. 


porter,  induce. 
pousser,  urge,  incite. 
prendre  garde',  take  care. 
prendre  plaisir,  delight  (in), 
66  prendre,  begin. 
preparer  (se),  prepare. 
pr^tendre*,  aspire. 
prier',  invite  (formally). 
proc6der,  proceed. 
provoquer,  incite. 
recommenoer ' ,  begin  again, 
r^duire,  reduce. 
se  r6duire,  confine  o.  s. 
refuser',  refuse  to  give. 
se  refuser,  refuse. 
renoncer,  renounce. 
r6pugner,  be  reluctant. 
se  r^signer,  resign  o.  s. 
r680udre',  induce. 
se  rdsoudre.  resolve. 
Tester,  remain. 
r^ussir,  succeed  (in\ 
servir,  serve. 
songer,  think  (of). 
souffrir^  suffer. 
suffire,  suffice. 
Burprendre,  discover. 
tarder,  be  long,  delay  (ivti, 
tendre,  tend. 
tenir,  be  anxious. 
travailler,  toork. 
trembler',  tremble  (at,  oitUt 
trouver,  find. 
venir',  ♦,  happen. 
viser,  aim. 
Touer  (se),  devote. 


204  THE  VERB.  [§280 

280.  Infinitive  with  the  Preposition  de.  The  infini- 
tive preceded  by  de  =  'to/  *of/  *from,'  'for,'  'at,'  etc.,  is 
used: — 

1.  As  logical  subject  of  an  impersonal  verb  (for  rare  ex- 
ceptions see  §  278,  3) : 

H  est  facile  de  faire  cela.  It  is  easy  to  do  that. 

H  importe  d'arriver  k  temps.  It  is  important  to  arrive  in  time. 

Bien  vous  sied  de  vous-  taire.  It  well  becomes  you  to  be  silent. 

a.  Similarly  as  subject  in  inverted  sentences  : 
C'est  une  folie  (que)  d'aller  \k.  It  is  madness  to  go  there. 

2.  As  complement  of  most  adjectives  and  nouns  (cf.  §279,  3) : 

Le  d^sir  de  partir.  The  desire  of  going. 

La  n^cessit^  de  rester.  The  necessity  of  remaining. 

II  n'est  pas  digne  de  vivre.  He  is  not  worthy  to  live. 

J'ai  envie  de  pleurer.  I  feel  like  crying. 

a.  So  also,  many  expressions,  like  the  last  example,  made  from  verb 
+  noun,  e.g.,  avoir  besoin  (honte,  peur,  raison,  soin,  tort,  etc.),  faire 
envie  (plaisir,  semblant,  etc. ),  courir  risque,  etc. ,  etc. 

3.  After  verbs  as  object  or  complement,  usually  to  denote 
the  source  or  occasion  of  action  (answering  *  whence  ?',  *  con- 
cerning what?'),  or  to  denote  separation  or  cessation  from 
(answering  *  from  what  V).     See  list  below  : 

Je  me  r^jouis  de  le  voir.  I  rejoice  to  see  it. 

EUe  se  pique  d'etre  la  premiere.  She  prides  herself  on  being  first. 

Prenez  garde  de  tomber.  Take  care  not  to  fall. 

H  s'excuse  d'y  aller.  He  excuses  himself  from  going. 

Promettez  de  ne  pas  le  dire.  Promise  not  to  tell  it. 

4.  As  historical  infinitive  ( =  a  past  definite) : 
Et  I'ennemi  de  s'enfuir.  And  the  enemy  fled. 

5.  After  que  in  the  second  member  of  a  comparison,  unless 
the  sentence  be  very  short : 

H  vaudra  mieux  rester  que  de        It  will  be  better  to  stay  than  to  go 

partir  si  tard.  so  late. 

But :  Mieux  vaut  savoir  qu'avoir.     Better  wisdom  than  wealth. 


§280] 


THE   INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


205 


6.  Reference  list  of  verbs  requiring  infinitive  with  de 


B'absenter,  absent  o.s.  (from). 

e'absoudre,  absolve  o.s. 
(from). 

B'abstenir,  abstain  (from). 

accorder,  grant. 

avoir  accoutum6,  be  accus- 
tomed. 

accuser  (s*),  accuse  (of). 

achever,  finish. 

admirer^tponder  (ot). 

affecter,  affect. 

s'affliger,  grieve  (at,  over). 

ambitionner,  aspire. 

s'aperoevoir,  perceive. 

I'applaudir,  congratulate 
O.S.  (on). 

appr^heoder,  fear. 

arrdter,  prevent  (from),  de- 
termine. 

s'attrister,  become  sad  (at). 

avertir,  notify,  warn. 

B'aviser,  think  (of). 

bl&mer,  blame  (for). 

brtller,  long. 

censurer,  censure  (for). 

cesser,  cease. 

se  ch&gT\neT,grieve(at,over). 

chargrer,  charge. 

Be  charger,  undertake. 

choisir,  choose. 

commander,  command. 

commencerS  begin. 

conjurer,  beseech. 

conseiller,  advise. 

consoler,  console  (for). 

Be  oontenter,  be  satisfied. 

continuer',  continue. 

contraindre^  constrain. 

convaincre,  convict  (of). 

convenir,  agree. 

craindre,  fear. 

crier,  cry. 

decider",  decide,  resolve. 

dtoourager  (se),  discourage 
(from). 

dMaigner,  disdain. 

d^fendre,  forbid. 


se  d^f  endre,  forbear,  excuse 
o.s. 

d^fler',  defy. 

Be  d6fier,  distrust. 

d^godter,  disgust  (icith). 

d61ib6rer,  deliberate  (about). 

demanderi,(MA;. 

se  d^pScher,  make  haste. 

d6saocoutumer   (se),    dis- 
accustom (from). 

d^sesp^rer,  despair  (of). 

dtehabituer   (se),    disac- 
custom (from). 

determiner",  resolve. 

de  tester,  detest. 

detoumer,  dissuade  (from). 

dire*,  bid. 

diacontinuer,  cease. 

disconvenir,  deny. 

se  disoulper,  excuse  o.s.  (for). 

dispenser,  dispense  (from). 

dissuader,  dissuade  (from). 

douter,  hesitate. 

se  douter,  suspect. 

terire,  write. 

s'eflorcer',  try. 

s'eflfrayer,  be  afraid. 

empdoher,  prevent. 

s'empficher.  abstain(from). 

s'empresser',  hasten. 

s'empresser^,  be  eager. 

enjoindre,  enjoin. 

s'ennuyer*,  •',  betired(of). 

B'enorgueillir,  be  proud. 

enrager,  be  enraged  (ot). 

entreprendre,  undertake. 

epargner,  spare. 

essay er I,  try. 

s'etonner,  be  astonished. 

6tre  k^,  ',  be  duty  (or  office) 
(of). 

6viter,  avoid. 

excuser  (s')  excuse  (from). 

esempter,  exempt  (from). 

faire  bien,  do  well. 

se  fatiguer*,  be  tired  (of). 

feindre,  feign. 


f  inciter  (se),  congratulate 

(on), 
tmr^,  finish. 
se  flatter,  fiatter  o.  8. 
forcer^,  force. 
fr^mir,  shudder. 
gager,  wager. 
garder  (se),  forbear. 
g6mir,  groan. 
gfener,  incommode. 
se  glorifier,  boast  (of). 
gronder,  scold  (for). 
hasarder,  venture. 
se  hater,  hasten. 
imaginer,  imagine. 
s'impatienter,  be  impatient, 
imputer,  impute. 
s'indigner,  be  indignant. 
s'ingerer,  meddle  {toith). 
inspirer,  inspire. 
interdire,  interdict  (from). 
jouir,  enjoy. 
jugerbon,  think  fit. 
jurer*,  promise  (on  oath). 
nepaslaisser',*,  not  to  cease. 
Be  lasser",  be  weary  (of). 
louer,  praise  (for). 
mander,  bid. 
manquer',  fail,  be  on  point 

of 
mediter,  meditate. 
se  mfiler,  meddle  (with). 
menacer,  threaten. 
m6riter,  deserve. 
se  moquer,  make  sport  (of), 
mourir,  die,  long. 
n^gliger,  neglect. 
notifier,  notify. 
obligerS  oblige,  force. 
obliger'',  do  favour. 
obtenir,  obtain. 
s'occuper'',  be  intent  (on). 
offrir,  offer. 
omettre,  omit. 
ordonner,  order. 
ovLhlier',  forget. 
pardonner,  forgive. 


206 


THE   VERB. 


[§281 


parier,  bet. 

parler,  speak. 

Be  passer,  do  without. 

permettre  (se),  permit. 

persuader,  persuade. 

86  piquer,  pride  o.  s.  (on). 

plaindre,  pity. 

Be  plaindre,  complain  (of). 

prendre  garde^,  take  care 

not,  beware  {of). 
prendre  soin,  take  care. 
prescrire,  prescribe. 
presaer,  urge. 
Be  presser,  hasten. 
pr^sumer,  presume. 
prier^,  beg,  pray. 
priver(8e),  deprive  (of). 
projeter,  intend. 


promettre  (se),  promise. 
proposer,  propose. 
se  proposer,  intend. 
protester,  protest. 
punir,  punish  (for). 
recommander,  recommend. 
recommencer^,  beginagain. 
refuser-'',  refuse. 
regretter,  regret. 
se  r^jouir,  rejoice. 
reniercier,  thank  (for). 
se  repentir,  repent  (of). 
reprendre,  reprove  (for). 
r^primander,  reprimand 

(for). 
reprocher(8e),  reproach 

(with). 
r680udre"«,  resolve. 


Be  ressouvenir,  remember. 
rire(se),  laugh. 
risquer,  risk. 
rougir,  blush. 
Bommer,  summon. 
86  soucier,  care. 
souffrir',  suffer. 
8oup<;onner,  suspect. 
sourire,  smile. 
se  souvenir,  recollect. 
sugg^rer,  suggest. 
supplier,  beseech. 
tacher^,  try. 
tenter^,  attempt. 
trembler-'',  tremble,  fear. 
trouver  bon,  think/U. 
Be  vanter,  boast  (of). 
venir'',  *,  have  just. 


»Ork 

'  Sometimes  k. 

»  See  also  list  of  verba  requiring  k.  (i  279,  6). 

*  See  also  list  of  verbs  requiring  direct  infinitive  (§  278,  6). 

281.  Distinctions.  As  appears  from  the  list,  the  same 
verb  sometimes  requires  a,  de,  or  the  direct  infinitive.  The 
following  are  examples  of  cases  in  which  the  sense  varies 
with  the  construction  : — 


1.  Aimer: 

J'aimerais  bien  le  connaitre. 
J'aime  mieux  vous  dire  tout. 
Aimez-vous  a  demeurer  ici  ? 

2.  Decider: 

II  m'a  decide  k  entrer. 
Nous  d^cidames  de  partir. 

3.  D^fier: 

On  le  d^fia  k  boire. 

Je  vous  d^fie  de  prouver  cela. 

4.  Descendre : 

Descends  chercher  ton  chapeau. 
U  a  descendu  meme  k  voler. 


I  should  like  to  know  him. 
I  prefer  to  tell  you  all. 
Do  you  like  to  live  here  ? 


He  induced  me  to  go  in. 
We  decided  to  set  out. 


They  challenged  him  to  drink. 
I  defy  you  to  prove  that. 


Go  down  and  get  your  hat. 
He  even  descended  to  theft. 


§281] 


THE   INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


207 


5.  Determiner: 

Je  I'ai  determine  k  tester. 

II  avait  determine  de  le  rebStir. 

6.  Dire: 

H  dit  I'avoir  vu. 

Je  lui  ai  dit  de  venir. 

7.  S'empresser : 

H  s'empressait  k  lui  plaire. 
II  s'empressa  de  r^pondre. 

8.  fetre: 

Je  suis  k  ecrire  des  lettres. 
Cest  k  vous  de  parler. 
Cest  k  vous  k  parler. 

9.  Sefatiguer: 

n  se  fatigua  k  jouer  au  billard. 
II  est  fatigue  de  jouer. 

10.  Finir: 

n  ne  finit  pas  k  me  le  dire. 
J'ai  fini  de  travailier. 

IL  Jurer : 
Je  jure  I'avoir  vu. 
Je  jure  de  le  faire. 

12.  Laisser: 

Je  I'ai  laisse  dire. 

Je  vous  laisse  k  penser. 

n  ne  laissa  pas  de  parler. 

13.  Se  lasser : 

II  s'est  lasse  k  courir. 
II  se  lasse  de  courir. 

14.  Manquer: 

Je  manquai  de  tomber. 

H  a  manque  k  faire  son  devoir. 

15.  Obliger: 

Je  I'ai  oblige  k  (de)  le  faire. 
Je  suis  oblige  de  partir. 
Vous   m'obligerez  beaucoup  de  le 
faii-e. 


I  induced  him  to  stay. 

H#  had  determined  to  rebuild  it. 


He  says  he  saw  it. 
I  told  him  to  come. 


He  was  eager  to  please  her. 
He  hastened  to  reply. 

I  am  (busy)  writing  letters. 
It  is  your  place  to  speak. 
It  is  your  turn  to  speak. 

He  fatigued  himself  playing  billiarda. 
He  is  tired  playing. 

He  was  never  done  telling  me  so. 
I  have  finished  working. 

I  swear  I  saw  it. 
I  swear  I  will  do  it. 

I  let  him  talk. 

I  leave  you  to  think. 

He  did  not  stop  talking. 

He  tired  himself  out  (by)  running. 
He  is  tired  of  running. 

I  was  on  the  point  of  falling. 
He  has  failed  to  do  his  duty. 

I  obliged  him  to  do  it. 
I  am  obliged  to  go. 
You  will  greatly  oblige  me  by  doing 
it. 


208 


THE  VERB. 


[§282 


16.  S'occuper: 

n  s'occupe  k  rien  faire. 
n  s'occupe  de  tout  voir. 

17.  Penser: 

Que  pensez-vous  faire  ? 

Je  pensai  tomber. 

Je  pense  k  r^pliquer  k  cela. 

18.  Prendre  garde : 
Prenez  garde  k  le  faire. 
Prenez  garde  a  ne  pas  le  faire. 
Prenez  garde  de  le  faire. 

19.  Pretendre: 

II  pretend  vous  connaltre. 
U  pretend  k  devenir  savant. 

20.  Prier: 

II  m'a  pri^  k  diner. 

Je  vous  prie  de  m'aider. 

21.  Refuser: 

Me  refusez- vous  k  manger  ? 
Je  refuserai  d'y  aller. 

22.  Resoudre: 

II  m'a  r^solu  k  I'acheter. 
J'ai  r^solu  de  Tacheter. 

23.  Trembler: 

II  tremble  k  me  voir. 

II  tremble  de  me  rencontrer. 

24.  Venir: 

Venez  nous  voir. 

Si  vous  venez  k  le  voir. 

Je  viens  de  le  voir. 


He  is  busy  doing  nothing. 

He  is  intent  on  seeing  everything. 

What  do  you  intend  to  do  ? 

I  nearly  fell. 

I  think  of  replying  to  that. 

Take  care  to  do  it. 
Take  care  not  to  do  it. 
Take  care  not  to  do  it. 


He  asserts  that  he  knows  you. 
He  aspires  to  become  learned. 

He  invited  me  to  dine. 

I  pray  (ask)  you  to  help  me. 

Do  you  refuse  to  give  me  food? 
I  shall  refuse  to  go. 

He  induced  me  to  buy  it. 
I  have  determined  to  buy  it. 

He  trembles  when  he  sees  me. 
He  fears  to  meet  me. 


Come  to  see  us. 

If  you  happen  to  see  himu 

I  have  just  seen  him. 


282.  Infinitive  with  other  Prepositions.  The  infinitive 
stands  also  after  par,  pour,  sans,  apres,  entre,  and  after 
locutions  ending  in  de  or  a,  such  as  afin  de,  afin  que  de, 
jusqu'a,  etc. : — 


§§283-284]  THE  INFINITIVE  MOOD.  209 

1.  Par=  *by,'  usually  only  after  commencer  and  flfnir : 

n  finit  par  m'insulter.  He  ended  by  insulting  me  {or  He 

finally  insulted  me). 

2.  Pour  usually  translates  *  in  order  to,'  *  for  the  purpose 
of;  sometimes  also  'for,'  'from,'  'because,'  'though,'  etc.,  and 
*  to '  after  assez,  trop,  etc. : 

n  faut  manger  pour  vivre.  We  must  eat  (in  order)  to  live. 

II  est  mort  pour  avoir  trop  bu.  He  died  from  over-drinking. 

II  fut  puni  pour  avoir  ri.  He  was  punished  for  laughing. 

Pour  etre  pauvre,  il  n'est  pas  larron.  Though  poor,  he  is  no  thief. 

II  est  trop  franc  pour  se  taire.  He  is  too  frank  to  keep  quiet. 

a.  Pour  after  a  verb  of  motion  (§  278,  4)  emphasizes  the  purpose : 
J'irai  pourle  voir.  I  shall  go  to  see  him. 

3.  Sans  =  * without*: 

N'allez  pas  sans  manger.  Do  not  go  without  eating. 

4.  Aprfes  =  '  after'  requires  the  perfect  infinitive : 
Apr6s  avoir  din^,  je  partis.  After  having  dined,  I  set  out. 

283.  Infinitive  for  Subordinate  Clause.  1.  An  in- 
finitive construction  usually  replaces  a  que  clause  of  which 
the  subject  is  the  same  with  that  of  the  subject  or  object 
(direct  or  indirect)  of  the  principal  clause : 

H  croit  vous  avoir  vu.  He  thinks  that  he  has  seen  you. 

Dites-leur  de  s'en  aller.  Tell  them  to  be  gone. 

2.  Similarly  afin  de,  el  moins  de,  aprfes,  avant  de,  de 
crainte  de,  de  peur  de,  de  fagon  a,  de  mani^re  a,  pour, 

sans,  etc.  +  the  infinitive  stand  for  afin  que,  etc.  +  the 
subjunctive,  but  only  when  the  subject  of  both  verbs  is  the 
same : 

H  partit  sans  me  voir.  He  went  without  seeing  me. 

But :  H  partit  sans  que  je  le  visse.    He  went  without  my  seeing  him. 

284.  Infinitive  with  Passive  Force.  A  transitive  in- 
finitive has  passive  force  after  verbs  of  perceiving  (voir,  etc.), 

14 


210  THE  VERB.  [§§285-286 

after  faire,  laisser,  and  when  a  +  an  infinitive  is  used  adjeo- 
tively  (cf.  §241,  3) : 

J'ai  vu  batir  cette  maison.  I  saw  this  house  being  built. 

Je  me  fais  faire  un  habit.  I  am  having  a  coat  made. 

Vous  etes  k  plaindre.  You  are  to  be  pitied. 

Une  faute  k  ^viter.  A  mistake  to  be  avoided. 

NOTB.— This  construction  may  be  explained  by  supplying  some  such  ellipsis  as  the 
following :  '  J'ai  vu  bitir  une  maison  (i  or  par  quelqu'un),  '  I  have  seen  somebody 
building  a  house.' 

285.  Infinitive  for  English  -ing.  The  infinitive  must 
be  used  to  translate  many  such  forms  (see  §  287,  2,  3,  4). 

THE  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

286.  Functions.  The  participial  form  in  -ant  serves  as  a 
verbal  adjective,  as  a  present  participle  (without  en),  and  as  a 
gerund  (with  en) : — 

1.  As  a  verbal  adjective,  it  denotes  quality  or  state,  and 
agrees  like  an  adjective : 

Ella  parait  bien  portante.  She  seems  welL 

Les  enfants  doivent  6tre  ob^issants.  Children  must  be  obedient. 
Les  vivants,  et  les  mourants.  The  living  and  the  dying. 

Des  paroles  consolantes.  Comforting  words. 

Obs.:  The  verbal  adjective,  attributively,  regularly  follows  the  noim,  as  in  the  lait 
example. 

a.  Some  verbs  have  a  special  form  for  the  verbal  adjective  : 


Adj. 

Part. 

Adj. 

Part. 

diflf^rent,  different. 

difif^rant. 

negligent,  careless. 

n^gligeant. 

convaincant,  convincing. 

convainquant. 

savant,  learned. 

sacliant. 

f  atigant,  fatiguing. 

fatiguant. 

puissant,  powerful. 

pOUVant. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

2.  As  a  present  participle,  it  is  used,  in  general,  like  the 
English  present  participle,  to  denote  simultaneous  action, 
manner,  cause,  motive,  etc.,  and  is  invariable : 

Pleurant,  elle  continua  le  r^cit.         Weeping,  she  continued  the  story. 
Je  le  trouvai  riant  comme  un  fou.     I  found  him  laughing  like  mad. 


§287]  THE  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE.  211 

EUe  ne  sortit  pas,  ^tant  malade.       She  did  not  go  out,  being  ill. 
Ayant  parl6  ainsi,  il  sortit.  Having  thus  spoken,  he  went  out. 

n  n'entrera  pas,  moi  vivant.  He  shall  not  enter,  while  I  live. 

Notes.— 1.  It  is  often  difficult  to  determine  whether  the  form  in  -ant  is  participle 
(invariable)  or  adjective  (variable).  As  a  participle,  the  action  (generally  transitory)  is 
prominent,  but  as  an  adjective,  quality  or  else  continued  action  (state)  is  denoted.  It 
is  nearly  always  a  participle  when  it  has  a  complement  or  a  construction  peculiar  to 
the  verb,  such  as  object,  negative,  adverb  following :  •  Une  femme  mourante,'  '  A  dying 
woman' ;  •  Des  gens  mourant  de  faim,'  '  People  dying  of  hunger' ;  '  Les  ennemis  se 
retirferent,  brOlant  les  villes  partout,'  '  The  enemies  retired,  burning  the  towns  every- 
where ' ;  '  Une  femme  ne  craignant  rien,'  '  A  woman  fearing  nothing ' ;  '  Des  dames 
parlant  doucement,' '  Ladies  speaking  softly ' ;  '  De  soi-disant  amis,'  '  So-called  friends.' 

2.  In  the  last  example,  sol-dlsant,  though  adjective  in  force,  remains  invariable  in 
view  of  the  literal  meaning,  '  calling  themselves.' 

3.  Ayant  and  ^tant  are  also  always  invariable,  except  in  •  les  ayants-droit(-cause).' 

3.  As  a  gerund,  it  denotes  either  simultaneous  action  or 
means  by  which,  and  is  invariable ;  en  =  '  while/  *  in/  *  on/ 
*  when/  'as/  *  by/  etc.,  or  is  untranslated  : 

En  jouant,  j'ai  perdu  ma  montre.  While  plajdng,  I  lost  my  watch. 

En  rentrant,  j'ai  trouv6  la  lettre.  On  returning,  I  found  the  letter. 

Vous  perdrez,  en  agissant  ainsi.  You  will  lose,  if  you  act  thus. 

En  lisant  on  apprend  k  lire.  By  reading  one  learns  to  read. 

a.  Both  participle  and  gerund  denote  simultaneous  action,  but  the 
use  of  en,  strengthened  sometimes  by  tout,  usually  emphasises  the 
continuity  of  the  action : 

(En)  disant  ceci,  il  prit  la  l3rre.       (While)  saying  this,  he  took  the  harp. 
Tout  en  pleurant,  elle  continua.     Still  weeping,  she  went  on. 

b.  The  gerund  usually  refers  to  the  subject : 

Je  Tai  vu  en  allant  k  la  poste.  I  saw  him  while  going  to  the  post. 

But :  L'app^tit  vient  en  mangeant.     One's  appetite  comes  while  eating. 

c.  En  is  sometimes  omitted,  especially  after  aller : 
G^n^ralement  parlant.  Generally  speaking. 
II  s'en  va  (en)  grondant.                      OflF  he  goes  grumbling. 

d.  The  gerund  denotes  progressive  action  in  a  few  expressions  formed 
from  aller : 

Cela  alia  (en)  diminuant.  That  kept  growing  less  and  less. 

287.  English  Forms  in  -ing.  These  are  variously 
translated  into  French ;  idiomatic  differences  are : — 


212  THE  VERB.  [§§288-289 

1.  Periphrastic  tense  forms  are  avoided  in  French : 

II  a  jou6  toute  la  matinee.  He  has  been  playing  all  morning. 

2.  English  gerunds  are  translated  by  an  -ant  form  only 
when  the  preposition  en  may  be  used;  otherwise  by  an 
infinitive,  a  noun,  or  a  clause: 

En  lisant  on  apprend  k  lire.  By  reading  one  learns  to  read* 

But :  II  parle  de  partir.  He  speaks  of  going  away. 

H  fut  pendu  pour  avoir  vol^.  He  was  hanged  for  having  stolen.  ^ 

EUe  partit  sans  dire  adieu.  She  went  without  saying  good-bye. 

Voir  c'est  croire.  Seeing  is  believing. 

J'aime  la  chasse  (or  h,  chasser).  I  like  hunting. 

Je  suis  ^tonn^  qu'il  soit  venu.  I  am  surprised  at  his  coming. 

3.  After  verbs  of  perception  (entendre,  sentir,  voir,  etc.), 
the  relative  or  infinitive  con^ruction  is  much  commoner  than 
the  participle : 

Je  les  vols  venir  (qui  viennent  or  I  see  them  coming. 

venant). 

Les  voilk  qui  passent !  See  them  passing  ! 

H  a  vu  sortir  mes  fr6res.  He  saw  my  brothers  going  out. 

Les  avez-vous  entendus  frapper  Did  you  hear  them  knocking  ? 

(qui  frappaient)  ? 

Je  la  {or  lui)  vis  frapper  I'enfant.  I  saw  her  striking  the  child. 

4.  Compound  nouns  with  a  first  component  in  -itlg  are  not 
literally  translated : 

Une  machine  h.  coudre.  A  sewing-machine. 

5.  It  is  often  more  elegant  to  avoid  a  French  form  in  -ant, 
even  when  permissible : 

Pendant  mon  voyage.  While  travelling. 

THE  PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

288.  General  Use.  The  past  participle  is  used,  (1) 
without  auxiliary,  (2)  with  6tre,  (3)  with  avoir  (or  ^tre  used 

as  avoir) 

289.  Without  Auxiliary.  A  past  participle  without  any 
auxiliary  has  the  force  of  an  adjective  (attributive,  predica- 


§§290-291]  THE  PAST  PARTICIPLK  213 

tive,  appositive),  and  agrees,  like  an  adjective,  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  word  qualified  : 

Des  fetes  donnees  par  le  roL  Festivities  given  by  the  king. 

Les  battus  ;  les  morts.  The  beaten  ;  the  dead. 

Le  pass6  n'est  plus  k  nous.  The  past  is  no  longer  ours. 

Jean  et  Marie  semblent  fatigues.  John  and  Mary  look  tired. 

Tenez  les  portes  ferrates.  Keep  the  doors  closed. 

lis  md  regard^rent  ^tonn^s.  They  looked  at  me  astonished. 

a.  Certain  past  participles  have  prepositional  force  when  preceding 
the  substantive,  and  are  invariable,  but  are  variable  when  following : 
Vu  les  difl&cult^s.  In  view  of  the  difficulties. 

Excepts  eux ;  eux  excepts  Except  them ;  they  excepted. 

Such  are :  Approuv^,  attendu,  certifi^,  collationn^,  7  compris,  non 
compris,  entendu,  excepts,  oui,  pay6,  pass6,  suppose,  vu,  etc 

h.  Ci-incxus  =  *  enclosed '  and  ci-joint  =  *  herewith,*  are  invariable 
when  beginning  a  sentence,  or  when  followed  by  a  noun  without  article: 
Ci-inclu8  la  copie,  eta  Herewith  the  copy,  etc. 

Vous  recevez  ci-joint  copie,  etc.        You  receive  herewith  a  copy,  etc. 
But ;  J'envoie  ci-jointe  line   (la)    I  send  herewith  a  (the)  copy,  etc. 
copie,  etc. 

290.  Past  Participle  with  4tre.  A  past  participle  with 
6tre  agrees  with  the  subject,  for  exceptions  see  §  244  : 

H  sont  (ont  6t6)  battus.  They  are  (have  been)  beaten. 

Marie  et  Louise  sont  venues.  Mary  and  Louisa  have  come. 

lis  sont  sortis.  They  have  gone  out. 

Les  dames  6tant  arriv^es.  The  ladies  having  come. 

Elle  parla  d'avoir  ^i6  bless^e.  She  spoke  of  having  been  woundfid. 

o.  Hence  the  past  participle  of  an  impersonal  verb  with  6tre  is 
invariable,  agreeing  strictly  with  the  grammatical  subject  il : 
II  ^tait  venu  des  soldats.  Soldiers  had  come. 

291.  Past  Participle  with  auoin  1.  A  past  participle 
with  avoir  agrees  with  a  preceding  direct  object ;  otherwise 
it  is  invariable : 

La  pi6ce  que  j'ai  6crite,  I'avez-      Have  you  read  the  play  I  wrote? 

vous  lue  ? 
Quels  livres  a-t-il  apport^s  ?  What  books  did  he  bring  ? 


214  THE  VERB.  [§292 

But :  J'ai  ^crit  la  lettre.  I  have  written  the  letter. 

EUes  ont  lu  et  ^crit.  They  have  read  and  written. 

Je  lui  ai  donn6  la  lettre.  I  have  given  her  the  letter. 

2.  Similarly,  the  past  participle  of  a  reflexive  verb  (conju- 
gated with  ^tre  for  avoir)  always  agrees  with  the  reflexive 
object,  unless  that  object  be  indirect : 

lis  se  sont  rejouis.  They  have  rejoiced. 

EUes  s'etaient  tromp^es.  They  were  mistaken, 

Elle  s'est  bless^e.  She  wounded  herself. 

EUe  s'est  laiss^e  tomber.  She  has  fallen  (fell). 

But :  lis  se  sont  ^crit.  They  wrote  to  each  other. 

Elle  s'est  bless^  la  main.  She  wounded  her  hand. 

lis  se  sont  arrog^  ce  privilege.  They  assumed  that  privilege. 

lis  se  sont  plu  a  Paris.  They  enjoyed  themselves  in  Paris. 

a.  Besides  the  indirect  reflexive    object,  a  direct  object  may  be 
present,  with  which  the  following  past  participle  agrees: 
Les  robes  qu'elle  s'est  achet^es.        The  dresses  she  bought  herself. 

292.  Remarks.  All  cases  of  the  agreement  of  the  past 
participle  depend  upon  the  above  general  principles ;  special 
difficulties  are : — 

1.  The  past  participle  of  an  impersonal  verb  is  invariable : 

La  belle  journ^e  qu'il  a  fait  I  What  a  fine  day  it  was  ! 

La  disette  qu'il  y  a  eu.  The  scarcity  there  was. 

2.  A  noun  denoting  distance,  time,  price,  weight,  etc.,  with 
such  verbs  as  marcher,  courir,  vivre,  coiiter,  peser, 
vSlloir,  etc.,  is  adverbial  accusative  (not  direct  object)  ;  hence 
no  agreement : 

Les  dix  milles  que  j'ai  march6.  The  ten  miles  I  walked. 

Les  cent  francs  que  cet  ouvrage      The  hundred  francs  that  book  cost 
m'a  cout^.  '  me. 

a.  Such  verbs  used  transitively,  or  figuratively  with  transitive  force, 
follow  the  general  rule  : 

La  malle  que  j'ai  pes^e.  The  trunk  which  I  weighed. 

Les  dangers  qu'il  a  courus.  The  dangers  he  incurred. 

La  peur  que  cela  a  cout^e.  The  fear  which  that  caused. 


§292]  THE  PAST  PARTICIPLE.  215 

3.  A  past  participle  preceded  by  an  expression  of  number  or 
quantity,  a  collective,  etc.,  is  variable  or  invariable  according 
to  the  sense  (cf.  §231-234): 

Que  de  maux  il  a  soufferts  !  What  ills  he  endured  ! 

C'est  la  moitie  des  meublea  qu'on  It  is  the  half  of  the  furniture  that 

a  saisie.  has  been  seized. 

La  moiti^  des  meubles  que  j'ai  The  half  of  the  furniture  which  I 

vendus.  sold. 

Quelle  joie,  quel  bonheur  vous  lui  What  joy,  what  happiness  you  have 

avez  procure  !  procured  him  ! 

a.  Partitive  en  is  never  a  direct  object ;  agreement,  however,  takes 
place  with  combien,  plus,  moins,  preceding  en,  if  the  sense  be  plural : 
Combien  Dieu  en  a-t-il  exauc^s  !       How  many  of  them  God  has  heard  I 
Plus  on  vous  a  donne  de  livres,  plus    The  more  books  you  were  given,  the 

vous  en  avez  lus.  more  of  them  you  read. 

4.  When  an  infinitive  (with  or  without  a  preposition) 
follows,  the  past  participle  is  invariable  when  the  preceding 
direct  object  is  governed  by  the  infinitive,  and  variable  if 
governed  by  the  past  participle  alone : 

La  lettre  que  j'ai  voulu  ^crire.  The  letter  I  wished  to  write. 

La  lettre  que  j'ai  oubli^  d'^crire.  The  letter  I  forgot  to  write. 

II  nous  a  pri^s  d'y  aller.  He  begged  us  to  go. 

On  nous  a  dit  de  sortir.  They  told  us  to  go  out. 

a.  Entendu,  vu,  laiss^,  agree  when  the  infinitive  has  active  foroe, 
but  are  invariable,  if  it  has  passive  force  (§284) : 
La  dame  que  j'ai  entendue  chanter.     The  lady  I  heard  sing(ing). 
Les  enfants  que  j'ai  vu  battre.  The  children  I  saw  beaten. 

6.  After  du,  pu,  voulu,  os6,  with  auxiliary  force,  a  governing  infini- 
tive  is  either  expressed  or  implied  ;  hence  no  agreement : 

J'ai  lu  tous  les  livres  que  j'ai  pu    I  read  all  the  books  that  I  could 

(lire).  (read). 

But :  Les  livres  que  j'ai  voulus.        The  books  I  wished. 

c.  Fait  +  infinitive  is  invariable  : 

Les  m^decins  qu'il  a  fait  venir.  The  doctors  he  sent  for. 

d.  The  past  participle  of  avoir  k  is  variable  or  invariable : 
Les  lettres  que  j'ai  eu  (eues)  h,  lire.     The  letters  I  had  to  read. 


216  THE  VERB.  [§§293-294 

5.  The  relative  pronoun  que  is  sometimes  direct  object  of 
a  verb  in  a  following  que  clause,  either  fully  expressed  or 
implied,  and  hence  the  past  participle  is  invariable  : 

Des  choses  que  j'ai  cm  qu'il  ferait.     Things  I  thought  he  would  do. 
J'ai  lu  les  livres  qu'il  a  voulu  (que    I  read  the  books  which  h«  wished 
je  lusse).  (me  to  read). 

GOVERNMENT  OF  VERBS. 

293.  Transitives.  1.  A  transitive  verb  governs  a  direct 
object,  as  in  English  : 

J'ai  ^crit  la  lettre  (des  lettres).         I  wrote  the  letter  (letters). 

2.  A  transitive  verb  can  have  only  one  direct  object ;  other 
substantives  related  to  it  must  stand  as  indirect  object  or  as 
prepositional  complement : 

Pardonnez-lui  ses  p6ch6s.  Pardon  him  his  sins. 

Je  donne  le  d6  k  la  fiUe.  I  give  the  girl  the  thimble. 

Je  lui  donne  le  d^  avec  plaisir.  I  give  her  the  thimble  with  pleasure. 

Je  conseille  k  mon  fils  de  partir.  I  advise  my  son  to  go. 

o.  By  an  extension  of  this  principle,  the  verb  faire=*  make,'  'cause 
to,'  etc.  +  an  infinitive,  requires  an  indirect  personal  object,  when  the 
infinitive  has  a  direct  object : 

Je  fais  lire  ce  livre  k  mon  fils.  I  make  my  son  read  this  book. 

Je  lui  fais  lire  ce  Uvre.  I  make  him  read  this  book. 

But :  Je  fais  lire  mon  fils.  I  make  my  son  read. 

Je  le  fais  lire.  I  make  him  read. 

5.  Laisser,  voir,  entendre,  oui'r,  may  have,  and  frequently  do  have, 
the  same  construction : 

Laissez-le  (-lui)  lire  le  livre.  Let  him  read  the  book. 

Je  r(lui)  ai  vu  jouer  ce  r6la  I  saw  him  play  that  part. 

But :  Laissez  hre  I'enfant  Let  the  child  read. 

294.  Intransitives.  An  intransitive  verb  can  have  no 
direct  object,  but  may,  of  course,  have  an  indirect  object  or  a 
prepositional  complement: 


§§295-296] 


GOYERNMENT  OF  VERBS. 


217 


n  parle  k  ce  soldat.  He  is  speaking  to  that  soldier. 

II  lui  parle  de  la  guerre.  He  speaks  to  him  of  the  war. 

a.  A  very  few  intransitives  govern  a  direct  object  anomalously : 
Oh  avez- vous  pass^  I'^t^  ?  Where  did  you  pass  the  summer  ? 

H  va  tout  droit  son  chemin.  He  goes  straight  on  his  way. 

NoTB.— Many  verba  serve  both  as  transitives  and  intransitives :  '  II  est  descendu* 
(intransitive),  'He  has  (cone  down';  'II  a  desoendu  le  tableau'  (transitive), '  He  has 
taken  down  the  picture.' 

29s  Predicative  Complement.    Nouns  are  used  pre- 

dicatively  after  certain  verbs,  as  follows : — 

1.  In  nominative  relation : 

Hs  sont  Anglais. 

II  est  m^ecin. 

EUe  est  morte  jeune  fille. 

Such  verbs  are : 
demeurer,  remain. 
devenir,  become. 
entrer,  enter. 
6tre,  be. 
dtre  oens^,  be  supposed. 

2.  In  accusative  relation : 

On  le  fit  roi, 

Je  le  connais  honn^te  homme. 

Such  verbs  are : 


They  are  Englishmen. 

He  is  a  doctor. 

She  died  a  young  girL 


mourir,  die. 
naitre,  be  bom. 
paraftre,  appear. 
passer,  poM. 


rester,  remain, 
■embler,  teem. 
•ortir,  go  out. 
etc 


They  made  him  king. 

I  know  him  to  be  an  honest  man. 


appeler,  call. 
couronner,  crown. 
croire,  believe. 
d^larer,  declare. 
^lire,  elect. 


estimer,  esteem. 
faire,  make. 
se  faire,  become. 
instituer,  institute. 
juger,  judge. 


se  montrer,  show  one's  se\f, 
nommer,  name. 
proclamer,  proclaim. 
savoir,  know. 
etc. 


296.  Prepositional  Complement.    The  use  of  de  and 

^  presents   special    difficulty;    other    prepositions    have,    in 
general,   their  usual  literal  force: — 

1.  Some  verbs  with   de  have   the   force   of   an   English 
transitive : 

H  m6dit  de  ses  voisins.  He  slanders  his  neighboura 

H  ne  jouit  de  rien.  He  enjoys  nothing. 


218 


THE  VERB. 


[§296 


Such  verbs  are : 
abuser  de,  misuse. 
S'apercevoir  de,  perceive. 
s'approcher  de,  approach. 
avoir  besoin  dc,  need. 
avoir  peur  de,  /ear. 
avoir  piti6  de,  pity. 
convenir  de,  admit. 
8e  d^fier  de,  mixtrust. 


se  d^mettre  de,  retign. 
disconvenir  de,  deny. 
douter  de,  suspect,  doubt. 
se  douter  de,  suspect. 
g^mir  de,  bemoan. 
jouir  de,  enjoy. 
manquer  de,  lack. 
m6dire  de,  slander. 


Be  m6fier  de,  mistnut, 
partir  de,  leave. 
se  passer  de,  do  vrithout. 
Be  servir  de,  use. 
se  souvenir  de,  recollect. 
Be  tromper  de,  mistake. 
user  de,  em,ploy,  use. 
etc. 


2.  Similarly,  some  verbs  with  a  have  the  force  of  an  English 
transitive : 


He  obeys  his  father. 
I  have  resisted  him. 


nuire  k,  harm. 

ob6ir  k,  obey. 
obvier  a,  obviate. 
ordonner  k,  order. 
pardonner  k,  pardon 
parvenir  k,  attain. 
permettre  k,  permit. 
persuader  k.  persuade. 
plaire  k,  please. 


promettre  k,  promise. 
rem6dier  k,  remedy. 
renoncer  k,  renounce. 
r^pondre  k,  answer. 
resister  k,  resist. 
ressembler  k,  resemble. 
Bucc^der  k,  succeed. 
Burvivre  k,  survive. 
etc. 


H  ob^it  k  son  p^re. 
Je  lui  ai  r^sist^. 

Such  verbs  are : 
aller  k,  fit,  suit. 
arriver  k,  reach. 
attenter  a,  attempt  {the  life), 
compatir  k,  pity. 
convenir  k,  suit. 
d^plaire  k,  displease. 
d^sob^ir  k,  disobey. 
se  fier  k,  trust. 
importer  k,  concern. 

3.  In  some  instances,  on  the  contrary,  a  French  transitive 
has  the  force  of  an  English  verb  +  a  preposition. 

Payez-lui  les  livres.  Pay  him  for  the  books. 

Je  regarde  cet  arbre-lk.  I  am  looking  at  that  tree. 

Such  verbs  are : 

demander,  ask  for. 
d6sirer,  rvish  for. 
6couter,  listen  to. 
envoyer  chercher,  send  for. 
esp^rer,  hope  for. 

4.  De  and  a  frequently  have,  as  compared  with  English,  a 
special  idiomatic  force  with  certain  verbs  : 

Cela  depend  de  vous.  That  depends  on  you. 

Pensez  k  votre  devoir.  Think  of  your  duty. 

Such  verbs  are : 

■TafBiger  de,  grieve  at.  biamer  de,  blam^for.  consoler  de,  console  for. 

approcher(8')  de,   draw  complimenter  de,  compli-  dejeuner  de,  breakfast  on. 

near  to.  ment  on.  d^pendre  de,  depend  on. 


accepter,  accept  of. 
admettre,  admit  of. 
approuver,  approve  of. 
attendre,  wait  for. 
chercher,  look  for. 


payer,  pay  for. 
regarder,  look  at. 
rencontrer,  meet  tvith. 
souhaiter,  vrishfor. 
eta 


1296] 


GOVERNMENT  OF  VERBS. 


219 


se  d^Boler  de,  grieve  over.       se  nourrir  de,  live  on. 
diner  de,  dine  otu  profiter  de,  profit  by. 

f61iciter  de,  congratulate  on.  punir  de,  punish  for. 
g6mir  de,  lament  over.  r^compenser  de,  reward 

louer  de,  praise  for.  for. 

se  mSler  de,  meddle  xoUlu       se  r^jouir  de,  rejoice  at. 


remercier  de,  thank  for. 
lire  de,  laugh  at. 
triompher  de,  triumph  over. 
vivre  de,  live  on. 
etc. 


acheter  qqoh.  k  qqu.,  Jmy  something  from 

(or  for)  tome  one. 
arracher  qqch.  k  qqu.,  snatch  fronu 
cacber  qqch.  k  qqu.,  hide  from. 
confdrer  qqch.  h  qqu.,  confer  on. 
demander  qqch.  k  qqu.,  ask  for  (of). 
d^rober  qqch.  k  qqu.,  steal  from. 
emprunter  qqch.  4  qqu.,  borrow  from. 
infliger  qqch.  k  qqu.,  inflict  on.. 
inspirer  qqch.  k  qqu.,  inspire  with. 
meier  qqch.  k  qqch.,  mingle  with. 

5.  Many  verbs  have 
meaning: 

Us  jouent  aux  cartes. 
Elle  joue  du  piano. 

Such  verbs  are : 

abuser  qqu.,  deceive. 

u     de  qqch. ,  misuse. 
assister  qqu.,  help. 

n       k  qqch.,  be  present  at,  toitness. 
concourir  k  qqch.,  contribute  to. 

II  pour  qqch.,  compete  for. 

convenir  k  qqu.,  suit. 

It         de  qqch.,  agree  about. 
croire,  qqu.,  or  qqch.,  believe. 

II      k,  en,  believe  in. 
demander  qqu.  or  qqch.,  ask  after. 

II  qqch.  a  qqu.,  ask  for  {from,  of). 

h^riter  de  qqu.,  be  heir  of. 

II      de  qqch.,  inherit. 
Jouer  qqu.,  deceive. 
II    d'un  instrument,  play  on  an  iruttru- 

ment. 
II    k  un  jeu,  play  {at)  a  game. 
manquer  qqu.  or  qqch.,  miss. 
•I       de,  lack. 
II       k,  fail  in. 
penser  k,  think  of  (.about). 


6ter  qqch.  k  qqu.,  take  away  for. 
pardonner  qqch.  k  qqu.,  pardon /or. 
payer  qqch.  k  qqu.,  pay  for. 
penser  k  qqch.  or  k  qqu.,  think  of. 
prendre,  qqch.  kqqu.,  take  from. 
pourvoir  k  qqch. ,  provide  for. 
procurer  qqch.  k  qqu.,  procure  for. 
prodigfuer  qqch.  k  qqu.,  lavish  on. 
reprocher  qqch.  k  qqu.,  reproach  VJitK. 
souhaiter  qqch.  k  qqu.,  wish. 
voler  qqch.  k  qqu.,  steal  from. 

a  double  construction  with  varying 


They  are  playing  cards. 
She  is  playing  the  piana 


penser  de,  have  opinUm  qf. 
pr^tendre  qqch.,  assert. 

•I         k,  aspire  to. 

servir,  serve  (tr.  and  intr.). 

II      de,  serve  as. 

II      k,  be  useful  for. 

se  servir  de,  make  use  of. 

suppler  qqu.,  take  the  place  of. 

II        k  qqch.,  complete. 
toucher  qqu.  or  qqch.,  touch. 
II       de  I'argent,  draw  money. 
II       k,  meddle  with,  be  near  to. 
M       d'un  instrument,  play  an  instru^ 
ment  (keyed), 
user  qqch.,  wear  out. 
II    de,  make  use  of. 
en  user  de,  deal,  act. 
veiller  qqu.,  watch  over,  nurse. 
II      k  qqch.,  attend  to,  wateh  over. 
M     sur  qqu.,  watdi  over. 
eta 


220  THE  NOUN.  [§§297-301 

297.  Position.  Objects  and  prepositional  complements 
regularly  follow  the  verb,  the  direct  object  (if  any)  being  first; 
but  if  of  unequal  length,  the  longer  usually  last.  For  position 
of  personal  pronouns,  see  the  Pronoun. 

298.  Composite  Complement.  The  various  parts  of  a 
complement  must  be  of  the  same  grammatical  value,  i.e.,  all 
nouns,  all  verbs,  etc.: 

II  apprend  k  lire  et  a  chanter.  He  learns  to  read  and  sing. 

II  apprend  la  lecture  et  le  chant.       He  learns  reading  and  singing. 

299.  Manifold  Verb.  Two  or  more  verbs  can  govern  the 
same  complement  only  if  alike  in  government : 

II  aime  et  respecte  son  oncle.  He  loves  and  respects  his  uncle. 

n  aime  son  oncle  et  lui  ob^it.  He  loves  and  obeys  his  uncle. 


THE  NOUN. 

GENDER  OF  NOUNS. 

300.  General  Rule.  Nouns  in  French  are  either  masca- 
line  or  feminine.  As  an  aid  to  memory,  general  rules  for 
determining  gender  are  given  in  the  following  sections. 

301.  Gender  by  Derivation.  1.  Nouns  derived  from 
Latin  masculines  are  regularly  masculine  : 

Mur  (L.  murum) ;  livre  (L.  lihrum)  j    Wall ;  book  ;  order  ;  poet, 
ordre  (L.  ordinem) ;  po6te  (L.  poeta). 

a.  Exceptions  are  not  uncommon ;  Latin  masculine  abstracts  in  -or 
(accusative  -orem)  have  become  feminine,  except  mascuhne  hozineur, 
d^shonneur,  labeur,  amour : 

candeur,  f.  (L.  candorem),  candour.  erreur,  f.  (L.  errorem),  error. 

*couleur,  f.  (L.  colorem),  colour.  fureur,  f.  (h.  furorem),  fury. 

douleur,  f.  (L.  dolorem),  pain.  etc. 

•Masculine  in  such  phraaes  as  'couleur  de  feu,'  'csouleur  de  rose,'  eto.,  e.ff.t  *ce 
ruban  est  d'un  beau  oouleur  de  rose.' 


§302]  GENDER  OF  NOUNS.  221 

2.  Nouns  derived  from  Latin  feminines  are  regularly 
feminine : 

Justice    (L.    justitiam) ;    charity        Justice ;  charity  ;  hand ;  faith. 
(L.  caritatem);   main  (L.  man- 
um) ;  foi  (L.  Jldem). 

3.  Nouns  derived  from  Latin  neuters  are  regularly 
masculine : 

Corps {Jj.  corpus) ;  ieriluferrum);        Body;     iron;     gold;     meadow; 
or  (L.   aurum) ;    pr6  (L.   pra-  century ;    verb. 

turn) ;  si^cle  (L.8ceculum);  verba 
(L.  verbum). 

a.  More  than  a  hundred  neuter  plurals  in  -a  have  become  feminine 
singular  in  French,  just  as  if  derived  from  nouns  in  -a  of  the  Latin 
first  declension : 

arme  (L.  arma),  arm.  feuille  (L.  folia),  leaf.  levre  (L.  labra\  lip. 

date  (L.  data),  date.  graine  (L.  grana),  seed.  OBUvre  (L.  opera),  work. 

dette  (L.  debita),  debt.  huile  (L.  olea),  oil.  pomme  (L.  poma),  apple. 

^tude  (L.  ttudia),  study.  Joie  (L.  gaudia),joy.  etc. 

302.  Gender  by  Endings.  1.  Masculine  are  most  nouns 
ending  as  follows : — 

(1)  In  a  vowel  sound  (not  -e  mute) : 

Un  op^ra  (c6t^,  chapeau,  cheveu).     An  opera  (side,  hat,  hair). 
Un  parti  (zero,  caillou,  tissu).  A  party  (zero,  pebble,  tissue). 

a.  Feminine  exceptions  are  : 

guerilla,  guerilla. 

gxitta-percha,  gutta-percha. 

polka,  polka. 

raz2da,  raid. 

tombola,  charity-lottery. 

v6randa,  verandah. 

<dt4,  city. 


amiti^,  friendship. 
oiharit^,  charity. 

(2)  In  a  consonant : 
Le  sac  (pied,  joug,  sol,  nez,  temps).     The  sack  (foot,  yoke,  soil,  nose,  time). 


moiti^,  half. 

bru,  daughUr-in-law. 

fourmi,  ant. 

glu,  bird-lime. 

merci,  merey. 

tribu,  tribe. 

foi,  faith. 

vertu,  virtue. 

loi,  law. 

eau,  water. 

paroi,  wall. 

peau,  skin. 

virago,  virago. 

etc. 

-t6,-ti6: 

liberty,  liberty. 

lant^.  health. 

piti6,  pity. 

etc. 

222 


THE  NOUN. 


[§303 


a.  Feminine  exceptions  are : 


clef,  key. 
net,  ship,  nave. 
Boif,  thirst. 
faim,  hunger, 
t&qon,  fashion. 
fin,  end. 
le^D,  lesson. 
main,  hand. 
ranQon,  ransom. 


chair,  Jlesh. 
cour,  court. 
cuiller,  spoon. 
mer,  sea. 
tour,  tower. 
brebis,  sheep, 
fois,  time. 
oasis,  oasis. 
Bouris,  mouse. 


vis,  screw. 
dent,  tootA. 
dot,  dower. 
forSt,  forest. 
gent,  tn&e. 
mort,  death. 
nuit,  night. 
part,  part,  «Aar«. 
chaux,  2im«. 


croix,  eroM. 
faux,  scythe. 
noix,  walnut, 
paix,  peace. 
perdrix,  partridge. 
poix,  pt'tcA. 
toux,  cough. 
voix,  voice, 
etc. 


Further,  nouns  in  -son,  -ion  and  most  abstracts  in  -eur  (cf.  §  301,  a)  i 


chanson,  song. 
maison,  house. 
raison,  reason. 
trahison,  treason. 


nation,  nation. 
occasion,  occasion. 
possession,  possession. 
couleur,  colour. 


f  aveur,  favour, 
fur  eur,  fury. 
peur, /car. 
etc. 


(3)  In  -acle,  -age,  -asme,  -^ge,  -6me,  -isme,  -t^re : 

Le  spectacle   (voyage,  sarcasme,       The  spectacle  (journey,   sarcasm, 
college,  diad^me,  magn^tisme,  college,     diadem,      magnetism^ 

myst^re).  mystery). 

a.  The  following  feminines  in  -age  should  be  noted : 

cage,  cage.  na/ge,  swimming.  plage,  heatJu 

image,  im4ige.  page,  page  (of  a  book).  rage,  rage. 

2.  Feminine  are  most  nouns  ending  as  follows  : — 

(1)  In  -e  preceded  by  a  vowel  or  double  consonant : 
Une  ann^e  (vie,  vue,  raie,  sole,        A  year  (life,  sight,  streak,  silk. 


roue,     pluie,    famille,    flamme, 
couronne,  tristesse,  botte). 


wheel,     rain,     family,     flame, 
crown,  sadness,  boot). 


(2)  In  -ace,  -ade,  -ance,  -ence,  -ense,  -i^re,  -oire, 
•ude,  -ure : 


La  preface  (salade,  Constance, 
presence,  defense,  lumi^re,  his- 
toire,  habitude,  culture). 


The  preface  (salad,  constancy, 
presence,  defence,  light,  his- 
tory, habit,  culture). 


303.  Gender  by  Meaning.     1.  Names  of  male  beings 
are  usually  masculine,  and  names  of  female  beings  feminine ; 

Un  homme  ;  une  femme.  A  man  ;  a  woman. 

Un  boeuf ;  une  vache.  An  ox ;  a  cow. 


§303]  GENDER  OF  NOUNS.  223 

o.  Most  nouns  denoting  professions,  e.g.,  docteur,  doctor ^  ^crivain, 
writer ,  imprimeur,  printer^  etc.,  and  a  few  nouns  lacking  a  feminine 
form,  e.g.,  ange,  angel^  t^moin,  witness,  etc.,  remain  masculine  when 
applied  to  females : 

Cette  dame  est  un  auteur  distingu^.     That  lady  is  a  celebrated  authoress. 
Marie  est  un  ange.  Mary  is  an  angel. 

h.  Some  names  of  lower  animals  are  masculine  only,  e.g.,  ^l^phant, 
elephant,  hibou,  owl;  others  are  feminine  only,  e.g.,  fourmi,  ant,  souris, 
mouse  ;  ambiguity  may.  be  avoided  by  adding  mMe  or  femelle  : 

Un  61dphant  male  (femelle).  A  he-  (she-)  elephant. 

c.  Some  nouns  are  feminine  only,  whether  applied  to  males  or  females  : 

caution,  surety.  personne,  person.  vedette,  scout. 

oonnaissance,  acquaintance.  pratique,  customer.  victime,  victim. 

dupe,  dupe.  recrue,  recruit.  vigie,  look-out  man. 

ganache,  blockhead.  Bentinelle,  sentinel.  etc. 

2.  The  following  are  masculine : — 

(1)  Names  of  cardinal  points  and  winds  : 

Le  nord ;  le  sud ;  le  zephyr.  The  north ;  the  south ;  the  zephyr. 

a.  Feminine  exceptions  are : 

bise,  north  wind.  mousBon,  monsoorL  tramontane,  north  wind. 

brise,  breeze. 

(2)  Names  of  seasons,  months,  days  of  the  week : 

Le  printemps ;  octobre ;  lundL         Spring ;  October ;  Monday. 

(3)  Names  of  countries  not  ending  in  -e  : 

Le  Canada ;  le  Dauphin^ ;  le  Chili.         Canada ;  Dauphiny  ;  ChilL 

(4)  Most  names  of  mountains  not  ending  in  -es,  and  most 
names  of  rivers : 

Le  Hartz ;  le  Jura.  The  Hartz  mountains ;  Mount  Jura. 

Les  Apennins.  The  Apennines. 

Le  Volga ;  le  Rhdne  ;  le  Rhin.  The  Volga ;  the  Rhone;  the  Rhine. 

But  fem.  :  Les  Alpes  (Pyr6n6es,  Vosges,  etc.). 

a.  The  rivers  of  France  in  -e  are  nearly  all  feminine : 
La  Seine,  la  Loire,  eto.  The  Seine,  the  Loire,  etc. 


224  THE  NOUN.  [§303 

(5)  Names  of  trees  and  shrubs : 

Le  chene ;  le  bouleau ;  le  poramier.     The  oak ;  the  birch;  the  apple-tree. 

a.  Feminine  exceptions  are  : 
atib^pine,  hawthorn.  ^pine,  thorn.  vigne,  vine. 

bourdaine,  buckthorn.  hifeble,  dwarf ^Ider.  viome,  wild  cUmatia. 

bruyfere,  heath.  ronce,  bramble.  etc. 

(6)  Names  of  weights  and  measures  of  the  metrical  system  : 
Un  mfetre  (gramme,  litre,  etc. ).        A  metre  (gramme,  litre,  etc. ). 

(7)  Names  of  metals  and  chemicals  : 

Le  fer  (or,  cuivre,  argent,  sulphate).     Iron(gold,  copper,  silver,  sulphate). 

a.  Feminine  exceptions  are  : 
fonte,  east-iron.  tdle,  slieet-iron. 

(8)  Words  and  phrases  not  nouns  when  used  as  nouns : 
Le  beau  ;  le  blanc  ;  le  fran^ais.         The  beautiful  ;  white  ;  French. 
Un  a ;  un  mais  ;  un  oui-dire.  An  *  a ' ;  a  '  but ' ;  a  rumour. 
Le  derri^re  de  la  t^te.                        The  back  of  the  head. 

a.  Adjectives  referring  to  concrete  objects  have  the  gender  of  the 
noun  understood : 

Une  belle  (sc.  dame,  femme,  etc. ).     A  beauty. 
Une  capitale  {sc.  ville,  lettre).  A  capitaL 

b.  The  names  of  the  letters  of  the  alphabet,  as  given  in  §  4,  are  all 
mascuUne,  except  f,  h,  1,  m,  n,  r,  s  : 

Un  a ;  un  b^  ;  une  eflfe.  An  *  a ' ;  a  *  b ' ;  an  *  f.' 

3.  The  following  are  feminine  : — 

(1)  Names  of  countries  in  -e : 

La  France  (Asie,  Normandie).  France  (Asia,  Normandy). 

a.  Masculine  exceptions  are  : 
le  Bengale,  Bengal.  le  Mexique,  Mexico.  le  Pdopon(n)fe8e,  Peloponnesus, 

le  Hanovre,  Hanover.         le  Maine,  Maine  (in  Pr.).  etc 

(2)  Most  names  of  cities  and  towns,  especially  in  -e,  -es : 
Borne  ;  Ath6nes ;  Tyr ;  Ilion.  Rome ;  Athens ;  Tyre ;  Ihum. 

a.  MascuUne  exceptions  are  : 
le  Caire,  Cairo.  Londres,  London.  Paris,  Paris. 

le  Havre,  Havre.  Versailles,  Versailles.  etc. 

Notes.— 1.  Any  name  of  a  town  or  city  is  masculine  as  a  collective :  'Tout  Rome  le 
aait,'  'AH  Rome  knows  it.'  2.  In  case  of  doubt  as  to  tbe  gender,  the  name  may  always 
be  preceded  by  la  Vllle  de= *  the  town  (city)  of 


§304]  GENDER  OF  NOUNS.  225 

(3)  Names  of  holidays,  fi&te  de  being  understood  ; 
La  Saint-Martin ;  la  mi-juin.  Martinmas  ;  mid-June. 

a.  Observe  : 
Noel,  m.  (la  Noel,  la  fete  de  Noel).     Christmas. 

(4)  Names  of  arts,  sciences,  trades  : 

La  peinture  (chimie,  librairie).  Painting  (chemistry,  book -trade). 

a.  Principal  exception : 
le  dessin,  drawing. 

304.  Nouns  of  Double  Gender.     1.   Some  nouns  de- 
noting persons,  mostly  in  -e,  and  adjectives  in  -e,  when  so 
used,  are  either  masculine  or  feminine  : 
Un  (une)  artiste ;  un  (une)  ^16ve.  An  artist ;  a  pupiL 

Un  (une)  malade ;  un  (une)  rebella.  A  patient ;  a  rebeL 

Such  nouns  are : 
aide,  astistant.  •enfant,  cWWL  propri6taire,  owmt, 

camarade,  comrade.  esclave,  tlave.  pupille,  ward. 

compatriote,  compatriot.       locataire,  tenant.  etc. 

•Always  masculine  in  the  pluraL 

2.  The  meaning  of  some  nouns  varies  with  the  gender : 

Un  critique ;  une  critique.  A  critic  ;  a  criticism. 

Le  mode ;  la  mode.  The  mode,  mood  (gram. ) ;  the  fashion. 

Such  nouns  are : 

Masc.                 Frm.  Masc.             Fkm. 

aide,         atti$tant,  assistant,  help.  page,  page,  page  (ot  a.  hock). 

aune,         alder,  ell.  pendule,  pendulum,  clock. 

crfipe,       crape,  pancake.  po61e,  atove,  pall,  frying-pan. 

critique,    crutc,  criticism.  politique,  politician,  politics. 

garde,       guard  (mil.),  keeper,  body  of  poste,  position,  post-office. 

keeper,  troops,  watch,  hiit.  somme,  sleep,  nap,  sum. 

guide,       guide,  rein.  souris,  smile,  mouse. 

livre,         book,  pound.  atatuaire,  sculptor,  sculpture. 

manche,    handle,  sleeve.  tour,  turn,  trick,  tower. 

m^moire,  memorandum,  memory.  trompette,  trumpeter,  trumpet. 

merci,       thanks,  mercy,  pity.  vapeur,  steamer,  steam. 

mode,        mode,  mood,  fashion.  vase,  vase,  slime,  mud» 

raoule,      mould,  mussel.  Toile,  veilt  tail, 

mousse,     cabin-boy,  moss.  eta 

oflQce,        service,  larder. 

15 


226  THE  NOUN.  [§304 

3.  The  following  nouns  are  either  masculine  or  feminine, 
with  identical  or  closely  related  meaning  : — 

a.  Apr^s-midi  =*  afternoon '  and  automne  =' autumn '  are  usually 
masculine,  sometimes  feminine. 

b.  Amour  (m.)=*love,'  'loved  object,'  'passion,'  'amour';  amour 
(f.  s.  poet. )=* passion,'  'amour';  amours  (f.  pi. )  =  ' passion,'  'amours.' 

c.  D^lice  =*  delight '  and  org^e  =' organ '  (music)  are  masculine  in 
singular  and  feminine  in  plural.     • 

d.  Hymne  (m.)  =  *h3man,'  'song  of  praise';  hymne  (f .)  —  * (church) 
hymn.' 

c.  Couple  (m.)  = 'couple,'  'pair'  (joined  by  affection,  sentiment,  etc.); 
couple  (f. )  = '  couple,'  *  two '  (two  like  objects  taken  together) : 

Un  couple  d'amants.  A  pair  of  lovers. 

Une  couple  d'oeufs.  Two  (a  couple  of)  eggs. 

Note :  Une  paire  de  gants,  etc.        A  pair  of  gloves,  etc. 

/.  P4que  or  p&ques  (m.  s.  )  =  *  Easter ' ;  pAques  fleuries  (t  pL)= 
•  Palm  Sunday '  (so  also  in  other  phrases) ;  p4que  (f. )  = '  passover. ' 

g.  Orge  (f.)  =  ' barley'  is  masculine  in  orge  mond6  (perl6)='pot- 

(pearl-)  barley.' 

h.  Foudre  (f.)=* thunderbolt'  is  sometimes  masculine  in  poetry  or 
elevated  prose ;  foudre  (m.)  in  le  foudre  de  Jupiter=' Jove's  thunder- 
bolt' and  in  figurative  expressions,  e.g.,  un  grand  foudre  de  guerre = 
*a  great  warrior.' 

i.  (Euvre  (f.)  =  *work,'  'works,'  is  sometimes  masculine  in  elevated 
style  ;  oeuvre  (m.  s. )  = '  works '  (collectively  of  an  engraver  or  musician) ; 
le  grand  ceuvre='jthe  philosopher's  stone';  le  gros  oeuvre  =' heavy 
stone- work ' ;  de  Toeuvre  (m.  )  = '  silver-lead.' 

j.  Gens  (pi.  m.  or  f.)=' people,'  'persons,'  etc.  Attributive  adjec- 
tives are  feminine  when  preceding,  and  masculine  when  following  gens, 
but  predicatives,  before  or  after,  are  masculine.  '  All '  is  translated  by 
toutes  only  when  attributive  and  separated  from  gens  by  an  adjective 
variable  for  the  feminine  ;  otherwise  by  tous: 

De  bonnes  gens.  Good  people. 

lies  vieilles  gens  sent  malheureux.    Old  people  are  unhappy. 


§§305-306] 


GENDER  OF  NOUNS. 


227 


Les  petites  gens  et  les  grands. 
Merci,  bonnes  gens,  merci. 
Ces  gens  sont  heureux. 
Toutes  les  vieilles  gens. 
Tous  les  gens. 
But :   Tous  les  habiles  gens. 

Tous  ces  gens-ci. 

Tous  sont  de  bonnes  gens. 

Les  gens  sont  tous  ici. 


The  small  people  and  the  great. 

Thanks,  good  people,  thanks. 

Those  people  are  happy. 

All  the  old  people. 

All  the  people. 

All  the  clever  people. 

All  these  people. 

All  are  good  people. 

The  people  are  all  here. 


A  toothpick  ;  a  pen-holder. 
A  corkscrew ;  a  portfolio. 


Notes. — 1.  A  pronoun  to  which  gens  is  antecedent  is  masculine  :  '  Les  gens  qui  sont 
▼enus,'  'The  people  who  have  come.'  2.  QenS  in  expressions  like  gens  de  TObB^ 
'  lawyers '  and  in  Jeunes  geUB  = '  young  men  '  is  always  masculine. 

305.  Gender  of  Compound  Nouns.  1.  Compound 
nouns  made  up  of  a  verb -fa  governed  noun  are  regularly 
masculine : 

Un  cure-dents  ;  un  porte-plume. 
Un  tire-bouchon  ;  un  portefeuille. 

a.  Occasionally  they  are  feminine  : 
Une  perce-neige.  A  snowdrop. 

2.  The  gender  of  other  compounds  is  regularly  that  of  the 
noun,  when  only  one  noun  is  present,  or  of  the  principal  noun^ 
in  case  there  are  two : 

Une  eau-forte.  An  etching. 

Une  mappe-monde.  A  map  of  the  world. 

La  fete-dieu.  Corpus  Christi  day. 

306.  Formation  of  the  Feminine.  Most  nouns  de- 
noting living  beings  distinguish  the  masculine  and  feminine  as 
follows : — 


1.  Some  by 

a  different  word ; 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Masc. 

FEBf. 

boeuf,  ox. 

vache. 

mari,  husband. 

femme. 

bouc,  he-goat. 

ch6vre. 

oncle,  uncle. 

tante. 

coq,  cock. 

poule. 

parrain,  god-father . 

marraine. 

fr6re,  brother. 

soeur. 

pore,  pig. 

truie. 

homme,  man. 

femme. 

etc. 

eta 

228 


THE  NOUN. 


[§306 


a.  The  feminine  form  is  often  obviously  cognate : 


Masc. 

Fbm. 

Masc. 

FnL 

ambasaadeur,  ambassador. 

ambassadrice. 

gouverneur,  tutor. 

gouvernante. 

canard,  drake. 

cane. 

loup,  wolf. 

louve. 

*chanteur,  singer. 

cantatrice. 

mulet,  mule. 

mule. 

cochon,  hog. 

coche. 

*procureur,  proxy. 

prociiratrice. 

compagnon,  companion. 

compagne. 

serviteur,  servant. 

servante. 

dindon,  turkey-cock. 

dinde. 

vieillard,  old  man. 

vieiUe. 

empereur,  emperor. 

imp^ratrice. 

etc. 

etc. 

*AIso  in  -euse,  see  §  337,  2,  (2),  a. 

2.  Some  by  adding  -eSSe  to  the  last  consonant : 


Masc. 

Fem. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

abb^,  abbot. 

abbesse. 

ogre,  ogre. 

ogresse. 

&ne,  ass. 

anesse. 

pair,  peer. 

pairesse. 

chanoine,  canon. 

chanoinesse. 

pauvre,  pauper. 

pauvresse. 

comte,  count. 

comtesse. 

pretre,  priest. 

pretresse. 

diable,  devil. 

diablesse. 

prince,  prince. 

princesse. 

drdle,  rogue. 

drdlesse. 

Suisse,  Swiss. 

suissesse. 

druide,  druid. 

druidesse. 

tigre,  tiger. 

tigresse. 

h6te,  host. 

hdtesse. 

traitre,  traitor. 

traitresse. 

maitre,  master. 

maitresse. 

etc. 

etc. 

a.  So  also  the 

following,  but  with  changes  in  the  stem 

: 

Masc. 

Fkm. 

Masc. 

Fkm. 

dieu,  god. 

d^esse. 

♦chasseur,  huntsman. 

chasseresse. 

doge,  doge. 

dogaresse. 

d^fendeur,  defendant. 

d^fenderesse. 

due,  duke. 

duchesse. 

*demandeur,  plaintiff. 

demanderesse. 

larron,  thief. 

larronnesse. 

enchanteur,  enchanter. 

enchanteresse. 

nfegre,  negro. 

n6gres8e. 

p^cheur,  sinner. 

p6cheresse. 

prophfete,  prophet. 

proph6tesse. 

*vendeur,  seller  (law). 

venderesse. 

hailleur,  lessor. 

bailleresse. 

vengeur,  avenger. 

vengeresse. 

*Also  in  -euse,  see  §337,  2,  (2),  a. 

3.  A  few  nouns  take  -ine  : 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

tsar,  czar. 

tsarine. 

Philippe,  Philip. 

Philippine. 

heros,  hero. 

heroine. 

etc. 

etc. 

4.  Most  other  nouns  follow  the  analogy  of  adjectives  of  like 
termination,  and  will  be  noted  under  the  Adjective. 


§307-308]  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  229 

NUMBER    OF    NOUNS. 

307.  General   Rule.     The  plural  of  a  noun  is  regularly 
formed  by  adding  -s  to  the  singular : 

Roi{s) ;  reine(s) ;  jardin(s).  King(s) ;  queen(s) ;  garden(s). 

308.  Principal    Exceptions.    The   following    are   the 
principal  exceptions  to  the  above  rule : — 

1.  Nouns  in  -s,  -X,  -Z  remain  unchanged  in  the  plural ;  so 
also  invariable  words  when  used  as  nouns  : 

Le  bras  ;  la  voix  ;  le  nez.  The  arm  ;  the  voice  ;  the  nose. 

Les  bras ;  les  voix  ;  lea  nez.  The  arms ;  the  voices ;  the  noses. 

Les  oui  et  les  non ;  les  on  dit  The  ayes  and  noes ;  the  rumoura. 

Plusieurs  pen  font  un  beaucoup.  Many  littles  make  a  '  muckle.' 

2.  Nouns  in  -au,  -eu,  aild  seven  in  -ou,  take  -x : 

Noyau(x);  chateau(x);  jeu(x},        Kemel(s) ;    castle(s);    game(s); 
voeu(x).  vow(s). 

The  seven  nouns  in  -ou  are : 

bijou{x),  jewel.  genou(x),  knee.  joujou(x),  toy. 

caillou(x),  pebble.  hibou(x),  owl.  pou(x),  louse. 

chou(x),  cabbage. 
But :  Clou(s),  naiU  sou(s),  half-penny^  etc. 

3.  Most  nouns  in  -al  change  -al  to  -au,  and  add  -x  as  above: 
G^n^ral ;  cheval ;  journal.  General ;  horse  ;  newspaper. 
G^n^raux ;  chevaux ;  joumaux.      Generals ;  horses ;  newspapers. 

a.  But  the  following,  and  a  few  rarer  ones  in  -al|  are  regular  : 
aval(BX  endoraement.  cal(8),  callosity.  ohacaI(8),  jackal. 

bal(s),  ball  (for  dancing).      carnaval(B),  carnival  r^gal(8),  treat. 

4.  The  following  in  -ail  have  the  plural  in  -aux  I 

bail  (-aox),  lease.  travail  (-aux),  work.  vitrail  (-aux),  stained 

corail  (-aux),  coraL  vantail  (-aux),  folding-door.      glass  window. 

Boupirail  (-aux),  ventail  (-aux),  ventail. 
air-hole. 

But:  d^tail(s),  detail;  6ventail(s), /aw,  etc.,  are  regular. 

Note.— Bestiauz(pl.)>  cattle,  is  often  ^ven  as  the  plural  ot  "tiitaM,  cattle ;  it  if 
from  an  obsolete  form  bestiail,  parallel  to  b^talL 


THE  NOUN.  [§§309-311 

5.  Gent  =  'race,'  'tribe,'  has  the  plural  gens  =  'people,'  etc. 

Note. — A  similar  omission  oft  in  the  plural  of  nouna  in  -ant,  -ent,  now  archaic, 
is  maintained  in  the  Meviie  des  deux  Mondes,  e.  g.,  ^ enfans '  for  '  en/ants.' 

309.  Double  Plurals.  The  following  have  two  plural 
forms,  mostly  with  varying  meaning; 

aieul  (aieux),  ancestor.  ceil  (yetix),  eye. 

"     (aieuls),  grandfather.  "  (ceils-)  in  compounds,  e.  g. 

ail  (aulx),  garlic.  ceils-de-bceuf,  oval  windows. 

"  (ails),        "  pal  (paux),  pale,  stake. 

ciel  (cieux),  sky,  heaven,  climate.        "   (pals),       "         " 
"    (ciels),  bed-tester,  (sky  in  paint-    travail  (travaux),  work, 
ing),  {roof  {of  a  quarry.)  "      (travails),  report  {of  a  minis- 

ter, etc.),  brake  {for  horse-shoeing). 
Obs.:  The  -x  plural  regularly  has  the  literal  meaning  of  the  word. 

310.  Foreign  Nouns.  Nouns  of  foreign  origin  take  -s 
usually  only  when  fully  naturalized,  but  usage  varies  greatly 
(see  dictionary) : 

a.  Partial  list  of  variable  foreign  nouns : 

acoe8sit(8),  honourable  men-  bill(s),  bill  toa8t(s),  tocut. 

tion.                                    duo(s),  duo.  tramway(8),  street-railtoay. 

album(s),  album.                   jury(8),  jury.  vivat(B),  hurrah. 

alibi(s),  alibi.                          op^ra(s),  opera.  eta 
bifteck(s),  beefsteak.               pen8um(s),  task. 

b.  Partial  list  of  invariable  foreign  nouns  : 

amen.  item.  interim.  post-scriptum.  Tademeoum. 

deficit.  in-folio.  magnificat.  requiem.  veto, 

facsimile.  in-octaro.  nota  bene.  Te  Deum.  eta 

c.  A  few  Italian  nouns  retain  their  plural  in  i : 

dilettante  (-i),  dilettante.      8oprano(-i),  soprano.  quintetto(-i),  quintette. 

libretto(-i),  libretto.  lazzarone(-i),  beggar.  eta 

311.  Compound  Nouns.  The  only  components  which 
take  a  plural  sign  are  nouns  and  adjectives.  The  following 
are  special  rules : — 

1.  Compounds  without  hyphen  are  treated  as  one  word,  and 
follow  the  general  rules  : 

Portemanteau(x) ;  grand 'mere(8).  Valise(s);  grandmother(8). 

a.  Exceptions  are : 

bon(s)homme(8),  goodman,  etc.  madame  (mesdames),  madam,  Mrs. 

gentil(8)homme(8),  nobleman.  mademoiselle  (mesdemoiselles),  Miss. 

monsieur  (messieurs),  Mr.,  sir,  etc.  monseigneur  (messeigneurs),  my  lord. 


§311]  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  231 

2.  When  placed  in  juxtaposition    and    connected    by    a 
hyphen,  nouns  and  adjectives  are  variable : 

Chef(s)-lieu(x) ;  chou{x)-fleur(s) ;  County-town(s) ;  cauliflower(8) ; 

grand{s)-p6re(s).  grandfather(s). 

a.  Demi-  is  invariable  in  compounds. 
Des  demi-heures.  Half-hours. 

&.  Further  exceptions  are : 
blaDC-8eing(B),  signature  in  blank.  terre-plein(B),  platform. 

chevBU-l^ger(8),  light-horseman.  etc. 

3.  Of  two  nouns  joined  by  preposition  and  hyphens,  the 
first  only  is  variable : 

Arc(s)-en-ciel ;  chef(s)-d'cEuvre.        Rainbow ;  masterpiece. 

a.  The  preposition  de  is  sometimes  understood : 
bain(8)-marie,  water-bath.  timbre(8)-po8te,  postage-stamp. 
hdtel(8)-dieu,  hospital.  etc. 

b.  The  following  are  invariable,  since  the  idea  conveyed  by  their 
plm-al  does  not  properly  belong  to  the  first  component  simply  : 
coq-i,-r4ne,  eoek-and-bull  story.  pot-au-feu,  beef  and  soup. 
pied-^-terre,  temporary  lodging.  t6te-k-t6te,  private  interview. 

4.  A  noun  with  preceding  invariable  component  is  usually 
variable : 

Anglo-Saxon(s) ;  avant-garde(s) ;     Anglo-Saxon  ;  vanguard  ; 
tire-bouchon{s) ;  vice-roi(s) ;  corkscrew ;  viceroy ; 

bouche-trou(s) ;  stop-gap. 

a.  But  the  final  noun  remains  invariable  when  the  plural  idea  does 
not  properly  belong  to  it : 

abat-jour,  lamp-shade.  gagne-pain,  m^aru  of  living,  r^veille-matin,  alarm- 

coupe-gorge,  cut-throat  place.  perce-neige,  snow-drop.  clock. 

crfeve-coBur,  heart-break.  prie-dieu,  praying-stool.  8erre-t6te,  head-band. 

oontre-poison,  antidote.  houte-en-tTsAn,  jolly  fellow.  etc 

b.  On  the  other  hand,  a  final  noun  of  clearly  plural  sense  retains  -s 
in  the  singular: 

un  (des)  casse-noisettes,  nut-cracker.  un  (des)  porte-clefs,  turnkey. 

un  (des)  cure-dents,  tooth-pick.  etc. 

5.  Invariable  words,  such  as  verb,  adverb,  preposition,  etc., 
are  invariable  in  compounds  : 

Des  on  dit ;  des  passe-partout.  Rumours ;  master-keys. 


THE  NOUN.  [§§312-313 

a.  Garde-  is  usually  variable  in  compounds  denoting  persons,  and 
Invariable  in  those  denoting  things : 

Des  gardes-malades.  Sick-nurses. 

But :  Des  garde-robes.  Wardrobes. 

312.  Plural  of  Proper  Nouns.     1.  Names  of  persons 

or  families  are  usually  invariable  in  the  plural : 

Lcs  deux  Racine.  The  two  Racines. 

Les  Comeille  et  les  Racine  de  la       The  Corneilles  and  Racines  of  the 
sc^ne.  stage  (i.e.,  Corneille,  Racine,  and 

others  like  them). 
Les  Duval  sont  arrives.  (The)  Duvals  have  come. 

a.  A  few  Latin  names,  originally  plural  in  form,  and  certain  well- 
known  historical  names  of  families  and  dynasties,  take  -s  : 


Lea  Bourbons. 

Les  Gracques. 

Les  Pharaons. 

Les  Tudors. 

Les  C^sars. 

Les  Guises. 

Les  Scipions. 

etc. 

Les  Cond^s. 

Les  Horaces. 

Les  Stuarts. 

b.  Names  of  persons  used  as  common  nouns  to  denote  *  persons  like ' 
or  *  works  by*  those  named  are  often  variable,  but  usage  is  not 
fixed: 

Les  Corneilles  sont  rares.  Corneilles  are  rare. 

J'ai  vu  deux  Raphaels.  I  saw  two  Raphaels. 

But :  Les  Hamlet ;  les  La  Fontaine ;  les  Goethe ;  les  Washington,  eta 

2.  Names  of  places  take  -s  when  the  idea  is  plural : 

Les  Indes  ;  les  Vosges.  The  Indies ;  the  Vosges. 

Les  deux  Romes.  The  two  Romes  (i.e.,  the  old  and  new). 


CASE  RELATION  AND  AGREEMENT  OF  NOUNS. 

313.  Case  Relations.     The  noun  in  French  does  not  vary 
in  form  to  denote  case ;  it  is  used  as  follows : — 

1.  With  verbs,  as  subject,  object,  predicate : 

Le  p6re  aime  son  fils.  The  father  loves  his  son. 

Jean  est  devenu  soldat  John  has  become  a  soldier. 


§§314-316]     CASE  RELATION  AND  AGREEMENT.  233 

2.  In  appositions,  and  with  adjectival  force : 

Henri  FV,  roi  de  France.  Henry  IV. ,  King  of  Franoe. 

Un  roi  enfant.  A  child  king. 

3.  After  prepositions : 

J'ai  parl^  h.  son  p6re.  I  have  spoken  to  his  father. 

4.  Absolutely,  generally  with  adverbial  force  : 

Le  diner  fini,  il  partit.  The  dinner  ended,  he  set  out. 

II  etait  \ky  le  chapeau  k  la  main.  He  was  there,  (with)  his  hat  in  his 

hand. 

Je  suis  venu  samedi.  I  came  on  Saturday. 

H  est  rest^  trois  heures.  He  stayed  three  hours, 

J'ai  march^  dix  milles.  I  walked  ten  miles. 

Nous  I'avons  achet6  dix  francs.  We  bought  it  for  ten  francs. 

5.  Vocatively : 

Bonjour,  mes  amis.  Good  morning,  my  friends. 

314.   Agreement.     A  predicate   noun,   or  a   noun  used 
adjectivally,  usually  agrees  like  an  adjective  with  the  word 
referred  to,  see  agreement  of  the  Adjective : 
lis  (elles)  sont  Allemand(e)s.  They  are  Germans. 

La  reine  m^re.  The  queen  mother. 


THE  ARTICLE. 
31S  The  Indefinite  Article. 

Masc.  Fem. 

un,  a  (an).  une,  a  (an). 

316.  The  Definite  Article. 

Sing.  Plur. 

Masc.  le  (l')\the.  Masc.  or  Fem.  les,  the. 

Fem     la  (V)j 

Ob».:  For  the  forms  in  parenthesis,  see  §19,  L 


234  THE  ARTICLE.  [§§317-318 

317.  Contractions.     The  prepositions  de  and  a  +  le  and 

les,  are  always  contracted  as  follows  : 

de  +  le  =  du.  i+le  =  au. 

de  +  les=des.  i  +  le8=aux. 

Notes.— 1.  No  contraction  takes  place  with  la,  1'.  2.  Formerly  en+les  was  con- 
tracted to  hs,  a  form  still  used  in  academical  titles,  e.g.,  'Bachelier  ^s  lettres,* 
'Bachelor  of  Arts.' 

318.  Agreement  and  Repetition.    The  article  agrees  in 

gender  and  number  with  its  noun,  and  is  regularly  repeated 
(as  also  de,  a)  before  each  noun  or  adjective  denoting  a 
distinctive  object : 

Une  maison  et  un  jardin.  A  house  and  garden. 

Le  flux  et  le  reflux.  High  and  low  tide. 

Au  bon  et  au  mauvais  c6t^.  On  the  good  and  bad  side. 

Les  bons  et  les  mauvais.  The  good  and  the  bad. 

Des  hommes  ou  des  femmes.  Men  or  women. 

But :  Le  bon  et  pieux  pretre.  The  kind  and  pious  priest. 

Le  delta  ou  basse  Egypte.  The  Delta  or  Lower  Egypt. 

a.  The  definite  article  is  not  repeated  when  a  single  adjective  precedes 
nouns  joined  by  et : 

Les  principales  villes  et  provinces    The  principal  towns  and  provinces 
de  la  France.  of  France. 

b.  Singular  adjectives  in  apposition  to  a  plural  noun  omit  the  article: 
Les  langues  frangaise  et  anglaise.  The  French  and  EngUsh  languages. 
Or :  La  langue  f ran9ai8e  et  la  langue  anglaise. 

La  langue  fran9ai8e  et  I'anglaise. 

c.  A  few  expressions  of  collective  force,  lik«  the  following,  are  per- 
missible, but  are  either  not  obligatory  or  are  confined  to  set  expressions : 
Les  p6re  et  m6re.  The  parents. 

Les  lundi  et  mardi.  (On)  Mondays  and  Tuesdays. 

Les  trois  et  quatre  avriL  The  third  and  fourth  of  ApriL 

Les  ofl&ciers  et  soldats.  The  officers  and  soldiers, 

^cole  des  ponts  et  chauss^es.  School  of  bridges  and  roads. 

d.  For  the  repetition  of  le,  la,  les  with  the  superlative,  see  Comparison 
of  Adjectives. 


§§319-321]      USE  OF  ARTICLE  WITH  NOUNS.  235 

USE  OF  THE  ARTICLE  WITH  NOUNS. 

319.  Use  in  General.  French  and  English  agree  to  a 
considerable  extent  in  the  use  of  the  article ;  differences  are 
noted  below. 

320.  The    Indefinite  Article.    1.  Its  use  corresponds 

in  general  with  that  of  English  *a,'  *an';  its  plural  is  the 

partitive  des  (§323) : 

Un  homme ;  une  f emme ;  des  gens.       A  man  ;  a  woman ;  people. 

2.  Contrary   to  English  usage,   the   indefinite  article  also 
commonly  stands  before  an  abstract  noun  used  partitively  with 
an  adjective  or  an  adjectival  adjunct : 
II  montra  un  soin  extreme.  He  showed  extreme  care, 

n  a  une  patience  k  toute  ^preuve.     He  has  patience  equal  to  anything. 
Elle  jouit  d'une  bonne  sant^  She  enjoys  good  health. 

Cest  une  triste  nouvelle.  It  is  sad  news. 

a.  The  adjective  or  complementary  clause  depending  on  such  a  noun 
may  be  understood : 

Voilk  une  patience  !  There  is  patience  for  you  ! 

J'^tais  d'une  humeur. . .  I  was  in  a  temper. . . 

Un  gar9on  d'une  raison. . .  A  young  fellow  of  (splendid)  intellect  I 

NoTB.— For  several  cases  in  which  the  English  indefinite  article  is  replaced  by  the 
French  definite  article,  or  vice  versd,  or  is  omitted,  see  below. 

321.  The  General  Noun.  A  noun  used  in  a  general 
sense,  i.e.,  'in  general,'  *all,'  'every,'  etc.,  being  implied  with 
it,  regularly  has  the  definite  article  in  French,  though  not 
usually  in  English: 

La  vie  est  courte.  Life  is  short. 

Le  fer  et  le  cuivre  sont  utiles.  Iron  and  copper  are  useful 

J'^tudie  la  musique.  I  am  studying  music. 

Les  Fran9ais  aiment  la  gloire.  The  French  love  glory. 

Le  cheval  est  I'ami  de  I'homme.  The  horse  is  the  friend  of  man. 

Le  noir  vous  sied  bien.  Black  becomes  you. 

J'aime  les  pommes  et  les  poires.  I  like  apples  and  pears. 

Le  beau  et  I'utile.  The  beautiful  and  the  useful. 

Le  boire  et  le  manger.  Eating  and  drinking. 


236  THE  ARTICLE.  [§§322-324 

a.  So  also,  names  of  languages,  except  after  en ;  but  not,  however, 
after  parler : 

Sait-il  le  fran9ais  ?  Does  he  know  French  ? 

II  parle  bien  (le)  frangais.  He  speaks  French  well. 

But :  Dites  cela  en  frangais.  Say  that  in  French. 

Parlez-vous  fran§ais  ?  Do  you  speak  French  ? 

322.  The  Partitive  Noun.  A  noun  implying  *  an  unde^ 
termined  quantity  or  number  of '  is  said  to  be  used  partitively 
or  in  a  partitive  sense. 

323.  Partitive  with  Article.  The  partitive  sense,  ex- 
pressed in  English  by  the  noun  simply,  or  else  the  noun 
preceded  by  'some '  or  *any,'  is  regularly  expressed  in  French, 
by  the  noun  preceded  by  de  +  the  definite  article  : 

Du  pain  tremp^  dans  du  vin.  (Some)  bread  dipped  in  wine. 

A-t-il  des  amis  ?  Has  he  (any)  friends  ? 

Des  enfants  poussaient  des  oris    Some  children  were  uttering  ter- 

desesperes.  rible  cries. 

n  est  des  gens  qui  le  croient.  There  are  people  who  believe  it. 

C'est  du  Carlyle  pur.  That  is  pure  Carlyleism. 

NoTB.  —Thia  use  of  de+the  definite  article,  or  even  of  de  alone  (see  next  section),  is 
often  called  the  '  partitive  article ' ;  it  is  entirely  identical  in  form  with  de+the  article 
in  other  senses,  e.g.,  'Je  vends  dU  bl6,'  '  I  sell  wheat ' ;  'Quel  est  le  prixdubl^?/ 
*  What  is  the  price  of  the  wheat  V 

324.  Omission  of  Article.  The  partitive  sense  is  ex- 
pressed by  de  alone  +  the  noun  as  follows : — 

1.  When  an  adjective  precedes  the  noun;  so  also,  when  a 
noun  is  understood  after  an  adjective  : 

Avez-vous  de  bon  papier  ?  Have  you  any  good  paper  ? 

Donnez-moi  de  ces  plumes-Ik.  Give  me  some  of  those  pens. 

J'ai  de  vos  livres.  I  have  some  of  your  books. 

De  bon  vin  et  de  mauvais  («c.  vin).  Good  wine  and  bad. 

De  gros  livres  et  de  i)etits  («c.  livres).     Big  books  and  little  ones. 
But :  Des  soldats  fran9ais.  French  soldiers. 

J'ai  du  pain  blanc.  I  have  white  bread. 

«.  The  article  is  not  omitted  when  the  noun  has  a  distinctive  adjunct: 
Du  bon  papier  qu'il  a  achet^.  Some  of  the  good  paper  he  bought. 


§325]        USE  OF  ARTICLE  WITH  NOUNS.         237 

b.  The  article  is  not  omitted  when  adjective  and  noun  are  indivisible 
in  sense,  i.e.,  when  forming  a  real  or  a  virtual  compound  : 

Dee  grands-p^res  ;  des  petits-fils.      Grandfathers  ;  grandchiMren. 
Des  petits  pois  ;  du  bon  sens.  Green  peas  ;  common  sense. 

Des  jeunes  gens  ;  de  la  bonne  foi.      Young  men  ;  honesty. 

c.  Familiarly,  the  article  is  often  used  contrary  to  the  rule : 
Du  bon  vin ;  du  vrai  bonheur.  Good  wine  ;  true  happiness. 

2.  After  a  general  negation,  implying  non-existence  of  the 
object  in  question : 

U  n'a  pas  de  montre.  He  has  no  (not  any)  watch. 

Je  n'ai  point  de  livres.  I  have  no  (not  any)  books. 

Sans  avoir  d'argent.  Without  having  (any)  money. 

II  ne  fit  pas  de  remarques.  He  made  no  remarks. 

Pas  d'argent  et  pas  d'amis.  No  money  and  no  friends. 

3.  But  the  article  is  not  omitted,  the  negation  being  no 
longer  general :  « 

a.  When  the  noun  has  a  distinctive  adjunct : 

Je  n'ai  plus  du  vin  de  cette  annee.     I  have  no  more  of  this  year's  wine. 

Jo  n'ai  pas  de  I'argent  pour  le  gas-     I  have  no  money  to  waste  ( =  I  have 

piller.  money,  but  not  to  waste). 

b.  In  contrasts : 

Pas  du  lait,  mais  du  th^.  Not  milk,  but  tea. 

c.  In  negative  interrogation  implying  affirmative  answer : 
N'avez-vous  pas  des  amis,  de  la        Have  you  not  friends,  health,  in- 

sant^,  de  I'influence  ?  fluence  ? 

325.  Omission  of  the  Partitive  Sign.  The  partitive 
sense  is  expressed  by  the  noun  simply,  when  the  preposition 
de  forms  an  essential  part  of  the  governing  expression, 
thus : — 

1.  In  expressions  of  quantity  or  number  : 

Une  livre  de  th4  (noix).  A  pound  of  tea  (nuts). 

Un  morceau  de  papier.  A  piece  of  paper. 

Une  foule  de  gens.  A  crowd  of  people. 

Peu  de  temps ;  beaucoup  d'amis.  Little  time  ;  many  friends. 


238  THE  ARTICLE.  [§326 

Assez  de  livres.  Enough  books  {or  books  enough). 

Des  milliers  d'etoiles.  Thousands  of  stars. 

Que  de  gens  assembles  !  What  a  number  of  people  assembled  I 

a.  Analogous  to  the  above  are  expressions  like  the  following : 
Trois  jours  de  marche.  Three  days'  march. 

Cent  soldats  de  tu6s.  A  hundred  soldiers  killed. 

Quelque  chose  (rien)  de  bon.  Something  (nothing)  good. 

b.  Bien=  *  beaucoup'  regularly  has  de  +  the  definite  article  : 
Bien  de  Targent ;  bien  du  monde.     Much  money  ;  many  people. 
Bien  des  gens  le  croient.  Many  people  think  so. 

But :  Bien  d'autres.  Many  others. 

NoTB.— Bien  in  other  senses  does  not  take  de :  '  J'ai  bien  faim,'  •  I  am  rery  hungry.* 

c.  Laplupart=*mo8t,'  'the  greater  part,'  etc.,  has  de  +  the  definite 
article : 

La  plupart  des  hommes.  Most  men. 

La  plupart  du  temps.  Most  of  the  time. 

d.  Expressions  of  qusRitity  or  number  with  a  distinctive  adjunct 
have  de  +  the  definite  article ;  so  also,  beaucoup,  peu,  etc.,  absolutely: 
Une  livre  du  th^  de  ce  marchand.     A  pound  of  this  tradesman's  tea. 
Beaucoup  des  Juifs  de  ce  pays.  Many  of  the  Jews  of  that  country. 

2.  After  a  verb  requiring  de  before  its  complement,  and  in 
phrases,  adjectival  or  adverbial,  formed  from  de  +  a  noun : 

II  vit  de  pain  (not  '  de  du  pain ').  He  lives  on  bread. 

II  manquait  d'argent.  He  lacked  money. 

II  ^tait  convert  de  plaies.  He  was  covered  with  wounds. 

Une  robe  de  soie.  A  silk  dress. 

Un  homme  de  g^nie.  A  man  of  genius. 

Une  bourse  pleine  d'or.  A  purse  full  of  gold. 

NOTBS.— 1.  In  both  cases  (§325, 1,  2)  the  disappearance  of  the  partitive  de  is  caused 
by  its  coincidence  with  a  governing:  de.  2.  The  negative  construction  (§  324, 2)  is  really 
parallel,  the  particles  pas,  point,  etc.,  being  etymologically  nouns. 

326.  General  and  Partitive  Sense.  The  general  sense 
of  a  noun  (§321)  is  to  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the 
partitive  sense  (§322) : 

Les  oiseaux  ont  des  ailes.  Birds  have  wings. 

Les  hommes  sont  des  animaux.         Men  are  animals. 


§§327-328]     USE  of  article  with  nouns.  239 

327.  Article  with  Titles.  A  title  of  dignity  or  pro- 
fession, preceding  a  proper  name,  regularly  takes  the  definite 
article,  except  in  direct  address : 

La  reine  Victoria  est  aim^e.  Queen  Victoria  is  beloved. 

Le  docteur  Ribot  est  arriv^.  Doctor  Ribot  has  come. 

Qu'est-ce  que  le  p6re  Daru  dit  What  does  Father  Daru  say  ? 

But :  Bonjour,  docteur  Ribot.  Good  morning,  Doctor  Ribot. 

a.  So  also,  when  such  title  is  preceded  by  a  title  of  courtesy  (mon- 
sieur, madame,  etc.),  whether  in  speaking  to  or  in  speaking  of  the 
person : 

Bonjour,  monsieur  le  docteur.  Good  morning,  doctor. 

Monsieur  le  president  I'a  dit.  The  president  said  so. 

b.  A  preceding  attributive  adjective  may  have  the  force  of  a  title  : 
La  petite  Claire ;  le  gros  Robert.      Little  Clara ;  big  Robert. 

328.  Article   for   Possessive.    The  definite  article  is 

commonly  used  with  the  force  of  a  possessive  adjective,  when 
no  ambiguity  arises  from  its  use : 

Donnez-moi  la  main.  Give  me  your  hand. 

n  a  perdu  la  vie.  He  has  lost  his  life. 

D  avait  le  chapeau  sur  la  tSte.  He  had  his  hat  on  his  head. 

a.  The  use  of  an  indirect  pronoun  object  +  the  definite  article  often 
avoids  ambiguity  : 

Le  courage  lui  manqua.  His  courage  failed  (him). 

EUe  lui  a  arrach^  les  yeux.  She  tore  out  his  eyes. 

II  s'est  fait  mal  k  la  tSte.  He  hurt  his  head. 

6.  Possessive  force  appears  also  in  avoir  mal  (froid,  chaud,  etc.) 
k  +  the  definite  article  followed  by  a  noun  denoting  part  of  the  person  ; 
similarly,  in  phrases  of  personal  description  made  up  of  avoir  +  the 
definite  article  +  a  noun  +  an  adjective  : 

J'ai  mal  k  la  tete.  I  have  a  headache  (my  head  aches). 

II  a  mal  aux  yeux.  He  has  sore  eyes  (his  eyes,  etc. ). 

H  a  froid  aux  pieds.  He  has  cold  feet  (his  feet,  etc. ). 

II  a  la  tSte  grosse  {or  une  grosse       He  has  a  large  head. 

tete). 
n  a  les  bras  longs  {or  de  longs  bras).    He  has  long  arms. 
Le  ch^ne  a  T^corce  rude.  The  oak  has  (a)  rough  bark. 


240  THE  ARTICLE.  [§§329-330 

329.  Article  Distributively.  1.  The  definite  article  with 
distributive  force  replaces  English  *a'  of  weight,  measure, 
number,  when  indicating  price  : 

Deux  francs  la  livre  (le  m6tre).  Two  francs  a  pound  (a  metre). 

Des  oeufs  (4)  dix  sous  la  douzaine.       Egg"S  at  ten  cents  a  dozen. 
Des  po^es  (h)  un  sou  la  pi^ce.  Pears  at  a  cent  apiece. 

a.  Otherwise  par  is  generally  used  with  price  : 
Cinq  francs  par  jour.  Five  francs  a  (per)  day. 

Cent  francs  par  tete.  A  hundred  francs  a  (per)  head. 

Trois  francs  par  le9on.  Three  francs  a  (per)  lesson. 

2.  The  definite  article  is  also  used  distributively  with  names 
of  days : 

II  vient  le  dimanche.  He  comes  (on)  Sundays. 

Le  bateau  part  tous  les  lundis.        The  boat  goes  every  Monday. 

330.  Omission  of  the  Article.  The  article,  whether 
definite,  indefinite,  or  partitive,  is  frequently  omitted.  This 
takes  place : — 

1.  In  a  large  number  of  expressions  made  up  of  a  verb  +  a 
noun: 

J'ai  sommeil ;  il  a  honte.  I  am  sleepy ;  he  is  ashamed. 

Je  vous  demande  pardon.  I  beg  your  pardon. 

Further  examples  are  : 

avoir  besoio,  need.  donner  avis,  notify.  faire  place,  make  room. 

avoir  faim,  be  hungry.  donner  ordre,  give  orders.  prendre  cong6,  take  leave. 

avoir  bonne  mine,  Zooj;  tre22.  faire  attention,  ^ay  atten-  prendre  garde,  taj:«  care, 

avoir  peur,  be  afraid.  tion.  rendre  visite,  pay  a  visit. 

avoir  tort,  be  (in  the)  torong.  faire  cadeau,  make  a  present,  trouver   moy  en,  find 

courir  risque,  run  the  risk.  faire  faillite,  fail  (in  bim-  m^ans. 

demander  oonseil,  a«i(;  adtm;e.       ness).  etc.,  etc 

2.  In  many  adjectival  and  adverbial  phrases  made  up  of 
a  preposition  +  a  noun  : 

D'apr^s  nature  ;  devant  t^moins.      After  nature  ;  before  witnesses. 
Sans  cause ;  k  travers  champs.  Without  cause ;  across  the  fields. 


§330] 


USE  OF  ARTICLE  WITH  NOUNS.  241 


Further  examples  are  : 

k  bord,  on  board.  ohien  de  herger,ghepJiercC8  par  chemin  de  fer,  by  rail' 

k  cheval,  on  horseback.  dog.  way. 

k  dessein,  intentionally.  homme  de  coeur,  man  of  par  exemple,  for  example. 

k  genoux,  on  one's  knees.  feeling.  par  exp6rience,6y  experience. 

k  pied,  on  foot.  homme  de  g^nie,  man  of  par  terre,  by  land. 

pot  k  Heurs,  flower-pot.  genius.  a&na  craAnte,  vnthout  fear. 

moulin  k  vent,  vnnd-mill  en  bateau,  in  a  boat.  Bans  raison,  vrithout  reason. 

apr^s  diner,  after  dinner.  en  6t6,  in  summer.  sous  condition,  on  condition. 

aveo  int6r6t,  with  interest,  en  voiture,  in  a  carriage,  soub  presse,  in  the  press. 

»vec  plaiair,  wUh  pleasure,  par  an,  by  the  year.  sur  papier,  on  paper. 

•ortir  de  table,  leave  the  table.  etc. ,  etc. 

3.  Before  a  predicate  noun  which  qualifies  in  a  general 
way  the  personal  subject,  or  object,  of  certain  verbs  (cf.  §,295): 

Us  sont  Russes.  They  are  Russians. 

Elle  est  modiste.  She  is  a  milliner. 

Nous  sommes  m^ecins.  We  are  doctors. 

II  parait  honnete  homme.  He  seems  an  honest  man. 

Son  fr^re  se  fit  soldat.  His  brother  became  a  soldier. 

On  I'a  ordonn^  prStre.  He  was  ordained  a  priest. 

Soyons  amis.  Let  us  be  friends. 

NoTi.— Nouns  BO  used  are  commonly  those  of  nationality,  profession,  title,  eta,  and 
their  function  is  adjectival.  Whenever  a  predicate  noun  denotes  an  individual  or  a 
species,  it  must  have  the  article  :  '  La  rose  est  una  fleur,' '  The  rose  is  a  flower ' ;  *  Les 
rois  Bont  dea  hommes,' '  Kings  are  men.' 

a.  The  article  is  not  omitted  when  the  predicate  noun  has  a  distinctive 
adjunct : 

Son  fr^re  est  un  artiste  de  m^rite.     His  brother  is  an  artist  of  merit, 
lis  sont   devenus    des   g^n^raux    They  became  distinguished  generals. 

distingu^s. 

h.  observe  the  predicative  force  of  a  noun  after  traiter  +  de,  qualifier 
+  de: 

H  m'a  traits  de  sot.  He  called  me  a  fool. 

Je  qualifie  cela  de  fraude.  I  call  that  fraud. 

c.  After  c'est,  ce  sont,  the  noun  is  logical  subject,  not  predicate,  and 
hence  the  article  or  some  other  determinating  word  must  be  used  with 
it: 

Cest  une  AUemande.  She  is  (a)  German. 

Ce  sont  les  (mes)  gants.  Those  are  the  (my)  gloves. 

16 


242 


THE  ARTICLE. 


[§330 


4.  Before  such  an  appositive  noun  as  serves  merely  the 
purpose  of  a  parenthetical  explanation  : 

L'Avare,  com^die  de  Moli^re.  L'Avare,  a  comedy  by  Moli^re. 

Paris,  fils  de  Priam,  ravit  Hel^ne,     Paris,  the  (a)  son  of  Priam,  carried 
femme  de  M^n^las.  off  Helena,  (the)  wife  of  Menelaus. 

a.  Thus  is  explained  the  omission  of  the  article  in  numerical  titles  : 
Jacques  premier  (deux).  James  the  First  (the  Second). 

b.  An  apposition  which  distinguishes,  contrasts,  compares,  regularly 
has  the  article,  as  in  English : 


Peter  the  Great. 

Racine  the  son  and  not  Racine  the 

father. 
Montreal     the     largest     city     in 

Canada. 
Mr.  Cook,  a  friend  of  my  father. 


Pierre  le  Grand. 

Racine  le  fils  et  non  Racine  le 

p6re. 
Montr^l  la  plus  grande  ville  du 

Canada. 
M.  Cook,  un  ami  de  mon  p^re. 

c.  Colloquially,  the  article  is  often  omitted  in  contrasts  : 
Dumas  pfere  et  Dumas  fils.      Dumas  the  elder  and  Dumas  the  younger. 

Note.— Pseudo-apposition  (really  ellipsis  of  de  or  of  a  de  clause)  is  found  in  many 
oases  like  '  L'6glise  («c.  de)  Saint-Pierre,'  '  St.  Peter's  Church ' ;  '  des  meubles  (»c.  du 
temps  de)  Louis  XY,'  'Louis  XV.  furniture';  'La  rue(«e.  de)Mirabeau,'  Mirabeau 
Street.' 

5.  In  condensed  sentences,  such  as  titles  of  books,  enumera- 
tions, addresses,  advertisements,  proverbs,  antithetical  expres- 
sions, etc.,  and  usually  after  ni .  • .  ni,  sans . .  .  ni,  soit . .  .  soity 
tant . . .  que,  jamais : 


Causes  de  la  perte  de  Rome. 
Portrait  de  Napoleon  III. 
Soldats,  officiers,  citoyens,  tous 

accoururent. 
Beauts,  talent,  esprit,  tout  s'use 

k  la  longue. 
II  loge  rue  Richelieu. 
Maison  k  vendre. 
Chapeaux  pour  hommes. 
Corps  et  ame  ;  nuit  et  jour. 
Soit  peur,  soit  prudence,  il  6vita 

le  combat. 


Causes  of  the  fall  of  Rome. 

(A)  portrait  of  Napoleon  HI. 

Soldiers,  officers,  citizens,  all  has- 
tened up. 

Beauty,   talent,   wit,   everything 
wears  out  in  the  long  run. 

He  lives  in  Richelieu  street. 

(A)  house  for  sale. 

Men's  hats. 

Body  and  soul ;  night  and  day. 

Whether  from  fear  or  prudence,  he 
avoided  the  combat. 


§331] 


USE  OF  ARTICLE  WITH  NOUNS. 


243 


B  n'a  ni  p6re  ni  ra6re. 
Sans  amis  ni  argent. 
Tant  hommes  que  femmes. 
Jamais  pere  n'a  tant  aimd 


He  has  neither  father  nor  mother. 

Without  friends  or  money. 

As  well  men  as  women. 

Never  did  a  father  love  so  much. 


331.  Unclassified  Examples.  The  following  examples 
show  idiomatic  distinctions  in  the  use  of  the  article  which 
cannot  conveniently  be  brought  under  general  rules : 


Vous  etes  le  bienvenu. 

Demander  (faire)  TaumOne. 

Avoir  le  temps. 

Aller  k  I'^cole  (I'^gUse). 

Commander  le  respect. 

Le  feu  s'est  d^clar^. 

Faire  la  guerre. 

Jeter  (lever)  Tancre. 

Garder  le  silence. 

Mettre  le  feu  k. 

Sur  (vers)  les  trois  heurea. 

Au  revoir ! 

L*ann6e  demi^re  (prochaine). 

La  semaine  (I'ann^)  pass^. 

Le  vendredi  saint. 

Le  mercredi  des  cendres. 

Le  printemps,  I'^td,  etc. 

Au  printemps,  en  6t^,  etc. 

La  («c.  f^te  de)  Saint-MicheL 

La  {sc.  fete  de)  mi-juin. 

La  moiti^  de  Tannic. 

Les  deux  tiers  du  temps. 

Tous  (les)  deux  ;  tous  (les)  trois. 

Tous  les  mois. 

Le  ministre  de  la  guerre. 

Le  meilleur  des  amis. 

II  cria  k  I'assassin. 

Je  I'ai  dit  au  hasard. 

Prendre  le  deuil  de  quelqu'un. 

Sentir  la  fum^. 

Je  vous  souhaite  la  bonne  aun^. 

n  n'a  pas  le  sou. 


You  are  welcome. 

Ask  (give)  alms. 

To  have  time. 

To  go  to  school  (church). 

Command  respect. 

Fire  broke  out. 

Make  war. 

Cast  (weigh)  anchor. 

Keep  silence. 

To  set  fire  to. 

Towards  three  o'clock. 

Good-bye  I 

Last  (next)  year. 

Last  week  (year). 

Good  Friday. 

Ash  Wednesday. 

Spring,  summer,  etc. 

In  spring,  in  summer,  eta 

Michaelmas. 

Mid-June. 

(The)  half  (of)  the  year. 

Two-thirds  of  the  time. 

Both ;  all  three. 

Every  month. 

The  minister  of  war. 

The  best  of  friends. 

He  cried  murder. 

I  said  it  at  random. 

Go  into  mourning  for  somebody. 

Smell  of  smoke. 

I  wish  you  a  happy  new  year. 

He  is  wretchedly  poor. 


244  THE  ARTICLE.  [§332 

II  est  plus  grand  que  vous  de  la      He  is  taller  than  you  by  a  head. 

t^te. 

Un  homme  k  la  barbe  noire.  A  man  with  a  black  beard. 

La  belle  question  !  What  a  (fine)  question  ! 

A  la  {sc.  mode)  fran9aise.  In  the  French  style. 

S'en  aller  a  I'anglaise.  To  take  French  leave. 

A  la  {sc.  mode  de)  Henri  IV.  In  the  style  of  Henry  IV. 

Cent  (mille)  ans.  A  hundred  (a  thousand)  years. 

Les  amis,  oti  allez-vous?  (My)  friends,  where  are  you  going? 

THE  ARTICLE  WITH  PROPER  NOUNS. 

332.  Names  of  Persons.     1.  Names  of  persons  usually 
take  no  article,  as  in  English  : 
Comeille  ;  George  Fox.  Comeille ;  George  Fox. 

a.  The  definite  article  is  a  constituent  part  of  some  surnames  : 
Les  romans  de  Lesage.  The  novels  of  Lesage. 

Les  fables  de  La  Fontaine.  The  fables  of  La  Fontaine. 

2.  The  definite  article  is  used  according  to  Italian  analogy 
in  the  French  form  of  a  few  famous  Italian  surnames;  so  also, 
in  a  very  few  names  which  are  not  Italian : 

Le  Corr^ge ;  le  pofeme  du  Tasse.       Correggio  ;  the  poem  of  Tasso. 
Le  Poussin ;  le  Camoens.  Poussin  ;  Camoens. 

3.  The  article  is  used  when  the  name  has  a  distinctive 
adjunct,  when  it  is  plural,  or  when  used  as  a  common  noun : 

Le  Christ.  Christ  ( =  the  *  Anointed '). 

Le  Satan  de  Milton  ;  le  grand  Milton's  Satan ;  the  Great  Cond^. 

Cond^. 

Les  Comeille  et  les  Racine.  A  Comeille,  a  Racine  ( =  Comeille, 

Racine  and  others  like  them). 

Cest  un  Alexandre.  He  is  an  Alexander. 

C'est  du  Ciceron  tout  pur.  It  is  pure  Ciceronian. 

J'ai  lu  le  Tel6maque.  I  have  read  Tel^maque. 

4.  Familiarly,  often  in  a  depreciatory  sense,  the  definite 
article  is  not  uncommon,  especially  with  names  of  females : 

Sans  attendre  la  Barbette.  Without  waiting  for  Barbara. 

Le  Duval  me  I'a  dit.  Duval  told  me  so. 


§333]     THE  ARTICLE  WITH  PROPER  NOUNS.        245 

333.  Names  of  Countries.  1.  Names  of  continents, 
countries,  provinces,  large  islands,  regularly  take  the  definite 
article,  always  so  when  standing  as  subject  or  object  of  a  verb: 

L'Asie  est  un  grand  contineut.  Asia  is  a  large  continent. 

Nous  aimons  le  Canada.  We  love  Canada. 

La  Normandie  ;  I'Angleterre.  Normandy  ;  England. 

a.  A  few  countries  named  after  cities  have  no  article : 
Naples;  Panne;  Bade.  Naples;  Parma;  Baden. 

Note.  —  ConBiderable  variety  prevails  regarding  the  uec  of  the  article  with  names 
of  IfllandB :  some  require  the  article,  whilst  it  is  omitted  with  others,  e.g., '  La  Corse,' 
Corsica;  '  La  Sicile,'  Sicily;  'Cuba,' Cuba;  ' Terre-Neuve,'  Newfoundland.  L'Tle 
de,  preceding  the  name,  and  I'Jle  in  apposition,  are  common  forms;  e.g.,  •  Llle 
de  Cuba,'  ♦  lille  Saint  Domingue,'  St.  Domingo;  •  Las  Sles  Bahama,'  the  Bahama 
Islands. 

2.  Before  names  of  continents,  European  countries  singular, 
and  feminine  countries  singular  outside  of  Europe,  en  denotes 

*  where,'  *  where  to,'  and  the  article  is  omitted ;  so  also,  after 
de  denoting  *  point  of  departure  from '  and  after  de  in  most 
adjectival  phrases : 

n  est  en  (va  en)  Europe.  He  is  in  (is  going  to)  Europe. 

II  voyage  en  France  (Portugal).  He  travels  in  France  (Portugal). 

II  vient  d'Espagne  (Daneraark).  He  comes  from  Spain  (Denmark). 

Le  roi  de  Portugal  (Espagne).  The  King  of  Portugal  (Spain). 

Le  fer  de  Su^e ;  les  vins  de  France.  Swedish  iron  ;  French  wines. 

a.  Exceptions  are  very  rare,  e.g.,  *au  Maine,'  *Le  due  du  Maine,'  etc. 

NOTB.— In  an  adjectival  phrase,  de  denoting  titular  distinction,  origin,  description, 
or  mere  apposition  usually  omits  the  article,  e.g.,  'le  pays  de  France,' '  Le  Royaume 
Uni  de  Grande-Bretagne  et  d'Irlande.' 

3.  But  the  definite  article  is  not  omitted,  in  answer  to 

*  where  V  *  where  to  V,  or  after  de  as  above,  when  the  name  is 
plural,  or  has  a  distinctive  adjunct,  or  denotes  a  masculine 
country  outside  of  Europe  : 

H  est  aux  Indes.  He  is  in  India. 

H  va  aux  :^tats-Unis.  He  goes  to  the  United  Statea. 

Aux  Pays-Bas.  In  (to)  the  Netherlands. 

L'imp^ratrice  des  Indes.  The  Empress  of  India. 

Venir  des  Indes  (de  I'lnde).  To  come  from  India. 

Dans  la  France  m^ridionale.  In  Southern  France. 


246  THE  ARTICLE.  [§§334-335 

Dans  TAm^rique  du  Nord.  In  North  America. 

La  reine  de  la  Grande-Bretagne.  The  Queen  of  Great  Britain. 

II  revient  de  I'Afrique  australe.  He  returns  from  South  Africa. 

Au  Canada  (Japon).  In  (to)  Canada  (Japan). 

Le  Dominion  du  Canada.  "I  rm     -r..      .   .        t.  r>,       ■, 

T     T>  .  J    r.       J     f  The  Dominion  of  Canada. 

La  Puissance  du  Canada.  J  ^ 

Chass6  de  la  Chine.  Expelled  from  China. 

Le  consul  du  P^rou.  The  consul  of  Peru. 

Le  fer  du  Canada.  Canadian  iron. 

Obs.:  When  the  definite  article  is  used,  'where,'  'where  to,' =  ^  (general)  or  dSJlB 
(speoific). 

a.  In  a  few  names  like  *  Asie  Mineure,'  *  basse  Bretagne,'  the  adjec- 
tiv3  is  no  longer  felt  to  be  distinctive  : 
En  Asie  mineure.  In  Asia  Minor. 

4.  Omission  of  the  article  in  the  predicate,  in  enumerations, 
titles,  etc.,  sometimes  occurs  (of.  §330,  5) : 
La  Gaule  est  devenue  France.  Gaul  became  France. 

Espagne,    Italic,    Belgique,   tout    Spain,   Italy,   Belgium,   all    would 

eAt  pris  feu.  have  caught -fire. 

334.  Names  of  Cities.     Names  of  cities  and  towns  usu- 
ally have  no  article,  unless  used  with  a  distinctive  adjunct : 
Londres,  Paris,  Quebec.  London,  Paris,  Quebec. 

A  Toronto  (Montreal).  To  or  in  Toronto  (Montreal). 

But :  La  Rome  de  ce  si^cle.  (The)  Rome  of  this  century. 

La  Nouvelle- Orleans.  New  Orleans. 

a.  The  definite  article  is  an  essential  part  of  several  names  of  cities  : 
Le  Caire  ;  le  Havre  ;  la  Ha  vane.      Cairo ;  Havre  ;  Havana. 

335.  Names  of  Mountains  and  Rivers.    Names  of 

mountains   always,  and    names  of  rivers  regularly,  have  the 

definite  article : 

Les  Alpes  ;  le  Nil ;  le  mont  Blanc.     The  Alps ;  the  Nile ;  Mt.  Blanc. 

a.  For  rivers,  the  usage  after  en,  de,  is  parallel  with  that  described 
in  §  333,  2 : 

De  I'eau  de  Seine.  Seine  water. 

Un  abordage  a  eu  lieu  en  Seine.        A  collision  occurred  on  the  Seine, 


§§336-337]      THE   FEMININE  OF  ADJECTIVES.  247 

THE  ADJECTIVE. 

THE  FEMININE  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

336.  General  Rule.  The  feminine  of  an  adjective  is 
regularly  formed  by  adding  -e  to  the  masculine  singular,  but 
adjectives  ending  in  -e  remain  unchanged : 


M. 

F. 

M. 

F. 

grand, 

joli, 

ruse, 

bless^, 

mort. 

grande,  tall. 
jolie,  pi-etty. 
rus^,  cunning. 
bless^e,  wounded. 
morte,  dead. 

facile, 
jeune, 
sincere, 
c^l6bre, 
etc. 

facile,  easy. 
jeune,  young. 
sincere,  sincere. 
c^l6bre,  celebrated, 
etc. 

a.  Similarly,  nouus  of  like  termination  (but  see 

§306,2): 

M. 

F. 

M. 

F. 

marquis,  marquis,  marquise, 
ami,  friend,            amie. . 
cousin,  eotuin,        cousin©, 
lapin,  rabbit,           lapine. 

artiste,  artist,           artiste, 
camarade,  comrade,  camarade. 
concierge,  porter,      concierge, 
malade,  patient,        malade. 

b.  Adjectives  in  -gu  are  regular,  but  require  the  diaeresis  to  indicate 
that  u  is  sounded,  e.g.,  aig^,  sharp,  aigufi. 

c.  The  circumflex  in  du  (f.  due)  distinguishes  it  from  du  =  *  of  the,* 
and  disappears  in  the  fem.  (§  214) ;   observe  also  mu  (f.  mue,  §  219). 

d.  Besides  adjectives  in  -e,  a  very  few  others  are  invariable  for  the 
feminine,  e.g.,  capot,  in  fitre  capot=*have  come  to  grief,'  grognon, 
grumbling,  rococo,  rococo,  sterling,  sterling,  and  rarer  ones. 

NOTB.— Here  also  properly  belongs  grand  in  grand'm^re,  etc.  In  O.  F.  grand 
was  masculine  or  feminine,  but  grammarians  at  a  later  date  gave  it  the  apostrophe  to 
denote  the  supposed  elision  of  e. 

337.  Special  Rules.  1.  Irregularities  consist  chiefly  of 
changes  in  the  stem  on  adding  the  feminine  sign  -e;  thus, 
when  -e  is  added  : — 

(1)  Final  f=V,  X  =  S,  C  =  ch  in  some,  and  qu  in  others, 

g:=g:u: 

M.                         F.  M.                       F. 

actif,  active,          active.  *blanc,  white,  blanche, 

href,  brie/,             br6ve.  t public,  public,  publique. 

heureux,  happy,  heureuse.  long,  long,  long^e. 

•So  also:  Franc, /roni,  franche  ;  sec,  dry,  s^che. 

tSoaJso:  Ammoniac  (-que),  ammoniac;  cadno  (-que),  decrepit;  franc  (-QUe) 
Frankith;    taro  (-que),  Turkisk. 


M. 

F. 

cruel,  cruel, 

cruelle. 

pareil,  like, 

pareille. 

ancien,  old, 

ancienne. 

bon,  good, 

bonne. 

bas,  low, 

basse. 

gros,  big. 

grosse. 

24(8  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [§337 

a.  Similarly,  nouns  of  like  termination : 

M.  F.  M.  F.  M.  F. 

veuf,  widower,    veuve.  ^poux,  spouse,    Spouse.  turc,  Turk,    turque. 

Note.— Here  alao  belongs  baiUi,  bailiff  (0.  F.  baillif),  baUliv©. 

b.  The  adjectives  doux,  douce,  sweet,  faux,  fausse,/a&«,  roux,  rousse, 
red  (of  hair,  etc.),  retain  the  [s]  sound  in  the  feminine,  denoted  by  c  and 
ss  respectively ;  grec,  Greek,  has  feminine  grecque ;  prefix  'prefixed,  is 
regular. 

(2)  Final  -el,  -eil,  -ien,  -on,  and  usually  -s,  -t,  double  the 
final  consonant : 

M.  F. 

^pais,  thick,  ^paisse. 

expres,  express,  expresse. 
prof^s,  professed,  professe. 
muet,  dumb,  muette. 

sot,  foolish,  sotte. 

etc.  etc. 

But :  ras,  rase,  flcU ;  gris,  grise,  grey ;  mat,  mate,  dead,  duU ;  pr^t, 
prete,   ready ;   d^vot,   devote,   devout ;   bigot,    bigote,    bigoted ;   cagct, 
cagote,  hypocritical ;  idiot,  idiote,  idiotic,  and  a  few  rarer  ones. 
a.  Similarly,  nouns  of  like  termination,  but  see  §  306  : 
M.  F.  M.  F.  M.  F. 

mortel,  mortal,  mortelle.  lion,  lior^,    lionne.  poulet,  ehieken,    poulette. 

ohien,  dog,         chienne.  chat,  cat,    chatte.  liDot,  linnet,         linotte. 

6.  A  very  few  adjectives  and  nouns  of  other  endings  follow  this  analogy: 
M.  F.  M.  F. 

paysan,  peasant,     paysanne.  gentil,  nice,       genbiUe. 

rouan,  roan,  rouanne.  nul,  nuU,  nulle. 

Note. — The  doubling  of  the  final  consonant  in  -el,  -ien,  -et  serves  to 
denote  the  required  [e]  sound  (§12,  1);  a  few  adjectives  in -et  denote 
this  [e]  sound  by  the  grave  accent  without  doubling,  cf.  (4)  below. 

(3)  The  following  have  two  masculine  forms  (in  sing.,  not 
in  pL),  one  of  which  doubles  1  for  the  feminine,  like  the  above  : 

M.  F.  M.  F. 

beau  or  bel,  fine,  belle.  mou  or  mol,  soft,  molle. 

fou  or  fol,  mad,  folle.  nouveau  or  nouvel,  new,  nouvelle. 

jumeau  or*  (O.F.  vieux  or  vieil,  old,  vieille. 

jumel)  twin,  jumelle. 

Obs.:  The  -1  form  is  regularly  used  only  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute;  vieuz  before  a 
vowel  is  permissible,  e.g.,  '  un  vieuz  ami '  (better :  '  uu  vieil  ami '). 


§337]  THE  FEMININE  OF  ADJECTIVES.  249 

a.  Analogous  are  a  few  nouns  : 

M.  F.  M.  F. 

ohamean,  camel,         chamelle.  jouvenceau,  young  feUow,    jouvencelle,  etc. 

(4)  Before  final  -r  and  -et  of  a  few  adjectives  e  becomes  ^ 
(cf.  §12,  1) ;  so  also  in  bref,  br^ve,  sec,  s^che : 

M.                  F.  M.                           F. 

•cher,  dear,     chhre.  complet,  complete,  complete. 

Idger,  light,    l^g^re.  etc.                          etc. 

a.  Similarly,  nouns  in  -er : 

M.  F.  M.  F. 

l)erger,  shepherd,       berg^re.  stranger,  stranger,       ^trangere,  eto. 

b.  The  complete  list  of  adjectives  in  -et  with  fem.  in  -^te  is  : 
<in)oomplet,  (in)eoinplete.      (in)di8cret,  (in)diacreet.  replet,  over-stout. 
«oncret,  concrete.                   inquiet,  uneasy.  secret,  secret. 

Note. — The  grave  accent  denotes  the  required  [e]  sound  (§12,  1). 

(5)  The  following  feminine  stems  show  etymological   ele- 
ments which  have  disappeared  in  the  masculine  : 

M.  F.  M.  F. 

<Joi  (L.  quietus),  quiet,  coite.        frais  (L.  L.  /rescue),  cool,  fraiche. 

b^nin  (L.  benignus),  benign,      b^nig-ne.  tiers  (L.  tertiua),  third,    tierce, 
lavori  {It.  favorito),  favourite,  favorite. 

2.  Adjectives  in  -eur  form  their  feminine  as  follows  : — 

(1)  Majeur,  mineur,  meilleur  and  those  in  -^rieurare 
regular : 

M.  F.  M.  F. 

majeur,  major,      majeure.  exterieur,  exterior,  ext^rieure. 

meilleur,  better,     meilleure.  sup^rieur,  superior,  sup^rieure. 

mineur,  minor,      mineure.  etc.  ,  etc. 

a.  Similarly,  nouns  of  like  termination  : 

M.  F.  M.  F.  M.  F. 

mineur,  minor,  mineure.       prieur,  prior,  prieure.       inf6rieur,  inferior,  inl6rieure. 

(2)  Those  in  -eur  with  a  cognate  present  participle  in  -ant 
change  -r  to  -s  and  add  -e  : 

M.                          F.  M.                              F. 

-causeur,  talkative,   causeuse.  r^veur,  dreamy,        r^veuse. 

flatteur,  ^ai^^-ringr,  flatteuse.  trompeur,  deceitful,  trompeuse. 

menteur,  lying,       menteuse.  etc                          eta 


260  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [§§338-339 

a.  Similarly,  nouns  of  like  termination,  but  see  also  §  306,  1,  a,  2,  a : 

M.  F.  F.  M. 

danaeur,  dancer,  danseuse.  buveur,  drinker^  buveuse. 

chanteur,  singer,  chanteuse.  vendeur,  seller^  vendeuse. 

flattenr,  flatterer,  flatteuse.  etc.  etc. 

(3)  Those  in  -teur,  with  no  cognate  present  participle  in 
-ant,  have  the  feminine  in  -trice  : 

M.  F.  M.  F. 

cr^ateur,  creative,     cr^atrice.  accusateur,  accusing,    accusatrice. 

directeur,  directive,  directrico.  etc.  etc. 

a.  Similarly,  nouns  of  like  termination,  but  see  §  306,  1,  a,  2,  a : 

M,  F.  M.  F. 

accusateur,  accuser,    accusatrloe.  cr^ateur,  creator,     cr^atrice. 

acteur,  actor,  actrice.  etc.  etc. 

THE  PLURAL  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

338.  General  Rule.  Most  masculine  adjectives  and  all 
feminines  form  their  plural  by  adding  s  to  the  singular 
(cf.   §307): 

grand(s),    grande(s).        jeune(s),  jeune(s).  bas,      bas8e(s). 

joli(s),        jolie(s).  aigu(s),  aigue(s).  doux,   douce(s). 

ru8^(s),       rus^(s).  complet(s),      compl6te(s).        etc.  etc. 

339.  Special  Rules.  The  following  rules  are  parallel 
with  those  for  the  irregular  plural  of  nouns  (cf.  §  308) : 

1.  Masculine  adjectives  in  -s,  -X  (none  in  -z)  remain 
unchanged : 

S.         P.  S.         P.  S.  P. 

bas,       bas.  *  gris,        gris.  faux,         faux, 

^pais,    6pais.  soumis,  soumis.  vieux,        vieux* 

frais,    frais.  doux,     doux.  heureux,    heureux. 

etc.  etc.  etc. 

2.  Masculine  adjectives  in  -eau,  and  one  in  -eu  take  x : 

S.  P.  S.  P. 

beau,  beaux.  jumeau,  jumeaux. 

nouveau,    nouveaux.  h^breu,  h^breux. 
But :  bleu,  bleus ;  feu,  feus. 


§340] 


AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


251 


3.  Masculine  adjectives  in 

-al  regularly  have  the  plural  in 

-aux: 

s. 

P. 

S. 

P. 

S.                P. 

amical, 

amicaux. 

g^n^ral, 

g^n^raux. 

moral,       moraux. 

brutal. 

brutaux. 

l^gal, 

legaux. 

principal,  principaux. 

capital, 

capitaux. 

liberal, 

lib^raux. 

rural,        ruraux. 

cardinal, 

cardinaux. 

local, 

locaux. 

special,      sp^ciaux. 

^gal, 

^gaux. 

loyal, 

loyaux. 

trivial,       triviaux. 

fiscal, 

fiscaux. 

martial, 

martiaux. 

etc.             etc. 

a.  Fatal  makes  '  fatals ;'  Littre  gives  also  final(s). 

b.  According  to  the  Dictionnaire  de  V Acadimie  the  following  have  no 
xnascuhne  plural : 

*sutomiiaL  frugal.  *JoviaL  naval.  tpaacal. 

'"colossal.  glacial.  Datal.  'partial. 

•  Littr6  gives  a  plural  in  -auz. 

t  Littr6  admits  a  plural  in  -auz,  and  quotes  authority  for  a  plural  in  -s. 

Notes.— 1.  There  are  upwards  of  a  hundred  and  fifty  adjectives  in  -aL  The  Diction- 
ftaire  de  l'Acad6mie  is  silent  regarding  the  masculine  plural  of  some  sixty  of  these,  to 
nearly  fifty  of  which,  however,  Littr6  gives  a  plural  in  -auz.  The  following  have  not 
been  pronounced  upon  by  either  authority  :  Brumal,  d^loyal,  diagonal,  instrumental, 
labial,  medicinal,  mental,  monacal,  paradoxal,  quadragesimal,  total,  virginal. 

2.  Regular  plurals  in  -als  were  formerly  much  commoner,  and  usage  is  still  unsettled 
for  some  words.  When  the  plural  is  wanting  or  doubtful  it  is  often  avoided,  e.g.,  '  Un 
repas  frugal ;  des  repas  simples.'  Plurals  commonly  so  avoided  are :  Fatal,  final, 
frugal,  glacial,  initial,  matinal,  natal,  naval,  th^tral. 

AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


340.  General  Rule.  An  adjective,  whethei:  attributive 
or  predicative,  regularly  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  its 
substantive : 


Cold  seasons  are  healthfuL 
They  are  pleased. 
They  said  they  were  ill. 
I  believe  them  sincere. 


Les  saisous  froides  sont  saines. 
Elles  sont  contentes. 
Us  se  disaient  malades. 
Je  les  crois  sinc^res. 

a.  When  the  substantive  has  a  de  clause,  the  agreement  is  parallel 
teith  that  explained  for  subject  and  verb  (cf.  §232,  2). 

b.  The  agreement  with  vous  ia  according  to  the  sense  : 
Madame,  vous  Stes  bien  bonne.         Madam,  you  are  very  kind. 


262  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [§§341-343 

341.  Manifold  Substantive.  1.  One  adjective  qualify- 
ing two  or  more  substantives  is  made  plural,  and  agrees  in 
gender  with  both,  if  of  the  same  gender;  if  of  different 
gender,  the  adjective  is  masculine. 

De  la  viande  et  de?  pommes  de     Cold  meat  and  potatoes. 

terre  froides. 
Sa  soeur  et  lui  sont  contents.  His  sister  and  he  are  pleased. 

a.  When  substantives  are  joined  by  ou,  ni. .  ,ni,  or  are  synonymous, 
or  form  a  climax,  etc.,  the  principles  stated  for  agreement  of  subject 
and  verb  apply  (cf.  §  233). 

h.  When  nouns  differ  in  gender,  the  masculine  one  is  usually  placed 
nearest  the  adjective,  especially  when  the  feminine  form  is  distinct  from 
the  masculine. 
La  mer  et  le  ciel  bleus.  The  blue  sea  and  sky. 

2.  When  the  noun  is  followed  by  a  preposition  +  a  noun,  the 
agreement  is,  of  course,  according  to  the  meaning : 

Une  table  de  bois  dur.  A  table  of  hard  wood. 

Une  table  de  bois  carr^e.  A  square  wooden  table. 

342.  Manifold  Adjective.  When  two  or  more  adjectives, 
denoting  different  objects  singular,  refer  to  one  noun,  the  noun 
is  made  plural,  and  the  adjectives  follow  it  in  the  singular,  or 
the  noun  is  made  singular,  and  the  article  repeated  with  each, 
adjective. 

Les  nations  grecque  et  romaine.        The  Greek  and  Roman  nations. 
La  nation  grecque  et  la  romaine.       The  Greek  nation  and  the  Boman» 
Or :  La  nation  grecque  et  la  nation  romaine. 

a.  The  agreement  for  a  preceding  ordinal  is  parallel  to  this  : 
Les  sixi^me  et  septi^me  rangs.  The  sixth  and  seventh  ranks. 

Le  sixi^me  rang  et  le  septi^me.  The  sixth  rank  and  the  seventh. 

Le  sixi^me  et  le  septi^me  rang.         The  sixth  and  the  seventh  rank. 

343.  Special  Cases.  1-  Adjectives  used  as  adverbs  are 
regularly  invariable : 

Cette  rose  sent  bon.  That  rose  smells  sweet. 

Les  livres  coiltent  cher  icL  Books  cost  dear  here. 


§343]  AGRiaiMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES.  25S 

a.  Possible,  replacing  a  clause,  and  fort,  in  se  faire  fort  =  *  to  pledge 
one's  self,'  are  considered  as  adverbs  : 

J'ai  fait  le  moins  de  fautes  pes-       I  have  made  as  few  mistakes  as  pos- 
sible, sible. 
Elle  se  fait  fort  de  le  payer.               She  pledges  herself  to  pay  it. 

2.  Compound  adjectives,  with  or  without  hyphen,  are 
treated  as  follows: 

(1)  Both  components  are  variable  when  co-ordinate,  except 
first  components  in  -o  : 

Des  8ourd(e)s-muet(te)s.  Deaf-mutes. 

Des  oranges  aigres-douces.  Sourish  oranges. 

But :  Les  lettres  greco-romaines.      Graeco- Roman  literature. 

(2)  A  subordinate  component  is  usually  invariable,  being 
regarded  as  adverbial,  but  the  principle  is  not  fully  carried 
out: 

Des  mots  grecs-modeme.  Modem  Greek  words. 

Des  enfants  court- vetus.  Short-coated  children. 

Une  dame  haut  plac^e.  A  lady  of  high  rank. 

Des  enfants  nouveau-n^s.  New-born  infants. 

a.  But  the  subordinated  component  is  variable  in  frais  cueilli= 
'freshly  gathered,'  in  ivre  raort=*dead  drunk,'  in  grand  ouvert= 
'wide  open,'  and  in  premier,  dernier,  nouveau-t-a  past  participle 
(except  nouveau-n^,  see  above) : 

Des  fleurs  fraiches  cueillies.  Freshly  gathered  flowers. 

La  porte  est  grande  ouverte.  The  door  is  wide  open. 

Les  nouveaux  mari6s.  The  bridegroom  and  bride. 

3.  Nouns  serving  as  adjectives  of  colour  are  regularly 
invariable : 

Des  robes  lilas  (citron).  Purple  (lemon-coloured)  dresses. 

a.  Rose,  cramoisi,  pourpre,  are  exceptions,  and  vary  : 
Des  robes  roses  (cramoisies).  Pink  (crimson)  dresses. 

b.  Modified  adjectives  of  colour  are  also  usually  invariable,  the 
modifier  being  also  invariable  by  rule,  2  (2),  above  : 

Des  cheveux  blond  ardent.  Reddish  blond  hair. 

NoTK.— Theae  congtructlona  are  explained  by  supplying  the  ellipais:  'Des  robes 
(ooaleur  d«)  liias' ;  '  Des  cheveux  (oouleur  de)  blond  ardent.' 


264  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [§344 

4.  A  few  adjectives  are  variable  or  invariable  according  to 
position  or  context  ; 

a.  Deini=  *  half,'  nu  =  *  naked,'  plein=  *  full  of,'  are  invariable  before 
and  variable  after  the  noun ;  so  also,  excepte  and  others  (§289,  a,  6) ; 
franc  de  port  =' post-paid'  (also  'franco,'  adverb)  is  invariable  before, 
and  usually  variable  after  : 

Une  demi-heure  ;  une  heure  et     Half  an  hour ;  an  hour  and  a  half. 

demie. 
II  a  de  Tor  plein  ses  poches.  He  has  his  pockets  full  of  gold. 

II  est  nu-tete ;  il  a  les  bras  nus.         He  is  bareheaded ;  his  arms  are  bare. 
II  a  les  yeux  pleins  de  larmes.  His  eyes  are  full  of  tears. 

Recevoir  franc  de  i)ort  une  lettre.     To  receive  a  letter  post-paid. 
Des  lettres  franches  de  port.  Post-paid  letters. 

Obs. :  deml,  nu,  when  preceding,  form  a  compound  with  hyphen. 

b.  Feu='late,'  'deceased,'  is  invariable  when  preceding  the  definite 
article,  or  determinative,  and  variable  after  it : 

Feu  la  reine  (la  feue  reine).  The  late  queen. 

c.  After  avoir  rair='have  an  air  (appearance)'  the  adjective  agrees 
with  air ;  but  it  agrees  with  the  subject  of  the  verb  when  the  expression 
means  'seem,'  'appear' : 

Cette  dame  a  I'air  hautain.  That  lady  has  a  haughty  air. 

EUe  a  Fair  malheureuse.  She  seems  unhappy. 

Cette  soupe  a  Pair  bonne.  This  soup  seems  good. 

5.  A  very  few  adjectives  are  always  invariable : 

Nous  avons  6t6  capot.  We  had  come  to  grief. 

Vingt  livres  sterling.  Twenty  pounds  sterling. 

344.  Nouns  as  Adjectives.    By  a  sort  of  apposition, 
nouns  are  frequently  used  as  adjectives ;  when  so  used,  they 
usually  agree  like  adjectives: 
Une  maltresse  cheminee.  A  main  chimney. 

Des  philosophes  pontes.  Poet  philosophers. 

But :  La  race  n^gre,  etc. 

a.  T^moin=' witness,'  at  the  head  of  a  phrase,  is  adverbial  and 
invariable : 

J'ai  bien  combattu,  t6moin  les        I   have  fought  well,   witness  the 
blessures  que  j'ai  re9ues.  wounds  I  received. 

b.  For  nouns  as  adjectives  of  colour,  see  §343,  3. 


§§345-346]      coMPAEisoN  of  adjectives.  256 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

345.  The  Comparative.  It  is  regularly  denoted  by 
placing  plus  = 'more/  moins  =  ' less,'  for  inequality,  and 
aussi  =  *as,'  for  equality,  before  each  adjective  compared; 
*  than  'or  *  as '  =  que  : 

II  est  plus  grand  que  Jean.  He  is  taller  than  John. 

II  est  moins  grand  que  Jean.  He  is  less  tall  than  (not  so  tall  as) 

John. 

H  est  aussi  grand  que  Jean.  He  is  as  tall  as  John. 

H  est  plus  diligent  et  plus  attentif  He   is    more    diligent   and   (more) 

que  Jean.  attentive  than  John. 

H  est  plus  faible  que  malade.  He  is  more  weak  than  ill. 

a.  Aussi,  used  negatively,  may  be  replaced  by  si : 
H  n'est  pas  aussi(si)  grand  que  J.     He  is  not  so  tall  as  John. 

h.  When  aussi  or  si  is  omitted,  comme  {not  que)  is  used : 
Un  roi  riche  comme  Cr^sus.  A  king  as  rich  as  Croesug. 

c.  After  plus,  moins,  afl&rmatively,  *  than '  =  que. .  .ne  when  coming 
before  a  finite  verb  : 

H  est  plus  grand  qu'il  ne  (le)  parait.    He  is  taller  than  he  seems. 

d.  '  More  and  more  (or  -er  and  -er) '  =  de  plus  en  plus ;  '  less  and  less 
{or  -er  and  -er)'  =  de  moins  en  moins;  'the  more. .  .the  more '=  plus 
. .  .(et)  plus ;  'the  less. .  .the  less'=moins. .  .(et)  moins ;  'the  more. . .' 
=  d'autant  plus. . .  : 

L'air  devint  de  plus  en  plus  froid.  The  air  became  colder  and  colder. 

H  devint  de  moins  en  moins  actif.  He  became  less  and  less  active. 

Plus  il  devient  riche  (et)  moins  il  The   richer   he   becomes    the   less 

est  g^n^reux.  generous  is  he. 

II  en  sera  d'autant  plus  riche.  He  will  be  the  richer  for  it. 

346.  Irregfular  Comparison.    The  adjectives  bon,  mau- 

yais,  petit,  have  a  special  comparative  form : 


Pos. 

COMP. 

Pos. 

COBIP. 

bon,  good, 

meilleur. 

or  bon, 

plus  bon  (rare). 

maurais,  had, 

pire. 

or  mauvais. 

plus  mauvais. 

petit,  amaU, 

moindre. 

or  petit. 

266  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [§§347-348 

a.  Bon  is  hardly  ever  compared  regularly  : 
A  bon  march^,  k  meilleur  marche.     Cheap,  cheaper. 
Cela  sent  bon  (meilleur).  That  smells  good  (better). 

But :  Ce  n'est  ni  plus  bon  ni  plus  mauvais. 

Notes.— 1.  In  expressions  like  'Ce  vin  est  plus  ou  moins  bon,'  bon  is  not  really 
comparative.    2.  Some  grammarians  admit  plus  bon='  more  good-natured.' 

h.  Pire  is,  in  general,  stronger  than  plus  mauvais,  and  may  serv» 
also  as  a  comparative  to  mechant= '  bad,'  *  evil,'  *  wicked' : 
Get  homme  est  m^chant  (pire).         That  man  is  bad  (worse). 

c.  In  general,  moindre=*less,'  *  lesser,'  'less  (in  importance)*  and 
plus  petit  =  *  smaller,'  *  less  (in  size)' : 

Votre  douleur  en  sera  moindre.         Your  sorrow  will  hence  be  less. 
Une  plus  petite  pomme.  A  smaller  apple. 

347.  The  Superlative  Relative.  1.  It  is  denoted  by 
placing  the  definite  article  (variable)  or  a  possessive  adjective 
(variable)  before  the  comparative  of  inequality  : 

EUe  est  la  moins  aimable.  She  is  the  least  amiable. 

Mas  meilleurs  amis.  My  best  friends. 

La  moindre  difficult^.  The  slightest  difficulty. 

a.  When  the  superlative  follows  the  noun,  the  definite  article  is  not 
omitted : 
Cest  I'enfant  le  plus  diligent  et  le    He  is  the  most  diligent  and  atten- 

plus  attentif  de  tous.  tive  boy  of  all. 

Mes  amis  les  plus  fiddles.  My  most  faithful  friends. 

2.  After  a  superlative,  *  in '  =  de  (not  a,  dans,  etc.) ; 
'  among '  =  entre  or  d'entre : 

L'homme  le  plus  riche  de  la  ville.     The  richest  man  in  the  city. 
Le  meilleur  ^crivain  du  Canada.        The  best  writer  in  Canada. 
Le  plus  brave  (d')entre  les  Grecs.      The  bravest  among  the  Greeks. 

348.  The  Superlative  Absolute.    It  is  expressed  by  le 

(invariable)  +  plus  or  moins  before  the  adjective,  or  else  by 
an  adverb,  such  as  tr^s,  bien,  fort,  extr^mement,  etc.,  or 
some  other  modifying  expression  : 

Elle  est  le  plus  heureuse  (moins    She  is  happiest  (least  happy)  when 
heureuse)  quand  elle  est  seule.  she  is  alone. 


§§349-350] 


POSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


257 


Vous  etes  tr^s  aimable.  You  are  very  (most)  kind. 

C'est  tout  ce  qu'il  y  a  de  plus  beau.  It  is  most  beautiful. 

Un  brave  des  braves.  One  of  the  bravest. 

Un  homme  des  plus  dignes.  A  most  worthy  man. 

Une  dame  on  ne  peut  plus  digne.  A  most  worthy  woman. 

Des  tribus  sauvages  au  possible.  Most  savage  tribes. 

a.  Occasionally  it  is  denoted  in  familiar  style  by  repetition  of  the 
adjective,  or  by  -issime  : 

Get  homme  est  rus6,  rus4  That  man  is  very,  very  cunning. 

II  est  richissime.  He  is  very  wealthy. 

349.   Remarks.     1.  Comparative  and  superlative  are  un- 
distinguishable  in  constructions  requiring  in  English  a  definite 
article  before  the  comparative : 
Le  plus  fort  de  mes  deux  fr^res.        The  stronger  of  my  two  brothers. 

2.  De  denotes    'by  how   much'  after  a   comparative  or 
superlative : 

Older  by  three  years. 
He  is  the  tallest  by  far. 
He  is  much  taller. 


Plus  S,g6  de  trois  ans. 

n  est  de  beancoup  le  plus  grand. 

But :  n  est  beaucoup  plus  grand. 

3.  Observe  the  following : 

Les  basses  classes. 
iTai  fait  mon  possible. 


The  lower  classes. 
I  did  my  utmost. 


POSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


350.  Predicative  Adjectives.    They  are  placed,  in  general, 
as  in  English : 

They  are  pleased. 
She  seemed  tired. 

Brave,  learned,  virtuous,  he  made 
himself  beloved  by  alL 


Elles  sont  contentes. 
EUe  parut  fatigu^e. 
Brave,  savant,  vertueux,  il  se  fit 
aimer  de  tons. 


a.  Observe  the  position  after  assez,  .after  plus.  .  .plus,  moins.  . . 
moins,  and  in  exclamations  with  combien  I,  comme  1,  que  I,  tant  I.  as 
compared  with  the  order  of  words  in  English : 

17 


258  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [§§351-352 

H  est  assez  sot  pour  le  croire.  He  is  silly  enough  to  believe  it. 

Plus  il  devint  riche  moins  il  fut  The    richer    he    became    the    less 

g^n^reux.  generous  was  he. 

Que  vous  ^tes  aimable  !  How  kind  you  are  ! 

351.  Attributive  Adjectives.  When  used  literally,  to 
define,  distinguish,  specify,  emphasize,  etc.,  they  usually 
follow ;  but  when  used  figuratively,  or  as  a  merely  ornamental 
epithet,  or  denoting  a  quality  viewed  as  essential  to  the 
object,  or  when  forming,  as  it  were,  one  idea  with  the  noun, 
they  usually  precede : 

Une  rue  ^troite ;  une  ^troite  a-  A    narrow    street  ;    an    intimate 

miti^.  friendship. 

Un  roi  savant ;  le  savant  auteur.  A  learned  king  ;  the  learned  author. 

Le  fameux  Pitt ;  im  rus^  coquin.  The  famous  Pitt ;  a  cunning  rogue. 

a.  The  following,  of  very  common  use,  generally  precede : 

bean.  grand.  joli.  meilleur.  pire.  yilain. 

bon.  gros.  long.  moindre.  sot. 

court  jeune.  mauvais.  petit.  vieux. 

352.  Special  Rules  for  Attributives.  1.  Certain  ad- 
jectives serve  regularly  to  define,  distinguish,  etc.,  and  hence 
regularly  follow ;  such  are  : — 

(1)  Adjectives  of  physical  quality : 

Une  table  carree ;  une  pierre  dure  ;  A  square  table  ;  a  hard  stone  ;  cold 
de  I'eau  froide  (chaude) ;  de  (hot)  water  ;  black  ink  ;  a  piquant 
I'encre  noire ;  une  sauce  piquante.         sauce. 

a.  By  the  general  rule  (§351)  they  sometimes  precede  : 
De    noirs    chagrins ;    une    verte    Dark  sorrows ;    a  green  old  age ; 
vieillesse ;  le  bleu  ciel  d'ltahe.  the  blue  sky  of  Italy. 

(2)  Adjectives  of  nationality,  religion,  profession,  title,  and 
those  from  proper  names  : 

La  loi  anglaise ;  un  pretre  catho-    The  English  law ;  a  Catholic  priest ; 
lique ;    une  splendeur    royale ;        royal     splendour ;     Ciceronian 
le  latin  cic^ronien.  Latin. 

(3)  Participles  used  as  adjectives : 

Une  ^toile  filante ;  un  homme  in-  A  shooting  star ;  an  educated  man ; 
strait ;  une  porte  ouverte.  an  open  door. 


§352]  POSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES.  '  259 

a.  By  the  general  rule  (§351)  they  sometimes  precede : 
Une  ^clatante  victoire.  A  signal  victory. 

b.  Past  participial  forms  which  have  become  real  adjectives,  e.g., 
pr^tendu,  absolu,  parfait,  dissolu,  feint,  ruse,  etc.,  very  often  precede 
(pr^tendu  nearly  always) : 

Une  feinte  modestie.  Feigned  modesty. 

Le  pr^tendu  comte.  The  would-be  count. 

2.  Adjectives  sometimes  follow  the  noun  on  account  of 
their  adjuncts  or  their  function ;  thus  : — 

(1)  "When  modified  by  an  adverb,  other  than  aussi,  sif 
tr^s,  bien,  fort,  plus,  moins,  assez : 

Un  discours  extremement  long.         An  extremely  long  speech. 
But :  Un  tres  long  discours.  A  very  long  speech. 

(2)  When  modified  by  an  adverbial  phrase,  or  in  com- 
parisons : 

Une  contr^  riche  en  vins.  A  district  rich  in  wines. 

Un  guerrier  brave  comme  un  lion.     A  warrior  as  brave  as  a  lion. 

(3)  Nouns  used  appositively  as  adjectives  : 
Une  puissance  amie.  A  friendly  power. 

3.  Two  or  more  adjectives,  with  one  noun,  follow,  in  general, 
the  rules  stated,  but,  if  joined  by  a  conjunction,  they  all  follow, 
in  case  one  is  such  as  must  follow  : 

Une  jolie  petite  fiUe.  A  pretty  little  girl. 

Une  belle  maison  blanche.  A  beautiful  white  house. 

Un  objet  blanc  et  etincelant.  A  white  and  dazzling  object. 

Une  dame  belle  et  savante.  A  beautiful  and  learned  lady. 

a.  The  more  specific  of  two  or  more  adjectives  which  follow  comeft 
last,  contrary  to  English  usage  : 
Des  ^rivains  f  ran9ais  habiles.  Clever  French  writers. 

4.  A  considerable  number  of  adjectives  differ  more  or  less 
widely  in  meaning,  according  as  they  precede  or  follow : 

Mon  cher  enfant ;  une  robe  ch^re.     My  dear  child ;  a  costly  dress. 
Une  f ranche  coquette ;  une  f  emme    A    thorough    coquette  ;    a  plain- 
franche.  spoken  woman. 


THE  ADJECTIVE. 


[§§353-365 


anoien. 

dernier. 

fort. 

jeune. 

bon. 

different 

furieux. 

maigre. 

brave. 

digne. 

galant. 

malhonn^te. 

certain. 

divers. 

grand. 

mauvais. 

Cher. 

fameux. 

gros. 

m6chant 

commun. 

faux. 

haut. 

mort. 

cruel. 

fier. 

honnSte. 

nouveau. 

Such  adjectives  are  : 

parfait  sage, 

pauvre.  seuL 

petit.  simple, 

plaisant.  triste. 

premier.  veritable, 

propre.  vrai,  etc. 
pur. 

NOTB. — Distinctions  of  this  kind  depend,  in  the  main,  upon  the  general  principles 
laid  down  above,  but  they  are  too  numerous  and  too  subtle  to  be  given  in  detail  here 
Observation,  and  the  use  of  a  good  dictionary  will,  in  time,  make  the  learner  familiar 
with  the  most  important  of  them. 

353,  Determinatives.     Such  adjectives,  including  numer- 
als, possessives,  demonstratives,  indefinites,  precede  • 

Trois  plumes ;  mes  plumes.  Three  pens ;  my  pens. 

Ces  plumes-ci ;  d'autres  plumes.        These  pens ;  other  pens. 


PREPOSITIONAL  COMPLEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


354.  An  adjective  is  often  followed  by  a  complement  con- 
nected with  it  by  a  preposition,  such  as  a,  de,  en,  envers, 
etc.  The  preposition  to  be  used  is  determined  by  the  mean- 
ing of  the  adjective,  as  explained  in  the  following  sections. 

355.  Adjective  +  a.  The  preposition  a  =  'to,'  *at,'  'for,' 
etc.,  is  required  after  most  adjectives  denoting  tendency, 
fitness,  and  their  opposites,  comparison,  etc. 

Get  homme  est  adonn^  k.  la  boisson.   That  man  is  addicted  to  drink. 
II  est  favorable  k  mes  projets.  He  is  favorable  to  my  projects. 


H  est  bien  habile  aux  affaires. 
Un  homme  sup^rieur  k  tous. 
Ce  n'est  bon  k  rien. 

Such  adjectives  are : 

accoutum^,  accti8tomed(to).  cher,  dear  (to). 

adroit,  clever  (at).  convenable,  suitable  (to). 

agr^able,  pleasant  (to).  6gal,  equal  (to). 

ent^rieur,  anterior  (to).  exact,  exa^t  (in). 

ardent,  ardent  (in).  fidfele,  faithful  (in). 

bon,  good,  fit  (for).  fort,  clever  (at). 


He  is  very  clever  in  business. 
A  man  superior  to  all. 
That  is  good  for  nothing. 


hardi,  bold  (in). 
impropre,  unfit  (for). 
inf^rieur,  inferior  (to). 
infidfele,  unfaithful  (to). 
inutile,  useless  (to). 
lent,  alow  (in). 


§§356-357]        PREPOSITIONAL  COMPLEMENT. 


261 


nuUdble,  hurtful  (to).  pr6t,  recuiy  (to).  semblable,  similar  (to). 

oppose,  opposed  (to).  prompt,  prompt  (in).  utile,  useful  (to). 

pareil,  similar  (to).  proplce,  propitious  (to).  etc 

port6,  inclined  (to).  propre,  fU  (for). 

a.  Bon  pour =*  good  for,'  *  beneficial  to,'  'kind  to.' 

356.  Adjective +  (/e.  The  preposition  de='of,*  'from,' 
*with,'  etc.,  is  required  after  most  adjectives  denoting  source 
or  origin  (hence  also,  feeling,  sentiment,  abundance),  separ- 
ation (hence  also,  absence,  distance,  want,  etc.),  and  after 
most  past  participles  to  denote  the  agent  (cf.  §240) : 

fites-vous  natif  de  Paris  ?  Are  you  a  native  of  Paris  ? 

lis  sont  contents  de  mon  succ6s.       They  are  pleased  at  my  success. 

She  is  full  of  vanity. 

I  am  free  from  pain. 

He  is  unknown  to  all. 


Elle  est  pleine  de  vanity. 
Je  suis  libre  de  douleur. 
D  est  inconnu  de  tons. 

Such  adjectives  are : 
absent,  absent  (from). 
aSiigi,  grieved  (at). 
aise,  glad  (of). 
alarms,  alanned  (at). 
ambitieux  ambitums(of). 
avide,  greedy  (of). 
b^ni,  blessed  (by). 
capable,  capable  (of). 
charm^,  delighted  (uiith). 
oh^ri,  beloved  (by). 
confus,  confused  (at). 
oontrarid,  vexed  (irith). 
d^nu^,  destitute  (of). 
d^pourvu,  devoid  (of). 
d^ireux,  desirous  (of). 
different,  different  (from). 


^loign4,  distant  (from). 
enchants,  delighted  (with). 
ennuy^,  weary  (of). 
^tonn^,  astonished  (at). 
exempt,  free  (from). 
tSuchi,  sorry  (for). 
fier,  proud  (of). 
glorieux,  proud  (of). 
h^riss^,  bristling  (with). 
heureux,  glad  (of). 
honteux,  ashamed  (of). 
ignorant,  ignorant  (of). 
indigne,  unworthy  (of). 
inquiet,  uneasy  (about). 
ivre,  intoxicated  (unth). 
jaloux,  jealous  (of). 
WhvQ,  free  (from). 


lourd,  heavy  (with). 
malheureux,  unhappy  (aSj. 
offense,  offended  (at). 
pauvre,  poor  (in). 
plein,  full  (of). 
ravi,  delighted  (with). 
satiafait,  satisfied  (with). 
soucieux,  anxious  (about), 
Bouilld,  soiled  (with). 
8(ir,  sure  (of). 
surpris,  surprised  (at). 
triste,  sad  (at). 
vain,  vain  (of). 
vex6,  vexed  (at). 
victorieux,  victorious  (over). 
vide,  empty  (of). 
etc. 


digne,  worthy  (of). 
a.  F4ch6  contre  =  *  angry  at  or  with  (a  person).' 

357.  Adjective  +  e/7.      En  is  required  after  a  few  adjec- 
tives denoting  abundance,  skill,  etc. : 

Le  Canada  est  fertile  en  bl4.  Canada  is  fertile  in  wheat. 

H  est  expert  en  chirurgie.  He  is  expert  in  surgery. 

Such  adjectives  are : 
abondant,  abounding  (in).        fort,  strong  (in\  learned  (in).  riche,  rich  (in). 

ttoond,  fruitful  (in).  ignorant,  ignorant  (in).  savant,  learned  ^), 


THE  PRONOUN. 


[§§358-359 


a.  fort  and  ignorant  sometimes  have  sur : 

II  est  fort  sur  I'histoire.  He  is  well  versed  (good)  in  history. 

Ignorant  sur  ces  mati^res-li.  Ignorant  about  those  matters. 

358.  Adjective  +  ewyers.     Envers   is   used   after   most 
adjectives  denoting  disposition  or  feeling  towards  : 
H  est  liberal  envers  tous.  He  is  liberal  towards  alL 


Such  adjectives  are 

affable,  affable. 
bon,  kind. 

charitable,  charitable, 
civil,  civil. 
cruel,  cruel. 
dur,  hard,  harsh. 
g6n6reux,  generous. 
grossier,  rude. 


honn6te,  polite. 
indulgent,  indulgent. 
ingrat,  ungrateful. 
insolent,  insolent. 
juste,  just. 
m^chant,  malicious. 
mis^ricordieux,  merciful. 
oflScieux,  obliging. 


poli,  polite. 
prodigue,  lavish. 
reconnaiasant,  grat-eful. 
respectueux,  respectful. 
responsable,  responsible. 
rigoureux,  stern. 
s^vfere,  severe,  stem. 
etc. 


a.  Bon,  dur,  very  frequently  take  pour ;  indulgent  may  take  pour 
or  k  i  civil,  severe,  may  take  k  I'egard  de : 

H  est  bon  (dur)  pour  moi.  He  is  kind  (harsh)  to  me. 

Indulgent  pour  (a)  ses  enfants.  Indulgent  to  his  children. 

Civil    (s^v^re)    k    regard    de  ses  Civil  (harsh)  to  his  servants. 
.  domestiques. 


THE  PRONOUN. 


THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN. 

359.  Personal  Pronouns. 

1.  Conjunctive  forms : 


IST  Pee. 

2nd  Pee. 

Srd  Per.  (m.). 

SrdPee.  (f.).    3ED  RBF.(ia.f.X 

^N. 

Je,i. 

tu,  thou. 

U.  he,  it. 

eUe,  she,  ic. 

p. 

me,  (to)  me. 

te,  (to)  thee. 

lui,  (to)  him. 

lui,  (to)  her.        86,  (to)-self. 

SA. 

me,  me. 

to,  thee. 

le,  him,  it. 

la,  her,  it.            86,  -self. 

^N. 

nous,  we. 

VOUS,  you. 

11a,  they. 

eUes,  they. 

SD. 

nous,  (to)  us. 

VOUS,(to)j'OU. 

leur,(to)them. 

leur ,  (to)  them,  se ,  (to)  -selves. 

&A. 

nous,  us. 

vous,  you. 

les,  them. 

les,  them.           86,  -selves. 

§§360-361]            THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN.  263 

2.  Disjunctive  forms : 

1st  Per.          2sd  Pkk.          3rd  Pbr.  (m.).      3rd  Per.  (f.).  3rd  Rkf.  (m.f.). 

c  A.  Vmol,  I,  me.     toi,  thou,  thee.  Inl,  he,  him.      elle,  she,  her.  sol,  one's  self,  eta 


^A.  Vnous.we, 
Sp.  j 


us.  vous,  you.        euz, they,  them,  elles,  they,  them. 


[N.  =  nominative ;  D. = dative ;  A.  =  accusative ;  P.  =  object  of  a  preposition.] 

Note. — A  more  scientific  terminology  would  be  'unstressed*  and  •  stressed*  instead 
of  '  conjunctive  *  and  '  disjunctive,'  as  indicating  the  real  distinction  between  the  two 
sets  of  forms,  e.g. ,  '  Je  (unstressed)  parle ' ;  '  Qui  parle  ?— Moi '  (stressed).  As  a  matter 
of  fact,  the  unstressed  forms  usually  stand  in  immediate  connection  with  the  verb  (as 
subject  or  object),  hence  the  term  '  conjunctive,'  while  the  stressed  forms  are  usually 
employed  otherwise,  hence  the  term  'disjunctive.'  The  distinction  of  'unstressed' 
and  '  stressed '  is  common  to  most  other  kinds  of  pronouns  as  welL 

360.  Pronominal  Adverbs. 

y  =to  (at,  on,  in,  into,  etc.)  it  or  them  j  there,  thither. 

en = of  (from,  etc.)  it  or  them ;  some,  any,  some  of  it,  some  of  them; 
thence,  from  there. 

Note.— Y  and  en  were  originally  adverbs  (7  from  L.  {&t=*  there,'  and  en  from  L. 
«nd«=' thence'),  but  they  are  now  usually  pronominal  in  function,  and  are  used 
precisely  like  the  conjunctive  forms. 

361.  Agreement.  The  personal  pronoun  regularly  agrees 
with  its  antecedent  in  gender,  number,  and  person  : 

Nous  les  avons  frapp^(e)s.  We  have  struck  them. 

Elle  lit  la  lettre ;  elle  la  lit.  She  reads  the  letter ;  she  reads  it. 

a.  The  first  person  plural  for  the  first  person  singular  is  used  by 
sovereigns  and  authorities,  and  by  writers,  as  in  English  : 

Nous  (le  roi)  avons  ordonn^  et    We  (the  king)  have  ordained  and 

ordonnons  ce  qui  suit.  ordain  as  follows. 

Comme  nous  avons  dit  d^j^  As  we  have  said  already. 

b.  Vou9p=  *  you  *  (singular  or  plural)  has  a  plural  verb ;    its  other 
agreements,  as  also  those  of  nous  above,  are  according  to  the  sense : 
Nous  (la  reine)  sommes  contente.      We  (the  queen)  are  satisfied. 
Madame,  vous  Stes  bien  bonne.         Madam,  you  are  very  kind. 

6.  For  imperative  first  plural  instead  of  first  singular,  see  §267>  a. 


264.  THE  PRONOUN.  [§362 

rf.  II  and  le  are  used  as  invariable  neutral  forms,  when  the  antecedent 
is  one  to  which  gender  cannot  be  ascribed  : 
Y  en  a-t-il  ? — Je  le  crois.  Is  there  any  (of  it)  ?    I  think  so. 

362.  Case  Relations  of  Conjunctives.    1.  The  nomi- 
native forms  stand  as  subject  and  the  accusative  forms  as 
direct  object  to  a  verb ;  their  use  is  obvious : 
II  nous  a  TU«.  He  saw  us. 

a.  The  conjunctive  is  optional  when  there  are  two  accusatives  : 
Je  (les)  bl^me  lui  et  elle.  I  blame  him  and  her. 

2.  The  dative  forms  denote  the  person  or  thing  for  whose 
*  advantage '  or  *  disadvantage '  the  action  is  done,  denoted  by 
^  =  *  to,*  *  for,'  *  from,'  with  nouns : 

Je  leur  preterai  les  livres.  I  shall  lend  them  the  books. 

On  lui  a  \o\i  son  argent.  His  money  has  been  stolen  from  him. 

But  k  +  a  disjunctive  form  is  used  in  the  following  cases : 

(1)  When  two  datives  are  joined  by  a  conjunction,  or  when 

in  emphasis  a  second  dative  is  implied  : 

J'en  ai  parld  k  lui  et  h  elle.  I  spoke  of  it  to  him  and  to  her. 

Je  donne  le  livre  k  elle  (pas  h.  lui).     I  give  the  book  to  her  (not  to  him). 

(2)  When  the  conjunctive  direct  object  is  any  other  pronoun 

than  le,  la,  les : 

Je  vous  pr^ente  k  elle.  I  introduce  you  to  her. 

II  se  pr^senta  k  moi.  He  introduced  himself  to  me. 

But :  Je  le  (la,  les)  leur  pr^sente,  etc. 

(3)  After  verbs  of  motion  and  some  others,  to  denote  the 
'object  towards  which  the  action  tends,'  the  relation,  though 
expressed  by  a,  not  being  really  dative : 

Je  courus  k  lui.  I  ran  to  him. 

Cette  maison  est  k  moL  That  house  belongs  to  me. 

n  pense  (songe,  rdve)  k  eux.  He  thinks  (muses,  dreams)  of  them. 


§§363-365]  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN.  265 

Such  verbs  are : 

accoutumer,  aeeuatonu  comparer,  compare.  prendre  inWrfit,  take  interesL 

aller,  go.  courir,  run.  pr6tendre,  aspire. 

appeler,  call.  6tre  (i),  belong  (to).  recourir,  have  reeourte, 

en  appeler,  appeal.  faireattention,pa?/a«t«nfton.  renoncer,  renounce. 

aspirer,  aspire.  habituer,  accustom.  revenir,  com*  back. 

attirer,  attract.  marcher,  march.  rfiver,  dream. 

avoir  affaire,  have  to  do.  penser,  think.  songer,  muse. 

avoir  recours,  have  recourse,  prendre  garde,  pay  heed.  venir,  come. 

a.  Certain  verbs  of  this  class,  when  not  literal,  take  the  conjunctive 
dative : 

II  lui  vint  une  id6e.  There  occurred  to  him  an  idea.      * 

Vous  nous  reviendrez.  You  will  come  to  see  us  again. 

NOTK.— The  ethical  dative,  denoting  the  person  '  interested  in '  or  '  affected  by  an 
action,  rare  in  English,  is  common  in  French :  '  Goutdz-mol  ce  vin-14,'  '  Just  tasta 
that  wine ' ;  '  Ne  me  faites  plus  cela,' '  Don't  do  that  again  (I  tell  you).' 

363.  Impersonal  //.  For  invariable  il  as  the  subject  of 
an  impersonal  verb,  see  §§248-253. 

364.  Predicative  /e,  la,  les.  As  predicate  the  accusative 
third  person  is  either  variable  or  invariable : — 

1.  Le  agrees  when  referring  to  a  determinate  noun  or  to 
an  adjective  used  as  such : 

fites-vous  sa  mere  ? — Je  la  suis.         Are  you  his  mother  ? — I  am. 
fites-vous  la  mariee  ? — Je  la  suis.      Are  you  the  bride  ? — I  am. 
Sont-ce  14  vos  livres? — Ce  les  sont.     Are  those  your  books  ?— They  are. 

2.  Le,  invariable,  is  used  when  referring  to  an  adjective, 
or  to  a  noun  as  adjective : 

fites-vous  fatigu^e  ? — Je  le  suis.        Are  you  tired  ? — I  am.     ' 
fltes-vous  m^re  ? — Je  le  suis.  Are  you  a  mother  ?— I  am. 

Sont-ils  Anglais  ?— lis  le  sont.  Are  they  English  ? — They  are. 

36s  Pleonastic  /e.  The  neutral  form  le  (§361,  d)  is 
often  pleonastic,  as  compared  with  English  usage : 

fites-vous  m^re  ? — Je  le  suis.  Are  you  a  mother  ? — I  am. 

Qu'ils  soient  venus,  je  le  sais.  That  they  have  come,  I  know. 

Fais  du  bien,  quand  tu  le  peux.  Do  good,  when  you  can. 

Ce  q[u'il  voulait,  il  le  veut  encore.  What  he  wished,  he  still  wishes. 


266  THE  PRONOUN.  [§§366-367 

Je  suis  prSte,  s'il  le  faut.  I  am  ready,  if  need  be. 

J'irai  si  vous  le  desirez.  I  shall  go,  if  you  wish  (it), 

lis  sont  comme  je  (le)  d^sirerais.       They  are  as  I  should  like. 
II  est  plus  age  que  je  ne  (le)  suis.      He  is  older  than  I  am. 
Obs.:  This  le  is  .optional  in  comparative  clauses. 

a.  Le  is  also  used  in  a  number  of  fixed  expressions : 
H  ne  le  c6de  k  personne.  He  yields  to  nobody. 
Nous  I'avons  emport6.                         We  have  carried  the  day. 
II  I'a  ^chapp^  belle.  He  had  a  narrow  escape. 

b.  Le  may  sometimes  be  translated  by  *  one '  or  *  so ' : 

II  est  soldat ;  je  le  suis  aussi.  He  is  a  soldier  ;  I  am  one  too. 

Sois  brave,  et  je  le  serai  aussL  Be  brave,  and  I  shall  be  so  too. 

366.  Reflexives.  1.  A  special  conjunctive  reflexive  form, 
Se  for  dative  or  accusative  of  either  gender  or  number,  is 
required  in  the  third  person  only;  for  the  first  and  second 
person  the  ordinary  forms  are  used  (cf.  §242) : 

II  (elle)  se  loue.  He  (she)  praises  him  (her)  -self, 

lis  (elles)  se  le  sont  dit.  They  said  so  to  each  other. 

But :  Je  me  loue ;  tu  te  loues  ;  nous  nous  louons ;  vous  vous  louez. 

2.  The  disjunctive  soi  is  hardly  used  beyond  the  third 
singular  in  an  indefinite  or  general  sense : 

Chacun  travaille  pour  soi.  Every  one  works  for  himself. 

On  doit  parler  rarement  de  soi.         One  should  rarely  speak  of  one's  self. 

De  soi  le  vice  est  odieux.  In  itself  vice  is  hateful. 

But :  Elle  est  contente  d'elle-meme ;  ils  ne  songent  qu'4  eux-memes,  etc. 

o.  The  use  of  soi  is  rarer  for  the  feminine  than  for  the  masculine  : 
Un  bienfait  porte  sa  recompense    A  good  deed  brings  its  reward  with 

avec  soi  (lui).  it. 

La  guerre  entratne  apr^s  elle  (soi)     War  brings  after  it  countless  evils. 

des  maux  sans  nombre. 

Note.— Soi  is  no  longer  used  of  persons  denoted  by  a  general  noun,  e.g.,  'L'avare 
ne  vit  que  pour  lui-m6me '  (not  '  pour  soi '),  nor  is  it  used,  as  formerly,  of  persons  to 
avoid  ambiguity,  e.g.,  'Quoique  son  frfere  soit  dans  la  misfere,  il  ne  pense  qu'4  lui- 

nidme  (not  *  k  soi  ')• 

367.  Uses  of  en.  1.  En  is  in  function  an  equivalent 
of  de  +  a  pronoun  of  the  third  person  of  either  gender  or 
number ;  it  is  used  of  things,  and  less  commonly  of  persons : 


§367] 


THE  PEESONAL  PRONOUN. 


267 


Je  parle  des  plumes ;  j'en  parle. 
Donnez-les-moi ;  j'en  ai  besoin. 
II  est  mon  ami ;  j'en  reponds. 
II  aime  ses  fils,  et  il  en  est  aim^. 
Vous  voiU  ;  j'en  suis  content. 


I  speak  of  the  pens  ;  I  speak  of  them. 
Give  me  them  ;  I  need  them. 
He  is  my  friend  ;  I  answer  for  him. 
He  loves  his  sons,  and  is  loved  by  them. 
There  you  are  ;  I  am  glad  of  it. 


Vient-il  de  Toronto? — II  en  vient.  Does  he  come  from  T.?    He  does. 
a.  The  antecedent  is  often  understood  or  indefinite  : 


Let  me  see,  where  were  we  ? 

They  came  to  blows. 

He  has  a  grudge  against  me. 

Far  from  it. 

It  is  all  up  with  him. 

If  one  is  to  believe  you. 

However  it  may  be. 

I  am  done  out. 

There  are  some  who  think  so. 


Voyons  !  oti  en  6tions-nous  ? 

Us  en  sont  veuus  aux  mains. 

11  m'en  veut. 

Tant  s'en  faut. 

C'en  est  fait  de  luL 

A  vous  en  croire. 

Quoi  qu'il  en  soit. 

Je  n'en  peux  plus. 

II  y  en  a  qui  le  croient. 

2.  Through  a  somewhat  special  application  of  the  general 
principle,  it  is  further  used : — 

(1)  In  a  partitive  sense  : 

Voici  du  papier ;  en  voulez-vous  ?  Here  is  some  paper ;  do  you  wish  any 

— Merci,  j'en  ai.  of  it  ? — Thank  you,  I  have  some. 

Avez-vous  une  plume? — J'en    ai  Have  you  a  pen? — I  have  one  (I 

une  (j'en  ai  plusieurs).  have  several). 

II  me  faut  en  acheter  d'autres.  I  must  buy  others. 

(2)  En  =  *  thereof '  +  the  definite  article  replaces  a  possessive 
adjective  referring  to  a  possessor  in  the  preceding  sentence, 
but  only  when  the  thing  possessed  is  a  direct  object,  a  subject 
of  ^tre,  or  a  predicate  noun  : 

I  like  this  country ;   I  admire  its 

institutions. 
Blame  the  sins  of  those  people,  but 
do  not  blame  their  misfortunes. 


J'aime  ce  pays ;  j'en  admire  les 

institutions. 
Blamez  les  p^ch^s  de  ces  gens,  mais 

n'en  bUmez  pas  les  malheurs. 
Cette  aflFaire  est  delicate  j  le  succ^s 

en  est  douteux. 
Ceci  est  la  gloire  du  pays  ;  cela  en 

est  la  honte. 
But :  '  Cette  maison  a  ses  d^fauts 


That  aflfair  is  delicate  ;  its  success  is 

doubtfuL 
This  is  the  country's  glory  ;  that  is 

its  disgrace, 
(the  possessor  not  being  in  the  pre- 


268  THE  PRONOUN.  [§§368-369 

vious  sentence)  ;  *  J'aime  ces  vers  ;  leur  harmonic  me  ravit '  (the  thing 
possessed  being  subject  of  another  verb  than  etre) ;  '  J'admire  ce  pays  ; 
11  est  fameux  pour  ses  bonnes  lots '  (the  thing  possessed  being  governed 
by  a  preposition). 

368.  Use  of  y.  Y  is  in  function  equivalent  to  a  (en, 
dans,  etc.)  +  a  pronoun  of  the  third  person  of  either  gender  or 
number ;  it  is  used  of  things,  and  rarely  of  persons  : 

Je  pense  k  mes  p6ches  ;  j'y  pense.  I  think  of  my  sins  ;  I  think  of  them. 

II  est  en  Europe  ;  il  y  est,  et  moi  He  is  in  Europe  ;  he  is  there,  and  I 

j'y  vais  aussi.  am  going  there  too. 

n  se  connait  en  ces  choses,  mais  He  is  an  expert  in  those  things,  but 

moi  je  ne  m'y  connais  pas.  I  am  not. 

11  aspire  k  cela  ;  il  y  aspire.  He  aspires  to  that ;  he  aspires  to  it. 

Vous  fiez-vous  k  lui  ? — Je  m'y  fie.  Do  you  trust  him  ? — I  trust  him. 

o.  The  antecedent  is  often  understood  or  indefinite : 
H  y  va  de  votre  vie.  Your  life  is  at  stake. 

J'y  suia  !    Qu'ya-t-il?  I  have  it !    What  is  the  matter? 

II  s'y  prend  adroitement.  He  goes  about  it  cleverly. 

Est-ce  que  Monsieur  B.  y  est  ?  Is  Mr.  B.  at  home  ? 

Y  pensez-vous  ?  You  don't  mean  it  ? 

369.  Position  of  Conjunctive  Objects.  1.  They  stand 
immediately  before  their  governing  verb,  except  the  imperative 
affirmative : 

Je  leur  en  parleraL  I  shall  speak  to  them  of  it. 

Je  I'y  ai  envoys  pour  le  leur  dire.      I  sent  him  there  to  tell  them  it. 
II  lui  faut  parler;  il  faut  lui  parler.     He  must  speak ;  one  must  speak  to 

him. 
01)8. :  Remember  that  the  auziliaiy  is  the  verb  in  compound  tenses. 

a.  With  negative  infinitive,  the  object  may  stand  between  ne  and 
pas  (point,  rien,  etc. ) ;  similarly  adverb  +  infinitive : 

Je  suis  4tonn^  de  ne  point  le  voir    I  am  astonished  not  to  see  him. 

{or  ne  le  point  voir). 
Pour  les  bien  consid^rer.  To  consider  them  welL 

b.  The  objects  of  an  infinitive  governed  by  faire,  laisser  (cf.  §230, 6, 7)oP 
a  verb  of  perceiving  (entendre,  voir,  etc. ),  accompany  the  finite  verb : 
Je  le  lui  ferai  dire.  I  shall  make  him  say  it. 

II  se  le  voit  refuser.  He  sees  himself  refused  it. 

Faites-vous-la  raconter.  Have  it  related  to  you, 


§370] 


THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN. 


269 


I  shall  send  for  him. 


c.  A  similar  arrangement  is  permissible  with  aller,  venir,  envoyer, 
etc.  +  an  infinitive  : 
J'enverrai  le  chercher  or\ 
Je  I'enverrai  chercher.     J 
Envoyez-le  chercher.  Send  for  it. 

NOTB.— In  the  older  langfuage,  objects  of  an  infinitive  often  stood  before  the  BO-oalled 
modal  auxiliaries,  e.g.,  *  Je  VOUS  dois  dire,'  but  usage  hardly  permits  this  now,  except 
for  en,  y,  e.g-,  'Ce  qu'on  en  doit  attendre/ 

2.  Conjunctive  objects  stand  immediately  after  an  imperative 
affirmative : 


Regardez-les ;  ^coutez-nous. 
Donnez-le-lui ;  allons-nous-en. 
But :  Ne  les  regardez  pas. 

Ne  nous  ^coutez  point. 

Ne  le  lui  donnez  pas. 


Look  at  them ;  listen  to  us. 
Give  it  to  him  ;  let  us  go  away. 
Do  not  look  at  them. 
Do  not  listen  to  us. 
Do  not  give  it  to  him. 


a.  The  rule  does  not  apply  to  the  subjunctive  as  impve.  (§272,  1,  a) : 
Qu'il  les  6coute.  Let  him  listen  to  them. 

NoTBS.— 1.  Formerly,  but  rarely  now,  an  imperative  affirmative  when  Joined  to 
another  by  et  (OU,  mals)  might  have -an  object  before  it:  'Achetez-les  et  les 
payez,'  etc. 

2.  Void  and  voll^,  which  are  imperatives  by  derivation,  are  always  preceded  by 
their  conjunctive  object :  'Les  voici ;  en  voiU,  etc.' 

370.  Relative  Position  of  Objects.    Personal  pronoun 

objects  and  pronominal  adverbs  are  arranged  with  reference 
to  each  other,  as  follows : — 


L  When  coming  before  the  verb : 

before  (\e  \  before  Jlui  '^  before  y' 
lleur 


me 
te 
se 
nous 

VOUS 

n  me  les  donne. 
n  les  lui  donne. 
n  nous  en  donne. 
Je  leur  en  parleraL 
Ne  leur  en  parlez  pas. 


la 
Ue< 


les 


before  en. 


He  gives  them  to  me. 
He  gives  them  to  him. 
He  gives  us  some  of  it. 
I  shall  speak  to  them  of  it. 
Do  not  speak  of  it  to  them. 


Je  I'y  ai  envoys  pour  le  leur  dire.     I  sent  him  there  to  tell  them  it. 


270 


THE  PRONOUN. 


[§370 


a.  When  there  are  two  direct  or  two  indirect  objects,  they  become 
disjunctive  and  follow  the  verb  : 

J'ai  vu  lui  et  elle.  I  have  seen  him  and  her. 

J'en  ai  parl^  k  lui  et  h.  elle.  I  spoke  of  it  to  him  and  to  her. 

2.  When  coming  after  the  verb  : 

le  (la  les)  before  moi  (toi,  lui,  nous,  vous,  leur). 

me  (te,  lui,  nous,  vous,  leur)  before  y  (en). 

y  before  en. 
Donnez-les-moL  Give  them  to  me. 

Donnez-lem'-en.  Give  them  some  of  it. 

Donnez-m'en  ;  va-t'en.  Give  me  some ;  begone. 

Conduisez-nous-y.  Take  us  there. 

Allez-vous-en.  Go  away. 

a.  After  an  imperative,  the  indirect  objects  nous,  vous,  may  precede 
the  direct  le,  la,  les  in  familiar  language  : 

Conservez-vous-le.  Keep  it  for  yourselves. 

Tenez-vous-le  pour  dit.  Consider  it  as  final 

3.  Reference  table  showing  possible  combinations  o£  two 
pronouns : 

(Before  the  Verb. )  (After  the  Verb. ) 


me  le 

tele 

sele 

le   lui 

-le  -moi 

-le  -toi 

-le  -lui 

me  la 

tela 

sela 

la   lui 

-la  -moi 

-la  -toi 

-la  -lui 

me  les 

teles 

se  les 

les  lui 

-les-moi 

-les-toi 

-les- lui 

nous  le 

vous  le 

sele 

le  leur 

-le  -nous 

-le  -vous 

-le  -leur 

nous  la 

vous  la 

sela 

la  leur 

-la  -nous 

-la  -vous 

-la  -leur 

nous  les 

vous  les 

se  les 

les  leur 

-les-nous 

-les-vous 

-les-leur 

m'en 

t'en 

s'en 

lui  en 

-m'en 

-t'en 

-lui-en 

m'en 

t'en 

s'en 

Ten 

-m'en 

-t'en 

-I'en 

nous  en 

vous  en 

s'en 

leur  en 

-nous-en 

-vous-en 

-leur-en 

nous  en 

vous  en 

s'en 

les    en 

-nous-en 

-vous-en 

-les-en 

m'y 

t'y 

s'y 

[lui    y] 

[-m'y] 

[-t'y] 

[-lui-y] 

m'y 

t7 

s'y 

I'y 

[-m'y] 

[-t'y] 

-I'y 

nous  y 

vousy 

s'y 

leury 

-nous-y 

-vous-y 

-leur-y 

nous  y 

vous  y 
yen 

s'y 

les    y 

-nous-y 

-vous-y 
y-en 

-les  -y 

§§371-372]  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN.  271 

Ohs. :  1.  The  disjunctive  forms  mol,  toi  are  used  instead  of  me,  te  after  the  verb^ 
except  before  en. 

2.  After  the  verb,  the  forms  are  joined  to  it  and  to  each  other  by  hyphens,  apostrophe 
instead  of  hyphen  being  used  according  to  §19. 

3.  Combinations  of  three  forms  are  rare,  e.g.,  'II  nous  yenadonn^';  they  are 
usually  avoided,  e.g.,  '  Donnes-y-en  k  moi'  for  •  Donne-m'y-en.' 

4.  The  forms  in  [  ]  are  almost  always  avoided,  either  by  transposition  or  by  some 
other  form  of  expression,  e.g.,  '  M^nes*-y-moi '  or  '  M^ne-moi  lit '  for  '  M^ne-m'y,'  eto. 

«See§159,  4 

371.  Omission  of  Object.  The  object  of  the  second  of 
two  verbs  in  a  compound  tense  joined  by  et  or  ou  may  be 
omitted  along  with  the  auxiliary  and  the  subject : 

II  I'a  pris  et  tue.  He  caught  and  killed  it. 

Or  :  II  i'a  pris  et  I'a  tu6.  He  caught  it  and  killed  it. 

II  I'a  pris  et  il  I'a  tu^.  He  has  caught  it  and  he  has  killed  it. 

But :  II  I'a  pris,  I'a  tu6.  He  has  caught  it,  has  killed  it. 

II  le  prend,  et  le  tue.  He  catches  it,  and  kills  it. 

Note.— The  verbs  must  be  alike  in  government,  miist  have  the  same  auxiliary,  must 
both  be  affirmative  or  negative,  otherwise  no  omission  is  allowed. 

372.  Disjunctives.  When,  for  any  reason,  the  pronoun 
is  stressed  (§7),  the  disjunctive  form  is  usually  employed  (see 
§359,  note) ;  thus,  the  disjunctives  are  used : — 

1.  Absolutely,  a  verb  being  implied,  but  not  expressed : 

Qui  est  U  ?— Moi  (eux,  elle).  Who  is  there  ?— I  (they,  she). 

Qui  as-tu  vn  ? — Lui  (eux).  Whom  did  you  see  ? — Him  (them). 

Toi  absent,  que  ferai-je  ?  You  flbsent,  what  shall  I  do  ? 

a.  So  also,  in  comparisons,  and  analogously,  after  ne . . .  que : 
Je  suis  plus  grand  que  toi.  I  am  taller  than  you. 

Faites  comme  eux.  Do  as  they  do. 

Je  n'ai  vu  que  lui  I  have  seen  him  only. 

2.  In  appositions,  often  emphatic  : 

Moi,  je  I'ai  vu  (moi-m^me).  (Why)  I  saw  it  myself. 

Toi  qui  I'as  vu,  tu  me  crois.  You  who  saw  it  (you)  believe  me. 

Lui  aussi  (il)  le  sait.  He  too  knows  it. 

Cela  vous  est  facile  k  vous.  That  is  easy  for  you. 


272  THE  PRONOUN.  §373 

a.  With  lui  so  used,  and  sometimes  also  with  eux,  the  conjunctive 
subject  may  be  omitted  : 

Lui  seul  (il)  ne  le  voulait  pas.  He  alone  did  not  wish  it. 

Lui  travaillait ;  eux  jouaient.  He  worked  ;  they  played. 

KOTS.— Je  SOUSSign^= '  I  the  undersigned '  is  a  relic  of  the  earlier  langtiage. 

3.  As  logical  subject  after  ce  +  ^tre  : 

Cest  moi  (toi,  vous) ;  ce  sont  eux,  etc.     It  is  I  (thou,  you) ;  it  is  they. 

4.  With  an  infinitive : 

Moi  t'oublier  !  jamais.  I  forget  thee  !    Never. 

Et  eux  de  s'enfuir.  And  they  made  oft 

5.  When  the  subject  or  object  is  composite,  see  also  §362, 
1,  a  and  2,  (1)  : 

Son  fr^re  et  lui  sont  venus.  His  brother  and  he  have  come. 

a.  A  composite  subject  or  object  is  usually  summed  up  by  a  pleonastic 
appositive  conjunctive,  especially  when  the  components  are  unlike  in 
person : 

Vous  et  lui  (vous)  I'avez  vu.  You  and  he  saw  it. 

Je  vous  envoie,  toi  et  ton  fr^re.         I  send  you  and  your  brother. 

6.  After  a  preposition : 

Je  parle  de  toi  et  d'eux.  I  speak  of  you  and  of  them, 

lis  sont  chez  eux.  They  are  at  home. 

II  se  moque  de  nous.  He  makes  sport  of  us. 

a.  Observe  the  peculiar  use  of  a  preposition  +  a  disjunctive  pronoun 
as  a  sort  of  emphatic  appositive  of  possession. 

J'ai  une  maison  k  moi.  I  have  a  house  of  my  own. 

Mon  idee  k  moi,  c'est,  etc.  My  (own)  idea  is,  etc. 

Note.— A  disjunctive  for  things  after  a  preposition  is  usually  avoided,  either  by  means 
of  en,  7,  or  else  by  an  adverb,  such  as  dedans,  dehors,  dessus,  devant,  derri^re, 
etc.  :  '  Je  ne  vois  rien  la  dedans  (iti  it) ' ;  '  Yoyez  sur  la  table,  cherchez  dessus  (on 
it)  et  dessous  (under  it).' 

7.  For  moi  and  toi  after  imperative,  see  §370,  3,  obs.  1. 

373.  Pronouns  in  Address.  In  addressing  one  person 
TOUS  is,  in  general,   the  pronoun  of  formality  and  respect^ 


§374]  THE  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUN.  273 

whilst    tu    denotes    familiarity,    aflfection,    solemnity,   etc., 
as  follows : — 

1.  Tu  — *you,'  of  one  person,  is  generally  used  between 
members  of  the  same  family  (husband  and  wife,  parents  and 
children,  brothers  and  sisters),  between  very  intimate  friends, 
between  children,  by  grown  persons  to  children  and  sometimes 
to  servants,  by  everybody  to  animals  and  inanimate  objects : 
Oil  es-tu,  mon  cher  pere  ?  Where  are  you,  my  dear  father  ? 
Est-ce  toi,  mon  enfant  ?                      Is  that  you,  my  child  ? 

Pauvre  chien,  tu  as  faim.  Poor  dog,  you  are  hungry. 

2.  Tu  =  *  thou  *  is  used  in  poetry  and  elevated  prose,  and 
by  Protestants  in  addressing  God,  Roman  Catholics  using 
vous: 

Nous  te  (vous)  louons,  0  Dieu  !  We  praise  thee,  0  God  ! 

3.  Vous,  with  the  above  limitations,  is  used,  both  in  the 
singular  and  plural,  as  in  English. 

THE  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUN. 

374.  Possessives. 

1.  Adjectival  Forms :  2.  Pronominal  Forms : 

Sing.  Plub.  Sing.  Plur. 

m.  mon         )  m.  le  mien      les  miens     1 

.  ,        ,  Vmes,  my.  r     1       •         1        •  mme. 

f.    ma  (mon)  J        '     ''  f.    la  mienne  les  miennes  j 

m.  ton       1     .      ^1  m.  le  tien       les  tiens     V,. 

m.  son       )  "I  his,  her,      m.  le  sien       les  siens     )  his,  hers,  its, 

f.     sa(son)J  '  /its,one's.     f.     la  sienne   les  siennes/one's  own. 

m.  "I      ,  m.  le  notrel  ,        .. 

.      Vnotre        nos,  our.  .     ,      ^^     v  les  notres,  ours. 

t     )  f.     la  notrej 


r} 


,  m.  le  v6trel  , 

votre        vos,  your.  ,      [■  les  votres,  yours. 


m 
i 

18 


j-leur  leurs,  theirs.        ™*  ^  ^"^  j-    les  leurs,  theirs. 


274  THE  PRONOUN.  [§§375-376 

Obs. :  1.  The  fonns  in  parenthesis,  Obs. :  1.  The  feminine,  except  for  letUf, 

mon,  ton,  son,  are  used  instead  of  ma,  is  formed  as  for  adjectives  of  like  ending. 

ta.  sa,  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute  :    '  Mon  2.  De,  4+le,  les,  contract  as  usual ;  thus, 

amie,'  'my  friend  (f.)';    'ton  llistoire  du  mien  (  =  de+le  mien),  aUX  miennes 

(f .),'*  your  story ' ;  'son  aimable  tante,'  (=k+les  miennes),  etc,    3.  'Note  the  ac- 

•  his  amiable  aunt.'     2.  Since   son  (sa  cent  mark  in  ndtre,  v6tre,  absent  in  notre, 

Bea)='hi8,'  'her,'  'its,'  ' one's,' the  con-  votre.    4.  Since  le  sien  (la  Sienne,  etc.) 

text  determines  which  sense  is  intended.  =  *  his,'  '  hers,'  '  its,'  '  one's,'  the  context 

determines  which  sense  is  intended. 

NoTB.— The  regular  feminine  forms,  ma,  ta,  sa,  were  at  one  time  used  before  a 

vowel  sound :  a  trace  of  this  usage  survives  in  ma  mie  (for  m'amie),  m'amour 

375.  Agreement.  The  possessives  agree  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  noun  denoting  the  object  possessed,  and  in 
person  with  the  possessor : 

Elle  a  son  crayon  et  les  miens.  She  has  her  pencil  and  mine. 

II  a  sa  plume  et  les  v6tres.  He  has  his  pen  and  yours. 

a.  The  possessive  adjective  must  bfc  repeated  precisely  like  the 
definite  article  (cf.  §318) : 

Mes  parents  et  mes  amis.  My  relatives  and  friends. 

b.  When  the  possessor  is  indefinite,  son  (sa,  etc.)  and  le  sien  (la 
sienne,  etc. ),  are  used  : 

On  doit  tenir  sa  parole.  One  must  keep  one's  word. 

Se  charger  des  affaires  d'autrui  et    To  undertake  the  business  of  others 
n^gliger  les  siennes.  and  neglect  one's  own. 

376.  Use  of  Adjectival  Forms.  They  are  used,  in 
general,  like  the  corresponding  English  forms;  idiomatic 
distinctions  and  special  rules  are  : — 

1.  The  possessive  adjective  is  commonly  replaced  by  the 
definite  article  (cf.  §328)  when  no  ambiguity  arises  from  its 
use: 

Donnez-moi  la  main.  Give  me  your  hand. 

II  m'a  dechir6  le  visage.  He  has  scratched  my  face. 

But :  II  a  d^chir^  son  habit.  He  has  torn  his  coat. 

a.  If  the  sense  is  specific,  emphatic,  or  distinctive,  the  possessive  ia 
used: 

Mon  bras  me  fait  mal.  My  arm  pains  me. 

Voilk  encore  ma  migraine  I  There  is  my  sick-headache  again ! 


§376]  THE  POSSESSIVE   PRONOUN.  276 

Je  I'ai  vu  de  mes  propres  yeux.         I  saw  it  with  my  own  eyes. 
EUle  lui  a  donne  sa  main.  She  has  given  him  her  hand  {sc.  in 

marriage). 

2.  En  4- the  definite  article  serves  in  certain  cases  as  a 
substitute  for  son,  leur,  see  §367,  2,  (2) : 

a.  This  construction  is  more  usual  for  things  than  for  persons ;  for 
things  personified,  for  names  of  places,  or  to  avoid  ambiguity,  son,  leur 
are  not  uncommon : 
La  necessite  parle ;  il  faut  suivre    Necessity  speaks ;  we  must  follow 

sa  loi.  her  law. 

Vous  rappelez-vous  cette    ville  ?    Do  you  remember  that  city?     Its 

Ses  promenades  sont  tr^s  belles.        promenades  are  very  fine. 
La  source  de  toutes  les  passions    Sensation  is  the  source  of  all  the 

est  la  sensibility,  I'imagiuation         passions,  imagination  determines 

determine  leur  pente.  their  tendency. 

3.  The  emphatic  *own*  is  denoted  by  propre  or  by  an 
apposition  witb  k  I 

Je  I'ai  ^crit  de  ma  propre  main.  I  wrote  it  with  my  own  hand. 

C'est  mon  opinion  k  moL  That  is  my  own  opinion. 

Cf.  also  :  J'ai  un  cheval  k  moi.  I  have  a  horse  of  my  own. 

Cest  k  moi  k  jouer.  It  is  my  turn  to  play. 

a.  Along  with  son  the  k  construction  often  avoids  ambiguity : 
Son  p6re  h.  lui.  His  (i.e.,  not  *  her ')  father. 

4.  Men  (ma)  is  commonly  used,  in  direct  address,  before 
the  name  of  a  relative  (not  before  papa,  maman)  or  the  title 
of  a  superior  oflBfcer : 

Bonjour  mon  p^re  (mon  colonel).      Good  morning  father  (colonel). 
But :  Est-ce  toi  papa  (maman)  ?        Is  that  you  papa  (mamma)  ? 

Note.— This  us^e  explains  the  origin  of  monsieur  (=mon+8ieur),  madame 
(=ma+dame),  etc. 

5.  In  speaking  to  a  person  of  his  or  her  relatives,  votrC 
(VOS)  is  often  preceded  by  monsieur,  etc.,  for  politeness : 
Madame  votre  m^re  y  est-elle  ?         Is  your  mother  in  ? 


276  THE  PRONOUN.  [§377 

6.  When  there  is  plurality  of  possessor,  the  object  possessed 
usually  remains  singular,  if  it  is  singular  as  regards  the 
individual  possessor  : 

Les  hommes  songent  moins  k  leur     Men  think  less  of  their  souls  than 

ame  qu'^  leur  corps.  of  their  bodies, 

lis  ont  perdu  la  vie.  They  lost  their  lives. 

a.  Sometimes  the  sense  demands  a  plural : 
Leurs  tetes  se  ressemblent.  Their  heads  are  alike. 

377.  Use  of  Pronominal  Forms.    They  are  used,  in 

general,    like   the    corresponding    English   forms;    idiomatic 
distinctions  and  special  rules  are  the  following : — 

1.  *  Mine,'  etc.,  after  ^tre  is  regularly  expressed  by  a  +  moi, 
etc.,  when  denoting  ownership   simply,  while  le  mien,  etc., 
denotes  a  distinction  of  ownership  : 
Cette  montre  est  k  moi. 


J 


-^  , ,  ,       .  I  That  watch  is  mine. 

Cette  montre  est  la  mienne 

2.  The  pronominal  form  sometimes  stands  without  article 
in  the  predicate  after  certain  verbs  : 

Ces  opinions  sont  vOtres.  Those  opinions  are  yours. 

Elle  deviendra  mienne.  She  shall  become  mine. 

Je  les  ai  fait  miens.  I  made  them  mine. 

Such  verbs  are : 

fitre.  devenir.  dire.  faire.  regarder  comme,  etc. 

3.  The   idiom   *a   friend   of    mine,*   etc.,    is    not    literally 
translated : 

tJn  de  mes  amis.  A  friend  of  mine. 

--.        ,  1     .     ,  .  f  One  of  my  friends,  (who  is)  a  doct<M:. 

Un  medecm  de  mes  amis.  1  *    i    ^  o  •     j    r     • 

I A  doctor,  a  friend  of  mine. 

Un  ami  k  moi.  A  friend  of  mine. 

Mon  ami  que  voici.  This  friend  of  mine. 

Cf. :  Un  tour  de  sa  fagon.  One  of  his  tricks. 

a.  The  use  of  mien  (tien,  sien)  attributively  in  this  sense  is  familiar : 
Un  mien  parent.  A  relative  of  mine. 

Une  sienne  cousine.  A  cousin  of  his. 


§§378-379]     THE  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUN.  277 

4.  Emphatic  'own'  is  rendered  by  propre,  or  is,  more 
usually,  untranslated : 

Son  avis  et  le  mien  (propre).  His  opinion  and  my  own. 

5.  When  used  absolutely,  i.e.,  without  antecedent,  the 
singular  denotes  'property,'  *what  is  mine,'  etc.,  and  the 
plural  *  relatives,*  *  friends,'  *  allies,'  etc. : 

Je  ne  demande  que  le  mien.  I  ask  only  for  what  is  mine. 

Les  n6tres  se  sont  bien  battus.  Our  soldiers  (etc. )  fought  welL 

a.  Familiarly,  the  feminine  means  '  pranks,'  etc. : 
JX  fait  encore  des  siennes.  He  is  at  his  pranks  again. 

Note. — Other  absolute  uses  are  not  permissible,  e.g,t '  Voire  lettre  (not '  la  vdtre ')  de 
la  semaine  demi^re.' 


THE  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUN. 

378.  Demonstratives. 

1.  Adjectival  forms :  2.  Pronominal  forms : 

Si50.  PtuK.  Sise.  Plue. 

-2  ce,  thisCthese),  that(those),  he(8he,it,  theyX 
Oh». :  The  form  cet  is  used  before  a     >    ceci,  this, 
vowel  or  h  mute :    Get   arbre ;   cet     !§,  cela,  that. 

homme ;    cet  autre    di  ;    but :   ce         obs. :  The  e  of  ce  is  "elided  before  a  vowel 
Ch6ne;    06  hfitre.  o,  j^  ^^^^  (gjg).   q.  becomes  9'  before  a 

(§5,4):  'c'a^t^.' 

379.  Agreement.  The  adjectival  form  agrees  in  gender 
and  number  with  the  noun  before  which  it  stands ;  the  pro- 
nominal form  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun 
instead  of  which  it  stands: 

Cette  plume  et  celle  de  Jean.  This  pen  and  that  of  John. 

J'aime  ces  hvres-ci,  mais  je  n'aime      I  like  these  books,  but  I  do  not  like 
pas  ceux-liL  those. 


278  THE  PRONOTJif.  [§§380-382 

a.  The  demonstrative  adjective  must  be  repeated  like  the  definite 
article  (cf.  §  318). 

380.  Use  of  Adjectival  ce.    Ce  (cette,   etc.)  =  *  this' 

or  'that'j  to  distinguish  'this'  from  Hhat'  -ci  and  -lei  are 
respectively  added  to  the  noun  : 

Lis  ce  livre-ci ;  lis  ce  livre-lk.  Read  this  book  ;  read  that  book. 

J'aime  ces  tableaux-Ik.  I  like  those  pictures. 

a.  Ce  (cette,  etc.),  referring  to  what  has  already  been  mentioned, 
sometimes  has  the  force  of  *  that '  : 

Le  t^legraphe,   cette  grande  d^-    The  telegraph,  that  great  discovery 
couverte  de  notre  si^cle.  of  our  century. 

h.  The  definite  article  replaces  the  demonstrative  adjective  in  a  few 
idioms : 

Ne  parlez  pas  de  la  sorte.  Do  not  speak  in  that  way. 

J'irai  k  I'instant.  I  shall  go  this  (very)  moment. 

381.  Celui.  The  pronoun  celui  (celle,  etc.)  =  *  that,'  'that 
one,'  *the  one/  *he,'  is  regularly  used  only  along  with  a 
relative  clause  or  a  de  clause : 

Ceux  qui  rient  pleureront.  Those  who  laugh  will  weep. 

Celle  dont  je  parle  est  venue.  She  of  whom  I  speak  has  come. 

Le  devoir  d'aimer  Bieu  et  celui  The  duty  of  loving  God  and  that  of 

d'aimer  son  prochain.  loving  one's  neighbour. 

Cette  robe  et  celle  que  j'ai  vue.  This  dress  and  the  one  I  saw. 

Mes  plumes  et  celles  de  mon  f  r^re.  My  pens  and  my  brother's. 
Obs. :  Note  the  use  of  celUl=Enfj:Iish  possessive  noun  substantively. 

a.  The  relative  sentence  is  sometimes  elliptically  expressed  by  the 
past  participle : 

Les  decouvertes  ^num^r^es  sont        The  discoveries  enumerated  are 
celles  faites  par  Edison.  those  made  by  Edison. 

b.  Celui-lk  replaces  celui  when  the  predicate  comes  before  the 
relative  : 

Celui-lk  est  riche  qui  est  toujours    He  (that  man)  is  rich  who  is  always 
content.  happy. 

382.  Celui-ci,  celui-la.    The  pronouns  celui-ci  (celle-ci, 

etc.)  = '  this,'  '  this  one,'  '  he/  *  the  latter '  and  celui-1^  (cellc- 


§383]       THE  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUN.         279 

1^,  etc.)  = 'that/  'that  one/  *the  former/  are  used  to  contrast 
the  nearer  with  the  more  remote : 

Voici  les  deux  chatnes ;  gardez  eel-  Here  are  the  two  chains ;  keep  this 
le-ci,  et  renvoyez  celle-1^  (one),  and  send  back  that  (one). 

Veut-il  ceux-ci  ou  ceux-U  ?  Does  he  wish  these  or  those  ? 

CiceronetVirgile ^talent Remains;  Cicero  and  Virgil  were  Romans; 
celui-ci  ^tait  poete,  et  celui-  the  former  was  an  orator,  and 
\k  orateur.  the  latter  a  poet. 

Obs.:  The  idiom  in  the  last  example  is  literally  *  the  latter. . .,  the  former.' 
a.  *  This '  or  *  that '  for  emphasis,  not  contrast,  is  celui-Ut. : 

Cest  une  bonne  loi  (que)  celle-la.      This  (that)  is  a  good  law. 

383.  Ce  as  Representative  Subject.    Ce  =  'this/  *that/ 

*  these/  '  those/  '  he,'  *  she,'  *  it,'  *  they,'  according  to  the  con- 
text, is  used  with  6tre,  or  with  devoir,  pouvoir,  savoir+ 
^tre,  as  representative  subject,  when  the  logical  subject  is  :^ 

1.  A  proper   noun,    or    a    determinate    noun,     including 
adjectives  as  such : 

Cest  Marie  et  sa  m^re.  It  is  Mary  and  her  mother. 

Ce  sera  un  beau  spectacle.  That  (it)  will  be  a  fine  sight. 

Ce  sont  nos  plumes.  These  (those)  are  our  pens. 

]6tait-ce  le  meilleur  ?  Was  it  the  best  ? 

Ce  sont  des  Allemands.  They  (those)  are  Germans.. 

Cest  mon  ami(e).  He  (she)  is  my  friend. 

Ce  pent  Itre  Jean.  That  may  be  John. 

a.  Before  ^tre  +  an  indeterminate  noun  il  (ils,  elles)  is  the  regular 
construction : 

II  est  temps  de  s'en  aller.  It  is  time  to  go. 

Ils  sont  amis  (Allemands).  They  are  friends  (Germans). 

Elle  est  couturi^re.  She  is  a  seamstress. 

NOTB.— For  a  few  expressions  like  c'est  dommage.  etc.,  in  which  c'est  stands 
with  an  indeterminate  noun,  see  384,  1,  note  3. 

b.  II  est  is  always  used  to  indicate  hours  of  the  day : 

II  est  midi  (trois  heures).  It  is  noon  (three  o'clock). 

But :  Quelle  heure    est-ce  qui  What  hour  has  just  struck  ? — It  is 

vient  de  sonner  ? — C'est  cinq  five. 

heures. 


280  THE  PRONOUN.  [§384 

ft  Observe  the  use  of  ce  in  the  following  date  idioms : 
C'est  aujourd'hui  lundi.  To-day  is  Monday. 

Ce  sera  demain  le  quatre.  To-morrow  will  be  the  fourth. 

2.  A  pronoun : 

Qui  est-ce  ?— Ce  sont  eux.  Who  is  it  ? — It  is  they. 

Ce  sont  les  leurs.  Those  are  theirs. 

C'est  ceci ;  c'est  cela.  It  is  this  ;  it  is  that. 

C'6taient  les  memes.  They  (those)  were  the  same. 

Ce  doivent  6tre  les  miens.  Those  must  be  mine. 

3.  An  infinitive,  or  an  infinitive  with  de  : 

Ce  serait  tout  perdre.  That  would  be  losing  everything. 

Voir  c'est  croire.  Seeing  is  believing. 

Ce  que  je  crains  c'est  de  I'oflfenser.     What  I  fear  is  to  offend  him. 

4.  A  noun  sentence  : 

Est-ce  que  vous  ne  le  f erez  pas  ?       Will  you  not  do  it  ? 
Oil  est-ce  qu'il  est?  Where  is  it  that  he  is ? 

Ce  n'est  pas  qu'il  ait  peur.  It  is  not  that  he  is  afraid. 

o.  The  noun  sentence  may  be  understood  : 
Vous  partirez,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  ( =     You  will  go,  will  you  not  ? 
n'est-ce  pas  que  vous  partirez  ?) 

5.  An  adverb  of  quantity : 

Combien  est-ce  t    (^'a.  6t^  trop.         How  much  is  it  ?    It  was  too  much. 
NOTB.— For  agreemtat  of  the  verb,  see  §232,  3. 

384.  Ce  as  Real  Subject.  Ce  stands  as  real  subject  of 
^tre,  or  of  devoir,  pOUVOir,  savoir  +  ^tre,  when  the  com- 
plement of  ^tre  is  : — 

1.  An  adjective,  an  adjective  -f  ^  -f  an  infinitive,  an  infinitive 
preceded  by  a,  an  adverb  (in  all  cases  without  further  syntac- 
tical connection,  see  a,  below) : 

C'est  facile  (vrai,  bien).  That  (it)  is  easy  (true,  well). 

Ce  doit  etre  (ne  saurait  ^tre)  vrai.  That  must  be  (cannot  be)  true. 

II  est  parti,  c'est  clair.  He  is  gone,  that  is  clear. 

C'est  clair,  il  est  partL  It  is  clear,  he  is  gone. 

C'est  4  d^sirer.  That  (it)  is  to  be  desired. 


§385]  THE  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUN.  281 

Od  sera-ce  ?  Where  will  it  (that)  be  ? 

C'^tait  bien  mal  k  vous.  That  was  very  wrong  of  you. 

o.  When  followed  by  de  +  an  infinitive  or  by  a  que  clause,  the  regular 
construction  for  the  above  is  impersonal  il  (not  *ce');  so  also  the 
parenthetical  il  est  vraiand  n'est-il  pas  vrai?  (=n'est-ce  pas?),  though 
without  syntactical  connection : 

II  est  facile  de  dire  cela.  It  is  easy  to  say  that. 

II  est  triste  de  vous  voir  ainsi.  It  is  sad  to  see  you  thus. 

II  est  clair  que  j'ai  raison.  It  is  clear  that  I  am  right. 

II  est  k  desirer  que  la  guerre  finisse    It  is  to  be  desired  that  the  war  wiU 

bientOt.  soon  end. 

On  rit,  il  est  vrai,  mais  attendez.      They  laugh,  to  be  sure,  but  wait. 
II  est  bien  mal  k  vous  de  parler     It  is  very  wrong  of  you  to  speak  so. 

ainsi. 

NOTB.— 1.  Colloquially,  c'est  is  pretty  freely  used  instead  of  il  est  before  de+infini* 
tive  or  a  que  clause  :  '  C'est  facile  de  faire  cela ' ;  '  C'est  clair  que  j'ai  raison,'  etc. 

2.  This  use  of  ce  is  permissible  in  the  literary  style  only  in  expressions  of  emotion, 

e.g.,  C'est  heureuz  (malheureux,  beau,  triste,  ^tonnant,  etc.),  c'est  k  pr^ 
sumer  (craindre,  regretter,  etc.):  'C'est  triste  de  vous  voir';  ' C'est k craindra 
qu'il  ne  soit  noy6.' 

3.  The  ce  construction  is  obli(;ratory  after  a  few  noun  phrases  of  like  value,  e.g.^ 
C'est  dommage  (piti6,  plalsir,  Justice^  etc.,  *  C'est  piti^  de  I'entendre.' 

2.  A  prepositional  clause,  or  a  conjunction : 

C'est  pour  vous.  It  (that)  is  for  you. 

C'est  pourquoi  je  suis  venu.  That  is  why  I  came. 

C'est  comme  vous  (le)  dites.  It  is  as  you  say. 

385.  Ce  +  Si  Relative.     As  antecedent  ce  +  a  relative  de- 
notes *  that  which,'  *  what,*  *  which,'  etc. : 
Ce  qui  m'amuse.  What  (that  which)  amuses  me. 

Ce  que  je  dis  est  vrai.  What  I  say  is  true. 

Ce  dont  nous  parlions.  What  we  were  speaking  of. 

Ce  k  quoi  je  pense.  What  I  am  thinking  of. 

II  est  kg^,  ce  qui  est  dommage.  He  is  old,  which  is  a  pity. 

a.  Ce,  so  used,  either  immediately  precedes  the  rielative,  or  is,  for 
emphasis,  divided  from  it  by  6tre  +  a  predicate  substantive : 
Ce  qu'il  veut  est  la  gloire.  What  he  desires  is  glory. 

Cest  la  gloire  qu'il  veut.  It  is  glory  that  he  desires. 

NoTB.— This  type  of  construction  is  widely  used  to  render  a  predicate  substantive 
emphatic,  e.^.,  'C'est  ton  frfere  qui  ledit':  '  C'est  k  vous  que  (='^  qui')  je  parle'; 
'  C'est  mourir  que  de  vivre  ainsi ' ;  '  C'est  une  belle  ville  que  Paris '  (cf .  397,  2,  n.  1). 


282  THE  PRONOUN.  [§§386-388 

386.  Other  uses  of  ce.  Apart  from  its  use  with  ^tre 
or  with  a  relative,  ce  is  found  in  a  few  phrases  only,  mostly 
archaic,  familiar  or  jocular  : 

Ce  devint  un  usage.  This  (that)  became  a  custom. 

Tu.  Grains,  ce  lui  dit-il.  You  fear,  said  he  to  him. 

Sur  ce,  je  vous  quitte.  And  now,  I  leave  you. 

De  ce  non  content.  Not  satisfied  with  this. 

a.  The  parenthetical  ce  semble  may  be  used  only  when  unconnected 
(cf.  §384,  1,  a),  otherwise  il  semble  : 

C'est  lui,  ce  me  semble,  au  moins.     It's  he,  it  seems  to  me,  at  least. 
But :  II  me  semble  que  c'est  lui. 

387.  Pleonastic  ce.  As  compared  with  English,  ce  is 
often  pleonastic;  thus,  it  is  used  with  6tre  +  a  logical  sub- 
ject : — 

1.  Regularly,  after  celui  qui  and  ce  qui : 

Celle  qui  I'a  dit  c'est  vous.  The  one  who  said  so  is  you. 

Ce  que  je  crains  ce  sent  mes  pr6-  What  I  fear  is  my  would-be  friends. 

tendus  amis. 

Ce  k  quoi  je  i)ense  c'est  sa  sant^.  What  I  think  of  is  his  health. 

2.  Regularly,  between  infinitives  when  not  negative : 

Penser,  c'est  vivre.  To  think  is  to  live. 

But :  V^g^ter  (ce)  n'est  pas  vivre.     To  vegetate  is  not  to  live. 

3.  Regularly,  in  inversion  with  que  : 

^,    ,  ,    ,,      .„  -n.    .  f  Paris  is  a  beautiful  city. 

C  est  une  belle  viUe  que  Pans.  <  /.  •  ^  t»    • 

^  lit  IS  a  fine  city,  (  is  )  Pans. 

4.  Optionally,  in  other  inversions  for  emphasis  : 
La  guerre  (ce)  serait  la  ruine.  War  would  be  ruin. 

NoTK.— When  the  complement  of  6tre  is  an  adjective  or  participle,  pleonastic  ce 
may  not  be  used  :  '  Ce  qui  est  utile  n'est  pas  toujours  juste.' 

388.  Cecl  and  Cela.  Ceci  =  'this,'  the  nearer,  and  cela 
=  *  that,'  the  more  remote,  are  used  to  denote  something 
indicated,  but  not  yet  named  : 

Gardez  ceci  et  donnez-moi  cela.         Keep  this  and  give  me  that. 

Obs. :  If  the  object  has  been  already  named,  or  if  the  name  is  fully  implied  by  the 
context,  celui-Ci  (-1^)  must  be  used. 


§389]  THE   INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUN.  283 

a.  Ceci  also  refers  to  what  is  about  to  be  said,  and  cela  to  what  has 
been  said : 

R^fl^chissez  bien  h.  ceci.  Think  well  on  this. 

Je  ne  dis  pas  davantage,  oela  suffit.        I  say  no  more,  that  is  enough. 

h.  Ceci  {not  *  cela ')  may  have  a  predicate  noun : 

Ceci  est  un  secret.  )       m,  •    • 

rk_     ^>    i.  •  •  i.  /         \   t       This  IS  a  secret. 

Or :  C  est  ici  un  secret  (rarer).  ) 

But:  Cest  a  un  secret  That  i8  a  secret. 

Cela  c  est  un  secret.  ) 

NoTS.— Cela  is  not  so  divided  before  mdme,  seul,  and  its  division  in  negratlons  If 
optional :  '  Cela  seul  (mdme)  en  est  la  cause ' ;  '  Cela  n'est  pas  (or  ce  n'est  pas  14)  un« 
faute.' 

c.  Cela  {not  *  ceci  *) = •  this '  before  a  de  clause : 

Paris  a  cela  d'avantageux.  Paris  has  this  advantage. 

d.  Cela  may  be  replaced  by  Ik  after  de  and  par  : 

De  \k  vient  que,  etc.  From  that  it  comes  that,  etc. 

II  faut  commencer  par  llL  We  must  begin  with  that. 

e.  Cela  is  often  contracted  to  9a  colloquially : 

Ca  ne  fait  rien.  That  doesn't  matter. 

/.  ^a  is  sometimes  used  familiarly  or  contemptuously  of  personf 
instead  of  a  personal  pronoun  : 

Regardez  comme  ^a  mange.  Look  how  they  (etc. )  eat. 

^a  veut  faire  h.  sa  tete.  You  (etc. )  wish  to  do  as  you  please. 

NOTS.— Distinguish  9a  from  9^  (adverb)  and  <^  !  (interjection). 

THE  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUN. 

389,  Interrogatives. 

1.  Adjectival  forms  :  2.  Pronominal  forms : 

Sing.  Plur.  Siwo.  Plur. 

m-  quel?        quels?    1  which?,        m.  lequel?        leaquela?    "k  which?,  which 
t   quelle?     quelles?/ what?  etc   f.    laquelle?    leBquelleB7/orwhatone(8)7 

^  qui?,  who?,  whom? 
*   que?,  what? 
C.  quoi?.  what? 
Oh». :  1.  For  the  feminine  and  plural  of  quel,  cf.  §§337, 1,  (2),  and  338. 
2.  Leqnel^le+quel,  both  parts  being  inflected  (§§316,  389, 1) ;  de,  k  oontraot  with 
le,  168  (duquel,  auquel,  etc.,  cf.  §317). 
8.  Qne=qu'  before  a  vowel  or  li  mute  (§19). 


284  THE  PRONOUN.  [§§390-392 

390.  Agreement.  The  adjectival  forms  agree  like  ordi- 
nary adjectives;  the  variable  pronominal  forms  agree  in  gender, 
not  necessarily  in  number,  with  the  nouns  for  which  they 
stand;  qui?  assumes  the  number  of  the  noun  or  pronoun 
referred  to : 

Quels  livres  avez-vous  ?  Which  (what)  books  have  you  ? 

Quelles  sont  vos  raisons  ?  What  are  your  reasons  ? 

Laquelle  des  dames  est  venue  ?  Which  of  the  ladies  has  come  ? 

Qui  Sonne  ?    Qui  sont-elles  ?  Who  rings  ?    Who  are  they  ? 

391.  Quel  ?,  Lequel  ?.  The  adjective  quel  ?  = '  which  V, 
*what?',  and  the  pronoun  lequel ?=' which  (one)?',  'what 
(one)?',  refer  either  to  persons  or  things,  and  stand  both  in 
direct  and  indirect  questions  : 

Quels  livres  avez-vous  ?  Which  (what)  books  have  you  ? 

Dites-moi  quel  livre  il  a.  Tell  me  which  (what)  book  he  has. 

Desquels  avez-vous  besoin  ?  Which  (ones)  do  you  need  ? 

Dites-moi  lesquels  vous  avez.  Tell  me  which  (ones)  you  have. 

Quelle  dame  est  arriv^e?  Which  (what)  lady  has  come? 

Je  ne  sais  pas  laquelle.  I  do  not  know  which  (one). 

Quelles  sont  vos  raisons  ?  What  are  your  reasons  ? 

Quel  homme  est-ce  1^?  What  (what  kind  of)  man  is  that? 

Auquel  des  hommes  parle-t-il  ?  To  which  of  the  men  does  he  speak  ? 

a.  Quel  1  in  exclamations  sometimes  = '  what  a  ! ',  *  what ! ' : 
Quel  hdros  !    Quels  h^ros  !  What  a  hero  !    What  heroes ! 
Quelle  belle  sc^ne  !                              What  a  beautiful  scene ! 

b.  Quel  ?  as  predicative  adjective  often  replaces  qui  ?= '  who?' : 
Quels  sont  cesgens-U?  Who  are  those  people?  {or  what 

kind  of  people  are  those  ?) 
Sais-tu  quelle  est  cette  dame  ?  Do  you  know  who  that  lady  is  ? 

Note.— A  pleonastic  de  is  commonly  used  before  alternatives  after  quel  ?,  lequel? 
and  other  interrogatives,  probably  caused  by  case  attraction  with  des  deuz,  often 
present  in  such  expressions  :  '  Quel  (des  deux)  est  le  plus  habile,  de  cet  homme-ci  ou  de 
celui-Ii?' ;  *  Laquelle  est  la  plus  illustre, -d' Athfenes  ou  de  Rome?' 

392.  Qui  ?.  1.  The  pronoun  qui  ?  =  '  who  ? ',  '  whom  1 ',  is 
regularly  used  of  persons  only,  and  stands  in  both  direct  and 
indirect  questions : 


§393]  THE   INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUN.  285 

Qui  frappe  ?    Qui  est  U.  ?  Who  is  knocking  ?    Who  is  there  ? 

De  qui  {k  qui)  parle-t-il?  Of  whom  (to  whom)  is  he  speaking? 

Qui  avez-vous  vu  ?  Whom  did  you  see  ? 

Qui  etes-vous  ?  Who  are  you  ? 

Dites-moi  qui  est  venu.  Tell  me  who  has  come  ? 

a.  Qui?  is  sometimes  used,  though  rarely  and  not  necessarily,  as 
subject  to  a  transitive  verb  in  the  sense  of  *  what  ? ' : 

Qui  vous  am^ne  de  si  bonne  heure?    What  brings  you  so  early  ? 

b.  Qui  ?,  predicatively,  is  often  replaced,  especially  when  feminine  or 
plural,  by  quel  ?  : 

Quelle  est  cette  dame  ?  Who  is  that  lady?  (What  L  is  that?). 

Quels  sont-ils  ?  Who  are  they  ? 

2.  *  Whose  V,  denoting  ownership  simply  =  a  qui  ?  ;  other- 
wise generally  de  qui  ?,  sometimes  quel  ?,  but  never  *  dont ' ; 

A  qui  est  cette  maison-lk  ?  Whose  house  is  that  ? 

De  qui  Ites-vous  fils  ?  Whose  son  are  you  ? 

Quelle  maison  a  6t^  briil^e  ?  Whose  (what)  house  was  burnt  ? 

NOTK.— Compare  with  this  the  idiom  c'est  k  qui:  'C'^tait  k  qui  finirait  le  premier,' 
*  It  was  a  strife  as  to  who  would  finish  first.' 

393.  Que?,  Quoi?.  The  form  que ?  =  * what ? '  is  con- 
junctive, while  quoi  ?  =  *  what  ? '  is  disjunctive ;  their  uses  in 
detail  are : — 

1.  Que  ?  stands  regularly  as  direct  object  or  as  predicate, 
and  in  direct  question  only  : 

Que  vous  a-t-il  dit  ?  What  did  he  say  to  you  ? 

Que  cherchez-vous  ?  What  are  you  looking  for  ? 

Que  sont-ils  devenus  ?  What  has  become  of  them  ? 

a.  Que  ?,  alternatively  with  quoi  ?,  may  stand  with  an  infinitive  in 
indirect  question  ; 
Je  ne  sais  que  (quoi)  dire.  I  know  not  what  to  say. 

6<  Que?  and  que  1  sometimes  have  adverbial  force : 
Que  ne  m'avez-vous  dit  cela  ?  Why  did  you  not  tell  me  that  ? 

Que  vous  ^tes  heureux  1  How  happy  you  are  ! 

Que  d'argent  perdu  1  What  a  quantity  of  money  lost ! 


286  THE  PRONOUN.  [§394 

2.  *Whatr  as  subject  of  a  verb  is  regularly  qu'est-ce 
qui  ? : 

Qu'est-ce  qui  fait  ce  bruit  ?  What  is  making  that  noise  ? 

a.  The  form  que?  may  stand  as  subject  to  a  few  intransitive  verbs, 
mostly  such  as  may  also  be  impersonal,  but  never  as  subject  to  a 
transitive  verb  : 

Que  sert  de  pleurer  ?  What  is  the  use  of  crying  ? 

Que  vous  en  semble  ?  What  do  you  think  of  it  ? 

Qu'est-ce?  What  is  it? 

3.  Quoi  ?  is  used  absolutely,  i.e.,  with  ellipsis  of  the  verb, 
and  after  a  preposition : 

II  y  a  du  nouveau.  — Quoi  ?  There  is  news.  — What  ? 

Quoi  de  plus  beau  que  cela  ?  What  finer  than  that  ? 

Quoi  !  vous  I'admirez  !  What !    You  admire  him  ! 

A  quoi  pensez-vous ?  What  are  you  thinking  of? 

En  quoi  puis-je  vous  servir  ?  In  what  can  I  help  you? 

a.  In  cases  of  special  emphasis  quoi  ?  may  be  direct  object : 

Je  re5ois  quoi  ? — Des  lettres.  I  receive  what  ? — Letters. 

h.  With  an  infinitive,  que  ?,  or  more  emphatically,  quoi  ?  is  used : 

Que  (quoi)  faire  ?  What  is  one  to  do  ? 

Je  ne  sais  que  (quoi)  r^pondre.  I  know  not  what  to  answer. 

394.  Interrogative  Locutions.  The  use  of  interrogative 
phrases  formed  with  est-ce,  etc.,  instead  of  the  simple  forms 
is  very  frequent  (cf.  §§392-3) : 

Qui  est-ce  qui  chante  ?  for  Qui  chante  ? 

Qui  est-ce  que  vous  demandez  ?  »  Qui  demandez-vous  ? 

A  qui  est-ce  que  vous  parliez  ?  »  k  qui  parliez-vous  ? 

Qu'est-ce  que  cela  prouve  ?  m  Que  prouve  cela  ? 

Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  ?  n  Qu'est-ce  ? 

Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  cela  ?  »  Qu'est-ce  que  cela  ? 

De  quoi  est-ce  qu'il  parle  ?  h  De  quoi  parle-t-il  ? 

Qu'est-ce  qui  fait  ce  bruit'?  What  is  making  that  noise  ? 


§§395-397]  THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUN.  287 

THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUN. 

395.  Relative  Pronouns. 

qui,  who,  which,  that ;  whom  (after  a  preposition). 

que,  whom,  which,  that. 

dont,  whose,  of  whom,  of  which,  etc. 

ou,  in  which,  into  which,  at  which,  to  which,  etc. 

lequel,  m.  s.        lesquels,  m.  pi.     \  u-  u  ^u  * 

,         ,,     <.  ,  It       i!     1      J- who,  whom,  which,  that, 

laquelle,  f.  s.       lesquelles,  f.  pi.    J        ' 

quoi,  what,  which. 

Obt.:  For  qu',  see  §19. 

396.  Agreement.  A  relative  pronoun,  whether  variable 
or  invariable  in  form,  is  of  the  gender,  number  and  person  of 
its  antecedent : 

Moi  qui  ^tais  (vous  qui  ^tiez)  Ik.  I  who  was  (you  who  were)  there. 

Les  lettres  que  j'ai  apportees.  The  letters  which  I  have  brought. 

Moi  qui  suis  son  ami(e).  I  who  am  his  friend  (m.  or  f.). 

Dieux  (vous)  qui  m'exaucez  !  (Ye)  gods  who  hear  me  ! 

C'est  nous  qui  I'avons  dit.  It  is  we  who  have  said  it. 

Je  suis  celui  qui  I'ai  dit.  I  am  the  one  who  has  said  it. 

a.  When  the  antecedent  is  a  predicate  noun,  or  an  adjective  as  such, 
the  relative  may  agree  in  person  either  with  this  noun  or  with  the 
subject  of  the  sentence  : 

Nous   sommes  deux  moines  qui    We  are  two  monks  who  are  trav- 

voyageons  (voyagent).  elling. 

Je  suis  le  seul  qui  I'aie  (ait)  dit.         I  am  the  only  one  who  has  said  it. 

b.  The  relative  after  un+a  plural  is  either  singular  or  plural,  usually 
according  to  the  sense : 

C'est  un  de  mes  (des)  proems  qui    It  is  one  of  my  (of  the)  law-suits 
m'a  (m'ont)  ruin4.  which  has  (have)  ruined  me. 

397.  Qui,  Que.  Both  qui  and  que  refer  to  antecedents, 
of  either  gender  or  number,  denoting  persons  or  things ;  their 
uses  in  detail  are : — 


288  THE  PRONOUN.  [§397 

1.  Qui  =  *  who,'  *  which/  'that,'  serves  as  subject;  qui  = 
*whom,'  of  persons  only,  or  things  personified,  may  also  be 
used  after  a  preposition : 

La  dame  qui  a  chants.  The  lady  who  (that)  has  sung. 

Les  amis  qui  sont  arrives.  The  friends  who  (that)  have  coma 

La  vache  qui  beugle.  The  cow  which  (that)  lows. 

Les  livres  qui  ont  6t6  perdus.  The  books  which  have  been  lost 

Les  oiseaux  qui  volent.  The  birds  which  (that)  fly. 

Ce  qui  m'amuse.  What  (that  which)  amuses  me. 

Rien  qui  soit  beau.  Nothing  that  is  beautiful 

La  tante  chez  qui  je  demeure.  'flie  aunt  with  whom  I  live. 

Les  amis  k  (de)  qui  je  parlais.  The  friends  to  (of)  whom  I  spoke. 

Rochers  k  qui  je  me  plains.  Rocks  to  whom  I  complain. 

a.  Qui,  without  antecedent,  sometimes =celui  qui  (ceux  qui,  etc), 
or,  when  repeated, = les  uns. .  .les  autres : 

Aimez  qui  vous  aime.  Love  him  (the  one)  who  loTes  you. 

Jouera  qui  voudra.  Let  those  who  will  play. 

Pour  qui  connait.  For  any  one  who  knows. 

Qui  d'un  c6t6,  qui  de  I'autre.  Some  on  one  side,  some  on  the  other. 

6.  Similarly,  in  a  few  phrases,  mostly  exclamatory  or  parenthetical, 
qui=ce  qui: 

Voilk  qui  est  strange !  That  is  strange  ! 

Qui  pis  est  (or  ce  qui  est  pis).  What  is  worse. 

2.  Que  =  *  whom,'  *  which,'  *  that,'  serves  regularly  as  direct 
object : 

Les  ami(e)a  que  j'aime.  The  friends  whom  (that)  I  love. 

Le  livre  (cheval)  que  j'ai.  The  book  (horse)  which  I  have. 

Les  plumes  que  j'ai  achet^es.  The  pens  which  I  have  bought. 

Ce  que  vous  dites.  That  which  you  say. 

Rien  de  ce  que  vous  dites.  Nothing  that  you  say. 

a.  Que  stands  also  as  predicate  nominative  (cf.  §295,  1),  and  as 
logical  subject  of  an  impersonal  veib  : 

Malheureuse  que  je  suis  !  Unhappy  woman  that  I  am  I 

Qu'est-ce  qu'elle  est  devenue  ?  What  has  become  of  her  ? 

A  I'heure  qu'il  est.  At  the  present  hour. 

L'homme  qu'il  vous  faut.  The  man  that  you  need. 

Prenez  ce  qu'il  vous  faut.  Take  what  you  need 


§§398-399]  THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUN.  289 

Notes.— 1.  The  que  of  emphatic  inversions  (§385,  a,  n.)  is  best  explained  as  predicative 
que :  'C'est  une  belle  ville  que  Paris '  =  *  C'est  une  belle  ville  que  Paris  (est)'  or  'C'est 
une  belle  ville  (ce)  que  (c'est)  Paris ' ;  '  Erreur  que  tout  cela '  = '  (C'est)  erreur  que  tout 
cela  (est)'  or  '(C'est)  erreur  (ce)  que  (c'est)  tout  cela.' 

2.  The  form  que  is  often  a  relative  adverb,  not  to  be  confounded  in  function  with 
the  relative  proper :  '  Dans  le  temps  que  cela  arrivait ' ;  '  C'est  k  vous  que  Je  parle ' 
(or  '  C'est  vous  k  qui  je  parle '). 

398.  Dent  The  form  dont  =  '  whose/  *  of  whom,'  '  of 
which,'  etc.,  has  the  value  of  de  +  a  relative;  it  refers  to 
antecedents,  of  either  gender  or  number,  denoting  persons  or 

things  : 

L'homrae  dont  le  fils  est  mort.  The  man  whose  son  is  dead. 

Les  gens  dont  je  parle.  The  people  of  whom  I  speak. 

Les  plumes  dont  je  me  scrs.  The  pens  which  I  make  use  of. 

La  gloire  dont  il  est  avide.  The  fame  for  which  he  is  eager. 

Ce  dont  je  me  plains.  That  of  which  I  complain. 

a.  A  noun  after  dont-  •  wliom  *  does  not  omit  the  article  as  in  English, 
and  must  follow  its  governing  verb  (of.  §4  0,  2) : 

Le  monsieur  dont  j'ai  trouv6  la    The  gentleman  whose  purse  I  found, 
bourse. 

b.  As  compared  with  d'ou  (cf.  §399,  a),  dont  has  figurative  force  in 
expressions  referring  to  extraction,  lineage,  etc. : 

La  maison  dont  il  sort.  The  family  from  which  he  comes. 

c.  Dont  was  originally  an  adverb  (L.  de  +  unde),  and  is  often  beat 
construed  as  such : 

Le  pays  dont  il  est  venu.  The  country  whence  he  came. 

399.  Oil.  The  adverb  oil  =  *  where '  is  also  used  as  a 
relative  with  the  value  of  dans  (k,  Sur,  vers,  etc.)  +  a 
relative ;  if  preceded  by  a  preposition,  oil  =  *  which,'  *  where ' : 

La  maison  oti  je  loge.  The  house  in  which  I  lodge. 

Le  si^cle  ou  nous  vivons.  The  age  in  which  we  live. 

Le  but  oil  il  tend.  The  end  towards  which  he  tends. 

Les  villes  par  ou  je  suis  venu.  The  cities  through  which  I  came. 

L'endroit  d'oti  il  vient.  The  place  from  which  he  comes. 

D'od  venez-vous  ?  Where  do  you  come  from  ? 

a.  D*o\i=  *  from  which,'  *  whence,'  is  usually  Uteral  in  force : 

La  maison  d'oti  il  sort.  The  house  out  of  which  he  comeBL 

19 


290  THE  PRONOUN.  [§§400-401 

400.  Lequel.     The  form  lequel  =  * who,'  *whom,'  'which,' 

*  that.'  refers  to  persons  or  things,  and  varies  in  form  to  agree 
with  its  antecedent ;  it  is  chiefly  used  where  qui,  que,  etc., 
may  not  be  employed : — 

1.  Lequel,  being  inflected,  stands  where  qui,  que,  from 
want  of  inflection,  would  be  ambiguous,  or  it  serves,  owing  to 
its  stress,  to  denote  the  more  remote  of  two  possible  ante- 
cedents : 

La  soeur  de  mon  ami  laquelle  vient  The  sister  of  my  friend  who  has  just 

d'arriver.  come. 

Le  fils  du  r^dacteur  lequel  je  viens  The  son  of  the  editor  whom  (i.e., 

de  voir.  *  the  son ')  I  have  just  seen. 

a.  Lequel  may  not  be  used  of  persons  after  en,  and  it  must  be  used 
of  persons  after  parmi,  entre  : 

Un  homme  en  qui  je  crois.  A  man  in  whom  I  believe. 

Les  amis  parmi  (entre)  lesquels.        The  friends  among  whom. 

2.  When  depending  on  a  noun  governed  by  a  preposition, 

*  whose '  must  be  turned  by  duquel,  etc.,  which  must  follow 

the  noun  (cf.  §398,  a) : 

La  dame  au  fils  de  laquelle  [or  de    The  lady  to  whose  son  I  give  les- 
qui)  je  donne  des  le9ons.  sons. 

NoTB.— Lequel  is  used  exceptionally  as  an  adjective  :  '  J'espfere  partir  demain, 
auquel  cas,  etc' ;  '  Je  viens  de  toucher  mille  francs,  de  laquelle  somme  je  payerai 
mes  dettes.' 

401.  Quoi.  1.  The  form  quoi=*what,'  'which,'  is  used 
without  definite  antecedent,  and  stands  after  a  preposition, 
rarely  otherwise : 

Voil^  de  quoi  je  parlais.   "  That  is  what  I  was  speaking  of. 

Sur  quoi  il  est  parti.  Whereupon  he  went  away. 

C'est  k  quoi  je  pensais.  That  is  what  I  was  thinking  of. 

D  m'a  pay^,  ce  k  quoi  je  ne  m'at-  He  paid  me,  which  I  hardly  ex- 
teudais  gu^re.  pected. 


§402]  THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUN.  291 

a.  De  quoi  +  an  infinitive,  expressed  or  implied,  denotes  the  means  or 
cause  of  the  action  of  the  infinitive  : 

II  a  de  quoi  vivre.  He  has  enough  to  live  on. 

II  a  de  quoi  (sc.  vivre,  etc. ).  He  has  means  (is  well  off). 

Donnez-moi  de  quoi  6crire.  Give  me  something  to  write  with. 

II  n'y  a  pas  de  quoi.  There  is  no  occasion  (don't  mention 

it,  etc.). 

5.  Quoi  stands  without  a  preposition  in  a  few  expressions : 
Quoi  faisant.  (By)  doing  which. 

Un  je  ne  sais  quoi  de  cruel.  A  certain  indefinable  cruelty. 

2.   '  What '  =  *  that   which '  is  expressed  by  ce  +  a  relative 
(cf.  §385) : 

Je  vois  ce  qui  se  passe.  I  see  what  is  going  on. 

Je  sais  ce  que  je  sais.  I  know  what  I  know. 

Ce  dont  je  me  plains.  That  of  which  I  complain. 

Ce  k  quoi  je  me  fiais.  What  I  was  trusting  to. 

n  est  sourd,  ce  qui  est  bien  dom-  He  is  deaf,  which  is  a  great  pity, 
mage. 

402.  Remarks.     1.  The  relative  pronoun,  often  omitted 
in  English,  is  never  onutted  in  French  : 

Le  tableau  que  j'ai  vu  U.  The  picture  (which)  I  saw  there. 

Le  livre  dont  je  parle  est  k  moi.        The  book  (which)  I  speak  of  is  mine. 

2.  Relative  and  antecedent  should  stand  as  near  together 
as  possible  : 

II  y  a  de  ce  livre  une  ^tion  qui    There  is  an  edition  of  that  book 

se  vend,  etc.  which  is  sold,  etc. 

Not :  Une  ^tion  de  ce  livre  qui,  etc 

3.  A  preposition  never  ends  the  relative  sentence,  as  some- 
times in  English : 

Ce  k  quoi  je  me  fiais.  What  I  was  trusting  to. 

4.  For    English    forms    in    -ing  =  relative    clause,    see 
§287,  3. 


292  THE  PRONOUN.  [§§403-404 

THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUN. 

403.  Indefinites. 

1.  Adjectival  forms : 

1.  certain,  a  certain  ;  pi.  certain.     4.  divers,  m.  pL   1       •  . 

_     ,         '       ,  ^  .  ,     ,  J-various,  etc. 

2.  ,chaque,  each,  every.  diverses,  f.  pi.  J 

3.  di£f6reiit(e)s,  pi. ,  various,  etc.     5.  maint,  many  a. 

6.  quelque,  some ;  pi. ,  some  (few). 
Obs. :  Except  for  divers,  the  feminine  and  plural  are  formed  like  those  of  ordinary 

adjectives. 

2.  Pronominal  forms : 

1.  autnii,  others,  other  people,  etc.   5.  quelqu'un,  m.  s.l  i^  j     ^ 

2.  chacun,  m.)each  (one),  every        quelqu'une,  f.  s.  J 

chacune,  f. /(one).  quelques-uns,  m.  pl.'k  some  (peo- 

3.  on  (I'on),  one,  people,  etc.  quelques-unes,  f.  pi.  J  pie),  etc. 

4.  personne. .  .ne,  nobody,  etc.        6.  quelque  chose,  something. 

7.  rien. .  .ne,  nothing. 

06s. :  1.  On  often  becomes  Ton  after  a  vowel  sound  to  avoid  hiatus,  especially  after 
et,  ou,  oil,  que,  lorsque,  etc.,  qui,  quol,  pourquoi,  si,  ainsi,  aussi,  but  not 
usually  when  a  closely  following  word  has  initial  1 ;  qu'on  almost  always  becomes 
que  Ton  when  a  closely  following  word  has  initial  [k]  sound. 

2.  For  quelqu'unCe),  see  §19. 

a  Note  the  hyphen  of  the  plural  of  quelqu'un. 

3.  Forms  serving  either  as  adjective  or  as  pronoun : 

1.  aucun...ne,  no;  nobody,  etc.  6.  plusieurs,  m.  ori.  pL,  severaL 

2.  autre,  other.  7.  tel,  m.  j^^^j^^  ^^^ 

3.  m^me,  same,  etc.  telle,  f.  J 

4.  nul. .  .ne,  m.  \no  ;  nobody,  8.  tout,  m.  tous,  m.  pi. ^ all,  every, 
nuUe . . .  ne,  f.  J  etc.  toute,  f.  toutes,  f.  pi.  J  etc. 

6.  pas  un . . .  ne,  no ;  nobody,  etc.     9.  un,  a ;  one,  etc. 

Oba.:  The  feminine  and  plural  are  like  those  of  adjectives  of  like  ending,  except  the 
feminine  of  nul  and  the  plural  of  tOUt. 

404.  Use  of  Adjectival  Forms.  1.  Certain  =  *  (a)  cer- 
tain,'pi.  'certain,'  *some,'  precedes  its  noun;  the  use  of  un 
in  the  singular,  and  of  partitive  de  in  the  plural,  is  optional : 
(Un)  certain  roi  de  France.  A  certain  French  king. 

(De)  certaines  gens.  (certain  (some)  people. 


§404]  THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUN.  293 

a.  Certains  is  exceptionally  used  as  a  pronoun : 

Certains  pretendent,  etc.  Some  assert,  etc. 

NOTB.— Certain,  placed  after  the  noun,  is  an  ordinary  adjective =•  sure,'  'trust- 
worthy, •  positive,'  etc.  (cf.  §362,  4). 

2.  Chaque  = '  each,'  *  every,'  is  distributive  and  singular 
only: 

Chaque  homme  (femme).  Each  or  every  man  (woman). 

o.  Distinguish  chaque=* every,*  'each,'  which  individualizes  from 
tout= '  every,'  *  all,'  which  generalizes : 

Chaque  homme  a  des  passions.  Every  (each)  man  has  passions. 

Tout  homme  a  une  passion  do-  Every  man  has  (all  men  have)  a 

minante.  ruling  passion. 

Chaque  ann6e ;  tous  les  ans.  Each  year ;  every  year. 

3.  DiffdrentS,  Divers  =' various,'  *  several,'  « sundry,' 
*  divers,'  are  indefinite  adjectives  only  when  plural  and  stand- 
ing before  nouns  : 

DiflF^rentes  choses  m'ont  retenu.        Various  things  detained  me. 
On  a  essay^  divers  moyens.  Several  methods  have  been  tried. 

Nora.— With  the  sense  of '  different,'  '  diverse,'  they  are  used  as  ordinary  adjectives. 

4.  Maint,  whether  singular  or  plural,  = '  many  » ' ;  it  ia 
often  repeated : 

Maint(8)  danger(8).  Many  a  danger. 

Mainte(8)  foia.  Many  a  time. 

En  mainte  et  mainte  occasion.  On  many  an  occasion. 

5.  Quelque  =  *  some ' ;  when  used  of  quantity  or  number, 
quelque  =  *  some,  but  not  much  or  many,*  *  a  little,'  *  a  few,* 
and  is  of  more  limited  force  than  the  partitive  some  (§322) : 

Quelques  amis  sont  pires  que  des  Some  friends  are  worse  than  ene- 

ennemis.  mies. 

J'ai  eu  quelque  difficult^  I  have  had  some  (a  little)  difficulty. 

n  a  quelques  amis  ici.  He  has  some  (a  few)  friends  here. 

Voici  les  quelques  francs  qui  nous  Here  are  the  few  francs  we  have 

restent.  left. 


294  THE  PRONOUN.  [§405 

a.  Quelque  has  adverbial  force,  and  is  invariable,  before  numerals  (not 
nouns  of  number)  = '  about,'  '  some ' : 

A  quelque  dix  milles  d'ici.  About  (some)  ten  miles  from  here. 

But :  Quelques  centaines  de  pas.       A  few  hundred  paces. 

A  cent  et  quelques  pas.  At  a  little  more  than  100  paces. 

h.  Similarly  before  adjectives  or  adverbs  =*  however'  (cf.  §271,  4,  h); 
Quelque  riches  qu'ils  soient.  However  rich  they  may  be. 

Quelque  bien  que  vous  parliez.  However  well  you  may  speak. 

*  Note.— 'However '+adjective  is  also  expressed  by  tout- ■■  que  (usually  with  the 
indicative),  si. .  .(que)  (with  the  subjunctive),  pour. . .  que  (with  the  subjunctive),  e.g., 
'  Toutes  bonnes  qu'elles  sont,'  '  However,  good  they  are ' ;  •  Si  bonnes  qu'elles 
soient,'  *  However  good  they  are ' ;  'SI  bonnes  vos  raisons  soient-elles,'  '  However 
good  your  reasons  are ' ;  '  Pour  bonnes  qu'elles  soient.'  '  However  good  they  are.' 

c.  For  the  use  of  quelque(s). .  .que=  *  whatever,'  see  §407. 

405.  Use  of  Pronominal  Forms.     1.  Autrui=  'others' 

*  other  people,'  'our  neighbour  (in  general),'  is  rarely  used 
except  after  a  preposition : 

II  ne  faut  pas  convoiter  les  biens      We  must  not  covet  the  goods  of 

d'autrui.  others. 

La  rigueur  envers  autrui.  Severity  towards  others. 

Note.—'  Others '  is  more  usually  les  autres,  d'autres  (§  406,  2,  b)  ;  regularly  so,  as 
subject  or  direct  object. 

2.  Chacun  =  *  each,'  '  each  one,'  *  every  one '  is  the  pronoun 
corresponding  to  the  adjective  chaque  (§4:04,  2) : 

Chacun  d'eux  a  refuse.  Each  (every)  one  of  them  refused. 

Donnez  k  chacun(e)  sa  part.  Give  to  each  his  (her)  share. 

Des  poires  k  deux  sous  chacune.         Pears  at  two  cents  each. 

a.  The  possessive  form  to  chacun  is  regularly  son  : 
Mettez-les  chacun(e)  k  sa  place.         Put  them  each  in  his  (her,  its)  place. 

6.  Chacun  in  apposition  to  nous,  vous,  takes,  as  its  possessive,  notre, 
votre: 
Parlez  chacun(e)  k  votre  tour.  Speak  each  in  your  turn. 

c.  Chacun,  in  apposition  to  ils,  elles,  takes  the  possessive  leur  before 
the  direct  object ;  otherwise  son  or  leur  : 
Elles  r^citent  chacune  leur  verset    They  each  recite  their  verse  (each 

(chacune  k  son  or  leur  tour).  in  turn). 


§405]  THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUN.  295 

d.  The  reflexive  to  chacun  =  *  every  one '  is  se  (soi) : 
Chaoun  pour  soi.  Every  one  for  himself. 

3.  On  =  *one,'  *some  one,'  *  we,'  *you,'  'they,*  *  people,' 
etc.,  is  used  as  subject  of  a  verb  in  the  third  singular,  without 
specifying  any  person  in  particular : 

On  dit  que  la  reine  est  malade.  They  (people)  say  the  queen  is  ilL 

A-t-on  allum^  mon  feu  ?  Has  anyone  lighted  my  fire  ? 

On  ne  peut  pas  meler  I'huile  aveo  One  (we,  you)  cannot  mix  oil  with 
I'eau.  water. 

a.  The  on  construction  often  corresponds  to  an  English  passive, 
especially  when  the  agent  is  not  specified  : 

On  a  attrap^  le  larron.  The  thief  has  been  caught. 

On  croit  que  la  guerre  est  finie.         It  is  thought  the  war  is  over. 
On  vous  demande.  You  are  wanted. 

6.  On  may  not  be  replaced  by  a  personal  pronoun  subject : 

On  est  triste  quand  on  est  sans    A  man  is  sad  when  he  is  without 
argent.  money. 

c.  Since  on  is  subject  only,  the  corresponding  direct  and  indirect 
object,  when  required,  are  borrowed  from  vous  : 

Lorsqu'on  presse  trop  un  poisson      When  you  squeeze  a  fish  too  much 
il  vous  ^happe.  it  escapes  you. 

d.  The  reflexive  to  on  is  se  (soi),  and  the  corresponding  possessive  is 
son,  whatever  be  the  English  equivalent : 

On  86  demande.  People  ask  themselves. 

On  perdrait  son  temps.  You  would  lose  your  time. 

e.  Although  on  is  invariable,  a  feminine  or  plural  noun  or  adjective 
may  relate  to  it,  when  the  sense  is  clearly  feminine  .or  plural : 

On  est  plus  jolie  k  present.  She  is  prettier  now. 

On  est  si  proches  voisins.  We  are  such  near  neighbours. 

/.  On  may  replace  a  personal  pronoun,  often  with  depreciatory  force : 
On  y  pensera.  I  (we)  shall  see  about  it. 

On  se  croit  bien  fin.  You  (he,  etc. )  think  yourself  very 

cunning. 


296  THE  PRONOUN.  [§405 

4.  Personne  and  rien  along  with  ne  +  a  verb,  or  when 
alone,  a  verb  being  understood,  =  *  nobody,'  *  no  one,'  '  not  any- 
body,' etc.,  and  *  nothing,'  *  not  anything,'  respectively  : 
Personne  n'est  venu.  Nobody  (no  one)  has  come. 

Je  n'ai  parl6  k  personne.  I  have  spoken  to  nobody  (not  spoken 

to  anybody). 
Ne  dites  rien.  Say  nothing  (do  not  say  anything). 

Personne  ici ! — Personne.  No  one  here  ! — No  one. 

Qu'a-t-ildit?— Rien.  What  did  he  say  ?— Nothing. 

a.  If  the  context  contains  or  implies  negation,  personne,  rien,  assume 
affirmative  force  (  =  quelqu'un,  quelque  chose) : 

II  n'a  rien  dit  k  personne.  He  said  nothing  to  any  one. 

Personne  n'a  jamais  rien  dit.  Nobody  has  ever  said  anything. 

Je  vous  defends  de  rien  dire.  I  forbid  you  to  say  anything. 

Je  crains  de  parler  k  personne.  I  fear  to  speak  to  anybody. 

Impossible  de  rien  faire  !  Impossible  to  do  anything  !  • 

II  cessa  de  rien  donner.  He  ceased  giving  anything. 

Oil  trouverai-je  rien  de  pareil ?  Where  shall  I  find  anything  like  it? 

Sans  parler  k  personne.  Without  speaking  to  anybody. 

b.  The  above  rule  does  not  apply  to  pleonastic  ne,  nor  to  double 
negations : 

Je  crains  qu'il  ne  fasse  mal  k  quel-  I  fear  he  will  hurt  somebody. 

qu'un. 

Ne  revenez  pas  sans  voir  quel-  Do  not  come  back  without  seeing 

qu'un.  somebody. 

NoTB.— The  pronoun  personne  is  masculine  (sometimes  sylleptically  feminine  like 
On>  3,  e,  above)  ;  the  noun  personne  is  always  feminine  (cf.  §303, 1,  c). 

5.  Quelqu'un (e)  =  *  somebody,'  '  some  one,'  '  any  one,'  etc., 
with  its  plural  quelques-un(e)s  = 'some,'  'some  people,'  'any,* 
*a  few,'  etc.,  is  the  pronoun  corresponding  to  the  adjective 
quelque  (§404,  5) : 

II  y  a  quelqu'un  1^.  There  is  somebody  there. 

Y  a-t-il  quelqu'un  1^  ?  Is  there  any  one  there  ? 

A-t-il  quelques-unes  des  fleurs  ?  Has  he  some  (any)  of  the  flowers? 

II  en  reste  quelques-unes.  A  few  of  them  remain. 

Quelqu'une  des  dames  viendra.  Some  one  of  the  ladies  will  come. 

Qaelques-uns  le  croient.  Some  (people)  believe  it. 


§406]  THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUN.  297 

6.  Quelque  chose  =  *  something,'  *  anything,'  and  is  mascu- 
line, though  formed  from  the  feminine  noun  chose : 
Quelque  chose  est  promis.  Something  is  promised. 

A-t-il  dit  quelque  chose  ?  Did  he  say  anything  ? 

A-t-il  quelque  chose  de  bon  ?  Has  he  anything  good  ? 

406.  Adjectival  or  Pronominal  Forms.    1.  Aucun, 

nul,  pas  un,  along  with  ne  +  a  verb,  or  when  alone,  a  verb 

being  understood,  =  * no,'    *not  any,'    'not  one,'  as  adjective, 

and  'none,'  'nobody,'  '  no  one,'  'not  one,'  as  pronoun : 

Aucun 'I 

Nul      Ucrivain  ne  le  dit.  No  writer  says  sa 

Pas  un  j 

Aucun  ne  le  croit.  No  one  believes  it. 

Je  n'en  ai  vu  aucun(e).  I  saw  none  of  them. 

Pas  un  de  ses  amis  ne  reste.  Not  one  of  his  friends  remains. 

A-t-il  de  I'espoir  ? — Aucun.  Has  he  any  hope  ? — None. 

a.  Aucun,  but  not  'nul'  or  'pas  un,'  becomes  afl&rmative  (=quelque 
or  quelqu'un)  when  the  context  is  negative  (cf.  §405,  4,  a) : 
Sans  aucune  cause.  Without  any  cause. 

Rien  pour  aucun  de  nous.  Nothing  for  any  of  us. 

Gkirdez-vous  de  faire  aucune  faute.     Take  care  not  to  make  any  mistake. 

6.  The  plural  adjective  aucun(e)s  may  be  used,    especially  before 
nouns  with  no    singular,   or  before   such   as   are   preferably   plural ; 
(d')aucuns  =  quelques-uns  is  sometimes  found  in  naif  or  jocular  style : 
H  ne  me  rend  aucuns  soins.  He  gives  me  no  care. 

(D')aucuns  le  croiraient.  Some  would  believe  it. 

2.  Autre  =  *  other,'  is  usually  preceded  in  the  singular  by 
un  or  r : 

Une  autre  fois  ;  d'autres  livres.        Another  time ;  other  books. 

En  avez-vous  un{e)  autre  ?  Have  you  another  ? 

Un  autre  dit  le  contraire.  Another  says  the  contrary. 

Les  autres  m'aideront.  The  others  will  help  me. 

Entre  autres  choses.  Among  other  things. 

a.  Distinguish  un  autre  =  *  another  (a  diflferent)'  from  encore  un=3 
'another  (an  additional)' : 

Donnez-moi  une  autre  plumel  ^ .  ^, 

^         y  Give  me  another  pen. 

II        II     encore  une    m     J  '^ 


298  THE  PRONOUN.  [§406 

b.  'Others,'  *  other  people,' =  les  autres  or  d'autres,  sometimes  au- 
trui  (cf.  §405,  1) : 

H  se  m^fie  tou jours  des  autre?.  He  always  suspects  others. 

D'autres  pensent  autrement.  Others  think  otherwise. 

Bien  d'autres.  Many  others. 

Obs. :  The  d'  of  d'autres  is  a  partitive  sign  (cf.  §  325,  1,  b). 

c.  Autres  is  often  added  familiarly  to  nous,  vous : 
Nous  autres  peintres.  We  painters. 

Vous  autres  rran9ais  parlez  tres    You  Frenchmen  speak  very  fast, 
vite. 

d.  Observe  the  following  expressions  with  autre  : 

Autre  part ;  de  part  et  d'autre.  Elsewhere  ;  reciprocally. 

C'est  un  (tout)  autre  homme.  He  is  a  very  different  man. 

Parler  de  choses  et  d'autres.  To  speak  of  this  and  that. 

L'autre  jour.  The  other  day. 

Autre    est    promettre,  autre  est  It   is   one   thing  to   promise,  and 

donner.  another  to  give. 

Tout  autre  que  lui.  Any  one  but  him. 

De  temps  k  autre.  From  time  to  time. 

A  d'autres  (familiar').  Tell  that  to  the  marines  (familiar). 

c  For  Tun. .  .l'autre,  les  uns. .  .les  autres,  see  §406,  7,  (2). 

3.  M^me  varies  in   meaning   and  form   according  to  its 
position  and  function  : — 

(1)  Preceding  its  noun  or  as  a  pronoun,  m^me  = '  same,' 
and  nearly  always  has  the  article  : 

La  (les)  m§me(s)  chose(s).  The  same  thing(s). 

Les  miens  sont  les  memes.  Mine  are  the  same. 

Donnez-moi  des  memes.  Give  me  some  of  the  same. 

Une  meme  affaire.  One  and  the  same  business. 

Des  plantes  de  la  meme  esp^ce.  Plants  of  the  same  species. 

(2)  Following  the  noun  or  pronoun  qualified,  m^me=  'self,' 
*  very,'  *  even,'  and  agrees,  but  has  no  article  : 

Dieu  est  la  bont^  meme.  God  is  goodness  itself. 

Moi-mSme;  elles-memes.  I  myself;  they  themselves. 

Cela  meme  ;  celui-U  meme.  That  itself  ;  that  man  himself. 

Les  enfants  memes.  The  very  (even  the)  children. 


§406]  THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUN.  299 

a.  Mdme  is  also  used  as  an  adverb  (invariable) : 

n  nous  a  meme  insulins.  He  even  insulted  us. 

Quand  meme  il  le  dirait.  Even  if  he  should  say  so. 

b.  M^me  forms  a  number  of  highly  idiomatic  locutions  : 

Cela  revient  au  meme.  That  amounts  to  the  same  thing, 

fites-vous  k  meme  de  faire  cela  ?        Are  you  in  a  position  to  do  that  ? 
J'irai  tout  de  meme.  I  shall  go  nevertheless. 

4.  Plusieurs  =  '  several ' ;  it  is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense 
of  beaucoup  =  '  many ' : 

Plusieurs  hommes  (femmes).  Several  men  (women). 

Apporte  plusieurs  des  plumes.  Bring  several  of  the  pens. 

J'en  ai  plusieurs.  I  have  several  of  them. 

Plusieurs  I'ont  cru.  Many  (people)  believed  it. 

5.  Tel,  as  adjective,  =  *  such/  'like';    un  tel  = '  such  a  * ; 
tel,  as  pronoun,  =  *  many  a  one,'  '  he,'  *  some,'  etc. : 

Ne  crois  pas  une  telle  histoire.  Do  not  believe  such  a  story. 

Tels  sent  mes  malheurs.  Such  are  my  misfortunes. 

U  n'y  a  pas  de  tels  aniraanx.  There  are  no  such  animals. 

A  telles  et  telles  conditions.  On  such  and  such  conditions. 

Telle  qu'une  tigresse.  Like  (as)  a  tigress. 
Tel    qui    rit    vendredi    dimanche      Some  (many  a  one,  he)  who  langh(8) 
pleurera  (proverb).  on  Friday  will  weep  on  Sunday. 

a.  Examples  of  more  idiomatic  uses  are  : 

Tel  p^,  tel  fils.  Like  father,  like  son. 

Tel  rit,  tel  pleure.  One  laughs,  another  weeps. 

Monsieur  un  tel  (Mrae  une  telle).  Mr.  So-and-so  (Mrs.  So-and-so). 

De  la  mnsique  telle  quelle.  Music  such  as  it  is. 

Votre  argent  tel  quel.  Your  money  intact. 

Note.—'  Such,'  as  adverb,  is  si  or  tellement  (not  '  tel ') :  *  Uno  8i  belle  dtoile ' : 
'  Un  homme  tellement  cruel.' 

6.    Tout  (singular)  =  *all/  *  every,'    *any,'  *  whole,'  etc.; 
tous  (plural)  =  *  all ' : 

Tonte  ma  vie ;  tous  les  hommes.  All    my  (my  whole)  life  ;   all  (the) 

men. 
Tout  homme  ;  toute  creature.  Every  (any)  man ;  every  creature. 

Tous  (toutes)  sont  venu(e)s.  All  have  come. 


300  THE  PRONOUN.  [§406 

C'est  tout ;  de  tous  c6t6s.  That  is  all ;  on  all  sides. 

Tout  m'efiraie.  Everything  frightens  me. 

a.  Tout  is  often  adverb=*  quite,'  'wholly,'  *  very,'  'very  much,'  etc., 
and  agrees  like  an  adjective,  when  immediately  preceding  a  feminine 
adjective   with    initial    consonant    or    h  aspirate,   but    is    elsewhere 
invariable : 
EUes  6taient  toutes  pS-les  et  tout    They  were  quite  pale  and  very  much 

agitees.  excited. 

But :  lis  ^taient  tout  p^les  et  tout  agit^s,  etc. 

NOTR.— So  also,  in  the  comjfeund  tOUt-puissant,  e.g.,  'Elle  est  tOUte-puissante.* 

h.  Observe  the  following  idiomatic  expressions  : 
Tout  le  monde  (cf.  le  monde  entier).    Everybody  (cf.  the  whole  world). 
Tous  les  mois  ;  pas  du  tout.  Every  month  ;  not  at  all. 

Tous  les  deux  jours.  Every  other  (alternate)  day. 

Tous  (les*)  deux  or  les  deux.  Both. 

Tout  k  I'heure.  Presently  [or  a  little  ago). 

Tout  beau  ;  tout  doux.  Gently  (slowly) ;  softly. 

(Pour)  tout  de  bon.  Seriously. 

*T0US  deux  (troiS,    etc.)— without    'les'— usually  denotes    •  simultaneousnew' 
(=s '  both  together,'  etc.) ;  les  is  obligatory  above  ten,  and  usual  from  five  to  ten. 

c.   For  the  distinction  between  tout  and  chaque  see  §404,  2,  a ;  for 
tont  .  .  .  que  =  '  however,'  see  §404, 5,  6,  note. 

7.    Un  is  used  either  alone  or  as  correlative  to  autre  :  — 

(1)  Un,   as    adjective,  =  'a,'    'an/    (cf.    §320),   'one,'    *a 
certain ' ;  un,  as  pronoun,  =  '  one  ' : 

La  maison  est  d'un  cotd.  The  house  is  on  one  side. 

Un  monsieur  A.  I'a  dit.  A  (certain)  Mv.  A.  said  so. 

Une  des  dames  I'a  dit.  One  of  the  ladies  said  so. 

Voici  un  crayon. — J'en  ai  un.  Here  is  a  pencil. — I  have  one. 

Les  uns  sont  de  cet  avis,  les  autres  Some  are  of  this  opinion,  (the)  others 
n'en  sont  pas.  are  not. 

a.   Un   as   a  pronoun  is  often  preceded  by  1',   especially  with  a   de 
clause  : 
L'un  des  consuls  est  arrivd.  One  of  the  consuls  has  come. 

(2)  L'un  r autre,   so   also   the   feminine   and  plural,  are 
combined  into  various  correlative  phrases,  as  follows  : 


§407] 


THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUN. 


301 


I'un  l'autre=  *  each  other,'  '  one  another ' ;  pi.  ditto. 

I'un  et  I'autre  =  *  both ' ;  pi. ,  '  both,'  *  aU.' 

I'un  ou  I'autre  =•  either' ;  pL,  ditto. 

ni  I'un  ni  I'autre  (.  .  .  ne)  =  * neither ' ;  pi.,  'neither,'  'none.' 

They  flatter  each  other. 
They  speak  of  one  another. 
For  one  another. 


Elles  se  flattent  I'une  I'autre. 
Us  parlent  les  uns  des  autres. 
Les  uns  pour  les  autres. 
L'une  et  I'autre  occasion. 
Les  uns  et  les  autres  parlent. 
Dites  ceci  aux  uns  et  aux  autres. 
Je  prends  run(e)  ou  I'autre. 
Parle  k  l'une  ou  k  I'autre. 
Ni  les  un(e)s  ni  les  autres  ne  sont 

pour  vous. 
Ni  pour  run(e)  ni  pour  I'autre. 


Both  occasions. 

Both  (all  of  them)  speak. 

Say  this  to  both  (all). 

I  take  either. 

Speak  to  either. 

Neither    (none    of    them) 

you. 
For  neither. 


for 


407.  Indefinite  Relatives. 

1.  Adjectival :  2.  Pronominal : 

Quelconque,  any  (whatever,  at  all).  Quiconque,  whoever. 

Quel  que (  +  subj.  of  etre),  whatever.  Qui  que  .  .  .  ( +subj.  of  etre),  who- 

Quelque  .  .  .  que  (  +  subj.),  what-        ever. 

ever.  Quoi  que  .  .  .  (  +  subj.),  whatever. 

a.  Quelconque  takes  -s  for  the  plural,  and  always  follows  its  noun  ; 
quiconque  is  invariable  ;  the  other  forms  are  made  up  from  quel,  quel- 
que, qui,  quoi,  +  que  ; 


Un  (deux)  point(s)  quelconque(8). 
Des  raisons  quelconques. 
Quiconque  parle  sera  puni(e). 
Quels  que  soient  (puissent  Stre) 

vos  desseins. 
Quelle  que  fiit  la  loi. 
Quelques  efforts  qu'il  fasse. 
Qui  que  tu  sois  (puisses  Stre). 
Quoi  que  vous  fassiez. 

Obs. :  For  the  use  of  the  subjunctive,  see  §  270,  4  : 

h.  Qui  que  and  quoi  que  are  also  used  with  ce  before  soit 
Qui  que  ce  soit  qui  le  dise.  Whosoever  says  it. 

Quoi  que  ce  soit  qu'il  dise.  Whatsoever  he  says. 


Any  (two)  point(s)  whatever. 
Any  reasons  whatever  (at  all). 
Whoever  speaks  will  be  punished. 
Whatever  be  (may  be)  your  designs. 

Whatever  the  law  was. 
Whatever  efforts  he  makes. 
Whoever  you  be  (may  be). 
Whatever  you  do. 


4». 

302 


THE  ADVERB. 


[§§408-409 


THE  ADVERB. 


408.  Simple  Adverbs, 
commoner  simple  adverbs ; 


The  following  list  contains   tho 


ailleurs,  elsewhere. 
ainsi,  ihus^  so. 
alors,  tlien. 
apres,  afterwards. 
assez,  enough,  rather. 
aujourd'hui,  to-day. 
auparavant,  be/ore. 
aussi,  also,  too,  as. 
aussitdt,  directly. 
autant,  as  much. 
autrefois,  formerly. 
beaucoup,  micch. 
bien,  well,  very,  much. 
bientOt,  soon. 
cependant,  however. 
certes,  indeed. 
comhicn{^), how  mnch{?). 
comme,  as,  like. 
comment  (?),  how{?). 
davantage,  more, 
dedans,  inside. 
dehors,  outside, 
diiik,  already. 
demain,  to-morrow. 
derri^re,  behind. 
d^sormais,  henceforth. 
dessous,  under. 
dessus,  above. 
devant,  before. 


dor^navant,  henceforth,  pas,  not. 

encore,  still.  peu,  little. 

eufin,  at  last. 

ensemble,  together. 

ensuite,  then, 

environ,  about. 

expres,  on  purpose. 

fort,  very. 

hier,  yesterday. 

ici,  here. 

jadis,  formerly. 

jamais,  ever,  never. 

\k,  there. 


pis,  worse. 
plus,  more. 
plutOt,  rather 
point,  not. 

pourquoi  (?),  why  {?). 
pourtant,  however, 
pres,  near  (by). 
presque,  almost. 
proche,  near  (by). 
puis,  then,  thereupon, 
quand  (?),  when{?). 


\om,far{off),  along  way.  que!,  how{!) 
longtemps,     (a)    long    quelquefois,  sometimes. 


(while), 
lors,  then. 
maintenant,  now. 
mal,  badly. 
meme,  even. 
mieux,  better. 
moins,  less. 
ne . . . ,  not. 


81,  so  ;  yes. 
souvent,  often. 
surtout,  especially. 
tant,  so  much. 
tantdt,  soon,  recently. 
tard,  late. 
tot,  soon. 
toujours,  always,  still. 


n^anmoins,  nevertheless,  tout,  quite,  entirely. 


non,  no. 

ofi  (?),  wliere  [?). 

oui,  yes. 

parfois,  sometimes. 

partout,  everywhere. 


toutefois,  hoioever. 
tr^s,  very. 
trop,  too  (mv/ch). 
vite,  quickly. 
volontiers,  vnllingly. 


409.  Adverbs  from  Adjectives.     Most  adjectives  become 
adverbs  by  the  addition  of  -ment  to  the  feminine  singular : 


Adj. 

Adv. 

doux. 

doucement,  sweetly. 

fou, 

follement,  madly. 

facile, 

facilement,  easily. 

autre, 

autrement,  otherwise. 

§409]  ADVEEBS   FROM   ADJECTIVES.  308 

Adj.  Adv. 

pur,     purement,  purely. 
strict,  strictement,  strictly. 
actif,    activement,  actively. 
sec,       s^chement,  dryly. 

a.  Adjectives  ending  in  a  vowel,  other  than  -e,  drop  the  -e  of  the 
feminine  on  adding  -ment : 

Adj.  Adv.  Adj.  Adv. 

poli(e),  poliment,  politely.  dteid6(e),         d^cid^ment,  decidedly. 

ab8olu(o)        absolument,  absolutely.  etc.  etc. 

Note.— The  omitted  e  is  denoted  by  a  circumflex  accent  in  aasidtlment,  COntintl- 
ment,  crtlment,  (iiL)dtlment,  galment  (better  'gaiement'),  ntiment. 

6.  The  following  adjectives  in  -e  change  e  to  ^  on  adding  -ment : 

Adj.  Adv.  Adj.  Adv. 

aveugle,  aveugl^ment.  immense,  immens^ment. 

commode,  commod^ment.  incommode,  incommod^ment. 

conforme.  conform^ment.  opiniatre,  opini&tr6ment. 

toorme,  ^norm^ment.  uniforme,  uniform^ment. 

c.  The  following  adjectives  change  the  added  -e  of  the  feminine  to  6 : 

Adj.  Adv.  Adj.  Adv. 

commnn(e),     conunun^ment.  obscurCe),  obacur^ment. 


confu8(e). 

confus^ment. 

opportun(e), 

opportuD^ment. 

diflfu9(e), 

diflfus^ment. 

pr6ci8(e), 

pr6ci86ment. 

expres8e(e), 

express^ment. 

profond(e), 

profond^ment. 

importun(e), 

importun^ment 

profu8(e), 

profus^ment. 

d.  Adjectives  in  -ant,  -ent  (except  lent,  present,  v6h6ment)  as- 
similate -nt  to  m  and  add  -ment  to  the  masculine  form : 

Adj.  Adv.  Adj.  Adv. 

eonstant,       constamment,  constantly.  prudent.       prudemment,  prudently. ' 

^l^gant,  61^amment,  elegantly.  etc.  etc. 

But:  Lentement,  sZow^y;  pr6aentement,  presently ;  vihimentement,  vehemently. 

e.  Gentil  gives  gentiment,  nicely  ;  the  adverb  to  bref  is  brifevement 
(from  a  parallel  form),  briefly;  the  adverb  to  impuni  is  impun6ment 
(probably  from  L.  impuTie,  cf.  6,  above),  loith  impunity. 

f.  The  adverbs  corresponding  to  bon,  qood^  and  mauvais,  had^  are 
bien,  v3eUy  and  mal,  badly.  From  bon  comes  regularly  bonnement= 
*  simply.' 


304  THE  ADVERB.  [§§410-411 

410.  Adjectives  as  Adverbs.  Adjectival  forms  are  not 
uncommonly  used  as  adverbs,  and,  as  such,  are  regularly 
invariable  : — 

1 .  A  number  of  adjectives  serve  as  adverbs  in  certain  fixed 
expressions  : 

Cette  sottise  lui  coute  cher.  That  folly  is  costing  him  dear. 

Elles  parlent  bas  (haut).  They  speak  low  (loud). 

Such  expressions  are : 

coCiter  bon,  cost  dear.  arrfiter  court,  stop  short.  coClter  gros,  cost  dear. 

Bentir     n     smell  good.  filer  doux,  '  sing  small.'  viser  haut,  aim  high. 

tenir      u     stand  firm.  aller  droit,  go  straight.  chanter  juste,  sing  in  tune. 

acheter  oher,  buy  dear.  viser    ir      aim    u  f rapper     n      strike  straight. 

cotlter      II      cost     1*  chanter  faux,  sing  out  of  sentir  mauvais,  smell  bad. 

vendre     u     sell     »                 tune.  .  6crire  serr^,  urrite  small 

voir  clair,  see  clearly.  frapper  ferme,  strike  hard,  (a)  vrai  dire,  speak  truly. 

^Touyer  clsMC,  prove  clearly,   parler       n      speak  firmly.  etc.       etc. 

2.  An  adjective  sometimes  modifies  another  adjective : 

Des  dames  haut  plac^es.  Ladies  of  high  rank. 

Un  veritable  grand  homme.  *  A  truly  great  man. 

3.  Besides  the  above,  a  few  adjectival  forms  serve  also  as 
adverbs : 

Je  I'ai  dit  expr^s.  I  said  it  purposely. 

Soudain  nous  vlmes  I'ennemi.  Suddenly  we  saw  the  enemy. 

Such  forms  are : 

bref ,  in  short.  mfime,  even.  tout  beau,  not  so  fast. 

exprfes,  purposely.  proche,  near  (by).  tout  doux,  gently. 

fort,  very,  hard,  loud,  etc.  soudain,  suddenly.  tvite,  quickly. 

Juste,  exactly,  etc.  *tout,  quite,  very,  etc. 

*  For  the  inflection  of  tOUt  as  adverb,  see  §406,  6,  a. 

tThe  adverb  viteinent= '  quickly,'  is  familiar. 

411.  Adverbial  Locutions.  Phrases  with  adverbial 
function  are  numerous : 

Je  viendrai  tout  k  I'heure.  I  shall  come  presently. 

Venez  de  bonne  heure.  Come  early. 


§412] 


COMPARISON   OF  ADVERBS. 


805 


Further  examples  are : 
k  bon  march6,  cheap.  d'ailleurs,  betides. 


4  c6t6,  near,  near  by. 
k  droite,  to  the  right, 
k  jamais,  forever, 
k  la  fois,  at  once, 
k  I'avenir,  in  future. 
k  peine,  hardly, 
k  peu  pr68,  nearly. 
au  juste,  exactly. 
au  moins,  at  least. 
9^  et  \k,  here  and  there. 
d'abord,  at  first. 


d^s  lors,  since. 

d'ordinaire,  usually. 

d'oii,  whence. 

d'5ii  ?,  whence  ? 

du  moins,  at  least. 

en  avant,  forward. 

en  has,  below,  down  stairs. 

en  effet,  in  fact. 

en  haut,  above,  up  stairs. 

Ik-baa,  yonder. 

lit-dessus,  thereupon. 


plus  tdt,  sooner. 
sans  doute,  doubtless. 
tant  mieux,  so  much  thi 

better. 
t6t  ou  tard,  sooner  or  later. 
tour  k  tour,  in  turn. 
tout  k  coup,  suddenly. 
tout  de  suite,  at  once. 
tout  d'un  coup,  all  at  onee. 

etc.,  etc. 


412.  Comparison  of  Adverbs.  1.  Adverbs  are  regu- 
larly compared  like  adjectives  (cf.  §  345)  by  the  use  of  plus, 
moins,  aussi ;  que  =  *  than/  *  as  * : 

Plus,  moins  facilement  que  Jean.     More,  less  easily  than  John. 
Aussi  facilement  que  Jean.  As  easily  as  John. 

a.  Further  examples,  illustrating  §345,  a,  b,  c,  d,  as  applied  to  ad- 
verbs • 


II  ne  marche  pas  aussi  (si)  vite. 
Vite  corame  un  eclair. 
II  marche  plus  viteque  je nepensais. 
De  plus  en  plus  vite. 
Plus  je  le  connais  (et)  moins  je 
I'estime. 


He  does  not  walk  as  (so)  fast. 
As  quick  as  lightning. 
He  walks  faster  than  I  thought. 
Faster  and  faster 

The  more  I  know  him  the  less  I 
esteem  him. 


b.  *More  than,'  *less  than,'  as  adverbs  of  quantity = plus  de,  moins 
de,    respectively ;    they  must    be    carefully    distinguished  from  plus 
(moins)  que= '  more  (less)  than'  in  an  elliptical  sentence  : 
J'ai  plus  (moins)  de  dix  francs.  I  have  more  (less)  than  ten  francs. 

En  moins  d'une  demi-heure.  In  less  than  half  an  hour. 

But :  Un  ^l^phant  mange  plus  que    An  elephant    eats  more  than  six 

six  chevaux  (ne  mangent).  horses  (eat). 

2.  The  following  are  irregularly  compared  : 

bien,  well  mieux,  better.  beaucoup,  much.        plus,  more. 

.  ,    ,,     ...       fpis,  worse.  peu,  little.  moins,  leea. 

mal,  badly,  ilL     i   i  , 

*         ^*  \plus  mal,  worse. 

ao 


THE  ADVERB.  [§413 

a.  Beaucoup='much  (many)'  or  'very  much  (many),' and  is  never 
modified  by  another  adverb,  except  pas. 

3.  The  superlative  is  formed  by  placing  le,  which  is  invari- 
able, before  the  comparative  of  inequality  : 
Le  plus  sou  vent  (moins  souvent).      (The)  mostT  frequently  (least  f.). 
Elle  parle  le  plus  (mieux,  moins).      She  speaks  (the)  most  (best,  least). 

413.  Position.  1.  An  adverb  regularly  stands  immediately 
after  its  verb,  rarely  between  the  subject  and  the  verb  : 

Charles  porte  souvent  ma  canne.  Charles  often  carries  my  cane. 

On  devrait  lire  lentement.  One  should  read  slowly. 

Se  levant  tard,  se  couchant  tdt.  Rising  late,  going  to  bed  early. 

Xls  I'ont  bien  regu.  They  have  received  him  well. 

Obs.:  Hence  the  adverb  reg^arly  comes  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  participle  in 
compound  tenses. 

a.  The  adverbs  aujourd'hui,  hier,  demain,  autrefois,  tot,  tard,  ici,  1^ 
ailleurs,  partout,  never  come  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  participle  : 
II  est  parti  hier.  He  went  away  yesterday. 

Je  I'ai  cherch^  partout.  I  looked  for  it  everjrwhere. 

b.  Long  adverbs  in  -ment  not  uncommonly  stand  after  the  past 
participle : 

II  a  parl^  ^loquemment.  He  has  spoken  eloquently. 

c.  Most  adverbs  of  quantity,  such  as  peu,  beaucoup,  trop,  etc. ,  and 
a  few  short  adverbs  like  bien,  mal,  mieux,  etc.,  as  also  adverbs  of  nega- 
tion, regularly  precede  the  infinitive  : 

Tu  ne  devrais  pas  trop  lire.  You  should  not  read  too  much. 

II  ne  saurait  mieux  faire.  He  cannot  do  better. 

II  parle  de  ne  pas  y  aller.  He  speaks  of  not  going. 

d.  Interrogative  adverbs  head  the  phrase,   as  in   English  ;    other 
adverbs  are  not  uncommonly  placed  first  for  emphasis  (cf.  §  237,  3) : 
Quand  allez-vous  revenir  ?  When  are  you  going  to  come  back  ? 
Aujourd'hui  je  vais  me  reposer.         To-day  I  am  going  to  rest. 
Malheureusement  tout  est  perdu.      Unfortunately  all  is  lost. 

2.  Adverbs  usually  precede  the  nouns,  adjectives,  adverbs, 
and  phrases  modified  by  them  : 

Assez  de  livres,  et  assez  chers.  Books  enough,  and  dear  enoagh. 

Bien  mal  k  propos.  Very  unseasonably. 


§§414-415]  NEGATION.  307 

a.  For  combieni,  commel,  quel,  tant!,  and  plus. .  .plus,  moins... 
moins  with  adjectives  or  adverbs,  of.  §350,  a. 

3.  Adverbial   phrases   follow  the   same   rules   as   adverbs, 
except  that  only  the  shorter  ones  may  usually  come  between 
the  auxiliary  and  the  verb : 
Nous  6tion8  k  peine  partis.  Hardly  had  we  gone. 

NEGATION. 

414.  Negation  without  Verb.  Non  =  'no,' 'not,' apar^ 
from  a  verb ;  it  is  often  emphasized  by  pas,  point : 

L*avez-vous  dit  ? — Non.  Did  yt)u  say  it  ? — No. 

Vous  viendrez  ? — Non  pas  (point).     You  will  come  ? — Certainly  not. 

Non,  non,  je  n'irai  pas.  •  No,  no,  I  shall  not  go. 

Non  content  de  dire  cela.  Not  satisfied  with  saying  that. 

Riche  ou  non,  il  ne  I'aura  pas.  Rich  or  not,  he  shall  not  have  it. 

A-t-il,  oui  ou  non,  du  talent  ?  Has  he  talent,  yes  or  no  ? 

Des  idees  non  moins  vastes.  Ideas  not  less  vast. 

Une  maison  non  meubl^e.  A  house  not  furnished. 

Non  seulement . . .  mais  encore.  Not  only . . .  but  also. 

a.  For  the  use  of  que  non,  see  §420,  1,  a. 

415.  Negation  with  Verb.  1.  Along  with  a  verb,  a 
negation  consists  regularly  of  two  parts,  ne  (n',  see  §  19)  to- 
gether with  some  other  word  or  words ;  the  principal  correla- 
tive expressions  of  this  kind  are : 

ne. .  .x)as,  not.  ne. . . aucunement \no<  at    ne. .  .rien,  nothing. 

ne. .  .point,  not.        ne. .  .nuUement    }  alL        ne. .  .ni(. .  .ni)  neither. . . 
ne . . .  gu^re,  hardly .  ne . . .  aucun  "|  nor. 

ne. .  .jamais,  never. ne  .  .nul       \no,  none, 
ne . . .  plus,  no  more .  ne . . .  pas  un  J 
ne . . .  que,  only .        ne . . .  personne,  nobody. 
Notes.  —1.  Point  is  usually  more  emphatic  than  pas,  and  is  less  common  in  ordinary 


je. 
2.  Negation  is  often  denoted  by  pas,  without  ne,  in  familiar  language  :  'Ai-]e  pas 


dit  cela  ?  (^ITai-je  pas  dit  cela  ?).' 

2.  Other  forms  of  less  frequent  use  are : 


308  THE  ADVERB.  [§416 

a.  Ne. .  .quelconque  =  *  no. .  .whatsoever  (at  all),'  ne...qui  que  ce 
soit=' nobody  whatsoever  (at  all),'  ne...quoi  que  ce  soit=* nothing 
whatsoever  (at  all).' 

Je  n'ai  dit  quoi  que  ce  soit.  I  said  nothing  at  all. 

6.  Ne...brin  (lit.  *  blade'),  or  mie  (lit.  *  crumb'),  or  goutte  (lit 
*drop'),  or  mot  (lit.  *  word  ')=ne. .  .rien,  in  certain  phrases : 

II  n'y  en  a  brin.  There  is  none  of  it. 

Je  n'y  entends  goutte.  I  understand  nothing  of  it. 

c.  Ne. .  .4me  vivante,  or  homme  qui  vive,  or  kme  qui  vive,  etc.  = 
ne..  .personne: 

H  n'y  avait  §,me  vivante  dans  la    There  was  not  a  living  soul  in  the 
maison.  house. 

d.  Ne . . .  de  +  an  expression  of  time,  e. g. ,  la  (ma)  vie,  de  huit  jours,  etc. : 
Je  ne  I'oublierai  de  ma  vie.  I  shall  not  forget  it  while  I  live. 

416.  Position.  Ne  always  precedes  the  verb,  and  its 
conjunctive  objects,  if  any;  pas,  point  and  other  adverbs 
immediately  follow  the  verb,  and  its  conjunctive  pronouns,  if 
any ;  indefinites  have  their  usual  place. 

Je  ne  le  leur  ai  pas  (point)  dit.  I  did  not  tell  them  it. 

Je  n'en  ai  gu6re.  I  have  hardly  any  of  it. 

Ne  les  a-t-il  jamais  vus  ?  Did  he  never  see  them  ? 

Je  n'y  resterai  plus.  I  shall  stay  there  no  longer. 

H  ne  le  veut  nuUement.  He  does  not  wish  it  at  all. 

1\  ne  prend  aucun  soin.  He  takes  no  care. 

Personne  ne  peut  le  dire.  Nobody  can  say  (it). 

H  n'a  mal  quelconque.  He  has  no  pain  at  all. 

Je  ne  I'ai  dit  k  qui  que  ce  soit.  I  have  told  it  to  nobody  at  all. 

a.  Pas,  point,  usually,  and  plus,  often,  precede  the  simple  infinitive, 
and  its  conjunctive  objects ;  they  may  precede  or  follow  avoir,  etre, 
either  when  alone  or  in  a  compound  infinitive  : 

H  parle  de  ne  pas  vous  voir.  He  speaks  of  not  seeing  you. 

£tre  ou  ne  pas  6tre.  To  be  or  not  to  be. 

J'^tais  f^che  de  ne  vous  avoir  pas    I  was  sorry  not  to  have  seen  you. 

vu  {or  de  ne  pas  vous  avoir 

vu,  or  de  ne  vous  pas  avoir  vu). 


§§417-418]  NEGATION.  309 

6.  Rien  as  object  is  treated  as  an  adverb ;  it  may  also  precede  an 
infinitive  like  an  adverb  : 
n  promet  de  ne  rien  dire.  He  promises  to  say  nothing. 

c.  The  que  of  ne. .  .que  must  immediately  precede  the  word  which  it 
modifies : 

Je  n'en  ai  vu  que  trois.  I  saw  only  three  of  them. 

d.  To  denote  'neither. .  .nor,'  ni  is  placed  before  each  co-ordinate, 
if  not  a  finite  verb,  and  ne  stands  before  the  finite  verb ;  when  finite 
verbs  are  co-ordinated,  ne  stands  before  each  of  them,  while  ni  also 
must  stand  with  the  last,  but  may  not  stand  with  the  first,  and  is 
optional  with,  others : 

Qui  le  sait? — Ni  lui  ni  moi.  Who  knows  it  ? — Neither  he  nor  L 

n  n'a  ni  parents  ni  amis.  He  has  neither  relatives  nor  friends. 

Je  ne  Fai  ni  vu  ni  entendu.  I  neither  saw  nor  heard  it. 

H  ne  sait  ni  lire  ni  ^crire.  He  can  neither  read  nor  write. 

Je  ne  veux  ni  qu'il  Use  ni  qu'il  I  neither  wish  him  to  read  nor  to 

derive.  write. 

II  ne  le  bldme  ni  ne  le  loue.  He  neither  blames  nor  praises  it. 

Je  ne  pouvais,  (ni)  ne  devais,  ni  I  neither  could,  nor  should,  nor 

ne  voulais  c6der.  would  yield. 

417.  Ellipsis  of  the  Verb.  If  the  verb  be  omitted,  but 
understood,  ne  is  also  omitted,  and  the  correlative  itself 
denotes  negation ; 

Est-il  venu?— Pas  encore  (=11  Has  he  come?— Not  yet(=He  has 

n'est  pas  encore  venu).  not  yet  come). 

Qui  est  li  ? — Personne.  Who  is  there  ? — Nobody. 

Plus  de  larmes ;  plus  de  soucis.  No  more  tears  ;  no  more  cares. 

a.  Pas,  when  so  used,  may  not  stand  alone  : 

Non  (pas) ;  pas  encore ;  pas  lui ;     No ;    not  yet ;    not  he  (him) ; 
pas  du  tout ;  pas  ce  soir,  etc.  not  at  all ;  not  this  evening,  etc. 

418.  Ne  alone  as  Negative.  Negation  with  verbs  is 
expressed  by  ne  alone  in  certain  cases,  as  follows ; — 

1.  After  que  =  pourquoi  ?,  and  usually  after  que,  qui  in 
rhetorical  question  or  exclamation : 


310  THE  ADVERB.  [§418 

Que  ne  le  disiez-vous  plus  t6t  ?  Why  did  you  not  say  so  sooner  ? 

Que  ne  ferais-je  pour  lui  ?  What  would  I  not  do  for  him  ? 

Qui  ne  voit  cela  ?  Who  does  not  see  that  ? 

2.  After  condition  expressed  by  inversion : 

N'eiit  4ti  la  pluie.  Had  it  not  been  for  the  rain. 

a.  Sometimes  also  in  conditions  regularly  expressed  with  si : 
Si  je  ne  me  trompe.  If  I  am  not  mistaken. 

Qui,  si  ce  n'est  vous  ?  Who,  if  not  you  ? 

3.  In  dependent  sentences  after  negation,  either  fully 
expressed  or  implied : 

Je  n'ai  pas  (j'ai  peu)  d'amis  qui  ne  I  have  no  (I  have  few)  friends  who 

soient  les  vdtres.  are  not  yours. 

H  n'y  a  rien  qu'il  ne  sache.  There  is  nothing  he  does  not  know. 

Non  que  je  ne  le  craigne.  Not  that  I  do  not  fear  him. 

Impossible  qu'il  ne  vienne  !  Impossible  that  he  -will  not  come  ! 

Ai-je  un  ami  qui  ne  soit  fiddle  ? —  Have  I  one  friend  who  is  not  faith- 

Non.  ful?— No. 

a.  More  obscure  cases  of  implied  negation  are  prendre  gfarde  que  = 
*  take  care  that  not,'  etc.,  and  such  expressions  as  il  tient=  *  it  depends 
on,'  used  interrogatively : 

Prenez  garde  qu'il  ne  tombe.  Take  care  he  does  not  fall. 

Gardez  qu'il  ne  sorte.  Take  care  he  does  not  go  out. 

A  quoi  tient-il  qu'on  ne  fasse         What  is  the  cause  of  that  not  being 
cela  ?  done  ? 

4.  Sometimes  with  savoir,  bouger,  and  with  pouvoir, 
OSer,  cesser  +  an  infinitive,  expressed  or  implied: 

Je  ne  sais  (pas).  I  do  not  know. 

Ne  bougez  (pas)  de  Ih.  Do  not  stir  from  there. 

Je  ne  puis  (pas)  r^pondre.  I  cannot  answ^. 

II  n'oserait  (pas)  le  dire.  He  would  not  dare  to  say  so. 

EUe  ne  cesse  (pas)  de  pleurer.  She  does  not  cease  weeping. 

a.  Always  ne  alone  in  je  ne  saurais  and  je  ne  sais  quoi : 
Je  ne  saurais  vous  le  dire.  I  cannot  tell  you. 

Ne  sauriez-vous  m'aider?  Can  you  not  help  me? 

Un  je  ne  sais  quoi  de  terrible.  Something  indefinably  terrible. 


§419]  NEGATION.  311 

5.  In  a  few  set  expressions,  such  as  : 

N'importe ;  n'avoir  garde.  It  does  not  matter  ;  not  to  care. 

Ne  vous  en  d^plaise.  By  your  leave. 

N'avoir  que  faire  de.  To  have  no  use  (whatever)  for. 

n  n'est  pire  eau  que  I'eau  qui       Still  waters  run  deep, 
dort  (proverb). 

419.  Pleonastic  ne.  In  a  que  clause  ne  is  often  pleo- 
nastic, as  compared  with  English ;  thus,  ne  stands  : — 

1.  After  emp^cher  = '  prevent,'  dviter  = '  avoid,'  a  moins 

que  =  'unless,'  or  que  so  used  : 

Empechez  qu'il  ne  sorte.  Prevent  him  from  going  out. 

J'6vite  qu'on  ne  me  voie.  I  avoid  being  seen. 

A  moins  que  je  ne  sois  retenu.  Unless  I  be  detained. 

o.  This  ne  is  often  omitted  after  emp^cher  and  6viter,  after  emp^cher 
mostly  when  negative  or  interrogative. 

h.  Ne  may  also  stand  after  avant  que  : 
Avant  qu'il  (ne)  parte.  Before  he  goes  away. 

2.  After  expressions  of  fearing,  such  as  craindre,  redoutcr, 
etc.,  avoir  peur,  etc.,  de  peur  que,  etc.,  when  not  negative, 
or  when  negation  is  not  implied  by  interrogation  expecting 
negative  answer,  or  by  condition : 

Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne.  I  fear  he  will  come. 

Craignez-vous  qu'il  ne  vienne  ?  Do  you  fear  he  will  come  ? 

But :   Je    ne  crains  pas   qu'il    vienne.      Sans  craindre   qu'il  vienne. 
Craignez-vous  qu'il  vienne  ? — Non.     Si  je  craignais  qu'il  vlnt. 

a.  What  it  is,  or  is  not,  feared  will  not  happen  has  the  full  negation 
ne. .  .pas  in  the  que  clause : 

Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne  pas.  I  fear  he  will  not  come. 

Je  ne  crains  pas  qu'il  ne  vienne  pas.   I  do  not  fear  he  will  not  come. 

6.  Interrogation  or  condition  and  negation  neutralize  each  other,  and 
ne  stands : 

Necraignez-vous  pas  qu'il  ne  vienne?  Do  you  not  fear  he  will  come? 
Si  je  ne  craignais  qu'il  ne  vint.  If  I  did  not  fear  he  would  come. 

Quand  mSme  je  ne  craindrais  pas  Even  though  I  did  not  fear  he  would 

qu'il  ne  vlnt.  come. 


312  THE  ADVERR  [§419 

3.  "With  a  finite  verb  in  the  second  member  of  a  comparison 
of  inequality,  when  the  first  member  is  not  negative,  or  does 
not  imply  negation  as  above : 

H  est  plus  riche  qu'il  ne  I'^tait.  He  is  richer  than  he  was. 
Est-il  plus  riche  qu'il  ne  I'^tait  ?  Is  he  richer  than  he  was  ? 
H  gagne  moins  qu'il  n'esp^rait.  He  earns  less  than  he  hoped. 

But :  II  n'est  pas  plus  riche  qu'il  I'^tait  j  est-il  plus  riche  qu'il  I'etait?— 
Non. 

a.  A  negative  interrogation  implies  affirmation,  and  ne  stands : 

N'est-il  pas   plus   riche   qu'il         Is  he  not  richer  than  he  was? 
ne  r^tait  ? 

Note.— Autre,  autrement,  plUtdt,  plus  tdt,  similarly  take  ne:  'II  est  tout 
autre  que  je  ne  pensais.' 

4.  Usually  after  expressions  of  doubt,  denial,  such  as 
douter,  nier,  disconvenir,  etc.,  often  d^sesp^rer,  when 
negative,  or  when  negation  is  implied  as  above : 

Je  ne  doute  pas  qu'il  ne  vienne.        I  do  not  doubt  that  he  will  come. 
Doutez-vous    qu'il  ne    vienne? —    Do    you    doubt    whether    he    will 

Non.  come  ? — No. 

But :  Je  doute  qu'il  vienne ;  doutez-vous  qu'il  vienne  ?  ( — question  for 
information). 

5.  After  il  s*en  faut  negatively,  interrogatively,  or  with 
peu,  gu^re,  etc. : 

II  ne  s'en  fallut  pas  (de)  beaucoup  He  came  very  near  being  killed. 

qu'il  ne  fut  tue. 

Combien  s'en  faut-il  que  la  somme  How  much  is  lacking  of  the  sum 

n'y  soit  ?  total ? 

Peu  s'en  est  fallu  que  je  ne  vinsse.  I  came  very  near  coming. 

6.  With  compound  tenses  after  il  y  a,  voila,  depuis : 

H  y  a  (voilk)  trois  jours  que  je  ne  It  is  three  days  since  I  saw  him  (1 

I'ai  vu.  have  not  seen  him  for,  etc. ). 

H  avait  grandi  depuis  que  je  ne  He  had  grown  since  I  saw  him. 
I'avais  vu. 

Depuie  que  je  ne  vous  ai  vu.  Since  I  saw  you. 

o.  In  a  simple  tense  (§§257,  2,  258,  4)  negatively,  ne...pas,  etc., 
must  be  used : 
Voilit  un  an  qu'il  ne  buvait  plus.      He  had  drunk  no  more  for  a  year. 


§420]  USE  OF  CERTAIN  ADVERBS.  818 

USE   OF   CERTAIN  ADVERBS. 

420.  Distinctions.  The  following  are  especially  liable  to 
be  confounded  in  use : — 

1.  Oui,  SL     *  Yes  *  in  afl5rmation  or  assent  is  oui ;  *  yes '  is  usually 

si  in  contradiction,  in  correction,  in  dissent : 

L'avez-vous  dit  ? — Oui,  monsieur.      Did  you  say  it  ? — Yes,  sir. 

Venez. — Oui,  oui,  j'irai.  Come. — Yes,  yes,  I  shall  go. 

n  ne  s'en  va  pas.— Si,  monsieur,  il       He  is  not  going.— Yes,  (sir),  he  is 

s'en  va.  (going). 

H  ne  s'en  va  pas  ? — ^Mais  sL  He  is  not  going  ? — Yes,  certainly. 

Je  n'irai  pas. — Si,  si  venez.  I  shall  not  go. — Yes,  yes,  come. 

NoTB.— The  use  of  si,  as  also  of  the  intensive  Bi  fait,  etc.,  thou^ifh  very  common,  is 
classed  as  familiar  by  the  Aeadimie;  it  is  often  avoided  by  pardon,  etc.,  or  other 
expressions :  '  II  ne  va  pas. — FardOU,  monsieur  (il  va).' 

o.  Oui,  si,  and  non,  are  often  preceded  by  que,  really  with  ellipsis  of 
a  whole  que  clause,  and  are  then  variously  translated  by  *yes,'  *80,* 
*no,'  *not,'  etc.,  or  by  a  clause : 
Je  dis  que  oui  (non).  I  say  yes  (no). 

Je  crois  que  oui  (non).  I  think  so  (not). 

Vous  ne  I'avez  pas  ? — Oh  !  que  si.      You  haven't  it  ? — Oh  yes  ! 
Le  fera-t-il  ? — Je  crois  que  oui.  Will  he  do  it  ? — I  think  he  wilL 

Je  dis  que  non.  I  say  it  is  not  so. 

Peut-etre  que  non.  Perhaps  not. 

2.  Autant,  Tant  'As  much  (many)'=autaiit ;  '  so  much  (many)'= 
tant: 

Je  gagne  autant  que  vous.  I  earn  as  much  as  you. 

n  but  tant  qu'il  en  mourut.  He  drank  so  much  that  he  died 

from  it. 
J'ai  tant  d'amis ;  j'en  ai  autant    I  have  so  many  friends ;  I  have  as 
que  vous.  many  as  you. 

3.  Plus,  Davantage.  Plus  is  used  in  all  senses  of  'more,*  'most' 
(see  below) ;  davantage  (strengthened  sometimes  by  bien  =  *  much,' 
encore  =  *  still' )=  '  more,'  is  regularly  used  only  absolutely,  and  usually 
stands  at  the  end  of  its  clause  : 

irenparlepasdavantage.!  Say  no  more  about  it. 

Xren  pane  plus.  J 

Ne  restez  pas  davantage.  |  j^  ^^^  ^^^^^         1  • 

Ne  restez  plus.  J 


314  THE  NUMERAL.  [§421 

Cela  me  plait  encore  da  vantage    That  pleases  me  still  more. 

(plus). 
Je  suis  riche  ;  il  Test  bien  da  van-    I  am  rich  ;  he  is  much  more  so. 

tage  (plus). 
But  only  :  J'en  ai  plus  que  lui ;  il  est  plus  habile ;  plus  de  dix  francs ; 
c'est  ce  qui  le  flatte  le  plus,  etc. 

Note.— Davantage  is  occasionally  followed  by  que  in  archaic  style. 

4.  Ne  .  .  .  que,  Seulement.   Seulement  must  be  used,  (1)  when  no 
verb  is  present,  (2)  when  '  only  '  refers  to  the  subject,  (3)  or  to  the  verb, 
(4)  or  to  a  que  clause,  and  (5)  it  may  be  used  to  strengthen  a  ne  .  .  . 
que  ;  otherwise  *  only '  =  ne  .  .  .  que  or  seulement : 
Seulement  les  braves.  Only  the  brave. 

Seulement  mon  frere  le  sait.  Only  my  brother  knows  it. 

£!coutez  seulement.  Only  listen. 

II  dit  seulement  qu'il  irait.  He  only  said  he  would  go. 

II  n'a  seulement  qu'k  venir.  He  has  only  to  come. 

But :  Nous  ne  serous  que  trois  {or  trois  seulement);  je  ne  veux  que 
voir  son  pfere  (or  je  veux  seulement  voir  son  pere),  etc. 

a.  *  Only,'  referring  to  the  subject,  may  be  turned  also  by  il  n*y  a 
que,  ce  n'est  que  ;  *  only,'  referring  to  the  verb,  may  be  turned  by  the 
help  of  faire : 
H  n'y  a  que  les  morts  qui  ne  re-    The  dead  only  do  not  come  back. 

viennent  pas. 
EUe  ne  fait  que  pleurer.  She  does  nothing  but  weep. 


THE    NUMERAL. 
421.  Cardinal  Numerals. 


1.  un,  une 

[&,  yn]. 

2.  deux 

[d0]. 

3.  trois 

ftrwa]. 

4.  quatre 

[katr]. 

5.  cinq 

[8?lk]. 

6.  six 

[sis]. 

7.  sept' 

[set]. 

8.  huit 

[qit]. 

9.  neuf 

[n<Bf]. 

10.  dix 

[dis]. 

11.  onze 

[o:z]. 

12.  douze 

[duiz]. 

13.  treize 

[treiz]. 

14.  quatorze  [katorz] 


§421]  CARDINAL  NUMERALS.  315 

15.  quinze  [k?:z].  70.  soixante-dix  [swasait  dis]. 

16.  seize  [seiz].  71.  soixante  et  onze  [swasait  e  oiz]. 

17.  dix-sept  [dis  set].  80.  quatre-vingts  [katr  v?]. 

18.  dix-huit  [diz  i{it].  81.  quatre-vingt-un  [katr  ve  dfe], 

19.  dix-neuf  [diz  noef],  90.  quatre-vingt-dix  [katr  ve  dis], 

20.  vingt  [vf].  91.  quatre-vingt-onze  [katr  vs  oiz], 

21.  vingt  et  un  [vet  e  &].  100.  cent  [sci]. 

22.  vingt-deux  [vend  d0].  101.  cent  un  [sa  <£]. 

30.  trente  [trait].  200.  deux  cents  [d0  sa]. 

31.  trente  et  un  [trait  e  o&].        201.  deux  cent  un  [d0  sa  dfej, 
40.  quarante        [karait].           1000.  mille                        [mil]. 

60.  cinquante      [sekait].  1001.  mille  un  [mil  <56]. 

60.  soixante         [swasait].        2000.  deux  mille  [d0  mil]. 

Nouns  OF  Number  :  1, 000, 000 =un  million  [dfe  miljo] ;  2,000,000=s 
deux  millions  [d0  miljo];  1,000,000,000  =  un  milliard  [c6  miljair]. 

Observe:  1.  The  hyphen  unites  together  compound  numerals  under 
100,  except  where  et  occurs.     2.  Et  stands  regularly  in  21,  31,  41,  51, 

61,  is  optional  in  70,  omitted  in  81,  and  elsewhere. 

Notes  on  Pronunciation  :  1.  The  final  consonant  of  5,  6,  7,  8,  9, 
10,  17,  18,  19,  is  silent  before  initial  consonant  or  h  aspirate  of  a  word 
multiplied  by  them,  not  elsewhere:  'Cinq  livres'  [s?  liivr],  but  'le 
cinq  mai'  [la  sfik  me].  2.  No  elision  or  liaison  occurs  before  huit, 
onze:  Le  huit  [laqit];  les  huit  livres  [le  qi  liivr];  le  onze  [la  oiz]; 
lea  onze  francs  [le  oiz  fra].  3.  The  t  is  sounded  in  vingt  in  21,  23,  24, 
25,  26,  27,  28,  29,  becomes  d  in  22,  is  silent  from  81  to  99,  is  silent  in 
cent  un,  deux  cent  un,  etc. 

a.  Un  (f.  une)  is  the  only  cardinal  which  varies  for  gender  : 
Une  (deux,  trois,  etc. )  plume(s).       One  (two,  three,  etc. )  pen(8). 
Vingt  et  une  vaches.  Twenty -one  cows. 

6.  Cardinals  are  invariable  for  number,  except  that  -s  is  added  to 
quatre-ving^  and  the  multiples  of  cent,  but  only  when  immediately 
preceding  a  noun,  or  an  adjective + a  noun,  or  when  they  themselves 
serve  as  nouns  of  number  : 

Quatre-vingts  francs.  Eighty  francs. 

Trois  cents  (bonnes)  plumes.  Three  hundred  (good)  pens. 

Deux  cents  millions.  Two  hundred  millions. 

Trois  cents  de  pommes.  Three  hundred  apples. 

Les  cinq  cents.  The  five  hundreds. 


316  THE  NUMERAL.  [§422 

But :  Trois  cent  un  francs  ;  les  cent  homines  engages ;  quatre-vingt- 
une  plumes ;  deux  cent  mille  ;  trois  mille  milles,  etc. 

N.B.— They  are  not  nouns  of  number  in  dates  (c.  below)  or  when  used  as  ordinals 
(§427):  '  L'an  quatre  cent ' ;  '  page  deux  cent ' ;  'page  quatrevingt.' 

c.  The  form  mil  (not  'mille')  is  used  in  dates  of  the  Christian  era 
from  1001  to  1999 : 

En  mil  huit  cent  quatre-vingt-       In  eighteen  hundred  and    ninety- 

onze.  one. 

(En)  l'an  mil  six.  (In)  the  year  1006. 

But :  L'an  mille  (sometimes  mil) ;  l'an  deux  mille  trois  cent ;  l'an  mille 

cent  du  monde,  etc. 

d.  From  1100  onward  dates  are  often  expressed  by  hundreds,  as 
BO  frequently  in  English  : 

Onze  cent(s) ;  treize  cent(8).  Eleven  hundred  ;  thirteen  hundred. 

Quinze  cent  cinquante.  Fifteen  hundred  and  fifty. 

«.  *  A  (or  one)  hundred '  =  cent ;  *  a  (or  one)  thousand  '= mille  : 
Mille  soldats.  A  (one)  thousand  soldiers. 

NoTH.— Septante = 70,  octante = 80,  nonante = 90,  six-Yingt(8)= 120,  and  quinze- 

Tl2l£^8)=300,  are  now  obsolete  in  the  literary  language. 

422.  Ordinal  Numerals.  The  ordinal  numerals  denote 
order  or  place  in  a  series  relatively  to  the  first;  they  are 
formed,  from  *  third  *  up,  by  adding  -i^me  to  the  last  conso- 
nant of  the  corresponding  cardinal,  cinq  adding  u,  and  f  of 
neuf  becoming  v  before  -i^me : 
1st  premier  [pramje]. 
r  second  [sago]. 
\deuxieme  [d0zjem]. 
3rd  troisieme  [trwaziem]. 
4th  quatrieme  [katriem]. 
5th    cinquieme  [sekjem].  21st  vingt  et  uni^me  [vet  e  ynjem]. 

6th    sixieme       [sizjem].  22nd  vingt-deuxieme  [vend  d0zjem]. 

NOTBS.— 1.  Besides  the  ordinary  forms,  tiers  (f.  tierce)= '  third,'  quart(e)=  'fourth,' 
are  used  in  a  few  expressions  and  in  fractions:  'Le  tiers  6tat,'  'The  commoners' ; 
•En  maison  tierce/  'In  the  house  of  a  third  party' ;  'Una  fi6vre  quarte,'  'A 
quartan  ague.' 

2.  Quint = '  fifth '  is  used  only  in  '  Charles-Quint/  Charles  V.  (.the  Emperor)' ; '  Sixte- 
Quint,'  *  Sixtus  V.  (the  Pope).' 


7th  septi^me 

[setjem]. 

8th  huiti^me 

[qitjem]. 

9th  neuvi^me 

[noevjem]. 

10th  dixi^me 

[dizjem]. 

11th  onzi^me 

[ozjem]. 

§§423-424]  COLLECTIVES — FRACTIONS.  317 

a.  Ordinals  are  like  ordinary  adjectives  in  inflection  and  agreement, 
and  regularly  precede  the  noun  : 

La  (les)  premiere(s)  maison(s).  The  first  house(s). 

Nous  sommes  arrives  les  premiers.    We  arrived  first. 

b.  Deuxi^me  instead  of  second  is  more  usually  employed  in  a  series 
of  more  than  two,  and  always  in  compounds : 

Le  second  volume.  The  second  volume  (of  two). 

Le  deuxi^me  volume.  The  second  volume  (of  three,  etc.). 

La  cent  deuxieme  fois.  The  hundred  and  second  time. 

423.  Collectives.  The  following  nouns  are  used  with 
collective  force : 

un(e)  couple,  a  couple  {two).  une  cinquantaine,  about  fifty, 

une  paire,  a  pair.  une  soixantaine,  about  sixty. 

une  huitaine,  about  eight.  ime  centaine,  abovi  a  hundred. 

une  dixaine,  about  ten.       ^  un  cent,  a  hundred. 

une  douzaine,  a  dozen.  un  millier,  {about)  a  thousand,  • 

une  quinzaine,  about  fifteen.  un  million,  a  million. 

une  vingtaine,  about  twenty.  un  milliard,  '\     umQn 

une  trentaine,  about  thirty.  un  billion,    / 

une  quarantaine,  about  forty.  etc. 

a.  They  take  -s  in  the  plural,  and  have  the  construction  of  ordinary 
nouns : 

II  y  a  une  centaine  d'^16ves.  There  are  about  100  pupils. 

II  y  en  a  deux  cents.  There  are  two  hundred  of  them. 

Des  milliers  de  gens.  Thousands  of  people. 

Deux  millions  de  francs.  -         Two  million(s  of)  francs. 

424.  Fractions.  The  numerator  is  regularly  denoted  by  a 
cardinal  and  the  denominator  by  an  ordinal;  'half '  =  moiti^, 
f.,  as  a  noun,  and  demi  as  an  adjective  or  a  noun : 

un  demi.  \  un  quart.  -^    trois  seiziemes. 

une  moiti^.  |  trois  quarts.  1^  sept  centi6mes. 

^    deux  demis.  \  un  cinquieme.  ^VV  dix  cent  uni^mes. 

\   un  tiers.  \  un  septi^me.  rHr  o^ize  milli^mes. 

}    deux  tiers.  ^  un  onzi^me.  etc. 

a.  Demi,  before  its  noun,  is  invariable  and  joined  by  a  hyphen,  but 
agrees  elsewhere;  as  a  noun,  demi  is  hardly  used,  except  in  arithmetical 
calculations : 


A 


318  THE  NUMERAL.  [§§425-426 

Une  demi-heure  ;  une  heure  et  Half  an  hour ;  an  hour  and  a  half. 

demie. 

Quatre  deinis=deux.  Four  halves = two. 

La  moitie  de  la  somme.  Half  the  sum. 

b.  The  definite  article  is  required  before  fractions  followed  by  de  +  a 
noun  when  the  noun  is  determined  by  the  definite  article,  a  possessive, 
or  a  demonstrative,  and  similarly  for  pronominal  substitutes  for  such 
constructions : 

La  moitie  du  temps.  Half  the  time. 

Les  trois  quarts  de  ces  (ses)  biens.     Three-fourths  of  those  (his)  goods. 
J* en  prends  les  cinq  sixiemes.  I  take  five-sixths  of  them. 

425.  Multiplicatives.  The  following  are  used  as  adjec- 
tives, or  absolutely  as  nouns  : 

double,  double.  septuple,  sevenfold. 

triple,  triple..  octuple,  eigJU/old. 

quadruple,  quadruple.  nonuple,  nine/old. 

quintuple,  fivefold.  decuple,  tenfold. 

sextuple,  sixfold.  centuple,  hundredfold. 

As  nouns,  le  double,  the  double,  etc. : 
La  triple  alliance.  The  triple  alliance. 

Payer  le  double.  To  pay  twice  as  much. 

a.  Double  is  sometimes  adverb  : 
H  voit  double.  He  sees  double. 

2.  *  Once,'  '  twice,'  *  three  times,'  etc.  =  une  fois,  deux 
fois,  trois  fois,  etc.: 

Dix  fois  dix  font  cent.  Ten  times  ten  make  a  hundred. 

Deux  fois  autant.  Twice  as  much. 

426.  Numeral    Adverbs.      They   are   formed   from   the 
ordinals  by  -ment,  according  to  rule  (cf.  §409) : 
premi^rement,  firsty  firstly.  troisiemement,  tinrdly. 
secondement    \,^^^,,^iy^  etc.  .etc. 
deuxi^mementj 

a.  Substitutes  for  them,  of  very  frequent  use,  are:  d'abord='at 
first,'  puis='then,'  'after  that,'  ensuite  =  *  then,'  *next,'  en  premier 
lieu  =*  in  the  first  place,'  en  second  lieu,  etc.  =  *in  the  second  place,' 
etc.  ;  or  the  Latin  adverb  forms  primo,  secundo,  tertio,  etc.,  abbre- 
viated to  1°,  2°,  3°,  etc. ,  are  used. 


§§427-428]    REMARKS  ON  USE  OF  NUMERALS.  319 

REMARKS  ON  THE  USE  OF  NUMERALS. 

427.  Cardinals  and  Ordinals.    1.  Premier  =' first '  la 
the  only  ordinal  used  to  denote  the  day  of  the  month  or  the 
numerical  title  of  a  ruler ;  otherwise,  cardinals  are  employed : 
Le  premier  (deux,  dix)  mai.  The  first  (second,  tenth)  of  May. 
Le  onze  de  ce  mois.  The  eleventh  of  this  month. 
Napoleon  (Gregoire)  premier.  Napoleon  (Gregory)  the  First. 
Henri  (Catherine)  deux.  Henry  (Catherine)  the  Second. 

2.  Observe  the  following  date  idioms  : 

Quel  jour  du  mois  est-ce  aujour-  What  day  oi  the  month  is  this? 

d'hui? 
Quel  jour  du  mois  sommes-nous  n  ti  h  h 

aujourd'hui  ? 
Quel  quantieme  du  mois  est-ce  ti  it  n  n 

aujourd'hui  ? 

C'est  aujourd'hui  le  quinze.  To-day  is  the  fifteenth. 

Ce  sera  demain  le  seize.  To-morrow  will  be  the  sixteenth. 

Le  six  Janvier.  On  the  sixth  of  January, 

lis  sont  arrives  lundi  They  came  on  Monday. 

D'aujourd'hui  en  huit.  A  week  from  to-day  (future). 

II  y  a  quinze  jours.  A  fortnight  ago. 

3.  Other  numerical  titles,  book,  chapter,  scene,  page,  etc., 
are  expressed  as  in  English,  ordinals  being  used  before. nouns, 
and  either  cardinals  or  ordinals  after  nouns : 

Tome  troisieme  (trois).  Volume  third  (three). 

La  dixi^me  sc6ne  du  second  acte.      The  tenth  scene  of  the  second  act. 

a.  The  first  of  two  ordinals  joined  by  et  or  ou  is  not  uncommonly 
replaced  by  a  cardinal : 
La  quatre  ou  cinqui^me  page.  The  fourth  or  fifth  page. 

6.  Cardinals  must  precede  ordinals  : 
Les  deux  premieres  scenes.  The  first  two  scenes. 

428.  Dimension.  The  various  methods  of  indicating 
dimension  may  be  seen  from  the  following : 

(1)  Une  table  longue  de  dix  pieds.  A  table  ten  feet  long. 

(2)  Une  table  de  10  p.  de  longueur  n      »i       n       n       %% 

(3)  Une  table  de  10  p.  de  long.  »      »       »       n       n 

(4)  Une  table  d'une  longueur  de  10  p.  n      u       n      n       ii 


820  THE  NUMERAL.  [§429 

(5)  La  table  est  longue  de  10  p.  The  table  is  ten  feet  long. 

(6)  La  table  a  10  p.  de  longueur.  n       it       u     »      n       » 

(7)  La  table  a  10  p.  de  long.  n       n       n     n       n       r 

(8)  La  table  a  une  longueur  de  10  p.  m       n       n     n       m       m 
Obs.:  1.  Dimension  after  an  adjective  is  denoted  by  de,  cf.  (1),  (5). 

2.  Substitutes  for  the  adjectival  construction  of  (1)  are  seen  in  (2),  (3),  (4). 

3.  The  verb  'to  be'  is  6tre,  as  in  (5),  or  avoir,  as  in  (6),  (7),  (8). 

4.  Haut,  large,  long  (but  not  '  6pais,'  •  profond ')  may  be  used  as  nouns,  instead 
Of  hauteur,  largeur,  longueur,  cf .  (3),  (7X 

a.  *By,'  of  relative  dimension  =  sur ;  *by,'  after  a  comparative = de  : 

Cette  table  a  dix  pieds  de  longueur    This  table  is  ten  feet  long  by  three 

sur  trois  de  largeur.  wide. 

Plus  (moins)  grand  de  deux  pouces.      Taller  (shorter)  by  two  inches. 

429.  Time  of  Day.     The  method  of  indicating  the  time  of 
day  may  be  seen  from  the  following  : — 

Quelle  heure  est-il  ?  What  time  (o'clock)  is  it  ? 

II  est  une  (deux)  heure(s).  It  is  one  (two)  o'clock. 

H  est  trois  heures  et  demie.  It  is  half-past  three. 

Trois  heures  (et)  un  quart.  A  quarter  past  three. 

Quatre  heures  moins  un  quart.  A  quarter  to  four. 

Trois  heures  trois  quarts.  A  quarter  to  four. 

Trois  heures  dix  (minutes).  Ten  minutes  past  three. 

Six  heures  moins  cinq  (minutes).       Five  minutes  to  six. 

Cinq  heures  cinquante-cinq.  Five  fifty-five. 

II  est  midi  et  demi.  It  is  half-past  twelve  (noon). 

II  est  minuit  (et)  un  quart.  It  is  a  quarter  past  twelve  (night).- 

A  huit  heures  du  soir.  At  eight  o'clock  in  the  evening. 

A  quelle  heure  ?  At  what  o'clock  ? 

A  trois  heures  precises.  At  three  o'clock  precisely. 

Vers  (les)  trois  heures.  Towards  (at  about)  three  o'clock. 

Obs.:  1.  •  It  is  (was,  etc.)'=il  est  (^tait,  etc.). 

2.  Heure(B)  is  never  omitted. 

8.  Et  is  essential  only  at  the  half  hour. 

4.  Deml(e)  agrees  with  heure  (f.)  or  with  midi  (m.),  minnit  (m.). 

5.  Minutes  is  often  omitted. 

1  'A  quarter  to,' '  minutes  to '  is  moins  before  the  following  hour. 
7.  Twelve  o'clock  is  never  dooze  henrea. 


§§43t)-4'32]  PREPOSITIONAL  LOCUTIONS. 


321 


430.  Age.     Idiomatic  expressions  denoting  age  are : 

Quel  4ge  avez-vous  ?  How  old  are  you  ? 

J'ai  vingt  ans.  I  am  twenty  (years  old). 

Je  suis  kg6  de  vingt  ans.  it   n         ft  ti         ti 

Une  fille  S.g6e  de  six  ans.  A  girl  six  years  old  (of  age). 

Plus  age  de  deux  ans.  Older  by  two  years. 

Obs.:  1.  The  construction  with  avolr  is  the  more  common. 
2.  All(8)  may  not  be  omitted  in  specifying  SLge. 
&  '  By ' = de,  after  a  comparison. 


THE   PREPOSITION. 


k,  to,  at,  in,  on,  etc, 
apr^s,  after,  next  to. 
avant,  before. 
avec,  with. 
chez,  loith,  at — *«. 
centre,  against. 
dans,  in{to). 


431.  Simple  Prepositions.    The  following  list  contains 
the  commoner  simple  prepositions  : 

durant,  during.  parini,  among. 

en,  in,  to.  pendant,  during. 

entre,  between,  among.  pour,  for. 

envers,  towards.  sans,  without, 

hormis,  except.  eauf,  save,  except. 

jusque,  till,  until.  selon,  axicording  to, 

malgr^,  in  spite  of.  sous,  under. 

de,  of,  from,  with,  etc.     moyennant,  by  means  of.  suivant,  according  t0. 

depuis,  since,  from.         nonobstant,     notvnth-  sur,  on,  upon. 

derri^re,  behind.  standing.  vers,  towards. 

d^s,  from,  since.  outre,  besides.  voici,  Jiere  is  {are). 

devant,  before.  par,  by,  through.  voilk,  there  is  (are). 

432.  Prepositional    Locutions.      Phrases  with  preposi- 
tional function,  mostly  ending  in  de  or  a,  are  numerous : 

A.  c8t^  de  r^glise.  Beside  the  church. 

Jusqu'k  la  semaine  prochaine.  Until  next  week. 

A.  travers  la  f or^t.  Through  the  forest. 
21 


322  THE  PREPOSITION.  [§§433-435 

Such  locutions  are : 

ik  cause  de,  on  account  of.  au-dcBsus  de,  above.  faute  de,  for  want  of. 

k  c6t6  de.  by  the  side  of.  au  lieu  de,  instead  of.  jusqu'k,  as  far  as,  untii. 

k  force  de,  by  dint  of.  autour  de,  around.  par  delk,  beyond, 

k  regard  de,  loith  regard  to.  au  moyen  de,  by  means  of.  par-dessous,  under, 

k  I'exception  de,  except.  auprfes  de,  near  by.  par-desaus,  over, 

k  I'insu  de,  unknoion  to.  au  travers  de,  across,  through,  prfes  de,  near. 

a  travers,  across,  through,  d'aprfes,  according  to.  quant  k,  as  for. 

au  deli  de,  beyond.  en  de?^  de,  on  this  side  (of).  vis-i-vis  de,  opposite. 

au-dessous  de,  under.  en  d^pit  de,  in  spite  of.  etc.,  etc. 

433.  Position.  Prepositions  regularly  precede  the  governed 
word,  as  in  English : 

Je  parle  de  Jean  (de  lui).  I  speak  of  John  (of  him). 

a.  Conjunctive  personal  pronouns  governed  by  voici,  voilk,  precede  ; 
Me  voici ;  les  voili.  Here  I  am ;  there  they  are. 

En  voici  quelques-uns.  Here  are  some  of  them. 

6.  Durant  is  sometimes  placed  after  its  noun  : 
Durant  sa  vie  {or  sa  vie  durant).       During  his  life. 

434.  Repetition.  The  prepositions  i,  de,  en,  are  regu- 
larly repeated  before  each  governed  substantive ;  the  repetition 
of  other  prepositions  is  regular  in  contrasts,  but  is  elsewhere 
optional,  as  in  English : 

II  aime  k  lire  et  k  6crire.  He  likes  to  read  and  write. 

Le  p^re  de  Jean  et  de  Marie.  The  father  of  John  and  Mary. 

En  France  ou  en  Italic.  In  France  or  Italy. 

Sur  terre  et  sur  mer.  By  land  and  sea. 

Par  la  persuasion  ou  par  la  force.      By  persuasion  or  force. 

But :  Pour  lui  et  (pour)  son  fr^re,  etc. 

IDIOMATIC  DISTINCTIONS. 

435.  Prepositions  vary  greatly  as  to  idiomatic  force  in 
different  languages.  In  the  following  sections  are  given  some 
of  the  various  French  equivalents  of  the  commoner  English 
prepositions. 


§§436-438]         IDIOMATIC  distinctions.  323 

436.  About. 

1.  In  the  sense  of  *  around '=autour  de  : 

Regardez  autour  de  vous.  Look  about  you. 

Autour  de  la  place.  About  the  square. 

2.  In  the  sense  of  *  concerning,'  *of '  =  de,  k  : 

De  quoi  parlez-vous?  What  are  you  talking  about? 

A  quoi  pensez-vous  ?  What  are  you  thinking  about  t 

3.  In  the  sense  of  *  with,'  ♦  about  (the  person) '  =  sur  : 
Avez-vous  de  I'argent  sur  vous  ?        Have  you  any  money  about  you  ? 

4.  Denoting  approximation  =  environ,  prhs  de,  k.  peu  prfes,  vers : 
Environ  (pr^s  de,  k  peu  pres)  deux    About  two  thousand  francs  j  about 

mille  francs  ;  vers  (sur  les)  dix        ten  o'clock ;  about  1830. 
heures ;  vers  1830. 

437.  After. 

1.  Denoting  time,  rank,  order,  position =aprts  : 

Apr^s  diner ;  le  premier  apr^s  le  After  dinner  ;  the  first  after  the 
roi ;  on  met  I'adjectif  aprfes  le  king  ;  the  adjective  is  placed  after 
nom ;  courez  apr6s  lui.  the  noun  ;  run  after  him. 

2.  In  the  sense  of  *  at  the  end  of ' =au  bout  de  : 

Au  bout  de  trois  sidles.  After  three  centuries. 

3.  Unclassified  : 

De  jour  en  jour ;  dessin^  d'apr^s  Day  after  day ;  drawn  after  Baph- 
Raphael ;  le  lendemain  de  son  ael ;  the  day  after  his  return  j  he 
retour  ;  il  tient  de  sa  m^re.  takes  after  his  mother. 

438.  Among. 

1.  In  the  sense  of  *  in  the  midst  of,'  'surrounded  by '=parmi,  some- 
times entre : 

Une  brebis  parmi  les  loups.  A  sheep  among  wolves. 

H  fut  trouv^  entre  les  morts.  He  was  found  among  the  dead. 

2.  '  Among  (dist^butively  or  reciprocally)  '  =  entre  : 

n  le  partagea  entre  ses  amis.  He  divided  it  among  his  friends, 

lis  parlaient  entre  eux.  They  spoke  among  themselves. 

3.  Unclassified : 

C^tait  ainsi  chez  les  Grecs.  It  was  so  among  the  Greeks. 


324  THE  PREPOSITION.  [§§439-441 

439.  At. 

1.  Denoting  place,  time,  =k,  sometimes  en : 

A.  r^cole  ;  k  Douvres  ;  a  table  ;  k  At  school ;  at  Dover  ;  at  table  j  at 

cinq  heures  ;  k  I'age  de  ;  en  tete  five  o'clock  ;    at  the  age  of ;    at 

de ;  en  (au)  meme  temps ;  k  la  the  head  of ;  at  the  same  time ; 

fin  (enfin).  at  last. 

2.  In  the  sense  of  *  at  the  house,  etc.,  of,'  *  at — 's'  =  chez  : 

J'ai  ^t^  chez  vous ;  il  est  chez  I  was  at  your  house ;  he  is  at  Mr. 
Monsieur  Ribot.  Ribot's. 

3.  Unclassified  : 

A    mes    depens ;    k    tout    prix ;  At  my  expense ;  at  any  price ;  at 

d'abord ;  sous  la  main ;  entrer  first ;  at  hand ;  come  (go)  in  at 

par  la  fenetre ;  en  haut  ( bas) ;  au  the  window ;  at  the  top  (bottom) ; 

moins ;  sur  mer ;  en  guerre.  at  least  j  at  sea ;  at  war. 

440.  Before. 

1.  Denoting  place,  in  the  sense  of  *  in  front  of,'  '  in  the  presence  of = 
devant : 

Mettez  cela  devant  le  feu ;  le  jar-  Put  that  before  the  fire ;  the  garden 
din  est  devant  la  maison ;  il  is  before  the  house  ;  he  preached 
pr^cha  devant  le  roi.  before  the  king. 

2.  Denoting  time,  order =avant : 

Avant  midi ;  je  I'ai  vu  avant  vous ;  Before  noon  ;  I  saw  it  before  you ; 
mettez  I'article  avant  le  nom.  put  the  article  before  the  noun. 

3.  Unclassified : 

Sous  mes  yeux  ;  la  veille  de  la  Before  my  eyes  ;  the  day  before 
bataille  ;  comparaitre  par-de-  the  battle ;  to  appear  before  the 
vant  le  juge.  judge. 

441.  By. 

1.  Denoting  the  agent  after  the  passive = par,  de  (cf.  §240) : 

Elle  fut  saisie  par  le  voleur  ;  ils  She  was  seized  by  the  robber ;  they 
sont  aim^s  de  tous.  are  loved  by  all. 

2.  Denoting  means,  way,  etc.  =par  (usually) : 

Par  la  poste ;  par  chemin  de  fer ;  By  post  ;  by  railway  ;  by  this 
par  ce  moyen ;  par  im  ami.  means ;  by  a  friend. 


§442]  IDIOMATIC   DISTINCTIONS.  326 

3.  Denoting  measure  =  de  ;  relative  dimension  =  sur : 

Plus  grand  de  la  tete  ;   plus  ag6    Tallerby  ahead;  older  by  ten  years 
de  dix  ans  (de  beaucoup);  plus       (by  far) ;  heavier  by  a  pound ; 
lourd  d'une  livre  ;  moindre  de       less  by  half  ;  ten  feet  by  six. 
la  moiti6  ;  dix  pieds  sur  six. 

4.  Unclassified: 

De  jour  (nuit);  k  Pann^e ;  goutte  By  day  (night);  by  the  year ;  drop 

k  goutte;     il  est  midi  k  ma  by  drop  ;  it  is  noon  by  my  watch  ; 

montre ;  connaitre  de  vue ;  de  to  know  by  sight ;  by  word  of 

vive  voix;  un  tailleur  de  son  mouth;  a  tailor  by  trade;  to  sell 

^tat ;  vendre  au  poids ;  fait  k  by  weight ;  made  by  hand, 
la  main. 

442.  For. 

1.  In  the  sense  of  *  for  the  sake  of,'  'instead  of,'  '(in  exchange)  for* 
=  pour : 

Mourirpourlapatrie;  je  lefaispour  To  die  for  one's  country ;  I  do  it  for 
vous;  donnez-moi  ceci  pourcela.       you;  give  me  this  for  that. 

2.  Denoting  destination  : 

Je  pars  pour  la  France  ;  une  let-     I  leave  for  France  ;  a  letter  for 
tre  pour  vous.  you. 

3.  Denoting  a  period  of  time  (future)  =  pour : 

Je resterai (pour) huit jours;  j'en     I  shall  stay  (for)  a  week;  I  have 
ai  pour  dix  ans.  enough  of  it  for  ten  years. 

NoTK. — *  For '  of  time  not  future  is  variously  rendered : '  J'fitais  huit  jours  absent 
or  J' 6tais  absent  pendant  huit  jours,'  '  I  was  absent  for  a  week';  '  II  y  a  (voici,  voilit) 
deux  heures  que  je  lis  or  Je  lis  depuis  deux  heures,'  I  have  been  reading  for  two 
hours.' 

4.  Unclassified : 

Mot  h  mot  or  mot  pour  mot ;  un  Word  for  word  ;  a  remedy  for  ;  to 

remade  contre  (pour) ;  trembler  tremble  for  fear  ;  for  example  ; 

de  crainte ;  par  exemple ;  quant  as  for  me  ;  to  sell  for  ten  francs 

k  moi ;  vendre  dix  francs  or  or  to  give  for  ten  francs ;    to 

laisser(donner)  pour  dix  francs;  thank  (punish)  for;    to  change 

remercier  (punir)  de  ;  changer  for ;    it  is  for  you  to  say;   for 

pour  (contre) ;  c'est  k  vous  de  all  that. 
dire ;  malgr6  tout  cela. 


326  THE  PREPOSITION.  [§§443-444 

443.  From. 

1.  Usually =de : 

D  vient  de  Paris;  de  trois  k  He  comes  from  Paris;  from  three 
quatre  heures ;  je  I'ai  appris  to  four  o'clock ;  I  heard  it  from 
de  lui.  him. 

2.  In  the  sense  of  *  because  of,'  *  out  of,'  •  through '  =par : 

Cela  arriva  par  negligence  ;  par  That  happened  from  carelessness  j 
experience  (amitie).  from  experience  (friendship). 

3.  In  the  sense  of  *  dating  from '  =  d^s,  depuis,  k  partir  de  : 

D6s  (depuis,  k  partir  de)  ce  jour  ;      From  that  day ;  from  1820  (on). 
k  partir  de  1820. 

4.  Unclassified : 

D'aujourd'hui  en  huit ;  dessin^  A  week  from  to-day ;  drawn  from 
d'apr^s  nature  ;  boire  dans  un  nature  ;  to  drink  from  a  glass ; 
verre ;  6tez  cela  k  I'enfant.  take  that  from  the  child. 

444.  In,  into. 

1.  Denoting  place  or  time  specifically,  i.e.,  in  the  sense  of  'within,' 
*  inside  of,'  '  in(to)  the  interior  of  '  =  dans  (cf.  §333,  3) ; 

Dans  ce  paquet  (champ) ;    dans    In  this  parcel    (field) ;    in(to)  the 
la  maison ;  dans  I'Afrique  aus-        house  ;   in  South  Africa ;    in  the 
trale  ;     dans    toute    la    ville  j        whole  city ;    in  the  same  year, 
dans  la  mSme  annee. 
Note. — The  governed  noun  usually  has  the  definite  article. 

2.  Denoting  place  or  time  generally = en,  k  (cf.  §333,  2,  3) : 

En  Afrique;  k  la  maison;  aux  In  Africa;  in  the  house  (at  home); 
champs  ;  au  Canada  ;  k  Ber-  in  the  fields ;  in  Canada ;  in  Ber- 
lin ;  k  la  campagne  (ville) ;  en  lin  ;  in  the  country  (city) ;  in 
hiver ;  au  printemps  ;  en  paix.  winter ;    in  spring  ;    in  peace. 

Note.— The  governed  word  after  en  has  but  rarely  the  definite  article  (mostly  in  fixed 
expressions  before  initial  vowel  sound):  •  En  I'air ' ;  '  En  I'honneur  de,'  etc. 

3.  In  the  sense  of  *at  the  end  of  (time) '= dans ;   *in  the  course  of 
(time) '  =  en: 

Le  train  part  dans  une  heure  ;  on  The  train  leaves  in  an  hour ;  one 
peut  aller  k  L.  en  une  heure.  can  go  to  L.  in  an  hour. 


§§445-446]         IDIOMATIC  distinctions. 


327 


4.  Denoting  place,  after  a  superlative  =  de : 

La  plus  grande  ville  du  monde.  The  largest  city  in  the  world. 

5.  Unclassified : 

Par  la  pluie ;    le  matin ;    de  nos  In  the  rain ;    in  the  morning ;   in 

jours ;  par  le  pass^  ;  k  I'avenir ;  our  day(8) ;   in  the  past ;  in  the 

d'avance  ;   entre  les  mains  de  ;  future ;  in  advance  ;  in  the  hands 

k  mon  avis  ;   sous  le  r^gne  de  ;  of ;  in  my  opinion  ;  in  the  reign 

sous  presse ;  de  oette  mani^re ;  of  ;   in  press  j  in  this  way  j  one 

un  sur  dix.  in  ten. 


44S  0£ 

1.  Usually =de: 

Le  toit  de  la  maison  ;  la  ville  de 
Paris  ;  un  homme  d'influence  ; 
une  livre  de  th6 ;  digne  d'hon- 
neur ;  il  parle  d'aller  k  Paris. 

2.  Denoting  material  =  en  : 

Un  pont  en  bois  (fer);  les  pieces 
de  dix  francs  sont  en  or. 

3.  Unclassified  : 

Cest  aimable  k  vous  ;  sur  100 
personnes  50  sont  ^chapp^es ; 
docteur  en  m^decine ;  un  de 
mes  amis ;  majeur. 


The  roof  of  the  house ;  the  city  of 
Paris ;  a  man  of  influence ;  a 
pound  of  tea  ;  worthy  of  honour ; 
he  speaks  of  going  to  Paris. 

A  bridge  of  wood  (iron) ;  ten  franc 
pieces  are  of  gold. 

It  is  kind  of  you  j  of  100  persons 
50  escaped  ;  doctor  of  medicine  ; 
one  of  my  friends  j  of  age. 


446.  On,  upon. 

1.  Usually = sur: 
Le  livre  est  (je  mets  le  livre)  'sur    The  book  is  (I  put  the  book)  on  the 


la  table. 


table. 


2.  Is  omitted  in  dates  before  specified  days  : 

Le  dix  mai ;  je  viendrai  mardi ;  il    On  the  tenth  of  May  ;  I  shall  come 

on  Tuesday ;  he  arrived  on  the 
morrow. 


arriva  le  lendemain. 


328 


THE  PREPOSITION. 


[§§447-449 


3.  Unclassified: 
Par  une  belle  journ^e  d'^t^ ;  mettre 
au  feu ;  pendre  contre  le  mur ; 
dans  la  rue  ;  dans  I'ile  ;  dans 
I'escalier ;  en  (dans  un)  voyage ; 
en  visite  (cong^)  ;  en  chemin 
(route)  ;  d'un  c6te  ;  tomber  par 
terre ;  k  genoux ;  dans  cette 
occasion  ;  k  cheval  (pied)  ;  k 
droite  (gauche) ;  k  son  arriv^e  ; 
au  contraire ;  pour  affaires. 


On  a  fine  summer  day ;  to  put  on 
the  fire ;  to  hang  on  the  wall ; 
on  the  street ;  on  the  island ;  on 
the  stairs ;  on  a  journey ;  on  a 
visit  (a  holiday) ;  on  the  way  (the 
road) ;  on  one  side ;  to  fall  on 
the  ground  ;  on  one's  knees ;  on 
that  occasion ;  on  horseback  (foot); 
on  the  right  (the  left) ;  on  his 
arrival ;  on  the  contrary ;  on 
business. 


447. 

1.  Unclassified 


Out  of. 


Boire  dans  un  verre ;  copier  dans  To  drink  out  of  a  glass ;  to  copy 
un  livre  ;  regarder  par  la  out  of  a  book  ;  to  look  out  of  the 
fenetre  ;  un  sur  dix.  window  ;  one  out  of  ten. 

448.  Over. 

1.  In  the  sense  of  •  above '=au-dessus  de  : 

Au-dessus  de  la  porte  ^taient  ecrits  Over  the  door  were  written  these 
ces  mots ;  les  nombres  au-dessus  words  ;  the  numbers  over  one 
de  mille.  thousand. 

2.  Denoting  motion  above = sur,  par,  par-dessus  : 

Passez  la  main  sur  ce  drap ;  par  Pass  your  hand  over  this  cloth ; 
monts  et  par  vaux ;  il  sauta  over  hill  and  dale ;  he  leaped 
par-dessus  la  haie.  over  the  hedge. 

3.  Unclassified : 

Au  delk  de  la  riviere  ;  I'emporter    Over  the  river  ;  to  triumph  over ; 
sur  (triompher  de) ;  se  rejouir        to  rejoice  over  ;  to  watch  over, 
de ;  veiller  sur. 


449. 


Througrh. 


1.  Denoting  motion  across =^  travers  (au  travers  de),  par  : 
Je  passai  k  travers  (»?.u  travers  de)     I  passed  through  the  forest ;  to 
la  f oret ;  passer  par  Berlin.  through  Berlin. 


§§450-453]  IDIOMATIC  DISTINCTIONS.  329 

2.  In  the  sense  of  '  because  of  J  *  owing  to,' = par : 
Par  negligence.  Through  carelessness. 

450.  Till,  until. 

1.  Unclassified : 

Jusqu'^  demain ;  pas  avant  I'ann^e  Till  to-morrow  ;  not  till  next  year  ; 
prochaine ;  jusqu'ici ;  du  matin  till  now;  from  morning  till 
au  soir.  night. 

451.  To. 

L  Denoting  the  indirect  object =ll  (cf.  §362,  2) : 
Je  I'ai  donn^  k  un  ami.  I  gave  it  to  a  friend. 

2.  Denoting  motion  to=k,  en  (cf.  §  333,  2,  3) ;  in  the  sense  of  *  to  the 
house,  etc. ,  of,'  '  to 's '  =  chez  : 

D  va  4  Paris  (4  I'^cole ;  au  Japon ;  He  goes  to  Paris   (to   school ;    to 

h.  un  bal ;  en  France  ;  en  Por-  Japan ;  to  a  ball ;  to  France ;  to 

tugal ;    chez    eux  ;    chez   mon  Portugal  ;    to  their  house,  etc.  ; 

ami).  to  my  friend's). 

3.  In  the  sense  of  '  towards '= vers  (physical  tendency),  envers  (moral 
tendency) : 

Levez  les  yeux  vers  le  ciel ;  il  est  Raise  your  eyes  to  heaven  ;  he  is 
juste  envers  tous.  just  to  alL 

4.  In  the  sense  of  *  as  far  as '  =  jusqu'k  : 

Venez  jusqu'au  bout  de  la  rue.  Come  to  the  end  of  the  street. 

6.  Unclassified : 

Le  voyage  (train)  de  Montreal ;  The  journey  (train)  to  Montreal ;  to 
^rire  sous  dict^  ;  dans  ce  but.        write  to  dictation  ;  to  this  end. 

452.  Towards. 

See  §  451,  3. 

453.  Under,  underneath. 

1.  Usually = sous  : 
Sous  la  table  ;  sous  la  loi  j   sous    Under  the  table  ;    under  the  law ; 
peine  de  mort.  under  pain  of  death. 


330  THE  PREPOSITION.  [§454 

2.  Denoting  lower  than,  less  than=au-dessous  de  : 

Au-dessous  du  coude  ;  vendre  une  Under  the  elbow  ;  to  sell  a  thing 
chose  au-dessous  de  sa  valeur.  under  its  value. 

3.  Unclassified : 

Fouler  aux  pieds ;  k  cette  condi-  To  tread  under  foot ;  under  this 
tion ;  dans  les  circonstances ;  condition ;  under  the  circum- 
dans  la  n^cessit^  de  ;  mineur.  stances  ;  under  the  necessity  of ; 

under  age. 

454.  With. 

1.  In  the  sense  of  *  along  with,'  *  in  company  with  '=avec  : 

Dlnez  avec  moi  k  I'hdtel ;  un  offi-  Dine  with  me  at  the  hotel ;  an  offi- 
cier  avec  des  soldats.  cer  with  some  soldiers. 

2.  In  the  sense  of  *  at  the  house,  etc. ,  of '  =  chez  : 
II  demeure  chez  nous.  He  lives  with  us. 

3.  Denoting  instrument,  manner = avec  (usually) : 

Frapper  avec  un  marteau  ;  ^crire  To  strike  with  a  hammer ;  to  write 
avec  une  plume  ;  avec  courage  with  a  pen  ;  with  courage  (force), 
(force). 

4.  Denoting  a  characteristic =k : 

Un  homme  k  la  barbe  noire.  A  man  with  a  black  beard. 

5.  •  With '  of  accessory  circumstance  is  usually  turned  by  an  absolute 
construction : 

II  parla  les  yeux  baiss^s.  He  spoke  with  downcast  eyes. 

6.  In  the  sense  of  *  from,'  *  on  account  of,'  and  after  many  verbs  and 
adjectives =de : 

Elle  pleura  de  colore ;  couvrir  de ;  She  wept  with  anger  ;  to  cover 
content  de.  with ;  satisfied  with. 

7.  Unclassified : 

A.  I'exception  de  ;  k  haute  voix  ;  With  the  exception  of ;  with  a  loud 
k  bras  ouverts ;  de  bon  app^tit ;  voice  ;  with  open  arms  ;  with  a 
k  I'ceil  nu ;  de  tout  mon  coeur,  good  appetite  ;  with  the  naked 

eye ;  with  all  my  heart. 


§455] 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


331 


THE  CONJUNCTION. 

455'  Conjunctions.     The  following   table  contains  most 
of  the  conjunctions  and  conjunctive  locutions  in  use : — 


•fk  (la)  condition  que',  on  condition 

that. 
*afin  que'^,  in  order  thaty  so  that. 
ainsi,  therefore,  hence. 
ainsi  que,  as  well  as,  as. 
alors  que,  when. 
k  mesure  que,  as,  just  as. 
*k  moins  que. .  .ne^  unless. 
apr^s  que,  after. 

bk  proportion  que,  in  proportion  as. 
attendu  que,  considering  that. 
+au  cas  oil',  in  case  (that). 
*au  cas  que',  in  case  (that). 
aussi,  hence,  therefore. 
aussitdt  que,  as  soon  as. 
*avant  que^,  before. 
*bien  que*,  though,  although. 
car, /or. 

*ce  n'est  pas  que°,  not  thoL 
cependant,  however,  yet, 
comme,  a^. 

fdans  le  cas  oil',  in  case  (that). 
*de  crainte  que. .  .ne^  for  fear 

that. 
fde  fa9on  que^  so  that. 
tde  mani^re  que  2,  so  that. 
de  meme  que,  as  well  as. 
*de  peur  que. ,  .ne>^,  for  fear  that. 
depuis  que,  since. 
tde  (telle)  sorte  que^,  so  that. 
d6s  que,  as  soon  as,  when,  since. 
done,  now,  then,  therefore. 
*en  attendant  que^,  untU. 
*en  cas  que',  in  case  (thai), 
encore,  yet,  still. 


*encore  que*,  though,  although. 

fen  sorte  que  2,  so  that. 

*en  supposant  que',  supposing  that, 

et,  and. 

et. .  .et,  both. .  .and. 

except^  que,  except  thai. 

tjusqu'^  ce  qUe^,  until. 

•loin.que*^,  far  from. 

lorsque,  when, 

mais,  but. 

*malgr^  que*,  tlwugh,  although, 

n^nmoins,  nevert^ieless. 

ni,  nor. 

ni. .  .ni. . .(. .  .ne),  neither. .  .nor, 

•nouobstant    que*,    notwithstanding 

that. 
*non  (pas)  que*,  not  that. 
non  seulement . . .  mais   encore,  not 

only . .  .but  also. 
or,  now. 
ou,  or. 

ou. .  .ou,  either. .  .or. 
outre  que,  besides  that. 
parce  que,  because. 
partant,  therefore,  hence. 
pendant  que,  while,  whilst. 
*pour  peu  que*,  if  ever  so  little. 
*pour  que'^,  in  order  that. 
pourtant,  yet,  however. 
*pourvu  que',  provided  thai. 
puisque,  since. 
quand,  when. 

tquand  meme*,  though,  even  if, 
tque^,  that,  than,  as. 
*quoique*,  though,  although 


332  THE  CONJUNCTION.  [§§456-457 


le* ,  without  *soit  que . . . ou  que*,  whether ..  .or, 

selon  que,  according  as.  suivant  que,  according  as. 

tsi^  if  (%27 1,  3,  a).  *suppos6  que^  suppose  that. 

fsi  bien  que  2,  so  that.  tandis  que,  whilst,  whereas. 

tsi  peu  que*,  however  little.  tant. .  .que,  both. .  .and. 

sinon,  if  not,  or  else.  tant  que,  as  long  as. 

Bit6t  que,  as  soon  as.  ttellement . . .  que^,  so  . .  that. 

soit. .  .soit,  whetlier. .  .or.  toutefois,  yet,  nevertheless. 

soit. .  .ou,  wJtether. .  .or.  une  fois  que,  as  soon  as. 

*soit  que. .  .soit  que*,  whether. .  .or.     vu  que,  seeing  that. 

*  Followed  by  the  subjunctive. 

t  Followed  by  the  indicative  or  subjunctive. 

N.B. — Conjunctions  without  *  or  t»in  the  table  are  followed  by  the  indicative. 

1  See  §271, 1  (time  before  which  or  up  to  which). 

2  See  §271,  2  (purpose  or  result). 

5  See  §271,  3  (condition). 
4  See  §271,  4  (concession). 

6  See  §271,  6  (negation). 

6  See  §269,  §271,  6,  and  §458 

USE  OF  CERTAIN  CONJUNCTIONS. 

456.  Kt.  1.  When  repeated,  et  usually  denotes  'both. . . 
and ' ;  otherwise  it  stands  with  the  last  only  of  two  or  more 
clauses : 

Je  connais  et  le  p^re  et  le  fils.  I  know  both  the  father  and  son. 

Les  femmes  pleuraient,  criaient  et    The  women  wept  (and)  screamed 
gesticulaient.  and  gesticulated. 

2.  *  And  *  after  a  verb  of  motion  is  usually  untranslated  : 
Allez  leur  parler.  Go  and  speak  to  them. 

457.  Ni.  1.  A  finite  verb  with  ni  or  ni.  .  .ni  must  be 
preceded  by  ne : 

H  n'a  ni  or  ni  argent.  He  has  neither  gold  nor  silver. 

H  ne  mange  ni  ne  boit.  He  neither  eats  nor  drinks. 

a.  For  the  position  of  ni. .  .ni. .  .ne,  see  §416,  d. 


§§458-459]  USE  of  certain  conjunctions.  333 

2.  In  sentences  of  negative  force,  *  and,'  *  or,'  are  rendered 
by  ni: 

Honneurs  ni  richesses  ne  font  le  Honours  and  wealth  do  not  consti- 
bonheur.  tute  happiness. 

3.  Observe  the  following  equivalents  of  *  neither,'  *not 
either,'  *nor  either,'  'nor,'  when  not  correlative  : 

Je  ne  le  feral  pas. — Ni  moi  non  I  shall  not  do  it. — Nor  I  either 
plus.  {or  Neither  shall  I). 

II  ne  le  fera  pas  non  plus.  He  will  not  do  it  either. 

H  ne  I'a  pas  fait,  et  il  ne  le  fera  He  has  not  done  it,  nor  will  he 
pas.  (do  it). 

458.  Que.  1.  Que  =* that'  is  followed  bj  the  indicative 
or  subjunctive  according  to  the  context : 

Je  dis  que  vous  avez  raison.  I  say  that  you  are  right. 

Je  suis  f§,ch6  que  vous  ayez  raison.     I  am  sorry  that  you  are  right* 

2.  Que  often  replaces  another  conjunction ;  when  so  used, 
it  takes  the  same  construction  as  the  conjunction  for  which  it 
stands,  except  that  que  instead  of  si  = '  if '  always  requires 
the  subjunctive : 

Quand  vous  aurez  fini,  et  que  vous  When  you  have  finished,  and  (when 

aurez  le  temps.  you)  have  time. 

Venez  que  ( = '  afin  que,'    *  pour  Come  that  I  may  see  you. 

que')  je  vous  voie. 

^  vous  venez  demain,  et  que  vous  If  you  come  to-morrow,  and  (if  you) 

ayez  le  temps.  have  time. 

3.  Que  may  not  be  omitted  before  a  finite  verb,  as  *  that  * 
often  is  in  English  : 

Je  crois  qu'il  viendra  et  qu'il  res-  I  think  (that)  he  will  come  and 
tera.  (that  he  will)  stay. 

459.  Distinctions.  The  following  conjunctions  are  espe- 
cially liable  to  be  confounded  in  use : 

1.  Quand,  Lorsque.  They  are  equivalents  in  the  sense  of  *  when,* 
but  quand  (jjot  'lorsque')  serves  also  as  an  interrogative  adverb  in 
direct  or  indirect  questions  : 


334 


THE  INTERJECTION. 


[§460 


Quand  est-il  arriv^  ? 
Dis-moi  quand  il  est  airiv^. 
Quand  {or  lorsque)  je  I'ai  vu. 
Nous  partirons  lorsque  {or  quand) 
la  lettre  arrivera. 


When  did  he  come  ? 

Tell  me  when  he  came. 

When  I  saw  him. 

We  shall    leave   when    the  letter 


2.  Pendant  que,  Tandis  que.  Pendant  que  =  •  while,'  'whilst,' 
*  during  the  time  that';  tandis  que=' while,'  'whilst,'  'during  the 
time  that,'  and  also,  'whilst,'  *  on  the  contrary,'  '  whereas ' : 

Lisez  le  journal  pendant  que  j'^cris    Read  the  newspaper  while  I  write 

this  note. 
Whilst  you  are  here. 
The  father  works,   while  the  son 
does  nothing. 

3.  Depuis  que,  Puisque.  Depuis  que  denotes  time ;  puisque  denotes 
cause  assigned : 

Je  suis  bien  seul  depuis  que  mon  I  am  very  lonely  since   my  brother 

frfere  est  parti.  went  away. 

H  me  faut  rester,  puisqu'il  n'y  a  I  must  remain,   since  there  is  no 

pas  de  train  ce  soir.  train  this  evening. 


ce  billet. 
Tandis  que  vous  Stes  ici. 
Le  p6re  travaille,  tandis  que  le  fils 

ne  fait  rien. 


THE  INTERJECTION. 

460.   Interjections.     The  commoner  interjections  and  ex- 
pressions used  as  such  are  : — 

1.  Joy,  admiration,  approval : 

shl,  ah/  k  la  bonne  heure  ! ,  toell done /,  that*8 

ha,    ha !    or  hi,    hi !  {to    denote        right ! 

laughter).  bis  ! ,  encore  ! 

bon  ! ,  good !  bravo  !  or  bravissimo  ! ,  well  dome  !, 

bien  ! ,  good  !  '  bravo  ! 

k  merveille  ! ,  capital !  hourra  !  or  vivat ! ,  hurrah  ! 

2.  Disgust,  disapproval,  indifference  : 

%.\^fie!  f oin  de  ! ,  a  plague  upon  ! 

fi  done  ! ,  for  shame  !  pouah  ! ,  disgusting .',  faugh  t 

fie  de!,^  on.'  oh!,o^/ 


§460] 


INTERJECTIONS. 


335 


par  exemple  ! ,  dear  me  / 
zest ! ,  pshaw  ! 


bah  !  or  ah  !  bah  ! ,    nonsense  /, 

pooh-pooh  ! 
baste  ! ,  enough  /,  pooh  /,  nonaense  / 

3.  Grief,  fear,  pain : 
ah  ! ,  aA  / 
oh!,  oh! 
h^las  ! ,  alas  ! 
aie  !,  oA/,  oh  dear! 

4.  Surprise: 
ah  !,  ah  ! 
oh!,  o/t/ 
eh!,  a^/ 
ha  !,  Ao  / 
comment !,  what ! 

5.  Encouragement: 
allons  !,  come  ! 
courage  !,  cheer  up  ! 
voyons  I,  come  now  ! 
qk  !,  or  or  9^  !,  or  sus  !,  or  or  sua  !, 

now  then  ! 

6.  Warning : 
gare  !,  look  out  /,  talce  care  ! 

7.  Calling: 
h^  !,  or  oM  !,  or  hoU  1,  ho  /,  hoy  ! 

halloo  ! 
hem  !,  ahem! 

8.  Calling  for  aid  : 

k  moi !,  or  au  secours  !,  help  I  au  voleur  ?,  stop  thief! 

k  I'assassin  or  au  meurtre !,  murder!  au  feu  1,  fire  1 

9.  Silencing,  stopping: 

chut  !  or  st !,  hush!  '  tout  doux  or  tout  beau  !,  gently! 

silence  !,  silence!  not  so  fast! 

motus  !,  not  a  word  !  halte-U  !,  stop  there  ! 

NoT>.— Akin  to  interjections  are  imitations  of  sounds  :  Cric  crac  !,  breaking  ;  drelin, 
drelin  !  or  drelin,  din,  din!,  ringing;  pan  pan  !,  bang  ;  pit  paf !,  gunshots;  boum  I, 
cannonading  ;  rataplan  !,  drum  ;  dare  dare  !,  quick  movement ;  cahin-caha,  jogging 
along;  clopin-clopant,  fiobbling;  tio  tao,  ticking,  eta 


mis^ricorde  ! ,  mercy  ! 
ouf  !  {to  express  suffocation,  or  relief 
and  exhaustion). 


quoi !,  what ! 

vraiment !,  indeed! 

tiens  !,  indeed  ! 

par  exemple !,  you  donH  say  so! 

misericorde  !,  m,ercy  ! 

en  avant !,  forward  ! 
ferme  !,  steady  ! 
preste  !,  quick! 


hoik  I,  stop!,  stop! 

st !,  hi  there  ! 

qui  vive  !,  who  goes  there! 


836 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


[§461 


ABBREVIATIONS. 
461.   French  Abbreviations.     The  following  are 

commoner  abbreviations  used  in  French  ; 


the 


c.-k.-d.  =c'est-^-dire,  that  is. 

Qie  Qj.  O=compagnie,  company. 

etc.  =et  caetera. 

fr.  or  f.  =  francs,  francs. 

h.  =  heure,  hour. 

in-fo  =  in-folio,  folio. 

J.-C.  =  Jesus-Christ,  Jesus  Christ. 

M.  =  Monsieur,  Air. 

MM.  =  Messieurs,  Messrs. 

M.R.  or  M.R. . .  =  Monsieur  R.  or 
Monsieur  R  Trois-Etoiles,  Mr. 
H.  or  Mr.  B—. 

M*  =  marchand,  merchant. 

M®  (pi.  M"")  =  maitre,  is  used  with 
names  of  lavoyers  instead  of  mon- 
sieur. 

Mgr.  (pi.  NNSS.)  =  monseigneur, 
my  lord. 

Mn«  (pi.  Mi»-)  =  Mademoiselle, 
Miss. 


M"'^  (pi.  M««)= Madame,  Mrs. 

M'»  =  maison,  house,  firm. 

ms.  (pi.  mss.)  =  manuscrit,  manu- 
script. 

N.-D.  =Notre-Dame,  Our  Lady. 

N.S.  =Notre-Seigneur,  Our  Lord, 

n'*=num^ro,  number. 

R.S.V.P.  =Repondez  s'il  vous  platt, 
an  answer  is  requested. 

S.  A.  R.  =  Son  Altesse  Royale,  His 
Royal  Highness. 

s.-ent.  =sous-entendu,  understood. 

S.  Exc.  =Son  Excellence,  His  Ex- 
cellency. 

S.  M.  (pi.  LL.  MM.)  =  Sa  Majesty, 
His  (Her)  Majesty. 

S.  S.  =  Sa  Saintet^,  His  Holiness. 

s.  V.  p.  =  s'il   vous    plait,    if  you, 
please. 

V*= veuve,  widow. 


1^  (in  titles)  =  premier,  the  First.  V  (fem.  1")  =  premier,  first. 

II  (in  titles)  =  deux,  the  Second.  2*=deuxi^me,  second. 

Le  XV«  si^le,  etc.  =le  quinzi^me  l«=primo,  firstly. 

ai^lGp  the  15th  century.  7*^=septembre, /S'c/J^wider.     Etc. 


EZEBCiSES  i-ii,  a.  337 

EXERCISES. 


[The  references  at  the  head  of  the  exercises  are  to  the  sections  in  the 
Grammar  on  which  they  are  based.] 

EXERCISE  I,  a.  (§§156-161.) 

1.  What  are  you  eating?  2.  We  are  eating  apples.  3.  It 
was  necessary  that  they  should  eat.  4.  Who  is  calling? 
5.  We  are  calling.  6.  The  general  leads  his  army.  7.  We 
shall  lead  the  horses.  8.  Who  is  throwing  stones?  9.  It  will 
freeze.  10.  He  is  buying  a  coat,  11.  We  never  yield. 
12.  They  will  never  yield.  13.  The  servant  is  peeling  apples. 
14.  When  will  he  pay?  15.  They  never  pay.  16.  The  servant 
is  cleaning  the  kitchen.  17.  We  shall  clean  our  gun.  18.  The 
little  girl  wipes  the  dishes.  19.  The  farmer  sows  the  seed. 
20.  It  is  freezing.  21.  We  are  going  to  school.  22.  We 
went  home.  23.  They  used  to  go  to  market  on  Saturdays. 
24.  He  will  send  it.  25.  The  servant  is  bringing  the  horses. 
26.  I  send  him  there.  27.  I  shall  go  to  school.  28.  Let 
them  go  to  the  city.  29.  It  was  necessary  that  you  should  go 
there.  30.  They  will  buy  a  box.  31.  Let  us  bring  the  children. 
32.  Bring  the  childreni  33.  Let  him  not  throw  stones. 
34.  We  have  led  the  horses  to  the  stable.  35.  Let  us  trace  a 
line.  30.  We  are  advancing.  37.  They  were  eating.  38.  We 
ate.  39.  They  will  eat.  40.  Let  us  advance.  41.  Let  us 
never  yield.  42.  Let  us  call  the  children.  43.  Let  us  not  go 
there.  44.  The  queen  has  been  reigning  a  long  time.  45.  The 
children  were  throwing  stones.  46.  He  led  the  horse  to  the 
stable.  47.  He  paid  the  money.  48.  The  servant  wiped  the 
dishes.     49.  The  child  traced  a  line. 

EXERCISE  II,  a.  (§§162-166.) 

1.  He  is  running.    2.  Shall  we  run?    3.  Run  fast,  my  little 
boy.     4.  He  is  a,cquiring  a  fortune.     6.  It  was  necessary  that 
we  should  run.     6.  They  will  conquer  that  city.       7.  The 
22 


338  EXERCISE  III,  a. 

general  has  acquired  glory.  8.  He  gives  him  consecrated 
bread.  9.  They  acquire  knowledge.  10.  We  shall  acquire 
property.      11.  There  is  holy  water.       12.  Let  us  not  run. 

13.  Let  them  acquire  it.  14.  We  are  gathering  apples. 
15.  It  was  necessary  that  they  should  gather  flowers.  16.  He 
welcomed  me.  17.  We  shall  gather  them.  18.  Let  us  not 
start  with  (de)  fear.  19.  He  assails  his  enemy.  20.  He  will 
assail  his  enemy.  21.  He  is  sleeping.  22.  Let  us  not  sleep. 
23.  He  must  sleep.  24.  We  shall  soon  sleep.  25.  They  fall 
asleep.  26.  He  is  leaving  for  France.  27.  He  left  yesterday. 
28.  If  he  were  asleep,  I  should  call  him.  29.  He  will  go  out. 
30.  Let  him  not  go  out.  31.  The  water  boils.  32.  The  water 
was  boiling.  33.  When  he  speaks,  he  lies.  34.  He  makes 
use  of  it.  35.  He  will  feel  it.  36.  If  he  were  here,  we  should 
not  sleep.  37.  The  water  will  soon  boil.  38.  He  has  run. 
39.  It  was  necessary  that  we  should  sleep.  40.  I  have  not 
slept.  41.  He  never  lies.  42.  The  horses  would  run,  if 
they  were  not  tired.  43.  They  ran.  44.  We  acquired  it. 
45.  The  horses  run  over  the  field.  46.  He  does  not  consent 
to  it.  47.  He  will  never  consent  to  it.  48.  Let  him  not 
make  use  of  it.     49.  We  were  running.     50.  We  fell  asleep. 

EXERCISE  III,  a.  (§§167-179.) 

1.  He  failed  on  (en)  that  occasion.  2.  It  is  a  prosperous 
country.  3.  He  flees.  4.  Let  us  not  flee.  5.  They  fled. 
6.  He  will  not  flee.  7.  It  was  necessary  that  I  should  flee. 
8.  Here  lies  a  hero.  9.  Here  lie  the  remains  of  the  great 
Napoleon.  10.  I  hate  evil.  11.  Men  hate  their  enemies. 
12.  Let  us  not  hate  our  enemies.     13.  He  hates  his  father. 

14.  Let  him  not  hate  his  father.  15.  Was  it  necessary  that 
he  should  hate  his  father?  16.  She  dies.  17.  They  will 
die.  18.  Let  us  not  die.  19.  It  was  necessary  that  he  should 
die.  20.  He  died.  21.  She  will  die.  22.  Let  him  not  die. 
23.  If  they  died,  we  should  be  sorry  for  it.  24.  That  tree  is 
dying  away.  25.  Open  the  door.  26.  We  have  opened  the 
box.  27.  He  oflTers  me  his  book.  28.  She  used  to  suffer  a 
great  deal.  29.  If  we  had  any,  we  should  ofier  you  some. 
30.  Columbus  discovered  America.  31.  We  held  it.  32.  Let 
him  not  hold  it.     33.  I  hold  it.     34.  Let  us  hold  it.     35.  We 


EXERCISE  IV,  a.  339 

are  coming.  36.  We  shall  come.  37.  We  should  come,  if  you 
would  come.  38.  If  I  should  come,  I  should  find  it.  39.  They 
are  coming  back.  40.  It  is  necessary  that  he  come.  41.  It 
was  necessary  that  he  should  come.  42.  Hold  it.  43.  He 
has  held  it.  44.  The  purse  contains  money.  45.  If  he  comes, 
we  shall  be  glad  (of  it).  46.  They  will  come  back.  47.  He 
is  ill  clad.  48.  He  clothes  himself  well.  49.  He  will  clothe 
his  child.     50.  It  is  necessary  that  he  clothe  his  child. 

EXERCISE  IV,  a.  (§§180-188.) 

1.  We  beat  the  horse.  2.  He  fells  the  tree.  3.  It  is 
necessary  that  he  fight  the  enemy.  4.  We  drink  water.  5. 
They  drink  milk.  6.  They  were  drinking  wine.  7.  We  shall 
drink  water.  8.  Let  him  drink  milk.  9.  He  has  drunk  the 
wine.  10.  It  was  necessary  that  we  should  drink  wine.  11. 
We  shall  not  drink  wine.  12.  The  wind  rustles  in  the  trees. 
13.  He  encloses  his  garden.  14.  He  will  close  the  bargain. 
15.  Those  flowers  will  soon  open.  16.  He  is  concluding  his 
argument.  17.  Let  us  conclude  the  bargain.  18.  The  bread 
is  baking  well.  19.  If  he  were  there,  he  would  conclude 
the  afiair.  20.  It  was  necessary  that  he  should  conclude  the 
bargain.  21.  He  drives  the  cows  to  the  field.  22.  They 
destroyed  their  books.  23.  They  will  construct  houses.  24. 
Let  us  translate  this  phrase.  25.  It  was  necessary  that  we 
should  translate  that  book.  26.  He  led  his  horse  to  the 
stable.  27.  We  were  translating  our  exercise.  28.  We  con- 
structed a  house.  29.  Let  him  translate  his  lesson.  30.  I 
have  translated  a  book.  31.  I  translated  a  book.  32.  She 
was  preserving  plums.  33.  We  are  preserving  cherries.  34. 
That  suffices.  35.  That  will  be  sufficient.  36.  Let  that 
suffice.  37.  Five  francs  a  day  are  sufficient  for  him.  38.  I 
know  that  gentleman.  39.  It  is  necessary  that  we  should 
know  him.  40.  Let  him  appear.  41.  The  cows  eat  the  grass. 
42.  It  was  necessary  that  we  should  know  him.  43.  It  was 
necessary  that  he  should  appear.  44.  He  will  not  disappear. 
45.  We  used  to  know  him.  46.  When  he  appears,  we  shall 
conclude  the  affair.  47.  Let  him  recognize  him.  48.  You 
know  him,  do  you  not?  49.  You  will  know  him.  50.  He 
reappeared. 


340  EXERCISES  v-vi,  a. 

EXERCISE  V,  a.  (§§189-193.) 

1.  The  little  girl  is  sewing.  2.  We  were  sewing.  3.  They 
will  sew.  4.  She  sewed.  5.  They  had  sewed.  6.  Let  us 
sew.     7.  Let  her  not  sew.     8.  Let  us  not  fear.     9.  They  fear. 

10.  Let  him  not  be  afraid.  11.  We  shall  not  fear.  12.  Men 
fear  death.  13.  They  pity  us.  14.  He  was  painting  a  pic- 
ture. 15.  Put  out  the  fire.  16.  Let  him  put  out  the  lamp. 
17.  It  was  necessary  that  we  should  rejoin  our  friends.  18. 
The  general  girds  on  his  sword.  19.  I  feared  the  rain.  20.  I 
believe  you.  21.  We  shall  not  believe  it.  22.  Let  us  believe 
it.  23.  I  used  to  believe  it.  24.  It  is  necessary  that  he 
should  believe  it.  25.  He  did  not  believe  it.  26.  It  was 
necessary  that  he  should  believe  it.  27.  We  did  not  believe 
it.  28.  Do  not  believe  it.  29.  The  flowers  are  growing.  30. 
The  tree  grows.  31.  That  tree  will  grow  fast.  32.  We  grew. 
33.  It  was  necessary  that  we  should  grow.  34.  The  trees 
were  growing  fast.  35.  Let  it  grow.  36.  He  has  believed. 
37.  The  tree  has  grown.  38.  Do  not  say  so  {le).  39.  We 
say  so.  40.  We  should  not  say  so,  if  we  did  not  believe  it. 
41.  Is  it  necessary  that  he  should  say  so?  42.  They  used 
to  say  so.  43.  Let  him  not  say  so.  44.  Was  it  necessary 
that  we  should  say  so  ?  45.  Do  not  say  so  again.  46.  Do  not 
slander.  47.  They  do  not  say  so.  48.  Cain  was  cursed  by 
{de)  Grod.  49.  We  do  not  curse  our  enemies.  50.  If  I  should 
say  so,  would  you  believe  me  ? 

EXERCISE  VI,  a.  (§§194-200.) 

1.  I  was  writing  when  he  came.  2.  Let  us  write  our  ex- 
ercise. 3.  We  wrote  a  letter.  4.  Write  your  lesson.  5.  Let 
him  write.  6.  We  shall  write  our  letter.  7.  It  was  neces- 
sary that  you  should  write.  8.  He  has  described  his  travels. 
9.  They  are  writing.     10.  Would  you  write,  if  I  should  write*? 

11.  Do  what  I  say.  12.  He  did  not  do  it.  13.  He  has  not 
done  his  work.  14.  Let  us  do  our  work.  15.  Let  him  do 
what  I  said.  16.  It  was  necessary  that  you  should  do  so. 
17.  I  shall  do  so  when  you  come.  18.  If  you  do  so,  we  shall 
do  so.  1 9.  If  you  should  say  so,  we  should  do  it.  20.  I  was 
doing  my  work  when  he  came.  21.  It  is  necessary  that  we 
do  that.     22.  If  I  do  this,  will  you  do  thati     23.  I  waa 


EXERCISE  vn,  a.  341 

reading,  when  he  came.     24.  He  will  never  read  that  book. 

25.  Read  that  letter.  26.  They  are  reading  their  book. 
27.  Did  you  not  read  the  newspaper?  28.  If  I  should  read 
this  book,  would  you  read  that  one?  29.  Is  he  reading  the 
newspaper?  30.  It  was  necessary  that  I  should  read  the 
letter.  31.  Let  him  not  read  that  book.  32.  Did  they  not 
read  this  book  ?  33.  I  placed  the  book  on  the  table.  34.  Do 
not  commit  that  crime.  35.  It  is  necessary  that  he  put  on 
his  coat.  36.  We  shall  put  on  our  clothes.  37.  They  have 
placed  their  books  on  the  table.  38.  We  shall  not  permit  it. 
39.  Does  he  permit  it  ?  40.  It  was  necessary  that  he  should 
not  permit  it.  41.  What  would  you  say,  if  we  should  permit 
it.  42.  The  miller  grinds  the  wheat.  43.  We  are  grinding 
wheat.  44.  We  ground  the  wheat.  45.  Let  him  grind  the 
wheat.  46.  The  prophet  said  that  a  child  would  be  born. 
47.  We  are  born  weak.  48.  We  were  born  [on]  the  same 
day.  49.  Let  a  young  nation  arise !  50.  Was  it  necessary 
that  hatred  should  arise  between  them  1 

EXERCISE  VII,  a.  (§§201-211.) 

1.  That  does  not  please  him  (lui).  2.  You  please  me. 
3.  Come  when  it  pleases  you.  4.  Do  so  if  you  please. 
5.  May  it  please  you.  6.  Take  your  places.  7.  He  takes 
his  hat  from  (sur)  the  table.  8.  If  I  should  take  it,  what 
would  you  do?  9.  Let  him  take  his  book.  10.  It  was 
necessary  that  he  should  take  the  medicine.  11.  We  took 
our  places.  12.  Have  you  learnt  your  lesson?  13.  He  will 
not  undertake  that.  14.  Fire  resolves  wood  into  (en)  smoke. 
15.  We  have  resolved  to  (de)  do  it.  16.  He  solved  the  diffi- 
culty. 17.  He  will  solve  the  difficulty.  18.  Let  us  not  laugh 
at  (de)  him.  1 9.  Why  is  he  laughing  ?  20.  If  I  should  laugh, 
what  would  you  say?  21.  Was  it  necessary  that  he  should 
laugh?  22.  We  laugh  at  them.  23.  Water  springs  from 
the  earth.     24.  Follow  me.     25.  The  dog  follows  his  master. 

26.  Let  him  follow  us.  27.  It  is  necessary  that  we  should 
follow  you.  28.  We  followed  him.  29.  If  I  should  follow 
him,  it  would  please  him.  30.  We  shall  never  follow  him. 
31.  Is  he  not  milking  the  cow?  32.  If  I  should  do  that,  he 
would  not  milk  the  cows.  33.  When  we  were  in  the  country, 
we  used  to  milk   the   cows.      34.  Let  him  milk   the  cow. 


342  EXERCISE  VIII,  a. 

35.  That  distracts  him  from  his  work.  36.  The  general  con- 
quers  his  enemies.  37.  We  conquer  our  passions.  38.  If 
you  were  to  conquer  your  passions,  you  would  be  happy. 
39.  Our  army  will  conquer.  40.  We  have  conquered  our 
enemies.  41.  Let  him  conquer  his  passions.  42.  He  is  not 
selling  his  house.  43.  He  will  never  sell  it.  44.  Horses  live 
on  (de)  hay.  45.  He  lives  only  for  himself.  46.  Let  us  live 
in  {en)  peace.  47.  He  will  live  yet  [a]  long  time.  48.  Louis 
XIV.  lived  in  the  17  th  century.  49.  Long  live  the  King. 
50.  Hurrah  for  liberty ! 

EXERCISE  VIII,  a.  (§§212-222.) 

\.  We  receive  our  friends.  2.  He  has  received  the  letter. 
3.  Let  us  not  receive  the  money.  4.  If  they  should  receive 
us,  we  should  be  glad.  5.  We  owe  him  {lui)  money.  6.  We 
shall  owe  him  something.  7.  If  they  receive  it,  we  shall  tell 
(it  to)  you.  8.  Let  him  not  receive  it.  9.  We  received  the 
money.  10.  Sit  down.  11.  He  sits  down.  12.  They  will  sit 
down.  13.  Let  us  sit  down.  14.  It  was  necessary  that  we 
should  sit  down.  15.  If  we  should  sit  down,  would  you  tell 
(raconier)  us  a  story?  16.  Let  them  not  sit  down.  17.  That 
does  not  become  him  (lui).  18.  That  will  not  become  us. 
19.  We  sit  down.  20.  The  payment  falls  due.  21.  His 
influence  has  declined.  22.  It  will  be  necessary  to  do  it.  23. 
It  is  necessary  to  be  there.  24.  Passion  moves  men.  25. 
Steam  and  water  drive  {mouvoir)  machines.  26.  His  story 
moved  {dmouvoir)  the  audience.  27.  Such  a  story  must  move 
men.  28.  We  shall  go  out,  if  it  does  not  rain.  29.  It  was  rain- 
ing when  we  came.  30.  It  will  rain.  31.  I  did  not  think  it 
would  rain.  32.  It  has  rained.  33.  I  shall  come,  if  I  can. 
34.   I  shall  come  when  I  can.      35.   They  cannot  go  away. 

36.  I  would  do  so,  if  I  could.  37.  I  wish  that  he  may  not  be 
able  to  do  so.  38.  I  could  do  that,  if  I  were  rich.  39.  You 
may  do  so,  if  you  desire.  40.  Could  (condl.)  you  not  give  me 
some?  41.  We  know  our  lesson.  42.  Do  you  know  how  to 
do  that  1  43.  That  child  cannot  write ;  he  is  too  young.  44. 
I  cannot  write ;  I  have  a  sore  finger.  45.  Do  you  know  that 
gentleman?  46.  I  used  to  know  how  to  swim.  47.  Your 
father  must  not  know  that.  48.  We  knew  it.  49.  We  shall 
know  it  to-morrow. 


EXERCISES  ix-x,  a.  343 


EXERCISE  IX,  a.  (§§223-225.) 

1.  That  horse  is  worth  one  hundred  dollars.  2.  Virtue  is 
worth  more  (mieux)  than  riches.  3.  Those  houses  are  worth 
more  (plus)  than  these.  4.  That  was  worth  more  last  year. 
6.  That  will  be  worth  more  next  year.  6.  If  that  were  worth 
more,  I  should  take  it.  7.  He  has  nothing  (which  is)  of  value 
(subj.).  8.  We  shall  not  see  him  again.  9.  Do  you  see 
him?  10.  I  saw  him.  11.  We  saw  him.  12.  If  we  should 
see  him,  we  should  tell  (it  to)  him.  13.  When  we  see  him, 
we  shall  speak  to  him  about  it.  14.  We  must  see  our  parents. 
15.  It  was  necessary  that  we  should  see  our  children.  16.  I 
have  seen  him.  17.  If  we  wished  to  do  it,  we  could  do  it. 
18.  You  may  come  when  you  wish.  19.  He  will  wish  to  do 
that  when  he  can.  20.  Be  so  good  as  to  sit  down.  21.  If 
you  will  sell  your  house,  I  shall  buy  it.  22.  Will  you  be  so 
kind  as  to  give  me  some*?  23.  We  do  not  wish  to  do  that. 
24.  Should  you  like  to  see  him  ?  25.  I  should  like  to  see  him, 
if  I  could.  26.  I  could  do  this,  if  I  wished.  27.  If  it  rains, 
we  cannot  go  out.  28.  If  they  were  willing,  they  could  do  it. 
29.  If  they  are  not  willing  to  tell  (it  to)  you,  you  will  not 
know  how  to  do  it. 


EXERCISE  X,  a.  (§§227-229.) 

Qu'est  devenu  son  fr^re  ?  What  has  become  of  his  brother? 

Je  sais  ce  qu'il  est  devenu.  I  know  what  has  become  of  him. 

EUe  est  n^.  She  was  bom. 

Elle  est  morte.  She  died. 

EUe  est  mont^e.  She  has  gone  up  {or  up  stairs). 

NoTK.— In  this  exercise,  verbs  having  the  asterisk  in  the  list  §229,  2,  are  to  be  COH- 
Jugated  with  6tre  when  intransitive. 

1.  Your  mother  has  come,  has  she  not?  2.  No,  she  has 
not  yet  come ;  she  will  come  to-morrow.  3.  Our  friends  have 
gone  to  church ;  let  us  go  (there)  too.  4.  The  old  gentleman 
who  lived  in  that  house  died  last  night.  5.  (The)  Queen 
Victoria  was  born  on  the  twenty-fourth  of  May.  6.  My  little 
sister  was  born  on  the  tenth  of  March.  7.  How  old  is  your 
father  1  8.  He  is  seventy ;  he  was  born  before  the  death  of 
Napoleon.     9.  What  has  become  of  your  brother?     10.  He 


344  EXERCISE  XI,  £U 

has  gone  to  (partir  pour)  France.  11.  When  did  he  go? 
12.  He  went  yesterday  morning.  13.  Is  your  father  out? 
14.  No,  sir,  he  is  in.       15.  When  did  your   father  return? 

16.  He  has  not  yet   returned ;   he   will   return   next   week. 

17.  The  servant  has  brought  down  the  trunk.  18.  Where  is 
your  sister?  19.  She  has  gone  down  for  breakfast.  20.  Where 
are  the  children  ?  21.  They  have  gone  up  stairs.  22.  Why 
did  they  not  come  down  when  I  was  there  1  23.  What  is  the 
matter,  my  child?  24.  It  was  slippery,  and  I  fell.  25.  My 
father  has  gone  into  the  house.  26.  Although  he  was  born 
rich,  he  is  now  poor.  27.  He  died  poor,  although  he  was  once 
rich.  28.  I  have  not  seen  him  to-day ;  what  has  become  of 
him  ?  29.  I  don't  know  what  has  become  of  him.  30.  Have 
you  taken  up  the  gentleman's  trunks?  31.  Not  yet,  but  I 
shall  take  them  up  immediately.  32.  At  what  o'clock  did 
your  sister  go  out  this  morning?  33.  She  went  out  at  half- 
past  nine.  34.  Where  is  my  sister?  35.  She  has  gone  up 
stairs ;  she  has  gone  to  get  her  books. 

EXERCISE  XI,  a.  (§230.) 

Si  vous  vouliez  bien  me  le  dire.         If  you  would  kindly  tell  me. 
Faites-les  entrer.  Show  them  in. 

1.  We  do  not  wish  to  leave  this  country ;  we  should  like  to 
remain  here,  but  if  we  cannot,  we  shall  go  away.  2.  You  ougjit 
to  go  home  (niy)  children ;  it  is  late.  3.  We  cannot  go  home ; 
it  is  dark,  and  our  father  told  us  to  (de)  wait  for  him.  4.  We 
cannot  go  away  before  six  o'clock ;  we  are  to  wait  here  till 
our  friends  come.  5.  We  could  have  written  the  letter,  if  we 
had  known  that  you  desired  it.  6.  That  beggar  could  have 
had  work,  if  he  had  wanted  it,  but  he  was  too  lazy ;  he  would 
not  work,  and  now  he  must  beg.  7.  Those  children  cannot 
read  yet;  they  are  too  young.  8.  If  they  had  been  able  to 
read,  they  would  not  have  believed  all  that  was  said  to  them. 
9.  You  ought  to  let  them  go  away,  for  their  father  told  them 
that  they  were  to  leave  before  (the)  night.  10.  You  might 
have  seen  them,  if  you  had  been  willing  to  come  with  me. 

11.  Our  teacher  told  us  that  we  were  to  write  this  exercise. 

12.  We  are  to  have  a  house  built  next  year.  13.  Their 
teacher  made  them  write  their  exercise.     14.  We  should  have 


EXERCISES  xii-xiii,  a.  345 

a  house  built,  if  we  were  rich  enough.  15.  "We  said  to  the 
innkeeper,  will  you  be  so  kind  as  to  have  our  horses  saddled  1 
"We  are  going  to  start.  16.  Opium  makes  [us]  sleep.  17.  It 
is  very  warm ;  if  this  great  heat  continues,  it  will  kill  the 
crops. 

EXERCISE  XII,  a.  (§230.) 

1.  Those  children  make  a  great  deal  of  noise  ;  they  talk  too 
much  ;  make  them  be  silent.  2.  That  girl  could  write,  if  she 
wished  (it).  3.  If  you  would  kindly  tell  me  where  the  doctor 
lives,  I  should  send  for  him.  4.  Do  you  know  Daudet's  La 
Belle-Nivernaiae  ?  5.  Oh,  yes,  it  is  a  charming  book  ;  I  liked 
it  so  well  that  I  had  my  pupils  read  it.  6.  That  is  a  beautiful 
picture.  7.  Yes,  I  have  just  been  showing  it  to  your  mother 
and  sister.  8.  When  did  you  see  my  father  ?  9.1  had  just 
been  speaking  with  him,  when  you  came.  10.  What  are  you 
going  to  do  to-morrow?  11.  To-morrow  we  are  going  to  see 
the  Invalides  and  the  Arc  de  Triomphe,  and  the  day  after 
to-morrow  we  are  to  see  Notre-Dame  and  the  Louvre  (m.). 
12.  We  ought  to  have  visited  the  Louvre  when  you  were  with 
us;  you  could  have  shown  us  the  fine  pictures.  13.  May  I  go 
with  you  when  you  visit  the  Louvre  next  time  %  I  should  like 
to  have  explained  to  me  some  of  the  beauties  of  the  finest 
pictures.  14.  That  gentleman  must  have  been  in  Paris,  for 
he  speaks  French  like  a  Parisian.  15.  Why  did  you  not 
make  those  ladies  sit  down  when  they  were  here?  16.  They 
said  they  would  not  stay,  because  you  were  out.  17.  There 
are  ladies  at  the  door.  18.  Very  well,  show  them  in. 
19.  Your  son  ought  to  write  his  exercises.  20.  Very  well, 
make  him  write  them.  21.  If  I  had  made  him  study  his 
lessons  when  he  was  at  school,  he  would  have  become  a  better 
man. 

EXERCISE  XIII,  a.  (§§231-234.) 

1.  The  French  people  are  brave  and  gay ;  they  (tZ)  have 
their  {ses)  defects,  but  also  their  good  qualities.  2.  Few 
people  believe  that  the  earth  is  not  round.  3.  Most  people 
believe  that  the  earth  will  be  destroyed.  4.  The  greater  part 
of  his  friends  abandoned  him.  5.  Many  think  that  our  friends 
will  not  succeed.     6.    A  great  number  of  men  were  killed. 


346  EXERCISE  XIV,  a. 

7.  The  Swiss  people  are  brave,  they  (il)  will  always  be  free.  8. 
More  than  one  house  was  burnt.  9.  Is  it  your  friends  who  live 
in  the  house  on  the  hilH  10.  Yes,  it  is  they;  they  have  lived 
there  for  two  years.  11.  You  and  he  were  there,  were  you 
not?  12.  Yes,  he  and  I  were  there,  and  your  brother  too. 
13.  Will  you  and  your  brother  come  and  see  us,  when  you  are 
in  London?  14.  We  shall  be  very  happy  to  (de)  visit  you. 
15.  Do  you  see  those  two  children?  Both  were  born  [on]  the 
same  day.  16.  You  or  I  shall  speak.  17.  There  happen 
many  misfortunes  here  below.  18.  There  arose  a  great  quarrel 
between  them.  19.  Who  went  for  the  doctor?  20.  It  was 
(pres.)  I  who  went  for  him.  21.  Do  you  see  those  two  gentle- 
men? Both  have  had  houses  built  this  year.  22.  Religion, 
truth,  honour,  all  was  abandoned.  23.  Many  think  that  you 
will  never  be  able  to  build  your  house.  24.  The  majority  are 
not  always  right.  25.  If  there  happened  such  misfortunes  to 
me,  I  should  leave  the  country.  26.  Were  it  only  a  few  lines, 
I  should  like  you  to  write  to  me.  27.  If  you  and  I  were 
young,  fine  things  would  be  done  (reflex,  impers.).  28.  Who 
can  have  done  that,  if  not  our  friends  ?  29.  Neither  he  nor 
his  brother  can  go  away ;  both  must  stay. 

EXERCISE  XIV,  a.  (§§235-238.) 

1.  Is  that  book  yours  or  your  brother's?  2.  How  much 
did  these  books  cost  ?  3.  I  do  not  know  how  much  they  cost. 
4.  Does  that  merchant  provide  you  cheap  with  what  you 
need  ?  5.  What  is  the  matter  with  that  boy  this  morning  ? 
6.  I  do  not  know  what  is  the  matter  with  him.  7.  Do  I  say, 
or  can  I  say,  the  half  of  what  he  has  done  ?  8.  Whatever 
men  may  do,  they  cannot  escape  death.  9.  What  books  did 
your  father  buy  when  he  was  in  the  city?  10.  Your  father 
told  me  what  your  brother  had  done.  11.  Your  brother  told 
me  what  he  had  done.  12.  Will  you  tell  me  where  those  men 
were  when  you  saw  them  1  1 3.  I  cannot  tell  you  where  they 
were.  14.  We  have  more  books  than  that  gentleman  has. 
15.  We  have  more  books  than  you  have.  16.  Virtue  is  a 
beautiful  thing,  hence  we  love  it.  17.  My  father  is  here^ 
perhaps  he  will  come  to  see  you.  18.  However  good  men 
may  be,  they  are  sometimes  poor.     19.  Such  are  my  reasons 


EXERCISE  XV,  a.  347 

for  doing  so.  20.  You  have  told  me  that  my  friend  has  gone; 
I  did  not  know  (impf.)  it,  but  perhaps  you  are  right.  21.  I 
wish  you  were  here,  were  it  only  to  encourage  us.  22.  That 
man   does   not   respect   himself,    hence   he   cannot   be   good. 

23.  Come   and   see   us,    said  he,   as  soon  as  you  can  (fut.). 

24.  If  I  do  this,  thought  he,  I  shall  be  punished,  hence  I  shall 
not  do  it.  25.  When  was  your  little  brother  born  ?  26.  I  do 
not  know  where  that  man  died.  27.  To  whom  did  your  friend 
give  his  gold  watch  1  28.  I  do  not  know  ;  perhaps  he  gave  it 
to  his  sister.  29.  I  cannot  do  (de)  such  things  ;  am  I  not  [an] 
Englishman  1  30.  Do  I  not  tell  you  that  I  shall  be  there,  and 
that  I  shall  see  you  ? 


EXERCISE  XV,  a.  (§§239-241.) 

On  lui  ob^it.  "i  tt    •     i.      j 

T,     J.    1  ,-      r  He  IS  obeyed. 

H  est  ob^i.    J  *^ 

On  me  I'a  pardonnd.     ^  I  have  been  pardoned  (for)  it. 

1.  America  was  discovered  by  Christopher  Columbus.  2. 
The  first  steamboat  was  built  by  Fulton.  3.  We  have  been 
deceived  by  that  scoundrel.  4.  We  have  been  deceived.  5. 
That  gentleman  has  been  mistaken  in  that  aflfair.  6.  Where 
is  that  said?  7.  Oh,  that  is  said  everywhere.  8.  Who  com- 
mitted that  crime?  9.  It  was  our  neighbour's  brother.  10. 
Will  he  not  be  punished?  11.  No,  he  has  been  pardoned  for 
it.  12.  I  have  often  seen  it  done.  13.  I  have  been  told  that 
you  had  it  done.  14.  Is  that  not  done  every  where  ?  15.  Oh, 
no,  that  is  never  done  amongst  respectable  people.  16.  How 
unfortunate  he  is !  He  is  a  good  fellow,  but  he  is  deceived 
and  suspected  everywhere.  17.  How  little  it  is  !  It  can 
hardly  be  seen.  1 8.  That  man  is  not  a  good  teacher ;  he  is 
not  obeyed  by  his  pupils.  19.  There  is  a  house  to  be  sold. 
20.  There  is  an  exercise  to  be  done.  21.  That  beggar  was 
given  bread  and  milk.  22.  We  were  made  to  read  our  lesson. 
23.  That  is  a  man  to  be  feared.  24.  They  were  told  that  you 
were  not  here.  25.  Why  were  we  not  told  that  our  friends 
had  gone  away  1 


348  EXERCISE  XVI,  a. 

EXERCISE  XVI,  a.  (§§242-247.) 

*Elle  s'est  rappel6  ce  que  j'ai  dit.  "^  i,      j     i.  ^  t      -j 

«T^n      ,    J.  J  -5  •  J..    hShe  remembered  what  I  said. 

*Elle  s'est  souvenue  de  ce  que  j  ai  dit.  J 

Je  me  le  rappelle.  "|  t  t.      -i^ 

^       ,  .         r  I  remember  it. 

Je  m  en  souviens.  J 

Je  me  le  rappelle.         "»  t  t.      ^  • 

-.  •        J    1   •   f  I  remember  nim. 

Je  me  souviens  de  lui.  J 

lis  se  souviennent  de  moi.  They  remember  me. 

Je  m'en  sers.  I  use  it  (I  make  use  of  it). 

II  s'en  passe.  He  does  without  it. 

EUe  s'est  fait  mal  k  la  main.  She  (has)  hurt  her  hand. 

EUe  s'est  cass6  le  bras.  She  has  broken  her  arm. 

EUe  s'est  tue.  She  became  silent. 

♦In  se  rappeler,  se  is  indirect,  in  se  souvenir,  se  is  direct. 

1.  They  have  not  yet  gone  away;  they  will  remain  here  till 
to-morrow.  2.  When  you  are  in  front  of  Mr.  Jackson's,  be 
good  enough  to  stop.  3.  How  have  you  been  this  long  time  ] 
4.  I  have  been  very  well.  6.  How  has  your  mother  been, 
since  she  has  been  living  in  Toronto?  6.  How  unfortunate 
I  am,  she  exclaimed,  my  friends  remember  me  no  longer. 
7.  When  the  door  opens,  we  can  go  in.  8.  Where  is  my 
book?  I  cannot  do  without  it.  9.  Why  do  you  not  make 
use  of  that  pen?  10.  It  is  not  a  good  pen;  I  cannot  use  it. 
11.  There  are  some  ladies  in  the  parlour;  very  well,  have 
them  sit  down,  and  ask  them  to  wait  a  little.  1 2.  Why  are 
you  crying,  my  little  girl  ?  1 3.  I  have  fallen  and  hurt  myself. 
14.  Where  did  you  hurt  yourself?  15.  I  hurt  my  hand. 
16.  Why  did  those  ladies  not  sit  down?  17.  They  would  not 
sit  down,  because  they  could  not  stay.  18.  If  you  wish  to 
use  this  ink  and  paper,  I  shall  give  you  some.  19.  It  was 
very  slippery  this  morning,  and  my  mother  in  going  down  the 
street,  fell  and  broke  her  arm.  20.  If  you  cannot  do  without 
this  book,  I  shall  lend  it  to  you.  21.  I  can  do  without  it 
now,  but  I  shall  need  it  next  week.  22.  Do  you  remember 
what  was  told  you  last  evening  ?  23.  No,  I  do  not  remember 
it.     24.  Did  that  little  girl  hurt  herself  badly,  when  she  fell  ? 

25.  Yes,  she  hurt  herself  very  badly;  she  broke  her  arm. 

26.  Have  those  young  ladies  written  letters  to  each  other? 

27.  They  have  written  many  ;  they  ha^ve  been  writing  to  eaeh 


EXERCISE  XVII,  a.  349 

other  for  two  years.  28.  I  am  not  well  this  morning ;  I  hurt 
my  head.  29.  Are  you  using  your  pen  now  1  30.  No,  I  am 
not  using  it;  you  may  have  it,  if  you  need  it.  31.  Do  you 
remember  the  gentleman  who  lived  in  that  large  house  on  the 
hill  ?  32.  Yes,  I  remember  him  very  well.  33.  One  cannot 
do  without  money  ;  it  is  useful  everywhere.  34.  I  remem- 
bered what  he  had  said,  as  soon  as  I  saw  him.  35.  Be  silent, 
(my)  children,  you  are  speaking  too  loud.  36.  As  soon  as  I 
came,  he  became  silent. 

EXERCISE  XVII,  a.  (§§242-247,  continued.) 

^  .  .  r What  are  you  called? 

Comment  vous  appelez-vous?  \  ,,^,    ,  .      "^  , 

*^*^  L  What  IS  your  name  ? 

Je  m'appelle  Jean.  I  am  called  John  (my  name  is  John). 

Se  promener  k  pied  (i  cheval).  To  take  a  walk  (a  ride). 

Se  promener  en  voiture  (en  bateau).  To  take  a  drive  (a  row  or  sail). 

Elle  s'est  couch^e  k  dix  heureg.  She  went  to  bed  at  ten.        , 

Elle  s'est  lev6e  k  six  heures.  She  rose  at  six. 

Attendez-moi.  Wait  for  me. 

Elle  ne  s'y  est  pas  attendue.  She  did  not  expect  it. 

Le  pr^tre  les  a  mari^s.  The  priest  (has)  married  them. 

Elle  s'est  mari^  k  {or  avec)  mon  She  (has)  married  my  cousin. 

cousin. 

Elle  s'est  marine  hier.  She  was  married  yesterday. 

II  est  all6  se  promener  en  bateau.  He  has  gone  for  a  row  {or  sail). 

AUons  nous  promener.  Let  us  go  for  a  walk. 

Elle  s'est  endormie.  She  fell  asleep. 

Se  connalt-il  en  tableaux  ?  Is  he  a  good  judge  of  pictures  ? 

II  s'y  connait  assez  bien.  He  is  a  pretty  good  judge  of  them. 

Vous  ennuyez-vous  ici  ?  Are  you  tired  of  being  here  ? 

1.  What  is  that  little  boy's  name  ?  2.  His  name  is  Henry. 
3.  What  are  you  going  to  do  to-day?  4.  We  are  going  to 
go  for  a  drive.  5.  We  are  not  going  for  a  drive  ;  we  prefer 
to  go  for  a  walk.  6.  Let  us  go  to  bed  now,  and  then  we  shall 
get  up  early.  7.  Is  your  brother  out  ?  8.  Yes,  he  has  gone 
for  a  drive.  9.  While  we  were  out  for  a  drive,  we  met  your 
brother  on  horseback.  10.  While  they  were  out  for  a  ride, 
they  met  us  on  foot.  11.  Let  us  go  for  a  walk  in  that  beau- 
tiful forest.     12.  Has  he  gone  for  a  ride  or  a  walk?     13.  He 


850  EXERCISE  XVIII,  a. 

has  gone  for  a  sail.  14.  The  children  went  to  bed  at  eight 
o'clock,  and  they  will  get  up  at  six.  15.  We  shall  wait  for 
him  here;  he  has  gone  for  a  walk.  16.  That  does  not  sur- 
prise me;  I  was  expecting  it.  17.  I  was  not  expecting  to  see 
him  there.  18.  Mr.  Jackson  has  married  his  eldest  daughter 
to  a  very  rich  man.  1 9.  Who  married  them  ?  20.  It  was 
the  priest  who  lives  in  the  little  village.  21.  My  cousin  was 
married  yesterday.  22.  To  whom  was  she  married  1  23.  She 
was  married  to  the  gentleman  who  lived  here  last  year. 
24.  When  are  you  going  to  get  married?  25.  I  shall  never 
get  married.  26.  What  is  the  name  of  the  gentleman  who 
married  your  cousin  ?  27.  If  the  children  had  not  gone  early 
to  bed  last  night,  they  would  not  be  able  to  rise  early  this 
morning.  28.  That  surprises  my  mother;  she  was  not  expect- 
ing it.  29.  We  went  to  bed,  and  (we)  fell  asleep  immediately. 
30.  Are  you  not  a  pretty  good  judge  of  books?  31.  Yes,  I 
am  a  pretty  good  judge  of  them.  32.  Is  your  mother  not 
tired  of  being  here  1  33.  I  think  so ;  I  shall  ask  her  to  go  for 
a  walk  with  us.  34.  Do  you  ever  get  tired  of  being  in  the 
country?  35.  No,  I  never  tire  of  being  there;  I  love  the 
fields  and  trees. 


EXERCISE  XVIII,  a.  (§§248-253. 
It  is  dark. 


II  fait  obscur.  ■) 

II  fait  noir.      J 

n  se  fait  tard.  It  is  getting  late. 

II  fait  jour.  It  is  day  (daylight). 

II  fait  du  soleil.  The  sun  is  shining. 

II  fait  du  brouillard.  It  is  foggy. 

II  fait  bon.  It  is  comfortable  (pleasant). 

II  tombe  de  la  neige.  It  is  snowing. 

II  fait  doux.  It  is  mild. 

1.  If  the  weather  is  fine,  we  shall  go  for  a  row  this  after- 
noon.' 2.  It  was  raining  this  morning,  but  now  the  sun  is 
shining.  3.  It  is  not  comfortable  here ;  let  us  go  out  for  a 
walk.  4.  It  is  getting  late ;  let  us  go  home.  5.  It  was  rain- 
ing last  evening,  then  it  froze,  and  now  it  is  slippery.  6.  It 
is  not  comfortable  in  those  countries  where  it  is  very  {/aire 
heaucoup  de)  foggy.     7.  It  is  too  windy ;  we  shall  not  go  for  a 


EXERCISE  XIX,  a.  351 

row.  8.  It  is  getting  late ;  the  children  will  have  to  go  to 
bed.  9.  What  time  is  it?  10.  I  do  not  know,  but  it  is 
already  daylight.  11.  Ts  it?  Well  then,  we  shall  have  to 
get  up  immediately.  12.  It  had  been  snowing  for  two  days, 
and  we  couldn't  go  for  a  drive.  13.  It  has  been  raining  since 
yesterday  morning,  and  it  will  be  better  to  remain  here.  14. 
My  sister  is  very  ill ;  her  life  is  at  stake.  15.  We  cannot  go 
away;  it  is  raining.  16.  No  matter;  I  do  not  fear  the  rain. 
17.  How  did  you  enjoy  yourself  yesterday?  18.  We  did  not 
enjoy  ourselves  at  all;  it  was  raining  all  day.  19.  If  it  is 
very  dark  this  evening,  we  shall  not  go  to  see  our  friends. 
20.  Yes,  it  will  be  better  to  stay  at  home;  we  can  easily 
amuse  ourselves.  21.  How  long  have  you  been  in  this  city  ? 
22.  I  came  here  three  years  ago.  23.  What  sort  of  weather 
will  it  be  to-morrow  ?  24.  I  do  not  know ;  I  am  not  a  good 
judge  of  such  things.  25.  It  has  been  raining  for  two  days  ; 
we  are  tired  of  being  here.  26.  In  winter  it  is  generally  mild 
in  Italy,  but  it  is  often  cold  in  Canada.  27.  Those  two  men 
are  disputing ;  what  is  the  matter  1  28.  It  is  about  (s'agir  de) 
the  price  of  a  horse  which  one  sold  to  the  other.  29.  It  was 
very  warm  yesterday,  but  it  rained  in  the  night,  and  now  it  is 
very  comfortable.  30.  I  think  (that)  it  will  rain,  but  it  may 
be  that  I  am  mistaken.  31.  We  need  another  house;  this 
one  is  too  small.  32.  Their  number  is  far  from  being  com- 
plete. 33.  Letters  have  come  which  tell  us  that  there  has 
been  a  great  storm  in  the  United  States.  34.  How  far  is  it 
from  Toronto  to  Montreal  1  35.  By  the  railroad  it  is  three 
hundred  and  thirty-three  miles. 

EXERCISE  XIX,  a.  (§§254-267.) 

Cest  k  peine  s'il  sort  h.  present.         He  hardly  ever  goes  out  now. 
A  peine  le  soleil  fut-il  (^tait-il)      Hardly  was  the  sun  up,  when  the 
lev^,  qu'on  aper9ut  Tennemi.  enemy  was  seen. 

II  fait  bon  marcher.  {^^^  ^^^^j^^  ^^  g°°^- 

tit  IS  good  walking. 

1.  When  that  man  is  working,  he  will  often  stop  to  (pour) 
speak  with  his  companions.  2.  How  long  have  you  been 
reading?  3.  I  have  been  reading  for  an  hour.  4.  It  was  at 
your  house  that  we  met  those  gentlemen.  5.  We  shall  be 
glad,  if  you  are  there.     6.  We  shall  be  glad  when  you  are 


352  EXERCISE  XX,  a. 

there.  7.  We  often  used  to  go  for  a  walk  when  we  lived  at 
your  house,  but  here  it  is  not  good  walking,  so  we  hardly  ever 
go  out  now.  8.  When  we  were  young,  our  mother  would  often 
tell  us  fairy  stories  which  interested  us  very  much.  9.  We 
remember  them  yet,  and  we  hope  (that)  we  shall  never  forget 
them.  10.  I  had  been  there  ten  days  when  he  came.  11. 
He  had  been  reading  an  hour  before  his  sister  rose.  12.  He 
asked  me  where  I  came  from,  and  where  I  was  going,  13.  I 
answered  him  that  I  came  from  Montreal,  and  (that  I)  was 
going  to  Boston.  14.  He  wrote  me  a  letter  saying  that  he 
wished  to  see  me.  15.  He  said  in  his  letter  that  he  had  been 
ill,  but  that  he  was  better  now.  16.  When  he  lived  with  us, 
we  would  often  go  out  for  a  walk  before  breakfast.  17.  The 
eldest  of  the  miller's  sons  received  the  mill,  but  the  youngest 
received  only  the  cat.  18.  As  soon  as  he  learned  that  I  was 
to  go  out  for  a  walk,  he  wished  to  go  also.  19.  If  he  had  seen 
it,  he  would  have  told  me  (it).  20.  When  I  had  finished  my 
lessons,  I  would  always  go  out  for  a  walk.  21.  When  he  had 
finished  his  dinner  to-day,  he  went  out.  22.  Hardly  had  he 
finished  his  work  when  his  friend  came.  23.  We  do  not  know 
whether  our  friends  will  come.  24.  Our  father  did  not  know 
whether  he  would  come.  25.  Why  is  that  work  not  done? 
26.  I  told  my  brother  to  {de)  do  it,  but  he  will  not  do  it.  27. 
Will  you  buy  my  horse  ?  28.  No,  I  shall  not  buy  him ;  I  do 
not  need  him.  29.  Good  morning,  gentlemen,  will  you  walk 
in?  30.  No  thank  you,  we  shall  not  go  in.  31.  As  long  as 
we  live,  we  shall  not  forget  your  kindness.  32.  As  soon  as  he 
comes,  I  shall  tell  him.  33.  We  shall  do  as  we  please.  34. 
You  may  start  when  you  will.  35.  He  may  come  when  he 
likes. 

EXERCISE  XX,  a.  (§§  254-267,  cowj!mMtfd ) 

1.  We  shall  soon  have  finished  our  work.  2.  When  you 
have  finished  your  lesson,  you  may  go  out  for  a  walk.  3. 
Everybody  should  learn  the  ten  commandments.  4.  They  tell 
us:  Thou  shalt  not  (point)  have  any  other  gods.  5.  Thou 
shalt  not  take  the  name  of  thy  God  in  vain.  6.  Thou  shalt 
not  steal  (derober).  7.  That  poor  child  is  very  weak ;  it  can 
hardly  walk ;  it  must  have  been  ill.  8.  My  brother  told  me 
that  you  were  not  well.  9.  You  must  have  made  a  mistake, 
for  I  am  very  well ;  I  never  was  better  in  (de)  my  life.     10. 


EXERCISE  XXI,  a.  353 

We  should  be  sorry,  if  you  should  do  so.  11.  You  should  be 
virtuous,  if  you  wish  to  be  happy.  12.  I  told  him  (that)  he 
ought  to  obey  his  teacher, 'but  he  would  not  listen  to  me. 

13.  Men  should  love  their  enemies,  but  generally  they  do  not. 

14.  The  little  boy  must  have  broken  that  stick;  I  saw  him 
there.  15.  I  often  used  to  go  to  see  him  when  he  lived  in 
our  city.  16.  He  says  (that)  it  will  rain.  17.  He  said  (that) 
it  would  rain.  18.  Can  it  be  possible  that  my  father's  watch 
is  stolen  (use:  on)'i  19.  I  could  do  that,  if  I  wished.  20.  I 
could  do  that  when  I  was  young.  21.  Could  you  tell  me 
where  le  Boulevard  des  Itcdiens  is?  22.  I  could  not  tell  you 
(it);  I  have  not  been  long  in  Paris.  23.  Can  it  be  true 
that  he  has  done  that  ?  24.  One  would  say  that  you  are  [a] 
Parisian,  you  speak  French  so  well.  25.  Even  if  that  were 
true,  I  should  not  go.  26.  Even  if  it  should  not  rain,  I  shall 
not  go  for  a  drive.  27.  According  to  the  newspapers,  a  great 
quantity  of  money  was  stolen  (use :  on).  28.  By  what  he 
says,  his  neighbours  are  poor.  29.  When  I  was  in  Europe,  I 
saw  a  horse  as  big  as  an  elephant.  30.  Nonsense !  You  are 
joking.  31.  Come !  Come !  (my)  children,  you  are  making 
too  much  noise.  32.  Let  us  go  away."  33.  Go  away.  34.  I 
did  not  think  he  would  know  it.  35.  If  you  will  not  do  it, 
we  shall  not  do  it. 

EXERCISE  XXI,  a.  (§§254-267,  con<tn«cd.) 

The  two  kings  met  (each  other)  on  the  13th  of  July  in  a 
vast  plain  between  Warsaw  ( Varsovie)  and  Cracow  (Cracovie). 
Augustus  had  nearly  twenty-four  thousand  men ;  Charles  had 
only  ten  thousand.  At  the  first  volley,  the  Duke  of  Holstein, 
who  commanded  the  Swedish  cavalry,  received  a  cannon-shot 
in  the  back.  The  king  asked  jf  he  was  dead :  he  was  told 
(use :  on)  that  he  was  {que  oui)  :  he  mac?e  no  reply  ;  (some) 
tears  yeZ^  from  his  eyes ;  he  {se)  hid  his  (le)  face  [for]  a  moment 
with  his  {les)  hands ;  then  he  rushed  into  the  midst  of  the 
enemy  at  the  head  of  his  guards. 

The  king  of  Poland  did  all  that  one  should  expect  from  a 
prince  who  was  fighting  for  his  crown ;  he  himself  brought 
hack  his  troops  three  times  to  the  charge ;  but  he  fought  with 
his  Saxons  only  ;  the  Poles,  vfho  formed  his  right  wing,  fled  at 
the  beginning  of  the  battle.     Charles  won  a  complete  victory. 


354  EXERCISE  XXII,  a. 

He  did  not  stay  on  the  field  of  battle,  but  (et)  marched  direct 
to  Cracow,  pursuing  the  king  of  Poland,  who  kept  Jieeing 
before  him. 

EXERCISE  XXII,  a.  (§§268-273.)* 

Je  tiens  k  ce  que  vous  appreniez  I  am  (most)  anxious  that  you  shall 

le  latin.  learn  Latin. 

Nous  n'aimerions  pas  qu'ou  se  mo-  We   should   not   like   to  he   made 

quat  de  nous.  sport  of. 

II  me  tarde  que  cela  soit  fait.  I  am  longing  for  that  to  be  done. 

,     .   ,  .  ,    r      .         f  I  wish  you  would  do  it. 

Je  voudrais  Dien  que  vous  le  fassiez.    A^    ,      ,-,,.,  ^    j    -^ 

^  \1  should  like  you  to  do  it. 

1.  Our  teacher  said  that  he  wished  us  to  write  our  exercise. 
2.  If  you  wish  to  go  to  the  city,  you  may  (pouvoir)  go  (there), 
but  if  you  wish  us  to  go  (there),  we  tell  you  plainly  that  we 
cannot.  3.  I  wish  you  to  do  your  work  before  (the)  breakfast. 
4.  Our  friends  wish  us  to  stay  with  them  this  week.  5.  My 
father  is  most  anxious  that  I  should  learn  French,  but  I  don't 
like  it.  6.  Would  you  prefer  that  I  should  go  to  church  this 
morning  ?  7.  We  should  not  like  our  friends  to  be  made  sport 
of.  8.  You  say  that  you  are  going  to  buy  a  house  from  that 
man ;  take  care  lest  he  deceive  you.  9.  I  am  longing  for  my 
house  to  be  finished.  10.  I  am  anxious  that  he  should  come  to 
see  us  when  he  visits  Toronto.  1 1 .  My  teacher  told  me  that  I 
should  write  my  exercise.  1 2.  My  father  told  me  that  he  had 
seen  you.  13.  The  law  forbids  that  to  be  done.  14.  These 
children  must  stay  in ;  their  parents  have  forbidden  them  to 
go  out.  15.  I  shall  give  orders  not  to  admit  them  (use:  on). 
16.  I  did  not  ask  that  I  should  be  answered  (use :  on)  before 
the  others.  17.  I  shall  avoid  her  speaking  to  me  about  it. 
18.  The  doctor  ordered  that  he  should  be  given  no  wine.  19. 
We  do  not  ask  that  you  should  pay  the  money.  20.  The  rain 
hinders  people  (on)  from  going  out  to-day.  21.  I  wish  you  to 
know  that  he  is  my  friend.  22.  You  approve  of  my  coming 
back,  do  you  not?  23.  Yes,  I  wish  you  would  go  away. 
24.  It  is  better  for  the  children  to  go  to  school.  25.  What 
shall  I  say  to  that  man]  He  has  insulted  me.  26.  That 
makes  no  difference,  he  is  not  worthy  of  being  answered  (use : 
on).  27.  The  doctor  gave  orders  that  my  father  should  go  out 
for  a  drive  every  day.     28.  He  has  torn  his  book;  he  deserves 

•See  note  on  the  limited  use  of  the  imperfect  subj.,  p.  108. 


EXERCISE  XXIII,  a.  355 

to  be  punished  (use :  on).  29.  I  should  like  you  to  go  for  a 
walk  with  me.  30.  Weakness  often  hinders  good  intentions 
from  being  fulfilled.  31.  I  long  for  his  return.  32.  There  is 
no  more  bread ;  I  should  like  you  to  go  and  get  some.  33. 
That  man  is  most  anxious  that  his  children  should  go  to 
school,  but  he  is  too  poor  to  (pour)  buy  them  books.  34. 
Take  care  that  the  dog  does  not  bite  you ;  he  is  very  cross. 
35.  That  young  man  is  not  very  amiable ;  we  should  not  like 
him  to  treat  us  as  he  has  treated  his  father. 

EXERCISE  XXIII,  a.  (§§  268-273,  continued.) 

1.  It  is  fitting  that  children   should   obey  their  parents. 

2.  It  is  good  that  men  should  sometimes  undergo  misfortunes. 

3.  It  may  be  that  he  has  returned,  but  I  have  not  seen  him. 

4.  It  is  natural  that  we  should  hate  our  enemies.  5.  It  is 
getting  late ;  it  is  time  that  we  should  go  home.  6.  He  had 
to  learn  French,  for  he  lived  in  France.  7.  We  are  very  glad 
that  you  have  come.  8.  We  are  very  sorry  that  you  did  not 
come.  9.  I  am  surprised  that  he  said  so,  because  he  told  me 
that  he  would  not  say  so.  10.  It  is  a  pity  that  we  cannot 
always  be  happy.  11.  It  is  a  shame  for  those  young  men  to 
be  so  ignorant.  12.  It  is  sad  that  a  man  like  him  should  be 
so  poor.  13.  I  fear  he  will  commit  some  crime.  14.  I  am 
glad  you  are  so  well.  15.  I  am  afraid  my  father  is  not  well 
enough  to  (pour)  go  with  us.  16.  I  wonder  he  did  not 
come  last  night.  17.  I  know  why  he  did  not  come;  he  was 
afraid  it  would  rain.  18.  He  was  not  afraid  it  would  rain ; 
he  was  afraid  a  certain  person  would  be  there  whom  he  did 
not  wish  to  see.  19.  I  do  not  fear  he  will  not  go.  20.  Are 
you  not  afraid  he  will  be  able  to  prevent  your  intentions  from 
being  fulfilled?  21.  I  doubt  whether  he  will  be  able  to  come. 
22.  I  do  not  deny  that  I  am  glad  of  your  ill-fortune.  23.  Do 
you  doubt  that  he  is  an  honest  man?  24.  Not  at  all;  I  know 
that  he  is  an  honest  man ;  I  have  known  him  for  twenty 
years.  25.  I  do  not  doubt  that  you  will  be  able  to  fulfil  all 
your  intentions.  26.  It  seems  he  has  not  received  [any]  of 
my  letters.  27.  It  cannot  be  that  you  are  ignorant  of  his 
intentions.  28.  How  is  your  father?  29.  He  is  very  well ; 
he  is  rarely  ill.  30.  It  seems  to  me  it  will  be  dangerous  if  we 
do  not  follow  his  advice.     31.  That  child  is  afraid  you  will 


356  EXERCISE  XXIV,  a. 

hurt  him.  32.  I  am  glad  you  did  not  hurt  yourself  when 
you  fell.  33.  We  regret  very  much  that  we  did  not  see  you 
when  you  were  in  Paris.  34.  Are  you  not  afraid  that  you 
will  tire  of  being  in  the  country  1  35.  I  am  not  afraid  that  I 
shall  tire  of  being  in  the  country. 

EXERCISE  XXIV,  a.  (§§268-273,  continued.) 

1.  Our  neighbour  is  an  honest  man;  I  hope  he  will  succeed. 

2.  I  do  not  think  he  will  succeed ;  he  has  not  much  ability. 

3.  We  thought  he  would  come  to-day.  4.  You  told  me  that 
you  did  not  think  he  would  go  away,  did  you  not?  5.  Do 
you  think  we  must  believe  what  he  says  1  6.  It  is  probable 
that  we  shall  go  away  to-morrow.  7.  It  is  not  certain  that 
our  friends  will  come  to-morrow.  8.  Is  it  probable  that  you 
will  go  away  to-day  *?  9.  We  are  sure  that  we  saw  them 
yesterday.  10.  Are  you  not  sure  that  you  saw  them  yester- 
day ?  11.  Do  you  think  your  father  will  go  to  France  this 
summer?  12.  It  is  probable  he  will  go  there.  13.  It  is 
certain  that  all  men  will  die.  14.  Is  it  certain  that  our 
friends  will  be  there  this  evening?  15.  Is  it  not  certain  that 
your  neighbour  will  buy  your  house?  16.  Does  he  imagine 
we  shall  do  that  merely  to  {pour)  please  him?  17.  We  are 
not  sure  that  will  please  him.  18.  Do  you  think  you  will  go 
for  a  walk  this  evening?  19.  Yes,  I  think  I  shall  go  out 
with  my  brother.  20.  Give  me  the  book  which  contains  that 
beautiful  story  of  which  you  were  speaking.  21.  Give  me  a 
book  which  contains  some  beautiful  stories.  22.  I  should  like 
to  buy  a  house  which  would  suit  me  better  than  this  one. 
23.  I  am  looking  for  a  grammar  in  which  I  can  find  better 
exercises.     24.  I  have  a  grammar  which  has  better  exercises. 

25.  Send  me  some  clothes  which   I  can  wear  in  the  house. 

26.  Has  he  a  single  friend  who  is  true  to  him  ?  27.  He  has 
not  a  single  friend  who  is  true  to  him.  28.  There  is  nobody 
here  who  can  speak  French.  29.  I  have  nothing  which  is 
of  value.  30.  There  are  no  houses  here  which  are  as  large 
as  those  in  the  city.  31.  There  are  few  people  here  who 
have  learned  French.  32.  It  is  the  finest  thing  one  can  see. 
33.  That  is  the  largest  ship  I  have  ever  seen.  34.  Whatever 
you  do,  you  will  not  be  able  to  persuade  me  that  you  are 
right.  35.  Whoever  you  are,  you  will  have  to  obey  the  law, 
as  long  as  you  are  in  this  country. 


EXERCISE  XXV,  a.  357 

EXERCISE  XXV,  a.  (§§268-273,  continued.) 

Que  v«it-il  dire  ?  What  does  he  mean  ? 

^         ^    ,  ,   .  rMen  trust  him. 

0°««fi«^l^-  JHe  is  trusted. 

Faites-moi  savoir.  Send  me  word  (let  me  know). 

Je  ne  re9ois  plus  de  sea  nouvelles.        I  never  hear  from  him  now. 

II  est  tr6s  occup^.  He  is  very  busy. 

II  s'occupe  de  cela.  He  takes  an  interest  in  that. 

1.  I  have  told  him  nothing  which  could  influence  him.  2. 
I  know  no  book  which  pleases  me  better.  3.  I  want  a  house 
which  will  suit  me  better.  4.  Mr.  Jackson  is  the  richest  man 
I  know.  5.  However  good  men  may  be,  they  do  not  escape 
misfortune.  6.  Let  us  go  out  for  a  walk  before  your  father 
returns.  7.  We  rose  this  morning  before  the  sun  rose.  8. 
Will  you  not  stay  here  until  the  weather  is  warm  ?  9.  Oh, 
no ;  we  must  leave  before  it  begins  to  be  warm.  10.  We  are 
going  to  work  until  we  go  to  bed.  11.  You  must  always  act 
so  that  men  may  respect  you.  12.  Tell  the  truth  always,  so 
that  men  may  trust  you.  13.  He  insulted  me  so  that  I  put 
him  out  doors.  14.  That  gentleman  made  a  speech,  but  he 
spoke   in   such   a   way  that  one  could  not  understand  him. 

15.  I  did  not  trust  him,  for  fear  that  he  might  deceive  me. 

16.  He  passed  our  house  before  we  had  finished  our  breakfast. 

17.  I  explained  it  to  him,  for  fear  he  might  not  know  what 
you  meant.  1 8.  I  cannot  trust  you,  unless  you  explain  to  me 
what  you  mean.  19.  In  case  you  cannot  come,  will  you  be 
kind  enough  to  send  me  word.  20.  We  shall  send  you  our 
carriage,  in  case  you  need  it.  21.  In  case  what  he 
says  is  true,  we  shall  send  you  word.  22.  Although  the 
children  have  gone  to  bed,  they  have  not  yet  gone  to  sleep. 
23.  Although  you  may  not  like  that  man,  you  must  confess 
that  he  is  an  honest  man.  24.  Although  we  used  to  be  good 
friends,  I  never  hear  from  him  now.  25.  Not  that  he  has 
forgotten  me,  but  he  is  so  much  occupied  with  his  business. 
26.  Far  from  his  saying  that  he  hates  you,  I  assure  you  that 
he  will  say  he  loves  you.  27.  He  gave  her  the  money  with- 
out my  knowing  it.  28.  Even  if  he  had  told  me  that  he 
liked  me,  I  should  not  have  believed  it.  29.  Though  Canada 
be  less  interesting  than  England,  Canadians  love  it  better.  30. 
I  cannot  go  out,  without  my  dog  following  me.    31.   If  we  are 


358  EXERCISE  XXVI,  a. 

there  and  see  him,  we  shall  tell  him  what  you  say.  32.  Al- 
though he  is  far  away,  I  hear  from  him  occasionally.  33.  Not 
that  we  take  no  interest  in  your  enterprise,  but  we  are  so  busy 
with  our  own  work  that  we  can't  think  of  anything  else.  34. 
We  are  at  the  wrong  door ;  would  you  be  kind  enough  to  tell 
us  where  we  are,  so  that  we  can  find  where  our  friends  live  ? 
35.  We  shall  rise  early  to-morrow  morning,  so  as  to  be  at  the 
station  before  our  friends  start.  ^^-yy 

EXERCISE  XXVI,  a.  (§§268-273,  continued.) 

1.  Would  to  God  he  were  here !  2.  Let  him  be  silent,  if  he 
cannot  explain  what  he  wishes.  3.  The  Frenchmen  shout 
"Hurrah  for  France  !  "  4.  He  doubted  whether  there  is  a  God. 
6.  I  should  like  you  to  write  me  a  letter  when  you  are  absent. 
6.  If  his  father  should  say  so,  he  would  have  to  do  it.  7.  I 
was  most  anxious  that  he  should  succeed  in  his  enterprise. 
8.  We  were  not  willing  that  you  should  go  away  without  our 
seeing  you.  9.  His  father  gave  orders  that  he  should  be  taken 
to  school.  10.  The  doctor  forbade  that  the  patient  should  go 
for  a  walk.  11.  I  was  longing  for  that  to  be  done.  12.  He 
would  not  permit  it  to  be  done.  13.  The  rain  hindered  us  all 
day  from  going  out.  1 4.  It  was  necessary  that  we  should  go 
away  before  the  others  came.  15.  It  was  better  that  we  should 
be  here  without  their  knowing  it.  16.  I  was  afraid  that  he 
had  said  too  much.  17.  I  doubted  whether  he  would  be  able 
to  pay  that  price.  18.  I  was  very  sorry  that  we  had  not  been 
able  to  go  for  a  walk  together;  I  am  sure  we  should  have 
enjoyed  ourselves.  19.  Our  friends  were  glad  that  you  had 
visited  them  before  they  left  for  France.  20.  He  told  me  he 
would  go  away,  unless  he  succeeded  better.  21.  We  did  not 
say  you  should  write  the  letter;  you  may  do  as  you  wish. 
22.  Did  you  fear  he  would  go  away  without  coming  to  see 
you  1  23.  My  father  thought  you  would  come,  but  my  mother 
thought  you  would  not  come.  24.  It  was  impossible  that  he 
should  not  be  mistaken ;  he  trusts  those  who  are  not  worthy 
of  confidence.  25.  We  are  not  sure  they  would  come.  26. 
We  waited  until  they  came.  27.  We  have  taken  care  that 
they  should  not  see  us.  28.  No  man  has  ever  lived  who  could 
equal  him  in  prudence.  29.  He  was  the  noblest  man  I  have 
ever  known.     30.  I  left  Russia  when  I  was  a  boy ;  I  sought  a 


EXERCISE  XXVII,  a.  359 

country  where  I  might  be  free.  31.  Did  he  ever  have  a  friend 
who  was  faithful  to  him  ?  32.  Show  me  a  house  which  will 
suit  me  better  than  this  one.  33.  I  have  never  seen  anything 
which  suited  me  better.  34.  Why  did  your  father  come  ?  35. 
He  came  in  case  I  should  be  ill.  36.  Although  he  was  very 
ill,  he  would  not  go  home. 

EXERCISE  XXVII,  a.  (§§274-275.) 

Je  lui  ai  dit  son  fait.  I  (have)  told  him  what  I  thought  of  him. 

Nous  nous  plaisons  k  la  ville.       We  like  it  (like  to  be)  in  the  city. 

H  se  plait  k  la  campagne.  He  likes  it  (likes  to  be)  in  the  country. 

Qu'il  fasse  beau,  ou  qu'il  pleuve.  "\  „_,    , ,       .^  •    ^  ^v  ^i.      -i.      • 

ovi  ^  -^  L  5  1    1  }■  Whether  it  is  fine,  or  whether  it  rams. 

D  il  fait  beau,  ou  qu  il  pleuve.    j 

^        ,     ^  ..        .         fEven  if  it  were  true. 

Quand  meme  ce  serait  vrai.        ■{  _, 

i^Even  were  it  true. 

II  s'en  plaint.  He  complains  of  it. 

1.  If  it  does  not  rain,  will  you  go  for  a  walk  to-morrow 
morning  ?  2.  No,  even  if  it  should  not  rain,  I  must  go  down 
town  to-morrow  morning  on  business.  3.  If  it  were  to  rain 
to-day,  we  should  not  go  down  town.  4.  If  I  had  known  that 
you  were  in  town,  I  should  have  gone  to  see  you.  5.  Had  it 
not  been  so  warm  to-day,  I  should  have  gone  away.  6.  If  the 
Germans  had  not  taken  Alsatia,  the  French  would  not  hate 
them  so  much  to-day.  7.  If  I  come  here  next  year,  I  shall 
bring  my  brother  with  me.  8.  If  I  were  you,  I  should  tell 
him  what  I  think  of  him.  9.  If  I  am  present  when  he  arrives, 
I  shall  tell  him  what  I  told  you.  10.  If  it  is  cold  in  winter, 
we  go  to  Florida;  if  it  is  mild,  we  remain  in  Canada.  11.  If 
my  father  likes  it  in  the  country,  he  will  stay  there  till  (the) 
autumn.  12.  If  I  should  like  it  in  the  city,  I  shall  stay  there 
always.  1 3.  I  can  never  trust  that  boy ;  if  he  should  tell  me 
anything,  I  should  not  believe  him.  14.  Whether  it  rains  or 
is  fine,  we  shall  come.  15.  He  is  a  good  (brave)  man,  if  there 
ever  was  one.  16.  If  that  man  were  as  rich  as  Croesus,  he 
would  not  be  satisfied.  17.  See  what  that  man  has  done  to 
me !  He  is  a  scoundrel,  if  there  ever  was  one.  18.  If  I 
should  go  to  sleep  before  you  come,  be  good  enough  to  wake 
me.  19.  Will  you  not  go  down  town  with  me  ?  20.  I  cannot 
go,  I  am  not  well;  if  I  were  better,  I  should  go  willingly. 


360  EXERCISE  XXVIII,  a. 

21.  If  he  had  risen  at  six  o'clock,  he  would  not  have  missed 
the  train.  22.  Yes,  he  would  (si  /  si  I).  He  would  have 
been  late,  even  if  he  had  risen  at  half-past  five,  for  the  train 
left  at  a  quarter  past  five.  23.  I  have  been  told  that  your 
friend  has  insulted  you ;  is  it  true  1  24.  No,  but  even  if  it 
were  true,  I  should  pardon  (it  to)  him.  25.  Did  our  friend 
tell  you  last  evening  whether  he  was  coming  to-morrow'} 
26.  Yes,  he  told  me  that  he  would  come.  27.  That  man 
told  me  that  he  had  a  thousand  dollars.  28.  Were  he  to 
swear  it,  I  should  not  believe  it.  29.  If  you  meet  him,  and 
he  should  ask  you  where  I  am,  do  not  tell  (it  to)  him. 
30.  Whether  he  comes,  or  not,  (that)  makes  no  difference 
to  me.     31.  f f  I  were  he,  I  should  tell  that  scoundrel  what 

I  thought  of  him.  32.  If  we  liked  it  in  the  country,  we  should 
stay  there.  33.  If  he  had  insulted  me  like  that,  I  should  have 
kicked  him  out.  34.  Even  were  you  to  hate  me,  I  should  not 
complain  (of  it).  35.  I  should  have  liked  it  in  the  country, 
if  it  had  not  rained  without  ceasing. 

EXERCISE  XXVIII,  a.  (§§276-285.) 

_        ...     rune  promenade.  "4..  .      .  ,, 

Je  vais  faire-{       ,  ^     ,  ,     >I  am  gome;  for  a  walk. 

I  un  tour  de  promenade.  J  e>      e 

Je  voudrais  le  faire.  I  should  like  to  do  it. 

T  ,     .        VI  1    r         /r*i.x  fl  should  like  him  to  do  it. 

Je  voudrais  qu'.l  le  fa^  (fit).  |j  ^.^^  ^.^  ^  ^^  .^ 

II  fait  beau  marcher  (se  promener).  <-r,.  ,       ,,  . 

^  '     Lit  IS  good  walkmg. 

-,  ,         J-     /      1    X  fit  is  vain  (useless)  for  you  to  speak. 

Vous  avez  beau  dire  (parler).  <  „  i    .  ,., 

I.  You  may  say  what  you  like. 

J*ai  cm  voir  passer  quelqu'un.  I  thought  I  saw  some  one  go  by. 

Je  les  ai  ^cout^s  chanter.  I  listened  to  them  sing(ing). 

II  a  pens^  mourir.  He  was  near  dying. 

Je  pense  (songe)  k  le  faire.  I  am  thinking  about  doing  it. 

II  ne  fait  que  de  venir  (arriver).  He  has  just  come. 

II  veut  faire  k  sa  t^te.  He  will  have  his  own  way. 

J'aimerais  autant  m'en  aller.  I  would  as  soon  go. 

Faites-le  monter.  Send  (show)  him  up  (stairs). 

1.  Let  us  go  for  a  walk  this  morning ;  the  walking  is  good, 
and  it  is  cool.  2.  Living  is  always  dear  in  Paris.  3.  Are 
the  children  coming  ?      4.  Yes,  I  saw  them  coming  when  I 


EXERCISE  XXIX,  a.  361 

was  on  the  hill.  5.  I  should  like  to  speak  to  the  doctor 
when  he  comes.  6.  I  should  like  you  to  speak  to  my  father 
when  you  see  him.  7.  When  do  you  expect  to  be  there? 
8.  I  expect  to  be  there  in  a  fortnight.  9.  He  might  say 
what  he  liked,  nobody  would  believe  him.  10.  It  was  use- 
less for  us  to  speak,  nobody  would  listen  to  us.  11.  I  like 
better  to  live  in  the  country  than  in  the  city.  12.  My 
friends  have  left  me,  and  I  know  not  what  to  do.  13.  I 
think  it  is  going  to  be  warm  to-day.  1 4.  My  father  thought 
he  heard  some  one   go   by,  but    I  think    he   was  mistaken. 

15.  My  father  was   very  ill  last  year;   he  was  near  dying. 

16.  His  little  boy  fell  into  the  water,  and  was  near  being 
drowned.  17.  I  was  thinking  about  going  to  see  you. 
18.  I  hope  I  shall  see  you  when  you  come.  19.  I  hope  he 
will  come  to  see  me  when  he  is  here.  20.  Did  you  see  my 
sister  at  the  ball?  21.  I  thought  I  saw  her,  but  I  am  not 
sure  (of  it).  22.  I  am  thinking  about  writing  him  a  letter, 
but  I  do  not  like  writing  letters,  and  so  I  delay  (it)  from  week 
to  week.  23.  I  should  like  better  to  go  than  to  stay.  24.  It 
would  be  better  to  go  than  to  stay.  25.  Come  and  see  us 
whenever  you  wish.  26.  My  master  has  just  come ;  after  he 
has  dined  I  shall  tell  him  that  you  are  here.  27.  I  hope  I 
shall  be  able  to  go  for  a  walk  with  you  to-morrow.  28.  I 
hope  you  will  not  go  away  before  I  have  seen  you.  29.  We 
ought  to  go  and  see  your  father  before  he  leaves.  30.  It  is 
useless  for  you  to  say  anything ;  he  will  have  his  own  way. 
31.  You  may  say  what  you  like;  young  people  will  have  their 
own  way.  32.  I  would  as  soon  go  as  stay.  33.  I  am  not 
very  well  this  morning ;  I  am  going  to  send  for  the  doctor. 
34.  The  doctor  has  just  come;  shall  I  send  him  up?  35.  We 
thought  we  heard  some  one  go  by,  but  we  must  have  been 
mistaken. 

EXERCISE  XXIX,  a.  (§§276-285,  con^inMed.) 

n  est  ^  travailler.  He  is  busy  working. 

J'y  suis  accoutum^.  I  am  used  to  it. 

II  finira  maL  He  will  come  to  a  bad  end. 

Se  plaire  k  mal  faire.  To  delight  in  evil-  (wrong-)  doing. 

II  tarde  k  venir.  He  is  long  in  coming. 

Tenez-vous  (beaucoup)  k  y  aller  ?      Are  you  (very)  anxious  to  go  there? 

Je  n'y  tiens  pas.  I  am  not  anxious  (for  it). 


362  EXERCISE  XXX,  a. 

1.  Continue  reading  until  you  are  called.  2.  We  are  busy 
•writing  our  exercises.  3.  I  have  my  work  to  do.  4.  Our 
teacher  taught  us  to  do  that.  5.  Will  you  help  me  to  do  my 
work  ?  6.  I  should  like  to  help  you,  but  I  have  work  to  do 
also.  7.  I  have  difficulty  in  believing  that  he  has  done  that. 
8.  How  old  is  that  child?  9.  He  is  two  years  old;  he  is 
beginning  to  talk.  10.  The  servant  is  busy  washing  dishes  in 
the  kitchen.  11.  We  are  occupied  to-day  in  writing  to  our 
friends.  12.  He  spends  his  time  in  reading  novels.  13.  He 
is  not  lazy;  he  sets  about  writing  his  lesson  as  soon  as  his 
teacher  tells  (it  to)  him.  14.  Do  you  not  get  tired  (in)  reading 
those  difficult  works?  15.  A  little,  but  I  am  rather  used  to 
it.  16.  He  lost  a  great  deal  in  selling  his  house.  17.  That 
boy  persists  in  reading  bad  books ;  he  will  come  to  a  bad  end. 
18.  The  wicked  delight  in  evil-doing.  19.  Our  friends  invited 
us  to  stay  with  them.  20.  I  should  like  to  know  where  my 
mother  is ;  she  is  long  in  coming.  21.  I  wish  she  would  come; 
I  long  to  see  her.  22.  Are  you  anxious  to  have  it  to-day^ 
23.  Oh  no,  I  am  not  anxious  for  that ;  but  I  must  have  it  to- 
morrow. 24.  Are  those  apples  good  to  eat  ?  25.  We  are 
looking  for  a  maid  of  all  work.  26.  That  young  lady  sings 
and  dances  charmingly.  27.  There  are  five  bed-rooms  in  that 
house.  28.  That  poor  little  girl  has  hurt  her  hand ;  she  is 
crying  pitifully.  29.  Our  neighbour  has  died;  his  family  is 
to  be  pitied.  30.  That  young  man  seems  to  delight  in  wrong- 
doing. 31.  Are  you  not  very  anxious  to  see  your  friends? 
32.  Yes,  I  should  like  to  see  them  ;  I  have  not  seen  them  for 
a  long  time.  33.  That  is  very  difficult  to  do ;  I  should  like 
you  to  help  me.  34.  I  am  always  ready  to  help  you.  35.  I 
am  glad  to  know  that  you  are  not  the  only  one  to  say  so. 
36.  That  scoundrel  did  not  succeed  in  deceiving  us. 

EXERCISE  XXX,  a.  (§§276-285,  continued.) 

n  fait  semblant  de  dormir.  He  pretends  to  be  asleep. 

Bien  faire,  mal  faire.  To  do  well,  to  do  evil  (wrong). 

1.  Our  teacher  tells  us  that  it  is  easy  to  read  that  book. 
2.  I  am  ashamed  to  say  that  we  are  mistaken.  3.  He  pretends 
to  be  asleep.  4.  She  pretends  to  be  reading.  5.  It  is  difficult 
to  say  whether  we  are  right  or  wrong.     6.   He  is  wron^  to 


EXERCISE  XXXI,  a.  363 

believe  that  we  are  his  enemies.  7.  "Will  you  permit  me  to 
go  to  bed  1  8.  Promise  us  not  to  go  away  without  telling  us 
(it).  9.  I  am  very  glad  to  say  that  I  shall  be  able  to  come 
and  see  you  at  once.  10.  We  are  sorry  to  tell  you  that  we 
cannot  come.  11.  Cease  to  do  evil;  learn  to  do  well.  12. 
Hasten  to  finish  your  work  before  leaving.  13.  Let  us  hasten 
to  leave,  or  we  shall  be  late.  14.  I  am  afraid  to  speak,  al- 
though I  know  it  is  my  place  to  tell  them  that  they  have 
done  wrong.  15.  He  commenced  by  telling  me  that  he  was  a 
rich  man's  son,  and  he  finished  by  asking  me  to  lend  him  five 
dollars.  16.  Take  care  not  to  fall.  17.  If  you  happen  to  see 
him,  tell  him  that  I  shall  not  go  away  before  seeing  him. 
18.  I  have  just  seen  him,  and  he  told  me  to  tell  you  that  he 
would  come  to-morrow.  19.  We  (on)  should  not  live  to  eat. 
20.  It  is  too  cold  to  go  for  a  walk.  21.  It  is  not  cool  enough 
to  go  for  a  walk.  22.  I  rose  early  this  morning  in  order  to 
be  able  to  do  my  work  before  going  down  town.  23.  We 
leam  French  in  order  to  be  able  to  read  French  books.  24. 
After  writing  our  exercises  we  went  for  a  walk,  25.  That 
little  boy  was  punished  for  having  lied.  26.  That  young  girl 
is  much  to  be  pitied ;  her  father  and  mother  are  dead.  27. 
Before  going  we  should  like  to  see  you.  28.  We  should  like 
to  see  you  before  you  go.  29.  We  saw  these  houses  being 
built.  30.  He  did  that  without  telling  us  (it).  31.  We  went 
away  without  his  seeing  us.  32.  It  was  very  windy,  and  we 
would  not  go  out  for  a  sail  for  fear  of  being  drowned.  33. 
Although  he  made  me  many  compliments  at  first,  he  finally 
insulted  me.  34.  Your  father  has  just  come ;  shall  I  tell  him 
to  wait  here,  or  should  you  like  to  see  him  at  once  1  35.  I 
have  not  time  to  see  him  now ;  I  shall  try  to  see  him  to- 
morrow.    36.  We  cannot  hinder  him  from  doing  so. 

EXERCISE  XXXI,  a.  (§§286-287.) 

Cette  femme  me  fait  piti^.  I  am  sorry  for  that  woman. 

II  s'est  fach6  contre  moi.  He  got  angry  with  me. 

1.  Knowing  so  many  things,  those  gentlemen  must  be  very 
learned.  2.  The  field  of  battle  was  covered  with  the  dead  and 
dying.  3.  I  am  sorry  for  that  poor  woman  ;  she  is  always  ill. 
4.  In  neglecting  her  duties,  she  shows  herself  careless.     6. 


364  EXERCISE  XXXII,  a. 

Their  misfortunes  went  on  increasing  from  day  to  day. 
6.  Don't  you  see  them  coming?  7.  Yes;  there  they  come! 
8.  Man  is  the  only  speaking  creature.  9.  Frenchmen  will  say 
(pres.)  that,  generally  speaking,  Frenchmen  are  better  than 
Englishmen.  10.  How  happy  those  peasants  are !  They  are 
always  singing  their  beautiful  songs,  as  they  work.  11.  One's 
appetite  comes  while  eating;  but,  said  the  Gascon,  I  have  been 
eating  two  hours,  and  it  has  not  come  yet.  12.  I  like  reading, 
but  I  prefer  hunting  and  fishing.  13.  Where  are  the  children? 
14.  There  they  are,  playing  under  the  trees.  15.  Our  neigh- 
bour's son  has  made  astonishing  progress  at  (the)  college.  16. 
The  sewing-machine  is  an  American  invention,  but  there  are 
many  of  them  in  Europe  now.  17.  Our  friends  were  very 
much  astonished  at  our  coming;  they  thought  we  were  in 
Europe.  18.  As  we  were  taking  a  walk  this  morning,  we  met 
the  old  gentleman  who  used  to  live  next  door.  19.  Our 
neighbours  are  speaking  of  going  away,  but  I  do  not  think 
tjhey  will.  20.  That  young  man  went  away  without  saying 
good-bye ;  he  must  have  got  angry  with  me.  21.  That  prince 
has  powerful  enemies.  22.  That  lady,  being  ill,  has  not  come 
to-day.  23.  Those  children,  having  finished  their  work,  have 
gone  out.  24.  Those  so-called  learned  men,  who  really  know 
nothing,  are  very  tiresome.  25.  Who  is  that  man  going  past] 
26.  That  is  the  would-be  nobleman.  27.  England  has  the 
most  powerful  fleet  in  the  world.  28.  That  little  girl,  having 
been  ill,  cannot  go  to  school.  29.  Our  friends,  being  tired, 
have  gone  to  bed.  30.  Seriously  speaking,  that  young  man  is 
not  worthy  of  being  respected.  31.  Those  children  appear  to 
be  well.  32.  If  the  population  of  the  towns  goes  on  increasing, 
and  that  of  the  country  diminishing,  we  shall  probably  have 
great  misfortunes.  33.  I  saw  him  coming  down  the  street 
before  I  met  you.  34.  While  travelling,  I  saw  many  astonish- 
ing things.     35.  Did  you  not  see  my  brothers  going  out  'i 

EXERCISE  XXXII,  a.  (§§288-292.) 

Elle  s'y  est  plu.  She  liked  it  there. 

Vous  etes-vous  bien  amus^  ?  Did  you  have  a  good  time  ? 

Elles  se  sont  donn^  la  main.  They  have  shaken  hands. 

EUes  se  sont  brouill^es.  They  have  fallen  out. 

Les  grandes  chaleurs  qu'il  a  fait.  The  great  heat  that  there  has  been. 


EXERCISE  XXXII,  a.  365 

1.  That  IS  the  old  lady  whom  I  saw  fall  in  the  street  yester- 
day. 2.  She  fell  in  front  of  Mr.  Simon's,  and  I  helped  her  to 
get  up.  3.  Our  friends  have  gone  away,  but  they  will  come 
back  to-morrow.  4.  Your  mother  has  been  in  the  country ; 
did  she  like  it  there?  5.  She  enjoyed  herself  (there) 
very  much;  she  intends  to  go  back  again  soon.  6.  Your 
sister  and  mother  have  come.  7.  You  will  find  enclosed  [a] 
copy  of  the  contract  which  we  have  signed.  8.  The  ten  hours 
that  he  has  slept  have  not  been  enough  to  rest  him.  9.  The 
children  had  a  good  time  to-day  at  the  picnic.  10.  Where 
is  the  servant?  11.  I  have  let  her  go  to  see  her  friends. 
12.  Those  are  the  three  miles  that  I  ran  to  {pour)  fetch  the 
doctor.  13.  Those  are  the  dangers  we  have  incurred  to  save 
our  country.  14.  She  remembered  the  dangers  I  had  incur- 
red. 15.  Did  those  two  ladies  shake  hands?  16.  No;  they 
did  not  even  look  at  each  other.  17.  Those  ladies  have 
written  each  other  many  letters.  18.  There  are  the  letters  I 
wrote,  19.  Those  young  ladies  have  fallen  out,  and  have 
burnt  the  letters  they  wrote  to  each  other.  20.  They  have 
said  good-bye  to  each  other.  21.  They  have  lost  what  they 
have  given  each  other.  22.  The  great  heat  that  there  has 
been  has  killed  the  crops.  23.  The  person  I  asked  (prier) 
to  sing  will  not  sing.  24.  What  difficulty  we  have  had  to 
remember  what  you  told  us  !  25.  The  crops  are  poor  this 
year ;  the  great  heat  has  killed  them.  26.  That  is  the  house 
which  we  had  built.  27.  How  many  houses  they  have  built  1 
28.  How  many  beautiful  houses  they  have  had  built !  29. 
That  is  the  lady  we  heard  sing  at  the  concert  last  evening. 
30.  Those  are  the  children  we  saw  playing  this  morning.  31. 
Those  are  the  beautiful  songs  we  heard  sung  at  the  concert. 

32.  Do  you  remember  the  houses  we  saw  being  built  last  year  ^ 

33.  There  is  a  letter  which  I  forgot  to  put  in  the  post.  34. 
He  has  read  all  the  books  he  could.  35.  There  are  the  books 
we  sent  for.  36.  We  have  told  them  to  go  out.  37.  Those 
are  the  books  which  I  thought  he  would  read. 


EXERCISE  XXXIII,  a. 


EXERCISE  XXXIII,  a.  (§§293-299.) 

II  se  croit  honnete  homme.  He  thinks  he  is  an  honest  man. 

II  ne  s'en  est  pas  aper^u.  He  did  not  notice  it. 

Ce  chapeau  ne  lui  va  pas.  That  hat  does  not  fit  him. 

II  ne  (nous)  est  pas  permis  de  .  .  ,     We  are  not  permitted  to  .  .  . 

Je  le  lui  ai  pay^.  I  paid  him  for  it. 

Je  Ten  ai  remercie.  I  thanked  him  for  it. 

Je  pense  h  vous.  I  am  thinking  of  you. 

Que  pensez-vous  de  cela  ?  What  do  you  think  of  that  ? 

1.  We  shall  make  them  do  their  work.     2.  They  (on)  have 
made  her  suffer  great  ills.     3.  Show  them  up  stairs  when  they 


come.     4.  I  have  seen  the  children  play.     5.  We  have  seen 
become  [a]  soldier.     8.  What  will  become  of  us  !     9.  I  believe 


him  play  that  part.     6.  He  was  born  [a]  poet.     7.  He  has 


fa] 


he  is  an  honest  man.  10.  He  thinks  he  is  [a]  scholar.  11.  I 
know  he  is  [a]  scholar.  12.  We  should  not  slander  our  neigh- 
bours. 13.  I  perceived  their  dejection,  as  soon  as  I  came  in; 
did  you?  (see  §  256).  U.  No,  I  did  not  notice  it.  15.  We 
cannot  do  without  our  books;  we  are  going  to  use  them  to- 
morrow. 16.  I  remember  the  sorrows  you  made  me  undergo. 
17.  These  gloves  do  not  fit  me.  18.  That  young  lady's  gloves 
do  not  fit  her.  19.  I  shall  look  for  a  house  which  suits  me 
better  (see  §  270,  1).  20.  That  house  does  not  suit  our  friends. 
21.  I  cannot  trust  him  ;  he  often  lies.  22.  The  son  resembles 
his  father.  23.  We  are  not  permitted  to  leave  the  city. 
24.  The  law  does  not  permit  children  to  marry.  25.  The 
king  pardons  him  his  crime.  26.  Did  you  pay  the  tailor  for 
your  coat  1  27.  I  have  not  paid  him  for  it  yet.  28.  What 
are  you  looking  at  1  29.  I  am  looking  at  those  men  working 
in  the  field.  30.  Wait  for  me,  till  I  come.  31.  I  think  of 
my  friends  who  have  gone  away.  32.  Do  you  think  of  the 
money  you  have  lost  1  33.  I  do  not.  34.  Shall  you  be  at  the 
ball  this  evening  1  35.  I  do  not  know ;  that  depends  on  you. 
36.  Did  you  thank  him  for  having  lent  you  his  book  1  37.  1 
did.  38.  He  stole  that  watch  from  his  father ;  what  do  you 
think  of  that?  39.  He  is  laughing  at  us.  40.  Those  men 
were  playing  cards.  41.  Those  young  ladies  play  on  the 
violin.  42.  You  believe  me;  do  you  not?  43.  Yes,  I  believe 
you.     44.  That  old  lady  believes  in  ghosts.     45.  He  loves 


EXEECISES  xxxiv-xxxv,  a.  367 

and  obeys  his  parents.     46.  He  missed  the  train ;  did  he  not? 

47.  I  am  short  of  money  this  morning;  I  cannot  pay  you. 

48.  He  fails  in  his  duty  when  he  does   not   pay  his  debts. 

49.  Have  you  asked  your  father  for  money]     50.  I  have  not 
asked  him  for  any. 

EXERCISE  XXXIV,  a.  (§§300-306.) 

1.  Tell  ibhe  servant  to  put  the  frying-pan  on  the  stove.  2. 
That  man  is  a  regular  dupe.  3.  He  is  not  a  friend ;  he  is  a 
mere  acquaintance.  4.  He  was  received  with  all  the  honours. 
5.  That  poet  is  always  singing  of  his  first  love.  6.  The  errors 
of  men  are  numerous.  7.  The  old  man  has  {faire)  a  nap  after 
dinner.  8.  He  paid  me  a  large  sum  of  money.  9.  My 
memory  is  not  good ;  give  me  a  memorandum  of  that  affair. 
10.  Steam  makes  the  steamer  go.  11.  That  man  and  his 
wife  are  a  happy  couple.  42.  I  have  Hugo's  works  at  home. 
13.  The  works  of  the  sculptor  Barye  were  exhibited  in  Paris 
in  1889.  14.  Old  people  are  generally  less  thoughtless  than 
young  people.  15.  Those  people  are  not  all  good.  16.  All 
those  people  were  present.  17.  All  good  people  are  worthy  of 
respect.  18.  All  the  clever  people  in  {de)  the  town  were 
present  at  the  ball.  19.  Happy  [are]  the  people  who  do  not 
love  vice.  20.  All  the  young  men  of  the  village  were  present 
at  the  celebration. 

EXERCISE  XXXV,  a.  (§§307-314.) 

Tomber  k  genoux.  To  fall  on  one's  knees. 

Le  petit  bonhomme.  The  brave  little  fellow. 

1.  That  man  has  broken  his  two  arms.  2.  The  *ifs*  and 
the  *  buts '  are  often  convenient  words.  3.  The  criminal  fell 
on  his  knees  before  the  king.  4.  That  little  boy  likes  to  pick 
up  pebbles.  5.  The  generals  have  good  horses.  6.  We  read 
the  newspapers  before  going  down  town  [in]  the  morning.  7. 
Frenchmen  like  carnivals  and  balls.  8.  Our  neighbour  has 
some  beautiful  corals  at  home.  9.  The  Minister  of  Public 
Works  has  ordered  a  railway  to  be  constructed.  10.  His 
grandfathers  are  dead.  11.  Our  ancestors  were  great  men 
who  left  [behind  them]  many  noble  works.  12.  The  poor  boy 
had  tears  in  his  {aijiac)  eyes  when  he  was  told  that  his  bird  was 


368  EXERCISE  XXXVI,  a. 

dead.  13.  That  painter  makes  beautiful  skies.  14.  Several 
Te  Deums  were  sung  this  year  in  that  church.  15.  Give  me 
two  postage-stamps,  if  you  please.  16.  We  had  some  delight- 
ful private  interviews.  17.  Those  corkscrews  are  useless. 
18.  Those  lamp-shades  are  very  pretty.  19.  Give  me  a  tooth- 
pick, if  you  please.  20.  Do  not  condemn  me  on  rumours. 
21.  The  two  Corneilles  were  dramatic  authors.  22.  All  the 
Ribots  were  present.  23.  I  have  two  Molieres  at  home.  24. 
The  Bourbons  have  been  very  unfortunate  ;  I  pity  them.  25. 
I  saw  the  school-boys  marching  yesterday;  the  brave  little 
fellows  were  really  fine-looking.  26.  The  noblemen  of  France 
have  suffered  much  during  this  century.  27.  There  are  two 
gentlemen  and  two  ladies  waiting  for  you.  28..  Good  morn- 
ing, ladies ;  how  do  you  do  1  29.  I  have  visited  all  the 
county-towns  of  that  part  of  France.  30.  Many  of  Moliere's 
works  are  masterpieces. 

EXERCISE  XXXVI,  a.  (§§315-335.) 

1.  He  showed  remarkable  courage  in  struggling  with  his 
difficulties.  2.  We  used  to- enjoy  good  health  when  we  lived 
in  France.  3.  Do  you  not  like  music  ?  4.  I  do,  when  it  is 
good.  5.  Gold  and  silver  are  abundant  in  that  country.  6. 
The  rich  have  much  gold  and  silver.  7.  Does  that  young  lady 
know  Greek  1  8.  She  does  not,  but  she  knows  French  and 
German  well.  9.  Does  your  mother  speak  French  ?  10.  Yes, 
she  speaks  French  and  German  well.  11.  We  have  French 
and  German  books  in  our  library.  12.  Have  you  any  good 
sugar  for  sale,  sir?  13.  Have  you  any  of  my  books  in  your 
library?  14.  Have  you  any  of  the  good  wine  you  bought  last 
year  ?  15.  We  have  no  pens  and  no  paper.  1 6.  They  have 
no  more  money,  and  so  they  must  stay  at  home.  17.  That  is 
not  wine ;  it  is  water.  18.  It  is  not  money  I  ask  you  for,  but 
friendship.  19.  Why  do  you  complain;  have  you  not  friends'? 
20.  I  should  like  to  buy  a  pound  of  tea ;  have  you  any  of  the 
good  tea  which  you  ordered  from  China?  21.  I  shall  give  you 
something  good,  if  you  come  to  see  me.  22.  He  promised  me 
something  very  beautiful,  but  he  never  gave  it  to  me.  23. 
Many  people  believe  that  he  will  come  to  a  bad  end.  24. 
Many  others  believe  that  he  will  succeed  well.  25.  Most 
people  are  ignorant  of  their  true  interests.     26.  We  were 


EXERCISE  XXXVII,  a.  369 

absent  most  of  the  time.  27.  Silk  dresses  and  gold  watches 
are  not  always  necessary.  28.  Horses  are  animals  which  are 
useful  to  men.  29.  Queen  Victoria  has  been  reigning  a  long 
time.  30.  The  President  of  the  French  Republic  has  signed 
the  treaty.  31.  King  Louis  XIV.  is  often  called  the  Great. 
32.  That  old  man  has  a  long  beard.  33.  Give  me  your  hand, 
and  I  shall  help  you  to  rise.  34.  We  shook  hands  before  we 
parted.  35.  She  has  not  taken  off  her  hat  and  gloves ;  she 
says  she  cannot  stay.  36.  I  have  tooth-ache  and  ear-ache, 
and  so  I  cannot  go  out.  37.  That  little  girl  has  blue  eyes, 
and  blond  hair.  38.  I  had  my  hair  cut  before  starting.  39. 
What  is  the  matter  with  you,  my  little  boy  1  40.  My  hands 
and  feet  are  cold. 


EXERCISE  XXXVII,  a.  (§§315-335,  continued.) 

Combien  les  avez-vous  payes  ?  How  much  did  you  pay  for  them  ? 

Je  les  ai  pay^s  dix  francs  la  douzaine.  I  paid  ten  francs  a  dozen  for  them. 

II  part  pour  la  France.  He  is  starting  for  France. 

An  nord  de  la  France.  In  the  north  of  France. 

1.  You  have  some  very  fine  pears ;  how  much  did  you  pay 
for  them  ?  2.  I  paid  two  cents  apiece  for  them.  3.  That  is 
not  dear;  I  thought  that  pears  would  not  sell  so  cheap  this 
year.  4.  Carpenters  are  earning  ten  francs  a  day  at  present. 
6.  We  do  not  go  to  school  on  Saturday.  6.  He  will  come  on 
Saturday.  7.  You  were  wrong  to  come  on  Wednesday ;  you 
should  always  come  on  Thursday.  8.  Did  I  step  on  your 
toel  I  ask  your  pardon.  9.  Are  you  going  on  horseback  or 
on  foot"?  10.  How  we  love  spring!  11.  In  spring  nature 
awakes  from  its  long  repose.  1 2.  In  winter  there  is  sometimes 
much  snow  in  France.  13.  Those  gentlemen  are  Frenchmen. 
14.  Our  neighbour  is  a  carpenter.  15.  His  son  has  become 
a  distinguished  physician.  16.  Charles  the  First,  King  of 
England,  was  beheaded.  17.  She  was  born  at  Marseilles,  a 
city  of  Southern  France.  18.  We  were  without  friends  and 
money.  19.  Those  children  have  neither  father  nor  mother. 
20.  He  will  come  home  at  Michaelmas.  21.  Those  ladies 
dress  in  French  style.  22.  Have  you  ever  read  Tasso's  great 
poem  ?  23.  Yes,  and  Ariosto's  also.  24.  We  are  to  start  for 
Europe  to-morrow.  25.  Normandy  is  a  province  of  France. 
84 


370  EXERCISE  XXXVIII,  a. 

26.  Did  you  ever  live  in  Paris  ?  27.  Yes,  I  lived  a  long  time 
in  France,  and  in  England  too.  28.  My  brother  has  lived  in 
China,  but  he  is  living  now  in  Japan.  29.  The  United  States 
is  the  most  important  country  in  North  America.  30.  Havre 
is  an  important  seaport  of  the  north  of  France.  31.  New 
Orleans  is  a  large  city  of  the  United  States.  32.  French 
wines  are  celebrated  in  all  parts  of  the  world.  33.  That 
traveller  comes  from  Africa,  and  is  going  to  South  America. 
34.  Ladies,  you  are  welcome;  we  are  always  glad  to  receive 
you.     35.  Our  neighbour  goes  to  the  city  every  other  day. 

EXERCISE  XXXVIII,  a.  (§§336-358.) 

1.  That  little  boy's  grandmother  has  given  him  a  knife. 
2.  That  little  girl  is  very  foolish.  3.  I  know  those  old  ladies 
well ;  they  are  our  old  neighbours.  4.  What  a  fine-looking 
man  !  Do  you  know  him  1  5.  There  are  some  beautiful 
trees  !     6.  The  prince  addressed  him  most  flattering  words. 

7.  That   statesman   is   celebrated   for   his   liberal   principles. 

8.  There  are,  according  to  Catholic  doctrine,  seven  capital 
sins.  9.  The  man  and  his  wife  were  both  old.  10.  The 
French  and  Italian  nations  are  often  called  Latin  nations. 
11.  Those  flowers  smell  sweet,  do  they  not?  12.  That  large 
building  is  the  school  for  (de)  deaf-mutes.  13.  He  left  the 
door  wide  open  when  he  went  out  this  morning.  14.  The 
newly  married  couple  had  just  left  the  church.  15.  My 
mother  had  blue  eyes  and  light  auburn  hair.  16.  When  I 
was  young,  I  used  to  go  barefoot  to  school.  17.  That  lady 
looks  kind.  18.  A  pound  sterling  is  worth  twenty-five  francs. 
19.  He  is  getting  richer  and  richer.  20.  He  is  richer  than 
people  (on)  believe.  21.  The  older  one  is,  the  wiser  one 
should  be.  22.  My  brother  is  older  than  I  by  four  years. 
23.  The  richer  one  part  of  the  population  becomes,  the  poorer 
the  rest  often  become.  24.  Your  house  is  small,  but  ours  is 
smaller  still.  25.  That  man  is  bad,  but  his  brother  is  still 
worse.  26.  The  dearer  those  articles  are,  the  less  of  them  we 
shall  be  able  to  buy.  27.  Our  house  is  good,  but  yours  is 
better.  28.  His  most  intimate  friends  knew  nothing  of  his 
good  fortune.  29.  Men  are  often  the  most  unhappy  when 
they  ought  to  be  the  most  happy.     30.  Is  that  not  a  splendid 


EXERCISES  XXXIX-XL,  a.  371 

sight?  31.  Yes,  it  is  most  beautiful!  32.  The  richest  men 
in  the  world  are  not  always  the  happiest.  33.  She  is  shorter 
than  I  by  three  inches. 

EXERCISE  XXXIX,  a.  (§§336-358,  continued.) 

1.  You  are  all  welcome,  ladies  ;  how  kind  you  are  to  come 
to  see  me  !  2.  What  a  pretty  little  girl !  What  is  her  name  ? 
3.  There  were  black  horses  and  white  ones  in  the  proces- 
sion. 4.  Will  you  give  me  some  cold  water  to  (pour)  drink  ? 
5.  Whose  is  that  broken  cane  1  6.  Our  neighbour  is  not  an 
educated  man.  7.  Our  friends  live  in  a  beautiful  white  house 
behind  the  town.  8.  The  English  language  is  spoken  in  all 
parts  of  the  world.  9.  I  have  just  seen  that  pretended  noble- 
man go  by.  10.  We  have  just  been  at  a  political  meeting, 
where  we  listened  to  a  very  long  speech.  11.  My  dear  child, 
you  are  too  young  to  wear  dear  dresses!  12.  I  love  that 
gentleman;  he  is  so  kind  to  children.  13.  Are  you  not  ready 
to  start?  You  are  very  slow  in  dressing.  14.  I  am  very  glad 
to  see  you;  when  are  you  coming  to  visit  me?  15.  I  am  very 
sorry  to  say  that  I  have  no  time  to  visit  you  before  I  go  away. 
16.  We  are  charmed  with  the  beautiful  present  you  gave 
(/aire)  us.  17.  You  are  not  angry  with  me,  are  you?  18.  I 
do  not  like  that  man;  he  is  too  severe  with  his  children. 

19.  That  is  a  nice  little  ginl ;  she  is  so  polite  to  everybody, 

20.  That  little  boy  is  very  clever  at  history  and  arithmetic. 

21.  That  army  is  weak  in  numbers.  22.  We  must  be 
charitable  to  everybody.  23.  Living  languages  are  more 
useful  than  dead  languages.  24.  We  must  not  confound  the 
verbal  adjectives  with  the  present  participles.  25.  That 
young  man  is  the  living  image  of  his  father.  26.  The  more 
learned  that  man  becomes,  the  less  generous  he  becomes. 

EXERCISE  XL,  a.  (§§359-373.) 

1.  Are  there  any  good  pens  in  the  box?  2.  There  are  none. 
3.  Do  you  know  that  old  man?  4.  I  know  him  and  his 
brother.  5.  Do  you  know  that  man  and  his  wife?  6.  We 
know  both  him  and  her.  7.  We  know  him  only.  8.  Did  you 
see  my  father  and  mother?  9.  We  saw  her  only.  10.  Are 
you  going  to  give  them  some  money?     11.  I  have  already 


372  EXERCISE  XLI,  a. 

given  them  some.  12.  Will  you  give  me  some  apples  ?  13.  I 
shall  give  you  and  him  some.  14.  Have  you  spoken  to  my 
cousin  of  your  plan?  15.  I  have  spoken  of  it  to  her  and  her 
mother.  16.  Will  you  have  the  goodness  to  introduce  us  to 
your  mother?  17.  I  shall  have  great  pleasure  in  introducing 
you  to  her.  18.  I  was  thinking  of  you  when  you  came  in. 
19.  Do  you  think  of  me,  when  I  am  far  away?  20.  Yes,  I 
always  think  of  you.  21.  Whose  is  that  house?  22.  It  is 
mine.  23.  As  soon  as  the  child  saw  his  mother,  he  ran  to  her. 
24  Are  you  that  young  man's  sister?  25.  I  am.  26.  Are 
you  satisfied,  madam?  27.  lam.  28.  Are  you  an  American, 
sir  ?  29.  I  am.  30.  Are  you  the  gentlemen  we  met  yester- 
day ?  31.  We  are.  32.  I  shall  go  for  the  doctor,  if  you  wish. 
33.  I  shall  do  the  work,  if  it  is  necessary.  34.  That  man  is 
richer  than  we  are.  35.  Why  do  you  tell  me  to  be  brave  1  I 
am  so  already.  36.  He  carried  the  day  over  all  his  rivals. 
37.  Tell  me  where  he  lives,  if  you  know.  38.  He  is  a 
Canadian,  and  I  am  one  too.  39.  Do  you  know  the  Robin- 
sons ?  40.  Yes,  they  are  very  fastidious  people,  and  I  do  not 
like  to  have  [anything]  to  do  with  them.  41.  There  is  the 
box ;  put  the  pens  into  it.  42.  Go  there,  my  child ;  do  not 
stay  here.  43.  Do  not  go  there,  my  daughter ;  you  will  hurt 
yourself.  44.  Give  them  some,  my  little  boy.  45.  He  is  a 
bad  man;  I  cannot  trust  him.  46.  The  earth  about  those 
flowers    is    dry;    throw    some    water    there,    my    daughter. 

47.  Let  us  not  go  away ;  let  them  laugh  at  us,  if  they  will. 

48.  The  children  wish  to  go  to  the  celebration;  let  us  take 
them  there.  49.  That  boy  has  apples  and  pears ;  let  us  ask 
him  for  some.  50.  That  boy  has  your  knife;  take  it  away 
from  him. 

EXERCISE  XLI,  a.  {%%Z59-313y  continued.) 

1.  My  father  did  not  hurt  himself,  but  he  had  a  narrow 
escape.  2.  Every  one  for  himself  is  too  often  the  maxim  of 
men.  3.  One  should  not  always  be  thinking  of  one's  self. 
4.  The  selfish  live  only  for  themselves.  5.  Do  you  need 
money?  6.  I  do.  7.  Do  you  come  from  London?  8.  We 
do.  9.  I  cannot  understand  why  he  has  a  grudge  against  me. 
10.  However  that  may  be,  it  is  all  over  with  him.  11.  Have 
you  any  money  ?     12.  I  have,  but  I  should  like  to  have  more. 


EXERCISE  XLII,  a.  373 

13.  How  many  apples  have  you?  14.  I  have  six.  15.  Here 
are  some  fine  pears;  do  you  wish  any?  16.  Yes,  I  should 
like  some,  for  I  have  none.  17.  Switzerland  is  my  country; 
I  love  its  blue  sky  and  free  institutions.  18.  I  planted  this 
apple-tree;  I  hope  I  shall  eat  its  fruit.  19.  Do  you  ever 
think  of  your  country  when  you  are  in  foreign  countries? 
20.  When  I  am  far  away,  I  always  think  of  it.  21.  My 
brother  has  gone  home,  and  I  am  going  too.  22.  I  see  a 
crowd  of  people  in  the  street ;  what  is  the  matter?  23.  Were 
you  ever  in  Europe  ?  24.  I  never  was.  25.  We  shall  make 
him  do  it  when  we  come.  26.  The  doctor  is  at  home  ;  shall 
I   send   for   him?     27.  There   they   are;   go   and   get  them. 

28.  There  is  some  water;  give  us  some,   for  we  are  thirsty. 

29.  Do  not  give  them  any;  they  do  not  need  any.  30.  Where 
are  the  children  ?  31.  They  are  coming  up  the  street.  32.  Do 
not  listen  to  them  ;  they  are  making  sport  of  you.  33.  There 
is  my  hat ;  give  it  to  me,  if  you  please.  34.  That  is  my  hat ; 
do  not  give  it  to  him.  35.  Let  us  go  away ;  it  is  getting  late. 
36.  If  you  have  any  money,  give  me  some.  37.  He  gives 
himself  some,  but  he  will  not  give  us  any.  38.  Take  us  there. 
39.  Give  it  to  us  ;  do  not  give  it  to  them.  40.  What  are  you 
doing,  naughty  dog?  Go  away.  41.  I  saw  him,  and  gave 
him  the  money.  42.  They  are  worthy  people;  I  love  and 
admire  them.  43.  Our  duty  to  our  parents  is  to  love  and 
obey  them.  44.  It  is  I  who  was  there.  45.  My  father  and  I 
were  not  there.  46.  What  were  you  and  he  doing  ?  47.  He 
was  writing,  and  I  was  reading.  48.  He  has  a  house  of  his 
own.  49.  You  and  he  were  there,  were  you  not  ?  50.  There 
is  the  box ;  I  should  like  to  know  whether  there  is  anything 
in  it. 

EXERCISE  XLII,  a.  (§§374-377.) 

EUe  lui  a  ferm^  la  porte  au  nez.  She  shut  the  door  in  his  face. 

Cela  lui  a  fait  venir  I'eau  k  la  bouche.     That  made  his  mouth  water. 
Cette  nuit ;  de  toute  la  nuit.  Last  night ;  all  night. 

1.  My  father  and  yours  will  soon  be  here.  2.  I  have  your 
books  and  my  own.  3.  Our  friends  are  coming  by  the  rail- 
way ;  yours  are  coming  by  the  steamer.  4.  My  brother  and 
sister  have  gone  away ;  they  will  not  be  back  till  Wednesday 
next.     5.  One  should  not  fail  to  pay  one's  debts,     6.  I  had 


374  EXERCISE  XLIII,  a. 

my  hair  cut  this  morning;  I  am  afraid  I  shall  catch  a  cold. 
7.  The  duke  was  presented  to  the  queen,  and  he  kissed  her 
hand.  8.  She  has  cut  her  finger.  9.  I  shall  love  him,  as 
long  as  my  heart  beats.  10.  It  was  so  warm  that  I  could  not 
close  my  eyes  all  night.  11.  Close  your  eyes,  and  open  your 
mouth.  12.  He  shuts  his  eyes  to  the  light.  13.  He  was 
walking  [with]  his  eyes  closed;  he  fell  and  broke  his  arm. 
14.  I  have  my  hands  full ;  I  cannot  help  you.  15.  I  went  to 
see  him,  but  he  shut  the  door  in  my  face.  16.  It  is  a  very 
cold  morning;  will  you  not  warm  your  hands'?  17.  Thank 
you  ;  my  hands  are  not  cold.  18.  That  clumsy  fellow  stepped 
on  my  toe,  and  he  hurt  me  very  much.  19.  My  head  aches 
this  morning ;  I  did  not  close  my  eyes  last  night.  20.  The 
sight  of  those  beautiful  apples  made  my  mouth  water.  21. 
He  stood  there,  [with]  his  arms  folded,  awaiting  his  fate  like 
a  brave  soldier.  22.  As  long  as  my  heart  beats,  I  shall  never 
forget  you.  23.  If  they  come  here,  we  shall  shut  the  door  in 
their  face.  24.  Do  you  see  those  poor  children ;  those  beau- 
tiful pears  made  their  mouths  water.  25.  Let  us  hope  that 
the  law  has  not  lost  its  force  in  this  country.  26.  He  has  a 
watch  of  his  own.  27.  Whom  do  you  mean ;  his  father  or 
her  father?  28.  I  mean  her  father.  29.  This  house  is  his, 
not  yours.  30.  They  lost  their  lives  fighting  for  their  (la) 
country.  31.  Negroes  have  dark  skins  and  large  mouths. 
32.  One  of  my  friends  who  is  a  doctor  told  me  the  following 
story.  33.  I  am  going  to  take  away  these  books  of  yours. 
34.  The  difference  between  mine  and  thine  is  not  always  easy 
to  determine.     35.  I  love  very  much  these  books  of  mine. 

EXERCISE  XLIII,  a.  (§§  378-388.) 

1.  I  have  never  read  that  book,  but  I  have  read  this  one, 
and  I  like  it  very  much.  2.  These  houses  are  not  so  line  as 
those.  3.  You  should  not  eat  in  that  way.  4.  Have 
patience,  I  shall  be  (pres.)  there  this  moment.  5.  Those  who 
do  wrong  will  be  punished.  6.  He  of  whom  you  were  speak- 
ing yesterday  has  arrived.  7.  Which  of  those  horses  do  you 
like  best?  8.  I  like  the  one  you  bought  better  than  your 
brother's,  but  I  like  my  own  best.  9.  This  house  and  the  one 
in  which  our  neighbours  live  will  be  sold  to-morrow.  10.  Our 
house  and  our  neighbour's  are  both  (en)  brick  [houses].     IL 


EXERCISE  XLIV,  a.  375 

These  facts,  and  those  discovered  since  that  time,  prove  that, 
although  he  was  a  great  scholar,  he  was  wrong.  12.  I  saw 
the  man  (celui)  last  evening  who  wanted  to  buy  my  horse. 
13.  Who  are  those  two  gentlemen?  14.  This  is  Mr.  Robinson, 
and  that  is  Mr.  Jones.  15.  You  are  looking  for  apples;  very 
well,  will  you  take  these  or  those?  16.  I  will  take  these; 
those  are  too  small.  17.  How  is  butter  selling  to-day  ?  18. 
That  sells  at  two  francs  a  pound,  and  this,  which  is  finer,  at 
two  francs  fifty  centimes.  19.  Gambetta  and  Hugo  were 
distinguished  men;  the  former  was  an  orator,  the  latter  a. 
poet.     20.  That  is  a  fine  horse !     How  much  is  he  worth  ? 

21.  Why  do  these  people  not  reply  when  we  speak  to  them? 

22.  They  are  Russians ;  they  do  not  understand  you.  23. 
Who  did  that?  24.  It  was  John  who  did  it.  25.  What 
o'clock  is  it?  26.  It  is  half-past  ten.  27.  What  day  of  the 
month  is  it?  28.  To-day  is  the  tenth.  29.  Is  that  the  house 
of  which  you  spoke  to  me  ?  30.  No,  it  is  the  next  one.  31. 
Who  is  that  lady  ?  32.  She  is  the  lady  who  lives  next  door. 
33.  What  I  fear  is  that  he  will  never  come  back.  34.  It  is 
not  that  he  is  losing  his  money,  but  he  is  destroying  his 
health  also.     35.  It  is  time  to  go  home. 

EXERCISE  XLIV,  a.  (§§  378-388,  continued.) 

CTest  tine  belle  chose  que  de  pro-  It  is  a  fine  thing  to  protect  the 

t^ger  les  faibles.  weak. 

Ce  sont  des  qualit^s  n^cessaires  Mildness  and  firmness  are  necessary 

pour  r^gner  que  la  douceur  et  qualities  for  ruling. 

la  fermet^. 

H  a  cela  de  bon.  He  has  this  good  thing  about  him. 

1.  It  is  they  who  have  done  it.  2.  It  was  kind  of  you  to  help 
those  poor  people.  3.  You  can  do  it ;  it  is  easy.  4.  That  was 
not  kind  of  you ;  you  should  have  allowed  me  to  do  it.  5.  You 
are  rich  ;  it  is  easy  for  you  to  say  so.  6.  It  is  a  pity  that  we 
did  not  know  it  sooner.  7.  It  is  unfortunate  that  he  did  nOfc 
come  yesterday.  8.  My  father  told  me  you  were  here ;  that  is. 
why  I  came.  9.  It  is  to  be  feared  that  the  traveller  has  died 
of  hunger.  10.  It  is  to  be  desired  that  those  misfortunes  will 
never  happen.  11.  What  we  were  speaking  of  has  happened. 
12.  What  I  am  thinking  of  is  the  way  of  preventing  that 
misfortune.     13    What  he  says  is  true.     14.  It's  a  fine  thing, 


376  EXERCISE  XLV,  a. 

(*is ')  money  !  15.  It  is  not  to  you  that  I  speak.  16.  He  has 
lost  all  his  money,  which  is  sad.  1 7.  What  a  beautiful  thing 
is  virtue  !  18.  It  is  money  that  he  wishes.  19.  He  is  a  fine 
young  man,  ( *  is ' )  John !  20.  It  would  be  a  good  thing  to  go 
awa3^  21.  It  is  a  fine  thing  to  love  virtue.  22.  Health  and 
good  sense  are  qualities  necessary  for  succeeding  in  the  world. 
23.  You  are  the  one  who  did  that.  24.  Love  is  the  strongest 
of  all  passions.  25.  This  does  not  belong  to  me,  but  that 
does.  26.  Give  me  this ;  keep  that  for  yourself.  27.  He 
has  this  good  thing  about  him,  that  he  always  tells  the  truth. 

28.  What  a  lazy  beast ;  and  yet  he  thinks  that  he  works ! 

29.  Did  he  give  you  back  your  pencil  ?  30.  No,  but  that  does 
not  matter;  I  have  another  here.  31.  It  is  difficult  to  trans- 
late the  word  'that'  into  French.  32.  I  am  sure  that  that 
*  that '  that  that  man  uses  is  superfluous. 

EXERCISE  XLV,  a.  (§§389-402.) 

1.  Whom  did  you  see  yesterday  1  2.  I  saw  him  who  was 
^ith  you  the  day  before  yesterday.  3.  I  told  you  already 
what  my  reasons  are.  4.  What  sort  of  weather  is  it  this 
morning?  5.  I  think  it  will  be  fine.  6.  I  do  not  know  to 
which  of  those  men  we  were  speaking.  7.  What  fine  weather ! 
I  hope  it  will  continue  until  we  leave.  8.  Who  is  that? 
9.  It  is  the  man  I  sold  my  house  to.  10.  What  was  the 
matter  this  morning;  I  heard  a  great  noise  in  the  street? 
11.  What  "vere  you  speaking  of  to  that  man  you  met?  12.  I 
was  speaking  to  him  of  what  we  were  discussing  yesterday. 
13.  Scoundrel  that  you  are,  if  I  catch  you,  I'll  give  you  what 
you  deserve.  14.  What  I  complain  of  is  that  you  make  no 
progress  in  your  studies.  15.  I  do  not  understand  you ;  will 
you  explain  to  me  clearly  what  you  mean  ?  16.  What  has 
become  of  that  young  gentleman  with  whom  I  saw  you? 
17.  I  don't  know  what  has  become  of  him ;  I  have  not  seen 
h'im  lately.  18.  Which  of  those  ladies  did  you  see?  19.  I 
saw  the  one  that  was  here  yesterday.  20.  What  are  you 
thinking  of?  21.  I  am  thinking  of  what  we  are  going  to  do 
to-morrow.  22.  What  did  your  father  ask  you  to  do  ?  23.  I 
have  done  what  he  asked  me  to  do.  24.  The  gentleman,  whose 
son  was  visiting  us  last  year,  will  come  himself  next  year. 
25.   The  lady,  whose  daughter  has  just  been  married,  will 


EXERCISE  XLVI,  a.  377 

spend  some  weeks  with  us  next  summer.  26.  The  people,  of 
whom  I  speak,  would  never  do  such  a  thing.  27.  I,  who  am 
your  friend,  tell  you  so,  and  you  ought  to  believe  it.  28.  It 
was  we  who  gave  them  their  liberty,  and  yet  to-day  they  are 
our  enemies.  29.  He  has  gone  away,  and  what  is  worse,  he 
has  not  paid  his  debts.  30.  That  is  very  strange  !  I  sent  him 
a  letter,  and  yet  he  says  he  never  received  it.  31.  To  whom 
are  you  speaking,  sir  ?  32.  It  is  to  you  I  am  speaking,  and  I 
want  you  to  pay  attention  to  what  I  say.  33.  The  house  they 
are  coming  out  of  belongs  to  my  father.  34.  The  people  of  the 
village  from  which  he  came  were  very  glad  to  be  rid  of  him. 
35.  The  gentleman,  for  whose  house  I  offered  such  a  high 
price,  has  bought  another.  36.  The  cause,  for  which  those 
soldiers  fought,  was  the  deliverance  of  their  country.  37.  The 
man,  in  whom  I  trust,  will  not  deceive  me.  38.  That  child  is 
deaf  and  dumb,  which  is  a  great  pity,  for  he  seems  very  intel- 
ligent.    39.  I  thank  you  very  much.     40.  Don't  mention  it. 

41.  What   I   was   expecting   was   that   he   would   pay   me. 

42.  That  is  not  a  poor  man ;  he  is  well  off.  43.  Where  is  the 
pen  I  made  use  of  yesterday?  44.  Take  what  you  need  ;  there 
will  be  enough  for  all.  45.  Which  way  did  you  come  this 
morning?  46.  I  came  the  way  you  came  yesterday.  47. 
There  is,  in  that  affair,  something  strange  and  mysterious. 

EXERCISE  XLVI,  a.  (§§403-407.) 

1.  Certain  people  say  the  criminal  has  escaped.  2.  Each 
day  brings  its  labour.  3.  We  rise  every  morning  at  six 
o'clock.  4.  I  have  seen  him  many  a  time.  5.  I  have  no 
apples,  but  I  have  some  pears  and  peaches.  6.  However 
great  and  rich  we  may  be,  we  must  die.  7.  Whatever  your 
intentions  were,  your  actions  were  not  good.  8.  However 
good  your  intentions  were,  you  did  not  succeed  in  doing  us 
good.  9.  We  should  respect  the  rights  of  others.  10.  Every 
one  for  himself  is,  happily,  not  a  maxim  which  everybody 
practises.  11.  If  we  do  not  love  others,  others  will  not  love 
us.  12.  Those  children  will  receive,  each  one  at  his  majority, 
their  portion  of  their  father's  estate.  13.  Mother,  will  you 
come  down  ?  You  are  wanted.  1 4.  It  is  said  that  the  robber 
has  been  caught.  15.  It  is  not  known  whether  the  ship  was 
wrecked   or   not.      16.  When   one   is   pretty,   one   is   rarely 


378  EXERCISE  XLVII,  a. 

ignorant  of  it.  17.  People  wonder  why  that  young  man 
associates  with  those  scoundrels.  18.  When  one  sees  a  noble 
action,  it  always  gives  one  pleasure.  19.  I  have  never  seen 
any  one  who  had  so  many  noble  qualities.  20.  I  am  afraid  to 
say  anything  about  it  to  any  one.  21.  No  one  has  ever  done 
anything  like  that.  22.  What  a  beautiful  view  !  Did  you 
ever  see  anything  like  it?  23.  He  went  away  without  visit- 
ing anyone.  24.  Did  you  find  anything  where  you  were 
looking  yesterday?  25.  I  do  not  know  any  one  of  his  friends. 
26.  I  doubt  whether  any  one  of  you  will  do  so.  27.  If  I  can 
do  it  without  any  expense,  I  shall  do  it  willingly.  28.  I  do 
not  like  this  book  ;  give  me  another.  29.  That  little  boy  has 
had  one  apple,  and  now  he  wants  another.  30.  Frenchmen 
often  laugh  at  us  Englishmen,  because  we  are  less  gay  than 
they.  31.  This  man  I  have  seen  elsewhere,  but  that  one  I 
never  saw  anywhere.  32.  These  are  the  same  people  that 
were  here  yesterday  morning.  33.  That  lady  is  goodness 
itself.  34.  Even  if  you  were  to  say  so,  I  should  not  believe  it. 
35.  That  is  a  young  man  in  whom  I  have  confidence  ;  I  shall 
put  him  in  a  position  to  make  his  fortune.  36.  Were  there 
any  children  at  the  meeting?  37.  Yes,  there  were  several. 
38.  I  shall  never  accept  such  conditions.  39.  I  never  saw 
such  a  foolish  man.  40.  If  he  were  to  say  such  a  thing  to 
me,  I  should  put  him  out  of  doors.  41.  He  spent  his  whole 
life  in  doing  good.  42.  Our  neighbour's  daughters  have 
become  quite  tall.     43.  He  comes  to  town  every  other  week. 

44.  Where  are  the  children?     Both  were  here  a  little  ago. 

45.  I  found  two  apples  in  the  basket,  but  neither  is  good. 

46.  Any  line  being  given,  draw  a  straight  line  which  shall  be 
equal  to  it.  47.  There  is  no  reason  whatever  which  can 
persuade  me.  48.  Whoever  has  stolen  that  poor  woman's 
money  ought  to  be  punished.  49.  Whoever  he  is  who  told 
you  that,  he  is  mistaken,  50.  Whatever  that  man  may  do, 
he  will  never  succeed.  51.  Whatever  the  reason  may  be,  he 
will  never  come  to  see  us. 

EXERCISE  XLVII,  a.  (408-420.) 

1.  I  will  not  sell  it,  cheap  or  dear.  2.  You  did  it  on  pur- 
pose, did  you  not?  3.  Not  at  all,  it  was  quite  accidental.  4. 
A  Christian  ought  to  love  not  only  his  friends,  but  even  his 


EXERCISE  XLVII,  a.  379 

enemies.  5.  Those  poor  people  had  scarcely  any  bread  to  eat 
when  we  found  them.  6.  We  have  said  nothing  at  all  about 
it.  7.  That  is  a  very  complicated  affair;  I  can  understand 
nothing  of  it.  8.  We  did  not  see  a  living  soul  in  the  street 
when  we  rose  that  morning.  9.  Whom  did  you  see  ?  I  saw 
nobody  at  all.  10.  I  shall  be  silent,  so  as  not  to  hinder  you 
from  working.  11.  He  told  me  to  do  nothing  until  he 
returned.  12.  I  went  away  so  as  not  to  be  punished.  13. 
What  is  the  matter  with  that  little  boy?  14.  I  do  not  know, 
sir;  I  neither  did  nor  said  anything  to  him.  15.  Would  you 
not  be  glad  to  see  our  old  friend?  16.  No,  I  neither  wish  to 
see  him  nor  speak  to  him.  17.  I  have  a  headache  this  evening; 
I  can  neither  sing  nor  play.  18.  Neither  he  nor  his  father 
were  there.  19.  I  saw  neither  him  nor  his  brother.  20.  I 
have  neither  friend  nor  money,  but  I  have  strong  arms  and 
courage.  21.  No  more  regrets;  take  courage,  and  forget  the 
past.  22.  Why  did  he  not  tell  me  so  before  leading  me  into 
this  peril?  23.  There  is  nobody  here  he  does  not  know.  24. 
Take  care  that  you  are  not  deceived.  25.  There  is  nothing 
which  does  not  please  me  better  than  that.  26.  Not  one  of 
those  we  invited  has  come.  27.  Do  you  know  where  Dr.  B. 
lives?  28.  I  cannot  tell  you.  29.  If  you  have  no  use  for  this 
book,  lend  it  to  me.  30.  Unless  you  do  what  you  said,  I  shall 
not  pay  you.  31.  Do  you  not  fear  he  will  go  away?  32.  I  do 
not  fear  he  will  go  away.  33.  I  am  afraid  our  friends  will  not 
be  there.  34.  If  I  were  afraid  he  would  do  it,  I  should  do 
something  to  hinder  him  (from  it).  35.  If  I  were  not  afraid 
he  would  hurt  himself  with  it,  I  should  let  him  have  it.  36. 
That  man  writes  better  than  he  speaks.  37.  We  do  not  wish 
more  money  thdn  we  have  now.  38.  I  do  not  doubt  that  that 
is  true.  39.  Not  much  is  lacking  for  the  number  to  be  com- 
plete. 40.  We  have  not  seen  each  other  for  three  years.  41. 
It  is  more  than  three  years  since  we  were  there.  42.  I  cannot 
go  with  you ;  I  have  no  time.  43.  Yes,  you  have,  you  are  not 
so^busy.  44.  You  have  stolen  my  apples.  45.  I  tell  you  I 
have  not.  46.  But  I  say  yes,  for  I  saw  you.  47.  He  has  as 
much  money  as  you  have,  but  he  has  not  as  much  as  I  have. 
48.  Let  us  say  no  more  about  it.  49.  We  are  in  a  hurry ;  let 
us  not  stay  any  longer.  50.  I  have  more  than  fifty  francs,  but 
he  has  more  than  I,  and  his  brother  has  still  more. 


380  EXERCISE  XLVin,  a. 


EXERCISE   XLVIII.  (§§  421-430.) 

H  a  une  yingtaine  d'ann^es.  He  is  about  twenty  (years  old). 

II  a  une  trentaine  de  mille  francs.    He  has  about  thirty  thousand  francs, 

1.  Columbus  discovered  America  in  the  year  1492.  2.  The 
French  national  Jete  is  on  the  fourteenth  of  July,  because 
[on]  that  day  the  Bastille  was  taken.  3.  My  father 
left  England  on  the  first  of  May,  1824.  4.  Napoleon 
the  First  was  a  greater  man  than  Napoleon  the  Third. 
5.  Charles  the  First  of  England  and  Louis  the  Sixteenth  of 
France  were  both  beheaded.  6.  The  first  train  leaves  at 
a  quarter  to  five  in  the  morning,  and  the  second  at  twenty 
minutes  past  two  in  the  afternoon.  7.  We  went  to  bed  last 
night  at  half-past  twelve.  8.  The  first  two  houses  in  the 
street  belong  to  us.  9.  We  have  only  the  last  two  chapters 
in  the  book  to  read.  10.  The  carriage  arrived  at  half-past 
one  in  the  morning.  11.  The  father  gave  his  son  a  fifth  of 
his  property  when  the  son  was  twenty-one.  12.  How  old 
would  you  say  that  man  is  ?  13.  I  should  say  he  is  about 
forty.  14.  It  is  twenty  years  since  I  saw  him.  15.  That 
man  is  well  off  ;  he  has  an  income  of  about  twenty  thousand 
francs  a  year.  16.  The  first  volume  of  his  works  contains 
poetry,  and  the  fourth  novels.  17.  This  house  cost  three 
times  as  much  as  that  one.  18.  Ten  times  ten  make  a  hun- 
dred. 19.  We  paid  a  hundred  and  twenty  dollars  for  that 
horse.  20.  That  carriage  cost  one  thousand  one  hundred 
dollars.  21.  That  old  man  is  eighty-five  years  old.  22.  [On] 
what  day  of  the  month  did  that  happen  ?  23.  It  happened 
on  the  twelfth.  24.  That  table  is  two  metres  long  by  one 
metre  wide.  25.  We  are  going  to  have  a  house  built  sixty 
feet  long  by  twenty-four  wide.  26.  What  o'clock  is  it? 
27.  It  is  just  noon.  28.  A  boy  ten  years  old  was  killed  last 
evening  by  a  carriage  in  the  Boulevard  des  Italiens.  29.  That 
girl  is  older  than  her  brother  by  two  years.  30.  I  am  taller 
than  my  brother  by  two  inches.  31.  Will  you  come  at  two 
o'clock  or  at  three  ?  32.  I  shall  be  there  precisely  at  three. 
33.  Is  that  boy  ten  years  old  or  eleven  ?    34.  He  is  eleven. 


EXERCISE  XLIX,  a.  381 


EXERCISE  XLIX,  a.  (§§431-454.) 

1.  I  was  thinking  of  what  you  were  talking  about  this 
morning.  2.  He  paid  about  twenty  francs  for  that  hat.  3. 
He  will  be  here  about  six  o'clock  in  the  evening.  4.  The  day 
after  our  arrival  we  went  to  see  the  museum.  5.  That  child 
has  black  eyes ;  he  takes  after  his  father.  6.  The  money  was 
divided  amongst  the  children.  7.  Amongst  all  those  people 
there  is  not  one  sensible  person.  8.  Art  arrived  at  great  per- 
fection among  the  Greeks.  9.  He  was  at  my  house  when  I 
was  at  his.  10.  They  all  laughed  at  my  expense.  11.  We 
all  laughed  at  him.  12.  The  thief  will  have  to  appear  before 
the  court.  13.  He  will  be  here  before  a  quarter  past  three. 
14.  That  is  greater  by  half  than  what  we  expected.  15.  That 
box  is  six  feet  long  by  two  wide.  16.  It  is  a  quarter  to  four 
by  my  watch.  17.  I  know  that  man  by  sight  only.  18.  He 
will  leave  for  France  in  a  week.  19.  We  lived  in  that  city 
for  twenty  years.  20.  I  have  been  here  for  two  years.  21.  I 
traded  my  black  horse  for  this  white  one.  22.  I  thanked  him 
for  his  kindness.  23.  From  the  fifteenth  of  May  I  shall  live 
in  that  house.  24.  They  drank  their  wine  from  golden  cups. 
25.  That  picture  is  painted  from  nature.  26.  In  spring  the 
weather  is  warm  and  the  flowers  open.  27.  There  is  not  so 
much  misery  in  Canada  as  in  Russia.  28.  Let  us  live  in 
peace  with  everybody.  29.  There  are  several  nations  in  North 
America.  30.  Not  one  in  a  hundred  was  good.  31.  Is  your 
house  (in)  brick  or  stone  1  32.  It  was  kind  of  you  to  aid  me 
in  my  misfortune.  33.  In  rainy  weather  we  stay  at  home. 
34.  We  shall  go  away  on  Saturday.  35.  He  is  now  on  the 
road  for  England.  36.  Our  house  is  on  this  side  of  the  street, 
and  his  is  on  that  side.  37.  When  you  come  to  the  next 
street,  turn  to  the  right.  38.  Instead  of  studying  he  is 
always  looking  out  of  the  window.  39.  His  gun  was  hanging 
above  the  chimney.  40.  The  dog  jumped  over  the  fence. 
41.  He  watched  over  my  interests.  42.  In  passing  through 
the  forest  we  saw  many  rare  plants.  43.  We  work  from 
morning  till  night.  44.  We  are  going  to  our  friends'  house. 
45.  The  train  for  Paris  will  be  here  immediately.  46.  They 
sold  those  goods  under  their  value.  47.  Wicked  men  tread 
Qod's  laws  under  foot.     48.  If  you  will  live  with  us,  we  shall 


382  EXERCISES  L-LI,  a. 

treat  you  well.  49.  Do  you  remember  the  man  with  the  big 
nose  whom  we  saw  yesterday?  50.  She  told  us  her  story 
with  tears  in  her  eyes. 

EXERCISE  L,  a.  (§§455-459.) 

1.  For  fear  it  should  rain  we  shall  not  go  away  to-day. 

2.  He   did   his   work   so   that   all   were   pleased   with   him. 

3.  Unless  you  come  to-morrow,  we  shall  not  wait  for  you. 

4.  Both  he  and  his  brother  were  there.  5.  Go  and  get  us 
some  bread.  6.  She  neither  laughs  nor  cries.  7.  Those  poor 
people  are  without  bread  or  meat.  8.  He  does  not  believe 
what  you  say ;  nor  I  either.  9.  We  shall  not  be  there ;  nor 
he  either.  10.  We  have  not  gone  away,  nor  shall  we. 
11.  As  soon  as  you  are  there  and  have  the  time,  will  you  go 
and  visit  my  brother  ?  1 2.  If  he  is  there  and  we  see  him,  we 
shall  tell  him  what  you  say.  13.  When  bread  is  dear  and  the 
weather  is  cold,  the  poor  suffer.  14.  I  think  we  shall  go  away 
the  day  after  to-morrow.  16.  If  your  friend  comes  to  the 
meeting  and  I  am  there,  I  shall  speak  to  him.  16.  Since  you 
went  away  I  have  been  writing  letters.  17.  Since  you  cannot 
do  it,  you  must  let  me  try.  18.  Since  you  went  away  yester- 
day he  has  done  nothing  but  play.  19.  Since  every  action 
brings  its  recompense  with  it,  we  must  pay  attention  to  what 
we  do.  20.  While  I  was  doing  my  exercise,  she  was  writing 
her  letters.  21.  The  good  shall  be  rewarded,  whilst  the  bad 
shall  be  punished.  22.  When  I  saw  him,  he  was  busy  working 
in  his  field.  23.  As  long  as  the  world  lasts,  justice  shall  pre- 
vail over  injustice.  24.  He  did  his  work,  so  that  he  was 
praised  by  all.  25.  He  was  kind  to  the  poor,  so  that  he  might 
be  praised  by  all. 

EXERCISE  LI,  a. 

The  largest  clock  in  the  world  will  be  the  one^  which  soon^ 
will  adorn  the  city  hall  of  Philadelphia.  The  dial  of  this 
colossal  clock  will  be^  ten  metres  in  diameter,  and  will  be 
placed  and  illuminated  so  as  to  be  visible  night  and  day  (de) 
everywhere  in  the  city.  The  hands  will  be,  one*  four  metres 
and  the  other  three  metres  long ;  the  bell  of  the  striking  part 
will  weigh  forty-six  thousand  pounds,  and  in  order  to  wind  the 


EXERCISES  LII-IV,  a.  383 

clock  a  steam-engine  placed  in  the  tower  will  be  used  daily 
(  =  one  will  use  daily  a  steam-engine,  etc.). 

»5381.  3§413.  »§428,o6«.  3.  *  8  406,  7,  Wi  «• 

EXERCISE  LII,  a. 

Horses^,  birds^  and  animals^  of  all  (the)  sorts  speak  a 
language  as  well  as  men^  We  cannot  understand  all  ( =  all 
that  which)  they  say,  but  we  understand  enough  of  it  to^ 
know  that  they  have  thoughts^  and  feelings^.  They  are  sad 
when  they  lose  a  companion,  or  when  they  are  driven  away* 
from  home.  They  are  pleased  when  they  are  well  treated*, 
and  angry  when  they  are  ill  treated*.  They  have,  so  to  speak, 
a  conscience ;  they  feel  ashamed  when  they  do  what  displeases 
us,  and  are  very  glad  when  they  merit  our  approbation. 
Kindness^  on  our  part  towards  them  is  as  reasonable  as  love^ 
and  kindness^  between  brothers^. 

*fi321.  <8  282, 2.  '8  322.  «8  241.2.a. 

EXERCISE  LIII,  a. 

A  rich!  man,  it  is  said^,  once^  asked*  a  learned  man  what 
was^  the  reason  that  scientific  men  were^  so  often^  seen  at  the 
doors  of  the  rich,  while  the  rich  were^  very  rarely  seen^  at  the 
doors  of  the  learned.  "It  is,"  replied*  the  scholar,  "because 
the  man  of  science  knows  the  value  of  riches^,  but  the  rich 
man  does  not  always  know  the  value  of  science^." 

»8351.  '8413.  »8258,  5.  •8258,1.  »|821. 

«8  241,  2,  o.  ♦8  459,2. 

EXERCISE  LIV,  a. 

Molifere,  the  great  French^  author,  was  born^  in  Paris  in  the 
year  one  thousand  six  hundred  and  twenty-two^.  His  father 
was  the  king's  upholsterer,  and  was  probably  a  rather  rich* 
man.  The  son  received^  a  good  education,  but  not  much  is 
known^  of  his  youth.  When  he  was  about  twenty  years  old^, 
he  organized^  a  company  of  actors,  which  was^  called  Vllhistre 
ThMtre.  But  in  this  enterprise  he  did  not  succeed^  very  well. 
He  soon^  lost^  all  his  money,  and  with  his  troupe  was^  forced 
to®  leave  Paris  and  (to)  make  a  tour  in  [the]  province[s].    This 


384  EXERCISES  LV-LVI,  a. 

tour  lasted^  from  sixteen  hundred  and  forty-six  to  sixteen 
hundred  and  fifty-eight.  During  these  years  he  travelled^ 
over  nearly  the  whole  of  France,  and  played^  in  many  of  the 
large  cities.  After  his  return  to  Paris  he  became^  the  king's 
favourite,  and  produced^  the  masterpieces  which  have  rendered 
him  so-  celebrated.  At  last,  after  fifteen  years  of  great  suc- 
cess, he  died^  in  sixteen  hundred  and  seventy-three  at  the 
age  of  fifty-one. 

i§352,  1,  (2).  »§421,  c.  6  §260.  »§430.  »§280,6. 

sPastDef.  *§361.  «§241, 2,  a.  «§413. 

EXERCISE  LV,  a. 

Speaking  of  the  small  world  in  which  even  the  greatest  live^, 
Lord  Beaconsfield  used  to  tell^  that  Napoleon  I.,  a  year  after 
his  accession  to  the  throne,  determined  to^  find  out  if  there  was* 
anybody  in  the  world  who  had  never  heard  of  him.  "Within  a 
fortnight  the  police  of  Paris  had^  discovered  a  wood-chopper 
at  Montmartre,  in  Paris  itself,  who  had  never  heard  of  the 
Revolution,  nor  of  the  death  of  Louis  XVI.,  nor  of  the 
Emperor  Napoleon. 

§1237,6.  «§258,2.  a§280,6.  *§2£8,6.  »§232,1. 

EXERCISE  LVI,  a. 

Napoleon,  the  greatest  general  of  modem  times^,  was  born^ 
at  Ajaccio  on  the  15th  of  August,  1769.  At  the  age  of  ten^  he 
was  sent  to  the  military*  school  at  Brienne,  where  he  remained 
more  than^  five  years.  Then  entering  the  French*  army,  he 
was,  in  1796,  appointed  general  of  the  army  of  Italy^,  and 
soon  succeeded  in  conquering"^  that  country.  He  used  so  well 
the  opportunities,  which  were  oflFered  him  by  the  weakness  of 
the  Republic  that  in  less  than  ten  years  he  was  elected 
Emperor.  The  ten  years'  struggle,  in  which  he  engaged  with 
the  purpose  of  subduing^  Europe^,  ended  with  the  battle  of 
Waterloo  in  1815.  Banished  to  (a)  St.  Helena  he  died^® 
there  on  the  5th  of  May,  1821.  Twenty  years  after  his  death 
his  remains  were  brought  back  to  (en)  France,  and  interred  in 
the  Hdtel  des  Invalides. 

»  §  321.  3  §  430,  obs.  2. "     «  §  412,  1,  6.  »  §  279,  2.        »  §  333, 1. 

iPastDef.        *§  352, 1,(2).       «§  333,  2,  note.      «§280,  2.     »<>§  mouruf  or  M«m<w^ 


EXERCISES  LVII-LVIII,  a.  385 


EXERCISE  LVII,  a. 

Great  Britain^  and  Ireland^  are  two  large  islands  in  the 
west  of  Europe^.  Great  Britain  is  the  larger  of  the  two  and 
comprises  England^,  Scotland^,  and  Wales^.  The  monarch  of 
the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain^  and  Ireland^  is  Queen^ 
Victoria,  who  was  born^  on  the  24th  of  May,  1819.  She  is 
the  daughter  of  the  Duke  of  Kent,  son  of  George  III.  She 
ascended  the  throne  on  (a)  the  death  of  William  IV.  in  1837. 
She  has  to  (pour)  assist  her  in  the  government  of  the  country 
a  parliament  which  meets  once  a  year  at  Westminster.  When 
she  appeared  before  (le)  parliament  for  the  first  time,  Queen 
Victoria  declared  that  she  would  place  her  trust  in  the  wisdom 
of  her  parliament  and  the  love  of  her  people,  and  she  has  not 
failed  to  keep  this  promise.  Having  thus  early  won  the 
hearts  of  all  her  sulojects,  she  has  retained  their  affection 
during  a  long  reign  of  more  than^  sixty  years.  Queen  Victoria 
is  a^  widow ;  her  husband,  Prince^  Albert  of  Saxe-Coburg- 
Gotha,  whom  she  married  in  1840,  died  in  1861,  much 
regretted  by  the  Queen  and  the  people. 

» §333,1.  »§327.  *%e$tn4e.  »f412, 1,&.  'ISSO.S. 

«§333,  2. 

EXERCISE  LVIII,  a. 

There  was^,  in  the  city  of  MS,con,  a  parrot  which  had 
learned  to^  say  continually  :  "  Who  is  there  ?  Who  is  there  V* 
This  parrot  escaped  one  day  from  its  cage  in  the  garden,  and 
soon^  flew  into  a  wood  near  by,  where  a  peasant  saw  it,  and 
began  to^  chase  it.  The  peasant  had  never  seen  a  parrot  in 
(de)  all  his  life.  He  approached*  the  tree  where  the  bird  was, 
and  was  going  to^  kill  the  poor  bird  with  his  gun.  At  that 
moment  the  parrot  began  to^  repeat  the  usual  question; 
"Who  is  there?  Who  is  there?"  The  peasant,  terrified  at 
these  words,  let  his  gun  fall^  from  his  hands.  Then  taking 
his  hat  off,  he  said,  very  respectfully:  "My  dear  sir,  I  pray 
you  to'^  excuse  me,  I  thought  that  it  was  a  bird." 

v§280  6. 


»§260. 

»§413. 

«  §  278,  6. 

•8  230,  6,  a  and  7. 

»§279,6. 

*§296,L 

25 

386  EXERCISES  LIX-LX,  a. 


EXERCISE  LIX,  a. 

The  unknown^  author  of  "  Beowulf "  was  not  a^  native  of 
England,  and  so  the  first  of  the  long  line  of  English^  poets  is 
really  Csedmon.  Bseda  tells  us  a  pretty  story  of  the  way  in 
which*  Csedmon  became  a^  poet.  He  was  already  almost  an^ 
old  man  before  he  knew  anything^  of  the  art  of  poetry.  At 
the  feasts,  in  those  days,  everybody  used  to  sing^  in  turn  to^ 
amuse  the  company,  but  Csedmon  used  to  leave^  the  table 
before  the  harp  was  given^  to  him.  One  evening,  when  he 
had  done  thus,  he  went  to  the  stable  and  lay  down,  after 
having^  cared  for  the  cattle,  because,  you  must  know,  he  was 
only  a  farm-servant  in  the  monastery  at  Whitby.  As  he 
slepti^,  some  one  appeared  to  him,  and  said,  "Csedmon,  sing  a 
song  to  me."  "I  cannot^^  sing,"  he  replied,  "and  that  is  why 
I  left  the  feast."  "Nevertheless,"  was  the  answer,  "you  must 
sing  to  me."  "Well,  then,"  asked  Csedmon,  "what  shall  I 
sing?"  The  other  replied,  "Sing  the  beginning  of  created 
things^^ »  Thereupon  he  made  some  verses,  which  he  still 
remembered  when  he  awoke.  The  Abbess  Hilda,  hearing  of 
his  dream,  believed  (that)  the  grace  of  God  had  been  given 
him,  and  made  him  a^  monk. 


»  §  352, 1,  (3). 

*  §  398. 

1  §  282,  2. 

»  §  282,  4. 

"§230,4. 

«§330,  3. 

6  §  405,  4,  a. 

8  §  241,  2,  a. 

"§268.1. 

»2§321. 

»§  352, 1.(2). 

•  §  258,  2. 

EXERCISE  LX,  a. 

A  miser  went^  one  day  to  market^,  and  bought^  some^  fine 
apples.  He  carried^  them  home,  arranged^  them  carefully  in 
his  cupboard,  and  used  to  go*  and  look  at  them  almost  every 
day,  but  would^  not  eat  any  until  they  began  to  spoil.  Every 
time  he  did  eat  one  he  regretted  it.  But  he  had  a  son,  a 
young  school-boy,  who  liked  apples;  and  one  day,  with  a 
comrade,  he  found  the  miser's  treasure.  I  do  not  know  how 
he  found  the  key  of  the  cupboard  ;  but  he  did^,  and  you  may 
imagine  how  many  apples  they  ate.  When  they  had^  finished 
the  apples,  the  old  father  came,  and  caught  them.  How 
angryS  he  was!  How  he  shouted  at  them!  "Wretches! 
where  are  my  beautiful  apples  ?  You  shall  both  be  hanged  I 
You  have  eaten  them  all ! "     His  son  replied :  *'  Do  not  be 


EXERCISES  LXI-LXII,  a.  387 

angry,  father^ !  You  only  eat  the  bad  apples ;  we  have  not 
touched  (a)  those;  we  have  eaten  the  good  ones,  and  left 
you  yours." 

»  §  260.  »  §  324, 1.  6  §  265,  1,  &.  ^  §  262,  3.  »  §  376,  4. 

.    »§  331,  ex.4.         ♦§258,2.  « §  256.  «  §  350,  a. 

EXERCISE  LXI,a. 

A  hungry^  fox  was  one  day  looking  for^  a  poultry-yard.  It 
was  late  in  the  afternoon,  and,  as  he  was  passing^  a  farm- 
house, he  saw^  a  cock  and  some  hens  which  had^  gone  up  into 
a  tree  for  the  night.  He  drew  near*,  and  invited*  them  to^ 
come  down  and'^  rejoice  with  him  on  account  of  a  new  treaty 
of  peace  which  had  been  formed  between  the  animals.  The 
cock  said  he  was^  very  glad  of  it,  but  that  he  did  not  intend^ 
to^  come  down  before  the  next  morning.  "But,"  said  he,  "I 
see  two  dogs  coraing^<^;  I  have  no  doubt  they  will  be^^  glad 
to^2  celebrate  the  peace  with  you."  Just  then  the  fox  remem- 
bered-that  he  had  business^^  elsewhere,  and,  bidding  the  cock 
good-bye,  began*  to  run.  "  Why  do  you  run  ] "  said  the  cock, 
"  If  the  animals  have  made  a  peace,  the  dogs  won't  hurt  you. 
I  know  them,  they  are  good,  loyaP*  dogs,  and  would  not  harm 
any  one."  "  Ah,"  said  the  fox,  "  I  am  afraid  they  have^^  not 
yet  heard  the  news." 

'8352,1,(3).  *§260.  »§456,2.  »»§287,  3.        "§323. 

*§258,1,;  §296,3.        » §  229 ;  §  262, 2.      '»§258,5.  '»§269,5.        '♦§352,3. 

•1268,  L  •§279,6.  »§280,  2,  a.         "§366.  "§269,4,0. 

EXERCISE  LXII,  a. 

A  woodman,  who  was  cutting^  wood  on  the  bank  of  a  river, 
let^  his  axe  fall^  into  the  water.  He  at  once*  began^  to^  pray 
[to]  the  gods  to^  find  it  for  him.  Mercury  appeared  ^  and 
asked 2  him  what  was^  the  matter.  **  I  have  lost  my  axe," 
said  2  he.  Having  heard  this.  Mercury  dived  ^  into  the  water, 
and  brought^  up  a  golden  axe.  "Is  this^  yours?"  "No," 
said  the  man.  Next  time  Mercury  brought  up  a  silver  one. 
"Is  this  one  yours?"  "No,"  said^  the  chopper  again.  The 
third  time  Mercury  brought  up  an  iron  one,  which  the  man 
recognized,  as  soon  as  he  saw^  it.  "  It  is  yours,"  said  the  god, 
"and  for  your  honesty  I  shall  give  you  the  other  two  also." 

>§258,  L  »§  230,  6,  a,  and  7.         6§279,  6.  »  §  268,  5.  8§236,2. 

>i26a  «§413.  •§280,6. 


388  EXERCISES  LXIII-LXV,  a. 

EXERCISE   LXIII,  a. 

Two  men  were  travelling^  together,  when  they  saw^  a  bear 
coming  out*  of  the  forest.  The  one  climbed  into  a  tree,  and 
tried  to^  conceal  himself  in  the  branches.  The  other,  when 
he  saw  that  the  bear  would  ( =  was  going  to)  attack  him, 
threw  himself  upon  the  ground,  and,  when  the  bear  came  up, 
he  ceased  to^  breathe,  for  it  is  said^  that  a  bear  will  not  touch^ 
a  dead'''  body.  When  the  bear  had^  gone,  his  companion  came 
down,  and  asked  :  "  What  was  it  that  the  bear  was  saying  to 
you?"  His  friend  replied:  "He  advised  me  not^  to  travel 
with  a  friend  who  runs  away  at  the  approach  of  danger ^o." 

»  §  258,  1.  «  §  287,  3.  »  §  241,  2,  a.  ^  §  352,  1,  (3).  »  §  416,  a. 

s§260.  *§280, 6.  «§296,  5.  8§262,  3.  ^§321. 

EXERCISE  LXIV,  a. 

A  well-known^  English^  actor,  travelling  to  Birmingham  by 
the  Great  Western^  railway  the  other  day,  on  approaching* 
Banbury,  began  to  feel  hungry,  and  determined  to  have  one  of 
the  buns  for  which  the  town  is  famous. 

The  train  having  stopped,  he  called  a  boy,  gave  him  six- 
pence, and  asked  him  to  get  "  two  Banbury s,"  promising  him 
one  of  the  two  for  his  trouble. 

Just  as  the  train  was  about  to  start,  the  boy  rushed  up  to 
the  carriage  in  which  the  impatient  actor  was  seated,  and 
oflfering  him  three  pence,  exclaimed  : 

"  Here's  your  change,  sir." 

"  Bother  the  change ;  where's  the  bun,"  roared  the  hungry 
actor. 

"There  was  only  one  left,"  replied  the  boy,  "and  I'm 
eating  that ! " 

»§352, 1,  (3).  *§352, 1,  (2).  »  §  330,  4,  c,  note.  ♦§296,1. 

EXERCISE  LXV,  a. 

Under  a  magnificent  walnut-tree  near  the  village,  two  little 
boys  found  a  walnut.  "It  belongs  to  me,"  said  the  one,  "for 
it  was^  I^  who  was  the  first  to  see  it  ( =  who  have  seen  it  the 
first)."  "No,  it  belongs  to  me,"  exclaimed  the  other,  "for  it 
was^  P  who  picked  it  up."     Thereupon  there^  arose  between 


EXERCISES  LXVI-LXVII,  a.  *  389 

them  a  violent  quarrel.  "  I  am  going  to  make  peace*  between 
you,"  said  to  them  a  third  boy,  who  was  passing  at  that 
moment.  The  latter  placed  himself  between  the  two  claim- 
ants, opened  the  walnut,  and  pronounced  this  sentence:  "One 
of  the  shells  belongs  to  him^  who  was  the  first  to  see  the 
walnut ;  the  other  to  him^  who  picked  it  up ;  as  to  the  kernel, 
I  keep  it  for  the  costs  of  the  court.  That's  how  lawsuits* 
generally  end,"  added  he,  laughing. 

>8  267,3,6  •§372,  a  >§262,2  *8  321.  »§381. 

EXERCISE  LXVI,  a. 

Many  years  ago^  there^  lived  in  the  city  of  Paris  a  cele- 
brated^ physician  who  was  very  fond  of  animals.  One  day  a 
friend  of  his*  brought  to  his  house  a  favourite^  dog,  whose  leg 
had  been  broken,  and  asked  him  if  he  could  do  anything  for 
the  poor  creature.  The  kind  doctor  examined,  the  wounded^ 
animal,  and,  prescribing  a  treatment  for  him,  soon^  cured  him, 
and  received  the  warm  thanks  of  his  friend,  who  set  a  very 
high  value  upon  his  dog.  Not  very  long  afterwards,  the 
doctor  was  in  his  room  busy  studying''.  He  though t^  he  heard 
a  noise  at  the  door,  as  if  some  animal  was  scratching  in  order 
to  be  let^  in.  For  some  time  he  paid  no  attention  to  the  noise, 
but  continued  studying^*^.  At  last,  however,  he  rose  up  and 
opened  the  door.  To  his  great  astonishment  he  saw  enter  the 
dog  which  he  had  cured,  and  with  him  another  dog.  The  latter 
also  had  a  broken^  leg,  and  was  able  to  move  only  with  much 
difficulty.  The  dog  which  the  surgeon  had  cured  had  brought 
his  friend  to  his  benefactor,  in  order  that  he,  too,  might  be^^ 
healed  ;  and,  as  well  as  he  could,  he  made  the  doctor^^  under- 
stand that  this  was  what  he  wanted. 


»§250,  4. 

♦  §  377,  3. 

»  §  279,  2. 

•§241,  2.  a. 

"§271,2. 

«  1 252,  2. 

•§352.1,(3X 

8  §458,  3. 

"§279,6. 

12  8230,6,6. 

«8861. 

«8413. 

EXERCISE  LXVII,  a. 

There  was  once  a  cat  who  was  a^  great  enemy  of  the  rats. 
He  had  eaten  a  great  many^,  and  they  were  much  afraid  of 
him.  So  the  chiefs  of  the  rats  called  a  meeting  to^  discuss 
what  they  should  do  to^  rid  themselves  of  him.      A  great 


390         •  EXERCISE  LXVIII,  a. 

many  plans  were  proposed,  but  after  a  little  discussion  they 
were  all  abandoned.  At  last  a  young  rat,  who  thought  him- 
self very  clever,  rose  and  said  :  "  Do  not  despair  my  friends, 
I  have  not  yet  proposed  a  plan.  A  splendid  idea  occurs  to 
me;  I  know  what. we  can  do.  We  can,  if  we  are  economical, 
soon  save  enough  money  to^  buy  a  little  bell.  This  we  can 
attach  to  the  neck  of  our  old  enemy,  and,  if  he  approaches,  we 
can^  flee  to  (dans)  a  place  of  safety." 

The  young  rats  all  applauded  the  idea,  but  one  of  the  old 
[ones],  who  up  to  this  time  had  said  nothing,  gravely^  asked 
the  one  who  had  made  the  speech  if  he  would  promise  to  put 
the  bell  on  the  cat.  The  young  rat  blushed,  and  said  he 
would  think  of  it^. 

The  meeting  broke  up  shortly  after,  and  the  rats  dispersed 
without  doing  anything'^. 

1  §  330,  3.  3  §  282,  2.  "  §  413.  •  §  368.  »  §  405,  4,  a. 

2  §  367,  2,  (1),        *  §  263,  2. 

/ 

EXERCISE  LXVIII,  a. 

Long  ago^  the  frogs,  tired  of  having^  a  republic,  resolved  to^ 
flisk  Jupiter  to  send  them  a  king.  Jupiter  did  not  receive 
their  petition  with  much  favour,  but  as  they  seemed  really  to* 
desire  one,  he  thought  (that)  it  would  be  better  to  please^ 
them.  So,  one  fine  day,  when  they  were  all  expecting^  their 
king,  a  great  log  fell  from  the  sky  into  the  pond,  where  they 
were^.  They  were  very  much  afraid  of  the  noise^  it  made, 
and  they  took  refuge  in  holes  and  in  the  mud  at  the  bottom  of 
the  pond.  Little  by  little,  however,  they  approached^  their 
king  to^  get  a  good  look  at  him,  and  seeing  that  he  was  so 
quiet,  they  became  more  bold,  and  finally  leaped  on  him,  and 
treated  him  with  great  familiarity  (  =  very  familiarly).  Then 
they  complained  again  to  Jupiter  saying  that  the  king  he  had 
sent  was  not  worthy  of  their  respect,  and  that  they  desired 
another,  who  would  show^^^  more  vigour.  In  order  to  please 
them  Jupiter  sent  them  this  time  a  stork,  who  immediately 
began  to  devour  them  with  much  avidity.  They  complained 
again,  but  Jupiter  told  them  that,  since^^  they  had  desired  a 
king,  they  would  be  forced  to  quietly  submit  to  the  one^^  he 
had  sent. 

J  §  250,  4.  ♦  §  278,  6.  ^  §  402,  1.  »  §  282,  2,  »>  §  459,  3. 

«  §  280,  2.  6  §  296,  2.  »  §  296, 1.         "  §  270,  1.  "  §  381 ;  402,  L 

*  §  280,  6.  «  §  258,  1. 


EXERCISES  LXIX-LXX,  a.  391 

EXERCISE  LXIX,  a. 

The  two  youngest  of  my  children  were  already  in  bed  and 
asleep,  the  third  had^  gone  out,  but  at  my  return  I  found  him 
sitting  beside  my  gate,  weeping^  very  sore.  I  asked  him  the 
reason.  "Fathef^,"  said  he,  "I  took  this  morning  from*  my 
mother,  without  her  knowing^  it,  one  of  those  three  apples 
you  brought  her,  and  I  kept^  it  a  long  while  ;  but,  as  I  was 
playing  some  time  ago''  with  my  little  brother  in  the  street,  a 
slave  that  went^  by  snatched  it  out  of  my  hands,  and  carried 
it  off ;  I  ran  after  him  asking  for  it,  and,  besides,  told  him 
that  it  belonged  to  my  mother,  who  was  ill,  and  that  you  had 
taken  a  fortnight's  journey  to  fetch  it ;  but  all  in  vain,  he 
would^  not  give  it  back.  And  because  I  still  followed  him, 
crying  out,  he  stopped  and  beat  me,  and  then  ran  away  as  fast 
as  he  could,  from  one  street  to  another,  till  at  length  I  lost 
sight  of  him.  I  have  since  that  been  walking  outside  the 
town,  expecting  your  return,  to  pray  you,  dear  father,  not  to 
tell  my  mother  [of]  it,  lest  it  should  make  her  worse."  And 
when  he  had^^  said  these  words,  he  began  weeping  again  more 
bitterly  than  ever. 

»  §  229.  3  §  376,  4.  »  §  271,  6.  »  §  250,  4.  »  §  265,  1,  6.  ^ 

»  §  286,  2.  *  §  296,  4.  «  §  269,  2.  «  §  268,  1.  "  §  262,  3-  W 

EXERCISE  LXX,  a. 

A  celebrated  Italian^  painter  had  told  his  pupils  to^  ask 
the  name  of  any  (tout)  person  who  might  come^  to  his  house 
during  his  absence  in  the  city.  One  day  three  gentlemen 
came  to*  see  the  painter,  and  the  latter  was  not  at  home. 
One  of  the  pupils,  whose  name  was  John,  opened  the  door  for 
them^,  said  that  his  master  was  not  in,  and  let  them  depart 
without  asking  their  names.  When  the  master  returned  and* 
heard  of  the  three  gentlemen,  he  asked ^  John  who  they  were. 
John  could  say  nothing  but,  "I  do  not  know,  sir."  The 
painter  got  angry,  but  John,  with  a  few  strokes  of  his  pen- 
cil, drew  (/aire)  the  portrait  of  the  three,  and  gave  it  to 
his  master,  who  immediately^  recognized  them.  The  artist 
admired  the  skill  of  the  young  man  so  much  that  he  took 
th^rawing,  and  kept  it  afterwards  among  his  most  precious 
possessions.     It  is  needless  to^  add  that  he  pardoned  the  pupil. 

»  §  352,  1,  (2>         ■•»  §  270,  1.  »  §  362,  2.  '  §  296,  2.  »  §  384,  1,  O. 

a§280, 6.  *§278, 6.  •8  458,2.  8§413. 


392  EXERCISES  LXXI-LXXII,  a. 


EXERCISE  LXXI,  a. 

A  man  (celui)  who  would i  have  friends  must  show  himself 
friendly.  A  man  was  passing  the  night  at  an  inn.  He  had 
just  left  a  town  where  he  had  spent  several  years.  The  land- 
lord asked^  him  why  he  had  left  the  place.  He  replied, 
"  because  my  neighbours  were  so  disagreeable  and  disobliging 
that  one  could  not  live  with  them."  The  landlord  replied, 
"you  will  find  exactly  the  same  sort  of  neighbours  where  you 
are  going."  The  following  day  another  traveller  came  from 
the  same  place.  He  told  the  landlord  that  he  was  obliged  to 
leave  the  place  where  he  had  been  living,  and  that  it  caused 
him  great  pain  to  part  with  his  neighbours,  who  had  been  so 
kind  and  obliging.  The  landlord  encouraged  him  by  telling^ 
him  that  he  would  find  exactly  the  same  sort  of  neighbours 
where  he  was  going. 

1  §230,1.  2§296,  2.  »§286,3. 

EXERCISE  LXXII,  a. 

When  I  was^  at  school,  I  was^  often  very  idle.  Even  in 
[the]  class  I  used  to  play^  with  boys  as  idle  as  myself.  We 
used  to  tryi  to  hide  this  from^  our  master,  but  one  day  he 
caught^  us  cleverly. 

"You  must  not  be  idle,"  said  he.  "You  must  not  raise 
your*  eyes  from  your  books.  You  do  not  know  what  you  lose 
by  idleness^.  Study  while  you  are  young;  you  will  not  be 
able  to  study  when  you  are^  old.  If  any  one  sees  another  boy, 
who  is  not  studying,  let  him  tell  me"." 

"  Now,"  said  I  to  myself,  "  there  is  Fred  Smith,  I  do  not 
like  him.     If  I  see  that  he  is  not  studying,  I  shall  telF." 

Soon  after,  I  saw  Fred  Smith  looking^  out  of  the  window, 
and  I  told  the  master  what  I  had  seen.  "  Indeed  ! "  said  he, 
"  how  do  you  know  he  was  idle  1 "  "  If  you  please,  sir,"  said 
I,  "I  saw^  him."  "O  you  saw^  him,  and  where  were  your 
eyes  when  you  saw^  him  1 " 

I  saw  the  other  boys  laugh^,  and  I  was^^  ashamed,  for  the 
master  smiled,  and  said  it  was  a  good  lesson  for  me. 

>§258.  3  §260.  6  §321.  t  §  365.  <>§  259,11 

»8  296,4.  *§328.  «§263, 2.  » §  287, 3.  »<>§  268,1. 


EXERCISES  LXXIII-LXXV,  a.  393 

EXERCISE  LXXIII,  a. 

The  princes  of  Europe^  have  found  out  a  manner  of  reward- 
ing2  their  subjects  who  have  behaved  well,  by  presenting^ 
them  with  about  two  yards  of  blue^  ribbon,  which  is  worn^  on 
the  shoulder.  Those  who  are  honoured  with  this  mark  of 
distinction  are  called  knights,  and  the  king  himself  is  always 
at  the  head  of  the  order.  This  is  a  cheap  method  of  recom- 
pensing2  ^i^q  most  important  services ;  and  it  is  very  fortunate 
for  kings^  that  their  subjects  are^  satisfied  with  such^  trifling 
rewards.  Should^  a  nobleman  lose  his  leg  in  a  battle,  the  king 
presents  him  with  two  yards  of  ribbon,  and  he  is  recompensed 
for  the  loss  of  his  leg.  Should^  an  ambassador  spend  all  his 
fortune  in^^  supporting  the  honour  of  his  country  abroad,  the 
king  presents  him  with  two  yards  of  ribbon,  which  is  con- 
sidered^ the  equivalent  of  his  estate.  In  short,  as  long  as  an 
European  king  has  a  yard  or  two  of  blue  or  green  ribbon,  he 
will  not  want  statesmen,  generals  and  soldiers. 

»  8  333,  2.  »  §  286,  3.  »  §  241,  2.         »  §  269,  4.  »  §  275. 

«  8  280,  2.  *  §  352,  1,  (1).        «  §  321.  «  §  406,  5,  a,  note.        "  §  279,  2. 

EXERCISE  LXXIV,  a. 

At  a  time  when  ancient  art  was  attracting  so  much  atten- 
tion in  Italy  that  modern  art^  was  being  neglected^,  Michael 
Angelo  had  resort  to  a  stratagem  in  order  to  teach  the  critics 
the  folly  of  judging  such  things  according  to  fashion^  or 
reputation^.  He  made  a  statue  which  represented^  a  beautiful 
girl  asleep'^,  and,  breaking  off"  an  arm,  buried  the  statue  in  a 
place  where  excavations  were  being  made^.  It  was  soon 
found,  and  was  lauded  by  critics^  and  by  the  public  as  a 
valuable  relic  of  antiquity^.  When  Michael  Angelo  thought 
the  time  opportune,  he  produced  the  broken  arm,  and,  to  the 
great  mortification  of  the  critics,  revealed  himself  as  the 
sculptor. 

»  8  321.  «  8  241,  2.  »  8  268,  3.  *  8  352.  1,  (3X 

EXERCISE  LXXV,  a. 

Had  you  seen  us,  Mr.  Harley,  when  we  were  turned  out  of 
South-hill,  I  am  sure  you  would  have  wept  at  that  sight.     You 


394  EXERCISE  LXXV,  a. 

remember  old  Trusty,  my  dog ;  I  shall  never  forget  it  while  I 
live  (fut.) ;  the  poor  creature  was  old  and  almost  blind,  and 
could  scarce  crawl  after  us  to  the  door ;  he  went,  however,  as 
far  as  the  gooseberry-bush,  which,  as  you  may  remember,  stood 
on  the  left  side  of  the  yard ;  he  was  wont  to  bask  in  the  sun 
there ;  when  he  had  re£U3hed  that  spot,  he  stopped ;  we  went 
on ;  I  called  him ;  he  wagged  his  tail,  but  did  not  stir ;  I 
called  again ;  he  lay  down ;  I  whistled,  and  cried  "  Trusty  "  ; 
he  gave  a  howl,  and  died !  I  could  have  lain  down  and  died 
( =  should  have  liked  to  lie  down  and  die)  too ;  but  God  gave 
me  strength  to  live  for  my  children. 


FKEI^CH   EEADER. 


1.  PAROLES  D'UN  CROYANT,  CHAP.  VII. 
Lamennais  (1782-1854). 

Lorsqu'un  arbre  est  seul,  il  est  battu  des  vents  et  d^pouill^ 
de  ses  feuilles ;  et  ses  branches,  au  lieu  de  s'^lever,  s'abaissent 
comme  si  elles  cherchaient  la  terre. 

Lorsqu'une  plante  est  seule,  ne  trouvant  point  d'abri  centre 
Vardeur  du  soleil,  elle  languit  et  se  desseche,  et  meurt.  6 

Lorsque  Thomme  est  seul,  le  vent  de  la  puissance  le  courbe 
vers  la  terre,  et  I'ardeur  de  la  convoitise  des  grands  de  ce 
monde  absorbe  la  seve  qui  le  nourrit. 

Ne  soyez  done  point  comme  la  plante  et  comme  I'arbre  qui 
sont  seuls :  mais  unissez-vous  les  uns  aux  autres,  et  appuyez-  lo 
vous,  et  abritez-vous,  mutuellement. 

Tandis  que  vous  serez  desunis,  et  que  chacun  ne  songera  qu'i 
soi,  vous  n'avez  rien  k  esp^rer,  que  souffrance,  et  malheur,  et 
oppression. 

Qu'y  a-t-il  de  plus  faible  que  le  passereau,  et  de  plus  d^sarm^  16 
que  I'hirondelle?     Cependant  quand  parait  I'oiseau  de  proie, 
les  hirondelles  et  les  passereaux  parviennent  k  le  chasser,  en  se 
rassemblant  autour  de  lui,  et  le  poursuivant  tous  ensemble. 

Prenez  exemple  sur  le  passereau  et  sur  I'hirondelle. 

Celui  qui  se  s^pare  de  ses  f reres,  la  crainte  le  suit  quand  il  20 
marche,  s'assied  pr^s  de  lui  quand  il  repose,  et  ne  le  quitte  pas 
meme  durant  son  sommeil. 

Done,  si  Ton  vous  demande :  "  Combien  ^tes-vous  ? "  r^pon- 
dez:  "Nous  sommes  un,  car  nos  freres,  c'est  nous,  et  nous, 
c'est  nos  frferes."  26 

Dieu  n'a  fait  ni  petits  ni  grands,  ni  m  ait  res  ni  esclaves,  ni 
rois  ni  sujets  :   il  a  fait  tous  les  hommes  ^gaux. 

Mais,  entre  les  hommes,  quelques-uns  ont  plus  de  force  ou  de 
corps,  ou  d'esprit,  ou  de  volenti,  et  ce  sont  ceux-1^  qui  cherchent 
k  s'assujettir  les  autres,  lorsque  I'orgueil  ou  la  convoitise  dtouf-80 
fent  en  eux  Tamour  de  leurs  freres. 


396  FRENCH  READER. 

Et  Dieu  savait  qu'il  en  serait  ainsi,  et  c'est  pourquoi  il  a 
command^  aux  hommes  de  s'aimer,  afin  qu'ils  fussent  unis,  et 
que  les  faibles  ne  tombassent  point  sous  I'oppression  des  forts. 

Car  celui  qui  est  plus  fort  qu'un  seul  sera  moins  fort  que 
6  deux,  et  celui  qui  est  plus  fort  que  deux  sera  moins  fort  que 
quatre;  et  ainsi  les  faibles  ne  craindront  rien  lorsque,  s'aimant 
les  uns  les  autres,  ils  seront  unis  veritablement. 

Un  homme  voyageait  dans  la  montagne,  et  il  arriva  en  un 
lieu  ou  un  gros  rocher,  ayant  roule  sur  le  chemin,  le  remplissait 
10  tout  entier,  et  hors  du  chemin  il  n'y  avait  point  d'autre  issue, 
ni  k  gauche,  ni  a  droite. 

Or,  cet  homme  voyant  qu'il  ne  pouvait  continuer  son  voyage 
a  cause  du  rocher,  essaya  de  le  mouvoir  pour  se  faire  un  pas- 
sage, et  il  se  fatigua  beaucoup  a  ce  travail,  et  tous  ses  efforts 
16  f  urent  vains. 

Ce  que  voyant,  il  s'assit  plein  de  tristesse  et  dit:  "Que 
sera-ce  de  moi  lorsque  la  nuit  viendra  et  me  surprendra  dans 
cette  solitude,  sans  nourriture,  sans  abri,  sans  aucune  defense, 
k  I'heure  ou  les  betes  feroces  sortent  pour  chercher  leur  proie?" 
20  Et  comme  il  etait  absorb^  dans  cette  pensde,  un  autre  voya- 
geur  survint,  et  celui-ci,  ayant  fait  ce  qu'avait  fait  le  premier 
et  s'etant  trouv^  aussi  impuissant  a  remuer  le  rocher,  s'assit  en 
silence  et  baissa  la  tete. 

Et  apres  celui-ci,  il  en  vint  plusieurs  autres,  et  aucun  ne  put 
25  mouvoir  le  rocher,  et  leur  crainte  k  tous  etait  grande. 

Enfin  I'un  d'eux  dit  aux  autres  :  "  Mes  f  re  res,  prions  notre 
P^re  qui  est  dans  les  cieux  :  peut-etre  qu'il  aura  piti^  de  nous 
dans  cette  ddtresse." 

Et  cette  parole  fut  dcout^e,  et  ils  pri^rent  de  coeur  le  Pfere 
80  qui  est  dans  les  cieux. 

Et  quand  ils  eurent  pri^,  celui  qui  avait  dit :  "  Prions,"  dit 
encore :  "Mes  freres,  ce  qu'aucun  de  nous  n'a  pu  faire  seul,  qui 
sait  si  nous  ne  le  ferons  pas  tous  ensemble  1 " 

Et  ils  se  leverent,  et  tous  ensemble  ils  pouss^rent  le  rocher  et 
86  le  rocher  cdda,  et  ils  poursuivirent  leur  route  en  paix. 

Le  voyageur  c'est  I'homme,  le  voyage  c'est  la  vie,  le  rocher 
ce  sont  les  misferes  qu'il  rencontre  a  chaque  pas  sur  sa  route. 

Aucun  homme  ne  saurait  soulever  seul  ce  rocher,  mais  Dieu 
en  a  mesur^  le  poids  de  mani^re  qu'il  n'arrete  jamais  ceux  qui 
40  voyagent  ensemble. 


FRENCH  READER.  397 

2.  PAROLES  D'UN  CROYANT,  CHAP.  XVII. 

Lamennais  (1782-1854). 

Deux  hommes  ^taient  voisins,  et  chacun  d'eux  avait  une 
femme  et  plusieurs  petits  enfants,  et  son  seul  travail  pour  les 
faire  vivre. 

Et  Tun  de  ces  deux  hommes  s'inquietait  en  lui-meme,  disant : 
"Si  je  meurs  ou  que  je  tombe  malade,  que  deviendront  ma  6 
femme  et  mes  enfants  1 " 

Et  cette  pensee  ne  le  quittait  point,  et  elle  rongeait  son  coeur 
comme  un  ver  ronge  le  fruit  ou  il  est  cache. 

Or,  bien  que  la  meme  pensee  fut  venue  ^galement  k  I'autre 
p^re,  il  ne  s'y  etait  point  arrets ;   "  car,  disait-il,  Dieu,  qui  con-  lo 
nalt  toutes  ses  creatures  et  qui  veille  sur  elles,  veillera  aussi 
sur  moi,  et  sur  ma  femme,  et  sur  mes  enfants." 

Et  celui-ci  vivait  tranquille,  tandis  que  le  premier  ne  goutaifc 
pas  un  instant  de  repos  ni  de  joie  intdrieurement. 

Un  jour  qu'il  travaillait  aux  champs,  triste  et  abattu  h  cause  15 
de  sa  crainte,  il  vit  quelques  oiseaux  entrer  dans  un  buisson,  en 
sortir,  et  puis  bient6t  y  revenir  encore. 

Et,  s'^tant  approch^,  il  vit  deux  nids  posds  c6te  k  c6te,  et 
dans  chacun  plusieurs  petits  nouvellement  dclos  et  encore  sans 
plumes.  20 

Et  quand  il  fut  retoumd  k  son  travail,  de  temps  en  temps  il 
levait  les  yeux,  et  regardait  ces  oiseaux  qui  allaient  et  venaient 
portant  la  nourriture  k  leurs  petits. 

Or,  voila  qu'au  moment  ou  I'une  des  m^res  rentrait  avec  sa 
because,  un  vautour  la  saisit,  I'enlfeve,  et  la  pauvre  mere  se25 
d^battant  vainement  sous  sa  serre,  jetait  des  cris  pergants. 

A  cette  vue,  I'homme  qui  travaillait  sentit  son  ame  plus 
troubl^e  qu'auparavant ;  "  car,  pensait-il,  la  mort  de  la  mfere, 
c'est  la  mort  des  enfants.  Les  miens  n'ont  que  moi  non  plus. 
Que  deviendront-ils  si  je  leur  manque  ?  "  30 

Et  tout  le  jour  il  fut  sombre  et  triste,  et  la  nuit  il  ne  dormit 
point. 

Le  lendemain,  de  retour  aux  champs,  il  se  dit :  "  Je  veux 
voir  les  petits  de  cette  pauvre  mhre  :  plusieurs  sans  doute  ont 
d6jk  p^ri."     Et  il  s'achemina  vers  le  buisson.  35 

Et,  regardant,  il  vit  les  petits  bien  portants ;  pas  un  ne  sem- 
blait  avoir  patL 


398  FRENCH  READER. 

Et,  ceci  Tayant  ^tonn^,  il  se  cach^  pour  observer  ce  qui  se 
passerait. 

Et,  apres  un  peu  de  temps,  il  entendit  un  \6ger  cri,  et  il 

apergut   la  seconde  mere  rapportant  en  hate    la   nourriture 

6qu'elle  avait  recueillie,  et  elle  la  distribua  a  tous  les  petits 

indistinctement,  et  il  y  en  eut  pour  tous,  et  les  orphelins  ne 

furent  point  delaiss^s  dans  leur  misere. 

Et  le  pere  qui  s'etait  d^fie  de  la  Providence  raconta  le  soir 
k  I'autre  pere  ce  qu'i]  avait  vu. 
10  Et  celui-ci  lui  dit:  "Pourquoi  s'inqui^ter?  Jamais  Dieu 
n'abandonne  les  siens.  Son  amour  a  des  secrets  que  nous  ne 
connaissons  point.  Croyons,  esp^rons,  aimons,  et  poursuivons 
notre  route  en  paix. 

"  Si  je  meurs  avant  vous,  vous  serez  ie  pere  de  mes  enfants ; 
16  si  vous  mourez  avant  moi,  je  serai  le  pere  des  vdtres. 

"  Et  si  Tun  et  Tautre,  nous  mourons  avant  qu'ils  soient  en 
S-ge  de  pourvoir  eux-m^mes  a  leurs  n^cessites,  ils  auront  pour 
pfere  le  Pere  qui  est  dans  les  cieux." 


3.  LE  MAtTRE  CHAT  OU  LE  CHAT  BOTTfe. 

Perrault  (1628-1703). 

Un  meunier  ne  laissa  pour  tous  biens  k  trois  enfants  qu'il 

80  avait,  que  son  moulin,  son  ^ne  et  son  chat.     Les  partages 

furent  bient6t  faits ;  ni  le  notaire,  ni  le  procureur  n'y  furent 

appeles.     lis  auraient  eu  bientot  mange  tout  le  pauvre  patri- 

moine.     L'aine  eut  le  moulin,  le  second  eut  I'ane,  et  le  plus 

jeune  n'eut  que  le  chat.     Ce  dernier  ne  pouvait  se  consoler 

26  d'avoir   un   si   pauvre   lot.     "  Mes   freres,   disait-il,   pourront 

gagner  leur  vie  honnetement  en  se  mettant  ensemble;  pour 

moi,  lorsque  j'aurai  mange  mon  chat,  et  que  je  me  serai  fait  un 

manchon  de  sa  peau,  il  faudra  que  je  meure  de  faim."     Le 

Chat,  qui  entendait  ce  discours,  mais  qui  n'en  fit  pas  semblant, 

80  lui  dit  d'un  air  pose  et  serieux  :  "  Ne  vous  affligez  point,  mon 

maitre,  vous  n'avez  qu'a  me  donner  un  sac  et  me  faire  fairs 

une  paire  de  bottes  pour  aller  dans  les  broussailles,  et  vous 

verrez  que  vous  n'§tes  pas  si  mal  partage  que  vous  croyez." 


FRENCH  READER.  399 

Quoique  le  maitre  du  Chat  ne  fit  pas  grand  fond  Ik-dessus,  il 
lui  avait  vu  faire  tant  de  tours  de  souplesse  pour  prendre  des 
rats  et  des  souris,  comme  quand  il  se  pendait  par  les  pieds,  ou 
qu'il  se  cachait  dans  la  farine  pour  faire  le  mort,  qu'il  ne 
d^sespera  pas  d'en  etre  secouru  dans  sa  mis^re.  Lorsque  le  5 
Chat  eut  ce  qu'il  avait  demande,  il  se  botta  bravement,  et, 
mettant  son  sac  a  son  cou,  il  en  prit  les  cordons  avec  ses 
pattes  de  devant,  et  s'en  alia  dans  une  garenne  ou  il  y  avait 
grand  nombre  de  lapins.  II  mit  du  son  et  des  lacerons  dans 
son  sac,  et,  s'dtendant  comme  s'il  exit  ^t6  mort,  il  attendit  que  lo 
quelque  jeune  lapin,  peu  instruit  encore  des  ruses  de  ce  monde, 
vint  se  fourrer  dans  son  sac  pour  manger  ce  qu'il  y  avait  mis. 
A.  peine  fut-il  couch^,  qu'il  eut  contentement ;  un  jeune  dtourdi 
de  lapin  entra  dans  son  sac,  et  le  maitre  Chat,  tirant  aussitdt 
ses  cordons,  le  prit  et  le  tua  sans  mis^ricorde.  Tout  glorieux  16 
de  sa  proie,  il  s'en  alia  chez  le  roi  et  demanda  k  lui  parler. 
On  le  fit  monter  k  I'appartement  de  Sa  Majesty,  ou  ^tant 
entrd,  il  fit  une  grande  rt^v^rence  au  roi,  et  lui  dit :  "  Voil^, 
sire,  un  lapin  de  garenne  que  M.  le  marquis  de  Carabas  (c'^tait 
le  nom  qu'il  prit  en  gr^  de  donner  k  son  maitre)  m'a  charg^  de  ao 
vous  presenter  de  sa  part. — Dis  k  ton  maitre,  r^pondit  le  roi, 
que  je  le  remercie,  et  qu'il  me  fait  plaisir."  Une  autre  fois,  il 
alia  se  cacher  dans  un  bl^  tenant  tou jours  son  sac  ouvert,  et 
lorsque  deux  perdrix  y  furent  entries,  il  tira  les  cordons  et  les 
prit  toutes  deux.  II  alia  ensuite  les  presenter  au  roi,  comme  26 
il  avait  fait  du  lapin  de  garenne.  Le  roi  re9ut  encore  avec 
plaisir  les  deux  perdrix,  et  lui  fit  donner  pour  boire.  Le  Chat 
continua  ainsi,  pendant  deux  ou  trois  mois,  de  porter  de  temps 
en  temps  au  roi  du  gibier  de  la  chasse  de  son  maitre.  Un  jour 
qu'il  sut  que  le  roi  devait  aller  k  la  promenade  sur  le  bord  de  so 
la  riviere,  avec  sa  fille,  la  plus  belle  princesse  du  monde,  il  dit 
k  son  maitre :  "Si  vous  voulez  suivre  mon  conseil,  votre  for- 
tune est  faite ;  vous  n'avez  qu'^  vous  baigner  dans  la  riviere,  k 
I'endroit  que  je  vous  monl^erai,  et  ensuite  me  laisser  faire." 
Le  marquis  de  Carabas  fit  ce  que  son  chat  lui  conseillait,  sans  85 
savoir  k  quoi  cela  serait  bon.  Dans  le  temps  qu'il  se  baignait, 
le  roi  vint  k  passer,  et  le  Chat  se  mit  k  crier  de  toute  sa  force : 
"  Au  secoursj  au  secours  !  voil^  M.  le  marquis  de  Carabas  qui 
se  noie  !  "  A  ce  cri,  le  roi  mit  la  tete  k  la  portiere,  et  recon- 
naissant  le  Chat  qui  lui  avait  apport^  tant  de  fois  du  gibier,  40 
il  ordonna  k  ses  gardes  qu'on  all&t  vite  au  secours  de  M.  le 


400  FRENCH  READER. 

marquis  de  Carabas.  Pendant  qu'on  retirait  le  pauvre  mar- 
quis de  la  riviere,  le  Chat,  s'approchant  du  carrosse,  dit  au  roi 
que,  dans  le  temps  que  son  maitre  se  baignait,  il  etait  venu 
des  voleurs  qui  avaient  emportd  ses  habits,  quoiqu'il  eut  crid 
6  au  voleur !  de  toute  sa  force :  le  drole  les  avait  caches  sous 
une  grosse  pierre.  Le  roi  ordonna  aussitdt  aux  officiers  de  sa 
garde-robe  d'aller  querir  un  de  ses  plus  beaux  habits  pour 
M.  le  marquis  de  Carabas.  Le  roi  lui  fit  mille  caresses ;  et, 
comme  les  beaux  habits  qu'on  venait  de  lui  donner  relevaient 

10  sa  bonne  mine  (car  il  ^tait  beau  et  bien  fait  de  sa  personne), 
la  fille  du  roi  le  trouva  fort  k  son  grd,  et  le  marquis  de  Carabas 
ne  lui  eut  pas  plus  t6t  jet^  deux  ou  trois  regards  fort  respec- 
tueux  et  un  peu  tendres,  qu'elle  en  devint  amoureuse  k  la  folic. 
Le  roi  voulut  qu'il  montat  dans  son  carrosse  et  qu'il  fut  de  la 

16  promenade.  Le  Chat,  ravi  de  voir  que  son  dessein  commen- 
9ait  k  r^ussir,  prit  les  devants,  et,  ayant  rencontr^  des  paysans 
qui  fauchaient  un  pr^,  il  leur  dit :  ^^ Bonnes  gens  qui  faucheZj 
si  vous  ne  dites  pas  au  roi  que  le  pr4  que  vous  /auchez  appar- 
tient  d,  M.  le  marquis  de  Carabas  vous  serez  tous  hack^s  menu 

2ocom,me  chair  a  pdtd."  Le  roi  ne  manqua  pas  de  demander  aux 
faucheurs  k  qui  ^tait  ce  pr^  qu'ils  fauchaient.  "  C'est  a  M.  le 
marquis  de  Carabas,"  dirent-ils  tous  ensemble ;  car  la  menace 
du  Chat  leur  avait  fait  peur.  "  Vous  avez  \k  un  bel  heritage, 
dit  le  roi  au  marquis  de  Carabas. — Vous  voyez,  sire,  r^pondit 

25  le  marquis,  c'est  un  pr^  qui  ne  manque  point  de  rapporter 
abondamment  toutes  les  anndes."  Le  maitre  Chat,  qui  allait 
toujours  devant,  rencontra  des  moissonneurs,  et  leur  dit : 
^'Bonnes  gens  qui  m^oissonnez,  si  vous  ne  dites  pas  que  tous  ces 
hies  appartiennent  d  M.  le  marquis  de  Carabas,  vous  serez  tous 

Zohach^s  menu  comme  chair  a  pdt^."  Le  roi,  qui  passa  un 
moment  apr^s,  voulut  savoir  a  qui  appartenaient  tous  les  bids 
qu'il  voyait.  "C'est  a  M.  le  marquis  de  Carabas,"  rdpondirent 
les  moissonneurs,  et  le  roi  s'en  r^jouit  encore  avec  le  marquis. 
Le  Chat,  qui  allait  devant  le  carrdfese,  disait  toujours  la  meme 

85  chose  a  tous  ceux  qu'il  rencon trait ;  et  le  roi  dtait  6tonn4  des 
grands  biens  de  M.  le  marquis  de  Carabas.  Le  maitre  Chat 
arriva  enfin  dans  un  beau  chateau,  dont  le  maitre  dtait  un 
ogre,  le  plus  riche  qu'on  ait  jamais  vu  :  car  toutes  les  terres 
par  ou  le  roi  avait  passd  dtaient  de  la  ddpendance  de  ce  cha- 

40  teau.  Le  Chat  eut  soin  de  s'informer  qui  dtait  cet  ogre,  et  ce 
qu'il  savait  faire,  et  demanda  k  lui  parler,  disant  qu'il  n'avait 


FRENCH  READER.  401 

pas  voulu  passer  si  pr^s  de  son  chateau  sans  avoir  I'honneur  de 
lui  faire  la  r^v^rence.     L'ogre  le  re9ut  aussi  civilement  que  le 
pent  un  ogre,  et  le  fit  reposer.     "  On  m'a  assur^,  dit  le  Chat, 
que  vous  aviez  le  don  de  vous  changer  en  toutes  sortes  d'ani- 
maux,  et  que  vous  pouviez,  par  exemple,  vous  transformer  en  5 
lion,  en  Elephant. — Cela  est  vrai,  repondit  brusquement  l'ogre, 
et.  pour  vous  le  montrer,  vous  allez  me  voir  devenir  lion."     Le 
Chat  fut  si  effray^  de  voir  un  lion  devant  lui,  qu'il  gagna  aussi- 
tot  les  gouttieres,  non  sans  peine  et  sans  peril,  k  cause  de  ses 
bottes,  qui  ne  valaient  rien  pour  marcher  sur  les  tuiles.     Quel-  ic 
que  temps  apres,  le  Chat  ayant  vu  que  l'ogre  avait  quitt^  sa 
premiere  forme,  descendit  et  avoua  qu'il  avait  eu  bien  peur.     • 
"On  m'a  as^ur^  encore,  dit  le  Chat,  mais  je  ne  saurais  le 
croire,  que  vous  aviez  aussi  le  pouvoir  de  prendre  la  forme 
des  plus  petits  animaux,  par  exemple  de  vous  changer  en  un  i6 
rat,  en  une  souris  :  je  vous  avoue  que  je  tiens  cela  tout  k  fait 
impossible. — Impossible !  reprit  l'ogre,  vous  allez  le  voir ;"  et 
en  meme  temps  il  se  changea  en  une  souris,  qui  se  mit  k  courir 
sur  le  plancher.     Le  Chat  ne  I'eut  pas  plus  t6t  aper9ue,  qu'il 
se  jeta  dessus  et  la  mangea.     Cependant  le  roi,  qui  vit  en  20 
passant  le  beau  chateau  de  l'ogre,  voulut  entrer  dedans.     Le 
Chat  qui  entendit  le  bruit  du  carrosse  qui  passait  sur  le  pont- 
levis,  courut  au-devant,  et  dit  au  roi :  "  Votre  majesty  soit  la 
bienvenue  dans  ce  chateau  de  M.  le  marquis  de  Carabas! — 
Comment,  monsieur  le  marquis,  s'^cria  le  roi,  ce  chS,teau  est  26 
encore  k  vous !     II  ne  se  pent  rien  de  plus  beau  que  cette  cour 
et  tous  ces  b&timents  qui  I'environnent;  voyons  les  dedans,  s'il 
vous  plait."     Le  marquis  donna  la  main  k  la  jeune  princesse, 
et,  suivant  le  roi  qui  montait  le  premier,  ils  entrferent  dans 
une  grande  salle,  ou  ils  trouvferent  une  magnifique  collation  80 
que  l'ogre  avait  fait  preparer  pour  ses  amis,  qui  devaient  venir 
le  voir  ce  meme  jour-la,  mais  qui  n'avaient  pas  os^  y  entrer, 
sachant  que  le  roi  y  ^tait.     Le  roi,  charm^  des  bonnes  qualitt^s 
de  M.  le  marquis  de  Carabas,  de  meme  que  sa  fille,  qui  en 
^tait  folle,  et  voyant  les  grands  biens  qu'il  poss^dait,  lui  dit,  35 
aprfes  avoir  bu  cinq  ou  six  coups :  "II  ne  tiendra  qu'^  vous, 
monsieur  le  marquis,  que  vous  ne  soyez  mon  gendre."     Le 
marquis,  faisant  de  grandes  r^vdrences,  accepta  I'honneur  que 
lui  faisait  le  roi ;  et,  d^s  le  m^me  jour,  il  ^pousa  la  princesse. 
Le  chat  devint  grand  seigneur,  et  ne  courut  plus  apr^s  les  40 
Aooris  que  pour  se  divertir, 
36 


402  FRENCH  READER. 

4.    UN    NEZ    GELi. 

N    Dumas  (1803-1870). 

Tin  jour,  k  Saint-P^tersbourg,  je  me  d^cidai  de  faire  mes 
courses  en  me  promenant.  Je  m'armai  de  pied  en  cap  con t re 
les  hostilities  du  froid  ;  je  m'enveloppai  d'une  grande  redingote 
d'astracan,  je  m'enfon9ai  un  bonnet  fourr^  sur  les  oreilles,  je 
5roulai  autour  de  men  cou  une  cravate  de  cachemire,  et  je 
m'aventurai  dans  la  rue,  n'ayant  de  toute  ma  personne  que 
le  bout  du  nez  k  I'air. 

D'abord  tout  alia  k  merveille ;  je  m'^tonnai  meme  du  peu 
d'impression  que  me  causait  le  froid,  et  je  rials  tout  bas  de 

lotous  les  contes  que  j'en  avals  entendu  faire;  j'^tais,  au  reste, 
enchants  que  le  hasard  m'eut  donn^  cette  occasion  pour  m'accli- 
mater.  Ndanmoins,  comme  les  deux  premiers  ^coliers  chez 
lesquels  je  me  rendais  n'^taient  point  chez  eux,  je  commen9ais 
a  trouver  que  le  hasard  faisait  trop  bien  les  choses,  lorsque  je 

15  crus  remarquer  que  ceux  que  je  croisais  me  regardaient  avec 
une  certaine  inquietude,  mais  cependant  sans  me  rien  dire. 
Bientdt  un  monsieur,  plus  causeur,  k  ce  qu'il  parait,  que  les 
autres,  me  dit  en  passant :  ^oss  !  Comme  je  ne  savais  pas  un 
mot  de  russe,  je  crus  que  ce  n'^tait  pas  la  peine  de  m'arreter 

20  pour  un  monosyllabe,  et  je  continual  mon  chemin.  Au  coin 
de  la  rue  des  Pois,  je  rencontrai  un  cocher  qui  passait  ventre 
k  terre  en  conduisant  son  traineau  ;  mais,  si  rapide  que  fut  sa 
course,  il  se  crut  oblig^  de  me  parler  a  son  tour  et  me  cria : 
Noss  !  noss  !    Enfin,  en  arrivant  sur  la  place  de  I'Amiraute,  je 

25  me  trouvai  en  face  d'un  moujik  qui  ne  me  cria  rien  du  tout, 
mais  qui,  ramassant  une  poignde  de  neige,  se  jeta  sur  moi,  et 
avant  que  j'eusse  pu  me  debarrasser  de  tout  mon  attirail,  se 
mit  k  me  debarbouiller  la  figure  et  k  me  frotter  particuli^re- 
ment  le  nez  de  toute  sa  force.     Je  trouvai  la  plaisanterie  assez 

80  mediocre,  surtout  par  le  temps  qu'il  faisait,  et  tirant  un  de  mes 
bras  d'une  de  mes  poches,  je  lui  allongeai  un  coup  de  poing 
qui  I'envoya  rouler  a  dix  pas.  Malheureusement  ou  heureuse- 
ment  pour  moi,  deux  paysans  passaient  en  ce  moment  qui, 
aprfes  m'avoir  regards  un  instant,  se  jetferent  sur  moi,  et  mal- 

S5gre  ma  defense,  me  maintinrent  les  bras,  tandis  que  mon 
enrage  moujik  ramassait  une  autre  poign^e  de  neige,  et, 
comme  s'il  ne  voulait  pas  en  avoir  le  dementi,  se  pr^cipitait  de 
nouveau  sur  moi.     Cette  fois,  profitant  de  Timpossibilite  oA 


FRENCH  READER.  403 

j'^tais  de  me  d^fendre,  il  se  mit  k  recommencer  sea  frictions. 
Mais,  si  j'avais  les  bras  pris,  j'avais  la  langue  libre :  croyant 
que  j'^tais  la  victime  de  quelque  m^prise  ou  de  quelque  guefc- 
apens,  j'appelai  de  toute  ma  force  au  secours.  Un  officier 
accourut  et  me  demanda  en  fran9ais  a  qui  j'en  avals.  6 

"  Comment,  monsieur  !  "  m'^criai-je  en  faisant  un  dernier 
effort  et  en  me  d^barrassant  de  mes  trois  hommes,  qui,  de 
I'air  le  plus  tranquille  du  monde,  se  remirent  k  continuer  leur 
chemin,  I'un  vers  la  Perspective,  et  les  deux  autres  du  c6t^  du 
quai  Anglais,  "  vous  ne  voyez  done  pas  ce  que  ces  drdles  me  lo 
faisaienf? — Que  vous  faisaient-ils  done? — Mais  ils  me  frot- 
taient  la  figure  avec  de  la  neige.  Est-ce  que  vous  trouveriez 
cela  une  plaisanterie  de  bon  gout  par  hasard,  avec  le  temps 
qu'il  fait? — Mais,  monsieur,  ils  vous  rendaient  un  ^norme 
service,  me  r^pondit  mon  interlocuteur  en  me  regardant  comme  15 
nous  disons,  nous  autres  Frangais,  dans  le  blanc  des  yeux. — 
Comment  cela  ? — Sans  doute,  vous  aviez  le  nez  gel^. — Mis^ri- 
corde  !  m'dcriai-je  en  portant  la  main  k  la  partie  menac^e. — 
Monsieur,  dit  un  passant  en  s'adressant  k  Tinterlocuteur,  mon- 
sieur I'officier,  je  vous  prdviens  que  votre.  nez  g^le. — Merci,  20 
monsieur,"  dit  I'ojSBcier,  comme  si  on  I'eiit  pr^venu  de  la  chose 
la  plus  naturelle  du  monde. 

Et  se  baissant,  il  ramassa  une  poign^e  de  neige  et  se  rendit 
k  lui-meme  le  service  que  m'avait  rendu  le  pauvre  moujik  que 
j'avais  si  brutalement  r^ompens^  de  son  obligeance.  25 

**  C'est-i-dire  alors,  monsieur,  que,  sans  cet  homme .  . . — Vous 
n'auriez  plus  de  nez,  continua  I'officier  en  se  frottant  le  sien. 

**  Alors,  monsieur,  permettez.  . ." 

Et  je  me  mis  k  courir  apr^s  mon  moujik,  qui,  croyant  que 
je  voulais  achever  de  I'assommer,  se  rait  k  courir  de  son  c6t^,  so 
de  sorte  que,  comme  la  crainte  est  naturellement  plus  agile 
que  la  reconnaissance,  je  ne  I'eusse  probablement  jamais  rat- 
trap^  si  quelques  personnes,  en  le  voyant  fuir  et  en  me  voyant 
le  poursuivre,  ne  Teussent  pris  pour  un  voleur,  et  ne  lui  eussent 
barr^  le  chemin.     Lorsque  j 'arrival,  je  le  trouvai  parlant  avec  35 
une  grande  volubility,  afin  de  faire  comprendre  qu'il  n'^tait 
coupable  que  de  trop  de  philanthropie ;  dix  roubles  que  je  lui 
donnai  expliquferent  la  chose.     Le  moujik  me  baisa  les  mains, 
et  un  des  assistants,  qui  parlait  fran9ais,  m'invita  k  faire  d^sor- 
mais  plus  d'attention  k  mon  nez.     L'invitation  dtait  inutile ;  40 
pendant  tout  le  reste  de  ma  course,  je  ne  le  perdis  pas  de  vue. 


404  FRENCH  READER. 

S  LA  PIPE  DE  JEAN  BART. 

Dumas  (1803-1870). 

Jean  Bart  ^tait  de  Dunkerque,  pays  humide  et  froid,  oh.  la 
pipe  est  non  seulement  une  compagne,  mais  un  po^le.  II  4tait 
petit-fils  et  neveu  de  corsaires,  et  fut  corsaire  lui-m^me  jusqu'^ 
I'^poque  ou  Louis  XIV  I'appela  dans  la  marine  militaire. 

5  A  cette  ^poque,  Jean  Bart  avait  deja  quarante  et  un  ans ; 
il  ^tait  done  trop  tard  pour  qu'il  changeat  ses  habitudes  de 
jeunesse.  Cependant,  ceux  qui  voudront  y  reflechir,  demeure- 
ront  parfaitement  convaincus  que,  lorsque  Jean  Bart  alluma 
sa  pipe  dans  I'antichambre  du  roi,  ce  n'etait  pas  par  ignorance 

lode  I'dtiquette  de  Versailles,  mais  parce  qu'il  voulait  attirer 
Vattention  sur  lui,  de  fa9on  a  ce  qu'on  fut  forc^  de  le  mettre  a 
la  porte  du  palais.  Or,  comme,  apres  tout,  il  ^tait  chef 
d'escadre  et  qu'il  s'appelait  Jean  Bart,  ce  n'etait  pas  chose 
facile  de  le  mettre  a  la  porte,  ou  d'aller  dire  a  Louis  XIV  qu'il 

16  y  avait,  porte  k  porte  avec  lui,  un  homme  qui  f umait. 

On  savait  que  Jean  Bart  venait  demander  au  roi  une  grace, 
— une  grace  que  le  roi  avait  d^ja  refusee  deux  fois. 

On  ne  faisait  pas  parvenir  au  roi  les  demandes  d'audience 
de  Jean  Bart ;  il  fallait  que  Jean  Bart  prit  le  cabinet  du  roi 

20  par  surprise. 

Jean  Bart  mit  de  c6t^  ses  fameux  habits  de  drap  d'or 
double  d'argent,  qui  faisaient  tant  de  bruit  dans  les  salons  de 
Paris,  revetit  son  simple  costume  d'officier  sup^rieur  de  la 
marine,  passa  seulement  k  son  cou  la  chaine  d'or  que  le  roi  lui 

25  avait  donn^e  autrefois  en  recompense  de  ses  exploits,  et  se 
pr^senta  k  I'antichambre  de  Sa  Majesty,  comme  s'il  avait  sa 
lettre  d'admission. 

"  Monsieur  le  capitaine  de  frigate,  demanda  I'officier  charg^ 
d'introduire  les  solliciteurs  pr^s  du  roi ;  monsieur  le  capitaine 

30  de  frigate,  avez-vous  votre  lettre  d'audience  1 

— Ma  lettre  d'audience?  dit  Jean  Bart;  pourquoi  faire) 
Je  suis,  certes,  assez  bon  ami  du  roi  pour  qu'il  n'y  ait  pas 
besoin  de  toutes  ces  niaiseries-la  entre  nous.  Dites-lui  que 
c'est  Jean  Bart  qui  demande  k  lui  parler,  et  cela  suffira. 

86  — Du  moment  ou  vous  n'avez  pas  de  lettre  d'audience, 
reprit  I'officier,  personne  ne  se  permettra  de  vous  annoncer. 

— Mais  j'ai  besoin  qu'on  m'annonce,  fit  Jean  Bart,  et  je  ne 
m'annoncerai  pas  bien  moi-mdme ! 


FRENCH  READER.  405 

Et  il  s'avanga  vers  la  porte  de  communication. 

— On  ne  passe  pas,  mon  officier,  dit  le  mousquetaire  de 
faction. 

— Est-ce  la  consigne  ?  demanda  Jean  Bart. 

— C'est  la  consigne,  repondit  le  mousquetaire.  b 

— Respect  a  la  consigne,"  dit  Jean  Bart. 

Puis,  s'adossant  a  la  boiserie,  il  tira  une  pipe  du  fond  de  son 
chapeau,  la  bourra  de  tabac,  battit  le  briquet,  et  I'alluma. 

Les  courtisans  le  regardaient  avec  stupefaction. 

"  Je  vous  ferai  observer,  Monsieur  le  capitaine  de  frigate,  lO 
dit  I'officier,  qu'on  ne  fume  pas  dans  I'antichambre  du  roi.  • 

— Alors,  qu'on  ne  m'y  fasse  pas  attendre;  moi,  je  fume 
tou jours  quand  j 'attends. 

— Monsieur  le  capitaine  de  frigate,  je  vais  §tre  oblig^  de 
vous  faire  sortir.  16 

— Avant  que  j'aie  parl^  au  roi !  fit  Jean  Bart  en  riant. 
Ah  !  je  vous  en  d^fie  bien." 

Et,  en  effet,  ce  n'^tait  pas,  commo  nous  Tavons  dit,  chose 
facile  que  de  mettre  Jean  Bart  a  la  porte;  de  deux  maux 
choisissant  le  moindre,  et  surtout  le  moins  dangereux,  I'officier  20 
alia  dire  au  roi : 

"  Sire,  il  y  a  dans  votre  antichambre  un  officier  de  marine 
qui  fume,  qui  nous  d^fie  de  le  faire  sortir,  et  qui  nous  declare 
qu'il  entrera  malgr^  nous." 

Louis  XIV  ne  se  donna  pas  m§me  la  peine  de  chercher.  26 

"  Je  parie  que  c'est  Jean  Bart ! "  dit-il. 

L'officier  s'inclina. 

"  Laissez-le  finir  sa  pipe,  dit  Louis  XIV,  et  faites-le  entrer." 
Jean  Bart  ne  finit  pas  sa  pipe ;  il  la  jeta  dans  la  chemin^e 
et  s'^langa  vers  le  cabinet  du  roi.     Mais  k  peine  en  eut-ila> 
franchi    le    seuil,    qu'il    s'arreta,    saluant    respectueusement 
Louis  XIV. 

Jean  Bart  ^tait  arriv^  k  son  but.  II  se  trouvait  en  face  du 
roi  avec  la  m^me  adresse  qu'il  manoeuvrait  devant  les  escadres 
ennemies.  II  conduisit  la  conversation  k  travers  les  ^cueils,  35 
les  passes,  les  rochers,  ou  il  voulait  I'amener;  c'est-i.-dire 
qu'ayant  commence  par  se  faire  faire  force  compliments  sur  sa 
sortie  du  port  de  Dunkerque  ou  il  ^tait  ^troitement  bloqu^  par 
les  Anglais  ;  sur  I'incendie  de  plus  de  quatre-vingts  batiments 
ennemis  qu'il  brula  en  mer ;  et  enfin  sur  sa  descente  k  New-  40 
castle, — il  mit  un  genou  en  terre  devant  le  roi,  et  finit  par  lui 


406  FRENCH  READER. 

demander  la  grkce  de  Keyser,  son  matelot,  condamn^  k  mort 
pour  avoir  tue  son  adversaire  en  duel. 

Le  roi  hesitait. 

Jean  Bart,  que  I'amiti^  fraternelle  qu'il  portait  k  Keyser 
srendait  eloquent,  pria,  adjura,  conjura ! 

"Jean  Bart,  dit  Louis  XIV,  je  vous  accorde  ce  que  j'ai 
refuse  k  Tourville. 

— Sire,  rdpondit  Jean  Bart,  mon  p^re,  deux  de  mes  f  reres, 
vingt  autres  membres  de  ma  famille,  sont  morts  au  service  de 
10  Votre  Majeste.     Vous  me  donnez  aujourd'hui  la  vie  de  mon 
maljelot,  je  vous  donne  quittance  pour  celles  des  autres." 

Et  Jean  Bart  sortit,  pleurant  comme  un  enfant,  et  criant : 
**  Vive  le  roi ! "  a  tue-tete. 

Ce  fut  alors  qu'envelopp^  par  tous  les  courtisans  d^sireux  de 
16  faire  la  cour  a  un  homme  qui  ^tait  demeur^  plus  d'une  demi- 
heure  en  audience  priv^e  avec  Louis  XIV,  et  ne  sachant  com- 
ment sortir  de  ce  cercle  vivant  qui  commengait  k  TetoulBfer,  il 
profita  de  ce  qu'un  des  courtisans  lui  demandait : 

"  Monsieur  Jean  Bart,   comment  done   etes-vous  sorti  du 
20  port  de  Dunkerque,   bloque  comme  vous  I'^tiez  par  la  flotte 
anglaise  1 

— Vous  voulez  le  savoir  1  rdpondit-il. 

— Oui,  oui,  s'^criferent-ils  tous  en  choeur ;  cela  nous  ferait 
grand  plaisir. 
26  — Eh  bien!  vous  allez  voir.  Je  suis  Jean  Bart,  n'est-ce 
pas  ?  Vous  etes  la  flotte  anglaise ;  vous  me  bloquez  dans 
I'antichambre  du  roi;  vous  m'empechez  de  sortir. .  .Eh  bien, 
vli!  vlan  !  piff !  pafF!  voila  comment  je  suis  sorti !" 

Et  a  chaque  exclamation,  allongeant  un  coup  de  pied  ou  un 

80  coup  de  poing  k  celui  qui  ^tait  en  face  de  lui  et  I'envoyant 

tomber  sur  son  voisin,  il  s'ouvrit  un  passage  jusqu'^  la  porte. 

Arriv^  1^ : 

*'  Messieurs,  dit-il,  voil^  comment  je  suis  sorti  du  port  de 
Dunkerque." 
85     Et  il  sortit  de  I'antichambre  du  roi. 


FRENCH  READER.  407 

6.   LA  DERNlfeRE  CLASSE. 
Daudet  (1840-1897). 

Ce  matin-li,  j'^tais  tres  en  retard  pour  aller  k  T^ole,  et 
j'avais  grand'peur  d'etre  grond^  d'autant  plus  que  M.  Hamel 
nous  avait  dit  qu'il  nous  interrogerait  sur  les  participes,  et  je 
n'en  savais  pas  le  premier  mot.  Un  moment  I'idee  me  vint  de 
manquer  la  classe  et  de  prendre  ma  course  k  travers  champs.  6 

Le  temps  ^tait  si  chaud,  si  clair ! 

On  entendait  les  merles  siffler  a  la  lisifere  du  bois,  et  dans 
le  pr^  Rippert,  derriere  la  scierie,  les  Prussiens  qui  faisaient 
Texercice.     Tout  cela  me  tentait  bien  plus  que  la  r^gle  des 
participes;  mais  j'eus  la  force  de  resister,  et  je  courus  bienio 
vite  vers  I'ecole. 

En  passant  devant  la  mairie,  je  vis  qu'il  y  avait  du  monde 
arrets  pres  du  petit  grillage  aux  affiches.     Depuis  deux  ans, 
c'est  de  1^  que  nous  sont  venues  toutes  les  mauvaises  nouvelles, 
les  batailles  perdues,  les  requisitions,  les  ordres  de  la  comman-  u 
dature ;  et  je  pensai  sans  m'arreter  ; 

"Qu'est-ce  qu'il  y  a  encore  1" 

Alors,  comme  je  traversais  la  place  en  courant,  le  forgeron 
Wachter,  qui  ^tait  la  avec  son  apprenti  en  train  de  lire 
I'affiche,  me  cria  :  20 

"Ne  te  d^p^che  pas  tant,  petit;  tu  y  arriveras  toujours 
assez  t6t,  a  ton  ^cole  ! " 

Je  crus  qu'il  se  moquait  de  moi,  et  j'entrai  tout  essouffl^ 
dans  la  petite  cour  de  M.  Hamel. 

D'ordinaire,  au  commencement  de  la  classe,  il  se  faisait  un  26 
grand  tapage  qu'on  entendait  jusque  dans  la  rue,  les  pupitres 
ouverts,  ferm^s,  les  le9ons  qu'on  r^p^tait  tres  haut  ensemble  en 
se  bouchant  les  oreilles  pour  mieux  apprendre,  et  la  grosse  regie 
du  maitre  qui  tapait  sur  les  tables  : 

"  Un  peu  de  silence  !  "  80 

Je  comptais  sur  tout  ce  train  pour  gagner  mon  banc  sans 
^tre  vu  ;  mais  justement  ce  jour-1^  tout  ^tait  tranquille,  comme 
un  matin  de  dimanche.  Par  la  fen^tre  ouverte  je  voyais  mes 
camarades  d^ja  ranges  k  leur  place,  et  M.  Hamel,  qui  passait 
et  repassait  avec  la  terrible  r^gle  en  fer  sous  le  bras.  II  fallut  85 
ouvrir  la  porte  et  entrer  au  milieu  de  ce  grand  calme.  Vous 
pensez  si  j'^tais  rouge,  et  si  j'avais  peur  1 


408  FRENCH  READER. 

Eh  bien,  non.  M.  Hamel  me  regarda  sans  colore  et  me  dit 
tres  doucement :  \ 

"  Va  vite  a  ta  place,  mon  petit  Frantz ;  nous  allions  com- 
mencer  sans  toi." 

6  J'enjambai  le  banc  et  je  m'assis  tout  de  suite  a  mon  pupitre- 
Alors  seulement,  un  peu  remis  de  frayeur,  je  remarquai  que 
notre  maitre  avait  sa  belle  redingote  verte,  son  jabot  pliss^  fin 
et  la  calotte  de  soie  noire  brodee  qu'il  ne  mettait  que  les  jours 
d'inspection  ou  de  distribution  de  prix.     Du  reste,  toute  la 

loclasse  avait  quelque  chose  d'extraordinaire  et  de  solennel. 
Mais  ce  qui  me  surprit  le  plus,  ce  fut  de  voir  au  fond  de  la 
salle,  sur  les  bancs  qui  restaient  vides  d'habitude,  les  gens  du 
village  assis  et  silencieux  comme  nous,  le  vieux  Hauser  aveo 
son  tricorne,  I'ancien  maire,  I'ancien  facteur,  et  puis  d'autres 

15  personnes  encore.  Tout  ce  monde-1^  paraissait  triste ;  et 
Hauser  avait  apportd  un  vieil  ab^cedaire  mang^  aux  bords 
qu'il  tenait  grand  ouvert  sur  ses  genoux,  avec  ses  grosses 
lunettes  poshes  en  travers  des  pages. 

Pendant  que  je  m'etonnais  de  tout  cela,  M.  Hamel  ^tait 

20  monte  dans  sa  chaire,  et,  de  la  meme  voix  douce  et  grave  dont 
il  m'avait  regu,  il  nous  dit : 

"Mes  enfants,  c'est  la  derniere  fois  que  je  vous  fais  la  classe. 
L'ordre  est  venu  de  Berlin  de  ne  plus  enseigner  que  I'allemand 
dans  les  ^coles  de  I'Alsace  et  de  la  Lorraine.  ...     Le  nouveau 

25  maitre  arrive  demain.  Aujourd'hui  c'est  votre  derniere  le9on 
de  frangais.     Je  vous  prie  d'etre  bien  attentifs." 

Ces  quelques  paroles  me  bouleverserent.     Ah!  les  misdrac 
bles,  voilk  ce  qu'ils  avaient  aflfich^  k  la  mairie : 
Ma  derniere  \eqou.  de  frangais  ! 

80  Et  moi  qui  savais  k  peine  ecrire !  Je  n'apprendrais  done 
jamais !  II  faudrait  done  en  rester  1^ !  Comme  je  m'en  vou- 
lais  maintenant  du  temps  perdu,  des  classes  manquees  a  courir 
les  nids  ou  a  faire  des  glissades  sur  la  Saar !  Mes  livres  que 
tout  k  I'heure  encore  je  trouvais  si  ennuyeux,  si  lourds  a  por- 

86ter,   ma  grammaire,   mon  histoire   sainte,  me  semblaient  de 

vieux   amis    qui   me   feraient  beaucoup   de   peine  a  quitter. 

C'est  comme  M.  Hamel.     L'idee  qu'il  allait  partir,  que  je  ne  le 

verrais  plus,  me  faisait  oublier  les  punitions,  les  coups  de  regie. 

Pauvre  homme ! 

40  C'est  en  I'honneur  de  cette  derniere  classe  qu'il  avait  mis  ses 
beaux  habits  du  dimanche,  et  maintenant  je  comprenais  pour- 


FRENCH  READER.  409 

qnoi  ces  vieux  du  village  ^taient  venus  s'asseoir  au  bout  de  la 
salle.  Cela  semblait  dire  qu'ils  regrettaient  de  ne  pas  y  etre 
venus  plus  souvent,  k  cette  ^eole.  C'e'tait  aussi  comma  une 
fa9on  de  remercier  notre  maitre  de  ses  quarante  ans  de  bons 
services,  et  de  rendre  leurs  devoirs  k  la  patrie  qui  s'en  allait.       ft 

J'en  ^tais  la  de  mes  reflexions,  quand  j'entendis  appeler  mon 
nom.  C'etait  mon  tour  de  reciter.  Que  n'aurais-je  pas  donn^ 
pour  pouvoir  dire  tout  au  long  cette  fameuse  regie  des  parti- 
cipes,  bien  haut,  bien  clair,  sans  une  faute ;  mais  je  m'embrou- 
illai  aux  premiers  mots,  et  je  restai  debout  k  me  balancer  dans  10 
mon  banc,  le  coeur  gros,  sans  oser  lever  la  t^te.  J'entendais 
M.  Hamel  qui  me  parlait : 

"  Je  ne  te  gronderai  pas  mon  petit  Frantz,  tu  dois  etre  assez 
puni.  Voila  ce  que  c'est.  Tous  les  jours  on  se  dit :  Bah  !  j'ai 
bien  le  temps.  J'apprendrai  demain.  Et  puis  tu  vois  ce  qui  16 
arrive.  .  .  .  Ah  !  9'a  ^te  le  grand  malheur  de  notre  Alsace  de 
toujours  remettre  son  instruction  a  demain.  Maintenant  ces 
gens-I^  sont  en  droit  de  nous  dire :  Comment !  Vous  pr^ten- 
diez  ^tre  Fran9ais,  et  vous  ne  savez  ni  parler  ni  ^crire  votre 
langue  !  .  .  .  Dans  tout  9a,  mon  pauvre  Frantz,  ce  n'est  pas  20 
encore  toi  le  plus  coupable.  Nous  avons  tous  notre  bonne 
part  de  reproches  k  nous  faire. 

"Vos  parents  n'ont  pas  assez  tenu  k  vous  voir  instniits. 
lis  aimaient  mieux  vous  envoyer  travailler  k  la  terre  ou  aux 
filatures  pour  avoir  quelques  sous  de  plus.  Moimeme,  n'ai-je26 
rien  k  me  reprocher  1  Est-ce  que  je  ne  vous  ai  pas  souvent  fait 
arroser  mon  jardin  au  lieu  de  travailler  ?  Et  quand  je  voulais 
aller  pecher  des  truites,  est-ce  que  je  me  g^nais  pour  vous 
donner  cong^  V  .  .  . 

Alors,  d'une  chose  k  Tautre,  M.  Hamel  se  mit  k  nous  parler  w 
de  la  langue  fran9aise,  disant  que  c'dtait  la  plus  belle  langue 
du  monde,  la  plus  claire,  la  plus  solide,  qu'il  fallait  la  garder 
entre  nous  et  ne  jamais  I'oublier,  parce  que  quand  un  peuple 
tombe  esclave,  tant  qu'il  tient  bien  sa  langue,  c'est  comme  s'il 
tenait  la  clef  de  sa  prison.  Puis  il  prit  une  grammaire  et  nous  86 
lut  notre  le9on.  J'^tais  ^tonn^  de  voir  comme  je  comprenais. 
Tout  ce  qu'il  me  disait  me  semblait  facile,  facile.  Je  crois 
aussi  que  je  n'avais  jamais  si  bien  4co\it6  et  que  lui  non  plus 
n'avait  jamais  mis  autant  de  patience  a  ses  explications.  On 
aurait  dit  qu'avant  de  s'en  aller  le  pauvre  homme  voulait  nous  40 


410  FRENCH  READER. 

donner  tout  son  savoir,  nous  le  faire  entrer  dans  la  t^te  d'un 
seul  coup. 

La  legon  finie,  on  passa  a  I'dcriture.  Pour  ce  jour-la  M.  Hamei 
nous  avait  prepare  des  exemples  tout  neufs,  sur  lesquels  ^tait 

6  ^crit  en  belle  ronde :  France^  Alsace^  France,  Alsace.  Cela 
faisait  comme  des  petits  drapeaux  qui  flottaient  tout  autour 
de  la  classe  pendus  a  la  tringle  de  nos  pupitres.  II  fallait  voir 
comme  chacun  s'appliquait,  et  quel  silence !  On  n'entendait 
que  le  grincement  des  plumes  sur  le  papier.     Un  moment  des 

lohannetons  entrerent;  mais  personne  n'y  fit  attention,  pas 
m§me  les  tout  petits,  qui  s'appliquaient  k  tracer  leurs  bdtons 
avec  un  coeur,  une  conscience,  comme  si  cela  encore  ^tait  du 
franqais.  . .  Sur  la  toiture  de  T^cole,  des  pigeons  roucoulaienfc 
tout  bas,  et  je  me  disais  en  les  ^coutant : 

16  "  Est-ce  qu'on  ne  va  pas  les  obliger  a  chanter  en  allemand, 
eux  aussi  1 " 

De  temps  en  temps  quand  je  levais  les  yeux  de  dessus  ma 
page,  je  voyais  M.  Hamel  immobile  dans  sa  chaire  et  fixant 
les  objets  autour  de  lui,  comme  s'il  avait  voulu  emporter  dans 

20  son  regard  toute  sa  petite  maison  d'ecole. . .  Pensez  !  depuis 
quarante  ans,  il  dtait  \k  h,  la  meme  place,  avec  sa  cour  en  face 
de  lui  et  sa  classe  toute  pareille.  Seulement  les  bancs,  les 
pupitres  s'etaient  polls,  frott^s  par  I'usage;  les  noyers  de  la 
cour  avaient  grandi,  et  le  houblon  qu'il  avait  plant^  lui-meme 

26  enguirlandait  maintenant  les  fen^tres  jusqu'au  toit.  Quel 
crfeve-cceur  9a  devait  ^tre  pour  ce  pauvre  homme  de  quitter 
toutes  ces  choses,  et  d'entendre  sa  soeur  qui  allait,  venait,  dans 
la  chambre  au-dessus,  en  train  de  fermer  leurs  malles  !  car  ils 
devaient  partir  le  lendemain,  s'en  aller  du  pays  pour  toiijours. 

80  Tout  de  meme  il  eut  le  courage  de  nous  faire  la  classe 
jusqu'au  bout.  Aprfes  F^criture,  nous  eumes  la  le9on  d'his- 
toire ;  ensuite  les  petits  chant^rent  le  ba  be  bi  bo  bu.  La-bas 
au  fond  de  la  salle,  le  vieux  Hauser  avait  mis  ses  lunettes,  et, 
tenant  son  ab^cedaire  k  deux  mains,  il  dpelait  les  lettres  avec 

65  eux.  On  voyait  qu'il  s'appliquait,  lui  aussi ;  sa  voix  tremblait 
d'^motion,  et  c'^tait  si  drdle  de  Ten  tend  re,  que  nous  avions 
tous  envie  de  rire  et  de  pleurer.  Ah  !  je  m'en  souviendrai  de 
cette  derni^re  classe. . . 

Tout  a  coup  I'horloge  de  I'^glise  sonna  midi,  puis  I'Angelus. 

10  Au  meme  moment,  les  trompettes  des  Prussiens  qui  revenaient 
de  I'exercice  ^clat^rent  sous  nos  fenetres. ...     M.  Hamel  se 


FRENCH  READER.  411 

leva,  tout  pSIe,  dans  sa  chaire.     Jamais  il  ne  m'avait  paru  si 
grand. 

"  Mes  amis,  dit-il,  mes  amis,  je . . .  je. . .  ." 

Mais  quelque  chose  I'etouffait.  II  ne  pouvait  pas  achever 
sa  phrase.  5 

Alors  il  se  tourna  vers  le  tableau,  prit  un  morceau  de  craie, 
et,  en  appuyant  de  toutes  ses  forces,  il  ^crivit  aussi  gros  qu'il 
put: 

"  Vive  la  France  ! " 

Puis  il  resta  la,  la  t^te  appuy^  au  mur,  et,  sans  parler,  avec  10 
sa  main  il  nous  faisait  signe  : 

"  C'est  fini allez-vous-en." 


7.  LA  CHiVRE  DE  M.  SEGUIN. 

Daudet  (1840-1897). 

M.  Seguin  n'avait  jamais  eu  de  bonheur  avec  ses  ch^vres. 

II  les  perdait  toutes  de  la  meme  fa9on  :  un  beau  matin,  elles 
cassaient  leur  corde,  s'en  allaient  dans  la  montagne,  et  la-haut » 
le  loup  les  mangeait.    Ni  les  caresses  de  leur  maitre,  ni  la  peur 
du  loup,  rien  ne  les  retenait.    C'^tait,  parait-il,  des  chevres  ind^- 
pendantes,  voulant  a  tout  prix  le  grand  air  et  la  liberty. 

Le  brave  M.  Seguin,  qui  ne  comprenait  rien  au  caractfere  de 
ses  betes,  ^tait  constern^.     II  disait :  20 

"C'est  fini ;  les  chfevres  s'ennuient  chez  moi,  je  n'en  garderai 
pas  une." 

Cependant  il  ne  se  d^couragea  pas,  et,  apr^s  avoir  perdu  six 
chevres  de  la  m^me  maniere,  il  en  acheta  une  septi^me ;  seule- 
ment,  cette  fois,  il  eut  soin  de  la  prendre  toute  jeune,  pourss 
qu'elle  s'habitu4t  mieux  k  demeurer  chez  lui. 

Ah  !  qu'elle  dtait  jolie  la  petite  ch^vre  de  M.  Seguin  !  qu'elle 
^tait  jolie  avec  ses  yeux  doux,  sa  barbiche  de  sous-officier,  ses 
sabots  noirs  et  luisants,  ses  cornes  z^brdes  et  ses  longs  poils 
blancs  qui  lui  faisaient  une  houppelande !  et  puis,  docile,  cares-  W 
sante,  se  laissant  traire  sans  bouger,  sans  mettre  son  pied  dans 
r^cuelle.     Un  amour  de  petite  ch^vre. , . 


412  FRENCH  READER. 

M.  Seguin  avait  derrifere  sa  maison  un  clos  entour^  d'au'W- 
pines.  C'est  1^  qu'il  mit  sa  nouvelle  pensionnaire.  II  I'attacha 
k  un  pieu  au  plus  bel  endroit  du  pre,  en  ayant  soin  de  lui  laisser 
beaucoup  de  corde,  et  de  temps  en  temps  il  venait  voir  si  elle 
6^tait  bien.  La  ch^vre  se  trouvait  tres  heureuse  et  broutait 
I'herbe  de  si  bon  coeur  que  M.  Seguin  ^tait  ravi. 

"  Enfin,  pensait  le  pauvre  homme,  en  voila  une  qui  ne  s'en- 
nuiera  pas  chez  moi !  " 

M,  Seguin  se  trompait,  sa  chevre  s'ennuya. 


10      Un  jour,  elle  se  dit  en  regardant  la  montagne : 

"  Comme  on  doit  etre  bien  Ik-haut !  Quel  plaisir  de  gam 
bader  dans  la  bruy^re,  sans  cette  maudite  longe  qui  vous 
^corche  le  cou  ! .  . .  C'est  bon  pour  I'ane  ou  pour  le  boeuf  de 
brouter  dans  un  clos  ! .  .  .  Les  cbevres,  il  leur  faut  du  large." 
IB  A  partir  de  ce  moment,  I'herbe  du  clos  lui  parut  fade, 
L'ennui  lui  vint.  Elle  maigrit,  son  lait  se  fit  rare.  C'^tait 
piti^  de  la  voir  tirer  tout  le  jour  sur  sa  longe,  la  t^te  tourn^e 
du  c6t^  de  la  montagne,  la  narine  ouverte,  en  faisant  Me  / . . . 
tristement. 
20  M.  Seguin  s'apercevait  bien  que  sa  chevre  avait  quelque 
chose,  mais  il  ne  savait  pas  ce  que  c'^tait .  . .  Un  matin, 
comme  il  achevait  de  la  traire,  la  chevre  se  retourna  et  lui  dit 
dans^  son  patois ; 

"Ecoutez,  monsieur  Seguin,  je  me  languis  chez  vous,  laissez- 
S5  moi  aller  dans  la  montagne. 

— Ah !  mon  Dieu ! . .  .  Elle  aussi !  cria  M.  Seguin  stup^f ait, 
et  du  coup  il  laissa  tomber  son  ^cuelle ;  puis,  s'asseyant  dans 
I'herbe  k  c6te  de  sa  chevre  : 

— Comment  Blanquette,  tu  veux  me  quitter  1 " 
80      Et  Blanquette  repondit ; 
*'  Oui,  monsieur  Seguin : 
— Est-ce  que  I'herbe  te  manque  ici  'i 
— Oh  !  non  !  monsieur  Seguin. 

— Tu  es   peut-etre   attachde   de  trop  court ;    veux-tu  que 
86  j 'allonge  la  corde  ! 

— Ce  n'est  pas  la  peine,  monsieur  Seguin. 
— Alors,  qu'est-ce  qu'il  te  faut !  qu'est-ce  que  tu  veux  t 
— Je  veux  aller  dans  la  montagne,  monsieur  Seguin. 
— Mais,  malheureuse,  tu  ne  sais  pas  qu'il  y  a  le  loup  dans  la 
40  montagne. . .      Que  feras-tu  quand  il  viendra?. , . 


FRENCH  READER.  413 

— Je  lui  donnerai  des  coups  de  come,  monsieur  Seguin. 

— Le  loup  se  moque  bien  de  tes  comes.     II  m'a  mang^  des 
biques  autrement  encorn^es  que  toi .  . .     Tu  sais  bien,  la  pauvre 
vieille  Renaude  qui  ^tait  ici  Tan  dernier'?  une  maitresse  chevre, 
forte  et  mechante  comme  un  bouc.     Elle  s'est  battue  avec  le  fi 
loup  toute  la  nuit .  .  .   puis,  le  matin,  le  loup  Fa  mangle. 

— P^caire !  Pauvre  Renaude ! . .  .      Qa  ne  fait  rien,  monsieur 
Seguin,  laissez-moi  aller  dans  la  montagne. 

— Bont^   divine  ! . .  .    dit  M.  Seguin ;   mais  qu'est-ce  qu'on 
leur  fait  done  k  mes  chevres  1     Encore  une  que  le  loup  va  me  lo 
manger . . .      Eh   bien,    non ...    j(^    te    sauverai    malgr^   toi, 
coquine !   et  de  peur  que  tu  ne  rompes  ta  corde,  je  vais  t'en- 
fermer  dans  ratable,  et  tu  y  resteras  toujours. 

lA-dessus,  M.  Seguin  emporta  la  chevre  dans  une  Stable 
toute  noire,  dont  il  ferma  la  porte  a  double  tour.     Malheu-16 
feusement,  il  avait  oubli^  la  fenetre,  et  k  peine  eut-il  le  dos 
tournd,  que  la  petite  s'en  alia. . .  . 

Quand  la  chevre  blanche  arriva  dans  la  montagne,  ce  fut  un 
ravissement  g^ndral.  Jamais  les  vieux  sapins  n'avaient  rien 
vu  d'aussi  joli.  On  la  re9ut  comme  une  petite  reine.  Les  20 
ch&taigniers  se  baissaient  jusqu'a  terre  pour  la  caresser  du 
bout  de  leurs  branches.  Les  genets  d'or  s'ouvraient  sur  son 
passage,  et  sentaient  bon  tant  qu'ils  pouvaient.  Toute  la 
montagne  lui  fit  f^te. 

On  pense  bien  si  notre  chevre  ^tait  heureuse !  Plus  de  25 
corde,  plus  de  pieu . .  .  rien  qui  I'emp^chat  de  gambader,  de 
brouter  a  sa  guise . .  .  C'est  \k  qu'il  y  en  avait  de  I'herbe ! 
jusque  par-dessus  les  comes  ! . .  .  Et  quelle  herbe  !  savoureuse, 
fine,  dentel^e,  faite  de  mille  plan  tes .  . .  C'^tait  bien  autre 
chose  que  le  gazon  du  clos.  Et  les  fleurs  done  ! . .  .  De  30 
grandes  campanules  bleues,  des  digitales  de  pourpre  k  longs 
calices,  toute  une  foret  de  fleurs  sauvages  d^bordant  de  sues 
capiteux  !  .  . . 

La  chevre  blanche,  k  moiti^  soule,  se  vautrait  1^  dedans  les 
jambes  en  Tair  et  roulait  le  long  des  talus,  pele-mele  avec  les  S5 
feuilles  tomb^es  et  les  chataignes . .  .  Puis,  tout  k  coup  elle 
se  redressait  d'un  bond  sur  ses  pattes.  Hop  !  la  voila  partie, 
la  tete  en  avant,  k  travers  les  maquis  et  les  buissiferes,  tantdt 
sur  un  pic,  tantdt  au  fond  d'un  ravin,  la-haut,  en  bas,  par- 
tout  ...  On  aurait  dit  qu'il  y  avait  dix  chevres  de  M.  Seguin  40 
dans  la  montagne. 


414  FRENCH  READER. 

"  C'est  qu'elle  n'avait  peur  de  rien  la  Blanquette. 

Elle  franchissait  d'un  saut  de  grands  torrents  qui  I'^claboua- 
saient  au  passage  de  poussiere  humide  et  d'ecume.  Alors, 
toute  ruisselante,  elle  allait  s'etendre  sur  quelque  roche  plate 
6  et  se  faisait  secher  par  le  soleil . .  .  Une  fois,  s'avangant  au 
bord  d'un  plateau,  une  fleur  de  cytise  aux  dents,  elle  aper9ut 
en  has,  tout  en  bas  dans  la  plaine,  la  maison  de  M.  Seguin 
avec  le  clos  derriere.     Cela  la  fit  rire  aux  larmes. 

"  Que  c'est  petit,  dit-elle ;  comment  ai-je  pu  tenir  Ik 
10  dedans?" 

Pauvrette !  de  se  voir  si  haut  perchde,  elle  se  croyait  au 
moins  aussi  grande  que  le  monde .  . . 


Tout   k   coup   le    vent    fraichit.  . .      La   montagne   devint 
violette ;  c'^tait  le  soir .  .  . 
16      "D^j^!"  dit  la  petite  chevre;  et  elle  s'arreta  fort  ^tonn^e. 
En  bas,  les  champs  ^taient  noyes  de  brume.     Le  clos  de 
M.  Seguin  disparaissait  dans  le  brouillard,  et  de  la  maisonnette 
on  ne  voyait  plus  que  le  toit  avec  un  peu  de  fum^e.     Elle 
^couta  les  clochettes  d'un  troupeau  qu'on  ramenait,  et  se  sentit 
50 1'ame  toute  triste . . .      Un  gerf aut,  qui  ren trait,  la  f r6la  de 
ses  ailes  en  passant.     Elle  tressaillit. .  .puis  ce  fut  un  hurle- 
ment  dans  la  montagne: 
"Hou!  hou!" 

Elle  pensa  au  loup ;  de  tout  le  jour  la  foUe  n^  avait  pas 
26pens^.  . .     Au  m^me  moment  une  trompe  sonna  bien  loin  dans 
la  valine.     C'^tait  ce  bon  M.  Seguin  qui  tentait  un  dernier 
effort. 

"  Hou  !  hou  ! . .  .  faisait  le  loup. 
—  Reviens  1  reviens  ! .  .  . "  criait  la  trompe. 
30     Blanquette  eut  envie  de  revenir ;  mais  en  se  rappelant  le 
pieu,  la  corde,  la  haie  du  clos,  elle  pensa  que  maintenant  elle 
ne  pouvait  plus  se  faire  a  cette  vie,  et  qu'il  valait  mieux  rester. 
La  trompe  ne  sonnait  plus .  .  . 

La  chevre  entendit  derriere  elle  un  bruit  de  feuilles.     Elle 
85  se  retour^a  et  vit  dans  Tombre  deux  oreilles  courtes,  toutes 
droites,  avec  deux  yeux  qui  reluisaient . . .     C'dtait  le  loup. 


FRENCH  READER.  415 

Enorme,  immobile,  assis  sur  son  train  de  derrifere,  il  ^tait  1^ 
regardant  la  petite  chevre  blanche  et  la  degustant  par  avance. 
Comme  il  savait  bien  qu'il  la  mangerait,  le  loup  ne  se  pressait 
pas;  seulement,  quand  elle  se  retourna,  il  se  mit  a  rire 
m^chamment.  S 

"Ha !  ha  !  la  petite  chevre  de  M.  Seguin !"  et  il  passa  sa 
grosse  langue  rouge  sur  ses  babines  d 'amadou. 

Blanquette  se  sentit  perdue .  . .  Un  moment  en  se  rappelant 
rhistoire  de  la  vieille  Renaude,  qui  s'etait  battue  toute  la 
nuit  pour  etre  mangle  le  matin  elle  se  dit  qu'il  vaudrait  peut-  lo 
^tre  mieux  se  laisser  manger  tout  de  suite;  puis,  s'^tant 
ravis^e,  elle  tomba  en  garde,  la  tete  basse  et  la  corne  en  avant, 
comme  une  brave  chevre  de  M.  Seguin  qu'elle  dtait .  .  .  Non 
pas  qu'elle  eut  I'espoir  de  tuer  le  loup, — les  chevres  ne  tuent 
pas  le  loup, — mais  seulement  pour  voir  si  elle  pourrait  teniriB 
aussi  longtemps  que  la  Renaude .  .  . 

Alors  le  monstre  s'avan9a,  et  les  petites  cornes  entr^rent  en 
danse. 

Ah !  la  brave  chevrette,  comme  elle  y  allait  de  bon  coeur  1 
Plus  de  dix  fois,  je  ne  mens  pas,  elle  iorqa.  le  loup  k  reculerM 
pour  reprendre  haleine.  Pendant  ces  troves  d'une  minute,  la 
gourmande  cueillait  en  hate  encore  un  brin  de  sa  ch^re  herbe; 
puis  elle  retournait  au  combat,  la  bouche  pleine.  .  .  Cela 
dura  toute  la  nuit.  De  temps  en  temps  la  chevre  de  M. 
Seguin  regardait  les  ^toiles  danser  dans  le  ciel  clair,  et  elle  se  26 
disait : 

"  Oh  !  pourvu  que  je  tienne  jusqu'i  I'aube .  .  .  *' 

L'une   apres  Tautre,    les   ^toiles   s'^teignirent.     Blanquette 
redoubla  de  coups  de  cornes,   le  loup  de  coups  de  dents .  . . 
Une  lueur  p^le  parut  dans  I'horizon ...      Le  chant  d'un  coq  80 
enrou^  monta  d'une  m^tairie. 

"Enfin!"  dit  la  pauvre  bete,  qui  n'attendait  plus  que  le  jour 
pour  mourir ;  et  elle  s'allongea  par  terre  dans  sa  belle  fourrure 
blanche  toute  tach^e  de  sang .  .  . 

Alors  le  loup  se  jeta  sur  la  petite  chfevre  et  la  mangea.  85 


416  FRENCH  READER. 

8.  LA  PATTE  DE  DINDON. 

Legotjve  (b.  1807). 

Ce  matin,  k  propos  d'un  plaisir  manque,  je  dis  en  riant  h 
mon  fils : 

"  Je  vois  que  tu  as  besoin  que  je  te  fasse  une  petite  le9on. 

— Eh  1  sur  quoi,  pere  1 
6      — Sur  une  disposition  que  tu  tiens  de  moi,  li^las  1   et  dont 
je  voudrais  bien  te  gu^rir. 

— Quelle  est-ellel 

— Le  recit  d'une  petite  aventure  de  ma  vie  d'^colier  te 
Tapprendra. 
10  J'avais  dix  ans ;  j'dtais  au  college ;  je  rapportais  chaque 
lundi,  de  chez  mes  parents,  la  grosse  somme  de  quinze  sous, 
destin^e  a  payer  mes  dejeuners  du  matin,  car  le  college  ne 
nous  fournissait  pour  ce  repas  qu'un  morceau  de  pain  tout  sec. 

Un  lundi,  en  rentrant,  je  trouve  un  de  nos  camarades  (je 
15  me  rappelle  encore  son  nom,  il  se  nommait  Couture)  arm^ 
d'une  superbe  patte  de  dindon.  Je  dis  patte  et  non  cuisse, 
car  Tobjet  tout  entier  se  composait  de  ce  que,  dans  mon  ignor- 
ance, j'appellerai  un  tibia^  et  de  la  patte  avec  ses  quatre 
doigts,  le  tout  recouvert  de  cette  peau  noire,  luisante  et 
20  rugueuse  qui  fait  que  le  dindon  a  I'air  de  marcher  sur  des 
brodequins  de  chagrin. 

Des  que  mon  camarade  m'aper9ut :  "  Yiens  voir !  "  me  dit-il, 
"  viens  voir  !  " 

J'accours ;   il   serrait  le  haut  de  la  patte  dans   ses  deux 

26  mains,  et,  sur  un  mouvement  de  sa  main  droite,  les  quatre 

doigts  s'ouvraient  et  se  refermaient  comme  les  doigts  d'une 

main  humaine.     Je  restai  stupefait  et  emerveill^.     Comment 

cette  patte  morte  pouvait-elle  remuer?     Comment  pouvait-il 

la  faire  agir  ?     Un  garQon  de  dix-huit  ans  qui  va  au  spectacle 

30  et  qui  suit  le  d^veloppement  du  drame  le  plus  merveilleux, 

n'a  pas  les  yeux  plus  ^carquilles,  les  regards  plus  ardents,  la 

tete  plus  fixement  penchde  en  avant  que  moi,  en  face  de  cette 

patte  de  dindon.     Chaque  fois  que  ces  quatre  doigts  s'ouvraient 

et  se  refermaient,  il  me  passait  devant  les  yeux  comme  un 

85  ^blouissement.     Je  croyais  assister  a  un  prodige. 

Lorsque  mon  camarade,  qui  ^tait  plus  kge  et  plus  raalin  que 
moi,  vit  mon  enthousiasme  arriv^  a  son  paroxysme,  il  remit  sa 


FRENCH  READER.  417 

merveille  dans  sa  poche  et  s'^loigna.  Je  m'en  allai  de  mon 
c6t^,  mais  reveur  et  voyant  toujours  cette  patte  flotter  devant 
mes  yeux  comme  une  vision .  .  . 

— Si  je  Tavais,  me  disais-je,  j'apprendrais  bien  vite  le  inoyen 
de  la  faire  agir.     Couture  n'est  pas  sorcier.     Et  alors,  comme  6 
je  m'amuserais ! 

Je  n'y  tins  plus,  je  courus  k  mon  camarade.  . . 

— Donne-moi  ta  patte!  . .  .lui  dis-je  avec  un  irresistible 
accent  de  supplication.     Je  t'en  prie  ! .  . . 

— Ma  patte  ! .  .  .  Te  donner  ma  patte  ! .  . .  veux-tu  t'en  aller !  lo 

Son  refus  irrita  encore  mon  desir. 

— Tu  ne  veux  pas  me  la  donner  ? . . . 

-Non! 

— Eh  bien  ! .  .  .  vends-la  moi. 

— Te  la  vendre  ?  combien  ?  16 

Je  me  mis  k  compter,  dans  le  fond  de  ma  poche,  I'argent  de 
ma  semaine .  .  . 

— Je  t'en  donne  cinq  sous. 

— Cinq  sous,  une  patte  comme  celle-1^ ! . .  .  Est-ce  que  tu  te 
moques  de  moi  1  20 

Et  prenant  le  pr^cieux  objet,  il  recommen9a  devant  moi  cet 
eblouissant  jeu  d'eventail,  et  chaque  fois  ma  passion  grandissait 
d'un  degr^. 

— Eh  bien,  je  t'en  offre  dix  sous. 

— Dix   sous ! .  .  .  dix   sous  ! .  .  .  reprit-il   avec   mdpris.      Mais  26 
regarde  done .  .  . 

Et  les  quatre  doigts  s'ouvraient  et  se  refermaient  toujours  ! 

— Mais  enfin,  lui  dis-je  en  tremblant,  combien  done  en 
veux-tu  1 

— Quarante  sous  ou  rien.  80 

— Quarante  sous !  m'^criai-je,  quarante  sous  1  prfes  de  trois 
somaines  de  dejeuners  !     Par  exemple  ! 

— Soit !  k  ton  aise  ! 

La  patte  disparut  dans  sa  poche,  et  il  s'^loigna.  Je  courue 
de  nouveau  apr^s  lui.  sa 

— Quinze  sous ! 

— Quarante. 

— Vingt  sous ! 

— Quarante. 

— Vingt-cinq  sous  I  *> 

—Quarante. 

27 


418  FRENCH  READER. 

Oh !  ce  Couture !  comme  il  aura  fait  son  chemin  dans  le 

monde !  comme  il  connaissait  d^j^  le  coeur  humain  !     Chaque 

fois  que  ce  terrible    mot    quarante    touchait  mon  oreille,  11 

emportait   un   peu    de   raa    resistance.     Au    bout    de    deux 

6  minutes,  je  ne  me  connaissais  plus ! 

— Eh  bien  done,  quarante  ! .  . .  m'ecriai-je.     Donne-la-moi ! 

— Donne-moi  d'abord  Fargent,  reprit-il. 

Je  lui  mis  dans  la  main  les  quinze  sous  de  ma  semaine,  et 
il  me  fit  ^crire  un  billet  de  vingt-cinq  sous  pour  le  surplus . . . 
10  Oh  !  le  sc^lerat !  il  dtait  d^ja  homme  d'affaires  a  treize  ans ! . . . 
Puis,  tirant  enfin  le  cher  objet  de  sa  poche : 

— Tiens,  me  dit-il,  la  voila  ! .  . . 

Je  me  prdcipitai  sur  elle.     Au  bout  de  quelques  secondes, 
ainsi  que  je  I'avais  prdvu,  je  connaissais  le  secret  et  je  tirais  le 
16  tendon  qui  servait    de   cordon   de   sonnette,    aussi  bien  que 
Couture. 

Pendant  deux  minutes  cela  m'amusa  follement ;  apr^s  deux 
minutes,  cela  m'amusa  moins ;  apres  trois,  cela  ne  m'amusa 
presque  plus ;  apres  quatre,  cela  ne  m'amusa  plus  du  tout.  Je 
20  tirais  toujours,  parce  que  je  voulais  avoir  les  int^r^ts  de  mon 
argent ; .  .  .  mais  le  desenchantement  me  gagnait ; .  .  .  puis  vint 
la  tristesse,  puis  le  regret,  puis  la  perspective  de  trois  semaines 
de  pain  sec,  puis  le  sentiment  de  ma  betise  ! .  . .  Et  tout  cela  se 
changeant  peu  k  peu  en  amertume,  la  colere  s'en  mela ;  et  au 
26  bout  de  dix  minutes,  saisissant  avec  une  veritable  haine  I'objet 
de  mon  amour,  je  le  lan9ai  par-dessus  la  muraille,  afin  d'etre 
bien  sur  de  ne  plus  le  revoir. 

Ce  souvenir  m'est  revenu  bien  souvent,  depuis  que  je  n'ai 
plus  dix  ans,  et  bien  souvent  aussi  j'ai  retrouv^  en  moi  I'enfant 
Boi,  la  patte  de  dindon.      Cette  imp^tuosite  de  d^sir,  cette  im- 
patience de  tous  les  obstacles  qui  me  s^paraient  de  la  posses- 
sion desir^e,  cette  f  olle  impr^voyance,  cette  puissance  d'illusion, 
^gale  seulement  h^las  !  h.  ma  puissance  de  disillusion,  tous  ces 
traits  de  caractere  se  sont  mille  fois  reveilles.  .  .que  dis-je?  se 
86  r^veillent  encore  en  moi,  des  qu'une  passion  m'envahit.     Oh ! 
on  n'^tudie  pas  assez  les  enfants  !     On  traite  leurs  sentiments 
de  pudrilit^s  !    Rien  n'est  pu^ril  dans  I'ame  humaine.    L'enfant 
ne  meurt  jamais  tout  en  tier  dans  I'homme,  et  ce  qui  est  pu^ril 
aujourd'hui  peut  ^tre  terrible  ou  coupable  demain.     Les  pas- 
40  sions  sont  differentes,  mais  le  coeur  ou  elles  poussent  est  le  meme, 
et  le  meilleur  moyen  de  biendiriger  un  jeune  homme  est  d'avoir 


FRENCH  READER.  419 

bien  observ^  le  gar9on  de  dix  ans.  Ainsi  cette  patte  de 
dindon  m'a  fort  servi.  Vingt  fois  dans  ma  vie,  au  beau  milieu 
d'une  sottise,  ce  souvenir  m'est  revenu ..."  Tu  seras  done 
toujours  le  meme  ? "  me  disais-je,  et  je  me  mettais  k  rire,  ce 
qui  m'arretait  court.  II  n'y  a  rien  de  plus  utile  que  de  se  rire  6 
au  nez  de  temps  en  temps. 

Je  me  retournai  alors  vers  mon  fils,  et  je  lui  dis :  "  Cette 
fable  montre. .  .que  les  fils  ressemblent  quelquefois  h,  leurs 
p^res." 


9.  HORTIBUS. 
POUVILLON  (b.  1840). 


Le  petit  college  est  en  fete.  Portes  ouvertes,  volets  bat- 10 
tants,  des  drapeaux  aux  fenetres,  du  monde  partout,  des 
bousculades  dans  les  escaliers,  des  galopades  dans  les  corridors, 
et,  dominant  le  tapage,  les  coups  de  marteau  du  tapissier  en 
train  de  clouer  les  tentures  sur  I'estrade  dress^e  dans  la  cour 
pour  la  distribution  des  prix.  16 

Les  prix !  les  vacances !  des  mots  qui  rient,  des  mots  qui 
chantent,  des  mots  qui  ^clatent  comme  des  soleils  et  qui 
embaument  comme  un  bouquet  de  fleurs  des.  champs ! 

Trfes  triste,  la-haut,  dans  I'infirmerie  toute  blanche,  le  petit 
malade  se  soulfeve  pour  ^couter.  Des  pas  montent,  se  hatent,  20 
passent  devant  la  porte ;  aucun  ne  s'arr^te.  Personne.  Le 
docteur — hem!  hem! — est  venu  tout  k  I'heure,  trfes  press6 
k  cause  de  la  fete;  bonjour,  bonsoir,  adieu  mon  m^decin. 
L'infirmi^re,  qui  aide  k  faire  les  malles  a  la  lingerie,  parait 
une  fois  tous  les  quarts  d'heure,  fait  voir  le  bout  du  nez,  26' 
referme  la  porte  et  s'en  va. 

Qu'elle  s'en  aille ! 

Ce  n'est  pas  elle  qu'attend  le  petit  malade,  le  docteur  pas 
da  vantage.     Ceux  qu'il  attend,  tenez,  les  voil^  qui  arrivent. 
Trois  campagnards :  un  homme   en   veste   ronde,  une  petite  80 
femme  courte  en  bonnet  blanc,  une  fillette  en  robe  longue, 


420  FRENCH  READER. 

trop  longue,  les  manches  jusqu'au  bout  des  doigts ;  le  pfere,  la 
mere,  la  petite  soeur. 

lis  entrent :  rhomme,  discretement,  tres  circonspect,  un  peu 
timide ;  la  mere,  tout  de  go,  les  bras  tendus  en  avant  jusqu'k 
6ce  qu'elle  tienne  embrass^e,  dtouff^e  sur  sa  poitrine,  la  chere 
petite  tete  de  I'enfant.  Le  pere  serre  la  main  du  malade,  la 
fillette  se  hausse  sur  la  pointe  des  pieds  jusqu'aux  joues 
pench^es  vers  ses  levres. 

Et  les  questions  pleuvent. 
10     — Qu'as-tu,  Tiennet] 

— Qu'est-ce  qui  te  fait  mal,  pitchou  ? 

— Rien,  presque  rien.  La,  au  front,  quelque  chose  qui  me 
p6se. 

— Depuis  quand  ? 
15      — Depuis   la   composition   en   thfeme   latin.      Oh  !  ce   sera 
bient6t  passe. 

— Bientdt  1  Non  ;  tout  de  suite,  reprend  la  mere.  Demain, 
jour  de  lessive,  je  fais  des  fouaces.  C'est  bon,  les  fouaces,  eh  ] 
Tiennet  1 
20  lis  bavardent,  et  d'en  bas,  de  I'estrade  dressde  en  plain  air, 
una  rumeur  monte;  des  pas  se  precipitent;  des  crosses  de 
fusil  sonnent  sur  le  pave  de  la  cour. 

Les  pompiers  sont  arrives. 

— Pere,    allons-y,    sollicite   la   petite    soeur.     Tantdt,   nous 
25  n'aurons  plus  de  place. 

Et,  caline,  elle  tire  I'homme  vers  la  porte. 

— Tu  peux  bien,  dit  la  mere.  A  trois,  que  ferions-nous  de 
plus  1  Descendez ;  moi,  je  reste,  s'il  me  veut,  lui,  ajoute-t-elle 
en  couvant  de  I'oeil  son  Tiennet. 

IL 

30      La  petite  soeur,  le  p^re,  sont  partis.     La  mhre  a  fermd  les 
volets,  k  cause  du  grand  jour,  et,  dans  la  demi-obscurit^  de 
I'infirmerie  close,  ils  demeurent  tous  les  deux  sommeillant. 
— Dors  un  peu,  mien,  9a  te  guerira. 
— Oui,  mere. 
S5      Et  Tiennet  ferme  les  yeux. 

Mais  le  moyen  de  s'endormir,  avec  le  remue-m^nage  de  la 
distribution  des  prix  sous  la  fen^tre  ? 

— ^M^re,  va  voir,  s'il  te  plait.     Que  f ait-on  1 


FRENCH  READER.  421 

— Rien  encore.  Les  messieurs  sont  arrives ;  une  pleine 
estrade.  Oh !  je  vois  au  milieu  un  ojBicier  avec  un  chapeau 
garni  d'un  enorme  plumet ! 

— Le  colonel ! 

— Et  un  autre  au  premier  rang,  en  face,  tout  brod^  d'argent.  6 

— Le  sous-prefet.     Bon ;  que  vois-tu  encore  1 

— J^sus  !  tant  de  prix !  lis  en  ont  fait  trois  piles  au  bord 
de  I'estrade ;  et  des  couronnes  !  une  montagne ! 

Brusquement,  une  fanfare  delate  a  pleins  cuivres,  k  pleins 
poumons.     C'est  beau,  la  musique  !     El^ves,  parents,  jusqu'au  10 
petit  malade,  tout  le  monde  applaudit. 

Attention,  maintenant ! 

Le  frac  brodd  d'argent  se  l^ve,  un  chiffon  de  papier  rould 
sur  le  doigt.  .  .le  discours.  On  n'entend  pas  un  mot,  rien 
qu'un  chantonnement  aigu,  ber^ant,  monotone.  16 

C'est  curieux  comme,  k  distance,  un  sous-prdfet  qui  parle 
pent  faire  I'effet  d'un  moucheron  qui  siffle. 

Le  frac  brodd  d'argent  s'assied ;  une  robe  noire  se  l^ve  :  un 
long,  chauve,  avec  un  fort  cahier  k  la  main.     II  ne  siffle  pas, 
celui-ci,  il  bourdonne.     Telle  une  grosse  mouche.    Des  phrases  20 
d'une  lieue,  des  pdriodes  d'une  heure ;  un  sermon. 

Du  coup,  la  mere  s'est  endormie. 

Tiennet,  lui,  s'impatiente. 

Aura-t-il,  n'aura-t-il  pas  le  prix  de  thfeme  latin  1     Le  prix, 
il  est  1^,  dans  la  pile,  un  beau  livre  dord  sur  tranche,  I'attesta-  26 
tion  collde  en  dedans  avec  les  palmes  acaddmiques  en  vignette 
et  le  parafe  du  principal. 

S'il  pouvait  lire  le  nom  du  vainqueur  ! 

Et  pendant  qu'il  calcule  ses  chances,  le  sommeil  le  prend  k 
son  tour.  80 

IIL 

n  r§ve. 

Quel  cauchemar!  L'attestation  est  dans  ses  mains,  sous 
Bes  yeux.  Hdlas !  un  autre  a  vaincu ;  Luc  Onzies  a  obtenu 
le  premier  prix. 

— Erreur !  injustice  I  objecte  Tiennet,   ma  copie  dtait  sans  36 
faute. 

— Sans  faute,  ricane  le  professeur,  sans  faute  I  Et  ceci, 
petit  malheureux,  qu'en  f aite^-vous  ] 


422  FRENCH  READER. 

Suivant  alors  le  doigt  accusateur  de  M.  Kdgulus  Bee  sur  la 
copie  cribl^e  d'annotations,  Tiennet  d^couvre,  soulignd  trois 
fois  k  I'encre  rouge,  cet  affreux  barbarisme : 

HORTIBUS. 

Hortibus  !     Adieu  le  prix,  adieu  la  gloire ! 

5  Hortibus  !  Le  mot  fatal  Tobsede ;  il  danse  multipli^  devant 
lui,  ^crit  en  ronde,  en  coulee,  en  anglaise,  imprim^  en  lettrea 
rouges,  en  lettres  bleues,  affich^  sur  le  mur  en  capitales,  char- 
bonn^  en  lettres  comiques  qui  s'animent,  tirant  la  langue, 
envoyant  des  pieds  de  nez  au  vaincu. 

10     Hortibus  I 

rv. 

Le  malade  s'agite,  ses  Ifevres  remuent. 
— II  appelle  quelqu'un,  dit  la  mfere.     Tiennet,  Tiennet ! 
Embrasse,  second  de  caresses,  Tiennet  ouvre  les  yeux. 
Plus  de  hortibus  !     Evanoui  dans  le  pays  des  songes  avec  la 
16  figure  irritee  du  professeur  R^gulus  Bee. 
Bon  voyage  k  tous  deux ! 
Mais  le  prix  ?  la  couronne  1 

Le  prix,  la  couronne?     lis  viennent,  lis  montent,  pieuse- 
ment,  religieusement  apport^s  par  le  pfere  et  la  petite  soeur. 
20  Une  marche  triomphale  ! 

lis  entrent,  et  voila  le  volume  ^tal^  sur  le  lit  du  petit 
malade,  la  couronne  pos^e  sur  son  front. 

Le  pere  rit,  la   m^re  pleure ;  tous   s'embrassent.     Oh !  le 
bonheur  des  braves  gens,  le  vrai  bonheur  ! 
26      Et  tandis  qu'on  fait  fete  au  vainqueur,  hem !  hem !  quel- 
qu'un se  pr^sente,  Invite  noire,  figure  rose :  le  docteur. 

— Hem  !  hem  ! .  . .  I'enfant  va  mieux ;  ee  laurier  sur  le  front 
a  fait  des  miracles.    Allons,  le  grand  air  ach^vera  de  le  gu^rir. 
Des  marches  k  pied,  de  I'exerciee,  et  surtout  pas  de  th^me 
80  latin  !     Hem  !  hem  ! 

Le  docteur  fait  deux  pas  vers  la  porte,  et,  saluant  la  famille, 
le  doigt  levd  dans  un  geste  de  menace  amieale : 
— Pas  de  th^me  latin,  entendez-vous ! 


FRENCH  READER.  423 

la  CHAGRIN  D'UN  VIEUX  FOR9AT. 

Pierre  Loti  (b.  1850). 

C*est  une  bien  petite  histoire,  qui  m'a  ^t^  cont^e  par  Yves, 
—Tin  soir  ou  il  ^tait  all^  en  rade  conduire,  avec  sa  canonni^re, 
une  cargaison  de  condamnes  au  grand  transport  en  partance 
pour  la  Nouvelle-Cal^donie. 

Dans  le  nombre  se  trouvait  un  for9at  tr^s  kg6  (soixante-dix  5 
ans  pour  le  moins),  qui  emmenait  avec  lui,  tendrement,  un 
pauvre  moineau  dans  une  petite  cage. 

Yves,  pour  passer  le  temps,  4tait  entr4  en  conversation  avec 
•ce  vieux,  qui  n'avait  pas  mauvaise  figure,  parait-il, — mais  qui 
^tait  accoupl^  par  une  chaine  k  un  jeune  monsieur  ignoble,  10 
gouailleur,  portant  lunettes  de  myope  sur  un  mince  nez  bldme. 

Vieux  coureur  de  grands  chemins,  arrets,  en  cinquifeme  ou 
sixi^me  r^cidive,  pour  vagabondage  et  vol,  il  disait :  "  Com- 
ment faire  pour  ne  pas  voler,  quand  on  a  commence  une  fois, 
— et  qu'on  n'a  pas  de  metier,  rien, — et  que  les  gens  ne  veuknt  15 
plus  de  vous  nulle  part  ?  II  faut  bien  manger,  n'est-ce  pas  ] — 
Pour  ma  derni^re  condamnation,  c'^tait  un  sac  de  pommes  de 
terre  que  j'avais  pris  dans  un  champ,  avec  un  fouet  de  roulier 
et  un  giraumont.  Est-ce  qu'on  n'aurait  pas  pu  me  laisser 
mourir  en  France,  je  vous  demande,  au  lieu  de  m'envoyer  \k-  so 
bas,  si  vieux  comme  je  suis  1 .  .  ." 

Et,  tout  heureux  de  voir  que  quelqu'un  consentait  k  I'^cou- 
ter  avec  compassion,  il  avait  ensuite  montr^  k  Yves  ce  qu'il 
poss^dait  de  prdcieux  au  monde  :    la  petite  cage  et  le  moineau. 

Le  moineau  apprivois^,  connaissant  sa  voix,  et  qui  pendant  2S 
prfes  d'une  annde,  en  prison,  avait  v^cu  perch^  sur  son  ^paule. . . 
— Ah  !  ce  n'est  pas  sans  peine  qu'il  avait  obtenu  la  permission 
de  I'emmener  avec  lui  en  Cal^donie ! — Et  puis  aprSs,  il  avait 
fallu  lui  faire  une  cage  convenable  pour  le  voyage ;  se  procurer 
du  bois,  un  peu  de  vieux  fil  de  fer,  et  un  peu  de  peinture  verte  30 
pour  peindre  le  tout  et  que  ce  fut  joli. 

Ici,  'je  me  rappelle  textuellement  ces  mots  d'Yves  :  '*  Pauvre 
moineau !  II  avait  pour  manger  dans  sa  cage  un  morceau  de  ce 
pain  gris  qu'on  donne  dans  les  prisons.      Et  il  avait  I'air  de  se 
trouver  content  tout  de  mdme ;  il  sautillait  comme  n'importe  35 
quel  autre  oiseau." 


424)  *   FRENCH  READER. 

Quelques  heures  apr^s,  comme  on  accostait  le  transport  et 

que  les  forgats  allaient  s'y  embarquer  pour  le  grand  voyage, 

Yves,  qui  avait  oublie  ce  vieux,  repassa  par  hasard  pres  de  lui. 

— Tenez,  prenez-la,  vous,  lui  dit-il  d'une  voix  toute  chang^e, 

5  en  lui  tendant  sa  petite  cage.     Je  vous  la  donne ;  9a  pourra 

peut-etre  vous  servir  a  quel  que  chose,  vous  faire  plaisir.  .  . 

— Non,  certes !  remercia  Yves.     II  faut  I'emporter  au  con- 
traire,  vous  savez  bien.     Ce  sera  votre  petit  compagnon  la-bas. . . 
— Oh!    reprit  le  vieux,  il  n'est  plus  dedans...      Vous  ne 
losaviez  done  pas  1  il  n'y  est  plus. . . 

Et  deux  larmes  d'indicible  misere  lui  coulaient  sur  les  joues. 

Pendant  une   bousculade   de   la  travers^e,  la  porte  s'^tait 

ouverte,  le  moineau  avait  eu  peur,  s'etait  en  vole, — et  tout  de, 

suite  etait  tomb^  a  la  mer  a  cause  de  son  aile  coupee.     Oh  I  le 

16  moment  d'horrible  douleur !     Le  voir  se  debattre  et  mourir, 

entraine  dans  le  sillage  rapide,  et  ne  pouvoir  rien  pour  lui  I 

D'abord,  dans  un  premier  mouvement  bien  naturel,  il  avait 

voulu  crier,  demander  du  secours,  s'adresser  k  Yves  lui-meme, 

le  supplier. . .     Elan  arrets  aussitdt  par  la  reflexion,  par  la 

20  conscience  immediate  de  sa  degradation  personnelle :  un  vieux 

miserable  comme  lui,  qui  est-ce  qui  aurait  piti^  de  son  moineau, 

qui  est-ce  qui  voudrait  seulement  ^couter  sa  priere?     Est-ce 

qu'il  pouvait  lui  venir  k  I'esprit  qu'on  retarderait  le  navire 

pour  repecher  un  moineau  qui  se  noie — et  un  pauvre  oiseau 

26  de  forgat,  quel  r^ve  absurde ! . . .     Alors  il  s'etait  tenu  silen- 

cieux  k  sa  place,  regardant  s'^loigner  sur  I'ecume  de  la  mer  le 

petit  corps  gris  qui  se  d^battait  toujours  ;  il  s'etait  senti  effroy- 

ablement  seul  maintenant,  pour  jamais,  et  de  grosses  larmes, 

des  larmes  de  d^sesp^rance  solitaire  et  supreme  lui  brouillaient 

so  la  vue, — tandis  que  le  jeune  monsieur  k  lunettes,  son  collogue 

de  chaine,  riait  de  voir  un  vieux  pleurer. 

Maintenant  que  I'oiseau  n'y  itait  plus,  il  ne  voulait   pas 

garder  cette  cage,  construite  avec  tant  de  sollicitude  pour  le 

petit  mort ;  il  la  tendait  toujours  a  ce  brave  marin  qui  avait 

86consenti  k  ecouter  son  histoire,   d<5sirant  lui  laisser  ce  legs 

avant  de  partir  pour  son  long  et  dernier  voyage 

Et  Yves,  tristement,  avait  accepts  le  cadeau,  la  maisonnette 
vide, — pour  ne  pas  faire  plus  de  peine  a  ce  vieil  abandonnd  en 
ayant  Fair  de  d^daigner  cette  chose  qui  lui  avait  cout^  tant  de 
40  travail. 


FRENCH  READER.  426 

II.  L'AVARE,  Acte  III,  Sc.  V. 

MoLiEKE  (1622-1673). 

Harpagon — Yal^re,  aide-moi  a  ceci.  Or  q^,  maitre  Jacques, 
approchez-vous ;  je  vous  ai  garde  pour  le  dernier. 

Maitre  Jacques — Est-ce  a  votre  cocher,  monsieur,  ou  bien 
k  votre  cuisinier,  que  vous  voulez  parler  ?  car  je  suis  Tun  et 
I'autre.  5 

Harpagon — C'est  a  tous  les  deux, 

Maitre  Jacques — Mais  a  qui  des  deux  le  premier  1 

Harpagon — Au  cuisinier. 

Maitre  Jacques — Attendez  done,  s'il  vous  plait.  [II  6te  sa 
easaque  de  cocher,  et  parait  vetu  en  cuisinier.]  10 

Harpagon — Quelle  diantre  de  cer^monie  est-ce  la  ? 

Maitre  Jacques — Vous  n'avez  qu'a  parler. 

Harpagon — Je  me  suis  engagd,  maitre  Jacques,  h,  donner 
oe  soir  k  souper. 

Maitre  Jacques — Grande  merveille  !  15 

Harpagon — Dis-moi  un  peu,  nous  feras-tu  bonne  chfere  ? 

Maitre  Jacques — Oui,  si  vous  me  donnez  bien  de  1 'argent. 

Harpagon — Que  diable  !  toujours  de  I'argent !     II  semble 
qu'ils  n'aient  autre  chose  k  dire,  de  I'argent,  de  I'argent,  de 
I'argent !     Ah !  ils  n'ont  que  ce  mot  a  la  bouche,  de  I'argent !  20 
Toujours   parler   d'argent !     Voila    leur   ^p^e   de   chevet,   de 
I'argent ! 

Val^ire — Je  n'ai  jamais  vu  de  r^ponse  plus  impertinente 
que  celle-la.  Voila  une  belle  merveille  que  de  faire  bonne 
chere  avec  bien  de  I'argent !  C'est  une  chose  la  plus  aisde  du  25 
monde,  et  il  n'y  a  si  pauvre  esprit  qui  n'en  fit  bien  autant  j 
mais,  pour  agir  en  habile  homme,  il  faut  parler  de  faire  bonne 
chere  avec  peu  d'argent. 

Maitre  Jacques — Bonne  chfere  avec  peu  d'argent? 

VALfcRE— Oui.  80 

Maitre  Jacques — Par  ma  foi,  monsieur  Tintendant,  vous 
nous  obligerez  de  nous  faire  voir  ce  secret,  et  de  prendre  mon 
office  de  cuisinier ;  aussi  bien  vous  melez-vous  c^ans  d'etre  le 
factoton. 

Harpagon — Taisez-vous.     Qu'est-ce  qu'il  nous  faudra  ?  ss 

Maitre  Jacques — Voila  monsieur  votre  intendant,  qui  vous 
fera  bonne  chfere  pour  peu  d'argent. 


426  FRENCH  READER. 

Harpagon — Haye  !  je  veux  que  tu  me  r^pondes. 

Maitre  Jacques — Combien  serez-vous  de  gens  k  table? 

Harpagon — Nous  serons  huit  ou  dix ;  mais  il  ne  faut  pren- 
dre que  huit.     Quand  il  y  a  a  manger  pour  huit,  il  y  en  a 
sbien  pour  dix. 

Yal^jre — Cela  s'entend. 

MaItre  Jacques— He  bien,  il  faudra  quatre  grands  potages 
et  cinq  assiettes  d'entr^es. 

Harpagon — Que  diable !     Voila  pour  traiter  toute  une  villa 
10  entiere ! 

Maitre  Jacques — R6t . . . 

Harpagon — [Lui  mettant  la  main  sur  la  bouche.^     Ah, 
traitre,  tu  manges  tout  mon  bien. 

Maitre  Jacques — Entremets . . 
16     Harpagon — Encore?     [Lui  mettant  encore  la  main  sur  la 
bouche.'\ 

Val^re — Est-ce  que  vous  avez  envie  de  faire  crever  tout  le 

monde  1  et  monsieur  a-t-il  invito  des  gens  pour  les  assassiner  h 

force  de  mangeaille  ?     Allez-vous-en  lire  un  peu  les  pr^ceptes 

20  de  la  sante,  et  demander  aux  m^decins  s'il  y  a  rien  de  plus 

pr^judiciable  a  I'homme  que  de  manger  avec  exc^s. 

Harpagon — II  a  raison. 

Val^jre — Apprenez,  maitre  Jacques,  vous  et  vos  pareils, 
que  c'est  un  coupe-gorge  qu'une  table  remplie  de  trop  de 
26  viandes ;  que  pour  se  bien  montrer  ami  de  ceux  que  Ton 
invite,  il  faut  que  la  frugality  regne  dans  les  repas  qu'on 
donne  et  que,  suivant  le  dire  d'un  ancien,  il  faut  manger  pour 
vivre^  et  non  pas  vivre  pour  manger. 

Harpagon — Ah,  que  cela  est  bien  dit!   approche,  que  je 

so  t'embrasse  pour  ce  mot.     Voila  la  plus  belle  sentence  que  j'aie 

entendue  de  ma  vie  :  il  faut  vivre  pour  manger,  et  non  pas 

manger  pour  viv . . .     Non,  ce  n'est  pas  cela.     Comment  est-ce 

que  tu  dis? 

Val^ire — QuHl  faut  monger  pour  vivre j  et  non  pas  vivre 
Sdpour  manger. 

Harpagon — [ob  Maitre  Jacques.]    Oui.    Entends-tu?    [A  Va- 
Ihre.]     Qui  est  le  grand  homme  qui  a  dit  cela  ? 

VALiiRE — Je  ne  me  souviens  pas  maintenant  de  son  nom. 

Harpagon — Souviens-toi  de  m'ecrire  ces  mots.     Je  les  veux 
40  faire  graver  en  lettres  d'or  sur  la  chemin^e  de  ma  salle. 


FRENCH  READER.  427 

YALiRE — Je  n'y  manquerai  pas.  Et  pour  votre  souper,  vous 
n'avez  qu'a  me  laisser  faire.     Je  r^glerai  tout  cela  comme  il  faut. 

Harpagon — Fais  done. 

Maitre  Jacques — Tant  mieux,  j'en  aurai  moins  de  peine. 

Harpagon — II  faudra  de  ces  choses  dont  on  ne  mange  gu^re,  6 
et  qui  rassasient  d'abord ;  quelque  bon  haricot  bien  gras,  avec 
quelque  pate  en  pot  bien  garni  de  marrons. 

VALijRE— Reposez-vous  sur  moi. 

Harpagon — Maintenant,  maitre  Jacques,  il  faut  nettoyer 
mon  carrosse.  lo 

Maitre  Jacques — Attendez.  Ceci  s'adresse  au  cocher. 
[II  remet  sa  cosaque.^     Vous  dites  .  . . 

Harpagon — Qu'il  faut  nettoyer  mon  carrosse,  et  tenir  mes 
chevaux  tout  prets  pour  conduire  h,  la  foire . . . 

Maitre  Jacques — Vos  chevaux,  monsieur  ?  Ma  f oi,  ils  ne  15 
Bont  point  du  tout  en  ^tat  de  marcher.  Je  ne  vous  dirai  point 
qu'ils  sont  sur  la  litiere,  les  pauvres  b^tes  n'en  ont  point,  et  ce 
serait  mal  parler ;  mais  vous  leur  faites  observer  des  jeunes 
si  aust^res,  que  ce  ne  sont  plus  rien  que  des  idees  ou  des 
fantdmes,  des  fa9ons  de  chevaux.  20 

Harpagon — Les  voila  bien  malades ;  ils  ne  font  rien. 

Maitre  Jacques — Et  pour  ne  rien  faire,  monsieur,  est-ce 
qu'il  ne  faut  rien  manger  ?  II  leur  vaudrait  bien  mieux,  les 
pauvres  animaux,  de  travailler  beaucoup,  et  de  manger*  de 
m§me.  Cela  me  fend  le  coeur  de  les  voir  ainsi  extenu^s ;  car,  26 
enfin,  j'ai  une  tendresse  pour  mes  chevaux,  qu'il  me  semble 
que  c'est  moi-mdme,  quand  je  les  vois  pS,tir  ;  je  m'6te  tous  les 
jours  pour  eux  les  choses  de  la  bouche;  et  c'est  etre,  mon- 
sieur, d'un  naturel  trop  dur,  que  de  n'avoir  nulle  piti^  de  son 
prochain.  80 

Harpagon — Le  travail  ne  sera  pas  grand,  d'aller  jusqu'i,  la 
foire. 

Maitre  Jacques — Non,  monsieur,  je  n'ai  pasle  courage  de  les 
mener;  et  je  ferais  conscience  de  leur  donner  des  coups  de  fouet, 
en  r^tat  ou  ils  sont.     Comment  voudriez-vous  qu'ils  trainassent  36 
un  carrosse  ?     Ils  ne  peuvent  pas  se  trainer  eux-m§mes. 

Val^rb — Monsieur,  j'obligerai  le  voisin  Picard  h  se  charger 
de  les  conduire:  aussi  bien  nous  fera-t-il  ici  besoin  pour 
appr^ter  le  souper. 

Maitre  Jacques — Soit.    J'aime  mieux  encore  qu'ils  meurent  40 
sous  la  main  d'un  autre  que  sous  la  mienne. 


428  FRENCH  READER. 

12.  WATERLOO,  CHAP.  IX. 
Victor  Hugo  (1802-1885). 

lis  ^taient  trois  mille  cinq  cents.  lis  faisaient  un  front  d'un 
quart  de  iieue.  C'etaient  des  hommes  geants  sur  des  chevaux 
colosses.  lis  etaient  vingt-six  escadrons ;  et  ils  avaient  derriere 
eux,  pour  les  appuyer,  la  division  de  Lefebvre-Desnouettes,  les 

6  cent  six  gendarmes  d'elite,  les  chasseurs  de  la  garde,  onze  cent 
quatre-vingt-dix-sept  hommes,  et  les  lanciers  de  la  garde,  huit 
cent  quatre-vingts  lances.  lis  portaient  le  casque  sans  crins 
et  la  cuirasse  de  fer  battu,  avec  les  pistolets  d'arQon  dans  les 
fontes  et  le  long  sabre-epee.     Le  matin  toute  I'armde  les  avait 

10  admires,  quand,  a  neuf  heures,  les  clairons  sonnant,  toutes  les 
musiques  chantant :  Veillons  au  salut  de  Vempire,  ils  Etaient 
venus,  colonne  epaisse,  une  de  leurs  batteries  a  leur  flanc,  I'autre 
k  leur  centre,  se  deployer  sur  deux  rangs  entre  la  chaussee  de 
Genappe  et  Frischemont,  et  prendre  leur  place  de  bataille  dans 

iscette  puissante  deuxieme  ligne,  si  savamment  composee  par 
Napoleon,  laquelle,  ayant  k  son  extr^mit^  de  gauche  les  cuiras- 
siers de  Kellermann  et  k  son  extremity  de  droite  les  cuirassiers 
de  Milhaud,  avait,  pour  ainsi  dire,  deux  ailes  de  fer. 

L'aide  de  camp  Bernard  leur  porta  I'ordre  de  I'empereur. 

aoNey  tira  son  ^p^e  et  prit  la  tete.  Les  escadrons  ^normes 
s'dbranlerent. 

Alors  on  vit  un  spectacle  formidable. 

Toute  cette  cavalerie,  sabres  lev^s,  dtendards  et  trompettes 
au  vent,  form^e  en  colonne  par  division,  descendit  d'un  merae 

25  mouvement  et  comme  un  seul  homme,  avec  la  precision  d'un 
b^lier  de  bronze  qui  ouvre  une  br^che,  la  colline  de  la  Belle- 
Alliance,  s'enfonga  dans  le  fond  redoutable  ou  tant  d'hommes 
d^ja  Etaient  tombes,  y  disparut  dans  la  fum^e,  puis,  sortant  de 
cette  ombre,  reparut  de  I'autre  c6t^  du  vallon,  toujours  com- 

80  pacte  et  serree,  montant  au  grand  trot,  k  travers  un  nuage  de 
mitraille  crevant  sur  elle,  I'epouvantable  pente  -de  boue  du 
plateau  de  Mont-Saint-Jean.  lis  montaient,  graves,  mena- 
9ants,  imperturbables  ;  dans  les  intervalles  de  la  mousqueterie 
et  de  I'artillerie,  on  entendait  ce  pidtinement  colossal.     Etant 

35  deux  divisions,  ils  dtaient  deux  colonnes ;  la  division  Wathier 
avait  la  droite,  la  division  Delord  avait  la  gauche.  On  croyait 
Yoir  de  loin  s'allonger  vers  la  crete  du  plateau  deux  immenses 


FRENCH  READER.  429 

couleuvres    d'acier,      Cela    traversa    la    bataille    comme   un 
prodige. 

Bien  de  semblable  ne  s'etait  vu  depuis  la  prise  de  la  grande 
redoute  de  la  Moskowa  par  la  grosse  cavalerie ;  Murat  y  man- 
quait,  mais  Ney  s'y  retrouvait.  II  semblait  que  cette  masse  6 
^tait  devenue  monstre  et  n'eut  qu'une  ame.  Chaque  escadron 
ondulait  et  se  gonflait  comme  un  anneau  du  polype.  On  les 
apercevait  k  travers  une  vaste  fum^e  dechiree  9a  et  1^.  Pele- 
mele  de  casques,  de  cris,  de  sabres,  bondissement  orageux  des 
croupes  des  chevaux  dans  le  canon  et  la  fanfare,  tumulte  disci- 10 
plin^  et  terrible ;  Ik-dessus  les  cuirasses,  comme  les  ecailles  sur 
I'hydre. 

Ces  r^cits  semblent  d'un  autre  kge.  Quelque  chose  de  pareil 
k  cette  vision  apparaissait  sans  doute  dans  les  vieilles  ^pop^es 
orphiques  racontant  les  hommes-chevaux,  les  antiques  hippan-16 
thropes,  ces  titans  k  face  humaine  et  k  poi trail  ^questre  dont 
le  galop  escaJada  I'Olympe,  horribles,  invuln^rables,  sublimes ; 
dieux  et  betes. 

Bizarre  coincidence  num^rique,  vingt-six  bataillons  allaient 
recevoir  ces  vingt-six  escadrons.     Derri^re  la  crete  du  plateau,  20 
k  I'ombre  de  la  batterie  masqu^e,  I'infanterie  anglaise,  form^e 
en  treize  carr^s,  deux  bataillons  par  carr^,  et  sur  deux  lignes, 
sept  sur  la  premiere,  six  sur  la  seconde,  la  crosse  k  I'^paule, 
couchant  en  joue  ce  qui  allait  venir,  calme,  muette,  immobile, 
attendait.     Elle  ne  voyait  pas  les  cuirassiers  et  les  cuirassiers  25 
ne  la  voyaient  pas.    Elle  ^coutait  monter  cette  mar^e  d'hom- 
mes.     Elle  entendait  le  grossissement  du  bruit  des  trois  mille 
chevaux,  le  frappement  alternatif  et  sym^trique  des  sabots  au 
grand  trot,  le  froissement  des  cuirasses,  le  cliquetis  des  sabres, 
et  une  sorte  de  grand  souffle  farouche.     II  y  eut  un  silence  80 
redoutable,  puis,   subitement,    une  longue   file   de  bras  lev^s 
brandissant  des  sabres  apparut  au-dessus  de  la  crete,  et  les 
casques,  et  les  trompettes,  et  les  ^tendards,  et  trois  mille  tetes 
k   moustaches    grises   criant :     vive    I'empereur !    Toute  cette 
cavalerie  d^boucha  sur  le  plateau,   et  ce  fut  comme  Tentrdess 
d'un  tremblement  de  terre. 

Tout  k  coup,  chose  tragique,  k  la  gauche  des  Anglais,  k  notre 
droite,  la  t^te  de  colonne  des  cuirassiers  se  cabra  avec  une  cla- 
meur  effroyable.     Parvenus  au  point  culminant  de  la  crete, 
efiFrdnds,  tout  k  leur  f urie  et  k  leur  course  d'extermination  sur  40 
lea  carr^s  et  les  canons,  les  cuirassiers  venaient  d'apercevoir 


430  FRENCH  READER. 

entre  eux  et  les  Anglais  un  foss^,  une  fosse.    C'^tait  le  chemin 
creux  d'Ohain. 

L'instant  fut  ^pouvantable.  Le  ravin  ^tait  la,  inattendu, 
beant,  a  pic  sous  les  pieds  des  chevaux,  profond  de  deux  toises 

6  entre  son  double  talus ;  le  second  rang  y  poussa  le  premier,  et 
le  troisi^me  y  poussa  le  second ;  les  chevaux  se  dressaient,  se 
rejetaient  en  arrifere,  tombaient  sur  la  croupe,  glissaient  les 
quatre  pieds  en  I'air,  pilant  et  bouleversant  les  cavaliers,  aucun 
moyen  de  reculer,  toute  la  colonne  n'etait  plus  qu'un  projectile, 

10  la  force  acquise  pour  ecraser  les  anglais  ^crasa  les  f ranqais,  le 
ravin  inexorable  ne  pouvait  se  rendre  que  comble ;  cavaliers  et 
chevaux  y  roulerent  pele-mele  se  broyant  les  uns  les  autres,  ne 
faisant  qu'une  chair  dans  ce  gouffre,  et  quand  cette  fosse  fut 
pleine  d'hommes  vivants,  on  marcha  dessus  et  le  reste  passa. 

15  Presque  un  tiers  de  la  brigade  Dubois  croula  dans  cet  abime. 
Ceci  commen9a  la  perte  de  la  bataille. 

Une  tradition  locale,  qui  exagere  ^videmment,  dit  que  deux 
mille  chevaux  et  quinze  cents  hommes  furent  ensevelis  dans 
le   chemin    creux    d'Ohain.      Ce    chifFre    vraisemblablement 

2ocomprend  tous  les  autres  cadavres  qu'on  jeta  dans  ce  ravin  le 
lendemain  du  combat. 

Napoleon,  avant  d'ordonner  cette  charge  des  cuirassiers  de 
Milhaud,  avait  scrut^  le  terrain,  mais  n'avait  pu  voir  ce  che- 
min creux  qui  ne  faisait  pas  meme  une  ride  k  la  surface  du 

25  plateau.  Averti  pourtant  et  mis  en  eveil  par  la  petite  chapelle 
blanche  qui  en  marque  Tangle  sur  la  chauss^e  de  Nivelles,  il 
avait  fait,  probablement  sur  I'eventualit^  d'un  obstacle,  une 
question  au  guide  Lacoste.  Le  guide  avait  r^pondu  non.  On 
pourrait  presque  dire  que  de  ce  signe  de  tete  d'un  paysan  est 

80  sortie  la  catastrophe  de  Napoleon. 

D'autres  fatalit^s  encore  devaient  surgir 
6tait-il  possible  que  Napoleon  gagnat  cette  bataille  ?  nous 
r^pondrons  non.     Pourquoi  ?  k  cause  de  Wellington  ?  k  cause 
de  Bliicher  1  non.     A  cause  de  Dieu. 

86      Bonaparte  vainqueur  a  Waterloo,  ceci  n'etait  plus  dans  la  loi 
du  dix-neuvieme  siecle.     Une  autre  s^rie  de  faits  se  prdparait, 
oil  Napoleon  n'avait  plus  de  place.     La  mauvaise  volont^  des 
^v^nements  s'^tait  annonc^e  de  longue  date. 
II  ^tait  temps  que  cet  homme  vaste  tomb^t. 

40  L'excessive  pesanteur  de  cet  homme  dans  la  destin^e  humaine 
troublait  I'^quilibre.     Cet  individu  comptait  k  lui  seul  plus  que 


FRENCH  READER.  431 

le  groupe  universel.  Ces  pl^thores  de  toute  la  vitality  humaine 
concentree  dans  une  seule  tete,  le  monde  montant  au  cerveau 
d'un  homme,  cela  serait  mortel  a  la  civilisation,  si  cela  durait. 
Le  moment  ^tait  venu  pour  I'incorruptible  ^quit^  supreme 
d'aviser.  Probablement  les  principes  et  les  ^l^ments,  d'oi!l  5 
dependent  les  gravitations  r^gulieres  dans  I'ordre  moral  comme 
dans  I'ordre  materiel,  se  plaignaient.  Le  sang  qui  fume,  le 
trop-plein  des  cimeti^res,  les  m^res  en  larmes,  ce  sont  des  plai- 
doyers  redoutables.  II  y  a,  quand  la  terre  souffre  d'une  sur- 
charge, de  myst^rieux  gdmissements  de  I'ombre,  que  I'abime  lo 
entend. 

Napol^n  avait  6t6  d^nonc^  dans  I'infini,  et  sa  chute  dtait 
ddcidJe. 

II  genait  Dieu. 

Waterloo  n'est  point  une  bataille ;  c'est  le  changement  dels 
front  de  Tunivers. 


13.  LA  MARSEILLAISE. 

ROUGET  DE  L'ISLE  (1760- 


Allons,  enfants  de  la  patrie, 

Le  jour  de  gloire  est  arriv^  ! 

Contre  nous  de  la  tyrannie 

L'dtendard  sanglant  est  lev^.  20 

Entendez-vous  dans  les  campagnes 

Mugir  ces  f^roces  soldats  1 

lis  viennent  j  usque  dans  nos  bras, 

Egorger  nos  fils,  nos  compagnes ! 

Aux  armes,  citoyens  !  formez  vos  bataillons  I  26 

Marchons,  marchons ! 
Qu'un  sang  impur  abreuve  nos  sillons ! 

Marchons,  marchons ! 
Qu'un  sang  impur  abreuve  nos  sillons  I 


M. 


432  FKENCH  READER. 

Amour  sacre  de  la  patrie, 
Conduis,  soutiens  nos  bras  vengeurs ; 
Liberty,  Liberte  cherie, 
Combats  avec  tes  defenseurs ! 
6  Sous  nos  drapeaux  que  la  Victoire 

Accoure  h.  tes  m^les  accents  ! 
Que  tes  ennemis  expirants 
Voient  ton  triomphe  et  notre  gloire ! 

Aux  armes,  citoyens  !  formez  vos  bataillons ' 
!•  Marchons,  marchons ! 

Qu'un  sang  impur  abreuve  nos  sillons ! 

Marchons,  marchons ! 
Qu'un  sang  impur  abreuve  nos  sillons ! 


14.  LA  FEUILLE. 

Abnault  (1766-1834). 


"  De  ta  tige  d^tachde, 
16  Pauvre  feuille  dess^chde, 

Oil  vas-tu  1 — Je  n'en  sais  rien, 
L'ora.ge  a  brise  le  chene 
Qui  seul  etait  mon  soutien ; 
De  son  inconstante  haleine, 
20  Le  zephyr  ou  Taquilon 

Depuis  ce  jour  me  promene 
De  la  foret  k  la  plaine, 
De  la  montagne  au  vallon. 
j  Je  vais  ou  le  vent  me  m^ne, 
i<*  •  Sans  me  plaindre  ou  m'effrayer, 

,  Je  vais  ou  va  toute  chose, 
{ Ou  va  la  feuille  de  rose 
I  Et  la  feuille  de  laurier." 


FRENCH   READER.  433 

15.  L'EXIL± 

Chateaubriand  (1768-1848). 

Combien  j'ai  douce  souvenance 

Du  joli  lieu  de  ma  naissance  ! 

Ma  soeur,  qu'ils  etaient  beaux,  les  jours 

De  France  1 
O  mon  pays  !  sois  mes  amours,  e 

Tou jours ! 

Te  souvient-il  que  notre  mfere, 
Au  foyer  de  notre  chaumiere, 
Nous  prSSsait  sur  son  coeur  joyeux 

Ma  chere  ?  10 

Et  nous  baisions  ses  blancs  cheveux, 

Tous  deux. 

Te  souvient-il  du  lac  tranquille 

Qu'effleurait  I'hirondelle  agile, 

Du  vent  qui  courbait  le  roseau  1« 

Mobile, 
Et  du  soleil  couchant  sur  I'eau, 

Si  beau  ? 

Ma  soeur,  te  souvient-il  encore 

Du  chateau  que  baignait  la  Dore,  20 

Et  de  cette  tant  vieille  tour 

Du  Maure, 
Ou  I'airain  sonnait  le  retour 

Du  jour  1 

Oh  !  qui  me  rendra  mon  H^l^ne,  2B 

Et  la  montagne,  et  le  grand  ch^ne  1 
Leur  souvenir  fait  tous  les  jours 

Ma  peine. 
Mon  pays  sera  mes  amours 

Toujours  1  30 


434  FRENCH  READER. 

i6.  LA  CHIM^RE. 

TnioPHiLE  Gautier  (1811-1872). 

Une  jeune  chimere,  aux  levres  de  ma  coupe, 
Dans  I'orgie,  a  donn^  le  baiser  le  plus  doux ; 
Elle  avait  les  yeux  verts,  et  j  usque  sur  sa  croupe 
Ondoyait  en  torrent  Tor  de  ses  cheveux  roux. 

6  Des  ailes  d'dpervier  tremblaient  k  son  ^paule  ; 

La  voyant  s'envoler,  je  sautai  sur  ses  reins ; 
Et,  faisant  jusqu'a  moi  ployer  son  cou  de  saule, 
J'enfonQai  comme  un  peigne  une  main  dans  ses  crins. 

Elle  se  d^menait,  hurlante  et  furieuse, 
10  Mais  en  vain.     Je  broyais  ses  flancs  dans  mes  genoux 

Alors  elle  me  dit  d'une  voix  gracieuse. 
Plus  claire  que  Fargent :   Maitre,  ou  done  allons-nous  ? 

Par  dela  le  soleil  et  par  dela  I'espace, 
Ou  Dieu  n'arriverait  qu'apres  I'dternit^ ; 
1*  Mais  avant  d'etre  au  but  ton  aile  sera  lasse : 

Car  je  veux  voir  mon  reve  en  sa  r^alite. 


17.  EXTASE. 
Victor  Hugo  (1802-1885). 


J'^tais  seul  pr^s  des  flots.  par  une  nuit  d'^toiles. 
Pas  un  nuage  aux  cieux,  sur  les  mers  pas  de  voiles. 
Mes  yeux  plongeaient  plus  loin  que  le  monde  r^eL 
Et  les  bois,  et  les  monts,  et  toute  la  nature, 
Semblaient  interroger  dans  un  confus  murmure 
Les  flots  des  mers,  les  feux  du  ciel. 


FRENCH  KEADER.  435 

Et  les  ^toiles  d'or,  Idgions  infinies, 
X  voix  haute,  a  voix  basse,  avec  mille  harmonies, 
Disaient,  en  inclinant  leurs  couronnes  de  feu  ; 
Et  les  flots  bleus,  que  rien  ne  gouverne  et  n'arrete, 
Disaient,  en  recourbant  Tecume  de  leur  crete : 
— C'est  le  Seigneur,  le  Seigneur  Dieu  ! 


i8.  L'AUTOMNE. 

Lamartine  (1791- 


Salut !  bois  couronnds  d'un  reste  de  verdure  ! 
Feuillages  jaunissants  sur  les  gazons  ^pars  ! 
Salut,  derniers  beaux  jours  !  Le  deuil  de  la  nature 
Convient  k  ma  douleur,  et  plait  k  mes  regards.  jo 

Je  suis  d'un  pas  reveur  le  sentier  solitaire, 
J'aime  k  revoir  encor,  pour  la  demiere  fois, 
Ce  soleil  palissant,  dont  la  faible  lumiere 
Perce  k  peine  a  mes  pieds  I'obscurit^  des  bois. 

Oui,  dans  ces  jours  d'automne  ou  la  nature  expire,  15 

A  ses  regards  voild^  je  trouve  plus  d'attraits  : 
C'est  I'adieu  d'un  ami,  c'est  le  dernier  sourire 
Des  Ifevres  que  la  mort  va  fermer  pour  jamais ! 

Ainsi,  pret  k  quitter  I'horizon  de  la  vie, 

Pleurant  de  mes  longs  jours  I'espoir  evanoui,  20 

Je  me  retourne  encore,  et  d'un  regard  d'envie 

Je  contemple  ces  biens  dont  je  n'ai  pas  joui. 

Terre,  soleil,  vallons,  belle  et  douce  nature, 

Je  vous  dois  une  larme  au  bord  de  mon  tombeau. 

L'air  est  si  parfum^  !  la  lumiere  est  si  pure  !  "      26 

Aux  regards  d'un  mourant  le  soleil  est  si  beau. 


436  FBENCH  READER. 

Je  voudrais  maintenant  vider  jusqu'a  la  lie 
Ce  calice  meld  de  nectar  et  de  fiel ; 
Au  fond  de  cette  coupe  ou  je  buvais  la  vie, 
Peut-etre  restait-il  une  goutte  de  miel. 

Peut-etre  I'avenir  me  gardait-il  encore 
TJn  retour  de  bonheur  dont  I'espoir  est  perdu  ; 
Peut-§tre  dans  la  foule,  une  ame  que  j 'ignore 
Aurait  compris  mon  ame  et  m'aurait  rdpondu. 

La  fleur  tombe  en  livrant  ses  parfums  au  zdphire, 
A  la  vie,  au  soleil,  ce  sont  la  ses  adieux ; 
Moi,  je  meurs,  et  mon  ^me,  au  moment  qu'elle  expire, 
S'exhale  comme  un  son  triste  et  mdlodieux. 


19.  TRISTESSE. 

De  Musset  (1810-1857). 

J'ai  perdu  ma  force  et  ma  vie, 
Et  mes  amis  et  ma  gaiety : 
J'ai  perdu  jusqu'a  la  fiertd 
Qui  faisait  croire  k  mon  genie. 

Quand  j'ai  connu  la  vdritd, 
J'ai  cru  que  c'dtait  une  amie  : 
Quand  je  I'ai  comprise  et  sen  tie 
J'en  dtais  d6jk  ddgoutd. 

Et  pourtant  elle  est  dternelle, 
Et  ceux  qui  se  sont  passes  d'elle, 
Ici-bas  ont  tout  ignord 

Dieu  parle,  il  faut  qu'on  lui  rdponde. 
Le  seul  bien  qui  me  reste  au  monde 
Est  d'avoir  quelquefois  pleurd. 


FRENCH  READER.  487 

20.  LE  VASE  BRISt. 

Sully-Prudhomme  (b.  1839). 

Le  vase  ou  meurt  cette  verveine 
D'un  coup  d'eventail  fut  fele ; 
Le  coup  dut  effleurer  a  peine. 
Aucun  bruit  ne  I'a  reveld 

Mais  la  legere  meurtrissure,  fi 

Mordant  le  cristal  chaque  jour, 
D'une  marche  invisible  et  sure 
En  a  fait  lentement  le  tour. 

Son  eau  f raiche  a  fui  goutte  k  goutte, 

Le  sue  des  fleurs  s'est  dpuisd ;  10 

Personne  encore  ne  s'en  doute, 

Wj  touchez  pas,  il  est  bris^. 

Souvent  aussi  la  main  qu'on  aime, 

EflBeurant  le  coeur,  le  meurtrit ; 

Puis  le  coeur  se  fend  de  lui-meme,  16 

La  fleur  de  son  amour  pdrit ; 

Toujours  intact  aux  yeux  du  monde, 

II  sent  croitre  et  pleurer  tout  bas 

Sa  blessure  fine  et  profonde, 

II  est  bris^,  n'y  touchez  pas.  20 


438  FRENCH  READER. 

21.  LE  CHfeNE  ET  LE  ROSEAU. 

La  Fontaine  (1621-1695). 

Le  chene  un  jour  dit  au  roseau : 
Vous  avez  bien  sujet  d'accuser  la  nature ; 
Un  roitelet  pour  vous  est  un  pesant  f ardeau  ; 

Le  moindre  vent  qui  d'aventure 
5  Fait  rider  la  face  de  I'eau 

Vous  oblige  k  baisser  la  tete  ; 
Cependant  que  mon  front,  au  Caucase  pareil, 
Non  content  d'arreter  les  rayons  du  soleil, 

Brave  Teffort  de  la  tempete. 
10  Tout  vous  est  aquilon,  tout  me  semble  zephyr. 

Encor  si  vous  naissiez  a  I'abri  du  feuillage 

Dont  je  couvre  le  voisinage, 

Yous  n'auriez  pas  tant  a  souffrir, 

Je  vous  d^fendrais  de  I'orage  : 
16  Mais  vous  naissez  le  plus  souvent 

Sur  les  humides  bords  des  royaumes  du  vent. 
La  nature  envers  vous  me  semble  bien  injuste, 
Votre  compassion,  lui  r^pondit  I'arbuste, 
Part  d'un  bon  naturel ;  mais  quittez  ce  souci : 
SQ  Les  vents  me  sont  moins  qu'^  vous  redoutables, 

Je  plie,  et  ne  romps  pas.     Vous  avez  jusqu'ici 

Contre  leurs  coups  ^pouvantables 

R^sist^  sans  courber  le  dos ; 
Mais  attendons  la  fin.     Comme  il  disait  ces  mots, 
IB  Du  bout  de  Thorizon  accourt  avec  furie 

Le  plus  terrible  des  enfants 
Que  le  nord  eut  port^s  j usque-la  dans  ses  flancs. 

L'arbre  tient  bon ;  le  roseau  plie. 

Le  vent  redouble  ses  efforts, 
90  Et  fait  si  bien  qu'il  d^racine 

Celui  de  qui  la  tete  au  ciel  ^tait  voisine, 

Et  dont  les  pieds  touchaient  a  Tempire  des  morts. 


COMPOSITION    EXERCISES 

BASED    ON 

THE    FRENCH    READER. 


[It  is  recommended  that  the  extracts  from  the  Reader  should  be 
used  as  a  basis  for  oral  practice,  dictation,  etc.  The  exercises  here 
given  have  not  been  divided  into  lessons :  such  portions  may  be 
assigned  for  this  purpose  as  the  teacher  deems  advisable.  The 
vocabulary  required  for  translating  any  given  exercise  is  to  be  found 
in  the  extract  from  the  Reader  on  which  it  is  based.] 

EXERCISE  I. 

(Paroles  d'un  croyant,  pp.  395-6.) 

A.  1.  Instead  of  bending  we  rise.  2.  This  plant  will  dry 
up  and  die,  if  it  finds  no  shelter  from  the  fierce  heat  of  the 
sun.  3.  The  wind  bends  the  trees  to  the  ground.  4.  If  we 
unite  with  one  another,  we  shall  shelter  one  another.  5.  Let 
us  not  think  of  ourselves  alone.  6.  What  is  there  that  is 
stronger  than  covetousness  ?  7.  The  swallows  gathered  round 
the  bird  of  prey.  8.  Fear  sat  down  beside  him,  and  did  not 
leave  him.  9.  We  asked  them :  "  How  many  were  there  of 
you?"  10.  They  answered :  "There  were  four  of  us."  11.  It 
is  thus,  and  therefore  God  commands  us  not  to  fall  under  thfe 
oppression  of  the  strong.  12.  The  weak  do  not  fear,  when 
they  love  one  another.  13.  A  rock  had  rolled  upon  the  road. 
14.  There  is  no  way  out,  except  the  road.  15.  The  man  tried 
to  make  a  way  for  himself.  16.  He  saw  that  his  efforts  were 
vain.  1 7.  If  we  sit  down  full  of  sadness,  what  will  become 
of  us?     18.  The  second  traveller  did  what  the  first  one  did. 

19.  Several  others  come  up,  sit  down,  and  bow  their  heads. 

20.  If  we  pray   to   our   Father,  He   will   have   pity  on  us. 

439 


440  COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  II. 

21.  When  we  had  prayed,  we  pushed  the  rock,  and  it  gave 
way.  22.  Life  is  a  journey,  and  man  is  a  traveller.  23.  He 
meets  many  troubles  on  his  way. 

B.  The  wind  strips  of  its  leaves  the  tree  which  is  alone, 
and  it  finds  no  shelter  from  the  fierce  heat  of  the  sun,  and 
the  fierce  heat  of  the  covetousness  of  the  great  dries  up  the 
sap  which  nourishes  the  man  who  is  alone.  Then,  let  us  be 
united.  So  long  as  we  think  only  of  ourselves,  we  have 
nothing  to  hope  for  but  oppression.  The  sparrows  succeed  in 
driving  off  birds  of  prey,  by  pursuing  them  all  together.  Let 
us  take  example  from  the  sparrows.  Fear  follows  him  who 
separates  himself  from  his  brethren.  All  men  are  equal. 
God  makes  neither  great  nor  small.  But  when  covetousness 
stifles  the  love  of  others  in  those  who  are  stronger  in  body  or 
mind,  they  try  to  subdue  their  brothers  to  themselves.  God 
knows  that  these  things  are  so,  and  that  is  why  He  commands 
us  to  love  one  another,  so  that  we  may  be  united,  and  may  not 
fall  under  the  oppression  of  the  strong.  A  man  who  was 
travelling  in  the  mountains  came  to  a  place  where  a  great 
rock  filled  the  road  completely.  The  man  saw  that  he  could 
not  continue  his  journey,  and  he  tried  to  move  the  rock,  but 
he  found  himself  powerless  to  move  it.  He  grew  weary  and 
said,  "  What  will  become  of  me  in  this  solitude,  when  the 
wild  beasts  come  out  to  seek  their  prey  ? "  Another  traveller 
came  up,  and  then  several  others,  and  none  of  them  being 
able  to  move  the  rock,  they  prayed  to  their  Father  in  Heaven 
that  He  might  have  (subj.)  pity  on  them.  The  Father  in 
Heaven  listened  to  them,  and  rising  up  all  together,  they 
took  away  (enlever)  the  rock  and  went  on  their  way.  God 
measures  the  troubles  which  we  meet  on  our  path,  and  if  we 
travel  together,  the  weight  of  no  rock  will  ever  stop  us. 

EXERCISE  II. 

(Paroles  d'un  croyant,  pp.  397-8.) 

A.  1.  If  we  should  die  or  fall  ill,  what  would  become  of 
you  ?  2.  If  this  thought  never  leaves  you  it  will  gnaw  your 
heart  like  a  worm.     3.  Although  the  same  thought  comes  to 


COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  II.  441 

me,  I  do  not  dwell  on  it.  4.  Let  us  live  without  anxiety. 
6.  Those  who  do  not  live  without  anxiety,  do  not  enjoy  a 
moment  of  repose.  6.  Soon  the  mother  came  back  again  to 
her  nest.  7.  The  man  was  sad  and  downcast,  on  account  of 
the  orphans  in  their  nest.  8.  The  poor  bird  struggled,  but 
the  vulture  carried  it  off.  9.  What  will  become  of  my 
children,  if. they  lose  me?  10.  The  little  birds  have  only 
their  mother.  11.  My  children,  too,  have  only  me.  12. 
When  he  returned  to  the  fields,  he  wished  to  see  the  young 
ones  again.  13.  All  the  little  birds  were  well.  14.  If  he 
hides  himself,  he  will  see  what  will  happen.  15.  He  observed 
what  had  happened.  16.  The  food,  which  was  brought  back 
by  the  mother,  was  given  to  all  without  distinction.  17.  If 
we  do  not  distrust  Providence,  God  will  not  abandon  us.  18. 
Let  us  not  be  anxious.  19.  Those  who  pursue  their  journey 
in  peace  will  know  the  secrets  of  God's  love.  20.  If  our 
children  are  not  of  an  age  to  provide  for  their  own  needs, 
they  will  have  the  Father  in  Heaven. 

B.  Two  men  had  only  their  labour  to  support  their  wives 
and  their  little  children.  And  one  of  them  was  troubled,  and 
asked  himself  {se  demander)  what  would  become  of  his  wife 
and  children  if  he  should  die.  But  the  other  man  lived  with- 
out anxiety,  for  he  said  that  God  knew  His  creatures,  and  that 
He  would  watch  over  him  and  his  children.  One  day  when 
the  first  man  was  working  in  the  fields,  he  saw  some  birds 
which  were  going  into  and  coming  out  of  a  clump  of  trees. 
He  drew  near,  and  saw  two  nests  in  which  were  several 
young  birds  without  feathers.  He  returns  to  his  work,  but 
watches  the  birds  as  they  come  and  go  with  food  for  their 
young.  Now,  as  the  man  was  working,  one  of  the  mother 
[birds]  uttered  a  piercing  cry,  for  a  vulture  had  seized  her  as 
she  was  returning  home  with  her  mouthful  of  food.  At  the 
sight  of  this,  the  man  felt  his  soul  deeply  (hien)  disturbed, 
and  said,  "What  will  become  now  of  the  little  birds?"  But 
the  next  day,  directing  his  steps  towards  the  clump  of  trees, 
he  saw  that  none  of  the  young  had  suffered.  This  astonished 
him.  But  he  soon  saw  the  second  mother  distributing  to  all 
the  young  ones  the  food  which  she  had  gathered.  She  had 
not  abandoned  the  orphans  in  their  distress.     Let  us  not  dis- 


442  COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  III. 

trust  Providence.  God  will  not  forsake  His  own.  We  shall 
never  know  the  secrets  of  His  love.  If  one  father  dies  before 
the  other,  the  latter  will  be  a  father  to  all  the  children.  If 
both  die,  the  children  will  have  their  Father  in  Heaven,  and 
He  will  provide  for  all  their  needs. 

EXERCISE  III. 

(Le  chat  bott^,  pp.  398-401.) 

A.  1.  "We  did  not  call  the  notary.  2.  The  miller  received 
the  mill.  3.  Shall  we  be  able  to  console  ourselves  for  having 
such  a  poor  shared  4.  When  he  has  his  bag,  and  when  he 
has  put  bran  into  it,  he  will  go  into  the  brushwood.  5.  I 
have  got  a  pair  of  boots  made  for  myself.  6.  He  hung  him- 
self up  by  the  feet,  and  pretended  to  be  dead.  7.  He  waited 
for  some  young  rabbit  to  eat  the  bran.  8.  "We  were  shown 
up  to  his  apartments.  9.  Did  you  bow  to  the  king?  10.  We 
thank  you.  11.  Let  us  go  and  hide  ourselves  in  the  wheat. 
12.  One  day,  when  we  learned  that  you  were  to  go  to  the 
river's  banks,  we  went  for  a  walk.  13.  We  said,  "Follow 
our  advice,  and  leave  it  to  us."  14.  They  advised  him  to 
bathe  in  the  river.  15.  As  they  were  bathing,  we  happened 
to  pass.  16,  She  put  her  head  out  of  the  carriage  door, 
and  screamed.  17.  Order  your  guards  that  some  one  go  to 
his  help.  18.  The  marquis  was  pulled  out  of  the  water. 
19.  Although  the  cat  cried,  "Stop  thief,"  the  thieves  carried 
off  his  master's  clothes.  20.  Go  and  get  those  fine  clothes. 
21.  We  had  just  given  him  a  carriage.  22.  They  wished  us  to 
get  into  the  carriage.  23.  We  shall  not  fail  to  ask  them 
whose  meadow  it  is.  24.  That  meadow  yields  well  every 
year.  25.  Do  you  wish  to  know  whose  castle  this  is?  26. 
We  shall  say  the  same  thing  to  those  we  meet.  27.  That  is 
the  castle  whose  master  is  an  ogre.  28.  He  is  the  richest 
man  I  have  ever  seen.  29.  Tell  us  what  that  cat  can  do. 
30.  Can  the  cat  change  itself  into  a  lion?  31.  The  ogre 
became  a  lion.     32.  Boots  are  no  good  for  walking  on  tiles. 

33.  Would  you    be  frightened   to   see   a   lion  before   you? 

34.  We  have  been  assured  that  he  was  afraid,  but  we  cannot 
beKeve  it.     35.  Can  the  cat  assume  the  form  of  a  rat  ?    36. 


COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  III.  443 

The  mice  began  to  run  over  the  floor.  37.  If  we  hear  the 
noise  of  the  carriage,  we  shall  not  enter  the  castle.  38.  Run 
to  meet  the  marquis  and  the  princess.  39.  You  are  welcome ! 
40.  Let  us  see  these  buildings,  if  you  please.  41.  We  went 
up  first,  the  cat  followed  us.  42.  Our  friends  were  to  come 
and  see  us.  43.  They  did  not  dare  to  come  in.  44.  We  saw 
the  great  wealth  he  possessed.  45.  It  will  be  my  fault  alone, 
if  I  am  not  the  king's  son-in-law.  46.  Cats  do  not  become 
great  lords.     47.  They  run  after  mice  to  amuse  themselves. 

B.  All  the  property  a  miller  had  was  a  mill,  an  ass  and  a 
cat.  He  left  the  mill  to  his  eldest  son  and  the  cat  to  the 
youngest.  The  latter  said  that  he  would  have  to  die  of 
hunger,  while  his  eldest  brother  would  be  able  to  earn  his 
living  decently.  The  cat  pretended  not  to  hear  this  speech. 
He  told  his  master  not  to  be  troubled,  but  to  give  him  a  bag, 
and  to  get  a  pair  of  boots  made  for  him.  His  master  no 
longer  despaired  of  being  helped  in  his  misery,  for  he  had  seen 
the  cat  play  many  clever  tricks.  He  had  seen  him  catch 
many  rats  and  mice.  Then  the  cat  put  on  his  boots,  and 
seizing  his  bag  with  his  fore-paws,  he  went  off  where  there 
were  many  rabbits.  Having  put  some  bran  into  his  bag,  he 
stretched  himself  out,  as  if  he  were  dead.  A  giddy  young 
rabbit  poked  himself  into  the  bag,  the  cat  drew  the  strings, 
and  caught  him.  Then  he  went  to  the  king's  palace,  carry- 
ing his  prey  with  him.  He  went  up  to  the  king's  apartments, 
and  making  a  bow,  he  told  the  king  that  the  Marquis  de 
Carabas  had  commissioned  him  to  present  a  rabbit  to  his 
majesty.  Another  time,  he  hid  himself  in  some  wheat,  and 
caught  two  partridges  which  had  gone  into  his  bag.  He 
presented  these  to  the  king  also,  and  the  king  received  them 
with  pleasure.  He  carried  thus,  from  time  to  time,  game  to 
the  king.  One  day,  the  king  went  for  a  drive  with  his 
daughter,  on  the  banks  of  the  river.  The  cat  advised  his 
master  to  bathe  in  the  river,  where  the  king  would  pass  by. 
The  marquis  did  not  know  what  use  it  would  be,  but  he 
followed  the  cat's  advice.  As  the  king  was  passing,  the  cat 
screamed,  **  Help  !  help  !  a  man  is  drowning  ! "  The  king 
recognized  the  cat,  and  ordered  his  guards  to  go  to  the  man's 
belp.     Now  (pr),  the  cat  had  hid  his  master's  clothes  under  a 


444  COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  III. 

stone,  although  he  told  the  king  that  robbers  had  carried 
them  off.  Then  the  officers  of  the  king's  wardrobe  went  for 
some  very  fine  clothing  for  the  marquis.  The  king's  daugh- 
ter fell  in  love  with  the  marquis,  for  he  was  very  fine-looking, 
and  the  fine  clothes  heightened  his  good  looks.  Then  he.got 
into  the  king's  carriage  and  took  part  in  the  drive.  The  cat 
was  delighted  to  see  that  his  plan  was  succeeding,  and  going 
ahead  he  came  upon  some  peasants  who  were  mowing  in  a 
meadow.  He  ordered  them  to  say  to  the  king,  if  the  king 
asked  them  whose  meadow  it  was,  that  it  belonged  to  the 
marquis.  They  did  not  fail  to  say  so  {le)  to  the  king.  Then 
the  cat  came  upon  some  harvesters,  and  told  them  that,  if 
they  did  not  say  that  the  field  of  wheat  which  they  were 
cutting  belonged  to  the  marquis,  they  would  be  cut  up  as  fine 
as  mince-meat.  The  king  asked  whose  field  it  was,  and  they 
replied  that  it  belonged  to  the  marquis.  The  king  rejoiced 
at  this,  but  was  astonished  at  the  great  possessions  of  the 
marquis.  Now,  all  these  lands  belonged  to  a  rich  ogre,  who 
lived  in  a  great  castle.  The  cat  made  enquiries  as  to  who 
this  ogre  was,  and  what  he  could  do,  and  asked  to  speak  to 
him,  saying  that  he  wished  to  have  the  honour  of  paying  him 
his  respects.  He  was  civilly  received  by  the  ogre.  Then  the 
ogre,  to  show  the  cat  what  he  could  do,  changed  himself  into 
a  lion.  The  cat  was  frightened,  and  fled  to  the  eave-troughs. 
After  a  little  time  the  cat  came  down,  and  told  the  ogre  that 
he  had  been  assured  that  the  ogre  could  also  change  himself 
into  a  rat  or  a  mouse,  but  that  he  considered  that  impossible. 
The  ogre  replied  that  he  would  soon  see,  and  changing  him- 
self into  a  mouse  began  to  run  over  the  floor.  The  cat 
pounced  on  the  mouse  and  ate  it.  The  king,  seeing  the 
beautiful  castle,  crossed  the  drawbridge  and  entered  the 
court.  The  cat  ran  to  meet  him  and  said,  "Your  majesty 
is  welcome  to  the  castle  of  the  Marquis  de  Carabas."  The 
king  went  in  first,  the  marquis  and  princess  followed  him. 
In  a  great  hall  they  found  a  wonderful  repast  which  had 
been  prepared  by  the  ogre  for  his  friends.  The  king  and 
the  princess  were  charmed  by  the  good  qualities  and  the 
great  wealth  of  the  marquis,  and  the  king  said  to  him, 
*'You  shall  b^  my  son-in-law."  That  very  day  he  married 
the  princess. 


COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  IV.  445 

EXERCISE  IV. 
(Un  nez  gel^,  pp.   402-3.) 

A.  1.  We  have  decided  to  make  our  rounds  on  foot.  2.  They 
were  armed  from  head  to  foot.  3.  I  was  delighted  that  we 
had  the  opportunity.  4.  We  were  going  to  a  gentleman's 
house  who  was  not  at  home.  6.  He  was  more  of  a  talker,  as 
it  seems,  than  the  others.  6.  The  coachman  drove  his  sleigh 
at  full  speed.  7.  However  fast  you  may  run,  I  shall 
catch  (rattraper)  you.  8.  Before  I  could  take  off  my 
cashmere  scarf,  he  was  washing  my  face.  9.  In  such  weather 
as  it  is,  I  do  not  venture  into  the  street.  10.  They  looked  at 
us  a  moment.  11.  We  rushed  again  at  them.  12.  I  profited 
by  the  fact  that  he  could  not  defend  himself.  13.  He 
thought  he  was  the  victim  of  an  ambuscade.  14.  I  got  rid 
of  the  three  men.  15.  He  did  not  think  the  joke  in  good 
taste.  16.  We  French  look  at  people  (gens)  straight  in  the 
eye.  17.  I  rendered  the  same  service  to  myself  as  the  peasant 
had  rendered  me.  18.  Gratitude  is  less  nimble  than  fear. 
19.  We  were  guilty  only  of  too  much  philanthropy.  20.  Those 
present  spoke  Russian,  and  did  not  understand  French. 

B.  Dumas,  being  at  St.  Petersburg,  ventured  into  the  street 
one  day,  having  only  the  tip  of  his  nose  to  the  air.  He  had 
armed  himself  against  the  cold,  by  (en)  wrapping  himself  in  a 
great  Astrachan  coat,  and  by  pulling  over  his  ears  a  fur-lined 
cap.  At  first,  he  was  surprised  at  the  little  impression  the 
cold  made  upon  him.  He  laughed  to  himself  at  the  stories  he 
had  heard  told  about  it.  Still  he  noticed  that  those  whom  he 
met  looked  at  him  with  anxiety,  but  without  saying  anything 
to  him.  Soon,  a  gentleman,  who  was  passing,  shouted  (crier) 
to  him  in  Russian,  but  he  did  not  know  a  word  of  Russian, 
and  continued  on  his  way.  He  soon  met  another  man,  who 
was  driving  his  sleigh.  The  latter  also  shouted  to  him  in 
Russian.  Finally  he  met  a  labourer,  who  picked  up  a  hand- 
ful of  snow,  and  rushing  at  Dumas,  rubbed  his  face  and  nose 
vigorously.  In  such  weather,  Dumas  thought  this  a  rather 
poor  joke,  and  he  gave  the  labourer  a  blow  with  his  fist. 
Then  two  peasants  looked  at  him  a  moment,  and  rushing  at 
him,  held  his  arms.     The  labourer,  after  having  picked  up 


446  COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  V. 

another  handful  of  snow,  rushed  at  him  again,  and  began 
again  his  rubbing.  Dumas  thought  he  was  the  victim  of 
some  mistake,  and  he  called  for  help.  An  officer,  who  had 
run  up,  asked  him  in  French  with  whom  he  was  angry. 
*'What,"  exclaimed  Dumas,  "don't  you  see  what  those  scamps 
were  doing  1 "  The  officer  replied  that  they  were  rendering 
him  a  great  service  by  (en)  rubbing  his  face  with  snow,  for 
Dumas  had  his  nose  frozen.  A  passer-by,  addressing  the 
officer,  told  him  that  his  nose  was  freezing  too.  The  officer 
stooped,  picked  up  some  snow,  and  rubbed  his  nose.  Then 
Dumas  put  off  after  the  labourer,  whom  he  would  not  have 
overtaken  if  some  people  had  not  stopped  the  way.  When 
Dumas  arrived  where  the  labourer  was,  he  gave  him  ten 
roubles,  and  explained  the  affair  to  him.  Those  present  re- 
commended Dumas  to  pay  more  attention  in  future  to  his 
nose.     During  the  rest  of  his  rounds  he  never  lost  sight  of  it. 

EXERCISE  V. 

(La  pipe  de  Jean  Bart,  pp.  404-6.) 

A.  1.  It  is  not  too  late  for  us  to  change  our  habits.  2. 
Reflect  on  it  and  you  will  be  convinced.  3.  We  did  not  wish 
to  attract  attention.  4.  They  did  not  turn  Jean  Bart  out  of 
the  palace.  5.  For  he  was  a  rear-admiral.  6.  They  did  not 
go  and  tell  the  king  that  a  man  whose  name  was  Jean  Bart 
was  smoking  in  his  ante-chamber.  7.  We  come  to  ask  a 
favour  of  the  king.  8.  The  rear-admiral  has  to  take  the 
king's  cabinet  by  surprise.  9.  We  shall  lay  aside  our  famous 
garments.  10.  The  king  put  upon  Jean  Bart's  neck  a  chain 
of  gold.  11.  Captains  receive  gold  chains  as  a  reward  for 
great  deeds.  12.  He  showed  the  petitioners  into  the  king's 
presence.  13.  Are  you  a  good  enough  friend  of  the  captain, 
for  there  to  be  no  need  of  that  1  1 4.  It  will  be  enough  if  you 
tell  him  that  I  ask  to  speak  to  him.  15.  Let  us  advance 
towards  the  door.  1 6.  The  orders  are  that  no  one  can  enter. 
17.  He  looked  at  us  with  astonishment.  18.  The  officer 
observed  to  us  that  no  smoking  was  allowed.  19.  Do  not 
keep  us  waiting.  20.  If  you  keep  me  waiting,  I  shall  smoke. 
21.  We  shall  be  obliged  to  smoke,  if  we  wait  here.  22.  We 
shall  put  them  out,  if  they  smoke.     23.  I  defy  you  to  put  me 


COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  V.  447 

out.  24.  "We  shall  not  go  out,  before  we  speak  to  the  king. 
25.  You  must  choose  the  less  of  two  evils.  26.  Let  us  go  and 
tell  him  that  Jean  Bart  is  here.  27.  Let  us  not  take  the 
trouble  to  look.  28.  We  shall  show  him  in.  29.  Do  not  let 
him  finish  his  pipe.  30.  We  had  hardly  crossed  the  threshold, 
when  we  stopped.  31.  If  we  salute  the  king,  we  shall  arrive 
at  our  goal.  32.  We  began  by  paying  compliments.  33.  We 
finished  by  asking  for  the  pardon  of  our  friend.  34.  We  shall 
get  many  compliments  paid  us.  35.  Many  ships  were  burned 
at  sea.  36.  Many  members  of  his  family  died  in  the  king's 
service.  37.  They  were  shouting,  "Long  live  the  king!" 
as  loud  as  they  could.  38.  We  profited  by  the  fact  that  we 
had  remained  more  than  half  an  hour  with  the  king.  39.  It 
would  afford  them  great  pleasure  if  you  told  them  how  you 
got  out  of  the  port.  40.  Do  not  prevent  me  from  getting  out. 
41.  I  shall  make  a  way  for  myself  to  the  door. 

B.  When  Jean  Bart  was  called  into  the  navy  by  Louis  XIV., 
he  was  forty-one  years  old.  The  descendant  of  pirates,  he  had 
been  a  pirate  himself,  and  he  loved  his  pipe,  for  he  was  of 
Dunkirk,  which  is  a  damp  and  cold  locality.  But  it  was  not 
from  ignorance  of  the  etiquette  of  Versailles  that  he  lit  his 
pipe  in  the  king's  ante-chamber.  He  had  come  to  ask  of  the 
king  a  favour  which  had  been  twice  refused  him.  And  he 
wished  to  attract  attention  to  himself.  Having  put  off  his 
famous  garments  of  cloth  of  gold,  and  having  put  on  a  plain 
officer's  costume,  he  presents  himself  at  the  ante-chamber  of 
the  king,  but  without  his  letter  of  admission.  The  officer 
who  was  charged  with  introducing  petitioners  into  the  king's 
presence,  asked  him  where  his  letter  was.  He  replied  that  he 
was  a  good  enough  friend  of  the  king  not  to  have  need  of  a 
letter.  But  the  officer  would  (voulait)  not  take  the  liberty  of 
announcing  Jean  Bart.  The  latter  leaned  against  the  wain- 
scot, and  drawing  a  pipe  from  the  crown  of  his  hat,  he  lit  it. 
The  courtiers  observed  to  him  that  people  did  not  smoke  in 
the  king's  ante-chamber.  But  Jean  Bart  replied  that  he 
always  smoked  when  he  was  waiting.  The  officer  said  he 
would  be  obliged  to  put  him  out.  But  it  was  not  easy  to  put 
Jean  Bart  out  of  doors,  so  the  officer  chose  the  less  of  two 
evils,  and  told  the  king  that  there  was  an  officer  in  the  ante- 
chamber who  was  smoking  and  who  dared  the  courtiers  to  put 


448  COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  VI. 

him  out.  The  king  told  the  officer  to  let  Jean  Bart  finish  his 
pipe  and  then  to  show  him  in.  But  Jean  Bart  did  not  wait. 
Throwing  his  pipe  away,  he  rushed  into  the  king's  cabinet. 
He  conducted  the  conversation  with  much  skill.  He  got 
many  compliments  paid  to  him  regarding  his  exit  from  the 
port  of  Dunkirk  and  his  burning  of  the  enemy's  ships.  Then 
kneeling  on  one  knee  he  asked  pardon  for  one  of  his  sailors 
who  had  killed  his  opponent  in  a  duel.  The  king  hesitated, 
but  finally  granted  him  what  he  asked  for.  When  Jean  Bart 
came  out,  he  was  surrounded  by  the  courtiers.  One  of  the 
latter  asked  him  how  he  got  out  of  the  port  of  Dunkirk,  when 
he  was  blockaded  by  the  English  fleet.  They  all  said  it  would 
be  a  great  pleasure  to  them  to  know  (it).  ''Well,"  said  he, 
"you  shall  see.  You  are  the  English  fleet  which  is  blockading 
me."  And  he  gave  kicks  and  blows  to  those  who  were  in  front 
of  him,  and  opened  a  passage  for  himself.  When  he  arrived 
at  the  door,  he  told  them  that  that  was  how  he  got  out  of  the 
port  of  Dunkirk. 

EXERCISE  VI. 

(La  demi^re  classe,  pp.  407-11.) 

A.  1.  I  was  afraid,  the  more  so  as  the  master  would  ques^ 
tion  me.  2.  We  did  not  run  away  from  school.  3.  Were  the 
Prussians  drilling  in  the  meadow  *?  4.  Did  you  see  people 
standing  near  the  bulletin-board  ?  5.  The  blacksmith  ran 
across  the  square.  6.  We  were  busy  reading  the  notice.  7. 
If  you  hasten,  you  will  get  to  school  in  time.  8.  Are  you 
making  fun  of  me  ?  9.  They  entered  the  school  out  of  breath. 
10.  They  stopped  their  ears  when  they  were  repeating  their 
lessons.  11.  Relying  on  this  noise  we  gained  our  seats  with- 
out being  seen.  1 2.  Everything  was  quiet,  as  on  a  Sunday 
morning.  13.  You  may  well  imagine  he  was  afraid.  14, 
Were  they  going  to  begin  without  us  ?  15.  They  sat  down 
at  their  desks.  1 6.  The  teacher  puts  on  his  frock  coat  only 
on  inspection  days.  17.  What  surprises  us  most  is  to  see  the 
postman  sitting  on  a  bench  at  the  back  of  the  room.  18.  Did 
you  bring  your  ABC  book?  19.  We  shall  teach  nothing  but 
German.  20.  He  asked  us  to  be  attentive.  21.  That  is  what 
we  had  posted  up  at  the  school.  22.  They  hardly  knew  how 
to  read.     23.  Are  books  tiresome  "i     24.  It  pains  me  to  leave 


COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  VI.  449 

old  friends.  25.  Did  you  come  and  sit  down  on  the  bench  ? 
26.  Will  they  regret  not  having  come  oftener?  27.  Will  the 
fatherland  pass  away  1  28.  When  we  were  at  that  point  in 
our  reflections,  we  heard  our  names  called.  29.  We  got  con- 
fused at  the  first  word.  30.  That's  how  things  go  when  you 
do  not  know  how  to  speak  your  language.  31.  We  shall  see 
what  will  happen.     32.  Let  us  not  put  it  off  till  to-morrow. 

33.  Are  you  anxious  to  see  your  children  educated  ? — We  are. 

34.  Would  you  prefer  to  send  them  to  work  on  the  land? 

35.  The  master  made  us  water  his  garden.  36.  As  long  as 
a  people  retains  its  language,  it  will  not  become  a  slave. 
37.  You  would  have  said  that  the  poor  man  wished  to  go 
away.  38.  You  should  have  seen  how  we  worked  !  39.  No 
one  pays  attention  to  them.  40.  He  did  not  raise  his  eyes 
from  the  page.  41.  The  desks  were  worn  by  use.  42.  Let 
us  pack  our  trunks,  for  we  must  leave  to-morrow.  43.  It  was 
so  funny  that  they  all  wanted  to  laugh.  44.  Shall  you  forget 
it?  45.  He  seems  tall  to  me.  46.  Can  you  finish  the  phrase? 
47.  We  motion  to  them  to  go  away.  48.  Do  not  go  away. 
49.  If  we  do  not  go  away,  we  shall  not  see  our  friend. 

B.  Little  Frantz  was  late  that  morning,  and  he  was  afraid 
of  being  scolded,  and  he  did  not  know  the  first  word  about 
the  participles.  The  weather  was  so  warm  that  the  thought 
came  to  him  to  play  truant.  But  he  had  the  strength  to 
resist,  although  {bien  que  with  subj.)  the  blackbirds  were 
whistling  in  the  woods,  and  he  ran  to  school.  As  he  was 
passing  the  mayor's  oflfice,  he  saw  people  who  were  reading 
the  notices.  And  he  thought  without  stopping,  "What  is 
the  matter?  Is  there  bad  news  again ?"  The  blacksmith  and 
his  apprentice  shouted  to  him,  as  he  was  running  across  the 
square,  not  to  {de  ne  pas)  be  in  such  a  hurry,  that  he  would 
get  to  school  soon  enough.  But  Frantz  thought  the  black- 
smith was  making  fun  of  him,  and  he  entered  the  school  yard. 
Generally  you  could  hear  (impf.  ind.)  out  into  the  street  the 
noise  that  was  made,  but  that  day  everything  was  still.  They 
(on)  were  not  repeating  their  lessons  out  loud,  and  the  master 
was  not  striking  the  table  with  his  ruler.  The  little  boy's 
comrades  were  already  in  their  places,  and  the  master  was 
going  up  and  down  with  his  ruler  under  his  arm,  and  Frantz 
had  to  enter  in  the  midst  of  that  calm.  Then  he  noticed  the 
29 


450  COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  VI. 

master's  beautiful  green  frock  coat,  and  his  silk  skull-cap^ 
He  noticed  also,  at  the  back  of  the  room,  sitting  on  benches, 
the  old  mayor  and  postman,  who  were  holding  open  on  their 
knees  old  ABC  books.  Then  M.  Hamel  told  the  children 
that  it  was  the  last  time  he  would  have  {/aire)  the  class,  that 
it  was  their  last  lesson  in  French.  These  words  upset  little 
Frantz.  Then  he  was  angry  with  himself  for  the  time  that 
was  lost.  His  books,  which  seemed  a  little  ago  so  heavy  to 
carry,  were  now  old  friends  whom  he  could  not  leave.  The 
little  boy  understood  now  why  poor  M.  Hamel  had  put  on  his 
Sunday  clothes,  and  why  the  old  men  had  come  to  school. 
They  were  thanking  the  master  for  his  forty  years'  services. 
Then  he  heard  his  name  called.  What  would  he  not  have 
given  to  be  able  to  recite  the  rule  of  the  participles  !  But  the 
master  did  not  scold  him,  for  he  was  sufficiently  punished. 
He  had  said  to  himself  that  he  had  plenty  of  time,  that  he 
would  put  off  his  education.  He  had  claimed  to  be  French 
and  he  could  neither  speak  nor  write  his  own  language. 
The  people  of  Alsatia  were  not  anxious  enough  to  see  their 
children  educated.  They  sent  them  to  work  in  the  spinning- 
factories  or  on  the  land.  And  the  teacher  himself  had 
something  to  reproach  himself  with.  "When  he  wanted  to  go 
fishing  for  trout,  he  did  not  hesitate  to  give  them  a  holiday. 
Then  M.  Hamel  spoke  of  the  French  language.  And  the 
little  boy  was  astonished  to  see  how  he  understood.  "The 
French  language,"  said  he,  "is  the  finest  language  in  the 
world.  It  must  never  be  forgotten."  Whatever  the  master 
said  seemed  so  easy  to  the  boy.  The  poor  man  wanted  to 
make  all  his  knowledge  go  into  the  heads  of  his  class  before 
departing.  Then  they  began  to  write.  The  copy-lines  were, — 
France^  Alsatia,  and  everybody  was  diligent.  Even  the  little 
fellows,  who  were  tracing  their  "  strokes,"  paid  no  attention  to 
the  may-bugs  which  came  in.  And  M.  Hamel  was  motion- 
less in  his  desk.  For  forty  years  he  had  been  there,  and  now 
he  wished  to  carry  away  in  his  eye  all  the  objects  in  his 
school.  The  walnut  trees  which  he  had  planted  had  grown 
large,  and  the  hop-vine  encircled  the  windows.  And  now  he 
and  his  sister  were  to  go  away  from  the  country  for  ever. 
Then  he  gave  the  children  their  history  lesson.  The  little 
fellows  sang  ha,  be,  bi,  and  old  Hauser  having  put  on  his 


COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  VII.  451 

spectacles  spelled  the  letters  with  them.  When  the  church 
clock  rang  noon,  M.  Hamel  rose  in  his  desk,  and  turning 
towards  the  black-board,  he  wrote  with  a  piece  of  chalk, 
"  Hurrah  for  France." 


EXERCISE  VII. 

(La  ch^vre  de  M.  Seguin,  pp.  411-15.) 

A.  1.  They  all  went  off  in  the  same  way.  2.  I  could  not 
make  out  their  nature  at  all.  3.  Do  you  weary  being  at 
home  1  4.  Do  not  get  discouraged.  5.  We  are  getting  used 
to  it.  6.  How  pretty  the  goat  is!  7.  Her  beard  was  as  pretty 
as  that  of  a  non-commissioned  officer.  8.  Will  she  let  herself 
be  milked  1  9.  Yes,  she  will  never  move,  nor  put  her  foot  into 
the  dish.  10.  I  shall  go  now  and  then  to  see  whether  you 
are  comfortable.  11.  That's  one  that  does  not  grow  weary. 
12.  The  tether  rubs  her  neck.  13.  From  that  day  she 
cropped  no  more  grass.  14.  She  turned  her  head  in  the 
direction  of  the  mountain.  15.  Does  that  seem  insipid  to 
you?  16.  Is  anything  the  matter  with  you?  17.  Did  you 
notice  that  the  goat  was  pulling  on  its  tether?  18.  Do  not 
let  her  go  to  the  mountain.  19.  Did  you  drop  your  dish? 
20.  Do  not  sit  down  in  the  grass.  21.  She  was  not  tied  too 
short.  22.  Shall  I  lengthen  the  rope?  23.  What  will  you  do 
when  the  wolf  comes?  24.  The  wolf  will  not  make  fun  of 
her  horns.  25.  Let  us  not  fight  with  him.  26.  That  makes 
no  difference,  I  shall  not  stay  with  you.  27.  He  will  tie  her  to 
a  stake  for  fear  she  should  go  away.  28.  Hardly  had  he  closed 
the  door,  when  she  ran  off.  29.  They  bowed  to  the  earth. 
30.  Those  flowers  smell  sweet,  do  they  not?  31.  You  may 
well  imagine  that  she  was  happy  !  32.  She  had  grass  up  over 
her  horns  !  33.  The  white  goat  jumps  up  on  her  feet  again. 
34.  There,  she  is  off !  35.  I  should  have  said  there  were  ten 
goats.  36.  Let  us  jump  across  this  stream.  37.  Go  and 
stretch  yourself  out  on  a  flat  rock.  38.  We  did  not  notice 
M.  Seguin's  field.  39.  We  laughed  till  we  cried.  40.  How 
little  that  house  is,  we  can  never  find  room  in  it.  41.  Listen 
to  the  bells.  42.  They  are  bringing  home  the  flocks.  42.  Do 
you  think  of  the  goat  ? — I  do.     44.  I  have  a  mind  to  return. 


452  COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  VII. 

45.  But  I  can  never  get  used  to  that  life  again.  46.  We  see 
two  ears  and  two  shining  eyes.  47.  Let  us  be  in  no  hurry. 
48.  Do  not  turn  round.  49.  Do  you  remember  that  story? 
50.  It  will  be  better  to  eat  it  at  once.  51.  She  changed  her 
mind.  52.  Can  we  hold  out  as  long  as  the  others?  53.  If 
we  go  about  it  heartily,  we  may  kill  the  wolf.  54.  Let  us 
take  breath  again.  55.  We  did  not  gather  a  blade  of  grass. 
56.  Let  us  not  look  at  the  stars  dancing  in  the  sky.  57.  The 
stars  will  die  out,  when  a  pale  light  appears  (fut.). 

B.  M.  Seguin  had  had  six  goats,  and  he  had  lost  them  all 
in  the  same  way.  They  were  independent  animals  which 
wished  for  liberty  at  any  price.  Good  M.  Seguin  could  not 
understand  them.  Nothing  could  hold  them  back.  They  all 
went  away  into  the  mountain,  and  the  wolves  ate  them. 
Then  he  bought  a  seventh  one,  a  pretty  little  goat,  and  quite 
young,  for  he  wished  it  to  get  accustomed  to  living  with  him. 
It  was  a  dear  little  goat  with  long,  white  hair,  soft  eyes  and 
black  hoofs  !  M.  Seguin  tied  his  goat  to  a  stake  in  a  meadow 
surrounded  with  hawthorn,  where  she  was  very  comfortable. 
She  ate  the  grass  so  heartily  that  M.  Seguin  thought  she 
would  never  grow  weary  with  him,  but  she  did  grow  weary. 
One  day  she  looked  at  the  mountain,  and  from  that  moment 
the  grass  of  the  field  seemed  tasteless  to  her.  She  said  to 
herself  that  one  must  be  very  happy  on  the  mountain,  that  an 
ox  might  crop  grass  in  a  field  but  that  goats  needed  room. 
When  M.  Seguin  noticed  that  his  goat  was  getting  lean,  he 
knew  that  something  was  the  matter  with  her,  but  he  did  not 
know  what  it  was.  She  said  to  him  that  she  was  pining  away, 
and  that  she  wished  to  go  into  the  mountain.  It  was  not  the 
grass  that  was  lacking ;  it  was  not  the  rope  that  was  too  short. 
M.  Seguin  told  her  that  the  wolf  would  eat  her,  but  she  said  she 
would  butt  him,  she  would  fight  with  him  all  night.  But  M. 
Seguin  said  he  would  save  her  in  spite  of  herself,  and  he  shut 
his  goat  into  a  stable  and  locked  the  door  securely.  But  he 
forgot  the  window,  and  the  goat  ran  away.  The  old  fir  trees 
welcomed  her.  The  chestnut  trees  caressed  her,  the  golden 
broom  smelled  sweet.  The  whole  mountain  received  her 
like  a  queen.  It  was  there  that  there  was  grass,  fine  and 
sweet!     And  the  wild  flowers  overflowed  with  juices!    She 


COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  VIU.  453 

wallowed  in  the  fallen  leaves;  she  ran  (courir)  through 
the  bushes ;  she  was  afraid  of  nothing.  If  the  torrents 
splashed  her  with  foam,  she  stretched  herself  out  on  a  rock 
and  dried  herself  in  the  sun.  Suddenly  it  was  evening.  The 
fields  disappeared  in  the  mist.  You  could  see  no  longer  any- 
thing but  the  smoke  of  M.  Seguin's  cottage.  There  was  a  howl, 
and  she  thought  of  the  wolf.  Then  M.  Seguin  blew  his  horn 
in  the  valley.  She  heard  it  and  had  a  mind  to  return,  but  she 
remembered  the  stake  and  the  rope,  and  thought  it  would  be 
better  to  stay.  There  was  a  noise  in  the  leaves,  and  turning 
round  she  saw  the  wolf.  There  he  was  on  his  haunches.  He 
knew  he  would  eat  her,  and  was  in  no  hurry.  She  remem- 
bered the  story  of  another  goat  of  M.  Seguin,  and  being  a 
brave  goat,  she  said  to  herself  that  she  would  not  let  herself 
be  eaten  at  once.  She  had  no  hope  of  killing  the  wolf,  but 
she  assumed  a  defensive  attitude.  The  fight  lasted  all  night. 
She  forced  the  wolf  to  retreat  more  than  ten  times.  The  stars 
danced  in  the  sky,  and  she  said  to  herself,  "  If  I  only  hold 
out  till  daylight!"  The  stars  died  out  on  the  horizon;  a 
hoarse  cock  crowed  in  the  valley  ;  the  wolf  ate  the  poor  little 
goat. 

EXERCISE  VIII. 

(La  patte  de  dindon,  pp.  416-19.) 

A»  1.  Do  you  need  a  lesson  from  me  1  2.  He  would  like  to 
cure  us  of  it.  3.  They  were  ten  years  old.  4.  We  had  a 
large  sum,  which  was  intended  to  pay  for  our  breakfast. 
5.  Bo  you  still  remember  his  name  1  6.  Their  name  is  Cou- 
ture. 7.  The  object  is  composed  of  what  is  called  a  tibia. 
8.  He  looked  as  if  he  were  walking.  9.  Will  the  fingers  open 
and  shut?  10.  How  can  you  make  it  move"?  11.  If  you  go 
to  the  theatre,  will  you  follow  the  development  of  the  drama  ? 
12.  A  dazzling  brightness  passed  before  our  eyes.  13.  Did 
you  think  you  were  present  at  a  miracle?  14.  You  are  older 
and  sharper  than  we.  15.  We  withdrew.  16.  Did  you  go 
away  tool  17.  We  shall  soon  learn  the  way  to  do  it. 
18.  What  fun  we  shall  have!  19.  Give  it  to  us,  we  beg  of 
you.  20.  Won't  you  give  it  to  us?  21.  We'll  give  you  ten 
cents  for  it.     22.  He  is  making  game  of  us.     23.  How  much 


454  COMPOSITION  EXERCISE   VIII. 

did  they  want  for  iti  24.  He  ran  after  us  again.  25.  How 
they  must  have  got  on  in  the  world !  26.  How  they  know 
the  human  heart !  27.  He  knows  himself  no  longer.  28.  Put 
a  cent  into  my  hand.  29.  He  is  a  business  man.  30.  Do 
not  rush  after  it.  31.  That  does  not  amuse  me  now  at  all. 
32.  Disenchantment  seizes  me.  33.  The  prospect  of  three 
weeks  of  dry  bread  did  not  amuse  me.  34.  These  traits  of 
character  will  not  awaken  again  in  you.  35.  People  have 
often  called  the  feelings  of  children  puerilities.  36.  The 
hearts  where  passions  grow  are  the  same.  37.  The  best  way 
of  guiding  a  boy  is  to  observe  him.  38.  It  is  useful  to  laugh 
at  one's  self  now  and  then.  39.  Sons  are  not  always  like 
their  fathers. 

B.  Ernest  was  at  school  on  a  Monday.  He  had  fifteen  cents 
which  he  had  brought  back  from  home  to  pay  for  his  breakfast. 
On  his  return  he  found  one  of  his  comrades  who  had  a  fine 
turkey's  foot.  When  his  comrade  said  to  him  to  come  and  see, 
he  ran  up.  His  comrade,  by  a  movement  of  his  hand,  was 
opening  and  closing  the  fingers  like  the  fingers  of  a  human 
hand.  He  stood  amazed  every  time  the  four  fingers  opened 
and  closed.  How  could  the  dead  foot  move?  The  comrade 
was  shrewder  than  he,  and  when  he  saw  Ernest's  great  enthu- 
siasm he  put  the  turkey's  foot  back  into  his  pocket.  Ernest 
could  stand  it  no  longer.  He  begged  his  comrade  to  give  him 
the  dead  foot.  His  comrade  told  him  to  be  gone.  "  If  you 
will  not  give  it  to  me,  will  you  sell  it  to  me  1 "  He  offered  his 
comrade  five  cents  for  it,  then  ten  cents,  and  then  twenty 
cents.  But  the  comrade  demanded  forty  cents.  After  a  few 
seconds  he  put  fifteen  cents  into  his  comrade's  hand,  and  wrote 
out  a  note  for  twenty-five  cents  for  the  remainder.  After  a 
couple  of  minutes  he  knew  the  secret  as  well  as  his  comrade. 
Eor  a  couple  of  minutes  it  amused  him  highly.  But  soon  it 
amused  him  no  longer.  Sadness  and  regret  came,  and  then 
bitterness  and  anger.  After  a  few  minutes  he  seized  the  tur- 
key's foot  and  threw  it  over  the  wall,  so  as  never  to  see  it  any 
more.  The  recollection  of  this  often  comes  back  to  him.  He 
finds  in  himself  again  the  child  with  the  turkey's  foot.  And 
that  turkey's  foot  has  often  been  of  great  service  to  him.  In 
the  midst  of  a  foolish  action,  he  stops  and  says  to  himself^ 
"  Will  you  always  be  the  same  ? " 


COMPOSITION   EXERCISE  IX.  455 

EXERCISE  IX. 

(Hortibus,  pp.  419-22.) 

A.  1.  It  was  a  holiday  at  the  school.  2.  The  hammers 
were  making  a  greater  noise  than  all  the  rest.  3.  They  rose 
up  to  listen.  4.  No  one  stopped  at  his  door.  5.  Are  you 
packing  your  trunk  1  6.  They  will  appear  every  fifteen 
minutes.  7.  If  he  were  to  show  the  tip  of  his  nose,  I  should 
close  the  door.  8.  Are  you  going  away"?  9.  Let  them  go 
away  too.  10.  We  are  not  waiting  for  the  doctor,  or  the 
nurse.  11.  The  father  came  in  circumspectly,  the  mother 
came  in  briskly,  the  little  girl  came  in  on  tiptoe.  12.  How 
long  has  it  pained  you?  13.  On  washing  days  the  mother 
used  to  make  hearth-cakes.  14.  Is  the  platform  in  the  college 
or  in  the  open  air?  15.  I  hear  hurried  steps.  16.  Let  us 
not  go  there.  1 7.  There  was  no  more  room  on  the  platform. 
18.  They  gazed  affectionately  on  their  child.  19.  Please  go 
and  see  who  are  there.  20.  The  colonel  had  a  hat  with  a 
plume.  21  The  speech  of  the  sous-pr^fet  was  on  a  bit  of 
paper  rolled  round  his  finger.  22.  We  could  not  hear  a  word 
of  it.  23.  It  was  only  a  monotonous  hum.  24.  The  certifi- 
cate was  pasted  inside.  25.  The  principal's  signature  was 
there.  26.  We  saw  the  academic  palm-wreath  in  the  form 
of  a  head-piece.  27.  Did  you  make  a  mistake  in  your  Latin 
prose?  28.  No,  my  paper  was  perfect.  29.  Your  paper  was 
bristling  with  corrections.  30.  Your  paper  contained  {con- 
tenir)  this  frightful  error — "hortibus."  31.  The  master 
underlined  it  three  times  with  red'ink.  32.  The  awful  word 
was  posted  on  the  wall.  33.  His  lips  moved,  he  called  his 
mother.  34.  Hortibus  had  vanished  (s^^vanouir).  35.  It  was 
in  the  land  of  dreams.  36.  Good-bye  to  Hortibus.  37.  Both 
have  come.  38.  The  winner  received  his  book.  39.  They  put 
the  wreath  on  his  brow.  40.  Are  you  better  ?  41.  Yes,  I  am 
much  better.  42.  The  open  air,  walks,  and  exercise  will  cure 
you,  but  above  all  no  Latin  prose. 

B.  Vacation  is  a  word  that  smells  as  sweet  as  a  bouquet  of 
flowers !  The  decorators  are  busy  putting  up  the  drapery. 
There  are  people  everywhere,  jostling  one  another  {se  bouscu- 
ler)  in  the  halls  and  stairways.  A  platform  has  been  erected 
for  the  distribution  of  the  prizes.     But  there  is  one  little  sick 


456  COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  X. 

boy  in  the  sick-ward  who  is  awaiting  some  one.  The  doctor 
comes  in  great  haste  and  goes  away,  and  the  nurse  also.  But 
they  are  not  the  ones  the  little  patient  is  waiting  for.  He  is 
awaiting  some  country-people — a  man,  a  woman,  and  a  young 
girl.  There  they  come  !  They  enter  the  sick-ward.  They 
clasp  his  hands  and  embrace  him.  They  ask  what  is  the 
matter  with  him.  He  had  had  a  heavy  feeling  in  his  head 
since  the  Latin  prose  paper.  But  it  would  soon  be  gone.  As 
they  chatted,  a  murmur  rose  from  the  platform  in  the  court. 
The  father  and  little  sister  went  down  to  it.  The  mother  and 
little  Tiennet  (Stevey)  stayed.  She  said  to  him  that  if  he 
slept  a  little  it  would  cure  him.  But  how  could  he  fall  asleep, 
with  the  hubbub  under  the  window !  The  platform  was  full. 
The  colonel  was  there,  and  the  sous-prSfet  in  his  dress-coat,  all 
embroidered  with  silver.  There  were  so  many  prizes, — three 
piles  of  books  and  a  mountain  of  wreaths !  The  brass-band 
blared  forth  and  everybody  applauded.  The  sous-prefet  rose, 
but  not  a  word  was  heard  of  his  speech.  Then  a  black  gown 
arose  with  his  sermon  in  his  hand.  He  hummed  away,  and 
the  mother  fell  asleep.  Tiennet  became  impatient.  Would 
he  have  the  Latin  prose  prize?  The  beautiful,  gilt-edged  book 
was  in  the  pile.  But  he  could  not  see  the  winner's  name.  And 
he  fell  asleep  too.  He  dreamed  that  he  had  made  a  frightful 
barbarism  in  his  Latin  prose,  and  that  another  had  won  the 
first  prize.  The  awful  word  "hortibus"  haunted  him.  It 
danced  before  him  in  a  thousand  forms  (multiplie  or  en  mille 
formes).  It  stuck  out  its  tongue  and  made  grimaces  at  him. 
But  when  Tiennet  opened  his  eyes,  there  was  no  more  ''horti- 
bus." The  father  and  little  sister  brought  up  the  prize  and 
laid  it  on  the  little  sick  boy's  bed.  The  doctor  came  too,  and 
said  the  boy  was  better,  the  wreath  on  the  brow  had  worked 
wonders,  the  open  air  would  complete  the  cure,  but,  said  he, 
"  no  Latin  prose  ! " 

EXERCISE  X. 

(Chagrin  d'un  vieux  forgat,  pp.  423-4.) 

A.  1.  Did  Yves  not  go  to  conduct  the  convicts?  2.  The 
convict  was  seventy  at  least.  3.  Whom  did  you  take  away 
with  you?  4.  Why  did  you  enter  into  conversation  with 
him  ?     5.  It  was  to  pass  the  time.     6.  They  did  not  have  bad 


COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  X.  457 

faces.  7.  Does  he  wear  spectacles  ?  8.  People  did  not  want 
anything  to  do  with  me.  9.  He  had  stolen  a  carter's  whip. 
10.  He  would  not  consent  to  listen  to  Yves.  11.  The  cage 
and  the  sparrow  were  his  most  precious  possessions.  12.  He 
had  tamed  the  sparrow  and  it  knew  his  voice.  13.  If  he  has 
to  build  a  cage  fit  for  the  journey,  he  will  procure  wood.  14. 
He  will  paint  it,  so  that  it  may  be  pretty.  15.  Do  you 
remember  the  very  words  of  Yvesi  16.  He  will  eat  coarse 
bread  like  any  other  bird.  17.  They  embarked  for  the 
journey.  18.  Will  that  be  of  any  use  to  him?  19.  You 
must  take  it  with  you.  20.  Big  tears  run  down  his  cheeks. 
21.  The  cage  door  opened.  22.  Was  the  bird  frightened? 
23.  The  poor  bird  struggled  and  died.  24.  It  was  carried 
away  in  the  wake  of  the  ship.  25.  He  applied  to  me.  26.  That 
would  never  occur  to  him.  27.  We  staid  silent  in  our  place. 
28.  Did  you  not  feel  dreadfully  alone?  29.  Tears  dimmed  their 
eight.  30.  Did  they  laugh  to  see  the  old  man  weep?  31. 
Will  you  not  keep  the  cage?  32.  This  cage  was  made  for  the 
little  bird.  33.  He  wished  to  leave  me  this  legacy.  34.  We 
did  not  wish  to  pain  the  old  man.  35.  He  seemed  to  despise 
the  thing. 

B.  The  transport-ship  was  about  to  sail  for  New  Caledonia, 
and  Yves  was  taking  some  convicts  to  it  with  his  gunboat. 
Amongst  the  convicts  was  an  old  man  who  had  a  sparrow  in 
a  cage.  He  had  been  arrested  for  the  fifth  or  sixth  time.  He 
had  to  eat  and  he  had  no  trade,  and  so  {par  consequent)  he 
had  stolen  a  bag  of  potatoes.  He  said  they  might  have  let 
him  die  in  France  instead  of  sending  him  away  off  there. 
He  had  obtained  permission  to  take  away  his  sparrow.  And 
then  he  had  got  wood  and  old  wire  and  green  paint,  and 
he  had  made  a  cage  for  the  sparrow.  The  sparrow  had  only 
the  dark-coloured  bread  of  the  prisons  to  eat,  but  he  seemed 
happy,  and  hopped  about  like  any  other  bird.  But  during 
the  passage  to  the  transport-ship  the  bird  flew  away  and  fell 
into  the  sea.  It  was  a  moment  of  sorrow  for  the  convict. 
He  saw  his  bird  struggle  and  die,  and  could  do  nothing  for  it. 
The  first  impulse  was  to  ask  for  help,  but  the  impulse  was 
arrested  by  the  consciousness  of  his  personal  degradation. 
Nobody  wovdd  have  pity  on  his  sparrow ;  nobody  would  listen 
to  his  request.     Who  would  stop  the  ship  to  pick  up  again  a 


458  COMPOSITION   EXERCISE  XI-XII. 

convict's  drowning  bird !  Then  he  watched  the  poor  little 
body  grow  more  distant  on  the  sea  foam,  and  he  felt  himself 
very  much  alone.  The  bird  was  no  longer  in  the  cage,  and  so 
he  handed  it  to  Yves,  who  had  listened  to  his  story.  And 
Yves,  not  wishing  to  seem  to  despise  the  thing  which  had  cost 
the  old  convict  so  much  work,  accepted  the  gift. 

EXERCISE  XI. 

(L'Avare,  pp.  425-7.) 

Harpagon  is  a  miser.  Valere  is  his  steward,  and  Maitre 
Jacques  is  his  cook  and  coachman.  The  miser  is  going  to 
give  a  supper,  and  has  invited  eight  or  ten  people.  He  wishes 
good  cheer,  but  does  not  wish  to  give  much  money.  He  thinks 
that  a  clever  man  can  make  good  cheer  with  little  money. 
Yalere,  the  steward,  says  the  same  thing.  Ten  people  have  been 
invited,  but  the  miser  says  that  if  there  is  enough  to  eat  for 
eight,  there  will  be  plenty  for  ten.  There  is  nothing  more  hurt- 
ful to  men  than  to  eat  to  excess.  Frugality  must  rule  in  the 
repasts  we  give,  and  one  must  remember  the  maxim,  "We 
should  eat  to  live,  and  not  live  to  eat."  Harpagon  will  have 
these  words  cut  in  letters  of  gold  on  his  mantel-piece.  Maitre 
Jacques  will  not  fill  the  table  with  soups,  entrees  and  roasts, 
but  with  those  things  of  which  people  eat  sparingly.  Then 
the  miser  addresses  the  coachman,  tells  him  to  clean  the 
carriage,  and  have  the  horses  ready  to  drive  to  the  fair.  But 
Harpagon  makes  the  poor  brutes  observe  such  strict  fasting 
that  they  cannot  walk.  Poor  Maitre  Jacques  has  pity  on  his 
neighbour.  It  breaks  his  heart  to  see  his  horses  suffer.  They 
cannot  drag  themselves  along,  and  he  has  not  the  heart  to 
whip  them. 

EXERCISE  XII. 

(Waterloo,  pp.  428-31). 

A.  1.  There  were  three  thousand  five  hundred  of  us.  2. 
The  light  cavalry  was  supporting  them.  3.  We  did  not 
wear  helmets.  4.  The  cavalry  descended  like  a  battering- 
ram  of  bronze,  so  to  speak.  5.  A  cloud  of  grape-shot  burst 
at  their  right.     6.  Do  you  hear  that  mighty  stamping?     7. 


COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  XIi.  459 

Nothing  like  it  will  ever  be  seen.  8.  Murat  had  been  at  the 
taking  of  the  redoubt  of  the  Moskowa,  but  he  was  lacking  at 
Waterloo.  9.  Something  like  these  stories  appears  in  the 
epics  of  another  age.  1 0.  The  infantry  was  taking  aim  at  the 
cavalry.  11.  The  English  listened  to  that  tide  rising.  12. 
Three  thousand  shouted,  ** Long  live  the  Emperor."  13.  There 
was  an  awful  noise  like  that  of  an  earthquake.  14.  We  have 
just  noticed  a  ditch.  15.  The  second  rank  forced  the  first 
into  the  gulf.  16.  The  horses  overturned  and  crushed  the 
riders.  17.  There  was  no  way  of  retreat.  18.  Fifteen  hun- 
dred men  were  buried  there.  19.  It  was  a  grave  into  which 
many  other  dead  bodies  were  thrown  on  the  day  after  the 
battle.  20.  Did  he  examine  the  ground?  21.  He  asked  a 
question  of  the  peasant.  22.  He  was  not  warned  by  the 
peasant.  23.  Napoleon's  end  came  from  a  peasant's  shake  of 
the  head.  24.  It  is  time  for  Napoleon  to  fall.  25.  Napoleon 
by  himself  counts  for  more  than  all  others.  26.  The  moral 
order,  like  the  material  order,  depends  on  principles. 

B.  There  were  eleven  hundred  and  ninety -seven  of  them, 
and  they  had  behind  them  one  hundred  and  eighty  lancers. 
At  nine  o'clock  the  bugles  sounded  and  all  the  bands  played. 
They  came  and  took  their  place  in  the  second  line,  where 
they  had  two  iron  wings,  Kellermann  on  the  left  and  Milhaud 
on  the  right.  Then  was  seen  a  great  sight.  All  that  cavalry 
began  to  move.  Like  one  man  it  came  down  the  hill  of  la 
Belle-Alliance,  disappeared  in  the  valley  and,  reappearing  on 
the  other  side,  ascended  the  dreadful  slope  of  Mont-Saint- 
Jean.  There  were  two  columns  of  them.  Like  two  great 
serpents  of  steel  they  stretched  out  towards  the  plateau. 
Nothing  like  it  was  ever  seen.  The  mass  had  become  a 
monster.  Through  a  great  smoke  you  could  see  a  pell-mell 
of  helmets,  swords,  and  of  the  rumps  of  horses,  and  above  them 
the  cuirasses,  like  the  scales  on  the  hydra.  It  was  like  a 
vision  of  Titans  climbing  Olympus.  Twenty-six  battalions  of 
infantry  were  waiting  for  the  twenty-six  squadrons  of  cavalry. 
The  infantry  could  not  see  the  cavalry,  but  it  could  hear  the 
noise  of  the  horses,  the  rattle  of  the  armour  and  the  clanking 
of  the  swords.  Then  suddenly  the  helmets,  the  trumpeters, 
the  standards  and  the  horses  appeared  on  the  crest  of  the 
plateau.     The  cuirassiers  arrived  at  the  crest,  and  suddenly 


460  COMPOSITION  EXERCISE  XII. 

they  saw  between  themselves  and  the  English  the  hollow  road 
of  Ohain.  It  was  a  frightful  ravine,  two  fathoms  deep. 
Hdrses  and  riders  fell  into  that  grave  and  crushed  one 
another.  When  the  abyss  was  full  of  men  and  horses,  the 
others  marched  on  them  and  passed  over.  Napoleon  did  not 
see  this  ravine  when  he  ordered  the  charge,  and  the  peasant 
of  whom  he  asked  the  question  replied  that  there  was  no 
hollow  road.  Why  was  it  not  possible  that  Napoleon  should 
win  the  battle  ?  Because  a  new  series  of  facts  was  preparing. 
The  moment  had  come  for  that  man  to  fall.  His  weight  was 
disturbing  the  equilibrium  of  human  destiny.  Reeking  blood, 
cemeteries,  mothers'  tears  were  complaining.  Napoleon's  fall 
was  settled. 


VOCABULARY. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


a  [a],  3  sg.  pres.  indie,  avoir. 

k  [a],  to,  towards,  at,  for,  in,  into, 
around,  by,  with,  from  ;  —  voire 
montre,  by  your  watch. 

abaisser  [abese],  to  lower  ;  s' — ,  to 
lower  one's  self,  fall,  sink,  be 
lowered. 

abandonner  [aba done],  to  aban- 
don, forsake. 

abattre  [abatr],  to  throw  down, 
knock  down,  cast  down,  dis- 
hearten ;  abattu,  p.p.,  disheart- 
ened, discouraged,  depressed. 

ab^c^daire  [abesede :  r],  m. ,  primer, 
spelling-book. 

abime  [abi:m],  m.,  abyss. 

abondamment  [abodama],  abun- 
dantly. 

abondant  [aboda],  abundant. 

abord  (d')  [d  aboir],  at  first,  first 
(of  all),  at  the  outset. 

abreuver  [abroeve],  to  water,  fill, 
soak. 

abri  [abri],  m.,  shelter,  cover;  d 
r —  de,  in  the  shelter  of. 

abriter  [abrite],  to  shelter,  shield. 

absorber  [apsorbe],  to  absorb,  en- 
gross. 

ab^urde  [apsyrd],  absurd. 

abuser  [abyze],  to  make  a  bad  use 
(of,  de),  abuse. 

acad^mique  [akademik],  academic. 

accent  [aksa],  m.,  accent,  tone. 

accepter  [aksepte],  to  accept. 

accident  [aksida],  m.,  accident, 
incident. 

acclimater  [aklimate],  to  acclima- 
tize ;  a' — ,  to  become  acclima- 
tized. 


accompag^ner  [akopape],  to  ac- 
company. 

accorder  [akorde],  to  grant,  con- 
cede. 

accoster  [akoste],  to  come  along- 
side (nav. ). 

accoupler  [akuple],  to  couple, 
fasten. 

accourir  [akuriir],  §  164,  to  run  or 
hasten  up ;  run  or  hasten  to 
one's  aid. 

accourut  [akury],  3  sg.  p.  def. 
accourir. 

accoutumer  [akutyme],  to  accus- 
tom, habituate. 

accusateur  [akyzatoeir],  accusing. 

accuser  [akyze],  to  accuse,  blame, 
reproach. 

achat  [aja],  m.,  purchase. 

acheter  [ajte],  §  158,  to  buy,  pur- 
chase. 

acheminer  (s*)  [s  ajmine],  to  take 
one's  way,  set  out. 

achever  [ajve],  §  158,  to  finish, 
complete  ;  —  de  +  infin.,  to 
finish. 

acier  [asje],  m. ,  steel. 

acqu^rir  [akeriir],  §  162,  to  ac- 
quire. 

acquis  [aki],  p.p.  acqudrir. 

acteur  [aktoeir],  m.,  actor. 

action  [aksjo],  f. ,  action. 

actuellement  [aktqelma],  now,  at 
this  very  time. 

addition  [adisjo],  f. ,  bill,  reckoning. 

adieu  [adj0],  m.,  good-bye,  fare- 
well. 

adjurer  [adsyre],  to  adjure,  be- 
seech. 

admettre  [admetr],  §  198,  to  admit. 


461 


462 


VOCABULARY. 


admirablement  [admirablema],  ad- 
mirably. 

admirer  [admire],  to  admire. 

admission  [admisjo],  L,  admit- 
tance. 

adosser  (s')  [s  adose],  to  lean  one's 
back  (against,  d,  contre). 

adresse  [adres],  f.,  address,  skill, 
dexterity. 

adresser  [adrese],  to  address; 
s' — ,  to. address  one's  self,  be 
addressed  or  directed,  apply, 
have  recourse. 

adversaire  [  adverse  :r],  m.,  ad- 
versary, opponent. 

a£faire  [afeir],  f.,  affair,  business, 
matter  ;  pi. ,  things,  business. 

affectueux  [afekti{0],  affectionate. 

affiche  [afij],  f . ,  placard,  poster. 

afficher  [  afije  ],  to  post  up. 

affliger  [aflise],  §  156 ;  to  afflict, 
vex,  grieve ;  s' — ,  to  grieve,  be 
troubled,  be  sorrowful,  fret. 

affreux  [afr0],  frightful,  horrible. 

aj&n  de  [af  £  da]  +  infin. ,  in  order  to. 

afin  que  [afs  ko],  in  order  that, 
that  (takes  subjunctive). 

kge  [a 1 3],  m.,  age,  century,  time; 
en  —  de,  of  an  age  to  ;  quel  — 
a-t-il  ?,  how  old  is  he  ? 

kgi  [ase],  aged,  old. 

agile  [asil],  nimble,  swift. 

agir  [asiir],  to  act,  operate,  work, 
move,  manage. 

agiter  (s')  [s  asite],  to  stir,  move, 
be  or  grow  restless. 

agneau  [ajio],  m.,  lamb. 

agreable  [  agreabl  ],  agreeable, 
pleasant. 

ah  !  [a  or  a :],  ah  !,  hah  !,  oh  ! 

ai  [e],  1  sg.  pres.  ind.  avoir. 

aide  [eid],  m.,  helper;  — de  camp, 
aide-de-camp. 

aider  [ede],  to  aid,  help,  assist. 

aie  [e],  1  sg.  pres.  subj.  and  2  sg. 
impve.  avoir. 

aigu  [egy],  acute ;  shrill,  pene- 
trating. 

aile  [el],  f.,  wing. 

aimable  [cmabl],  kind,  amiable. 


aimer  [erne],  to  love,  like ;  —  wiewa;, 
to  prefer. 

ain^  [ene],  eldest. 

ainsi  [esi],  thus,  so ;  —  que,  as, 
just  as  ;  pour  —  dire,  so  to  say. 

air  [eir],  m.,  air,  atmosphere  ;  air, 
look,  appearance  ',dV  — ,  en  V  — , 
in  the  air;  le  grand  — ,  the  open 
air ;  en  plein  — ,  in  the  open  air  ; 
avoir  V  —  de,  to  seem  to. 

airain  [ers],  m. ,  brass,  bronze. 

aise  [e:z],  f.,  gladness  ;  ease,  con- 
venience ;  d  ton  — ,  comfortably, 
at  your  ease,  just  as  you  like, 
suit  yourself. 

aise  [eze],  easy. 

aisement  [ezema],  easily. 

ait  [e],  3  sg.  pres.  subj.  avoir. 

ajouter  [asute],  to  add.     '^ 

Albret  (d')  [d  albre];  Henri  — , 
father  of  Henry  IV.  of  France. 

Allah[alla],m.,  Allah. 

allemand  [alma],  adj.,  German; 
V — ,  m.,  German  (the  language). 

aller[ale],  §  160,  to  go  ;  —-t- infin., 
to  go  to,  go  and ',  y —  de  bon  coeur, 
to  go  at  (a  thing)  with  spirit  ; 
s'en  — ,  to  go  away,  depart,  set 
out ;  allez-vous-en,  go  away ; 
qu'elle  s'en  aille!,  let  her  go 
(away)  ! ;  allons !,  come  !,  cour- 
age !,  up  !,  arise  ! ;  —  a  la  ren- 
contre de,  to  go  to  meet ;  —  cher- 
cher,  go  for,  go  and  get ;  — 
trouver,  go  and  find,  go  to;  — 
(of  garments) ,  fit. 

allonger  [alose],  §  156,  to  lengthen^ 
stretch  out ;  —  un  coup,  to  deal' 
or  administer  a  blow;  s' — ,  to 
stretch  out,  extend. 

allumer  [alyme],  to.  light. 

alors  [aloir],  then. 

Alsace  [alzas],  n.  pr,  f.,  Alsatia. 

alternatif  [alternatif],  alternate, 
alternating. 

amadou  [amadu],  m. ,  tinder, 
punk  ;  habines  d"  — ,  red  lips  (of 
animals). 

ambition  [a  bis  jo],  f.,  ambition. 

ame  [a: m],  f.,  soul,  heart. 

amener  [amne]  ,§158,  to  bring,  lead. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


463 


am^ricain  [amerikf],  American. 

amertume  [amertym],  f.,  bitter- 
ness. 

ami  [ami],  m. ,  friend ;  m(m  — , 
my  good  fellow. 

amie  [ami],  f.,  friend,  loved  one. 

amicaJ  [amikal],  friendly. 

amiraute  [amirote],  f.,  admiralty. 

amitie  [amitje],  f.,  friendship, 
affection. 

amour  [amuir],  m.  in  sing,  and 
f .  in  pi. ,  love,  aflfection  ;  un  — 
de  petite  chivref  a  dear  little 
goat. 

amoureux  [amur0],  enamoured,  in 
love  ;  —  d  la  folie,  madly  in 
love. 

amusant  [amyza],  amusing. 

amusement  [amy zma],  m.,  amuse- 
ment. 

amuser  [amyze],  to  amuse  ;  «'  — , 
to  amuse  or  enjoy  one's  self, 
play. 

an  [d],  m.,  year;  avoir  quarante 
— «,  to  be  forty  years  old,  forty 
years  of  age ;  le  jour  de  VAn^ 
New  Year's  day. 

ancien  [asje],  ancient, old;  former, 
un  — ,  m. ,  an  ancient. 

Ane  [am],  m.,  ass,  donkey. 

anecdote  [anegdot],  f.,  anecdote. 

Angelas  [ajelys],  m.,  Angelus  (a 
prayer  in  honour  of  the  Incarna- 
tion), ringing  bell  for  ditto. 

anglais  [ogle],  adj. ,  English ;  n.  m. , 
Englishman ;  V — ,  m. ,  English. 

anglaise  [agleiz],  f.,  running- 
hand  (of  writing). 

angle  [a:gl],  m.,  angle,  corner. 

animal  [animal], m., animal,  beast. 

animer  (s')  [s  anime],  to  become 
animated,  become  lively. 

anneau  [ano],  m.,  ring. 

annee  [ane],  f. ,  year,  twelvemonth ; 
/' —  dernUre,  last  year. 

annoncer  [anose],  §  156,  to  an- 
nounce, usher  in ;  s' — ,  to  an- 
nounce one's  self,  be  indicated, 
be  evident. 

annotation  [anotasjo],  £.,  annota- 
tion, note. 


antichambre  [atijaibr],  f.,  ante- 
chamber. 

antique  [atik],  ancient. 

aout  [u],  m. ,  August. 

apercevoir  [apersavwair],  §  213, 
to  perceive,  see,  observe,  notice ; 
s — ,  ditto. 

aper^oit  [apcrswa],  3  sg.  pres.  in- 
die, apercevoir. 

apergu  [apersy],  p.p.  apercevoir. 

aper^ut  [apersy],  3  sg.  p.  def. 
apercevoir. 

apotre  [apoitr],  m.,  apostle. 

apparaitre  [apareitr],  §  188,  to 
appear. 

appartement[apart8ma],m. , apart- 
ments, suite  of  rooms. 

appartenir  [apart9ni:r],  §  177,  to 
belong  (to,  d). 

appel  [apel],  m. ,  call. 

appeler  [aple],  §  158,  to  call ;  call 
in,  summon  ;  name  ;  «' — ,  to  be 
called,  named ;  comment  s'ap- 
pelle-t-il?,  what  is  his  name?;  il 
s'appelle  Jean  Bart,  his  name  is 
Jean  Bart. 

applaudir  [aplodiir],  to  applaud, 
clap  (the  hands). 

appliquer  [aplike],  to  apply ;  a'—, 
to  apply  one's  self,  work,  set  to 
work,  take  pains. 

apporter  [aporte],  to  bring  (to.  A). 

apprendre  [aprd:dr],  §  202,  to 
learn  ;  teach. 

apprenti  [aprati],  m.,  apprentice. 

apprdter  [aprete],  to  prepare,  get 
ready. 

apprivoiser  [aprivwaze],  to  tame 
(animals). 

approche  [aproj],  f.,  approach. 

approcher  [aproje],  intr.,  to  ap- 
proach, draw  near;  — de,  ditto; 
«' — ,  to  approach,  draw  near  (to. 
de). 

appuyer  [apt^ije],  §  157,  to  prop, 
support,  lean,  rest,  press  on ; 
appuyd,  p.p.,  leaning  or  sup- 
ported (on,  d) ;  «' — ,  to  support 
one's  self,  lean. 

apr^s  [apre],  after,  next  (to) ;  adv., 
afterwards,  after. 


464 


VOCABULARY. 


apr^s-demain  [apre  dme],  the  day 
after  to-morrow. 

apres-midi  [apre  midi],  m.  f. ,  after- 
noon. 

aquilon  [akilo],  m.,  north-wind. 

arabe  [arab],  Arabian  ;  Arabe,  m., 
(an)  Arabian. 

Arable  [arabi],  f.,  Arabia. 

arbre  [arbr],  m.,  tree. 

arbuste  [arbyst],  m.,  shrub. 

Arc  de  Triomphe  [ark  da  trio  if], 
name  of  an  arch  in  Paris. 

ar^on  [arso],  m.,  saddle-bow. 

ardent  [arda],  fiery,  eager,  intense. 

ardeur  [ardceir],  f.,  heat,  burning 
heat. 

argent  [arsa],  m.,  silver,  money. 

argument  [argyma],  m. ,  argument. 

arithmetique  [aritraetik],  f.,  arith- 
metic. 

arme  [arm],  f. ,  arm,  weapon ;  aux 
— s  !  to  arms ! 

armee  [arme],  f.,  army. 

armer  [arme],  to  arm,  equip,  fit 
out,  provide  ;  s' — ,  to  arm,  fort- 
ify, secure  one's  self. 

armoire  [armwair],  f.,  cupboard, 
clothes-press. 

Arnault  [arno],  French  author,  b. 
1766,  d.  1834. 

arracher  [araje],  to  pull  out,  snatch 
(from),  extract  (a  tooth). 

arranger  [arose],  §  156,  to  arrange. 

arreter  [arete],  to  stop,  delay, 
stay,  check,  arrest ;  «' — ,  to 
stop,  pause,  give  heed  (to,  a); 
du  monde  arrStS,  people  standing. 

arri^re  [arjeir],  m.,  back  part; 
en — ,  back(wards). 

arriver  [arive],  to  arrive  (at,  d, 
dansy  sur) ;  come,  come  to,  come 
up ;  happen,  occur  ;  les  voila  qui 
arrivent,  see  themcoming(there). 

arroser  [aroze],  to  sprinkle,  water 
(a  garden,  etc. ). 

article  [artikl],  m. ,  article. 

articuler  [artikylej,  to  articulate, 
utter. 

artillerie  [artijri],  f.,  artillery. 

as  [a],  2  3g.  pres.  indie,  avoir. 


ascension  [asasjo],  f.,  ascension) 
la  fite  de  V Ascension,  Ascension 
day. 

assassiner  [asasine],  to  assassin- 
ate, murder. 

asseoir(s')  [s  aswair],  §  215,  to  sit 
down,  seat  one's  self,  be  seated. 

asseyant(s')  [s  aseja],  pres.  part. 
s'asseoir. 

assez  [ase],  enough,  sufficiently; 
pretty,  rather,  quite,  very?  — 
ban,  good  enough. 

assied(s')  [s  asje],  3  sg.  pres.  indie. 
s'asseoir. 

assiette  [asjet],  f.,  plate. 

assis  [asi],  p.p.  s'asseoir,  seated, 
sitting. 

assistant  [asista],  m.,  person  pres- 
ent, bystander. 

assister  [asiste],  to  be  present  (at, 
d),  look  upon. 

assit(s')  [s  asi],  3  sg.  past  def. 
s'asseoir. 

associe  [asosje],  m. ,  partner. 

assommer  [asome],  to  knock  down, 
beat  to  death. 

assomption  [asopsjo],  f.,  assump- 
tion ;  lafSte  de  l' Assomption,  As- 
sumption day. 

assujettir  [asysetiir],  to  subdue, 
enthral,  subject. 

assurer  [asyre],  to  assure. 

astracan  [astraka],  astrakhan  (a 
kind  of  fur). 

attacher  [ataje],  to  fasten,  tie, 
make  fast. 

attendre  [ataidr],  §210,  to  wait; 
wait  for,  expect. 

attentif  [atatif],  attentive. 

attention  [atasjo],  1,  attention; 
/aire  — ,  to  pay  attention. 

attentivement  [atativma],  atten- 
tively. 

attestation  [atestasjo],  f.,  certifi- 
cate. 

attirail  [atiraij],  m.,  apparatus, 
gear,  paraphernalia. 

attirer  [atire],  to  attract,  draw. 

attrait  [atre],  m.,  attraction, 
charm. 

au  [o],  contr.  oid-\-le. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


465 


aube  [oib],  f,,  dawn. 

aubepine  [obepin],  f.,  hawthorn. 

auberge  [obers],  f.,  inn. 

aubergiste  [obersist],  m.,  inn- 
keeper. 

aucun  [okce],  any,  no ;  ne .  .  .  — , 
no,  none,  no  one. 

au-dessus  [odsy],  above;  —  de, 
above. 

audience  [odja:s],  f.,  audience, 
interview. 

Aug^ste  [ogyst],  m.,  Augustus. 

aujourd'hui  [ojurdqi],  to-day,  now ; 

—  en  huit,  a  week  from  to-day, 
auparavant  [oparava],  adv.,   be- 
fore. 

aupr^s  de  [oprs  da],  into  the  pres- 
ence of,  to. 
auquel  [okel],  contr.  of  d  +  lequel. 
aura  [ora],  3  sg.  fut.  avoir. 
aurai  [ore],  1  sg.  fut.  avoir. 
auraient  [ore],  3  pi.  condl.  avoir  ; 

—  eu  (obs.  form),  would  have, 
aurais  [ore],  1  sg.  condl.  avoir. 
aurait  [ore],  3  sg.  condl.  avoir. 
auras  [ora],  2  sg.  fut.  indie,  avoir. 
aurez  [ore],  2  pi.  fut.  avoir. 
auriez  [orje],  2  pi.  condl.  avoir. 
auront  [oro],  3  pi.  fut.  avoir. 
ausculter  [oskylte],  to  auscultate, 

sound  (lungs,  etc.). 
aussi  [osi],  too,  also,  likewise  ;   as 
(in  comparison) ;  —  bien,  besides ; 

—  Men  que,  as  well  as. 
aussitot  [osito],  immediately,forth- 

with,  at  once. 

austbre  [oste:r],  austere,  severe, 
rigorous. 

autant  [ota],  as  or  so  much,  as  or 
so  many ;  —  de,  ditto  ;  d'  —  pltLS, 
the  more  so ;  bien  — ,  quite  as 
much. 

automne  [oton],  m. ,  autumn ; 
en  — ,  in  autumn. 

autour  de  [otu  i  r  da],  prep. ,  around, 
round. 

autre  [otr],  other ;  les  — «,  others, 
the  others,  other  people  ;  d' — «, 
others ;  Vun  et  V — ,  both  ;  lea 
uns  les  — «,  one  another,  both, 
all ;  noua  — «  Franfaist  we 
80 


Frenchmen  ;  bien  —  cJiose,  some- 
thing very  different. 

autrefois  [otrofwa],  formerly,  once. 

autrement  [otroma],  otherwise ; 
—  encornees  que  toi,  with  horns 
very  different  from  yours. 

aux  [o],  contr.  of  d  +  les. 

avaient  [ave],  3  pi.  impf.  indie. 
avoir. 

avait  [ave],  3  sg.  impf.  indie 
avoir. 

avance  [avQ :  s],  f . ,  advance ;  par — , 
beforehand. 

avancer  [a vase],  §  156,  to  advance, 
forward  ;  «' — ,  to  advance,  move 
forward ;  avanc^y  advanced ; 
proficient. 

avant  [ava],  before ;  en  — ,  for- 
ward ;  la  tite  en  — ,  head  first, 
head  foremost ;  —  de,  before. 

avant  que  [ava  ka],  conj.  •\-  subj., 
before. 

avare  [avair],  m.,  miser;  VAvart^ 
a  comedy  by  Moli^re. 

avec  [avek],  with;  —  le  temps 
quit  fait,  in  such  weather  as 
this. 

avenir  [avniir],  m.,  future. 

aventure  [avatyzr],  f.,  adventure; 
d' — ,  by  chance. 

aventurer  (s')  [s  ava  tyre],  to  ven- 
ture. 

avenue  [avny],  f . ,  avenue. 

avertir  [avertiir],  to  warn,  in- 
form ;  averti,  warned,  put  on 
one's  guard. 

avez  [ave],  2  sg.  pres.  indie. ,  avoir. 

aviser  [avize],  to  consider,  take 
counsel. 

avoir  [avwair],  §  154,  to  have;  ob- 
tain, receive,  get;  y — ,  impers., 
il  y  a,  there  is,  there  are  ;  it  p 
avait,  there  was,  etc. ;  ily  a  huit 
jours,  a  week  ago  ;  il  y  eut,  there 
was,  etc.  ;  il  eut  le  moulin,  he 
obtained,  received,  the  mill; 
cet  enfant  a  quelque  chose,  there 
is  something  the  matter  with 
that  child ;  qu'est-ce  que  voua 
avez  ?,  what  is  the  matter  with 
you?;  il  a  dix  ans,  he  is  ten 


466 


VOCABULARY. 


years  old,  ten  years  of  age;  vous 
n'avez  qu'd  purler,  you  have  only 
to  speak ;  —  raison,  to  be  (in  the) 
right ;  en  —  d,  be  angry  with. 

avons  [avo],  1  pi.  pres.  indie. 
avoir. 

avouer  [avwe],  to  confess,  declare, 
avow,  acknowledge. 

avril  [avril],  m. ,  April. 

ayant  [eja],  pres.  part,  avoir. 

ayez  [eje],  2  pi.  impve.  avoir. 

ayons  [ejo],  1  pi.  pres.  subj.  avoir. 

B. 

babine  [babin],  f . ,  lip  (of  animals) ; 
— s  d'arnadou,  red  lips. 

babiole  [babjol],  f.,  toy,  trinket. 

bah  I  [ba],  pooh  !  pshaw  ! 

baigner  [bejie],  tr.  to  bathe,  lave; 
se  — ,  to  bathe  (intr.). 

baiser  [beze],  to  kiss. 

baiser  [beze],  m.,  kiss. 

baisser  [bese],  to  lower,  let  down, 
hang  (down) ;  —  la  tSte,  bow 
down,  hang  one's  head ;  se  — , 
to  stoop  down,  stoop. 

balancer  [balase],§  156,  to  balance, 
swing,  wave  ;  se  — ,  intr. ,  to 
swing,  rock,  sway. 

banane  [banan],  f.,  banana. 

banc  [ba],  m.,  bench,  seat. 

bander  [bade],  to  bind  up. 

banque  [baik],  f.,  bank. 

banquier  [bakje],  m.,  banker. 

barbarisme  [barbarism],  m.,  bar- 
barism. 

barbiche  [barbij],  f. ,  tuft  of  beard, 
tufted  beard. 

barrer  [bare],  to  bar,  obstruct, 
block. 

Bart  (Jean)  [so  bair],  famous 
French  seaman,  b.  at  Dunkirk 
1651,  d.  1702. 

bas  [ba],  low;  Id  — ,  over  there, 
yonder ;  tout  — ,  in  an  under- 
tone, to  one's  self,  softly, 
silently ;  en  — ,  below,  at  the 
bottom,  down  (below),  down 
Btairs ;  d'en  — ,  from  down  be- 
low. 


Bas-Canada  [ba  kanada],  m.. 
Lower  Canada. 

Bastille  [bastiij],  f.,  Bastile. 

bataille  [bataij],  1,  battle. 

bataillon  [batajo],  m.,  battalion, 
squadron. 

bateau  [bato],  m.,  boat;  se  pro- 
mener  en  — ,  to  go  for  a  boat- 
ride,  row,  sail  (in  a  boat). 

bdtiment  [batima],  m.,  building, 
edifice ;  ship,  vessel. 

batir  [batiir],  to  build. 

baton  [bato],  m.,  stick;  stroke 
(in  learning  to  write) ;  coup  de — , 
blow  with  a  stick. 

batterie  [batri],  f. ,  battery  (milit. ). 

battre  [batr],  §  180,  to  beat,  strike; 
thresh ;  —  des  mains,  clap  the 
hands  ;  —  le  briquet,  to  strike  a 
light  with  flint  and  steel ;  battu, 
beaten,  wrought ;  se  — ,  to  fight ; 
hattant,  swinging,  swinging  open, 
flapping. 

bavarder  [bavarde],  to  babble, 
prattle,  gossip. 

b^ant  [bea],  gaping. 

beau,  bel,  belle,  pi.  beaux,  belles 
[bo,  bel,  bel,  bo,  bel],  beautiful, 
handsome,  fine ;  au  —  milieu,  in 
the  very  midst;  il/ait  —  (temps), 
it  is  fine. 

beaucoup  [boku],  much,  a  great 
deal,  very  much,  many,  very 
many,  a  great  many ;  —  de, 
ditto. 

Bee  [bek],  proper  name. 

becher  [beje],  to  dig,  delve. 

becqueter  [bekte],  §  158,  to  peck. 

becqu^e  [beke],  f.,  billful. 

bel  [bel],  see  beau. 

belier [belje],  m.,  ram;  battering- 
ram. 

belle  [bel],  see  beau. 

benediction  [benediksjo],  f. ,  bene- 
diction. 

benir  [beniir],  §  163,  to  bless. 

ber^ant  [bersa],  soothing,  som- 
niferous. 

bercer  [berse],  §  156,  to  rock,  lull 
to  sleep. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


467 


berger  [berse],  m. ,  shepherd ; 
chien  de  — ,  shepherd's  dog. 

Berlin  [berls],  m.,  Berlin. 

besoin  [bazwe],  m.,  need,  neces- 
sity ;  avoir  —  de,  to  need,  be  in 
need  of ;  vous  avez  —  qtie  je  vous 
aide,  you  need  my  help ;  aussi 
bien  noiLS  fera-t-il  — ,  then  be- 
sides we  shall  need  him. 

bete  [belt],  f. ,  beast,  brute,  animal. 

bete  [be:t],  stupid. 

betise  [betiiz],  f.,  stupidity,  folly. 

bibliotheque  [bibliote :  k],f. , library. 

bicyclette  [bisiklet],  f.,  bicycle. 

bien  [bje],  well,  very,  indeed,  real- 
ly, I  am  sure,  surely,  of  course, 
quite  ;  —  plus,  much  more  ;  fai 

—  le  temps,  I  have  plenty  of  time ; 
itre  — ,  to  be  well,  be  well  off,  be 
comfortable,  be  happy ;  —  que 
( -f  subj. ),  though,  although  ;  ou 
— ,  or  indeed,  or  on  the  contrary ; 

—  de,  much,  a  great  deal  of. 
bien  [bj?],  m.,  good. 

biens  [bje],  m.  pi.,  estate,  prop- 
erty, goods,  wealth,  possessions ; 
blessings. 

bientot  [bje to],  soon,  shortly,  pre- 
sently. 

bienvenu  [bj?vny],  adj.,  welcome; 
itre  — ,  to  be  welcome. 

billet  [bije],  m.,  note,  letter ;  pro- 
missory note;  ticket;  — d'erUr^e, 
ticket  (of  admission). 

bique  [bik],  f.,  she-goat. 

bise  [bi:z],  f.,  north  wind. 

bizarre  [biza:r],  odd,  singular, 
strange. 

blanc  [bla],  white;  le  — ,  n.  m., 
the  white. 

Blanche  [bla: J],  pr.  n.  f.,  Blanche. 

Blanquette  [blaket],  f.,  'Whitey.' 

ble  [ble],  m. ,  wheat,  wheat-field. 

bleme  [bleim],  pale,  pallid. 

blesser  [blese],  to  wound. 

blessure  [blesyir],  f.,  wound. 

bleu  [bl0],  blue. 

bloquer  [bloke],  to  blockade. 

Bliichcr  [  blykeir  or  bly|e:r  ], 
Prussian  general,  ally  of  Wel- 
lington at  Waterloo. 


boeuf  [beef],  m. ,  ox. 

boire  [bwair],  §  181,  to  drink ;  don- 
ner  pour  — ,  to  give  a  gratuity,  a 
tip  (colloq. ). 

bois  [bwa],  m.,  wood(s),  forest. 

bois  de  Boulogne  [bwo  da  buloji], 
m.,  name  of  a  park  in  the 
suburbs  of  Paris. 

boiserie  [bwazri],  f.,  wainscoting. 

boite  [bwa It],  f.,  box. 

bon  [bo],  good  ;  kind ;  sentir  — , 
to  smell  sweet. 

Bonaparte  [bonapart],  (Napoleon) 
Bonaparte. 

bonbon  [b5b5],  m. ,  bonbon,  candy. 

bond  [bo],  m.,  bound,  skip. 

bondissement  [bodisma],  m., 
bounding,  leaping. 

bonheur  [bonce :r],  m.,  happiness; 
good  fortune,  (good)  luck. 

bonjour  [bo3u:r],  m.,  good  nam- 
ing, good  day. 

bonne  [bon],  f.,  maid,  servant, 
nursery-maid. 

bonnet  [bone],  m. ,  cap. 

bonsoir  [boswair],  m.,  good  even- 
ing. 

bont^  [bote],  f . ,  goodness ;  — 
divine  !,  goodness  gracious  ! 

bord  [bo:r],  m.,  shore,  bank, 
margin,  edge ;  board  (nav. ) ; 
d  —  de,  on  board  of. 

bomer  [borne],  to  limit ;  se  — ,  to 
be  limited. 

botte  [bot],  f. ,  boot. 

better  [bote],  to  furnish  with  boots; 
hottd,hootedi,  with  boots  on ;  "Le 
ChatBottS,"  "Puss  in  Boots;"  se 
— ,  to  put  on  one's  boots. 

bouc  [buk],  m. ,  he-goat. 

bouche  [bu j],  f. ,  mouth  ;  d  la  — , 
in  one's  mouth. 

boucher  [buje],  to  stop,  stop  up. 

boue  [bu],  f.,  mud,  mire. 

bouger  [buse],  §  156,  intr.,  to  stir, 
budge. 

boulanger  [bula.^e],  m.,  baker. 

bouleverser  [bulverse],  to  over- 
throw, overturn,  upset,  agitate. 

bouquet  [buke],  m.,  nosegay, 
bouquet. 


468 


VOCABULARY. 


bourdonner  [burdone],  to  buzz, 
hum. 

bourrer  [bure],  to  stuff,  fill. 

bousculade  [buskylad],f.,  jostling, 
hustling,  confusion. 

bout  [bu],  m.,  end,  tip;  edge, 
extremity ;  au  —  de,  at  the  end 
of. 

boutique  [butik],  1,  shop. 

branche  [brdij],  f.,  branch. 

brandir  [brddiir],  to  brandish. 

bras  [bra],  m.,  arm. 

brave  [bra  i  v],  brave,  gallant ;  good, 
kind,  honest,  worthy. 

bravement  [bravma],  bravely, 
courageously. 

braver  [brave],  to  defy,  brave. 

breche  [brej],  f. ,  breach. 

brigade  [brigad],  f.,  brigade. 

brigand  [briga],  m.,  brigand, 
thief. 

briller  [brije],  to  shine,  sparkle. 

brin  [bri],  m. ,  blade,  sprig. 

briquet  [brike],  m. ,  steel  (for  strik- 
ing a  light) ;  hattre  le  — ,  to 
strike  a  light. 

brise  [bri:z],  f.,  breeze. 

briser  [brize],  to  break,  break  or 
dash  to  pieces,  shatter. 

broder  [brode],  to  embroider; 
brodS,  p.  part.,  embroidered. 

brodequin  [brodke],  m.,  (laced-) 
boot. 

bronze  [broiz],  m.,  bronze. 

brosse  [bros],  f.,  brush. 

brosser  [brose],  to  brush. 

brouillard  [brujair],  m.,  fog,  mist, 
haze. 

brouiller  [bruje],  to  confuse;  be- 
dim (the  sight). 

broussailles  [brusa  i j],  f.  pi. ,  brush- 
wood, bushes. 

brouter  [brute],  to  browse. 

broyer  [brwoje],  §  157,  to  grind, 
crush  to  pieces. 

bruit  [brt{i],  m. ,  noise,  sound ; 
fame,  reputation  ;faire  tantde — , 
to  attract  so  much  attention. 

br&lant  [bryla],  burning  hot. 

briller  [bryle],  to  burn. 

brume  [brym],  f.,  fog,  mist,  haze. 


brusque  [brysk],  blunt, 
brusquement  [bryskma],  bluntly, 

roughly,  abruptly ;  suddenly, 
brutalement  [brytalma],  brutally, 

rudely. 
bruyere[bryje:r],f.,heath,heather. 
bu  [by],  p.  part,  boire. 
buissiere   [bqisjeir],    f.,    thicket, 

bush. 
buisson  [bqiso],  m.,  bush,  thicket, 
bureau  [byro],  m.,  office, 
but  [byt  or  by],  object,  end,  goal ; 

arriver  a  son  — ,  attain  his  ob- 

ject. 
buvais  [b3rvre],  1  sg.  impf.  indie 

boire. 


qsL  [sa],  (for  cela)  that. 

9'a  6t6  [s  a  ete],  for  ga  or  ce  a  4U. 

K^k  [sa],  here ;  —  et  Id,  here  and 
there,  up  and  down,  hither  and 
thither. 

cabinet  [kabine],  m.,  cabinet ; 
office,  private  office. 

cabrer  (se)  [s9  kabre],  intr.  to 
rear. 

cachemire  [kajmiir],  m.,  cash- 
mere. 

cacher  [kaje],  to  hide,  conceal ; 
se  — ,  to  hide  one's  self. 

cadavre  [kada:vr],  m.,  corpse, 
dead  body. 

cadeau  [kado],  m.,  present,  gift. 

cafe  [kafe],  m. ,  coffee ;  coffee-house, 
restaurant,  caf6. 

cage  [ka:?],  f.,  cage. 

cahier  [kaje],  m.,  note-book,  ex- 
ercise-book. 

caille  [ka:j],  f.,  quail. 

caillou  [kaju],  m.,  pebble,  stone. 

caissier  [kesje],  m.,  cashier. 

calculer  [kalkyle],  to  calculate, 
reckon. 

calice  [kalis],  m. ,  chalice,  cup ; 
calyx. 

calin  [kale],  adj.,  wheedling,  coax- 
ing. 

calme  [kalm],  m.,  stillness,  calm. 

calme  [kalm],  calm,  still. 

calmer  [kalme],  to  calm. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


469 


calotte  [kalot],  f.,  cap,  skull-cap. 

camarade  [kamarad],  m.,  f.,  com- 
rade, playmate. 

camp  [ka],  m.,  camp. 

campagnard  [kapajia:r],  m.,  coun- 
tryman. 

campagne  p^apaji],  f.,  country, 
fields  ;  d  la  — ,  in  the  country. 

campanule  [kapanyl],  f.,  campa- 
nula, bell-flower. 

Canadla  [kanada],  m.,  Canada. 

canadien  [kanadjf],  Canadian. 

canard  [kanair],  m.,  duck. 

caniche  [kanij],  m.,  poodle. 

canif  [kanif],  m.,  penknife. 

canon  [kano],  m.,  cannon. 

canonni^re  [kanonjerr],  f.,  gun- 
boat. 

cantique  [katik],  m.,  hymn. 

cap  [kap],  head,  obs. ,  except  in  de 
pied  en  — ,  from  head  to  foot. 

capitaine  [kapiten],  m.,  captain. 

capitale  [kapital],  f. ,  capital  letter. 

capiteux  [kapit0],  heaidy,  intoxi- 
cating. 

car  [kar],  for. 

caract^re  [karakteir],  m.,  charac- 
ter, disposition,  temper. 

caravane  [karavan],  f.,  caravan. 

caressant  [karcsa],  kindly,  gentle. 

caresse  [kares],  f. ,  caress ;  /aire 
mille  — 8  d,  qq.,  to  overwhelm 
anyone  with  kindness. 

caresser  [karese],  to  caress,  stroke. 

cargaison  [kargezo],  f.,  cargo. 

carotte  [karot],  f.,  carrot. 

carr6  [kore],  m.,  square. 

carrosse  [karos],  m.,  carriage, 
coach. 

cas  [kc],  m.,  case. 

casaque  [kazak],  f.,  jacket. 

casque  [kask],  m.,  helmet. 

casser  [kn :  se],  to  break. 

Castille  [kastiij],  f.,  Castile. 

catastrophe  [katastrof],  f.,  catas- 
trophe. 

Caucase[koka!z],  m.,  Caucasus. 

cauchemar  [kojmair],  m.,  night- 
mare. 

cause  [ko:z],  f.,  cause;  d  —  de, 
because  o£ 


causer  [koze],  to  cause  ;  chat,  talk ; 

—  une  impression,  to  make  an 
impression. 

causeur  [kozoeir],  talkative, 
cavalerie    [kavalri],    f.,  cavalry; 

grosse  — ,  heavy  cavalry, 
cavalier  [kavalje],  m.,  horseman, 

rider,  trooper. 
ce  [sa],  pron. ,  it,  this,  that ;  c'est 

pourquoi,  that  is  why ;  c^est  noua^ 

it  is  we  ;   ce  sont  eiix,  it  is  they  ; 

ce  qui,  ce  que,  that  which,  which, 

what. 
ce,  cet,  cette,  ces  [ss,  set,  set,  se], 

adj.,  this,  that;  ce . .  .  -Id,  that 

(emphatic). 
c^ans  [sed],  here  within,  in  this 

house. 
ceci  [sasi],  pron. ,  this. 
c^der  [sedej,  §  158,  to  yield,  give 

way. 
cela  [sla],  pron.,  that ;  — a'entendy 

that  is  evident ;  of  course. 
c^l^brer  [selebre],  §  158,  to  cele- 
brate. 
c61^bre  [selebr],  celebrated, 
celle  [sel],  see  celui. 
celui,  celle,  ceux,   celles  [salqi, 

sel,  80,  selj,  this  or  that,  this  or 

that  one ;    the  one,   he,   him ; 

—  qui,  the  one  who,  he  or  him 
who. 

celui-ci  [salqi  si],  celle-ci,  ceux- 
ci,  celles-ci,  pron.,  this,  this 
man,  this  one,  the  latter,  he 
(too). 

celui-lk,  etc.  [salqi  la],  pron. ,  that, 
that  man,  that  one,  the  former, 
he. 

cent  [so],  (a)  hundred. 

centieme  [satjem],  hundredth. 

centime  [satim],  m.,  the  hundredth 
part  of  a  franc. 

centre  [saitr],  m.,  centre. 

cependant  [sapada],  yet,  never- 
theless ;  still,  however,  in  the 
meantime,  meanwhile  ;  —  que^ 
while,  whilst. 

cercle  [serkl],  m.,  circle. 

c^r6monie[seremoni],  f . , ceremony. 

cerise  [sariiz],  f.,  cherry. 


470 


VOCABULARY. 


cerisier  [sarizje],  m.,  cherry-tree. 

certain  [serte],  certain. 

certes  [sert],  certainly,  surely. 

cerveau  [servo],  m.,  Drain,  mind. 

cervelle  [servel],  f . ,  brains. 

cesser  [sese],  to  cease,  leave  off; 
—  de,  ditto. 

ces  [se],  see  ce. 

cet  [set],  see  ce. 

cette  [set],  f.  of  ce. 

ceux  [s0],  m.  pi.  celui. 

chacun  [Jakcfe],  pron.,  each,  each 
one,  every  one. 

chagrin  [Jagre],  m.,  sorrow,  grief; 
shagreen. 

chaine  [Jem],  f.,  chain. 

chair  [je:r],  1,  flesh,  meat;  — d. 
pdUi  mince-meat ;  ne  faisant 
qu'une  — ,  becoming  only  an  in- 
distinguishable mass  of  flesh. 

chaire  [Je:r],  f.,  pulpit,  desk  (of  a 
teacher). 

chaise  [|e:z],  f.,  chair. 

chaleur  [Jaloeir],  1,  heat. 

chambre  [Ja:br],  f.,  room  ;  Cham- 
bre  cles  dAprdds,  House  of  Parlia- 
ment. 

chameau  [Jamo],  m.,  camel. 

champ  [faj,  m.,  field. 
Champs-Elysees  [Jaiz  elize],  m. 
pi. ,  name  of  certain  public  gar- 
dens in  Paris. 
chance  [Jais],  f.,  chance. 
changement[Ja3ma],  m.,  change  ; 
—  de  fronts   change  of  front, 
transformation. 
changer  [Jase],  §  156,  to  change, 
alter,     transform ;     s«    — ,     to 
change  or  transform  one's  self, 
change  (intr. ). 
chanson  [Jaso],  f.,  song, 
chant  [ja],  m.,  singing;  crowing 

(of  a  cock). 
chanter  [fate],  to  sing ;  chant,  in- 
tone, play, 
chantonnement  [  |atonma  ],    m., 

humming,  singing. 
chapeau  [|apo],  m. ,  hat. 
chapelier  [Japalje],  m. ,  hatter ;  chez 
le  — ,  to  or  at  the  hatter's. 


chapelle  [Japel],  f. ,  chapeL 
chapitre  [japitr],  m.,  chapter, 
chaque  [|ak],  each,  every. 
charbonner    [Jarbone],    to    write 

with  charcoal,  sketch,  scrawl. 
charge  [Jars],  f.,  charge,  load. 
charger  [Jarse],  §  156,  to  charge, 
commission,  order,  entrust;   ae 
— ,  to  undertake, 
charmant  [farma],  charming, 
charmer  [Jarme],   to  charm,   de- 
light ;  charm4  de,  charmed  with, 
delighted  with, 
chasse  [Jas],  f . ,  chase,  hunt,  hunt- 
ing, hunting-party. 
chasser    [Jasej,    to    chase,    drive 

away. 
chasseur  [Jasoeir],  m.,  light  infan- 
try soldier,  chasseur. 
chat  [Ja],  m. ,  cat ;  '  'Le  Chat  BotU^" 

"  Puss  in  Boots." 
ch4taigne  [Jatep],  f.,  chestnut, 
chataignier  [Jotejie],  m. ,  chestnut- 
tree. 
chkteaM  [Ja to],  m.,  castle,  palace. 
Chateaubriand  [Jatobria],  French 

writer,  b.  1768,  d.  1848. 
chaud  [Jo],  warm,  hot. 
chaud  [Jo],  m. ,  heat,  warmth ;  U 
fait   — ,   it   is    warm,    hot    (of 
weather,  etc. ) ;  avoir  — ,  to  be 
warm,  hot  (of  living  beings). 
chaumiere  [Jomjeir],  f.,  thatched 

house,  cottage,  cot. 
chauss^e  [Jose],  f . ,  highway,  main 

road. 
chaussures  [[osyir],  f.  pi.,  shoes, 

boots. 
chauve  [  Joiv],  bald ;  un  — ,  a  bald 

man. 
chef  [Jef],  m. ,  chief,  commander ; 

—  d'escadr.e,  rear-admiral, 
chemin  [Jams],   m. ,   way,    road  ; 

grand  — ,  main  road,  highway ; 

—  de  fer,  railway  ;  —  faisanty 
on  the  way  ;  en  — ,  on  the  way. 

chemin^e  [Jamine],  f.,  fire-place; 

mantel- shelf. 
chene  [Jem],  m.,  oak. 
chenille  [Janiij],  f.,  caterpillar. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


471 


cher  [Jeir],  dear ;  beloved  ;  payer 
— ,  pay  dear(ly)  for,  pay  too 
much  for. 

chercher  [Jerje],  to  seek,  search, 
look  for ;  ailer  — ,  go  for,  go  and 
get ;  —  d,  seek  to,  try  to. 

chere  [feir],  f.,  cheer,  entertain- 
ment ;  faire  bonne  — ,  to  pro- 
vide good  cheer,  provide  a  good 
spread. 

ch^rir  [Jeriir],  to  cherish;  cMriy 
beloved,  cherished,  dear. 

cheval  [javal],  m.,  horse;  A  — , 
on  horseback. 

chevet  [jave],  m.,  pillow,  bolster, 
the  head  of  a  bed;  ip^e  de  — , 
see  ^p^e. 

cheveu  [fav^],  m.,hair;  cheveux, 
pL,  hair. 

chevre  [Je:vr],  f.,  goat. 

chevreau  [Javro],  m.,  kid. 

chevrette  [Javret],  f.,  little  goat. 

chez  [Je],  to,  at,  in,  into  (the 
house,  shop,  office,  etc. ,  of) ; 
with  ;  aller  —  le  roi,  to  go  to 
the  king's  (palace,  court,  etc. ) ; 
ils  dtaient  —  eux^  they  were  at 
home ;  —  moi^  at  my  house,  at 
home  ;  —  vouSy  at  your  house, 
at  home. 

chien  [fj?],  m.,  dog  ;  —  de  berger, 
shepherd's  dog ;  —  danois, 
Danish  dog,  great  Dane. 

chiffon  [fifo],  m. ,  rag  ;  strip,  piece. 

chiffre  [Jifr],  m.,  figure,  number. 

chim^re  [Jimctr],  f.,  chimaera  (a 
fabulous  beast  of  antiquity). 

choBur  [kceir],  m.,  chorus. 

choisir  [Jwazi:r],  to  choose. 

chose  [Joiz],  f.,  thing,  aflfair,  mat- 
ter; quelque  — ,  m.  pron., 
something  ;  quelque  —  d* extra- 
ordinaire, something  extraordi- 
nary, unusual ;  la  cMvre  a 
quelque  — ,  there  is  something 
the  matter  with  the  goat ;  bien 
atUre  — ,  something  very  dif- 
ferent. 

chou  [|u],  m.,  cabbage. 

chute  [Jyt],  f.,  fall,  downfall        • 


-ci  [si],  see  c«. 

Cic^ron  [sisero],  Cicero.  * 

Cid[8id],  leCid,  drama  byComeille. 

ciel,  pi.  cieux  [sjel,  sj0],  m., 
heaven,  heavens,  sky. 

cimetiere  [simtjeir],  cemetery,  m. 

cinq  [se:k],  five. 

cinquante  [sekfiit],  fifty. 

cinquieme  [sekjem],  fifth. 

circonspect  [8irkospe(kt)],  circum- 
spect, cautious. 

cirque  [sirk],  m.,  circus. 

cite  [site],  f.,  city. 

citoyen  [sitwaje],  m.,  citizen. 

civilement  [sivilmo],  civilly,  cour- 
teously, politely. 

civilisation  [sivilizosjo],  f.,  civil- 
isation. 

clair  [kleir],  clear,  bright,  plain. 

clair  [kleir],  m.,  light,  cleamese; 
—  de  lune,  moonlight. 

clair  [kleir],  clearly,  plain(ly). 

clairon  [klero],  m.,  clarion. 

clameur  [klamoeir],  f.,  clamour, 
outcry. 

classe  [klois],  f.,  class,  recitation, 
lesson,  class-room ;  ma7iquer  la 
. — ,  stay  away  from  school,  play 
truant ;  faire  la  — ,  give  a  lesson 
(to  a  class),  teach  (a  class). 

clef  [kle],  f.,  key. 

cliquetis  [klikti],  m.,  rattle,  click- 


n,  f.,  bell. 
klofetl,  f., 


ing,  jingle. 

cloche 

clochette  [klojet],  f.,  (small)  bell. 

clos  [klo],  p.  part,  clore,  to  close, 
shut. 

clos  [klo],  m.,  enclosure,  field. 

clouer  [klue],  to  nail. 

cocher  [koje],  m.,  coachman. 

cceur  [koeir],  m.,  heart,  heartiness, 
courage,  energy ;  de  {bon)  — , 
heartily,  fervently ;  le  —  groa, 
with  a  heavy  heart. 

coin  [kwe],  m.,  corner. 

coincidence  [koesidains],  f.,  coin- 
cidence. 

colore  [koleir],  f.,  anger;  se  met- 
ire  en  — ,  to  get  angry,  be  angry. 

collation  [kolosjo]^  f.,  collation, 
repast. 


472 


VOCABULARY. 


college  [kolei  3],  ra. ,  college,  school. 

collogue  [koleg],  m.,  colleague, 
mate. 

coller  [kole],  to  glue,  paste. 

colline  [kolin],  1,  hill. 

colonel  [kolonel],  m.,  colonel. 

colonne  [kolon],  f.,  column  ;  — 
Spaisse,  close  column,  in  close 
marching  order. 

colossal  [kolosal],  colossal,  mighty. 

colosse  [kolos],  m. ,  colossus,  giant ; 
chevaux  — s,  colossal  or  gigantic 
horses. 

combat  [koba],  m.,  combat,  fight. 

combattre  [kobatr],  §  180,  to  fight, 
do  battle. 

combien  [kSbje],  how  much?,  how 
many  ?  ;  at  what  price  ?  ;  how 
much,  how  many;  — ites-vous?, 
how  many  are  there  of  you  ?  ;  — 
serez-vous  de  gens  A  table?,  how 
many  (people)  will  there  be  of 
you  at  table? ;  —  avez-vouspayd?, 
how  much  or  what  did  you  pay 
(for) ? 

combler  [koblel,  to  heap  up ;  fill, 
crown,  complete ;  comble,  full  to 
overflowing. 

comique  [komik],  comical. 

commandature  [komadatyir],  f., 
headquarters  (milit.). 

commander  [komade],  to  com- 
mand, order,  bid. 

comme  [kom],  as,  like  ;  as  it  were, 
as  if  ;  as  well  as  ;  how ;  how  !  ; 
—  void,  as  follows ;  —  il  faut, 
in  fine  style,  exactly  right,  as  it 
should  be. 

commencement  [komasma],  m., 
beginning,  commencement. 

commencer  [komase],  §  156,  to 
begin,  commence  (to,  d,  de). 

comment  [koma],  how;  how?; 
how  !,  what  !  —  cela  ?,  how  is 
that  ? ;  —  faire  pour  ne  pas 
voler?,  how  is  one  to  avoid 
stealing  ? 

commode  [komod],  comfortable. 

communication  [komynikosjo],  f., 
communication. 

compact  [kdpakt],  compact,  dense. 


compagne  [kopap],  f.,  companion; 
wife. 

compagnie  [kopapi],  f.,  company. 

compagnon  [kopapo],  m.,  com- 
panion; — t/e  yo^/^gfe,  travelling, 
companion. 

comparaison  [koparezo],  1,  com- 
parison. 

comparer  [kopare],  to  compare. 

compartiment  [kopartimo],  m., 
compartment. 

compassion  [koposjo],  f.,  compas- 
sion, pity. 

complet  [kople],  m.,  suit  (of 
clothes) ;  complement ;  itre  au 
— ,  to  be  full. 

compliment  [koplimr),  m.,  com- 
pliment. 

composer  [kopoze],  to  compose, 
form,  arrange  ;  se  — ,  to  be  com- 
posed, consist  (of,  de). 

composition  [kopozisjo],  f.,  com- 
position. 

comprendre  [kopraidr],  §  202,  to 
understand,  comprehend ;  in- 
clude ;  faire  — ,  to  explain. 

compter  [kote],  to  count,  reckon  ; 
intend,  think ;  be  of  import- 
ance ;  il  comptait  pluSy  he  was 
of  more  account. 

concentrer  [kosatre],  to  concen- 
trate. 

concert  [koseir],  m.,  concert. 

Concorde  [kokord],  f . ,  concord  ; 
place  de  la  Concorde,  name  of  a 
square  in  Paris. 

condamnation  [kodanasjo],  f., con- 
demnation, sentence. 

condamner  [kodane],  to  condemn, 
sentence. 

condamn^  [kodane],  m.,  convict. 

conduire  [kodqiir],  §  185,  to  con- 
duct, lead,  guide,  drive,  take, 
convej\ 

confiance  [kofjais],  f.,  confidence,- 
trust. 

confiseur  [kofizoeir],  m.,  confec- 
tioner. 

confus  [kofy],  confused,  indistinct. 

cong^  [kose], m.,  holiday;  donner 

'    —  d,  to  give  a  holiday  to. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


473 


conjurer  [kosyre],  to  implore. 

connais  [kone],  1  sg.  pres.  indie. 
coimaitre. 

connaissance  [konesais],  f.,  ac- 
quaintance ;  /aire  —  avec,  be- 
come acquainted  with. 

connaissez  [konese],  2  pi.  pres. 
indie,  connaitre. 

connaissons  [koneso],  1  pi.  pres. 
indie,  connaitre. 

connait  [kone],  3  sg.  pres.  indie. 
connaitre. 

connaitre  [koneitr],  §  188,  to 
know,  be  acquainted  with,  un- 
derstand. 

conscience  [kosja :  s],  f . ,  conscience; 
consciousness;  conscientiousness ; 
je  ferais  —  de,  I  should  scruple 
to,  I  should  think  it  a  sin  to. 

conseil  [kSseij],  m.,  counsel,  ad- 
vice. 

conseiller  [koseje],  to  advise, 
counsel. 

consentir  [kosatiir],  §  166,  to  con- 
sent. 

conserver  [koserve],  to  preserve, 
save. 

consigfne  [kosiji],  f . ,  orders  (milit. ), 
instructions. 

consister  [kosiste],  to  consist. 

consoler  [kosole],  toeonsole,  solace, 
comfort ;  86  — ,  to  console  one's 
self  (with,  de). 

constemer  [kosteme],  to  astound, 
dismay,  amaze,  terrify. 

construire  [kostrqi : r],  §  185,  to  con- 
struct. 

conte  [koit],  m.,  story,  tale  ;  /aire 
un  — ,  tell  a  story. 

contempler  [kotaple],  to  contem- 
plate, gaze  on,  survey. 

contenir  [kotaniir],  §  177,  to  con- 
tain. 

content  [koto],  adj.,  content,  satis- 
fied, pleased,  gratified,  happy. 

contentement  [kotatma],  m.,  con- 
tentment, satisfaction. 

contenter  [kotate],  to  satisfy. 

center  [kote],  to  relate,  tell. 

continuer  [kotinqe],  to  continue 
(to,  de),  keep  on,  pursue. 


contraire  [kotrcir],  m.,  contrary; 
au  — ,  on  the  contrary. 

centre  [kotr],  against,  from. 

convaincu  [k5v§ky],  convinced, 
satisfied. 

convenable  [kovanabl],  suitable. 

convenir  [kovaniir],  §  178,  to  suit, 
become,  be  fitting  or  appro- 
priate. 

conversation  [koversasj5],  f.,  con- 
versation. 

convoitise  [kovwatiiz],  f.,  covet- 
ousness,  envy. 

copie  [kopi],  f.,  copy;  exercise. 

coq  [kok],  m.,  cock. 

coquin-e  [kok^,  kokin],  rogue, 
wretch,  scamp. 

corde  [kord],  f.,  cord,  rope. 

cordon  [kordS],  m.,  cord,  string; 
—  de  aounette,  bell-pull,  bell- 
rope. 

come  [kom],  f. ,  horn. 

Comeille  [korneij],  m.,  French 
dramatist,  b.  1606,  d.  1684. 

corps  [ko:r],  m.,  body,  form. 

corridor  [koridoir],  m.,  corridor, 
passage. 

corsaire  [korse-.r],  m.,  privateer. 

costume  [kostym],  m.,  costume, 
dress. 

cote  [kot],  f. ,  coast,  rib,  side ;  —  d 
— ,  side  by  side. 

cot^  [kote],  m. ,  side,  way  ;  d*un  — , 
on  one  side  ;  de  V autre  — ,  on  the 
other  side  ;  de  ce  — ,  on  this 
side  ;  de  — ,  to  one  side,  aside  ; 
du  —  de^  in  the  direction  of, 
towards ;  de  son  — ,  on  his  part, 
he  too  ;  a  —  de,  beside. 

cou  [ku],  m. ,  neck. 

coucher  [kuje],  intr.,  to  lie,  lie 
doAvn ;  set  (of  the  sun) ;  tr. ,  to 
put  to  bed,  lay  down ;  —  en 
joucy  take  aim  (at) ;  se  — ,  to  go 
to  bed,  retire  (to  rest) ;  Stre 
couchS,  to  be  lying  down. 

coucher  [kuJe],  m.,  setting  ;  —  du 
soleil,  sunset. 

coulee  [kule],  f. ,  running-hand. 

couler  [kule],  to  flow,  run,  trickle. 

couleur  [kulce:r],  f.,  colour. 


474 


VOCABULARY. 


couleuvre  [kuloejvr],  1,  snake. 

coup  [ku],  m. ,  blow,  stroke ;  drink ; 
boire  cinq  ou  six  — 5,  to  take  five 
or  six  drinks  or  draughts  ;  —  de 
poing,  a  blow  with  the  fist ;  —  de 
pied,  a  kick  ;  d'un  seul  — ,  at  a 
single  stroke ;  tout  d,  — ,  all  at 
once ;  du  — ,  at  once,  thereupon ; 
donner  des  — s  de  come,  to  hook, 
butt ;  —  de  dent,  bite ;  donner 
des  — s  de  fouet,  to  whip  ;  —  de 
tonnerre,  thunder-clap  ;  —  de 
bdton,  blow  with  a  stick ;  —  de 
pistolet,  pistol-shot ;  de  plusieurs 
— s,  in  several  places. 

coupable  [kupabl],  guilty,  at  fault, 
blameworthy. 

coupe  [kup],  f. ,  cup,  wine-cup. 

coupe-gorge  [kup  gors],  m.,  a 
cut-throat  place,  a  nest  of 
swindlers. 

couper  [kupe],  to  cut. 

cour[ku:r],  f.,  court ;  yard,  court- 
yard ;  /aire  la  — ,  pay  court ; 
gens  de  la  — ,  courtiers. 

courage  [kurais],  m.,  courage. 

courageux  [kura30],  brave. 

couramment  [kurama],  fluently. 

courber  [kurbe],  to  bend,  bow. 

coureur  [kuroeir],  m.,  runner;  — 
de  grands  chemins,  tramp,  va- 
grant. 

courir  [kuri:  r],  §  164,  to  run  (about); 
hasten  ;  hunt  after  ;  —  les  nids, 
to  hunt  after  birds'  nests,  go 
birds'  nesting. 

couronne  [kuron],  f. ,  crown ; 
wreath. 

couronner  [kurone],  to  crown, 
wreathe. 

course  [kurs],  f.,  course,  tour, 
walk,  round  ;  faire  une  — ,  take 
a  walk,  make  a  round  ;  prendre 
sa  — ,  to  take  one's  way. 

court  [kuir],  short  (adj.);  short 
(adv. )  ;  de  trap  — ,  too  short, 
too  tightly. 

court  [kuir],  3  sg.  pres.  indie. 
courir. 

courtisan  [kurtiza],  m.,  courtier. 

couru  [kury],  p.p.  courir. 


courus   [  kury  ],   1   sg.   past  det 

courir. 
courut  [kury],   3  sg.   past    def. 

courir. 
cousin-e  [kuze,  kuzin],  cousin, 
couteau  [kuto],  m.,  knife, 
couter  [kute],  to  cost. 
coutume    [kutym],    f.,    custom, 

habit, 
couturifere  [kutyrje:r],   f.,   dress- 
maker. 
couver  [kuve],  to  brood,   hatch ; 

couvant  de  I'osil,  wistfully  eying, 

gazing  at. 
couvert  [kuve:r],   p.    p.    couvriTf 

covered ;  cloudy,  overcast  j  with 

one's  hat  on. 
couvrir  [kuvriir],  §  176,  to  cover; 

se  — ,  cover  one's  self,  be  covered. 
craindre  [kreidr],  §  190,  to  fear, 

be  afraid  of. 
craie  [kre],  f.,  chalk, 
crainte  [kre it],  f.,  fear. 
cravate  [kravat],  f.,  neckcloth, 
crayon  [krejo],  m.,  pencil, 
creature  [kreatyir],  f.,  creature. 
Crete  [kre:t],  f.,  crest,  summit, 
creuser  [kr0ze],  to  dig. 
creux  [kr0],  hollow ;   cJiemin  — , 

deep-cut  road. 
crfeve-coeur  [krev  koe :  r],  m. ,  heart- 
break, grief, 
crever  [krave],  §  158,  to  burst;  die, 

perish. 
en  [kri],  m.,  cry,  shout,  outcry, 
cribler  [krible],  to  sift ;  riddle, 
crier  [krie],  to  cry  (out),  shout, 

call  (out),  exclaim, 
crin  [krs],  m.,  hair  (of  the  mane 

and  tail   of    the    horse,    etc, ) ; 

crins,   pi. ,    hair,   mane ;   plume 

(of  a  helmet). 
crista!  [kristal],  m.,  crystal. 
croire  [krwair],  §  191,  to  believe  ; 

think  ;  se  — ,  to  believe  or  think 

one's  self  ;  /aire  —  d,  to  make 

(one)  believe  in. 
croiser  [krwaze],  to   oross,  come 

across,  meet. 
croitre  [krwa:tr],  §  192,  to  grow, 

increase. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


475 


crosse  [kros],  f .  ;  —  de  fusily  butt 

(-end)  of  a  gun  or  musket. 
crouler  [krule],  to  crumble,  go  to 

ruin,  sink  to  ruin. 
croupe  [krup],  f.,  croup,  rump, 
croyant  [  krwajd  ],    pres.    part. 

croire  ;  — ,  m. ,  believer. 
croyez  [krwaje],  2  pi.  pres.  indie. 

croire. 
croyons  [krwajo],  1  pi.  indie,  or 

impve.  croire. 
cms  [kry],  1  sg.  past  def.  croire. 
cmt  [kry],  3  sg.  past  def.  croire. 
cueillir  [koejiir],  §   165,  to  pick, 

pluck,  gather. 
cuiller  [kyjeir],  f,,  spoon, 
cuir  [kqiir],  m,,  leather. 
cuirasse    [  kqiras  ],    f.,    cuirass, 

breast -plate, 
cuirassier  [kqirasje],  m. ,  cuirassier, 
cuisinier  [kqizinje],  m.,  cook, 
cuisinifere  [kqizinjeir],  f.,  cook, 
cuisse    [  kqis  ],    f.,    thigh;     leg, 

"drum-stick." 
cuivre  [kqiivr],  m.,  copper,  brass  ; 

d  pleins  — «,  as  loud  as  the  band 

could  play, 
culminant  [kylmina],  culminating, 
curieux  [kyrj0],  curious,  odd. 
curiosite  [kyrjozite],  f.,  curiosity, 
cytise  [siti:z],   m.,  cytisus,  bean- 
trefoil,  laburnum. 


dame  [dam],  f. ,  lady. 
dangereux  [da3r0],  dangerous, 
danois  [danwa],  Danish. 
dans  [da],  in,  within,  to,  into,  at, 

on,    among,     between;    —     le 

temps,  at  the  time. 
danse  [dais],  f.,  dance  ;  erUrer  en 

— ,  to  begin  to  play. 
danser  [dose],  to  dance. 
date  [dat],  f.,  date  ;  de  longue  — , 

long  before. 
Daudet  [dode],  Alphonse  Daudet, 

French  novelist,   b.  at  Niraes, 

1840,  d.  1897. 
dayantage  [davatais],  more;    le 

docteur  pas  — ,  nor  the  doctor 

either. 


de  [da],  of,  from,  out  of,  for,  with, 

in,  on,  by,  at,  to; h  infin., 

to,  at,  for,  in,  etc. 

d6barbouiller  [debarbuje],toclean, 
wash  (the  face). 

debarrasser  [debarase],  to  dis- 
encumber, rid  ;  se  — ,  to  free 
one's  self,  get  rid  (of,  de). 

d^battre  (se)  [ss  debatr],  §  180,  to 
struggle. 

deborder  [deborde],  to  overflow, 
run  over. 

d^boucher  [debuje],  to  come  out 
(on,  sur),  debouch. 

debout  [dobu],  adv.,  upright, 
standing. 

decapiter  [dekapite],  to  behead. 

decembre  [desaibr],  m.,  Decem- 
ber. 

dechirer  [dejire],  to  tear  (asunder), 
rend." 

decide  [deside],  decided. 

decider  [deside],  to  decide,  deter- 
mine ;  fie  — ,  to  decide,  resolve, 
make  up  one's  mind. 

declarer  [deklare],  to  declare. 

decourager  [dekuraje],  §  156,  to 
discourage  ;  se  — ,  to  be  discour- 
aged, give  up  (intr. ). 

d^couvnr  [dekuvriir],  §  176,  to 
discover ;  take  ofl  the  hat. 

dedaigner  [dedejie],  to  disdain. 

dedans  [dado],  adv.,  within,  in- 
side ;  in  it,  into  it ;  le  — ,  les  — , 
n.  m.,  the  inside,  interior;  en 
— ,  inside. 

d^fendre  [defaidr],  §  210,  to  de- 
fend, protect  (from,  de) ;  forbid  ; 
se  — ,  to  defend  one's  self. 

defense  [defa:s],  f.,  defense,  pro- 
tection. 

d^fenseur  [def  a  s* :  r],  m. ,  defender, 
guardian. 

d^fier  [defje],  to  defy,  challenge ; 
je  vous  en  ddjie,  I  dare,  defy, 
you  to  do  it ;  se  —  de,  to  mis- 
trust, distrust. 

d^gouter  [degute],  to  disgust. 

degradation  [degradosjo],  f.,  de- 
gradation. 

degr^  [dagre],  m.,  step;  degree. 


476 


VOCABULARY. 


degfuster  [degyste],  to  taste,  enjoy 

the  taste  of. 
d6jk  [desa],  already;  ddjdb  /,  so  soon ! 
dejeuner  [de  3  0ne],  ra.,  breakfast; 

lunch ;  —  du  matin  or  premier 

— ,  breakfast  (i.e.,  the  first  meal 

of  the  day) ;  —  d  lafourchette  or 

second  — ,  luncheon,  lunch. 
dejeuner  [de30ne],    to   breakfast, 

lunch. 
delk  [dala],  beyond ;  par  — ,  further 

(than),  beyond. 
delaisser  [delese],  to  abandon,  de- 
sert, forsake. 
d^licatesse  [delikates],  f . ,  delicacy, 

consideration. 
demain  [dams],  m. ,  to-morrow, 
demande   [damaid],   f.,   demand, 

request. 
demander  [damade],  to  ask,  ask 

for ;  —  d,  to  ask  of,  from  (indir. 

obj. ),  ask ;  —  d  +  infin. ,  to  ask  to ; 

86  — ,  to  ask  one's  self,  wonder, 
demener  (se)  [sa  demne],  §  158,  to 

struggle. 
dementi  [demati],  m.,  contradic- 

tion ;  il  ne  voulait  pas  en  avoir 

le  — ,  he  was  determined  not  to 

be  beaten. 
demeurer  [damoere],  to  live,  dwell, 

reside ;  remain,  be. 
demi  [dami],  half  ;  A  — ,  half, 
demi-heure  [dami  oeir],  f.,  half  an 

hour, 
demi-obscurit^  [dami  opskyrite], 

f.,   half   darkness,   faint   light, 

feeble  light, 
d^montrer    [demotre],    to    show, 

prove, 
denier  [danje],  m.,  denarius  (obs.), 

penny. 
d6noncer  [denose],  §  156,  to  de- 
nounce. 
dent  [da],  f.,  tooth;  coup  de  — , 

bite. 
dentel6     [datle],      denticulated, 

notched  (said  of  leaves). 
dentelle  [datel],  f.,  lace, 
dentiste  [datist],  m.,  dentist, 
depart  [depair],  m.,  departure. 
d^pecher  (se)  [sa  depeje],  to  make 


haste,  hurry ;  ne  te  d^pSche  pas 
tant,  do  not  be  in  such  a  hurry. 

d^pendance  [depadais],  f.,  de- 
pendence, territory. 

dependre  [depaidr],  §  210,  to  de- 
pend (upon,  de), 

depenser  [depose],  to  spend,  ex- 
pend. 

deployer  (se)  [sa  deplwaje],  §  157, 
to  deploy  (milit.). 

depouiller  [depuje],  to  strip,  de- 
spoil, deprive. 

depuis  [dapqi],  since ;  from ;  — 
deux  ans,  for  two  years  back, 
for  the  last  two  years  ;  —  ^we, 
since  ;  —  quand .?,  since  when  ?, 
how  long  ? 

d^put^  [depyte],  m. ,  deputy,  mem- 
ber of  parliament. 

deraciner  [derasine],  to  uproot. 

deranger  [derase],  §  156,  to  de- 
range ;  se  — ,  to  trouble  one's 
self. 

dernier  [demje],  latter,  last,  finaL 

derriere  [derjeir],  behind  (prep.) : 
behind,  at  the  back  (adv. ) ;  de 
— ,  hind  (adj.). 

des  [de],  contr.  of  de  +  les. 

d^s  [de],  from  (dating  from),  not 
later  than ;  —  demain^  beginning 
to-morrow ;  —  que,  as  soon  as, 
from  the  very  moment  that ; 
—  le  mime  jour,  on  the  (very 
same)  day  ;  —  le  point  du  jour, 
at  daybreak. 

d^sagreable  [  dezagreabl  ],  dis- 
agreeable, unpleasant. 

desarmer  [dezarme],  to  disarm ; 
desarm^,  unprotected,  helpless. 

descendre[de8aidr],  §210,  to  de- 
scend, come  or  go  down ;  go 
down  (stairs). 

descente  [desait],  f.,  descent. 

desenchantement  [  deza  \q  tma  ], 
m. ,  disenchantment,  disappoint- 
ment. 

desert  [dezeir],  m.,  desert. 

desesperance  [  dezesperd :  s  ],  f. , 
despair. 

d^sesp^rer  [dezespere],  §  158,  to 
despair. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


477 


<l^sillusion  [dezilyzjo],  f.,  disillu- 
sion. 

•desir  [deziir],  m.,  desire,  longing. 

d^sirer  [dezire],  to  desire,  wish. 

il^sireux  [dezir^],  desirous,  anxious 
(to,  de). 

d^sormais,  henceforth. 

dess^cher  [desefe],  ^  158,  to  dry, 
dry  up,  parch,  wither ;  8e  — , 
to  dry  up,  wither.       [scheme. 

dessein  [desg],  m.,  design,  plan, 

dessert  [dese:r],  m.,  dessert. 

^essus  [dasy],  adv.,  above,  over; 
upon  or  over  (it,  them,  etc. ) ; 
de  — ,  from  (off). 

destin^e  [destine],  f. ,  fate,  destiny. 

destiner  [destine],  to  destine ;  in- 
tend, design. 

destruction  [  destryksjo  ],  f.,  de- 
struction. 

d^sunir  [dezyniir],  to  disunite. 

detacher  [  detaje  ],  to  detach, 
separate. 

d^tresse  [detres],  f. ,  distress,  grief, 
trouble. 

deuil  [dceij],  m. ,  mourning  (attire). 

deux  [d0],  two ;  toils  (or  toutes) 
— ,  both  (of  them). 

deuxi^me  [d^zjem],  second. 

devant  [dava],  prep.,  before,  in 
front  of,  ahead  of. 

devant  [dava],  adv. ,  before,  ahead, 
in  advance ;  pattes  de  — ,  front 
paws,  fore-paws ;  prendre  les — «, 
to  go  on  before,  ahead ;  courir 
au  — ,  to  run  to  meet. 

^^veloppement  [  devlopma  ],  m. , 
development,  progress. 

devenir  [davni:r],  §  178,  to  be- 
come ;  become  of. 

<[eviendront  [davjedro],  3  pi.  fut. 
devenir. 

•devint  [davfj,  3  sg.  past  def.  de- 
venir. 

<levoir  [davwair],  m.,  duty;  exer- 
cise (lesson) ;  rendre  leurs  — 8  d, 
to  pay  their  respects  to. 

devoir  [davwair],  §214,  to  owe; 
be  one's  duty  to,  ought,  be  to, 
have  to,  be  obliged  to,  must; 
—  +  infin. ,  to  be  one's  duty  to, 


ought,  be  to,  have  to,  be  obliged 

to,  must. 
diable  [djoibl],  interj.,  the  devil  1 

the  deuce ! 
diantre  [dja :  tr],  interj. ,  the  deuce  ! 
Dieu  [dj0],   m.,   God;    ah/   mon 

— .' ,  oh  !  dear  me  ! 
dieu  [dj0],  m.,  god. 
difference  [diferais],  f.,  difference, 
differend     [difera],    m.,    quarrel, 

dispute, 
different  [difera],  different,  divers, 

various. 
difficile  [difisil],  difficult,  hard, 
difficult^  [difikylte],  f.,  difficulty, 
dig^tale  [digital],  f.,  fox-glove, 
dimanche  [dimaij],  m.,  Sunday; 

tons  les  — s,  every  Sunday. 
dindon  [dedo],  m.,  turkey;  patte 

de  — ,  see  patte. 
diner  [dine],  to  dine, 
diner  [dine],  m. ,  dinner  ;  A  — ,  to 

or  at  dinner. 
dire  [diir],  §  193,  to  say,  tell,  re- 
cite ;  c'est  d  — ,  that  is  (to  say) ; 

dis-moi  un  peUy   just    tell  me ; 

vouloir  — ,  to  mean, 
dire  [diir],  m.,  saying,  maxim. 
directeur  [direktoeir],  m.,  director, 

manager, 
dirent  [ai:r],  3  pi.  p.  def.  dire. 
diriger  [dirise],  §  156,  to  direct, 

guide, 
dis  [di],  2  sg.  indie,  or  impve.  dire. 
disais  [dize],  1  sg.  impf.  indie,  dire. 
disait  [dize],  3  sg.  impf.  indie,  dire. 
disant  [diza],  pres.  part.  dire. 
discipliner[disipline],  to  discipline. 
discours  [diskuir],  m.,  discourse, 

speech. 
discr^tement  [diskretma],discreet- 

ly,  circumspectly,  cautiously. 
disons  [dizo],  1  pi.  pres.  indie,  dire. 
disparaitre  [dispareitr],  §  188,  to 

disappear,  vanish. 
disposition  [dispozisjo],  f.,  disposi- 
tion, tendency,  habit  ;  disposal. 
distance    [dista:s],    f.,   distance; 

(t  — ,  at  a  distance, 
distribuer  [distribi{e],  to  distribute, 

deal  out,  portion  out. 


478 


VOCABULARY. 


distribution  [distribysjo],  f.,  dis- 
tribution. 

dit-  [di],  3  sg.  pres.  indie,  3  sg. 
past  def . ,  and  p.  part,  of  dire. 

dites  [dit],  2  pi.  pres.  indie,  and 
2  pi.  impve.  dire  ;  vous  —  .^ .  .  . , 
what  did  you  say  ? 

divertir  [divertiir],  to  divert, 
amuse ;  se  — ,  to  divert  one's 
self,  amuse  one's  self. 

divin  [dive],  divine. 

diviser  [divize],  to  divide. 

division  [divizjo],  f.,  division. 

dix  [dis],  ten. 

dix-huit  [diz  qit],  eighteen. 

dix-neuvieme  [diz  ncevjem],  nine- 
teenth. 

docile  [dosil],  docile,  tractable, 
quiet. 

docteur  [doktoeir],  m.,  doctor. 

doig^  [dwa],  m. ,  finger  ;  toe. 

dois  [dwa],  1  and  2  sg.  pres.  indie. 
devoir. 

dollar  [dola:r],  m.,  dollar. 

dominer  [domine],  to  rule,  prevail 
over,  rise  above. 

dommage  [domais],  m.,  damage, 
pity. 

don  [do],  m.,  gift,  power,  knack. 

done  [do],  then,  therefore,  conse- 
quently. 

dOnner  [done],  to  give ;  bear  (of 
trees) ;  —  d  souper,  to  give  a  sup- 
per ;  se  — ,  to  give  to  each  other. 

dont  [do],  of  whom,  of  (from,  etc.) 
which,  whose,  with  which,  etc. , 
whence. 

Dore  [doir],  f.,  name  of  a  river  in 
central  France. 

dore  [dore],  gilt. 

dormir  [dormiir],  §  166,  to  sleep. 

dos  [do],  m. ,  back. 

double  [dubl],  double. 

doubler  [duble],  to  double;  line 
(clothes). 

doucement  [dusma],  gently,  softly, 

quietly,  kindly. 
douleur'[dulce:r],  f.,  pain,  grief, 
sorrow. 

douloureusement  [  dulur0zma  ], 
sadly. 


doute  [dut],  m. ,  doubt ;  sans  — , 

no  doubt,  doubtless. 
douter  (se)  [so  dute],  to  be  sus- 
picious ;  se  —  de,  to  suspect. 
doux    [du],   sweet ;   soft,  gentle, 

kindly. 
douzaine  [duzein],  f.,  dozen, 
douze  [duiz],  twelve. 
drame  [dram],  m.,  drama. 
drap  [dra],  m.,  cloth. 
drapeau  [drapo],  m. ,  flag,  banner, 
dresser  [drese],  to  erect,  set  up ; 

se  — ,  to  rise  upright,  rear. 
droit  [drwa],  straight,  right;  up- 
right, erect. 
droit  [drwa],  m.,  right ;  Stre  en  — 

de,  to  have  a  right  to. 
droite  [drwat],  f. ,  right  hand,  right, 

right  side  ;  d  — ,  de  — ,  to  or  on 

the  right  (hand), 
drole  [dro:l],  comical,  amusing. 
drole  [dro:l],  m.,  rogue,  rascal. 
du  [dy],  contr.  of  de  +  le. 
ducat  [dyka],  m. ,  ducat, 
duel  [dqel],  m. ,  duel. 
Dumas  [dyma],  Alexandre  Dumas, 

French  dramatist  and  novelist, 

b.  1803,  d.  1870. 
Dunkerque   [dokerk],    a   French 

seaport,  Dunkirk. 
duquel    [dykel],    contr.    of  de  + 

lequel. 
dur  [dyir],  hard,  harsh, 
durant  [dyra],  during. 
durer   [dyre],   to   last,   continue, 

endure. 


eau  [o],  f.,  water. 

^blouissant  [ebluisS],  dazzling. 

eblouissement  [ebluisma],  m.,  daz- 
zling. 

^branler  (s')  [s  ebrale],  to  begin  to 
move  (intr. ). 

^caille  [ekaij],  f.,  scale  (of  fish, 
etc. ). 

^carquille  [ekarkije],  p.  part. ,  wide 
open  (of  eyes). 

^carter  (s')  [s  ekarte],  to  go  away 
(from,  de),  ramble,  stray. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


479 


^change  [ejais],  m.,  exchange; 
en  —  de,  in  exchange  for. 

echapper(s')  [s  ejape],  m.,  to  es- 
cape. 

^clabousser  [eklabuse],  to  splash, 
spatter. 

^claif  [ekleir],  m.,  lightning,  flash 
of  lightning  ;  il  fait  des  — s,  it 
lightens. 

^clat  [ekla],  m.,  burst,  outburst. 

^clater  [eklate],  to  burst  out, 
burst  forth,  sound  out  (suddenly 
and  loudly),  break  out. 

6clore  [ekloir],  §183,  to  hatch; 
4clos,  p.  part.,  hatched. 

^cole  [ekol],  f. ,  school ;  maison 
<f — ,  school-house. 

^colier.  [ekolje],  m.,  school -boy, 
pupil. 

Scorcher [ekorje],  to  skin,  flay,  gall, 
rub  the  skin  off. 

^couter  [ekute],  to  listen,  listen 
to,  hear. 

^eraser  [ekraze],  to  crush,  over- 
whelm. 

Verier  (s')  [s  ekrie],  to  cry  out, 
exclaim. 

^crire  [ekriir],  §  194,  to  write. 

^crit  [ekri],  p.  part,  ^crire. 

Venture  [ekrityir],  f.,  writing. 

^crivit[ekrivi],  3  sg.  pastdef.  derive. 

^cueil  [ekoe:j],  m.,  reef,  rock. 

^cuelle  [ekqel],  f.,  porringer,  milk- 
pail. 

^cume  [ekym],  f.,  foam. 

^cureuil  [ekyroeij],  m.,  squirrel. 

Edifice  [edifis],  m. ,  edifice,  building. 

Education  [edykasjo],  f.,  educa- 
tion, training. 

cffet  [efe],  m.,  effect;  en  — ,  in 
effect,  indeed,  in  fact. 

effleurer  [efloere],  to  skim  (over), 
touch  (lightly). 

effort  [ef o !  r],  m. ,  effort,  endeavour ; 
force,  might;  tenter  tin  dernier — , 
to  make  a  final  effort. 

effrayer  [efreje],  §  157,  to  frighten, 
terrify,  alarm ;  »' — ,  to  be 
frightened,  fear. 

effr^n^  [efrene],  unbridled,  uncon- 
trollable. 


effroyable    [efrwojabl],    frightful, 

horrible. 
effroyablement    [  efrwojablama  ], 
frightfully,  terribly,  dreadfully, 
egal  [egal],  equal. 
egalement  [egalma],   equally,  in 

like   manner,  also. 
egarer  (s')  [s  egare],  to  lose  one's 

way. 
6g\ise  [egli:z],  f.,  church. 
^gorger  [egorje],  §  156,  to  cut  the 

throat  of,  butcher,  slaughter. 
^gyptien  [esipsje],  Egyptian. 
eh  I    [e],    ah  !,    well ! ;    —  bien .', 

well !,  well  then  !,  well  now  ! 
dlan  [ela],  m.,  impulse. 
61ancer(s')[s  elase],§  156,  to  bound, 
rush,  dash,  precipitate  one's  self. 
^I6ment  [elema],  m.,  element, 
^l^phant  [elefa],  m.,  elephant. 
ilhve  [ele:  v],  m. ,  f. ,  pupil,  scholar. 
Clever  [elve],  §  158,  to  raise,  raise 
up,  lift  up,  exalt ;   rear,  brine 
up ;  s'  — ,  to  rise,  exalt  one's  self, 
be  lifted  up,  be  exalted. 
61ite  [elit],   choice,   pick  ;    d*  — , 

selected,  picked. 
elle  [el],  she,  it,  her. 
^loignl  [elwape],  distant, 
^loig^er  (s')  [  s  elwape  ],    to    go ' 

away,  disappear  in  the  distance. 
Eloquent  [eloka],  eloquent, 
embarras  [abara],  m.,  embarrass- 
ment. 
embarquer  (s')  [s  abarke],  intr.,  to 

embark, 
embaumer  [a home],  to  perfume, 
embl^me  [ableim],  m.,  emblem, 
embrasser  [abrase],  to  embrace, 
clasp,    kiss  ;    a'  — ,    to   embrace 
one  another,  kiss  one  another, 
embrasure  [abrazyir],    f.,  embra- 
sure, recess  (of  window,  etc. ). 
embrouiller  (s'),  [s  abruje],  to  be- 
come confused,  get  puzzled, 
^merveill^   [emerveje],   p.    part., 

astonished. 
emmener  [amne],  §  158,   to  lead 

or  take  away. 
Amotion   [emosjo],    f.,    emotion, 
feeling. 


480 


VOCABULARY. 


emp^cher  [apeje],  to  hinder,  pre- 
vent (from,  de). 

empereur  [aproeir],  m.,  emperor. 

empire  [dpiir],  m.,  empire. 

emplette  [aplet],  f.,  purchase; 
allerfaire  des  — ,  to  go  shopping. 

emporter  [aporte],  to  carry  away, 
carry  off,  take  away. 

empressement  [  apresma  ],  m,, 
eagerness. 

en  [a],  in,  into  ;  at ;  of  ;  as  a,  like 
a ;  en  +  pres.  part. ,  in,  while, 
whilst,    by    (or   untranslated) ; 

—  dqe  de,  of  an  age  to  ;  —  route, 
on  the  way  ;  —  argent,  of  silver ; 

—  quoi  ?,  of  what  (material)? 
en  [a],  pron.  and  adv.,  of  (from, 

out  of,  for,  by,  etc. )  it  or  them  ; 

of  him,  of  her,  some  of  it,  some 

of  them  ;  some,  any. 
enchanter    [ajate],    to    enchant, 

charm,  delight ;    enchantd,    de- 
lighted. 
encore  [akoir],  yet,   still,  again, 

more,  still  more,  moreover,  be- 
sides, also,  now,   only  ;  —  un, 

another,  one  more ;  —  si,  even 

if. 
encom^  [akorne],  see  under  autre- 

ment. 
encourag^ement  [akurasma],   m., 

encouragement. 
encre  [aikr],  f.,  ink;  a  V—,  with 

ink. 
encrier  [akrie],  m.,  inkstand. 
endormir  (s')  [s  adormiir],  §  166, 

to  go  to  sleep,  fall  asleep ;  en- 

dormi,  asleep. 
endroit  [adrwa],  m.,  place,  spot, 
enfant    [afa],    m.   f.,  child,   son, 

daughter  ;  boy,  girl,  offspring, 
enfermer    [aferme],    to  shut  up, 

lock  up. 
enfin  [afe],  at  last,  finally,  in  fine, 

in  short. 
enfoncer  [afose],   §  156,   to  sink, 

push    down,    plunge ;    s' — ,    to 

bury  one's  self,  plunge. 
engager  [agase],  §  156,  to  pledge, 

engage  ;  s' — ,  to  promise,  pledge 

one's  self. 


enguirlander      [  agirlade  ],      to 

wreathe,  encircle. 
enjamber   [asabe],   bestride,   put 

one's  leg  over. 
enlever  [alve],  §  158,  to  carry  away, 

carry  off. 
ennemi  [enmi],  m. ,  enemy,  foe. 
ennemi    [enmi],    hostile ;    of   the 

enemy. 
ennui  [anx|i],  m. ,  weariness,  ennui, 

tedium,  vexation,  annoyance. 
ennuyer  (s')  [s  finqije],  §  157,  to 

be  wearied,  grow  weary,  find  it 

tiresome. 
ennuyeux  [anqij^],  tiresome,  an- 
noying. 
^norme  [enorm],  enormous,  very 

large,  very  great. 
enrag^  [arase],  mad,  enraged,  des- 
perate. 
enrou^  [arwe],  hoarse. 
enseigner  [asejie],  to  teach, 
ensemble  [asaibl],   together,    all 

together. 
ensevelir    [asavliir],     to    bury, 

swallow  up. 
ensuite  [a suit],  afterwards,  then, 

thereupon,  after  that. 
entendre  [ataidr],  §  210,  to  hear; 

cela  s'entend,  that  is  evident ;  of 

course. 
enthousiasme  [atuzjasm],  m.,  en- 
thusiasm. 
entier  [atje],  entire,  whole;    tout 

— ,  wholly. 
enti^rement    [atjerma],   entirely, 

wholly, 
entourer  [ature],  to  surround, 
entrainer  [atrene],  to  carry  away, 

drag  away, 
entre    [a:tr],    between,     among, 

amongst. 
entree   [atre],   f.,   entrance,    be. 
ginning ;     entree    (a    term    in 
cookery);   hillet  d' — ,  ticket  (of 
admission). 
entremets    [atr9   me],    side-dish, 

entremets. 
entrer  [atre],    to    enter,    go   in^ 
come  in ;  —  danSy  enter. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


481 


^um^rer  [enymere],  §  158,  to  enu- 
merate. 

envahir  [d  vai :  r],  to  invade,  attack. 

envelopper  [avlope],  to  envelop, 
wrap  up,  muffle  ;  surround. 

envers  [aveir],  towards. 

envie  [avi],  f.,  envy,  desire,  incli- 
nation ;  avoir  —  de,  to  feel  like, 
wish  or  desire  to. 

cnvironner  [avirone],  to  surround, 
environ. 

cnvoler  (s')  [s  a  vole],  to  fly  away, 
take  to  flight. 

envoyer  [avwaje],  §  157,  to  send. 

^pais  [epe],  thick,  close  together  ; 
colonne  ipaisse,  see  colovne. 

^pargner  [eparjie],  to  save,  eco- 
nomize. 

^pars  [epa:r],  scattered. 

^paule  [epo:l],  f.,  shoulder. 

^p^e  [epe],  f. ,  sword ;  —  de  chevet, 
sword  kept  under  the  pillow  for 
defence  in  case  of  attack  by 
night,  a  thing  which  one  con- 
stantly uses,  a  '*  stand  by." 

^peler  [eple],  §  158,  to  spell. 

^pervier  [epervje],  m.,  hawk. 

^pi  [epi],  m. ,  ear  (of  corn). 

epingle  [ep?!gl],  f.,  pin. 

^pop^e  [epope],  f.,  epic  poem, 
epic. 

^poque  [epok],  f.,  epoch,  period, 
time. 

^pouser  [epuze],  to  marry  (tr.), 
take  in  marriage,  wed. 

^pouvantable  [epuvatabl],  fright- 
ful, dreadful,  terrible. 

^puiser  (s)  [s  epqize],  to  be  or  be- 
come exhausted,  waste  away. 

^questre  [ekestr],  equestrian,  of  a 
horse. 

6quilibre  [ekiliibr],  m.,  equili- 
orium.  balance. 

^quit6  [ekite],  f.,  equity,  justice. 

Arable  [erabl],  m.,  maple. 

erreur  [eroeir],  f.,  error,  mistake. 

es  [e],  2  sg.  pres.  indie.  Stre. 

escadre  [eskadr],  f.,  squadron, 
fleet ;  chef  rf'  — ,  rear-admiral. 

escadron  [eskadrd],  m.,  squadron 
(milit.). 
81 


escalader    [eskalade],    to    scale, 

climb. 
escalier  [eskalje],  m.,  stairs. 
esclave  [esklaiv],  m.    f.,    slave; 

iomher  — ,  to  fall  into  slavery, 

become  a  slave. 
espace  [espois],  m.,  space. 
espece  [espes],  f.,  species,  kind. 
esperance  [esperais],  f.,  hope. 
esperer  [espere],  §  158,  to  hope, 

hope  for,  expect, 
espoir  [espwa:r],  m. ,  hope,  expecta- 
tion, 
esprit  [espri],  m.,  spirit,  mind, wit; 

Saint-Esprit,  Holy  Ghost, 
essayer  [eseje],  §  157,  to  try,  at- 
tempt ;  try  on. 
essouffle  [esufle],  p.  part.,  out  of 

breath,  breathless. 
est  [e],   3  sg.    pres.  indie,   etre ; 

ce  que?,  is  it  (the  case)  that? 

(a  statement  prefixed  by  est-ce 

que  ?    becomes    interrogative)  ; 

n'eat-ce  pas  ?,  lit. ,  is  it  not  (so)  ? 

(variously  rendered  to  suit  the 

context). 
estrade[estrad],  f. ,  stage,  platform, 
et  [e],  and. 

Stable  [etabl],  f. ,  stable,  byre, 
^tait  [ete],  3  sg.  impf.  indie.  Stre. 
^talent  [ete],   3  pi.    impf.    indie. 

Stre. 
Staler  [etale],  to  spread  out,  dis- 
play, 
etant  [eta],  pres.  part.  Stre. 
itat  [eta],  m.,  state;  condition; 

homme  d'J^tat,  statesman  ;  en  — 

de,  in  a  condition  to. 
£tats-Unis  [etaz    yni],    m.,   pi., 

United  States. 
it6  [ete],  m.,  summer;  en  — ,  ha 

summer. 
aeindre  [et?idr],  §  190,  to  extin- 

guish  ;  s' — ,  to  be  extinguished, 

die  away,  go  out  or  disappear 

(of  a  light,  etc. ). 
^teignirent  [etejiiir],   3  pi.   past 

def.  Steindre. 
^tendard  [etadair],  m.,  standard, 

banner. 
^tendre  [etdidr],  §  210,  to  stretch. 


482 


VOCABULARY. 


extend,  stretch  out ;  «' — ,  to 
stretch  one's  self  out,  lie  down. 

^ternel  [eternel],  eternal. 

^ternite  [eternite],  f.,  eternity. 

etes  [e:t],  2  pi.  pres.  indie.  Ure. 

Etiquette  [etiket],  f.,  etiquette. 

^toile  [etwal],  f.,  star, 

^tonner  [etone],  to  astonish,  sur- 
prise ;  s' — ,  to<  be  astonished, 
surprised  (at,  de). 

^touffer  [etuf  e],  to  suffocate,  choke, 
smother,  stifle. 

^tourdi  [eturdi],  m.,  madcap. 

6tre  [eitr],  §  154,  to  be ;  —  d,  to 
belong^  to  ;  fen  itais  Id,  de  mes 
reflexions,  T  had  gone  thus  far  in 
my  reflexions ;  nous  somnies  cinq, 
there  are  five  of  us. 

^trenne  [etren],  f. ,  New  Year's  gift. 

^troitement[etrwatma],  narrowly, 
closely. 

^tudier  [etydje],  to  study. 

eu  [y],  past  p.  avoir. 

eumes  [ym],  1  pi.  past  def.  avoir. 

eurent  [yir],  3  pi.  past  def.  avoir. 

Europe  [oerop],  f.,  Europe. 

europeen  [oeropee],  European. 

eus  [y],  1  sg.  past  def.  avoir. 

eusse  [ys],  1  sg.  impf.  subj.  avoir. 

eut  [y],  3  sg.  past  def.  avoir. 

cut  [y],  3  sg.  impf.  subj.  avoir 

eutes  [yt],  2  pi.  p.  def.,  avoir. 

eux  [0],  they,  them. 

eux-memes  [0  meim],  they  them- 
selves, themselves. 

^vanouir  (s')  [s  evanwiir],  to  van- 
ish ;  ^vanoui,  p.  part. ,  vanished, 
vanishing. 

^veil  [eve  I  j],  m. ,  awakening,  watch ; 
en  — ,  on  one's  guard,  on  the 
watch. 

^venement  [evenma],   m.,  event. 

^ventail  [evataij],  m.,  fan. 

^ventualite  [evatqalite],  f.,  con- 
tingency. 

^videmment  [evidama],  evidently. 

exagerer  [egzasere],  §  156,  to  ex- 
aggerate. 

examiner  [egzamine],  to  examine. 

excepts  [eksepte],  except. 

exoes  [ekse]   m. ,  excess. 


excessif  [eksesif],  excessive. 

exciter  [eksite],  to  excite. 

exclamation  [esklamasjo],  f.,  ex- 
clamation. 

excuser  [ekskyze],  to  excuse. 

exemple  [egzapl],  m.,  example, 
pattern ;  copy,  copy-slip,  head- 
line ;  par  — ,  for  instance,  for 
example  ;  you  don't  say  so  !, 
dear  me  ! 

exercice  [egzersis],  m.,  exercise; 
/aire  F — ,  to  drill  (milit.). 

exhaler  (s')  [s  egzale],  to  be  ex- 
haled, be  breathed  forth. 

exil6  [egzile],  m. ,  exile. 

exister  [egziste],  to  exist. 

expirer  [ekspire],  to  expire,  die. 

explication  [eksplikasjo],  f.,  ex- 
planation. 

expliquer  [eksplike],  to  explain. 

exploit  [eksplwa],  m.,  exploit, 
achievement. 

exprimer  [eksprime],  to  express. 

extase  [ekstaizj,  f.,  ecstasy,  rap- 
ture. 

extenuer  [ekstenqe],  to  extenuate, 
enfeeble,  weaken,  reduce. 

extermination  [eksterminasjo],  f., 
extermination. 

extraordinaire  [  ekstraordine :  r  ], 
extraordinary,  unusual. 

extr^mit^  [  ekstremite  ],  f.,  ex- 
tremity ;  —  de  gauche,  extreme 
left. 

F. 

fable  [fabl],  f. ,  fable,  story. 

facade  [fasad],  f. ,  front,  fagade. 

face  [fas],  f . ,  face  ;  en  — ,  opposite, 
on  the  other  side ;  en  —  de, 
opposite  to,  facing,  before,  face 
to  face  with,  in  the  presence  of; 
—  d  — ,  face  to  face,  opposite 
(each  other). 

f&cher  [faje],  to  vex,  displease; 
fdcM,  sorry,  angry. 

f4cheux  [faJ0],  vexatious,  annoy- 
ing. 

facile  [fasil],  easy. 

facilement  [fasilma],  easily. 

fa^on   [faso],    f.,    fashion,    way, 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


483 


maimer ;  outline,  sketch  ;  de  — 
d  ce  que,  in  such  a  way  or 
manner  that ;  de  la  mime  — ,  in 
the  same  way. 

facteur  [faktoeir],  m.,  post-man, 
letter-carrier. 

faction  [faksjo],  f.,  itre  de  — ,  to 
be  on  duty. 

factoton  [faktoto],  m.,  factotum. 

fade  [fad],  insipid,  tasteless. 

faible  [fe:bl],  weak,  feeble. 

faiblesse  [febles],  f.,  weakness. 

faim  [f e],  f. ,  himger ;  avoir  — ,  to 
be  hungry. 

faire  [fe:r],  §  195,  to  do,  make, 
act,  cause  (  +  infin.,  to  do  or  be 
done),  produce,  occasion,  give, 
form ;  say,  reply,  exclaim,  cry, 
•remark  ;  faire  faire,  to  have 
made,  cause  to  be  made  ;  — 
vivre,   to  keep  alive,  support ; 

—  fe  tour  de,  to  go  round  ;  —  le 
mort,  to  pretend  to  be  dead  ;  — 
jp/oi«ir,  to  givepleasure;  — peurd, 
to  frighten ;  — ses  courses,  to  make 
one's  rounds ;  —  attention,  to 
pay  attention  ;  —  sortir,  to  put 
out,  expel ;  —  la  cour,  pay  court ; 

—  texercioe,  to  drill  (milit.);  — 
la  classe,  to  give  a  lesson,  teach ; 
cela  ne  fait  rien,  that  makes  no 
diflFerence ;  — fSte  d,  to  welcome, 
hail  with  joy  ;  ce  qui  fait  que 
le  dindon  a  fair  de,  etc.,  which 
makes  the  turkey  seem  to,  etc. ; 

—  lea  malles,  to  pack  the  trunks ; 

—  voir,  to  show ;  —  mal  d,  to 
pain,  hurt ;  —  un  pas,  to  take 
a  step ;  —  bonne  ch&re,  to  pro- 
vide good  cheer,  provide  a  good 
spread ;  fais  done,  do  (so)  then, 
do  (it  your  own  way)  then,  all 
right ;  je  ferais  conscience  de, 
I  should  scruple  to,  I  should 
think  it  a  sin  to  ;  —  une  ques- 
tion, to  ask  a  question ;  il  fait 
beau  {chaud,  etc. ),  it  is  fine  (hot, 
etc. ). 

Caire  (se)  [sa  Uw],  §  195,  to  make 
one's  self,  render  one's  self, 
make  to  or  for  one's  self ;  to  be 


done  ;  to  become ;  to  take  place; 
to  be ;  se  —  rare,  to  decrease,  be- 
come scanty;  it  sefaisaitun  grand 
tapage,  there  was  a  great  uproar  j 
se  —  d,  to  adapt  one's  self  to. 

fais  [fe],  1  sg.  pres.  indie,  faire. 

faisaient  [faze],  3  pi.  impf .  indie. 
faire. 

faisais  [faze],  1  sg.  impf.  faire. 

faisait  [faze],  3  sg.  impf.  faire. 

faisant  [faza],  pres.  part,  faire. 

faisan  [feza],  m.,  pheasant. 

faisons  [fazo],  1  pL  pres.  indie. 
faire. 

fait  [fet],  m.,  fact,  event;  tout  d 
—  [tut  a  fe],  altogether,  entirely, 
quite. 

fait  [fe],  '6  sg.  pres.  indie,  faire. 

fait  [fe],  p.  part,  faire ;  bien  —  de 
sa  personne,  handsome. 

faites  [fet],  2  pi.  pres.  indie,  and 
impve.  faire. 

fallait  [fale],  3  sg.  impf.  indie. 
falloir. 

falloir  [falwair],  §  218,  impers. 
vb. ,  to  be  necessary,  have  to ; 
ilfaut  +  in^n.,  one  (etc.)  must, 
one  has  to  ;  ilfaZlait  que,  it  was 
necessary  that  (he,  etc. ),  he  was 
obliged  to  or  had  to  ;  il  luifaut, 
he  needs,  must  have ;  il  faul 
manger,  one  must  eat ;  il  avait 
fallu,  he  had  been  obliged. 

fallut  [faly],  3  sg.  past  def.  falloir, 

fameux  [fam0],  famous,  celebrated. 

famille  [fami:j],  f.,  family. 

fanfare  [fafa :  r],  f. ,  flourish  of  trum- 
pets, brass -band. 

fantome  [fatoim],  m.,  phantom, 
shadow,  ghost. 

fardeau  [fardo],  m.,  burden,  load. 

farine  [farin],  f. ,  flour. 

farouche  [faruj],  wild,  fierce. 

fasse  [fas],  3  sg.  pres.  subj.  faire, 

fatal  [fatal],  fatal. 

fatality  [fatalite],  f.,  fatality. 

fatigue  [fatiig],  f.,  fatigue. 

fatig^^  [fatige],  tired. 

fatiguer  [fatige],  to  fatigue,  wearv, 
tire ;  se  — ,  to  fatigue  one's  self, 
etc. 


484 


VOCABULAEY. 


faucher  [foje],  to  mow,  reap, 
reaper. 


faucheur    [fojceir],    m.,    mower, 


faudra  [fodra],  3  sg.  fut.  falloir. 

faut  [fo],  3  sg.  pres.  indie,  falloir. 

faute,[fo:t],  f.,  fault,  mistake. 

faux-col  [fo  kol],  m.,  collar. 

feler  [fele],  to  crack  (glass,  etc. ). 

femme  [fam],  f.,  woman,  wife. 

fendre  [faidr],  §  210,  to  split, 
cleave  ;  break  ;  se  — ,  intr. ,  to 
burst  (asunder),  break. 

fenetre  [faneitr],  f.,  window. 

fer  [fe:r],  m.,  iron  ;  en  — ,  iron 
(adj. ),  of  iron ;  —  battu,  wrought 
iron  ;  chemin  de  — ,  railway ;  — 
d  cheval,  horse-shoe. 

fera  [fara],  3  sg.  fut.  /aire. 

ferait  [fsre],  3  sg.  condl.  /aire. 

ferez  [fare],  2  pi.  fut.  /aire. 

feriez  [farje],  2  pi.  condl.  /aire. 

ferme  [ferm],  firm(ly),  hard. 

fermer  [ferme],  to  shut  (up),  close ; 
lock  ;  —  d  double  tour,  to  double- 
lock. 

f^roce  [feros],  fierce,  ferocious, 
wild  ;  bite  — ,  wild  beast. 

ferrant  [fera],  that  shoes  horses  ; 
7tiar4chal  — ,  blacksmith,  horse- 
shoer. 

ferons  [faro],  1  pi.  fut.  /aire. 

ffete  [fe:t],  f.,  holiday,  festival ; 
festivity,  feast,  merry-making  ; 
itre  en  — ,  to  be  in  festivity,  hold 
a  celebration ;  faire  —  d,  to 
welcome,  hail  with  joy ;  Fete- 
dieu.  Corpus  Christi  day ;  jour 
de  — ,  holiday. 

feu  [f0],  m.,  fire. 

feuillage  [foejais],  m.,  foliage, 
leaves. 

feuille  [foeij],  f.,  leaf. 

f6vrier  [fevrie],  m.,  February. 

fid^lement  [fidelma],  faithfully. 

fiel  [fjel],  m.,  gall,  bitterness. 

fier  [fjeir],  proud. 

fiferement  [fjerma],  proudly. 

fiert^  [fjerte],  f.,  pride. 

figure  [figyir],  f.,  face,  counten- 
ance. 

fil  [fil],  m.,  thread  j  —de/er,  wire. 


filature  [filatyir],  f.,  spinning-milL 

file[fil],f.,  row,  file. 

fille  [fi:j],  f.,  girl,  daughter. 

fiUette  [fijet],  f.,  little  girl. 

fils  [fis],  m. ,  son. 

fin  [f?],  f.,  end;  d  la  — ,  finally, 
at  last. 

fin  [  fe  ],  fine,  delicate,  sweet : 
minute. 

finir  [finiir],  to  finish,  conclude, 
end ;  il  /nit  par  lui  demander^ 
he  asked  him  finally ;  c'est  /ni, 
it's  all  over. 

firent  [fi:r],  3  pi.  p.  def.  /aire. 

fis  [fi],  1  sg.  p.  def.  /aire. 

fit  [fi],  3  sg.  p.  def.  /aire. 

fit  [fi],  3  sg.  impf.  subj.  /aire. 

fttes  [fit],  2  pi.  p.  def.  /aire. 

fixement  [fiksma],  fixedly. 

fixer  [fikse],  to  fix,  fasten;  gaze 
(steadily)  at. 

fianc  [fla],  m.,  flank,  side,  womb. 

flatter  [flate],  to  flatter. 

fleur  [floeir],  f.,  flower;  en — ,  in 
flower,  blooming. 

fleuve  [floeiv],  m.,  river. 

flot  [flo],  m.,  wave,  billow. 

flotte[flot],  f.,  fleet. 

flotter  [flote],  to  float,  wave. 

foi  [fwo],  f.,  faith;  ma  — !,  faith! 

foire  [fwair],  f.,  fair  (market). 

fois  [fwa],  f.,  time  (repeated  occa- 
sion) ;  tant  de  — ,  so  many  times, 
so  often  ;  une  — ,  deujc  — ,  once, 
twice  ;  encore  une  — ,  once  more, 

folic  [foli],  f. ,  madness,  folly ;  d  la 
— ,  madly,  to  distraction. 

folic  [fol],  t.,  madwoman,  madcap, 
giddy  creature. 

folle  [fol],  f.  of  /ou  ;  Stre  —  de,  to 
be  passionately  fond  of,  dote  on. 

foUement  [folma],  madly,  extrava- 
gantly, exceedingly. 

fond  [fo],  m. ,  bottom,  depth,  abyss ; 
crown  (of  hat) ;  au  —  de,  at  or  in 
the  bottom  of,  at  the  back  of, 
in  the  depth(s)  of ;  /aire  —  sur, 
to  set  store  by,  depend  upon. 

fondre  [foidr],  §  210,  to  melt. 

font  [fo],  3  pi.  pres.  indie,  /aire, 

fontc  [foit],  f.,  holster. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


485 


format  [forsa],  m.,  galley-slave, 
convict. 

force  [fors],  f.,  force,  strength, 
might ;  de  toute  sa  — ,  with  all 
one's  might ;  A  —  de  mangeaille, 
by  dint  of  gorging. 

force  [fors],  adv.,  much,  many,  a 
great  many. 

forcer  [forse],  §  156,  to  force,  oblige 
(to,  de). 

foret  [fore],  f.,  forest. 

forgeron  [forsaro],  m.,  blacksmith. 

forme  [form],  f.,  form,  shape. 

former  [forme],  to  form  ;  muster. 

formidable[formidabl],formidable, 
frightful. 

fort  [fo:r],  strong,  powerful ;  big, 
thick ;  clever. 

fort  [fo:r],  much,  very,  very  much ; 
loud,  loudly  ;  m'a  —  servi,  has 
been  of  great  service  to  me. 

fortune  [fortyn],  f. ,  fortune,  good 
luck  ;  chercker  — ,  to  seek  one's 
fortune,  see  what  one  can  find. 

fosse  [fo!s],  f.,  pit,  grave. 

foss6  [fose],  m.,  ditch,  moat. 

fou  [fu],  mad,  foolish,  extremely 
or  excessively  fond  (of,  de). 

fouace  [fwas],  f. ,  hearth-cake. 

fouet  [fwe],  m.,  whip. 

loug^eux  [fug0],  spirited,  fiery. 

foule  [fu:l],  f.,  crowd. 

fourchette  [furjet],  f.,  fork. 

fourmi  [furmi],  f.,  ant. 

foumir  [fumi:r],  to  furnish,  pro- 
vide. 

fourr^  [fure],  furry ;  bonnet  — ,  fur- 
lined  cap. 

fourrer  (se)  [sa  fure],  to  thrust 
one's  self  (into,  dans),  creep 
(into,  dans). 

fourrure  [furyir],  f.,  fur. 

foyer  [fwaje],  m.,  hearth. 

frac  [frak],  m. ,  dress-coat. 

fraichir  [frejiir],  intr.,  to  freshen. 

frais,  fraicne  [fre,  freij],  cool, 
fresh  ;  /aire  — ,  to  be  cool  (of 
weather,  temperature). 

franc  [fro],  m. ,  franc  (a  coin  worth 
about  20  cents). 

France  [fro  is],  f.,  Franco. 


fran^ais  [frase],  adj.,  French; 
m.,  Frenchman;  le  — ,  French 
(the  language);  en — ,  in  French; 
parler  — ,  to  speak  French. 

franchir  [frajiir],  to  pass,  leap 
over,  cross. 

Franijois  [fraswa],  m,,  Francis. 

Franklin  (Benjamin)  [  bs3am5 
frakle  ],  Benjamin  Franklin, 
American  statesman  and  philo- 
sopher, b.  1706,  d.  1790. 

Frantz  [f rants],  n.  pr.  m.,  Frank. 

frappement[frapma],  m.,  striking, 
stroke  ;  —  des  sabots,  trampling 
of  hoofs. 

frapper  [frape],  to  strike,  knock, 
rap. 

fratemel  [fraternel],  brotherly, 
fraternal. 

frayeur  [frejceir],  f.,  fright,  fear. 

Fr^d^ric  le  Grand  [frederik  la 
gra],  Frederic  the  Great,  King 
of  Prussia,  b.  1712,  d.  1786. 

frigate  [fregat],  f. ,  frigate. 

fr^re  [fre:r],  m.,  brother. 

friction  [friksjo],  f.,  friction,  rub- 
bing. 

froid  [frwa],  adj.,  cold;  /rote/,  m., 
cold. 

froissement  [frwasmfi],  m.,  clash- 
ing. 

froler  [frole],  to  graze,  touch  light- 
ly (in  passing). 

front  [fro],  m.,  forehead,  brow; 
front,  van  ;  changement  de  — , 
change  of  front,  transformation. 

frotter  [frote],  to  rub. 

frug:alit^  [frygalite],  f.,  frugality. 

fruit  [frqi],  m. ,  fruit. 

fruitier  [frqitje],  fruit-bearing ; 
arbre  — ,  fruit-tree. 

fuir  ffiiiir],  §  170,  to  flee,  fly,  run 
away,  escape. 

fum^e  [fyme],  f.,  smoke. 

fumer  [fyme],  to  smoke,  reek. 

furent  [fy:r],  3  pi.  p.  def.  of  Stre. 

furie  [fyri],  f. ,  fury,  rage. 

furieux  [fyrj0],  furious,  fierce. 

fusil  [fyzi],  m.,  gun,  musket. 

fussent  [fys],  3  pi.  imp.  subj.  Stre, 

fut  [fy],  3  sg.  past  de£  Stre. 


486 


VOCABULARY. 


fiit  [fy],  3  sg.  impf.  subj.  ^tre  ;  — 
de  la  compagnie,  should  join  the 
company  ;  que  ce  — joli,  in  order 
that  it  should  be  pretty  {pour 
being  understood  with  qu£). 

G. 

gages  [gais],  m.  pi.,  wages. 
gagner  [gape],  to  gain,  win,  earn, 

obtain  ;  reach ;  seize,  come  over; 

flee  to,  take  refuge  in. 
gai  [ge],  gay,  merry,  cheerful. 
gaite  [gete],  f . ,  gayety,  mirth,  glee, 
galerie  [galri],  f,,  gallery. 
galop  [galo],  m.,  gallop. 
galopade  [galopad],  f.,  galloping, 

rushing. 
gambader  [go bade],    to  gambol, 

frisk  or  skip  about, 
gant  [go],  m.,  glove, 
gantier  [gatje],  m.,  glover. 
gar^on  [garso],  m.,  boy. 
garde  [gard],  m. ,  guard,  keeper, 
garde  [gard],  f . ,  defence,  guard  ; 

tomber  en  — ,    to    assume    the 

defensive. 
garder  [garde],  to  keep,  preserve, 

have  in  store. 
garde-robe  [gard  rob],  f.,  ward- 
robe. 
gare  [gair],  f.,  station, 
garenne  [garen],  f. ,  warren  ;  lapin 

de  — ,  wild  rabbit. 
garnir  [garni  ir],   to  adorn,  orna- 
ment. 
gkti  [gate],  spoiled,  decayed  (of 

teeth). 
gater  [gate],  to  spoil, 
gauche  [go:j],  adj.,  left. 
gauche  [go: J],  f.,  left-hand,  left, 

left-side  ;  d  {la)  — ,  de  — ,  to  or 

on  the  left  (hand). 
Gauthier  (Th^ophile)  [teofil  gotje], 

French  writer,  b.  1811,  d.  1872. 
gazon    [gaz5],     m.,    turf,    grass, 

green -sward, 
g^ant  [sea],  gigantic. 
geler  [sole],  §  158,  to  freeze  ;  gelS, 

frozen. 


g^missement  [semisma],  m. ,  groan 
(ing),  moan(ing). 

gendarme  [sadarm],  m.,  dragoon. 

gendre  [saidr],  m.,  son-in-law. 

gener  [.sene],  to  impede,  restrain^ 
incommode,  be  in  the  way  of. 
disturb  ;  se  — ,  to  put  one's  self 
to  inconvenience,  to  hesitate. 

g^n^ral  [seneral],  general;  m., 
general ;  en  — ,  in  general,  gen- 
erally. 

generosity  [senerozite],  f.,  gene- 
rosity. 

genet  [sone],  m.,  broom  (bot.). 

genie  [seni],  m.,  genius. 

genou  [sonu],  m.,  knee. 

gens  [so],  m.  f.  pi.,  people ;  —  de 
la  cour,  courtiers. 

gentil  [sati],  pretty,  nice. 

geographic  [seografi],  f.,  geo- 
graphy. 

gerfaut  [serfo],  m.,  gyrfalcon. 

germer  [serme],  to  sprout. 

geste  [sest],  m.,  gesture,  sign. 

gibier  [sibje],  m.,  game  (the  pro- 
duct of  the  chase). 

gilet  [.sile],  m.,  waistcoat,  vest. 

giraumont  [siromo],  m. ,  pumpkin. 

glace  [glas],  f. ,  ice  ;  ice-cream. 

glissade  [glisad],  f.,  slide  ;/atr« 
des  — «,  to  go  sliding  (on  the 
ice). 

glisser  [glise],  to  slip,  slide. 

gloire  [glwair],  f.,  glory. 

glorieux  [glorj0],  glorious,  proud, 
elated. 

go  [go] ;  tout  de  — ,  unceremoni- 
ously, without  hesitation. 

gonfler  (se)  [so  gofle],  to  swell  (up), 
be  swollen. 

gouailleur  [gwajoeir],  m.,  joker, 
one  fond  of  teasing  or  chaffing. 

gouffre  [gufr],  m.,  gulf,  abyss. 

gourmande  [gurma  :d],  f.,  glutton, 
gourmand. 

gout  [gu],  m.,  taste ;  de  bon  — ,  in 
good  taste. 

gouter  [gute],  m. ,  lunch. 

gouter  [gute],  to  taste,  enjoy. 

goutte  [gut],  f.,  drop;  —  d  — , 
drop  by  drop. 


FRENCH-ENGUSH. 


487 


goutti^re  [gutjejr],  f,,  gutter  (of  a 
roof),  "^ave-trough." 

gouverner  [guverne],  to  govern, 
rule,  control,  guide. 

gr&ce  [gra:s],  f.,  grace,  favour; 
pardon. 

gracieux  [grasj0],gracious,  kindly. 

grain  [gre],  m.,  grain,  corn. 

graine  [^re:n],  f.,  seed. 

gjammaire  [grame :  r],  f . ,  grammar. 

grand  [gra],  great,  large,  tall, 
grand  ;  long. 

grand'chose  [gra  Joiz],  much. 

grandir  [gradiir],  to  grow,  grow 
large,  grow  up  ;  increase. 

g^and-pfere  [gra  peir],  m.,  grand- 
father. 

grange  [gra :  3],  f. ,  bam. 

g^as  [gra],  fat ;  mardi ,  Shrove- 

Tuesday. 

g^ave  [  graiv  ],  grave,  serious, 
solemn. 

gravement  [gravma],  gravely,  seri- 
ously. 

graver  [grave],  to  engrave. 

gravitation  [gravitasjo],  f.,  gravi- 
tation. 

g^^  [gre],  m.,*will,  wish,  liking, 
pleasure ;  prendre  en  —  de,  to 
take  a  fancy  to ;  d  son  — ,  to 
one's  taste. 

grelot  [gralo],  m. ,  bell  (spherical), 
sleigh-bell. 

grillage  [grijais],  m.,  grating, 
wire- work  ;  —  aux  affiches,  bul- 
letin-board (covered  with  a  wire 
net- work  as  a  protection). 

grimper  [grfpe],  to  climb. 

grincement  [gr?sma],  m.,  scratch- 
ing (sound  of  pens  on  paper). 

gris  [gri],  gray,  dark-coloured ; 
vain  — ,  black  bread,  coarse 
bread,  etc. 

gTonder  [grode],  to  chide,  scold ; 

grumble,  rumble  (of  thunder). 
gros    [gro],    large,     big,    great ; 
heavy  ;  le  coeur  — ,  with  a  heavy 
heart, 
grossissement  [grosisma],  m.,  in- 

crease,  growing. 
groupe  [grup],  m.,  group,  mass. 


g^ere  [geir],  but  little,  not  much ; 
ne  .  .  .  — ,  hardly  ...  at  all. 

guerir  [geriir],  to  cure. 

guerre  [geir],  f,,  war. 

guet-apens  [get  apa],  m.,  ambus- 
cade. 

guide  [gid],  m.,  guide. 

guise  [gi:z],  f.,  manner,  way, 
fancy;  d  sa  — ,  at  will,  as  one 
likes. 

H. 
[h  aspirate  is  indicated  thus :  *1lJ 

*hal  'ha  I  [a,  a],  ha!  ha  I 
habile  [abil],  able,  clever, 
habiller  [abije],  to  dress. 
habit  [abi],   m,,    garment,  dress, 
apparel,  garb  ;  coat;  pi.,  clothes, 

apparel,  costume. 
habitant  [abita],  m.,  inhabitant, 

resident, 
habiter  [abite],  to  inhabit,  live  in. 
habitude  [abityd],  f.,  habit,  cus- 
tom ;  d' — ,  ordinarily,  usually. 
habituer    [abitqe],    to  accustom; 

habituate  ;    «' — ,    to    accustom 

one's  self,  get  used  (to,  d). 
'hacher  [ajej,  to  chop,  hack,  cut 

to  pieces,  mince. 
*haie  [e],  f. ,  hedge, 
'haine  [e:n],  f.,  hatred. 
haleine[ale:nl,  f.,  breath  ;  prendre 

— ,  to  take  breath,  recover  one's 

breath, 
'hanneton  [anto],   m.,    may-bug, 

cock-chafer. 
harmonie  [armoni],  f. ,  harmony. 
'haricot  [ariko],  m. ,  kidney-bean  ; 

stew  of  mutton  and  turnips. 
'Harpagon  [arpago],   Harpagon, 

a  miser,  the  chief  personage  in 

Moli^re's  ' '  1' Avare  ". 
'hasard  [azair],  m.,  chance;  par 

— ,  by  chance,  perchance., 
*h4te  [a:t],   f.,  haste;   en  — ,  in 

haste. 
'h&ter  (se)    [sa  ate],   to   hasten, 

hurry. 
'hausser  (se)  [se  ose],  to  raise  one's 

self,  rise  ;  se  —  sur  la  pointe  des 

pieds,  to  stand  upon  tiptoe. 


488 


VOCABULARY. 


*haut  [o],  m. ,  height ;  top,  upper 
part,  summit ;  en  — ,  up  stairs. 

*haut  [o],  high  ;  loud. 

'haut  [o],  adv. ,  loud. 

'hayel  [haij],  interj.,  indicating 
surprise. 

♦h6 1  [e],  hoy !,  halloo ! 

helas!  [elais],  alas! 

Helene  [elein],  f.,  Helen. 

Henri  [ari],  m.,  Henry. 

herbe  [erb],  f.,  grass,  herb(8). 

heritage  [eritais],  m.,  heritage, 
inheritance. 

hesiter  [ezite],  to  hesitate. 

'hetre  [e:tr],  m.,  beech. 

heure  [oeir],  f.,  hour;  time; 
quelle  —  est-il  ?,  what  o'clock  is 
it  ? ;  A  —  heure  ?,  at  what 
o'clock  ?,  at  what  hour  ?  ;  d  neuf 
— 8,  at  nine  o'clock  ;  tout  d  V — , 
not  long  ago,  just  now,  a  little 
ago ;  de  bonne  — ,  early,  betimes, 
in  good  time. 

heureusement  [oer^zma],  happily, 
luckily,  fortunately. 

heureux  [cer0],  happy. 

hier  [je-.r],  yesterday;  —  aoir, 
yesterday  evening. 

hippanthrope  [ipatrop],  m. ,  a  fabu- 
lous monster  half  man  half  horse, 
centaur. 

hirondelle  [irodel],  f.,  swallow. 

histoire[istwa:r],  f.,  history,  story. 

hiver  [iveir],  m.,  winter;  en  — , 
in  winter. 

homme  [om],  m.,  man  ;  —  (TMat, 
statesman. 

homme-cheval  [om  Javal],  m., 
centaur. 

honnetement  [onetma],  honestly, 
honourably,  decently. 

honneur  [once:r],  m.,  honour. 

'honte  [5 it],  f., shame;  avoir — ,  to 
be  ashamed. 

hdpital  [opital],  m.,  hospital. 

horizon  [orizo],  m.,  horizon. 

horloge  [orloi^],  f.,  clock. 

horrible  [oriblj,  horrible. 

*hors  de  [osr  de],  outside  of,  ex- 
cept, apart  from. 


'hortibus  [ortibys],  the  erroneous 
Latin  form  which  the  .boy  in  the 
story  dreamt  that  he  wrote  in  his 
exercise  instead  of  the  form  hortis. 

bote  [o:t],  m.,  guest. 

hostilite  [ostilite],  f.,  hostility, 
attack. 

Hotel- Dieu  [otel  dj0],  m. ,  hospital. 

hotel  de  viUe  [otel  da  vil],  m. ,  town- 
hall. 

'houblon  [ublo],  m.,  hop,  hop- vine. 

'houppelande  [upla  id],  f. ,  big  coat, 
great-coat. 

Hugo  (Victor)  [viktoir  ygo], 
French  writer,  b.  1802,  d.  1885. 

huile  [qil],  f.,  oil. 

*huit  [qit],  eight. 

humain  [yme],  human. 

humeur  [ymoe:r],  f.,  humour. 

humide  [ymid],  damp,  wet. 

'hurlement  [yrlama],  m.,  howl, 
howling. 

'Hurler  [yrle],  to  howl,  roar,bellow. 

hydre  [idr],  f.,  hydra. 

L 

ici  [isi],  here  ;  ici-hasy  here  below. 

id^e  [ide],  f.,  idea.  * 

ignoble  [ipobl],  mean,  base. 

ignorance  [iporois],  f.,  ignorance. 

ignorer  [ipore],  to  be  ignorant  of, 
not  to  know. 

il  [il],  he,  it ;  -^  en  vint  plttskura^ 
there  came  several. 

lie  [il],  f . ,  island. 

ils  [il],  they. 

illusion  [ilyzjo],  f.,  illusion. 

imm^diat  [imedja],  immediate. 

immense  [imais],  immense. 

immobile  [imobil],  motionless. 

impatience  [epasjais],  f.,  impa- 
tience. 

impatienter  (s*)  [s  fpasjate],  to 
become  impatient. 

impertinent  [epertina],  imperti- 
nent, stupid. 

imperturbable  [epertyrbabl],  im- 
perturbable. 

impetuosity  [gpetqozite],  f. ,  impe- 
tuosity. 

important  [eportd],  important. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


489 


importer  [eporte],  to  be  of  conse- 
quence ;  n'importe,  no  matter ; 
n^importe  quel  autre,  any  other. 

impossibilite  [eposibilite],  f.,  im- 
possibility. 

impossible  [eposibl],  impossible. 

impression  [epresjo],  f.,  impres- 
sion. 

imprevoyance  [eprevwajais],  f., 
want  of  foresight. 

imprimer  [eprime],  to  print. 

impuissant  [Epqisa],  powerless. 

impur  [epy:r],  impure. 
I   jinattendu  [inatady],  unexpected. 
!   iincendie  [esadi],  m.,  burning,  fire. 

incliner  [ekline],  to  incline,  bend ; 
«' — ,  to  bow. 
^  ^connu  [ekony],  unknown. 
}    inconstant     [  ekosta  ],     variable, 
wavering. 

inconvenient  [?kovenja],  m.,  dis- 
advantage. 

incorruptible  [?koryptibl],  incor- 
ruptible. 

'independant  [fdepddd],  independ- 
H  ent. 

^  indicible  [edisibl],  unspeakable. 

indiquer  [edike],  to  indicate. 

indistinctement  [  edistektama  ], 
without  distinction. 

individu  [?dividy],  m.,  individual. 

inexorable  [  inegzorabl  ],  inexor- 
able. 

infanterie  [?fatri],  f.,  infantry. 

infini  [efini],  infinite. 

infini  [efini],  m.,  infinite. 

infiniment  [efinima],  infinitely, 
very  much. 

infirmerie  [ffirmari],  f.,  infirmary, 
sick-ward. 

infirmifere[efirmje:r],  f.,  nurse. 

influent  [eflya],  influential. 

informer  (s')  [s  eforme],  to  in- 
quire. 

injuste  [?3yst],  unjust. 

injustice  [esystis],  f.,  injustice. 

inqui^ter  [ekjete],  §  158,  to  disquiet, 
trouble  ;  «' — ,  to  be  anxious. 

inquietude  [gkjetyd],  f.,  anxiety. 

insecte  [esekt],  m.,  insect. 

inspection  [Sspeksjo],!  ,in8pection. 


instant  [fsta],  m.,  instant,  mo- 
ment ;  d  I' — ,  immediately. 

instruction  [estryksjo],  f.,  instruc- 
tion, education. 

instruit  [estrqi],  informed,  edu- 
cated. 

instrument  [estryma],  m.,  instru- 
ment. 

intact  [etakt],  intact,  whole. 

intelligent  [etelisa],  intelligent. 

intendant  [eta da],  m.,  steward. 

intention  [etasjo],  f.,  intention; 
avoir  U — ,  to  intend. 

interessant  [eteresa],  interesting. 

interesser  [eterese],  to  interest. 

int^ret  [etere],  m. ,  interest. 

int^rieurement  [  Jterjoerma  J,  in- 
wardly. 

interlocuteur  [fterlokytceir],  m., 
interlocutor. 

interroger  [?tero3e],  §  156,  to 
question. 

intervalle  [?terval],  m.,  interval. 

introduire  [etrodqiirj,  §  185,  to 
introduce. 

inutile  [inytil],  useless. 

invisible  [evizibl],  invisible,  un- 
seen. 

invitation  [fvitasjo],  f.,  invitation. 

inviter  [evite],  to  invite,  beg. 

invulnerable  [Svylnerabl],  invul- 
nerable. 

irai  [ire],  1  sg.  fut.  alter. 

irresistible  [irezistibl],  itresistible. 

irriter  [irite],  to  irritate,  excite. 

issue  [isy],  f.,  issue,  outlet. 

J- 

jabot  [sabo],  m.,  frill. 

Jacques  [so  I k],  James. 

jamais  [same],  ever,  never ;  ne. .. 

— ,  never ;  pour  — ,  for  ever, 
jambe  [3a  ib],  f.,  leg. 
Janvier  [3a vje],  m.,  January, 
jardin  [sarde],  m.,  garden, 
jaunissant  [sonisa  ],  turning  yellow, 
je  [38],  I. 


Jean  [3a],  John. 

jeri< 


jericho  [seriko],  Jericho. 
Jerusalem  [seryzalem],  Jerusalem. 


490 


VOCABULARY. 


Jesus-Christ  [sezy    kri],    Jesus 

Christ. 
Jeter  [sate],  §  158,  to  throw,  cast, 

utter  ;  se  — ,  to  fall  upon,  rush. 
^eu  [30],  m.,  play,  game,  motion, 
j'eudi  [30di],  m. ,  Thursday. 
j'eune  [seen],  young. 
j]eune  [30:n],  m.,  fasting. 
jeunesse  [scenes],  f.,  youth. 
joie  [swa],  f.,  joy. 
joli  [3oli],  pretty,  nice,  fine. 
joue  [3u],  f.,  cheek  ;  coucheren — , 

to  aim  at. 
jouer  [swe],  to  play. 
jouet  [3 we],  m.,  toy. 
jouir  [3wi:r],  to  enjoy;  — de^  to 

enjoy, 
jour  [5uir],  m.,  day,  light;  — de 

f^te,  holiday ;  le  —  de  PAn,  New 

Year's  day. 
journal  [surnal],  m.,  newspaper. 
joum6e  [sume],  f.,  day;  toute  la 

— ,  all  day  long. 
joyeux  [3waj0],  joyous,  glad, 
j'uge  [3y:3],  m.,  judge, 
juif  [sqif],  m.,  Jew. 
juillet  [sqije],  m.,  July. 
jusque  (k)  [sysk  (a)],  to,  even,  as 

far  as,  until ;  —  d  ce  que,  till ; 

—  id,  till  now  ; Id,  till  then. 

justement  [systama],  precisely. 
justice  [systis],  f.,  justice. 


Kellermann  [kelerman'],  a  general 
under  Napoleon,  b.  1770,  d.  1835. 

Keyser  [kezeir],  a  general  under 
Napoleon. 

L. 

Ill  [la],  there ;  celui-ld,  that  one, 
the  former  ;  ce  sont  —  ses  adieux, 
those  are  its  farewells. 

Ik-bas  [la  ba],  yonder. 

labourer  [labure],  to  plough,  dig. 

laboureur  [laburoeir],  m.,  hus- 
bandman. 

lac  [lak],  m.,  lake. 

laceron  [lasaro],  m. ,  sow-thistle. 

Ui  dedans  [la  dado],  in  it,  therein. 


Ik-dessus  [la  dsy],  upon  it,  there- 
upon, on  top  of  that. 

La  Fontaine  [la  fStein],  a  cele- 
brated French  writer,  b.  1621, 
d.  1695. 

Ik-haut  [la  o],  up  there,  up  high. 

laisser  [lese],  to  leave,  bequeath, 
let,  let  have  ;  me  —  /aire,  to 
leave  it  to  me  ;  se  —  traire,  to 
allow  herself  to  be  milked ;  — 
tomher,  to  let  fall,  drop. 

lait  [le],  m. ,  milk. 

laitue  [lety],  f.,  lettuce. 

Lamartine  [  lamartin  ],  French 
writer,  b.  1791,  d.  1869. 

Laniennais[lamne],French  writer, 
b.  1782,  d.  1854. 

lance  [la  :s],  f.,  lance. 

lancer  [lose],  §  156,  to  fling,  throw. 

lancier  [lasje],  m.,  lancer. 

langue  [la  :g],  f. ,  tongue,  language. 

languir  [lagiir],  to  languish,  pine 
away  ;  se  — ,  ditto. 

lapereau  [lapro],  m.,  young  rabbit. 

lapin  [lape],  m. ,  rabbit. 

large  [lar3],  wide,  broad. 

larme  [larm],  f . ,  tear ;  rire  aux  — «, 
to  laugh  till  the  tears  come. 

las  [la],  weary. 

latin  [late],  Latin. 

laurier  [lorje],  m.,  laurel. 

laver  [lave],  to  wash. 

le,  la,  1',  les  [la,  la,  1,  le],  the. 

le,  la,  r,  les  [la,  la,  1,  le],  him,  her, 
it,  them. 

legon  [laso],  f.,  lesson. 

lecture  [lektyir],  f.,  reading. 

Lefebvre  -  Desnouettes  [  laf e :  vr 
den  wet],  a  French  general  under 
Napoleon,  b.  1773,  d.  1822. 

l^ger  [lese],  light,  slight. 

legion  [les jo],  f.,  legion. 

Legouve  [laguve],  French  writer, 
b.  1807. 

legs[le],  m.,  legacy. 

legume  [legym],  m.,  vegetable. 

lendemain  [ladme],  m.,  next  day, 
day  after,  the  morrow. 

lentement  [latma],  slowly. 

lequel,  laquelle  [  lakel,  lakel  ], 
who,  whom,  which. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


491 


lessive  [lEsiiv],  f.,  large  washing. 

lettrerietr],  f.,  letter. 

leur   [loeir],   poss.,   their;    le  — , 

theirs. 
leur  [lce:r],  pers.,  to  them,  them. 
lever  [lave],  §  158,  to  raise  ;  se  — , 

to  rise. 
lever    [lave],    m. ,    rising ;    —  du 

aoleily  sun-rise. 
Invite  [levit],  m.,  Levite. 
Invite  [levit],  f.,  frock-coat. 
l^vre  [leivr],  f.,  lip. 
l^vrier  [levrie],  m.,  greyhound, 
liberty  [liberte],  f.,  Uberty. 
libre  [libr],  free. 
lie  [li],  f.,  lees,  dregs. 
lieu  [lj0],  m.,  place ;  au  —  de,  in- 
stead of  ;  avoir  — ,  to  take  place. 
lieue  [lj0],  f. ,  league. 
ligne  [liji],  f.,  line, 
lingerie  [l?3ri],  f.,  linen-room, 
lion  [Ijo],  m.,  lion. 
lire[li:r],  §  197,  to  read. 
lisi^re  [lizjeir],  f.,  edge, 
lit  rii],  m.,  bed. 
litiere  [litjeir],  f.,  litter,   straw; 

itre  8ur  la  — ,  said  of  a  person 

very  ill  in  bed. 
livre  [li:vr],  m.,  book, 
livrer  [livre],  to  give  up. 
local  [lokal],  local. 
k)i  [Iwa],  f.,  law, 
loin  [lw2],  far,  far  ofiF;  de  — ,  in 

the  distance ;  plus  — ,  farther 

oflP,  farther  on. 
long  [15],  long ;  le  —  de,  along ; 

tovt  au  — ,  at  full  length. 
longe  [13:3],  f.,  tether;  loin, 
longtemps    [lota],    long,   a  long 

while. 
Lorraine  [lore in],  f.,  Lorraine, 
lorsque  [lorsko],  when. 
lot  [lo],  m. ,  lot,  portion. 
Louis- Philippe  [Iwi  filip],  king  of 

France  from  1830  to  1848. 
Louis  XIV  [Iwi  katorz],  king  of 

France  from  1643  to  1715. 
Louis  XV   [Iwi   ke:z],   king    of 

France  from  1715  to  1774. 
Louis  XVI    [Iwi  se:z],  king   of 

France  from  1774  to  1793. 


loup  [lu],  m.,  wolf. 

lourd  [luir],  heavy;  close,  sultry 

(of  weather). 
lourdement  [lurdma],  heavily. 
Loti  [loti],  nom  de  plume  of  Julien 

Viaud,  b.  1850. 
Louvre  [luivr],  m..  Louvre. 
Luc  [lyk],  Luke, 
lueur  [lqoe:r],  f.,  gleam, 
lui  [Iqi],  him,  to  him,  to  her,  it, 

himself;  he;  —  -mime,  himself; 

d  —  seul,  by  himself,  alone. 
luisant  [li{iza],  shining,  glossy. 
lumi^re  [lymjeir],  f..  Tight. 
lundi  [Icedi],  m.,  Monday. 
lune  [lyn],  f.,  moon;  clair  de  — , 

moonlight. 
lunettes  [lynet],  f. ,  spectacles, 
lut  [ly],  3  sg.  p.  def.  lire, 
Lyon  [Ijo],  m.,  Lyons. 

M. 

M.  [masj0],  abbreviation  of  Mon- 
sieur. 

madame  [madam],  f. ,  madam,  Mrs. 

Madeleine  [madle :  n],f. ,  Magdalen. 

mademoiselle  [madmwazel],  f., 
miss. 

magasin  [magaz?],  m.,  shop,  store. 

magnifique  [majiifik],  magnificent, 
splendid. 

mai  [me],  m.,  May. 

maigrir  [megriir],  to  become  lean. 

main  [ml],  1. ,  hand  ;  d  la  — ,  in 
his  (your,  etc. )  hand  ;  battre  dea 
— s,  to  clap  hands. 

maintenant  [metna],  now. 

maintenir  [m?tni:r],  §  177,  to  hold 
fast. 

maire  [me:r],  m.,  mayor. 

mairie  [meri],  f . ,  mayor's  ofl&ce. 

mais  [me],  but ; —  non,  not  at  all. 

maison  [mezo],  f.,  house,  home  ;  d 
la  — ,  at  home. 

maisonnette  [mezonet],  f.,  cot- 
tage, little  house. 

mai^e  [me:tr],  m.,  master. 

maitresse  [metres],  f.,  mistress; 
adj.,  superior. 

majesty  [maseste],  f.,  majesty. 

majority  [masorite],  f.,  majority. 


492 


VOCABULARY. 


mal  [mal],  m.,  evil,  ill ;  faire  —  d, 
to  hurt,  be  sore,  ache ;  —  aux 
dents,  toothache. 

mal  [malj,  badly,  ill,  wrong. 

malade  [malad],  sick,  ill,  sore  ;  U 
— ,  the  sick  one,  the  patient. 

maladresse  [maladres],  f.,  clumsi- 


mdle  [mail],  male,  strong. 

maigre  [malgre],  in  spite  of. 

malheur  [maloeir],  m.,  misfortune, 
unhappiness. 

malheureusement  [maloer^zmci  ], 
unhappily. 

malheureux  [maloer0],  unhappy; 
m.,  poor  creature. 

malin  [mal?],  cunning. 

malle  [mal],  f. ,  trunk. 

manche  [ma: J],  f.,  sleeve. 

manchette  [ma  Jet],  f.,  cufF. 

manchon  [ma Jo],  m. ,  muff. 

mangeaille  [masaij],  f.,  food,  eat- 
ing. 

manger  [ma.^e],  §  156,  to  eat, 
wear  away. 

maniere  [manjeir],  f.,  manner, 
way  ;  de  —  que^  so  that. 

manoeuvrer  [mancevre],  to  man- 
oeuvre. 

manquer  [make],  to  fail,  be  lack- 
ing, miss ;  —  la  classe,  to  run 
away  from  school,  play  truant. 

maquis  [maki],  m.,  thicket. 

marchand  [marja],  m.,  merchant, 
shop-keeper. 

marche  [marj],  f.,  march,  walk, 
progress,  speed. 

march^  [marje],  m.,  market;  (d) 
hon  — ,  cheap. 

marcher  [marJe],  to  march,  walk, 

go- 
mau-di  [mardi],  m.,  Tuesday;  k  — 

gras,  Shrove-Tuesday. 
mar^chal   ferrant  [marejal  fera], 

blacksmith,  horse-shoer. 
xnar6e  [mare],  f.,  tide. 
Marie  [tnari],  f. ,  Mary, 
marin  [mare],  m.,  sailor,  seaman. 
marine  [marin],  f . ,  marine,  navy  ; 

—  militaire,  royal  navy. 


marquer  [marke],  to  mark,  show, 
marquis   [marki],    m.,  marquis; 

mondeur  le  — ,  the  marquis. 
marron  [maro],  m.,  chestnut. 
mars  [mars],  m. ,  March. 
Marseillaise    [marsejeiz],   f.,  the 

French  national  air. 
marteau  [marto],  m.,  hammer, 
masque  [maske],  masked. 
masse  [mas],  f.,  mass. 
matelot  [matlo],  m. ,  sailor, 
materiel  [mate rj el],  materiaL 
matin  [mate],  m.,  morning ;  le  — , 

in  the  morning, 
maudit  [modi],  cursed, 
maure  [mo:r],  m.,  Moor, 
mauvais  [move],  bad,  ill,  evil, 
maux  [mo],  see  mal. 
maxime  [maksim],  f.,  maxim, 
me  [mo],  me,  to  me,  for  me. 
m^chamment     [  me  Jama  ],     mali- 
ciously. 
mechant  [meja],  bad,  cross, 
mecontent  [mekota],  dissatisfied, 

disp"  ased. 
m^contentement  [mekota  tma],  m., 

dissatisfaction. 
m^decin  [medse],  m.,  doctor. 
mediocre    [  medjokr  ],    mediocre, 

poor, 
meilleur  [mejceir],  better,  best, 
meler  [mele],  to  mingle ;  se  —  de,  to 

be  mingled  with,  to  meddle  with, 
m^lodieux  [melodj0],  melodious. 
membre  [maibr],  m.,  membert 
meme   [me:m],  same,   even,  self, 

very  ;  de  — ,  the  same  ;  de  — qiie^ 

as  well  as. 
m^moire  [memwair],  f.,  memory, 
menace [monas],  f. ,  menace,  threat. 
menacer  [monase],  §  156,  to  menace, 

threaten, 
mener  [mone],  §  158,  to  lead,  con- 
duct, take,  drive, 
mentir  [matiir],  §  166,  to  lie. 
menu  [many],  small,  fine, 
mepris  [mepri],  m.,  scorn, 
meprise  [mepri  iz],  f.,  mistake, 
mer  [me:r],  f,,  sea  ;  en  — ,  at  sea. 
merci  [mersi],  m.,  thanks,  thank 

you. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


493 


mercredi  [mcrkrodi],  m. ,  Wednes- 
day. 

m^re  [me:r],  f.,  mother. 

merite  [merit],  m.,  merit,  worth.- 

meriter  [merite],  to  deserve. 

merle  [merl],  m.,  blackbird. 

merveille  [merve:j],  f.,  marvel, 
wonder  ;  d  — ,  wonderfully. 

merveilleux  [mervej0],  wonderful. 

messQ[mesJ,  f.,  mass  (eccles. ). 

messieurs  [mesj0],  pi.  of  monsieur. 

mesure  [mazyir],  f.,  measure. 

mesurer  [mazyre],  to  measure. 

m^tairie  [metcri],  f. ,  small  farm. 

metier  [metje],  m. ,  trade. 

mettre  [metr],  §  198,  to  put,  place, 
put  on  ;  le  —  d  la  porte,  to  turn 
him  out  of  doors  ;  —  de  c6ld,  to 
lay  aside  ;  —  en  ^veil,  to  warn  ; 
se  — ,  to  set  one's  self,  begin  ;  se 
—  A  table,  to  sit  down  to  dinner, 
etc. ;  se  —  en  colore,  to  get  angry. 

meunier  [m0nje],  m. ,  miller. 

meurs  [moeir],  1  sg.  pres.  indie. 
mourir. 

meurt  [raoeir],  3  sg.  pres.  indie. 
mourb: 

meurtrir  [moertriir],  to  bruise. 

meurtrissure  [  moertrisy  i  r  ],  f . , 
bruise. 

midi  [midi],  m.,  noon. 

miel  [mjel],  m.,  honey. 

mien  [mj?],  mine  ;  le  — ,  mine. 

miette  [mjet],  f.,  crumb. 

mieux  [raj0],  better. 

Milhaud  [mijo],  a  French  general 
under  Napoleon,  b.  1776,  d.  1833. 

milieu  [milj0],  m, ,  middle,  midst ; 
au  beau  — ,  in  the  very  midst. 

militaire  [milite:r],  military, 

mille  [mil],  a  thousand. 

million  [milj5],  m.,  million. 

mince  [raeis],  thin. 

mine  [min],  f.,  looks. 

minuit  fminqi],  m.,  midnight. 

minute  [minyt],  f. ,  minute. 

miracle  [miraikl],  m.,  miracle. 

mis  [mi],  1  sg.  p.  def.  and  p.  part. 
mettre. 

miserable  [mizerabl],  miserable, 
wretched. 


misfere  [mizs  i  r],  f . ,  misery,  trouble, 
distress. 

misericorde  [mizerikord],  f.,  pity, 
mercy. 

mit  [mi],  3  sg.  p.  def.  mettre. 

mitraille  [mitroij],  f.,  grapeshot. 

mobile  [mobil],  mobile,  change- 
able, variable. 

modeste  [modest],  modest. 

modiste  [modist],  f. ,  milliner. 

moi  [mwa],  me,  to  me ;  I ;  — 
•mime,  (I)  myself. 

moindre  [mweidr],  less,  least. 

moineaii  [mwano],  m.,  sparrow. 

moins  [mwej,  less,  least ;  pour  le 
— ,  at  the  least ;  du  — ,  at  least. 

mois  [mwa],  m,,  month. 

moisson  [mwaso],  f.,  harvest. 

moissonner  [mwasone],  to  reap. 

moissonneur  [  mwasonoe:r  ],  m., 
reaper. 

moiti6  [mwatje],  f.,  half;  d  — , 
half. 

Moli^re  [moljeir],  French  dram> 
atist,  b.  1622,  d.  1673. 

molle  [mol],  f.  of  mou. 

moment  [moma],  m.,  moment;  du 
—  oil,  since ;  au  —  oil,  when,  at 
the  moment  when. 

mon,  ma,  mes  [m5,  ma,  me],  my. 

monde  [mojd],  m.,  world,  people  ; 
tout  le  — ,  everybody. 

monnaie  [mone],  f. ,  coin,  money. 

monosyllabe  [monosilab],  m.,  mo- 
nosyllable. 

monotone  [monoton],  monotonous. 

monsieur  [masj0],  m.,  sir,  gentle- 
man,the  gentleman,  my  lord,  Mr. 

monstre  [moistr],  m,,  monster. 

mont  [mo],  m.,  mountain. 

montagne  [motap],  f.,  mountain. 

monter  [mote],  to  mount,  go  up, 
ascend,  rise,  get  into  (of  vehicles). 

montre  [mo:tr],  f.,  watch. 

Montreal  [moreal],  m.,  Montreal. 

montrer  [motre],  to  show  ;  se  — , 
to  show  one's  self. 

monture  [motyir],  f.,  beast  (for 
riding). 

monument  [monyma],  m.,  monu- 
ment. 


494 


VOCABULARY. 


moquer  (se)  [sa  moke],  to  laugh 
at,  make  sport  of,  despise. 

moral  [moral],  moral. 

morale  [moral],  f. ,  moral. 

morceau  [morso],  m.,  bit,  piece. 

mordre  [mordr],  §  210,  to  bite,  eat 
away. 

mort  [mo:r],  f.,  death. 

mort  [moir],  p.  part,  mourir,  dead  ; 
le  — ,  the  dead  one. 

mortel  [mortel],  deadly. 

Moskowa,  Moskwa  [moskova, 
moskva],  f. ,  river  on  which  JVIos- 
cow  is  built. 

mot  [mo],  m.,  word. 

mou  [mu],  soft. 

mouche  [muj],  f.,  fly. 

moucheron  [raujro],  m.,  gnat. 

mouchoir  [mujwair],  m.,  hand- 
kerchief. 

moujik  [musik],  m.,  Russian  peas- 
ant, labourer. 

moulin  [mule],  m.,  mill. 

mourant  [mura],  m. ,  dying  person. 

mourir  [muriir],  §  174,  to  die, 
perish  ;  il  est  mort,  he  died  ; 
—  defaim,  to  die  with  hunger, 
starve  (to  death). 

mousquetaire  [  muskoteir  ],  m., 
musketeer,  guardsman. 

mousqueterie  [musketri],  f.,  mus- 
ketry. 

moustache  [mustaj],  f . ,  moustache. 

moUvement  [muvma],  m.,  move- 
ment ;  premier  — ,  first  impulse. 

mouvoir  [muvwair],  §219,  to  move. 

moyen  [mwaje],  m.,  means,  way  ; 
le  —  de  le  /aire  ?,  how  shall  we 
doit? 

muet  [mqe],  mute,  dumb. 

mugir  [my  si  I  r],  to  bellow. 

mugiiet  [myge],  m.,  lily  of  the 
valley. 

multiplier  [myltiplie],  to  multiply. 

mur  [myir],  m.,  wall. 

mur  [myir],  ripe. 

muraille  [myra:j],  f.,  wall. 

Murat  [  myra  ],  famous  general 
under  Napoleon,  born  1771,  ex- 
ecuted Oct.  13th,  1815. 

mtirir  [myriir],  to  ripen. 


murmure  [myrmyir],  m.,  murmur. 

musique  [myzik],  r.,  music,  band 
(military). 

Musset  (de)  [da  myse],  French 
poet,  b.  1810,  d.  1857. 

mutuellement  [mytqelma],  mutu- 
ally. 

myope  [mjop],  short-sighted. 

myst^rieux  [misterj0],  mysterious. 

N. 

naissance  [nesais],  f.,  birth. 

naitre  [neitr],  §  200,  to  be  bom; 
il  est  nd,  he  was  born. 

Napoleon  [  napoleo  ],  Napoleon 
Bonaparte  (1769-1821),  born  in 
Corsica,  became  Emperor  of  the 
French,  1804,  died  in  St.  Helena. 

nappe  [nap],  f.,  table-cloth. 

narme  [narin],  1,  nostril. 

national  [nasjonal],  national. 

nature  [natyir],  f.,  nature. 

naturel  [natyrel],  natural. 

naturel  [natyrel],  m. ,  nature,  tem- 
per. 

naturellement  [natjnrelma],  natur- 
ally. 

Navarre  [navair],  f.,  ancient  king- 
dom in  the  south  of  France. 

navet  [nave],  m. ,  turnip. 

navire  [navi:r],  m.,  ship. 

ne  [na],  no,  not ;  ne  ,  .  .  pas,  no, 
not ;  ne  .  .  .  ni  .  .  .  ni,  neither 
.  .  .  nor ;  ne  .  .  .  rien,  nothing ; 
ne  ...  que,  only  ;  untranslated 
after  comparatives. 

n€  [ne],  p.  part,  naitre. 

n^anmoins  [nea  m  w£  ] ,  nevertheless. 

n^cessaire  [neseseir],  necessary. 

necessity  [nesesite],  i,  necessity. 

nectar  [nekta:r],  m.,  nectar. 

neige  [neis],  f.,  snow. 

nettoyer  [netwaje],  §  157,  to  clean. 

neuf  [noef  ],  nine. 

neuf  fnoef],  new. 

neuvieme  [noevjem],  ninth. 

neveu  [nav0],  m. ,  nephew,  descend- 
ant. 

Ney  [ne],  a  very  distinguished  gen- 
eral under  Napoleon,  born  1769, 
executed  December  7th,  1816. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


nez  [ne],  m. ,  nose  ;  se  rire  au  — , 
to  laugh  at  one's  self ;  /aire 
(envoyer)  un  pied  de  —  d,  to  put 
one's  fingers  to  one's  nose  at,  to 
make  grimaces  at,  to  laugh  at. 

ni  [ni],  neither,  nor  ;  ne  .  .  .  ni  . . . 
ni,  neither  .  .  .  nor. 

niaiscrie  [njezri],  f.,  nonsense. 

nid  [ni],  m.,  nest. 

Noel  [noel],  m.  or  f. ,  Christmas  ; 
le  jour  de  — ,  Christmas  day. 

noir  [nwa:r],  black,  dark. 

noisette  [nwazet],  f.,  hazel-nut. 

nom  [n5m],  m.,  name. 

nombre  [no:br],  m.,  number. 

nombreux  [n5br0],  numerous. 

nommer  [nome],  to  name,  call, 
appoint ;  ae  — ,  to  be  named, 
called. 

Don  [no],  no,  not ;  ni  moi  —  plus, 
nor  I  either  ;  les  miens  n'ont  que 
moi  —  plu^,  mine  also  have  no 
one  but  me ;  —  pas  que,  not 
that. 

nord  [noir],  m.,  north. 

nos  [no],  pi.  of  notre. 

noss  [nos],  Russian  for  •  nose.' 

notaire  [note:r],  m.,  notary. 

notre,  nos  [notr,  no],  our. 

notre  (le)  [la  no:tr],  ours. 

Notre- Dame  [notr  dam],  f. ,  church 
in  Paris. 

nourrir  [nuriir],  to  nourish,  feed, 
bring  up. 

Qourriture  [nurity:r],  f.,  food, 
nurture. 

nous  [nu],  we,  us,  to  us. 

nouveau  [nuvol,  new ;  de  — ,  again. 

nouveaut^  [nuvote],  f. ,  novelty  ; 
magasin  de  nouveauUs,  dry-goods 
store. 

Nouvelle-Cal^donie  [nuvel  kale- 
doni],  f.,^  New  Caledonia,  a 
French  penal  settlement. 

Nouvelle-Orl^ans  [nuvel  orlea], 
f . ,  New  Orleans. 

nouvelles  [nuvel],  f.  plu.,  news. 

nouvellement  [nuvelma],  newly. 

novembre[nova :  br],m. , November. 

noyer  [nwaje],  m. ,  walnut-tree. 

noyer  [nwaje],  §  157,  to  drown; 


noyd  de  brume,  hidden  in  mist ; 

se — ,  to  drown, 
nu  [ny],  naked,  bare, 
nuage  [nijais],  m.,  cloud, 
nuit  [nqi],  f . ,  night ;  cette  — ,  last 

night. 
nul  [nj^l],  no,  no  one. 
num^rique  [nymerikj,  numericaL 


ob^lisque  [obelisk],  m. ,  obelisk. 

objecter  [obsekte],  to  object. 

objet  [obse],  m.,  object. 

obligeance  [oblisais],  f.,  kindness. 

obliger  [oblige],  §  156,  to  force; 
voics  nous  obligerez  de,  you  will 
oblige  us  by. 

obscurity  [opskyrite],  f.,  dark- 
ness. 

obs^der  [opsede],  §  158,  to  beset. 

observe!  [opserve],  to  observe; 
faire  —  d,  to  observe  to. 

obstacle  [opstakl],  m. ,  obstacle. 

obtenir  [optoniir],  §  177,  to  obtain. 

occasion  [okazjo],  f.,  opportunity. 

occuper  [okypej,  to  occupy. 

ceil,  pi.  yeux  [ceij,  j0],  m.,  eye. 

ceillet  [oeje],  m.,  pink,  carnation. 

office  [ofis],  m.,  ofl&ce,  duty. 

officier  [ofisje],  m. ,  officer. 

ofifrir  [ofriir],  §  176,  to  offer. 

og:re[ogr],  m.,  ogre. 

oh  I  [o],  oh  ! 

oie  [wa],  f.,  goose. 

oignon  [ojio],  m.,  onion. 

oisean  [wazo],  m.,  bird. 

Olympe  [olf:p],  m.,  Olympus. 

ombre  [o:br],  f.,  shade,  shadow, 
obscurity  ;  d  V —  {de),  under  or 
in  the  shadow  (of). 

on  [o],  one,  they,  we,  you,  people, 
some  one. 

oncle  [o:kl],  m.,  uncle. 

ondoyer  [odwaje],  §  157,  to  undu- 
late, float. 

onduler  [odyle],  to  undulate. 

ont  [o],  3  pi.  pres.  indie,  avoir. 

onze  [o:z],  eleven. 

opinion  [opinjo],  f.,  opinion. 

oppression  [opresjo],  f . ,  oppressioa 

or  [o:r],  m.,  gold;  d' — ,  gold(en). 


496 


VOCABULARY. 


or  [oir],  now,  but ;  —  fd,  come  now. 

orage  [orais],  m.,  storm. 

orageux  [oras^l,  stormy,  agitated. 

orateur  [oratoeir],  m.,  orator. 

ordinaire  [  ordine :  r  ],  ordinary ; 
d' — ,  usually. 

ordinairement  [ordinerma],  or- 
dinarily. 

ordinal  [ordinal],  ordinal. 

ordonnance  [ordona  i  s],  f .  ,prescrip- 
tion. 

ordonner  [ordone],  to  order,  pre- 
scribe. 

ordre  [ordr],  ra.,  order. 

Oreille  [ore:j],  f.,  ear. 

orgie[or3i],  f.,  orgy. 

orgueil  [orgoeij],  m.,  pride. 

origine  [oris in],  f.,  origin. 

orme  [orm],  m.,  elm. 

orner  [ome],  to  adorn,  decorate. 

orphelin  [orfalf],  m. ,  orphan. 

orphique  [orfik],  Orphic. 

ortolan  [ortola],  m.,  ortolan. 

oser  [oze],  to  dare. 

oter  [ote],  to  take  oflf,  take  out, 
remove. 

OU  [u],  or  ;  ou. .  .ou,  either. .  .or ; 
—  bieii,  or. 

Oii  [u],  where,  when,  in  which, 
on  which  ;  d' — ,  whence,  from 
which,  on  which. 

oublier  [ublie],  to  forget. 

ouest  [west],  m.,  west. 

oui  [wi],  yes. 

outre  [utr],  beyond  ;  en  — ,  in  ad- 
dition ;  passer  — ,  to  pass  by 
without  noticing. 

ouvert  [uveir],  p.  part,  ouvrir, 
oi)en. 

ouvrage  [uvrais],  m.,  work. 

ouvre  [  u:vr  ],  3  sg.  pres.  indie. 
ouvrir. 

ouvrir  [uvri:r],  §  176,  to  open; 
«' — ,  to  open. 

P. 

page[pa:3],  m.,  page, 

page  [pais],  f.,  page. 

paille  [paij],  f.,  straw;  cmpeau  de 

— ,  straw  liat. 
pain  [pej  m.,  bread. 


paire  [peir],  f.,  pair. 

paix  [pe],  f. ,  peace. 

palais  [pale],  m.,  palace,  building} 

—  de  justice,  court-house. 
p41e  [pa:l],  pale. 

pMir  [poliir],  to  grow  pale. 

puissant  [palisaj,  turning  pale, 
waning. 

palme  [palm],  f.,  palm;  — s  aca- 
ddmiques  (p.  421),  wreath  of 
palm  leaves  used  as  an  orna- 
mental design  on  the  certifi- 
cates granted  to  prize-winners 
at  school. 

papier  [papje],  m.,  paper. 

Fdques  [pa  :k],  m. ,  Easter ;  lundi 
de  — ,  Easter  Monday. 

par  [par],  by,  through ;  —  oil,  by 
what  place,  by  which,  through 
which ;  —  exemple,  for  example, 
(interj. )  dear  me  ! ;  —  ma  foi, 
upon  my  word ;  —  deld,  beyond  j 

—  une  nuit,  on  a  night ;  —  Zd, 
by  that  place. 

parafe  [paraf],  m.,  paraph,  flourish 

(added  to  one's  signature). 
paraitre  [pareitr],  §  188,  to  appear. 

d  ce  qu'il  paratt,  paraU-il,  as  it 

appears, 
parce  que  [pars  ka],  because, 
par-ci  par-Ik  [par  si  par  la],  here 

and  there. 
par-dessus-  [par    dasy],    above, 

higher  than,  over  ;  —  (le)  bord^ 

overboard, 
pardon  [pardo],  m. ,  pardon ;  excuse 

me,  I  beg  your  pardon, 
pareil  [parei  j],  like,  similar,  equal. 
parent  [para],  m.,  parent,  relative, 
parfaitement    [  parfetma  ],  com- 
pletely, 
parfum  [parfde],  m.,  perfume. 
parfum6    [  parfyme  '\^    perfumed, 

sweet. 
parier  [parje],  to  wager,  bet. 
Paris  [pari],  m.,  Paris, 
parisien  [parizje],  Parisian, 
parier  [parle],  to  speak,  talk;  — ' 

fran^ais,  to  speak  French, 
parmi  [parmi],  amongst. 
parole  [parol],  f.,  word. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


497 


paroxysme[paroksism],m. , climax, 
part  [pair],  f.,  part,  share;  de  sa 

— ,    from    him ;    nulle    — ,    no- 
where. 
partage  [partais],  m.,  share, 
partager  [partake],  §  156,  to  share ; 

give  a  share  to  ;  etre  7»alpartag^, 

to  have  a  bad  share. 
parlance  [partais],  f.,  setting  sail; 

en  — ,  on  the  point  of  sailing. 
parterre   [parte  ir],   m.,   parterre, 

pit  (theatre). 
participe  [partisip],  m. ,  participle, 
particulier  [partikyljej,  m., private 

individual, 
particulierement  [partikyljerma], 

especially. 
partie  [parti],  f.,  part. 
partir   [parti  :r],   §  166,  to  leave, 

depart,  go  away,  be  off,  start ; 

d  —  de,  from,  beginning  with. 
partout  [partu],  everywhere, 
parut  [pary],  3  sg.  p.  det.  paraitre. 
parvenir    [parvaniir],    §    178,    to 

arrive,  succeed. 
pas  [pa],  m.,  step,  pace,  footstep. 
pas  [pa],  no,  not ;  ne  .  .  .  — ,  no, 

not ;  —  un  (we),  not  one  ;  ■ —  de, 

no,   not,   none ;    non    — ,    not ; 

rCest  ce  —  ?,  shall  we  not  ?  ;  etc. , 

etc. 
passage    [pasais],    m.,   passage, 

crossing. 
passant  [pasa],  m. ,  passer-by. 
passe  [pais],  f.,  pass,  channel. 
pass^  [pase],  past,  gone,  over,  last, 
passer  [pose],  to  pass,  pass  on,  go 

by,    put   on ;    spend   (time) ;    il 

passa  sa  langue  sur,  he  ran  his 

tongue  over  ;  —  devant,  to  pass, 

go  past ;  —  chez,  to  call  on  ;  se 

— ,  to  take  place,  happen ;  ae  — 

de,  to  do  without. 
passereau  [pasro],  m.,  sparrow, 
passion  [pasjo],  f.,  passion, 
pasteur  [pastceir],  m.,  pastor. 
p&t6  [pate],  m.,  pastry,  pie;  chair 

d,  — ,  mince-meat, 
patience  [pasjais],  f.,  patience, 
patiner  [patine],  to  skate. 
p4tir  [potiir],  to  suffer. 


patois  [patwa],  m.,  dialect. 

patrie  [patri],  f.,  native  land. 

patrimoine  [patrimwan],  m.,  in- 
heritance. 

patriotique  [patriotik],  patriotic. 

patte  [pat],  f.,  paw,  foot;  — s  de 
dei-riere,  hind-feet ;  — s  de  devant, 
fore -feet ;  —  de  dindon,  turkey's 
foot. 

pauvre  [poivr],  poor,  paltry. 

pauvrette  [povret],  f.,  poor  crea- 
ture. 

pav^  [pave],  m.,  pavement. 

payer  [peje],  §  157,  to  pay,  pay  for. 

pays  [pei],  m.,  country,  locality. 

paysan  [peiza],  m.,  peasant. 

peau  [po],  f. ,  skin. 

p^cai're  1  [pekaiir],  dear,  dear  I 

pecher  [peJe],  to  fish  ;  alter  — ,  to 
go  fishing. 

peigne  [peji],  m.,  comb. 

peindre  [peidr],  §  190,  to  paint. 

peine  [pe:n],  f.,  pain,  difficulty, 
trouble,  sorrow  ;  d  — ,  hardly  ; 
ce  n'eat  pas  la  — ,  it  is  not  worth 
while  ;  /aire  de  la  —  d,  to  pain. 

peinture[pe  ty  I  r],  f .  ,paint,  pai  nting. 

pele-mele  [pel  mel],  pell-mell; 
m.,  confusion. 

pencher  [pa[e],  to  incline,  bend. 

pendant  [pa da],  during  ;  —  que, 
whilst. 

pendre  [paidr],  §  210,  to  hang. 

pens^e  [pase],  f.,  thought. 

penser  [pase],  to  think  ;  vous 
pensez  si,  imagine  whether ;  —  d, 
to  think  of. 

pensionnaire  [pasjoneir],  m.  and 
f.,  boarder. 

?ente  [pa:t],  f.,  slope. 
'entecote  [patkoit],  f.,  Whitsun- 
tide ;    lundi   de    la    — ,    Whit- 
Monday,  Whitsun  Monday. 

percer  [perse],  §  156,  to  pierce. 

percher  [perje],  to  perch. 

perdre  [perdr],  §  210,  to  lose,  ruin. 

perdreau  [perdro],  m.,  young  par- 
tridge. 

perdrix  [perdri],  f.,  partridge. 

pere  [pe:r],  m.,  father. 

p^ril  [peril],  m. ,  peril. 


498 


VOCABULARY. 


p^riode  [perjod],  f.,  period,  sen- 
tence. 

p^rir  [periir],  to  perish. 

perle  [perl],  f.,  pearl. 

permettre  [permetr],  §  198,  to  per- 
mit ;  se  — ,  to  take  the  liberty  ; 
permis,  permitted. 

permission  [permisjo],  f.,  permis- 
sion. 

Perrault  [pero],  French  writer,  b. 
1628,  d.  1703. 

personnage  [personals],  m.,  per- 
sonage, character. 

personne  [person],  f . ,  person  ;  pi. 
people. 

personne  [person],  m.,  anybody, 
nobody  ;  ne. .  . — ,  not  any  one, 
no  one,  nobody. 

personnel  [personel],  personal. 

perspective  [perspektiiv],  f.,  pros- 
pect. 

perte  [pert],  f. ,  loss. 

pesant  [paza],  hea-vy. 

pesanteur  [pazotoeir],  f.,  weight. 

peser  [paze],  §  158,  to  weigh,  be 
heavy,  oppress. 

petit  [pati],  small,  little ;  m.,  little 
one,  voung  one. 

petit-fils  [pati  fis],  m. ,  grandson. 

peu  [p0],  m. ,  little ;  also  as  ad- 
verb, little ;  —  d,  — ,  little  by 
little ;  dis-moi  un  — ,  tell  me 
now ;  si  —  de  chose,  so  little.- 

peuple  [poepl],  m.,  people,  nation. 

peur  [poeir],  1,  fear  ;  lui  faire  — , 
to  frighten  him  ;  avoir  — ,  to 
be  afraid  ;  avoir  grand!  — ,  to  be 
in  great  fear;  de  —  gttc.wc, 
for  fear  lest. 

peut  [p0],  3  sg.  pres.  indie,  povir 
voir. 

peut-etre  (que)  [p0t  eitr  ka],  pei- 


philanthropie  [filatropi],  f.,  phil- 
anthropy. 

phrase  [fro  iz],  f. ,  phrase,  sentence. 

pic  [pik],  m.,  peak ;  d  — ,  perpen- 
dicular. 

pied  [pje],  m.,  foot ;  A  — ,  on  foot ; 
de  —  en  cap,  from  head  to  foot. 

pierre  [pjeir],  f.,  stone. 


pietinement  [pjetinma],  m. ,  stamp- 
ing. 

pieu  [pj0],  m.,  stake. 

pieusement  [pj0zma],  piously. 

pigeon  [piso],  m.,  pigeon. 

pigeonneau  [pisono],  m.,  young 
pigeon. 

pile  [pil],  f.,  pile. 

piler  [pil  e] ,  to  pound  (as  in  a  mortar). 

pipe  [pip],  f.,  pipe. 

pique-nique  [pik  nik],  m.,  picnic. 

pistolet  [pistole],  m. ,  pistol ;  — 
d'arqon,  holster-pistol ;  tirer  un 
coup  de  — ,  to  fire  a  pistol. 

pitchou  [pitju],  dialectal  for  petit. 

pitie  [pitje],  f.,  pity. 

place  [plas],  f . ,  place,  post,  square, 
seat,  room,  position. 

plaidoyer[pleawaje],  m., pleading. 

plaie  [pie],  f.,  wound. 

piaindre  [pleidr],  §  190,  to  pity; 
se  — ,  to  complain. 

plaine  [ple:n],  f.,  plain. 

plaire  [ple:r],  §  201,  to  please  ;  s'il 
vous  plaity  s'U  te  plait,  if  you 
please. 

plaisanterie  [plezatri],  f.,  pleas- 
antry, joke. 

plaisir  [pleziir],  m. ,  pleasure ;  /aire 
— ,  to  give  pleasure. 

plan  [pla],  m.,  plan. 

plancher  [pla  [e],  m. ,  floor. 

plante  [plait],  f.,  plant. 

planter  [plate],  to  plant. 

plat  [pla],  flat. 

plateau  [plato],  m. ,  plateau,  upland. 

plein  [pie],  full ;  en  —  aiit,  in  the 
open  air. 

pl^thore  [pletoir],  f.,  plethora. 

pleurer  [ploere],  to  weep. 

pleuvoir  [ploevwair],  §  220,  to 
rain,  come  thick. 

plier  [plie],  to  bend. 

plisser  [plise],  to  plait. 

plonger  [plose],  §  156,  to  plunge, 
dive,  dip. 

ployer  [plwaje],  §  157,  to  bend. 

plu  [ply],  p.  part,  pleuvoir. 

pluie  [plt|i],  f . ,  rain. 

plume  [plym],  f.,  feather,  pen. 

plumet  [plyme],  m.,  plume. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


499 


plus  [ply],  more  ;  —  de,  more,  no 
more,'  le  — ,  the  more,  the 
most ;  —  de  (with  numerals), 
more  than  ;  we .  . ,  — ,  no  more, 
no  longer ;  d'autant  —  que,  the 
more  so  as ;  de  — ,  additional  ; 
fCStre  —  que,  to  be  no  longer 
anything  but;  ne. .  .pas  non  — , 
not . .  .  either. 

plusieurs  [plyzjcE : r],  several, 
many. 

plutot  [pl3i;o],  rather. 

poche  [poj],  f.,  pocket. 

poele  [pwa:l],  m.,  stove. 

po^te  [poest],  m.,  poet. 

poids  [pwa],  m.,  weight. 

poig^le  [pwajie],  f.,  handful. 

poll  [pwal],  m. ,  hair. 

poing  [pwe],  m. ,  fist ;  ««  hattre  d 
coups  de  — ,  to  box  with  one 
another. 

point  [pwf],  m, ,  point ;  itre  sur  le 
. —  a«,  to  be  at  the  point  of; 

—  du  jour,  daybreak. 

point    [pw?],    no,    not;    ne... — 

de,  not  any,  no. 
pointe  [pwe It],  f.,  point;  mr  la 

—  des  pieds,  on  tiptoe. 
poire  [pwair],  f.,  pear. 
poirier  [pwarje],  m.,  pear-tree. 
pois  [pwa],  m.,  pea. 

poitrail  [pwatra:j],  m.,  breast  (of 
horse). 

poitrine  [pwatrin],  f.,  breast, 
lungs. 

polir  [poli:r],  to  polish. 

polype  [polip],  m.,  polyp. 

pomme  [pom],  f. ,  apple ;  —  de 
terre,  potato. 

pommier  [pomje],  m.,  apple-tree. 

pompier  [popje],  m.,  fireman. 

pont  [po],  m.,  bridge. 

pont-levis  [po  Ivi],  m.,  draw- 
bridge. 

Pont-Neuf  [p5  noef],  m.,  bridge 
over  the  Seine  in  Paris. 

populaire  [popyleir],  popular. 

port[poir],  m.,  port. 

portail  [porta  :j],  m.,  portal. 

porte  [port],  f. ,  door,  gate ;  —  d  — , 
next  door. 


porte-plume  [port  plym],  m. ,  pen- 
holder. 

porter  [porte],  to  bear,  carry,  take, 
wear,  put ;  se  —  {bien),  to  be 
(well) ;  bien  portant,  in  good 
health,  well ;  comment  vous 
portez'vous  ?,  how  are  you  ? 

portifere  [portjeir],  f.,  coach-door. 

pose  [poze],  staid,  sober. 

poser  [poze],  to  place,  lay,  set. 

posseder  [posede],  §  158,  to  possess, 
own. 

possession  [posesjo],  f. ,  possession. 

possible  [posibl],  possible. 

pot  [po],  m. ,  pot. 

potage  [potais],  m.,  soup;  grands 
— s,  first-rate  soups. 

poularde  [pulard],  f.,  fat  pullet. 

poulet  [pule],  m.,  chicken. 

poumon  [pumo],  m.,  lung. 

pour  [pur],  for,  in  order  to,  to; 
—  que,  in  order  that ;  —  ainai 
dire,  so  to  speak. 

pourboire  [purbwa :  r],  m. ,  gratuity, 
•tip.' 

pourpre  [purpr],  m. ,  purple. 

pourquoi  [purkwa],  why  ;  c^est  — , 
therefore,  so,  hence,  that  is 
why. 

pourrai    [pure],  1  sg.  int., pouvoir. 

poursuivre  [pursqiivr],  §206,  to 
pursue,  continue. 

pourtant  [purta]  however,  still. 

pourvoir  [purvwa:r],  §  224,  to 
provide. 

pourvu  que  [purvy  ko],  provided 
that,  I  hope  that. 

pousser  [puse],  to  push,  grow. 

poussi^re  [pusjeir],  f.,  dust. 

Pouvillon  (Emile)  [emil  puvij3], 
French  writer,  b.  1840. 

pouvoir  [puvwair],  §  221,  to  be 
able,  can,  may ;  il  se  pent,  it 
may  be ;  il  ne  se  peut  rien,  no- 
thing can  be ;  on  pourrait  dire, 
one  might  say. 

pouvoir  [puvwair],  m.,  power. 

pr^  [pre],  m.,  meadow. 

pr^cepte  [presept],  m.,  precept. 

pr^cieux  [presjji^],  precious,  valu- 
able. 


600 


VOCABULARY. 


precipiter  (se)  [sa  preaipite],  to 

rush,  dart,  hasten, 
precis  [presi],  precise,  exact. 
precision  [presizjo],  f.,  precision, 
predicateur    [  predikatce :  r  j,     m. , 

preacher. 
preferer  [prefere],  §  158,  to  prefer, 
prejudiciable  [presydisjabl],  pre- 
judicial. 
premier  [promje],    first,   former; 

marcher  le  —,  to  walk  ahead. 
prendre  [praidr],   §202,  to  take, 

catch,   assume,   seize,   suppose, 

reckon ;  —  exemple  sur  quelqu'un, 

to  take  example  by  any  one. 
preparer  [prepare],  to  prepare  ;  se 

— ,  to  be  prepared. 
pres  [pre],  near  by  ;  —  de,  near, 

nearly ;  d  peu  — ,  almost,  nearly, 
present  [preza],  m.,    present;    d, 

— ,  now. 
presenter  [preza  te],  to  present ;  se 

— ,  to  present  one's  self. 
presque  [presk],   nearly,   hardly, 

almost. 
presse  [prese],  in  haste. 
presser  [prese],  to  press ;  se  — ,  to 

be  in  haste. 
pret  [pre],  ready, 
pretendre  [pretaidr],  §  210,  to 

claim,  assert. 
preter  [prete],  to  lend, 
pretre  [pre:tr],  m.,  priest, 
preuve  [proeiv],  f.,  proof, 
prevenir    [  prevniir  ],    §   178,   to 

warn. 
pr^voir  [prevwair],  §  224,  to  fore- 
see. 
prier  [prie],  to  pray,  pray  to,  beg, 

ask  ;  je  t'en  prie,  I  beg  of  you. 
pri^re  [prieir],  f.,  prayer,  request. 
prince  [preis],  m.,  prince, 
princesse  [prsses],  f.,  princess. 
principal  [presipal],  adj.  and  n.  m., 

principal, 
prmcipe  [presip],  m. ,  principle, 
printemps  [preta],  m.,  spring;  au 

— ,  in  spring. 
pris  [pri],  1  sg.  p.  def.  and  p.  part. 

prendre, 
prit  [pri],  3  sg.  p.  def.  prendre. 


prise  [pri:z],  f.,  taking,  capture. 

prison  [prizo],  1,  prison. 

prive  [prive],  private. 

prix  [pri],  m. ,  price,  prize. 

probablement  [probablama],  prob- 
ably. 

prochain  [proje],  next. 

prochain  [projej,  m.,  neighbour, 
fellow-creature. 

procurer  (se)  [sa  prokyre],  to  pro- 
cure. 

procureur  [prokyroeir],  m.,  soli- 
citor. 

prodige  [prodiis],  m.,  miracle, 
prodigy. 

produire  [prodqiir],  §  185,  to  pro- 
duce. 

professeur  [profesoeir],  m.,  pro- 
fessor, teacher. 

profession  [profesjo],  f. ,  profession, 
calling. 

profiler  [profite],  to  profit,  avail 
one's  self. 

profond  [prof 5],  profound,  deep ; 
—  de  deux  toises,  two  fathoms 
deep. 

proie  [prwo],  f.,  prey. 

projectile[pro3ektil],m.  .projectile. 

promenade  [promnad],  f.,  walk, 
walking,  drive  ;  alter  d  la  — ,  to 
go  for  a  walk. 

promener  [promne],  §  158,  to  carry 
about,  drive  about ;  se  — d  pied 
{en  voiture,  en  bateau,  etc.),  to 
take  a  walk  (go  for  a  drive,  go 
for  a  sail,  etc. ) ;  se  —  en  bicy- 
clette,  to  ride  a  bicycle. 

propos  [propo],  m.,  discourse,  pur- 
pose ;  d  — ,  seasonable,  fit ;  by 
the  way  ;  d  —  de,  with  respect 
to. 

proposer  [propoze],  to  propose. 

proteg"er[prote3e],  §156,  to  protect. 

proverbe  [proverb],  m.,  proverb. 

providence  [provida is],  f..  Provi- 
dence. 

prudence  [prydais],  f.,  prudence. 

prudent  [pryda],  prudent. 

prune  [pryn],  f. ,  plum. 

prunier[prynje],  m,,  plum-tree. 

Prusse  [prys],  f.,  Prussia. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


501 


pnissien  [prysje],  m.,  Prussian. 

pu  [py],  p.  part,  pouvoir. 

public  [pyblik],  public. 

pueril  [pqeril],  puerile,  childish. 

puerilite  [pnerilite],  f.,  childish- 
ness. 

puis  [pqi],  1  sg.  pres.  indie,  pou- 
voir. 

puis  [pqi],  then. 

puissance  [pqisais],  f.,  power, 
force. 

puissant  [pqisa],  powertuL 

puits  [pqi],  m.,  well. 

punir  [pyniir],  to  punish. 

punition  [pynisjo],  f.,  punishment. 

pupitre  [pypitr],  m.,  desk. 

pur  [pyir],  pure. 

put  [py],  3  sg.  p.  def.  pouvoir. 

Q. 

quai  [ke],  m. ,  quay. 

quality  [kalite],  f. ,  quality,  rank. 

quand  [ka],  when  ;  depuis  —  .'', 
how  long  ? 

quant  k  [kat  a],  as  to,  as  for. 

quarante  [karait],  forty. 

quart  [ka:r],  m.,  quarter. 

quatre  [katr],  four. 

quatre-ving^ts  [katr  vf],  eighty ; 
quatre-vingt-dix-aeptt  ninety- 
seven. 

que  [ka],  pron.,  whom,  which, 
that,  what ;  qu'est-ce  qui  ?, 
what  ?  ;  qu^est-ce  —  c^est  — .'', 
what  is  ?  ;  ce  — ,  that  which, 
what,  which  ;  qu'est-ce  qu'il  ya?y 
what  is  there  ?  ;  qvHas-tu  ?,  what 
is  the  matter  with  you  ? ;  <^tst 
Id  — ,  it  is  there  that,  that  is 
where. 

que  [kd],  conj.,  that,  used  as  a 
substitute  for  other  conjunc- 
tions like  tandis  — ,  lorsque, 
quand,  hi,  etc.  ;  when,  than,  as, 
till,  let  (with  subjunctive). 

que  [ka],  adv.,  how,  how  many, 
how  much,  what  (a) ;  ne. . .—, 
only,  but;  ne...rien  — ,  no- 
thing but ;  qu'elle  est  jolie  !,  how 
pretty  she  is  ! ;  —  cda  est  bien 
aU  I,  how  well  said  that  is ! 


Quebec  [kebsk],  m.,  Quebec, 
quel  [kel],  what,  which  :  who. 
quelconque  [kelkoik],  whatever, 
quelque   [kelka], "  some,   few ;   — 

chose,  something, 
quelquefois  [kelkafwa],  sometimes. 
quelqu'un,  quelques-uns  [kelk  dfe, 

kelkaz  ce],  some  one,  some. 
querir   [kari:r],    §  162,   to  fetch  ; 

aller  — ,  to  go  and  bring, 
question  [kestjo],  f.,  question, 
quete  [ke:t],  f.,  collection. 
qui  [ki],  who,  which,  that,  whom; 

A  — ,  whose  ;  ce  — ,  what, 
quinze  [kfiz],  fifteen, 
quittance  [kitais],  f.,  receipt, 
quitter  [kite],  to  quit,  leave,  lay 

aside. 
quoi  [kwa],  what ;  d  —  hon,  what 

use  ;  en  —  ?,  of  what  (material)  ? 
quoique  [kwaka],  although. 

R. 

race  [ras],  f. ,  race,  breed, 
raconter  [rakote],  to  relate,  telL 
rade  [rad],  f. ,  roadstead. 
raison  [rezo],   f.,    reason,  sense; 

avoir  — ,  to  be  (in  the)  right. 
ralentir  [ralotiir],  to  slacken. 
ramasser  [rama  !se],  to  pick  up. 
ramener  [ramne],  §  158,  to  bring 

back,  bring  home  again. 
rang*  [ra],  m.,  row,  rank. 
rang6e  [rase],  1,  row. 
ranger  [rose],  §  156,  to  range,  put 

in  place, 
rapide  [rapid],  swift. 
rappeler  (se)  [sa  raple],  §  158,  to 

remember. 
rapporter  [raporte],  to  bring  back ; 

produce,  yield, 
rare  [ra:r],  rare,  scanty. 
rassasier  [rasazjo],  to  satiate,  sat- 
isfy. 
rassembler  [rasoble],  to  assemble, 
rat  [ra],  m.,  rat. 
rattraper  [ratrape],  to  overtake, 
ravi  [ravi],  charmed,  delighted, 
ravin  [rav?],  m.,  ravine, 
raviser  (se)  [sa  ravize],  to  change 

one's  mini 


602 


VOCABULARY. 


ravissement  [ravisma],m.  ,rapture, 

delight. 
rayon  [rejo],  m.,  ray. 
r^alite  [realite],  f. ,  reality. 
recevoir    [rasavwair],    §  213,    to 

receive. 
r^cidive  [residiiv],   f.,   repetition 

of  an  offence. 
r^cit  [resi],  m.,  story. 
reciter  [resite],  to  recite. 
recommencer  [rakomase],  §   156, 

to  begin  again. 
recompense  [rekopais],  f.,  recom- 
pense. 
r^compenser  [rekopase],  to  recom- 
pense, reward, 
reconnaissance    [rakonesais],    f., 

gratitude. 
reconnaitre  [rakoneitr],  §  188,  to 

recognize. 
reconnu  [rakony],  recognized. 
recourber     [rakurbe],     to     bend 

round. 
reconvert   [rakuveir],    p.    part. 

recouvrir. 
recouvrir    [rakuvriir],    §  176,    to 

cover,  cover  again. 
recueillir    [rakoejiir],    §    165,    to 

gather. 
reculer  [rakyle],  to  fall  back, 
re^ut  [rasy],  3  sg.  p.  def.  recevoir. 
redingote  [radegot],  f.,  frock-coat, 

overcoat. 
redoubler  [raduble],  to  redouble, 

increase. 
redoutable  [radutabl],  formidable, 

terrible. 
redoute  [rodut],  f.,  redoubt. 
redresser  (se)  [sa  radrese],  to  stand 

erect  again. 
r^el  [reel],  real, 
refermer  (se)  [sa  raferme],  to  close 

again. 
r^flechir  [refleji:r],  to  reflect. 
reflexion  [refleksjo],  f.,  reflection, 
refus  [rafy],  m. ,  refusal. 
refuser  [rafyze],  to  refuse. 
regard  [ragair],  m.,  look,  glance, 

eye. 
regarderfrogarde],  to  look  at,  look. 
r^gle  [reigl],  f.,  rule,  ruler. 


regler  [regie],  §  158,  to  regulate, 
arrange. 

regne  [reji],  m.,  reign. 

regner  [repe],  §  158,  to  reign,  rule. 

regret  [ragre],  m. ,  regret. 

regretter  [ragrete],  to  regret. 

rep^ulier  [regylje],  regular. 

Regulus  [regylys],  m.,  Regulus. 

reine[re:n],  f.,  queen. 

reins  [rs],  m.  pi. ,  loins,  back. 

rejeter  [rajte],  §  158,  to  throw- 
back ;  se  — ,  to  be  thrown  back. 

rejoindre  [rasweidr],  §  190,  to  re- 
join. 

rejouir(se)  [sa  reswiir],  to  rejoice, 
be  glad. 

relever  [ralve],  §  158,  to  heighten, 
raise,  lift  up. 

religieusement  [ralisj^zma],  reli- 
giously. 

religieux  [rali3J0],  religious. 

reluire  [ralqiir],  §  185,  to  shine, 
glitter. 

remarquer  [ramarke],  to  remark, 
notice. 

remercier  [ramersje],  to  thank. 

remettre  [rametr],  §  198,  to  re- 
store, put  off",  put  back,  put  on 
again ;  se  — ,  to  recover,  begin 
again ;  remis,  recovered ;  se  — 
€71  route,  to  set  out  again. 

remplir  [rapliir],  to  fill. 

remporter  [ra parte],  to  take  away. 

remue-m^nage  [ramy  mena  1 3  ],  m. , 
hubbub. 

remuer  [ramt^e],  to  move,  stir. 

Renaude  [ranod],  f . ,  proper  name. 

rencontre  [rako I tr],  f,,  meeting; 
aller  d  leur  — ,  to  go  to  meet 
them. 

rencontrer  [rakotre],  to  meet. 

rendre  [raidr],  §  210,  to  render, 
give  back,  make  ;  se  — .  to  go, 
proceed  ;  surrender. 

rentrer  [ratre],  to  retimi,  return 
home. 

reparaitre  [rapareitr],  §  188,  to 
reappear. 

repas  [rapa],  m.,  meal, 

repasser  [rapcse],  to  repass,  pass 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


503 


repfecher  [ropefe],  to  fish  up  again. 

r^peter  [repete],  §  158,  to  repeat. 

repliquer  [replike],  to  reply. 

repondre  [repoidr],  §  210,  to 
answer. 

r^ponse  [repois],  f.,  reply. 

repos  [rapo],  m.,  repose,  peace. 

reposer  [rapoze],  to  repose,  rest ; 
86  — ,  to  rest ;  86  —  svr,  to 
depend  on. 

reprendre  [raprfiidr],  §  202,  to 
take  again,  reply ;  —  haleim, 
to  recover  one's  breath. 

representer  [raprezatej,  to  repre- 
sent. 

reprit  [rapri],  3  sg.  p.  def.  repren- 
dre. 

reproche  [raproj],  m.,  reproach. 

reprocher  [raproje],  to  reproach. 

requisition  [rekizisjo],  f.,  requisi- 
tion, levying. 

r^server  [rezerve],  to  reserve. 

resistance  [rezista:s],  f.,  resist- 
ance. 

r^sister  [reziste],  to  resist. 

respect  [respe],  m.,  respect. 

respecter  [respekte],  to  respect. 

respectueusement  [  respektq^z- 
ma],  respectfully. 

respectueux  [resp£ktq0],  respect- 
ful. 

ressembler  [  rasoble  ] ;  —  d,  to 
resemble. 

restaurant  [restora],  m.,  res- 
taurant. 

reste  [rest],  m.,  rest,  remainder; 
du  — ,  au  reste^  besides,  more- 
over. 

Tester  [reste],  to  remain,  stay  ;  en 
—  Id,  to  stop  there,  get  no 
further. 

retard  [ratasr],  m.,  delay  ;  Stre  en 
— ,  to  be  late. 

retarder  [ratarde],  to  delay. 

retenir  [ratniir],  §  177,  to  keep 
back,  restrain. 

retirer  [ratire],  to  pull  out ;  se  — , 
to  retire. 

retour  [ratuir],  m.,  return  ;  Stre  de 
— ,  to  have  returned,  be  back. 

retoumer  [ratume],  to  go  back, 


return,  turn  up,  turn  over  j  se 
— ,  to  turn  round. 

retraite  [ratret],  f. ,  retreat. 

retrouver  [ratruve],  to  find  again ; 
se  — ,  to  be  met  with  again. 

reussir  [reysiir],  to  succeed. 

reve  [re:v],  m.,  dream. 

reveiller  [reveje],  to  wak«n  ;  se  — , 
to  waken. 

reveler  [revele],  §  158,  to  reveal. 

revenir  [ravni:r],  §  178,  to  come 
back ;  revenu,  (having)  returned. 

rever  [reve],  to  dream. 

r^v^rence  [reverais],  f.,  bow, 
courtesy  ;  luifaire  la  — ,  to  pay 
him  one's  respects. 

revetir  [ravetiir],  §  179,  to  put  on. 

reveur  [revoeir],  thoughtful,  pen- 
sive. 

revoir  [ravwair],  §  224,  to  see 
again. 

revolution  [revolysjo],  f.,  revolu- 
tion. 

revolver  [revolve  :r],  m.,  revolver, 

ricaner  [rikane],  to  sneer. 

riche  [rij],  rich. 

richement  [rijma],  richly. 

ride  [rid],  f.,  wrinkle. 

rider  [ride],  to  wrinkle. 

ridicule  [ridikyl],  m.,  ridiculous- 
ness ;  tourner  en  — ,  to  ridicule. 

rien  [rj?],  anything,  nothing  ;  ne 
...  — ,  not  anything,  nothing ; 
je  rHen  sais  — ,  I  do  not  know. 

rire  [riir],  §  204,  to  laugh,  smile. 

rire  [ri:r],  m.,  laughter. 

ris  de  veau  [ri  da  vo],  m.,  sweet- 
bread. 

risquer  [riske],  to  run  the  risk  of. 

riviere  [rivjeir],  f.,  river. 

Rivoli  [rivoli],  street  in  Paris. 

robe  [rob],  f.,  robe,  dress,  frock, 
goM'n. 

roche[roj],  f.,  rock. 

rocher  [roje],  m. ,  rock. 

roi  [rwa],  m.,  king ;  le  jour  des 
Rois,  Twelfth-day,  Epiphany. 

roitelet  [rwa tie],  m.,  wren. 

roman  [romci],  m.,  novel. 

rompre  [ro:  pr] ,  to  break. 

rend  [ro],  round. 


504 


VOCABULARY. 


ronde  [r3:d],  f.,  round  hand, 
ronger  [rose],  §  156,  to  gnaw. 
rosace  [lozas],  f. ,  rose- window. 
rose  [ro:z],  f.,  rose. 
rose  [ro:z],  rosy. 
roseau  [rozo],  m. ,  reed. 
rot  [ro],  m.,  roast. 
rouble  [rubl],  m.,  rouble. 
roucouler  [rukule],  to  coo. 
Rouen  [rwa],  m.,  Rouen, 
rouge  [ru!  3],  red. 
rouge-gorge  [rus  gors],  m. ,  robin. 
Rouget  de  I'lsle  [ru3e  d9  1  il], 

French  writer,  b.  1760,  d.  1836. 
rouleau  [rulo],  m.,  roll, 
rouler  [rule],  to  roll, 
roulier  [rulje],  m.,  carter, 
route  [rut],  f. ,  route,  way,  course  ; 

en  — ,  on  the  way ;  Stre  en  — ,  to 

be  on  the  way,  be  off. 
roux  [ru],  reddish  brown, 
royaume  [rwojojm],  m.,  kingdom, 

realm. 
ruban  [ryba],  m.,  ribbon, 
rue  [ry],  f.,  street. 
rug^eux  [ryg0],  wrinkled,  rough. 
ruisselant  [rqisla],  streaming. 
rumeur  [rymoeir],  f.,  noise, 
ruse  [ryiz],  f.,  wile,  trick. 
ilisse  [rys],  Russian. 

S. 

Saar  [sair],  f.,  Saar  (a  river  of 

Alsatia). 
sable  [sGibl],  m.,  sand, 
sabot  [sabo],  m.,  sabot,  shoe,  hoof, 
sabre  [sa:br],  m.,  sabre. 
sac  [sak],  m.,  sack,  bag,  satchel, 
sachant  [saja],  pres.  part,  savoir. 
sacr6  [sakre],  sacred,  holy. 
sage  [sais],  wise. 
saint  [sg],  sacred,  holy  ;  m. ,  saint. 
Sainte-Chapelle  [seta  Japel],  f. ,  a 

church  in  Paris. 
Saint- Esprit  [set  espri],  m. ,  Holy 

Ghost. 
Saint-Louis  [s?  Iwi],  Louis  IX. 

King  of  France  from   1226  to 

1270. 
Saint-P^tersbourg[sspetersbu:r], 

St.  Petersburg. 


sais  [se],  1  sg.  pres.  indie,  savoir, 

saisir  [seziir],  to  seize. 

saison  [sezo],  f.,  season. 

sait  [se],  3  sg.  pres.  indie,  savoir, 

salade  [salad],  f, ,  salad. 

salle  [sal],  f.,  hall,  room;  —  de 
classe,  class-room  ;  —  a,  mangeVt 
dining-room. 

salon  [salo],  m.,  drawing-room. 

saluer  [salqe],  to  salute,  bow  to, 
bow. 

salut  [saly],  m. ,  safety  ;  hail ! 

Samaritain  [samarite],  m.,  Sama- 
ritan. 

samedi  [samdi],  m.,  Saturday. 

sang  [so],  m.,  blood. 

sanglant  [sagla],  bloody. 

sans  [so],  without,  were  it  not  for; 
—  que,  without. 

sante  [sate],  f.,  health. 

sapin  [sape],  m.,  fir. 

saule  [so:l],  m.,  willow. 

saut  [so],  m.,  leap. 

sauter  [sote],  to  leap,  jump. 

sautiller  [sotije],  to  hop. 

sauvage  [sovais],  wild. 

sauver  [sove],  to  save. 

savamment  [savama],  skilfully. 

savoir  [savwair],  §  222,  to  know, 
know  how ;  —  le  ft-angais,  to 
know  French ;  aucun  homme  ne 
saurait,  no  man  can  ;  un  jour 
quHl  sut,  one  day  when  he 
learned. 

savoir  [savwajr],  m.,  knowledge. 

savon  [savo],  m. ,  soap. 

savoureux  [  savur0  ],  savoury, 
sweet. 

scelerat  [sclera],  m.,  scoundrel 

scene  [sem],  f.,  scene. 

scierie  [siri],  f. ,  saw-mill. 

scruter  [skryte],  to  scrutinize. 

se  [sa],  one's  self,  to  one's  self, 
himself,  herself,  etc. 

sec  [sek],  dry. 

secher  (se)  [so  seje],  §  158,  to  dry 
one's  self. 

second  [sago],  second. 

seconde  [sago id],  f.,  second. 

secouer[sakwe],  to  shake,  disturb. 

secourir  [sakuri :  r],  §  164,  to  succour. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


505 


secours  [sokuir],  m.,  help;  au  —  / 
help  ! 

secret  [sakre],  m. ,  secret. 

Seguin  [sags],  a  pr.  name. 

seigneur  [sejioeirj,  m.,  lord. 

Seine  [se:n],  f.,  Seine  (river). 

semaine  [some in],  f.,  week. 

semblable  [sablabl],  similar,  like. 

semblant  [sabla],  m.,  appearance; 
faire  —  rfe,  to  pretend. 

sembler  [sable],  to  seem. 

semer  [same],  §  158,  to  sow. 

sens[sa  :s],m.  ,sense,direction,way. 

sentence  [sata:s],  f.,  maxim. 

sentier  [satje],  m.,  path. 

sentiment  [satima],  m.,  sentiment, 
feeling,  sense. 

sentir  [sdti:r],  §  166,  to  feel,  smell; 
—  bon,  to  smell  sweet ;  se  — , 
to  feel  one's  self,  feel. 

S^parer  [separe],  to  separate. 

sept  [set],  seven. 

septembre  [septdibr],  m.,  Sep- 
tember. 

septieme  [setjem],  seventh. 

serai  [sare],  1  sg.  fut.  itre. 

ser^^e  [sers],  f.,  serge. 

S^ne  [seri],  f.,  series. 

s^rieux  [8erj0],  serious,  grave. 

sermon  [sermo],  m. ,  sermon. 

serre  [seir],  f.,  talon. 

serrer  [sere],  to  press,  grasp,  clasp, 
hold  tight,  crowd  together. 

service  [servis],  m. ,  service. 

serviette  [servjet],  f.,  towel,  nap- 
kin. 

servir  [serviir],  §  166,  to  serve,, 
be  of  service,  be  of  use  ;  —  d 
quelqve  chose,  to  be  of  some  use. 

seuil  [soeij],  m.,  threshold. 

seul  [soel],  alone,  single. 

seulement  [scelma],  only,  but,  even, 
merely. 

seve  [seiv],  f.,  sap. 

s^verit^  [severite],  f.,  severity. 

si  [si],  if,  whether. 

si  [si],  so,  however ;  —  rapide 
que,  however  swift. 

si^cle  [sjckl],  m. ,  century. 

sien  (le)  [la  sjf],  his,  hers,  its; 
lea  — 8.  his  own. 


siffler  [sifle],  to  whistle,  hiss,  sing. 

sifflet  [sifle],  m.,  whistle. 

signe  [siji],  m.,  sign  ;  faire  — ,  to 

beckon, 
signifier  [sipifje],  to  mean, 
silence  [silais],  m.,  silence. 
silencieux  [silasj0],  silent. 
sillage  [sijais],  m.,  wake  (of  ship), 
sillon  [sijo],  m.,  furrow, 
simple  [se:pl],  simple,  plain,  mere, 
sire  [si:r],  m.,  sire. 
situ6  [sitqe],  situated,  placed, 
six  [sis],  six. 
sixieme  [sizjem],  sixth. 
societe  [sosjete],  f.,  society. 
sceur  [sceir],  f.,  sister, 
soi  [swa],  one's  self,  himself. 
soie  [swa],  f.,  silk. 
soif  [swaf],  f. ,  thirst ;  avoir  — ,  to 

be  thirsty. 
soigner  [swape],  to  care  for. 
soin  [swe],  m. ,  care  ;  avoir  — ,  to 

take  care. 
soir  [swair],  m. ,  evening ;  le  — ,  in 

theevening;  hier — ,lastevening. 
soiree  [sware],  f.,  evening. 
sois  [swa],  1  sg.  pres.  subj.  and  2 

sg.  impve.  etre. 
soit  [swa],  3  sg.  pres.  subj.  &tre; 

8oit  /,  be  it  so  !       ^ 
soixante  [swasa it],  sixty ; dia, 

seventy. 
soldat  [solda],  m.,  soldier. 
soleil  [soleij],   m.,  sun;    (p.  419) 

Catherine-wheel. 
solennel  [solancl],  solemn. 
solide  [solid],  solid,  strong,  perfect, 
solitaire  [soliteir],  solitary,  lonely. 
solitude  [solityd],  f. ,  solitude. 
solliciter  [solisite],  to  entreat, 
solliciteur    [solisitoeir],   m.,   peti- 
tioner. 
sollicitude[solisitydl,  f. ,  solicitude. 
sombre  [soibr],  gloomy, 
somme  [som],  f.,  sum. 
sommeil  [someij],  m.,  sleep, 
sommeiller  [someje],  to  doze, 
sommes  [som],  1  pi.  pres.  ind.  Stre, 
son  [so],  m.,  sound. 
son  [so],  m. ,  bran. 
son,  sa,  ses  [so,  sa,  se],  his,  her,  its. 


506 


VOCABULARY. 


songfe  [so  1 3],  m.,  dream. 

songer  [sose],  §  156,  to  think. 

sonner[sone],  to  sound,  ring, strike. 

sonnette  [sonet],  1,  little  bell. 

sont  [so],  3  pi.  pres.  ind.  Stre. 

sorcier  [sorsje],  m.,  magician. 

sorte  [sort],  f.,  sort ;  de  —  que^ 
so  that. 

sortie  [sorti],  f.,  going  out,  getting 
out. 

sortir  [sorti  :r],  §  166,  to  come  out, 
go  out,  stick  out,  arise ;  /aire 
— ,  to  put  out,  force  out. 

sot  [so],  foolish,  stupid. 

sottise  [sotiiz],  f.,  foolish  action. 

sou  [su],  m. ,  sou,  halfpenny,  cent. 

souci  [susi],  m.,  care,  anxiety. 

souffle  [sufl],  m. ,  breathing. 

souffler  [sufle],  to  blow. 

souffrance   [sufrais],  f.,  suffering. 

soufFrant  [sufra],  poorly,  unwell. 

souffrir  [sufriir],  §  176,  to  suffer; 
faire  — ,  to  cause  pain,  pain. 

soul  [su],  drunk,  intoxicated. 

soulager  [sulase],  §  156,  to  relieve. 

soulever  [sulve],  §  158,  to  raise, 
lift  up  ;  86  — ,  to  raise  one's  self. 

Soulier  [sulje],  m.,  shoe. 

souligner  [sulipe],  to  underline. 

souper  [supe],  m.  supper. 

souper  [supe],  to  sup. 

souplesse  [suples],  f.,  suppleness. 

sourire  [suriir],  m.,  smile. 

souris  [suri],  f.,  mouse. 

sous  [su],  under,  in  the  reign  of,  in. 

sous-officier  [suz  ofisje],  m.,  non- 
commissioned officer. 

S0us-pr6fet  [su  prefe],  m.,  sous- 
prdfet,  important  official  in 
municipal  administration. 

soutenir  [sutniir],  §  177,  to  sus- 
tain. 

soutien  [sutje],  m.,  support. 

souvenance  [suvnais],  f.,  recol- 
lection. 

souvenir  [suvniir],  m.,  recollec- 
tion. 

souvenir  (se)  [sa  suvniir],  §  178, 
to  remember  ;  je  me  souviens 
{de),  il  me  souvient  {de),  I  re- 
member. 


souvent  [suva],  often. 

soyez  [swaje],  2  pi.  pres.  subj.  and 
impve.  Stre. 

soyons  [swajo],  1  pi.  pres.  subj. 
and  impve.  Stre. 

spectacle  [spektakl],  m. ,  spectacle, 
play,  theatre. 

splendide  [spladid],  splendid. 

statue  [staty],  f. ,  statue. 

Strasbourg  [strazbuir],  m.,  Stras- 
burg. 

stupefaction  [stypefaksjo],  f.,  as- 
tonishment. 

stup^fait  [stypefe],  astonished. 

subitement  [subitma],  suddenly. 

sublime  [syblim],  sublime. 

sue  [syk],  m.,  juice,  sap. 

succ6der  [syksede],  §  158 ;  —  d,  to 
succeed. 

suffire  [syfiir],  §  187,  to  suffice. 

suis  [sqi],  1  sg.  pres.  indie.  Stre, 
and  suivre. 

suite  [sqit],  f.,  continuation;  toiU 
de  — ,  immediately  ;  par  la  — , 
subsequently. 

suivant  [sqiva],  prep.,  according 
to,  following  ;  adj. ,  following. 

suivre  [sqiivr],  §206,  to  follow; 
—  des  yeux,  to  look  after,  watch. 

sujet  [sy3e],  m. ,  subject,  cause. 

SuUy-Prudhomme  [syli  prydom], 
French  writer,  b.  1839. 

superbe  [syperb],  splendid". 

sup^rieur  [syperjceir],  superior. 

supplication  [syplikasjo],  f.,  en- 
treaty. 

supplier  [syplie],  to  entreat. 

supreme  [sypreim],  supreme, 
crowning. 

sur  [syr],  on,  upon,  over,  about. 

sur  [syir],  sure. 

surcharge  [syr Jar 3],  f.,  excess  of 
burden. 

surface  [syrfas],  f.,  surface. 

surgir  [sjnrsiir],  to  arise,  spring  up. 

surplus  [syrply],  m.,  surplus. 

surprendre  [syrpraidr],  §  202,  to 
surprise,  overtake. 

surprise  [s3nT)riiz],  f.,  surprise. 

surtout  [sjrtu],  above  aU,  espe- 
cially, particularly. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


507 


Survenir  [syrvani:r],  §  178,  to  come 

up. 
sus  [sy],  1  sg.  p.  def.  savoir. 
sym^trique  [simetrik],  syrametri- 

caL 

T. 

tabac  [taba],  m.,  tobacco. 

table  [tabl],  f.,  table. 

tableau  [tablo],  m. ,  picture,  black- 
board ;  —  noir,  blackboard. 

tacher  [taje],  to  stain. 

tocher  [taJe],  to  try,  endeavour. 

tailleur  [tajceir],  m.,  tailor. 

taire(se)[s8  te:r],  §201,  to  be  silent, 
become  silent. 

talus  [taly],  m.,  slope. 

tandis  que  [tadis  ko],  whilst. 

taut  [to],  so,  so  many,  so  much  ; 

—  lie  fois,  so  often  ;_  —  gue,  as 
much  as,  as  long  as ;  —  mietix, 
so  much  the  better. 

tante  [ta:t],  f.,  aunt. 

tantot  [tato],  presently,  soon,  just 
now,  sometimes,  now. .  .at  an- 
other time. 

tapagfe  [tapais],  m.,  noise,  racket. 

taper  [tape],  to  strike. 

tapissier  [tapisje],  m.,  uphols- 
terer. 

tard  [ta:r],  late  ;  plus  — ,  later. 

t^ter  [tote],  to  feel. 

te  [ta],  thee,  to  thee,  you,  to  you. 

tel  [tel],  such,  like,  so ;  un  — , 
such  a  one. 

tenement  [telma],  so,  so  much. 

tempete  [tapeit],  f.,  tempest. 

temps  [tb],  m.,  time,  weather; 
avec  le  — ,  in  time ;  de  —  en  — , 
from  time  to  time ;  dans  le  — 
que,  whilst ;  en  meme  — ,  at  the 
same  time  ;  par  le  —  qiCil  fait, 
in  such  weather  as  it  is  ;  faire 
beau  — ,  to  be  fine  weather ; 
mauvais  — ,  bad  weather  ;  quel 

—  fait-il  ?,  what  sort  of  weather 
is  it? 

tendon  [tado],  m.,  sinew. 
tendre  [taidr],  tender,  loving. 
tendre  [taidr],  §  210,  to  hold  out, 
stretch. 


tendrement  [tadroma],  affection- 
ately. 

tendresse  [tadres],  f. ,  affection. 

tenir  [taniir],  §  177,  to  hold,  have, 
hold  on,  hold  out,  keep,  resist; 
be  anxious,  insist  on ;  be  con- 
tained in,  find  room  in ;  il  ne 
tiendra  qu'd  vous  que,  it  will  be 
your  own  fault  if ;  —  boji,  to 
stand  fast ;  liens  !,  tenez !,  now 
then  !,  here  !,  look  ! ;  se  — ,  to 
hold  one's  self,  stay,  stand. 

tenter  [tate],  to  attempt,  tempt. 

tenture  [tatyir],  f.,  hangings. 

terrain  [tere],  m.,  ground. 

terre[te:r],  f.,  earth,  ground,  land; 
par  — ,  d  — ,  on  the  ground ;  la 
—  sainte,  the  Holy  iJind. 

terre-neuve  [ter  nceiv],  m.,  New- 
foundland dog. 

terrible  [teribl],  terrible. 

tete[te!t],  f.,  head. 

texte  [tekst],  m.,  text. 

textuellement  [tekstqelma],  word 
for  word. 

th^&tre  [tea:tr],  m.,  theatre  ;  Thd- 
dtre-Fran(^ais,  the  most  famous 
theatre  of  Paris. 

th^i^re  [tejeir],  f.,  teapot. 

th^me  [te I m],m., exercise  in  trans- 
lating from  French  into  another 
language  ;  —  latin,  Latin  prose. 

Thomas  [toma],  m.,  Thomas. 

tibia  [tibja],  m.,  tibia. 

tien  (le)  [la  tje],  thine,  yours. 

Tiennet  [tjene],  dim.  of  Mienne^ 
Stephen. 

tiens  [tje],  1  sg.  pres.  indie,  and  2 
sg.  impve.  of  tenir. 

tiers  [tjeir],  m.,  third  part. 

tige  [ti:.'^],  f.,  stem. 

timide  [timid],  timid. 

tins  [te],  1  sg.  p.  def.  tenir. 

tirer  [tire],  to  draw,  pull,  deduce, 
shoot ;  —  la  langue,  to  put  out 
the  tongue. 

Titan  [tita],  m..  Titan. 

toi  [twa],  thee,  thou,  you. 

toilette  [twalet],  f.,  toilet,  dress; 
faire  sa  — ,  to  dress ;  table  de 
— ,  dressing-table. 


508 


VOCABULARY. 


toise  [twaiz],  f.,  fathom. 

toit  [twa],  m.,  roof. 

toiture  [twatyir],  f.,  roofing,  roof. 

tombeau  [tobo],  m.,  tomb,  grave. 

toraber  [tobe],  to  fall. 

ton,  ta,  tes  [to,  ta,  te],  thy,  your. 

ton  [to],  m. ,  tone,  voice. 

tonnerre  [toneir],  m.,  thunder; 
coup  de  — ,  peal  of  thunder. 

torrent  [tora],  m.,  torrent. 

tort  [to:r],  m.,  wrong;  avoir  — ,  to 
be  (in  the)  wrong. 

tot  [to],  soon  ;  plus  — ,  sooner. 

toucher  [tuje],  to  touch  ;  —  d.,  to 
be  near,  approach ;  n^y  touchez 
pas,  do  not  touch  it,  hands  off. 

toujours  [tu3U!r],  always,  still,  at 
all  events  ;  disait  — ,  kept  say- 
ing ;  pour  — ,  for  ever. 

tour  [tu:r],  f.,  tower. 

tour  [tuir],  m.,  turn,  trick,  feat; 
fermer  d  double  — ,  to  lock  fast ; 
d  son  — ,  in  his  (her,  its)  turn ; 
/aire  le  —  de,  to  go  round. 

tourner  [turne],  to  turn. 

tourte  [turt],  f. ,  pie. 

Tourville  [turvil],  a  celebrated 
French  naval  officer,  born  1642, 
died  1701. 

Toussaint  [tuse],  f..  All-saints' 
Day. 

tout,  tous  [tu,  tu(8)],  all,  any, 
every,  everything  ;  quite  ;  —  le 
monde,  everybody ;  —  le  jour, 
toute  la  journ^e,  the  whole  day  ; 
— s  les  jours,  every  day ;  toutes 
{les)  deux,  both ;  — es  les  ann4es, 
every  year;  —  d  fait,  alto- 
gether; —  d  Vheure,  a  little 
ago ;  —  ce  que,  all  that,  what- 
ever; —  de  mime,  all  the 
same ;  — d  coup,  suddenly  ;  rien 
du  — ,  nothing  at  all ;  le  — ,  the 
whole ;  —  d  leur  furie,  intent  on 
their  fury. 

tracer  [trase],  §  156,  to  trace. 

tradition  [tradisjo],  f.,  tradition. 

tragique  [trajik],  tragical. 

train  [tre],  m. ,  train,  noise  ;  en  — 
de,  busy  at ;  —  de  derrUre,  hind- 
quarters. 


traineau  [treno],  m. ,  sleigh  ;  se 
promener  en  — ,  to  take  a  sleigh- 
ride. 

trainer  [trene],  to  drag,  draw. 

traire  [treir],  §208,  to  milk. 

trait  [tre],  m. ,  trait,  feature,  action. 

traiter  [trete],  to  treat,  entertain ; 
—  de,  to  call. 

traitre  [treitr],  m.,  traitor,  scoun- 
drel. 

tramway  [tramwe],  m. ,  tramway, 
street-car. 

tranche  [traij],  f.,  slice,  edge  (of 
book). 

tranquille  [trakil],  quiet,  calm, 
easy  in  mind  ;  soyez  — ,  don't  be 
uneasy,  don't  worry. 

tranquillement[trakilma],  calmly. 

transformer  [trasforme],  to  trans- 
form. 

transport  [traspo:r],  m.,  trans- 
port-ship. 

transporter  [trasporte],  to  con- 
vey, bring. 

travail  [travaij],  m.,  work,  labour. 

travailler  [travaje],  to  work. 

travers  [trave:r],  m.,  breadth; 
d  — ,  through,  across  ;  en  —  de, 
across. 

travers^e  [traverse],  f.,  voyage. 

traverser  [traverse],  to  traverse, 
cross,  go  through;  —  en  courant, 
to  run  across. 

treize  [tre:z],  thirteen. 

tremblement  [trabloma],  m. ,  trem- 
bling ;  —  de  terre,  earthquake. 

trembler  [trSble],  to  tremble. 

trente  [trait],  thirty. 

tr^s  [tre],  very,  very  much. 

tresor  [trezoir],  m.,  treasure. 

tressaillir  [tresaji  i  r],  to  give  a  start. 

treve  [treiv],  f.,  truce. 

tricome  [trikom],  m.,  three-cor- 
nered hat. 

tringle  [treigl],  f.,  rod. 

triomphal  [triofal],  triumphal 

triomphe  [triof],  m.,  triumph. 

triste  [trist],  sad. 

tristement  [tristma],  sadly. 

tristesse  [tristes],  f.,  sadness. 

trois  [trwa],  three. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


509 


troisi^me  [trwazjcm],  third, 
trompe  [tro:p],  f.,  horn, 
tromper  [trope J,  to  deceive ;  se  — , 

to  oe  mistaken. 
trompette  [tropet],  f.,  trumpet, 
trop  [tro],  too,  too  much,  too  many. 
trop-plein  [tro  pie],  m.,  overflow. 
trot  [tro],  m. ,  trot ;  grand  — ,  fast 

trot, 
troubler  [truble],  to  disturb, 
troupeau  [trupo],  m.,  flock. 
trouver  [truve],  to  find  ;  oiler  — , 

to  go  to  ;  se  — ,  to  find  one's  self, 

be,  feel, 
truite  [trqit],  f. ,  trout, 
tu  [ty],  thou,  you. 
tuer  [tqe],  to  kill, 
tue-tete  [ty  te:t];  d—,  as  loud  as 

possible. 
tmIe[tHil],  f.,  tile. 
tuileries  [tqilri],  f.  pL,  Tuileries 

(once  a  royal  palace). 
tulipe  [tylip],  f.,  tulip, 
tumulte  [tymylt],  m.,  tumult. 
tyrannie  [tirani],  f.,  tyranny. 

U. 

un  [<5&],  one,  a,  an  ;  V — ,  one  ;  f — 
{et)r autre,  both;  lesunslesautres, 
one  another. 

unir  [yniir],  to  unite,  join;  unissez- 
vous  lea  una  aux  autres,  join  your- 
selves together. 

univers  [yniveir],  m.,  universe. 

universel  [yniversel],  universal. 

usage  [yza:3],  m.,  use. 

utile  [ytil],  useful, 

utility  [ytilite],  f.,  utility,  use. 

V. 

va  [va],  3  sg.  pres.  indie,  and  2  sg. 

impve.  alter. 
vacances  [vaka is],  f.  pi. ,  holidays. 
vache  [vaj],  f.,  cow, 
vagabondage  [vagaboda:3],   m,, 

vagrancy. 
vag^e  [vag],  f,,  wave, 
vam  [vs],  vain  ;  en  — ,  in  vain. 
vaincre  [vf  :kr],  §  209,  to  conquer, 
vaincu  [v?ky],  vanquished  (one), 
vainement  [venma],  vainly. 


vainqueur  [v?koeir],  m.,  victor, 
winner. 

vais  [ve],  1  sg.  pres.  indie,  aller. 

vaisseau  [veso],  m.,  ship. 

vaisselle  [vesel],  f. ,  dishes. 

Valere  [valeir],  the  name  of  a 
suitor  for  the  hand  of  Harpagon's 
daughter,  who  enters  his  service 
as  steward,  and  is  anxious  to  in- 
gratiate himself  into  the  favour 
of  Harpagon, 

valet  [vale],  m.,  servant. 

valeur  [valceir],  f.,  value. 

vailee  [vale],  f,,  valley. 

vallon  [valo],  m. ,  dale,  valley. 

valoir  [valwa:  r],  §  223,  to  be  worth ; 
— mieux,  to  be  better ;  —  la  peingf 
to  be  worth  the  trouble  (while). 

vas  [vaJ,  2  sg.  pres.  indie,  aller, 

vase  [va:z],  m,,  vase,  vessel 

vaste  [vast],  vast,  mighty. 

vaudrai  [vodre],  1  sg.  fut.  valoir. 

vaut  [vo],  3  sg.  pres.  indie,  valoir. 

vautour  [votuir],  m.,  vulture, 

vautrer  (se)  [sa  votre],  to  wallow. 

veau  [vo],  m.,  calf,  veal. 

v6cu  [veky],  p.  part,  vivre. 

veiller  [veje],  to  watch  (over,  d  or 
sur). 

vendre  [vaidr],  §  210,  to  sell. 

vendredi  [vadradi],  m.,  Friday; 
—  saivt,  Good  Friday. 

vengeur  [vasoeir],  avenging. 

venir  [vaniir],  §  178^  to  come ; 
vint  d  passer,  happened  to  go 
by ;  —  de,  to  have  just ;  on 
venait  de  lui  donner,  they  had 
just  given  him ;  il  venait  voir, 
he  came  to  see  ;  lui  —  d  Vesprit, 
to  occur  to  him, 

vent  [va],  m.,  wind;  il  fait  du  — , 
it  is  windy. 

ventre  [valtr],  m,,  belly;  —  d 
tfrre,  at  full  speed. 

ver  [veir],  m,,  worm. 

verdure  [verdyir],  f.,  verdure, 
green,  greenness. 

verger  [verse],  m. ,  orchard. 

veritable  [veritabl],  true,  real. 

v^ritablement  [veritablamd  ],  truly, 
really. 


510 


VOCABULARY. 


v^rit6  [verite],  f.,  truth. 

verrai  [vere],  1  sg.  fut.  voir. 

vers  [veir],  towards,  about. 

Versailles  [versa  :j],  m.,  a  city  of 
about  50,000  inhabitants,  situ- 
ated about  twelve  miles  south- 
west of  Paris.  It  contains  the 
great  chdteau  which  was  the 
chief  residence  of  Louis  XIV. 

verser  [verse],  to  pour  out. 

verset  [verse],  m.,  verse  (Bible, 
etc. ). 

vert  [veir],  green. 

verveine  [verve in],  f.,  verbena. 

veste  [vest],  f.,  jacket. 

vestibule  [vestibyl],  m.,  vestibule, 
hall. 

vetement[vetma],  m. ,  clothes,  suit. 

vetir  [vetiir],  §  179,  to  clothe. 

veulent  [voe:l],  3  pi.  pres.  ind. 
vouloir. 

veut  [v0],  3  sg.  pres.  ind.  vouloir. 

veux  [v0],  1  sg.  pres.  ind.  vouloir. 

viande  [vjaid],  £,  meat. 

victime  [viktim],  f.,  victim. 

victoire  [viktwair],  f.,  victory. 

vide  [vid],  empty. 

vider  [vide],  to  empty. 

vie  [vi],  f.,  life,  living. 

vieil  [vjeij],  see  vieux. 

vieillard  [vjejair],  m.,  old  man. 

viendrai  [vjedre],  1  sg.  fut.  ve?iir. 

viens  [vje],  1  sg.  pres.  ind.  and  2 
sg.  impve.  venir. 

vierge  [vjers],  f. ,  virgin  ;  la  sainte 
Vierge,  the  Virgin  Mary. 

vieux,  vieil,  vieiUe  [vj0,  vjeij, 
vjeij],  old,  aged  ;  un  vieux,  an 
old  man,  an  old  fellow. 

vignette  [vipet],  f.,  vignette,  or- 
namental design. 

vigoureux  [vigur0],  vigorous. 

village  [vilais],  m.,  village. 

ville  [vil],  f.,  town,  city;  en — , 
down  town. 

vin  [vs],  m.,  wine. 

vingt  [  ve  ],  twenty  ;  —  -huit, 
twenty-eight. 

vint  [vs],  3  sg.  p.  def.  venir. 

vint  [ve],  3  sg.  impf.  subj.  venir. 

violet  [vjole],  violet. 


Virgile  [virsil],  m. ,  Virgil  (Vergil). 

vis  [vi],  1  sg.  p.  def.  voir. 

vision  [vizjo],  f,,  vision. 

visite  [vizit],  f.,  visit. 

visiter  [vizite],  to  visit. 

vit  [vi],  3  sg.  p.  def.  voir. 

vitalite  [vitalite],  f.,  vitality. 

vite  [vit],  quick,  quickly. 

vivant  [viva],  living. 

vivre  [viivr],  §  211,  to  live  ;  faire 
— ,  to  maintain ;  vively  long  live !, 
hurrah  for  ! 

VOBU  [v0],  m.,  vow,  wish. 

voici  [vwasi],  see  here,  here  is, 
here  are  ;  nous  — ,  here  we  are. 

voilk  [vwala],  behold,  there  is, 
there  are,  that  is ;  —  que,  be- 
hold, lo ;  —  ce  que  c'est,  that's 
how  things  go  ;  en  —  U7i,  that's 
one ;  la  — ,  here  (there)  it  is  J 
7I0US  — ,  here  we  are  ! 

voile  [vwal],  f.,  sail. 

voiler  [vwale],  to  veil. 

voir  [vwair],  §  224,  to  see  ;  lui  — 
faire  des  tours,  to  see  him  play 
tricks  ;  faire  — ,  to  show  ;  ae  — , 
to  be  seen. 

voisin  [vwazs],  neighbouring;  m., 
neighbour. 

voisinage  [vwazinaij],  m.,  neigh- 
bourhood, vicinity. 

voiture  [vwatyir],  f.,  carriage, car; 
en  — ,  in  a  carriage  ;  sepromener 
en  — ,  to  take  a  drive. 

voix  [vwa],  f. ,  voice. 

vol  [vol],  m.,  theft,  robbery. 

volaille  [volaij],  f.,  poultry. 

voler  [vole],  to  fly. 

voler  [vole],  to  steal,  rob. 

volet  [vole],  m.,  shutter. 

voleur  [voice  I  r],  m.,  thief,  robber  j 
an  —  /,   stop  thief  ! 

volifere  [voljeir],  f. ,  pigeon-house. 

volont^  [volote],  f. ,  will. 

volubility  [voly  bilite],  f . ,  volubility. 

volume  [volym],  m.,  volume. 

vont  [v5],  3  pi.  pres.  indie,  alUr. 

votre,  vos  [votr,  vo],  your. 

votre  (le)  [lo  voitr],  yours. 

voudrai  [vudre],  1  sg.  fut.  vouloir, 

vouloir  [vulwair],  §  225,  to  will. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH. 


511 


wish,  want;  en  —  d,  to  be  angry 
with ;  je  voudrais  {bien),  I  should 
like ;  —  dire,  to  mean  ;  aurait 
voulu,  would  have  liked. 

vous  [vu],  you,  to  you,  yourself, 
yourselves. 

voyage  [vwajais],  m.,  journey, 
voyage ;  bon  —  /,  a  pleasant  jour- 
ney ! ;  compagnon  de  — ,  fellow- 
traveller. 

voyager  [vwajase],  §  156,  to  travel. 

voyageur  [vwajasoeir],  m.,  tra- 
veller. 

vrai  [vre],  true,  real. 

vraiment  [vrema],  really. 

vraisemblablement  [vresablabla- 
ma],  probably. 

vu  [vy],  p.  part.  voir. 

vue  [vy],  f . ,  sight,  view. 


W. 
Waterloo   [vaterlo  or  waterlo], 

Waterloo. 
Wathier  [vatje],  name  of  a  French 

officer. 
Wellington  [velegton],  the  Duke 

of  Wellington. 

Y. 

y  [i],  there,  in  it,  to  it,  at  it,  on  it, 
of  it;  il  —  a,  there  is,  there  are ; 
il  —  en  a,  there  is  (are)  some. 

yeux  [j0],  plur.  of  ml,  eyes. 

Yves  [i:v],  name  of  a  sailor  friend 
of  Loti,  mentioned  in  several  of 
his  works,  such  as  Mon/rire  Yves, 

Z. 

z^br^  [zebre],  striped. 
z6phire,  z6phyr  [zefijr],  zephyr. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 

[h  aspirate  ia  indicated  thus  :  'h.] 


a,  an,  un,  m.,  une,  f.  ;  — franc 

—  dozen,  un  franc  la  douzaine  ; 
—franc  —  day,  un  franc  par 
jour  ;  not  another,  ne  .  .  .  pas 
(point)  d'autre. 

abandon,  abandonner. 

abbess,  abbesse,  f. 

ability,  capacite,  f.,  talent,  m. 

able  ;  be  —  ,  pouvoir. 

about,  de,  autour  de,  environ,  sur ; 

—  three  o'clock,  vers  (les)  trois 
heures  ;  —  it,  en ;  be  — ,  s'agir 
de,,  etre  sur  le  point  de  ;  he  has 
this  good  thing  —  hivi,  il  a  cela 
de  bon  ;  set  — ,  se  mettre  k. 

above,  au-dessus  de. 
abroad,  k  I'etranger. 
absence,  absence,  f. 
absent,  absent. 
abundant,  abondant. 
accept,  accepter. 
accession,  accession,  f. 
accident,  accident,  m. 
accidental,  accidentel. 
accompany,  accompagner. 
according  to,  selon. 
account ;  on  —  of,  k  cause  de. 
ache  ;  have  head — ,  avoir  mal  k  la 

tete  ;  my  head — s,  j'ai  mal  k  la 

tete. 
acquaintance,  connaissance,  f. 
acquire,  acquerir. 
act,  agir. 

action,  action,  f.,  trait,  m. 
actor,   acteur,  m,,    comedian,  m. 
add,  aj outer. 
address,  adresser. 
adjective,  adjectif,  m. 
admire,  admirer, 
admission,  entree,  f. 
admit,  admettre. 
adorn,  faire  I'ornement  de. 
advance,  avancer. 
advanced,  avanc6. 


advantage  ;  take  —  of,  abuser  de. 

advice,  avis,  m.,  conseil,  m. 

advise,  conseiller. 

affair,  affaire,  f. 

afraid;  to  be  —  {of),   avoir  peur 

(de),  craindre ;  —  of,  effray^  de ; 

be  much  — ,    avoir  grand'peur, 

avoir  bien  peur. 
after,  prep,  and  adv. ,  apr^s  ;  ten 

7ninutes  —  five,  cinq  heures  dix 

(minutes). 
after,  conj. ,  apres  que. 
afternoon,  apres-midi,  m.  and  f. 
afterwards,  ensuite,  puis,  apres. 
again,  encore,  encore  une  fois,  de 

nouveau. 
against,  centre, 
age,' age,  m. ;  to  he  twenty  years  of 

— ,  avoir  vingt  ans. 
ago,  il  y  a. 
agreeable,  agr^^able. 
ahead ;  walk  — ,  marcher  le  pre- 
mier. 
Ajaccio,  Ajaccio. 
alas !,  helas  ! 
Albert,  Albert, 
all,  tout ;  —  that  {which),  tout  ce 

qui;    not  at  — ,    pas   du  tout; 

—  passions,  toutes  les  passions, 
allow,  laisser,  permettre. 
almost,  presque. 
alone,  seul. 
along,    par ;    as    they    went    — , 

chemin  faisant. 
already,  deja. 
Alsatia,  Alsace,  f. 
also,  aussi. 

although,  bien  que,  quoique. 
always;  toujours. 
ambassador,  anfbassadeur,  m. 
ambition,  ambition,  f. 
America,  Amerique,  f. 
American,  am^ricain, 
amiable,  aimable. 


612 


ENaLISH-FRENCH. 


513 


amongf,  parmi,  entre,  chez. 
amongst,  parmi,  entre,  chez. 
amuse,    amuser ;     —    one's    selfy 

s'amuser. 
amusement,  amusement,  m. 
amusing,  amusant. 
ancestors,  ancetres,  m.  pi.  ;  aiieux, 

ra.  pi. 
ancient,  ancien,  antique, 
and,  et ;  to  go  —  visit,  aller  visiter. 
angry*;    —  aty  —  withy  f^ch^  de 

(centre) ;  he.  — ,  get  — ,  se  facher. 
animal,  animal,  m. 
another,  un  autre,  encore  un. 
answer,  n.,  r^ponse,  f. 
answer,  v.,  r^pondre. 
ant,  fourmi,  f. 

antechamber,  antichambre,  f. 
antiquity,  antiquity,  f. 
anxious ;  he  — ,  tenir  k. 
any;  de  +  def.  art.  ;  de ;  en  ;  au- 

cun,  quelconque,  tout ;  /  haven't 

— ,  je  n'en  ai  pas  ;  have  you  — .'', 

en  avez-vous  ?  ;  don't  give  him  — , 

ne  lui  '^n  donnez  pas ;  —  thing 

(with  neg. ),  rien ;  —  one  (with 

neg.),  personne. 
anylK>dy,  anyone,  quelqu'un  ;  not 

.  .  .  — ,  ne  .  .  .  personne. 
any  one,  see  anybody, 
anything,  quelque  chose,  m.  ;  not 

.  .  .  — ,    ne  .  .  .  rien  ;    —   goody 

quelque  chose  de  bon  ;  not .  .  . 

—  good,  ne  .  . .  rien  de  bon. 
anywhere -ynot.  . .  — ,  ne  .  .  .  nuUe 

part. 
apiece,  chacun,  la  pi^ce. 
appear,   paraitre,   sembler,    com- 

paraitre. 
appetite,  app^tit,  m. 
applaud,  applaudir. 
apple,  porame,  f. 
apple-tree,  pommier,  m. 
appoint,  nommer. 
approach,  n. ,  approche,  f. 
approach,  v.,  approcher,  s'appro- 

cher  de. 
approbation,  approbation,  f. 
approve,  trouver  bon. 
April,  avril,  m. 
Arab,  Arabe,  m. 


are ;  see  be ;  here  is  (or  are)y  void; 
there  is  (or  are),  voila. 

argument,  argument,  m. 

Ariosto,  Arioste,  m. 

arise,  s'elever,  naitre. 

arithmetic,  arithm^tique,  i 

arm,  bras,  m. 

army,  arm^e,  f. 

around,  autour  de  ;  she  looks  — 
her,  elle  regarde  autour  d'elle ; 
go  —  the  cityy  faire  le  tour  de  la 
ville. 

arouse,  exciter. 

arrange,  arranger. 

arrivdf,  arrivee,  f. 

arrive,  arriver. 

art,  art,  ra. 

article,  article,  m.;  —  of  dresSy 
article  de  toilette. 

artist,  artiste,  m. 

as,  comme ;  aussi,  si ;  pendant  que, 
en ;  —  ...  — ,  aussi  . . .  que ; 
not  — ...  — ,  pas  aussi . . .  que,  pas 
si  . . .  que ;  not  so  . . .  — ,pas«,u88i 
. . .  que,  pas  si . . .  que,  moins  . . . 
que  ;  —  much  money  — ,  autant 
d'argent  que  ;  —  long  — ,  tant 
que  ;  —  soon  — ,  aussitOt  que ; 
—  if,  comme  si ;  —  well  — ,  ausfid 
bien  que  ;  —  to,  quant  k. 

ascend,  monter  (sur). 

ashamed  ;  he  — ,  avoir  honte ;  feel 
— ,  avoir  honte. 

ask,  demander,  prier ;  —  /or, 
demander  ;  —  him  for  it,  le  lui 
demander  ;  —  one's  self,  se  de- 
mander. 

asleep,  endormi ;  be  — ,  6tre  en- 
dormi,  dormir  ;  we  have  been  — , 
nous  avons  dormi ;  fall  — ,  s'en- 
dormir. 

ass,  ^ne,  m. 

assail,  assaillir. 

assist,  aider. 

associate,  s'associer. 

assure,  assurer. 

astonish,  ^tonner. 

astonishment,  6tonnement,  m. 

at,  k,  chez,  de.;  —  (the  house,  shop, 
office,  etc.,  of),  chez ;  —  th£ 
hatter's,  chez  le  chapelier ;    — 


614 


VOCABULAEY. 


my  father' 8,  chez  mon  p^re  ;  — 

home,  chez  moi,  chez  toi,  etc.  ; 

—  my  house,  chez  moi ;  —  our 

house,  chez  nous ;  —  daybreak, 

des  le  point  du  jour, 
attack,  attaquer. 
attend,  assister  k. 
attention,  attention,  f.  ;  pay  — , 

give  — ,  faire  attention. 
attentively,  attentivement. 
attract,  attirer. 
auburn,  chatain. 
audience,  assistance,  f.,  assistants, 

m.  pi. 
Au^st,  aoUt,  m. 
Augustus,  Auguste,  m. 
aunt,  tante,  f. 
author,  auteur,  m. 
autumn,  automne,  m.  ;  in  — ,  en 

automne. 
avenue,  avenue,  f. 
avidity,  avidity,  f. 
avoid,  6viter. 
await,  attendre. 
awake,  intr. ,  se  r^veiller. 
away;    go  — ,   partir,  s'en  aller; 

take  — ,  Cter ;  far  — ,  loin,  loin 

d'ici ;  run  — ,  se  sauver. 
axe,  'hache,  f. 

B. 

1)ack,  dos,  m.  ;  he  — ,  dtre  de  re- 
tour  ;  give  — ,  rendre  ;  come  — , 
revenir  ;  go  — ,  retourner ;  bring 
— ,  ramener. 

bad,  mauvais,  mdchant. 

badly,  mal ;  hurt  {very)  — ,  faire 
(beaucoup  de)  mal  k. 

Bseda,  Bede. 

bag,  sac,  m. 

bake,  cuire. 

baker,  boulanger,  m, 

ball,  bal,  m. 

banana,  banane,  f. 

banish,  bannir. 

bank,  bord,  m. ;  on  the  — ,  au  bord. 

banker,  banquier,  m. 

banking-house,  maison  (f.)  de 
banque. 

barefoot,  nu-pieds,  les  pieds  nus. 

bareheaded,  d^couvert. 


bargain,  march^,  m. 

barn,  grange,  f. 

bask,  se  chauffer. 

basket,  panier,  m. 

Bastille,  Bastille,  f. 

battle,  bataille,  f. 

be,  etre ;  y  avoir ;  —  {of  health), 
se  porter,  aller ;  —  about  to, 
aller,  etre  sur  le  point  de,  devoir; 
—  born,  naltre  ;  —  (of  weather), 
faire  ;  —  {of  age),  avoir  ;  —  {of 
time),  y  avoir ;  —  afraid,  avoir 
peur ;  here  is  {are),  voici  ;  there 
is  (are),  voila,  il  y  a  ;  is  he  finish- 
ing?,  finit-il?;  is  he  not?,  etc., 
n'est-ce  pas  ? ;  how  are  you  ?, 
comment  vous  portez-vous?, 
comment  allez-vous?,  comment 
9a  va-t-il  ?,  comment  9a  va  ?  ; 
/  am  well,  je  me  porte  bien,  9a 
va  bien,  etc.  ;  /  am  to  do  it,  je 
dois  le  faire ;  /  am  going  to  do 
it,  je  vais  le  faire ;  it  is  fve,  il 
fait  beau  ;  is  it  ?,  vraiment  ? ; 
he  is  ten  years  old,  il  a  dix  ans ; 
a  house  to  —  sold,  une  maison  k 
vendre. 

bear,  n.,  ours,  m. 

bear,  v,  {of  frtiit  trees),  donner. 

beard,  barbe,  f. 

beast,  animal,  m.  ;  (p.  118)  mon- 
ture,  f. 

beat,  battre. 

beautiful,  beau. 

beauty,  beaute,  f. 

because,  parce  que. 

become,  devenir,  se  faire ;  —  {suit), 
seoir ;  what  has  —  of  her  ?,  qu'est- 
elle  devenue  ? 

bed  ;  go  to  — ,  se  coucher ;  he  in 
— ,  etre  au  lit,  ^tre  couch6. 

bedroom,  chambre  (f. )  k  coucher. 

beech,  'hetre,  m. 

before,  prep. ,  devant  {of  place) ; 
avant  {of  time) ;  avant  de  +  in- 
fin.  ;  —  the  judge,  par  devant  le 
juge. 

before,  conj.,  avant  que. 

before,  adv.,  auparavant. 

beg  ;  /  —  your  pardon,  pardon. 

beg,  prier,  mendier. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


515 


beg:gfar,  mendiant,  m. 

begin,  commencer,  se  mettre  k, 

beginning,  commencement,  m. 

behave,  se  comporter. 

behead,  d^capiter. 

behind,  derri^re. 

believe,  croire;  it  is  believed,  on 

croit. 
bell,  cloche,  f.  ;  little  —  {.spherical), 

erelot ;  sleigh-  — ,  grelot,  m. 
belong  ;  —  to,  etre  k,  appartenir  k. 
below  ;  here  — ,  ici-bas. 
bend,  courber. 
benefactor,  bienfaiteur,  m. 
benediction,  benediction,  f. 
beside,  k  c6t6  de. 
besides,  d'ailleurs. 
best,  adj.,  le  meilleur. 
best,  adv.,  le  mieux. 
better,  adj.,  meilleur. 
better,  adv. ,  mieux ;  be  — ,be  worth 

more,    valoir  mieux  ;    be  —  {of 

health),  se  porter  mieux,    aller 

mieux  ;    like  — ,  prefer,   aimer 

mieux. 
between,  entre. 

bid  ;  —  good-bye  to,  dire  adieu  k. 
big,  grand,  gros. 
bind  up,  bander. 
bird,  oiseau,  m. 
birthday,  fete,  f. ,  anniversaire  (m. ) 

de  ma  (sa)  naissance. 
bite,  mordre. 
bitterly,  amdrement. 
black,  noir. 

black-board,  tableau  noir,  m. 
blacksmith,  mar^chal  f errant,  m. 
blade,  brin,  m. 
blind,  aveugle. 
blond,  blond. 
blow,  n. ,  coup,  m.  ;  —  with  a  stick, 

coup  de  bS.ton. 
blow,  v.,  souffler. 
blue,  bleu, 
blunt,  brusque, 
blush,  rougir. 

board,  bord,  m. ;  on  —  of,  k  bord  de. 
body,  corps,  m. 
boil,  bouillir. 
bold,  *hardi. 
bonbon,  bonbon,  m. 


book,  livre,  m. 

born  ;  to  be  — ,  naltre  ;  he  was  — , 
il  est  n6. 

both,  tous  (les)  deux,  I'un  et 
I'autre  ;  —  ...  and,  et  . . .  et. 

bother  !,  peste  de  ! 

bottom,  fond,  m.  ;  at  the  —  of, 
au  fond  de. 

Boston,  Boston,  m. 

bow  ;  —  to,  saluer. 

box,  boite,  f. 

boy,  enfant,  gargon,  m.  ;  my  — , 
mon  enfant,  m. 

branch,  branche,  f. 

brave,  courageux,  brave. 

bread,  pain,  m. 

break,  casser,  rompre ;  —  out, 
edater ;  —  one's  arm,  se  casser 
le  bras  ;  —  off,  casser,  dter ;  — 
up,  se  dissoudre. 

breakfast,  dejeuner,  m. 

breathe,  respirer. 

brick,  brique,  f. ;  —  house,  maison 
(f. )  en  briques. 

bridge,  pont,  m. 

bring,  apporter ;  {carry)  trans- 
porter ;  {lead)  amener  ;  —  back, 
ramener ;  —  dovm,  descendre  ; 
—  up  {rear)  Clever ;  —  up, 
ramener  k  la  surface. 

Britain,  see  Great  Britain. 

brother,  fr^re,  m. 

brush,  n.,  brosse,  f. 

brush,  v.,  brosser. 

build,  batir. 

building,  edifice,  m. 

bun,  brioche,  f. 

burden,  fardeau,  m. 

burn,  brftler. 

burst,  eclat,  m. 

bury,  enterrer. 

busmess,  commerce,  m.,  affairos, 
f.  pi.  ;  on  — ,  pour  affaires ;  go 
into  — ,  se  mettre  dans  les  af- 
faires, se  mettre  en  commerce. 

busy,  occupe  (de) ;  be  —  doing  any- 
thing, be  —  at  anything,  ^tre  en 
train  de  faire  quelque  chose,  etre 
k  faire  quelque  chose. 

but,  mais ;  nothing  — ,  ne  . . .  rien 
. . .  que. 


516 


VOCABULARY. 


butter,  beurre,  m. 

buy,  acheter. 

by,  par,  de,  sur,  k,  en ;  — rubbing,  en 
frottant ;  —  the  way,  k  propos  ; 
go  — ,  passer ;  —  sight,  de  vue  ; 
taller  —  an  inch,  plus  grand 
d'un  pouce  ;  six  feet  —  seven,  six 
pieds  sur  sept ;  —  my  watch,  k 
ma  montre  ;  —  what  he  says,  k 
ce  qu'il  dit ;  loved  — ,  aim^  de. 

C. 

cabbage,  chou,  m. 

Caedmon,  Cedmon. 

cai^,  cafe,  m, 

cage,  cage,  f. 

Cain,  Cain. 

call,    appeler ;  faire   venir ;   —   a 

meeting,    convoquer   une  assem- 

blee  ;  be  called,  s' appeler. 
camel,  chameau,  m. 
can,  pouvoir,  savoir ;  he  — not,  il 

ne  pent  pas,  il  ne  sait  pas ;  / 

could,  je  pourrais,  je  pouvais  ;  / 

could  have,  j'aurais  pu. 
Canada,  Canada,  m.;  in  or  to  — , 

au  Canada. 
Canadian,  canadien. 
cane,  canne,  f. 

cannon-shot,  coup(m.  )decanon,  m. 
capital,  n.,  capitale,  f. 
capital,  adj.,  capital, 
captain,  capitaine,  m. 
caravan,  caravane,  f. 
card,  carte,  f. 
care ;  —  for,  soigner ;  take  —  of, 

avoir  soin  de,  soigner ;  take  — , 

prendre  garde. 
carefully,  soigneusement. 
careless,  negligent. 
caress,  caresse,  f. 
carnival,  carnaval,  m. 
caT>enter,  charpentier,  m. 
carriage,  voiture,  f. 
carrot,  carotte,  f. 
CeUrry,   porter ;  —  off,   emporter ; 

—  the  day,  I'emporter. 
case,cas,m. ;  in — (iAa<),au casque. 
cat,  chat,  m. 
catch,  attraper ;  —  (a)  cold,  a'en- 

rhumer. 


catholic,  catholique. 

cattle,  b^tail,  m.  s. ,  bestiaux,  m.  pL 

cause,  n.,  cause,  f. 

cause,  v.,  causer;  exciter; — to, 

faire. 
cavalry,  cavalerie,  f. 
cease,  cesser. 
celebrate,  ceUbrer. 
celebrated,  c^l^bre. 
celebration,  fete,  f. 
cent,  sou,  m. 
centime,  centime,  m. 
century,  siecle,  m. 
certain,  certain. 
chair,  chaise,  f. 
chance,  'hasard,  ra. 
change,  monnaie,  f. 
chapter,  chapitre,  m. 
charge,  charge,  f. 
charitable,  charitable, 
charm,  charmer. 
charming,  charmant. 
charmingly,  k  ravir. 
chase,  chasser,  poursuivro, 
chat,  causer. 
cheap,  (k)  bon  march^,  peu   cou- 

teux ;  cheaper,  k  meilleur  march^, 

moins  cher. 
cherry,  cerise,  f. 
cherry-tree,  cerisier,  m. 
chicken,  poulet,  m. 
chief,  n.,  chef,  m. 
chief,  adj.,  principal, 
child,  enfant,  m.  and  f. 
chimney,  cheminee,  f. 
China,  Chine,  f. 
chopper,  bucheron,  m. 
Christian,  chr^tien. 
Christopher,  Christophe. 
church,   eglise,    f.  ;   at   {to)   — ,  k 

I'eglise. 
city,  ville,  f.  ;  in  the  — ,  k  la  ville, 

en  ville. 
city-hall,  hdtel  (m.)  de  ville. 
clad,  see  clothe, 
claimant,  pretendant,  m. 
class,  classe,  f. 
class-room,  classe,  f. 
clean,  nettoyer. 
clearly,  clairement. 
clever,  habile,  fort. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


517 


cleverly,  habilement. 

climb,  grimper. 

clock,  horloge,  f. 

close,  fermer,  clore. 

cloth  ;  table-  — ,  nappe,  f. 

clothe,  vetir. 

clothes,  vetements,  m.  pi. ,  habits, 
m.  pi. 

clothes-press,  armoire,  f. 

clumsy  ;  be  so  —  as  to,  avoir  la 
maladresse  de  ;  — fellow,  mala- 
droit, m, 

coat,  habit,  m. 

cock,  coq,  m. 

coffee,  cafe,  m. 

cold,  adj.,  froid;  n.,  froid,  ra. ; 
be  —  {of  living  beings),  avoir 
froid ;  be  —  {of  weather),  faire 
froid  ;  /  have  —  hands,  my  hands 
are  — ,  j'ai  froid  aux  mains ;  catch 
(a) — ,  s'enrhumer. 

collect,  ramasser. 

collection,  quete,  f.  ;  take  up  the 
— ,  faire  la  quete. 

college,  college,  ra. 

colossal,  colossal. 

Columbus,  Colomb.  f^ 

comb,  peigne,  m. 

come,  venir,  arriver;  —  again, 
revenir;  —  back,  —  home,  re- 
venir  ;  — to  see,  — and  see,  venir 
voir ;  —  dovm,  descendre ;  — 
up,  monter,  arriver ;  —  in,  en- 
trer  ;  —  out,  sortir ;  come  I, 
voyons !,  allons ! 

comfortable,  commode ;  be  — ,  faire 
bon. 

command,  commander. 

commandment,  conimandement, 
m.  ;  the  ten  — s,  les  dix  com- 
mandements,  le  decalogue. 

commence,  commencer. 

commit,  commettre. 

companion,  compagnon,  m.,  cora- 
pagne,  f.  ;  travelling  — ,  com- 
pagnon de  voyage. 

company,  compagnie,  f. 

compartment,  compartiment,  m. 

compassion,  compassion,  f. 

complain,  se  plaindre. 

complete,  complet. 


complicated,  compliqu6. 

compliment,  compliment,  m. 

comprise,  comprendre. 

comrade,  camarade,  m. 

conceal,  cacher. 

concert,  concert,  m. 

conclude,  conclure. 

condemn,  condamner. 

condition,  condition,  f. 

confectioner,  confiseur,  m. 

confess,  avouer. 

confidence,  confiance,  f. 

confound,  confondre. 

conquer,  conqu^rir,  vaincre. 

conscience,  conscience,  f. 

consecrate,  benir. 

consent,  consentir. 

consider,  consid^rer. 

construct,  construira 

contain,  contenir. 

continually,  sans  cesse. 

continue,  continuer. 

contract,  contrat,  m. 

contrary  ;  on  the  — ,  au  contraire. 

convenient,  commode. 

cook,  cuisinier,  m.,  -6re,  f. 

cool,  frais ;  it  is  —  (of  toeaiher), 

il  fait  frais. 
coolly,  tranquillement. 
copper,  sou,  m. 
copy,  exemplaire,  m.,  copie,  f. 
coral,  corail,  m. 
corkscrew,  tire-bouchon,  m. 
costs,  frais,  m.  pi. 
cost,  coilter. 
country,    pays,    m.  ;    —    {native 

land),  patrie,  f.  ;  —  {as  opposed 

to  toum),   campagne,   f.  ;  in  the 

— ,  k  la  campagne. 
county-town,  chef-lieu,  m. 
couple,  couple,  m.  and  f. 
courage,   courage,   m.  ;    take   — , 

prendre  courage. 
court,  cour,  f. 
courtier,  courtisan,  m. 
cousin,  cousin,  m.  ;  cousine,  f. 
cover,     couvrir ;      covered     with, 

couvert  de. 
cow,  vache,  f. 
Cracow,  Cracovie,  f. 
crawl,  se  trainer. 


518 


VOCABULARY. 


create,  cr^er, 
creature,  creature,  f. 
crime,  crime,  m. 
criminal,  criminel,  m. 
critic,  critique,  m. 
Croesus,  Cresus. 
crops,  recolte,  f. 
cross,  adj.,  mechant. 
cross,  v.,  traverser. 
crowd,  foule,  f. 
crown,  couronne,  f. 
crumb,  raiette,  f. 
cry,  pleurer,  crier ;  —  out,  crier, 
cup,  tasse,  f,,  coupe,  f. ;  cupboard, 
cure,  ^uerir.  [armoire,  f. 

curiosity,  curiosity,  f. 
curse,  maudire. 
custom,  coutume,  f, 
cut,  couper ;  have  one^s  hair  — ,  se 
faire  couper  les  cheveux. 


daily,  tous  les  jours. 

dance,  danser. 

danger,  danger,  m. 

dangerous,  aangereux. 

dark,  noir;  he  — ,  faire  noir,  faire 
obscur. 

date  {time),  date,  f. 

date  { fruit),  datte,  f. 

daughter,  fille,  f. 

day,  jour,  m.,  joum^e,  f.  ;  every 
— ,  tous  les  jours,  chaque  jour ; 
in  those  — s,  k  cette  epoque ; 
what  —  of  the  month  is  it  to-day  ?, 
quel  jour  du  mois  sommes-nous 
aujourd'hui  ?,  etc.  ;  the  —  after 
to-morrow,  apr^s-demain ;  the  — 
before  yesterday,  avant-hier  ;  all 
—  (long),  toute  la  journ^e,  tout 
ie  jour  ;  from  —  to  — ,  de  jour 
en  jour ;  he  —  {daylight),  faire 
jour. 

daybreak,  point  (m. )  du  jour ;  at 
{since)  — ,  d^s  le  point  du  jour. 

dead,  mort. 

deaf-mute,  sourd-muet. 

deal ;  a  great  — ,  a  good  — ,  beau- 
coup. 

dear,  cher  ;  not  so  — ,  pas  si  cher, 
moins  cher. 


death,  mort,  f.  ;  be  at  the  point  of 
— ,  etre  sur  le  point  de  mourir ; 
put  to  — ,  mettre  a  mort. 

debt,  dette,  f. 

decapitate,  decapiter. 

decayed,  gate. 

deceive,  tromper. 

declare,  declarer. 

decline,  dechoir. 

decorate,  orner. 

defect,  defaut,  m.         |A 

dejection,  abattement,  in. 

delay,  diff^rer. 

delicacy,  delicatesse,  f. 

delight ;  —  i»,  se  plaire  k, 

delighted,  enchante. 

delightful,  charmant. 

deliverance,  delivrance,  f. 

delve,  becher. 

dentist,  dentiste,  m. 

deny,  nier. 

depart,  s'en  aller,  partir. 

depend ;  —  on,  d^pendre  de. 

describe,  d^crire. 

desert,  desert,  m. 

deserve,  meriter. 

desire,  d^sirer,  vouloir. 

despair,  desesp^rer. 

dessert,  dessert,  m. 

destroy,  d^truire. 

determine,  determiners  r^soudre. 

devour,  d^vorer. 

dial,  cadran,  m. 

diameter,  diam^tre,  m. 

die,  mourir ;  —  away,  se  mourir. 

difference,  difference,  f.  ;  that 
makes  no  — ,  cela  ne  fait  rien. 

different,  different. 

difficult,  difficile. 

difficulty,  difficulte,  f. 

dig.  creuser,  becher. 

diminish,  diminuer. 

dine,  diner. 

dining-room,  salle  (f. )  k  manger. 

dinner,  diner,  m. 

direct,  adj.,  droit. 

direct,  v.,  diriger. 

disagreeable,  d^sagr^able. 

disappear,  disparaitre. 

discover,  decouvrir. 

discuss,  discuter. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


519 


discussion,  discussion,  f. 
dishes,  vaisselle,  f. 
disobliging,  desobligeant. 
disperse,  se  disperser,  se  s^parer. 
displease,  deplaire. 
dispute,  11.,  diflferend,  m. 
dispute,  V. ,  se  disputer. 
dissatisfied,  mecontent. 
distinction,  distinction,  f. 
distinguished,  distingu^. 
distract,  distraire. 
disturb,  deranger. 
dive,  plonger. 
divide,  diviser ;  partager. 
do,  faire  ;  —  {of  health),  se  porter, 
etc.;  —  without,    se  passer  de; 

—  you  like?,  aimez-vous?,  did  he 
speak  ?,  a-t-il  parl6  ?  ;  he  does  not 
speak,  il  ne  parle  pas  ;  he  works, 
does  he  not  ?,  il  travaille,  n'est- 
ce  pas  ?  ;  —  not  {don't)  speaky  ne 
parlez  pas. 

doctor,  medecin,  m,,  docteur,  m. 

doctrine,  doctrine,  f. 

dog,  chien,  m. 

dollar,  dollar,  m.,  piastre,  f.  ;  a 

—  a  dozen,  un  dollar  la  douzaine. 
door,  porte,  f.  ;  next  — ,  k  ctlL 
doubt,  n. ,  doute,  m . ;  no — ,  sans  doute 
doubt,  V. ,  douter.  " 

down ;  —  stairs,  en  has  ;  come  — , 
go  —  {stairs),  descendre,  aller  en 
bas ;  bring  — ,  descendre  ;  — 
tov)Vf  en  ville  ;  bent  — ,  courb^ ; 
sit  — ,  s'asseoir ;  lie  — ,  se  coucher. 

dozen,  douzaine,  f. 

Dr.,  docteur,  m. 

dramatic,  dramatique. 

draw,  tirer ;  tracer ;  —  neavt 
s'approcher  (de). 

drawing,  dessin,  m. 

dream,  songe,  m.,  reve,  m. 

dress,  n.,  robe,  f.  ;  toilette,  f. 

dress,  v. ,  habiller ;  se  mettre ; 
s'habiller  ;  be  —  ed,  etre  mis. 

dress-maker,  couturi^re,  f. 

drink,  boire. 

drive ;  go  for  a  — ,  be  out  for  a  — , 
se  promener  en  voiture. 

drive,  v.,  conduire,  mener,  mou- 
voir,  chasser ;  —  away,  chasser. 


drop,  laisser  tomber. 

drown,  se  noyer. 

dry,  sec. 

dry-goods  store,  magasin  (m. )  de 

nouveautes. 
ducat,  ducat,  m. 
duke,  due,  m. 
dupe,  dupe,  f. 
during,  pendant, 
duty,  devoir,  m. 
dwell,  demeurer. 

E. 

each,  chaque,  tout. 

each  one,  chacun. 

each  other,  reflex,  pron.  pi. ,  nous, 

vous,  se  ;  indef. ,  I'un  I'autre. 
eagerly,  avec  empressement. 
ear,  oreille,  f.  ;  —  -ache,  mal  aux 

oreilles  ;  —  {of  corn),  ^pi,  m. 
early,  de  bonne  heure. 
earn,  gagner. 
earth,  terre,  f. 
easily,  facilement 
easy,  facile. 
eat,  manger. 
economical,  ^conome. 
educated,  instruit. 
education,  education,  f.  ;  receive  a 

good  — ,  faire  de  bonnes  etudes. 
eight,  'huit. 
eighty,  quatre-vingt(8). 
either,  ou ;  nor  ...  — ,  ni . .  .  non 

plus  ;  he  hasn't  any  — ,  il  n'en  a 

pas  non  plus, 
eldest,  ain6. 
elect,  ^lire. 

elephant,  ^Idphant,  m. 
eleven,  onze. 
elm,  orme,  m. 
else,  autre  ;  not .  .  .  anything  — , 

nothing  — ,  ne  .  .  .  rien  autre. 
elsewhere,  autre  part,  ailleurs. 
emblem,  embl^me,  m. 
embrasure,  embrasure,  f. 
emperor,  empereur,  m. 
employ  ;  admit  into  his  — ,  admetr 

tre  chez  lui. 
empty,  vide. 
enclose,  clore,  enclore. 
enclosed,  ci-inclua. 


620 


VOCABULARY. 


encourage,  encourager. 

end,  n. ,  fin,  f.  ;  come  to  a  bad — , 

finir  mal. 
end,  v.,  finir,  se  terminer, 
enemy,  ennemi,  m. 
engage,  s'engager. 
England,  Angleterre,  f. 
English,  anglais  ;  — man,  Anglais, 

m.  ;   —  (the  langvage),  I'anglais, 

m.,  anglais,  m. 
enjoy,  jouir  de ;  — one's  self,  s'amu- 

ser. 
enough,  assez  (de) ;  not  — ,  pas 

assez  ;  kind  — ,  assez  bon. 
enter,  entrer  (dans). 
enterprise,  entreprise,  f. 
equal ;  be  —  {to),  egaler. 
equivalent,  Equivalent, 
error,  erreur,  f. 
escape,  Eviter,  Echapper  ;  have  a 

narrow  — ,  I'Echapper  belle, 
estate,  propri^te,  f.,  biens,  m.  pi. 
Europe,  Europe,  f. 
European,  europEen. 
even,meme  ;  — if,  —  though,  quand 

meme. 
evening,   soir,  m.,  soiree,   f.  ;    in 

the  — ,  le  soir  ;  last  — ,  yesterday 

— ,  hier  (au)  soir. 
ever,  jamais. 
every,  tout,  chaque ;  —  Sunday, 

tous   les  dimanches  ;     —   thing 

which,  tout  ce  qui ;  —  other  day, 

tous  les  deux  jours. 
everybody,  tout  le  monde,  m. 
everyone,  chacun. 
everywhere,  partout. 

evil,  mal ; doing,  mal  faire,  m. 

exactly,  exactement,  pr^cis^ment. 

examine,  examiner. 

example,   exemple,   m.  ;  for  — , 

par  exemple. 
excavation,  excavation,  f. 
exclaim,  s' Eerier. 
excuse,  excuser.  [theme,  m. 

exercise,  devoir,  m.,  exercice,  m. 
exercise-book,  cahier,  m. 
exhibit,  exposer. 

expect,  attendre,  s'attendre,  comp- 
ter, espErer. 
expense,  dEpense,  f.,  dEpens,  m.  pi. 


explain,  expliquer. 

extract,  arracher. 

eye,  ceil,  m.,  plur.,  yeux. 


facade,  facade,  f. 

face,  figure,  f.,  visage,  m.  ;  shut 
the  door  in  one's  — ,  fermer  la 
porte  au  nez  k  quelqu'un. 

fact,  fait,  m. 

fail,  faillir  ;  to  —  in,  manquer  k. 

fairy,  fee,  f.  ;  —  story,  coute  de 

faithful',  fiddle. 

fall,    tomber ;   —   due,    Echoir ;  — 

out,    se    brouiller  ;    —    asleep, 

s'endormir. 
familiarity,  familiarity,  f. 
familiarly,  familierement. 
family,  famille,  f. 
famous,  fameux. 
far,  adv. ,  loin  ;  —  from,  loin  que, 

loin  de  ;  —  away,  loin,  loin  d'ici ; 

farther  off,  plus  loin  ;  farther  on, 

plus  loin  ;  as  —  as,  jusqu'A, ;  how 

—  is  it  ?,  combien  y  a-t-il  ? 
farmer,  paysan,  m.,  fermier,  m., 

cultivateur,  m. 
farmhouse,  ferme,  f. 
farm-servant,  valet  (m. )  de  ferme. 
fashion,  mode,  f. 
fast,  vite. 
fastidious,  difficile, 
fate,  destin,  ra. 
father,  pere,  m. 
favour,  faveur,  f. 
favourite,  favori,  m. 
fear,  n.,  crainte,  f,,  peur,  f.  ;  for — 

that,  de  crainte  que  ;  for  —  of, 

de  crainte  de. 
fear,  v. ,  craindre,  avoir  peur. 
feast,  festin,  m.,  banquet,  m. 
feed,  nourrir. 
feel,    tater ;     sentir ;    —  hungry, 

sentir  la  faim,  avoir  faim. 
feeling,  sentiment,  m. 
fell,  abattre. 
fellow,   gar9on,  m.  ;   my  good  — , 

mon  ami ;    the  brave   little  — s, 

les     petits     bonshommes ;     the 

clumsy  -^f  le  maladroit. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


621 


fence,  cldture,  f. 

fetch,  aller  cherchfer. 

few,  peu,  peu  de,  quelques  ;  a  — , 

quelques-uns  ;     hut     — ,     ne . . . 

gu^re,  ne. .  .que  pen. 
field,  champ,  m. 
fifteen,  quinze. 
fifteenth,  quinzi^me,  quinze. 
fifth,  cinquieme,  cinq. 
fiftY,  cinquante. 
fignt,  combattre. 
fill,  remplir. 
finally,  enfin,  ^  la  fin  ;  —  do,  finir 

par  faire. 
find,  trouver ;  he  found,  se   trou- 

ver  ;  —  out,  d^couvrir. 
fine,    beau  ;  it  is  —   {weather),  il 

fait  beau  (temps). 
fine-looking,  beau,  ^l^gant. 
finger,  doigt,  m. 
finish,  finir. 
fire,  feu,  m. 
first,  adj.,  premier, 
first,  adv. ,  d'abord ;  at  — ,  d'abord ; 

for  the  —  time,  pour  la  premiere 

fois. 
fish,  n.,  poisson,  m. 
fish,  v.,  pecher. 
fit,  aller  k  ;   my  suit  — s  me  well, 

mon  complet  me  va  bien. 
fitting",  convenable. 
five,  cinq. 
flatter,  flatter. 
flattering,  flatteur. 
flee,  fuir,  s'entuir. 
fleet,  flotte,  f. 
Florida,  Floride,  f. 
flour,  farine,  f. 

flower,  fleur,  f.  ;  in  — ,  en  fleurs. 
fluently,  couramment. 
fly,  voler  ;  —  away,  s'envoler. 
foggfy ;  he  — ,  faire  du  brouillard. 
folded,  crois^. 
foliage,  feuillage,  m. 
follow,  suivre. 
following,  suivant. 
folly,  folie,  f, 
fond  ;  he  —  of,  aimer 
food,  nourriture,  f. 
foolish,  fou. 
foot,    pied,   m.  ;  on    — ^   k  pied ; 


tread  under  — ,  fouler  aux 
pieds. 

for,  prep. ,  pour,pendant,  de,contre, 
par  ;  —  a  momeyit,  un  moment ; 
—  (during),  pendant ;  set  out 
— ,  partir  pour ;  —  {since), 
depuis  ;  —  a  long  time,  —  a  week, 
depuis  longtemps,  depuis  une 
semaine  ;  —  w€,  pour  moi ;  —  it, 
en ;  trade  — ,  ^changer  pour 
(contre) ;  /  am,  sorry  —  it,  j'en 
suis  fach6. 

for,  conj.,  car. 

forbid,  defendre. 

force,  n. ,  force,  f. 

force,  v.,  forcer. 

foreign,  Stranger;  in  — countries, 
k  I'dtranger. 

forest,  foret,  f. 

forget,  oublier. 

fork,  fourchette,  f. 

form,  former. 

former  ;  the  — ,  celui-U. 

fortnight,  quinzaine,  f.,  quinze 
jours,  m.  pi. 

fortunate,  heureux. 

fortune,  fortune,  f. ;  good  — ,  bon- 
heur,  ni.  ;  make  07ie's  — ,  faire 
fortune. 

forty,  quarante. 

four,  quatre. 

fourteenth,  quatorzifeme,  quatorze. 

fourth,  quatri^me,  quatre. 

fox,  renard,  m. 

franc,"  franc,  m. 

France,  France,  f.  ;  in  — ,  to  — ,  en 
France. 

Francis,  Frangois,  ra, ,  Francis,  m. 

Frederick  the  Great,  Fr^d^ric  le 
Grand. 

free,  libre. 

freeze,  geler. 

French,  adj.,  fran9ai8;  —  {the  lan- 
guage), le  fran9ai8,  frangais ;  — 
Tnaw,  Fran9ai8,  m.  ;  —  t'^acheTf 
professeur  (m. )  de  fran9ais. 

Friday,  vendredi,  m. 

friend,  ami,  m.  ;  amie,  f. 

friendly,  aimable. 

friendship,  amiti^,  f. 

frog,  grenouille,  f. 


522 


VOCABULARY. 


from,  de,  ^,  k  partir  de,  dans, 
d'apres,  depuis  ;  —  day  to  day, 
de  jour  en  jour  ;  —  it,  en;  — 
nature,  d'apres  nature  ;  drink  — 
a  glass,  boire  dans  un  verre  ; 
take  —  the  table,  prendre  sur  la 
table. 

front ;  in  —  of,  devant. 

fruit,  fruit,  m. 

frying-pan,  poele,  f. 

fulfil,  accomplir. 

full,  plein. 

furnish,  foumir. 

G. 

gallery,  galerie,  f. 

garden,  jardin,  m. 

Gascon,  Gascon,  m. 

gate,  porte,  f. 

gather,  cueillir. 

gay,  gai. 

general,  general,  m. 

generally,  en  g^n^ral,  gen^rale- 
ment,  ordinairement. 

generous,  genereux. 

gentleman,  monsieur,  m. 

George,  Georges. 

German,  allemand. 

get,  prendre  ;  avoir  ;  obtenir  ;  go 
and  — ,  aller  chercher,  aller 
trouver  ;  —  up,  rise,  se  lever  ; 

—  up  on,  monter  sur  ;  —  (be- 
come), devenir  ;  —  made,  have 
made,  faire  faire  ;  —  married,  se 
marier  ;  —    angry,    se    f^cher ; 

—  on,  avancer. 
ghost,  revenant,  m. 
gird  on,  ceindre. 
girl,  fille,  f.,  enfant,  f. 

give,  donner  ;  —  away,    donner ; 

—  back,  rendre. 

glad ;  —  at,  of,  content  de,  charm^ 
de. 

glory,  gloire,  f. 

glove,  gant,  m. 

go,  aller ;  se  rendre ;  —  away,  s'en 
aller,  partir;  —  in,  into,  entrer 
dans  ;  —  oict,  sortir ;  —  with, 
accompagner,  aller  avec  ;  —  by, 

—  past,  passer  (devant) ;  —  up 
{stairs),  aller  en  haut,  monter ; 


—  down  (stairs),  aller  en  baa, 
descendre ;  —  'and  see,  aller  voir ; 

—  around  the  city,  faire  le  tour 
de  la  ville  ;  —  to  bed,  se  coucher  ; 

—  for  a  row,  sail,  etc.,  se  pro- 
mener  en  bateau  ;  —  (out)  for  a 
walk,  aller  se  promener  (a  pied), 
aller  faire  une  promenade  (k 
pied) ;  —  for  a  drive,  se  pro- 
mener en  voiture  ;  —  for  a  ride, 
se  promener  k  cheval;  — for,  — 
after,  —  aiid  get,  aller  cherchei* ; 
— back  (again),  retourner  ;  — 
down  town,  aller  en  ville ;  — 
home,  aller  chez-soi,  rentrer  ;  — 
on,  continuer  (k),  aller  en  ;  —  to 
sleep,  s'endormir ;  —  to  France, 
aller  en  France,  partir  pour  la 
France. 

God,  Dieu ;  gods,  dieux,  m,  pi. 
gold,  or,  m. ;  adj.  (of  gold),  d'or, 

en  or. 
golden,  d'or. 
good,  bon,  brave ;  my  —  fellow, 

mon  ami,  m. ;  be  so  —  as  to,  he 

—  enough  to,  voulez-vous  bien, 
ayez  la  bontd  de,  veuillez. 

good,  bien,  m. ;  do  — ,  faire  du 
bien. 

good-bye,  adieu,  au  revoir. 

goodness,  bont^,  f. 

goods,  marchandises,  f.  pi. 

goose,  oie,  f. 

gooseberry-bush,  groseillier,  m. 

government,  gouvernement,  m. 

grace,  grace,  f. 

grain,  grain,  m. 

grammar,  grammaire^  f. 

grandfather,  grand-pere,  m. ,  aieul, 
m. 

grandmamma,  grand'mere,  f. 

grandmother,  grand'mere,  f. 

grandson,  petit-fils,  m. 

grass,  herbe,  f. 

gravely,  gravement. 

great,  grand,  gros  ;  —  deal,  beau- 
coup. 

Great  Britain,  Grande-Bretagne,  £. 

Greek,  grec. 

green,  vert. 

g^rind,  moudre. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


523 


ground,  terre,  f.  ;  {up)on  the  — ,  k 
terre,  par  terre. 

grro"wr,  croitre  ;  —  larger,  grandir. 

grudge  (have  a),  en  vouloir. 

guard,  garde,  m. 

gun,  fusil,  m. 

H. 

hair,  cheveux,  m.  pi. 

half,  demi,  inoiti6,  f .  ;  —  an  hour, 
une  demi-heure,  f.  ;  half-past 
eight,  huit  heures  et  demie. 

half,  adv. ,  k  demi. 

hall,  vestibule,  m.  ;  salle,  f. 

hand,  main,  f.  ;  shake  hamls  with, 
donner  la  main  k;  on  the  right 
— ,  k  droite ;  on  the  left  — ,  k 
gauche ;  — {of  a  clock),  aiguille,  f. 

handkerchief,  mouchoir,  m. 

hang,  pendre. 

happen,  arriver ;  venir  k, 

happily,  heureuaement. 

happy,  heureux,  content. 

hard  ;  work  — ,  travailler  ferme. 

hardly,  k  peine. 

harm,  faire  mal  k. 

harp,  'harpe,  f. 

harvest,  moisson,  f. 

hasten,  se  hater,  se  ddp^cher  ;  — 
into  presence  of,  accourir  aupr^s 
de. 

hat,  chapeau,  m. 

hate,  'hair. 

hatred,  'haine,  f. 

hatter,  chapelier,  m. 

have,  avoir;  obtenir ;  —  (as 
auxiliary),  avoir,  §tre;  / — to  be 
there,  il  faut  que  j'y  sois  ;  — 
him  go,  faites-le  partir;  —  (cause 
to  6c),  faire  ;  /  am  having  a  house 
built,  je  fais  bitir  une  maison ; 

—  done,  faire  faire  ;  —  one's  hair 
cut,  se  faire  couper  les  cheveux  ; 

—  just,  venir  de  ;  —  to  do  vnth, 
avoir  aflFaire  k\  he  has  spoken, 
has  he  not  ?,  il  a  parl^,  n'est-ce 
pas  ?  ;  —  to,  ^tre  oblig^  de. 

Havre,  le  Havre. 

hay,  foin,  m. 

hazel-nut,  noisette,  f. 

he,  il,  lui ;  ce  ;  —  who,  celui  qui ; 

—  himself,  lui-meme. 


head,  t^te,  f.  j  maltre,  m. 
headache;  have  — ,  avoir  mal  h 

la  tete. 
heal,  gu6rir. 
health,  sant^,  f. 
hear,  entendre  ;  — from,  recevoir 

des  nouvelles  de ;  /  —  from  him, 

je  re9oi8  de  ses  nouvelles ;  —  of, 

entendre  parler  de. 
heart,  coeur,  m. 
heat,  chaleur,  f. 
heavy,  lourd. 
hedge,  'haie,  f. 

Helena ;  St.  — ,  Sainte-H616ne. 
help,  aider, 
hen,  poule,  f. 
hence,  aussi,  done. 
Henry,  Henri,  m. 
her,  adj. ,  son,  sa,  ses  ;  lui ...  le  {k 

elle). 
her,  pers.'  pron. ,  la,  elle  ;  to  — , 

lui,  k  elle ;   —  ovm,  le  sien,  k 

elle. 
here,  ici,  y  ;  —  below,  ici-bas ;  — 

is,  —  are,  voici. 
hero,  'heros,  m. 
hers,  le  sien,  k  elle. 
herself,  se,  elle-m^me. 
hide,  cacher. 
high,  'haut ;  —  price,  grand  prix, 

m.,  tant. 
hill,  colline,  f. 
him,   le,   lui  ;  to,  for  — ,  lui ;   — 

who,  celui  qui. 
himself,  se,  soi,  lui,  lui-meme  ;  to 

— ,   en    lui-meme ;    he  — ,   lui- 
meme. 
hind,  adj.,  de  derri^re. 
hinder,  empecher. 
his,  adj. ,  son,  sa,  ses ;  lui  ...  le 

{k  lui). 
his,  pron.,  le  sien,  4  lui;  —  own, 

le  sien. 
history,  histoire,  f. 
hither  ;  —  and  thither,  (?A  et  IIL 
hold,  tenir ;  —  out,  tendre. 
hole,  trou,  m. 
holiday,    jour  (m. )  de  fete  ;   — 8, 

vacances,  f.  pi. 
holy,  benit. 
home ;  {at)  — ,  chez  moi,  chez  toi, 


524 


VOCABULARY. 


etc.,  k  la  maison  ;  go  — ,  aller 
chez  moi,  chez  toi,  etc.,  aller  k 
la  maison. 

honest,  honnete,  loyal,  probe. 

honesty,  loyaute,  f.,  probite,  f. 

honour,  n.,  honneur,  m. 

honour,  v.,  honorer. 

hope,  n.,  esperance,  f. 

hope,  v.,  esperer. 

horse,  cheval,  m. 

horseback  ;  07i  — ,  k  cheval. 

horseshoe,  fer  (m.)  k  cheval. 

hot ;  chaud,  brulant ;  it  is  — ,  il 
fait  chaud. 

hour,  heure,  f. 

house,  maison,  f.  ;  at  {to)  our  — , 
chez  nous ;  at  whose  —  ?,  chez 
qui  ?  ;  at  Mr.  B^s  (  —  ),  chez 
Monsieur  B ;  in  the  — ,  k  la 
maison,  dans  la  maison. 

hew,  comment,  comme,  combien  ; 
— !,    comme!,   que!;   —  much, 

—  many,  combien ;  —  much/,  — 
many  !,  combien  (de) !,  que  de  ! ; 

—  long  have  you  been  here  ?,  de- 
puis  quand  etes-vous  ici  ?  ;  — 
happy  she  is  /,  qu'elle  est  heu- 
reuse  ! ;  —  old  is  he  ?,  quel  ^ge 
a-t-il  ? ;  —  is  he  ?,  comment  se 
porte-t-il  ?,  comment  va-t-il  ? 

however,  cependant ;  —  good, 
quelque  bon  que  ;  —  that  may 
he,  quoi  qu'il  en  soit ;  —  little, 
pour  peu  que. 

howl,  n. ,  cri,  m. ;  give  a  — ,  pousser 
un  cri. 

howl,  v.,  pousser  un  cri. 

humble,  humble. 

hundred  ;   a  {one)  — ,  cent. 

hunger,  faim,  f. 

hungry  ;  he  {feel)  — ,  avoir  faim. 

hunt,  chasser. 

hunting,  chasse,  f. 

hurrah  for  !,  vive(nt) ! 

hurry  ;  —  up,  se  depecher  ;  he  in 
a  — ,  etre  press^. 

hurt,  faire  mal  4;  —  one's  self,  se 
faire  mal. 

husband,  mari,  m. 

husbandman,  laboureur,  m. 

hymn,  cantique,  m. 


I,  je,  moi. 

ice,  glace,  f. 

idea,  idee,  f. 

idle,  paresseux. 

idleness,  paresse,  f. 

if,  si. 

ignorant,  ignorant;  he  —  of,  ig- 
norer. 

ill,  n.,  mal,  m. 

ill,  adj.,  malade. 

ill,  adv.,  mal. 

ill-fortune,  malheur,  m. 

ill-treat,  maltraiter. 

illuminate,  illuminer. 

image,  image,  f. 

imagine,  s'imaginer. 

immediately,  tout  de  suite. 

impatient,  impatient. 

important,  important. 

impossible,  impossible. 

in,  dans,  k,  en,  de,  sur  ;  —  it,  y; 
—  {after  superlative),  de  ;  —  the 
reign  of,  sous ;  he  — ,  y  etre, 
etre  chez  soi ;  —  the  evening,  le 
soir  ;  one  —  ten,  un  sur  dix  ;  — 
the  west,  k  I'ouest. 

inch,  pouce,  m. 

income,  revenu,  m. 

increase,  augmenter. 

incur,  courir. 

indeed !,  vraiment ! 

indisposed,  soufFrant. 

individual,  individu,  m. 

influence,  n. ,  influence,  f. 

influence,  v.,  influencer. 

inhabitant,  habitant,  m. 

injustice,  injustice,  f. 

ink,  encre,  f. 

inkstand,  encrier,  m. 

inn,  auberge,  f. 

innkeeper,  aubergiste,  m. 

insect,  insecte,  m. 

instead  of,  au  lieu  de. 

institution,  institution,  f. 

instrument,  instrument,  m. 

insult,  dire  des  injures  k,  insulter. 

inteUigent,  intelligent. 

intend,  avoir  (r)intention. 

intention,  intention,  f. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


625 


inter,  enterrer. 

interest,  int^ret,  m.  ;  take  —  tn, 
prendre  interet  a,  s'occuper  de. 

interest,  interesser. 

interesting,  interessant. 

interview;  {private) — , tete-i-tete, 
m. 

intimate,  intime. 

into,  dans,  en  ;  —  it,  y,  U  dedans  ; 
fall  —  the  sea,  tomber  k  la  mer  ; 
—  his  presence,  aupres  de  lui. 

introduce,  presenter. 

invention,  invention,  f. 

invite,  inviter. 

iron,  fer,  m. ;  —  (adj.)  de  fer. 

is,  see  be  ;  here  — ,  here  are,  voici ; 
here  he  — ,  ie  voici. 

island,  lie,  f. 

it,  il,  elle,  ce  ;  le,  la  ;  cela  ;  in  — , 
y,  dedans  ;  of — ,for  — ,  en  ;  to 
— ,  y ;  —  is  you,  c'est  vous ;  —  is 
they,  ce  sont  eux,  c'est  eux ;  thiTik 
of—-,  y  penser;  is — ?,  vraiment? 

Italian,  italien. 

Italy,  Italic,  f. 

its,  son,  sa,  ses  ;  en,  .^.le. 

itself,  se,  sol ;  lui-merae  ;  meme. 

J. 
January,  Janvier,  m. 
apan,  Japon,  m. 
ericho,  Jericho, 
erusalem,  Jerusalem, 
ohn,  Jean. 
joke,  plaisanter. 
journey,  voyage,  m.  ;  set  out  again 

on  a  — ,  se  remettre  en  route, 
joyful,  joyeux. 
judge,  juge,  m.  ;  be  a  good  —  of, 

se  connaitre  k  (en). 
judge,  juger. 
July,  juillet,  m. 
jump,  sauter ;  —  over,  sauter  par- 

dessus. 
Jupiter,  Jupiter.  " 
^ust,  adj.,  juste,  precis. 
just,  adv.,justementfdonc;  — look, 
regardez  done ;  to  have  — ,  venir 
de,  ne  faire  que  de  ;  —  then,  k  ce 
moment ;   —  as,  au  moment  ou. 
justice,  justice,  f. 


keep,  garder,  tenir;  —  on,  aller 

en. 
kernel,  amande,  f. 
key,  clef,  f. 

kick  out,  mettre  k  la  porta, 
kill,  tuer,  faire  mourir. 
kind,  n.,  espece,  f.,  sorte,  f. ;  whcU 

—of  weather  is  it?,  quel  temps 

fait-il  ? 
kind,  adj.,  bon  ;  —  to,  bon  pour  ; 

be   so   —   as,   be  —    enough   to, 

vouloir  bien  ;  it  is  —  of  him  to, 

c'est  bon  k  lui  de. 
kindly,  bien. 
kindness,   bont^,  f.  ;  have  the  — 

to,  vouloir  bien,  avoir  la  bont^ 

de. 
king,  roi,  m. 
kingdom,   royaume,   m.  j    United 

— ,  Royaume-Uni,  m. 
kiss,  embrasser,  baiser. 
kitchen,  cuisine,  f. 
knee,  genou,  ra.  ;  fall  on  one's  — «, 

tomber  k  genoux. 
knife,  couteau,  m.,  canif,  m. 
knight,  chevalier,  ra. 
knock,  frapper ;  tliere  is  a  — ,  on 

frappe. 
know,  savoir,  connaitre  ;  —  how, 

savoir. 
knowledge,  science,   f.,   connais« 

sances,  f.  pi. 


labour,  travail,  m.,  labeur,  m. 
lady,  dame,  f.  ;  young  — ,  demoi. 

selle,  f.,  jeune  dame,  f. 
lake,  lac,  m. 
lamb,  agneau,  m. 
lamp,  lampe,  f. 
lamp-shade,  abat-jour,  m. 
lana,  terre,  f. 
landlord,  aubergiste,  m. 
language,  langue,  f.  ;  —  {of  ani- 

mals,  etc. ),  langage,  m. 
large,     grand,    gros ;     grow    — , 

grandir. 
last,  adj.,  dernier,  pass^;  —  yeat^ 

I'ann^e  demi^re,  Tannic  pase^  j 


526 


VOCABULARY. 


— evening,  hier  (au)  soir;  — night, 

cette  nuit ;  at  — ,  enfin,  a  la  fin. 
last,  v.,  durer. 
late,  tard,  en  retard ;  he  is  — ,  il 

est  en  retard  ;  be  —  for,  man- 

quer  ;  it  is  — ,   il  est  tard  ;  it  is 

getting  — ,  il  se  fait  tard ;  later 

on,  plus  tard. 
lately,  dernierement. 
Latin,  latin, 
latter  ;  the  — ,  celui-ci. 
laud,  louer. 
laugh,   rire ;    —  at,   rire    de,   se 

moquer  de. 
laughter,  rire,  m. 
law,  loi,  f. 
law-suit,  proems,  m. 
lazy,  paresseux. 
lead,  mener,  conduire. 
leaf,  feuille,  f. 
leap,  sauter. 
learn,  apprendre,  savoir. 
learned  ;  —  man,  savant,  m. 
leathern,  de  cuir. 
leave,  tr.,  quitter,  laisser. 
leave,  intr.,  partir. 
left,  gauche  ;   on  the  —  {hand),  k 

(la)  gauche  ;  /  have  none  — ,  je 

n'en  ai  plus. 
leg,  jambe,  f. 
lend,  preter. 
less,  moins ;   —  than  two,   moins 

de  deux. 
lesson,  le9on,  f. 

lest,  que . . .  ne,  de  peur  que . . .  ne. 
let,  laisser,  perraettre;  —  us  go, 

allons ;  —  him  finish,  qu'il  finisse ; 

—  him  he  glad,  qu'il  soit  content ; 

—  in,  laisser  entrer. 
letter,  lettre,  f. 
Levite,  levite,  m. 
liberal,  liberal. 
liberty,  liberty,  f. 
library,  biblioth^que,  f. 

lie  {speak  falsely),  mentir  ;  — 
(buried),  g^sir ;  —  down,  se 
coucher. 

life,  vie,  f. 

light,  n. ,  lumi^re,  f . 

light ;  —  auburn  hair,  cheveux 
chlktain  clair. 


like,  V. ,  aim^r  ;  vouloir,  desirer ; 

—  better,  aimer  mieux  ;  —  to, 
aimer  k;  I  should  —  {very  much), 
j'aimerais  (bien),  je  voudrais 
(bien) ;  /  should  —  you  to  do  it, 
je  voudrais  que  vous  le  fassiez 
(fissiez) ;  —  it  in,  se  plaire  k ; 
J  should  —  to  have  done  it, 
j'aurais  voulu  le  faire. 

like,  prep. ,  comme  ;  anything  — 
that,  quelque  chose  de  pareil, 
ne  . .  .  rien  de  pareil. 

lily  of  the  valley,  muguet,  m. 

line,  ligne,  f. 

listen  (to),  ecouter. 

little,  adj.,  petit;  — ,  adv.,  peu; 
a  — ,  un  peu  (de)  ;  however  — , 
pour  peu  que ;  a  —  ago,  il  y  a 
quelques  moments  ;  —  by  — , 
peu  k  peu. 

live,  demeurer,  vivre  ;  —  in,  de- 
meurer  k,  dans,  etc. ,  habiter ;  — 
on,  vivre  de;  long  — !,  vive(nt)! 

living,  vivant ;  —  is  dear,  il  fait 
cher  vivre  ;  not  a  —  soul,  ne. . . 
kme  vivante. 

log,  btiche,  *f. 

London,  Londres. 

long,  v.,  tarder;  /  —  to,  il  me 
tarde  de  ;  be  —  in,  tarder  k. 

long,  adj.  or  adv. ,  long,  longtemps ; 
fiave  you  been  here  —  ?,  y  a-t-il 
longtemps  que  vous  dtes  ici?; 
a  —  time,  a  —  lohile,  longtemps ; 
how    — .'',    depuis    quand  ? ;    as 

—  as,  tant  que  ;  I  have  not  seen 
them  for  a  —  time,  il  y  a  long- 
temps que  je  ne  les  ai  vus  ;  a  — 
way  off,  loin. 

longer ;  no  — ,  ne  . . .  plus. 

look,  regarder;  —  at,   regarder; 

—  around,  regarder  autour ;  — 
out  of  the  window,  regarder  par 
la  fen^tre  ;  —  for,  chercher  ;  — , 
intr.,  avoir  I'air,  sembler,  par- 
aitre  ;  get  a  good  —  at,  bien  voir. 

look  out,  prendre  garde;  —  of 
the  window,  regarder  par  la 
fenStre. 

lose,  perdre ;  —  sight  of,  perdre 
de  vue. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


527 


loss,  pe'rte,  f. 

loud,  adv.,  fort,  haut. 

Louis,  Louis,  m, 

love,  n.,  amour,  m.  f.,  aflfection,  f., 

tendresse,  f.  ;  my  first  — ,  mes 

premieres  amours. 
love,  v.,  aimer, 
luck  ;  good  — ,  fortune,  f. 
lunch,  v.,  dejeuner. 
lunch,  n.,  godter,  m.,  dejeuner,  m. 

M. 

machine,  machine,  f. 

madam,  madame,  f.  pi.  mesdames. 

magnificent,  magnifique. 

maid,  bonne,  f.  ;   —  of  all  work, 

bonne  k  tout  faire. 
majority,  majority,  f. 
make,   faire,  rendre  ;  be  made,  se 

faire  ;  —  use,  se  servir. 
man,  homme,  m. ;  old — ,  vieillard, 

m.,  —  (soldier),  soldat,  m. ;  the  — 

who,  a  —  who,  celui  qui ;  young 

men,  jeunes  gens. 
manner,  mani^re,  f. 
many ;  very  — ,  a  great  — ,  beau- 

coup  (de);  so — ,  tant  (de) ;  — 

a,  maint ;    as  — ,  autant  (de)  ; 

^010  —  ?,  combien  (de)  ?,  many, 

beaucoup  de  personnes. 
maple,  n. , Arable,  m. ;  adj. , d'^rable. 
March,  mars,  ra. 
march,  marcher, 
mark,  marque,  f. 
market,  march^,  m.  ;  to,  at  {the) 

— ,  au  march^. 
marry ;    (give   in   marriage,   unite 

in  marriage),   marier ;  —  (take 

in  marriage),  ^pouser,  se  marier 

4  (avec) ;    —  (be  married,   get 

married),  se  marier. 
Marseilles,  Marseille,  f. 
Mary,  Marie, 
mass,  messe,  f. 
master,  maitre,  m. 
masterpiece,  chef-d'oeuvre,  m. 
matter  ;  what  is  the  —  with  you  ?, 

qu'avez-vous  ?  ;   what  is  the  — ?, 

qu'y  a-t-il  ?,  de  quoi  s'agit-il  ? ; 

no  — ,  thoA  does  not  — ,  n'im- 

porte. 


maxim,  maxime,  f. 

May,  mai,  m. 

may,  pouvoir   ;  that  —  be,  cela  se 

pent ;    it   —    be,    il   se  peut ;  / 

might  have,   j'aurais   pu  j   —  it 

please,  qu'il  plaise. 
me,  me,  moi ;  to,  for  — ,  me,  moi ;  for 

-^,  pour  moi ;  with  — ,  avec  moi. 
mean,  vouloir  dire. 
meat,  viande,  f, 
medicine,  medecine,  f. 
meet,  rencontrer  ;  se  r^unir. 
meeting,  asserabl^e,  f.  ;  call  a  — , 

convoquer  une  assemblee. 
melt,  fondre. 
member ;  —  of  Parliament,  d^pu- 

t^,  m. 
memorandum,  m^moire,  m. 
memory,  memoire,  f. 
mention ;  don't  —  it^  11  n'y  a  pas 

de  quoi. 
merchant,  marchand,  m. 
Mercury,  Mercure. 
mere,  simple. 

merely,  seulement,  rien  que. 
merit,  merite,  m. 
method,  m^thode,  f. 
metre,  m^tre,  m. 
Michaelmas,  la  Saint-Michel, 
middle,  milieu,  m. 
midnight,  minuit,  m. 
midst,  milieu,  m.  ;  into  the  — ,  au 

milieu, 
midsummer  night's  dream,  songe 

(m.)  d'une  nuit  d'ete. 
mild  ;  be  — ,  faire  doux. 
mile,  mille,  m. 
military,  militaire. 
milk,  n.,  lait,  m. 
milk,  v.,  traire. 
mill,  moulin,  m. 
miller,  meunier,  m. 
milliner,  modiste,  f. 
mind,  ^me,  f. 
mine,  le  mien  ;  k  moi ;  a  friend  of 

— ,  un   de   mes   amis ;   —  and 

thine,  le  mien  et  le  tien. 
minister,  ministre,  m. 
minute,  minute,  f.  ;  five  — s  tofive^ 

cinq  heures  moina  cinq  (minutes), 

quatre  heures  cinquante-cinq. 


528 


VOCABULARY. 


miser,  avare,  m. 

misery,  misere,  f. 

misfortune,  malheur,  m. 

Miss,  mademoiselle,  f. 

miss,  manquer. 

mistake  ;  make  a  — ,  se  tromper. 

mistaken  ;  he  — ,  se  tromper. 

modern,  moderne. 

modest,  modeste. 

moment,  moment,  m.  ;  this  — ,  k 

I'inatant. 
monarch,  monarque,  m. 
monastery,  monastere,  m. 
Monday,  lundi,  m. 
money,  argent,  m. 
monk,  moine,  m. 
month,  mois,  m. ;  what  day  of  the 

—  is  it '(  (see  §427,  2) ;   in  the  — 
of  May,  au  mois  de  mai. 

Montreal,  Montr^l,  m. 

moon,  lune,  f. 

moonlight,  clair  (m.)  de  lune. 

more,  plus  (de),  encore,  davan- 
tage ;  have  you  any  —  money  ?, 
avez-vous  encore  de  I'argent  ?,  / 
have  no  — ,  /  have  not  any  — ,  je 
n'en  ai  plus ;  —  money  than,  plus 
d' argent  que ;  I  have  some  — ,  j'en 
ai  encore  ;  no  — ,  ne . . .  plus  ;  — 
than  twenty  times,  plus  de  vingt 
fois ;  it  is  worth  — ,  il  vaut  mieux ; 

—  than  one,  plus  d'un. 
morning,  matin,  m. ;  good  — ,  bon- 

jour  ;  in  the  — ,  le  matin. 
morrow,  lendemain,  m. 
mortification,  mortification,  f. 
most,  tr^s,  bien,  fort ;   the  — ,  le 

plus  ;  —  people,  la  plupart  des 

gens. 
mother,  m^re,  f. 
mount,  montagne,  f. 
mountain,  montagne,  f. 
mouth,  bouche,  f. 
move,  mouvoir,  emouvoir,  remuer ; 

se  remuer. 
Mr.,  monsieur,  m. 
much,  beaucoup  (de),  bien,  tr^s, 

grand'chose  ;  very  — ,  beaucoup  ; 

as  —  as,  autant  que ;  so  — ,  tant, 

tellement ;    how   —  ?,    combien 

(de)  ? ;  too  — ,  trop ;  as  — ,  au- 


tant (de) ;  pay  twice  as  — ,  payer 
deux  fois  plus  cher  ;  give  too  — , 
payer  trop  cher. 

mud,  vase,  f.,  boue,  f. 

museum,  musee,  m. 

music,  musique,  f. 

must,  falloir,  devoir ;  I  —  go,  il 
me  faut  partir,  il  faut  que  je 
parte  ;  he  —  have  done  it,  il  a 
du  le  faire. 

my,  mon,  ma,  mes  ;  me  (dat. ) . . . 
le ;  /  wash  —  face,  je  me  lave 
la  figure  ;  —  own,  le  mien,  a  moL 

myself,  me,  moi,  moi-meme. 

mysterious,  mysterieux. 

N. 
nail,  clou,  m. 
naked,  nu. 
name,  n.,  nom,  m. 
name,  v.  appeler;  benam^d,  s'appe- 

ler ;  what  is  the  —  of  ?,  comment 

s'appelle  ? 
nap,  somme,  m. 
Napoleon,  Napoleon, 
narrow,  etroit ;  have  a  —  escape, 

I'echapper  belle. 
nation,  nation,  f. 
national,  national, 
native,  natif. 
natural,  naturel. 
nature,  nature,  f. 
naughty,  m^chant. 
near,  pres  de ;  —  by,  tout  pr^s ; 

he  — falling,  penser  tomber. 
nearly,  pr^s  de,  presque. 
necessary,  n^cessaire  ;  be  — ,  etre 

necessaire,  falloir. 
neck,  cou,  m. 
need,  n.,  besoin,  m. 
need,  v. ,  avoir  besoin  de.  falloir ; 

what  does  he  —  ?,  que  lui  faut-il  ?, 

de  quoi  a-t-il  besoin  ? 
needless,  inutile. 
neglect,  n^gliger. 
negro,  negre,  m. 

neighbour,  voisin,  m.,  voisine,  f. 
neighbouring,  voisin. 
neither,  ni  I'un  ni  I'autre  ...  ne ; 

—  ...  nor,  (ne . . . )  ni  . . .  ni. 
nest,  nid,  m. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


529 


never,  ne  . . .  jamais  ;  —  can  any 
one,  on  (personne)  ne  pent  ja- 
mais. 

nevertheless,  cependant. 

new,  nouveau,  neuf. 

New  Orleans,  la  Nouvelle  -  Or- 
leans, f. 

neTVS,  nouvelle(s),  f.  ;  what  is  the 

—  ?y  qu'y  a-t-il  de  nouveau  ? 
newly-married  couple,  nouveaux 

maries. 
new^spaper,  journal,  m. 
New- Year's  Day,  le  jour  de  I'An. 
next,  adj.,  prochain,  premier  ;  — 

year  J  I'annee  prochaine  ;  the  — 

day,  le  lendemain  ;   —  time,  la 

prochaine  fois  ;  —  door,  k  c6t^  ; 

the  —   one,    celui    k    c6t^  ;    — 

morning,  le  lendemain  matin. 
next,   adv. ,    apr^s,    ensuite ;    the 

very  —  day^  d6s  demain,  d6s  le 

lendemain. 
nice,  joli,  gentil. 
nieht,  nuit,  f.  ;  all  —,  (de)  toute 

Ta  nuit  ;  last  — ,  hier  soir,  cette 

nuit. 
nine,  neuf. 
nineteen,  dix-neuf. 
ninety,  quatre-vingt-dix. 
ninety-two,  quatre-vingt-douze. 
no,   non,    ne  . . .  pas,    aucun  ;    — 

maji,  —  one,  personne,  aucun  ; 

—  longer,  —  more,  ne  .  .  .  plus, 
noble,  noble. 

nobleman,  noble,  m. ,  gentilhomme, 

m. 
nobody,   ne  . . .  personne  ;    —  at 

all,  ne  . . .  qui  que  ce  soit  (fClt). 
noise,  bruit,  m. 
none,  pas,  nul ;  /  have  — ,  je  n'en 

ai  pas  ;  there  are  — ,  il  n'y  en  a 

pas ;  liave  —  left,  n'en  avoir  plus, 
nonsense  !,  allons  done  ! 
noon,  midi,  m. 
nor,  ni,  et  ne.  . .  pas  ;  —  /  either, 

ni  moi  non  plus. 
Normandy,  Normandie,  f. 
north,  nord,  m. ,  du  nord  ;  —  wind, 

bise,  f.,  vent  (m. )  du  nord. 
North  America,  rAm^rique  (f. )  du 

Nord. 


nose,  nez,  m. 

not,  ne  .  .  .  pas  (point),  non  ;  is  he 
—  .'',  n'est-ce  pas  ? ;  —  for  vie, 
(non)  pas  pour  moi ;  —  that,  non 
(pas)  que  ;  —  one,  (ne .  . . )  pas 
un ;  —  at  all,  pas  du  tout ;  — 
very  long  afterwards,  pas  long- 
temps  apres. 

note,  billet,  m. 

nothing,  (ne . . . )  rien  ;  that  is  —  to 
him,  cela  ne  lui  fait  rien ;  — 
good,  (ne .  .  . )  rien  de  bon  ;  —  at 
all,  rien  du  tout,  ne . .  .  quoi 
que  ce  soit  (fdt) ;  do  —  but,  ne 
faire  que. 

notice,  apercevoir,  s'apercevoir. 

novel,  roman,  m. 

November,  novembre,  m. 

now,  maintenant,  4  present,  d^jk; 
tiens  ! ;  not  to  have  — ,  n'avoir 
plus  ;  —  and  then,  de  temps  en 
temps. 

number,  nombre,  m.,  num^ro,  m., 
compte,  m. 

numerous,  nombreux, 

nut,  noisette,  i. 


oak,  chdne,  m. 

obelisk,  ob^lisque,  m. 

obey,  obeir  {k). 

oblige,  obliger,  forcer. 

obliging,  obligeant. 

observe,  observer,  remarquer. 

occasion,  occasion,  f. 

occasionally,  de  temps  en  temps. 

occupied,  occupe. 

occur  {of  ideas),  venir  k  qqn.   k 

I'esprit. 
o'clock,  heure(s),  f.  ;  at  four  — , 

k  quatre  heures. 
October,  octobre,  m. 
of,  de  ;  —  it,  —  them,  etl,  y. 
offend,  ofFenser,  deplaire  L 
office,  bureau,  m. 
often,  souvent ;  how  — ,  combien 

de  fois. 
oh  I,  oh  !  , 

oil,  huile,  f. 
old  {in  years),  vieux,  ag^ ;  (former), 

ancien;  how  —  are  you?,  quel 


530 


VOCABULARY. 


Age  avez-vous?;  be  Jive  years  — , 
avoir  cinq  ans,  etre  ag4  de  cinq 
ans  ;  —  7nan^  vieillard,  m. 

on,  sur,  k,  de,  en ;  —  the  right,  k 
(la)  droite ;  —  business,  pour 
affaires  ;  —  this  side,  de  ce  c6te; 
often  omitted  with  time  expres- 
sions, e.g.,  —  the  sixth,  le  six. 

once,  une  fois,  autrefois;  at  — , 
tout  de  suite. 

one,  num.,  un,  une. 

one,  indef.  pron.,  on,  vous  (obj.) ; 
—  must  eat,  il  faut  manger  ;  no 
— ,  personne  {with  ne) ;  the 
white  — s,  les  blancs ;  an  iron 
— ,  un  en  fer ;  a  small  — ,  un 
petit ;  the  —  who,  celui  qui ; 
that  — ,  celui-la  ;  /  am  —  too,  je 
le  suis  aussi ;  —  of  my  friends,  a 
doctor,  un  docteur  de  mes  amis. 

one's,  son  ;  le. 

one's  self,  se,  soi. 

only,  ne  . .  .  que,  seulement ;  not 
— ,  non  seulement ;  —  {one), 
seul. 

open,  adj.,  ouvert;  vnde  — , 
grand(e)  ouvert(e). 

open,  V. ,  ouvrir  ;  s'ouvrir,  ^clore. 

opium,  opium,  m. 

opportune,  opportun. 

opportunily,  occasion,  f. 

or,  ou  ;  ni  {after  sans) ;  no  ...  — , 
ne . , .  ni . . .  ni. 

orator,  orateur,  m. 

orchard,  verger,  m. 

order,  n.,  ordre,  m.  ;  m  —  to, 
pour,  afin  de  ;  in  —  that,  poui; 
que,  afin  que. 

order,  give  orders,  ordonner ;  — 
{send  for),  faire  venir. 

organize,  organiser. 

other,  autre  ;  — s,  d'autres  ;  many 
— «,  bien  d'autres ;  people  give 
each  — ,  on  se  donne  ;  write  to 
each  — ,  s'^crire;  every  —  day, 
tous  les  deux  jours. 

ought,  devoir  ;  he  —  to  do  it,  il 
devrait  le  faire  ;  Jte  —  to  have 
done  it,  il  aurait  dH  le  faire. 

our,  notre,  nos  ;  at  —  house,  chez 
nous. 


ours,  le  n6tre. 

ourselves,  nous,  nous-m^mes. 

out ;  come  — ,  go  — ,  sortir  ;  be  — , 

etre  sorti ;  —  of  the  window,  par 

la  fenetre. 
outburst,  6clat,  m. 
outside,  hors  de. 
over,  sur,  par,  par-dessus  ;  be  all 

—  with,  en  etre  fait  de. 
0"we,  devoir. 
OT«m,  adj. ,  propre ;  my  — ,  le  mien ; 

of  his  — ,  a  lui. 
own,  v.,  posseder. 


page,  page,  m. 

pain,  peine,  f.,  douleur,  f. 

paint,  peindre. 

painter,  peintre,  m, 

painting,  peinture,  f.,  tableau,  m. 

pair,  paire,  f. 

palace,  palais,  m.,  chateau,  m. 

paper,  papier,  m. 

pardon,    n.,    pardon,   m.  ;    /    beg 

your  — ,  pardon. 
pardon,    v.,    pardonner   qqch.    k 

qqn. 
parent,  parent,  m. 
Paris,  Paris,  m.  ;  in  —,  k  Paris  ; 

in  —  itself,  dans  Paris  (meme). 
Parisian,  parisien. 
parliament,  parlement,  m. ;  Cham- 

bre  (f. )  des  deputes;  member  of 

— ,  d^put^,  m. 
parlour,  salon,  m. 
parrot,  perroquet,  m. 
part,  n.,  partie,  f.,  part,  f.,  region, 

f.  ;  play  a  — ,  jouer  un  rOle ;  on 

our  — ,  de  notre  part, 
part,  V.  ;  —  with  (from),  se  s^pa- 

rer  de. 
participle,  participe,  m. 
partner,  associ^,  m. 
pass,    go   past,    passer    (devant, 

pres  de) ;  —  through,  traverser  ; 

—  by  on  the  other  side,  passer 

outre, 
passion,  passion,  f. 
past,  n,,  passe,  m. 
past,  adj.,  passe;  et ;  at  half  — 

one,  k  une  heure  et  demie. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


531 


pastor,  pasteur,  m. 
paternal,  paternel. 
patience,  patience,  f. 
patient,  malade,  ra.  f. 
pay,  pay  for,  payer ;  —  too  much 
for  it,  le  payer   trop   cher ;  — 
attention,  faire  attention, 
payment,  paiement,  m. 
peace,  paix,  f. 
peach,  peche,  f. 
pear,  poire,  f. 
pearl,  perle,  f. 
pear-tree,  poirier,  m. 
peasant,  paysan,  m. 
pebble,  caillou,  m. 
peck  at,  becqueter. 
peel,  peler. 

peep  of  day,  point  (m.)  du  jour, 
pen,  plume,  f. 
pencil,  crayon,  m. 
pen-holder,  porte-plume,  m. 
penknife,  canif,^m. 
penny,  deux  sous,  m. 
people,  peuple,  m.,  on,  gens,  m.  f., 
monde,  m.,  personnes,  f . ;  few  — , 
pen  de  gens  (raonde.  personnes) ; 
most  — ,  la  plupart  des  gens. 

perceive,  apercevoir,  s'apercevoir 
de. 

perhaps,  peut-etre. 

peril,  peril,  m. 

permission,  permission,  f. 

permit,  permettre  {k) ;  we  are  per- 
mitted to,  il  nous  est  permis  de. 

persist,  persister. 

person,  personne,  f. 

persuade,  persuader. 

petition,  petition,  f. 
^Philadelphia,  Philadelphia,  f. 

phrase,  phrase,  f. 

physician,  m^decin,  m. 

pick  up,  ramasser. 

picnic,  pique-iiique,  m. 

picture,  tableau,  m. ,  peinture,  f. ;  — 
gallery,  galerie  (f. )  de  peintures. 

piece,  morceau,  m. 

pin,  6pingle,  f. 

pipe,  pipe,  f. 

pitifully,  k  faire  piti^. 

pity,  piti6,  f .  ;  iCs  a  — ,  c'est  dom- 
mage ;  wJiat  a  — ,  quel  dommage ; 


which  is  a  great  — ,  (ce)  qui  est 
bien  dommage. 
place,  n.,  endroit,  m.,  lieu,  ra., 
place,  f. ;  take  — ,  avoir  lieu  ;  it 
is  my  —  to,  c'est  k  moi  de. 
place,  v.,  mettre,  placer, 
plain,  plaine,  f. 
plainly,  franchement. 
plan,  plan,  ra. 
plant,  n.,  plante,  f. 
plant,  v.,  planter, 
plate,  assiette,  f. 

play,  jouer ;  —  at  {gam£s),  jouer 
a  ;  —  on  (instruments),  jouer  de. 
pleasant,  agreable,  airaable. 
please,  plaire  k ;  if  you  — ,  s'il  vous 
plait ;  as  we  — ,  comme  il  nous 
plaira. 
pleased,  content. 
pleasure,  plaisir,  m. ;  give  — ,  faire 

plaisir. 
plough,  labourer, 
plum,  prune,  f. 
plum-tree,  prunier,  m. 
pocket,  poche,  f. 
poem,  poeme,  m.,  vers,  m.  pi. 
poet,  po^te,  ra. 
poetry,  po^sie,  f.,  vers,  m.  pi. 
point,  point,  ra. ;  at  the  —  off  sup 

le  point  de. 
Poland,  Pologne,  f. 
Pole,  Polonais,  m. 
police,  police,  f. 
polite,  poli. 
political,  politique. 
pond,  6tang,  m. 
poodle,  caniche,  m. 
poor,  pauvre,  raauvais. 
population,  population,  f. 
portion,  part,  f. 
portrait,  portrait,  ra. 
position,  place,  f. ;  put  in  a  —  to, 

raettre  k  raerae  de. 
possession,  possession,  f. 
possible,  possible. 
post,  post-office,  poste,  f. ;  ptU  in 

the  — ,  raettre  k  la  poste. 
postage-stamp,  tirabre-poste,  m. 
potato,  porame  de  terre,  f. 
poultry,  volaille,  f . ;  —  yardy 
cour,  f. 


632 


VOCABULARY. 


pound,  livre,  f. 
pour,  verser. 
powerful,  puissant,  fort. 
practise,  mettre  en  pratique. 
praise,  louer. 
pray,  prier,  prier  Dieu. 
precious,  precieux. 
precise,  precis. 

precisely,    precisement ;    at    two 
o'clock  — ,  a  deux  heures  pre- 


prefer,  pr^ferer,  aimer  mieux. 
prepare,  preparer. 
prescribe,  prescrire,  ordonner. 
presence,  presence,  f. ;  into  his  — , 

aupr^s  de  lui. 
present,  n.,  cadeau,  ra. 
present,   adj.,  present;  at  — ,  k 

present ;  he  —  at,  etre  present 

k,  assister  k. 
present  (with),  v. ,  presenter. 
preserve,  conserver,  confire. 
president,  monsieur  le  president. 
pretend,  faire  semblant  de. 
pretended,  pr^tendu. 
pretty,  adj.,  joli. 
pretty,  adv.,  assez. 
prevail  over,  I'emporter  sur. 
prevent,  empecher. 
price,  prix,  m. ;  at  what  — ,  k  quel 

prix,  {k)  combien. 
priest,  pretre,  m. 
prince,  prince,  m. 
principle,  principe,  m. 
private  interview,  tete  k  t^te,  m. 
probable,  probable, 
probably,  probablement. 
procession,  cortege,  m. 
produce,  produire. 
product,  produit,  m. 
progress,  progr^s,  m. 
promenade,  promenade,  f. 
promise,  n.,  promesse,  f. 
promise,  v.,  promettre. 
pronounce,  prononcer,  donner. 
proof,  preuve,  f. 
property,  propri^t^,  f.,  biens,  m. 

pi. 
prophet,  proph^te,  m. 
propose,  proposer. 
prosperous,  florissant. 


protect,  proteger. 

proud,  fier,  orgueilleux. 

proudly,  fierement. 

prove,  prouver,  d^montrer. 

provide  with,  fournir  a. 

province,  province,  f. 

prudence,  prudence,  f. 

prudent,  prudent. 

public,  public ;  —  works,  les  tra- 
vaux  (m.)  publics;  the  — ,  le 
public. 

punish,  punir. 

pupil,  616ve,  m.  f. 

purchase,  emplette,  f . ,  achat,  m. 

purpose,  but,  m.,  intention,  f.  ; 
on  — ,  expres ;  with  the  — ,  dans 
le  but.  • 

purse,  poHe-monnaie,  m. 

pursue,  poursuivre. 

put,  mettre,  attacher  ;  —  on  {cloth- 
ing), mettre  ;  —  out  (fire,  etc. ), 
^teindre  ;  —  out  {of  doors),  met- 
tre k  la  porte ;  —  to  deathj 
mettre  k  mort. 


quality,  quality,  f. 

quantity,  quantity,  f. 

quarrel,  dispute,  f. 

quarter,  quart,  m. ;  in  a  —  of  an 

hour,  dans  un  quart  d'heure ;  a 

—  past  one,  une  heure  et  quart ; 

a  —  to  one,  une  heure  moins 

(un)  quart. 
Quebec,  Quebec,  m. 
queen,  reine,  f. 
question,  question,  f. 
quickly,  vite. 

quiet,  tranquille.  , 

quietly,  tranquillement. 
quite,  tout,  tout  a  fait. 

R. 

race,  race,  f. 

railway,  railroad,  chemin  (m.)  de 

fer. 
rain,  n.,  pluie,  f. 
rain,  v.,  pleuvoir. 
rainy,   pluvieux  ;    in  —  weather, 

quand  il  pleut,  quand  le  temps 

est  k  la  pluie. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


533 


raise,  lever,  Clever,  relever. 

rare,  rare. 

rarely,  larement;  il  est  rare  que. 

r^'c,  rat,  m. 

rather,  assez ;  plut6t. 

reach,  arriver  k  (chez),  atteindre. 

read,  lire. 

reading,  lecture,  f. ;  amtise  your- 
self — ,  vous  amuser  k  lire. 

ready,  pret. 

really,  r^ellement,  vraiment. 

reappear,  reparaitre. 

rear-admiral,  chef  (m. )  d'escadre. 

reason,  raison,  f. 

reasonable,  raisonnable. 

receive,  recevoir ;  received,  re9ut, 
eut ;  received  a  good  ediication, 
fit  de  bonnes  etudes. 

recite,  reciter. 

recog^nize,  reconnaltre. 

recompense,  n.,  recompense,  f. 

recompense,  v. ,  r^compenser. 

red,  rouge. 

refuge,  refuge,  m. ;  take  — ,  se  r^- 
fugier. 

regret,  n.,  regret,  m. 

regret,  v.,  reeretter. 

regular,  r^gulier,  vrai. 

reign,  n.,  r^gne,  m. 

reig^,  v.,  r^gner. 

rej^oice  at,  se  r^jouir  de. 

rejoin,  rejoindre. 

relate,  raconter. 

relative,  parent,  m. 

relic,  reste,  m. 

religion,  religion,  f. 

remain,  rester. 

remains,  restes,  ra.  pi. 

remarkable,  remarquable. 

remember,  se  souvenir  de,  se  rap- 
peler,  retenir ;  —  me  to  them, 
rappelez-moi  k  leur  bon  souvenir. 

render,  rendre. 

repeat,  r^p^ter. 

reply,  n. ,  r^ponse,  f. ;  make  a  — , 
r^pondre. 

reply,  v.,  r^pondre. 

repose,  repos,  m. 

represent,  representor. 

republic,  r^publique,  f. 

reputation,  renomm^e,  f. 


resemble,  ressembler  k. 
resolve,  r^soudre,  decider, 
resort ;  have  — ,  avoir  recours,  m. 
respect,  n.,  respect,  m. 
respect,  v.,  respecter. 
respectable,     respectable,     hono- 
rable, 
respectfully,  respectueusement. 
rest  (the),  les  autres. 
rest,  v. ,  se  reposer. 
restaurant,  restaurant,  m. 
retain,  garder. 
retire,  se  retirer. 
return,  n.,  retour,  m. ;  on  my  — , 

k  mon  retour. 
return,  v.,  revenir,  retoumer  {go 

back);  — Ao7ne,rentrer(chez8oi). 
reveal,  reveler. 
revolution,  revolution,  f. 
revolver,  revolver,  m. 
reward,  n. ,  recompense,  f. 
reward,  v.,  recompenser. 
ribbon,  ruban,  m. 
rich,  riche. 
riches,  richesse,  f. 
rid ;  be  —  of,  get  —  of,  se  debar- 

rasser  de. 
ride  ;  go  for  a  — ,  be  out  for  a  — , 

se  promener  k  cheval. 
right,  n. ,  droit,  m.  ;  be  {in  the)  —, 

avoir  raison;  all  — !,  k  la  bonne 

heure ! 
right,  adj.,  droit ;  on  the  —  hand, 

to  the  — ,  k  (la)  droite. 
ring,  sonner. 
ripe,  mtlr. 
ripen,  murir. 
rise  (up),  se  lever, 
rival,  rival. 

river,  fleuve,  m.,  riviere,  f. 
road,  route,  f.,  chemin,   m. ;  on 

the  — ,  en  route. 
roar,  rugir,  crier. 
robber,  voleur. 
Robert,  Robert. 
robin,  rouge-gorge,  m. 
rock,  rocher,  m. 
roll,  n.,  rouleau,  m. 
roll,  v.,  rouler. 
room,   salle,   f.  ;  chambre,   f.  ;  in 

his  — ,  dans  sa  chambre,  chez  lui 


534 


VOCABULAEY. 


rose,  rose,  f. 

Rouen,  Rouen,  m. 

round,   rond;  to  go  — ,   faire  le 

tour  de. 
row ;  go  for  a  — ,  se  promener  en 

bateau. 
rub,    frotter,   se  frotter ;  —  out, 

faire  sortir. 
ruin,  perdre. 
ruler,  r^gle,  f. 
rumour,  on  dit,  m. 
run,  courir ;  —  away,  se  sauver ; 

—  over,  pareourir. 
rush,     se     pr^cipiter,     s'^lancer, 

accourir. 
Russia,  Russie,  f. 
Russian,  russe. 
rustle,  bruire. 

S. 

sad,  triste. 

saddle,  v.,  seller. 

safety,  surety,  f. 

sail,  faire  voile  ;  go  for  a  — ,  se 
promener  en  bateau. 

sailor,  marin,  m. ,  matelot,  m. 

saint,  saint,  m.  ;  All  Saints'  Day, 
la  Toussaint. 

sale,  vente,  f.  ;  for  — ,  k  vendre. 

salute,  saluer. 

Samaritan,  Samaritain).m. 

same,  meme. 

sand,  sable,  m. 

satisfied,  satisfait,  content. 

Saturday,  samedi,  m. 

save,  sauver,  conserver,  {money) 
^pargner. 

Saxon,  saxon. 

say,  dire  ;  it  is  said,  on  dit ;  —  no, 
dire  que  non ;  —  yes,  dire  que 
oui  (si) ;  —  to  each  other,  —  to 
one's  self,  se  dire ;  let  us  —  no 
more  about  it,  n'en  parlous  plus ; 
how  old  would  you  —  that  man 
is?,  quel  S,ge  donneriez-voue  k 
cet  homme  ?  ;  —  again,  redire. 

scarce,  scarcely,  k  peine ;  —  aiiy, 
tr^s  peu  de. 

scene,  vue,  f. 

scholar,  savant,  m. 

school,  ^cole,  f. ;  at  {to)  — ,  k  I'^cole. 


school-boy,  ^colier,  m. ,  colUgien ,  m. 
school-fellow,      camarade      (m. ) 

d'ecole. 
science,   science,  f.  ;  man  of  — , 

savant,  m. 
scientific  man,  savant,  m. 
Scotland,  Ecosse,  f. 
scoundrel,  coquin,  m. ,  sc^l^rat,  m. 
scratch,  gratter. 
scream,  crier, 
sculptor,  sculpteur,  m. 
sea,  mer,  f. 

seaport,  port  (m. )  de  mer. 
search,  make  a  search,  chercher. 
season,  saison,  f. 
seat,  banc,  m. 
seated,  assis. 

second,  second,  deuxi^me. 
see,  voir ;  —  again,  revoir. 
seed,  graine,  f. 
seek,  chercher. 
seem,  sembler. 
seize,  saisir. 
self,    meme,    se ;  enjoy  one's  — , 

s'amuser. 
selfish,  ^goiste. 
sell,   V.  tr.,  vendre;  v.  intr.,  se 

vendre. 
send,   envoyer ;   —  for,   envoyer 

chercher,    faire    appeler,    faire 

venir ;  —  up  stairs,  faire  monter. 
sense,  sens,  m. 
sensible,  sens6,  raisonnable. 
sentence,    sentence,    f.,    (gram.) 

phrase,  f.,  locution,  f. 
September,  septembre,  m. 
serge,  serge,  f. 
seriously,  s^rieusement. 
sermon,  sermon,  m. 
servant,  valet,  m. ,  domestique,  m. 

f.,  servante,  f.,  bonne,  f. 
service,  service,  m. 
set,  mettre  ;  —  a  high  value  upon, 

attacher  une  grande  valeur  k; 

—  about,  se  mettre  k. 
set  out,  partir. 
settle,  r^gler. 
seven,  sept. 
seventeen,  dix-sept. 
seventy,  eoixante-dix. 
sevenly-five,  soixante-quinze. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


535 


several,  plusieurs. 

severe,  s6v6re. 

se^v,  coudre. 

sewing-machine,  machine  (f.)  k 
coudre. 

shade,  ombre,  f. 

shake,  secouer  ;  —  hands,  se  don- 
ner  la  main,  se  serrer  la  main. 

shall,  devoir ;  —  J  go  ?,  dois-je 
aller?,  irai-je?;  we  —  go,  nous 
irons;  what — /sm/7?,quevoulez- 
VOU8  que  je  chante  ? 

shame,  honte,  f . ;  it  is  a  — ,  c'est 
honteux. 

she,  elle,  ce. 

shell,  coquille,  f. 

shelter,  abriter. 

shepherd,  berger,  m. 

ship,  vaisseau,  m.,  navire,  m. 

shoe,  Soulier,  m. 

shoemaker,  cordonnier,  m.,  mar- 
chand  (m. )  de  chaussures. 

shop,  magasin,  m.,  boutique,  f.  ; 
to  go  sfiopping,  aller  faire  des 
emplettes. 

shop-keeper,  marchand,  m. 

shore,  bord,  m.  ;  on  the  lake  — , 
au  bord  du  lac. 

short,  court,  petit ;  in  — ,  bref  j 
be  —  of,  manquer  de. 

shortly,  bientOt. 

shot,  coup,  m. 

should  ;  you  —  do  it,  vous  devriez 
le  faire ;  if  we  —  be  there,  si 
nous  y  ^tions  ;  /  —  be  glad  if  he 
were  here,  je  serais  content  s'il 
6tait  ici ;  /  —  like  you  to  do  it, 
je  voudrais  que  vous  le  fassiez. 

shoulder,  ^paule,  f. 

shout,  crier. 

show,  n.,  spectacle,  m. 

show,  v.,  montrer,  faire  voir;  — 
itself,  se  montrer  ;  —  in,  faire 
entrer ;  — up  stairs,  faire  monter. 

shut,  fermer. 

side,  cOt^,  m.  ;  on  this  — ,  de  ce 
^  cdt^. 

sight,  spectacle,  m.,  vue,  f.  ;  at 
—  of  that,  k  cette  vue  ;  lose  — 
o/,  perdre  de  vue ;  by  — ,  de 


sign,  signer. 

silent,  muet,  silencieux ;  be  {he- 
come)  — ,  se  taire. 

silk,  soie,  f. 

silver,  n.,  argent,  m. 

silver,  adj.,  d'argent,  en  argent. 

sin,  p^ch6,  m. 

since,  prep. ,  depuis. 

since,  conj.,  depuis  que,  puisque, 
que ;  it  is  two  months  —  /  saw 
him,  il  y  a  deux  mois  que  je  ne 
I'ai  vu. 

sing,  chanter. 

single,  seuL 

sir,  monsieur,  m. 

sire,  sire,  m. 

sister,  sceur,  f. 

sit,  s'asseoir,  etre  assis ;  —  down 
to  dinner,  se  mettre  k  table. 

sitting,  assis. 

situated,  situ^. 

six,  six. 

sixteen,  seize. 

sixty,  soixante. 

skate,  patiner ;  go  — ing,  (aller) 
patiner. 

skill,  habilet^,  f.,  adresse,  f. 

skin,  peau,  f. 

sky,  ciel,  m. 

slander,  m^dire  (de). 

slave,  esclave,  m.  f. 

sleep,  dormir ;  go  to  — ,  s'endor- 
mir. 

sleigh,  traineau,  m. ;  go  for  a  — 
-ride,  (aller)  se  promener  en 
traineau,  faire  une  promenade 
en  traineau. 

sleigh-bell,  grelot,  m. 

slip,  glisser,  s'^chapper. 

slippery ;  be  — ,  faire  glissant. 

slow,  lent. 

small,  petit. 

smell,  sentir. 

smile,  sourire. 

smoke,  n. ,  fum^e,  f. 

smoke,  v.,  fumer. 

snatch,  arracher. 

snow,  n. ,  neige,  f. 

snow^,  v.,  neiger. 

so,  si,  ainsi,  par  consequent,  aussi, 
c'est  pourquoi ;  — wanyt — much, 


536 


VOCABULARY. 


tant(de),telleinent;  not  — . .  .as, 

ne. .  .pas  si, .  .que;  I  think — ,  je 

le  crois  ;  /  am  — ,  je  le  suis  ;  — 

as  to,  afin  de,  de  maniere  k;  — 

that,  afin  que,  de  sorte  que ;  — 

well,  si  bien,  tant ;  will  you  be  — 

kind  as  to,  veuillez,  voulez-vous 

bien. 
so-called,  soi-disant,  pretendu. 
soft,  mou. 

soldier,  soldat,  m.,  militaire,  m. 
solve,  resoudre. 
some,  adj.,  du,  de  la,  des ;  quel- 

que(8) ;  for  —    time,    pendant 

quelque  temps. 
some,  pron.,  en,  quelqu'un,  quel- 

ques-uns ;  —  of  it,  en ;  /  have 

— ,  j'en  ai. 
somebody,  some  one,  quelqu'un, 

on. 
something,  quelque  chose,  m. ;  — 

good,  quelque  chose  de  bon  ;  — 

strange  and  mysterious,  je  ne  sais 

quoi  de  myst^rieux. 
sometimes,  quelquefois. 
son,  fils,  m. 

song,  chanson,  f.,  chant,  m. 
soon,  bientdt ;  as  —  as,  aussitdt 

que. 
sooner,  plus  t6t. 
sore  ;  have  a  —  hand,  avoir  mal  k 

la  main. 
sore,  adv.,  fort. 

sorrow,  douleur,  f.,  chagrin,  m. 
sorry,'  fach^,   d^sol^ ;   be  —  for, 

regretter. 
sort,  sorte,  f . ,  esp^ce,  f.  ;  what  — 

of  weather?,  quel  temps? 
soul,  kme,  f. 
sound,  son,  m. 
soup,  potage,  m. 
South  America,  Am^rique  (f.)  du 

Sud. 
southern,  meridional. 
sow,  semer. 
speak,  parler ;  French  is  spoken, 

on  parle  fran9ais ;  so  to  — ,  pour 

ainsi  dire. 
speech,  discours,  m. 
spend,  {time)  passer,   (moTiey)  d^- 

penser. 


spirited,  fougueux. 

splendid,  magnifique. 

spoil,  intr.,  segater. 

spoon,  cuiller,  f. 

sport,   jeu,   m.  ;   make  —  of,   se 

moquer  de. 
spot,  endroit,  m. 
spring,  n.,  printemps,  m.  ;  in  — , 

au  printemps. 
spring,  V. ,  sourdre. 
sprout,  germer. 
square,  place,  f. 
stable,  {for  horses)  ecurie,  f.,  (for 

cattle)  etable,  f. 
stair(s),  escalier,  m.  ;  up  — s,   en 

haut ;    down    — s,   en   bas ;     go 

down  — s,  descendre. 
stake,  pieu,  m.  ;  be  at  — ,  y  aller 

de. 
stand,   etre  debout,   se  tenir,  se 

trouver. 
start,  {with  fear,  etc. )  tressaillir ; 

{set  out)  partir ;   —  off,  partir. 
starvation,  faim,  f. 
starve,  mourir  de  faim. 
statesman,  homme  d'Etat. 
station  {railway),  gare,  f. 
statue,  statue,  f. 

stay.  Tester,  s'arreter ; . —  in,  Tes- 
ter k  la  maison.  Tester  chez  soi. 
steal,  voler,  d^rober. 
steam,  vapeur,  f. 
steam-boat,  steamer,  bateau  (m.) 

k  vapeur,  vapeur,  m. 
steam-engine,     machine    (f.)     ^ 

vapeur. 
step,  n. ,  pas,  m. 
step,  v.,  marcher, 
sterling,  sterling  (invar.). 
St.  Helena,  Sainte-H616ne,  f. 
stick,  baton,  m. 
stick  out,  sortir. 
still,  encore,  toujours. 
stir,  remuer,  bouger. 
stone,  pierre,  f. 
stoop,  se  baisser. 
stop,  s'arreter. 
store,  magasin,  m. 
stork,  cigogne,  f. 
storm,  orage,  m. 
story,  histoire,  f.,  conte,  m. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


537 


stove,  po^le,  m. 

straight,  droit. 

strange,  Strange, 

stratagem,  stratag^me,  m. 

straw,    paille,   i.  ;   a  —  hat,    un 
chapeau  de  paille. 

street,  rue,  f.  ;  from  one  —  to  an- 
otiier,  de  rue  en  rue. 

street-cars,  tramway,  m. 

streng^th,  force,  f. 

striking  part,  sonnerie,  f. 

strip,  depouiller. 

stroke,  coup,  m. 

strong,  fort. 

struggle,  n.,  lutte,  t 

struggle,  v.,  lutter. 

study,  n.,  6tude,  f. 

study,  v.,  ^tudier,  apprendre. 

stupid,  sot. 

style,    style,   m.,  mani^re,   f.  ;  in 
(the)  French  — ,  i  la  fran9aise. 

subdue,  subjuguer. 

subject,  sujet,  m. 

submit,  se  soumettre. 

succeed,  succ^der  k ;  r^ussir. 

success,  succ^s,  m. 

such,  tel ;  —  a,  un  tel ;  —  a  fool- 
ish man,  un  hoinme  si  bete. 

suffer,  souffrir,  subir. 

suffice,  suflBre. 

sufficient,  suffisant ;  he  — ,  suffire. 

sugar,  Sucre,  m. 

suit,  n.,  vetement  (m.)  complet. 

suit,  v.,  convenir. 

sum,  somme,  f. 

summer,  6t6,  m.  ;  in  — ,  en  ^t^. 

sun,  soleil,  m.',  the  —  is  shining,  il 
fait  du  soleil. 

Sunday,  dimanche,  m. 

sunset,  coucher  (m. )  du  soleil. 

superfluous,  superflu,  de  trop. 

support,  soutenir. 

sure,  sur, 

surgeon,  m^ecin,  m.,  chirurgien, 
m. 

surprise,  surprendre. 

surprised,  surpris,  ^tonn^. 

suspect,  soup9onner,  se  douter. 

swallow,  hirondelle,  f. 

swear,  jurer. 
Swedish,  su^dois. 


sweet,  doux  ;  smell  — ,  sentir  bon. 
swim,  nager. 
Swiss,  Suisse. 
Switzerland,  Suisse,  f. 
sword,  ^pee,  i 

T. 

teble,  table,  f. 

tail,  queue,  f. 

tailor,  tailleur,  m. 

take,  prendre,  porter,  emporter, 
niener,  conduire;  —  after,  tenir 
de;  —  a  walk,  (aller)  se  pro- 
mener,  faire  une  promenade ; 
—  up  the  collection,  faire  la 
quSte ;  —  place,  avoir  lieu ;  — 
advantage  of  abuser  de  ;  —  care 
of,  avoir  soin  de ;  —  interest  %% 
s'intdresser  k,  s'occuper  de ;  — 
away,  oter,  emporter  ;  —  care  not 
to,  prendre  garde  de ;  —  a  journey, 
faire  un  voyage  ;  —  offj  oter ;  — 
up,  monter. 

talk,  parler. 

tall,  grand,  haut. 

Tasso,  Tasse. 

taste,  goAt,  m. 

tea,  th^,  m. 

teach,  enseigner,  apprendre. 

teacher,  professeur,  m.,  mattre,  m. 

tea-pot,  th^i^re,  f. 

tear,  n.,  larme,  f. 

tear,  v.,  dechirer. 

Te  Deum,  Te  Deum,  m. 

tell,  raconter,  dire,  annoncer;  — 
(understand)  comprendre,  savoir. 

tempt,  tenter. 

ten,  dix. 

terrify,  ^pouvanter. 

text,  texte,  ra. 

than,  que,  de  (before  numerals). 

thank,  remercier  ;  (no)  I  —  you, 
je  vous  remercie. 

thanks,  remerciments,  m.  ;  (no) 
— ,  merci. 

that,  dem.  adj.,  ce,  cet,  cette; 
ce .  . .  -\k. 

that,  dem.  pron.  ce,  cela,  celui ;  all 
— ,  tout  cela  ;  —  is,  voilk,  voilk 
qui,  c'est,  celui-14  est ;  is  —  the 
I      house  ?,  est-ce  li  la  maison? 


538 


VOCABULARY. 


that,  rel.  pron.  qui,  que,  lequel; 

all  — ,  tout  ce  qui  (que). 
that,  conj.,  que. 
the,  le,  la,  les ;  —  richer  one  t«, 

plus  on  est  riche  ;  —  less  one 

has  of  them,  moins  on  en  a. 
theatre,  theatre,  m. 
their,  adj.,  leur,  leurs. 
theirs,  pron. ,  le  leur. 
them,  les,  leur,  eux,  elles  ;  of  — , 

d'eux,  en  ;  to  — ,  k  eux,  leur,  y. 
themselves,  se,  eux,  eux-memes. 
then,  alors,  ensuite,  puis, 
there,  1^,  y  ;  —  is  {are),  voil4,  il  y 

a ;  —  it  is,  le  (la)  voil^  ;  —  will 

be   rain,    il    pleuvra ;    —  is  a 

knock,  on  frappe  ;    —  happens, 

il  arrive  ;  if —  ever  was,  s'il  en 

fut   jamais ;    —  he  comes  /,   le 

voil^  qui  vient ! 
thereupon,  1^-dessus. 
these,  adj.,  ces  ;  ces. . .  -ci. 
these,    pron.,    ceux,    ceux-ci ;  — 

are,  ce  sont ;  —  hooks  of  yours, 

vos  livres  que  voici. 
they,  ils,  elles,  on,  ce ;   there  — 

are,  les  voil^  ;   it  is  — ,  ce  sont 

eux. 
thief,  voleur,  m. 
thine,  le  tien. 
thing-,  chose,  f.,  affaire,   f.  ;   this 

good  — ,  cela  de  bon. 
think,  penser,  croire,  songer ;  what 

are  you  — ing  of  (about)?,  k  quoi 

pensez-vous  ?  ;  one  would  — ,  on 

croirait ;  what  I  —  of  him,  son 

fait. 
third,  troisi^rae,  trois. 
thirsty;   be  — ,  avoir  soif,  f.  ;    be 

very  — ,  avoir  bien  soif,  mourir 

de  soif. 
thirteen,  treize. 
thirty,  trente. 
this,  adj.,   ce,   cet,  cette;    ce  . . . 

-ci. 
this,  pron.,  ce,  ceci,  celui(-ci) ;  — 

one,  celui-ci ;  —  book  of  mine, 

mon  livre  que  voicL 
thither,  \k. 

those,  adj.,  ces,  ces  . . .  -U. 
those,  pron.,  ceux(-lk);  all — , tons 


ceux ;  —  who,  ceux  qui ;  —  a/re, 
voil^. 

thou,  tu,  toi. 

though,  bien  que,  quoique, 

thought,  pensee,  f. 

thoughtless,  ^tourdi. 

thousand,  mille,  mil. 

threaten,  menacer. 

three,  trois. 

thresh,  battre. 

throne,  tr6ne,  m. 

through,  par,  k  travers,  au  travv 
ers  de. 

throw,  jeter. 

Thursday,  jeudi,  m. 

thus,  ainsi. 

thy,  ton,  ta,  tes. 

ticket,  billet,  m. 

till,  prep.,  jusqu'^,  avant. 

till,  conj.,  jusqu'4  ce  que,  que. 

time,  temps,  m.,  fois,  f.,  epoque, 
f.,  moment,  m. ;  some  — ,  quel- 
que  temps ;  in  the  —  of,  sous ; 
at  that  — ,  dans  ce  temps-1^,  k 
cette  Epoque,  k  ce  moment ;  a 
long  — ,  longtemps ;  next  — ,  la 
prochaine  fois  ;  what  —  is  it  ?, 
quelle  heure  est-il  ?  ;  many  a  — , 
bien  des  fois  ;  have  —  to,  avoir 
le  temps  de ;  /  have  riot  — ,  je 
n'ai  pas  le  temps  ;  be  —  to,  etre 
temps  de  (que) ;  most  of  the  — , 
la  plupart  du  temps  -,  at  a  — 
when,  k  une  Epoque  ou ;  cost 
three  — s  as  much,  codter  trois 
fois  plus  cher ;  have  a  good  — , 
s'amuser  bien ;  every  —  thaty 
toutes  les  fois  que,  chaque  fois 
que ;  this  long  — ,  depuis  si  long- 
temps. 

tire,  fatiguer,  ennuyer;  be  (get) 
tired  (of  being),  s'ennuyer. 

tired,  fatigu^,  ennuy^. 

tiresome,  ennuyeux. 

to,  k,  chez,  de,  pour,  en,  jusqu'^, 
en  vers  ;  at  five  minutes  —  threes 
k  trois  heures  moins  cinq. 

to-day,  aujourd'hui. 

toe,  orteil,  m.,  doigt,  m.  ;  step  on 
one's  — 8,  vous  marcher  sur  le 
pied. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


539 


togfether,  ensemble. 

toilet,  toilette,  f. 

to-morrow,  demain  ;  day  after — , 

apres  demain. 
too,    aussi ;    trop ;    —   much,    — 

many,  trop. 
tooth,  dent,  f. 

toothache,  mal  (m. )  aux  dents, 
tooth-pick,  cure-dent,  m. 
top,  haut,  m. 
touch,  toucher  (k). 
tour,  tour,  m. 
towards,  vers,  envers. 
tower,  tour,  f. 
town,  ville,  f.  ;  in  — ,  down  — ,  en 

ville  ;  to  — ,  k  la  ville. 
toy,  jouet,  m. 
trace,  tracer. 
trade,  changer, 
train,  train,  m. 
translate,  traduire. 
travel,  n.,  voyage,  ra. 
travel,  v. ,  voyager ;  —  ovevy  par- 

courir ;     travelling     companion, 

compagnon  (m.)  de  voyage, 
traveller^  voyageur,  m. 
tread  under  foot,  fouler  aux  pieds. 
treasure,  tr^sor,  m. 
treat,  traiter. 
treatment,  traitement,  m. 
treaty,  traits,  m. 
tree,  arbre,  m. 
tremble,  trembler, 
trifling^,  insignifiant. 
trinket,  babiole,  f. 
troops,  troupes,  f.  pL 
trouble,  peine,  f. 
troupe,  troupe,  f. 
true,  vrai,  fiddle, 
tnmk,  malle,  f. 
trust,  n.,  confiance,  f. 
trust,  V.  ,avoir  confiance  en,  ae  fier  k. 
truth,  v^rit^,  f. 
try,  tocher  ;  —  and  «aw«,  tocher  de 

conserver. 
try  on,  essayer. 
Tuesday,  mardi,  m. 
tulip,  tulipe,  f. 
turn,  n.,  tour,  m. ;  in  — ,  tour  h. 

tour, 
turn,   v.,   toumer:  —  round,   se 


retoumer  ;    —  out  of,  chasser 

de  ;  —  out  of  doors,  mettre  k  la- 

porte. 
twelve,  douze ;  —  {o'clock),  midi, 

m.,  minuit,  m. 
twenty,  vingt. 
twenty-five,  vingt-cinq. 
twice,  deux  fois. 
two,  deux. 

U. 
uncle,  oncle,  m. 
under,  sous,  au-dessous  de. 
undergo,  subir. 
understaiid,  comprendre ;  /  can  — 

nothing  of  it,  je  n'y  comprends 

rien. 
undertake,  entreprendre. 
unfortunate,  malheureux. 
unhappy,  malheureux. 
United  Kingdom,  Royaume-Uni, 

m.  , 

United  States,  Etats-Unis,  m. ; 
in  the  — ,  aux  ]fctats-Unis. 

unknown,  inconnu. 

unless,  k  moins  que  . . .  ne. 

until,  jusqu'k  ce  que,  que. 

up,  en  haut;  to  be  — ,  ^tre  lev^; 
get  — ,  se  lever,  come  — ,  monter; 
—  to,  jusqu'k. 

upholsterer,  tapissier,  m. 

upon,  sur. 

upright,  droit. 

up  stairs,  en  haut. 

us,  nous. 

use,  n. ,  usage,  m.  ;  make  —  of,  se 
servir  de,  employer  ;  he  of  some 
— ,  Stre  de  quelque  utility  ;  have 
— for,  avoir  besoin  de. 

use,  V. ,  se  servir  de,  employer. 

used,  accoutum^ ;  be  —  to,  avoir 
coutume  de  ;  —  to  is  often  ex- 
pressed by  the  imperfect  indica- 
tive. 

useful,  utile. 

useless,  inutile ;  he  — ,  ne  valoir 
rien ;  it  is  —  Jfor  you  to  say  so, 
vous  avez  beau  dire. 

usual,  usuel,  accoutum^,  ordinaire. 

usually,  ordinairement. 

utter,  prof^rer,  articular. 


640 


VOCABULARY. 


V. 

vain,  vain  ;  in  — ,  en  vain. 

valuable,  pr^cieux. 

value,  valeur,  f. , ;  he  of  — ,  valoir. 

vast,  vaste. 

vegetable,  legume,  m. 

verbal,  verbal. 

verse,  vers,  m.,  verset,  m. 

very,    tres,  bien,  fort,  beaucoup ; 

—  much,  beaucoup,  bien,  tr^s  ; 
that  —  evening,  le  soir  meme. 

vest,  gilet,  m. 

vice,  vice,  m. 

Victoria,  Victoria. 

victory,  victoire,  f. 

vie-w,  vue,  f. 

vigour,  vigueur,  f. 

village,  village,  m. 

violent,  violent. 

violin,  violon,  m. 

virtue,  vertu,  f. 

virtuous,  vertueux. 

visible,  visible. 

visit,  visiter,  faire  (una)  visite  k, 

rendre  visite  a. 
voice,  voix,  f. 
volley,  vol^e,  f. 
volume,  volume,  m.,  tome,  m. 

W. 

wag,  remuer. 

wages,  gages,  m.  pi. 

wait,  wait  tor,  attendre. 

wake,  "waken,  ^veiller,  r^veiller, 

se  r^veiller. 
"Wales,  le  pays  de  Galles. 
walk,  n. ,  promenade,  f . ;  go  for  a 

— ,  take  a  — ,  (aller)  se  promener ; 

faire  une  promenade, 
walk,  V. ,  marcher,  se  promener ; 

—  in,  entrer. 

walking,  marcher,  m. ;  he  good  — , 

faire  beau  (bon)  marcher, 
walnut,  noix,  f. 
walnut-tree,  noyer,  m. 
Wander,  s'egarer,  s'ecarter. 
want,  avoir  besoin,   vouloir,  d^- 

sirer,  demander,  manquer  (de) ; 

you   are   wanted^    on  vous   de- 

mande. 


warm,  adj.,  chaud,  chaleureux ; 
be  —  {of  living  heings),  avoir 
chaud ;  he  —  {of  weather),  faire 
chaud. 

warm,  v.,  chauflfer. 

wash,  laver. 

watch,  n.,  montre,  f. 

watch,  V. ,  suivre  des  yeux,  veiller. 

water,  n.,  eau,  f. 

water,  v.,  abreuver  ;  make  his 
mouth  — ,  lui  faire  venir  I'eau 
k  la  bouche. 

wave,  vague,  f. 

way,  route,  f.,  chemin,  m.  ;  ma- 
ni^re,  f.,  moyen,  m.  ;  on  the  — , 
en  route,  chemin  faisant ;  hy  the 
— ,  4  propos  ;  a  long  —  off,  bien 
loin ;  lose  one's  — ,  s'egarer  ;  in 
that  — ,  de  cette  mani^re-1^  ;  in 
su^h  a  — ,  de  telle  sorte ;  have 
one's  — ,  faire  k  sa  tete ;  which  — , 
the  — ,  par  oti. 

we,  nous,  on. 

weak,  faible. 

weakness,  faiblesse,  f. 

wear,  porter. 

weather,  temps,  m.  ;  wh^t  kind  of 

—  is  it  ?,  quel  temps  fait-il  ?  ;  it 
is  fine  — ,  il  fait  beau  (temps) ; 
the  —  15  warm,  il  fait  chaud. 

Wednesday,  mercredi,  m. 

week,  semaine,  f.,  huit  jours,  m., 
pi. ;  a  —  from  to-day,  d'aujour- 
d'huienhuit;  two — sfromto-day, 
d'aujourd'hui  en  quinze;  from 

—  to  — ,  de  semaine  en  semaine. 
weep,  pleurer. 

weigh,  peser. 

welcome,  accueillir ;  he  — ,  Stre  le 
bienvenu. 

well,  n.,  puits,  m. 

well,  adv.,  bien,  eh  bien,  tr^s ;  so 
— ,  si  bien ;  very  — ,  tres  bien,  eh 
bien ;  be  —  q^,  avoir  de  quoi 
vivre,  etre  k  son  aise  ;  be  — ,  se 
porter  bien ;  do  — ,  faire  le  bien ; 
as  —  as,  aussi  bien  que. 

well-bred,  bien  ^lev^. 

well-knoTvn,  bien  connu.  ^ 

were,  past  tense  of  be  ;  if  you  — 
to  go  tJiere,  si  vous  y  alliez ;  if 


ENGLISH-FRENCH. 


541 


Jie  —  to  say,  s'il  disait ;  —  it 
only,  ne  f<it-ce  que. 

west,  ouest,  m. 

what,  adj.,  quel ;  —  o'clock  is  it  ?, 
quelle  heure  est-il  ? 

what,  pron. ,  que,  quoi,  ce  qui,  ce 
que,  ce  k  quoi,  ce  dont,  qu'est-ce 
que?,  qu'est-ce  qui?,  qu'est-ce 
que  c'est  que  ?,  ce  que  c'est  que  ; 
by  —  he  says,  h.  ce  qu'il  dit  ;  not 
to  know  —  to  do,  ne  savoir  que 
faire ;  —  is  that  to  him  ?, 
qu'est-ce  que  cela  lui  fait? 

whatever,  tout  ce  qui  (que),  quoi 
que,  quel  que,  qui  que,  quel- 
conque. 

wheat,  ble,  ra. ;  —field,  champ  (m. ) 
de  ble. 

g^hen,  quand,  lorsque,  que,  k 
quelle  heure  ;  hardly  ...  — ,  k 
peine . . .  que  ;  —  you  voill,  quand 
vous  voudrez. 

whenever,  quand,  lorsque,  toutes 
les  fois  que. 

where,  oii ;  from  — ,  d'od. 

whether,  si,  que,  soit  que ;  —  ... 
or,  (soit)  que  . . .  ou  (que). 

which,  adj.,  quel. 

which,  pron.,  qui,  que,  lequel ;  of 
— ,  dont,  duquel ;  at  — ,  ou, 
auquel ;  in  — ,  oil,  dans  lequel ; 
from  — ,  dont,  duqueL 

while,  prep.,  en. 

while,  whilst,  conj. ,  pendant  que, 
taiidis  que,  tant  que. 

while  ;  a  long  — ,  longtemps. 

whistle,  n.,  sifBet,  m.    f 

whistle,  v.,  siflfler. 

white,  blanc. 

who,  qui,  quel,  lequel. 

whoever,  qui  que,  qui  que  ce  soit, 
quiconque. 

whole,  tout ;  the  —  evening,  toute 
la  soiree ;  the  —  year,  toute 
I'ann^e. 

whom,  qui,  que,  lequel;  of  — , 
dont,  de  qui,  duquel. 

whose,  k  qui,  de  qui,  dont,  du- 
quel ;  at  —  house,  chez  qui. 

why,  pourquoi. 

wicked,  m^chant. 


wide,  large;   —   open^    grand(e) 

ouvert(e). 
widow,  veuve,  f. 
wife,  femme,  f.,  Spouse,  f. 
will,  vouloir ;  he  —  come,  il  vien- 

dra  ;  —  you  come  ?,  voulez-vous 

venir  ?  —  you  kindly  ?,  voulez- 
vous  bien  ? 
William,  Guillaume. 
willing  ;  he  — ,  vouloir. 
willingly,  volontiers. 
win,  remporter,  gagner. 
wind,  n.,  vent,  m. 
wind,  V. ,  remonter. 
window,   fenetre,  f,  ;    out  of  the 

— ,  par  la  fenetre. 
windy ;  he  — ,  faire  du  vent, 
wine,  vin,  m. 
wing,  aile,  f. 
winter,  hiver,  m. 
wipe,  essuyer. 
wisdom,  sagesse,  f. 
wise,  sage. 
wish,  d^sirer,  vouloir  ;  as  you  — , 

comme  vous  voudrez ;  v)}ien{ever) 

you  — ,  quand  vous  voudrez  ;  if 

you  — ,  si  vous  voulez  ;  /  —  you 

were  here,  je  voudrais  que  vous 

fussiez  ici. 
with,  avec,  chez,  k,  de,   envers, 

par  ;  go   (he)  — ,   acconipagner ; 

the  man  —  th^  big  nose,  I'homme 

au  gros  nez. 
withdraw,  se  retirer. 
within,  dans,  au  bout  de. 
without,  prep. ,  sans  ;  —  ...  and 

{or),  sans  . . .  ni  j  do  — ,  se  passer 

de. 
without,  conj.,    sans   que    (with 

subj. ). 
woman,  femme,  f. 
wonder,  s'^tonner,  se  demander. 
wont ;  he  — ,  avoir  coutume  de. 
wood(s),  bois,  m. 
wood-chopper,    woodman,     bd- 

cheron,  m. 
word,  mot,  m.,  parole,  f.;  send — , 

faire  savoir. 
work,  n.,  travail,    m.,  ouvrage, 

m.,  oeuvre,  m.  f. 
work,  v.,  travailler. 


542 


VOCABULARY. 


workman,  ouvrier,  m. 

world,  monde,  m. 

worse,  plus  mauvais,  pire,pis,  plus 
malade ;  which  is  — ,  qui  pis  est. 

worth ;  be  — ,  valoir ;  feel  his  own 
— ,  sentir  ce  qu'il  vaut ;  —  the 
trouble  (while),  valoir  la  peine. 

worthy,  digne,  brave. 

would,  past  tense  of  will ;  if  you 
were  here  you  —  do  ity  si  vous 
^tiez  ici  voua  le  feriez  ;  he  —  not 
do  it,  il  ne  voulait  pas  le  faire ; 
—  to  Ood!,  plat  k  Dieu!;  — 
you  be  kind  enough  to,  veuillez, 
voulez-vous  bien,  voudriez-vous 
bien  ;  /  —  as  soon. .  .as,  j'aim- 
erais  autant .  . .  que  de  ;  would 
is  also  often  expressed  by  the 
impf.  indie. 

would-be,  soi-disant,  prdtendu. 

wound,  n.,  blessure,  f.,  plaie,  f. 

wound,  v.,  blesser. 

wreath,  couronne,  f. 

wrecked  ;   be  — ,  faire  naufrage. 

wretch,  miserable. 

write,  ^crire ;  —  to  each  other, 
B'^crire. 


wrong,  mal,  m. ;  be  {in  the)  — , 
avoir  tort ;  do  — ,  faire  le  mal ; 
take  the  —  road,  se  tromper  de 
chemin. 

wrong-doing,  mal  faire,  m. 

Y. 

yard,  cour,  f. ;  {measure)  m^tre,  m. 
year,  annee,  f.,  an,  m. ;  last  — , 

I'annee  derni^re,  I'annee  pass^e ; 

in  the  —  1860,   I'an   1860;    20 

francs  a  — ,  20  francs  par  an. 
yes,  oui,  si ;  —  you  have,  si,  si. 
yesterday,  hier. 
yet,  encore,  cependant;  d^^;  not 

— ,  pas  encore. 
yield,  c^der. 

yonder,  Ik-bas ;  over  — ,  1^-bas. 
you,  vous,  tu,  te,  toi. 
young,  jeune. 

your,  votre,  vos,  ton,  ta,  tea.. 
yours,  le  vOtre,  le  tien ;  k  vous,  k 

toi. 
yourself,  vous,  te,  toi,  vous-meme, 

toi-meme. 
youth,  jeunesse,  1 


INDEX, 


A  (prep.),  of  indir.  obj., 
§362,  2,  §451,  1 ;  verb  +  o 
=  Eng.  tran.,  §296, 2 ;  idio- 
matic with  verbs,  §296,  4 ; 
with  names  of  countries, 
§333,  3,  obs. ;  denoting 
possession  after  4tre,  §377, 
l;in  prepositional  phrases, 
§432;  repetition,  §434;  = 
•  concerning,'  •  of,'  §436, 2 ; 
of  '  place,"  '  time,'  §439,  1, 
§444,  2;  of  'motion  to- 
wards,' §451,2;  ='with' 
(characteristic),  §454,  4. 

abbreviations,  §461. 

•about,'  §436. 

accent,  accent  marks,  §6 ; 
stress,  §7. 

acute  accent,  §2, 1. 

adjective,  §§336-358,  see  also 
possessive  adj.,  demonstr. 
adj.,  interrog.  adj.,  indef. 
adj.,  numeral;  fem., 
§§336-337;  plur.,  §§338- 
339 ;  agreement,  §§340- 
844;  as  adv.,  §410,  §343,1; 
nouns  as  adjs.,  §344  ;  com- 
parison, §§345-349;  posi- 
tion, §§350-353;  with  d, 
§355 ;  with  de,  §356 ;  with 
en,  §357;  with  envers, 
§358. 

adverb,  §§408-420;  list,  §408; 
in  -ment  from  adjs.,  §409; 
adjs.  as  ad  vs.,  §410 ;  ad- 
verbial locutions,  §411 ; 
comparison,  §412;  posi- 
tion §413  ;  negatives, 
§§414-419 :  distinctions  in 
use,  §420 ;  numeral  ad  vs., 
1428. 


afin  gti«,-f  subj.,§455,§27l,2. 

•after,' §437. 

agir,  impers.,  §251, 1,  obs. 

aieul,  plur.,  §309. 

ail,  plur.,  §309. 

aimer,  +d,  +de,  without 
prep.,  §281, 1. 

aller,  -f  infin.,  §230,  8 ;  im- 
pers., §252,  1,  obs. ;  «'en 
aller,  §247. 

allez,  special  force,  §267,  b. 

allons,  special  force,  §267,  6. 

alphabet,  §4  ;  names  of  let- 
ters, §4. 

dme  qui  vive,  with  ru,  §415, 
2,  c. 

d7ne  vivante,  with  ne,  §416, 

2,  c. 

d  moins  que,  with  ne,  §419,1. 
'among,'  §438. 
alkour,  gender,  §304, 3,  h. 
'  and,'  untranslated,  §456, 2 ; 

=m,  §457,  2. 
apostrophe,  §5,  5,  §19. 
apposition,  use  ol  art.,  §330, 

4. 
approuvS,  §289,  a. 
aprts,  §437. 
aprit,  -f  infln.,  §282,  4. 
aprt8-midi,   gender,    §304, 

3.  a. 

arrirer, impers.,  §252,  l,ob8. 

article,  §§315-335,  see  also 
def.  art.  and  indef.  art. ; 
agreement  and  repetition, 
§318;  use  with  nouns, 
§§319-335  ;  omission,  §330 ; 
in  apposition,  §330, 4  ;  un- 
classified examples,  §331 ; 
with  proper  names,  §§332- 
335, 

'at,'  §439. 

543 


attendant ; en  -  que,+so\i].t 

§455,  §271, 1. 
attendu,  §289,  a. 
au,  =d.+le,  §317. 
aucun{8),  §  403, 3  ;  use,  §406, 

1 ;  with  ne,  §415. 
aucunement,  with  ne,  §415. 
au-des8U8  de,  §448, 1. 
au-dessous  de,  §453,  2. 
aussi,  in  comparison  (adj.), 

§345 ;  (adv.),  §412. 
autant,  §420,  2. 
automne,  gend.,  §304,  3,  a. 
autour  de,  §436, 1. 
autre,  §403,  3  ;  use,  §406,  2 ; 

with  ne,  419,  3,  n. 
autrement,  with  ne,  §419, 

3,  n. 

autrui,  §403, 2  ;  use,  §405,  L 

aux,  =d+les,%3n. 

auxiliary  verbs,  use  §§227- 
229;  modal  auxs.,  §230, 
«    6,  n. 

avant,  §440,  2. 

avant  que,  with  ne,  §419, 1, 
6;  avant  que,  +  subj., 
§455,  §271,  1. 

avec,  §  454,  1,  3. 

avoir,  conjugn.,  §154  ;  used 
to  form  comp.  tenses,  §227, 
§229;  y avoir,  §250;  ilyr 
and  voild,  §250,  3;  avoir 
besoin,  etc.  (without art.), 
§330, 1 ;  avoir  Fair,  agree- 
ment of  adj.  with,  §343, 

4,  e,  denoting  dimension, 
§428,  obs.  3;  denoting  age, 
§430. 

B. 
beaueoup,  -f  de,  agreement 
of  verb,  §232, 2,  a,  b  ;  with 
partitive,  §325, 1,  (f ;  re* 


544 


INDEX. 


placed  \>y  pliisievrs,  §406, 

4  ;   comparison,   §412,  2  ; 

not  modified,  §412,  2,  a. 
•before,'  §440. 
bel,  §337,  1,  (3). 
bestiaux,  §308,  4,  n. 
h^tail,  plur.,  §308,4,  n. 
Hen,  with  partitive,  §325, 

1,  6;   irreg.  comparison, 

§412,  2. 
bien  que,+sabj.,  §455,  §271, 

4. 
bon,  comparison,  §346  ;  +<^ 

or  pour,    §355,    §356,  a, 

§358,  a. 
tourer,  with  ne  alone,§418,4. 
bout  ;  au  —  de,  §437,  2. 
brin,  with  n«,  §415,  2,  6. 
•by,'  §441 ;  of  •dimension,' 

S428,  a. 

O. 

f,  §5,  4. 

f",  §378,  2,  obs. 

fa,  for  cela,  §388,  «,  /;  dis- 
tinguished from  fd  and 
pd/,  §388,/.  n. 

fd,  ^  /,  distinguished  from 
pd,  §388,/.  n. 

capitals,  use,  §21.  ' 

cardinals,  §421,  §427  ;  in 
dates,  etc.,  §427 ;  for  or- 
dinals, §427. 

etu;  au  —  oA,  -t-indic.  or 
■ubj.,§455,§27l,3;  au- 
gM«, -|-subj.,§455,§27l,3; 
-dans  le  —  oii,  -findio.  or 
Bubj.,  §455,  §271,  3  ;  en  - 
que,  +8ubj.,  §455,  §271,  3. 

case  relations,  of  nouns, 
§313 ;  of  conjunctive  pers. 
prons.,  §362. 

ee  (adj.),  §378, 1 ;  use,  §380. 

ee  (pron.),  §378,  2;  agree- 
ment of  verb  with,  §232, 
8 ;  use,  §§383-387  ;  +itre, 
1383,  §384  ;  c'est  and  il  est, 
1384  ;  -fa  relat.,  §385 ;  in 
phrases,  §386 ;  ce  semble, 
1886,  a;  pleonastic,  §387; 


ce  n'est  pas  que  +  subj., 
§455. 

ceci,  §378,  2  ;  use,  §388. 

cedilla,  §5,  4. 

cela,  §378,  2  ;  use,  §388  ;  re- 
placed by  la,  §388,  d. 

celui,  §378,  2  ;  use,  381. 

celui-ci,  §378,  2  ;  use,  §382. 

celui-la,  §378,  2  ;  use,  §3b2  ; 
replacing  celui,  §381,  b. 

cent{s),  §421,  6,  c,  d,  e. 

•cer,  verbs  in,  §156. 

certain,  §403, 1  ;u8e,  §404,1. 

certijU,  §289,  o. 

cesser,  with  ne  alone,  §418, 4. 

cet,  for  ce,  §378, 1,  obs. 

chacun,  §403,  2 ;  use,  §405, 2. 

chaque,  §403, 1 ;  use,  §404,  2. 

cAez,  §439, 2,  §451, 2,  §454, 2. 

-ct,  §380. 

del,  plur.,  §309. 

ci-inclvs,  §289,  6. 

ci-joint,  §289,  6. 

circumflex  accent,  §5,  3. 

cit^iZ,  +d  regard  de,  §358,  a. 

collationnd,  §289,  a. 

collectives,  §423. 

combien,  agreement,  §2^, 
2,  6. 

comme,  for  jtte  in  compari- 
son, §345,  6. 

comparison,  of  adjs.,  §§345- 
349 ;  of  ad  vs.,  §412  ;  irreg. 
(adj.),  §346  ;  irreg.  (adv.), 
§412,  2;  remarks,  §349; 
followed  by  ne,  §419,  3. 

comparative,  see  compari- 
son. 

complement,  predicative, 
§295  ;  prepositional,  §276 ; 
composite,  §298. 

compound  adjs.  plur.,  §343, 
2. 

compound  nouns,  plur., 
§311. 

compound  tenses,  forma- 
tion, §§227-229 ;  sequence 
of  subj.,  §273, 3 ;  in  condl. 
sent.,  §275,  a. 

compris  (y),  non—,  §289,  a. 


•concerning,' §436,  2. 
condition  ;  a  la  —  que,  +bx- 

dic.orsubj.,§455,§271,3,e. 
conditional  sentences,  §274, 

§275 ;   use  of  mood  and 

tense  in,  §275. 
conditional,  tense,  §266,  in 

condl.  sent.,  §275. 
conditional  anterior,  tense, 

§266  ;  replaced  by  plupf. 

subj.,  §272,   3;    replaced 

byimpf.  indie,  in  'result' 

clause,  §274,  c. 
conjunction,  §§455-459 ;  list, 

§455  ;   with  indie,  sub]., 

indie,   or  subj.,  see  list, 

§455 ;  use  of  certain,  §§456« 

459 ;  distinctions,  §459. 
conjunctive  pron.,  §359  and 

n.;  use,  §§362-371. 
consonants,  prncn.,  §§16-17; 

final,  prncn.,  §18. 
couple,  gender,  §304,  8,  «. 
craindre,  with  ne,  §419,  2. 
orainte  ;  de  —  que . . .  ne,  -f- 

subj.,§455,  §271,  2. 


d'abord,  §426,  a. 

dans,  §444, 1, 3  ;  witlTnames 
of  countries,  §333,  3,  obs. 

dates,  §427. 

dative,  of  pers.  pron.,  §362, 
2  ;  ethical,  §362,  n. 

davantage,  §420,  3.     , 

de,  as  partitive  sigfn,  §§323- 
325  ;  agent  after  passive, 
§240,  §366,  §441, 1 ;  verb-H 
de  =  Eng.  transitive,  §296, 
1 ;  idiomatic  with  verbs, 
§296,  4  ;  with  names  of 
countries,  §333,  2 ;  cfe= 
•  in,' after  superl.,  §347, 2 ; 
denoting  '  by  how  much,' 
after  superl.,  §349, 2;  pleo- 
nastic after  interrog.  ,§391 , 
n.  ;  of  '  dimension,'  §428, 
obs.  1,  §430,  obs.  8; 
in  prepositional  phrases, 
§432 ;  repetition,  §434  ;  d» 


INDEX. 


545 


=*  by  *  (measure),  §441,  S ; 
<fo='from,'  §443,  1;  of 
*  place'  (after  superl.), 
§444,4;  de='of,'§445, 1; 
de  =  'with,'  §454,6;  = 
'  concerning,' '  of,'  §436,  2, 

de  ce  que,  constr.,  §269,  4,  b. 

didder,  +d,  +de,  §281,  2. 

difier,  +d,  +de,  §281,3. 

definite  article,  forms,  §316  ; 
contractions,  §317  ;  agree- 
ment and  repetition,  §318, 
§347,a;  with  general  noun, 
§321 ;  with  partitive  noun, 
§323 ;  in  titles,  §327  ;  for 
possessive  adj.,  §328  ;  dis- 
tributively,  §329 ;  omis- 
sion, §330,  §333,4;  un- 
classified examples,  §331 ; 
with  names  of  persons, 
§332  ;  with  names  of  coun- 
tries, §333;  with  names  of 
cities,  etc.,  §334 ;  with 
names  of  mountains  and 
rivers,  §335  ;  in  superla- 
tive, §§347-349 ;  replacing 
demonstr,  adj.,  §380,  6; 
in  fractions,  §424,  b. 

dilice^  gender,  §304,  2,  c. 

demi,  agreement,  §343,  4, 
a ;  in  compounds,  §311, 2, 
a, §343, 4,  a;  infractions, 
§424,  a. 

demonstrative  adjective, 
forms,  §378, 1 ;  agreement, 
§379  ;  repetition,  §379,  a  ; 
use,  §380 ;  replaced  by 
def.  art.,  §380,  6. 

demonstrative  pronoun, 
forms,  §378, 2 ;  agreement, 
§379 ;  use,  §§381-388. 

demonstratives,  see  demon- 
str. adj.  and  demonstr. 
pron. 

depuis,  §443,  3 ;  with  ne, 
§419,6;  — git«,  distinguish- 
ed from  puisque,  §459,  3. 

dernier,  -f  subj.,  §270,  3 ; 
+<H-infln.,  §279,  8,  a. 

de«,=de+^,  §317. 


die,  §443,  3. 

descendre,  +d,  +  dir.  infin., 

§281,  4. 
disobeir,  passive  use,  §241, 1. 
determinatives,      position, 

§353. 
d^terminer,+a.,+de,  §281,5. 
dexixihme,ioT  second,  §422,&. 
devant,  §440, 1. 
devoir,  +infin.,  §230,2;  4- 

de-f  infin.,  §278,  6,  o. 
diaeresis,  §4,  7. 
diffdrents,    §403,   1  ;     use, 

§404,  3. 
diphthongization,  absent  in 

French,  §1,  6. 
dire,+de,+d&T.  infin.,  §281, 

6. 
direct  obj.,  §293. 
disjunctive  pron.,  §359  and 

n. ;  use,    §372 ;   avoided, 

§372,  6,  n. 
divers,  §403,  1 ;  use,  §404,  3. 
donner,  conjugation,  §153. 
dont,  §395  ;  use,  §398. 
double,  as  adv.,  §425,  a. 
du,  =de+le,  §317. 
dH,  agreement,  §292,  4,  b. 
dur,+pour,  §358,  a. 
durant,  position,  §433,  b. 

E. 

'either,'  'nor—,'  'not—,' 
§457,  3. 

-eler,  verbs  in,  §158,  2. 

elision,  §19. 

elliptical  tense  forms,  §256. 

empicher,  with  ne,  §419,  1. 

empresser(s'),+d,+de,  §281, 
7. 

en  (pron.  adv.),  §360;  use, 
§367,  §372,  6,  n.;  position, 
§370. 

en  (prep.),  in  gerunds,  §286, 
3  ;  agreement  of  past 
part.,  §292,  3,  a;  with 
names  of  countries  (no 
art.),  §333,2;  repetition, 
§434  ;  of  '  place,'  '  time,' 
§439,    1,    §444,    2,    3 ;  of 


♦material',  §445,  2;  of 
*  motion  towards',  §451, 2. 

encore  que,  +  subj.,  §456, 
§271,  4. 

encore  un,  §406,  2,  a. 

en  premier  lieu,  §426,  a. 

ensuite,  §426,  a. 

entendre,  +  infin.,  constr.  of 
obj.,  §293,  2,  b. 

entendu,  §289,  a,  §292,  4,  a. 

entre,  §438,  1,  2. 

d'entre,  after  superl., §347, 2. 

envers,  §451,  3. 

environ,  §436,  4. 

is,  =  en  les,  §317,  n.  2. 

-esse,  tern,  ending,  §306,  2. 

est-ce  que,  use  of,  §236,  4. 

et  (conj.),  use  of,  §456. 

iU,  invar.,  §239,  obs. 

■eter,  verbs  in,  §158. 

ethical  dative,  §362,  n. 

itre,  §154;  forming  comp. 
tenses,  §228,  §229;  form- 
ing passive,  §239;  form- 
ing reflexive  comp.  tenses, 
§242 ;  as  impers.  verb, 
§260,2;  -fd-f  infin.,  §279, 

5  and  6,  & ;  +d,,+d de, 

+d.... A,  §281,8. 

eu,  past  part.,  agreement, 
§292,  4,  d. 

•eur,  fem.  of,  §337,  2,  (2X 

6viter,  with  ne,  §419, 1. 

excepti,  §289,  a. 


fdchd,+eontre,  §356,  a. 

faqon;  de  —que,+\n!di\Q.  or 
subj.,  §456,  §271,  2,  a. 

/oire,+infin.,  §230,6;  +de 
-f infin.,  §278,  6,  b;  of 
weather,  etc.,  §249,  2; 
-f  infin.,  constr.  of  obj., 
§293,  a;  passive  force  of 
trans,  infin.  after,  §241,  3. 

fait  (past  part.),  agreement, 
§292,  4,  c. 

falloir,  251. 

fatiguer(8e),+d,  -f(ic,§281,a 

feminine,  see  gender. 


646 


INDEX. 


/«*,  §343,  4,  6. 

finir,  conjugation,  §153 ;  +d, 
+de,  §281,  10, 

fois  (une  fois,  etc.),  §425,  2. 

fol,  §337,  1,  (3). 

'  for,'  §442. 

force,  agreement,  §232, 2,  a. 

fort,  +8ur,  §357,  a. 

foudre,  gender,  §304,  3,  h. 

fractions,  §424. 

franc  de  port,  §343,  4,  o. 

♦  from,'  §443. 

future,  §263 ;  in  condl.  sen- 
tence, §275 ;  replaced  by 
pres.,  §257,  4,  5;  replaced 
by  condl.,  §265,  3. 

future  anterior,  §264;  re- 
placed by  past  indef., 
§259,  3. 

G. 

garde-,  in  compounds,  §311, 
5,  a. 

gender,  of  nouns,  §300-306  ; 
by  meaning,  §303;  by 
endings,  §302 ;  by  deriva- 
tion, §301 ;  double,  §304 ; 
of  compounds,  §305  ;  for- 
mation of  fem.,  §306, 
§336,  §837;  of  ad js.,  §336, 
§337. 

general  noun,  §321  ;  and 
partitive,  §326. 

gens,  gender,  §304,  3,  j. 

gent,  plur.,  §308,  5. 

gerund,  §286,  3;  EngUah, 
§287,  2. 

goutte,  with  ru,  §415,  f ,  6. 

grave  accent,  §5,  2. 

guire,  with  n.;,  §415. 

H. 
hair,  +de+m&n.,  §279, 6,  c. 
haut,   for    haiUeur,    §428, 

obs.  4. 
homme  qui  vive,  with  ne, 

§415,  2,  c. 
'however,'  §404,  5,  b  and  n. 
hytnrie,  gender,  §304,  3,  d. 
hyphen,  use,  §5,  6. 


I. 

ignorant,  -f  «ur,  §357,  a. 

ignorer,  -f  negative,  constr. 
after,  §269,  5,  d. 

il  (impers.),  agreement, 
§232,  4,  §361,  d ;  as  sub- 
ject of  impers.  verb,  §248, 
§252,  2,  §253  •,ilya,  §250, 
3  ;  il  est,  §250,  2,  §383,  1, 
a,  b ;  il  faut,  §251 ;  rj 
s'enfaut,  §251,  5  ;  distin- 
guished from  ce,  §384, 1 ; 
il  est  vrai,  §384,  1,  a; 
il  semble,  §386,  a;  il  s'en 
faut,  with  ne,  §419,  5 ;  il 
y  a,  with  ne,  §419,  6. 

imperative,  §267 ;  retention 
of  -s  in  2  8g.  before  y  or 
en,  §153,  §159, 4 ;  in  condl. 
sentence,  §275;  replaced 
by  fut.,  §263,  4. 

imperfect,  (indie),  §258  ;  in 
narrative,  examples  of, 
§261 ;  in  condl.  sentence, 
§275 ;  replacing  plupf.  or 
condl.  ant.  in  condl.  sen- 
tence, §275,  e;  (subj.), 
§273,  2  and  4,  e  ;  for  perf. 
subj.,  §273,  4,  a. 

impersonal  verbs,  §§248-253 ; 
verbs  used  impersonally, 
§252  ;  de+infin.  as  logical 
subj.  of,  §280,  1. 

importe  (qu'),  §232,  4,  a. 

•in,'  §444. 

indefinite  article,  forms, 
§315  ;  agreement  and  re- 
petition, §318 ;  use,  §320; 
omission,  §330;  unclassi- 
fied examples,  §331 ;  with 
names  of  persons,  §332,  3. 

indefinite  adj.,  forms,  §403, 
1-3,  §407,  1  ;  use,  §404, 
§406,  §407;  position  in 
negation,  §416. 

indefinite  pron.,  forms,  §403, 
2,  3,  §407,  2;  use,  §405, 
§406,  §407 ;  position  in 
negation,  §416,  §416,  b. 


indefinites,  see  indef.  adj. 
and  pron. 

indicative  mood,  §254,  see 
also  the  various  tenses; 
in  conditions,  §275,  obs. 

indirect  discourse,  mood  of, 
§254,  n.  1;  tense  of,  §258,  5. 

indirect  obj.,  §293,  2,  §294, 
§362,  2,  §451,  1. 

indulgent,  -\-pour  or  d, 
§358,  a. 

■ine,  fem.  ending,  §306,  3. 

infinitive  mood,  §§276-285; 
without  prep.,  §278,  re- 
ference list,  §278,  6 ;  with 
d,  §279,  reference  list, 
§279,  6;  with  de,  §280, 
reference  list,  §280,  6; 
historical,  §280,  4 ;  dis- 
tinctions, §281 ;  with 
other  preps.,  §282 ;  for 
subordinate  clause,  §283 ; 
with  passive  force,  §284  ; 
for  Eng.-ing,  §285,  §287, 3. 

interjection,  §460. 

interrogation,  word  order, 
§236 ;  indirect,  §238. 

interrogative  adj.,  forms, 
§389, 1 ;  agreement,  §390  ; 
use,  §391,  §392,  1,  b,  2. 

interrogative  locutions,  §394 

interrogative  pron.,  forms, 
§389,  2  ;  agreement,  §390; 
use,  §§392,  393. 

interrogatives,  see  interrog. 
adj.  and  pron. 

'into,'  §444. 

intransitive  verbs,  §294. 

inversions,  rhetorical,  §237. 

irregular  verbs,  §§156-226; 
list  of,  §226  ;  in  -er,  §§156- 
161 ;  in  -cer,  -ger,  §156  ;  in 
-yer,  §157 ;  with  stem- 
vowel  e  (^),  §158  ;  in  -eler, 
-eter,  §158  ;  in  -tV,  §§162- 
179  ;  in  -re,  §§180-211 ;  in 
-oir,  §§212-225  ;  in  -andre, 
•endre,  -erdre,  -ondre- 
-ordre,  §210. 

•issime,  superl.  ending, 
§348.  a. 


INDEX. 


547 


jamaiiy  with  n«,  §415. 
je  sou8si(jne,  §372,  2,  n. 
jumelle,  §337  1,  (3). 
j'urer,    +de,    +dir.    infin., 

§281,  11. 
jtuqu'd,  §451,  4  ;  jusqu'd  ce 

que,    +  indie,    or   subj., 

S455,  §271, 1. 

L. 

■Id,  §380. 

laissi,  §292,  4,  a. 

laisser,  +infin.,  §230,  7  ;  + 
d«+infln.,  §278,  6,  c;  +d, 
+de,  +dir.  infin.,  §281, 
12;con8tr.ofobj.,§293,b. 

large,  for  largeur,  §428, 
oba.  4. 

Zo««er  (««),  +d,  +de,  §281, 
13. 

2«  {la,  les),  see  def.  art.  and 
pers.  pron. ;  predicjative, 
§364  ;  pleonastic,  §365 ;  = 
•one,'  '80,' §365,  b. 

length,  see  quantity. 

lequeU,  §389,  2 ;  use.  §391. 

lequel,  §395  ;  use,  §400. 

'less' ;  'less  and  less,'  §345, 
d;  'the  less,'  §345,  d; 
Mess  than'  (adv.  of  quan- 
tity), §412,  b. 

liaison,  §18. 

linking,  see  liaison. 

lip-rounding,  §1,  4. 

loin  g««,+subj.,  §455,  §271, 
5. 

long,  for  longueur,  §428, 
obs.  4. 

lorsque,  distingfuished  from 
quand,  §459, 1. 

Tun,  §406,  7,  (1),  a. 

Fun  Vautre,  §406,  7,  (2). 

M. 
mairU,  §403, 1 ;  use,  §404, 4. 
mat,     irreg.     comparison, 

§412,  2. 
maXgri  que,  +sub].,  §455, 


ma  mie,  §374,  n. 

m'amour,  §374,  n. 

mani^re,  de  —  gu«,  +  indie, 
or  subj.,  §455,  §271,  2,  a. 

manquer,  +d,  -j-de,  §281, 
14. 

masculine,  see  gender. 

mauvais,  irreg.  comparison, 
§346. 

meilleur,  §346. 

mime,  §403,  3 ;  use,  §406,  3. 

mie,  with  ne,  §415,  2,  Z>. 

mien,  etc.,  for  le  mien, 
§377,  2. 

mieux,  §412,  2. 

mi7,  in  dates,  §421,  c. 

7/iiZZe,  §421,  e. 

•mine,'  etc.,  translated, 
§377, 1. 

moi,  for  m«,  §370,  3,  obs.  1. 

m^indre,  §346. 

motTM,  §412,  2  ;  in  compari- 
son (adj.),  §346,  (adv.), 
§412 ;  moins  de,  412,  1, 
b;  d  moins  que...ne,  + 
subj.,  §455,  §271,  3,  —  -f 
de  deux,  agreement  of, 
§232,  2,  c. 

mol,  §337, 1,  (3). 

mon,  for  ma,  §374,  1,  obs. 
1 ;  in  address,  §376,  4. 

mood,  see  the  various 
moods ;  of  subordinate 
clause,  §254,  n.  2. 

'more';  'more  and  more,' 
§345,  d;  •  the  more,'  §345, 
d  ;  •  more  than,'  (adv.  of 
quantity),  §412,  6. 

mot,  with  ne,  §415,  2,  6. 

multiplicatives,  §425. 

N. 

narrow,  of  sounds,  §1,  3. 

n'avoir  garde,  §418,  5. 

ne(n'),  §§415-419  ;  with  pas, 
point,  etc.,  §415 ;  posi- 
tion, §416 ;  omisssion, 
§417 ;  alone  as  negative, 
§418;  pleonastic,  §419; 
ne...que,  position,  §^6, 


e;     ne...ni,     position, 

§416,    d;   ne...que  and 

seulem^nt,  §420,  4. 
negation,    §§414-419 ;     see 

also  ne,  non,  pas,  etc. 
'  neither . . .  nor,'  translated 

§416,  d,  §457,  3. 
ni,  use,  §233,  6,    §457,  1; 

with  ne,  §415 ;  ni...ne, 

position,  §416,  d. 
n'importe,  §418,  5. 
nombre,   -f  de,    agreement 

with  verb,  §232,  2,  a. 
non  {pas  point),  §414  ;  que 

non,  §420, 1,  a. 
nonante,  §421,  n. 
nonobstant    qu>e,     -f  subj., 

§455,  §271,  4. 
non(pa«)gu«,  ■i-8ubj.,§456, 

§271,  5. 

•  nor ' ;  — '  either,'  §457,  3. 

•  not' ;  — '  either,'  §457,  3. 
noun,    §§300-314;     gender, 

§§300-306,  §§336-337;  num- 
ber, §§307-312 ;  case  rela- 
tion, §313 ;  agreement, 
§314;  as  adj.,  §343,  3, 
§344,  §352,  2,  (3). 

nous,  tor  je,  §361,  o;  pleo- 
nastic, §372,  6,  a;  no%u 
autres,  §406,  2,  c. 

nouvel,  §337, 1,  (3). 

nu,  agreement,  §348,  4,  a. 

nul,  §403,  3,  §337,  1,(2),  6; 
use,  §406, 1 ;  with  ne,  §415. 

nullement,  with  ne,  §415. 

number,  of  nouns,  §§307- 
312  ;  general  rule,  §307  ; 
exceptions,  §308 ;  double 
plurs.,§309;  foreignnouns, 
§310  ;  comp.  nouns,  §311 ; 
plur.  of  proper  nouns, 
§312 ;  of  adjs.,  §§338-339. 

numerals,  §§421-430;  car- 
dinals, §421 ;  ordinals, 
§422;  collectives,  §423; 
fractions,  §424;  multipli- 
catives, §425 ;  adverb, 
§426;  remarks  on  use, 
§§427-430 ;  in  dates,  titles, 


548 


INDEX. 


etc.,  §427  ;  for  dimension, 
§428;  for  time  of  day, 
§429;  for  age,  §430. 

O. 

obeir,  in  passive,  §241, 1. 
object,  dir.  and  indir.,  §293  ; 

position,  §297. 
obliger,  +d,  +de,  §281,  15. 
occuperis^),  +d,  +de,  §281, 

16. 
octante,  §421,  n. 
oeil,  plur.  of,  §309. 
oeuvre,  gender,  §304,  3,  i. 

*  of,'    §445  ;     •  a   friend   of 

mine,'  etc.,  §377,  3. 
on  (Von),  §403,  2  ;  use,  §405, 

3 ;  replacing  passive,  §241, 

2,  a. 
•on,' §446. 
'once'  ('twice,'  etc.),  §425, 

2. 
•one,'=Z«,  §365,  &. 

•  only,'  translated,  §420,  4. 
•or,'=m,  §457,2. 
ordinals,  §422. 

orge,  gender,  §304,  3,  g. 
os4,  agreement,  §292,  4,  b. 
o«er+ infin.,  §230,  5  ;  vv^ith 

ne  alone,  §418,  4. 
*other8,'§§405-406,  2,  6. 
oil  (rel.  pron.),  §395 ;  use, 

§399,  §398,  b. 
oui,  §420,  1 ;  que  oui,  §420, 

l,a. 
out,  §289,  a. 
ouir,  +infin.,  oonstr.  of  obj., 

§293,  b. 
'out  of,' §447. 
•over,'  §448. 
'own,'  translated,  §376,  3, 

§377,  4. 

P. 

poi,  plur.,  §309. 

pdque,(8),  gender,  §804,  3,/. 

par,  §441, 1,  2,  §443,  2,  §448, 
2,  §449,  1,  2 ;  agent  after 
passive,  §240;  +infin., 
S282, 1 ;  of  price,  §329,  a. 


par-dessus,  §448,  2. 

paraitre,  il  parait,  constr. 
after,  §269,  5,  b. 

pardonner,  in  passive,  §241, 
1. 

parlerfrangais,etc.,%321,  a. 

parmi,  §438,  1. 

participles,  §§286-292 ;  pres., 
§286 ;  Eng.  forms  in  -ing, 
§287  ;  past,  §§288-292  ;  as 
adjs.,  position,  §352, 1,  (3). 

partir  ;  a  partir  de,  §443,  3. 

partitive  noun,  §§322-326  ; 
partitive  and  general 
noun,  §326. 

pas,  with  ne,  §415  ;  position, 
§416  ;  without  verb,  §417, 
a ;  without  ne  (fam.), 
§415,  n,  2. 

pass^,  §289,  a. 

passive  voice,  formation, 
§239 ;  agreement  of  past 
part.,  §239 and  obs. ;  agent 
after,  §240 ;  limitations 
and  substitutes,  §241 ;  re- 
placed by  on,etc.,§405,3,a. 

past  anterior,  §262. 

past  definite,  §260;  in  nar- 
rative, examples,  §261 ; 
replaced  by  impf.,  §258, 
8 ;  in  •  if '  clauses,  §275,  /. 

past  indefinite,  §259;  in 
narrative,  examples,  §261 ; 
subjunctive  sequence  af- 
ter, §273,  4,  a. 

past  participle,  agreement 
in  passive,  §239  and  obs.  ; 
without  aux.,  §289 ;  as 
prep.,  §289,  a;  with itre, 
§290,  §244,  2  ;  with  avoir, 
§291 ;  invar,  after  impers. 
itre,  §290,  a;  remarks, 
§292. 

pas  un,  §403,  3  ;  use,  §406, 
1 ;  with  Tie,  §415. 

paye,  §289,  a. 

pendant  que,  distinguished 
from  tandis  que,  §459,  2. 

penser,+d.,  +dir.infiii.  ,§281, 
17. 


perfect  subj.,  §273,  3 ;  for 
plupf.,  §273, 4,  c;  replaced 
by  impf,  subj.,  §273,  4,  6. 

periphrastic  forms,  in  con- 
jugation, §255,  §287,  1. 

personal  pronouns,  §§359- 
373  ;  forms,  §359  ;  agree- 
ment, §361 ;  case  relations 
and  use  of  conjunctives, 
§362  ;  reflexives,  §366  ; 
position  of  subject,  §§235- 
238 ;  position  of  objects, 
§369;  omission  of  obj., 
§371 ;  disjunctives,  use 
of,  §372  ;  in  address,  §373. 

personne,  §103,  2  ;  use  of, 
§405,  4  ;  with  ne,  §415  ; 
gender,  §405,  4,  n. 

petit,  irreg.  comparison, 
§346. 

peu,  irreg.  comparison, 
§412,  2. 

peu,  +de,  §232, 2,  a,  b;  with 
partitive,  §325,  1,  d. 

peur  ;  de  —  que  ...ne,  + 
subj.,  §455,  §271,  2. 

peut-itre  que,  constr.,  §269, 
5,  n. ;  no  inversion,  §237, 3. 

phonetic  transcription,  ex- 
ample of,  p.  12. 

pire,  §346. 

pis,  §412,  2. 

plein,  when  invar. ,  §343, 4,  a. 

plupart,  agreement  of  verb, 
§232,  2,  a,  b  ;  with  parti- 
tive, §325,  1,  c. 

pluperfect  (indie),  §262  ;  re- 
placed by  plupf.  subj., 
§272,  3 ;  replaced  by  impf. 
indie,  §275,  c. ;  (subj.), 
§273,  §272;  replaced  by 
perf.  subj.,  §273,  4,  c; 
replacing  plupf.  indie,  or 
oondl.  ant.,  §272,  3;  se- 
quence, §273,  3,  4,  a; 
replacing  plupf.  indie,  in 
'if  clause  or  'result' 
clause,  275,  b. 

plural,  see  number. 

plus,  §412,  2 ;  in  compari- 


INDEX. 


549 


■on  (adj.),  §345,  (adv.). 
§412 ;  -de,  §412, 1,6;  with 
ne,  §415  ;  pltu  and  davan- 
tage,  §420,  3;  —  d'un, 
agreement,  §232,  2,  c. 
plusieurs,  §403, 3 ;  me,  §406, 

4. 
plus  tdt,  with  ne,  §419,  3,  n. 

plutdt,  with  ne,  §419,  3,  n. 

point,  with  ne,  §415,  and  n. 
1 ;  position,  §416. 

possessive  adj., forms,  §374, 
1 ;  agreement,  §376  ;  re- 
petition, §375,  a;  use, 
§378 ;  def.  art.  for,  §328, 
§376,1;  «n,-i-def.art.  for, 
§367,  ?,  (2),  §376,  2. 

possessive  pron. ,  forms,  §374, 
2  -,  agreement,  §375  ;  use, 
§377. 

possessives,  see  po88.  adj. 
and  poss.  pron. 

pour,  §442, 1,  2,  3;  +infln., 
§882, 2 ;— ^tte+8ubj.,§455, 
§271,  2  ;—peu  que+a\ihi., 
§465,  §271,  4  ;  —  . . .  que, 
constr,,  §404,  5,  n. 

pourvu  que,  -fsubj.,  §455, 
§271,  3. 

pouvoir,  +infln.,  §230,  3; 
impers.,  §252,  1,  obs. ; 
with  ne  alone,  §418,  4. 

predicate  noun,  omission  of 
art.,  §330,  3. 

predicative  complement, 
§296,  §330,  3. 

premier,  in  dates,  etc.,  §427; 
§330,4,  a;  +8ubJ.,  §270, 
3;+d+infin.,  §279,3,  a. 

prendre  £%rde,  +d,  -t-d«, 
§261, 18. 

preposition,  §§431-454;  list 
of  simple,  §431 ;  position, 
§433  ;  locutions, §432  ;  re- 
petition, §434 ;  idiomatic 
distinctions,  §§435-454. 

prepositional  complement, 
§296. 

prifi  ;  -de,  §436, 4 ;  dpeu— , 
§486. 


present,  indie,  §257 ;  as 
historical  past,  examples, 
§261 ;  replaced  by  impf., 
§258,  5 ;  in  condl.  sen- 
tences, §275. 

present  participle,  §286. 

present  sub j.,  §273. 

pritendre,  -f  d,  -f  dir.  infin., 
§281,  19. 

prier,  +d,  ■\-de,  §281,  20. 

primary  tenses,  see  princi- 
pal parts. 

prinw(secu7ido,6ic.),%i2Q,a. 

principal  parts,  formation 
of  tenses  from,    §159. 

pronominal  ad  vs.,  §360. 

pronoun,  §§359-407,  see  also 
personal,  possessive,  etc. 

pronunciation,  §§1-19 ;  of 
vowels,  §§9-15  ;  of  conso- 
nants, §§16-17. 

proper  nouns,  plur.,  §312 ; 
use  of  art.  with,  §§332- 
335. 

propre,  §376,  3. 

pu,  agreement,  §292,  4,  6. 

puig,  §426,  a. 

puisque,  distinguished  from 
depuig  que,  §459,  3. 

punctuation,  §20. 


qualifier  de,  §330,  3.  6. 

quand,  distinguished  from 
lorsque,  §459,  1. 

quand  (m&me),  condl.  after, 
§265,  6,  §275,  e ;  some- 
times takes  subj.,  §271,  4, 
c;  -f  indie,  or  aubj.,  §455, 
§271,  4,  c. 

quantity,  +de,  agreement 
of  verb,  §232,  2,  a. 

quantity,  of  vowels,  §8. 

quart,  §422,  n,  1. 

quatrevinfft(8),  §421,  b. 

que  f,  §389,  2  ;  use,  §393. 

que  I,  §393, 1,  b. 

gM«(relat.),  §395 ;  use,  §397 ; 
in  inversions  (emphatic), 
§897.  2,  n.,  §385,  a,  n. ; 


past  part,  invar,  after, 
§292,  5. 

que  (conj.),  condl.  after, 
§265,  6;  replacing  other 
conjs.,  §271,  6,  §458,  2; 
=  'than,'  'as,'  in  com- 
parison, §345,  §412 ;  with 
ne,  §415 ;  for  d  moins  que, 
§419, 1 ;  +indic.  or  subj., 
§455,  §269,  §271,  6,  §458 ; 
not  omitted,  §458,  3. 

quel?,  §389,  1;  use,  §391, 
§392,  2. 

qv^l .',  §391,  a. 

quelconque,  §407 ;  with  ne, 
§415,  2,  a. 

quel  que,  -J-subj.  of  (tre, 
§407. 

quelque,  §403, 1 ;  use,  §404, 
5;  as  adv.,  §404,  6,  a. 

quelque  chose,  §403,  2  ;  use, 
§405,  6. 

quelque que,  +  subj., 

§407. 

quelqu'un,  §403,  2;  use, 
§405,  5. 

qu'est-ce  qui  ?,  §393,  2. 

question,  direct,  §236;  in- 
direct, §23£. 

quif,  §389,  2;  use,  §392; 
replaced  lay  qiiel,  §391,  b, 
392,  6. 

qui,  §305;  use,  §397,  re- 
placing celui  qui,  les  unt 
...lea  autres,  ee  qui,  §397, 
1,  a,  b;  qui  que,  +  subj. 
of  itre,  §407 ;  qui  que  ee 
aoit,  §407 ;  qui  que  ce  aoU 
+ne,  §415,  2,  a. 

quiconque,  §407. 

quint,  §422,  n,  2. 

quinze-vin{jt(8),  §421,  n. 

^uoi.«,  §389,  2;use,  §393. 

quoi,  §395 ;  use,  §401 ;  — 
que...  +  subj.,  §407 ;  — 
que  ce  aoit,  §407  ;  with  ne<, 
§415,  2,  a. 

quoique,  -fsubj.,  §455,  §271, 
4. 


650 


INDEX. 


B. 

reciprocal  verbs,  §243. 

reflexive  pers.  prons.,  §366. 

reflexive  verb,  formation 
of  oomp.  tenses,  §242 ; 
with  reciprocal  force,§243; 
agreement  of  past  part., 
§244  ;  omission  of  reflex, 
obj.,  §245 ;  comparison 
witli  Eng.,  §246;  replac- 
ing passive,  §241,  2,  b. 

re/user,  +d,  +de,  §281,  21. 

relative  pron.,  forms,  §395  ; 
agreement,  §396 ;  use, 
§§397-402 ;  remarks,  §402  ; 
not  omitted,  §402,  1 ;  re- 
lative clause  for  Eng.  -ing, 
§287,3;indef.relat.,§407. 

rSsoudre,  -f  d,  +de,  §281,  22. 

rien,  §403,  2 ;  use,  405,  4  ; 
with  ne,  §415. 

rompre,  conjugation,  §153. 

rounding  (lip-),  §i,  4. 

S. 
sache,  irreg.  use,  §272,  2. 
sans,  4-infin.,  §282,  3;  — 

doitte  que,  constr.,  §269, 

5,  n, ;  —  que,    -f  subj., 

§455,  §271,  6. 
savoir +in&n.,  §230,  4 ;  with 

ne  alone  §418,  4. 
se,  reflex,  pron.,  §366, 1. 
sembler;  il  gemble,  constr. 

after,  §269,  5,  b,  6,  c. 
semi-vowel  sounds,  §16,  1, 

2,3. 
i'en     aller,     conjugation, 

§247. 
s'en/alloir,  §251,  5. 
septante,  §421,  n. 
sequence,  of  subj.  tenses, 

§273. 
seul,  -fsubj.,  §270,  3 ;  +d 

-f  infin.,  §279,  3,  a. 
seulement,  §420,  4. 
sivlre,+dV4gardde,  §358,  a. 
•should,*  distinctions,  §265, 

1,6. 
«i,  elision  of  i,  §19 ;  subjunc- 


tive after,  §275,  b;  re- 
placed  by  ^we  +  subj., 
§271,6 ;  in  conditional  sen- 
tence, §274  ;  omission, 
§275,  d;  si  (  =  ' whether') 
4-fut.  or  condl.,  §275,  g ; 
for  amsi,  §345,  a,  §412,  a; 
-t-indic.  or  subj.,  §455, 
§271,  Z,  a;  —  bien  que, 
-t- indie,  or  subj.,  §455, 
§271,  4  ;  —  pen  que,  -fin- 
die,  or  subj.,  §455,  §271, 
4  ;  si  ...  {que),  constr., 
§404,  5,  n. 
»i  (= '  yes ').  si  fait,  §420, 1 ; 

que  si,  §420,  1,  a. 
isix-vingt{s),  §421,  n. 
'so,'^le,  §365,  b. 
soi,  reflex,  pron.,  §366,  2. 
soi-disant,  §286,  2,  n.  2. 
soil  que. .  .soil  que  {ou  que), 

+subj.,  §455,  §271,  4. 
son,  for  sa,  §374, 1,  obs.  1  ; 

forindef.,  §375,6. 
sorte;  de  (telle)— que,  -fin- 
die,  or  subj.,  §455,  §271, 
2,  a;  en  —  qu^,  -f  indie,  or 
subj.,  §455,  §271,  2,  a. 
sounds  of  French,  descrip- 
tion of,  §§9-17. 
S(ms,  §453,  1. 
stress,  §7. 

subjunctive,  §§268-278;  in 
subordinate  clause,  §§268- 
271 ;  in  noun  clause,  §269  ; 
in  adjectival  clause,  §270 ; 
in  adverbial  clause,  §271 "; 
in  principal  clause,  §272  ; 
as  imperative,  §272,  la; 
tense  sequence,  §273. 
'  such,'  §406,  5  and  n. 
sujffire,  +pour+in&n.,  §279, 

6,  a. 
superlative  (adjs.),  §§347- 
349,  (advs.),  §412,  3  ;  rela- 
tive, §347  ;  absolute,  §348  ; 
remarks,  §349. 
supposant ;  en  —  que,  + 
«ubj.,  §465,  §271,  3. 


suppose,  §289,  a;  —  que,  + 
subj.,  §455,  §271,  8. 

sur,  = '  with,'  •  about  (the 
person),'  §436,  3;  ='by 
(relative  dimension),  §441, 
3;  ='on,'  'upon,'  §446; 
of  'motion  above,'  §448, 
2. 

syllabication,  §6. 

T. 
■t;   inserted  in  interrog., 

§236,  1,  a. 
tandis  que,    distinguished 
from  pendant  que,  §459,2. 
tant,  §420,  2. 
tel,  §403,  3 ;  use,  §406,  5. 
tellement  . . .  que,    -f  indie 

or  subj.,  §455,  §271,  2,  a. 
timoin,  §344,  a. 
tenses,  formation  of  comp., 
§155,  §§227-229 ;  formation 
from  principal  parts,  §159; 
of  indie,  §§255-266  ;  peri- 
phrastic Eng. ,  §255  ;  ellip- 
tical  Eng.,  §256;  in  nar- 
ration,   §§258-261;    tense 
sequence  of  subj.,  §273. 
■teur,  fem.  of,  §337,  2,  (3). 
'  through,'  §449. 
tiers,  §422,  n.  1. 
'till,' §450. 
time,  how  expressed,  §248, 

1.  §429. 
'to,' §451. 

toi,  for  te,  §370,  3,  obs.  1. 
ton,  for  ta,  §374, 1,  obs.  1. 
tous  (les)  deux,  §406,  6,  6. 
tout,  §403,  3 ;  use,  §406,  6 ; 
as  adv.  (variable),  §406,  6, 
a;  with  gens,  §304,  3,  j. 
tout . . .  que,  constr.,  §404, 

6,  6,  n. 
tout-puissant,  §406,  6,  a,  n. 
•towards,' §452. 
traiter  de,  §330,  3,  6. 
transitive  verbs,  §293,  §294, 
n.  ;  in   Fr.  =  Eng.  verb-H 
prep.,  §296,  3. 
travail,  plur.,  §309. 


> 


INDEX. 


551 


travers;  d— ,  au — de,  5449, 
1. 

trembler,  +d,  +de,  §281, 23. 

tu  =  'you,'  'thou,'  in  ad- 
dress, §373,  1,  2. 

U. 
un,  see  indef.  art. 
wn  (adj     pron.),    §403,    3; 

use  of,  §406,  7. 
un  (num.),  §421,  o. 
'  under,'  §453. 
•underneath,' §453, 
unique,  +8ubj.,  §270,  3. 
'until,'  §450. 
•upon,' §446. 

V. 

va,  special  force,  §267,  b. 

valoir,  impers.,  §262, 1,  obs. 

venir  d«  +  infin.,  §230,  9  ;  + 
d,  +d«,  +dir.  infin. ,  §281, 
24. 

verb,  §§153  299  ;  regular 
conjugations,  §153  ;  aux- 
iliaries, §154 ;  useof  auxa., 
§§227-229  ;  irreg.  verbs, 
§§156-226  ;  formation  of 
comp.  tenses,  §155,  §§227- 
229 ;  phrases,  §230 ;  agree- 


ment with  subject,  §§231- 
234  ;  position  of  subject, 
§§235-238;  passive  voice, 
§§239  -  241  ;  reflexives, 
§§242-247  ;  irapersonals, 
§§248  •  253  ;  moods  and 
tenses,  §§254-292  ;  indic- 
ative, §§254-266  ;  impera- 
tive, §267  ;  subjunctive, 
§§268  -  273  ;  infinitive, 
§§276  -  285  ;  participles, 
§§286  -  292  ;  government. 


vers,  §436,  4,  §451,  3. 

vieU,  §337,  1,  (3). 

void,  position  of  pers.  pron. 

obj.,  §369,  2,  n.  2,  §433,  a. 
voild,  distinguished  from  il 

y  a,  §250,  3  ;   position  of 

pers.  pron.   obj.   §369,  2, 

n.  2,  §433,  a ;  with  ne, 

§419,  6. 
voir,  -finfin.,con8tr.  ofobj., 

§293,  2,  b. 
voire  (vos),  for   politeness, 

§376,  5. 
votUoir,  +infin.,  §230, 1. 
voulu,  agreement,  §292,  4, 6. 
vovs,   agreement,   §361,   6, 

§239,  obs.,  2,  §244,  2,  n.  2, 


§340,  b;  replacing  on, 
§405,  3,  c;  —  autres, 
§406,  2,  c;  pleonastic, 
§372,  6,  a;  in  address, 
§373. 

vowels,  pmcn.,  §§9-15. 

semi-vowels,  §16, 

voyons,  special  force,  §207, 
6. 

vu,  §289,  a,  §292,  4,  a. 

W. 

'  what?,'  as  subject,  §393, 2. 
'what'    (='that    which'), 

§401,  2. 
'  whatever,'  §407. 

•  whose  ?,'  §392,  2. 
wide,  definition  of,  §1,  3. 

•  will,'  distinctions,  §263,l,a. 
•with,' §454. 

'  would,'  distinctions,  §265, 
1.6. 


y,  pron.  adv.,  §360. 

y,  +  avoir,  §250. 

y  (pron.   adv.),  §360 ;   use, 

§368,  §372,  6,  n. :  position, 

§369,  3,  (2). 
•yer,  verbs  in,  llSl 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desl<  of  any 
p  University  of  California  Library 

J  or  to  the 

■j-        NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
_        University  of  California  .,    , . 

4        Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS  r 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling  | 

6  (510)642-6753  io 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing         ^ 
books  to  NRLF  _ 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  j" 
_            days  prior  to  due  date.  _ 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW  - 


APR  1 Q 1999 


■J 

IT 


^^  12,000(11/95) 


P^ 


.1, 


^ 


.hi  UiJd4 


Ibeatb's  /iDobcrn^^Ldiioua^c  :JcciC0* 

INTERMEDIATE  FRENCH  TEXTS.     (Partial. Lisi) 
Lamartine's  Scenes  de  la  Revoliftion  Frangaise  (Super).    V^cab.    40  cts. 
Lamartine's  Graziella  (Warren).     35  cts.  ... 

Lamartine's  Jeanne  d'Arc  (Barr^re).     Vocabulary;v  ^jfcts. 
Erckmann-Chatrian's  Majl^me  Therdse  (Manlej^><>. Vocabulary.    40  cts. 
Michelet:  Extraits  de  I'liistoire  de  Francfe>( Wright).    30 'cts. 
Hugo's  La  Chute.     From  Les  Misera3i^'^l(Tcl\iis),     Vocabulary.    30  cts. 
Hugo's  Bug  Jargal  (Bo'ielle).    40  cts.   V\      \     ^.        "^; 
Hugo's  Quatre-vingt-treize  (Fontaine).    Vocabulairy.""   50  cts. 
Champfleury's  Le  Violon  de  Faience  (wme 
Gautier's  Voyage  en  Espagne  (Steel). 
Bal:   ' 
Bal; 
Com 
Ore- 
Dau 
Dau 
The 
Mu{ 
Mai 
Tail 
Adv 
De: 
Dun 
Les 

SaxLj  o  ^-  -^-o-  -.  I .-      - •   .,—.«. 

*  bout's  La  Mere  de  la  Marquise  (Brushy.    Vocabulary.    40  cts.  ^, 
Chateaubriand's  Atala  (Kuhns).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 
Erckmann-Chatrian's  Le  Juif  Polonais.(Manley)!    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 
Feuillet's  Roman  d'un  jeune  homme  pauvre  (Bruner).    Vocab.    55  cts. 
Labiche's  La  Cagnotte  (Farnsworth).    25  cts. 
La  Brute's  Mon  Oncle  et  Mon  Cure  (Colin).    Vocabulary.    45  cts. 
Dumas'  La  Tulipe  ISfoire  (Fontaine).    40  cts.     Vocabulary.     50  cts. 
Voltaire's  Zadig  (Babbitt).    Vocabulary.    45  cts.^ 

*"*  U.C.BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


803 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


